Ford - Escape 2wd - Workshop Manual - 2001 - 2001

Factory Workshop Manual Make Ford Model Escape 2wd Engine and year L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001) Please navigate through the PDF using the options provided by OnlyManuals.com on the sidebar. This manual was submitted by Anonymous Date 1st January 2018 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0100 - P0104, ( P0101 P0102 P0103 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0102 P0100 - P0104: Testing and Inspection P0102 For diagnosis of code P0102 refer to chart Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0100 - P0104, ( P0101 P0102 P0103 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0102 > Page 9 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0100 - P0104, ( P0101 P0102 P0103 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0102 > Page 10 P0100 - P0104: Testing and Inspection P0103 For diagnosis of code P0103 refer to chart Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0100 - P0104, ( P0101 P0102 P0103 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0102 > Page 11 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109, ( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 P0105 - P0109: Testing and Inspection P0106 For diagnosis of code P0106 refer to chart Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109, ( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 16 For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109, ( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 17 P0105 - P0109: Testing and Inspection P0107 For diagnosis of code P0107 refer to chart Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109, ( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 18 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109, ( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 19 P0105 - P0109: Testing and Inspection P0108 For diagnosis of code P0108 refer to chart Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109, ( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 20 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109, ( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 21 P0105 - P0109: Testing and Inspection P0109 For diagnosis of code P0109 refer to chart Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109, ( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 22 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0110 - P0114, ( P0111 P0112 P0113 0110 0111 0112 0113 0114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0112 P0110 - P0114: Testing and Inspection P0112 For diagnosis of code P0112 refer to chart Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0110 - P0114, ( P0111 P0112 P0113 0110 0111 0112 0113 0114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0112 > Page 27 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0110 - P0114, ( P0111 P0112 P0113 0110 0111 0112 0113 0114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0112 > Page 28 P0110 - P0114: Testing and Inspection P0113 For diagnosis of code P0113 refer to chart Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0110 - P0114, ( P0111 P0112 P0113 0110 0111 0112 0113 0114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0112 > Page 29 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119, ( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116 P0115 - P0119: Testing and Inspection P0116 For diagnosis of code P0116 refer to chart Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119, ( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116 > Page 34 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119, ( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116 > Page 35 P0115 - P0119: Testing and Inspection P0117 For diagnosis of code P0117 refer to chart Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119, ( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116 > Page 36 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119, ( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116 > Page 37 P0115 - P0119: Testing and Inspection P0118 For diagnosis of code P0118 refer to chart Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119, ( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116 > Page 38 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0120 - P0124, ( P0121 P0122 P0123 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0121 P0120 - P0124: Testing and Inspection P0121 For diagnosis of code P0121 refer to chart Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0120 - P0124, ( P0121 P0122 P0123 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0121 > Page 43 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0120 - P0124, ( P0121 P0122 P0123 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0121 > Page 44 P0120 - P0124: Testing and Inspection P0122 For diagnosis of code P0122 refer to chart Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0120 - P0124, ( P0121 P0122 P0123 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0121 > Page 45 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0120 - P0124, ( P0121 P0122 P0123 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0121 > Page 46 P0120 - P0124: Testing and Inspection P0123 For diagnosis of code P0123 refer to chart Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0120 - P0124, ( P0121 P0122 P0123 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0121 > Page 47 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0125 - P0129, ( P0126 P0127 P0128 0125 0126 0127 0128 0129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0125 P0125 - P0129: Testing and Inspection P0125 For diagnosis of code P0125 refer to chart Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0125 - P0129, ( P0126 P0127 P0128 0125 0126 0127 0128 0129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0125 > Page 52 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0125 - P0129, ( P0126 P0127 P0128 0125 0126 0127 0128 0129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0125 > Page 53 P0125 - P0129: Testing and Inspection P0127 For diagnosis of code P0127 refer to chart Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0125 - P0129, ( P0126 P0127 P0128 0125 0126 0127 0128 0129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0125 > Page 54 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134, ( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131 P0130 - P0134: Testing and Inspection P0131 For diagnosis of code P0131 refer to chart Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134, ( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131 > Page 59 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134, ( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131 > Page 60 P0130 - P0134: Testing and Inspection P0133 For diagnosis of code P0133 refer to chart Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134, ( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131 > Page 61 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0135 - P0139, ( P0136 P0137 P0138 0135 0136 0137 0138 0139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0135 P0135 - P0139: Testing and Inspection P0135 For diagnosis of code P0135 refer to chart Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0135 - P0139, ( P0136 P0137 P0138 0135 0136 0137 0138 0139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0135 > Page 66 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0135 - P0139, ( P0136 P0137 P0138 0135 0136 0137 0138 0139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0135 > Page 67 P0135 - P0139: Testing and Inspection P0136 For diagnosis of code P0136 refer to chart Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0135 - P0139, ( P0136 P0137 P0138 0135 0136 0137 0138 0139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0135 > Page 68 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0140 - P0144, ( P0141 P0142 P0143 0140 0141 0142 0143 0144 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0140 - P0144: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P0141 refer to chart Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0140 - P0144, ( P0141 P0142 P0143 0140 0141 0142 0143 0144 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 72 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0145 - P0149, ( P0146 P0127 P0148 0145 0146 0147 0148 0149 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0145 - P0149: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P0148 refer to chart Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0145 - P0149, ( P0146 P0127 P0148 0145 0146 0147 0148 0149 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 76 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154, ( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151 P0150 - P0154: Testing and Inspection P0151 For diagnosis of code P0151 refer to chart Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154, ( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151 > Page 81 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154, ( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151 > Page 82 P0150 - P0154: Testing and Inspection P0153 For diagnosis of code P0153 refer to chart Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154, ( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151 > Page 83 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0155 - P0159, ( P0156 P0157 P0158 0155 0156 0157 0158 0159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0155 P0155 - P0159: Testing and Inspection P0155 For diagnosis of code P0155 refer to chart Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0155 - P0159, ( P0156 P0157 P0158 0155 0156 0157 0158 0159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0155 > Page 88 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0155 - P0159, ( P0156 P0157 P0158 0155 0156 0157 0158 0159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0155 > Page 89 P0155 - P0159: Testing and Inspection P0156 For diagnosis of code P0156 refer to chart Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0155 - P0159, ( P0156 P0157 P0158 0155 0156 0157 0158 0159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0155 > Page 90 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0160 - P0164, ( P0161 P0162 P0163 0160 0161 0162 0163 0164 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0160 - P0164: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P0161 refer to chart Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0160 - P0164, ( P0161 P0162 P0163 0160 0161 0162 0163 0164 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 94 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174, ( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 P0170 - P0174: Testing and Inspection P0171 For diagnosis of code P0171 refer to chart Bxxxx, Cxxxx, P0102 - P0171 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174, ( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 > Page 99 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174, ( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 > Page 100 P0170 - P0174: Testing and Inspection P0172 For diagnosis of code P0172 refer to chart P0172 - P0304 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174, ( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 > Page 101 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174, ( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 > Page 102 P0170 - P0174: Testing and Inspection P0174 For diagnosis of code P0174 refer to chart P0172 - P0304 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174, ( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 > Page 103 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0175 - P0179, ( P0176 P0177 P0178 0175 0176 0177 0178 0179 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0175 P0175 - P0179: Testing and Inspection P0175 For diagnosis of code P0175 refer to chart P0172 - P0304 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0175 - P0179, ( P0176 P0177 P0178 0175 0176 0177 0178 0179 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0175 > Page 108 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0175 - P0179, ( P0176 P0177 P0178 0175 0176 0177 0178 0179 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0175 > Page 109 P0175 - P0179: Testing and Inspection P0176 For diagnosis of code P0176 refer to chart P0172 - P0304 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0175 - P0179, ( P0176 P0177 P0178 0175 0176 0177 0178 0179 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0175 > Page 110 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184, ( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 P0180 - P0184: Testing and Inspection P0180 For diagnosis of code P0180 refer to chart P0172 - P0304 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184, ( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 115 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184, ( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 116 P0180 - P0184: Testing and Inspection P0181 For diagnosis of code P0181 refer to chart P0172 - P0304 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184, ( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 117 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184, ( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 118 P0180 - P0184: Testing and Inspection P0182 For diagnosis of code P0182 refer to chart P0172 - P0304 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184, ( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 119 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184, ( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 120 P0180 - P0184: Testing and Inspection P0183 For diagnosis of code P0183 refer to chart P0172 - P0304 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184, ( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 121 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194, ( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 P0190 - P0194: Testing and Inspection P0190 For diagnosis of code P0190 refer to chart P0172 - P0304 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194, ( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 126 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194, ( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 127 P0190 - P0194: Testing and Inspection P0191 For diagnosis of code P0191 refer to chart P0172 - P0304 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194, ( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 128 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194, ( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 129 P0190 - P0194: Testing and Inspection P0192 For diagnosis of code P0192 refer to chart P0172 - P0304 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194, ( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 130 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194, ( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 131 P0190 - P0194: Testing and Inspection P0193 For diagnosis of code P0193 refer to chart P0172 - P0304 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194, ( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 132 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204, ( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 P0200 - P0204: Testing and Inspection P0201 For diagnosis of code P0201 refer to chart P0172 - P0304 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204, ( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 138 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204, ( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 139 P0200 - P0204: Testing and Inspection P0202 For diagnosis of code P0202 refer to chart P0172 - P0304 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204, ( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 140 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204, ( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 141 P0200 - P0204: Testing and Inspection P0203 For diagnosis of code P0203 refer to chart P0172 - P0304 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204, ( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 142 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204, ( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 143 P0200 - P0204: Testing and Inspection P0204 For diagnosis of code P0204 refer to chart P0172 - P0304 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204, ( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 144 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209, ( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 P0205 - P0209: Testing and Inspection P0205 For diagnosis of code P0205 refer to chart P0172 - P0304 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209, ( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 149 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209, ( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 150 P0205 - P0209: Testing and Inspection P0206 For diagnosis of code P0206 refer to chart P0172 - P0304 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209, ( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 151 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209, ( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 152 P0205 - P0209: Testing and Inspection P0207 For diagnosis of code P0207 refer to chart P0172 - P0304 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209, ( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 153 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209, ( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 154 P0205 - P0209: Testing and Inspection P0208 For diagnosis of code P0208 refer to chart P0172 - P0304 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209, ( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 155 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209, ( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 156 P0205 - P0209: Testing and Inspection P0209 For diagnosis of code P0209 refer to chart P0172 - P0304 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209, ( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 157 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0210 - P0214, ( P0211 P0212 P0213 0210 0211 0212 0213 0214 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0210 P0210 - P0214: Testing and Inspection P0210 For diagnosis of code P0210 refer to chart P0172 - P0304 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0210 - P0214, ( P0211 P0212 P0213 0210 0211 0212 0213 0214 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0210 > Page 162 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0210 - P0214, ( P0211 P0212 P0213 0210 0211 0212 0213 0214 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0210 > Page 163 P0210 - P0214: Testing and Inspection P0211 For diagnosis of code P0211 refer to chart P0172 - P0304 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0210 - P0214, ( P0211 P0212 P0213 0210 0211 0212 0213 0214 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0210 > Page 164 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0210 - P0214, ( P0211 P0212 P0213 0210 0211 0212 0213 0214 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0210 > Page 165 P0210 - P0214: Testing and Inspection P0212 For diagnosis of code P0212 refer to chart P0172 - P0304 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0210 - P0214, ( P0211 P0212 P0213 0210 0211 0212 0213 0214 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0210 > Page 166 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0215 - P0219, ( P0216 P0217 P0218 0215 0216 0217 0218 0219 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0215 - P0219: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P0217 refer to chart P0172 - P0304 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0215 - P0219, ( P0216 P0217 P0218 0215 0216 0217 0218 0219 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 170 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234, ( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230 P0230 - P0234: Testing and Inspection P0230 For diagnosis of code P0230 refer to chart P0172 - P0304 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234, ( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230 > Page 175 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234, ( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230 > Page 176 P0230 - P0234: Testing and Inspection P0231 For diagnosis of code P0231 refer to chart P0172 - P0304 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234, ( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230 > Page 177 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234, ( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230 > Page 178 P0230 - P0234: Testing and Inspection P0232 For diagnosis of code P0232 refer to chart P0172 - P0304 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234, ( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230 > Page 179 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234, ( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230 > Page 180 P0230 - P0234: Testing and Inspection P0234 For diagnosis of code P0234 refer to chart P0172 - P0304 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234, ( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230 > Page 181 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0240 - P0244, ( P0241 P0242 P0243 0240 0241 0242 0243 0244 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0240 - P0244: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P0243 refer to chart P0172 - P0304 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0240 - P0244, ( P0241 P0242 P0243 0240 0241 0242 0243 0244 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 185 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0295 - P0299, ( P0296 P0297 P0298 0295 0296 0297 0298 0299 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0295 - P0299: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P0298 refer to chart P0172 - P0304 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0295 - P0299, ( P0296 P0297 P0298 0295 0296 0297 0298 0299 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 189 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0300 - P0304, ( P0301 P0302 P0303 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0300 P0300 - P0304: Testing and Inspection P0300 For diagnosis of code P0300 refer to chart P0172 - P0304 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0300 - P0304, ( P0301 P0302 P0303 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0300 > Page 195 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0300 - P0304, ( P0301 P0302 P0303 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0300 > Page 196 P0300 - P0304: Testing and Inspection P0301 For diagnosis of code P0301 refer to chart P0172 - P0304 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0300 - P0304, ( P0301 P0302 P0303 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0300 > Page 197 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0300 - P0304, ( P0301 P0302 P0303 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0300 > Page 198 P0300 - P0304: Testing and Inspection P0302 For diagnosis of code P0302 refer to chart P0172 - P0304 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0300 - P0304, ( P0301 P0302 P0303 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0300 > Page 199 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0300 - P0304, ( P0301 P0302 P0303 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0300 > Page 200 P0300 - P0304: Testing and Inspection P0303 For diagnosis of code P0303 refer to chart P0172 - P0304 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0300 - P0304, ( P0301 P0302 P0303 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0300 > Page 201 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0300 - P0304, ( P0301 P0302 P0303 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0300 > Page 202 P0300 - P0304: Testing and Inspection P0304 For diagnosis of code P0304 refer to chart P0172 - P0304 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0300 - P0304, ( P0301 P0302 P0303 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0300 > Page 203 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0305 - P0309, ( P0306 P0307 P0308 0305 0306 0307 0308 0309 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0305 P0305 - P0309: Testing and Inspection P0305 For diagnosis of code P0305 refer to chart P0305 - P0442 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0305 - P0309, ( P0306 P0307 P0308 0305 0306 0307 0308 0309 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0305 > Page 208 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0305 - P0309, ( P0306 P0307 P0308 0305 0306 0307 0308 0309 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0305 > Page 209 P0305 - P0309: Testing and Inspection P0306 For diagnosis of code P0306 refer to chart P0305 - P0442 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0305 - P0309, ( P0306 P0307 P0308 0305 0306 0307 0308 0309 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0305 > Page 210 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0305 - P0309, ( P0306 P0307 P0308 0305 0306 0307 0308 0309 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0305 > Page 211 P0305 - P0309: Testing and Inspection P0307 For diagnosis of code P0307 refer to chart P0305 - P0442 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0305 - P0309, ( P0306 P0307 P0308 0305 0306 0307 0308 0309 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0305 > Page 212 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0305 - P0309, ( P0306 P0307 P0308 0305 0306 0307 0308 0309 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0305 > Page 213 P0305 - P0309: Testing and Inspection P0308 For diagnosis of code P0308 refer to chart P0305 - P0442 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0305 - P0309, ( P0306 P0307 P0308 0305 0306 0307 0308 0309 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0305 > Page 214 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0305 - P0309, ( P0306 P0307 P0308 0305 0306 0307 0308 0309 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0305 > Page 215 P0305 - P0309: Testing and Inspection P0309 For diagnosis of code P0309 refer to chart P0305 - P0442 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0305 - P0309, ( P0306 P0307 P0308 0305 0306 0307 0308 0309 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0305 > Page 216 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0310 - P0314, ( P0311 P0312 P0313 0310 0311 0312 0313 0314 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0310 - P0314: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P0310 refer to chart P0305 - P0442 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0310 - P0314, ( P0311 P0312 P0313 0310 0311 0312 0313 0314 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 220 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0320 - P0324, ( P0321 P0322 P0323 0320 0321 0322 0323 0324 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0320 - P0324: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P0320 refer to chart P0305 - P0442 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0320 - P0324, ( P0321 P0322 P0323 0320 0321 0322 0323 0324 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 224 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0325 - P0329, ( P0326 P0327 P0328 0325 0326 0327 0328 0329 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0325 P0325 - P0329: Testing and Inspection P0325 For diagnosis of code P0325 refer to chart P0305 - P0442 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0325 - P0329, ( P0326 P0327 P0328 0325 0326 0327 0328 0329 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0325 > Page 229 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0325 - P0329, ( P0326 P0327 P0328 0325 0326 0327 0328 0329 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0325 > Page 230 P0325 - P0329: Testing and Inspection P0326 For diagnosis of code P0326 refer to chart P0305 - P0442 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0325 - P0329, ( P0326 P0327 P0328 0325 0326 0327 0328 0329 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0325 > Page 231 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0330 - P0334, ( P0331 P0332 P0333 0330 0331 0332 0333 0334 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0330 P0330 - P0334: Testing and Inspection P0330 For diagnosis of code P0330 refer to chart P0305 - P0442 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0330 - P0334, ( P0331 P0332 P0333 0330 0331 0332 0333 0334 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0330 > Page 236 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0330 - P0334, ( P0331 P0332 P0333 0330 0331 0332 0333 0334 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0330 > Page 237 P0330 - P0334: Testing and Inspection P0331 For diagnosis of code P0331 refer to chart P0305 - P0442 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0330 - P0334, ( P0331 P0332 P0333 0330 0331 0332 0333 0334 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0330 > Page 238 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0340 - P0344, ( P0341 P0342 P0343 0340 0341 0342 0343 0344 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0340 - P0344: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P0340 refer to chart P0305 - P0442 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0340 - P0344, ( P0341 P0342 P0343 0340 0341 0342 0343 0344 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 242 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354, ( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 P0350 - P0354: Testing and Inspection P0350 For diagnosis of code P0350 refer to chart P0305 - P0442 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354, ( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 247 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354, ( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 248 P0350 - P0354: Testing and Inspection P0351 For diagnosis of code P0351 refer to chart P0305 - P0442 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354, ( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 249 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354, ( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 250 P0350 - P0354: Testing and Inspection P0352 For diagnosis of code P0352 refer to chart P0305 - P0442 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354, ( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 251 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354, ( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 252 P0350 - P0354: Testing and Inspection P0353 For diagnosis of code P0353 refer to chart P0305 - P0442 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354, ( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 253 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354, ( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 254 P0350 - P0354: Testing and Inspection P0354 For diagnosis of code P0354 refer to chart P0305 - P0442 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354, ( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 255 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359, ( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 P0355 - P0359: Testing and Inspection P0355 For diagnosis of code P0355 refer to chart P0305 - P0442 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359, ( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 260 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359, ( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 261 P0355 - P0359: Testing and Inspection P0356 For diagnosis of code P0356 refer to chart P0305 - P0442 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359, ( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 262 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359, ( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 263 P0355 - P0359: Testing and Inspection P0357 For diagnosis of code P0357 refer to chart P0305 - P0442 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359, ( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 264 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359, ( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 265 P0355 - P0359: Testing and Inspection P0358 For diagnosis of code P0358 refer to chart P0305 - P0442 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359, ( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 266 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359, ( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 267 P0355 - P0359: Testing and Inspection P0359 For diagnosis of code P0359 refer to chart P0305 - P0442 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359, ( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 268 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0360 - P0364, ( P0361 P0362 P0363 0360 0361 0362 0363 0364 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0360 - P0364: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P0360 refer to chart P0305 - P0442 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0360 - P0364, ( P0361 P0362 P0363 0360 0361 0362 0363 0364 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 272 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404, ( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400 P0400 - P0404: Testing and Inspection P0400 For diagnosis of code P0400 refer to chart P0305 - P0442 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404, ( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400 > Page 278 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404, ( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400 > Page 279 P0400 - P0404: Testing and Inspection P0401 For diagnosis of code P0401 refer to chart P0305 - P0442 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404, ( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400 > Page 280 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404, ( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400 > Page 281 P0400 - P0404: Testing and Inspection P0402 For diagnosis of code P0402 refer to chart P0305 - P0442 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404, ( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400 > Page 282 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404, ( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400 > Page 283 P0400 - P0404: Testing and Inspection P0403 For diagnosis of code P0403 refer to chart P0305 - P0442 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404, ( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400 > Page 284 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0410 - P0414, ( P0411 P0412 P0413 0410 0411 0412 0413 0414 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0411 P0410 - P0414: Testing and Inspection P0411 For diagnosis of code P0411 refer to chart P0305 - P0442 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0410 - P0414, ( P0411 P0412 P0413 0410 0411 0412 0413 0414 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0411 > Page 289 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0410 - P0414, ( P0411 P0412 P0413 0410 0411 0412 0413 0414 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0411 > Page 290 P0410 - P0414: Testing and Inspection P0412 For diagnosis of code P0412 refer to chart P0305 - P0442 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0410 - P0414, ( P0411 P0412 P0413 0410 0411 0412 0413 0414 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0411 > Page 291 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0420 - P0424, ( P0421 P0422 P0423 0420 0421 0422 0423 0424 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0420 - P0424: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P0420 refer to chart P0305 - P0442 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0420 - P0424, ( P0421 P0422 P0423 0420 0421 0422 0423 0424 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 295 For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0430 - P0434, ( P0431 P0432 P0433 0430 0431 0432 0433 0434 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0430 - P0434: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P0430 refer to chart P0305 - P0442 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0430 - P0434, ( P0431 P0432 P0433 0430 0431 0432 0433 0434 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 299 For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0440 - P0444, ( P0441 P0442 P0443 0440 0441 0442 0443 0444 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0442 P0440 - P0444: Testing and Inspection P0442 For diagnosis of code P0442 refer to chart DTC Index P0442 - P1443 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Evaporative Emissions diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0440 - P0444, ( P0441 P0442 P0443 0440 0441 0442 0443 0444 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0442 > Page 304 P0440 - P0444: Testing and Inspection P0443 For diagnosis of code P0443 refer to chart P0443 - P071x If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0440 - P0444, ( P0441 P0442 P0443 0440 0441 0442 0443 0444 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0442 > Page 305 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0450 - P0454, ( P0451 P0452 P0453 0450 0451 0452 0453 0454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0451 P0450 - P0454: Testing and Inspection P0451 For diagnosis of code P0451 refer to chart P0443 - P071x If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0450 - P0454, ( P0451 P0452 P0453 0450 0451 0452 0453 0454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0451 > Page 310 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0450 - P0454, ( P0451 P0452 P0453 0450 0451 0452 0453 0454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0451 > Page 311 P0450 - P0454: Testing and Inspection P0452 For diagnosis of code P0452 refer to chart P0443 - P071x If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0450 - P0454, ( P0451 P0452 P0453 0450 0451 0452 0453 0454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0451 > Page 312 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0450 - P0454, ( P0451 P0452 P0453 0450 0451 0452 0453 0454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0451 > Page 313 P0450 - P0454: Testing and Inspection P0453 For diagnosis of code P0453 refer to chart P0443 - P071x If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0450 - P0454, ( P0451 P0452 P0453 0450 0451 0452 0453 0454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0451 > Page 314 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0455 - P0459, ( P0456 P0457 P0458 0455 0456 0457 0458 0459 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0455 P0455 - P0459: Testing and Inspection P0455 For diagnosis of code P0455 refer to chart DTC Index P0442 - P1443 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Evaporative Emissions diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0455 - P0459, ( P0456 P0457 P0458 0455 0456 0457 0458 0459 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0455 > Page 319 P0455 - P0459: Testing and Inspection P0457 For diagnosis of P0457 refer to the system experiencing the problem. Computers and Control Systems P0443 - P071x Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0455 - P0459, ( P0456 P0457 P0458 0455 0456 0457 0458 0459 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0455 > Page 320 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Instrument Panel DTC Index P0457 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Instrument Panel diagnostic information, See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0460 - P0464, ( P0461 P0462 P0463 0460 0461 0462 0463 0464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0460 P0460 - P0464: Testing and Inspection P0460 For diagnosis of code P0460 refer to chart P0443 - P071x If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0460 - P0464, ( P0461 P0462 P0463 0460 0461 0462 0463 0464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0460 > Page 325 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0460 - P0464, ( P0461 P0462 P0463 0460 0461 0462 0463 0464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0460 > Page 326 P0460 - P0464: Testing and Inspection P0461 For diagnosis of code P0461 refer to chart P0443 - P071x If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0460 - P0464, ( P0461 P0462 P0463 0460 0461 0462 0463 0464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0460 > Page 327 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0500 - P0504, ( P0501 P0502 P0503 0500 0501 0502 0503 0504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0500 P0500 - P0504: Testing and Inspection P0500 For diagnosis of code P0500 refer to chart P0443 - P071x NOTE 12: Vehicle Speed information is provided by the Antilock Brake System (ABS). Perform complete diagnosis, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0500 - P0504, ( P0501 P0502 P0503 0500 0501 0502 0503 0504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0500 > Page 333 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0500 - P0504, ( P0501 P0502 P0503 0500 0501 0502 0503 0504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0500 > Page 334 P0500 - P0504: Testing and Inspection P0501 For diagnosis of code P0501 refer to chart P0443 - P071x NOTE 12: Vehicle Speed information is provided by the Antilock Brake System (ABS). Perform complete diagnosis, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0500 - P0504, ( P0501 P0502 P0503 0500 0501 0502 0503 0504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0500 > Page 335 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0500 - P0504, ( P0501 P0502 P0503 0500 0501 0502 0503 0504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0500 > Page 336 P0500 - P0504: Testing and Inspection P0503 For diagnosis of code P0503 refer to chart P0443 - P071x NOTE 12: Vehicle Speed information is provided by the Antilock Brake System (ABS). Perform complete diagnosis, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0500 - P0504, ( P0501 P0502 P0503 0500 0501 0502 0503 0504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0500 > Page 337 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0505 - P0509, ( P0506 P0507 P0508 0505 0506 0507 0508 0509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0505 - P0509: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P0505 refer to chart P0443 - P071x If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0505 - P0509, ( P0506 P0507 P0508 0505 0506 0507 0508 0509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 341 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0550 - P0554, ( P0551 P0552 P0553 0550 0551 0552 0553 0554 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0552 P0550 - P0554: Testing and Inspection P0552 For diagnosis of code P0552 refer to chart P0443 - P071x If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0550 - P0554, ( P0551 P0552 P0553 0550 0551 0552 0553 0554 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0552 > Page 346 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0550 - P0554, ( P0551 P0552 P0553 0550 0551 0552 0553 0554 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0552 > Page 347 P0550 - P0554: Testing and Inspection P0553 For diagnosis of code P0553 refer to chart P0443 - P071x If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0550 - P0554, ( P0551 P0552 P0553 0550 0551 0552 0553 0554 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0552 > Page 348 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0600 - P0604, ( P0601 P0602 P0603 0600 0601 0602 0603 0604 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0602 P0600 - P0604: Testing and Inspection P0602 For diagnosis of code P0602 refer to chart P0443 - P071x NOTE 11: The vehicle ID block (VID) needs to be reprogrammed. Refer to VID Block Procedure. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0600 - P0604, ( P0601 P0602 P0603 0600 0601 0602 0603 0604 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0602 > Page 354 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0600 - P0604, ( P0601 P0602 P0603 0600 0601 0602 0603 0604 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0602 > Page 355 P0600 - P0604: Testing and Inspection P0603 For diagnosis of code P0603 refer to chart P0443 - P071x If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0600 - P0604, ( P0601 P0602 P0603 0600 0601 0602 0603 0604 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0602 > Page 356 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0605 - P0609, ( P0606 P0607 P0608 0605 0606 0607 0608 0609 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0605 - P0609: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P0605 refer to chart P0443 - P071x NOTE 14: Be sure to check for aftermarket performance products before replacing PCM. If replacement is necessary refer to Flash Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM), See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0605 - P0609, ( P0606 P0607 P0608 0605 0606 0607 0608 0609 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 360 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0700 - P0704, ( P0701 P0702 P0703 0700 0701 0702 0703 0704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0703 P0700 - P0704: Testing and Inspection P0703 For diagnosis of code P0703 refer to chart P0443 - P071x If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0700 - P0704, ( P0701 P0702 P0703 0700 0701 0702 0703 0704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0703 > Page 366 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0700 - P0704, ( P0701 P0702 P0703 0700 0701 0702 0703 0704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0703 > Page 367 P0700 - P0704: Testing and Inspection P0704 For diagnosis of code P0704 refer to chart P0443 - P071x If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0700 - P0704, ( P0701 P0702 P0703 0700 0701 0702 0703 0704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0703 > Page 368 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0705 - P0709, ( P0706 P0707 P0708 0705 0706 0707 0708 0709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0707 P0705 - P0709: Testing and Inspection P0707 For diagnosis of code P0707 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0705 - P0709, ( P0706 P0707 P0708 0705 0706 0707 0708 0709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0707 > Page 373 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0705 - P0709, ( P0706 P0707 P0708 0705 0706 0707 0708 0709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0707 > Page 374 P0705 - P0709: Testing and Inspection P0708 For diagnosis of code P0708 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0705 - P0709, ( P0706 P0707 P0708 0705 0706 0707 0708 0709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0707 > Page 375 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0710 - P0714, ( P0711 P0712 P0713 0710 0711 0712 0713 0714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0712 P0710 - P0714: Testing and Inspection P0712 For diagnosis of code P0712 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0710 - P0714, ( P0711 P0712 P0713 0710 0711 0712 0713 0714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0712 > Page 380 P0710 - P0714: Testing and Inspection P0713 For diagnosis of code P0713 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0715 - P0719, ( P0716 P0717 P0718 0715 0716 0717 0718 0719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0715 P0715 - P0719: Testing and Inspection P0715 For diagnosis of code P0715 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0715 - P0719, ( P0716 P0717 P0718 0715 0716 0717 0718 0719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0715 > Page 385 P0715 - P0719: Testing and Inspection P0717 For diagnosis of code P0717 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0715 - P0719, ( P0716 P0717 P0718 0715 0716 0717 0718 0719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0715 > Page 386 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0715 - P0719, ( P0716 P0717 P0718 0715 0716 0717 0718 0719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0715 > Page 387 P0715 - P0719: Testing and Inspection P0718 For diagnosis of code P0718 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0715 - P0719, ( P0716 P0717 P0718 0715 0716 0717 0718 0719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0715 > Page 388 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724, ( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission P0720 - P0724: Testing and Inspection Manual Transmission For diagnosis of code P072x refer to chart P072x - P1138 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724, ( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission > Page 393 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Note: "x" = any number 0 thru 9 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724, ( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission > Page 394 P0720 - P0724: Testing and Inspection Automatic Transmission P0720 For diagnosis of code P0720 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724, ( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission > Page 395 For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection P0721 For diagnosis of code P0721 refer to chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724, ( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission > Page 396 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724, ( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission > Page 397 Inspection P0722 ( P 0722 ) For diagnosis of code P0722 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724, ( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission > Page 398 - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0725 - P0729, ( P0726 P0727 P0728 0725 0726 0727 0728 0729 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0725 - P0729: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P072x refer to chart P072x - P1138 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0725 - P0729, ( P0726 P0727 P0728 0725 0726 0727 0728 0729 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 402 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Note: "x" = any number 0 thru 9 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734, ( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0731 P0730 - P0734: Testing and Inspection P0731 For diagnosis of code P0731 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734, ( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0731 > Page 407 P0730 - P0734: Testing and Inspection P0732 For diagnosis of code P0732 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734, ( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0731 > Page 408 P0730 - P0734: Testing and Inspection P0733 For diagnosis of code P0733 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734, ( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0731 > Page 409 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734, ( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0731 > Page 410 P0730 - P0734: Testing and Inspection P0734 For diagnosis of code P0734 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734, ( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0731 > Page 411 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744, ( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0740 - P0744: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P0743 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744, ( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 415 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0750 - P0754, ( P0751 P0752 P0753 0750 0751 0752 0753 0754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0750 P0750 - P0754: Testing and Inspection P0750 For diagnosis of code P0750 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0750 - P0754, ( P0751 P0752 P0753 0750 0751 0752 0753 0754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0750 > Page 420 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0750 - P0754, ( P0751 P0752 P0753 0750 0751 0752 0753 0754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0750 > Page 421 P0750 - P0754: Testing and Inspection P0751 For diagnosis of code P0751 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0750 - P0754, ( P0751 P0752 P0753 0750 0751 0752 0753 0754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0750 > Page 422 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0755 - P0759, ( P0756 P0757 P0758 0755 0756 0757 0758 0759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0755 P0755 - P0759: Testing and Inspection P0755 For diagnosis of code P0755 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0755 - P0759, ( P0756 P0757 P0758 0755 0756 0757 0758 0759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0755 > Page 427 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0755 - P0759, ( P0756 P0757 P0758 0755 0756 0757 0758 0759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0755 > Page 428 P0755 - P0759: Testing and Inspection P0756 For diagnosis of code P0756 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0755 - P0759, ( P0756 P0757 P0758 0755 0756 0757 0758 0759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0755 > Page 429 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0800-P08ZZ > P0810 - P0814, ( P0811 P0812 P0813 0810 0811 0812 0813 0814 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P0810 - P0814: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P0812 refer to chart P072x - P1138 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0800-P08ZZ > P0810 - P0814, ( P0811 P0812 P0813 0810 0811 0812 0813 0814 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 434 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1000-P10ZZ > P1000 - P1004, ( P1001 P1002 P1003 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1000 P1000 - P1004: Testing and Inspection P1000 For diagnosis of code P1000 refer to chart P072x - P1138 NOTE 1: DTC P1000 is ignored in KOEO and KOER Self-Test. Disregard the DTC P1000 and continue as directed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1000-P10ZZ > P1000 - P1004, ( P1001 P1002 P1003 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1000 > Page 440 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1000-P10ZZ > P1000 - P1004, ( P1001 P1002 P1003 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1000 > Page 441 P1000 - P1004: Testing and Inspection P1001 For diagnosis of code P1001 refer to chart P072x - P1138 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1000-P10ZZ > P1000 - P1004, ( P1001 P1002 P1003 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1000 > Page 442 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1100 - P1104, ( P1101 P1102 P1103 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1100 P1100 - P1104: Testing and Inspection P1100 For diagnosis of code P1100 refer to chart P072x - P1138 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1100 - P1104, ( P1101 P1102 P1103 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1100 > Page 448 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1100 - P1104, ( P1101 P1102 P1103 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1100 > Page 449 P1100 - P1104: Testing and Inspection P1101 For diagnosis of code P1101 refer to chart P072x - P1138 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1100 - P1104, ( P1101 P1102 P1103 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1100 > Page 450 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1110 - P1114, ( P1111 P1112 P1113 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1112 P1110 - P1114: Testing and Inspection P1112 For diagnosis of code P1112 refer to chart P072x - P1138 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1110 - P1114, ( P1111 P1112 P1113 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1112 > Page 455 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1110 - P1114, ( P1111 P1112 P1113 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1112 > Page 456 P1110 - P1114: Testing and Inspection P1114 For diagnosis of code P1114 refer to chart P072x - P1138 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1110 - P1114, ( P1111 P1112 P1113 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1112 > Page 457 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1115 - P1119, ( P1116 P1117 P1118 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1115 P1115 - P1119: Testing and Inspection P1115 For diagnosis of code P1115 refer to chart P072x - P1138 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1115 - P1119, ( P1116 P1117 P1118 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1115 > Page 462 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1115 - P1119, ( P1116 P1117 P1118 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1115 > Page 463 P1115 - P1119: Testing and Inspection P1116 For diagnosis of code P1116 refer to chart P072x - P1138 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1115 - P1119, ( P1116 P1117 P1118 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1115 > Page 464 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1115 - P1119, ( P1116 P1117 P1118 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1115 > Page 465 P1115 - P1119: Testing and Inspection P1117 For diagnosis of code P1117 refer to chart P072x - P1138 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1115 - P1119, ( P1116 P1117 P1118 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1115 > Page 466 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1120 - P1124, ( P1121 P1122 P1123 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1120 P1120 - P1124: Testing and Inspection P1120 For diagnosis of code P1120 refer to chart P072x - P1138 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1120 - P1124, ( P1121 P1122 P1123 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1120 > Page 471 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1120 - P1124, ( P1121 P1122 P1123 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1120 > Page 472 P1120 - P1124: Testing and Inspection P1121 For diagnosis of code P1121 refer to chart P072x - P1138 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1120 - P1124, ( P1121 P1122 P1123 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1120 > Page 473 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1120 - P1124, ( P1121 P1122 P1123 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1120 > Page 474 P1120 - P1124: Testing and Inspection P1124 For diagnosis of code P1124 refer to chart P072x - P1138 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1120 - P1124, ( P1121 P1122 P1123 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1120 > Page 475 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129, ( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125 P1125 - P1129: Testing and Inspection P1125 For diagnosis of code P1125 refer to chart P072x - P1138 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129, ( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125 > Page 480 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129, ( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125 > Page 481 P1125 - P1129: Testing and Inspection P1127 For diagnosis of code P1127 refer to chart P072x - P1138 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129, ( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125 > Page 482 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129, ( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125 > Page 483 P1125 - P1129: Testing and Inspection P1128 For diagnosis of code P1128 refer to chart P072x - P1138 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129, ( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125 > Page 484 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129, ( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125 > Page 485 P1125 - P1129: Testing and Inspection P1129 For diagnosis of code P1129 refer to chart P072x - P1138 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129, ( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125 > Page 486 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1130 - P1134, ( P1131 P1132 P1133 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1130 P1130 - P1134: Testing and Inspection P1130 For diagnosis of code P1130 refer to chart P072x - P1138 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1130 - P1134, ( P1131 P1132 P1133 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1130 > Page 491 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1130 - P1134, ( P1131 P1132 P1133 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1130 > Page 492 P1130 - P1134: Testing and Inspection P1131 For diagnosis of code P1131 refer to chart P072x - P1138 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1130 - P1134, ( P1131 P1132 P1133 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1130 > Page 493 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1130 - P1134, ( P1131 P1132 P1133 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1130 > Page 494 P1130 - P1134: Testing and Inspection P1132 For diagnosis of code P1132 refer to chart P072x - P1138 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1130 - P1134, ( P1131 P1132 P1133 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1130 > Page 495 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1135 - P1139, ( P1136 P1137 P1138 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1137 P1135 - P1139: Testing and Inspection P1137 For diagnosis of code P1137 refer to chart P072x - P1138 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1135 - P1139, ( P1136 P1137 P1138 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1137 > Page 500 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1135 - P1139, ( P1136 P1137 P1138 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1137 > Page 501 P1135 - P1139: Testing and Inspection P1138 For diagnosis of code P1138 refer to chart P072x - P1138 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1135 - P1139, ( P1136 P1137 P1138 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1137 > Page 502 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1150 - P1154, ( P1151 P1152 P1153 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1150 P1150 - P1154: Testing and Inspection P1150 For diagnosis of code P1150 refer to chart P1150 - P1401 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1150 - P1154, ( P1151 P1152 P1153 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1150 > Page 507 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1150 - P1154, ( P1151 P1152 P1153 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1150 > Page 508 P1150 - P1154: Testing and Inspection P1151 For diagnosis of code P1151 refer to chart P1150 - P1401 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1150 - P1154, ( P1151 P1152 P1153 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1150 > Page 509 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1150 - P1154, ( P1151 P1152 P1153 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1150 > Page 510 P1150 - P1154: Testing and Inspection P1152 For diagnosis of code P1152 refer to chart P1150 - P1401 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1150 - P1154, ( P1151 P1152 P1153 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1150 > Page 511 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1155 - P1159, ( P1156 P1157 P1158 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1157 P1155 - P1159: Testing and Inspection P1157 For diagnosis of code P1157 refer to chart P1150 - P1401 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1155 - P1159, ( P1156 P1157 P1158 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1157 > Page 516 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1155 - P1159, ( P1156 P1157 P1158 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1157 > Page 517 P1155 - P1159: Testing and Inspection P1158 For diagnosis of code P1158 refer to chart P1150 - P1401 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1155 - P1159, ( P1156 P1157 P1158 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1157 > Page 518 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1165 - P1169, ( P1166 P1167 P1168 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1168 P1165 - P1169: Testing and Inspection P1168 For diagnosis of code P1168 refer to chart P1150 - P1401 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1165 - P1169, ( P1166 P1167 P1168 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1168 > Page 523 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1165 - P1169, ( P1166 P1167 P1168 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1168 > Page 524 P1165 - P1169: Testing and Inspection P1169 For diagnosis of code P1169 refer to chart P1150 - P1401 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1165 - P1169, ( P1166 P1167 P1168 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1168 > Page 525 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1180 - P1184, ( P1181 P1182 P1183 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1180 P1180 - P1184: Testing and Inspection P1180 For diagnosis of code P1180 refer to chart P1150 - P1401 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1180 - P1184, ( P1181 P1182 P1183 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1180 > Page 530 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1180 - P1184, ( P1181 P1182 P1183 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1180 > Page 531 P1180 - P1184: Testing and Inspection P1181 For diagnosis of code P1181 refer to chart P1150 - P1401 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1180 - P1184, ( P1181 P1182 P1183 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1180 > Page 532 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1180 - P1184, ( P1181 P1182 P1183 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1180 > Page 533 P1180 - P1184: Testing and Inspection P1183 For diagnosis of code P1183 refer to chart P1150 - P1401 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1180 - P1184, ( P1181 P1182 P1183 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1180 > Page 534 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1180 - P1184, ( P1181 P1182 P1183 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1180 > Page 535 P1180 - P1184: Testing and Inspection P1184 For diagnosis of code P1184 refer to chart P1150 - P1401 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1180 - P1184, ( P1181 P1182 P1183 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1180 > Page 536 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1225 - P1229, ( P1226 P1227 P1228 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1225 - P1229: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1229 refer to chart P1150 - P1401 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1225 - P1229, ( P1226 P1227 P1228 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 541 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1230 - P1234, ( P1231 P1232 P1233 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1232 P1230 - P1234: Testing and Inspection P1232 For diagnosis of code P1232 refer to chart P1150 - P1401 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1230 - P1234, ( P1231 P1232 P1233 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1232 > Page 546 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1230 - P1234, ( P1231 P1232 P1233 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1232 > Page 547 P1230 - P1234: Testing and Inspection P1233 For diagnosis of code P1233 refer to chart P1150 - P1401 NOTE 10: Perform Rear Electronics Module (REM) self-test/diagnostics. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1230 - P1234, ( P1231 P1232 P1233 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1232 > Page 548 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1230 - P1234, ( P1231 P1232 P1233 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1232 > Page 549 P1230 - P1234: Testing and Inspection P1234 For diagnosis of code P1234 refer to chart P1150 - P1401 NOTE 10: Perform Rear Electronics Module (REM) self-test/diagnostics. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1230 - P1234, ( P1231 P1232 P1233 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1232 > Page 550 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1235 - P1239, ( P1236 P1237 P1238 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1235 P1235 - P1239: Testing and Inspection P1235 For diagnosis of code P1235 refer to chart P1150 - P1401 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1235 - P1239, ( P1236 P1237 P1238 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1235 > Page 555 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1235 - P1239, ( P1236 P1237 P1238 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1235 > Page 556 P1235 - P1239: Testing and Inspection P1236 For diagnosis of code P1236 refer to chart P1150 - P1401 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1235 - P1239, ( P1236 P1237 P1238 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1235 > Page 557 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1235 - P1239, ( P1236 P1237 P1238 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1235 > Page 558 P1235 - P1239: Testing and Inspection P1237 For diagnosis of code P1237 refer to chart P1150 - P1401 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1235 - P1239, ( P1236 P1237 P1238 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1235 > Page 559 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1235 - P1239, ( P1236 P1237 P1238 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1235 > Page 560 P1235 - P1239: Testing and Inspection P1238 For diagnosis of code P1238 refer to chart P1150 - P1401 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1235 - P1239, ( P1236 P1237 P1238 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1235 > Page 561 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1240 - P1244, ( P1241 P1242 P1243 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1240 - P1244: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1244 refer to chart P1150 - P1401 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1240 - P1244, ( P1241 P1242 P1243 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 565 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1245 - P1249, ( P1246 P1247 P1248 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1245 P1245 - P1249: Testing and Inspection P1245 For diagnosis of code P1245 refer to chart P1150 - P1401 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1245 - P1249, ( P1246 P1247 P1248 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1245 > Page 570 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1245 - P1249, ( P1246 P1247 P1248 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1245 > Page 571 P1245 - P1249: Testing and Inspection P1246 For diagnosis of P1246 refer to the system experiencing the problem. Computers and Control Systems Refer to Pinpoint Test HY1. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Pinpoint Tests/Tests HY: Generator/Regulator System If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Charging System DTC Index P1246 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Charging System diagnostic information, See: Starting and Charging/Charging System/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1260 - P1264, ( P1261 P1262 P1263 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1260 - P1264: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1260 refer to chart P1150 - P1401 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1260 - P1264, ( P1261 P1262 P1263 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 575 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1270 - P1274, ( P1271 P1272 P1273 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1270 - P1274: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1270 refer to chart P1150 - P1401 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1270 - P1274, ( P1271 P1272 P1273 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 579 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1285 - P1289, ( P1286 P1287 P1288 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1285 P1285 - P1289: Testing and Inspection P1285 For diagnosis of code P1285 refer to chart P1150 - P1401 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1285 - P1289, ( P1286 P1287 P1288 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1285 > Page 584 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1285 - P1289, ( P1286 P1287 P1288 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1285 > Page 585 P1285 - P1289: Testing and Inspection P1288 For diagnosis of code P1288 refer to chart P1150 - P1401 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1285 - P1289, ( P1286 P1287 P1288 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1285 > Page 586 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1285 - P1289, ( P1286 P1287 P1288 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1285 > Page 587 P1285 - P1289: Testing and Inspection P1289 For diagnosis of code P1289 refer to chart P1150 - P1401 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1285 - P1289, ( P1286 P1287 P1288 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1285 > Page 588 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1290 - P1294, ( P1291 P1292 P1293 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1290 - P1294: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1290 refer to chart P1150 - P1401 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1290 - P1294, ( P1291 P1292 P1293 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 592 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1295 - P1299, ( P1296 P1297 P1298 1295 1296 1297 1298 1299 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1295 - P1299: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1299 refer to chart P1150 - P1401 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1295 - P1299, ( P1296 P1297 P1298 1295 1296 1297 1298 1299 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 596 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1305 - P1309, ( P1306 P1307 P1308 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1305 - P1309: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1309 refer to chart P1150 - P1401 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1305 - P1309, ( P1306 P1307 P1308 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 601 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1380 - P1384, ( P1381 P1382 P1383 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1380 P1380 - P1384: Testing and Inspection P1380 For diagnosis of code P1380 refer to chart P1150 - P1401 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1380 - P1384, ( P1381 P1382 P1383 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1380 > Page 606 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1380 - P1384, ( P1381 P1382 P1383 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1380 > Page 607 P1380 - P1384: Testing and Inspection P1381 For diagnosis of code P1381 refer to chart P1150 - P1401 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1380 - P1384, ( P1381 P1382 P1383 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1380 > Page 608 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1380 - P1384, ( P1381 P1382 P1383 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1380 > Page 609 P1380 - P1384: Testing and Inspection P1383 For diagnosis of code P1383 refer to chart P1150 - P1401 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1380 - P1384, ( P1381 P1382 P1383 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1380 > Page 610 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1400 - P1404, ( P1401 P1402 P1403 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1400 P1400 - P1404: Testing and Inspection P1400 For diagnosis of code P1400 refer to chart P1150 - P1401 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1400 - P1404, ( P1401 P1402 P1403 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1400 > Page 616 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1400 - P1404, ( P1401 P1402 P1403 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1400 > Page 617 P1400 - P1404: Testing and Inspection P1401 For diagnosis of code P1401 refer to chart P1150 - P1401 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1400 - P1404, ( P1401 P1402 P1403 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1400 > Page 618 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409, ( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405 P1405 - P1409: Testing and Inspection P1405 For diagnosis of code P1405 refer to chart P1405 - P1517 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409, ( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405 > Page 623 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409, ( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405 > Page 624 P1405 - P1409: Testing and Inspection P1406 For diagnosis of code P1406 refer to chart P1405 - P1517 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409, ( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405 > Page 625 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409, ( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405 > Page 626 P1405 - P1409: Testing and Inspection P1408 For diagnosis of code P1408 refer to chart P1405 - P1517 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409, ( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405 > Page 627 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409, ( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405 > Page 628 P1405 - P1409: Testing and Inspection P1409 For diagnosis of code P1409 refer to chart P1405 - P1517 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409, ( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405 > Page 629 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1410 - P1414, ( P1411 P1412 P1413 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1413 P1410 - P1414: Testing and Inspection P1413 For diagnosis of code P1413 refer to chart P1405 - P1517 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1410 - P1414, ( P1411 P1412 P1413 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1413 > Page 634 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1410 - P1414, ( P1411 P1412 P1413 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1413 > Page 635 P1410 - P1414: Testing and Inspection P1414 For diagnosis of code P1414 refer to chart P1405 - P1517 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1410 - P1414, ( P1411 P1412 P1413 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1413 > Page 636 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1430 - P1434, ( P1431 P1432 P1433 1430 1431 1432 1433 1434 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1430 - P1434: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1432 refer to chart P1405 - P1517 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1430 - P1434, ( P1431 P1432 P1433 1430 1431 1432 1433 1434 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 640 For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1440 - P1444, ( P1441 P1442 P1443 1440 1441 1442 1443 1444 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1440 - P1444: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1443 refer to chart DTC Index P0442 - P1443 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Evaporative Emissions diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1450 - P1454, ( P1451 P1452 P1453 1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1450 P1450 - P1454: Testing and Inspection P1450 For diagnosis of code P1450 refer to the system experiencing the problem. Computers and Control Systems P1405 - P1517 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1450 - P1454, ( P1451 P1452 P1453 1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1450 > Page 648 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Evaporative Emissions System DTC Index P1450 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Evaporative Emissions diagnostic information, See: Powertrain Management/Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1450 - P1454, ( P1451 P1452 P1453 1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1450 > Page 649 P1450 - P1454: Testing and Inspection P1451 For diagnosis of code P1451 refer to chart P1405 - P1517 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1450 - P1454, ( P1451 P1452 P1453 1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1450 > Page 650 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464, ( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 P1460 - P1464: Testing and Inspection P1460 For diagnosis of code P1460 refer to chart P1405 - P1517 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464, ( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 655 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464, ( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 656 P1460 - P1464: Testing and Inspection P1461 For diagnosis of code P1461 refer to chart P1405 - P1517 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464, ( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 657 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464, ( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 658 P1460 - P1464: Testing and Inspection P1462 For diagnosis of code P1462 refer to chart P1405 - P1517 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464, ( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 659 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464, ( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 660 P1460 - P1464: Testing and Inspection P1463 For diagnosis of code P1463 refer to chart P1405 - P1517 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464, ( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 661 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464, ( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 662 P1460 - P1464: Testing and Inspection P1464 For diagnosis of P1464 refer to the system experiencing the problem. Computers and Control Systems P1405 - P1517 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464, ( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 663 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Heating and Air Conditioning DTC Index P1460 - P1479 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Heating and Air Conditioning diagnostic information, See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1465 - P1469, ( P1466 P1467 P1468 1465 1466 1467 1468 1469 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1465 - P1469: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1469 refer to chart P1405 - P1517 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1465 - P1469, ( P1466 P1467 P1468 1465 1466 1467 1468 1469 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 667 For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1470 - P1474, ( P1471 P1472 P1473 1470 1471 1472 1473 1474 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1470 - P1474: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1474 refer to chart P1405 - P1517 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1470 - P1474, ( P1471 P1472 P1473 1470 1471 1472 1473 1474 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 671 For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1475 - P1479, ( P1476 P1477 P1478 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1477 P1475 - P1479: Testing and Inspection P1477 For diagnosis of code P1477 refer to chart P1405 - P1517 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1475 - P1479, ( P1476 P1477 P1478 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1477 > Page 676 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1475 - P1479, ( P1476 P1477 P1478 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1477 > Page 677 P1475 - P1479: Testing and Inspection P1479 For diagnosis of code P1479 refer to chart P1405 - P1517 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1475 - P1479, ( P1476 P1477 P1478 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1477 > Page 678 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete Engine Control diagnostic information , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1500 - P1504, ( P1501 P1502 P1503 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1500 P1500 - P1504: Testing and Inspection P1500 For diagnosis of code P1500 refer to chart P1405 - P1517 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1500 - P1504, ( P1501 P1502 P1503 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1500 > Page 684 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1500 - P1504, ( P1501 P1502 P1503 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1500 > Page 685 P1500 - P1504: Testing and Inspection P1501 For diagnosis of code P1501 refer to chart P1405 - P1517 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1500 - P1504, ( P1501 P1502 P1503 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1500 > Page 686 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1500 - P1504, ( P1501 P1502 P1503 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1500 > Page 687 P1500 - P1504: Testing and Inspection P1502 For diagnosis of code P1502 refer to chart P1405 - P1517 NOTE 12: Vehicle Speed information is provided by the Antilock Brake System (ABS). Perform complete diagnosis, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1500 - P1504, ( P1501 P1502 P1503 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1500 > Page 688 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1500 - P1504, ( P1501 P1502 P1503 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1500 > Page 689 P1500 - P1504: Testing and Inspection P1504 For diagnosis of code P1504 refer to chart P1405 - P1517 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1500 - P1504, ( P1501 P1502 P1503 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1500 > Page 690 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1505 - P1509, ( P1506 P1507 P1508 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1506 P1505 - P1509: Testing and Inspection P1506 For diagnosis of code P1506 refer to chart P1405 - P1517 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1505 - P1509, ( P1506 P1507 P1508 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1506 > Page 695 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1505 - P1509, ( P1506 P1507 P1508 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1506 > Page 696 P1505 - P1509: Testing and Inspection P1507 For diagnosis of code P1507 refer to chart P1405 - P1517 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1505 - P1509, ( P1506 P1507 P1508 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1506 > Page 697 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519, ( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516 P1515 - P1519: Testing and Inspection P1516 For diagnosis of code P1516 refer to chart P1405 - P1517 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519, ( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516 > Page 702 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519, ( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516 > Page 703 P1515 - P1519: Testing and Inspection P1517 For diagnosis of code P1517 refer to chart P1405 - P1517 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519, ( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516 > Page 704 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519, ( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516 > Page 705 P1515 - P1519: Testing and Inspection P1518 For diagnosis of code P1518 refer to chart P1518 - P1781 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519, ( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516 > Page 706 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519, ( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516 > Page 707 P1515 - P1519: Testing and Inspection P1519 For diagnosis of code P1519 refer to chart P1518 - P1781 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519, ( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516 > Page 708 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1520 - P1524, ( P1521 P1522 P1523 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1520 - P1524: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1520 refer to chart P1518 - P1781 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1520 - P1524, ( P1521 P1522 P1523 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 712 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1545 - P1549, ( P1546 P1547 P1548 1545 1546 1547 1548 1549 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1545 - P1549: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1549 refer to chart P1518 - P1781 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1545 - P1549, ( P1546 P1547 P1548 1545 1546 1547 1548 1549 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 716 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1550 - P1554, ( P1551 P1552 P1553 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1550 - P1554: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1550 refer to chart P1518 - P1781 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1550 - P1554, ( P1551 P1552 P1553 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 720 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1570 - P1574, ( P1571 P1572 P1573 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1570 - P1574: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1572 refer to chart P1518 - P1781 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1570 - P1574, ( P1571 P1572 P1573 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 724 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1605 - P1609, ( P1606 P1607 P1608 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1605 - P1609: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1605 refer to chart P1518 - P1781 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1605 - P1609, ( P1606 P1607 P1608 1605 1606 1607 1608 1609 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 729 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1630 - P1634, ( P1631 P1632 P1633 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1630 - P1634: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1633 refer to chart P1518 - P1781 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1630 - P1634, ( P1631 P1632 P1633 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 733 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1635 - P1639, ( P1636 P1637 P1638 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1635 P1635 - P1639: Testing and Inspection P1635 For diagnosis of code P1635 refer to chart P1518 - P1781 NOTE 11: The vehicle ID block (VID) needs to be reprogrammed. Refer to Flash VID Block procedure, See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1635 - P1639, ( P1636 P1637 P1638 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1635 > Page 738 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1635 - P1639, ( P1636 P1637 P1638 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1635 > Page 739 P1635 - P1639: Testing and Inspection P1636 For diagnosis of code P1636 refer to chart P1518 - P1781 NOTE 18: DTC P1636 indicates the PCM has lost communication with the Inductive Signature Chip. Replace PCM. If replacement is necessary refer to Flash Electically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM), See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1635 - P1639, ( P1636 P1637 P1638 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1635 > Page 740 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1635 - P1639, ( P1636 P1637 P1638 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1635 > Page 741 P1635 - P1639: Testing and Inspection P1639 For diagnosis of code P1639 refer to chart P1518 - P1781 NOTE 11: The vehicle ID block (VID) needs to be reprogrammed. Refer to Flash VID Block procedure, See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1635 - P1639, ( P1636 P1637 P1638 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1635 > Page 742 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1640 - P1644, ( P1641 P1642 P1643 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1640 - P1644: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1641 refer to chart P1518 - P1781 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1640 - P1644, ( P1641 P1642 P1643 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 746 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1650 - P1654, ( P1651 P1652 P1653 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1650 P1650 - P1654: Testing and Inspection P1650 For diagnosis of code P1650 refer to chart P1518 - P1781 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1650 - P1654, ( P1651 P1652 P1653 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1650 > Page 751 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1650 - P1654, ( P1651 P1652 P1653 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1650 > Page 752 P1650 - P1654: Testing and Inspection P1651 For diagnosis of code P1651 refer to chart P1518 - P1781 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1650 - P1654, ( P1651 P1652 P1653 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1650 > Page 753 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1700 - P1704, ( P1701 P1702 P1703 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1702 P1700 - P1704: Testing and Inspection P1702 For diagnosis of code P1702 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1700 - P1704, ( P1701 P1702 P1703 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1702 > Page 759 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1700 - P1704, ( P1701 P1702 P1703 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1702 > Page 760 P1700 - P1704: Testing and Inspection P1703 For diagnosis of code P1703 refer to charts P1518 - P1781 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1700 - P1704, ( P1701 P1702 P1703 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1702 > Page 761 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1705 - P1709, ( P1706 P1707 P1708 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1705 P1705 - P1709: Testing and Inspection P1705 Manual Transmission For diagnosis of code P1705 refer to chart P1518 - P1781 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1705 - P1709, ( P1706 P1707 P1708 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1705 > Page 766 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Automatic Transmission For diagnosis of code P1705 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1705 - P1709, ( P1706 P1707 P1708 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1705 > Page 767 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1705 - P1709, ( P1706 P1707 P1708 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1705 > Page 768 P1705 - P1709: Testing and Inspection P1709 For diagnosis of code P1709 refer to chart P1518 - P1781 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1705 - P1709, ( P1706 P1707 P1708 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1705 > Page 769 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714, ( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1711 P1710 - P1714: Testing and Inspection P1711 For diagnosis of code P1711 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714, ( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1711 > Page 774 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714, ( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1711 > Page 775 P1710 - P1714: Testing and Inspection P1713 For diagnosis of code P1713 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714, ( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1711 > Page 776 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714, ( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1711 > Page 777 P1710 - P1714: Testing and Inspection P1714 For diagnosis of code P1714 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714, ( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1711 > Page 778 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1715 - P1719, ( P1716 P1717 P1718 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1715 P1715 - P1719: Testing and Inspection P1715 For diagnosis of code P1715 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1715 - P1719, ( P1716 P1717 P1718 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1715 > Page 783 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1715 - P1719, ( P1716 P1717 P1718 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1715 > Page 784 P1715 - P1719: Testing and Inspection P1718 For diagnosis of code P1718 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1715 - P1719, ( P1716 P1717 P1718 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1715 > Page 785 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1725 - P1729, ( P1726 P1727 P1728 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1725 - P1729: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1729 refer to chart P1518 - P1781 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1725 - P1729, ( P1726 P1727 P1728 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 789 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1740 - P1744, ( P1741 P1742 P1743 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1742 P1740 - P1744: Testing and Inspection P1742 For diagnosis of code P1742 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1740 - P1744, ( P1741 P1742 P1743 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1742 > Page 794 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1740 - P1744, ( P1741 P1742 P1743 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1742 > Page 795 P1740 - P1744: Testing and Inspection P1744 For diagnosis of code P1744 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1740 - P1744, ( P1741 P1742 P1743 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1742 > Page 796 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1745 - P1749, ( P1746 P1747 P1748 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1746 P1745 - P1749: Testing and Inspection P1746 For diagnosis of code P1746 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1745 - P1749, ( P1746 P1747 P1748 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1746 > Page 801 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1745 - P1749, ( P1746 P1747 P1748 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1746 > Page 802 P1745 - P1749: Testing and Inspection P1747 For diagnosis of code P1747 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1745 - P1749, ( P1746 P1747 P1748 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1746 > Page 803 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1750 - P1754, ( P1751 P1752 P1753 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1750 - P1754: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1751 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1750 - P1754, ( P1751 P1752 P1753 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 807 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1755 - P1759, ( P1756 P1757 P1758 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1755 - P1759: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1756 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1755 - P1759, ( P1756 P1757 P1758 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 811 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1760 - P1764, ( P1761 P1762 P1763 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1760 - P1764: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1760 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1760 - P1764, ( P1761 P1762 P1763 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 815 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784, ( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780 P1780 - P1784: Testing and Inspection P1780 For diagnosis of code P1780 refer to chart P1518 - P1781 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784, ( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780 > Page 820 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784, ( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780 > Page 821 P1780 - P1784: Testing and Inspection P1781 For diagnosis of code P1781 refer to chart P1518 - P1781 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784, ( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780 > Page 822 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784, ( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780 > Page 823 P1780 - P1784: Testing and Inspection P1783 For diagnosis of code P1783 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784, ( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780 > Page 824 - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1785 - P1789, ( P1786 P1787 P1788 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1788 P1785 - P1789: Testing and Inspection P1788 For diagnosis of code P1788 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1785 - P1789, ( P1786 P1787 P1788 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1788 > Page 829 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1785 - P1789, ( P1786 P1787 P1788 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1788 > Page 830 P1785 - P1789: Testing and Inspection P1789 For diagnosis of code P1789 refer to chart If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1785 - P1789, ( P1786 P1787 P1788 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1788 > Page 831 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1900-P19ZZ > P1900 - P1904, ( P1901 P1902 P1903 1900 1901 1902 1903 1904 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis P1900 - P1904: Testing and Inspection For diagnosis of code P1900 refer to charts P1783 - P1900 If there is no link in the chart then: - This code is not a valid code for this vehicle - Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code - Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1900-P19ZZ > P1900 - P1904, ( P1901 P1902 P1903 1900 1901 1902 1903 1904 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 836 For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations Accessory Delay Relay: Locations Diagram 700-01-00-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 843 Diagram 700-01-00-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Relay Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Relay > Page 846 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay > Page 849 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay > Page 850 Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection Micro ISO Relay Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay > Page 851 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Application and ID Alarm Module: Application and ID For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules (General Module). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 855 Alarm Module: Testing and Inspection Testing and Inspection For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 861 Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Connector Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Find and Use These Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams ^ System Diagrams ^ Grounds Diagrams Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 864 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow. Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the diagram. Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be found. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 865 Fuse And Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. Fuse Circuits Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery. Ground Distribution Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text "partial". Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 866 Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of (1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces). The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number. Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the way out by a spring. Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control. A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the way in. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. circuit Numbering Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification Circuit Numbering: Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting electrical circuits. Function: The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter "S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit. System-Connection (including branch): Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate wires in one connection with the same function. Wire Identification (wire colors): The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 867 Wire Identification Example Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know the following information about the wire: Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit System: AC = Headlamp leveling Connection: 3 = Switch connection A = Branch Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe). Circuit Identification Charts Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 868 Circuit Identification Chart System Codes Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 869 Sample Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 870 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 871 Sample Diagram Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 872 Circuit Identification Chart SYSTEM CODES CHART Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 873 SAMPLE DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 874 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 875 Sample Diagram Electrical Symbols ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 876 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 877 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 878 Types of Diagrams Shown Types of Diagrams Shown Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them. Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations. Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system information suitable for diagnostic operations. Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a relationship to them, are also included. All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding of the system component interactions. Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type. Wire Color Code Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 879 Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 880 Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Diagnostic Aids These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 881 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 882 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 883 Diagram 419-10-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Description and Operation > System Description Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Description and Operation System Description The multifunction module consists of the Generic Electronic Module (GEM). The GEM controls the following features: ^ interval rear window wiper ^ battery saver ^ illuminated entry ^ headlamp control ^ interior lamp control ^ power door locks ^ Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ^ accessory delay ^ perimeter anti-theft system ^ door ajar output control Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Description and Operation > System Description > Page 886 Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Description and Operation Principles of Operation (How Does It Work?) The Generic Electronic Module (GEM) constantly monitors its subsystems for concerns. If a concern is found in one of the subsystems, the GEM will record the concern in the form of a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). The ignition switch position is very important to the GEM function. Erratic or unexpected GEM function can often be traced to problems with these GEM inputs. The GEM controls a variety of systems: ^ interval rear window wiper ^ battery saver ^ illuminated entry ^ headlamp control ^ interior lamp control ^ power door locks ^ Remote Key Less Entry (RKE) ^ accessory delay ^ perimeter anti-theft system ^ door ajar output control Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview 1. Verify the customer concern by operating the system in question. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical and electrical damage. VISUAL INSPECTION CHART Electrical ^ Fuse ^ Wiring harness ^ Connector(s) ^ Circuitry ^ Generic Electronic Module (GEM) 3. If the concern remains after the inspection, connect the diagnostic tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC) located beneath the instrument panel and select the vehicle to be tested from the diagnostic tool menu. If the diagnostic tool does not communicate with the vehicle: ^ check that the program card is correctly installed. ^ check the connections to the vehicle. ^ check the ignition switch position. 4. If the diagnostic tool still does not communicate with the vehicle, refer to the diagnostic tool manual. 5. Carry out the DATA LINK DIAGNOSTICS test. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Module Communication Network/Testing and Inspection/Module Communications Network/Pinpoint Tests/Pinpoint Test PC (Precheck) If the diagnostic tool responds with: ^ CKT914, CKT915 or CKT70 = ALL ECUS NO RESP/NOT EQUIP, refer to Module Communications Network (Information Bus). ^ NO RESP/NOT EQUIP for generic electronic module (GEM), go to Pinpoint Test A. ^ SYSTEM PASSED, retrieve and record the continuous Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs), erase the continuous DTCs and carry out self-test diagnostics for the GEM. 6. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to the GEM Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index to continue diagnostics. See: Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures 7. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, refer to the appropriate Vehicle System to continue diagnostics. Additional Testing For additional information on warning chime concerns, refer to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators. For additional information on courtesy lamps/illuminated entry and battery saver concerns, refer to Lighting and Horns. For additional information on Rear interval timer concerns, refer to Wiper and Washer Systems. For additional information on keyless entry concerns, refer to Keyless Entry. For additional information on Power Door Lock concerns, refer to Power Locks. For additional information on anti-theft concerns, refer to Antitheft and Alarm Systems. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 889 Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures DTC Index B1217 - B1325 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 890 DTC Index B1327 - C1962 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 891 Symptom Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 892 Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Pinpoint Tests A1 - A2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 893 A2 - A4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 894 A4 - A5 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 895 Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. NOTE: Prior to removal of the GEM, it is necessary to upload module configuration information to a diagnostic tool. This information needs to be downloaded into the new module once installed. 2. Remove the floor console. Refer to Console. 3. Disconnect the GEM electrical connectors. 4. Remove the GEM 1 Pull back the insulation and remove the nuts. 2 Remove the GEM. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Configure the GEM. Refer to Module Communications Network (Information Bus). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 896 Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Application and ID Keyless Entry Module: Application and ID For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules (General Module). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 900 Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection Testing and Inspection For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Application and ID Keyless Entry Module: Application and ID For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules (General Module). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 905 Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection Testing and Inspection For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Control Module > Component Information > Application and ID Power Door Lock Control Module: Application and ID For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules (General Module). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Control Module > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 909 Power Door Lock Control Module: Testing and Inspection Testing and Inspection For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 913 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair Technical Service Bulletin # 07S51S2 Date: 091009 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 923 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes. OASIS was activated April 10, 2007. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes. Available through the website. Owner names and addresses were made available April 30, 2007. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 924 NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles have been directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. OWNER REFUNDS ^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan, which is posted with this bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC). The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or, at their option, directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251 Dearborn, MI 48121-6251. ^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund claims that include other non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be accepted for reimbursement. ^ This safety recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair. Claiming a refund will not close the recall on the vehicle. ^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.) - Program Code: 07S51 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN - Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs. RENTAL VEHICLES If an ABS module needs to be ordered, Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except for fuel and insurance which will be at the owner's expense. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for rental dollar amounts. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall claim form. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Handling Allowance: An allowance of $1.00 per repair is being provided to cover the costs of locally obtained materials and XG-12 Electrical Grease. To claim the allowance, enter $1.00 as "HANDLG" in the "MISC EXPENSE" area of the claim form. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 925 ^ Refund or related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires approval from Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires approval from Special Service Support Center. ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 926 Parts will not be direct shipped for this program Order your parts requirements through normal order processing channels. The DOR/COR number for this safety recall is 50376. Questions regarding parts should be directed to the Special Support Center or E-mailed. DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to DOES II. PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN Affected ABS Modules (Part number YL8Z-2C065-AA and YL8Z-2B373-BA) and the removed ABS connector are subject to random selection for return to the Ford Warranty Parts Analysis Center (WPAC). Refer to your daily PEARS (Parts Entry and Return System) register for part disposition and return instructions. Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures". EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW This program includes making sure the wiring harness connector is properly sealed against moisture/contamination, and inspecting the ABS module for evidence of corrosion resulting from an inadequately sealed connector. During the inspection, we expect that most of the affected vehicles will not have any evidence of corrosion in the ABS module. However, the ABS wiring harness connector still needs to be inspected for missing or improperly seated seals and/or incorrect connector number. If the ABS module is corroded, the ABS module and connector must be replaced. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 927 A flow chart has been developed to help direct you to the proper repair. See Figure 1. Inspect Connector Seals INSPECTION 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. NOTE: When disconnecting the ABS module connector, be sure the blue connector lock stays engaged with the harness connector and does not remain in the module. Remove it from the module if necessary and make sure the white 0-ring seal is properly installed. Disconnect the ABS module 25-pin connector by sliding the lock mechanism out (towards the passenger side of the vehicle) and pulling the connector off the module. 3. Disconnect the speed sensor harness, then remove the 2 harness retainers from the studs and position the harness above the air cleaner assembly to provide access for inspection. 4. Inspect the top of the ABS module connector cover for 2 yellow "X" marks. ^ If 2 yellow "X" marks are present, perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply Electrical Grease. ^ If no yellow "X" marks are present, proceed to Step 5. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 928 5. Inspect the ABS module connector pins for corrosion. See Figure 2. ^ If corrosion is present, perform Labor Operation E - Install Pigtail, New ABS Module and Apply Electrical Grease. ^ If corrosion is not present, proceed to Step 6. 6. CAUTION: Do not cut any of the harness wires or the wire insulation when cutting off the tie strap. Remove the tie strap from the connector dress cover, then slide the cover off the connector. See Figure 3. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 929 7. Verify the wire seals are present on the 4 heavier gauge wires. See Figure 4. 8. Verify the numbers 054" are stamped on the slide-lock end of the mat cover (wipe the mat cover clean if necessary to view). See Figure 5. NOTE: Mat covers with any other number will be missing plugs in the unused pin locations. 9. Perform Labor Operation C - Install Pigtail and Apply Electrical Grease if: ^ any seals are missing or, ^ if the number on the mat cover is not "054". 10. Perform Labor Operation D - Seat Connector and Apply Electrical Grease if: ^ Any of the 4 wire seals are not fully seated in the connector cavities. ^ Each seal should sit approximately 1-2 mm (1/16 in) below the top of the round cavity. See Figure 4. 11. Perform Labor Operation A - Apply Electrical Grease if: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 930 ^ The module is not corroded. and ^ All seals are present. and ^ All seals are fully seated. and ^ The number on the mat cover is "054". LABOR OPERATION A - APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE 1. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: a) Reinstall the dress cover. b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 6. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 6. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a "hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 2. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 3. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. LABOR OPERATION C - INSTALL PIGTAIL AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 931 USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 7. 1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module connector. See Figure 8. 2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness (all wires) to the same length. See Figure 8. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 932 3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/2 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See Figure 9. CAUTION: The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag. Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing circuits when splicing wires. NOTE: The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation. NOTE: The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 933 4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness. Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903. See Figure 10. 5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice connector. 6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit, shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all wires are insulated. See Figure 11. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 934 7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on the other. See Figure 12. 8. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: a) Reinstall the dress cover. b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 13. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 935 connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 13. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 9. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 10. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. 11. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds). ^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle. ^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special Support Service Center. LABOR OPERATION D - SEAT CONNECTOR SEALS AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE 1. If the seals are not fully seated, reseat any seals not fully seated with a blunt tool. DO NOT use anything sharp such as a screwdriver, awl or punch that could penetrate the seal and allow moisture to enter the terminal. See Figure 14. 2. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: a) Reinstall the dress cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 936 b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 15. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 15. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 3. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 4. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. LABOR OPERATION E - INSTALL PIGTAIL, NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 937 USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 16. PROCEDURE TO REPLACE VEHICLE HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module connector. See Figure 17. 2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness (all wires) to the same length. See Figure 17. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 938 3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See Figure 18. CAUTION: The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag. Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing circuits when splicing wires. NOTE: The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation. NOTE: The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 939 4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness. Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903. See Figure 19. 5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice connector. 6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit, shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all wires are insulated. See Figure 20. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 940 7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on the other. See Figure 21. 8. Install a new ABS module. Perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply Electrical Grease. 9. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. 10. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds). ^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle. ^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special Support Service Center. LABOR OPERATION F - INSTALL NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE NOTE: Module configuration or reprogramming is not required when installing a new ABS module. 1. Disconnect the 2-wire electrical connector at the ABS module. 2. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 3. Remove the screws and the ABS module. 4. Position the new module and install the screws. Tighten the screws no more than 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 5. Lower the hoist. 6. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 941 ^ Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 22. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 22. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 7. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 8. Reconnect the 2-wire connector to the ABS module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 942 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 943 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 944 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 945 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 946 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 947 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > NHTSA07V156000 > Mar > 07 > Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect Electronic Brake Control Module: Recalls Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2001-2004 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V156000 MFR'S REPORT DATE: March 30, 2007 COMPONENT: Service Brakes, Hydraulic: Antilock: Control Unit/Module POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 446460 SUMMARY: On certain sport utility vehicles equipped with Antilock Brakes (ABS), the ABS module connector may have missing or dislodged wire seals. This condition could allow contamination to enter the module connector, creating a potential for an electrical short. CONSEQUENCE: An electrical short might cause an ABS malfunction that would illuminate the ABS warning light, and in some cases, the module may overheat resulting in burning odor, smoke, and/or fire. This condition could occur either when the vehicle ignition switch is in the off position or while the vehicle is being operated. Remedy: Dealers will inspect the wire harness connector to the ABS module for missing or dislodged wire seals, and repair or replace the harness connector as appropriate. The dealer will also inspect the connector on the ABS module and replace it if it is found to be corroded or damaged. The recall began on April 23, 2007. Owners may contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673. NOTES: Ford recall No. 07S51. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair Technical Service Bulletin # 07S51S2 Date: 091009 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 957 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes. OASIS was activated April 10, 2007. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes. Available through the website. Owner names and addresses were made available April 30, 2007. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 958 NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles have been directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. OWNER REFUNDS ^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan, which is posted with this bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC). The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or, at their option, directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251 Dearborn, MI 48121-6251. ^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund claims that include other non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be accepted for reimbursement. ^ This safety recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair. Claiming a refund will not close the recall on the vehicle. ^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.) - Program Code: 07S51 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN - Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs. RENTAL VEHICLES If an ABS module needs to be ordered, Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except for fuel and insurance which will be at the owner's expense. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for rental dollar amounts. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall claim form. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Handling Allowance: An allowance of $1.00 per repair is being provided to cover the costs of locally obtained materials and XG-12 Electrical Grease. To claim the allowance, enter $1.00 as "HANDLG" in the "MISC EXPENSE" area of the claim form. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 959 ^ Refund or related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires approval from Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires approval from Special Service Support Center. ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 960 Parts will not be direct shipped for this program Order your parts requirements through normal order processing channels. The DOR/COR number for this safety recall is 50376. Questions regarding parts should be directed to the Special Support Center or E-mailed. DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to DOES II. PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN Affected ABS Modules (Part number YL8Z-2C065-AA and YL8Z-2B373-BA) and the removed ABS connector are subject to random selection for return to the Ford Warranty Parts Analysis Center (WPAC). Refer to your daily PEARS (Parts Entry and Return System) register for part disposition and return instructions. Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures". EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW This program includes making sure the wiring harness connector is properly sealed against moisture/contamination, and inspecting the ABS module for evidence of corrosion resulting from an inadequately sealed connector. During the inspection, we expect that most of the affected vehicles will not have any evidence of corrosion in the ABS module. However, the ABS wiring harness connector still needs to be inspected for missing or improperly seated seals and/or incorrect connector number. If the ABS module is corroded, the ABS module and connector must be replaced. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 961 A flow chart has been developed to help direct you to the proper repair. See Figure 1. Inspect Connector Seals INSPECTION 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. NOTE: When disconnecting the ABS module connector, be sure the blue connector lock stays engaged with the harness connector and does not remain in the module. Remove it from the module if necessary and make sure the white 0-ring seal is properly installed. Disconnect the ABS module 25-pin connector by sliding the lock mechanism out (towards the passenger side of the vehicle) and pulling the connector off the module. 3. Disconnect the speed sensor harness, then remove the 2 harness retainers from the studs and position the harness above the air cleaner assembly to provide access for inspection. 4. Inspect the top of the ABS module connector cover for 2 yellow "X" marks. ^ If 2 yellow "X" marks are present, perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply Electrical Grease. ^ If no yellow "X" marks are present, proceed to Step 5. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 962 5. Inspect the ABS module connector pins for corrosion. See Figure 2. ^ If corrosion is present, perform Labor Operation E - Install Pigtail, New ABS Module and Apply Electrical Grease. ^ If corrosion is not present, proceed to Step 6. 6. CAUTION: Do not cut any of the harness wires or the wire insulation when cutting off the tie strap. Remove the tie strap from the connector dress cover, then slide the cover off the connector. See Figure 3. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 963 7. Verify the wire seals are present on the 4 heavier gauge wires. See Figure 4. 8. Verify the numbers 054" are stamped on the slide-lock end of the mat cover (wipe the mat cover clean if necessary to view). See Figure 5. NOTE: Mat covers with any other number will be missing plugs in the unused pin locations. 9. Perform Labor Operation C - Install Pigtail and Apply Electrical Grease if: ^ any seals are missing or, ^ if the number on the mat cover is not "054". 10. Perform Labor Operation D - Seat Connector and Apply Electrical Grease if: ^ Any of the 4 wire seals are not fully seated in the connector cavities. ^ Each seal should sit approximately 1-2 mm (1/16 in) below the top of the round cavity. See Figure 4. 11. Perform Labor Operation A - Apply Electrical Grease if: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 964 ^ The module is not corroded. and ^ All seals are present. and ^ All seals are fully seated. and ^ The number on the mat cover is "054". LABOR OPERATION A - APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE 1. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: a) Reinstall the dress cover. b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 6. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 6. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a "hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 2. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 3. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. LABOR OPERATION C - INSTALL PIGTAIL AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 965 USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 7. 1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module connector. See Figure 8. 2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness (all wires) to the same length. See Figure 8. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 966 3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/2 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See Figure 9. CAUTION: The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag. Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing circuits when splicing wires. NOTE: The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation. NOTE: The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 967 4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness. Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903. See Figure 10. 5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice connector. 6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit, shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all wires are insulated. See Figure 11. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 968 7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on the other. See Figure 12. 8. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: a) Reinstall the dress cover. b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 13. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 969 connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 13. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 9. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 10. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. 11. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds). ^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle. ^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special Support Service Center. LABOR OPERATION D - SEAT CONNECTOR SEALS AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE 1. If the seals are not fully seated, reseat any seals not fully seated with a blunt tool. DO NOT use anything sharp such as a screwdriver, awl or punch that could penetrate the seal and allow moisture to enter the terminal. See Figure 14. 2. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: a) Reinstall the dress cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 970 b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 15. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 15. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 3. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 4. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. LABOR OPERATION E - INSTALL PIGTAIL, NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 971 USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 16. PROCEDURE TO REPLACE VEHICLE HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module connector. See Figure 17. 2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness (all wires) to the same length. See Figure 17. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 972 3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See Figure 18. CAUTION: The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag. Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing circuits when splicing wires. NOTE: The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation. NOTE: The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 973 4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness. Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903. See Figure 19. 5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice connector. 6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit, shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all wires are insulated. See Figure 20. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 974 7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on the other. See Figure 21. 8. Install a new ABS module. Perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply Electrical Grease. 9. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. 10. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds). ^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle. ^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special Support Service Center. LABOR OPERATION F - INSTALL NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE NOTE: Module configuration or reprogramming is not required when installing a new ABS module. 1. Disconnect the 2-wire electrical connector at the ABS module. 2. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 3. Remove the screws and the ABS module. 4. Position the new module and install the screws. Tighten the screws no more than 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 5. Lower the hoist. 6. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 975 ^ Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 22. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 22. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 7. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 8. Reconnect the 2-wire connector to the ABS module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 976 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 977 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 978 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 979 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 980 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 981 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > NHTSA07V156000 > Mar > 07 > Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2001-2004 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V156000 MFR'S REPORT DATE: March 30, 2007 COMPONENT: Service Brakes, Hydraulic: Antilock: Control Unit/Module POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 446460 SUMMARY: On certain sport utility vehicles equipped with Antilock Brakes (ABS), the ABS module connector may have missing or dislodged wire seals. This condition could allow contamination to enter the module connector, creating a potential for an electrical short. CONSEQUENCE: An electrical short might cause an ABS malfunction that would illuminate the ABS warning light, and in some cases, the module may overheat resulting in burning odor, smoke, and/or fire. This condition could occur either when the vehicle ignition switch is in the off position or while the vehicle is being operated. Remedy: Dealers will inspect the wire harness connector to the ABS module for missing or dislodged wire seals, and repair or replace the harness connector as appropriate. The dealer will also inspect the connector on the ABS module and replace it if it is found to be corroded or damaged. The recall began on April 23, 2007. Owners may contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673. NOTES: Ford recall No. 07S51. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 986 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 987 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 988 Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation Anti-Lock Brake Control Module NOTE: The 4x2 service replacement module cannot be interchanged with the 4x4 module. The service replacement 4x4 module is interchangeable with the 4x2 module. The anti-lock brake control module is mounted to the HCU. It is an on-board diagnostic, non-repairable unit consisting of two microprocessors and the necessary circuitry for their operation. The anti-lock brake control module monitors system operation during normal driving as well as during anti-lock braking. Anti-lock brake module operation is as follows: ^ Under normal driving conditions, the microprocessor produces short test pulses to the solenoid valves that check the electrical system without any mechanical reaction. ^ Impending wheel lock conditions trigger signals from the anti-lock brake control module that open and close the appropriate solenoid valves. This results in moderate pulsations in the brake pedal. ^ The anti-lock brake module used in 4x4 application includes a G-sensor. It detects vehicle movement during a brake lockup event that is transferred to other wheels through the powertrain. During normal braking, the brake pedal feel is identical to a standard brake system. Most faults that occur in the anti-lock brake system will be stored as a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) in the keep-alive memory of the anti-lock brake control module. The DTCs can be retrieved by following the or-board diagnostic procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 989 Electronic Brake Control Module: Testing and Inspection For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is part of, please refer to Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems; Testing and Inspection. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 990 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Module-Anti-Lock Brake Control Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the air cleaner and the air cleaner outlet pipe. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 4. Remove the bolts. 5. Remove the bolt. 6. Raise and support the vehicle. 7. Remove the screws and the control module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 991 8. NOTE: The 4x2 module cannot be interchanged with the 4x4 module. The 4x4 module is interchangeable with the 4x2 module. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan Low Relay Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan Low Relay > Page 997 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan Low Relay > Page 998 Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan Low Relay > Page 999 Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 1002 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 1003 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 1004 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Diagrams Medium Speed Fan Control Relay Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1005 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1006 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Blower Motor Relay: Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1011 Electrical Components Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1012 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1013 Blower Motor Relay: Description and Operation The blower motor relay supplies voltage to the blower motor and is activated when the key is ON and the function selector switch is in any position besides OFF. The blower motor relay is located under the instrument panel next to the steering column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1014 Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1015 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1019 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Compressor Clutch Relay Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation Compressor Clutch Relay The A/C compressor clutch relay supplies voltage to the A/C compressor clutch and is located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB). The Power Control Module (PCM) can interrupt the A/C compressor operation through the A/C compressor clutch relay under the following conditions: ^ during engine start-up ^ Wide Open Throttle (WOT) ^ low engine idle conditions ^ excessively high engine temperatures Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Compressor Clutch Relay > Page 1022 Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation Compressor Cut-Off Relay WIDE OPEN THROTTLE A/C CUT-OFF The Wide Open Throttle A/C Cut-Off Relay (may be referred to as the A/C clutch relay) is normally open. There is no direct electrical connection between the A/C switch or EATC Module and the A/C clutch. The PCM will receive a signal indicating that A/C is requested (for some applications, this message is sent through the BUS + and BUS - circuits). When A/C is requested, the PCM will check other A/C related inputs that are available (such as ACP (SW), A/C Cycling Switch (ACCS)). If these inputs indicate A/C operation is OK, and the engine conditions are OK (such as coolant temperature, engine rpm, throttle position), the PCM will ground the Wide Open Throttle A/C (WAC) output, closing the relay contacts and sending voltage to the A/C clutch. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1023 Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1024 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Battery Discharge Protection Relay, Lighting > Component Information > Application and ID Battery Discharge Protection Relay: Application and ID For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules (General Module). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 1032 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 1033 Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the nut and the DRL module. ^ Disconnect the electrical connectors. ^ Transfer parts as necessary. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1037 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1038 Daytime Running Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1039 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Exterior Lighting Module > Component Information > Application and ID Exterior Lighting Module: Application and ID For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules (General Module). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Exterior Lighting Module > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 1043 Exterior Lighting Module: Testing and Inspection Testing and Inspection For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1047 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1048 Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1049 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1053 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1054 Headlamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1055 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations Diagram 700-01-00-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1059 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1060 Horn Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1061 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Application and ID Interior Lighting Module: Application and ID For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules (General Module). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 1065 Interior Lighting Module: Testing and Inspection Testing and Inspection For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Lamp Control Module > Component Information > Application and ID Lamp Control Module: Application and ID For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules (General Module). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Diagram 700-01-00-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1072 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1073 Parking Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1074 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1079 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1083 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 1088 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 1089 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 1090 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 1091 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 1092 Relay Box: Locations Central Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 1093 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 1094 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 1095 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 1096 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box Relay Box: Diagrams Central Junction Box Diagram 700-01-00-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 1099 Diagram 700-01-00-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 1100 Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 1103 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 1104 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 1105 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 1106 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 1107 Relay Box: Application and ID Central Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 1108 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 1109 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 1110 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 1111 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-5-5 > Mar > 01 > PCM - Charge Lamp ON in Cold Temperatures Powertrain Control Module: Customer Interest PCM - Charge Lamp ON in Cold Temperatures Article No. 01-5-5 March 19, 2001 ELECTRICAL - CHARGING SYSTEM WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED - DURING COLD AMBIENT TEMPERATURES BELOW - 6 DEGREES CELSIUS (20 DEGREES F.) VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH 2.0L ZETEC ENGINE BUILT 7/8/2000 THROUGH 2/12/2001 ONLY FORD: 2001 ESCAPE ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a red charge lamp illumination in cold ambient temperatures below-6°C (20°F). This may be caused by the calibration of the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). ACTION Verify red charge lamp illumination. If normal diagnostics cannot resolve condition, reprogram the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with latest calibration. Refer to the PCM Calibration Information Chart shown for details. Obtain an Authorized Modifications Decal (FPS 8262 - obtainable through DOES II, 25/pkg) and list the date, dealer number, and summary of modifications performed. Select a prominent place adjacent to the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal suitable for installing the Authorized Modifications Decal. Clean the area, install the decal, and cover it with a clear plastic decal shield. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 203000, 203100, 204000, 204200, 206000, 290000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures Powertrain Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures TSB 04-24-14 12/13/04 FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS 1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis, Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement. ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed. ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs. Verify repair after reprogramming. SERVICE PROCEDURE PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement 1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle. 2. Use WDS if available. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 1127 a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply. b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level. 3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool, such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS. NOTE IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS, GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF. PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD 1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure. 2. Install the new PCM. NOTE IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER. 3. Attempt to start the vehicle. 4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM. 5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639. a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1. b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc. 6. Check for DTC B2900. a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during this procedure. b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7. 7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures. REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement 1. Verify all cables are properly connected. 2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level. 3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level. 4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again. 5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open previous session, and attempt reprogramming again. 6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure. BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure. 1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits. 2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity. NOTE IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 1128 INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC. 3. Connect WDS to vehicle. 4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK. 5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK. 6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK. 7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press TICK. 8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK. 9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK. 10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above". 11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK. 12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed above. Press TICK. 13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens. 14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 01-5-5 > Mar > 01 > PCM Charge Lamp ON in Cold Temperatures Powertrain Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins PCM - Charge Lamp ON in Cold Temperatures Article No. 01-5-5 March 19, 2001 ELECTRICAL - CHARGING SYSTEM WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED - DURING COLD AMBIENT TEMPERATURES BELOW - 6 DEGREES CELSIUS (20 DEGREES F.) VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH 2.0L ZETEC ENGINE BUILT 7/8/2000 THROUGH 2/12/2001 ONLY FORD: 2001 ESCAPE ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a red charge lamp illumination in cold ambient temperatures below-6°C (20°F). This may be caused by the calibration of the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). ACTION Verify red charge lamp illumination. If normal diagnostics cannot resolve condition, reprogram the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with latest calibration. Refer to the PCM Calibration Information Chart shown for details. Obtain an Authorized Modifications Decal (FPS 8262 - obtainable through DOES II, 25/pkg) and list the date, dealer number, and summary of modifications performed. Select a prominent place adjacent to the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal suitable for installing the Authorized Modifications Decal. Clean the area, install the decal, and cover it with a clear plastic decal shield. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 203000, 203100, 204000, 204200, 206000, 290000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures Powertrain Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures TSB 04-24-14 12/13/04 FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS 1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis, Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement. ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed. ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs. Verify repair after reprogramming. SERVICE PROCEDURE PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement 1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle. 2. Use WDS if available. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 1138 a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply. b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level. 3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool, such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS. NOTE IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS, GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF. PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD 1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure. 2. Install the new PCM. NOTE IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER. 3. Attempt to start the vehicle. 4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM. 5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639. a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1. b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc. 6. Check for DTC B2900. a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during this procedure. b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7. 7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures. REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement 1. Verify all cables are properly connected. 2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level. 3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level. 4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again. 5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open previous session, and attempt reprogramming again. 6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure. BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure. 1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits. 2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity. NOTE IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 1139 INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC. 3. Connect WDS to vehicle. 4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK. 5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK. 6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK. 7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press TICK. 8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK. 9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK. 10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above". 11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK. 12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed above. Press TICK. 13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens. 14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1140 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1141 Powertrain Control Module: Diagrams Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1142 Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1143 Part 3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1144 Powertrain Control Module: Description and Operation POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE - VEHICLE SPEED OUTPUT (VSO) The PCM-VSO (Powertrain Control Module - Vehicle Speed Output) speed signal subsystem generates vehicle speed information for distribution to the vehicle's electrical/electronic modules and subsystems that require vehicle speed data. This subsystem senses the transmission output shaft speed with a sensor. The data is processed by the PCM, and distributed as a hard-wired signal or as a multiplexed data message. The key features of the PCM-VSO system are to: ^ Infer vehicle movement from the output shaft sensor signal ^ Convert transmission output shaft rotational information to vehicle speed information ^ Compensate for tire size and axle ratio with a programmed calibration variable ^ Utilize a transfer case sensor for four wheel drive applications ^ Distribute vehicle speed information as a multiplexed message and/or an analog signal The signal from a non-contact shaft sensor (Output Shaft Sensor--OSS or Transfer Case Shaft Sensor--TCSS) mounted on the transmission (automatics, manuals, or 4X4 transfer cases) is sensed directly by the PCM. The PCM converts the OSS or TCSS information to 8000 pulses per mile, based on a tire and axle ratio conversion factor. This conversion factor is programmed into the PCM at the time the vehicle is assembled and can be reprogrammed in the field for servicing changes in the tire size and axle ratio. The PCM transmits the computed vehicle speed and distance traveled information to all the vehicle speed signal users on the vehicle. VSO information can be transmitted by a hard-wired interface between the vehicle speed signal user and the PCM, or by Speed and Odometer SCP multiplexed data messages. The VSO hard-wired signal wave form is a DC square wave with a voltage level of 0 to VBAT. Typical output operating range is 2.22Hz per MPH (1.3808 Hz pr 1 Km/h). Multiplexed data for speed and distance data are transmitted as separate SCP messages over the SCP multiplex link. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory Powertrain Control Module: Service and Repair Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory - Flash EEPROM Description Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) is contained in an Integrated Circuit (IC) internal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle and is capable of being reprogrammed or reflashed repeatedly. As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the Vehicle Identification (VID) block. The VID block must be programmed when replacing the PCM as under Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to perform this procedure may generate fault code: P1639, VID Block not programmed or is corrupt. The VID block in an existing Powertrain Control Module (PCM). can also be tailored to accommodate various hardware changes made to the vehicle since production. Failure to perform this procedure properly may generate fault code: P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of Acceptable Range. This is described under Making Changes to the VID Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The VID block contains many items used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items include the VIN number, octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the presence of speed control and four wheel drive electronic shift on the fly versus manual shift on the fly. Only items applicable to vehicle hardware and supported by the VID block will be displayed on the scan tool. When changing items in the VID block, the strategy will place range limits on certain items such as tire and axle ratio. The VID block is also limited to the number of times to be reconfigured. When this limit is reached, the scan tool will display a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again to reset the VID block. Each of the procedures described below use the Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS). Reprogramming can be performed by a local Ford dealer for any non Ford facility. There are other Enhanced Scan Tools that may have reprogramming capabilities available. Refer to the diagnostic tool manufacturers users manual for details. Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM A new PCM will contain the latest strategy and calibration level for a particular vehicle. However, the VID block will be blank and will need programming. There are two procedures available. The first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM and the second is manual data entry into the new PCM. Automatic data transfer will be performed if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by the use of a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The stored data can now be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been replaced. Manual data entry must be performed if the old module is damaged and is incapable of communicating. Remove and replace the old PCM. You may be instructed to contact the "AS BUILT" data center for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center ONLY if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford L-M technician's, contact your National Hotline for "AS Built" data. Non Ford technicians, use the Fed World website at "fedworld.gov". Select Auto Service Information and search for "Calibrations" or "Vehicle Calibrations" then specify vehicle manufacturer, model name and model year as required. Making Changes to the VID Block A PCM which is programmed may require changes to be made to certain VID information to accommodate vehicle hardware. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the Scan Tool. Making Changes to the PCM Calibration At certain times, the entire EEPROM will need to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to changes made to the strategy or calibration after production or the need to reset the VID block because it has reached its limit. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the Scan Tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory > Page 1147 Powertrain Control Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) cover. 1 Loosen the bolt and disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the nuts and the cover. 3. Remove the PCM. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module Power Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module Power Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 1151 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Emission Control Systems > Air Injection Pump Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation Air Injection Pump Relay: Description and Operation SOLID STATE RELAY Solid State Relay The solid state relay (Figure 124) switches the high current required for operation of the electric AIR pump. Input control to the solid state relay comes from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1160 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1161 Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1162 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Powertrain Control Module Power Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Powertrain Control Module Power Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 1166 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations Diagram 700-01-00-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1171 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1172 Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1173 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications Air Bag Control Module: Specifications Restraint Control Module Bolts 12 Nm Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1178 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1179 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1180 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Air Bag Control Module: Technician Safety Information WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. ^ THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 1183 Air Bag Control Module: Vehicle Damage Warnings CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage can result. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 1184 Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation The Restraints Control Module (RCM) carries out the following functions: ^ signals the inflators to deploy the air bags in the event of a deployable crash ^ monitors the air bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) for faults ^ illuminates the air bag indicator if a fault is detected ^ flashes the air bag indicator to indicate the Lamp Fault Code (LFC) detected ^ communicates through the Data Link Connector (DLC) the current or historical Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) ^ signals the instrument cluster to activate a chime if the air bag indicator is not available and another SRS fault exists NOTE: The safing Sensor is internal to the RCM and is not serviced separately. The RCM monitors the SRS for possible faults. If a fault is detected while the ignition switch is in the RUN position, the RCM will flash the air bag indicator located in the instrument cluster. When the ignition is cycled (turned off and then on), the air bag indicator will prove out by lighting for six seconds and then off for two seconds. After the prove out, the air bag indicator will then flash the two-digit LFC for any current SRS fault. If an SRS fault exists, the air bag indicator will flash the LFC five times, and then remain illuminated for the rest of the key cycle. The RCM will also communicate the current and historical DTCs through the DLC, to the scan tool. If the air bag indicator does not function, and the system detects a fault condition, the RCM will signal the instrument cluster to activate an audible chime. The chime is a series of five sets of five tone bursts. If the chime is heard, the SRS and the air bag indicator require repair. LFCs are prioritized. If two or more faults occur at the same time, the fault having the highest priority will be displayed. After that fault has been corrected, the next highest priority fault will be displayed. The RCM includes a backup power supply. This feature provides sufficient backup power to deploy the air bags in the event that the ignition circuit is damaged in a collision before the safing and air bag sensors determine that a deployment is required. The backup power supply will deplete its stored energy approximately one minute after the battery ground cable is disconnected. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 1185 Air Bag Control Module: Testing and Inspection For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Air Bag Systems; Testing and Inspection. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Restraints Control Module (RCM) Vehicles With Side Air Bags Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage can result. NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1188 procedure again. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. 2. Remove the steering wheel access cover. 3. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1189 4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the steering column. 5. Open the glove box past its stops. 6. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the instrument panel, disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket under the seat. 2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip. 3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1190 9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. 1 Slide and release the passenger side air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. 11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger side air bag module floor electrical connector. 12. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat bracket. 2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip. 3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1191 13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. 14. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 1 Slide and release the driver side air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 15. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver side air bag module floor electrical connector. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. 17. With the restraint system diagnostic tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure 18. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 19. Position the carpet back at the right-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel. 20. Remove the right-hand side restraint control module (RCM) retaining bolts. 21. Position the carpet back at the left-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1192 22. Remove the RCM. 1 Slide and disengage the two RCM electrical connector locking clips. 2 Push down to pivot the RCM electrical connector tabs and pull out to disconnect. 3 Remove the retaining bolt. 4 Remove the RCM. INSTALLATION WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage can result. NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Position the RCM to the center tunnel area and install the three bolts hand-tight. WARNING: ^ THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1193 NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. 2. Tighten the right-hand side RCM bolts. WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. 3. Reposition the carpet back at the right-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel. 4. Connect the RCM. 1 Tighten the bolt. 2 Connect the RCM electrical connectors. 3 Slide and engage the RCM electrical connector locking clips. WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. 5. Reposition the carpet back at the left-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel. 6. Connect the battery ground cable. 7. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure 8. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1194 9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 10. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 11. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 12. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver side air bag module electrical connector onto the bracket under the Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1195 seat. 13. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 14. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 15. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag module floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1196 16. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Install the passenger side air bag module electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 17. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 18. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 19. Close the glove box. 20. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the steering column. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1197 VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 21. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 22. Install the steering wheel access cover. 23. Connect the battery ground cable. 24. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Vehicles Without Side Air Bags Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1198 WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage can result. NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1199 2. Remove the steering wheel access cover. 3. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the steering column. 5. Open the glove box past its stops. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1200 6. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the instrument panel, disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket under the seat. 2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip. 3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1201 10. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat bracket. 2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip. 3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. 12. Connect the battery ground cable. 13. With the restraint system diagnostic tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure 14. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 15. Position the carpet back at the right-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel. 16. Remove the right-hand side restraint control module (RCM) retaining bolts. 17. Position the carpet back at the left-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel. 18. Remove the RCM. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1202 1 Slide and disengage the two RCM electrical connector locking clips. 2 Push down to pivot the RCM electrical connector tabs and pull out to disconnect. 3 Remove the retaining bolt. 4 Remove the RCM. INSTALLATION WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage can result. NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Position the RCM to the center tunnel area and install the three bolts hand-tight. WARNING: ^ THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1203 2. Tighten the right-hand side RCM bolts. WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. 3. Reposition the carpet back at the right-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel. 4. Connect the RCM. 1 Tighten the bolt. 2 Connect the RCM electrical connectors. 3 Slide and engage the RCM electrical connector locking clips. WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. 5. Reposition the carpet back at the left-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel. 6. Connect the battery ground cable. 7. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure 8. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1204 10. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 11. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 12. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 13. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1205 VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 14. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 15. Close the glove box. 16. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the steering column. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 17. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 18. Install the steering wheel access cover. 19. Connect the battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1206 20. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1207 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Weld Nut Repair "J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). NOTE: ^ There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld nut(s). Read both this procedures and Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair. ^ If two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts in this procedure. Weld nuts must be installed in Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor. ^ The following procedure applies to vehicles that have a rectangular hole in the sheet metal that is in close proximity to the missing weld nut. 1. Obtain a "J" nut (part number N623332-S301) or any of the following optional "J" nuts (part numbers: N623342-S101, N800854-S100, N800925-S100). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-S190) or equivalent. 3. Install the "J" nut through the rectangular hole in the sheet metal. 4. Install the crash sensor. NOTE: Be sure the threaded portion of the "J" nut is aligned with the clearance hole in the sheet metal. 5. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications. Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). NOTE: ^ There are two procedures to repairs a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld nut(s). Read both this procedure and Weld Nut Repair-"J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair. ^ Use only this procedure if two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts in Weld Nut Repair-"J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Crash Sensor. ^ Radiator support repair shown, others are similar. 1. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) weld nut (part number N806285-S190). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-S190). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 1208 3. Route a sufficient length of copper welding wire through the weld nut clearance hole and back out an adjacent access hole. 4. Feed the copper welding wire through the weld nut, then through a standard flat washer. 5. Secure the flat washer so that it cannot be pulled off the end of the copper welding wire. 6. Pull the copper welding wire back through the clearance hole, allowing the weld nut and flat washer to follow the copper welding wire through. 7. Position the weld nut to the weld nut clearance hole, firmly pulling on the copper welding wire allowing the secured flat washer to hold the weld nut in position. 8. Holding the weld nut securely in place and using a MIG welder, weld in four places around the edge of the weld nut. 9. Metal finish as required. 10. Verify the nut is securely in place. 11. Install the crash sensor. 12. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications. Stripped Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). 1. Obtain an 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw (part number N802455-S190). 2. Drill out the internal threads of the stripped-out weld nut to 7.37 mm (0.29 in) using a letter "L" size drill bit. 3. Position the crash sensor to the vehicle. 4. Install the 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw into the drilled-out weld nut. 5. Install the remaining attaching screws. 6. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1209 Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1214 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1220 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1221 Shift Interlock Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1222 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1227 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1228 Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1229 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 00S49 Date: 001101 Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement 00S49 SAFETY RECALL Certain 2001 Model Year Escape Vehicles - Windshield Wiper Module Inspection and Possible Replacement November 2000 Advance Announcement Dealer Letter Attachment I ^ Administrative Information Attachment II ^ Labor Allowances ^ Parts Ordering Information Attachment III ^ Technical Information Owner Letter Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1239 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1240 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1241 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this recall. PLEASE NOTE Correct all vehicles in stock before delivery. PROMPTLY CORRECT Promptly correct all affected vehicles on your dealer VIN list which you will receive in the Ford Dealer Consolidated Communicator (FDCC). Also, correct other eligible vehicles which are brought to your dealership. DEALER-OWNER CONTACT If you have recently sold a vehicle, please contact that owner immediately and provide them a copy of the owner letter and schedule a service date. REGIONAL CONTACT Advise regional office if an owner: ^ cannot be contacted. ^ does not make a service date. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using DWE. ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. OWNER REFUNDS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1242 Ford Motor Company will refund owner-paid wiper module repairs made before the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair was made away from the servicing dealer). Refer to ACESII manual for refund information. RENTAL CARS For vehicles which fail the inspection, and if parts are not available, Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except for fuel which will be at the owner's expense. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall claim. Follow ESP cost guidelines. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS CRITICAL PARTS SUPPLY NOTE - PLEASE READ CAREFULLY Parts will be in limited supply for several weeks. Therefore, parts will be prioritized for vehicles which Ford records show as sold as of November 16, 2000. Dealers are to report the results of inspections on all affected units that fail the inspection (for the first 30 days) by calling the Recall Hotline at 1-800-325-5621 with the following required information: -- VIN number -- Results of (4) ball stud inspections -- Results of (4) plastic ball socket inspections -- Dealer P&A; Code Based on the inspection results reported. dealers will be advised if the vehicle can be released or if it must be held for repair. Please note that FCS-700 tags will be issued and all replaced parts must be returned to the Warranty Parts Return Center where they will be inspected to assure that only suspect parts are being replaced. The cost of parts not properly inspected or not returned will be charged back to the dealer. A fair and equitable distribution of parts will be made based on the number of vehicles which fail the inspection and are properly reported to the Recall Hotline. Each Dealer who calls in will receive a shipment of parts for reported units before any dealer receives a second shipment. No seed stock distribution is planned at this time. No parts will be sent until inspected units are reported to the Recall Hotline. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1243 Please note that vehicles sold after November 16, 2000 will not receive priority handling for parts. We urge you to carefully conduct inspections and manage your allocation of parts for this program. NOTE: All orders must be placed through the Recall Hotline (1-800 325-5621) for the first 30 days, until December 21, 2000. After that date, use the normal order process. ORDER INFORMATION DOR/COR DOR/COR number 50197 identifies parts ordered for this campaign through the Recall Hotline (1-800-325-5621). FCS-700 TAGS FCS-700 Tags will be issued for each claim involving a wiper module (less motor) replacement. These returned assemblies will be inspected and dealers will be "charged-back" for units that pass inspection criteria. Less than 6% of the wiper module assemblies will require replacement. DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to: ^ DOES II ^ Updated Price Book EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW The affected vehicles in this program may require the replacement of the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly (wiper module assembly less motor). A two-part inspection must be performed to determine if replacement is required. The inspection includes the following: ^ An inspection of the wiper link ball studs. ^ An inspection of the wiper link plastic ball sockets. If the vehicle fails the inspection process, a new windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly must be installed. This procedure gives details of the inspection process and refers you to the service procedures in the Workshop Manual if replacement is required. INSPECTION CAUTION Whenever the wiper arms are removed and reinstalled, proper torquing of the wiper arm nuts is critical. 1. Verify that the wipers are in the "PARK" position and the key is in the "OFF" position before proceeding with inspection. 2. Remove the windshield wiper arm nuts, then remove the wiper arms. 3. Remove the left side cowl top vent panel. 4. Disconnect the wiper motor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1244 5. Remove the three (3) bolts, then remove the wiper module. See Figure 1. IMPORTANT: USING A PERMANENT MARKER, PLACE A MARK ON THE WIPER LINKS NEXT TO ALL BALL STUDS/SOCKETS THAT FAIL INSPECTION. DEFECTIVE WINDSHIELD WIPER MOUNTING ARM AND PIVOT SHAFT ASSEMBLIES MUST BE RETURNED TO THE WARRANTY PARTS RETURN CENTER. SEE THE ATTACHMENT II FOR MORE INFORMATION. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1245 6. Inspect the four (4) ball studs (positions A-D). The backside of each ball stud should be riveted (mushroomed) over as shown in the illustration. Please note, the ball stud at position B is the most suspect. See Figure 2 for ball stud location and Figure 3 for detail of ball studs. ^ If ANY of the ball studs are not mushroomed over, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. ^ If all of the ball studs are mushroomed over, continue the inspection procedure. 7. Visually inspect the tabs on the four (4) plastic ball sockets located at the ends of the wiper links. Each tab should be undamaged and fully engaged in the corresponding hole located in the wiper arm link. See Figure 2 for location of ball sockets and Figure 4 for detail of tabs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1246 a. If the tab is missing, damaged, or detached from the rim on ANY of the sockets, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 5. b. If the tab is aligned but not fully engaged into the corresponding hole in the link on ANY one of the sockets but is not otherwise damaged or detached from the rim, press the tab with your thumb (no tools) to fully engage it in the hole. If force greater than thumb pressure is required to engage the tab into the hole, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 6. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1247 c. If the tab is not aligned with the corresponding hole in the link on ANY one of the sockets, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 7. d. Beginning at the tab, carefully lift the lip of the rubber seal using a flat screwdriver or similar tool. Verify that there is a continuous rim of plastic material around the base of EACH socket. If there are any sections of material broken away or any visible damage (cracks) on ANY one of the sockets, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1248 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 8. e. Inspect the dome section of the sockets for cracks. If grease is present on the dome of the socket, this may be evidence of a crack. If ANY one of the sockets is cracked, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 9. If the wiper module passes all the inspections described in A-E, no replacement is required. 8. Install the wiper module. Tighten the bolts to 12 Nm (107 lb-in). WARNING: THE IGNITION KEY MUST BE IN THE "OFF" POSITION BEFORE CONNECTING THE WIPER MOTOR. IF NOT, SUDDEN MOVEMENT OF THE WIPER LINKS MAY OCCUR WHEN THE MOTOR IS CONNECTED. 9. Connect the wiper motor electrical connector. 10. Install the left side cowl vent panel. CAUTION The wiper motor must be in the "PARK" position before installing the wiper arms or damage to the vehicle will result. 11. Cycle and park the wiper motor. CAUTION Proper torquing of the wiper arm nuts is critical. 12. Install the windshield wiper arms. Tighten the nuts to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1249 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1250 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 00S49 Date: 001101 Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement 00S49 SAFETY RECALL Certain 2001 Model Year Escape Vehicles - Windshield Wiper Module Inspection and Possible Replacement November 2000 Advance Announcement Dealer Letter Attachment I ^ Administrative Information Attachment II ^ Labor Allowances ^ Parts Ordering Information Attachment III ^ Technical Information Owner Letter Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1256 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1257 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1258 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this recall. PLEASE NOTE Correct all vehicles in stock before delivery. PROMPTLY CORRECT Promptly correct all affected vehicles on your dealer VIN list which you will receive in the Ford Dealer Consolidated Communicator (FDCC). Also, correct other eligible vehicles which are brought to your dealership. DEALER-OWNER CONTACT If you have recently sold a vehicle, please contact that owner immediately and provide them a copy of the owner letter and schedule a service date. REGIONAL CONTACT Advise regional office if an owner: ^ cannot be contacted. ^ does not make a service date. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using DWE. ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. OWNER REFUNDS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1259 Ford Motor Company will refund owner-paid wiper module repairs made before the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair was made away from the servicing dealer). Refer to ACESII manual for refund information. RENTAL CARS For vehicles which fail the inspection, and if parts are not available, Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except for fuel which will be at the owner's expense. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall claim. Follow ESP cost guidelines. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS CRITICAL PARTS SUPPLY NOTE - PLEASE READ CAREFULLY Parts will be in limited supply for several weeks. Therefore, parts will be prioritized for vehicles which Ford records show as sold as of November 16, 2000. Dealers are to report the results of inspections on all affected units that fail the inspection (for the first 30 days) by calling the Recall Hotline at 1-800-325-5621 with the following required information: -- VIN number -- Results of (4) ball stud inspections -- Results of (4) plastic ball socket inspections -- Dealer P&A; Code Based on the inspection results reported. dealers will be advised if the vehicle can be released or if it must be held for repair. Please note that FCS-700 tags will be issued and all replaced parts must be returned to the Warranty Parts Return Center where they will be inspected to assure that only suspect parts are being replaced. The cost of parts not properly inspected or not returned will be charged back to the dealer. A fair and equitable distribution of parts will be made based on the number of vehicles which fail the inspection and are properly reported to the Recall Hotline. Each Dealer who calls in will receive a shipment of parts for reported units before any dealer receives a second shipment. No seed stock distribution is planned at this time. No parts will be sent until inspected units are reported to the Recall Hotline. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1260 Please note that vehicles sold after November 16, 2000 will not receive priority handling for parts. We urge you to carefully conduct inspections and manage your allocation of parts for this program. NOTE: All orders must be placed through the Recall Hotline (1-800 325-5621) for the first 30 days, until December 21, 2000. After that date, use the normal order process. ORDER INFORMATION DOR/COR DOR/COR number 50197 identifies parts ordered for this campaign through the Recall Hotline (1-800-325-5621). FCS-700 TAGS FCS-700 Tags will be issued for each claim involving a wiper module (less motor) replacement. These returned assemblies will be inspected and dealers will be "charged-back" for units that pass inspection criteria. Less than 6% of the wiper module assemblies will require replacement. DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to: ^ DOES II ^ Updated Price Book EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW The affected vehicles in this program may require the replacement of the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly (wiper module assembly less motor). A two-part inspection must be performed to determine if replacement is required. The inspection includes the following: ^ An inspection of the wiper link ball studs. ^ An inspection of the wiper link plastic ball sockets. If the vehicle fails the inspection process, a new windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly must be installed. This procedure gives details of the inspection process and refers you to the service procedures in the Workshop Manual if replacement is required. INSPECTION CAUTION Whenever the wiper arms are removed and reinstalled, proper torquing of the wiper arm nuts is critical. 1. Verify that the wipers are in the "PARK" position and the key is in the "OFF" position before proceeding with inspection. 2. Remove the windshield wiper arm nuts, then remove the wiper arms. 3. Remove the left side cowl top vent panel. 4. Disconnect the wiper motor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1261 5. Remove the three (3) bolts, then remove the wiper module. See Figure 1. IMPORTANT: USING A PERMANENT MARKER, PLACE A MARK ON THE WIPER LINKS NEXT TO ALL BALL STUDS/SOCKETS THAT FAIL INSPECTION. DEFECTIVE WINDSHIELD WIPER MOUNTING ARM AND PIVOT SHAFT ASSEMBLIES MUST BE RETURNED TO THE WARRANTY PARTS RETURN CENTER. SEE THE ATTACHMENT II FOR MORE INFORMATION. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1262 6. Inspect the four (4) ball studs (positions A-D). The backside of each ball stud should be riveted (mushroomed) over as shown in the illustration. Please note, the ball stud at position B is the most suspect. See Figure 2 for ball stud location and Figure 3 for detail of ball studs. ^ If ANY of the ball studs are not mushroomed over, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. ^ If all of the ball studs are mushroomed over, continue the inspection procedure. 7. Visually inspect the tabs on the four (4) plastic ball sockets located at the ends of the wiper links. Each tab should be undamaged and fully engaged in the corresponding hole located in the wiper arm link. See Figure 2 for location of ball sockets and Figure 4 for detail of tabs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1263 a. If the tab is missing, damaged, or detached from the rim on ANY of the sockets, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 5. b. If the tab is aligned but not fully engaged into the corresponding hole in the link on ANY one of the sockets but is not otherwise damaged or detached from the rim, press the tab with your thumb (no tools) to fully engage it in the hole. If force greater than thumb pressure is required to engage the tab into the hole, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 6. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1264 c. If the tab is not aligned with the corresponding hole in the link on ANY one of the sockets, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 7. d. Beginning at the tab, carefully lift the lip of the rubber seal using a flat screwdriver or similar tool. Verify that there is a continuous rim of plastic material around the base of EACH socket. If there are any sections of material broken away or any visible damage (cracks) on ANY one of the sockets, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1265 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 8. e. Inspect the dome section of the sockets for cracks. If grease is present on the dome of the socket, this may be evidence of a crack. If ANY one of the sockets is cracked, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 9. If the wiper module passes all the inspections described in A-E, no replacement is required. 8. Install the wiper module. Tighten the bolts to 12 Nm (107 lb-in). WARNING: THE IGNITION KEY MUST BE IN THE "OFF" POSITION BEFORE CONNECTING THE WIPER MOTOR. IF NOT, SUDDEN MOVEMENT OF THE WIPER LINKS MAY OCCUR WHEN THE MOTOR IS CONNECTED. 9. Connect the wiper motor electrical connector. 10. Install the left side cowl vent panel. CAUTION The wiper motor must be in the "PARK" position before installing the wiper arms or damage to the vehicle will result. 11. Cycle and park the wiper motor. CAUTION Proper torquing of the wiper arm nuts is critical. 12. Install the windshield wiper arms. Tighten the nuts to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1266 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 1267 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1268 Wiper Control Module: Application and ID For further information regarding the Rear Interval Wiper please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules (General Module). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1269 Wiper Control Module: Testing and Inspection Testing and Inspection For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 1284 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Driver Side Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Driver Side Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Driver Side > Page 1287 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Driver Side > Page 1288 Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Passenger Side Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Driver Side > Page 1289 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1293 Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1294 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1298 Power Seat Switch: Service Precautions WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARD. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1299 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1300 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1301 Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair REMOVAL WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARD. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag system is being repaired the air bag system must be deactivated per the deactivation procedure contained in Air Bag Systems. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the vehicle. ^ Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side air bag to floor connector. ^ A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. ^ If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the seat control switch knob. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1302 3. Remove the front seat cushion side shield, 1 Remove the seat backrest handle. 2 Remove the screw. 3 Remove the shield. ^ Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the seat control switch. 1 Remove the screws. 2 Remove the switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1306 Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1307 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Roof Opening Panel Position Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Roof Opening Panel Position Switch > Page 1312 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch > Page 1317 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1322 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Brake Fluid Level, Warning Switch The brake fluid level warning switch is an integral part of the brake master cylinder reservoir. It consists of a float containing a magnet and a reed switch mounted in the bottom of the brake master cylinder reservoir. When the brake fluid in the brake master cylinder reservoir gets to a predetermined level, the float and magnet actuates the reed switch that causes the red brake warning indicator to illuminate. Loss of brake fluid from either the primary (front) or secondary (rear) system will cause this system to activate. If the brake fluid level warning switch is inoperative, a new brake master cylinder reservoir must be installed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Release Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Parking Brake Release Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the parking brake control. 2. Remove the parking brake warning indicator switch. ^ Remove the screws. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips Wheel Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips TSB 04-23-2 11/29/04 WHEEL SPEED SENSOR REMOVAL TIP FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid MERCURY: 2005 Mariner ISSUE When servicing the wheel speed sensors on a 2001-2005 Escape or 2005 Mariner and Escape Hybrid, care must be taken during removal to prevent damage. The wheel speed sensor wire has a body plug attached to it. This plug can be damaged if not removed correctly, such as removal for pinpoint testing. If the body plug is damaged, sensor replacement may be necessary even though the sensor is functional in all other respects. ACTION When removing the body plug, rotate the plug into a position which allows the use of a small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the body plug. These two tabs are at right angles (directly above and below) to the sensor wire. See Figures 1 and 2 for reference. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips > Page 1333 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1334 Wheel Speed Sensor: Specifications Anti-lock brake sensor bolt Rear 20 ft.lb Anti-lock brake sensor bolt (4X2) Front 9-10 ft.lb Anti-lock brake sensor bolt (4X4) 62-80 in.lb Anti-lock brake sensor wire retaining bolt (4X4) 62-80 in.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 1337 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 1338 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 1339 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 1342 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 1343 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 1344 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1345 Wheel Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Anti-Lock Brake Sensor NOTE: Any time an anti-lock brake sensor is removed, thoroughly clean the mounting surfaces. On front anti-lock brake sensors, apply High-Temperature 4x4 Front Axle and Wheel Bearing Grease. The anti-lock brake system uses four "active" sensors and four sensor indicators to detect the speed of each wheel. The teeth on the sensor indicator rotate past the stationary sensor at wheel speed. As the teeth pass the sensor, a digital input signal is generated. The control module uses the input to compute the speed of each wheel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor, Front Sensor-Front Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Detach the grommet from the body and pull the connector through the hole. 3. Disconnect the sensor wiring. 4. Detach the retainer. 5. Remove the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 1348 6. NOTE: Clean off any dirt that may have collected around the sensor before removal. Remove the bolt and the sensor. 7. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 1349 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor, Rear Sensor-Rear Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Detach the grommet from the body and pull the connector through the hole. 3. Disconnect the sensor wiring. 4. Detach the bolt. 5. Remove the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 1350 6. NOTE: Clean off any dirt that may have collected around the sensor before removal. Remove the bolt and the sensor. 7. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Coolant Level Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Level Sensor: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON Coolant Level Sensor: Customer Interest Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON Article No. 03-25-2 12/22/03 ENGINE - COOLING SYSTEM - LOW COOLANT WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED COOLANT DEGAS BOTTLE INSPECTION - SERVICE TIP FORD: 2001-2003 ESCAPE This article supersedes TSB 03-08-5 to update the vehicle model years and service procedure. ISSUE Some 2001-2003 Escape 3.0L vehicles may exhibit a low coolant warning indicator lamp illuminated. This may be caused by a low coolant level, even if it appears there is significant coolant in the degas bottle. Analysis of coolant degas bottles indicate that bottle replacement may not be necessary. Adjusting the coolant to the proper level may be all that is required to correct the condition. ACTION The following Service Procedure provides tips to help in veritying proper coolant levels. Additional diagnostic and service information can be found in the appropriate Workshop Manual Section 303-03. SERVICE PROCEDURE PROPER INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF COOLANT LEVEL IN THE DEGAS BOTTLE There are four (4) different cells within the Escape degas bottle. The front cells of the degas bottle are not a good visual indicator of proper coolant level, as these cells will always give the appearance of being full (Figure 1). The actual COLD FILL RANGE is the larger cell with the fill cap, just below the seam. It can be difficult to see if not properly examined. If the vehicle is HOT when inspecting, the coolant level should be at the bottle seam (minimum) or above the seam by 1/2 inch, well above the LOW mark. When hot, if the coolant level is not at least to the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), there is a possibility of illuminating the low coolant lamp when the vehicle cools down and the coolant is drawn back into the engine cooling system. DIAGNOSIS Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Not Illuminated (OFF): 1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten pressure cap and return vehicle to customer. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Coolant Level Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Level Sensor: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON > Page 1360 Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Illuminated (ON): 1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten pressure cap, verify that the warning lamp turns off after key cycle and return to customer. 2. If the coolant level is verified to be at the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), disconnect the coolant level sensor and verify that the warning lamp turns off. If the lamp does turn off then replace the degas bottle. If the lamp remains on with the sensor disconnected then perform diagnostics on the circuit beyond degas bottle/low coolant sensor. NOTE IT TAKES APPROXIMATELY 25 SECONDS FOR THE LOW COOLANT LAMP TO TURN OFF AFTER THE SENSOR CIRCUIT IS OPENED. (EXAMPLE: WHEN ADDING COOLANT TO A LOW BOTTLE WITH LAMP ON.) NOTE DO NOT REPLACE THE DEGAS BOTTLE UNLESS DIRECTED BY DIAGNOSTICS IN STEP 2. Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 03-08-5 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Coolant Level Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Level Sensor: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON Coolant Level Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON Article No. 03-25-2 12/22/03 ENGINE - COOLING SYSTEM - LOW COOLANT WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED COOLANT DEGAS BOTTLE INSPECTION - SERVICE TIP FORD: 2001-2003 ESCAPE This article supersedes TSB 03-08-5 to update the vehicle model years and service procedure. ISSUE Some 2001-2003 Escape 3.0L vehicles may exhibit a low coolant warning indicator lamp illuminated. This may be caused by a low coolant level, even if it appears there is significant coolant in the degas bottle. Analysis of coolant degas bottles indicate that bottle replacement may not be necessary. Adjusting the coolant to the proper level may be all that is required to correct the condition. ACTION The following Service Procedure provides tips to help in veritying proper coolant levels. Additional diagnostic and service information can be found in the appropriate Workshop Manual Section 303-03. SERVICE PROCEDURE PROPER INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF COOLANT LEVEL IN THE DEGAS BOTTLE There are four (4) different cells within the Escape degas bottle. The front cells of the degas bottle are not a good visual indicator of proper coolant level, as these cells will always give the appearance of being full (Figure 1). The actual COLD FILL RANGE is the larger cell with the fill cap, just below the seam. It can be difficult to see if not properly examined. If the vehicle is HOT when inspecting, the coolant level should be at the bottle seam (minimum) or above the seam by 1/2 inch, well above the LOW mark. When hot, if the coolant level is not at least to the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), there is a possibility of illuminating the low coolant lamp when the vehicle cools down and the coolant is drawn back into the engine cooling system. DIAGNOSIS Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Not Illuminated (OFF): 1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten pressure cap and return vehicle to customer. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Coolant Level Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Level Sensor: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON > Page 1366 Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Illuminated (ON): 1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten pressure cap, verify that the warning lamp turns off after key cycle and return to customer. 2. If the coolant level is verified to be at the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), disconnect the coolant level sensor and verify that the warning lamp turns off. If the lamp does turn off then replace the degas bottle. If the lamp remains on with the sensor disconnected then perform diagnostics on the circuit beyond degas bottle/low coolant sensor. NOTE IT TAKES APPROXIMATELY 25 SECONDS FOR THE LOW COOLANT LAMP TO TURN OFF AFTER THE SENSOR CIRCUIT IS OPENED. (EXAMPLE: WHEN ADDING COOLANT TO A LOW BOTTLE WITH LAMP ON.) NOTE DO NOT REPLACE THE DEGAS BOTTLE UNLESS DIRECTED BY DIAGNOSTICS IN STEP 2. Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 03-08-5 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Coolant Level Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1367 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1372 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE SENSOR Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor The Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor (Figure 26) is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and increases as temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM would then initiate a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy details. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor > Page 1378 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor (Figure 27) is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The sensor is threaded into an engine coolant passage. The ECT sensor is similar in construction to the IAT sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1379 Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. Remove the generator. 2. Disconnect the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the CHT sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Deactivator Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Deactivator Switch > Page 1385 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1386 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Service Precautions CAUTION: Initial installation of a deactivator switch allows for one adjustment. If additional adjustments are required, install a new switch. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1387 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the deactivator switch. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Rotate counterclockwise 45 degrees and remove the deactivator switch. INSTALLATION CAUTION: Initial installation of a deactivator switch allows for one adjustment. If additional adjustments are required, install a new switch. 1. Release the plunger lock. ^ Turn the lock knob counterclockwise until the first click is felt. 2. Depress the brake pedal. 3. Install the deactivator switch. 1 Position the deactivator switch in the bracket and rotate clockwise 45 degrees. 2 Connect the electrical connector. 4. Slowly release the brake pedal and tug moderately once the pedal reaches the rest position. NOTE: There should be an extra click heard when tugging on the brake pedal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service Precautions Cruise Control Switch: Service Precautions WARNING: WHEN CARRYING A LIVE AIR BAG, MAKE SURE THE BAG AND TRIM COVER ARE POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT, THE BAG WILL THEN DEPLOY WITH MINIMAL CHANCE OF INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 1391 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the steering wheel. 2. Remove the steering wheel cover. WARNING: WHEN CARRYING A LIVE AIR BAG, MAKE SURE THE BAG AND TRIM COVER ARE POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT, THE BAG WILL THEN DEPLOY WITH MINIMAL CHANCE OF INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 3. Remove the steering wheel frame. 1 Remove the nuts. 2 Disconnect the ground wire. 3 Remove the steering wheel frame. 4. Disconnect the speed control switches electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 1392 5. Remove the speed control switches. 1 Remove the screws. 2 Remove the speed control switches. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Specifications Oil Pressure Sender: Specifications Oil Pressure Sender Tightening Torque 20 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1397 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1398 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: The halfshaft is removed for clarity. Disconnect the oil pressure sender electrical connector. 2. Remove the oil pressure sender. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Air Conditioning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Conditioning Switch: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel. 2. Remove the function selector switch knob. 3. Remove the function selector switch. ^ Push in the locking tab on one side of the function selector switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. NOTE: Align the function selector switch locking tabs with the holes in the housing and press the function selector into the housing. Verify that both locking tabs are secured. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel. 2. Remove the blower motor switch knob. 3. Remove the blower motor switch. ^ Depress the locking tab. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations Electrical Components Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 1409 Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 1410 Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Compressor Cut-Off/Cycling Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Compressor Cut-Off/Cycling Switch > Page 1413 Dual Pressure Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation A/C Cycling Switch A/C Cycling Switch The A/C cycling switch is mounted on a Schrader valve-type fitting on the top of the suction accumulator. ^ A valve depressor, located inside the threaded end of the A/C cycling switch, presses in on the Schrader valve stem. ^ This allows the suction pressure inside the suction accumulator to control the operation of the A/C cycling switch. ^ The electrical switch contacts open when the suction pressure drops to 152-193 kPa (22-28 psi). ^ The contacts close when the suction pressure rises to 276-324 kPa (40-47 psi). ^ When the A/C cycling switch contacts close, the signal to energize the A/C clutch is sent to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) which energizes the A/C relay and supplies B+ voltage to the A/C clutch field coil. ^ When the A/C cycling switch contacts open, the A/C clutch field coil is deenergized and compressor operation stops. ^ The A/C cycling switch will control the A/C evaporator core pressure at a point where the plate/fin surface temperature will be maintained slightly above freezing. ^ This prevents icing of the A/C evaporator core and blockage of airflow. ^ It is not necessary to discharge the refrigerant system to remove the A/C cycling switch. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch > Page 1416 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Cycling Switch PCM Inputs AIR CONDITIONING CYCLING SWITCH The Air Conditioning (A/C) cycling switch may be wired to either the A/C Cycling Switch (ACCS) or ACPSW Powertrain Control Module (PCM) input. When the A/C cycling switch opens, the PCM will turn off the Air Conditioning (A/C) clutch For information on the specific function of the A/C cycling switch, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning. The A/C Cycling Switch (ACCS) circuit to the PCM provides a voltage signal which indicates when the A/C is requested. When the A/C demand switch is turned on, and both the A/C cycling switch and the high pressure contacts of the A/C high pressure switch (if equipped and in circuit) are closed, voltage is supplied to the ACCS circuit at the PCM. Refer to Vehicle/Diagrams for vehicle specific wiring. If the ACCS signal is not received by the PCM, the PCM circuit will not allow the A/C to operate. For additional information, refer to PCM outputs, wide open throttle air conditioning cutoff. See: Powertrain Management/Description and Operation/PCM Outputs NOTE: Some applications do not have a dedicated (separate) input to the PCM indicating that A/C is requested. This information is received by the PCM through the BUS + and BUS - Standard Corporate Protocol (SCP) communication. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch > Page 1417 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning High Pressure Switch The A/C pressure cut-off switch is used to interrupt A/C compressor operation in the event of high system discharge pressures. ^ The A/C pressure cut-off switch is mounted on a Schrader valve-type fitting on the high pressure side of the condenser to evaporator line. ^ A valve depressor, located inside the threaded end of the A/C pressure cut-off switch, is used to monitor the compressor discharge pressure. ^ It is not necessary to discharge the refrigerant system to remove the A/C pressure cut-off switch. ^ The A/C pressure cut-off switch has two sets of contacts. One electrical contact is normally closed. ^ When the compressor discharge pressure rises to approximately 3,103 kPa (450 psi), the switch contacts open, disengaging the A/C compressor. ^ When the pressure drops to approximately 1,724 kPa (250 psi), the contacts close to allow operation of the A/C compressor. The switch contains a second set of electrical contacts used for high-speed fan control. ^ When the compressor discharge pressure reaches approximately 2,241 kPa (325 psi), these contacts close and engage the high-speed fan control. ^ When the pressure drops to approximately 1,896 kPa (275 psi), the contacts again open and the high speed fan control is disengaged. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Cut-Off/Cycling Switch Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Compressor Cut-Off/Cycling Switch REMOVAL 1. Remove the A/C cycling switch. 1 Disconnect the A/C cycling switch electrical connector. 2 Remove the A/C cycling switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Cut-Off/Cycling Switch > Page 1420 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Pressure Cutoff Switch REMOVAL 1. Remove the pressure cut-off switch. 1 Disconnect the A/C pressure cut-off switch electrical connector. 2 Remove the A/C pressure cut-off switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1425 Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1426 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pin 3 using a fused (10 A) jumper to 12V DC power and pin 5 to ground. Measure the voltage between pin 3 and pin 5 while rotating the thumbwell from full illumination to no illumination. If the voltage smoothly decreases from near 12 volts to near 0 volts, the illumination dimmer is okay. If not, replace the main light switch. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Pedal Position Switch <--> [Brake Light Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Pedal Position Switch <--> [Brake Light Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1437 Brake Pedal Position Switch: Description and Operation BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH Typical Brake Pedal Position Switch The Brake Pedal Position (BPP) switch (Figure 21) is used by the PCM to disengage the transmission torque converter clutch and on some applications as an input to the idle speed control for idle quality. On most applications the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and supplies battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. On other applications the BPP switch signal is broadcast over the SCP link via another module to be received by the PCM. On applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stoplamp circuit, if all stoplamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stop amp bulbs has failed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Pedal Position Switch <--> [Brake Light Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1438 Brake Pedal Position Switch: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the Brake Pedal Position (BPP) switch. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Rotate clockwise and remove the BPP switch. INSTALLATION NOTE: Initial installation of brake pedal position (BPP) switch allows for one adjustment. If additional adjustments are necessary, install a new switch. 1. To unlock, rotate the lock knob counterclockwise to the stop. 2. With the engine running, fully depress and hold the brake pedal. 3. Install the brake pedal position (BPP) switch. 1 Position the BPP switch in the bracket and rotate counterclockwise. 2 Connect the electrical connector. 4. Slowly release the brake pedal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1442 Fog/Driving Lamp Switch: Service Precautions CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver to remove fog lamp switch or damage to the finish panel may occur. Adding tape to the end of a thin tool will reduce marring to the finish panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1443 Fog/Driving Lamp Switch: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver to remove fog lamp switch or damage to the finish panel may occur. Adding tape to the end of a thin tool will reduce marring to the finish panel. 2. Use a thin tool to remove the fog lamp switch. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1447 Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Position the instrument panel center finish panel rearward from the instrument panel. 3. Remove the Hazard flasher switch. 1. Disconnect Electrical connector. 2. Remove the hazard flasher switch. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1451 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Turn Signal Switch: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1455 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Absolute Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation THERMAL MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure (TMAP) Sensor The Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor (TMAP) (Figure 41) consists of a Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor and an integrated thermistor. The thermistor part of the sensor is currently not being used. The MAP part of the sensor measures intake manifold air absolute pressure. The PCM uses information from the MAP sensor, Throttle Position (TP) sensor, Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor, Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) or Cylinder Head Temperature (CKP) sensor and Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor to determine how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations > Page 1464 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations > Page 1465 Mass Air Flow Sensor: Description and Operation MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire (Figure 36). If the hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the air mass flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio (Figure 37). This input is also used in determining transmission Electronic Pressure Control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling. Some MAF sensors have Integrated Bypass Technology (IBT) with an integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor. The present applications with IBT are: Focus, Escort (4V), 2.0L Cougar, Escape, Taurus/Sable, Windstar, Explorer/Mountaineer and E-Series. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations > Page 1466 Mass Air Flow Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube. 2. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the four nuts and the MAF sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1470 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1471 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR The Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston No.1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and used for synchronizing the firing of sequential fuel injectors. The Coil On Plug (COP) Ignition applications also use the CMP signal to select the proper ignition coil to fire. The input circuit to the PCM is referred to as the CMP input or circuit. Typical Hall-Effect Sensor Typical Variable Reluctance Sensor There are two types of CMP sensors: the three pin connector Hall-effect type sensor (Figure 22) and the two pin connector variable reluctance sensor (Figure 23). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1472 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolt. 3 Remove the sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Clutch Switch: Description and Operation CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP)/Park-Neutral Position (PNP) Switches The Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) switch (Figure 24) is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position and, in some manual transmission applications, both the clutch pedal engagement position and the gear shift position. The PCM provides a 5-volt reference Vehicle Reference Voltage (VREF) signal to the CPP switch and/or a Park/Neutral Position (PNP) switch (on the CPP signal line). If the CPP switch (either or both CPP and PNP switches are closed) is closed, indicating the clutch pedal is engaged and the shift lever is in the NEUTRAL position, the output voltage (5 volts) from the PCM is grounded through the signal return line to the PCM, and there is 1 volt or less. One volt or less indicates there is a reduced load on the engine. If the CPP switch (or PNP switch on vehicle or both CPP and PNP switches open on the vehicle) is open, meaning the clutch pedal is disengaged (all systems) and the shift lever is not in NEUTRAL position (PNP switch systems), the input on the CPP signal to the PCM will be approximately 5 volts. Then, the 5-volt signal input at the PCM will indicate a load on the engine. The PCM uses the load information in mass air flow and fuel calculations. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1476 Clutch Switch: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) electrical connector. 2. Remove the CPP locknut and the switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1480 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1484 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1485 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (INTEGRATED IGNITION SYSTEMS) Three Different Types Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensors The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The trigger wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L ten cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the trigger wheel, the CKP indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to fixed reference (Figure 25). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1486 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the exhaust manifold. 2. Remove the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolt. 3 Remove the sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE SENSOR Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor The Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor (Figure 26) is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and increases as temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM would then initiate a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy details. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor > Page 1492 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor (Figure 27) is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The sensor is threaded into an engine coolant passage. The ECT sensor is similar in construction to the IAT sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1493 Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. Remove the generator. 2. Disconnect the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the CHT sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service Precautions WARNING: ^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 1497 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor In-Line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor The Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) sensor (Figure 97) or inline Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) sensor (Figure 98) is used to measure the fuel tank pressure during the EVAP monitor test on vehicles equipped with the Running Loss-type system. Also, it is used to control excessive fuel tank pressure by forcing the system to purge. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 1498 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 1. Disconnect the battery. WARNING: THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 2. Remove the rear seat assembly. 3. Remove the fuel tank sending unit access cover. 4. Disconnect the fuel tank pressure sensor electrical connector. 5. Remove the fuel tank pressure sensor. ^ Disconnect the vapor tubes. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 1499 ^ Carry out a leak test. See: Powertrain Management/Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission System Leak Test ^ Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Powertrain Management/Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission Repair Verification Drive Cycle NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL(R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot and Cold Wire Terminals The Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensors (Figure 34) and integrated Mass Air Flow (MAF) type (Figure 37), are thermistor devices in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1503 Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The IAT provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air temperature information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel spark and MAF. The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT sensor. Supercharged 5.4L Lightning vehicles use (2) AT sensors. Both sensors operate as above. However, one is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for standard OBD II/cold weather input, while a second sensor Second Intake Air Temperature (IAT2) is located after the supercharger in the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air temperature information to the PCM to control border-line spark and to help determine intercooler efficiency. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1507 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Knock Sensor Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS) The Knock Sensor (KS) (Figure 35) is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1508 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Disconnect the KS electrical connector and remove the connector from the mounting bracket. NOTE: The Knock Sensor (KS) is located on the RH side of the cylinder block. 3. Remove the nut and the KS. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis Technical Service Bulletin # 01-9-7 Date: 010514 Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis Article No. 01-9-7 05/14/01 DRIVEABILITY - H025 (HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR), CATALYST, AND FUEL SYSTEM MONITORS - SERVICE TIPS - OBD II VEHICLES ONLY FORD: 1994-1997 THUNDERBIRD 1994-2001 MUSTANG 1995-2001 CROWN VICTORIA 1996-1997 PROBE 1996-2000 CONTOUR 1996-2001 ESCORT, TAURUS 2000-2001 FOCUS 1994-1997 F SUPER DUTY, F-250 HD, F-350 1995-2001 ECONOLINE, RANGER, WINDSTAR 1996 BRONCO 1996-1997 AEROSTAR 1996-2001 EXPLORER 1997-2001 EXPEDITION, F-150, F-250 LD 1999-2001 SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2001 EXCURSION 2001 ESCAPE LINCOLN: 1995-2001 CONTINENTAL, TOWN CAR 1996-1998 MARK VIII 2000-2001 LS 1998-2001 NAVIGATOR MERCURY: 1994-1997 COUGAR 1995-2001 GRAND MARQUIS 1996-1999 TRACER 1996-2000 MYSTIQUE 1996-2001 SABLE 1999-2001 COUGAR 1997-2001 MOUNTAINEER ISSUE This article is intended to be an aide in diagnosing conditions related to Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S), Catalyst, and Fuel System Monitor related Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Additional information is included to assist in diagnosing certain vehicle symptoms. This article is NOT intended to be a shortcut to the Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) Workshop Manual pinpoint tests. The pinpoint tests in the PC/ED Manual should ALWAYS be followed when diagnosing vehicle conditions. ACTION Use the following information and Service Tips to assist in the diagnosis of H025, Catalyst, and Fuel System Monitor related DTCs. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 98-23-10 WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 623000, 690000, 698298 Information ^ A. Description of Terms and Acronyms ^ B. HO2S Location Diagrams ^ C. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 1513 ^ C1. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Information ^ C2. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) ^ D. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor ^ D1. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Information ^ D2. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) ^ E. Fuel System Monitor ^ E1. Fuel System Monitor - Information ^ E2. Fuel System Monitor Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) ^ F. Diagnostic Service Tips ^ F1. Tips - General ^ F2. Tips Related to Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor ^ F3. Tips Related to Catalyst Monitor ^ F4. Tips Related to Fuel System Monitor A. Description of Terms and Acronyms ^ CHT - Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor or PID ^ CKP - Crankshaft Position Sensor or PID ^ DTC - Diagnostic Trouble Code ^ ECT - Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor or PID ^ EGR - Exhaust Gas Recirculation ^ EEC - Electronic Engine Control ^ EVR - EGR Vacuum Regulator ^ FMEM - Failure Mode Effects Management ^ GND - Ground ^ HC - Hydrocarbons ^ HO2S - Heated Oxygen Sensor or PID ^ IAT - Inlet Air Temperature Sensor or PID ^ KAM - Keep Alive Memory ^ KOEO - Key On Engine Off ^ KOER - Key On Engine Running ^ LONGFT - Long Term Fuel Trim ^ MAF - Mass Air Flow Sensor or PID ^ MIL - Malfunction Indicator Lamp ("Check Engine") ^ NGS - New Generation Star Tester (Scan Tool) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 1514 ^ OBD II - On-Board Diagnostics II ^ OSM - Output State Monitor ^ PC/ED - Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis ^ PCM - Powertrain Control Module ^ PCV - Positive Crankcase Ventilation ^ PID - Parameter Identification Display ^ RAM - Random Access Memory ^ RPM - Revolutions Per Minute ^ SHRTFT - Short Term Fuel Trim ^ Stoichiometric - 14.7:1 Air/Fuel Ratio (Gasoline Engines) ^ TP - Throttle Position Sensor or PID ^ VMV - Vapor Management Valve ^ VPWR - Vehicle Power (Battery Voltage) ^ VREF - Vehicle Reference Voltage (5 volts) B. HO2S Location Diagrams Refer to Figure 1 to better understand the H025 sensor names and locations. Regardless of how the engine is mounted in the vehicle, conventional or transverse, the HO2S naming convention stays the same in relationship to engine banks 1 and 2. Bank 1 will always be the bank containing the # 1 cylinder. C. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor C1.) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 1515 The H025 Monitor is an on-board strategy designed to monitor the HO2S sensors for a malfunction or deterioration that can affect emissions. Under specific conditions, the fuel control or upstream HO2S sensors (Figures 1 and 3) are checked for proper output voltage and response rate (the time it takes to switch from lean to rich or rich to lean). Downstream HO2S sensors (Figures 1 and 3) used for Catalyst Monitor are also monitored for proper output voltage. Input is required from the ECT or CHT, IAT, MAF, TP and CKP sensors to activate the H025 Monitor. The Fuel System Monitor and Misfire Detection Monitor must also have completed successfully before the HO2S Monitor is enabled. The HO2S sensor senses the oxygen content in the exhaust flow and outputs a voltage between zero and 1.0 volt. Lean of stoichiometric (air/fuel ratio of approximately 14.7:1 for gasoline engines), the HO2S will generate a voltage between zero and 0.45 volt. Rich of stoichiometric, the HO2S will generate a voltage between 0.45 and 1.0 volt. ^ The HO2S Monitor evaluates both the upstream (Fuel Control) and downstream (Catalyst Monitor) HO2S for proper function. ^ Once the HO2S Monitor is enabled, the upstream H025 signal voltage amplitude and response frequency are checked. Excessive voltage is determined by comparing the HO2S signal voltage to a maximum calibratable threshold voltage. ^ A fixed frequency closed loop fuel control routine is executed and the upstream HO2S voltage amplitude and output response frequency are observed. A sample of the upstream HO2S signal is evaluated to determine if the sensor is capable of switching or has a slow response rate. ^ An HO2S heater circuit fault is determined by turning the heater on and off and looking for a corresponding change in the OSM and by measuring the current going through the heater circuit. ^ The MIL is activated after a fault is detected on two consecutive OBD II drive cycles. The HO2S Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows: ^ HO2S signal circuit malfunction - P0131, P0136, P0151, P0156 ^ HO2S slow response rate - P0133, P0153 ^ HO2S heater circuit malfunction - P0135, P0141, P0155, P0161 ^ Downstream HO2S not running in on-demand self test - P1127 ^ Swapped H025 connectors - P1128 and P1129 ^ H025 lack of switching - P1130, P1131, P1132, P1150, P1151, P1152 ^ HO2S lack of switching (sensor indicates lean) - P1137 ^ H025 lack of switching (sensor indicates rich) - P1138 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 1516 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 1517 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 1518 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 1519 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 1520 C2.) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes D. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor D1.) Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Information The Federal Test Procedure Catalyst Monitor monitors for deterioration in the catalyst system and illuminates the MIL when tailpipe emissions exceed the appropriate HC emission thresholds. The Catalyst Monitor is enabled after the upstream and downstream HO2S sensors have been tested and verified to be functional. This monitor relies on the front and rear heated oxygen sensors (HO2S) to infer catalyst efficiency based upon oxygen storage capacity. Under normal closed loop fuel conditions, high efficiency catalysts have oxygen storage which makes the switching frequency of the rear HO2S quite slow compared with the frequency of the front HO2S. As catalyst efficiency deteriorates, its ability to store oxygen declines, and the rear HO2S begins to switch more rapidly, approaching the frequency of the front sensor. In general, as catalyst efficiency decreases, the switch ratio increases from a switch ratio of 0 for a low mileage catalyst to a switch ratio of 0.8 or 0.9 for a low efficiency catalyst. Some vehicles will monitor substantially less than the entire catalyst volume in order to meet the stringent catalyst monitoring malfunction thresholds. In many cases, only the front, light-off catalyst is monitored. Front and rear HO2S switches are counted under specified closed loop fuel conditions. After the required number of front switches are obtained, a rear-to-front HO2S switch ratio is calculated. The switch ratio is compared against a threshold value. If the switch ratio is greater than the calibrated maximum limit, the catalyst has failed. The test entry conditions for the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor are as follows: ECT or CHT (warmed engine), IAT (not at extreme ambient temperatures), MAF (greater than minimum engine load), VSS (within vehicle speed window) and TP (at part throttle) are required. ^ Because an exponentially weighted moving average is used for malfunction determination, up to six OBD II drive cycles may be required to illuminate the MIL. NOTE THE CATALYST MONITOR ON SOME EARLY OBD II VEHICLES (SOME 1994-1996 VEHICLES) WAS REFERRED TO AS THE "STEADY-STATE CATALYST MONITOR" AS OPPOSED TO THE "FTP CATALYST MONITOR" (DESCRIBED ABOVE) THAT IS MOST COMMON FOR VEHICLES BUILT AFTER 1996. BELOW IS A BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE STEADY-STATE CATALYST MONITOR: The Steady-State Catalyst Monitor performs a 20 second test during steady state rpm and load conditions. The Monitor transfers closed loop fuel control from the front to the rear 02 sensors. The Monitor then observes the switching frequency and compares it to a threshold frequency stored in an rpm/load table. A frequency higher than the maximum calibrated threshold indicates a malfunction. The Catalyst Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 1521 ^ Catalyst system efficiency below threshold (Bank 1) - P0420 ^ Catalyst system efficiency below threshold (Bank 2) - P0430 D2.) Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes E. Fuel System Monitor E1.) Fuel System Monitor - Information The Fuel System Monitor is an on-board strategy designed to monitor the fuel trim system. The fuel control system uses fuel trim tables stored in the PCM's KAM to compensate for variability in fuel system components due to normal wear and aging. Fuel trim tables are based on vehicle speed and engine load. During closed loop vehicle operation, the fuel trim strategy learns the corrections needed to correct a "biased" rich or lean fuel system. The correction is stored in the fuel trim tables. The fuel trim has two means of adapting; a LONGFT and a SHRTFT. LONGFT relies on the fuel trim tables and SHRTFT refers to the desired air/fuel ratio parameter "LAMBSE". LAMBSE is calculated by the PCM from HO2S inputs and helps maintain a 14.7:1 air/fuel ratio during closed loop operation. SHRTFT and LONGFT work together. If the HO2S indicates the engine is running rich, the PCM will correct the rich condition by moving SHRTFT in the negative range (less fuel to correct for a rich combustion). If after a certain amount of time SHRTFT is still compensating for a rich condition, the PCM "learns" this and moves LONGFT into the negative range to compensate and allows SHRTFT to return to a value near 0%. Input from the ECT or CHT, IAT, and MAF sensors is required to activate the fuel trim system, which in turn activates the Fuel System Monitor. Once activated, the Fuel System Monitor looks for the fuel trim tables to reach the adaptive clip (adaptive limit) and LAMBSE to exceed a calibrated limit. The Fuel System Monitor will store the appropriate DTC when a fault is detected as described below. ^ The H025 detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and provides the PCM with feedback indicating a rich or lean condition. ^ A correction factor is added to the fuel injector pulsewidth calculation according to the Long and Short Term Fuel Trims as needed to compensate for variations in the fuel system. ^ When deviation in the parameter LAMBSE increases, air/fuel control suffers and emissions increase. When LAMBSE exceeds a calibrated limit and the fuel trim table has clipped (reached adaptive limit), the Fuel System Monitor sets a DTC. ^ The MIL is activated after a fault is detected on two consecutive OBD II drive cycles. The Fuel System Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows: ^ Fuel Delivery Error - P0148 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 1522 ^ Lean shift in fuel system operation - P0171 (Bank 1) and P0174 (Bank 2) ^ Rich shift in fuel system operation - P0172 (Bank 1) and P0175 (Bank 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 1523 E2.) Fuel System Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes F. Diagnostic Service Tips 1. Always reset KAM after performing a repair: After performing a repair on a vehicle with the MIL on, and/or DTCs present, always clear KAM. When a malfunction is present, the PCM adapts (attempts to correct) for this condition. Once the vehicle has been repaired, if the KAM is not reset, the PCM will once again have to adapt back to the normal operating conditions. Clearing the KAM will erase what the PCM has learned, so the PCM will be able to start with "base tables". 2. Always view and record Freeze Frame Data: Freeze Frame Data can be a valuable asset in duplicating and diagnosing concerns. This data (a snapshot of certain PID values, recorded at the time the MIL was activated) indicates the manner in which the vehicle was being driven at the time the fault occurred. This can be especially useful on intermittent concerns. Freeze Frame Data, in some cases, can also help to isolate possible areas of concern, as well as ruling out others. Always record (write down) the Freeze Frame Data. 3. Multiple DTCs (with the same meaning): When multiple (paired) DTCs with the same meaning are set for multiple sensors, it is unlikely that replacing both HO2S sensors will resolve the concern. In most cases, there will be another issue that is causing the codes. Examples of multiple (paired) DTCs: (P0135/P0155), (P0141/P0161), (P1131/P1151), (P1132/P1152). To further clarify this, see the more detailed scenario as follows: A vehicle comes in with a MIL On concern. KOEO self test reveals DTCs P0135 and P0155 (HTR-11 and HTR-21 circuit malfunction), with no other DTCs present. The most likely cause of these DTCs would be something in the heater power circuit that both of these HO2S sensors have in common (Example: open or shorted heater circuit wiring or splice). It is highly unlikely that multiple sensors would fail at the same time. When multiple DTCs of this nature are encountered, reviewing the appropriate wiring diagram(s) can help to isolate possible areas of concern. When reviewing the wiring diagram, look for things that the affected sensors have in common. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 1524 In this example, the most likely cause of DTCs P0135 and P0155 (with no other DTCs present) would be a concern with Splice "B" (refer to Figure 2). NOTE THIS ILLUSTRATION IS ONLY AN EXAMPLE. SPLICE NAMES "A", "B", AND "C" ARE USED IN THIS EXAMPLE FOR CONVENIENCE ONLY. ON AN ACTUAL VEHICLE, SPLICE NAMES WILL DEPEND ON THE CIRCUIT NUMBER FOR THE VEHICLE UNDER REPAIR. NOTE ALSO THAT THIS FIGURE IS NOT INTENDED TO SHOW ALL SPLICES/CONNECTIONS ON ALL VEHICLES. OTHER EEC CIRCUITS, NOT SHOWN, MAY ALSO BE SPLICED IN WITH THE CIRCUITS SHOWN. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 1525 4. View H025 PID data carefully: NGS PIDs for HO2S sensors that do not exist (with certain exhaust configurations) will show a value of "0" volts (refer to Figures 3 and 4). In this example, the vehicle (equipped with a 4-cylinder engine) has one upstream and one downstream HO2S. Notice that the NGS (scan tool) display shows two upstream and two downstream HO2S PIDs, and that the "unused" HO2S sensor PIDs display "0" volts. 5. H025 sensors measure oxygen in the exhaust, not fuel: The exhaust gas condition reported by the HO2S sensor is based on the presence of oxygen in the exhaust, not the presence of unburned fuel. Example: In the event of an ignition-related misfire, you might expect a rich HO2S reading, due to the amount of unburned fuel in the exhaust system. However, there is also a large amount of unburned oxygen, since no combustion took place in the misfiring cylinder. Since the H025 senses oxygen only, it would report a lean condition in this particular situation. F2.) Tips Related to Heated Oxygen Sensor (H025) Monitor 1. OBD II Response Rate Monitor: The OBD II Response Rate Monitor (P0133/P0153) is only run at vehicle speeds between approximately 50-95 km/h (30-60 mph), during steady-state conditions. The test lasts approximately 6 seconds. Therefore, P0133/P0153 cannot be diagnosed at idle in the repair bay. 2. Do not compare H025 switch rate - Bank-to-Bank or vehicle-to-vehicle: Different H025 switch rates, from Bank-to-Bank, are considered normal. The H025 switch rate, from one Bank to the other, should not be compared as a gauge of the H025's ability to switch/react. The PCM is continuously adjusting spark and fuel in reaction to engine operating conditions (rpm, load, air flow, throttle angle, etc.). The PCM is also continuously adapting to certain conditions (customer driving habits, engine and component wear, etc.). F3.) Tips Related to Catalyst Efficiency Monitor 1. Determining catalyst efficiency/switch ratio: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 1526 The upstream H025 sensors will have a high switch frequency, due to normal closed loop fuel control. With an efficient catalyst, the downstream H025 will have a low switch frequency. The switch ratio is determined by dividing the number of downstream switches by the number of upstream switches over a given period of time. As the catalyst ages (or if the catalyst is damaged or contaminated), the downstream switches will increase. When the downstream switch rate crosses a threshold value (approximately 0.75 switch ratio), a code is stored (P0420 and/or P0430) and the MIL illuminates (refer to Figures 5 and 6). NOTE IF A CATALYST IS DETERMINED TO HAVE LOW EFFICIENCY AND REQUIRES REPLACEMENT, REPLACEMENT OF THE DOWNSTREAM H025 SENSORS WILL NOT BE NECESSARY. 2. Use care in handling H025 sensors: In the event of catalyst replacement, use care in the handling of H025 sensors to prevent damage or contamination. Do not use power tools in the removal or installation of sensors. Use a 22mm wrench or crow foot to remove and install H025 sensors; do not use slotted sockets, as these sockets may damage wires. H025 sensors should be torqued to 41 +/- 5 N.m (30 +/- 4 lb-ft). 3. Do not replace downstream HO2S sensors (H02S12/H02S22) for DTCs P0420 and/or P0430: When diagnosing a vehicle with a customer concern of MIL On and DTCs P0420/P0430 in continuous memory, do not replace the downstream HO2S sensors (H02S12/H02S22). Damaged or malfunctioning downstream HO2S sensors will not cause these DTCs to be set. Always verify the vehicle concern, then perform the pinpoint diagnostics in the appropriate PC/ED Service Manual. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 1527 F4.) Tips Related to the Fuel System Monitor 1. HO2S sensors are not likely to be the cause of adaptive DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175: Most warranty-returned HO2S sensors (replaced for these DTCs) are found to function normally. Additional related DTCs will normally be present if there is a concern with the HO2S sensors. Do not replace an HO2S sensor unless verified through pinpoint diagnostic tests found in the PC/ED Service Manual. 2. DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174, and P0175 are not related to downstream H028 sensors: When diagnosing a vehicle with a MIL On and DTC(s) P0171, P0172, P0174, and/or P0175 in continuous memory, do not replace the downstream HO2S sensors. These DTCs have no connection to the downstream HO2S sensor function nor its diagnosis for faults. Always verify the vehicle concern, then perform the pinpoint diagnostics from the appropriate PC/ED Service Manual. 3. Diagnosing lean conditions and lean DTCs P0171, P0174: Freeze Frame Data can often help to identify the type of lean condition, even if the fault is intermittent, by indicating how the vehicle was being driven when the fault occurred. Diagnosis of lean conditions and lean adaptive DTCs can be difficult, especially if the concern is intermittent. Verifying the concern is extremely important. There are different types of lean conditions. The ability to identify the type of lean condition causing the concern can be crucial to a correct diagnosis. When DTCs P0171 and P0174 are both present, there is a strong likelihood of another concern being present: a. Vacuum leaks/unmetered air: In this type of condition, the engine may actually run lean of stoichiometry (14.7:1 air/fuel ratio) if the PCM is not able to compensate enough to correct for the condition. This condition is typically caused by air entering the engine through an abnormal source (opening), or due to a MAF malfunction. In this situation, the volume of air entering the engine is actually greater than what the MAF is indicating to the PCM. Vacuum leaks will normally be most apparent when high manifold vacuum is present, during idle or light throttle. If Freeze Frame Data indicates that the fault occurred at idle, a check for vacuum leaks/unmetered air when the engine is cold might be the best starting point. Examples: Loose, leaking or disconnected vacuum lines, intake manifold gaskets or 0-rings, throttle body gaskets, brake booster, air inlet tube, stuck/frozen/aftermarket PCV valve, unseated engine oil dipstick, MAF reading lower than normal, etc. b. Insufficient fueling: In this type of condition, the engine may actually run lean of stoichiometry (14.7:1 air/fuel ratio) if the PCM is not able to compensate enough to correct for the condition. This condition is typically caused by a fuel delivery system concern that restricts or limits the amount of fuel being delivered to the engine. This condition will normally be most apparent when the engine is under a heavy load, when a higher volume of fuel is required. If Freeze Frame Data indicates that the fault occurred under a heavy load, a check of the fuel delivery system (checking fuel pressure with engine under a load) might be the best starting point. Examples: Low fuel pressure (fuel pump, fuel filter, fuel leaks, restricted fuel supply lines), fuel injector concerns, etc. c. Exhaust system leaks: In this type of condition, the engine may actually be running near stoichiometry (14.7:1 air/fuel ratio), but the exhaust gas mixture will be lean. This condition is caused by oxygen-rich air entering the exhaust system through an external source. This condition will cause the exhaust gas mixture to be lean, even though the actual combustion in the engine may not be. Examples: Exhaust system leaks upstream or near HO2S, malfunctioning Secondary Air Injection system d. MAF concerns: If a MAF concern is suspected, see TSB 98-23-10. 4. Checking fuel pressure: Check fuel pressure with engine under a load when diagnosing a lean concern. A partially plugged fuel filter can be difficult to detect and can be easily overlooked if fuel pressure is only checked at idle. The same is true for other types of fuel supply concerns (e.g., bent or kinked lines, degraded fuel pump). At idle, an engine requires only a small volume of fuel. Due to the fact that there is a small volume of fuel needed at idle, a restriction in the fuel supply line in many cases will not cause the fuel pressure to be low. When the vehicle is under a load, the engine requires much more fuel than at idle. Under a load, a restriction in the fuel supply line will prevent the high rate of fuel flow that is needed to maintain the correct fuel pressure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1528 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Heated Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Find and Use These Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams ^ System Diagrams ^ Grounds Diagrams Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1531 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow. Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the diagram. Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be found. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1532 Fuse And Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. Fuse Circuits Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery. Ground Distribution Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text "partial". Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1533 Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of (1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces). The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number. Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the way out by a spring. Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control. A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the way in. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. circuit Numbering Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification Circuit Numbering: Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting electrical circuits. Function: The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter "S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit. System-Connection (including branch): Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate wires in one connection with the same function. Wire Identification (wire colors): The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1534 Wire Identification Example Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know the following information about the wire: Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit System: AC = Headlamp leveling Connection: 3 = Switch connection A = Branch Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe). Circuit Identification Charts Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1535 Circuit Identification Chart System Codes Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1536 Sample Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1537 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1538 Sample Diagram Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1539 Circuit Identification Chart SYSTEM CODES CHART Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1540 SAMPLE DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1541 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1542 Sample Diagram Electrical Symbols ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1543 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1544 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1545 Types of Diagrams Shown Types of Diagrams Shown Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them. Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations. Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system information suitable for diagnostic operations. Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a relationship to them, are also included. All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding of the system component interactions. Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type. Wire Color Code Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1546 Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1547 Heated Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1548 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1549 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1550 Heated Oxygen Sensor: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1551 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor Heated Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor Heated Oxygen Sensor Monitor The Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor is an on-board strategy designed to monitor the HO2S sensors for a malfunction or deterioration which can affect emissions. The fuel control or upstream HO2S is checked for proper output voltage and response rate (the time it takes to switch from lean to rich or rich to lean). Downstream HO2S used for Catalyst Monitor are also monitored for proper output voltage. The following illustration shows that input is required from the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) or Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT), Intake Air Temperature (IAT), Mass Air Flow (MAF) and Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensors to activate the HO2S Monitor. The Fuel System Monitor and Misfire Detection Monitor must also have completed successfully before the HO2S Monitor is enabled. 1. The HO2S sensor senses the oxygen content in the exhaust flow and outputs a voltage between zero and 1.0 volt. Lean of stoichiometric (air/fuel ratio of approximately 14.7:1), the HO2S will generate a voltage between zero and 0.45 volt. Rich of stoichiometric, the HO2S will generate a voltage between 0.45 and 1.0 volt. The HO2S Monitor evaluates both the upstream (fuel control) and downstream (Catalyst Monitor) HO2S for proper function. 2. Once the HO2S Monitor is enabled, the upstream HO2S signal voltage amplitude and response frequency are checked. Excessive voltage is determined by comparing the HO2S signal voltage to a maximum calibratable threshold voltage. A fixed frequency closed loop fuel control routine is executed and the upstream HO2S voltage amplitude and output response frequency are observed. A sample of the upstream HO2S signal is evaluated to determine if the sensor is capable of switching or has a slow response rate. A HO2S heater circuit fault is determined by turning the heater on and off and looking for a corresponding change in the Output State Monitor (OSM) and by measuring the current going through the heater circuit. The HO2S Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows: The Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTCs) associated with HO2S lack of switching are DTCs P1130, P1131, P1132, P1150, P1151 and P1152. The DTCs associated with HO2S slow response rate are DTCs P0133 and P0153. The DTCs associated with HO2S signal circuit malfunction are DTCs P0131, P0136, P0148, P0151 and P0156. The DTCs associated with a HO2S heater circuit malfunction are DTCs P0135, P0141, P0155 and P0161. The Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) associated with the downstream HO2S not running in on-demand is DTC P1127. The DTCs associated with swapped HO2S connectors are DTCs P1128 and P1129. 3. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) is activated after a fault is detected on two consecutive drive cycles. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor > Page 1554 Heated Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation PCM Inputs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) The Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) (Figure 33) detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in the exhaust produces a low voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich air/fuel ratio) produces a high voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts. Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to temperatures of 800°C (1400°F). At approximately 300°C (600°F) the engine can enter closed loop operation. The Vehicle Power (VPWR) circuit supplies voltage to the heater and the PCM will complete the ground when the proper conditions occur. For model year 1998 a new HO2S heater and heater control system are installed on some vehicles. The high power heater reaches closed loop fuel control temperatures. The use of this heater requires that the HO2S heater control be duty cycled, to prevent damage to the heater. The 6 ohm design is not interchangeable with new style 3.3 ohm heater. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Heated Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) EGO Sensor Wrench SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Using the special tool, remove the HO2S. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the HO2S with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the HO2S to aid in installation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 1557 Heated Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor EGO Sensor Wrench SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL EGO Sensor Wrench 1. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the catalyst monitor sensor with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor to aid in installation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1558 EGO Sensor Wrench Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Find and Use These Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams ^ System Diagrams ^ Grounds Diagrams Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1563 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow. Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the diagram. Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be found. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1564 Fuse And Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. Fuse Circuits Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery. Ground Distribution Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text "partial". Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1565 Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of (1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces). The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number. Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the way out by a spring. Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control. A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the way in. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. circuit Numbering Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification Circuit Numbering: Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting electrical circuits. Function: The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter "S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit. System-Connection (including branch): Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate wires in one connection with the same function. Wire Identification (wire colors): The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1566 Wire Identification Example Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know the following information about the wire: Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit System: AC = Headlamp leveling Connection: 3 = Switch connection A = Branch Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe). Circuit Identification Charts Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1567 Circuit Identification Chart System Codes Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1568 Sample Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1569 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1570 Sample Diagram Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1571 Circuit Identification Chart SYSTEM CODES CHART Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1572 SAMPLE DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1573 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1574 Sample Diagram Electrical Symbols ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1575 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1576 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1577 Types of Diagrams Shown Types of Diagrams Shown Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them. Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations. Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system information suitable for diagnostic operations. Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a relationship to them, are also included. All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding of the system component interactions. Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type. Wire Color Code Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1578 Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1579 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1580 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1581 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1582 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The Power Steering Pressure (PSP) switch (Figure 38) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust transmission Electronic Pressure Control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Page 1585 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Sensor POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The Power Steering Pressure (PSP) sensor (Figure 39) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM will change as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust transmission Electronic Pressure Control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect Technical Service Bulletin # 02M01S6 Date: 040831 Attachment I - Administrative Information Customer Satisfaction Program 02M01-S6 Certain Vehicles Equipped with a Tube-Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Additional EGR Pressure Sensor Warranty Coverage OASIS You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this program. Note: Submission of an "M" program claim will not remove the vehicle from OASIS because the affected vehicles are eligible for multiple repairs if the affected condition reoccurs during the extended warranty time/mileage period. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line that the FSA is claimed on. CLAIMING INSTRUCTIONS FOR REPAIRS WITH A REPAIR DATE ON OR AFTER 10/27/03 Claims for all vehicles that are within the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage must be submitted as a warranty repair. ACESII will not accept claims for reimbursement under the 02M01 program for vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage. Vehicles that have branded titles are eligible for this repair under the 02M01 program. Vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage Claims are to be submitted as a normal warranty claim in accordance with TSB 04-11-01. Vehicles beyond New Vehicle Warranty Coverage (including branded titled vehicles) Claims are to be submitted following program 02M01 guidelines. Future Warranty Extension Customer Satisfaction Programs (CSP) Future Warranty Extension CSPs will follow these claiming instructions; only those vehicles outside the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage will be submitted as a CSP type repair. OWNER REFUNDS Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid repairs made on or before the last day of the month of the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair was made away from the servicing dealer). Failure of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460) will not have an impact on any other component of the vehicle. Therefore, refunds will only be granted for the replacement of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460). All supporting documentation must be retained in accordance with the Warranty and Policy Manual. Refer to ACESII manual for refund information. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. Attachment II - Labor Allowances and Parts Ordering Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 1594 LABOR ALLOWANCES [NEW] NOTE: If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service Support Center. Special Notes: ^ 02M01C labor operation is in effect for repairs performed on or after 10/27/03. ^ Diagnostics performed beyond retrieving continuous DTC will not be paid for under this program. ^ Pinpoint diagnostics are not required to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor; therefore labor time has been adjusted accordingly. ^ Due to the use of specific DTCs to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor, this program will not cover any other continuous DTCs; normal vehicle warranty would apply for any other DTCs. ^ There will be no related damage claims allowed for this program. PARTS REQUIREMENTS Parts will not be direct shipped for this program. Order your parts requirement through normal order processing. PARTS REQUIREMENTS/ORDERING INFORMATION NOTE: If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service Support Center. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 1595 DEALER PRICE For latest prices, check DOES II or updated price book. PARTS RETENTION Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures." EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: If a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine and a dash-mounted EGR pressure sensor is encountered, call the Special Service Support Center. 1. Retrieve continuous DTCs. NOTE: Replace the EGR pressure sensor only if one or more of the following continuous DTCs are present: ^ P1400 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE DETECTED ^ P1401 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE DETECTED ^ P0401- EGR FLOW INSUFFICIENT DETECTED ^ P0402- EGR FLOW EXCESSIVE DETECTED Any other DTC present is not covered by this program. 2. If one or more of the DTCs listed above is present, replace the EGR pressure sensor (9J460) as follows: a) Key off. b) Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the EGR pressure sensor from the EGR tube. c) Install the new EGR pressure sensor onto the EGR tube and connect the electrical connector. Note: Refer to Section 303-08 of the appropriate workshop manual if additional information is required. 3. Clear continuous DTCs. 4. Perform KOEO and KOER self tests. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 1596 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 1597 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 1598 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect Technical Service Bulletin # 02M01S6 Date: 040831 Attachment I - Administrative Information Customer Satisfaction Program 02M01-S6 Certain Vehicles Equipped with a Tube-Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Additional EGR Pressure Sensor Warranty Coverage OASIS You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this program. Note: Submission of an "M" program claim will not remove the vehicle from OASIS because the affected vehicles are eligible for multiple repairs if the affected condition reoccurs during the extended warranty time/mileage period. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line that the FSA is claimed on. CLAIMING INSTRUCTIONS FOR REPAIRS WITH A REPAIR DATE ON OR AFTER 10/27/03 Claims for all vehicles that are within the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage must be submitted as a warranty repair. ACESII will not accept claims for reimbursement under the 02M01 program for vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage. Vehicles that have branded titles are eligible for this repair under the 02M01 program. Vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage Claims are to be submitted as a normal warranty claim in accordance with TSB 04-11-01. Vehicles beyond New Vehicle Warranty Coverage (including branded titled vehicles) Claims are to be submitted following program 02M01 guidelines. Future Warranty Extension Customer Satisfaction Programs (CSP) Future Warranty Extension CSPs will follow these claiming instructions; only those vehicles outside the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage will be submitted as a CSP type repair. OWNER REFUNDS Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid repairs made on or before the last day of the month of the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair was made away from the servicing dealer). Failure of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460) will not have an impact on any other component of the vehicle. Therefore, refunds will only be granted for the replacement of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460). All supporting documentation must be retained in accordance with the Warranty and Policy Manual. Refer to ACESII manual for refund information. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. Attachment II - Labor Allowances and Parts Ordering Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 1604 LABOR ALLOWANCES [NEW] NOTE: If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service Support Center. Special Notes: ^ 02M01C labor operation is in effect for repairs performed on or after 10/27/03. ^ Diagnostics performed beyond retrieving continuous DTC will not be paid for under this program. ^ Pinpoint diagnostics are not required to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor; therefore labor time has been adjusted accordingly. ^ Due to the use of specific DTCs to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor, this program will not cover any other continuous DTCs; normal vehicle warranty would apply for any other DTCs. ^ There will be no related damage claims allowed for this program. PARTS REQUIREMENTS Parts will not be direct shipped for this program. Order your parts requirement through normal order processing. PARTS REQUIREMENTS/ORDERING INFORMATION NOTE: If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service Support Center. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 1605 DEALER PRICE For latest prices, check DOES II or updated price book. PARTS RETENTION Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures." EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: If a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine and a dash-mounted EGR pressure sensor is encountered, call the Special Service Support Center. 1. Retrieve continuous DTCs. NOTE: Replace the EGR pressure sensor only if one or more of the following continuous DTCs are present: ^ P1400 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE DETECTED ^ P1401 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE DETECTED ^ P0401- EGR FLOW INSUFFICIENT DETECTED ^ P0402- EGR FLOW EXCESSIVE DETECTED Any other DTC present is not covered by this program. 2. If one or more of the DTCs listed above is present, replace the EGR pressure sensor (9J460) as follows: a) Key off. b) Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the EGR pressure sensor from the EGR tube. c) Install the new EGR pressure sensor onto the EGR tube and connect the electrical connector. Note: Refer to Section 303-08 of the appropriate workshop manual if additional information is required. 3. Clear continuous DTCs. 4. Perform KOEO and KOER self tests. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 1606 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 1607 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 1608 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set Article No. 04-11-1 06/08/2004 DRIVEABILITY - STREAMLINED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR VEHICLES WITH MIL ON AND DTCS P0401, P0402, P1400 OR P1401 - ADDITIONAL SYMPTOMS MAY INCLUDE RUNS ROUGH, LACKS POWER, SURGE, POOR FUEL ECONOMY FORD: 2000-2002 TAURUS 2001-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, FOCUS, MUSTANG 2001 EXPLORER USPS 2001-2002 E SERIES, ESCAPE, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 2002-2003 EXPLORER LINCOLN: 2001-2002 TOWN CAR MERCURY: 2000-2002 SABLE 2001-2002 COUGAR, GRAND MARQUIS 2002-2003 MOUNTAINEER This article supersedes TSB 04-3-1 to update service part information and applications. ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) "ON" with or without the following symptoms: Rough Running, Lack of Power, Surge or Poor Fuel Economy, along with diagnostic trouble codes (DTC's) P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401. This may be caused by an intermittently functioning tube-mounted delta pressure feedback EGR (DPFE) sensor (Figure 1). ACTION For vehicles equipped with a tube-mounted DPFE sensor, perform the following diagnostic procedure and repair action. This procedure supersedes the diagnostic procedure in the PC/ED Manual for the issue described above. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 1613 NOTE ALL LISTED APPLICATIONS CAN NOW BE SERVICED WITH DPFE SENSOR 4U7Z-9J460-AA NOTE THIS ARTICLE APPLIES TO THE FULL MODEL YEAR FOR ALL VEHICLES SHOWN EXCEPT THE FOLLOWING: ^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L DOHC - Built After May 2002 ^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L OHV - Built After February 2002 ^ 2002 Econoline And F-150 4.2L OHV - Built After April 9, 2002 ^ 2003 Explorer 4dr/Mountaineer 4.6L SOHC - Built After February 2, 2003 SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Retrieve continuous DTC(s). 2. If P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401 are present, turn ignition OFF and replace the DPFE sensor. 3. Clear continuous DTC(s). 4. Perform key on engine off (KOEO) and key on engine running (KOER) self-test. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 1614 Labor Operations Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9J460 42 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 1615 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set Article No. 04-11-1 06/08/2004 DRIVEABILITY - STREAMLINED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR VEHICLES WITH MIL ON AND DTCS P0401, P0402, P1400 OR P1401 - ADDITIONAL SYMPTOMS MAY INCLUDE RUNS ROUGH, LACKS POWER, SURGE, POOR FUEL ECONOMY FORD: 2000-2002 TAURUS 2001-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, FOCUS, MUSTANG 2001 EXPLORER USPS 2001-2002 E SERIES, ESCAPE, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 2002-2003 EXPLORER LINCOLN: 2001-2002 TOWN CAR MERCURY: 2000-2002 SABLE 2001-2002 COUGAR, GRAND MARQUIS 2002-2003 MOUNTAINEER This article supersedes TSB 04-3-1 to update service part information and applications. ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) "ON" with or without the following symptoms: Rough Running, Lack of Power, Surge or Poor Fuel Economy, along with diagnostic trouble codes (DTC's) P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401. This may be caused by an intermittently functioning tube-mounted delta pressure feedback EGR (DPFE) sensor (Figure 1). ACTION For vehicles equipped with a tube-mounted DPFE sensor, perform the following diagnostic procedure and repair action. This procedure supersedes the diagnostic procedure in the PC/ED Manual for the issue described above. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 1621 NOTE ALL LISTED APPLICATIONS CAN NOW BE SERVICED WITH DPFE SENSOR 4U7Z-9J460-AA NOTE THIS ARTICLE APPLIES TO THE FULL MODEL YEAR FOR ALL VEHICLES SHOWN EXCEPT THE FOLLOWING: ^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L DOHC - Built After May 2002 ^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L OHV - Built After February 2002 ^ 2002 Econoline And F-150 4.2L OHV - Built After April 9, 2002 ^ 2003 Explorer 4dr/Mountaineer 4.6L SOHC - Built After February 2, 2003 SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Retrieve continuous DTC(s). 2. If P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401 are present, turn ignition OFF and replace the DPFE sensor. 3. Clear continuous DTC(s). 4. Perform key on engine off (KOEO) and key on engine running (KOER) self-test. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 1622 Labor Operations Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9J460 42 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 1623 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1624 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1625 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 86) is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback sensor receives this signal through two hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the aluminum differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1626 Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 87) is identical in operation as the larger metal or plastic DPFE sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the underside of the sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1627 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor by sliding up and off the EGR tube. NOTE: The 3.0L (4V) engine is shown, the 2.0L Zetec engine is similar. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1631 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > PCM Inputs Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation PCM Inputs THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Typical Throttle Position (TP) Sensor The Throttle Position (TP) sensor (Figure 42) is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a three-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases corrosion resistance on terminals and increases connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, four operating conditions are determined by the PCM from the TP. Those conditions are closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration), part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration), wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank), and throttle angle rate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > PCM Inputs > Page 1634 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Systems THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is monitored by the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) II system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government regulations. For additional information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System Hardware-PCM Inputs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications Digital Transmission Range Sensor: Specifications Park/neutral position (PNP) switch 18 ft.lb Transmission range (TR) sensor bolts 9 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1638 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1639 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1640 Digital Transmission Range Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Special Tools Special Tool(s) Removal 1. Place the vehicle in NEUTRAL. 2. Disconnect the battery cables. 3. Remove the battery and tray. 4. Disconnect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAP) sensor. 5. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1641 6. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 7. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the thermostat housing to gain access to the transmission range (TR) sensor. Remove the thermostat housing. 8. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor. 1. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the TR sensor. Installation 1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position. Install the transmission range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1642 2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts. ^ Connect the electrical connector. 3. Install the thermostat housing. 4. Install the air cleaner assembly. 5. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover. 6. Connect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAF) sensor. 7. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or incorrect routing position. Install the battery and tray. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1643 8. NOTE: When the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, some abnormal drive symptoms can occur while the vehicle relearns its adaptive strategy. The vehicle may need to be driven 160 km (100 miles) or more to relearn the strategy. Connect the battery cables. 9. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should be active only in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications Vehicle Speed Sensor: Specifications Vehicle speed sensor (VSS) bolt 62 in.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1647 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1648 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1649 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) The Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (Figure 45) is a variable reluctance or Hall-effect sensor that generates a waveform with a frequency that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the vehicle is moving at a relatively low velocity, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as fuel injection, ignition control, transmission/transaxle shift scheduling and torque converter clutch scheduling. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1650 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the VSS. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect Technical Service Bulletin # 02M01S6 Date: 040831 Attachment I - Administrative Information Customer Satisfaction Program 02M01-S6 Certain Vehicles Equipped with a Tube-Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Additional EGR Pressure Sensor Warranty Coverage OASIS You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this program. Note: Submission of an "M" program claim will not remove the vehicle from OASIS because the affected vehicles are eligible for multiple repairs if the affected condition reoccurs during the extended warranty time/mileage period. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line that the FSA is claimed on. CLAIMING INSTRUCTIONS FOR REPAIRS WITH A REPAIR DATE ON OR AFTER 10/27/03 Claims for all vehicles that are within the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage must be submitted as a warranty repair. ACESII will not accept claims for reimbursement under the 02M01 program for vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage. Vehicles that have branded titles are eligible for this repair under the 02M01 program. Vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage Claims are to be submitted as a normal warranty claim in accordance with TSB 04-11-01. Vehicles beyond New Vehicle Warranty Coverage (including branded titled vehicles) Claims are to be submitted following program 02M01 guidelines. Future Warranty Extension Customer Satisfaction Programs (CSP) Future Warranty Extension CSPs will follow these claiming instructions; only those vehicles outside the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage will be submitted as a CSP type repair. OWNER REFUNDS Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid repairs made on or before the last day of the month of the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair was made away from the servicing dealer). Failure of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460) will not have an impact on any other component of the vehicle. Therefore, refunds will only be granted for the replacement of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460). All supporting documentation must be retained in accordance with the Warranty and Policy Manual. Refer to ACESII manual for refund information. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. Attachment II - Labor Allowances and Parts Ordering Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 1660 LABOR ALLOWANCES [NEW] NOTE: If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service Support Center. Special Notes: ^ 02M01C labor operation is in effect for repairs performed on or after 10/27/03. ^ Diagnostics performed beyond retrieving continuous DTC will not be paid for under this program. ^ Pinpoint diagnostics are not required to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor; therefore labor time has been adjusted accordingly. ^ Due to the use of specific DTCs to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor, this program will not cover any other continuous DTCs; normal vehicle warranty would apply for any other DTCs. ^ There will be no related damage claims allowed for this program. PARTS REQUIREMENTS Parts will not be direct shipped for this program. Order your parts requirement through normal order processing. PARTS REQUIREMENTS/ORDERING INFORMATION NOTE: If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service Support Center. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 1661 DEALER PRICE For latest prices, check DOES II or updated price book. PARTS RETENTION Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures." EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: If a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine and a dash-mounted EGR pressure sensor is encountered, call the Special Service Support Center. 1. Retrieve continuous DTCs. NOTE: Replace the EGR pressure sensor only if one or more of the following continuous DTCs are present: ^ P1400 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE DETECTED ^ P1401 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE DETECTED ^ P0401- EGR FLOW INSUFFICIENT DETECTED ^ P0402- EGR FLOW EXCESSIVE DETECTED Any other DTC present is not covered by this program. 2. If one or more of the DTCs listed above is present, replace the EGR pressure sensor (9J460) as follows: a) Key off. b) Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the EGR pressure sensor from the EGR tube. c) Install the new EGR pressure sensor onto the EGR tube and connect the electrical connector. Note: Refer to Section 303-08 of the appropriate workshop manual if additional information is required. 3. Clear continuous DTCs. 4. Perform KOEO and KOER self tests. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 1662 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 1663 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 1664 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect Technical Service Bulletin # 02M01S6 Date: 040831 Attachment I - Administrative Information Customer Satisfaction Program 02M01-S6 Certain Vehicles Equipped with a Tube-Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Additional EGR Pressure Sensor Warranty Coverage OASIS You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this program. Note: Submission of an "M" program claim will not remove the vehicle from OASIS because the affected vehicles are eligible for multiple repairs if the affected condition reoccurs during the extended warranty time/mileage period. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line that the FSA is claimed on. CLAIMING INSTRUCTIONS FOR REPAIRS WITH A REPAIR DATE ON OR AFTER 10/27/03 Claims for all vehicles that are within the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage must be submitted as a warranty repair. ACESII will not accept claims for reimbursement under the 02M01 program for vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage. Vehicles that have branded titles are eligible for this repair under the 02M01 program. Vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage Claims are to be submitted as a normal warranty claim in accordance with TSB 04-11-01. Vehicles beyond New Vehicle Warranty Coverage (including branded titled vehicles) Claims are to be submitted following program 02M01 guidelines. Future Warranty Extension Customer Satisfaction Programs (CSP) Future Warranty Extension CSPs will follow these claiming instructions; only those vehicles outside the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage will be submitted as a CSP type repair. OWNER REFUNDS Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid repairs made on or before the last day of the month of the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair was made away from the servicing dealer). Failure of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460) will not have an impact on any other component of the vehicle. Therefore, refunds will only be granted for the replacement of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460). All supporting documentation must be retained in accordance with the Warranty and Policy Manual. Refer to ACESII manual for refund information. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. Attachment II - Labor Allowances and Parts Ordering Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 1670 LABOR ALLOWANCES [NEW] NOTE: If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service Support Center. Special Notes: ^ 02M01C labor operation is in effect for repairs performed on or after 10/27/03. ^ Diagnostics performed beyond retrieving continuous DTC will not be paid for under this program. ^ Pinpoint diagnostics are not required to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor; therefore labor time has been adjusted accordingly. ^ Due to the use of specific DTCs to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor, this program will not cover any other continuous DTCs; normal vehicle warranty would apply for any other DTCs. ^ There will be no related damage claims allowed for this program. PARTS REQUIREMENTS Parts will not be direct shipped for this program. Order your parts requirement through normal order processing. PARTS REQUIREMENTS/ORDERING INFORMATION NOTE: If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service Support Center. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 1671 DEALER PRICE For latest prices, check DOES II or updated price book. PARTS RETENTION Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures." EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: If a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine and a dash-mounted EGR pressure sensor is encountered, call the Special Service Support Center. 1. Retrieve continuous DTCs. NOTE: Replace the EGR pressure sensor only if one or more of the following continuous DTCs are present: ^ P1400 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE DETECTED ^ P1401 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE DETECTED ^ P0401- EGR FLOW INSUFFICIENT DETECTED ^ P0402- EGR FLOW EXCESSIVE DETECTED Any other DTC present is not covered by this program. 2. If one or more of the DTCs listed above is present, replace the EGR pressure sensor (9J460) as follows: a) Key off. b) Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the EGR pressure sensor from the EGR tube. c) Install the new EGR pressure sensor onto the EGR tube and connect the electrical connector. Note: Refer to Section 303-08 of the appropriate workshop manual if additional information is required. 3. Clear continuous DTCs. 4. Perform KOEO and KOER self tests. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 1672 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 1673 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 1674 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set Article No. 04-11-1 06/08/2004 DRIVEABILITY - STREAMLINED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR VEHICLES WITH MIL ON AND DTCS P0401, P0402, P1400 OR P1401 - ADDITIONAL SYMPTOMS MAY INCLUDE RUNS ROUGH, LACKS POWER, SURGE, POOR FUEL ECONOMY FORD: 2000-2002 TAURUS 2001-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, FOCUS, MUSTANG 2001 EXPLORER USPS 2001-2002 E SERIES, ESCAPE, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 2002-2003 EXPLORER LINCOLN: 2001-2002 TOWN CAR MERCURY: 2000-2002 SABLE 2001-2002 COUGAR, GRAND MARQUIS 2002-2003 MOUNTAINEER This article supersedes TSB 04-3-1 to update service part information and applications. ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) "ON" with or without the following symptoms: Rough Running, Lack of Power, Surge or Poor Fuel Economy, along with diagnostic trouble codes (DTC's) P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401. This may be caused by an intermittently functioning tube-mounted delta pressure feedback EGR (DPFE) sensor (Figure 1). ACTION For vehicles equipped with a tube-mounted DPFE sensor, perform the following diagnostic procedure and repair action. This procedure supersedes the diagnostic procedure in the PC/ED Manual for the issue described above. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 1679 NOTE ALL LISTED APPLICATIONS CAN NOW BE SERVICED WITH DPFE SENSOR 4U7Z-9J460-AA NOTE THIS ARTICLE APPLIES TO THE FULL MODEL YEAR FOR ALL VEHICLES SHOWN EXCEPT THE FOLLOWING: ^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L DOHC - Built After May 2002 ^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L OHV - Built After February 2002 ^ 2002 Econoline And F-150 4.2L OHV - Built After April 9, 2002 ^ 2003 Explorer 4dr/Mountaineer 4.6L SOHC - Built After February 2, 2003 SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Retrieve continuous DTC(s). 2. If P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401 are present, turn ignition OFF and replace the DPFE sensor. 3. Clear continuous DTC(s). 4. Perform key on engine off (KOEO) and key on engine running (KOER) self-test. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 1680 Labor Operations Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9J460 42 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 1681 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set Article No. 04-11-1 06/08/2004 DRIVEABILITY - STREAMLINED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR VEHICLES WITH MIL ON AND DTCS P0401, P0402, P1400 OR P1401 - ADDITIONAL SYMPTOMS MAY INCLUDE RUNS ROUGH, LACKS POWER, SURGE, POOR FUEL ECONOMY FORD: 2000-2002 TAURUS 2001-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, FOCUS, MUSTANG 2001 EXPLORER USPS 2001-2002 E SERIES, ESCAPE, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 2002-2003 EXPLORER LINCOLN: 2001-2002 TOWN CAR MERCURY: 2000-2002 SABLE 2001-2002 COUGAR, GRAND MARQUIS 2002-2003 MOUNTAINEER This article supersedes TSB 04-3-1 to update service part information and applications. ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) "ON" with or without the following symptoms: Rough Running, Lack of Power, Surge or Poor Fuel Economy, along with diagnostic trouble codes (DTC's) P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401. This may be caused by an intermittently functioning tube-mounted delta pressure feedback EGR (DPFE) sensor (Figure 1). ACTION For vehicles equipped with a tube-mounted DPFE sensor, perform the following diagnostic procedure and repair action. This procedure supersedes the diagnostic procedure in the PC/ED Manual for the issue described above. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 1687 NOTE ALL LISTED APPLICATIONS CAN NOW BE SERVICED WITH DPFE SENSOR 4U7Z-9J460-AA NOTE THIS ARTICLE APPLIES TO THE FULL MODEL YEAR FOR ALL VEHICLES SHOWN EXCEPT THE FOLLOWING: ^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L DOHC - Built After May 2002 ^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L OHV - Built After February 2002 ^ 2002 Econoline And F-150 4.2L OHV - Built After April 9, 2002 ^ 2003 Explorer 4dr/Mountaineer 4.6L SOHC - Built After February 2, 2003 SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Retrieve continuous DTC(s). 2. If P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401 are present, turn ignition OFF and replace the DPFE sensor. 3. Clear continuous DTC(s). 4. Perform key on engine off (KOEO) and key on engine running (KOER) self-test. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 1688 Labor Operations Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9J460 42 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 1689 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1690 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1691 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 86) is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback sensor receives this signal through two hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the aluminum differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1692 Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 87) is identical in operation as the larger metal or plastic DPFE sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the underside of the sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1693 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor by sliding up and off the EGR tube. NOTE: The 3.0L (4V) engine is shown, the 2.0L Zetec engine is similar. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations > Page 1698 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations > Page 1699 Mass Air Flow Sensor: Description and Operation MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire (Figure 36). If the hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the air mass flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio (Figure 37). This input is also used in determining transmission Electronic Pressure Control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling. Some MAF sensors have Integrated Bypass Technology (IBT) with an integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor. The present applications with IBT are: Focus, Escort (4V), 2.0L Cougar, Escape, Taurus/Sable, Windstar, Explorer/Mountaineer and E-Series. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations > Page 1700 Mass Air Flow Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube. 2. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the four nuts and the MAF sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1704 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1705 Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor The Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) sensor (Figure 31) is a diaphragm strain gauge device in which resistance changes with pressure. The electrical resistance of a strain gauge increases as pressure increases, and decreases as pressure decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to pressure. Strain gauge type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The FRP sensor measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This signal is used by the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulse width and meter fuel to each engine combustion cylinder. Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor The Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) sensor (Figure 32) senses the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The return fuel line to the fuel tank has been deleted in this type of fuel system. The differential fuel/intake manifold pressure together with measured fuel temperature provides an indication of the fuel vapors in the fuel rail. Both differential pressure and temperature feedback signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserve fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to decrease. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1709 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1710 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch The Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) switch (Figure 72) is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump. The purpose of the IFS switch is to shut off the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel ball held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the switch and shuts off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the Owner Guide for the location of the IFS. Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1711 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the cowl side trim panel. 1 Remove the pin-type retainers. 2 Remove the nut. 3 Remove the cowl side trim panel. 2. Remove the Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) switch. 1 Disconnect the connector. 2 Remove the screws and the IFS switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1715 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > PCM Inputs Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation PCM Inputs THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Typical Throttle Position (TP) Sensor The Throttle Position (TP) sensor (Figure 42) is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a three-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases corrosion resistance on terminals and increases connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, four operating conditions are determined by the PCM from the TP. Those conditions are closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration), part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration), wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank), and throttle angle rate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > PCM Inputs > Page 1718 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Systems THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is monitored by the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) II system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government regulations. For additional information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System Hardware-PCM Inputs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1723 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1724 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR The Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston No.1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and used for synchronizing the firing of sequential fuel injectors. The Coil On Plug (COP) Ignition applications also use the CMP signal to select the proper ignition coil to fire. The input circuit to the PCM is referred to as the CMP input or circuit. Typical Hall-Effect Sensor Typical Variable Reluctance Sensor There are two types of CMP sensors: the three pin connector Hall-effect type sensor (Figure 22) and the two pin connector variable reluctance sensor (Figure 23). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1725 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolt. 3 Remove the sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1729 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1730 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (INTEGRATED IGNITION SYSTEMS) Three Different Types Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensors The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The trigger wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L ten cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the trigger wheel, the CKP indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to fixed reference (Figure 25). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1731 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the exhaust manifold. 2. Remove the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolt. 3 Remove the sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the upper steering column shroud. 3. Remove the screws and the lower steering column shroud. 4. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. 5. Using a small tool, depress the ignition lock cylinder release button and pull the ignition lock cylinder out. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1739 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Knock Sensor Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS) The Knock Sensor (KS) (Figure 35) is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1740 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Disconnect the KS electrical connector and remove the connector from the mounting bracket. NOTE: The Knock Sensor (KS) is located on the RH side of the cylinder block. 3. Remove the nut and the KS. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Specifications Impact Sensor: Specifications Side Impact Sensor Bolts 12 Nm Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Air Bag Sensor, Left Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Air Bag Sensor, Left > Page 1747 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Air Bag Sensor, Left Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Air Bag Sensor, Left > Page 1750 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information Impact Sensor: Customer Safety Information WARNING: THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR CORRECT SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information > Page 1753 Impact Sensor: Technician Safety Information WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. ^ THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE AIR BAG SIDE CRASH SENSOR RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 1754 Impact Sensor: Description and Operation WARNING: THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR CORRECT SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION. For this vehicle, the SRS employs three crash sensors. One of the sensors is integral to the RCM and is not serviceable separately. In addition, there are two side crash sensors located in the LH and RH B-pillars. The RCM is mounted on the center tunnel under the instrument panel. Mounting orientation is critical for correct operation of all crash sensors. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor Driver Side Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1757 vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). 2. Remove the steering wheel access cover. 3. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1758 4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the steering column. 5. Open the glove box past its stops. 6. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the Instrument Panel (I/P), disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1759 8. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. 1 Slide and release the passenger side air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. 9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger side air bag module floor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket under the seat. 2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip. 3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1760 12. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 1 Slide and release the driver side air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver side air bag module floor electrical connector. 14. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat bracket. 2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip. 3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 15. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. 17. With the restraint system diagnostic tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure 18. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1761 19. Remove the B-pillar trim panel. 20. Remove the side crash sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolts. 3 Remove the side crash sensor. INSTALLATION WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1762 1. Install the side crash sensor. 1 Position the side crash sensor to the B-pillar. 2 Install the bolts. 3 Connect the side crash sensor electrical connector. WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE AIR BAG SIDE CRASH SENSOR RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. 2. Connect the battery ground cable. 3. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still in place at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure 4. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 5. Install the B-pillar trim panel. 6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 7. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1763 8. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 9. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver side air bag module electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 10. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 11. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1764 onto the bracket under the seat. 12. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag module floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 13. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Install the passenger side air bag module electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 14. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1765 15. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 16. Close the glove box. 17. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the steering column. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 18. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 19. Install the steering wheel access cover. 20. Connect the battery ground cable. 21. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1766 WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 22. Check the restraint system for correct operation. Passenger Side Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1767 ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat Systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). 2. Open the glove box past its stops. 3. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the Instrument Panel (I/P), disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1768 4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 5. Remove the steering wheel access cover. 6. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the steering column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1769 8. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 1 Slide and release the driver side air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver side air bag module floor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat bracket. 2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip. 3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1770 12. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. 1 Slide and release the passenger side air bag module electrical connector locking dip. 2 Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. 13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger side air bag module floor electrical connector. 14. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket under the seat. 2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip. 3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 15. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. 17. With the restraint system diagnostic tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure 18. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1771 19. Remove the B-pillar trim panel. 20. Remove the side crash sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolts. 3 Remove the side crash sensor. INSTALLATION WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat Systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1772 1. Install the side crash sensor. 1 Position the side crash sensor to the B-pillar. 2 Install the bolts. 3 Connect the side crash sensor electrical connector. WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE AIR BAG SIDE CRASH SENSOR RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. 2. Connect the battery ground cable. 3. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still in place at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure 4. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 5. Install the B-pillar trim panel. 6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 7. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1773 8. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag module floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 9. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Install the passenger side air bag module electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 10. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 11. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1774 the bracket under the seat. 12. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 13. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver side air bag module electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 14. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the steering column. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1775 15. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 16. Install the steering wheel access cover. 17. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 18. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 19. Close the glove box. 20. Connect the battery ground cable. 21. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1776 WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 22. Check the restraint system for correct operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1777 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Weld Nut Repair "J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). NOTE: ^ There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld nut(s). Read both this procedures and Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair. ^ If two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts in this procedure. Weld nuts must be installed in Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor. ^ The following procedure applies to vehicles that have a rectangular hole in the sheet metal that is in close proximity to the missing weld nut. 1. Obtain a "J" nut (part number N623332-S301) or any of the following optional "J" nuts (part numbers: N623342-S101, N800854-S100, N800925-S100). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-S190) or equivalent. 3. Install the "J" nut through the rectangular hole in the sheet metal. 4. Install the crash sensor. NOTE: Be sure the threaded portion of the "J" nut is aligned with the clearance hole in the sheet metal. 5. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications. Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). NOTE: ^ There are two procedures to repairs a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld nut(s). Read both this procedure and Weld Nut Repair-"J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair. ^ Use only this procedure if two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts in Weld Nut Repair-"J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Crash Sensor. ^ Radiator support repair shown, others are similar. 1. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) weld nut (part number N806285-S190). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-S190). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 1778 3. Route a sufficient length of copper welding wire through the weld nut clearance hole and back out an adjacent access hole. 4. Feed the copper welding wire through the weld nut, then through a standard flat washer. 5. Secure the flat washer so that it cannot be pulled off the end of the copper welding wire. 6. Pull the copper welding wire back through the clearance hole, allowing the weld nut and flat washer to follow the copper welding wire through. 7. Position the weld nut to the weld nut clearance hole, firmly pulling on the copper welding wire allowing the secured flat washer to hold the weld nut in position. 8. Holding the weld nut securely in place and using a MIG welder, weld in four places around the edge of the weld nut. 9. Metal finish as required. 10. Verify the nut is securely in place. 11. Install the crash sensor. 12. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications. Stripped Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). 1. Obtain an 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw (part number N802455-S190). 2. Drill out the internal threads of the stripped-out weld nut to 7.37 mm (0.29 in) using a letter "L" size drill bit. 3. Position the crash sensor to the vehicle. 4. Install the 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw into the drilled-out weld nut. 5. Install the remaining attaching screws. 6. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1779 Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Safing Sensor, Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation Safing Sensor: Description and Operation Safing Sensor The Safing Sensor is part of the Restraints Control Module (RCM) and is not serviced separately. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Belt Buckle Switch: > 05-17-11 > Sep > 05 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Customer Interest SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set TSB 05-17-11 09/05/05 RESTRAINT SYSTEM - SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1877 AND/OR B1881 FORD: 2001-2004 Escape This article supersedes TSB 04-24-4 to update the service procedure. ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit an intermittent air bag lamp on and diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1877 and/or B1881. This may be caused by a variation in the electrical continuity between the pins of the driver and/or passenger side wiring harness and the buckle pretensioner connector. If this condition were to occur, the air bag system remains fully functional. ACTION Install a replacement harness connector kit ON BOTH the driver and passenger safety belt buckle pretensioners, even if the DTC is present for only one side. The kit includes improved connector halves to replace the existing connectors on both the body harness and the safety belt buckle pretensioner. One kit is required per side (2 kits per vehicle). Refer to the instruction sheet included in the kit for complete repair procedure. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 051711A 2001-2004 Escape Install 2.0 Hrs. A Replacement Harness Connector On Both The Body Side And Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner Harness For Both Driver And Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioners (Do Not Use With 14056D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7861202 OR 7861203 X2 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle Switch: > 05-17-11 > Sep > 05 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set Seat Belt Buckle Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set TSB 05-17-11 09/05/05 RESTRAINT SYSTEM - SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1877 AND/OR B1881 FORD: 2001-2004 Escape This article supersedes TSB 04-24-4 to update the service procedure. ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit an intermittent air bag lamp on and diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1877 and/or B1881. This may be caused by a variation in the electrical continuity between the pins of the driver and/or passenger side wiring harness and the buckle pretensioner connector. If this condition were to occur, the air bag system remains fully functional. ACTION Install a replacement harness connector kit ON BOTH the driver and passenger safety belt buckle pretensioners, even if the DTC is present for only one side. The kit includes improved connector halves to replace the existing connectors on both the body harness and the safety belt buckle pretensioner. One kit is required per side (2 kits per vehicle). Refer to the instruction sheet included in the kit for complete repair procedure. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 051711A 2001-2004 Escape Install 2.0 Hrs. A Replacement Harness Connector On Both The Body Side And Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner Harness For Both Driver And Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioners (Do Not Use With 14056D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7861202 OR 7861203 X2 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1796 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations Clutch Switch: Locations The Clutch Switch is located near the left hand rocker panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cutoff Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cutoff Switch > Page 1803 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the upper steering column shroud. 3. Remove the screws and the lower steering column shroud. 4. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. 5. Using a small tool, depress the ignition lock cylinder release button and pull the ignition lock cylinder out. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Find and Use These Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams ^ System Diagrams ^ Grounds Diagrams Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1814 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow. Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the diagram. Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be found. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1815 Fuse And Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. Fuse Circuits Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery. Ground Distribution Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text "partial". Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1816 Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of (1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces). The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number. Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the way out by a spring. Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control. A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the way in. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. circuit Numbering Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification Circuit Numbering: Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting electrical circuits. Function: The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter "S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit. System-Connection (including branch): Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate wires in one connection with the same function. Wire Identification (wire colors): The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1817 Wire Identification Example Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know the following information about the wire: Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit System: AC = Headlamp leveling Connection: 3 = Switch connection A = Branch Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe). Circuit Identification Charts Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1818 Circuit Identification Chart System Codes Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1819 Sample Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1820 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1821 Sample Diagram Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1822 Circuit Identification Chart SYSTEM CODES CHART Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1823 SAMPLE DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1824 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1825 Sample Diagram Electrical Symbols ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1826 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1827 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1828 Types of Diagrams Shown Types of Diagrams Shown Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them. Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations. Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system information suitable for diagnostic operations. Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a relationship to them, are also included. All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding of the system component interactions. Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type. Wire Color Code Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1829 Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1830 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1831 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1832 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1833 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The Power Steering Pressure (PSP) switch (Figure 38) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust transmission Electronic Pressure Control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Page 1836 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Sensor POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The Power Steering Pressure (PSP) sensor (Figure 39) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM will change as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust transmission Electronic Pressure Control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Transmission Control Switch (TCS) The Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (Figures 43 and 44) signals the PCM with key power whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the Transmission Control Indicator Lamp (TCIL) lights when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. The operator of the vehicle controls the position of the TCS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications Digital Transmission Range Sensor: Specifications Park/neutral position (PNP) switch 18 ft.lb Transmission range (TR) sensor bolts 9 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1845 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1846 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1847 Digital Transmission Range Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Special Tools Special Tool(s) Removal 1. Place the vehicle in NEUTRAL. 2. Disconnect the battery cables. 3. Remove the battery and tray. 4. Disconnect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAP) sensor. 5. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1848 6. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 7. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the thermostat housing to gain access to the transmission range (TR) sensor. Remove the thermostat housing. 8. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor. 1. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the TR sensor. Installation 1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position. Install the transmission range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1849 2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts. ^ Connect the electrical connector. 3. Install the thermostat housing. 4. Install the air cleaner assembly. 5. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover. 6. Connect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAF) sensor. 7. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or incorrect routing position. Install the battery and tray. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1850 8. NOTE: When the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, some abnormal drive symptoms can occur while the vehicle relearns its adaptive strategy. The vehicle may need to be driven 160 km (100 miles) or more to relearn the strategy. Connect the battery cables. 9. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should be active only in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored Transmission Speed Sensor: Customer Interest A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored Article No. 02-2-4 02/04/02 TRANSAXLE - CD4E - HARSH AND DELAYED 1-2/2-3 UPSHIFTS - AFTER TRANSAXLE OR TURBINE SHAFT SPEED SENSOR (TSS) REPLACEMENT - POSSIBLE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTC) 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, AND P1744 FORD: 1994-1997 PROBE 1995-2000 CONTOUR 2001-2002 ESCAPE MERCURY: 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR ISSUE Some vehicles equipped with the CD4E transaxle may exhibit harsh and delayed 1-2/2-3 upshifts along with DTCs for gear ratio errors after the Transaxle or Turbine Shaft Speed sensor (TSS) have been replaced. DTCs may include OBD1 codes 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, or OBD II codes P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, and P1744 ACTION If the condition occurred after servicing the Transaxle or TSS, refer to the following TSS Selection Chart and select the correct TSS for the vehicle application. Note that each TSS has the Ford engineering part number on it. Also note that there is a TSS kit that includes an instruction sheet, TSS sensor and correct bolt. SERVICE PROCEDURE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored > Page 1859 If the condition occurred after replacing the Transaxle or TSS, use the TSS Selection Chart and determine the correct sensor for the vehicle. 1. Remove the existing TSS from the CD4E pump body. 2. Reinstall the original TSS sensor, if available, or install the correct TSS as indicated in the Selection Chart. 3. Clear all codes and verify repair. 4. If the condition still exists, follow normal diagnostics as listed in the appropriate model year Workshop Manual. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 501000, 502000, 503000, 504000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored Article No. 02-2-4 02/04/02 TRANSAXLE - CD4E - HARSH AND DELAYED 1-2/2-3 UPSHIFTS - AFTER TRANSAXLE OR TURBINE SHAFT SPEED SENSOR (TSS) REPLACEMENT - POSSIBLE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTC) 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, AND P1744 FORD: 1994-1997 PROBE 1995-2000 CONTOUR 2001-2002 ESCAPE MERCURY: 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR ISSUE Some vehicles equipped with the CD4E transaxle may exhibit harsh and delayed 1-2/2-3 upshifts along with DTCs for gear ratio errors after the Transaxle or Turbine Shaft Speed sensor (TSS) have been replaced. DTCs may include OBD1 codes 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, or OBD II codes P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, and P1744 ACTION If the condition occurred after servicing the Transaxle or TSS, refer to the following TSS Selection Chart and select the correct TSS for the vehicle application. Note that each TSS has the Ford engineering part number on it. Also note that there is a TSS kit that includes an instruction sheet, TSS sensor and correct bolt. SERVICE PROCEDURE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored > Page 1865 If the condition occurred after replacing the Transaxle or TSS, use the TSS Selection Chart and determine the correct sensor for the vehicle. 1. Remove the existing TSS from the CD4E pump body. 2. Reinstall the original TSS sensor, if available, or install the correct TSS as indicated in the Selection Chart. 3. Clear all codes and verify repair. 4. If the condition still exists, follow normal diagnostics as listed in the appropriate model year Workshop Manual. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 501000, 502000, 503000, 504000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1866 Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications Turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb Output shaft speed (OSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 1869 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 1872 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1873 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED SENSOR The Output Shaft Speed Sensor (OSS), provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft. The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information generated. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel. 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor. ^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector. ^ Remove the bolt. ^ Inspect the OSS bore. 5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 1876 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation. Install the OSS sensor. ^ Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 1877 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel. 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor. 5. Remove the TSS sensor. ^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector. ^ Remove the bolt. ^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore. 6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 1878 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation. Install the TSS sensor. ^ Connect the TSS electrical connector. 2. Remove the drain pan. 3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 7. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all near positions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Specifications Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications Turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb Output shaft speed (OSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 1885 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 1888 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1889 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED SENSOR The Output Shaft Speed Sensor (OSS), provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft. The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information generated. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel. 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor. ^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector. ^ Remove the bolt. ^ Inspect the OSS bore. 5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 1892 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation. Install the OSS sensor. ^ Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 1893 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel. 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor. 5. Remove the TSS sensor. ^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector. ^ Remove the bolt. ^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore. 6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 1894 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation. Install the TSS sensor. ^ Connect the TSS electrical connector. 2. Remove the drain pan. 3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 7. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all near positions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1899 Heated Glass Element Switch: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the audio unit. 2. Push outward on the rear window defrost switch to remove it from the instrument panel center finish panel. ^ Disconnect the electrical connector. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 1904 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Adjust Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 1905 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Rear Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Left Rear Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 1908 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 1909 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 1910 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 1911 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Passenger Side Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 1912 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 1913 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Right Rear Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 1914 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1915 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair REMOVAL NOTE: The removal and installation procedures for all window control switches are similar. Front door 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. All doors 2. Release the locking clip and remove the window control switch. ^ Disconnect the electrical connector. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1920 Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1921 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1922 Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the steering column shroud. NOTE: The windshield wiper/washer switch is part of the multifunction switch assembly. 2. Remove the screws. 3. Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1926 Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1927 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1928 Wiper Switch: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the steering column shroud. NOTE: The windshield wiper/washer switch is part of the multifunction switch assembly. 2. Remove the screws. 3. Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics TSB 04-21-4 11/01/04 STEERING DRIFT/PULL - IMPROVED DIAGNOSTIC AND REPAIR PROCEDURE - SERVICE TIP FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid MERCURY: 2005 Mariner ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull to either the right or left. This condition may occur even if the alignment settings are within specifications. ACTION The following procedure is designed to supplement the Workshop Manual. It contains a more detailed description of the camber/caster adjustment, updated diagnostics to help determine cause and an updated camber adjustment procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 1938 1. Refer to the Drift/Pull diagnostic flow chart (Figure 1). 2. Use procedures in TSB when adjusting alignment if directed by the diagnostic flow chart. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 1939 3. Complete worksheet as needed (Figure 5). GENERAL FRONT SUSPENSION UPPER STRUT MOUNT ADJUSTMENT INFORMATION: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 1940 Adjustment of camber and caster can be made by rotating the upper strut mount into one (1) of four (4) positions. The orientation of the strut rod relative to the center of the hole for the mount determines the alignment change. The strut rod is offset 180 degrees from the paint mark on the strut bushing. Moving the strut rod inboard or outboard changes camber and moving the strut rod forward or rearward changes caster. Regardless of the start setting, a 90 degree rotation will only change one of the settings (caster or camber), and a 180 degree rotation will change both settings (caster and camber). ADDITIONAL FRONT CAMBER ADJUSTMENT: The clearance between the bolts and the holes in the knuckle to strut joint allows front camber adjustment beyond what the strut mount orientation provides. This additional adjustment can be used on either of the front wheels to increase or decrease a camber split. Rotating the upper strut mount is the primary and preferred method to adjust front camber. If rotating the upper strut mount does not provide enough camber adjustment, perform the following steps to achieve an approximate camber change of up to +/- 0.24 degrees per side: 1. Lift the vehicle up off its tires. 2. Replace the old strut to knuckle fasteners (bolts and nuts) with new fasteners, but do not torque the new fasteners. 3. Move the top of the tire inboard or outboard to adjust camber (Figure 4). a. If more negative camber is desired, push the top of the tire inboard. b. If less negative camber is desired, pull the top of the tire outboard. 4. With the tire at the desired position, torque the new fasteners to 85 lb-ft (115 N.m). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 1941 5. Lower the vehicle back down. 6. Place vehicle on alignment rack and measure the alignment to confirm the desired camber change was achieved. NOTE DO NOT ADJUST THE ALIGNMENT SETTINGS (INDIVIDUAL CAMBER) BEYOND THE RELEASED SPECIFICATIONS. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE FRONT W6 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics Alignment: By Symptom Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics TSB 04-21-4 11/01/04 STEERING DRIFT/PULL - IMPROVED DIAGNOSTIC AND REPAIR PROCEDURE - SERVICE TIP FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid MERCURY: 2005 Mariner ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull to either the right or left. This condition may occur even if the alignment settings are within specifications. ACTION The following procedure is designed to supplement the Workshop Manual. It contains a more detailed description of the camber/caster adjustment, updated diagnostics to help determine cause and an updated camber adjustment procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 1947 1. Refer to the Drift/Pull diagnostic flow chart (Figure 1). 2. Use procedures in TSB when adjusting alignment if directed by the diagnostic flow chart. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 1948 3. Complete worksheet as needed (Figure 5). GENERAL FRONT SUSPENSION UPPER STRUT MOUNT ADJUSTMENT INFORMATION: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 1949 Adjustment of camber and caster can be made by rotating the upper strut mount into one (1) of four (4) positions. The orientation of the strut rod relative to the center of the hole for the mount determines the alignment change. The strut rod is offset 180 degrees from the paint mark on the strut bushing. Moving the strut rod inboard or outboard changes camber and moving the strut rod forward or rearward changes caster. Regardless of the start setting, a 90 degree rotation will only change one of the settings (caster or camber), and a 180 degree rotation will change both settings (caster and camber). ADDITIONAL FRONT CAMBER ADJUSTMENT: The clearance between the bolts and the holes in the knuckle to strut joint allows front camber adjustment beyond what the strut mount orientation provides. This additional adjustment can be used on either of the front wheels to increase or decrease a camber split. Rotating the upper strut mount is the primary and preferred method to adjust front camber. If rotating the upper strut mount does not provide enough camber adjustment, perform the following steps to achieve an approximate camber change of up to +/- 0.24 degrees per side: 1. Lift the vehicle up off its tires. 2. Replace the old strut to knuckle fasteners (bolts and nuts) with new fasteners, but do not torque the new fasteners. 3. Move the top of the tire inboard or outboard to adjust camber (Figure 4). a. If more negative camber is desired, push the top of the tire inboard. b. If less negative camber is desired, pull the top of the tire outboard. 4. With the tire at the desired position, torque the new fasteners to 85 lb-ft (115 N.m). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 1950 5. Lower the vehicle back down. 6. Place vehicle on alignment rack and measure the alignment to confirm the desired camber change was achieved. NOTE DO NOT ADJUST THE ALIGNMENT SETTINGS (INDIVIDUAL CAMBER) BEYOND THE RELEASED SPECIFICATIONS. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE FRONT W6 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1951 Alignment: Specifications Front Alignment Specifications Camber -0.84 deg Caster 1.93 deg Toe 3 +/- 3 mm Steering Axis Inclination 11.4 deg Steering Axis Offset 4.16 mm (tire size P215/70R16) -1.6 mm (-0.06 inch) (tire size P225/70R15)1.41 mm (0.05 inch) (tire size P235/70R16) Ride height 476.6 +/- 20 mm Rear Alignment Specifications Camber 0.04 deg Toe 2.4 +/- 2.8 mm Ride height 491 +/- 20 mm Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1952 Alignment: Description and Operation Camber Camber is the inward or outward tilting of the wheels at the top. When the wheel tilts out at the top, then the camber is positive (+). When the wheel tilts in at the top, then the camber is negative (-). Caster Caster is the tilting of the steering axis either forward or backward from vertical. A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Front caster adjustment is not a separate procedure on this vehicle. Front caster should fall within specification when the front camber is adjusted. Toe Toe is a measurement of how much the front of the wheels are turned in or out from the straight-ahead position. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1953 When the wheels are turned in toward the front of the vehicle, toe is positive (+) (toe in). When the wheels are turned out toward the front of the vehicle, toe is negative (-) (toe out). Toe is measured in degrees, from side to side, and totaled. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment Alignment: Service and Repair Camber and Caster Adjustment 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the front shock absorber upper mounting bracket nuts. 3. Push the front shock absorber upper mounting bracket downward and turn it to the desired position to set camber and caster. Both camber and caster for front suspension are adjustable within a maximum of 30 degree angle. 4. Tighten the front shock absorber upper mounting bracket nuts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 1956 Alignment: Service and Repair Lean Correction NOTE: When installing a new coil spring, install a new one with the same part number and the same spring code. Refer to the Vehicle Certification (VC) Label on the driver side door. 1. Measure the distance from the wheelhouse opening to the center of the wheel and tire at the same point on both sides of the vehicle. 2. If the difference exceeds 10 mm (0.4 inch), a lean correction is necessary. Compare the original with a new coil spring. Note the difference. 3. Remove the higher side coil spring. 1 If the original coil spring exceeds the height of the new one by 10 mm (0.4 inch), install the new coil spring in the vehicle. 2 If the original coil spring is shorter than the new one by 10 mm (0.4 inch), remove the low side coil spring from the vehicle. 4. Compare all three coil springs and select the two most evenly matched for installation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 1957 Alignment: Service and Repair Toe Adjustment Front 1. Start the engine and center the steering wheel. 2. Turn the engine off, and lock the steering wheel in position. 3. Check the toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 4. NOTE: Do not allow the steering gear bellows to twist when the front wheel spindle tie rod is rotated. Remove the clamps. 5. Loosen the nuts. ^ Clean and lubricate the nut(s) and front wheel spindle tie rod threads. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 1958 6. Rotate the front wheel spindle tie rods. 7. Tighten the nuts. 8. Install the clamp(s). 9. Recheck the toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. Rear 1. NOTE: Jounce the vehicle to make sure that the suspension is in its normal resting position. Check the toe setting using suitable wheel alignment equipment. 2. Loosen the LH and RH rear suspension trailing arm and bushing bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 1959 3. Turn the LH and RH adjusting cams simultaneously until the toe is within specification. 4. Tighten the LH and RH rear suspension trailing arm and bushing bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation PRESSURE TEST POINT There is a pressure test point with a schrader fitting in the fuel rail that relieves fuel pressure and measures the fuel injector supply pressure for service and diagnostic procedures. Before servicing or testing the fuel system, read any CAUTION, WARNING, and HANDLING information. ON VEHICLES NOT EQUIPPED WITH A SCHRADER VALVE, USE ROTUNDA FUEL PRESSURE TEST KIT #134-ROO87 OR EQUIVALENT. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Hot Idle ................................................................................................................................................ ......................................................... 800 - 900 RPM Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Remove the battery tray. 3. Remove the bolt and the intake pipe. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. NOTE: Make sure the front sponge seal of the intake pipe is seated on the shroud panel correctly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve Eliminated Fuel Pressure Release: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve Eliminated Article No. 02-21-2 10/28/02 FUEL - FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE DISCONTINUED - 2.0L ENGINE FORD: 2000-2002 FOCUS 2001-2002 ESCORT ZX2, ESCAPE MERCURY: 1999-2002 COUGAR ISSUE Vehicles equipped with the 2.0L 4V Zetec and the 2.0L SPI no longer have the Fuel Pressure Relief Valve (Schrader Valve). ACTION To relieve or manually check fuel pressures, refer to the following Service Procedures for details. SERVICE PROCEDURE Service Procedure For Relieving Fuel Pressure 1. Remove the fuel pump relay in the engine compartment fuse box. 2. Start the engine and allow idling until the engine stalls. 3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately five seconds to ensure the fuel injection supply manifold pressure has been released. 4. When fuel system service is complete, Install Fuel Pump Relay. 5. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting engine. NOTE IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM. 6. Start vehicle and check for leaks. NOTE IT IS POSSIBLE THAT A DTC MAY BE SET DUE TO THE PUMP RELAY BEING PULLED AND THE ENGINE STARTED AND RUN OUT OF FUEL. IF DTC'S ARE SET, CLEAR ALL DTC'S BEFORE RETURNING VEHICLE TO THE CUSTOMER. Service Procedure For Manually Checking Fuel Pressure With A Gauge. 1. Remove the fuel pump relay in the engine compartment fuse box. 2. Start the engine and allow idling until the engine stalls. 3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately five seconds to make sure the fuel injection supply manifold pressure has been released. 4. Disconnect fuel line at the fuel rail to chassis line pierce point. a. If the vehicle is equipped with Quick Release Coupling Push Connector at the fuel rail to fuel line pierce point, separate the coupling by depressing the tabs and pulling on the fuel line. b. If the vehicle is equipped with a Spring Lock Coupling Connector using special tool 310-D00S or equivalent 5. Install the Schrader Valve service tool adaptor listed in the chart in this article. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve Eliminated > Page 1977 6. Install fuel pressure gauge special service tool 310-012 or equivalent. 7. Install fuel pump relay. 8. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for oaks before starting engine. NOTE IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM. 9. Start and run engine to surge air from fuel system (air trapped in the fuel system may effect test results). 10. Perform normal diagnosti35 ann service repairs as needed. 11. After fuel system service is complete, relieve fuel system pressure using fuel pressure gauge relief valve. 12. Remove special service tools 13. Re-connect fuel system lines 14. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting engine. NOTE IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM. 15. Start vehicle and check for leaks. NOTE IT IS POSSIBLE THAT A DTC MAY BE SET DUE TO THE PUMP RELAY BEING PULLED AND THE ENGINE STARTED AND RUN OUT OF FUEL. IF DTC'S ARE SET, CLEAR ALL DTC'S BEFORE RETURNING VEHICLE TO THE CUSTOMER. Service Tools Required Chart OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 404000, 490000, 497000, 499000, 603300, 607000, 698298 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1978 Fuel Pressure Release: Service Precautions WARNING: ^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1979 Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair 1. Remove the LH engine compartment relay panel cover. WARNING: ^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. NOTE: Before disconnecting any fuel tube, release the fuel pressure from the fuel system. 2. Remove the fuel pump relay. 3. Start the engine. 4. After the engine stalls, crank the engine over two more times to be sure all the pressure has been released. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. Install the fuel pump relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1980 Fuel Pressure Gauge Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications Firing Order: Specifications 4-Cyl Firing Order: 1 3 4 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1984 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Service Precautions Ignition Cable: Service Precautions CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the ignition wire directly, as the wire may separate from the connector inside the spark plug boot. ^ Correct installation of the ignition wires is critical to engine operation. If one spark plug wire is not correctly installed at either the spark plug or the ignition coil, both spark plugs connected to the ignition coil may not fire under load. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 1992 Ignition Cable: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Grasp the spark plug boot firmly and with a twisting-pulling motion, disconnect the ignition wires from the spark plugs. CAUTION: Do not pull on the ignition wire directly, as the wire may separate from the connector inside the spark plug boot. 2. Disconnect the ignition wires from the ignition coil and remove the wires. INSTALLATION 1. Connect the ignition wires to the correct ignition coil terminals. CAUTION: Correct installation of the ignition wires is critical to engine operation. If one spark plug wire is not correctly installed at either the spark plug or the ignition coil, both spark plugs connected to the ignition coil may not fire under load. NOTE: ^ Whenever an ignition wire is reinstalled or a new one is installed, apply Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric compound to the interior surface of the ignition wire boot. ^ Before installing the ignition wires, inspect the ignition wires for any visible damage; install new ignition wires if necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 1993 2. Connect the ignition wires to the correct spark plugs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Spark Plug Gap Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Gap Spark Plug Gap ................................................................................................................................... .................................................. 1.3 mm (0.051 inch) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Spark Plug Gap > Page 1998 Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Torque Spark Plug Torque ............................................................................................................................... ...................................................... 15 Nm (11 ft lbs) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1999 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark Plug Type Cylinders 1 And 3 ..................................................................................................... ................................................................ AZFS-32F Spark Plug Type Cylinders 2 And 4 .................. ................................................................................................................................................ AZFS-32FE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2000 Spark Plug: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the spark plug wires from the spark plugs. 2. Remove the spark plugs. NOTE: ^ If an original spark plug is reused, install it in the same cylinder from which it was removed. New spark plugs can be used in any cylinder. ^ Use compressed air to remove any foreign material from the spark plug well before removing the spark plugs. 3. Inspect the spark plugs. 4. Clean the spark plugs with a wire brush or a professional spark plug cleaner (follow the manufacturer's instructions). INSTALLATION 1. Adjust the plug gap as necessary. 2. Install the spark plugs. NOTE: Apply Anti-Seize Lubricant to the lower three threads of the spark plugs. Do not allow lubricant to contaminate the spark plug electrodes or insulator tips. 3. Connect the spark plug wires to the spark plugs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications The indicated compression pressure are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is within 75% of the highest reading. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 2004 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection General Remarks NOTE: Removing fuses and disconnecting electrical components causes the powertrain control module (PCM) to log an error message. After the measurements have been carried out this error message should be cleared from memory by connecting to PCM. NOTE: Only check the compression pressure with the valves set to the prescribed clearance (if this can be adjusted). The compression pressure should be checked with the engine at operating temperature. Check The Compression Pressure WARNING: On manual transmissions shift the transmission into neutral. On automatic transmission vehicles, select "P". Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. Remove the fuel pump relay. 2. Start the engine - the engine will start, run for a few seconds then stall. 3. Remove the spark plugs. 4. Install the compression tester. 5. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit. With the ignition switch OFF, using the auxiliary starter switch, crank the engine a minimum of five compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the approximate number of compression strokes required to obtain the highest reading. 6. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of compression strokes. 7. Install the components in reverse order, observing the specified tightening torques. 8. Reset the PCM fault memory. Interpretation of the Results The indicated compression pressure are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is within 75% of the highest reading. CAUTION: If engine oil is sprayed into the combustion chamber, after carrying out the measurement run the engine at 2000 rpm for about 15 minutes, in order to burn the oil and prevent damage to the catalytic converter. If the measurement on one or more cylinders is much lower than the specified value, spray some engine oil into the combustion chamber and repeat the compression measurement. If the reading greatly improves, the piston rings are damaged. If the reading stays the same, the cause is either damaged valve seats or valve stem seals. If the measurements for two cylinders next to each other are both too low then it is very likely that the cylinder head gasket between them is burnt through. This can also be recognized by traces of engine oil in the coolant and/or coolant in the engine oil. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve Clearance Intake 0.006 in Exhaust 0.012 in Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 2008 Valve Clearance: Adjustments Removal 1. Remove the timing belt. 2. NOTE: Measure each valve's clearance at base circle with the lobe pointed away from the tappet, before removing the camshafts. Failure to measure all clearances prior to removing the camshafts will necessitate repeated removal and installation and wasted labor time. Use a feeler gauge to measure each valve's clearance and record its location. 3. Remove the camshafts. 4. CAUTION: If the camshaft and valve tappets are to be reused, mark the location of the valve tappets to make sure that they are assembled in their original positions. Remove the valve tappets from the cylinder head. 5. NOTE: A mid-range clearance is the most desirable: ^ intake: 0.15 mm (0.006 inch) ^ exhaust: 0.3 mm (0.012 inch) NOTE: Select tappets using this formula: tappet thickness = measured clearance plus the base tappet thickness minus most desirable thickness. Select tappets and mark installation location. Installation 1. NOTE: Lubricate the valve tappets with Super Premium SAE 5W-20 Motor Oil or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C153-H. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 2009 Install the valve tappets. 2. Install the camshafts. 3. Confirm each valve's clearance at base circle with the lobe pointed away from the tappet. 4. Install the timing belt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications Timing Belt: Specifications Timing Belt Replacement Interval 120,000 mi Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2013 Timing Belt: Diagrams Confirm The Crankshaft Position Is At TDC (No. 1 Cylinder) Adjust the timing belt tensioner. 1 Using a 6mm Allen wrench, rotate the adjuster counterclockwise and align the marks as shown. 2 Tighten the tensioner pulley bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2014 Timing Belt: Service and Repair Timing Belt NOTE:Ford does not provide camshaft gear timing marks, or information to perform timing belt service without the special tools shown in this procedure. Special Tools Removal 1. Remove the valve cover. 2. Remove the spark plugs. 3. Remove the catalytic converter. 4. Remove the bolt, nut, and position the coolant tube aside. 5. Rotate the crankshaft to just before Top Dead Center (TDC) (No. 1 cylinder). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2015 6. Remove the stud. 7. Install the special tool. 8. NOTE: Make sure the correct (second) notch in the pulley is indexed to the lower cylinder block. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise against the peg to bring it to TDC (No. 1 cylinder). 9. Loosen the water pulley bolts. 10. Remove the timing belt covers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2016 11. Remove the water pump pulley. 12. Remove the accessory drive belt idler pulley. 13. NOTE: Installation of the alignment tool into the exhaust camshaft may require the camshafts to be rotated clockwise slightly. Install the special tool and align the camshafts. 14. Raise and support the vehicle. 15. Remove the bolts and the engine mount lower bracket. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2017 16. Loosen the timing belt tensioner pulley and allow to slide down to the bottom of its travel. 17. CAUTION: If the camshaft timing belt is to be reused, mark the direction of the camshaft timing belt to rotation of camshaft prior to removal or premature wear or failure may occur. Slide the timing belt off of the camshaft and crankshaft sprockets. 18. Inspect the timing belt for wear. Install a new belt if necessary. Installation 1. NOTE: Make sure the correct (second) notch in the pulley is indexed to the lower cylinder block. Slide the crankshaft pulley onto the crankshaft and confirm the crankshaft position is at TDC (No. 1 cylinder) by rotating it clockwise against the alignment peg. ^ Remove the crankshaft pulley. 2. Lower the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2018 3. Confirm that the timing belt tensioner is installed correctly with the tab positioned in the slot in the inner timing cover. 4. Install the timing belt onto the timing belt sprockets. 5. Adjust the timing belt tensioner. 1 Using a 6mm Allen wrench, rotate the adjuster counterclockwise and align the marks as shown. 2 Tighten the tensioner pulley bolt. 6. Raise the vehicle. 7. Install the front engine mount lower bracket. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2019 8. Install the accessory drive belt idler pulley. 9. Install the water pump pulley. ^ Hand tighten the bolts. 10. Install the timing belt covers. 11. Tighten the water pump pulley bolts. 12. Remove the special tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2020 13. Install the stud. 14. Install the coolant tube. 15. Install the catalytic converter. 16. Remove the special tool. 17. Install the valve cover. 18. Install the spark plugs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Locations Drive Belt: Locations 2.0L Zetec without A/C 2.0L Zetec with A/C Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Locations > Page 2024 Drive Belt: Diagrams 2.0L Zetec without A/C 2.0L Zetec with A/C Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Drive Belt: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Inspection and Verification 1. Verify the customer's concern by operating the engine to duplicate the condition. 2. Inspect to determine if any of the following mechanical concerns apply: 3. NOTE: Minor cracks in the V-grooved portion of the drive belt are considered normal and acceptable. If the drive belt has chunks missing from the ribs, a new drive belt should be installed. Install a new drive belt if any of the following conditions exist: rib chunk-out, severe glazing, frayed cords or other concerns. Inspect for drive belt cracking/chunking/wear. V-Ribbed Belt With Cracks (Acceptable) V-Ribbed Serpentine Drive Belt With Cracks Across Ribs V-Ribbed Belt With Chunks Of Rib Missing (Not Acceptable) V-Ribbed Serpentine Drive Belt With Chunks of Rib Missing 4. If the concerns remain after inspection, determine the symptoms and go to the Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2027 Drive Belt: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures SYMPTOM CHART Part 1 of 2 Part 2 of 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2028 Drive Belt: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Belt Tensioner-Dynamic Belt Tensioner-Dynamic The belt tensioner can be checked dynamically as follows: 1. With the engine running, observe the belt tensioner movement. The belt tensioner should move (respond) when the A/C clutch cycles (if equipped), or when the engine is accelerated rapidly. If the belt tensioner movement is constant without A/C clutch cycling or acceleration, a pulley or shaft is probably bent or a pulley is out of round. In rare cases, excessive drive belt rideout (uneven depth of grooves in drive belt ) can cause excessive drive belt tensioner movement. This condition can be checked by installing a new drive belt, and repeating the observation. 2. With the engine off, check routing of the drive belt. 3. Inspect the belt tensioner wear indicator to confirm the drive belt is within operating range. Install a new drive belt if necessary. Belt Tensioner-Mechanical Belt Tensioner-Mechanical The only mechanical check that needs to be made is a check for tensioner stick, grab or bind. 1. Remove the belt in the area of the tensioner. 2. Rotate the tensioner from its relaxed position through its full stroke and back to the relaxed position to make sure there is no stick, grab or bind and to make sure that there is tension on the belt tensioner spring. 3. If the tensioner meets the above criteria, proceed to test the tensioner dynamically. If the tensioner does not meet the above criteria, install a new tensioner. Engine Accessory Drive Engine Accessory Drive Test To carry out this test, proceed as follows: ^ Remove the accessory drive belts. WARNING: BLOCK THE FRONT AND REAR WHEELS, AND APPLY THE PARKING BRAKE AND THE SERVICE BRAKE, OR INJURY TO PERSONNEL CAN RESULT. CAUTION: Limit engine running time to one minute or less with belts removed or serious engine damage will result. NOTE: A serpentine drive belt decreases the usefulness of this test. In these cases, use a vibration analyzer, such as the EVA, to pinpoint accessory vibrations. An electronic listening device, such as an EngineEAR, will also help to identify noises from specific accessories. ^ Increase the engine rpm to where the concern occurs. ^ If the vibration/noise is duplicated when carrying out this test, the belts and accessories are not sources. ^ If the vibration/noise was not duplicated when carrying out this test, install each accessory belt, one at a time, to locate the source. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2029 Drive Belt: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt - 2.0L Zetec Removal and Installation 1. Remove the right front wheel and tire. 2. Remove the bolts and the right front lower splash shield. 3. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and remove the accessory drive belt. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Remove the battery tray. 3. Remove the bolt and the intake pipe. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. NOTE: Make sure the front sponge seal of the intake pipe is seated on the shroud panel correctly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair NOTE: The air distribution system of this vehicle cannot be equipped with a cabin air filter. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service Precautions Evaporative Canister Filter: Service Precautions WARNING: ^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 2041 Evaporative Canister Filter: Service and Repair REMOVAL WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 1. Disconnect the battery. WARNING: THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the EVAP canister outlet tube. 4. Disconnect the canister vent solenoid electrical connector and the remote canister vent hose. 5. Remove the EVAP canister bracket assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 2042 6. Remove the remote canister vent hose. 7. Remove the dust separator. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Carry out a leak test. See: Powertrain Management/Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission System Leak Test ^ Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Powertrain Management/Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission Repair Verification Drive Cycle NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL(R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Specifications Fluid Filter - A/T: Specifications Transmission filler tube bolt 71 in.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2046 Fluid Filter - A/T: Locations Part 1 Of 7 Transmission Fluid Filter Location Filter is located at exploded view position number 8 internal. See Transmission Disassembly/Assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2047 Special Tool Seal Removal Transmission Filter Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve Eliminated Fuel Pressure Release: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve Eliminated Article No. 02-21-2 10/28/02 FUEL - FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE DISCONTINUED - 2.0L ENGINE FORD: 2000-2002 FOCUS 2001-2002 ESCORT ZX2, ESCAPE MERCURY: 1999-2002 COUGAR ISSUE Vehicles equipped with the 2.0L 4V Zetec and the 2.0L SPI no longer have the Fuel Pressure Relief Valve (Schrader Valve). ACTION To relieve or manually check fuel pressures, refer to the following Service Procedures for details. SERVICE PROCEDURE Service Procedure For Relieving Fuel Pressure 1. Remove the fuel pump relay in the engine compartment fuse box. 2. Start the engine and allow idling until the engine stalls. 3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately five seconds to ensure the fuel injection supply manifold pressure has been released. 4. When fuel system service is complete, Install Fuel Pump Relay. 5. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting engine. NOTE IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM. 6. Start vehicle and check for leaks. NOTE IT IS POSSIBLE THAT A DTC MAY BE SET DUE TO THE PUMP RELAY BEING PULLED AND THE ENGINE STARTED AND RUN OUT OF FUEL. IF DTC'S ARE SET, CLEAR ALL DTC'S BEFORE RETURNING VEHICLE TO THE CUSTOMER. Service Procedure For Manually Checking Fuel Pressure With A Gauge. 1. Remove the fuel pump relay in the engine compartment fuse box. 2. Start the engine and allow idling until the engine stalls. 3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately five seconds to make sure the fuel injection supply manifold pressure has been released. 4. Disconnect fuel line at the fuel rail to chassis line pierce point. a. If the vehicle is equipped with Quick Release Coupling Push Connector at the fuel rail to fuel line pierce point, separate the coupling by depressing the tabs and pulling on the fuel line. b. If the vehicle is equipped with a Spring Lock Coupling Connector using special tool 310-D00S or equivalent 5. Install the Schrader Valve service tool adaptor listed in the chart in this article. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve Eliminated > Page 2053 6. Install fuel pressure gauge special service tool 310-012 or equivalent. 7. Install fuel pump relay. 8. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for oaks before starting engine. NOTE IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM. 9. Start and run engine to surge air from fuel system (air trapped in the fuel system may effect test results). 10. Perform normal diagnosti35 ann service repairs as needed. 11. After fuel system service is complete, relieve fuel system pressure using fuel pressure gauge relief valve. 12. Remove special service tools 13. Re-connect fuel system lines 14. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting engine. NOTE IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM. 15. Start vehicle and check for leaks. NOTE IT IS POSSIBLE THAT A DTC MAY BE SET DUE TO THE PUMP RELAY BEING PULLED AND THE ENGINE STARTED AND RUN OUT OF FUEL. IF DTC'S ARE SET, CLEAR ALL DTC'S BEFORE RETURNING VEHICLE TO THE CUSTOMER. Service Tools Required Chart OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 404000, 490000, 497000, 499000, 603300, 607000, 698298 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2054 Fuel Pressure Release: Service Precautions WARNING: ^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2055 Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair 1. Remove the LH engine compartment relay panel cover. WARNING: ^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. NOTE: Before disconnecting any fuel tube, release the fuel pressure from the fuel system. 2. Remove the fuel pump relay. 3. Start the engine. 4. After the engine stalls, crank the engine over two more times to be sure all the pressure has been released. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. Install the fuel pump relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2056 Fuel Pressure Gauge Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Oil Filter: Specifications Oil Filter 12 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage Heater Hose: Customer Interest A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage TSB 06-21-19 10/30/06 HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY) FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250 Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004 F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure. ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have occurred. ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant: a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely due to due to high flow rate - replace the Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 2069 heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference Workshop Manual, Section 412. b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis. Testing For Electrolysis Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system. Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible. 1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable. a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle. b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant. NOTE POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING. c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect battery cables and proceed to Step 2. d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly. e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V. f. Reconnect battery cables. g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant. 2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions. a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine. b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK. d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections. e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper wire to ground. f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test. g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V. h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped. 3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds. a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. b. Crank engine but do not start. c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter. e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm. f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell phone, etc. g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 2070 h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair ground to the accessory just identified. j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts. l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4. m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower motor and any fan motors. n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it up then retest. o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck. NOTE If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor voltage when they are on and when off. CAUTION DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE GROUND PATH. 4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03. NOTE IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18476 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage Heater Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage TSB 06-21-19 10/30/06 HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY) FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250 Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004 F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure. ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have occurred. ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant: a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely due to due to high flow rate - replace the Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 2076 heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference Workshop Manual, Section 412. b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis. Testing For Electrolysis Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system. Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible. 1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable. a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle. b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant. NOTE POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING. c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect battery cables and proceed to Step 2. d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly. e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V. f. Reconnect battery cables. g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant. 2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions. a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine. b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK. d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections. e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper wire to ground. f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test. g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V. h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped. 3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds. a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. b. Crank engine but do not start. c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter. e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm. f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell phone, etc. g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 2077 h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair ground to the accessory just identified. j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts. l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4. m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower motor and any fan motors. n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it up then retest. o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck. NOTE If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor voltage when they are on and when off. CAUTION DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE GROUND PATH. 4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03. NOTE IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18476 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2078 Heater Hose: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core. 3. Disconnect the heater hose from the hose connection. 4. Remove the RH front wheel. 5. Disconnect the heater hose from the hose connection. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Lubricate the hoses with Rubber Suspension Insulator Lube E25Y-19553-A or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESF-M99B112-A. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service Precautions Hose/Line HVAC: Service Precautions CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 2082 Hose/Line HVAC: Description and Operation NOTE: Installation of a new suction accumulator is not necessary when repairing the air conditioning system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the suction accumulator. The condenser to evaporator line contains high-pressure liquid refrigerant upstream of the A/C evaporator core orifice. The A/C manifold and tube assembly is attached to the A/C compressor with O-ring seals. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 2083 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the A/C pressure cut-off switch. 2. Remove the evaporator core orifice. 3. Disconnect the condenser to evaporator line from the A/C evaporator core. CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture. 4. Remove the front bumper cover. 5. Remove the nut and disconnect the condenser to evaporator line from the A/C condenser core and remove the condenser to evaporator line. CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 2084 Spring Lock Coupling Disconnect Tool Set Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 02-5-2 > Mar > 02 > Power Steering - Leaks in Extreme Cold Power Steering Line/Hose: Customer Interest Power Steering - Leaks in Extreme Cold Article No. 02-5-2 03/01/02 STEERING - POWER STEERING FLUID LEAK DURING EXTREME COLD AMBIENT TEMPERATURES -20 TO -28C (-5 TO -20F) - VEHICLES PRODUCED 2/12/2002 ONLY FORD: 2001-2002 ESCAPE ISSUE Some vehicles built before 2/12/2002 may exhibit a power steering fluid leak at the Return Hose and/or Cooler Hose at the Intermediate Tube Assembly during extreme cold ambient temperatures -20 to -28°C (-5 to -20 °F). This may be caused by hose blow out due to an increase in fluid viscosity during extreme cold temperatures. ACTION Replace the Intermediate Tube with a steel intermediate tube and replace spring type clamps on Return Hose and Cooler Hose with worm type clamps to increase hose retention. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Perform procedure in Workshop Manual Section 211-02 to remove Return Hose and Cooler Hose from Intermediate Tube. 2. Replace Intermediate Tube with new part 2L8Z-3A713-AA. 3. Reinstall Cooler and Return Hoses using worm clamps 376240-S100. 4. Bleed all of the air from steering system using bleed procedure in Section 211-00 of the appropriate year Workshop Manual. Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 020502A Replace Metal Section Of 1.0 Hr. Power Steering Return Hose (Includes Time To Bleed Air From System) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A713 42 OASIS CODES: 303000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 02-5-2 > Mar > 02 > Power Steering Leaks in Extreme Cold Power Steering Line/Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Power Steering - Leaks in Extreme Cold Article No. 02-5-2 03/01/02 STEERING - POWER STEERING FLUID LEAK DURING EXTREME COLD AMBIENT TEMPERATURES -20 TO -28C (-5 TO -20F) - VEHICLES PRODUCED 2/12/2002 ONLY FORD: 2001-2002 ESCAPE ISSUE Some vehicles built before 2/12/2002 may exhibit a power steering fluid leak at the Return Hose and/or Cooler Hose at the Intermediate Tube Assembly during extreme cold ambient temperatures -20 to -28°C (-5 to -20 °F). This may be caused by hose blow out due to an increase in fluid viscosity during extreme cold temperatures. ACTION Replace the Intermediate Tube with a steel intermediate tube and replace spring type clamps on Return Hose and Cooler Hose with worm type clamps to increase hose retention. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Perform procedure in Workshop Manual Section 211-02 to remove Return Hose and Cooler Hose from Intermediate Tube. 2. Replace Intermediate Tube with new part 2L8Z-3A713-AA. 3. Reinstall Cooler and Return Hoses using worm clamps 376240-S100. 4. Bleed all of the air from steering system using bleed procedure in Section 211-00 of the appropriate year Workshop Manual. Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 020502A Replace Metal Section Of 1.0 Hr. Power Steering Return Hose (Includes Time To Bleed Air From System) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A713 42 OASIS CODES: 303000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2098 Power Steering Line/Hose: Specifications Power Steering Pressure Line-To-Pump Fitting 48 ft.lb Power Steering Pressure Line Bracket-To-Engine Bolt 18 ft.lb Power Steering Pressure And Return Line Retainer Plate-To-Gear Bolt 18 ft.lb Power Steering Pressure Line Bracket-To-Gear Bolt 89 in.lb Power Steering Return Line Bracket-To-Gear Bolt 89 in.lb Power Steering Pressure Line Bracket-To-Lifting Eye Bolt 89 in.lb Power Steering Pressure Hose To Steering Gear Fitting 21 - 25 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hose Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Hose Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: Drain the excess power steering fluid into a suitable drain pan. NOTE: Make sure not to drop the O-ring seals. Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines. 1 Remove the bolt. 2 Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines. 2. Remove the power steering return line bracket-to-gear bolt. 3. Release the clamp and remove the power steering return line. 4. NOTE: Make sure the O-ring seals are on the power steering pressure and return lines. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Fill, bleed and leak check the power steering system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hose > Page 2101 Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Pump to Gear Pressure Line Special Tools Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. NOTE: Drain the excess power steering fluid into a suitable drain pan. Disconnect the power steering pressure line from the power steering pump. 3. Lower the vehicle. 4. NOTE: Do not drop the O-ring seals. Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines. 1 Remove the bolt. 2 Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hose > Page 2102 5. Remove the power steering pressure line bracket bolt to the steering gear. 6. Remove the power steering pressure line bracket bolt to the engine lifting hook. 7. Remove the power steering pressure line bracket to engine bolt and the power steering pressure line. Installation 1. Using the special tool, install a new seal on the power steering pressure line fitting. ^ Remove and discard the original seal. ^ Stretch the seal over the special tool and slide it onto the tube nut. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hose > Page 2103 2. Install the power steering pressure line bucket to engine bolt. 3. Install the power steering pressure line bracket bolt to the engine lifting hook. 4. Install the power steering pressure line bracket bolt to the steering gear. 5. NOTE: Make sure the O-ring seals are on the power steering pressure and return lines. Connect the power steering pressure and return lines to the steering gear and install the bolt. 6. Raise the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hose > Page 2104 7. Connect the power steering pressure line to the power steering pump. 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Fill, bleed and leak check the power steering system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid, C6AZ-19542-AB ESA-M6C25-A, DOT3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2109 Brake Fluid: Description and Operation Brake Fluid WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. ^ Do not reuse brake fluid drained or bled from the brake system. ^ Do not use brake fluid that has been stored in an open container. ^ Do not mix different types of brake fluid. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Clutch Fluid: Specifications Ford High Performance DOT3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB ESA-M6C25-A, DOT3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Coolant - Propylene Glycol Recommendations Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Coolant - Propylene Glycol Recommendations Article No. 01-23-6 11/26/01 ^ ENGINE COOLANT - PROPYLENE GLYCOL - FORD MOTOR COMPANY POSITION ON ENGINE COOLANTS MADE FROM PROPYLENE GLYCOL ^ ENGINE COOLANT - PROPYLENE GLYCOL-BASED - FORD MOTOR COMPANY POSITION ON PROPYLENE GLYCOL-BASED ENGINE COOLANTS FORD: 1989-1993 FESTIVA 1989-1994 TEMPO 1989-1997 PROBE, THUNDERBIRD 1989-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, ESCORT, MUSTANG, TAURUS 1994-1997 ASPIRE 1995-2000 CONTOUR 2000-2002 FOCUS 2002 THUNDERBIRD 1989-1990 BRONCO II 1989-1996 BRONCO 1989-1997 AEROSTAR, F SUPER DUTY 1989-2002 ECONOLINE, F-150, RANGER 1991-2002 EXPLORER 1995-2002 WINDSTAR 1997-2002 EXPEDITION 1999-2002 SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2002 EXCURSION 2001-2002 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT 2000-2002 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 1989-1992 MARK VII 1989-2002 CONTINENTAL, TOWN CAR 1993-1998 MARK VIII 2000-2002 LS 1998-2002 NAVIGATOR 2002 BLACKWOOD MERCURY: 1989-1994 TOPAZ 1989-1997 COUGAR 1989-2002 GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE 1991-1994 CAPRI 1991-1999 TRACER 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR 1993-2002 VILLAGER 1997-2002 MOUNTAINEER MERKUR: 1989 SCORPIO, XR4TI This article is being republished in its entirety to update the model year coverage. ISSUE This TSB article describes Ford Motor Company's position on the use of propylene glycol-based engine coolants. ACTION Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Coolant - Propylene Glycol Recommendations > Page 2117 Ford Motor Company does not recommend nor endorse the use of engine coolants made with propylene glycol in Ford vehicles. Ford Motor Company currently recommends the use of ethylene glycol-based engine coolants. Published information suggests that engine coolants made with propylene glycol may provide engine cooling performance equivalent to engine coolants made with ethylene glycol. However, different brands of engine coolant provide varying corrosion protection for the cooling system. Ford does not have performance data for the multitude of engine coolants available in the aftermarket and therefore cannot recommend the use of any coolant except those sold by Ford Customer Service Division. Consult the vehicle's Owner's Guide to determine the appropriate Ford Customer Service Division coolant for the vehicle. Furthermore, claims of toxicological and environmental advantages of propylene glycol over ethylene glycol may be misleading. When significant new information is developed, Ford will review this policy. Ford Motor Company specifications recommend that vehicles be maintained using certain ethylene glycol-based engine coolants. Those specifications do not refer to engine coolants made with propylene glycol. Although the Ford New Vehicle Limited Warranty is not automatically voided upon the use of a coolant made with propylene glycol, if such use results in damage to the vehicle or its components, the cost of repairing the damage would not be covered by the Ford New Vehicle Limited Warranty. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 96-16-4 WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 402000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Coolant Capacity (Manual Trans) 7.0 qt (US) To convert to imperial measure, multiply U.S. quarts shown by 0.83. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2120 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications Antifreeze Type Ford Premium Engine Coolant (Green in color) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Differential Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Fluid (2.0L) 2.95 pt (US) Use SAE 80W-90 High Perfomance Rear Axle Lubricant F1TZ-19580-B or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSP-M2C197-A. Fill the rear axle 3-5 mm (1/8-3/16 inch) from the bottom of filler hole. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2125 Differential Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Ford Part Name - MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid Ford Part Number - XT-5-QM Ford Specification - MERCON(R) V Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Differential Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications Please refer to Manual Transmission Fluid; Specifications for capacities of the manual transaxle assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2130 Differential Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications Fluid Type SAE 75W-90 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage TSB 06-14-4 07/24/06 MERCON ATF IS BEING REPLACED BY MERCON V ATF AS A SERVICE FLUID. FORD: 1980-1997 Crown Victoria 1981-1997 Mustang, Thunderbird 1981-2003 Escort 1986-1993 Festiva 1986-1997 Taurus 1989-1997 Probe 1994-1997 Aspire 1995-2000 Contour 1980-1996 Bronco 1981-2003 F-150 1981-2004 E-Series, F-Super Duty 1983-1996 Ranger 1986-1996 Aerostar 1991-1997 Explorer 1993-2004 F-53 Motorhome Chassis 1995-1998 Windstar 1997-2004 Expedition 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2007 Escape 1987-2000 F-B-Series 2000-2007 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 1980-1997 Town Car 1981-1997 Continental 1993-1997 Mark VIII 1998-2004 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood MERCURY: 1980-1997 Grand Marquis 1981-1997 Cougar 1986-1997 Sable 1987-1999 Tracer 1995-2000 Mystique 1999-2002 Cougar 1993-2002 Villager 1997 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner MERKUR: 1985-1989 XR4TI This article supersedes TSB 01-15-7 to update the vehicle application chart. ISSUE MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid is being replaced by MERCON(R) V as a service fluid. ACTION Beginning immediately all automatic transmission / transaxle applications requiring MERCON(R) can now be serviced using MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V. After July 1, 2007, MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid will no longer be manufactured, therefore, availability of this fluid will only continue for however long it takes to deplete what remains in inventory. SERVICE PROCEDURE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage > Page 2135 Service automatic transmissions requiring MERCON(R) with MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V For proper fluid application on current and past model vehicles equipped with automatic transmissions I transaxles refer to the fluid usage chart. (Figure 1) CAUTION AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS / TRANSAXLES THAT REQUIRE MERCON® V SHOULD STILL ONLY USE MERCON(R) V OR DUAL USAGE FLUID LABELED MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage > Page 2136 CAUTION MERCON(R) SP, MOTORCRAFT PREMIUM AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID AND MOTORCRAFT M5 ATFS ARE UNIQUE FLUIDS AND MUST BE USED IN APPLICATIONS RECOMMENDING THAT PARTICULAR FLUID. USE OF ANY OTHER FLUID MAY CAUSE REDUCED FUNCTIONALITY OR TRANSMISSION DAMAGE. CAUTION THE FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS OF FLUIDS FOR CVT TRANSMISSIONS ARE VERY DIFFERENT THAN THOSE OF OTHER AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUIDS (ATFS). USE OF A FLUID OTHER THAN MOTORCRAFT CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE CHAIN TYPE TRANSMISSION FLUID OR ONE LABELED AS MEETING MERCON(R) C WILL CAUSE FUNCTIONALITY CONCERNS AND INTERNAL TRANSMISSION DAMAGE. CAUTION DO NOT USE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID SUPPLEMENTS, ADDITIVES, TREATMENTS OR CLEANING AGENTS. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Transmission Fluid .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................. 10 Qt 9.5L Note: Approximately Dry Fill Capacity Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2139 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Ford Part Name - MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid Ford Part Number - XT-5-QM Ford Specification - MERCON(R) V Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2140 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Place a suitable container under the transaxle drain plug. 3. NOTE: If an integral problem is suspected, drain the fluid through a paper filter. A small amount of metal or friction particles may be found from normal wear. However, if excessive metal and friction particles are present, internal service will be required. Remove the transaxle drain plug and drain transmission fluid. Installation 1. Install the transaxle drain plug. ^ After the fluid has been drained, clean the drain plug threads and apply a small amount of Pipe Sealant with Teflon 09 D8AZ- 19554-A or XW7Z-19554-AA or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSK-M2G350-A2. 2. Lower the vehicle 3. Add 3.7 liters (3.9 quarts) of MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 4. Start the engine and run through all gears for a total of five minutes at idle. Turn off the engine. 5. Repeat the previous steps to help flush fluid from the torque converter. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications Manual Transmission Capacity ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................... 2.8 Quarts Note: Approximate refill. Service refill capacity is determined by filling the transmission to the bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a level surface. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2145 Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications Manual Transmission Fluid Type Type ..................................................................................................................................................... .................. Motorcraft SAE 75W-90 Gear Oil GL-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Oil - Oil Recommendations/Applications Technical Service Bulletin # 02-1-9 Date: 020121 Engine Oil - Oil Recommendations/Applications Article No. 02-1-9 01/21/02 ENGINE - ENGINE OIL - RECOMMENDED APPLICATIONS FOR SAE 5W-20 AND SAE 5W-30 MOTOR OILS - GASOLINE AND FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLES ONLY FORD: 1992-2002 CROWN VICTORIA 1993-1994 TEMPO 1993-1997 THUNDERBIRD 1993-2002 ESCORT, MUSTANG, TAURUS 1995-2000 CONTOUR 1998-2002 ESCORT ZX2 2000-2002 FOCUS 1993-1996 BRONCO 1993-1997 AEROSTAR 1993-2002 E SERIES, F-150, RANGER 1995-2002 WINDSTAR 1997-1999 F-250 LD 1997-2001 EXPLORER 1997-2002 EXPEDITION 1999-2002 SUPER DUTY F SERIES, SUPER DUTY F-53 STRIPPED CHAS. 2000-2002 EXCURSION 2001-2002 ESCAPE LINCOLN: 1991-2002 TOWN CAR 1993-1998 MARK VIII 1993-2002 CONTINENTAL 2000-2002 LS 1998-2002 NAVIGATOR MERCURY: 1992-2002 GRAND MARQUIS 1993-1994 TOPAZ 1993-1997 COUGAR 1993-1999 TRACER 1993-2002 SABLE 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR 1997-2001 MOUNTAINEER This article is being republished in its entirety to update the vehicle models, engines and years affected. NOTE PLEASE REFER TO THE VEHICLE APPLICATION LIST LATER IN THIS TSB FOR A COMPLETE LIST OF VEHICLES AFFECTED BY THIS TSB. ISSUE Ford Motor Company now recommends SAE 5W-20 viscosity grade for servicing most gasoline and flexible fueled vehicles. ACTION All 2001 and 2002 vehicles where SAE 5W-20 is specified should be serviced at the recommended oil change intervals using SAE 5W-20. This oil is an improved formulation to improve fuel economy. Testing has validated this viscosity grade can be used in many previous model year vehicles. It is recommended ALL vehicles on the following Vehicle Application Listing be service with SAE 5W-20. All 2001-2002 vehicles other than those listed in the "Exception 2001 Vehicles" or "Exception 2002 Vehicles" chart are being filled with SAE 5W-20 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Oil - Oil Recommendations/Applications > Page 2150 motor oil at the factory and should also be serviced with SAE 5W-20 oil. Exception 2001 Vehicles Exception 2002 Vehicles NOTE IF VEHICLE IS NOT LISTED IN THIS APPLICATION, SAE 5W-30 OIL IS RECOMMENDED. REFER TO TSB 99-8-16. Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 99-8-16 SUPERSEDES: 01-4-7 WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 401000, 490000, 497000, 499000 Veh. App. Listing Approved For SAE 5W-20 Motor Oil ^ 1993-1996 1.9L Escort/Tracer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Oil - Oil Recommendations/Applications > Page 2151 ^ 1995-2000 2.0L Zetec Contour/Mystique ^ 1999-2002 2.0L Cougar ^ 1997-2002 2.0L Escort/Tracer ^ 1998-2002 2.0L Escort ZX2 ^ 2000-2002 2.0L Focus ^ 2001-2002 2.0L Escape ^ 1993-1997 2.3L Ranger ^ 1993-1994 2.3L Mustang ^ 1993-1994 2.3L Tempo/Topaz ^ 1998-2001 2.5L Ranger ^ 1995-2000 2.5L Contour/Mystique ^ 1999-2002 2.5L Cougar ^ 2001-2002 3.0L 4V Escape ^ 1996-2001 3.0L 4V Taurus/Sable ^ 1993-2002 3.0L (Vulcan) Aerostar/Ranger, ^ Taurus/Sable (Flexible Fuel and Gas) ^ 1995-2000 3.0L (Vulcan) Windstar ^ 1993-1994 3.0L (Vulcan) Tempo/Topaz ^ 2000-2002 3.0L 4V Lincoln LS ^ 1995-2002 3.8L Windstar ^ 1993-1997 3.8L Taurus/Sable, ^ Thunderbird/Cougar, Continental ^ 1994-2002 3.8L Mustang ^ 2002-2002 3.9L 4V Lincoln LS ^ 1997-2002 4.2L (SPI) F-150 (under 8500 GVW only), E-Series ^ 1996-2002 4.6L 2V Mustang ^ 1992-2002 4.6L Crown Victoria/Grand Marquis ^ 1991-2002 4.6L Town Car ^ 1994-1997 4.6L 2V Thunderbird/Cougar ^ 1996-2002 4.6L 4V Mustang Cobra ^ 1995-2002 4.6L 4V Continental ^ 1993-1998 4.6L 4V Mark VIII Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Oil - Oil Recommendations/Applications > Page 2152 ^ 1997-2002 4.6L 2V Triton F-150/250 (under 8500 GVW only), E-Series, Expedition ^ 1993-1999 4.9L E-Series, F-Series ^ 1993-1995 5.0L Mustang/Mustang Cobra ^ 1993-1993 5.0L Thunderbird/Cougar ^ 1997-2001 5.0L Explorer/Mountaineer ^ 1993-1996 5.0L E-Series, F-Series, Bronco ^ 2000-2002 5.4L Excursion ^ 1998-2002 5.4L 2V/4V Navigator ^ 1997-2002 5.4L 2V F-1501250 (under 8500 GVW only), Expedition, E-Series, E-350 Chassis/RV/Cutaway ^ 1993-1997 5.8L F-Series, Bronco ^ 1993-1996 5.8L E-Series ^ 2000-2002 6.8L Excursion ^ 1997-2002 6.8L E-Series, E-350 Chassis/RV/Cutaway ^ 1999-2002 6.8L Super Duty F-Series 250 HD/350/450/550 Motorhome ^ 1993-1998 7.5L All Vehicles NOTE FOR 1993 THROUGH 1998 MODEL YEAR FFV USE XO-10W30-FFV. NOTE THE "EXCEPTION 2001-2002 VEHICLES" SHOULD BE SERVICED WITH SAE 5W-30 MOTOR OIL Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil With Filter ............................................................................................................................................ ........................................................... 4.25L (4.5 Qt) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2155 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Engine Oil Type ...................................................................................................................... Super Premium SAE 5W-20, XO-5W-20-QSP or equivalent Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering - Mercon V(R) Fluid Usage Power Steering Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Mercon V(R) Fluid Usage TSB 07-1-7 01/22/07 MERCON(R) ATF REPLACED BY MERCON(R) V AS A SERVICE FLUID FOR SOME POWER STEERING SYSTEMS FORD: 1996-1997 Thunderbird 1996-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 1998-2003 Escort 2000-2007 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2006 Ford GT 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1996-1997 Aerostar 1996-2007 E-Series, Explorer, Ranger 1997-2004 F-53 Motorhome Chassis 1997-2007 Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty 1998-2003 Windstar 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2007 Escape 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1996-1997 Cargo 1996-1998 L-Series 1996-1999 F- B-Series 2000-2007 F-650, F-750 2006-2007 Low Cab Forward LINCOLN: 1996-1998 Mark VIII 1996-1999 Continental 1996-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT 2007 MKX MERCURY: 1996-1997 Cougar 1996-2005 Sable 1996-2007 Grand Marquis 1999-2002 Cougar 2003-2004 Marauder 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2007 Mountaineer 1998-2002 Villager 2004-2007 Monterey 2005-2007 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid is being replaced by MERCON(R) V as a service fluid for power steering systems originally requiring MERCON(R). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering - Mercon V(R) Fluid Usage > Page 2160 ACTION Beginning immediately all power steering applications requiring MERCON(R) can now be serviced using MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V. After July 1, 2007, MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid will no longer be manufactured, therefore, availability of this fluid will continue until remaining inventory has been depleted. SERVICE PROCEDURE Service power steering Systems requiring MERCON(R) with MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V. CAUTION APPLICATIONS RECOMMENDING TYPE F AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION AND POWER STEERING FLUID MUST CONTINUE TO USE THAT PARTICULAR FLUID. USE OF ANY OTHER FLUID MAY CAUSE REDUCED FUNCTIONALITY OR DAMAGE Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Capacity Specifications Power Steering Fluid Capacity 2.0 qt (US) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2163 Power Steering Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications / / Power Steering Fluid Type MERCON(R) ATF Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications Capacity ............................................................................................................................................... .................................................. 850 kg (1 lb, 14 oz) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2168 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications A/C Refrigerant .................................................................................................................................... ....................................... R-134a Refrigerant YN-19 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2169 Refrigerant: Diagrams Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2170 Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service Precautions > Environmental Impact Information Refrigerant: Environmental Impact Information The Ozone Layer A thin layer of ozone molecules, located 10 to 30 miles above the earth, form a protective cover by absorbing a portion of the ultraviolet (UV) radiation emitted from the Sun. Ozone Depletion Scientific research performed over the past 15 years links the release of chlorofluorocarbons (CFC)s, also know by the trade name Freon) into the atmosphere to ozone depletion. When CFCs are released into the atmosphere, they eventually reach the ozone layer located in the stratosphere where they react with and destroy ozone molecules. Harmful Effects Ozone depletion and the corresponding increase in UV radiation has been shown to lead to higher incidents of cancer as well as global warming. When viewed from a global perspective, ozone depletion holds an enormous potential for damage. Upper Level Vs. Ground Level Ozone Confusion often arises when we hear about the necessity of the ozone layer and ground level ozone. The ozone layer existing high above the earth is beneficial but the same compound, when located at ground level, is harmful to humans, animals, crops and vegetation. Ground level ozone is a component of smog and forms when hydrocarbons (HC) react with nitrogen oxides (NOx) in the presence of sunlight and heat. Montreal Protocol In response to the growing body of evidence demonstrating the detrimental effects of (CFC)s, 24 countries and the European community met in Montreal, Canada, in 1987 to establish standards for the control of (CFC)s. Since that time, a total of 132 countries have become signatories to this agreement leading to an end of production of R12 in December, 1995, in all developed countries. As established by the Montreal Protocol, R12 production in developed countries has ceased. Clean Air Act The United States Congress, acting in response to the Montreal Protocol, banned production of (CFC)s by the year 2000. Congress also amended the Clean Air Act in an effort to control both the production and use of (CFC)s for refrigerant applications including mobile vehicle air conditioning systems. Additional Information Sources For more complete and detailed explanations of the above policies, please refer to: http://www.epa.gov/ozone/ Technician Certification Organizations providing technician refrigerant recovery and recycling certification include: National Institute for Automotive Service Excellence (ASE) 13505 Dulles Technology Drive, Suite 2 Herndon, VA 22071-3421 Phone: (703) 713-3800 Fax: (703) 713-0727 http://www.asecert.org/ International Mobile Air Conditioning Association (IMACA) P.O. Box 9000 Fort Worth, TX 76147-2000 Phone: (817) 732-4600 Fax: (817) 732-9610 http://www.imaca.org/ Mobile Air Conditioning Society (MACS) Worldwide P.O. Box 100 East Greenville, PA 18041 Phone: 215-679-2220 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service Precautions > Environmental Impact Information > Page 2173 Fax: 215-541-4635 http://www.macsw.org/ Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service Precautions > Environmental Impact Information > Page 2174 Refrigerant: Technician Safety Information WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE INJURY, THE AIR BAG SYSTEM BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING ANY CLIMATE CONTROL COMPONENTS. TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY POSITIVE CABLE AND WAIT ONE MINUTE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ CARBON MONOXIDE IS COLORLESS, ODORLESS AND DANGEROUS. IF IT IS NECESSARY TO OPERATE THE ENGINE WITH VEHICLE IN A CLOSED AREA SUCH AS A GARAGE, ALWAYS USE AN EXHAUST COLLECTOR TO VENT THE EXHAUST GASES OUTSIDE THE CLOSED AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ R-134A IS CLASSIFIED AS A SAFE REFRIGERANT, BUT MISUSE CAN MAKE IT DANGEROUS. THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS MUST BE OBSERVED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GOGGLES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM. ^ AVOID CONTACT WITH LIQUID REFRIGERANT R-134A. R-134A VAPORIZES AT APPROXIMATELY -25°C (-13°F) UNDER ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE AND IT WILL FREEZE SKIN TISSUE. ^ NEVER ALLOW REFRIGERANT R-134A GAS TO ESCAPE IN QUANTITY IN AN OCCUPIED SPACE. R-134A IS NON-TOXIC, BUT IT WILL DISPLACE THE OXYGEN NEEDED TO SUPPORT LIFE. ^ DO NOT ALLOW ANY PORTION OF THE CHARGED AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM TO BECOME TOO HOT. THE PRESSURE IN AN AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM RISES AS THE TEMPERATURE RISES AND TEMPERATURES OF APPROXIMATELY 85°C (185°F) CAN BE DANGEROUS. ^ ALLOW THE ENGINE TO COOL SUFFICIENTLY PRIOR TO CARRYING OUT MAINTENANCE OR SERIOUS BURNS AND INJURY CAN OCCUR. ^ USE EXTREME CARE AND OBSERVE ALL SAFETY AND SERVICE PRECAUTIONS RELATED TO THE USE OF REFRIGERANTS. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ DUE TO REFRIGERANT HAZARDS, ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GOGGLES AND NON-PENETRABLE GLOVES WHEN WORKING ON OR FLUSHING A/C SYSTEMS. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service Precautions > Environmental Impact Information > Page 2175 Refrigerant: Vehicle Damage Warnings CAUTION: - To avoid damaging the vehicle or A/C components, the following precautions must be observed: ^ The A/C refrigerant of all vehicles must be identified and analyzed prior to refrigerant charging. Failure to do so can contaminate the shop bulk refrigerant and other vehicles. ^ Do not add R-12 refrigerant to an A/C system that requires the use of R-134a refrigerant. These two types of refrigerant must never be mixed. Doing so can damage the A/C system. ^ Charge the A/C system with the engine running only at the low-pressure side to prevent refrigerant slugging from damaging the A/C compressor. ^ Use only R-134a refrigerant. Due to environmental concerns, when the air conditioning system is drained, the refrigerant must be collected using refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment. R-134a must never be removed without the appropriate equipment or released into the atmosphere. Use of a recovery machine dedicated to R-134a is necessary to reduce the possibility of oil and refrigerant incompatibility concerns. Refer to the instructions provided by the equipment manufacturer when removing refrigerant from or charging the air conditioning system. ^ Refrigerant R-134a must not be mixed with air for leak testing or used with air for any other purpose above atmospheric pressure. R-134a is combustible when mixed with high concentrations of air and at higher pressures. ^ A number of manufacturers are producing refrigerant products that are described as direct substitutes for refrigerant R-134a. The use of any unauthorized substitute refrigerant can severely damage the A/C components. If repair is necessary, use only new or recycled refrigerant R-134a. - To avoid contamination of the A/C system: ^ Keep service tools and the work area clean. ^ Never open or loosen a connection before discharging the system. ^ When loosening a connection, if any residual pressure is evident, allow it to leak out before opening the fitting. ^ Evacuate a system that has been opened to install a new component or a system that has discharged through leakage before charging. ^ Seal open fittings with a cap or plug immediately after disconnecting a component from the system. ^ Clean the outside of the fittings thoroughly before disconnecting a component from the system. ^ Do not remove the sealing caps from a new component until ready to install. ^ Refrigerant oil will absorb moisture from the atmosphere if left uncapped. Do not open an oil container until ready to use, and install the cap immediately after using. Store the oil in a clean, moisture-free container. ^ Install a new O-ring seal before connecting an open fitting. Coat the fitting and O-ring seal with refrigerant oil before connecting. ^ When installing a refrigerant line, avoid sharp bends. Position the line away from the exhaust or any sharp edges that can chafe the line. ^ Tighten threaded fittings only to specifications. The steel and aluminum fittings used in the refrigerant system will not tolerate overtightening. ^ When disconnecting a fitting, use a wrench on both halves of the fitting to prevent twisting of the refrigerant lines or tubes. ^ Do not open a refrigerant system or uncap a new component unless it is as close as possible to room temperature. This will prevent condensation from forming inside a component that is cooler than the surrounding air. - Good ventilation is necessary in the area where electronic A/C leak testing is to be carried out. If the surrounding air is contaminated with refrigerant gas, the leak detector will indicate this gas all the time. Odors from other chemicals such as antifreeze, diesel fuel, disc brake cleaner, or other cleaning solvents can cause the same problem. A fan, even in a well-ventilated area, is very helpful in removing small traces of contamination from the air that might affect the leak detector. - A/C Refrigerant Analyzer must be used before the recovery of any vehicle's A/C refrigerant. Failure to do so puts the shop's bulk refrigerant at risk of contamination. If the vehicle's A/C refrigerant is contaminated, refer the customer to the service facility that carried out the last A/C service. If the customer wishes to pay the additional cost, use the A/C recovery equipment that is designated for recovering contaminated A/C refrigerant. All contaminated A/C refrigerant must be disposed of as hazardous waste. For all equipment, follow the equipment manufacturer's procedures and instructions. - Suction accumulator/drier, muffler, hoses, thermal expansion valve, and fixed orifice tube should be removed when flushing the A/C system. Internal plumbing of these devices makes it impossible to correctly remove any residual-flushing agent. Except for the hoses, these components are typically discarded after A/C system contamination. Hoses can normally be reused unless they are clogged with foreign material. The 3.785 liters (1 gallon) of A/C Systems Flushing Solvent F4AZ-19579-A and FL1-A filter used in A/C Flusher 219-00001 are intended for use on one vehicle only. They may be used to flush both the A/C condenser core and the A/C evaporator core on an individual vehicle, but under no circumstances should they be used on more than one vehicle. - During normal A/C operation, oil is circulated through the system with the refrigerant, and a small amount is retained in each component. If certain components of the system are removed for new installation, some of the refrigerant oil will go with the component. To maintain the original total oil charge, it is necessary to compensate for the oil lost by adding oil to the system with the new part. - If contaminated refrigerant is detected, DO NOT recover the refrigerant into your recovery/recycling equipment. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) 1. Prior to recovering or charging the refrigerant system, you must verify the purity of the refrigerant. 2. Connect the R-134a A/C Refrigerant Center to the low and high pressure service gauge port valves. NOTE: Some R-134a service centers require the use of an A/C manifold gauge set. 3. Recover the refrigerant from the system following the operating instructions provided by the equipment manufacturer. 4. Once the service center has recovered the vehicle A/C system refrigerant, close the service center inlet valve (if so equipped). Then switch off the power supply. 5. Allow the vehicle A/C system to remain closed for about two minutes. Observe the system vacuum level as shown on the gauge. If the pressure does not rise, disconnect the recovery station hose(s). 6. If the system pressure rises, repeat Steps 2 through 5 until the vacuum level remains stable for two minutes. 7. Carry out the required repairs, then evacuate and recharge the A/C system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 2178 Refrigerant: Service and Repair Identifying Refrigerants Delux A/C Refrigerant Analyzer SPECIAL TOOL(S) 1. Follow the instructions included with the refrigerant analyzer to obtain the sample for testing. NOTE: Prior to recovering or charging the refrigerant system, you must use an A/C refrigerant analyzer to identify gas samples taken directly from the refrigeration system or storage containers. 2. The analyzer will display one of the following: ^ A green "PASS" Light Emitting Diode (LED) will light if the purity of the R-134, R-12 or the R-22 is better than 98% by weight. ^ A red "FAIL" LED will light if the purity of the gases does not meet the 98% purity standard. ^ A red "FAIL" LED and "HYDROCARBON" light will illuminate and a horn will sound if a hydrocarbon is detected above 5%. This will alert the user of potential hazards. 3. If contaminated refrigerant is detected, DO NOT recover the refrigerant into your recovery/recycling equipment. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 2179 Refrigerant: Service and Repair Handling of Contaminated Refrigerants 1. Recover the contaminated refrigerant using suitable recovery-only equipment designed for capturing and storing contaminated refrigerant. ^ This equipment must only be used to recover contaminated refrigerant to prevent the spread to other vehicles. ^ If this equipment is not available, contact an A/C service facility in your area with the correct equipment to carry out this service. CAUTION: If contaminated refrigerant is detected, DO NOT recover the refrigerant into your recovery/recycling equipment. 2. Determine and correct the cause of the customer's initial concern. 3. Remove the suction accumulator/drier. NOTE: ^ Residual refrigerant oil in the suction accumulator/drier must be drained and measured for correct oil system matching. ^ The suction accumulator/drier cannot be cleaned and a new suction accumulator/drier must be installed. 4. Clean the A/C evaporator core and the A/C condenser core by flushing. 5. Install the new suction accumulator/drier. 6. Correctly oil match the system. 7. Evacuate and charge the system. 8. Dispose of contaminated refrigerant according to all federal, state and local regulations. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 2180 Refrigerant: Service and Repair Evacuation and Charging Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) 1. Prior to charging the refrigerant system, you must verify the purity of the refrigerant. See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Identifying Refrigerants 2. Connect the R-134a A/C Refrigerant Center to the low and high pressure service gauge port valves. NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a charging station to carry out evacuation and charging of the refrigerant system. If a charging station is not available, system charging may be accomplished using a separate vacuum pump, charging cylinder, and manifold gauge set. 3. Evacuate the system until the low-pressure gauge reads at least 99.4 kPa (29.5 in-Hg) (vacuum) and as close to 101.1 kPa (30 in-Hg) as possible. Continue to operate the vacuum pump for a minimum of 45 minutes. 4. Turn off the evacuation pump. Observe the low-pressure gauge for five minutes to make sure that the system vacuum is held. If vacuum is not held for five minutes, leak test the system, service the leaks, and evacuate the system again. 5. Correctly oil match the system to verify that the correct amount of refrigerant oil is present in the system. 6. Charge the system with the specified weight of refrigerant and refrigerant oil. 7. When no more refrigerant is being drawn into the system, start the engine and select MAX A/C operation. Adjust the blower motor speed to maximum and allow the remaining refrigerant to be drawn into the system. Continue to add refrigerant into the system until the specified weight of R-134a has been added. Close the charging cylinder valve and allow the system to pull any remaining refrigerant from the hose. When the suction pressure drops to approximately 207 kPa (30 psi), close the charging hose valve. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 2181 Refrigerant: Service and Repair Leak Detection Electronic Leak Detection Refrigerent Leak Detector SPECIAL TOOL(S) CAUTION: Good ventilation is necessary in the area where electronic A/C leak testing is to be carried out. If the surrounding air is contaminated with refrigerant gas, the leak detector will indicate this gas all the time. Odors from other chemicals such as antifreeze, diesel fuel, disc brake cleaner, or other cleaning solvents can cause the same problem. A fan, even in a well-ventilated area, is very helpful in removing small traces of contamination from the air that might affect the leak detector. 1. Leak test the refrigerant system using the Refrigerant Leak Detector. Follow instructions included with leak detector for handling and operation techniques. NOTE: System pressure should be between 413-551 kPa (60-80 psi) at 24°C (75°F) with the engine off. 2. If a leak is found, recover the refrigerant and repair the system. Tracer Dye Leak Detection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 2182 Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) NOTE: Ford Motor Company vehicles are produced with R-134a Leak Tracer Dye incorporated into the A/C system. The location of leaks can be pinpointed by the bright yellow-green glow of the tracer dye. Since more than one leak can exist, always inspect each component. 1. Check for leaks using a 120-watt UV spot lamp. 2. Scan all components, fittings and lines of the A/C system. 3. After the leak is repaired, remove any traces of leak dye with a general purpose oil solvent. 4. Verify the repair by operating the system for a short time and inspecting with the UV spot lamp. Tracer Dye Injection NOTE: System pressure should be between 413-551 kPa (60-80 psi) at 24°C (75°F) with the engine off. 1. Install the Manifold Gauge Set or a recovery station. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 2183 2. Turn the valve on the fluorescent tracer dye injector all the way to the left to close the valve. 3. Fill the reservoir with 7 ml (0.25 ounce) of R-134a Fluorescent Tracer Dye 164-R3712. 4. Install the injector between the low-side quick disconnect and the vehicle low-pressure service gauge port valve. 5. Open all quick disconnect valves and charge the refrigerant system. 6. When system charging is complete, recover the refrigerant from the dye injector. 7. Remove the dye injector from the low-side quick disconnect valve. NOTE: Only connect the dye-injector to the Manifold Gauge Set or the charging/recovery station when dye is to be injected. The dye injector has a one-way check valve that will prevent system refrigerant recovery and evacuation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications General Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2188 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil R-134a Systems ................................................................................................................... F7AZ-19589-DA (Motorcraft YN-12-C) WSH-M1C231-B Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2189 Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair Refrigerant Oil Addition CAUTION: During normal A/C operation, oil is circulated through the system with the refrigerant, and a small amount is retained in each component. If certain components of the system are removed for new installation, some of the refrigerant oil will go with the component. To maintain the original total oil charge, it is necessary to compensate for the oil lost by adding oil to the system with the new part. 1. Rotate the A/C compressor shaft six to eight revolutions while collecting oil in a clean measuring device. ^ If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is between 85-142 ml (3-5 ounces), pour the same amount plus 30 ml (1 ounce) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B into the new A/C compressor. ^ If the amount of oil that was removed from the old A/C compressor is greater than 142 ml (5 ounces), pour the same amount drained of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B into the new A/C compressor. ^ If the amount of oil that was removed from the old A/C compressor is less than 85 ml (3 ounces), pour 85 ml (3 ounces) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B into the new A/C compressor. NOTE: Service A/C compressors are shipped without compressor oil. 2. For the suction accumulator/drier, drill two 1/2 inch holes in the suction accumulator/drier cylinder and drain the oil into a calibrated container. ^ Add a quantity of new oil to match that drained from the old suction accumulator/drier plus 60 ml (2 ounces) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. 3. For the A/C evaporator core, add 89 ml (3 ounces) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B to the suction accumulator/drier inlet tube. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2190 4. For the A/C condenser core, add 30 ml (1 ounce) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B to the A/C condenser core or the suction accumulator/drier inlet tube. 5. Add 60 ml (2 ounces) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B to the suction accumulator/drier inlet tube when carrying out each of the following repairs: ^ installation of a new A/C evaporator core orifice ^ installation of a new A/C compressor pressure relief valve ^ installation of a new refrigerant line ^ repair of an O-ring seal leak ^ repair of a charge port leak 6. Installation of new components that do not require discharge of refrigerant and resulting oil loss, such as the A/C cycling switch and the A/C pressure transducer, do not require additional oil. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Specifications Brake Bleeding: Specifications Disc Brake Caliper Bleeder Screws 12 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed Brake Master Cylinder-Bench Bleed WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. 1. Support the brake master cylinder body in a soft jaw vise, and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with specified brake fluid. ^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 2. Install plugs in the front and rear brake outlet ports. 3. Loosen the plug in the front outlet port and slowly depress the primary piston. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 2196 4. Tighten the plug in the front outlet port and release the primary piston. 5. Repeat this procedure until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows. 6. Repeat Steps 3, 4, and 5 for the rear outlet port with the front outlet port plugged. 7. Tighten the plugs and attempt to depress the primary piston. The piston will not depress if all the air is bled out of the system. 8. Install the reservoir cap and install the brake master cylinder in the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 2197 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake Master Cylinder - In-Vehicle Bleed Brake Master Cylinder-In-Vehicle Bleed WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and Polyglycol. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. 1. Disconnect the brake outlet lines from the brake master cylinder and cap the lines. 2. Install short brake hoses to the master cylinder outlet ports with the ends submerged in the brake master cylinder reservoir. 3. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows from both brake hoses. 5. Remove the short brake hoses and install the brake outlet lines. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 2198 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Gravity Bleeding Gravity Bleed Brake system 1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do not let it run dry. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, then to the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front wheel. Rear drum brakes 3. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do not let it run dry. Loosen the rear wheel cylinder bleeder screw and leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows. 4. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. Front disc brakes 5. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do not let it run dry. Open the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. Leave open until clear bubble-free brake fluid flows. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 2199 6. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. 7. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with fluid and install the reservoir cap. ^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 2200 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Manual Bleeding Manual Bleed WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. Brake system 1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do not let it run dry. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, then to the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front wheel. Rear drum brakes 3. Attach a rubber drain hose to the rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 5. Loosen the bleeder screw until fluid flow stops. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal and tighten the bleeder screw. 6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows. 7. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. 8. Continue bleeding the rest of the system. Front disc brakes Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 2201 9. Attach a rubber drain hose to the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 10. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 11. Loosen the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw until fluid flow stops. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal and tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. 12. Repeat Steps 10 and 11 until clear, bubble-free fluid flows. 13. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. 14. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir and install the reservoir cap. ^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 2202 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed Brake Master Cylinder-Bench Bleed WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. 1. Support the brake master cylinder body in a soft jaw vise, and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with specified brake fluid. ^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 2. Install plugs in the front and rear brake outlet ports. 3. Loosen the plug in the front outlet port and slowly depress the primary piston. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 2203 4. Tighten the plug in the front outlet port and release the primary piston. 5. Repeat this procedure until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows. 6. Repeat Steps 3, 4, and 5 for the rear outlet port with the front outlet port plugged. 7. Tighten the plugs and attempt to depress the primary piston. The piston will not depress if all the air is bled out of the system. 8. Install the reservoir cap and install the brake master cylinder in the vehicle. Brake Master Cylinder - In-Vehicle Bleed Brake Master Cylinder-In-Vehicle Bleed WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and Polyglycol. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. 1. Disconnect the brake outlet lines from the brake master cylinder and cap the lines. 2. Install short brake hoses to the master cylinder outlet ports with the ends submerged in the brake master cylinder reservoir. 3. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows from both brake hoses. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 2204 5. Remove the short brake hoses and install the brake outlet lines. Brake System Gravity Bleeding Gravity Bleed Brake system 1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do not let it run dry. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, then to the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front wheel. Rear drum brakes 3. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do not let it run dry. Loosen the rear wheel cylinder bleeder screw and leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows. 4. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. Front disc brakes Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 2205 5. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do not let it run dry. Open the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. Leave open until clear bubble-free brake fluid flows. 6. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. 7. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with fluid and install the reservoir cap. ^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. Brake System Manual Bleeding Manual Bleed WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. Brake system 1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do not let it run dry. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 2206 Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, then to the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front wheel. Rear drum brakes 3. Attach a rubber drain hose to the rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 5. Loosen the bleeder screw until fluid flow stops. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal and tighten the bleeder screw. 6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows. 7. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. 8. Continue bleeding the rest of the system. Front disc brakes 9. Attach a rubber drain hose to the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 10. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 11. Loosen the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw until fluid flow stops. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal and tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. 12. Repeat Steps 10 and 11 until clear, bubble-free fluid flows. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 2207 13. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. 14. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir and install the reservoir cap. ^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. Brake System Pressure Bleeding Brake System Pressure Bleeding Special Tool(s) WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or replacement, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. 1. Clean the outside of the brake master cylinder reservoir. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 2208 2. Remove the reservoir cap and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with brake fluid. ^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 3. NOTE: Master cylinder pressure bleeder adapter tools are available from various manufacturers of pressure bleeding equipment. Follow the instructions of the manufacturer when installing the adapter. Install Brake Bleeder to the brake master cylinder reservoir, and attach the Brake Bleeder tank hose to the fitting on the adapter. 4. Attach a rubber drain hose to the RH rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 5. Open the valve on the Brake Bleeder tank. 6. Loosen the bleeder screw. Leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows, then close the bleeder screw and remove the rubber hose. 7. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. 8. Continue bleeding the rest of the system, going in order from the LH rear wheel to the RH front wheel, ending with the LH front wheel. 9. Close the Brake Bleeder tank valve and remove the tank hose from the adapter, and remove the adapter. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 2209 10. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir and install the reservoir cap. ^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. Four Wheel Antilock Brake System Bleeding Brake System Bleeding Special Tool(s) Anti-Lock Brakes Bleed 1. NOTE: Carrying out the System Bleed function drives trapped air from the hydraulic control unit (HCU). Subsequent bleeding removes the air from the brake hydraulic system to the bleeder screws. NOTE: The engine must be running to provide adequate voltage to the HCU module during the anti-lock control portion of the system bleed. Connect the diagnostic tool. 2. Start the engine and depress the brake pedal to half of the full travel position. 3. Access FUNCTION TEST mode and press the trigger to run the SYSTEM BLEED FUNCTION. 4. Manually bleed the brake hydraulic system. 5. Repeat the procedure carrying out a total of two diagnostic tool cycles and two manual bleed cycles. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Customer Safety Information WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. ^ THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information > Page 2214 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Technician Safety Information WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. ^ THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming Seats Removed There are two deactivation procedures. ^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing side air bag concerns, and also when repairing any in-seat component in vehicles equipped with side air bags. ^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal. This procedure will be used when diagnosing a concern not related to the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag system is being serviced, the airbag system must be deactivated using the appropriate deactivation procedure. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system, the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring behind the access panel on the bottom of the steering wheel. 4. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 5. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the passenger air bag. 7. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, remove the front seats. 9. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag floor electrical connector. 10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side floor electrical connector. 12. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable. Seats Not Removed There are two deactivation procedures. ^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing side air bag concerns, and also when repairing any in-seat component in vehicles equipped with side air bags. ^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal. This procedure will be used when diagnosing a concern not related to the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). 1. Move and tilt the front seats to their highest and most forward position. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 2217 SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag system is being serviced, the airbag system must be deactivated using the appropriate deactivation procedure. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system, the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. 3. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 4. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring behind the access panel in the bottom of the steering wheel. 5. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring. 6. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector beneath the front seat. 10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag electrical connector beneath the passenger seat. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 12. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the driver seat. 13. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the front seat. 14. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle electrical connector. 15. Reconnect the battery ground cable. Depowering and Repowering Procedure Depowering Procedure WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. WARNING: Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which can result in personal injury. WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be depowered. NOTE: The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the central junction box (CJB), located below the LH side of the instrument panel, remove the cover and the restraints control module (RCM) fuse F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) from the CJB. 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 2218 proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Repowering Procedure 1. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected. 2. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 3. Install RCM fuses F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) to the CJB and close the cover. 4. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front of any air bag module when the battery ground cable is connected. Connect the battery ground cable. 5. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool. Seats Removed 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 4. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 2219 5. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 7. Install the front seats. 8. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. ^ Reconnect the electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 10. Reconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 11. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 12. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure Seats Not Removed 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. ^ Reconnect the electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 4. If equipped with side air bags, remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 5. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 7. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 2220 8. If equipped with side air bags, connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. 9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 10. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 11. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 2221 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag System Reconnect Checklist Air Bag Reconnect Checklist The checklist below should be completed following diagnosis or repair of any air bag system concern: 1. All in-seat electrical connectors connected? 2. All air bag modules connected? 3. Restraints Control Module (RCM) connected? 4. All safety belt pretensioners connectors connected? 5. All sensors (side impact) connected? 6. Battery connected? Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 2222 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position and visually monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either: ^ fail to light. ^ remain lit continuously. ^ flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the RUN position. This is the time required for the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 2228 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 2229 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 2230 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 2231 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 2232 Fuse: Locations Central Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 2233 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 2234 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 2235 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 2236 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Find and Use These Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams ^ System Diagrams ^ Grounds Diagrams Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2239 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow. Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the diagram. Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be found. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2240 Fuse And Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. Fuse Circuits Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery. Ground Distribution Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text "partial". Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2241 Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of (1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces). The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number. Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the way out by a spring. Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control. A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the way in. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. circuit Numbering Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification Circuit Numbering: Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting electrical circuits. Function: The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter "S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit. System-Connection (including branch): Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate wires in one connection with the same function. Wire Identification (wire colors): The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2242 Wire Identification Example Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know the following information about the wire: Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit System: AC = Headlamp leveling Connection: 3 = Switch connection A = Branch Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe). Circuit Identification Charts Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2243 Circuit Identification Chart System Codes Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2244 Sample Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2245 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2246 Sample Diagram Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2247 Circuit Identification Chart SYSTEM CODES CHART Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2248 SAMPLE DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2249 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2250 Sample Diagram Electrical Symbols ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2251 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2252 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2253 Types of Diagrams Shown Types of Diagrams Shown Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them. Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations. Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system information suitable for diagnostic operations. Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a relationship to them, are also included. All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding of the system component interactions. Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type. Wire Color Code Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2254 Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2255 Fuse: Diagnostic Aids These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2256 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2257 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2260 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2261 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2262 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2263 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2264 Fuse: Application and ID Central Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2265 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2266 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2267 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2268 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box Fuse Block: Locations Battery Junction Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 2273 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 2274 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 2275 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 2276 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 2277 Fuse Block: Locations Central Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 2278 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 2279 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 2280 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 2281 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Find and Use These Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams ^ System Diagrams ^ Grounds Diagrams Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2284 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow. Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the diagram. Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be found. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2285 Fuse And Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. Fuse Circuits Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery. Ground Distribution Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text "partial". Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2286 Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of (1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces). The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number. Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the way out by a spring. Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control. A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the way in. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. circuit Numbering Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification Circuit Numbering: Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting electrical circuits. Function: The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter "S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit. System-Connection (including branch): Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate wires in one connection with the same function. Wire Identification (wire colors): The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2287 Wire Identification Example Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know the following information about the wire: Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit System: AC = Headlamp leveling Connection: 3 = Switch connection A = Branch Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe). Circuit Identification Charts Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2288 Circuit Identification Chart System Codes Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2289 Sample Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2290 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2291 Sample Diagram Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2292 Circuit Identification Chart SYSTEM CODES CHART Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2293 SAMPLE DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2294 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2295 Sample Diagram Electrical Symbols ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2296 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2297 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2298 Types of Diagrams Shown Types of Diagrams Shown Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them. Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations. Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system information suitable for diagnostic operations. Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a relationship to them, are also included. All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding of the system component interactions. Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type. Wire Color Code Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2299 Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2300 Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2301 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2302 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2303 Fuse Block: Connector Views Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2304 Diagram 700-01-00-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2305 Diagram 700-01-00-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box Fuse Block: Application and ID Battery Junction Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2308 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2309 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2310 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2311 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2312 Fuse Block: Application and ID Central Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2313 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2314 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2315 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2316 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 2321 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 2322 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 2323 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 2324 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 2325 Relay Box: Locations Central Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 2326 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 2327 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 2328 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 2329 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box Relay Box: Diagrams Central Junction Box Diagram 700-01-00-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 2332 Diagram 700-01-00-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 2333 Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2336 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2337 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2338 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2339 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2340 Relay Box: Application and ID Central Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2341 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2342 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2343 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2344 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation SERVICE ENGINE SOON Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine's emission control system. This is commonly known as the On Board Diagnostic System (OBD II). This OBD II system protects the environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet government emission standards. The OBD II system also assists the service technician in properly servicing your vehicle. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON indicator light illuminates when the ignition is first turned to the ON position to check the bulb. If it comes on after the engine is started, on of the engine's emission control systems may be malfunctioning. The light may illuminate without a driveability concern being noted. The vehicle will ususally be drivable and will not require towing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2349 Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair Solid SERVICE ENGINE SOON light This means that the On Board Diagnostic System (OBD II) has detected a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause your SERVICE ENGINE SOON light to illuminate. Examples are: 1. The vehicle has run out of fuel. (The engine may misfire or run poorly.) 2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel. 3. The fuel cap may not have been properly installed and securely tightened. The temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank with good quality fuel and/or properly installing and securely tightening the gas cap. After three driving cycles with out these or any other temporary malfunctions present, the SERVICE ENGINE SOON light should turn off. (A driving cycle consists of a cold engine start-up followed by mixed city/highway driving.) No additional vehicle service is required. Blinking SERVICE ENGINE SOON light Engine misfire is occurring which could cause damage to your catalytic converter. You should drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Check Engine, Service Engine Soon Or ISO Standard Engine Symbol The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) (Figure 15) alerts the driver that the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) has detected an OBD II emission-related component or system fault. When this occurs, an OBD II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be set. ^ The MIL is located on the instrument cluster and is labeled CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE SOON or ISO standard engine symbol (Figure 16). ^ Power is supplied to the MIL whenever the ignition switch is in the RUN or START position. ^ The MIL will remain on in the RUN/START mode as a bulb check during the instrument cluster proveout for approximately 4 seconds. ^ If the MIL remains on after the bulb check: The PCM illuminates the MIL for an emission related concern and a DTC will be present. - The instrument cluster will illuminate the MIL if the PCM does not send a control message to the instrument cluster. - The PCM is operating in the Hardware Limited Operation Strategy (HLOS). - The MIL circuit is shorted to ground. ^ If the MIL remains off (during the bulb check): Bulb is damaged. - MIL circuit is open. ^ To turn off the MIL after a repair, a reset command from the Scan Tool must be sent, or three consecutive drive cycles must be completed without a fault. ^ For any MIL concern, GO to Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection. ^ If the MIL blinks at a steady rate, a severe misfire condition could possibly exist. ^ If the MIL blinks erratically, an intermittent open B+ to the bulb or an intermittent short to ground in the MIL circuit exist. Also, the PCM can reset while cranking if battery voltage is low. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair The manufacturer does NOT show that this vehicle is equipped with an oil change reminder lamp. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and Operation Vehicle Lifting: Description and Operation JACKING WARNING: ^ DO NOT RUN THE ENGINE WHEN JACKING THE VEHICLE. THE WHEELS CONTACTING THE GROUND COULD CAUSE THE VEHICLE TO MOVE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ MAKE SURE THE JACK AND JACK STANDS ARE CORRECTLY LOCATED TO PREVENT THE VEHICLE FROM FALLING. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ WHEEL CHOCKS SHOULD BE USED TO PREVENT THE VEHICLE FROM ROLLING AND FALLING OFF THE JACK. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. CAUTION: The service jack provided with the vehicle is only intended to be used in an emergency for changing a deflated tire. Never use the service jack to hoist the vehicle for any other service. Refer to the Owner Guide when using the jack supplied with the vehicle. Jacking Points - Front 1. The front jacking point is at the bolt head of the lower control arm. Jacking Points - Rear 1. The rear jacking points are located on the rear trailing arms. LIFTING Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2360 Lifting Points 1. The lifting points are part of the uni-body structure. CAUTION: Damage to the suspension, exhaust or steering linkage components may occur if care is not exercised when positioning the hoist adapters prior to lifting the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment Technical Service Bulletin # 02-1-6 Date: 020121 Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment Article No. 02-1-6 01/21/02 ^ WHEELS - ROAD FORCE MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT HUNTER G5P9700 - SERVICE TIPS ^ VIBRATION - ROAD FORCE MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT HUNTER G5P9700 - SERVICE TIPS FORD: 1997 THUNDERBIRD 1997-2000 CONTOUR 1997-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, ESCORT, MUSTANG, TAURUS 2000-2002 FOCUS 2002 THUNDERBIRD 1997-2002 E SERIES, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 1999-2002 SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2002 EXCURSION 2001-2002 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT LINCOLN: 1997-1998 MARK VIII 1997-2002 CONTINENTAL, TOWN CAR 2000-2002 LS 1998-2002 NAVIGATOR 2002 BLACKWOOD MERCURY: 1997 COUGAR 1997-2000 MYSTIQUE 1997-2002 GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE 1999-2002 COUGAR 1997-2002 MOUNTAINEER, VILLAGER ISSUE The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance when using tire/wheel assembly road force measurement equipment such as the Hunter GSP97OO. This bulletin is authored and endorsed by Hunter, Michelin, Goodyear, Continental/General, Hankook, Bridgestone/Firestone and Pirelli. Items addressed are software upgrades, road test (exercise tires), assembly center verification and warranty restrictions. This type of equipment can be a valuable tool to improve customer satisfaction when used as a vibration repair tool. This type of equipment can also provide a high level of customer satisfaction when used as an assembly too! when the customer has purchased new wheels/tires in the "Around-the-Wheel" program. ACTION The Hunter GSP9700/9712 road force measurement tool is NOT to be used for determining if a tire or wheel meets a specification. It can be used as a service diagnostic tool to minimize road force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. The tool such as the Hunter GSP97OO can approximate the low point of the "'1heel and the high point of the tire. This allows the tire to be matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly road force variation. This will minimize the contribution to vibration from the tire/wheel assembly. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 306000, 703000 Service Information NOTE TRADITIONAL WHEEL BALANCER "MATCH-MOUNTING" OR "WEIGHT OPTIMIZATION" ACHIEVES WEIGHT MINIMIZATION AND WILL NOT ACHIEVE THE SAME RESULTS. NOTE WARRANTY CLAIMS CANNOT BE SUBMITTED FOR TIRE/WHEEL REPLACEMENT BASED ON HUNTER G5P9700 RESULTS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2365 NOTE UPGRADING SOFTWARE TO VERSION 2.1 OR GREATER WILL ENHANCE THE TECHNICIANS CAPABILITY TO MINIMIZE THE ROAD FORCE VARIATION OF THE TIRE/WHEEL ASSEMBLY. THE VERSION OF SOFTWARE CAN BE IDENTIFIED FROM THE START-UP SCREEN BY PRESSING THE CENTER SHIFT KEY ONCE (I.E. HAS TWO GREEN ARROWS) AND SELECTING THE K1 KEY ("IDENTIFY SOFTWARE"). IF THE SYSTEM IS IN THE BALANCE MODE, THE START-UP SCREEN CAN BE ACCESSED BY PRESSING THE "R" KEY TWICE (THIS IS JUST TO THE LEFT OF THE START KEY). CONTACT YOUR LOCAL HUNTER ENGINEERING REPRESENTATIVE TO ORDER SOFTWARE UPGRADES. 1. Check the inflation pressure of all four tires and adjust to the vehicle manufacturers recommended pressure. The vehicle manufacturers recommended tire pressure for the original equipment tires can be found on the drivers side door placard. 2. Road test the vehicle on a smooth road for a minimum of 10 miles. Performance of the road test at highway speeds is preferred. NOTE THIS MUST BE PERFORMED TO "EXERCISE" THE TIRES AND ELIMINATE "COLD" FLAT SPOTTING THAT OCCURS DUE TO SHORT-PERIOD VEHICLE STORAGE OR PARKING. IF THE VEHICLE'S TIRES ARE NOT EXERCISED FIRST, ACCURACY OF THE ROAD FORCE MEASUREMENTS CAN VARY SIGNIFICANTLY, EVEN IF THE VEHICLE IS PARKED/STORED IN ONE LOCATION FOR ONLY A SHORT PERIOD OF TIME (E.G. 20 MINUTES). 3. Perform the road force measurement IMMEDIATELY after exercising the tires. If the road force measurement cannot be performed immediately, lift all four tires off the ground with a hoist or jack stands to prevent measurement errors due to further flat spotting. 4. Assembly centering verification MUST be performed and PASSED prior to any road force measurement. For those with a software version other than 2.1 the centering verification must be performed manually. a. Spin assembly to measure. Record the assembly R1H. b. Loosen wing-nut. c. Rotate and reposition assembly and cone/adapter to a different mounting location (180 degrees). d. Tighten wing-nut. e. Re-spin to measure. Record the assembly R1H. f. Compare results obtained in STEP a with those obtained in STEP e. g. If the difference in assembly R1H measurements is less than 5 lbs., the assembly centering verification PASSES and technician can proceed to the measurement/repair process. If the centering verification FAILS proceed to STEP h. h. The following items may contribute to an assembly centering verification FAILURE. ^ Cone/adapter does not fit properly or is incorrect for the application ^ The wheel mounting surface is damaged 5. For those with software version 2.1 the following procedure will lead the technician through a Centering Check. a. From the balance mode screen press the center SHIFT KEY ONCE (i.e. has two green arrows). b. Push the "K1" button to select Perform Centering Check. c. Follow the instructions. d. If Centering Check PASSES proceed to the measurement/repair process. If the Centering Check fails proceed to step e. e. The following items may contribute to an assembly centering verification FAILURE. ^ Cone/adapter does not fit properly or is incorrect for the application ^ The wheel mounting surface is damaged 6. Prior to installing assembly on the vehicle balance assembly utilizing the two-plane dynamic balancing mode. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2366 Technical Service Bulletin # 00L12 Date: 010101 Information 00L12 SPECIAL FIELD ACTION All 2001 Model Year Passenger Cars and Light Trucks up to and Including F550 Super Duty Vehicles Sold in the U.S., U.S. Territories, Mexico, and Canada - Warranty Guide Supplement Original - January 2001 Dealer Letter Attachment I ^ Administrative Information Attachment II ^ Labor Allowances Attachment III ^ Technical Information Customer Notification Letter Supplement # 1, February 5, 2001 - Updated Information All 2001 Model Year Passenger Cars and Light Trucks up to and Including F550 Super Duty Vehicles Sold in the U.S., U.S. Territories, Mexico, and Canada - Warranty Guide Supplement Supplement # 2, February 19, 2001 - Updated Information All 2001 Model Year Passenger Cars and light Trucks up to and Including F550 Super Duty Vehicles Sold in the U.S., U.S. Territories, Mexico, and Canada - Warranty Guide Supplement Special Field Action 00L12, Supplement # 1 dated 2/05/01 - Updated Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2367 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2368 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS Will not be active for this program. PLEASE NOTE Correct all units in dealer inventory prior to delivery to the customer. DEALER - OWNER CONTACT An owner list will not be provided for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using DWE. ^ Refer to ACES II manual for claims preparation and submission information. Attachment II - Labor Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2369 LABOR ALLOWANCES Attachment III - Technical Information SPECIAL FIELD ACTION 00L12 WARRANTY GUIDE SUPPLEMENT VEHICLES COVERED BY THE NEW TIRE WARRANTY All 2001 model year passenger cars and light trucks up to and including F550 Super Duty vehicles sold in the U.S., U.S. Territories, Mexico, and Canada, built through December 31, 2000. NOTE: Information regarding tire warranty will be included in the Warranty Guide for vehicles produced after December 31, 2000. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Obtain a copy of the Warranty Guide Supplement. NOTE: Beginning January 2001, dealers will begin to receive vehicle notification letters, which includes the Warranty Guide Supplement, for in-stock units. In the interim, until notification letters begin to arrive at the dealership, please make copies of the Warranty Guide Supplement (attached to this document). 2. Locate the vehicle Warranty Guide (located in the glove compartment). 3. Place a copy of the Warranty Guide Supplement in the Warranty Guide of the vehicle. PLEASE NOTE: This procedure is for dealer stock units only. Owners of vehicles previously delivered will receive a copy of the Warranty Guide Supplement with their notification letter. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2370 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2371 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2372 Supplement # 1 - Information Supplement # 1, February 5, 2001 - Updated Information Cover Letter Dealer Letter Attachment I ^ Administrative Information Attachment II ^ Labor Allowances Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2373 Attachment III ^ Technical Information Customer Notification Letter Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2374 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2375 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2376 Supplement # 1 - Attachment I OASIS Will not be active for this program. PLEASE NOTE Correct all units in dealer inventory prior to delivery to the customer. DEALER - OWNER CONTACT An owner list will not be provided for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using DWE. ^ Refer to ACES II manual for claims preparation and submission information. Supplement # 1 - Attachment II Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2377 LABOR ALLOWANCES Supplement # 1 - Attachment III WARRANTY GUIDE SUPPLEMENT NOTE: Information regarding tire warranty will be included in the Warranty Guide for vehicles produced after the end date listed above. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2378 SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Obtain a copy of the Warranty Guide Supplement. NOTE: Beginning January 2001, dealers will begin to receive vehicle notification letters, which includes the Warranty Guide Supplement, for in-stock units. In the interim, until notification letters begin to arrive at the dealership, please make copies of the Warranty Guide Supplement (included in this document). 2. Locate the vehicle Warranty Guide (located in the glove compartment). 3. Place a copy of the Warranty Guide Supplement in the Warranty Guide of the vehicle. PLEASE NOTE: This procedure is for dealer stock units only. Owners of vehicles previously delivered will receive a copy of the Warranty Guide Supplement with their notification letter. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2379 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2380 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2381 Supplement # 2 - Information Supplement # 2, February 19, 2001 - Updated Information Cover Letter Dealer Letter Attachment I ^ Administrative Information Attachment II ^Labor Allowances Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2382 Attachment III ^ Technical Information Apology Letter Customer Notification Letter Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2383 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2384 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2385 Supplement # 2 - Attachment I OASIS Will not be active for this program. PLEASE NOTE Correct all units in dealer inventory prior to delivery to the customer. DEALER - OWNER CONTACT An owner list will not be provided for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using DWE. ^ Refer to ACES II manual for claims preparation and submission information. Supplement # 2 - Attachment II Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2386 LABOR ALLOWANCES Supplement # 2 - Attachment III WARRANTY GUIDE SUPPLEMENT NOTE: Information regarding tire warranty will be included in the Warranty Guide for vehicles produced after the end date listed above. SERVICE PROCEDURE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2387 1. Obtain a copy of the Warranty Guide Supplement. Note: Beginning January 2001, dealers will begin to receive vehicle notification letters, which includes the Warranty Guide Supplement, for in-stock units. In the interim, until notification letters begin to arrive at the dealership, please make copies of the Warranty Guide Supplement (attached to this document). 2. Locate the vehicle Warranty Guide (located in the glove compartment). 3. Place a copy of the Warranty Guide Supplement in the Warranty Guide of the vehicle. PLEASE NOTE: This procedure is for dealer stock units only. Owners of vehicles previously delivered will receive a copy of the Warranty Guide Supplement with their notification letter. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2388 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2389 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2390 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2391 Tires: Specifications Aluminum Max. Radial Runout 0.06 in Max. Lateral Runout 0.08 in Steel Max. Radial Runout 0.06 in Max. Lateral Runout 0.08 in Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > NHTSA00V260001 > Sep > 00 > Recall 00V260001: Wheel Separation From Vehicle Wheels: Recalls Recall 00V260001: Wheel Separation From Vehicle Some 4x2 sport utility vehicles not equipped with an antilock braking system may have inadvertently been built with 4x4 rear hubs instead of 4x2 hubs. If the incorrect hubs are installed on a 4x2 vehicle, the rear wheels can loosen, or in some cases, separate from the vehicle. This condition could cause loss of control of the vehicle, increasing the risk of a crash. Dealers will inspect the rear hubs and, if necessary, replace them. Owner notification began September 25, 2000. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon service date and do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673. Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-11-2 > Jun > 02 > Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels Wheels: Customer Interest Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels Article No. 02-11-2 06/10/02 BRAKES - EXCESSIVE BRAKE DUST - INFORMATION AND CLEANING TIPS FORD: 1999-2002 ESCORT 1999-2003 CROWN VICTORIA 2000-2002 FOCUS 2001-2002 ESCAPE MERCURY: 1999-2003 GRAND MARQUIS ISSUE Under normal operating conditions, customers may notice accumulation of brake dust on their wheels. Some brake dust is inevitable as brakes wear and does not contribute to brake noise. The use of modern friction materials with emphasis on improved performance and environmental considerations can lead to more dust than in the past. ACTION Brake dust can be cleaned by weekly washing with Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A) and a soft sponge. Heavier deposits can be removed with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A). Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 108000, 301000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 02-11-2 > Jun > 02 > Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels Article No. 02-11-2 06/10/02 BRAKES - EXCESSIVE BRAKE DUST - INFORMATION AND CLEANING TIPS FORD: 1999-2002 ESCORT 1999-2003 CROWN VICTORIA 2000-2002 FOCUS 2001-2002 ESCAPE MERCURY: 1999-2003 GRAND MARQUIS ISSUE Under normal operating conditions, customers may notice accumulation of brake dust on their wheels. Some brake dust is inevitable as brakes wear and does not contribute to brake noise. The use of modern friction materials with emphasis on improved performance and environmental considerations can lead to more dust than in the past. ACTION Brake dust can be cleaned by weekly washing with Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A) and a soft sponge. Heavier deposits can be removed with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A). Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 108000, 301000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 02-1-6 > Jan > 02 > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment Technical Service Bulletin # 02-1-6 Date: 020121 Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment Article No. 02-1-6 01/21/02 ^ WHEELS - ROAD FORCE MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT HUNTER G5P9700 - SERVICE TIPS ^ VIBRATION - ROAD FORCE MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT HUNTER G5P9700 - SERVICE TIPS FORD: 1997 THUNDERBIRD 1997-2000 CONTOUR 1997-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, ESCORT, MUSTANG, TAURUS 2000-2002 FOCUS 2002 THUNDERBIRD 1997-2002 E SERIES, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 1999-2002 SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2002 EXCURSION 2001-2002 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT LINCOLN: 1997-1998 MARK VIII 1997-2002 CONTINENTAL, TOWN CAR 2000-2002 LS 1998-2002 NAVIGATOR 2002 BLACKWOOD MERCURY: 1997 COUGAR 1997-2000 MYSTIQUE 1997-2002 GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE 1999-2002 COUGAR 1997-2002 MOUNTAINEER, VILLAGER ISSUE The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance when using tire/wheel assembly road force measurement equipment such as the Hunter GSP97OO. This bulletin is authored and endorsed by Hunter, Michelin, Goodyear, Continental/General, Hankook, Bridgestone/Firestone and Pirelli. Items addressed are software upgrades, road test (exercise tires), assembly center verification and warranty restrictions. This type of equipment can be a valuable tool to improve customer satisfaction when used as a vibration repair tool. This type of equipment can also provide a high level of customer satisfaction when used as an assembly too! when the customer has purchased new wheels/tires in the "Around-the-Wheel" program. ACTION The Hunter GSP9700/9712 road force measurement tool is NOT to be used for determining if a tire or wheel meets a specification. It can be used as a service diagnostic tool to minimize road force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. The tool such as the Hunter GSP97OO can approximate the low point of the "'1heel and the high point of the tire. This allows the tire to be matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly road force variation. This will minimize the contribution to vibration from the tire/wheel assembly. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 306000, 703000 Service Information NOTE TRADITIONAL WHEEL BALANCER "MATCH-MOUNTING" OR "WEIGHT OPTIMIZATION" ACHIEVES WEIGHT MINIMIZATION AND WILL NOT ACHIEVE THE SAME RESULTS. NOTE WARRANTY CLAIMS CANNOT BE SUBMITTED FOR TIRE/WHEEL REPLACEMENT BASED ON HUNTER G5P9700 RESULTS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 02-1-6 > Jan > 02 > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2414 NOTE UPGRADING SOFTWARE TO VERSION 2.1 OR GREATER WILL ENHANCE THE TECHNICIANS CAPABILITY TO MINIMIZE THE ROAD FORCE VARIATION OF THE TIRE/WHEEL ASSEMBLY. THE VERSION OF SOFTWARE CAN BE IDENTIFIED FROM THE START-UP SCREEN BY PRESSING THE CENTER SHIFT KEY ONCE (I.E. HAS TWO GREEN ARROWS) AND SELECTING THE K1 KEY ("IDENTIFY SOFTWARE"). IF THE SYSTEM IS IN THE BALANCE MODE, THE START-UP SCREEN CAN BE ACCESSED BY PRESSING THE "R" KEY TWICE (THIS IS JUST TO THE LEFT OF THE START KEY). CONTACT YOUR LOCAL HUNTER ENGINEERING REPRESENTATIVE TO ORDER SOFTWARE UPGRADES. 1. Check the inflation pressure of all four tires and adjust to the vehicle manufacturers recommended pressure. The vehicle manufacturers recommended tire pressure for the original equipment tires can be found on the drivers side door placard. 2. Road test the vehicle on a smooth road for a minimum of 10 miles. Performance of the road test at highway speeds is preferred. NOTE THIS MUST BE PERFORMED TO "EXERCISE" THE TIRES AND ELIMINATE "COLD" FLAT SPOTTING THAT OCCURS DUE TO SHORT-PERIOD VEHICLE STORAGE OR PARKING. IF THE VEHICLE'S TIRES ARE NOT EXERCISED FIRST, ACCURACY OF THE ROAD FORCE MEASUREMENTS CAN VARY SIGNIFICANTLY, EVEN IF THE VEHICLE IS PARKED/STORED IN ONE LOCATION FOR ONLY A SHORT PERIOD OF TIME (E.G. 20 MINUTES). 3. Perform the road force measurement IMMEDIATELY after exercising the tires. If the road force measurement cannot be performed immediately, lift all four tires off the ground with a hoist or jack stands to prevent measurement errors due to further flat spotting. 4. Assembly centering verification MUST be performed and PASSED prior to any road force measurement. For those with a software version other than 2.1 the centering verification must be performed manually. a. Spin assembly to measure. Record the assembly R1H. b. Loosen wing-nut. c. Rotate and reposition assembly and cone/adapter to a different mounting location (180 degrees). d. Tighten wing-nut. e. Re-spin to measure. Record the assembly R1H. f. Compare results obtained in STEP a with those obtained in STEP e. g. If the difference in assembly R1H measurements is less than 5 lbs., the assembly centering verification PASSES and technician can proceed to the measurement/repair process. If the centering verification FAILS proceed to STEP h. h. The following items may contribute to an assembly centering verification FAILURE. ^ Cone/adapter does not fit properly or is incorrect for the application ^ The wheel mounting surface is damaged 5. For those with software version 2.1 the following procedure will lead the technician through a Centering Check. a. From the balance mode screen press the center SHIFT KEY ONCE (i.e. has two green arrows). b. Push the "K1" button to select Perform Centering Check. c. Follow the instructions. d. If Centering Check PASSES proceed to the measurement/repair process. If the Centering Check fails proceed to step e. e. The following items may contribute to an assembly centering verification FAILURE. ^ Cone/adapter does not fit properly or is incorrect for the application ^ The wheel mounting surface is damaged 6. Prior to installing assembly on the vehicle balance assembly utilizing the two-plane dynamic balancing mode. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > NHTSA00V260001 > Sep > 00 > Recall 00V260001: Wheel Separation From Vehicle Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 00V260001: Wheel Separation From Vehicle Some 4x2 sport utility vehicles not equipped with an antilock braking system may have inadvertently been built with 4x4 rear hubs instead of 4x2 hubs. If the incorrect hubs are installed on a 4x2 vehicle, the rear wheels can loosen, or in some cases, separate from the vehicle. This condition could cause loss of control of the vehicle, increasing the risk of a crash. Dealers will inspect the rear hubs and, if necessary, replace them. Owner notification began September 25, 2000. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon service date and do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673. Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 02-11-2 > Jun > 02 > Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels Article No. 02-11-2 06/10/02 BRAKES - EXCESSIVE BRAKE DUST - INFORMATION AND CLEANING TIPS FORD: 1999-2002 ESCORT 1999-2003 CROWN VICTORIA 2000-2002 FOCUS 2001-2002 ESCAPE MERCURY: 1999-2003 GRAND MARQUIS ISSUE Under normal operating conditions, customers may notice accumulation of brake dust on their wheels. Some brake dust is inevitable as brakes wear and does not contribute to brake noise. The use of modern friction materials with emphasis on improved performance and environmental considerations can lead to more dust than in the past. ACTION Brake dust can be cleaned by weekly washing with Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A) and a soft sponge. Heavier deposits can be removed with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A). Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 108000, 301000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 02-1-6 > Jan > 02 > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment Technical Service Bulletin # 02-1-6 Date: 020121 Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment Article No. 02-1-6 01/21/02 ^ WHEELS - ROAD FORCE MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT HUNTER G5P9700 - SERVICE TIPS ^ VIBRATION - ROAD FORCE MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT HUNTER G5P9700 - SERVICE TIPS FORD: 1997 THUNDERBIRD 1997-2000 CONTOUR 1997-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, ESCORT, MUSTANG, TAURUS 2000-2002 FOCUS 2002 THUNDERBIRD 1997-2002 E SERIES, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 1999-2002 SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2002 EXCURSION 2001-2002 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT LINCOLN: 1997-1998 MARK VIII 1997-2002 CONTINENTAL, TOWN CAR 2000-2002 LS 1998-2002 NAVIGATOR 2002 BLACKWOOD MERCURY: 1997 COUGAR 1997-2000 MYSTIQUE 1997-2002 GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE 1999-2002 COUGAR 1997-2002 MOUNTAINEER, VILLAGER ISSUE The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance when using tire/wheel assembly road force measurement equipment such as the Hunter GSP97OO. This bulletin is authored and endorsed by Hunter, Michelin, Goodyear, Continental/General, Hankook, Bridgestone/Firestone and Pirelli. Items addressed are software upgrades, road test (exercise tires), assembly center verification and warranty restrictions. This type of equipment can be a valuable tool to improve customer satisfaction when used as a vibration repair tool. This type of equipment can also provide a high level of customer satisfaction when used as an assembly too! when the customer has purchased new wheels/tires in the "Around-the-Wheel" program. ACTION The Hunter GSP9700/9712 road force measurement tool is NOT to be used for determining if a tire or wheel meets a specification. It can be used as a service diagnostic tool to minimize road force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. The tool such as the Hunter GSP97OO can approximate the low point of the "'1heel and the high point of the tire. This allows the tire to be matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly road force variation. This will minimize the contribution to vibration from the tire/wheel assembly. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 306000, 703000 Service Information NOTE TRADITIONAL WHEEL BALANCER "MATCH-MOUNTING" OR "WEIGHT OPTIMIZATION" ACHIEVES WEIGHT MINIMIZATION AND WILL NOT ACHIEVE THE SAME RESULTS. NOTE WARRANTY CLAIMS CANNOT BE SUBMITTED FOR TIRE/WHEEL REPLACEMENT BASED ON HUNTER G5P9700 RESULTS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 02-1-6 > Jan > 02 > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2428 NOTE UPGRADING SOFTWARE TO VERSION 2.1 OR GREATER WILL ENHANCE THE TECHNICIANS CAPABILITY TO MINIMIZE THE ROAD FORCE VARIATION OF THE TIRE/WHEEL ASSEMBLY. THE VERSION OF SOFTWARE CAN BE IDENTIFIED FROM THE START-UP SCREEN BY PRESSING THE CENTER SHIFT KEY ONCE (I.E. HAS TWO GREEN ARROWS) AND SELECTING THE K1 KEY ("IDENTIFY SOFTWARE"). IF THE SYSTEM IS IN THE BALANCE MODE, THE START-UP SCREEN CAN BE ACCESSED BY PRESSING THE "R" KEY TWICE (THIS IS JUST TO THE LEFT OF THE START KEY). CONTACT YOUR LOCAL HUNTER ENGINEERING REPRESENTATIVE TO ORDER SOFTWARE UPGRADES. 1. Check the inflation pressure of all four tires and adjust to the vehicle manufacturers recommended pressure. The vehicle manufacturers recommended tire pressure for the original equipment tires can be found on the drivers side door placard. 2. Road test the vehicle on a smooth road for a minimum of 10 miles. Performance of the road test at highway speeds is preferred. NOTE THIS MUST BE PERFORMED TO "EXERCISE" THE TIRES AND ELIMINATE "COLD" FLAT SPOTTING THAT OCCURS DUE TO SHORT-PERIOD VEHICLE STORAGE OR PARKING. IF THE VEHICLE'S TIRES ARE NOT EXERCISED FIRST, ACCURACY OF THE ROAD FORCE MEASUREMENTS CAN VARY SIGNIFICANTLY, EVEN IF THE VEHICLE IS PARKED/STORED IN ONE LOCATION FOR ONLY A SHORT PERIOD OF TIME (E.G. 20 MINUTES). 3. Perform the road force measurement IMMEDIATELY after exercising the tires. If the road force measurement cannot be performed immediately, lift all four tires off the ground with a hoist or jack stands to prevent measurement errors due to further flat spotting. 4. Assembly centering verification MUST be performed and PASSED prior to any road force measurement. For those with a software version other than 2.1 the centering verification must be performed manually. a. Spin assembly to measure. Record the assembly R1H. b. Loosen wing-nut. c. Rotate and reposition assembly and cone/adapter to a different mounting location (180 degrees). d. Tighten wing-nut. e. Re-spin to measure. Record the assembly R1H. f. Compare results obtained in STEP a with those obtained in STEP e. g. If the difference in assembly R1H measurements is less than 5 lbs., the assembly centering verification PASSES and technician can proceed to the measurement/repair process. If the centering verification FAILS proceed to STEP h. h. The following items may contribute to an assembly centering verification FAILURE. ^ Cone/adapter does not fit properly or is incorrect for the application ^ The wheel mounting surface is damaged 5. For those with software version 2.1 the following procedure will lead the technician through a Centering Check. a. From the balance mode screen press the center SHIFT KEY ONCE (i.e. has two green arrows). b. Push the "K1" button to select Perform Centering Check. c. Follow the instructions. d. If Centering Check PASSES proceed to the measurement/repair process. If the Centering Check fails proceed to step e. e. The following items may contribute to an assembly centering verification FAILURE. ^ Cone/adapter does not fit properly or is incorrect for the application ^ The wheel mounting surface is damaged 6. Prior to installing assembly on the vehicle balance assembly utilizing the two-plane dynamic balancing mode. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 02-1-6 > Jan > 02 > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 2434 NOTE UPGRADING SOFTWARE TO VERSION 2.1 OR GREATER WILL ENHANCE THE TECHNICIANS CAPABILITY TO MINIMIZE THE ROAD FORCE VARIATION OF THE TIRE/WHEEL ASSEMBLY. THE VERSION OF SOFTWARE CAN BE IDENTIFIED FROM THE START-UP SCREEN BY PRESSING THE CENTER SHIFT KEY ONCE (I.E. HAS TWO GREEN ARROWS) AND SELECTING THE K1 KEY ("IDENTIFY SOFTWARE"). IF THE SYSTEM IS IN THE BALANCE MODE, THE START-UP SCREEN CAN BE ACCESSED BY PRESSING THE "R" KEY TWICE (THIS IS JUST TO THE LEFT OF THE START KEY). CONTACT YOUR LOCAL HUNTER ENGINEERING REPRESENTATIVE TO ORDER SOFTWARE UPGRADES. 1. Check the inflation pressure of all four tires and adjust to the vehicle manufacturers recommended pressure. The vehicle manufacturers recommended tire pressure for the original equipment tires can be found on the drivers side door placard. 2. Road test the vehicle on a smooth road for a minimum of 10 miles. Performance of the road test at highway speeds is preferred. NOTE THIS MUST BE PERFORMED TO "EXERCISE" THE TIRES AND ELIMINATE "COLD" FLAT SPOTTING THAT OCCURS DUE TO SHORT-PERIOD VEHICLE STORAGE OR PARKING. IF THE VEHICLE'S TIRES ARE NOT EXERCISED FIRST, ACCURACY OF THE ROAD FORCE MEASUREMENTS CAN VARY SIGNIFICANTLY, EVEN IF THE VEHICLE IS PARKED/STORED IN ONE LOCATION FOR ONLY A SHORT PERIOD OF TIME (E.G. 20 MINUTES). 3. Perform the road force measurement IMMEDIATELY after exercising the tires. If the road force measurement cannot be performed immediately, lift all four tires off the ground with a hoist or jack stands to prevent measurement errors due to further flat spotting. 4. Assembly centering verification MUST be performed and PASSED prior to any road force measurement. For those with a software version other than 2.1 the centering verification must be performed manually. a. Spin assembly to measure. Record the assembly R1H. b. Loosen wing-nut. c. Rotate and reposition assembly and cone/adapter to a different mounting location (180 degrees). d. Tighten wing-nut. e. Re-spin to measure. Record the assembly R1H. f. Compare results obtained in STEP a with those obtained in STEP e. g. If the difference in assembly R1H measurements is less than 5 lbs., the assembly centering verification PASSES and technician can proceed to the measurement/repair process. If the centering verification FAILS proceed to STEP h. h. The following items may contribute to an assembly centering verification FAILURE. ^ Cone/adapter does not fit properly or is incorrect for the application ^ The wheel mounting surface is damaged 5. For those with software version 2.1 the following procedure will lead the technician through a Centering Check. a. From the balance mode screen press the center SHIFT KEY ONCE (i.e. has two green arrows). b. Push the "K1" button to select Perform Centering Check. c. Follow the instructions. d. If Centering Check PASSES proceed to the measurement/repair process. If the Centering Check fails proceed to step e. e. The following items may contribute to an assembly centering verification FAILURE. ^ Cone/adapter does not fit properly or is incorrect for the application ^ The wheel mounting surface is damaged 6. Prior to installing assembly on the vehicle balance assembly utilizing the two-plane dynamic balancing mode. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > NHTSA00V260001 > Sep > 00 > Recall 00V260001: Wheel Separation From Vehicle Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 00V260001: Wheel Separation From Vehicle Some 4x2 sport utility vehicles not equipped with an antilock braking system may have inadvertently been built with 4x4 rear hubs instead of 4x2 hubs. If the incorrect hubs are installed on a 4x2 vehicle, the rear wheels can loosen, or in some cases, separate from the vehicle. This condition could cause loss of control of the vehicle, increasing the risk of a crash. Dealers will inspect the rear hubs and, if necessary, replace them. Owner notification began September 25, 2000. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon service date and do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673. Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2439 Wheels: Specifications Aluminum Max. Radial Runout 0.06 in Max. Lateral Runout 0.08 in Steel Max. Radial Runout 0.06 in Max. Lateral Runout 0.08 in Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Service and Repair > Straightening Wheels, Rims or Components Wheels: Service and Repair Straightening Wheels, Rims or Components 1. NOTE: Do not heat wheels in an attempt to soften them for straightening to repair damage. The special alloy used in these wheels is heat-treated. Uncontrolled heating from welding affects the properties of the material. Do not weld the wheels for any reason. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Service and Repair > Straightening Wheels, Rims or Components > Page 2442 Wheels: Service and Repair Wheel Leaks 1. Pinhole leaks in cast aluminum wheels compromise the wheel integrity. Install a new wheel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Wheel Bearing Check 1. Raise the vehicle until the front tires are off the floor. ^ Make sure the wheels are in a straight forward position. 2. Spin the tire by hand to check the wheel bearings for roughness. NOTE: Make sure the wheel rotates freely and that the brake pads are retraced sufficiently to allow free movement of the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Grip each front tire at the top and bottom and move the wheel inward and outward while lifting the weight of the tire off the front wheel bearing. 4. If the tire and wheel (hub) is loose on the spindle, does not rotate freely, or has a rough feeling when spun, carry out one of the following: 1 On vehicles with inner and outer bearings, inspect the bearings and cups for wear or damage. Adjust or install new bearing and cups as Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2446 necessary. 2 On vehicles with one sealed bearing install a new wheel hub. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Special Tools Special Tools Special Tools Removal NOTE: Install a new wheel bearing when the wheel hub is removed. All vehicles 1. Remove the brake disc. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 2449 2. Remove the wheel hub nut. 3. Remove the tie rod end nut. 1 Remove the cotter pin. 2 Remove the nut. 4. Using the special tool, separate the tie rod end from the knuckle. Vehicles with ABS 5. Remove the bolt and position the anti-lock brake sensor aside. All vehicles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 2450 6. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle. 1 Remove the pinch bolt. 2 Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle. 7. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the wheel knuckle. ^ Position the halfshaft aside and support. 8. Remove the wheel knuckle. 1 Remove the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts. 2 Remove the wheel knuckle. 9. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing and knuckle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 2451 10. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle, after removing the wheel hub. Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub. 11. Remove the snap ring. 12. Using the special tools, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle. NOTE: The brake disc shield is pressed on. 13. If necessary, remove the brake disc shield. Installation All vehicles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 2452 1. If necessary, install a disc brake shield. 2. Using the special tool, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. 3. Install the snap ring. 4. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 2453 5. Install the wheel knuckle. 1 Position the wheel knuckle. 2 Install the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts. 6. Using the special tool, insert the halfshaft into the wheel hub. 7. Install the pinch bolt into the wheel knuckle. ^ Position and align the ball joint stud into the wheel knuckle. Vehicles with ABS 8. Install the anti-lock brake sensor and tighten the bolt. All vehicles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 2454 9. Install the tie rod end into the wheel knuckle. 1 Install the tie rod end nut. 2 Install a new cotter pin. 10. Install the wheel hub nut. 11. Install the brake disc. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 2455 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Special Tools Removal 1. Remove the brake drum. 2. Remove the wheel hub nut. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 2456 3. Using the special tool, remove the wheel hub. 4. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle, after removing the wheel hub. Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub. 5. Remove the snap ring. 6. Using the special tools, remove the wheel bearing outer race from the wheel knuckle. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 2457 1. Using the special tools, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. 2. Install the snap ring. 3. Using the special tool, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. 4. Install the wheel hub nut. 5. Install the brake drum. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Front Wheel Hub Nut 290 Nm (214 lb-ft) Rear Wheel Hub Nut (2WD) 290 Nm (214 lb-ft) Rear Wheel Hub Nut (4WD) 290 Nm (214 lb-ft) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Fastener: Specifications Wheel Nuts (all wheels) 133 Nm (98 lb-ft) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front wheel bearing. 2. Press out the wheel studs. 3. To install. reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 2467 Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Rear Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wheel bearing. 2. Press out the wheel studs. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and Operation Vehicle Lifting: Description and Operation JACKING WARNING: ^ DO NOT RUN THE ENGINE WHEN JACKING THE VEHICLE. THE WHEELS CONTACTING THE GROUND COULD CAUSE THE VEHICLE TO MOVE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ MAKE SURE THE JACK AND JACK STANDS ARE CORRECTLY LOCATED TO PREVENT THE VEHICLE FROM FALLING. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ WHEEL CHOCKS SHOULD BE USED TO PREVENT THE VEHICLE FROM ROLLING AND FALLING OFF THE JACK. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. CAUTION: The service jack provided with the vehicle is only intended to be used in an emergency for changing a deflated tire. Never use the service jack to hoist the vehicle for any other service. Refer to the Owner Guide when using the jack supplied with the vehicle. Jacking Points - Front 1. The front jacking point is at the bolt head of the lower control arm. Jacking Points - Rear 1. The rear jacking points are located on the rear trailing arms. LIFTING Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2471 Lifting Points 1. The lifting points are part of the uni-body structure. CAUTION: Damage to the suspension, exhaust or steering linkage components may occur if care is not exercised when positioning the hoist adapters prior to lifting the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Variable Cam Timing System Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation Variable Cam Timing System Variable Cam Timing System Overview The Variable Cam Timing System allows the exhaust cam to advance and retard at varying engine speeds. The purpose of this is to reduce exhaust emissions and increase fuel economy. As the exhaust cam retards in relation to the crankshaft position, residual exhaust gases are left in the combustion chamber. The residual gases cool the combustion chamber and are inert when mixed with the incoming fresh charge of fuel and air. This results in better fuel economy and lower Nitrogen Oxides (NOx) and Hydrocarbons (HG) the engine produces. The Exhaust Gas Recalculation System (EGR) is unnecessary on the 2.0L (4V) engine due to this feature. Variable Cam Timing The Variable Cam Timing (VCT) system consists of the control solenoid, five-tooth pulse ring (4+1) on exhaust camshaft, Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor, Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor, Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor, Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor, Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor, Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (Figure 129). 1. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) receives input signals from the Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor, Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor, Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor, Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor and Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor for determining the operating conditions of the engine. 2. The Variable Cam Timing (VCT) system is enabled by the PCM when the proper conditions are met. The PCM disables the VCT system if a fault is detected. 3. The PCM calculates relative cam position using the CMP sensor and data from the (4+1) pulse ring mounted on the exhaust camshaft. Relative cam position is calculated by measuring the time between the rising edge of Profile Ignition Pickup (PIP) and the falling edge of Variable Cam Timing (VCT) pulse. 4. The PCM continually calculates a cam position error value based on the difference between the desired and actual position and a duty cycle is commanded for the VCT solenoid valve. Engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT unit. 5. Oil flows to either side of the piston chamber changing a linear motion from the piston to a rotation motion from the helical mechanism in the VCT unit. During closed loop the PCM outputs a revised duty cycle to the VCT solenoid valve to correct for cam position error. Variable Cam Timing System HARDWARE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Variable Cam Timing System > Page 2479 Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Solenoid Valve Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Solenoid Valve The VCT solenoid valve (Figure 130) is an integral part of the VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil to the variable cam timing unit assembly. As the PCM duty cycles the solenoid valve, oil is allowed to flow to the VCT unit assembly and advance or retard the cam timing. Variable Cam Timing Unit Assembly Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Unit Assembly The variable cam timing unit assembly (Figure 131) is coupled to the camshaft through a helical spline in the VCT unit chamber. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil pressure forces the piston to move linearly along the axis of the camshaft. This linear motion is translated into rotational camshaft motion through the helical spline coupling. A spring installed Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Variable Cam Timing System > Page 2480 in the chamber is designed to hold the camshaft in the minimum overlap position (5 degrees) when oil pressure is too low to maintain adequate position control. The camshaft is allowed to rotate up to 30 degrees. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Variable Cam Timing System > Page 2481 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Unit Assembly Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Unit Assembly Variable Cam Timing Unit Assembly The variable cam timing unit assembly (Figure 131) is coupled to the camshaft through a helical spline in the VCT unit chamber. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil pressure forces the piston to move linearly along the axis of the camshaft. This linear motion is translated into rotational camshaft motion through the helical spline coupling. A spring installed in the chamber is designed to hold the camshaft in the minimum overlap position (5 degrees) when oil pressure is too low to maintain adequate position control. The camshaft is allowed to rotate up to 30 degrees. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Description and Operation Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Description and Operation VARIABLE CAM TIMING (VCT) SOLENOID VALVE Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Solenoid Valve The Variable Cam Timing (VCT) solenoid valve (Figure 130) is an integral part of the VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil to the variable cam timing unit assembly. As the PCM duty cycles the solenoid valve, oil is allowed to flow to the VCT unit assembly and advance or retard the cam timing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications The indicated compression pressure are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is within 75% of the highest reading. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 2488 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection General Remarks NOTE: Removing fuses and disconnecting electrical components causes the powertrain control module (PCM) to log an error message. After the measurements have been carried out this error message should be cleared from memory by connecting to PCM. NOTE: Only check the compression pressure with the valves set to the prescribed clearance (if this can be adjusted). The compression pressure should be checked with the engine at operating temperature. Check The Compression Pressure WARNING: On manual transmissions shift the transmission into neutral. On automatic transmission vehicles, select "P". Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. Remove the fuel pump relay. 2. Start the engine - the engine will start, run for a few seconds then stall. 3. Remove the spark plugs. 4. Install the compression tester. 5. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit. With the ignition switch OFF, using the auxiliary starter switch, crank the engine a minimum of five compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the approximate number of compression strokes required to obtain the highest reading. 6. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of compression strokes. 7. Install the components in reverse order, observing the specified tightening torques. 8. Reset the PCM fault memory. Interpretation of the Results The indicated compression pressure are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is within 75% of the highest reading. CAUTION: If engine oil is sprayed into the combustion chamber, after carrying out the measurement run the engine at 2000 rpm for about 15 minutes, in order to burn the oil and prevent damage to the catalytic converter. If the measurement on one or more cylinders is much lower than the specified value, spray some engine oil into the combustion chamber and repeat the compression measurement. If the reading greatly improves, the piston rings are damaged. If the reading stays the same, the cause is either damaged valve seats or valve stem seals. If the measurements for two cylinders next to each other are both too low then it is very likely that the cylinder head gasket between them is burnt through. This can also be recognized by traces of engine oil in the coolant and/or coolant in the engine oil. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Camshaft Bearing: Specifications Camshaft Cap Bolts: 19 Nm (14 ft. lb.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications Camshaft Sprocket Bolts 50 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Page 2497 Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications Crankshaft Pulley Bolt 85 ft.lb Camshaft Sprocket Bolts 50 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2498 Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Service and Repair NOTE:Ford does not provide camshaft gear timing marks, or information to perform timing belt service without the special tools shown in this procedure. Timing Drive Components-Timing Sprockets Special Tool(s) Removal 1. Remove the timing belt. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. CAUTION: The camshaft alignment tool is not recommended to hold the camshafts in place when removing or tightening the bolts. Damage to camshaft may result. NOTE: Use an open-end wrench to keep each camshaft from rotating. Remove the bolts and the camshaft timing sprockets. Installation 1. Install the camshaft sprockets onto the camshafts and loosely install the bolts. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2499 3. NOTE: Make sure the correct (second) notch in the pulley is indexed to the lower cylinder block. Slide the crankshaft pulley onto the crankshaft and confirm the crankshaft position is at TDC (No. 1cylinder) by rotating it clockwise against the alignment peg. ^ Remove the crankshaft pulley. 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Confirm that the timing belt tensioner is installed correctly with the tab positioned in the slot in the inner timing cover. 6. Install the timing belt onto the timing belt sprockets. 7. Adjust the timing belt tensioner. 1 Using a 6mm Allen wrench, rotate the adjuster counterclockwise and align the marks as shown. 2 Tighten the tensioner pulley bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2500 8. CAUTION: The camshaft alignment tool is not recommended to hold the camshafts in place when removing or tightening the bolts. Damage to camshaft may result. NOTE: Use an open-end wrench to keep each camshaft from rotating. Tighten the camshaft timing sprocket bolts to specifications. 9. Raise and support the vehicle. 10. Install the front mount lower bracket. 11. Install the lower timing belt cover. 12. Install the accessory drive belt idler pulley. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2501 13. Install the water pump pulley. ^ Hand tighten the bolts. 14. Install the crankshaft pulley. 15. Tighten the water pump pulley bolts. 16. Remove the special tool. 17. Install the stud. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2502 18. Install the coolant tube. 19. Install the catalytic converter. 20. Lower the vehicle. 21. Remove the special tool. 22. Remove the special tool. 23. Install the valve cover. 24. Install the spark plugs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Camshaft: Specifications Camshaft Lobe Lift Intake 0.0137 in Exhaust 0.0134 in Theoretical Valve Maximum Lift Intake 0.3643 in Exhaust 0.33858 in End Play Service Limit 0.00315 - 0.00866 in Bearing Journal Diameter 1.0221 - 1.0227 in Camshaft Bearing Radial Clearance 0.000787 - 0.002756 in Camshaft Cap Bolts Tightening Torque 14 ft.lb Sequence Refer to Procedure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2506 Camshaft: Service and Repair NOTE:Ford does not provide camshaft gear timing marks, or information to perform timing belt service without the special tools shown in this procedure. Removal 1. Remove the camshaft timing sprockets. 2. Verify the valve clearance. 3. CAUTION: Cylinder head camshaft journal caps are numbered on the outside flats to make sure that they are assembled in their original positions. Failure to do so may result in engine damage. Remove the camshafts. ^ Loosen the camshaft journal cap bolts in several two-turn passes in the sequence shown. ^ Remove the bolts. ^ Remove the caps. 4. Inspect the camshafts for wear. ^ Discard the oil seals. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2507 1. NOTE: The front camshaft journal cap must be installed and the bolts tightened to specification within four minutes of sealer application or oil leaks may occur. Coat the sealing surface of the front camshaft journal cap with Gasket Maker F8AZ-19B508-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSK-M2G348-AS. 2. NOTE: Lubricate camshaft bearing surfaces with Super Premium SAE 5W-20 Motor Oil or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C153-H. Install the camshafts. ^ Position the camshafts and camshaft journal caps. ^ Install the bolts and tighten the bolts in several two-turn passes using the sequence shown. 3. Verify the valve clearance. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2508 4. NOTE: The exhaust camshaft oil seal is shown, the intake seal is similar. Using the special tool, install new camshaft front oil seals. 5. Install the camshaft timing sprockets. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Service and Repair Removal 1. Remove the camshafts. 2. CAUTION: If the camshaft and valve tappets are to be reused, mark the location of the valve tappets to make sure that they are assembled in their original positions. Remove the valve tappets from the cylinder head. 3. Inspect the valve tappets. 4. NOTE: Make sure the valve tappets are installed in their original locations. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Lubricate the valve tappet with Super Premium SAE 5W-20 Motor Oil or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C153-H. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Variable Cam Timing System Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation Variable Cam Timing System Variable Cam Timing System Overview The Variable Cam Timing System allows the exhaust cam to advance and retard at varying engine speeds. The purpose of this is to reduce exhaust emissions and increase fuel economy. As the exhaust cam retards in relation to the crankshaft position, residual exhaust gases are left in the combustion chamber. The residual gases cool the combustion chamber and are inert when mixed with the incoming fresh charge of fuel and air. This results in better fuel economy and lower Nitrogen Oxides (NOx) and Hydrocarbons (HG) the engine produces. The Exhaust Gas Recalculation System (EGR) is unnecessary on the 2.0L (4V) engine due to this feature. Variable Cam Timing The Variable Cam Timing (VCT) system consists of the control solenoid, five-tooth pulse ring (4+1) on exhaust camshaft, Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor, Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor, Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor, Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor, Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor, Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (Figure 129). 1. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) receives input signals from the Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor, Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor, Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor, Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor and Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor for determining the operating conditions of the engine. 2. The Variable Cam Timing (VCT) system is enabled by the PCM when the proper conditions are met. The PCM disables the VCT system if a fault is detected. 3. The PCM calculates relative cam position using the CMP sensor and data from the (4+1) pulse ring mounted on the exhaust camshaft. Relative cam position is calculated by measuring the time between the rising edge of Profile Ignition Pickup (PIP) and the falling edge of Variable Cam Timing (VCT) pulse. 4. The PCM continually calculates a cam position error value based on the difference between the desired and actual position and a duty cycle is commanded for the VCT solenoid valve. Engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT unit. 5. Oil flows to either side of the piston chamber changing a linear motion from the piston to a rotation motion from the helical mechanism in the VCT unit. During closed loop the PCM outputs a revised duty cycle to the VCT solenoid valve to correct for cam position error. Variable Cam Timing System HARDWARE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Variable Cam Timing System > Page 2516 Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Solenoid Valve Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Solenoid Valve The VCT solenoid valve (Figure 130) is an integral part of the VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil to the variable cam timing unit assembly. As the PCM duty cycles the solenoid valve, oil is allowed to flow to the VCT unit assembly and advance or retard the cam timing. Variable Cam Timing Unit Assembly Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Unit Assembly The variable cam timing unit assembly (Figure 131) is coupled to the camshaft through a helical spline in the VCT unit chamber. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil pressure forces the piston to move linearly along the axis of the camshaft. This linear motion is translated into rotational camshaft motion through the helical spline coupling. A spring installed Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Variable Cam Timing System > Page 2517 in the chamber is designed to hold the camshaft in the minimum overlap position (5 degrees) when oil pressure is too low to maintain adequate position control. The camshaft is allowed to rotate up to 30 degrees. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Variable Cam Timing System > Page 2518 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Unit Assembly Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Unit Assembly Variable Cam Timing Unit Assembly The variable cam timing unit assembly (Figure 131) is coupled to the camshaft through a helical spline in the VCT unit chamber. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil pressure forces the piston to move linearly along the axis of the camshaft. This linear motion is translated into rotational camshaft motion through the helical spline coupling. A spring installed in the chamber is designed to hold the camshaft in the minimum overlap position (5 degrees) when oil pressure is too low to maintain adequate position control. The camshaft is allowed to rotate up to 30 degrees. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Connecting Rod Bearing: Specifications Connecting Rod Bearing Clearance to Crankshaft 0.016-0.070 mm (0.0006299-0.0027559 in) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Connecting Rod Bolt Connecting Rod: Specifications Connecting Rod Bolt CAUTION: Connecting rods and connecting rod caps must be correctly oriented, the interlocking tangs on the same side of the connecting rod or possible engine damage may occur. NOTE: Lubricate the connecting rod bearings and the crankshaft journals prior to installation with Super Premium SAE 5W-20 Motor Oil or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C153-H. NOTE: Rotate the crankshaft after installing each connecting rod cap and inspect for excess drag or binding. Install the connecting rod caps. ^ Install new bolts and tighten in two stages: ^ Stage 1: Tighten to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.). ^ Stage 2: Tighten an additional 90 degrees. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Connecting Rod Bolt > Page 2527 Connecting Rod: Specifications Connecting Rod Bearing Bore Diameter 46.89-46.91 mm Bearing Clearance to Crankshaft 0.016-0.070 mm Piston Pin Bore Diameter 20.589-20.609 mm Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications Main Bearing Bores Inside Diameter Bearing Caps Installed 2.28389 - 2.284956 in Main Bearing Bores Inside Diameter Bearing Caps Installed 2.2837749 - 2.284680 in Bearing Caps Graded By Size Main Bearing Radial Clearances 0.000433 - 0.002833 in Main Bearing Radial Clearances Bearing Caps Graded By Size 0.0007716 - 0.0017322 in Main Bearing Cap Bolts Stage 1 18 ft.lb Stage 2 Additional 60 degrees Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft: Specifications Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal Diameter 2.2826726-2.28346 in Main Bearing Journal End Play 0.0035433-0.010236 in Connecting Rod Bearing Journal Diameter 1.846059-1.850036 in Crankshaft Bearing Bore Diameter 0.810589-1.846847 in Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair Engine Block Heater: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. Drain the cooling system. 2. Raise the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the block heater power cable from the block heater. 4. CAUTION: Do not loosen the block heater retaining screw more than necessary for removal. Remove the block heater. 5. CAUTION: Make sure the power cable is routed and secured away from rotating or hot components or damage to the cable may occur. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications Pulley, Crankshaft Bolt 85 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2540 Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the bolts and the RH lower splash shield. 3. Loosen the bolt retaining the crankshaft pulley. 4. Remove the accessory drive belt. 5. Remove the bolt and the crankshaft pulley. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston: Specifications Piston to Bore Clearance 0.0003937 - 0.0011811 in Piston Diameter Class-1 3.337828 - 3.338537 in Class-2 3.357316 - 3.3358025 in Piston Bore Diameter 0.7870063 - 0.7877937 in Ring Groove Width Upper Compression Ring 0.058425 in Lower Compression Ring 0.0682675 in Oil Control Ring 1.1143698 in Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Pin, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston Pin: Specifications Wrist Pin Piston Pin Length 2.48031 - 2.51181 in Pin Diameter White 0.8134629 - 0.8120062 in Red 0.8120062 - 0.8121243 in Blue 0.8121243 - 0.8122424 in Piston-to Piston Pin Interference Fit 0.0003937 - 0.0005905 in Piston Pin Clearance In Connecting Rod Bore 0.0006299 - 0.0019291 in Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston Ring: Specifications Piston Ring Ring Width Upper Compression Ring 0.011811 - 0.019685 in Lower Compression Ring 0.011811 - 0.019685 in Oil Control Ring 0.015748 - 0.055118 in Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve Clearance Intake 0.006 in Exhaust 0.012 in Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 2554 Valve Clearance: Adjustments Removal 1. Remove the timing belt. 2. NOTE: Measure each valve's clearance at base circle with the lobe pointed away from the tappet, before removing the camshafts. Failure to measure all clearances prior to removing the camshafts will necessitate repeated removal and installation and wasted labor time. Use a feeler gauge to measure each valve's clearance and record its location. 3. Remove the camshafts. 4. CAUTION: If the camshaft and valve tappets are to be reused, mark the location of the valve tappets to make sure that they are assembled in their original positions. Remove the valve tappets from the cylinder head. 5. NOTE: A mid-range clearance is the most desirable: ^ intake: 0.15 mm (0.006 inch) ^ exhaust: 0.3 mm (0.012 inch) NOTE: Select tappets using this formula: tappet thickness = measured clearance plus the base tappet thickness minus most desirable thickness. Select tappets and mark installation location. Installation 1. NOTE: Lubricate the valve tappets with Super Premium SAE 5W-20 Motor Oil or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C153-H. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 2555 Install the valve tappets. 2. Install the camshafts. 3. Confirm each valve's clearance at base circle with the lobe pointed away from the tappet. 4. Install the timing belt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve Eliminated Fuel Pressure Release: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve Eliminated Article No. 02-21-2 10/28/02 FUEL - FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE DISCONTINUED - 2.0L ENGINE FORD: 2000-2002 FOCUS 2001-2002 ESCORT ZX2, ESCAPE MERCURY: 1999-2002 COUGAR ISSUE Vehicles equipped with the 2.0L 4V Zetec and the 2.0L SPI no longer have the Fuel Pressure Relief Valve (Schrader Valve). ACTION To relieve or manually check fuel pressures, refer to the following Service Procedures for details. SERVICE PROCEDURE Service Procedure For Relieving Fuel Pressure 1. Remove the fuel pump relay in the engine compartment fuse box. 2. Start the engine and allow idling until the engine stalls. 3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately five seconds to ensure the fuel injection supply manifold pressure has been released. 4. When fuel system service is complete, Install Fuel Pump Relay. 5. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting engine. NOTE IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM. 6. Start vehicle and check for leaks. NOTE IT IS POSSIBLE THAT A DTC MAY BE SET DUE TO THE PUMP RELAY BEING PULLED AND THE ENGINE STARTED AND RUN OUT OF FUEL. IF DTC'S ARE SET, CLEAR ALL DTC'S BEFORE RETURNING VEHICLE TO THE CUSTOMER. Service Procedure For Manually Checking Fuel Pressure With A Gauge. 1. Remove the fuel pump relay in the engine compartment fuse box. 2. Start the engine and allow idling until the engine stalls. 3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately five seconds to make sure the fuel injection supply manifold pressure has been released. 4. Disconnect fuel line at the fuel rail to chassis line pierce point. a. If the vehicle is equipped with Quick Release Coupling Push Connector at the fuel rail to fuel line pierce point, separate the coupling by depressing the tabs and pulling on the fuel line. b. If the vehicle is equipped with a Spring Lock Coupling Connector using special tool 310-D00S or equivalent 5. Install the Schrader Valve service tool adaptor listed in the chart in this article. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve Eliminated > Page 2560 6. Install fuel pressure gauge special service tool 310-012 or equivalent. 7. Install fuel pump relay. 8. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for oaks before starting engine. NOTE IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM. 9. Start and run engine to surge air from fuel system (air trapped in the fuel system may effect test results). 10. Perform normal diagnosti35 ann service repairs as needed. 11. After fuel system service is complete, relieve fuel system pressure using fuel pressure gauge relief valve. 12. Remove special service tools 13. Re-connect fuel system lines 14. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting engine. NOTE IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM. 15. Start vehicle and check for leaks. NOTE IT IS POSSIBLE THAT A DTC MAY BE SET DUE TO THE PUMP RELAY BEING PULLED AND THE ENGINE STARTED AND RUN OUT OF FUEL. IF DTC'S ARE SET, CLEAR ALL DTC'S BEFORE RETURNING VEHICLE TO THE CUSTOMER. Service Tools Required Chart OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 404000, 490000, 497000, 499000, 603300, 607000, 698298 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2561 Fuel Pressure Release: Service Precautions WARNING: ^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2562 Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair 1. Remove the LH engine compartment relay panel cover. WARNING: ^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. NOTE: Before disconnecting any fuel tube, release the fuel pressure from the fuel system. 2. Remove the fuel pump relay. 3. Start the engine. 4. After the engine stalls, crank the engine over two more times to be sure all the pressure has been released. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. Install the fuel pump relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2563 Fuel Pressure Gauge Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Specifications Valve Cover: Specifications Valve Cover Bolts 80 in.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2567 Valve Cover: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe. 2. Remove the ignition wires from the spark plugs. 3. Disconnect the throttle cables. ^ Disconnect the speed control actuator cable (if equipped). ^ Disconnect the accelerator cable. 4. Remove the valve cover. 1 Remove the stud bolts 2 Remove the bolts. 5. CAUTION: The valve cover sealing surfaces are soft materials. Do not use abrasive grinding discs to remove gasket material; only use manual scrapers. Do not scratch or gouge sealing surfaces or oil leaks may occur. Clean and inspect the sealing surfaces of the valve cover and the cylinder head. Both surfaces must be clean and flat. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Install a new valve cover gasket if damaged. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Guide > Component Information > Specifications Valve Guide: Specifications Valve Guide Bore Diameter Intake 0.23858 in Insert Counterbore Diameter Exhaust 0.23858 in Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Specifications Valve Spring: Specifications Valve Spring Compression Pressure Intake 82.1 lbf at 0.988 in Exhaust 94.94 lbf at 1.0275 in Free Length 1.701 in Installed Height 1.346 in Assembled Height Service Limit 1.346 in Pressure Lost @ Specific Height +/- 0.0256 inch Intake 32.596 lbf Exhaust 40.464 lbf Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2574 Valve Spring: Service and Repair Valve-Valve Spring, Valve Spring Retainer and Valve Stem Seal Removal 1. Remove the spark plugs. 2. Remove the valve tappets. 3. NOTE: If the air pressure fails to hold the valves closed while carrying out the following steps, valve or valve seat damage is indicated and the cylinder head must be removed. NOTE: Make sure the applicable piston is at the top of its stroke. Install the air line with an adapter in the spark plug hole and turn on the air supply. 4. Install the special tools, compress the valve spring, and remove the valve spring retainer and valve spring. 5. Inspect the valve spring, valve spring retainer and valve spring retainer key. Install new parts as necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2575 6. NOTE: If air pressure has forced the piston to the bottom of the cylinder, any loss of air pressure will allow the valve(s) to fall into the cylinder. A rubber band, tape or string wrapped around the end of the valve stem will prevent this from happening. Use the special tools to remove the valve stem seal. Installation 1. CAUTION: If the valve has been damaged, removal will be necessary for repair. Remove the air pressure from the spark plug adapter and inspect the valve for damage. Rotate the valve and check the valve for eccentric movement during rotation. 2. If the condition of the valve is satisfactory, apply Super Premium SAE 5W-20 Motor Oil or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C153-H to the valve stem and hold the valve closed. Apply the air pressure within the cylinder. 3. Lubricate valve and guides with Super Premium SAE 5W-20 Motor Oil or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C153-H and using the special tool install the valve stem seals onto the cylinder head valve guides. 4. Place the valve spring in position over the valve and install the valve spring retainer. 5. Using the special tools compress the valve spring and install the valve spring retainer keys. ^ Remove the special tools. 6. Remove the air pressure. 7. Remove the air line adapter. 8. Install the valve tappets. 9. Install the spark plugs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Specifications Valve: Specifications Valve Valve To Guide Clearance 0.000662 - 0.0025196 in Angle Degrees Runout 90 deg Total Indicated Runout Valve Head Diameter Intake 1.2598 in Exhaust 1.10236 in Valve Face Runout Limit 0.0013779 in Intake and Exhaust Valve Face Angle 45 deg Valve Stem Diameter Intake 0.23740 in Exhaust 0.23740 in Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Locations Drive Belt: Locations 2.0L Zetec without A/C 2.0L Zetec with A/C Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Locations > Page 2583 Drive Belt: Diagrams 2.0L Zetec without A/C 2.0L Zetec with A/C Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Drive Belt: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Inspection and Verification 1. Verify the customer's concern by operating the engine to duplicate the condition. 2. Inspect to determine if any of the following mechanical concerns apply: 3. NOTE: Minor cracks in the V-grooved portion of the drive belt are considered normal and acceptable. If the drive belt has chunks missing from the ribs, a new drive belt should be installed. Install a new drive belt if any of the following conditions exist: rib chunk-out, severe glazing, frayed cords or other concerns. Inspect for drive belt cracking/chunking/wear. V-Ribbed Belt With Cracks (Acceptable) V-Ribbed Serpentine Drive Belt With Cracks Across Ribs V-Ribbed Belt With Chunks Of Rib Missing (Not Acceptable) V-Ribbed Serpentine Drive Belt With Chunks of Rib Missing 4. If the concerns remain after inspection, determine the symptoms and go to the Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2586 Drive Belt: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures SYMPTOM CHART Part 1 of 2 Part 2 of 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2587 Drive Belt: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Belt Tensioner-Dynamic Belt Tensioner-Dynamic The belt tensioner can be checked dynamically as follows: 1. With the engine running, observe the belt tensioner movement. The belt tensioner should move (respond) when the A/C clutch cycles (if equipped), or when the engine is accelerated rapidly. If the belt tensioner movement is constant without A/C clutch cycling or acceleration, a pulley or shaft is probably bent or a pulley is out of round. In rare cases, excessive drive belt rideout (uneven depth of grooves in drive belt ) can cause excessive drive belt tensioner movement. This condition can be checked by installing a new drive belt, and repeating the observation. 2. With the engine off, check routing of the drive belt. 3. Inspect the belt tensioner wear indicator to confirm the drive belt is within operating range. Install a new drive belt if necessary. Belt Tensioner-Mechanical Belt Tensioner-Mechanical The only mechanical check that needs to be made is a check for tensioner stick, grab or bind. 1. Remove the belt in the area of the tensioner. 2. Rotate the tensioner from its relaxed position through its full stroke and back to the relaxed position to make sure there is no stick, grab or bind and to make sure that there is tension on the belt tensioner spring. 3. If the tensioner meets the above criteria, proceed to test the tensioner dynamically. If the tensioner does not meet the above criteria, install a new tensioner. Engine Accessory Drive Engine Accessory Drive Test To carry out this test, proceed as follows: ^ Remove the accessory drive belts. WARNING: BLOCK THE FRONT AND REAR WHEELS, AND APPLY THE PARKING BRAKE AND THE SERVICE BRAKE, OR INJURY TO PERSONNEL CAN RESULT. CAUTION: Limit engine running time to one minute or less with belts removed or serious engine damage will result. NOTE: A serpentine drive belt decreases the usefulness of this test. In these cases, use a vibration analyzer, such as the EVA, to pinpoint accessory vibrations. An electronic listening device, such as an EngineEAR, will also help to identify noises from specific accessories. ^ Increase the engine rpm to where the concern occurs. ^ If the vibration/noise is duplicated when carrying out this test, the belts and accessories are not sources. ^ If the vibration/noise was not duplicated when carrying out this test, install each accessory belt, one at a time, to locate the source. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2588 Drive Belt: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt - 2.0L Zetec Removal and Installation 1. Remove the right front wheel and tire. 2. Remove the bolts and the right front lower splash shield. 3. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and remove the accessory drive belt. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner -2.0L Zetec Removal and Installation 1. Remove the accessory drive belt. 2. Remove the bolts and the accessory drive belt tensioner. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Specifications Engine Mount: Specifications Engine Mount Ground Wire Nut (Engine) 80 in.lb Ground Wire Nut (Body) 89 in.lb Bolt/Nuts 41 ft.lb Lower Bracket Bolts 37 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Mount Engine Mount: Service and Repair Engine Mount Engine Mount Removal and Installation 1. Install the special tool. 2. Disconnect the ground strap. 3. Remove the engine mount upper bracket. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Mount > Page 2597 4. Disconnect the ground wire. 5. Disconnect the power steering line bracket. 6. Disconnect the power steering line bracket and position the line aside. 7. Remove the engine mount. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Mount > Page 2598 Engine Mount: Service and Repair Powertrain/Drivetrain Mount Neutralizing Powertrain/Drivetrain Mount Neutralizing 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Loosen, but do not remove, the powertrain/drivetrain mount fasteners. 3. Lower the vehicle. 4. Move the vehicle in forward and reverse 0.6-1.2 meters (2-4 ft). CAUTION: Do not twist or strain the powertrain/drivetrain mounts. 5. Raise and support the vehicle. 6. Tighten the powertrain/drivetrain mount fasteners. 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Test the system for normal operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler Pulley > Component Information > Specifications Idler Pulley: Specifications Idler Pulley Bolt 35 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2602 Idler Pulley: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt Idler Pulley -2.0L Zetec Removal and Installation 1. Remove the accessory drive belt. 2. Remove the bolt and the accessory drive belt idler pulley. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications Oil Pressure (Hot) 54-80 psi at 4000 rpm Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube > Component Information > Specifications Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: Specifications Dip Stick Tube 89 in.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2610 Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. Remove the bolt and the oil level indicator and tube. 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Install a new O-ring seal if damaged. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Drain Plug > Component Information > Specifications Engine Oil Drain Plug: Specifications Drain Plug 18 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Oil - Oil Recommendations/Applications Technical Service Bulletin # 02-1-9 Date: 020121 Engine Oil - Oil Recommendations/Applications Article No. 02-1-9 01/21/02 ENGINE - ENGINE OIL - RECOMMENDED APPLICATIONS FOR SAE 5W-20 AND SAE 5W-30 MOTOR OILS - GASOLINE AND FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLES ONLY FORD: 1992-2002 CROWN VICTORIA 1993-1994 TEMPO 1993-1997 THUNDERBIRD 1993-2002 ESCORT, MUSTANG, TAURUS 1995-2000 CONTOUR 1998-2002 ESCORT ZX2 2000-2002 FOCUS 1993-1996 BRONCO 1993-1997 AEROSTAR 1993-2002 E SERIES, F-150, RANGER 1995-2002 WINDSTAR 1997-1999 F-250 LD 1997-2001 EXPLORER 1997-2002 EXPEDITION 1999-2002 SUPER DUTY F SERIES, SUPER DUTY F-53 STRIPPED CHAS. 2000-2002 EXCURSION 2001-2002 ESCAPE LINCOLN: 1991-2002 TOWN CAR 1993-1998 MARK VIII 1993-2002 CONTINENTAL 2000-2002 LS 1998-2002 NAVIGATOR MERCURY: 1992-2002 GRAND MARQUIS 1993-1994 TOPAZ 1993-1997 COUGAR 1993-1999 TRACER 1993-2002 SABLE 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR 1997-2001 MOUNTAINEER This article is being republished in its entirety to update the vehicle models, engines and years affected. NOTE PLEASE REFER TO THE VEHICLE APPLICATION LIST LATER IN THIS TSB FOR A COMPLETE LIST OF VEHICLES AFFECTED BY THIS TSB. ISSUE Ford Motor Company now recommends SAE 5W-20 viscosity grade for servicing most gasoline and flexible fueled vehicles. ACTION All 2001 and 2002 vehicles where SAE 5W-20 is specified should be serviced at the recommended oil change intervals using SAE 5W-20. This oil is an improved formulation to improve fuel economy. Testing has validated this viscosity grade can be used in many previous model year vehicles. It is recommended ALL vehicles on the following Vehicle Application Listing be service with SAE 5W-20. All 2001-2002 vehicles other than those listed in the "Exception 2001 Vehicles" or "Exception 2002 Vehicles" chart are being filled with SAE 5W-20 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Oil - Oil Recommendations/Applications > Page 2618 motor oil at the factory and should also be serviced with SAE 5W-20 oil. Exception 2001 Vehicles Exception 2002 Vehicles NOTE IF VEHICLE IS NOT LISTED IN THIS APPLICATION, SAE 5W-30 OIL IS RECOMMENDED. REFER TO TSB 99-8-16. Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 99-8-16 SUPERSEDES: 01-4-7 WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 401000, 490000, 497000, 499000 Veh. App. Listing Approved For SAE 5W-20 Motor Oil ^ 1993-1996 1.9L Escort/Tracer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Oil - Oil Recommendations/Applications > Page 2619 ^ 1995-2000 2.0L Zetec Contour/Mystique ^ 1999-2002 2.0L Cougar ^ 1997-2002 2.0L Escort/Tracer ^ 1998-2002 2.0L Escort ZX2 ^ 2000-2002 2.0L Focus ^ 2001-2002 2.0L Escape ^ 1993-1997 2.3L Ranger ^ 1993-1994 2.3L Mustang ^ 1993-1994 2.3L Tempo/Topaz ^ 1998-2001 2.5L Ranger ^ 1995-2000 2.5L Contour/Mystique ^ 1999-2002 2.5L Cougar ^ 2001-2002 3.0L 4V Escape ^ 1996-2001 3.0L 4V Taurus/Sable ^ 1993-2002 3.0L (Vulcan) Aerostar/Ranger, ^ Taurus/Sable (Flexible Fuel and Gas) ^ 1995-2000 3.0L (Vulcan) Windstar ^ 1993-1994 3.0L (Vulcan) Tempo/Topaz ^ 2000-2002 3.0L 4V Lincoln LS ^ 1995-2002 3.8L Windstar ^ 1993-1997 3.8L Taurus/Sable, ^ Thunderbird/Cougar, Continental ^ 1994-2002 3.8L Mustang ^ 2002-2002 3.9L 4V Lincoln LS ^ 1997-2002 4.2L (SPI) F-150 (under 8500 GVW only), E-Series ^ 1996-2002 4.6L 2V Mustang ^ 1992-2002 4.6L Crown Victoria/Grand Marquis ^ 1991-2002 4.6L Town Car ^ 1994-1997 4.6L 2V Thunderbird/Cougar ^ 1996-2002 4.6L 4V Mustang Cobra ^ 1995-2002 4.6L 4V Continental ^ 1993-1998 4.6L 4V Mark VIII Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Oil - Oil Recommendations/Applications > Page 2620 ^ 1997-2002 4.6L 2V Triton F-150/250 (under 8500 GVW only), E-Series, Expedition ^ 1993-1999 4.9L E-Series, F-Series ^ 1993-1995 5.0L Mustang/Mustang Cobra ^ 1993-1993 5.0L Thunderbird/Cougar ^ 1997-2001 5.0L Explorer/Mountaineer ^ 1993-1996 5.0L E-Series, F-Series, Bronco ^ 2000-2002 5.4L Excursion ^ 1998-2002 5.4L 2V/4V Navigator ^ 1997-2002 5.4L 2V F-1501250 (under 8500 GVW only), Expedition, E-Series, E-350 Chassis/RV/Cutaway ^ 1993-1997 5.8L F-Series, Bronco ^ 1993-1996 5.8L E-Series ^ 2000-2002 6.8L Excursion ^ 1997-2002 6.8L E-Series, E-350 Chassis/RV/Cutaway ^ 1999-2002 6.8L Super Duty F-Series 250 HD/350/450/550 Motorhome ^ 1993-1998 7.5L All Vehicles NOTE FOR 1993 THROUGH 1998 MODEL YEAR FFV USE XO-10W30-FFV. NOTE THE "EXCEPTION 2001-2002 VEHICLES" SHOULD BE SERVICED WITH SAE 5W-30 MOTOR OIL Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil With Filter ............................................................................................................................................ ........................................................... 4.25L (4.5 Qt) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2623 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Engine Oil Type ...................................................................................................................... Super Premium SAE 5W-20, XO-5W-20-QSP or equivalent Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Oil Cooler: Specifications Oil Cooler Bolt 43 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2627 Oil Cooler: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Remove the oil filter. 3. Remove the oil cooler. ^ Disconnect the coolant hoses. ^ Remove the cooler mounting bolt. 4. CAUTION: The oil cooler sealing surfaces are soft metals. Do not use abrasive grinding discs to remove gasket material; only use manual scrapers. Do not scratch or gouge sealing surfaces or oil leaks may occur. Carefully clean the sealing surfaces. ^ Install a new oil filter. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Oil Filter: Specifications Oil Filter 12 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Oil Pan: Specifications -- The oil pan must be installed and the bolts tightened to specification within seven minutes of sealer application or oil leaks may occur. Oil Pan Bolts Stage 1 6 Nm Stage 2 12 Nm Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2634 Oil Pan: Service and Repair Removal 1. Remove the catalytic converter. 2. Drain the engine oil. ^ Install the drain plug. 3. Remove the 17 bolts and the oil pan. Installation 1. CAUTION: The oil pan sealing surfaces are soft metals. Do not use abrasive grinding discs to remove gasket material; use only manual scrapers. Do not scratch or gouge the aluminum sealing surfaces. Clean and inspect the mounting faces of both the oil pan and the cylinder block with Metal Surface Cleaner F4AZ-19A536-RA or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSE-M5B392-A. Both surfaces must be flat, clean and dry. 2. NOTE: The oil pan must be installed and the bolts tightened to specification within seven minutes of sealer application or oil leaks may occur. NOTE: Apply a 3 mm (0.1 inch) continuous bead of Silicone Gasket and Sealant F7AZ-19554-EA or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSE-M4G323-A4 to the oil pan. Install the oil pan. Tighten the bolts using the sequence shown in two stages: ^ Stage 1: Tighten to 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.). ^ Stage 2: Tighten 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the catalytic converter. 4. Fill the crankcase with Super Premium SAE 5W-20 Motor Oil or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C153-H. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Specifications Oil Pressure Sender: Specifications Oil Pressure Sender Tightening Torque 20 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2638 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2639 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: The halfshaft is removed for clarity. Disconnect the oil pressure sender electrical connector. 2. Remove the oil pressure sender. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component Information > Specifications Oil Pick Up/Strainer: Specifications Oil Pump Pick Up Tightening Torque 89 in.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2643 Oil Pick Up/Strainer: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. Remove the oil pan. 2. Remove the oil pump screen cover and tube. ^ Remove and discard the gasket. 3. CAUTION: The oil pump screen cover and tube sealing surfaces are soft metals. Do not use abrasive grinding discs to remove gasket material; only use manual scrapers. Do not scratch or gouge sealing surfaces. Carefully clean both sealing surfaces. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Install a new gasket. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications Oil Pressure (Hot) 54-80 psi at 4000 rpm Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications Intake Manifold: Specifications Throttle Body 62 in.lb Intake Manifold Bolts/Nuts 13 ft.lb Sequence --- Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2651 Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Removal 1. WARNING: Fuel supply lines will remain pressurized for long periods of time after engine shut down. This pressure must be relieved before disconnecting any fuel lines or fuel system components to prevent possible injury. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Remove the fuel injection supply manifold. 2. Disconnect the Throttle Position (TP) sensor electrical connector. 3. Disconnect the Idle Air Control (IAC) electrical connector and unclip the harness from the bracket. 4. Disconnect the main engine control sensor wiring and remove the connector from the mounting bracket. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2652 5. Disconnect the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) wire harness from the bracket. 6. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum supply hose. 7. Disconnect the four vacuum lines. 8. Disconnect the Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) vacuum line. 9. Disconnect the Knock Sensor (KS) electrical connector. 10. Lower the vehicle. 11. Remove the generator. 12. NOTE: Illustration shown with throttle body removed for clarity. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2653 Remove the intake manifold. ^ Remove the two nuts and five bolts in the sequence shown. 13. Remove and inspect the intake manifold gaskets. ^ Discard if damaged. Installation 1. NOTE: Illustration shown with the throttle body removed for clarity. NOTE: Install new intake manifold gaskets if damaged. Install the intake manifold and tighten using the sequence shown. 2. Install the generator. 3. Raise the vehicle. 4. Connect the KS electrical connector 5. Lower the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2654 6. Connect the PCV vacuum line. 7. Connect the four vacuum lines. 8. Connect the brake booster vacuum supply hose to the intake manifold. 9. Connect the PCM wire harness to the bracket. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2655 10. Connect the main engine control sensor wiring. 11. Connect the IAC electrical connector and reattach the harness to the bracket. 12. Connect the TP sensor electrical connector. 13. Install the fuel injection supply manifold. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Camshaft Oil Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair Camshaft Oil Seal: Service and Repair Camshaft Oil Seal Removal 1. Remove the camshaft timing sprockets. 2. NOTE: The exhaust camshaft oil seal is shown, the intake camshaft oil seal is similar. Using the special tool, remove the camshaft oil seals. Installation 1. NOTE: The exhaust camshaft oil seal is shown, the intake seal is similar. Using the special tool, install new camshaft front oil seals. 2. Install the camshaft timing sprockets. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal Removal 1. Remove the flywheel. 2. CAUTION: Use care to avoid damaging the crankshaft sealing surface. Using the special tool, remove the crankshaft rear oil seal. 3. Inspect the crankshaft rear oil seal area. Installation 1. NOTE: Coat the rear oil seal area and the crankshaft rear oil seal lip with Super Premium SAE 5W-20 Motor Oil or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C153-H. NOTE: Make sure the crankshaft rear oil seal is on correctly and that the edges are not rolled over. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2663 Using the special tools, install the crankshaft rear oil seal. 2. Install the flywheel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Cylinder Head Gasket > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Reman Engine Head Gasket Identification Cylinder Head Gasket: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Reman Engine Head Gasket Identification TSB 06-18-16 09/18/06 IDENTIFYING THE CORRECT REPLACEMENT HEAD GASKET FOR CERTAIN REMANUFACTURED ENGINES - SERVICE TIP FORD: 1999-2006 Mustang, Mustang, Mustang, Mustang, Mustang, Mustang 2000-2005 Thunderbird 2001-2005 Taurus 2001-2006 Crown Victoria, Crown Victoria 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 1997-2005 Expedition 1997-2006 E-Series, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty 1999-2003 Windstar 1999-2004 F-53 Motorhome Chassis 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Escape, Escape, Explorer Sport Trac, Ranger 2004-2005 Freestar, Freestar 2006 F-53 Motorhome Chassis LINCOLN: 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2001-2002 Continental 2001-200 Town Car 1998-2004 Navigator, Navigator 2003-2004 Aviator 2006 Mark LT MERCURY: 2001 Cougar 2001-2005 Sable 2001-2006 Grand Marquis 2003-2006 Marauder 2005 Montego 1997-2006 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey 2005 Mariner ISSUE On various vehicles when servicing the head gasket on certain Ford remanufactured engines, it is critical to determine the type of remanufactured engine that is being serviced, in order to identify the correct replacement gasket. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to help identify if the vehicle is equipped with a SID (for originally equipment level thickness head gasket) or OVR (for oversized service level thicker head gasket) remanufactured engine when replacing a head gasket. SERVICE PROCEDURE Use this TSB to help identify if the vehicle is equipped with a STD or OVR remanufactured engine when replacing a head gasket. This will ensure that you obtain the proper head gasket (thicker for OVR-oversized) for the engine you are repairing, as the engine may have milled engine block deck, milled cylinder head deck, or an over sized bore in the cylinders. This information will be needed when ordering parts. The parts catalogs already reflect the correct service numbers, as long as this additional information is available. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Cylinder Head Gasket > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Reman Engine Head Gasket Identification > Page 2668 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Cylinder Head Gasket > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Reman Engine Head Gasket Identification > Page 2669 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Cylinder Head Gasket > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Reman Engine Head Gasket Identification > Page 2670 For certain remanufactured engines, the long block assembly will be uniquely identified with a build date, reman code, service part number, and serial number. This metal tag will be marked with STD, or with OVR (Figures 1-6). WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Cylinder Head Gasket > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Reman Engine Head Gasket Identification > Page 2671 Technical Service Bulletin # 02-1-4 Date: 020121 Engine Head Gasket - Approved Replacement Procedures Article No. 02-1-4 01/21/02 ENGINE - APPROVED HEAD GASKET REPLACEMENT SERVICE PROCEDURES FORD: 1992-1997 THUNDERBIRD 1992-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, ESCORT, MUSTANG, TAURUS 1995-2000 CONTOUR 2000-2002 FOCUS 1995-2002 WINDSTAR 1997-2002 E SERIES, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER, F-150 1999-2002 SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2002 EXCURSION 2001-2002 ESCAPE LINCOLN: 1992-2002 CONTINENTAL, TOWN CAR 2000-2002 LS 1998-2002 NAVIGATOR 2002 BLACKWOOD MERCURY: 1992-1997 COUGAR 1992-1999 TRACER 1992-2002 GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR 1993-2002 VILLAGER 1997-2002 MOUNTAINEER ISSUE Some engine assemblies with aluminum cylinder heads repaired in-vehicle have been found to leak coolant and/or oil from the cylinder head gasket area due to particle contamination or scratches and dents at the head to block mating surfaces. ACTION Refer to the following Service Information for recommended gasket sealing surface preparation procedures. If the engine diagnosis points to a faulty head gasket (leaks oil, leaks coolant, oil or coolant contamination, or air in coolant), thorough cleaning procedures are necessary for a successful head gasket repair. Diagnosis and post-repair confirmation can be done successfully utilizing leak detection methods such as a black light dye process. SERVICE PROCEDURE To sum up, a successful leak repair depends on: ^ Accurate diagnosis of the leak using Ford-recommended test equipment and procedures ^ Surface preparation and gasket installation using the approved tools, cleaners, and methods ^ Exercising CARE and CLEANLINESS during disassembly/assembly of components ^ Use of genuine Ford OEM replacement parts ^ Use of a Ford Remanufacturer OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 401000, 402000, 403000, 499000 Aluminum Cylinder Head - Removal From Engine Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Cylinder Head Gasket > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Reman Engine Head Gasket Identification > Page 2672 WARNING ALUMINUM CYLINDER HEADS ARE HIGHLY POLISHED AND MUST BE HANDLED WITH EXTREME CARE. AFTER REMOVING THE HEAD BOLTS, WITHDRAW THE HEAD FROM THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT. USE EXTREME CARE NOTING THAT THE GASKET SURFACE OF THE HEAD COULD BE DAMAGED ON THE WAY OUT OF THE VEHICLE IF ALLOWED TO HIT AGAINST OTHER ENGINE COMPONENTS. ONCE REMOVED, PLACE THE HEAD ON A BENCH, GASKET SIDE UP, USING A PIECE OF CLEAN CARDBOARD ON THE BENCH SURFACE UNDERNEATH. DO NOT SLIDE THE HEAD GASKET SURFACE ALONG THE BENCHTOP OR DAMAGE WILL OCCUR. NOTE SOME ENGINES REQUIRE A "DE-TORQUING" PROCEDURE OF THE CYLINDER HEAD BOLTS. CONSULT WITH THE APPROPRIATE MODEL YEAR WORKSHOP MANUAL FIRST, AS THIS PROCEDURE IS USUALLY DONE ON FOUR-VALVE ENGINES. HOWEVER, ALL ALUMINUM HEADS ARE PRONE TO WARPAGE DURING REMOVAL IF TAKEN OFF WHEN HOT OR WARM. THE ENGINE SHOULD BE COOLED SUFFICIENTLY BY THE TIME THE HEADS ARE ACCESSIBLE DURING TEARDOWN. ALLOW AN ADEQUATE COOL DOWN PERIOD. NOTE IN SOME ENGINE APPLICATIONS, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO "RUBBER BAND" A FEW OF THE HEAD BOLTS TOGETHER DUE TO TIGHT CLEARANCES OF THE HEAD NEAR HEATER/AC PLENUMS AND THE BODY COWL. THIS WILL ALLOW THE BOLTS TO CLEAR THE BLOCK DECK AS THE HEAD IS WITHDRAWN FROM THE VEHICLE. Place CLEAN shop towels over the cylinder block bores to prevent further contamination from reaching internal parts and surfaces. If a towel is to be removed, do it SLOWLY . Debris collected on the towel can fall on the engine if care is not exercised as it is removed. Gasket surfaces are machined to near-mirror surface quality. Scratches, dents, gouges, and other impressions may allow oil, coolant, and compression gases to leak into other sealed cavities and/or the atmosphere. Surface imperfections deteriorate the head gasket's ability to seal effectively. Contamination on these surfaces will cause leaks from "shimming" the head even under full head bolt torque. Contamination will also cause marks on the polished gasket surface, creating a leak path. Inspection For Damage and Cleaning Procedure The overall straightness of the cylinder head and block face is held within very tight specification. Defects known as "waviness" or "depressions" cannot be surface machined out with ordinary equipment. Machining must meet manufacturer's specification on surface finish quality and be less than 0.001" inch (0.025 mm) level as measured under a known quality straightedge using a feeler gauge. If the engine has been overheated the cylinder head may have been damaged or warped. Re-surfacing will not correct this damage. The head must not contain any impressions on its sealing surface deeper than 0.001" (0.025 mm). There must not be any scratches or gouges present, especially those which track to another sealing cavity or to the atmosphere. Ensure that the mating cylinder block surface is completely free of solid contamination, corrosion, and fluids. Use Motorcraft Metal Surface Cleaner, F4AZ-19A536-RA or equivalent, to rid the surface of any material, which could later interfere with the gasket's sealing ability. WARNING UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES ARE ANY ALUMINUM GASKET SURFACES TO BE CLEANED USING RAZOR BLADES, ROTARY ABRASIVE DEVICES INCLUDING ROLOC AND 3M BRANDED SCOTCHBRITE PRODUCTS, ROTARY WIRE BRUSHES, SINGLE HANDLED WIRE BRUSHES, HAND ABRASIVE SUCH AS SANDPAPER OR EMERY CLOTH, OR ANY CARBON STEEL BLADE. THESE TOOLS ARE PROVEN TO CUT AND DAMAGE ALUMINUM AND WILL DISRUPT THE POLISHED FINISH. ABRASIVE PARTICLES ARE ALSO SUSCEPTIBLE TO ENTERING THE ENGINE CAVITIES AND MAY CAUSE INTERNAL ENGINE DAMAGE. THE ONLY TOOLS ACCEPTABLE ARE PLASTIC AND WOOD SCRAPERS COMBINED WITH USE OF MOTORCRAFT METAL SURFACE CLEANER, F4AZ-19A536-RA, OR EQUIVALENT SOLVENT. The original head bolts are to be discarded. Only new head bolts are acceptable for use in a head gasket repair. Use of old bolts can cause clamp load failure because they were stretched from the last torquing procedure either from the plant or a previous field repair. The new head bolt shanks and threads should be thoroughly cleaned, dried, and lightly lubricated. Oil the bolts and let oil drip for a minimum of 5 minutes. Use of too much oil may cause hydraulic lockup in the bolt hole. The corresponding bolt holes in the cylinder block must be free of contamination consisting of dirt particles, coolant, and oil. Bolts can mechanically or hydraulically lock on top of these materials and cause for poor clamping of the cylinder head gasket. Use very lightly compressed air to blow out the bolt holes. Use care to prevent debris from scattering over the internal engine surfaces. To clean the cylinder block gasket surface, a plastic or wood scraper in combination with Motorcraft Metal Surface Cleaner, F4AZ-19A536-RA, or equivalent solvent can be used with a portable shop vacuum. Move the scraper toward the vacuum nozzle to direct loosened material quickly away from the block surface. It is not necessary to expect aluminum head surfaces to be shiny and bright after the vehicle has been in service. Sanding, scraping, or polishing will create surface depressions that cause leaks. The surface is expected to be flat within 0.001" (0.025 mm) and free of dirt, metal chips, and liquid contaminants. Any staining of the metal surface is considered normal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Cylinder Head Gasket > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Reman Engine Head Gasket Identification > Page 2673 Machining of aluminum heads and blocks is an unacceptable field practice for quality control purposes of flatness and surface finish standards. Removing material will also raise the risk of internal reciprocating components striking each other, as well as changing the emissions calibration of the engine. Machining practices of aluminum blocks and heads are not reimbursable. Ford Remanufacturers are authorized to perform this procedure and have the necessary equipment to put the specified surface finish on the head within original factory limits. Installation Onto the Cylinder Block Surface WARNING ANY GASKET SEALING AIDS WHICH ARE NOT LIMITED TO, AND INCLUDE AVIATION CEMENT, COPPER SPRAYS, OR GLUES ARE NOT TO BE USED. THE GASKET MUST BE FITTED DRY WITHOUT SUPPLEMENTAL SEALING AIDS. ATTEMPTS TO SEAL WITH THESE COMPOUNDS WILL CAUSE HEAD SHIMMING AND/OR NEW LEAK PATHS. THESE COMPOUNDS HAVE ALSO BEEN KNOWN TO CAUSE EMISSIONS SENSORS TO FAIL THEREBY TRIPPING FAULT CODES IN THE PCM. Ensure that all surfaces of the cylinder block, cylinder head, and gasket are fully free of any solid or liquid contamination and have been prepared for assembly using Motorcraft Metal Surface Cleaner, F4AZ-19A536-RA, or equivalent solvent. Also ensure that any residual dirt on the engine was removed successfully from the surrounding areas of the block to head face of the head and the block. Using Workshop Manual procedures, assemble the head to the block carefully. Do not allow the gasket surfaces to scrape or bang against other engine parts. The head may pick up material along the way, if this is allowed. Once in place, with dowels properly aligned to the head and ensuring that the head is fully square, seated, and resting on the block deck in a level condition, install new "torque-to-yield" cylinder head bolts to a finger tight condition. Refer to the appropriate model year Workshop Manual for the procedure to torque the head bolts in the correct sequence and at the intervals specified. Failure to follow these instructions may result in a warped head, and damaged head bolt threads. Do not use "cheater pipes" on torque wrenches. Use a known quality, calibrated torque wrench. Pull evenly and steady on each bolt. Do not exert side pressures on the bolt hex, which can disrupt the integrity of the bolt head and give a false reading on the final torque value of the fastener. Once the engine is fully reassembled, be sure that fluid levels have been topped off as required for the operation. When the engine is ready for starting, ensure that the engine 6i1 pump is (was) primed properly and is in a "ready to start" condition with all engine oil galleys having been charged with oil. WARNING DO NOT RACE THE ENGINE UPON INITIAL STARTUP. MAINTAIN ENGINE IDLE TO BUILD OIL PRESSURE. USE OF A MECHANICAL PRESSURE GAUGE WILL ENSURE THAT OIL FLOW HAS DEVELOPED ON THE PUMP'S PRESSURE SIDE. A DEFECTIVE GAUGE OR LIGHT IN THE INSTRUMENT PANEL WILL NOT VERIFY PRESSURE HAS BEEN OBTAINED. SEVERE INTERNAL ENGINE DAMAGE WILL RESULT IF PRESSURE IS NOT OBSERVED AND STEADILY MAINTAINED. Allow a warm up period, which brings the engine to normal operating temperature. Check for leaks around the gasket joints of the head, front cover, and associated component parts. The vehicle should be road tested within normal guidelines to raise the engine to operating temperature and verify the repair is sound. Shut down the engine, allow for a cool-down and drain-back period to enable fluids to return to levels. Check fluid levels using owner guide recommendations (dipstick, sight gages, etc.). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair Removal 1. Remove the timing belt. 2. Remove the crankshaft sprocket and timing belt guide. 3. CAUTION: Use care to avoid damaging the crankshaft surface. Using the special tool, remove the crankshaft front seal from the oil pump. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2677 1. Using the special tool, install a new crankshaft front seal. 2. Install the timing belt guide and crankshaft sprocket. 3. Install the timing belt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Specifications Oil Pressure Sender: Specifications Oil Pressure Sender Tightening Torque 20 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2682 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2683 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: The halfshaft is removed for clarity. Disconnect the oil pressure sender electrical connector. 2. Remove the oil pressure sender. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications Camshaft Sprocket Bolts 50 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Page 2689 Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications Crankshaft Pulley Bolt 85 ft.lb Camshaft Sprocket Bolts 50 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2690 Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Service and Repair NOTE:Ford does not provide camshaft gear timing marks, or information to perform timing belt service without the special tools shown in this procedure. Timing Drive Components-Timing Sprockets Special Tool(s) Removal 1. Remove the timing belt. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. CAUTION: The camshaft alignment tool is not recommended to hold the camshafts in place when removing or tightening the bolts. Damage to camshaft may result. NOTE: Use an open-end wrench to keep each camshaft from rotating. Remove the bolts and the camshaft timing sprockets. Installation 1. Install the camshaft sprockets onto the camshafts and loosely install the bolts. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2691 3. NOTE: Make sure the correct (second) notch in the pulley is indexed to the lower cylinder block. Slide the crankshaft pulley onto the crankshaft and confirm the crankshaft position is at TDC (No. 1cylinder) by rotating it clockwise against the alignment peg. ^ Remove the crankshaft pulley. 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Confirm that the timing belt tensioner is installed correctly with the tab positioned in the slot in the inner timing cover. 6. Install the timing belt onto the timing belt sprockets. 7. Adjust the timing belt tensioner. 1 Using a 6mm Allen wrench, rotate the adjuster counterclockwise and align the marks as shown. 2 Tighten the tensioner pulley bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2692 8. CAUTION: The camshaft alignment tool is not recommended to hold the camshafts in place when removing or tightening the bolts. Damage to camshaft may result. NOTE: Use an open-end wrench to keep each camshaft from rotating. Tighten the camshaft timing sprocket bolts to specifications. 9. Raise and support the vehicle. 10. Install the front mount lower bracket. 11. Install the lower timing belt cover. 12. Install the accessory drive belt idler pulley. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2693 13. Install the water pump pulley. ^ Hand tighten the bolts. 14. Install the crankshaft pulley. 15. Tighten the water pump pulley bolts. 16. Remove the special tool. 17. Install the stud. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2694 18. Install the coolant tube. 19. Install the catalytic converter. 20. Lower the vehicle. 21. Remove the special tool. 22. Remove the special tool. 23. Install the valve cover. 24. Install the spark plugs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications Timing Belt: Specifications Timing Belt Replacement Interval 120,000 mi Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2698 Timing Belt: Diagrams Confirm The Crankshaft Position Is At TDC (No. 1 Cylinder) Adjust the timing belt tensioner. 1 Using a 6mm Allen wrench, rotate the adjuster counterclockwise and align the marks as shown. 2 Tighten the tensioner pulley bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2699 Timing Belt: Service and Repair Timing Belt NOTE:Ford does not provide camshaft gear timing marks, or information to perform timing belt service without the special tools shown in this procedure. Special Tools Removal 1. Remove the valve cover. 2. Remove the spark plugs. 3. Remove the catalytic converter. 4. Remove the bolt, nut, and position the coolant tube aside. 5. Rotate the crankshaft to just before Top Dead Center (TDC) (No. 1 cylinder). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2700 6. Remove the stud. 7. Install the special tool. 8. NOTE: Make sure the correct (second) notch in the pulley is indexed to the lower cylinder block. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise against the peg to bring it to TDC (No. 1 cylinder). 9. Loosen the water pulley bolts. 10. Remove the timing belt covers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2701 11. Remove the water pump pulley. 12. Remove the accessory drive belt idler pulley. 13. NOTE: Installation of the alignment tool into the exhaust camshaft may require the camshafts to be rotated clockwise slightly. Install the special tool and align the camshafts. 14. Raise and support the vehicle. 15. Remove the bolts and the engine mount lower bracket. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2702 16. Loosen the timing belt tensioner pulley and allow to slide down to the bottom of its travel. 17. CAUTION: If the camshaft timing belt is to be reused, mark the direction of the camshaft timing belt to rotation of camshaft prior to removal or premature wear or failure may occur. Slide the timing belt off of the camshaft and crankshaft sprockets. 18. Inspect the timing belt for wear. Install a new belt if necessary. Installation 1. NOTE: Make sure the correct (second) notch in the pulley is indexed to the lower cylinder block. Slide the crankshaft pulley onto the crankshaft and confirm the crankshaft position is at TDC (No. 1 cylinder) by rotating it clockwise against the alignment peg. ^ Remove the crankshaft pulley. 2. Lower the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2703 3. Confirm that the timing belt tensioner is installed correctly with the tab positioned in the slot in the inner timing cover. 4. Install the timing belt onto the timing belt sprockets. 5. Adjust the timing belt tensioner. 1 Using a 6mm Allen wrench, rotate the adjuster counterclockwise and align the marks as shown. 2 Tighten the tensioner pulley bolt. 6. Raise the vehicle. 7. Install the front engine mount lower bracket. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2704 8. Install the accessory drive belt idler pulley. 9. Install the water pump pulley. ^ Hand tighten the bolts. 10. Install the timing belt covers. 11. Tighten the water pump pulley bolts. 12. Remove the special tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2705 13. Install the stud. 14. Install the coolant tube. 15. Install the catalytic converter. 16. Remove the special tool. 17. Install the valve cover. 18. Install the spark plugs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt Idler Pulley > Component Information > Service Precautions Timing Belt Idler Pulley: Service Precautions Ford does not provide camshaft gear timing marks, or information to perform timing belt service without the special tools shown in the service and repair procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications Timing Belt Tensioner: Specifications Timing Belt Tensioner Bolt 25 Nm (18 lb-ft) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2712 Timing Belt Tensioner: Service Precautions Ford does not provide camshaft gear timing marks, or information to perform timing belt service without the special tools shown in the service and repair procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications Timing Cover: Specifications Timing Cover Upper Cover 71 in.lb Lower Cover 62 in.lb Inner Cover 89 in.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2716 Timing Cover: Service and Repair NOTE:Ford does not provide camshaft gear timing marks, or information to perform timing belt service without the special tools shown in this procedure. Timing Belt Cover-Upper and Lower Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the crankshaft pulley. 3. Remove the bolts and the lower timing belt cover. 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Install the special tool. 6. Remove the ground strap. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2717 7. Remove the engine mount upper bracket. 8. Remove the studs. 9. Remove the bolts and the upper timing belt cover. 10. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Variable Cam Timing System Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation Variable Cam Timing System Variable Cam Timing System Overview The Variable Cam Timing System allows the exhaust cam to advance and retard at varying engine speeds. The purpose of this is to reduce exhaust emissions and increase fuel economy. As the exhaust cam retards in relation to the crankshaft position, residual exhaust gases are left in the combustion chamber. The residual gases cool the combustion chamber and are inert when mixed with the incoming fresh charge of fuel and air. This results in better fuel economy and lower Nitrogen Oxides (NOx) and Hydrocarbons (HG) the engine produces. The Exhaust Gas Recalculation System (EGR) is unnecessary on the 2.0L (4V) engine due to this feature. Variable Cam Timing The Variable Cam Timing (VCT) system consists of the control solenoid, five-tooth pulse ring (4+1) on exhaust camshaft, Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor, Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor, Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor, Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor, Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor, Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (Figure 129). 1. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) receives input signals from the Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor, Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor, Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor, Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor and Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor for determining the operating conditions of the engine. 2. The Variable Cam Timing (VCT) system is enabled by the PCM when the proper conditions are met. The PCM disables the VCT system if a fault is detected. 3. The PCM calculates relative cam position using the CMP sensor and data from the (4+1) pulse ring mounted on the exhaust camshaft. Relative cam position is calculated by measuring the time between the rising edge of Profile Ignition Pickup (PIP) and the falling edge of Variable Cam Timing (VCT) pulse. 4. The PCM continually calculates a cam position error value based on the difference between the desired and actual position and a duty cycle is commanded for the VCT solenoid valve. Engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT unit. 5. Oil flows to either side of the piston chamber changing a linear motion from the piston to a rotation motion from the helical mechanism in the VCT unit. During closed loop the PCM outputs a revised duty cycle to the VCT solenoid valve to correct for cam position error. Variable Cam Timing System HARDWARE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Variable Cam Timing System > Page 2723 Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Solenoid Valve Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Solenoid Valve The VCT solenoid valve (Figure 130) is an integral part of the VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil to the variable cam timing unit assembly. As the PCM duty cycles the solenoid valve, oil is allowed to flow to the VCT unit assembly and advance or retard the cam timing. Variable Cam Timing Unit Assembly Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Unit Assembly The variable cam timing unit assembly (Figure 131) is coupled to the camshaft through a helical spline in the VCT unit chamber. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil pressure forces the piston to move linearly along the axis of the camshaft. This linear motion is translated into rotational camshaft motion through the helical spline coupling. A spring installed Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Variable Cam Timing System > Page 2724 in the chamber is designed to hold the camshaft in the minimum overlap position (5 degrees) when oil pressure is too low to maintain adequate position control. The camshaft is allowed to rotate up to 30 degrees. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Variable Cam Timing System > Page 2725 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Unit Assembly Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Unit Assembly Variable Cam Timing Unit Assembly The variable cam timing unit assembly (Figure 131) is coupled to the camshaft through a helical spline in the VCT unit chamber. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil pressure forces the piston to move linearly along the axis of the camshaft. This linear motion is translated into rotational camshaft motion through the helical spline coupling. A spring installed in the chamber is designed to hold the camshaft in the minimum overlap position (5 degrees) when oil pressure is too low to maintain adequate position control. The camshaft is allowed to rotate up to 30 degrees. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Description and Operation Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Description and Operation VARIABLE CAM TIMING (VCT) SOLENOID VALVE Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Solenoid Valve The Variable Cam Timing (VCT) solenoid valve (Figure 130) is an integral part of the VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil to the variable cam timing unit assembly. As the PCM duty cycles the solenoid valve, oil is allowed to flow to the VCT unit assembly and advance or retard the cam timing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation PRESSURE TEST POINT There is a pressure test point with a schrader fitting in the fuel rail that relieves fuel pressure and measures the fuel injector supply pressure for service and diagnostic procedures. Before servicing or testing the fuel system, read any CAUTION, WARNING, and HANDLING information. ON VEHICLES NOT EQUIPPED WITH A SCHRADER VALVE, USE ROTUNDA FUEL PRESSURE TEST KIT #134-ROO87 OR EQUIVALENT. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Hot Idle ................................................................................................................................................ ......................................................... 800 - 900 RPM Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Remove the battery tray. 3. Remove the bolt and the intake pipe. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. NOTE: Make sure the front sponge seal of the intake pipe is seated on the shroud panel correctly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve Eliminated Fuel Pressure Release: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve Eliminated Article No. 02-21-2 10/28/02 FUEL - FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE DISCONTINUED - 2.0L ENGINE FORD: 2000-2002 FOCUS 2001-2002 ESCORT ZX2, ESCAPE MERCURY: 1999-2002 COUGAR ISSUE Vehicles equipped with the 2.0L 4V Zetec and the 2.0L SPI no longer have the Fuel Pressure Relief Valve (Schrader Valve). ACTION To relieve or manually check fuel pressures, refer to the following Service Procedures for details. SERVICE PROCEDURE Service Procedure For Relieving Fuel Pressure 1. Remove the fuel pump relay in the engine compartment fuse box. 2. Start the engine and allow idling until the engine stalls. 3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately five seconds to ensure the fuel injection supply manifold pressure has been released. 4. When fuel system service is complete, Install Fuel Pump Relay. 5. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting engine. NOTE IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM. 6. Start vehicle and check for leaks. NOTE IT IS POSSIBLE THAT A DTC MAY BE SET DUE TO THE PUMP RELAY BEING PULLED AND THE ENGINE STARTED AND RUN OUT OF FUEL. IF DTC'S ARE SET, CLEAR ALL DTC'S BEFORE RETURNING VEHICLE TO THE CUSTOMER. Service Procedure For Manually Checking Fuel Pressure With A Gauge. 1. Remove the fuel pump relay in the engine compartment fuse box. 2. Start the engine and allow idling until the engine stalls. 3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately five seconds to make sure the fuel injection supply manifold pressure has been released. 4. Disconnect fuel line at the fuel rail to chassis line pierce point. a. If the vehicle is equipped with Quick Release Coupling Push Connector at the fuel rail to fuel line pierce point, separate the coupling by depressing the tabs and pulling on the fuel line. b. If the vehicle is equipped with a Spring Lock Coupling Connector using special tool 310-D00S or equivalent 5. Install the Schrader Valve service tool adaptor listed in the chart in this article. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve Eliminated > Page 2746 6. Install fuel pressure gauge special service tool 310-012 or equivalent. 7. Install fuel pump relay. 8. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for oaks before starting engine. NOTE IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM. 9. Start and run engine to surge air from fuel system (air trapped in the fuel system may effect test results). 10. Perform normal diagnosti35 ann service repairs as needed. 11. After fuel system service is complete, relieve fuel system pressure using fuel pressure gauge relief valve. 12. Remove special service tools 13. Re-connect fuel system lines 14. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting engine. NOTE IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM. 15. Start vehicle and check for leaks. NOTE IT IS POSSIBLE THAT A DTC MAY BE SET DUE TO THE PUMP RELAY BEING PULLED AND THE ENGINE STARTED AND RUN OUT OF FUEL. IF DTC'S ARE SET, CLEAR ALL DTC'S BEFORE RETURNING VEHICLE TO THE CUSTOMER. Service Tools Required Chart OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 404000, 490000, 497000, 499000, 603300, 607000, 698298 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2747 Fuel Pressure Release: Service Precautions WARNING: ^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2748 Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair 1. Remove the LH engine compartment relay panel cover. WARNING: ^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. NOTE: Before disconnecting any fuel tube, release the fuel pressure from the fuel system. 2. Remove the fuel pump relay. 3. Start the engine. 4. After the engine stalls, crank the engine over two more times to be sure all the pressure has been released. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. Install the fuel pump relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2749 Fuel Pressure Gauge Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications Firing Order: Specifications 4-Cyl Firing Order: 1 3 4 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2753 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Service Precautions Ignition Cable: Service Precautions CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the ignition wire directly, as the wire may separate from the connector inside the spark plug boot. ^ Correct installation of the ignition wires is critical to engine operation. If one spark plug wire is not correctly installed at either the spark plug or the ignition coil, both spark plugs connected to the ignition coil may not fire under load. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 2761 Ignition Cable: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Grasp the spark plug boot firmly and with a twisting-pulling motion, disconnect the ignition wires from the spark plugs. CAUTION: Do not pull on the ignition wire directly, as the wire may separate from the connector inside the spark plug boot. 2. Disconnect the ignition wires from the ignition coil and remove the wires. INSTALLATION 1. Connect the ignition wires to the correct ignition coil terminals. CAUTION: Correct installation of the ignition wires is critical to engine operation. If one spark plug wire is not correctly installed at either the spark plug or the ignition coil, both spark plugs connected to the ignition coil may not fire under load. NOTE: ^ Whenever an ignition wire is reinstalled or a new one is installed, apply Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric compound to the interior surface of the ignition wire boot. ^ Before installing the ignition wires, inspect the ignition wires for any visible damage; install new ignition wires if necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 2762 2. Connect the ignition wires to the correct spark plugs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Spark Plug Gap Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Gap Spark Plug Gap ................................................................................................................................... .................................................. 1.3 mm (0.051 inch) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Spark Plug Gap > Page 2767 Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Torque Spark Plug Torque ............................................................................................................................... ...................................................... 15 Nm (11 ft lbs) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2768 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark Plug Type Cylinders 1 And 3 ..................................................................................................... ................................................................ AZFS-32F Spark Plug Type Cylinders 2 And 4 .................. ................................................................................................................................................ AZFS-32FE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2769 Spark Plug: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the spark plug wires from the spark plugs. 2. Remove the spark plugs. NOTE: ^ If an original spark plug is reused, install it in the same cylinder from which it was removed. New spark plugs can be used in any cylinder. ^ Use compressed air to remove any foreign material from the spark plug well before removing the spark plugs. 3. Inspect the spark plugs. 4. Clean the spark plugs with a wire brush or a professional spark plug cleaner (follow the manufacturer's instructions). INSTALLATION 1. Adjust the plug gap as necessary. 2. Install the spark plugs. NOTE: Apply Anti-Seize Lubricant to the lower three threads of the spark plugs. Do not allow lubricant to contaminate the spark plug electrodes or insulator tips. 3. Connect the spark plug wires to the spark plugs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications The indicated compression pressure are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is within 75% of the highest reading. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 2773 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection General Remarks NOTE: Removing fuses and disconnecting electrical components causes the powertrain control module (PCM) to log an error message. After the measurements have been carried out this error message should be cleared from memory by connecting to PCM. NOTE: Only check the compression pressure with the valves set to the prescribed clearance (if this can be adjusted). The compression pressure should be checked with the engine at operating temperature. Check The Compression Pressure WARNING: On manual transmissions shift the transmission into neutral. On automatic transmission vehicles, select "P". Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. Remove the fuel pump relay. 2. Start the engine - the engine will start, run for a few seconds then stall. 3. Remove the spark plugs. 4. Install the compression tester. 5. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit. With the ignition switch OFF, using the auxiliary starter switch, crank the engine a minimum of five compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the approximate number of compression strokes required to obtain the highest reading. 6. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of compression strokes. 7. Install the components in reverse order, observing the specified tightening torques. 8. Reset the PCM fault memory. Interpretation of the Results The indicated compression pressure are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is within 75% of the highest reading. CAUTION: If engine oil is sprayed into the combustion chamber, after carrying out the measurement run the engine at 2000 rpm for about 15 minutes, in order to burn the oil and prevent damage to the catalytic converter. If the measurement on one or more cylinders is much lower than the specified value, spray some engine oil into the combustion chamber and repeat the compression measurement. If the reading greatly improves, the piston rings are damaged. If the reading stays the same, the cause is either damaged valve seats or valve stem seals. If the measurements for two cylinders next to each other are both too low then it is very likely that the cylinder head gasket between them is burnt through. This can also be recognized by traces of engine oil in the coolant and/or coolant in the engine oil. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve Clearance Intake 0.006 in Exhaust 0.012 in Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 2777 Valve Clearance: Adjustments Removal 1. Remove the timing belt. 2. NOTE: Measure each valve's clearance at base circle with the lobe pointed away from the tappet, before removing the camshafts. Failure to measure all clearances prior to removing the camshafts will necessitate repeated removal and installation and wasted labor time. Use a feeler gauge to measure each valve's clearance and record its location. 3. Remove the camshafts. 4. CAUTION: If the camshaft and valve tappets are to be reused, mark the location of the valve tappets to make sure that they are assembled in their original positions. Remove the valve tappets from the cylinder head. 5. NOTE: A mid-range clearance is the most desirable: ^ intake: 0.15 mm (0.006 inch) ^ exhaust: 0.3 mm (0.012 inch) NOTE: Select tappets using this formula: tappet thickness = measured clearance plus the base tappet thickness minus most desirable thickness. Select tappets and mark installation location. Installation 1. NOTE: Lubricate the valve tappets with Super Premium SAE 5W-20 Motor Oil or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C153-H. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 2778 Install the valve tappets. 2. Install the camshafts. 3. Confirm each valve's clearance at base circle with the lobe pointed away from the tappet. 4. Install the timing belt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Water Pump Water Pump: Specifications Water Pump Bolts 89 in.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Water Pump > Page 2783 Water Pump: Specifications Water Pump Pulley 89 in.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2784 Water Pump: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. Drain the engine cooling system. 2. Remove the right front tire assembly. 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Remove the accessory drive belt. 5. Remove the water pump pulley. 6. Remove the four bolts and the water pump. 7. NOTE: Clean and inspect the sealing surfaces. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Actuators and Solenoids - Cooling System > Hydraulic Cooling Fan Solenoid Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation Hydraulic Cooling Fan Solenoid Valve: Description and Operation HYDRAULIC COOLING FAN DRIVE Hydraulic Cooling Fan Pump With Integral Solenoid The system consists of an engine-driven pump with an integral solenoid (Figure 50) on the pump that is triggered by the powertrain control module (PCM). Fan speed is controlled by adjusting current to the solenoid, which then changes the fluid flow to the hydraulic motor. More current means the solenoid opens up, allowing higher pressure to increase the fan speed. The fan always turns due to solenoid current leakage, even in cold engine cases. The motor is driven by the pump. It contains a shaft on which the fan mounts. The motor also contains quick connect fittings for the high pressure lines. The cooler is similar to the power steering cooler (same purpose and function, to keep the fluid cool). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Coolant - Propylene Glycol Recommendations Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Coolant - Propylene Glycol Recommendations Article No. 01-23-6 11/26/01 ^ ENGINE COOLANT - PROPYLENE GLYCOL - FORD MOTOR COMPANY POSITION ON ENGINE COOLANTS MADE FROM PROPYLENE GLYCOL ^ ENGINE COOLANT - PROPYLENE GLYCOL-BASED - FORD MOTOR COMPANY POSITION ON PROPYLENE GLYCOL-BASED ENGINE COOLANTS FORD: 1989-1993 FESTIVA 1989-1994 TEMPO 1989-1997 PROBE, THUNDERBIRD 1989-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, ESCORT, MUSTANG, TAURUS 1994-1997 ASPIRE 1995-2000 CONTOUR 2000-2002 FOCUS 2002 THUNDERBIRD 1989-1990 BRONCO II 1989-1996 BRONCO 1989-1997 AEROSTAR, F SUPER DUTY 1989-2002 ECONOLINE, F-150, RANGER 1991-2002 EXPLORER 1995-2002 WINDSTAR 1997-2002 EXPEDITION 1999-2002 SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2002 EXCURSION 2001-2002 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT 2000-2002 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 1989-1992 MARK VII 1989-2002 CONTINENTAL, TOWN CAR 1993-1998 MARK VIII 2000-2002 LS 1998-2002 NAVIGATOR 2002 BLACKWOOD MERCURY: 1989-1994 TOPAZ 1989-1997 COUGAR 1989-2002 GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE 1991-1994 CAPRI 1991-1999 TRACER 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR 1993-2002 VILLAGER 1997-2002 MOUNTAINEER MERKUR: 1989 SCORPIO, XR4TI This article is being republished in its entirety to update the model year coverage. ISSUE This TSB article describes Ford Motor Company's position on the use of propylene glycol-based engine coolants. ACTION Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Coolant - Propylene Glycol Recommendations > Page 2794 Ford Motor Company does not recommend nor endorse the use of engine coolants made with propylene glycol in Ford vehicles. Ford Motor Company currently recommends the use of ethylene glycol-based engine coolants. Published information suggests that engine coolants made with propylene glycol may provide engine cooling performance equivalent to engine coolants made with ethylene glycol. However, different brands of engine coolant provide varying corrosion protection for the cooling system. Ford does not have performance data for the multitude of engine coolants available in the aftermarket and therefore cannot recommend the use of any coolant except those sold by Ford Customer Service Division. Consult the vehicle's Owner's Guide to determine the appropriate Ford Customer Service Division coolant for the vehicle. Furthermore, claims of toxicological and environmental advantages of propylene glycol over ethylene glycol may be misleading. When significant new information is developed, Ford will review this policy. Ford Motor Company specifications recommend that vehicles be maintained using certain ethylene glycol-based engine coolants. Those specifications do not refer to engine coolants made with propylene glycol. Although the Ford New Vehicle Limited Warranty is not automatically voided upon the use of a coolant made with propylene glycol, if such use results in damage to the vehicle or its components, the cost of repairing the damage would not be covered by the Ford New Vehicle Limited Warranty. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 96-16-4 WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 402000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Coolant Capacity (Manual Trans) 7.0 qt (US) To convert to imperial measure, multiply U.S. quarts shown by 0.83. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2797 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications Antifreeze Type Ford Premium Engine Coolant (Green in color) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Level Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Level Sensor: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON Coolant Level Sensor: Customer Interest Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON Article No. 03-25-2 12/22/03 ENGINE - COOLING SYSTEM - LOW COOLANT WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED COOLANT DEGAS BOTTLE INSPECTION - SERVICE TIP FORD: 2001-2003 ESCAPE This article supersedes TSB 03-08-5 to update the vehicle model years and service procedure. ISSUE Some 2001-2003 Escape 3.0L vehicles may exhibit a low coolant warning indicator lamp illuminated. This may be caused by a low coolant level, even if it appears there is significant coolant in the degas bottle. Analysis of coolant degas bottles indicate that bottle replacement may not be necessary. Adjusting the coolant to the proper level may be all that is required to correct the condition. ACTION The following Service Procedure provides tips to help in veritying proper coolant levels. Additional diagnostic and service information can be found in the appropriate Workshop Manual Section 303-03. SERVICE PROCEDURE PROPER INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF COOLANT LEVEL IN THE DEGAS BOTTLE There are four (4) different cells within the Escape degas bottle. The front cells of the degas bottle are not a good visual indicator of proper coolant level, as these cells will always give the appearance of being full (Figure 1). The actual COLD FILL RANGE is the larger cell with the fill cap, just below the seam. It can be difficult to see if not properly examined. If the vehicle is HOT when inspecting, the coolant level should be at the bottle seam (minimum) or above the seam by 1/2 inch, well above the LOW mark. When hot, if the coolant level is not at least to the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), there is a possibility of illuminating the low coolant lamp when the vehicle cools down and the coolant is drawn back into the engine cooling system. DIAGNOSIS Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Not Illuminated (OFF): 1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten pressure cap and return vehicle to customer. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Level Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Level Sensor: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON > Page 2806 Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Illuminated (ON): 1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten pressure cap, verify that the warning lamp turns off after key cycle and return to customer. 2. If the coolant level is verified to be at the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), disconnect the coolant level sensor and verify that the warning lamp turns off. If the lamp does turn off then replace the degas bottle. If the lamp remains on with the sensor disconnected then perform diagnostics on the circuit beyond degas bottle/low coolant sensor. NOTE IT TAKES APPROXIMATELY 25 SECONDS FOR THE LOW COOLANT LAMP TO TURN OFF AFTER THE SENSOR CIRCUIT IS OPENED. (EXAMPLE: WHEN ADDING COOLANT TO A LOW BOTTLE WITH LAMP ON.) NOTE DO NOT REPLACE THE DEGAS BOTTLE UNLESS DIRECTED BY DIAGNOSTICS IN STEP 2. Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 03-08-5 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Level Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Level Sensor: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON Coolant Level Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON Article No. 03-25-2 12/22/03 ENGINE - COOLING SYSTEM - LOW COOLANT WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED COOLANT DEGAS BOTTLE INSPECTION - SERVICE TIP FORD: 2001-2003 ESCAPE This article supersedes TSB 03-08-5 to update the vehicle model years and service procedure. ISSUE Some 2001-2003 Escape 3.0L vehicles may exhibit a low coolant warning indicator lamp illuminated. This may be caused by a low coolant level, even if it appears there is significant coolant in the degas bottle. Analysis of coolant degas bottles indicate that bottle replacement may not be necessary. Adjusting the coolant to the proper level may be all that is required to correct the condition. ACTION The following Service Procedure provides tips to help in veritying proper coolant levels. Additional diagnostic and service information can be found in the appropriate Workshop Manual Section 303-03. SERVICE PROCEDURE PROPER INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF COOLANT LEVEL IN THE DEGAS BOTTLE There are four (4) different cells within the Escape degas bottle. The front cells of the degas bottle are not a good visual indicator of proper coolant level, as these cells will always give the appearance of being full (Figure 1). The actual COLD FILL RANGE is the larger cell with the fill cap, just below the seam. It can be difficult to see if not properly examined. If the vehicle is HOT when inspecting, the coolant level should be at the bottle seam (minimum) or above the seam by 1/2 inch, well above the LOW mark. When hot, if the coolant level is not at least to the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), there is a possibility of illuminating the low coolant lamp when the vehicle cools down and the coolant is drawn back into the engine cooling system. DIAGNOSIS Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Not Illuminated (OFF): 1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten pressure cap and return vehicle to customer. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Level Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Level Sensor: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON > Page 2812 Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Illuminated (ON): 1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten pressure cap, verify that the warning lamp turns off after key cycle and return to customer. 2. If the coolant level is verified to be at the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), disconnect the coolant level sensor and verify that the warning lamp turns off. If the lamp does turn off then replace the degas bottle. If the lamp remains on with the sensor disconnected then perform diagnostics on the circuit beyond degas bottle/low coolant sensor. NOTE IT TAKES APPROXIMATELY 25 SECONDS FOR THE LOW COOLANT LAMP TO TURN OFF AFTER THE SENSOR CIRCUIT IS OPENED. (EXAMPLE: WHEN ADDING COOLANT TO A LOW BOTTLE WITH LAMP ON.) NOTE DO NOT REPLACE THE DEGAS BOTTLE UNLESS DIRECTED BY DIAGNOSTICS IN STEP 2. Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 03-08-5 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Level Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2813 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Reservoir: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON Coolant Reservoir: Customer Interest Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON Article No. 03-25-2 12/22/03 ENGINE - COOLING SYSTEM - LOW COOLANT WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED COOLANT DEGAS BOTTLE INSPECTION - SERVICE TIP FORD: 2001-2003 ESCAPE This article supersedes TSB 03-08-5 to update the vehicle model years and service procedure. ISSUE Some 2001-2003 Escape 3.0L vehicles may exhibit a low coolant warning indicator lamp illuminated. This may be caused by a low coolant level, even if it appears there is significant coolant in the degas bottle. Analysis of coolant degas bottles indicate that bottle replacement may not be necessary. Adjusting the coolant to the proper level may be all that is required to correct the condition. ACTION The following Service Procedure provides tips to help in veritying proper coolant levels. Additional diagnostic and service information can be found in the appropriate Workshop Manual Section 303-03. SERVICE PROCEDURE PROPER INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF COOLANT LEVEL IN THE DEGAS BOTTLE There are four (4) different cells within the Escape degas bottle. The front cells of the degas bottle are not a good visual indicator of proper coolant level, as these cells will always give the appearance of being full (Figure 1). The actual COLD FILL RANGE is the larger cell with the fill cap, just below the seam. It can be difficult to see if not properly examined. If the vehicle is HOT when inspecting, the coolant level should be at the bottle seam (minimum) or above the seam by 1/2 inch, well above the LOW mark. When hot, if the coolant level is not at least to the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), there is a possibility of illuminating the low coolant lamp when the vehicle cools down and the coolant is drawn back into the engine cooling system. DIAGNOSIS Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Not Illuminated (OFF): 1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten pressure cap and return vehicle to customer. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Reservoir: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON > Page 2822 Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Illuminated (ON): 1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten pressure cap, verify that the warning lamp turns off after key cycle and return to customer. 2. If the coolant level is verified to be at the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), disconnect the coolant level sensor and verify that the warning lamp turns off. If the lamp does turn off then replace the degas bottle. If the lamp remains on with the sensor disconnected then perform diagnostics on the circuit beyond degas bottle/low coolant sensor. NOTE IT TAKES APPROXIMATELY 25 SECONDS FOR THE LOW COOLANT LAMP TO TURN OFF AFTER THE SENSOR CIRCUIT IS OPENED. (EXAMPLE: WHEN ADDING COOLANT TO A LOW BOTTLE WITH LAMP ON.) NOTE DO NOT REPLACE THE DEGAS BOTTLE UNLESS DIRECTED BY DIAGNOSTICS IN STEP 2. Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 03-08-5 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Reservoir: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON Coolant Reservoir: All Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON Article No. 03-25-2 12/22/03 ENGINE - COOLING SYSTEM - LOW COOLANT WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED COOLANT DEGAS BOTTLE INSPECTION - SERVICE TIP FORD: 2001-2003 ESCAPE This article supersedes TSB 03-08-5 to update the vehicle model years and service procedure. ISSUE Some 2001-2003 Escape 3.0L vehicles may exhibit a low coolant warning indicator lamp illuminated. This may be caused by a low coolant level, even if it appears there is significant coolant in the degas bottle. Analysis of coolant degas bottles indicate that bottle replacement may not be necessary. Adjusting the coolant to the proper level may be all that is required to correct the condition. ACTION The following Service Procedure provides tips to help in veritying proper coolant levels. Additional diagnostic and service information can be found in the appropriate Workshop Manual Section 303-03. SERVICE PROCEDURE PROPER INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF COOLANT LEVEL IN THE DEGAS BOTTLE There are four (4) different cells within the Escape degas bottle. The front cells of the degas bottle are not a good visual indicator of proper coolant level, as these cells will always give the appearance of being full (Figure 1). The actual COLD FILL RANGE is the larger cell with the fill cap, just below the seam. It can be difficult to see if not properly examined. If the vehicle is HOT when inspecting, the coolant level should be at the bottle seam (minimum) or above the seam by 1/2 inch, well above the LOW mark. When hot, if the coolant level is not at least to the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), there is a possibility of illuminating the low coolant lamp when the vehicle cools down and the coolant is drawn back into the engine cooling system. DIAGNOSIS Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Not Illuminated (OFF): 1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten pressure cap and return vehicle to customer. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Reservoir: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON > Page 2828 Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Illuminated (ON): 1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten pressure cap, verify that the warning lamp turns off after key cycle and return to customer. 2. If the coolant level is verified to be at the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), disconnect the coolant level sensor and verify that the warning lamp turns off. If the lamp does turn off then replace the degas bottle. If the lamp remains on with the sensor disconnected then perform diagnostics on the circuit beyond degas bottle/low coolant sensor. NOTE IT TAKES APPROXIMATELY 25 SECONDS FOR THE LOW COOLANT LAMP TO TURN OFF AFTER THE SENSOR CIRCUIT IS OPENED. (EXAMPLE: WHEN ADDING COOLANT TO A LOW BOTTLE WITH LAMP ON.) NOTE DO NOT REPLACE THE DEGAS BOTTLE UNLESS DIRECTED BY DIAGNOSTICS IN STEP 2. Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 03-08-5 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2829 Coolant Reservoir: Specifications Degas Bottle Nuts ................................................................................................................................ ................................................... 6 Nm (53 inch lbs.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2830 Coolant Reservoir: Service and Repair Degas Bottle Removal and Installation 1. Drain the engine cooling system. 2. Remove the degas bottle. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor 1 > Page 2836 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan Low Relay Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan Low Relay > Page 2841 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan Low Relay > Page 2842 Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan Low Relay > Page 2843 Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 2846 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 2847 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 2848 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Diagrams Medium Speed Fan Control Relay Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2849 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2850 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Resistor > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Fan Clutch > Component Information > Tools and Equipment Fan Clutch: Tools and Equipment Fan Clutch Holding Tool AST tool# 8005 Allows the technician to hold the water pump pulleuy in place while loosening the radiator fan. 2009 Suggested user price: $41.20 Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1 800 525 2943 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Hydraulic Cooling Fan Solenoid Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation Hydraulic Cooling Fan Solenoid Valve: Description and Operation HYDRAULIC COOLING FAN DRIVE Hydraulic Cooling Fan Pump With Integral Solenoid The system consists of an engine-driven pump with an integral solenoid (Figure 50) on the pump that is triggered by the powertrain control module (PCM). Fan speed is controlled by adjusting current to the solenoid, which then changes the fluid flow to the hydraulic motor. More current means the solenoid opens up, allowing higher pressure to increase the fan speed. The fan always turns due to solenoid current leakage, even in cold engine cases. The motor is driven by the pump. It contains a shaft on which the fan mounts. The motor also contains quick connect fittings for the high pressure lines. The cooler is similar to the power steering cooler (same purpose and function, to keep the fluid cool). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2864 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE SENSOR Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor The Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor (Figure 26) is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and increases as temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM would then initiate a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy details. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor > Page 2870 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor (Figure 27) is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The sensor is threaded into an engine coolant passage. The ECT sensor is similar in construction to the IAT sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2871 Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. Remove the generator. 2. Disconnect the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the CHT sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage Heater Core: Customer Interest A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage TSB 06-21-19 10/30/06 HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY) FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250 Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004 F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure. ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have occurred. ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant: a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely due to due to high flow rate - replace the Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 2880 heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference Workshop Manual, Section 412. b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis. Testing For Electrolysis Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system. Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible. 1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable. a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle. b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant. NOTE POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING. c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect battery cables and proceed to Step 2. d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly. e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V. f. Reconnect battery cables. g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant. 2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions. a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine. b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK. d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections. e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper wire to ground. f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test. g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V. h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped. 3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds. a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. b. Crank engine but do not start. c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter. e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm. f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell phone, etc. g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 2881 h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair ground to the accessory just identified. j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts. l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4. m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower motor and any fan motors. n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it up then retest. o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck. NOTE If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor voltage when they are on and when off. CAUTION DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE GROUND PATH. 4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03. NOTE IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18476 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage Heater Core: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage TSB 06-21-19 10/30/06 HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY) FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250 Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004 F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure. ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have occurred. ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant: a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely due to due to high flow rate - replace the Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 2887 heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference Workshop Manual, Section 412. b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis. Testing For Electrolysis Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system. Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible. 1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable. a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle. b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant. NOTE POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING. c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect battery cables and proceed to Step 2. d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly. e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V. f. Reconnect battery cables. g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant. 2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions. a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine. b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK. d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections. e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper wire to ground. f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test. g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V. h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped. 3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds. a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. b. Crank engine but do not start. c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter. e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm. f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell phone, etc. g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 2888 h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair ground to the accessory just identified. j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts. l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4. m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower motor and any fan motors. n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it up then retest. o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck. NOTE If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor voltage when they are on and when off. CAUTION DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE GROUND PATH. 4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03. NOTE IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18476 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Heater Core: Technician Safety Information WARNING: ^ CARBON MONOXIDE IS COLORLESS, ODORLESS AND DANGEROUS. IF IT IS NECESSARY TO OPERATE THE ENGINE WITH THE VEHICLE IN A CLOSED AREA SUCH AS A GARAGE, ALWAYS USE AN EXHAUST COLLECTOR TO VENT THE EXHAUST GASES OUTSIDE THE CLOSED AREA. ^ THE HEATER CORE INLET HOSE WILL BECOME TOO HOT TO HANDLE IF THE SYSTEM IS WORKING CORRECTLY. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 2891 Heater Core: Vehicle Damage Warnings CAUTION: Spring-type clamps are installed as original equipment. Installation and overtightening of non-specification clamps can cause leakage at the heater water hose connection and damage the heater core. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 2892 Heater Core: Description and Operation Heater Core The heater core consists of fins and tubes arranged to extract heat from the engine coolant and transfer the heat to air passing through the heater core housing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 2893 Heater Core: Testing and Inspection WARNING: CARBON MONOXIDE GAS IS COLORLESS, ODORLESS AND DANGEROUS. IF IT IS NECESSARY TO OPERATE THE ENGINE WITH THE VEHICLE IN A CLOSED AREA SUCH AS A GARAGE, ALWAYS USE AN EXHAUST COLLECTOR TO VENT THE EXHAUST GASES OUTSIDE THE CLOSED AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 1. Inspect for evidence of coolant leakage at the heater water hose to heater core attachments. A coolant leak in the heater water hose could follow the heater core tube to the heater core and appear as a leak in the heater core. CAUTION: Spring-type clamps are installed as original equipment. Installation and overtightening of non-specification clamps can cause leakage at the heater water hose connection and damage the heater core. NOTE: Testing of returned heater cores reveals that a large percentage of heater cores are good and did not require installation of a new heater core. If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be tested by following the Plugged Heater Core Component Test before the Heater Core Pressure Test. Carry out a system inspection by checking the heater system thoroughly. 2. Check the integrity of the heater water hose clamps. Heater Core - Plugged WARNING: THE HEATER CORE INLET HOSE WILL BECOME TOO HOT TO HANDLE IF THE SYSTEM IS WORKING CORRECTLY. 1. Check to see that the engine coolant is at the correct level. 2. Start the engine and turn on the heater 3. When the engine coolant reaches operating temperature, feel the heater core outlet hose to see if it is hot. If it is not hot: ^ the heater core may have an air pocket. ^ the heater core may be plugged, or ^ the thermostat is not working correctly. Heater Core - Pressure Test Use the radiator/heater core pressure tester to carry out the pressure test. 1. Drain the coolant from the cooling system. NOTE: Due to space limitations, a bench test may be necessary for pressure testing. 2. Disconnect the heater water hoses from the heater core. 3. Install a short piece of heater water hose, approximately 101 mm (4 inches) long on each heater core tube. 4. Fill the heater core and heater water hoses with water and install plug BT-7422-B and adapter BT-7422-A from the radiator/heater core pressure tester in the heater water hose ends. Secure the heater water hoses, plug and adapter with hose clamps. 5. Attach the pump and gauge assembly from the radiator/heater core pressure tester to the adapter. 6. Close the bleed valve at the base of the gauge. Pump 241 kPa (35 psi) of air pressure into the heater core. 7. Observe the pressure gauge for a minimum of three minutes. 8. If the pressure drops, check the heater water hose connections to the core tubes for leaks. If the heater water hoses do not leak, remove the heater core from the vehicle and carry out the bench test. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 2894 Heater Core - Bench Test 1. Remove the heater core from the vehicle. 2. Drain all of the coolant from the heater core. 3. Connect the 101 mm (4 inch) test heater water hoses with plug and adapter to the core tubes. Then connect the radiator/heater core pressure tester to the adapter. 4. Apply 241 kPa (35 psi) of air pressure to the heater core. Submerge the heater core in water. 5. If a leak is observed, install a new heater core. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 2895 Heater Core: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Drain the engine coolant. NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be leak tested before the heater core is removed. 2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core. 3. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to: Body and Frame, Interior Trim, Dashboard/Instrument Panel, Service and Repair, Removal and Installation, See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation 4. Remove the heater blending door levers. 1 Remove the screw for heater blending door. 2 Remove the levers for the blending door. 5. Remove the heater core. 1 Remove the three screws. 2 Remove the cover for the heater core and pull the heater core out of the housing. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. NOTE: Before installing the temperature control cable, make sure the blend door, cable and temperature switch are correctly positioned. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Specifications Radiator: Specifications Radiator Pressure Test 20 psi Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2899 Radiator: Service and Repair Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. Drain the engine cooling system. 2. Remove the lower splash shields. Vehicles with 2.0L Zetec engines 3. Disconnect the lower radiator hose and the degas return hose. Vehicles with 3.0L (4V) engines 4. Disconnect the lower radiator hose and the high pressure transmission line. All vehicles 5. Lower the vehicle. Vehicles with 2.0L Zetec engines Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2900 6. Disconnect the remaining coolant hose connections. Vehicles with 3.0L (4V) engines 7. Disconnect the transmission return line. 8. Disconnect the upper radiator hose and degas supply hose. All vehicles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2901 9. Position the hood latch assemble out of the way. 10. Remove the two bolts and the center support. 11. Remove the two top bolts retaining the cooling fan to the radiator. 12. Remove the upper radiator support brackets, and remove the radiator from the vehicle. 13. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cap > Component Information > Specifications Radiator Cap: Specifications Radiator Cap Pressure 16 psi +2 psi -3 psi Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan Low Relay Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan Low Relay > Page 2910 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan Low Relay > Page 2911 Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan Low Relay > Page 2912 Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 2915 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 2916 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 2917 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Diagrams Medium Speed Fan Control Relay Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2918 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2919 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Coolant Level Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Level Sensor: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON Coolant Level Sensor: Customer Interest Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON Article No. 03-25-2 12/22/03 ENGINE - COOLING SYSTEM - LOW COOLANT WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED COOLANT DEGAS BOTTLE INSPECTION - SERVICE TIP FORD: 2001-2003 ESCAPE This article supersedes TSB 03-08-5 to update the vehicle model years and service procedure. ISSUE Some 2001-2003 Escape 3.0L vehicles may exhibit a low coolant warning indicator lamp illuminated. This may be caused by a low coolant level, even if it appears there is significant coolant in the degas bottle. Analysis of coolant degas bottles indicate that bottle replacement may not be necessary. Adjusting the coolant to the proper level may be all that is required to correct the condition. ACTION The following Service Procedure provides tips to help in veritying proper coolant levels. Additional diagnostic and service information can be found in the appropriate Workshop Manual Section 303-03. SERVICE PROCEDURE PROPER INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF COOLANT LEVEL IN THE DEGAS BOTTLE There are four (4) different cells within the Escape degas bottle. The front cells of the degas bottle are not a good visual indicator of proper coolant level, as these cells will always give the appearance of being full (Figure 1). The actual COLD FILL RANGE is the larger cell with the fill cap, just below the seam. It can be difficult to see if not properly examined. If the vehicle is HOT when inspecting, the coolant level should be at the bottle seam (minimum) or above the seam by 1/2 inch, well above the LOW mark. When hot, if the coolant level is not at least to the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), there is a possibility of illuminating the low coolant lamp when the vehicle cools down and the coolant is drawn back into the engine cooling system. DIAGNOSIS Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Not Illuminated (OFF): 1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten pressure cap and return vehicle to customer. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Coolant Level Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Level Sensor: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON > Page 2929 Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Illuminated (ON): 1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten pressure cap, verify that the warning lamp turns off after key cycle and return to customer. 2. If the coolant level is verified to be at the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), disconnect the coolant level sensor and verify that the warning lamp turns off. If the lamp does turn off then replace the degas bottle. If the lamp remains on with the sensor disconnected then perform diagnostics on the circuit beyond degas bottle/low coolant sensor. NOTE IT TAKES APPROXIMATELY 25 SECONDS FOR THE LOW COOLANT LAMP TO TURN OFF AFTER THE SENSOR CIRCUIT IS OPENED. (EXAMPLE: WHEN ADDING COOLANT TO A LOW BOTTLE WITH LAMP ON.) NOTE DO NOT REPLACE THE DEGAS BOTTLE UNLESS DIRECTED BY DIAGNOSTICS IN STEP 2. Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 03-08-5 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Coolant Level Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Level Sensor: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON Coolant Level Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON Article No. 03-25-2 12/22/03 ENGINE - COOLING SYSTEM - LOW COOLANT WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED COOLANT DEGAS BOTTLE INSPECTION - SERVICE TIP FORD: 2001-2003 ESCAPE This article supersedes TSB 03-08-5 to update the vehicle model years and service procedure. ISSUE Some 2001-2003 Escape 3.0L vehicles may exhibit a low coolant warning indicator lamp illuminated. This may be caused by a low coolant level, even if it appears there is significant coolant in the degas bottle. Analysis of coolant degas bottles indicate that bottle replacement may not be necessary. Adjusting the coolant to the proper level may be all that is required to correct the condition. ACTION The following Service Procedure provides tips to help in veritying proper coolant levels. Additional diagnostic and service information can be found in the appropriate Workshop Manual Section 303-03. SERVICE PROCEDURE PROPER INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF COOLANT LEVEL IN THE DEGAS BOTTLE There are four (4) different cells within the Escape degas bottle. The front cells of the degas bottle are not a good visual indicator of proper coolant level, as these cells will always give the appearance of being full (Figure 1). The actual COLD FILL RANGE is the larger cell with the fill cap, just below the seam. It can be difficult to see if not properly examined. If the vehicle is HOT when inspecting, the coolant level should be at the bottle seam (minimum) or above the seam by 1/2 inch, well above the LOW mark. When hot, if the coolant level is not at least to the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), there is a possibility of illuminating the low coolant lamp when the vehicle cools down and the coolant is drawn back into the engine cooling system. DIAGNOSIS Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Not Illuminated (OFF): 1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten pressure cap and return vehicle to customer. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Coolant Level Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Level Sensor: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON > Page 2935 Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Illuminated (ON): 1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten pressure cap, verify that the warning lamp turns off after key cycle and return to customer. 2. If the coolant level is verified to be at the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), disconnect the coolant level sensor and verify that the warning lamp turns off. If the lamp does turn off then replace the degas bottle. If the lamp remains on with the sensor disconnected then perform diagnostics on the circuit beyond degas bottle/low coolant sensor. NOTE IT TAKES APPROXIMATELY 25 SECONDS FOR THE LOW COOLANT LAMP TO TURN OFF AFTER THE SENSOR CIRCUIT IS OPENED. (EXAMPLE: WHEN ADDING COOLANT TO A LOW BOTTLE WITH LAMP ON.) NOTE DO NOT REPLACE THE DEGAS BOTTLE UNLESS DIRECTED BY DIAGNOSTICS IN STEP 2. Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 03-08-5 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Coolant Level Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2936 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2941 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE SENSOR Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor The Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor (Figure 26) is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and increases as temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM would then initiate a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy details. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor > Page 2947 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor (Figure 27) is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The sensor is threaded into an engine coolant passage. The ECT sensor is similar in construction to the IAT sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2948 Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. Remove the generator. 2. Disconnect the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the CHT sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications Thermostat: Specifications Thermostat Starts To Open 194 - 201 F Fully Open 223 F Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2952 Thermostat: Description and Operation THERMOSTAT HEATER CONTROL Thermostat Assembly With Heater Control The primary objective for the thermostat heater control is for improvement in fuel economy and thermal efficiency. The system consists of a high temperature (98°C/208°F in lieu of a 90°C/194°F) thermostat (Figure 51)that has a resistive heater within the wax element. The heater is controlled by the PCM dependent on engine speed, throttle position, engine load, vehicle speed, air charge temperature, transmission oil temperature and engine coolant temperature. During low speed, low load and low air charge temperature conditions, the thermostat heater is OFF and the engine is allowed to operate at an elevated coolant temperature. This should result in lower internal friction and higher thermal efficiency, both leading to improved fuel economy. During high speed, high load, high temperature conditions (air charge, transmission oil or engine coolant), the PCM output is energized with a duty cycle to the thermostat heater. This heats the wax and forces the thermostat to rapidly open wider allowing extra coolant to flow from the radiator. This will reduce the coolant temperature and improve with performance demand. It should be noted that the heater is only capable of supplying a SMALL amount of additional heat to the wax element; it is NOT capable of opening the thermostat alone. The thermostat is 100% duty cycle for short calibrated time and than the duty cycle is reduce to a maximum of 70% on and 30% off. Approximately, unheated, the thermostat will begin to open at a coolant temperature of 98°C (208°F) and will be fully open at 115°C (239°F). Energizing the heater will reduce the opening temperature to about 80°C (176°F) and the fully open temperature to 110°C (230°F). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2953 Thermostat: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Remove the three bolts and separate the water outlet adapter from the thermostat housing. 3. NOTE: The thermostat is indexed and must be installed correctly. Remove the thermostat and the 0-ring seal. 4. NOTE: Clean and inspect the sealing surfaces. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Housing, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications Thermostat Housing: Specifications Thermostat Housing Bolts and Studs 89 in.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Housing, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2957 Thermostat Housing: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. Remove the thermostat. 2. Remove the thermostat housing. 3. NOTE: Clean and inspect the sealing surfaces. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Water Pump Water Pump: Specifications Water Pump Bolts 89 in.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Water Pump > Page 2962 Water Pump: Specifications Water Pump Pulley 89 in.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2963 Water Pump: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. Drain the engine cooling system. 2. Remove the right front tire assembly. 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Remove the accessory drive belt. 5. Remove the water pump pulley. 6. Remove the four bolts and the water pump. 7. NOTE: Clean and inspect the sealing surfaces. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis Technical Service Bulletin # 01-9-7 Date: 010514 Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis Article No. 01-9-7 05/14/01 DRIVEABILITY - H025 (HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR), CATALYST, AND FUEL SYSTEM MONITORS - SERVICE TIPS - OBD II VEHICLES ONLY FORD: 1994-1997 THUNDERBIRD 1994-2001 MUSTANG 1995-2001 CROWN VICTORIA 1996-1997 PROBE 1996-2000 CONTOUR 1996-2001 ESCORT, TAURUS 2000-2001 FOCUS 1994-1997 F SUPER DUTY, F-250 HD, F-350 1995-2001 ECONOLINE, RANGER, WINDSTAR 1996 BRONCO 1996-1997 AEROSTAR 1996-2001 EXPLORER 1997-2001 EXPEDITION, F-150, F-250 LD 1999-2001 SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2001 EXCURSION 2001 ESCAPE LINCOLN: 1995-2001 CONTINENTAL, TOWN CAR 1996-1998 MARK VIII 2000-2001 LS 1998-2001 NAVIGATOR MERCURY: 1994-1997 COUGAR 1995-2001 GRAND MARQUIS 1996-1999 TRACER 1996-2000 MYSTIQUE 1996-2001 SABLE 1999-2001 COUGAR 1997-2001 MOUNTAINEER ISSUE This article is intended to be an aide in diagnosing conditions related to Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S), Catalyst, and Fuel System Monitor related Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Additional information is included to assist in diagnosing certain vehicle symptoms. This article is NOT intended to be a shortcut to the Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) Workshop Manual pinpoint tests. The pinpoint tests in the PC/ED Manual should ALWAYS be followed when diagnosing vehicle conditions. ACTION Use the following information and Service Tips to assist in the diagnosis of H025, Catalyst, and Fuel System Monitor related DTCs. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 98-23-10 WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 623000, 690000, 698298 Information ^ A. Description of Terms and Acronyms ^ B. HO2S Location Diagrams ^ C. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 2969 ^ C1. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Information ^ C2. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) ^ D. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor ^ D1. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Information ^ D2. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) ^ E. Fuel System Monitor ^ E1. Fuel System Monitor - Information ^ E2. Fuel System Monitor Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) ^ F. Diagnostic Service Tips ^ F1. Tips - General ^ F2. Tips Related to Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor ^ F3. Tips Related to Catalyst Monitor ^ F4. Tips Related to Fuel System Monitor A. Description of Terms and Acronyms ^ CHT - Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor or PID ^ CKP - Crankshaft Position Sensor or PID ^ DTC - Diagnostic Trouble Code ^ ECT - Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor or PID ^ EGR - Exhaust Gas Recirculation ^ EEC - Electronic Engine Control ^ EVR - EGR Vacuum Regulator ^ FMEM - Failure Mode Effects Management ^ GND - Ground ^ HC - Hydrocarbons ^ HO2S - Heated Oxygen Sensor or PID ^ IAT - Inlet Air Temperature Sensor or PID ^ KAM - Keep Alive Memory ^ KOEO - Key On Engine Off ^ KOER - Key On Engine Running ^ LONGFT - Long Term Fuel Trim ^ MAF - Mass Air Flow Sensor or PID ^ MIL - Malfunction Indicator Lamp ("Check Engine") ^ NGS - New Generation Star Tester (Scan Tool) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 2970 ^ OBD II - On-Board Diagnostics II ^ OSM - Output State Monitor ^ PC/ED - Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis ^ PCM - Powertrain Control Module ^ PCV - Positive Crankcase Ventilation ^ PID - Parameter Identification Display ^ RAM - Random Access Memory ^ RPM - Revolutions Per Minute ^ SHRTFT - Short Term Fuel Trim ^ Stoichiometric - 14.7:1 Air/Fuel Ratio (Gasoline Engines) ^ TP - Throttle Position Sensor or PID ^ VMV - Vapor Management Valve ^ VPWR - Vehicle Power (Battery Voltage) ^ VREF - Vehicle Reference Voltage (5 volts) B. HO2S Location Diagrams Refer to Figure 1 to better understand the H025 sensor names and locations. Regardless of how the engine is mounted in the vehicle, conventional or transverse, the HO2S naming convention stays the same in relationship to engine banks 1 and 2. Bank 1 will always be the bank containing the # 1 cylinder. C. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor C1.) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 2971 The H025 Monitor is an on-board strategy designed to monitor the HO2S sensors for a malfunction or deterioration that can affect emissions. Under specific conditions, the fuel control or upstream HO2S sensors (Figures 1 and 3) are checked for proper output voltage and response rate (the time it takes to switch from lean to rich or rich to lean). Downstream HO2S sensors (Figures 1 and 3) used for Catalyst Monitor are also monitored for proper output voltage. Input is required from the ECT or CHT, IAT, MAF, TP and CKP sensors to activate the H025 Monitor. The Fuel System Monitor and Misfire Detection Monitor must also have completed successfully before the HO2S Monitor is enabled. The HO2S sensor senses the oxygen content in the exhaust flow and outputs a voltage between zero and 1.0 volt. Lean of stoichiometric (air/fuel ratio of approximately 14.7:1 for gasoline engines), the HO2S will generate a voltage between zero and 0.45 volt. Rich of stoichiometric, the HO2S will generate a voltage between 0.45 and 1.0 volt. ^ The HO2S Monitor evaluates both the upstream (Fuel Control) and downstream (Catalyst Monitor) HO2S for proper function. ^ Once the HO2S Monitor is enabled, the upstream H025 signal voltage amplitude and response frequency are checked. Excessive voltage is determined by comparing the HO2S signal voltage to a maximum calibratable threshold voltage. ^ A fixed frequency closed loop fuel control routine is executed and the upstream HO2S voltage amplitude and output response frequency are observed. A sample of the upstream HO2S signal is evaluated to determine if the sensor is capable of switching or has a slow response rate. ^ An HO2S heater circuit fault is determined by turning the heater on and off and looking for a corresponding change in the OSM and by measuring the current going through the heater circuit. ^ The MIL is activated after a fault is detected on two consecutive OBD II drive cycles. The HO2S Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows: ^ HO2S signal circuit malfunction - P0131, P0136, P0151, P0156 ^ HO2S slow response rate - P0133, P0153 ^ HO2S heater circuit malfunction - P0135, P0141, P0155, P0161 ^ Downstream HO2S not running in on-demand self test - P1127 ^ Swapped H025 connectors - P1128 and P1129 ^ H025 lack of switching - P1130, P1131, P1132, P1150, P1151, P1152 ^ HO2S lack of switching (sensor indicates lean) - P1137 ^ H025 lack of switching (sensor indicates rich) - P1138 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 2972 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 2973 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 2974 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 2975 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 2976 C2.) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes D. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor D1.) Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Information The Federal Test Procedure Catalyst Monitor monitors for deterioration in the catalyst system and illuminates the MIL when tailpipe emissions exceed the appropriate HC emission thresholds. The Catalyst Monitor is enabled after the upstream and downstream HO2S sensors have been tested and verified to be functional. This monitor relies on the front and rear heated oxygen sensors (HO2S) to infer catalyst efficiency based upon oxygen storage capacity. Under normal closed loop fuel conditions, high efficiency catalysts have oxygen storage which makes the switching frequency of the rear HO2S quite slow compared with the frequency of the front HO2S. As catalyst efficiency deteriorates, its ability to store oxygen declines, and the rear HO2S begins to switch more rapidly, approaching the frequency of the front sensor. In general, as catalyst efficiency decreases, the switch ratio increases from a switch ratio of 0 for a low mileage catalyst to a switch ratio of 0.8 or 0.9 for a low efficiency catalyst. Some vehicles will monitor substantially less than the entire catalyst volume in order to meet the stringent catalyst monitoring malfunction thresholds. In many cases, only the front, light-off catalyst is monitored. Front and rear HO2S switches are counted under specified closed loop fuel conditions. After the required number of front switches are obtained, a rear-to-front HO2S switch ratio is calculated. The switch ratio is compared against a threshold value. If the switch ratio is greater than the calibrated maximum limit, the catalyst has failed. The test entry conditions for the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor are as follows: ECT or CHT (warmed engine), IAT (not at extreme ambient temperatures), MAF (greater than minimum engine load), VSS (within vehicle speed window) and TP (at part throttle) are required. ^ Because an exponentially weighted moving average is used for malfunction determination, up to six OBD II drive cycles may be required to illuminate the MIL. NOTE THE CATALYST MONITOR ON SOME EARLY OBD II VEHICLES (SOME 1994-1996 VEHICLES) WAS REFERRED TO AS THE "STEADY-STATE CATALYST MONITOR" AS OPPOSED TO THE "FTP CATALYST MONITOR" (DESCRIBED ABOVE) THAT IS MOST COMMON FOR VEHICLES BUILT AFTER 1996. BELOW IS A BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE STEADY-STATE CATALYST MONITOR: The Steady-State Catalyst Monitor performs a 20 second test during steady state rpm and load conditions. The Monitor transfers closed loop fuel control from the front to the rear 02 sensors. The Monitor then observes the switching frequency and compares it to a threshold frequency stored in an rpm/load table. A frequency higher than the maximum calibrated threshold indicates a malfunction. The Catalyst Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 2977 ^ Catalyst system efficiency below threshold (Bank 1) - P0420 ^ Catalyst system efficiency below threshold (Bank 2) - P0430 D2.) Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes E. Fuel System Monitor E1.) Fuel System Monitor - Information The Fuel System Monitor is an on-board strategy designed to monitor the fuel trim system. The fuel control system uses fuel trim tables stored in the PCM's KAM to compensate for variability in fuel system components due to normal wear and aging. Fuel trim tables are based on vehicle speed and engine load. During closed loop vehicle operation, the fuel trim strategy learns the corrections needed to correct a "biased" rich or lean fuel system. The correction is stored in the fuel trim tables. The fuel trim has two means of adapting; a LONGFT and a SHRTFT. LONGFT relies on the fuel trim tables and SHRTFT refers to the desired air/fuel ratio parameter "LAMBSE". LAMBSE is calculated by the PCM from HO2S inputs and helps maintain a 14.7:1 air/fuel ratio during closed loop operation. SHRTFT and LONGFT work together. If the HO2S indicates the engine is running rich, the PCM will correct the rich condition by moving SHRTFT in the negative range (less fuel to correct for a rich combustion). If after a certain amount of time SHRTFT is still compensating for a rich condition, the PCM "learns" this and moves LONGFT into the negative range to compensate and allows SHRTFT to return to a value near 0%. Input from the ECT or CHT, IAT, and MAF sensors is required to activate the fuel trim system, which in turn activates the Fuel System Monitor. Once activated, the Fuel System Monitor looks for the fuel trim tables to reach the adaptive clip (adaptive limit) and LAMBSE to exceed a calibrated limit. The Fuel System Monitor will store the appropriate DTC when a fault is detected as described below. ^ The H025 detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and provides the PCM with feedback indicating a rich or lean condition. ^ A correction factor is added to the fuel injector pulsewidth calculation according to the Long and Short Term Fuel Trims as needed to compensate for variations in the fuel system. ^ When deviation in the parameter LAMBSE increases, air/fuel control suffers and emissions increase. When LAMBSE exceeds a calibrated limit and the fuel trim table has clipped (reached adaptive limit), the Fuel System Monitor sets a DTC. ^ The MIL is activated after a fault is detected on two consecutive OBD II drive cycles. The Fuel System Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows: ^ Fuel Delivery Error - P0148 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 2978 ^ Lean shift in fuel system operation - P0171 (Bank 1) and P0174 (Bank 2) ^ Rich shift in fuel system operation - P0172 (Bank 1) and P0175 (Bank 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 2979 E2.) Fuel System Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes F. Diagnostic Service Tips 1. Always reset KAM after performing a repair: After performing a repair on a vehicle with the MIL on, and/or DTCs present, always clear KAM. When a malfunction is present, the PCM adapts (attempts to correct) for this condition. Once the vehicle has been repaired, if the KAM is not reset, the PCM will once again have to adapt back to the normal operating conditions. Clearing the KAM will erase what the PCM has learned, so the PCM will be able to start with "base tables". 2. Always view and record Freeze Frame Data: Freeze Frame Data can be a valuable asset in duplicating and diagnosing concerns. This data (a snapshot of certain PID values, recorded at the time the MIL was activated) indicates the manner in which the vehicle was being driven at the time the fault occurred. This can be especially useful on intermittent concerns. Freeze Frame Data, in some cases, can also help to isolate possible areas of concern, as well as ruling out others. Always record (write down) the Freeze Frame Data. 3. Multiple DTCs (with the same meaning): When multiple (paired) DTCs with the same meaning are set for multiple sensors, it is unlikely that replacing both HO2S sensors will resolve the concern. In most cases, there will be another issue that is causing the codes. Examples of multiple (paired) DTCs: (P0135/P0155), (P0141/P0161), (P1131/P1151), (P1132/P1152). To further clarify this, see the more detailed scenario as follows: A vehicle comes in with a MIL On concern. KOEO self test reveals DTCs P0135 and P0155 (HTR-11 and HTR-21 circuit malfunction), with no other DTCs present. The most likely cause of these DTCs would be something in the heater power circuit that both of these HO2S sensors have in common (Example: open or shorted heater circuit wiring or splice). It is highly unlikely that multiple sensors would fail at the same time. When multiple DTCs of this nature are encountered, reviewing the appropriate wiring diagram(s) can help to isolate possible areas of concern. When reviewing the wiring diagram, look for things that the affected sensors have in common. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 2980 In this example, the most likely cause of DTCs P0135 and P0155 (with no other DTCs present) would be a concern with Splice "B" (refer to Figure 2). NOTE THIS ILLUSTRATION IS ONLY AN EXAMPLE. SPLICE NAMES "A", "B", AND "C" ARE USED IN THIS EXAMPLE FOR CONVENIENCE ONLY. ON AN ACTUAL VEHICLE, SPLICE NAMES WILL DEPEND ON THE CIRCUIT NUMBER FOR THE VEHICLE UNDER REPAIR. NOTE ALSO THAT THIS FIGURE IS NOT INTENDED TO SHOW ALL SPLICES/CONNECTIONS ON ALL VEHICLES. OTHER EEC CIRCUITS, NOT SHOWN, MAY ALSO BE SPLICED IN WITH THE CIRCUITS SHOWN. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 2981 4. View H025 PID data carefully: NGS PIDs for HO2S sensors that do not exist (with certain exhaust configurations) will show a value of "0" volts (refer to Figures 3 and 4). In this example, the vehicle (equipped with a 4-cylinder engine) has one upstream and one downstream HO2S. Notice that the NGS (scan tool) display shows two upstream and two downstream HO2S PIDs, and that the "unused" HO2S sensor PIDs display "0" volts. 5. H025 sensors measure oxygen in the exhaust, not fuel: The exhaust gas condition reported by the HO2S sensor is based on the presence of oxygen in the exhaust, not the presence of unburned fuel. Example: In the event of an ignition-related misfire, you might expect a rich HO2S reading, due to the amount of unburned fuel in the exhaust system. However, there is also a large amount of unburned oxygen, since no combustion took place in the misfiring cylinder. Since the H025 senses oxygen only, it would report a lean condition in this particular situation. F2.) Tips Related to Heated Oxygen Sensor (H025) Monitor 1. OBD II Response Rate Monitor: The OBD II Response Rate Monitor (P0133/P0153) is only run at vehicle speeds between approximately 50-95 km/h (30-60 mph), during steady-state conditions. The test lasts approximately 6 seconds. Therefore, P0133/P0153 cannot be diagnosed at idle in the repair bay. 2. Do not compare H025 switch rate - Bank-to-Bank or vehicle-to-vehicle: Different H025 switch rates, from Bank-to-Bank, are considered normal. The H025 switch rate, from one Bank to the other, should not be compared as a gauge of the H025's ability to switch/react. The PCM is continuously adjusting spark and fuel in reaction to engine operating conditions (rpm, load, air flow, throttle angle, etc.). The PCM is also continuously adapting to certain conditions (customer driving habits, engine and component wear, etc.). F3.) Tips Related to Catalyst Efficiency Monitor 1. Determining catalyst efficiency/switch ratio: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 2982 The upstream H025 sensors will have a high switch frequency, due to normal closed loop fuel control. With an efficient catalyst, the downstream H025 will have a low switch frequency. The switch ratio is determined by dividing the number of downstream switches by the number of upstream switches over a given period of time. As the catalyst ages (or if the catalyst is damaged or contaminated), the downstream switches will increase. When the downstream switch rate crosses a threshold value (approximately 0.75 switch ratio), a code is stored (P0420 and/or P0430) and the MIL illuminates (refer to Figures 5 and 6). NOTE IF A CATALYST IS DETERMINED TO HAVE LOW EFFICIENCY AND REQUIRES REPLACEMENT, REPLACEMENT OF THE DOWNSTREAM H025 SENSORS WILL NOT BE NECESSARY. 2. Use care in handling H025 sensors: In the event of catalyst replacement, use care in the handling of H025 sensors to prevent damage or contamination. Do not use power tools in the removal or installation of sensors. Use a 22mm wrench or crow foot to remove and install H025 sensors; do not use slotted sockets, as these sockets may damage wires. H025 sensors should be torqued to 41 +/- 5 N.m (30 +/- 4 lb-ft). 3. Do not replace downstream HO2S sensors (H02S12/H02S22) for DTCs P0420 and/or P0430: When diagnosing a vehicle with a customer concern of MIL On and DTCs P0420/P0430 in continuous memory, do not replace the downstream HO2S sensors (H02S12/H02S22). Damaged or malfunctioning downstream HO2S sensors will not cause these DTCs to be set. Always verify the vehicle concern, then perform the pinpoint diagnostics in the appropriate PC/ED Service Manual. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 2983 F4.) Tips Related to the Fuel System Monitor 1. HO2S sensors are not likely to be the cause of adaptive DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175: Most warranty-returned HO2S sensors (replaced for these DTCs) are found to function normally. Additional related DTCs will normally be present if there is a concern with the HO2S sensors. Do not replace an HO2S sensor unless verified through pinpoint diagnostic tests found in the PC/ED Service Manual. 2. DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174, and P0175 are not related to downstream H028 sensors: When diagnosing a vehicle with a MIL On and DTC(s) P0171, P0172, P0174, and/or P0175 in continuous memory, do not replace the downstream HO2S sensors. These DTCs have no connection to the downstream HO2S sensor function nor its diagnosis for faults. Always verify the vehicle concern, then perform the pinpoint diagnostics from the appropriate PC/ED Service Manual. 3. Diagnosing lean conditions and lean DTCs P0171, P0174: Freeze Frame Data can often help to identify the type of lean condition, even if the fault is intermittent, by indicating how the vehicle was being driven when the fault occurred. Diagnosis of lean conditions and lean adaptive DTCs can be difficult, especially if the concern is intermittent. Verifying the concern is extremely important. There are different types of lean conditions. The ability to identify the type of lean condition causing the concern can be crucial to a correct diagnosis. When DTCs P0171 and P0174 are both present, there is a strong likelihood of another concern being present: a. Vacuum leaks/unmetered air: In this type of condition, the engine may actually run lean of stoichiometry (14.7:1 air/fuel ratio) if the PCM is not able to compensate enough to correct for the condition. This condition is typically caused by air entering the engine through an abnormal source (opening), or due to a MAF malfunction. In this situation, the volume of air entering the engine is actually greater than what the MAF is indicating to the PCM. Vacuum leaks will normally be most apparent when high manifold vacuum is present, during idle or light throttle. If Freeze Frame Data indicates that the fault occurred at idle, a check for vacuum leaks/unmetered air when the engine is cold might be the best starting point. Examples: Loose, leaking or disconnected vacuum lines, intake manifold gaskets or 0-rings, throttle body gaskets, brake booster, air inlet tube, stuck/frozen/aftermarket PCV valve, unseated engine oil dipstick, MAF reading lower than normal, etc. b. Insufficient fueling: In this type of condition, the engine may actually run lean of stoichiometry (14.7:1 air/fuel ratio) if the PCM is not able to compensate enough to correct for the condition. This condition is typically caused by a fuel delivery system concern that restricts or limits the amount of fuel being delivered to the engine. This condition will normally be most apparent when the engine is under a heavy load, when a higher volume of fuel is required. If Freeze Frame Data indicates that the fault occurred under a heavy load, a check of the fuel delivery system (checking fuel pressure with engine under a load) might be the best starting point. Examples: Low fuel pressure (fuel pump, fuel filter, fuel leaks, restricted fuel supply lines), fuel injector concerns, etc. c. Exhaust system leaks: In this type of condition, the engine may actually be running near stoichiometry (14.7:1 air/fuel ratio), but the exhaust gas mixture will be lean. This condition is caused by oxygen-rich air entering the exhaust system through an external source. This condition will cause the exhaust gas mixture to be lean, even though the actual combustion in the engine may not be. Examples: Exhaust system leaks upstream or near HO2S, malfunctioning Secondary Air Injection system d. MAF concerns: If a MAF concern is suspected, see TSB 98-23-10. 4. Checking fuel pressure: Check fuel pressure with engine under a load when diagnosing a lean concern. A partially plugged fuel filter can be difficult to detect and can be easily overlooked if fuel pressure is only checked at idle. The same is true for other types of fuel supply concerns (e.g., bent or kinked lines, degraded fuel pump). At idle, an engine requires only a small volume of fuel. Due to the fact that there is a small volume of fuel needed at idle, a restriction in the fuel supply line in many cases will not cause the fuel pressure to be low. When the vehicle is under a load, the engine requires much more fuel than at idle. Under a load, a restriction in the fuel supply line will prevent the high rate of fuel flow that is needed to maintain the correct fuel pressure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2984 Catalytic Converter: Specifications Catalytic Converter TWC to Exhaust Manifold Nuts 35 ft.lb TWC Bracket Bolts 18 ft.lb TWC To Resonator Bolts 30 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation Acronyms and Definitions 2V - L ACRONYMS AND DEFINITIONS NOTE: This Acronyms and Definitions listing contains technical terms applicable to Ford Motor Company products. It is not intended to be an all-inclusive dictionary of components and their functions. If a detailed description of a particular system or component is desired, refer to the applicable Vehicle System for the specific vehicle being serviced. 2V: Two Valve engine configuration. 4V: Four Valve engine configuration. ABS: Anti-lock Brake System. A/C: Air Conditioning. A vehicle accessory system that modifies the passenger compartment air by cooling and dehydrating the air. ACC: Air Conditioning Clutch. Indicates status of the A/C clutch. ACCS: Air Conditioning Cycling Switch. Indicates status of the A/C cycling switch. ACD: Air Conditioning Demand. A signal input to the PCM from the Air Conditioning control panel. ACP: Air Conditioning Head Pressure or A/C cycling switch input state. ACPSW: Air Conditioning Pressure Switch. ACPV: Air Conditioning Head Pressure Volts. A voltage input to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) from the ACP switch or sensor. ACR: Air Conditioning Relay. Commanded output controlled by the PCM and acts as an A/C cutout control during heavy acceleration. A/D: Analog-to-Digital. Analog-to-Digital signal conversion. ADC: See ATDC. AFCM: Alternative Fuel Control Module. AIR: Secondary Air Injection. AIRB: Secondary Air Injection Bypass. Air Diverter: Air Diverter Valve. Part of the EAIR system. Diverts fresh air to the exhaust system when the electric air pump is commanded on. AIR EVAL: Air System Evaluated. Displays a YES or NO status indicating whether the Air System has been evaluated for OBD (On-Board Diagnostic) II purposes. Air/Fuel Ratio: Air to fuel mixture ratio. An air/fuel mixture that is 14.7:1 is also called stoichiometry. AIRM: Secondary AIR pump monitor. Ambient Air Temperature: Temperature of the air surrounding an object. Analog (Electrical/Electronic): An electrical signal that can obtain any value within the voltage limits of the signal. ARB: Air Resource Board. ARPMIDES: Ancillary RPM Desired. RPM required to maintain the vehicle speed commanded by Speed Control Command Switch (SCCS) inputs. ASCII: American Standard Code for Information Interchange. ATDC: After Top Dead Center. The location of the piston after it has reached the top of its stroke. Measured in degrees of crankshaft rotation. AVOM: Analog Volt-Ohm Multimeter. Readings are indicated by a sweep hand on a printed scale, rather than a digital display. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 2987 AWD: All-Wheel Drive. BARO: Barometric Pressure. Base Idle: Idle rpm determined by the throttle lever hardset on the throttle body with the IAC solenoid disconnected. Base Timing: Spark advance in degrees before top dead center of the base engine without any control from the PCM or ICM. Battery Positive Voltage (B+): The positive (+) voltage from the battery or any circuit connected directly to the battery. Compare "Vehicle Power (VPWR)." BAT TEMP: Battery Temperature. BJB: Battery Junction Box. BOB: Breakout Box. A test device which connects in series to the PCM and PCM harness. BPA: Brake Pedal Applied switch. Typically located on the braking system master cylinder. Can be hydraulic or electric. BPP: Brake Pedal Position. Indicates the position of the brake pedal, based on input from the Brake Pedal Position (BPP) switch. BRAKE LMP or BRKL: Brake Warning Lamp Status. Activates the Brake Warning Lamp by applying voltage to the control line. BTDC: Before Top Dead Center. The location of the piston before it has reached the top of its stroke. Measured in degrees of crankshaft rotation. Bus + or Bus -: Multiplex circuits that carry Standard Corporate Protocol (SCP) data from module to module and to the DLC. CAC: Charge Air Cooler. Formerly known as Intercooler. A device which lowers the temperature of pressurized intake air. CAFE: Corporate Average Fuel Economy. A set of federal requirements and regulations which govern fuel economy standards. CANVNT: Canister Vent Solenoid. Catalyst: Catalytic converter. An in-line exhaust system device used to reduce the level of engine exhaust emissions. CAT EVAL: Catalyst System Evaluated. This item indicates YES when the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor has successfully completed. CCM: Comprehensive Component Monitor. CCRM: Constant Control Relay Module. A relay module that provides ON-OFF control of various EEC components. CD A through J: Coil Driver 1 through 10. Centralized Testing Facility: State government operation. Provides Inspection/Maintenance (IM) and safety inspections. CGND or CSE GND: Case Ground. Provides a ground source for the PCM or ECU case. CHT: Cylinder Head Temperature. Units are displayed in either degrees Fahrenheit or Centigrade. CHTIL: Cylinder Head Temperature Indicator Lamp. CHTV: Cylinder Head Temperature Voltage. The actual voltage drop across the CHT sensor thermistor. CID: Cylinder Identification. PCM input signal from Camshaft Position Sensor. CKP: Crankshaft Position. Senses the position of the crankshaft. CKP+, CKP-: CKP+ is the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor signal wire. CKP - is the signal return. CL: Closed Loop. An operating condition or mode which enables operation based on sensor feedback. CMP: Camshaft Position. Indicates camshaft position. CMPFM: Camshaft Position Failure Mode. Indicates when the PCM identifies a CID/CMP fault. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 2988 CMS: Catalyst Monitor Sensor. Downstream H025. CMVSS: Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. CNG: Compressed Natural Gas. CO: Carbon Monoxide. A colorless, odorless and toxic gas that is a component of auto exhaust emissions. CO(2): Carbon Dioxide. A colorless, odorless gas that is a normal by-product of the combustion of fuel. Coil: A device consisting of windings around an iron core. In a spark ignition system, designed to increase voltage. Cold Soak: Time given to a vehicle to sit at a low temperature (typically below 68°F / 20°C) until the temperature of external and internal components stabilize. CONT: Continuous Memory. The portion of KAM (Keep Alive Memory) used to store DTCs generated during Continuous Memory Self-Test. Continuous Memory Self- Test: A continuous test of the EEC system conducted by the PCM whenever the vehicle is operating. CPP: Clutch Pedal Position. Indicates clutch pedal position. CPP Switch: Clutch Pedal Position Switch. Located on the clutch pedal and detects when the clutch pedal is depressed. CQIS: Common Quality Indicator System. CSE GND: Case Ground. CT: Closed Throttle Mode. A mode when the PCM varies the pulse width of the fuel injectors to obtain the air/fuel mixture appropriate for closed throttle operation. CTO: Clean Tach Output. Signal used to drive the instrument panel tachometer. Data Communications Link: A communication path between various in-vehicle electronic modules. Accessed by scan tools through the Data Link Connector (DLC). DC: 1. Direct Current. Electric current flowing in one direction. 2. Duty Cycle. The voltage measurement of ON time versus the full cycle period, expressed in percent. DCL: Data Communication Link. DI: Distributor Ignition. A system in which the ignition coil secondary circuit is sequenced by a distributor. Digital: Controls process information by switching the current or voltage ON and OFF. DLC: Data Link Connector. J1962 connector providing access to vehicle diagnostic information. DOHC: Dual Overhead Cam. An engine configuration that uses two camshafts positioned above the valves. DOL: Data Output Line. A circuit that sends certain information from the PCM to the instrument cluster. DPFEGR: Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation. System that uses a pressure transducer to control the operation of the Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Vacuum Regulator Valve. DRI: Deposit Resistant Injector. A fuel injector designed to prevent build-up of carbon and other unwanted deposits. DRL: Daytime Running Lamps. A system that keeps the vehicle running lamps on at all times while the vehicle is operating. DTM: Diagnostic Test Mode. A level of capability in an On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) system. DTC: Diagnostic Trouble Code. An alpha/numeric identifier for a fault condition identified by the On-Board Diagnostic System. DVOM: Digital Volt-Ohm Meter. E-85: Fuel containing 85% ethanol alcohol. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 2989 EAIR: Electric Secondary Air Injection. A pump-driven system for providing secondary air using an electric air pump. EAIRM: Electric Secondary Air Pump circuit Monitor. ECT: Engine Coolant Temperature. Displayed in either Fahrenheit or Centigrade. ECTV: Engine Coolant Temperature Voltage. The actual voltage drop across the ECT sensor thermistor. ECU: Electronic Control Unit. A module that handles the control strategy and monitors system inputs or outputs. EEC: Electronic Engine Control system. EEC-V: Fifth generation EEC system. EFT: Engine Fuel Temperature. EFTA: Bank 1 input. EFTA is displayed in either Fahrenheit or Centigrade. EFTAV: Voltage drop across the EFTA (Bank 1) sensor thermistor. EFTB: Bank 2 input. EFTB is displayed in either Fahrenheit or Centigrade. EFTBV: Voltage drop across the EFTB (Bank 2) sensor thermistor. EGR: Exhaust Gas Recirculation. A process in which a small amount of exhaust gas is routed into the combustion chamber. EGR EVAL: Exhaust Gas Recirculation System Evaluated. EGR EVAL will display YES when the monitor is complete. EGRMDSD: Electric Exhaust Gas Recirculation Motor Desired position. The PID name used to operate the Electric Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EEGR) valve with scan tool's output state control. EGRS: EGR Shutoff. A normally closed solenoid that applies vacuum to the EGR valve when energized by the PCM. EGRT: Exhaust Gas Recirculation Valve Temperature Sensor. A temperature sensor that is threaded into the bottom of the intake plenum. EGR Vacuum Regulator: Controls vacuum to the EGR valve by a duty cycle signal from the PCM. EGRVR: Exhaust Gas Recirculation Vacuum Regulator. Solenoid which varies the vacuum to the EGR valve by varying the duty cycle to the regulator. EGRVRA: Exhaust Gas Recirculation Vacuum Regulator Actual (volt). The actual state of the commanded output. EGRVRF: Exhaust Gas Recirculation Vacuum Regulator Fault. Represents whether a fault exists in the EGRV circuit. EI: Integrated Electronic Ignition. An Electronic Ignition system that has the Ignition Control Module (ICM) integrated into the PCM. EI-HDR: Electronic Ignition, High Data Rate. Formerly known as Electronic Distributorless Ignition System. EI-LDR: Electronic Ignition, Low Data Rate. Formerly known as Distributorless Ignition System. EMI: Electromagnetic Interference. Usually caused by ignition voltage spikes, solenoids, relay operation or noisy generator contacts. EOL: End Of Line. A system designed specifically for use at assembly plants to make sure all new vehicles perform to design specifications. EPA: Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. Government). EPROM: Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory. An electronic component in the PCM that requires the electronic storage of information. ESOF: Electronic Shift-on-the-Fly. EVAP: Evaporative Emissions. A system to prevent fuel vapor from escaping into the atmosphere. EVAPCP: Evaporative Canister Purge Solenoid. Controls a solenoid which allows venting of the evaporative purge canister. EVAPCPF: Evaporative Canister Purge Solenoid Fault. Identifies whether an electrical fault exists for the current commanded state. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 2990 EVAPCV: Evaporative Canister Vent Solenoid. Controls a solenoid which seals the EVAP system canister from atmospheric pressure during the EVAP OBD II Monitor test. Evaporative Emissions Canister: An evaporative emission canister, containing activated charcoal which absorbs and holds fuel vapors. EVAPPDC: Evaporative Canister Purge Duty Cycle. The duty cycle commanded to the Evap Canister Purge Solenoid by the PCM. EVO: Electronic Variable Orifice. EWP: Electric Water Pump. Exciter Ring: A toothed or notched iron or steel disk, which is the moveable part of a wheel speed sensor. FAN: Fan Speed. Used in conjunction with vehicles having multiple fan speed control. Displays OFF, LOW, or HIGH status. FC: Fan Control. FCS: Fuel Control Solenoid. FCIL: Fuel Cap Off Indicator Lamp. Indicates that the fuel filler cap was not properly installed. FEAD: Front End Accessory Drive. FEPS: Flash Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) Programming Signal. 18 volt DC signal sent by the scan tool to initiate PCM reprogramming. FF: 1. Flexible Fuel. A system capable of using a variety of fuels for vehicle operation. 2. A PID that displays the % alcohol content in fuel. FFLRN: Flex Fuel Learned. Displays when the PCM's Flex Fuel strategy has completed calculating the inferred alcohol content of fuel. FFFM: Flexible Fuel Failure Mode. Indicates whether the current Flex Fuel Sensor reading (FF) is reliable or not. Displays a YES or NO. FFTEMP: Flexible Fuel Sensor - Temperature. Alcohol concentration derived from the signal pulse width. FFV: Flexible Fuel Vehicle. FIFO: First In First Out. FILO: First In Last Out. FIM: Fuel Indicator Module. FLI: Fuel Level Input. Used by the Evap monitor to calculate fuel tank vapor volume. Displayed as a percentage. FLIV: Fuel Level Input Voltage. FMEM: Failure Mode Effects Management. Operating strategy that maintains limited vehicle function in the event of a PCM or EEC component failure. FP:1. Fuel Pump. Indicates whether the pump has been commanded ON or OFF by the PCM. 2. Fuel Pump (Modulated). Fuel pump duty cycle percentage. FPDM: Fuel Pump Driver Module. A module that controls the electric fuel pump. FPF: Fuel Pump Fault. Identifies whether a fault exists in the FP circuit. FPM: Fuel Pump Monitor. Monitors the Fuel Pump I circuits for faults. Freeze Frame: A block of memory containing the vehicle operating conditions at a specific time. FRP: Fuel Rail Pressure. Based on FRP V. FRP V: Fuel Rail Pressure Voltage. A voltage input to the PCM from the Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor. FSC: Fail-Safe Cooling. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 2991 FSV: Fuel Shut-off Valve. A component of Natural Gas Vehicles. This valve either allows or prevents Natural Gas flow to the fuel rail. FSVF: Fuel Shut-Off Valve Fault. Indicates if there is a fault in the FSV circuit. Displayed as YES or NO. FSVM: Fuel Shut-off Valve Monitor. Monitors operation of the Fuel Shut-Off Valve / circuit. FTP: Fuel Tank Pressure. Displayed as inches of water, kPa, or volts. FTP V: Fuel Tank Pressure Voltage. From the FTP transducer. FUEL PR: Fuel Pressure. Measurement of the force of the fuel delivered via the fuel pump. FUELPW: Fuel Pulse Width. Displays the commanded pulse width at time of last data update. FUELPW1: Fuel Injector Pulse Width #1. Corresponds to injectors normally affected by O2S1 (HEGO1). FUELPW2: Fuel Injector Pulse Width #2. Corresponds to injectors normally affected by O2S2 (HEGO2). FUELSYS: Fuel System Status (OPEN/CLOSED Loop). Formerly known as LOOP. Fuel Tank Vapor Valve: A valve mounted in the top of the fuel tank that vents excess vapor and pressure from the fuel tank into the Evaporative Emission Control System. FWD: Front Wheel Drive. GEM: Generic Electronic Module. GEN: Generator. GENF: Generator Output Fault. GENFDC: Generator Field Control Output. GFS: Generator field signal monitor. GND: Ground. GPM: Grams Per Mile. Also known as Gallons Per Minute. GPS: Global Positioning Satellite. Green State Vehicle: Formally known as California Emissions. A vehicle that is equipped with California on-board diagnostics. GSS: Gear Select Solenoid. GVW: Gross Vehicle Weight. Hall Effect: A process where current is passed through a small slice of semi-conductor material and a magnetic field to produce a small voltage in the semi-conductor. Hard Fault: A fault currently present in the system. HC: 1. Hydrocarbon. A by-product of combustion and a component of auto exhaust emissions. 2. High Compression. HCF: Hydraulic Cooling Fan. HCFD: Hydraulic Cooling Fan Drive. HFC: Hydraulic Cooling Fan. HFCF: High Fan Control Fault. Identifies if there is a fault in the HFC circuit. HFP: High Fuel Pump. HLOS: Hardware Limited Operating Strategy. A mode of operation where the PCM replaces output commands with fixed values in response to internal Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 2992 PCM malfunctions. HO: High Output. HO2S: Heated Oxygen Sensor. Formerly known as Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen (HEGO) Sensor. Provides information on rich or lean exhaust conditions to the PCM. Hot Soak: Period of time after an engine operates where localized combustion heat dissipates throughout the engine. HTR, HTR11, HTR12, HTR21 H1R22, HTRX1, HTRX2: HO2S Heater. Heater element for the HO2S sensor. Hydrogen: Chemical symbol H. Highly flammable gas. Hz: Hertz. Cycles per second. IAC: Idle Air Control. Electrical control of throttle bypass air. IAT: Intake Air Temperature. IATV: Intake Air Temperature Voltage. Actual voltage drop across the IAT sensor. IAT2: Intake Air Temperature 2. Displayed in either Fahrenheit or Centigrade. Used on supercharged vehicles. IAT2V: Intake Air Temperature 2 Voltage. Actual voltage drop across the IATV2 sensor. IC: Integrated Circuit. A small Semi-Conductor device capable of doing many separate circuit functions. ICM: Ignition Control Module. The module that controls the ignition system. IFDM: Integrated Fuel Delivery Module. IFS: Inertia Fuel Shutoff. IGN GND: Ignition Ground. Ignition: System used to provide high voltage spark for internal combustion engines. IGNKEY(IGKY): Ignition Key status. IGNSW (IGSW): Ignition Switch Position. IMRC: Intake Manifold Runner Control. Controls airflow through the high-speed runners in the intake manifold. IMRCM: Intake Manifold Runner Control Monitor. Monitors the IMRC / circuits for faults. IMTV: Intake Manifold Tuning Valve. Controls airflow through runners in a split intake manifold. INJ1, INJ2, INJ3, INJ4, INJ5, INJ6, INJ7, INJ8, INJ9, INJ1O: lnjector number or its signal output from the PCM. Injector: A device for delivering metered pressurized fuel to the intake system or the cylinders. Intake Air: Air drawn through a filter and distributed to each cylinder for use in combustion. Intercooler: See CAC. IPATS: Integrated Passive Anti-Theft System. ISO: international Standards Organization. KAM: Keep Alive Memory. A portion of the memory within the PCM that must have power even when the vehicle is not operating. KAPWR: Keep Alive Power. Dedicated, unswitched power circuit that maintains KAM. Key On Engine Off Self- Test: A test of the EEC system conducted by the PCM with power applied and the engine at rest. Key On Engine Running Self- Test: A test of the EEC system conducted by the PCM with the engine running and the vehicle at rest. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 2993 KEYPWR: Key Power. Battery voltage supplied when the ignition key is in the ON position. Knock: The sharp metallic sound produced when two combustion pressure fronts collide in the combustion chamber of an engine. KOEC: Key On Engine Continuous. KOEO: Key On Engine off. KOER: Key On Engine Running. KPA: Kilopascal. Unit of pressure. 3.386 kPa = 1 inch of mercury (Hg.). KPH: Kilometers Per Hour. KS: Knock Sensor. Detects engine knock. L: Liters. The unit of volume in the metric measuring system. One liter equals 1.06 quarts. LEV: Low Emissions Vehicle. LFC: Low Fan Control. LFP: Low Fuel Pump. Reduced operating speed for multi-speed fuel pumps. LIFO: Last In First Out. LILO: Last In Last Out. LONGFT1, LONGFT2: Long-Term Fuel Trim. Fuel flow adjustment determined by the PCM. LOOP: indicates OPEN or CLOSED loop status. LPG: Liquefied Petroleum Gas. LPLR: Low Pressure Low Resistance fuel injector. M-V ACRONYMS AND DEFINITIONS NOTE: This Acronyms and Definitions listing contains technical terms applicable to Ford Motor Company products. It is not intended to be an all-inclusive dictionary of components and their functions. If a detailed description of a particular system or component is desired, refer to the applicable Vehicle System for the specific vehicle being serviced. M-85: Fuel containing 85% methanol alcohol. MAF: Mass Air Flow. Used to measure the mass (weight) of the air entering the engine. MAF RTN: Mass Air Flow Return. A return circuit for the MAF sensor. MAP: Manifold Absolute Pressure. The internal pressure of the intake manifold. MFC: Medium Fan Control. MFI: Multiport Fuel Injection. A fuel-delivery system in which each cylinder is individually fueled. MFP: Modulated Fuel Pump. Microprocessor: A digital processor on a chip which perform arithmetic and control logic. MIL: Malfunction Indicator Lamp. An indicator lamp alerting the driver of an emission related malfunction. May also read "CHECK ENGINE" or "SERVICE ENGINE SOON." MISF: Misfire. Any event in the cylinder that causes a sudden change in acceleration of the crankshaft. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 2994 MON: Motor Octane Number. Monolithic Substrate: The ceramic honeycomb structure used in the catalytic converter. MSOF: Manual Shift-on-the-Fly. MY: Model Year. NA: Naturally Aspirated. Engine that is not supercharged or turbocharged. NAAO: North American Automotive Operations. NC: Normally Closed. NG: Natural Gas. A system capable of using natural gas for vehicle operation. NGS: New Generation STAR (Self-Test Automatic Readout) tester. NGVM: Natural Gas Vehicle Module. NO: Norm ally Open. NO(x): Oxides of Nitrogen. Formed at high combustion temperatures. NVH: Noise, Vibration, Harshness. A classification of vehicle concerns. OASIS: On-Line Automotive Service Information System. OBD, OBD-II: On-Board Diagnostics, On-Board Diagnostics Second Generation. A system that monitors PCM input and output control signals. On Demand Test: Technician initiated "KOEO" and "KOER" tests performed by the PCM. OC: Oxidation Catalytic converter. A catalytic converter system that reduces levels of HC and CO. OCT ADJ: Octane Adjust. Compensating strategy that adjusts for changes in fuel octane. OEM: Original Equipment Manufacturer. OHC: OverHead Cam. An engine configuration that uses a single camshaft positioned above the valves. OWL: Overheat Warning Lamp or its signal output from the PCM. Turns the TEMP warning lamp ON when engine oil temperature exceeds safe limits. Open Circuit: A circuit which does not provide a complete path for flow of current. OL: Open Loop. An operating condition based on instructions not modified by PCM feedback. O(2)S 11/12/21/22: Oxygen Sensor and its relative position in the exhaust system. Detects oxygen content in exhaust gasses. OSC: Output State Control. OSS: Output Shaft Speed. Ozone: A blue gaseous form of oxygen (O(3)) formed naturally by electric discharge or exposure to ultraviolet radiation. Particulate: Small solid matter found in exhaust gases, especially prevalent in diesel engines. PATS: Passive Anti-Theft System. PATSIL: Passive Anti-Theft System Indicator Light. PATSIN: Passive Anti-Theft System Receive Signal. PATSOUT: Passive Anti-Theft System Transmit Signal. PATSTRT: Passive Anti-Theft System Starter Relay Control Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 2995 PCM: Powertrain Control Module. Formerly known as the EEC (Electronic Engine Control) Processor. PCV: Positive Crankcase Ventilation. A system which allows the controlled flow of crankcase vapors into the combustion chamber. PF: Purge Flow. Amount of fuel vapor burned in the engine. Photochemical: Term describing the action of light on air pollutants which results in creating smog. PID: Parameter Identifier. Identifies an address in PCM memory which contains operating information. Powertrain: Engine and transmission/transaxle components. Pressure - Absolute: A pressure referenced to a perfect vacuum. Pressure - Atmospheric: The pressure of the surrounding air at any given temperature and altitude. Sometimes called Barometric Pressure. Pressure - Barometric: Pertaining to atmospheric pressure or the results obtained by a barometer. Pressure - Differential: The pressure difference between two regions, such as between the intake manifold and atmospheric pressure. Pressure - Gage: The amount by which absolute pressure exceeds the ambient atmospheric pressure. PIP: Profile Ignition Pickup. Provides crankshaft position information for ignition synchronization. Potentiometer: An adjustable resistance component commonly used as a sensor (Example: TP Sensor). PPM: Parts Per Million. A measure used in emission analysis. PROM: Programmable Read-Only Memory. Similar to ROM except without program instructions. Protocol: A set of rules for the exchange of information on a network. PSOM: Programmable Speedometer/Odometer Module. A module that processes vehicle speed information. PSP: Power Steering Pressure. Indicates the pressure in the power steering system. PSP V: Power Steering Pressure Input Voltage. PTEC: Powertrain Electronic Controller. PTO: Power Take-Off. PW: Pulse Width. The length of time an actuator, such as a fuel injector, remains energized. PWM: Pulse Width Modulation. Controls the intensity of an output by varying the signal duty cycle. PWR GND: Power Ground. The main ground circuit in the EEC system. Quick Test: A series of diagnostic tests of the EEC system consisting of KOEO, KOER and Continuous Memory Self-Tests. Results are displayed as a series of DTCs. RABS: Rear Antilock Brake System. RAM: Random Access Memory. Memory into which information can be written as well as read. REDOX: Reduction Oxidation Catalytic converter. A catalytic converter system designed to operate at high temperatures. Regulator: Controls the alternator/generator field current to maintain proper battery charge. Contained within the PCM in smart charging applications. Relay: An electromechanical device in which connections in one circuit are opened or closed by changes in another circuit. REM: Rear Electronic Module. Repetitive Spark: Multiple firings of individual spark plugs at engine speeds below 1000 RPM to improve idle quality and improve emissions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 2996 RF: Radio Frequency. RFI: Radio Frequency Interference. RFS: Returnless Fuel System. RM: Relay Module. A module containing two or more relays. ROM: Read-Only Memory. Computer memory that can be accessed and utilized, but not altered. RON: Research Octane Number. Routine: A group of related tasks, such as a series of diagnostic tests. RPM: Revolutions Per Minute. RS: Reverse Switch. RTN: Return. A dedicated sensor ground circuit. RWD: Rear Wheel Drive. SAE: Society of Automotive Engineers. SBS: Supercharger Bypass Solenoid or its signal output from the PCM. SC: Supercharged or Supercharger. SCB: Supercharger Bypass Control. A system that allows manifold vacuum to be bled away from the supercharger wastegate actuator to allow for maximum boost. SCBF: Supercharger Bypass Control Fault. Identifies whether a fault exists in the Supercharger Bypass circuit. SCICP: Supercharger Intercooler Pump Control. SCICPF: Supercharger Intercooler Pump Control Fault. SCIPC: The PID to monitor the operation of the Supercharger and Charge Air Cooler pump. SCP: Standard Corporate Protocol. Self- Test: See Quick Test. Sensor: A device that detects the value or change in a physical quantity, such as temperature, pressure or flow rate, and converts the data into an electrical signal. SFI: Sequential Multi port Fuel Injection. A multiport fuel delivery system where each injector is individually energized and timed relative to its cylinder intake event. Shield: A conducting sleeve that surrounds wires to be electronically isolated from Electromagnetic Interference (EMI). Short Circuit: An undesirable condition in a circuit where it is terminated at a point other than that intended. SHRT FT: Short-Term Fuel Trim. Fuel flow adjustment in response to the HO2S sensor(s) input during closed-loop operation. SIG RTN: Signal Return. A dedicated sensor ground circuit that is common to two or more sensors. SIL: Shift Indicator Lamp. Smart Driver: A PCM or ECU output driver that can detect faults (open or shorts) on its output circuit. SME: Society of Manufacturing Engineers. SOF: Shift-On-the-Fly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 2997 SOHC: Single Overhead Cam. Solenoid: A device consisting of an electrical coil which produces a magnetic field in a plunger and pulled to a central position. ST: Scan Tool. A device that interfaces with and communicates information on a data link. Stoichiometry: An air/fuel mixture that is neither too rich nor too lean. Stoichiometric ratio is 14.7 parts of air for every 1 part of fuel. Switch: A device for making, breaking, or changing the connections in an electrical circuit. TA: Traction Assist. TACH: Tachometer. TB: Throttle Body. A device that controls airflow through the engine via a butterfly valve, and has an air bypass channel around the throttle plate. TC: 1. Traction Control. Combines anti-lock braking and axle torque reduction to control wheel slippage. 2. Turbocharger. TDC: Top Dead Center. Tear Tag: The two-piece adhesive label attached to the PCM to identify its calibration. Thermistor: A temperature dependent resistor, like that used in CHT and ECT sensors. Timing: Relationship between spark plug firing and piston position expressed in crankshaft degrees before (BTDC) or after (ATDC) top dead center of the compression stroke. TMAP: Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor. A MAP Sensor that includes a thermistor to measure intake air temperature. TP: Throttle Position (sensor). A three-wire potentiometer that provides throttle angle and rate information for the PCM. TP V: Throttle Position Sensor Voltage. Transducer: A device that receives energy from one medium and transfers it to another. For example, thermal energy is converted to an electrical signal through a temperature probe. Transmissions/Transaxles: NOTE: All related items are grouped under the general heading "TRANSMISSIONS" located at the end. TSB: Technical Service Bulletin. Notifies service personnel of any known vehicle concerns, procedures, or general service information. Underspeed Mode: A control mode that prevents the engine from stalling in the event it stumbles while running. Also used during engine crank. Vacuum: Manifold pressure that is reduced below the ambient atmospheric pressure. Variable Reluctance: A process of passing a varying magnetic field through wire windings and inducing a voltage. VCT: Variable Camshaft Timing. VECI: Vehicle Emission Control Information label. VIN: Vehicle Identification Number. A unique identification number given to every vehicle produced. Includes information about the year, model, engine, and plant origin of the vehicle. VMV: Vapor Management Valve. Controls the flow of fuel vapors out of the carbon canister. VOM: Volt-Ohm Meter. Readings are indicated by sweep hand on a printed scale rather than a digital (DVOM) display. VPWR: Vehicle Power. A switched circuit that provides power to the EEC system. Compare "Battery Voltage VREF: Reference Voltage. A dedicated circuit that provides approximately a 5.0 volt signal used as a reference by certain sensors. WAC: Wide Open Throttle A/C Cut-off. Turns A/C system off during wide open throttle or certain other operating conditions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 2998 Wastegate Control: A device that opens the wastegate in case of overboost from a turbocharger. WOT: Wide Open Throttle. A condition of maximum airflow through the throttle body. Zip Tube: Another name for "fresh air duct" or "air inlet duct". TRANSMISSIONS: NOTE: The transmission naming convention is as follows: ^ The first character, a number, is the number of forward gears. ^ The second character, either the letter "F" or "R," represents front (transaxle) or rear (transmission) wheel drive. ^ The next set of characters, a grouping of numbers, represents the design torque capacity of the transmission/transaxle (for example, "27" represents 270ft./lbs. in the 4F27E transaxle). ^ The last character, if used, is one of the following: ^ "E" for electronic shift ^ "N" for non-synchronous shift ^ "S" for synchronous shift ^ "W" for wide ratio ^ 4F27E: Also known as the FN Focus automatic transmission. ^ 4F44E: Formerly known as the CD4E. ^ 4F46S: Formerly known as the Ax45 and regular-duty AXOD-E. ^ 4F50N: Formerly known as the Ax4N and heavy-duty AXOD-E. ^ 4R44E: Formerly known as A4LD for 3.0L applications. ^ 4R55E: Formerly known as A4LD for 4.0L applications. ^ 4R70W: Formerly known as AOD-E. ^ 4R100: Formerly known as E4OD. ^ 5R44E: Formerly known as A5LD for 3.0L applications. ^ 5R55E: Formerly known as A5LD for 4.0L applications. ^ 5R55N: Lincoln LS automatic transmission. ^ 5R55W: Wide-ratio truck transmission. ^ 4x4L: 4x4 Low. ^ A/T: Automatic Transmission. ^ CCS: Coast Clutch Solenoid. ^ CCSF: Coast Clutch Solenoid Fault. Displays a YES if fault exists. ^ EPC: Electronic Pressure Control. ^ EPCV: Electronic Pressure Control Volts. ^ ESS: Electronic Shift Scheduling. ^ HCDSS: High Clutch Drum Speed Sensor. PCM input from the 4R44E and 4R55E. ^ M5OD: Manual 5-Speed transmission with overdrive (RWD). ^ M/T: Manual Transmission/Transaxle. ^ NPS: Neutral Pressure Switch or its signal input to the PCM. ^ OCS: Overdrive Cancel Switch. ^ OSS: Output Shaft Speed. Indicates rotational speed of the transmission output shaft. ^ PNP: Park/Neutral Position switch. Also known as Neutral Drive Switch (NDS), Neutral Gear Switch (NGS), and Transmission Switch Neutral (TSN). ^ REVERSE or REV: Transmission Reverse Switch Input. ^ SIL: Shift Indicator Lamp. A lamp that indicates the preferred shift points on select manual transmission/transaxle vehicles. ^ S91/SS2/SS3: Shift solenoids. Devices that control the shifting in an automatic transmission. ^ TCC: Torque Converter Clutch. When energized, causes a mechanical engagement and disengagement of the Torque Converter Clutch. ^ TCIL: Transmission Control Indicator Lamp. Indicates that the Transmission Control Switch (TCS) has been activated. ^ TCS: Transmission Control Switch. Modifies the operation of electronically controlled transmissions. ^ Torque converter: A device which by its design multiplies the torque in a fluid coupling between an engine and transmission/transaxle. ^ TFT: Transmission Fluid Temperature. Indicates temperature of transmission fluid. ^ Transaxle: A device consisting of a transmission and axle drive gears assembled in the same case. Front-wheel drive applications. ^ Transmission: A device which selectively increases or decreases the ratio of relative rotation between its input and output shafts. Rear-wheel drive applications. ^ TR: Transmission Range. The range in which the transmission is operating. ^ TR Sensor: Formerly known as Manual Lever Position Sensor (MLPS). Provides information to the PCM on the transmission range selector position. ^ TR V: Transmission Range Voltage. ^ TSS: Turbine Shaft Speed. Indicates rotational speed of the transmission turbine shaft. ^ VSS: Vehicle Speed Sensor. A magnetic pickup device that generates an AC signal that is proportional to vehicle speed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 2999 Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Federal Test Procedure Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Federal Test Procedure The Catalyst Efficiency Monitor uses an oxygen sensor before and after the catalyst to infer the hydrocarbon efficiency based on oxygen storage capacity of the catalyst. Under normal, close-loop fuel conditions, high efficiency catalysts have significant oxygen storage. This makes the switching frequency of the rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) very slow and reduces the amplitude of those switches as compared to the switching frequency and amplitude of the front HO2S. As the catalyst efficiency deteriorates, its ability to store oxygen declines. The post-catalyst or downstream HO2S signal begins to switch more rapidly with increasing amplitude, approaching the switching frequency and amplitude of the pre-catalyst or upstream HO2S. All applications utilize an FTP-based (Federal Test Procedure) catalyst monitor. This simply means that the catalyst monitor must run during a standard FTP emission test as opposed to the 20-second steady state catalyst monitor used in 1994 through some 1996 vehicles. Two slightly different versions of the catalyst monitor are used in the 2001 model year. Switch Ratio Method (1996 - 2001) 1. In order to assess catalyst oxygen storage, the monitor counts front and rear HO2S switches during part-throttle, close-loop fuel condition after the engine is warmed-up and inferred catalyst temperature is within limits. Front switches are accumulated in up to nine different air mass regions or cells although three air mass regions is typical. Rear switches are counted in a single cell for all air mass regions. When the required number of front switches has accumulated in each cell, the total number of rear switches is divided by the total number of front switches to compute a switch ratio. A switch ratio near 0.0 indicates high oxygen storage capacity, hence high HC efficiency. A switch ratio near 1.0 indicates low oxygen storage capacity, hence low HC efficiency. If the actual switch ratio exceeds a calibrated threshold switch ratio, the catalyst is considered failed. Inputs from Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) or Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) (warm engine), IAT (not extreme ambient temperatures), Mass Air Flow (MAF) (greater than minimum engine load), Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (within vehicle speed widow) and Throttle Position (TP) (at part-throttle) are required to enable the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor. 2. The DTCs associated with this test are Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0420 (Bank 1) and P0430 (Bank 2). Because an Exponentially Weight Moving Average algorithm is use for malfunction determination, up to six driving cycles may be required to illuminate the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) during normal customer driving. If Keep Alive Memory (KAM) is reset, a malfunction will illuminate the MIL in 2 drive cycles. Index Ratio Method (some 2001 and beyond) 1. In order to assess catalyst oxygen storage, the catalyst monitor counts front HO2S switches during part-throttle, closed-loop fuel conditions after the engine is warmed-up and inferred catalyst temperature is within limits. Front switches are accumulated in up to three different air mass regions or cells. While catalyst monitoring entry conditions are being met, the front and rear HO2S signal lengths are continually being calculated. When the required number of front switches has accumulated in each cell, the total signal length of the rear HO2S is divided by the total signal length of the front HO2S to compute a catalyst index ratio. An index ratio near 0.0 indicates high oxygen storage capacity, hence high efficiency. A switch ratio near 1.0 indicates low oxygen storage capacity, hence low HC efficiency. If the actual index ratio exceeds the threshold index ratio, the catalyst is considered failed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 3000 Inputs from ECT or CHT (warm engine), IAT (not extreme ambient temperatures), MAF (greater than minimum engine load), VSS (within vehicle speed widow) and TP (at part-throttle) are required to enable the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor. 2. The DTCs associated with this test are DTC P0420 (Bank 1) and P0430 (Bank 2). Because an Exponentially Weighted Moving Average algorithm is use for malfunction determination, up to six driving cycles may be required to illuminate the MIL during normal customer driving. If KAM is reset, a malfunction will illuminate the MIL in 2 drive cycles. If the catalyst monitor does not complete during a particular driving cycle, the already accumulated switch/signal data is retained in Keep Alive Memory and is used during the next driving cycle to allow the catalyst monitor a better opportunity to complete. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 3001 Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation Catalyst and Exhaust Systems Catalyst and Exhaust System Overview The Catalytic Converter and Exhaust Systems (Figure 135) work together to control the release of harmful engine exhaust emissions into the atmosphere. The engine exhaust gas consists mainly of Nitrogen (N), Carbon Dioxide (CO2) and Water Vapor (H2O). However, it also contains Carbon Monoxide (CO), Oxides Of Nitrogen (NOx), Hydrogen (H), and various unburned Hydrocarbons (HCs). CO, NO(x), and HCs are major air pollutants, and their emission into the atmosphere must be controlled. The exhaust system generally consists of an exhaust manifold, front exhaust pipe, upstream Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S), rear exhaust pipe, downstream HO2S, a muffler and an exhaust tailpipe. The catalytic converter is installed between the front and rear exhaust pipes. Catalytic converter efficiency is monitored by the On Board Diagnostic (OBD II) system. Generic Catalyst and Exhaust System Catalytic Converter A catalyst is a material that remains unchanged when it initiates and increases the speed of a chemical reaction. A catalyst will also enable a chemical reaction to occur at a lower temperature. The concentration of exhaust gas products released to the atmosphere must be controlled. The catalytic converter assists in this task. It contains a catalyst in the form of a specially treated honeycomb structure saturated with catalytically active precious metals. As the exhaust gases come in contact with the catalyst, they are changed into mostly harmless products. The catalyst initiates and speeds up heat producing chemical reactions of the exhaust gas components so they are used up as much as possible. Exhaust System The purpose of the exhaust system is to convey engine emissions from the exhaust manifold to the atmosphere. Engine exhaust emissions are directed from the engine exhaust manifold to the catalytic converter through the front exhaust pipe. An HO2S is mounted on the front exhaust pipe before the catalyst. The catalytic converter reduces the concentration of Carbon Monoxide (CO), unburned Hydrocarbons (HCs) and Oxides of Nitrogen (NO) in the exhaust emissions to an acceptable level. The reduced exhaust emissions are directed from the catalytic converter to a muffler through the rear exhaust pipe. Another HO2S is mounted on the rear exhaust pipe. Lastly, the exhaust emissions are directed to the atmosphere through an exhaust tailpipe. HARDWARE The downstream HO2S may be located after the light off catalyst or underbody catalyst. The underbody catalyst may be in-line with the light off catalyst, or the underbody catalyst may be common to two light off catalysts, forming a "Y" pipe configuration. For an exact configuration of the catalyst and exhaust system, refer to Exhaust System. Three Way Catalytic Converter The Three Way Catalytic (TWC) converter contains either platinum (Pt) and Rhodium (Rh) or Palladium (Pd) and Rhodium (Rh). The TWC converter catalyzes the oxidation reactions of unburned HCs and CO and the reduction reaction of NO. The three-way conversion can be best accomplished by always operating the engine air fuel/ratio at or close to stoichiometry. Exhaust Manifold/Runners The exhaust manifold runners collect exhaust gases from engine cylinders. The number of exhaust manifolds and exhaust manifold runners depends on the engine configuration and number of cylinders. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 3002 Exhaust Pipes Exhaust pipes are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase the life of the product. The pipes serve as guides for the flow of exhaust gases from the engine exhaust manifold through the catalytic converter and the muffler. Upstream Heated and Downstream Heated Oxygen Sensors The HO2S provide the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with voltage and frequency information related to the oxygen content of the exhaust gas. In addition to providing the PCM with indications of how rich/lean the engine is operating, the upstream HO2S signal serves as an input to the HO2S monitor. The downstream HO2S signal is an input to the Catalyst Efficiency monitor. Muffler Mufflers are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase the life of the product. The muffler reduces the level of noise produced by the engine, and it also reduces the noise produced by exhaust gases as they travel from the catalytic converter to the atmosphere. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3003 Catalytic Converter: Testing and Inspection For information regarding diagnosis of this system refer to Computers and Control Systems Diagnosis. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3004 Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter-2.0L Zetec Removal and Installation 1. Remove the bolts and the heat shield. 2. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (H02S) and the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connectors. 3. Using the special tool, remove the H02S. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3005 4. Disconnect the Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) tube. 5. Remove and discard the nuts. 6. Raise and support the vehicle. 7. Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor. 8. Remove the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3006 9. Remove the spring bolts and the flag nuts. ^ Discard the nuts. 10. Remove the catalytic converter. ^ Discard the ring seal. ^ Discard the gasket. 11. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Install new flag nuts. ^ Install a new ring seal. ^ Install a new gasket. ^ Install new nuts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Specifications Exhaust Manifold: Specifications Exhaust Manifold Bolts/Nuts 12 ft.lb Exhaust Manifold Heat Shield Bolts 89 in.lb EGR To Exhaust Manifold Tube Nut 30 ft.lb TWC To Exhaust Manifold Nuts 35 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3010 Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair Removal 1. Remove the catalytic converter. 2. Lower the vehicle. 3. Remove the oil level indicator and tube bracket bolt. 4. CAUTION: Do not work on the aluminum engine components until the engine is cold or damage may occur. Remove the six bolts and three nuts and remove the exhaust manifold. ^ Discard the gasket. Installation 1. CAUTION: The exhaust manifold sealing surfaces are soft metals. Do not use abrasive grinding discs to remove gasket material; use only plastic manual scrapers. Do not scratch or gouge the aluminum sealing surfaces. Carefully clean both sealing surfaces. ^ Position a new gasket. 2. Install the exhaust manifold and tighten using the sequence shown. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3011 3. Install the oil level indicator and tube. 4. Install the catalytic converter. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Heat Shield, Exhaust > Component Information > Specifications Heat Shield: Specifications Heat Shield Exhaust Manifold Heat Shield Bolts 89 in.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Specifications Muffler: Specifications Muffler Muffler/Tailpipe To Resonator Nuts 37 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3018 Muffler: Service and Repair Muffler and Tailpipe 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove and discard the nuts. ^ Discard the gasket. 3. Disconnect the muffler from the hanger and remove the muffler. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Install a new gasket. ^ Install new nuts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Resonator > Component Information > Specifications Exhaust Resonator: Specifications Resonator TWC To Resonator Bolts 30 ft.lb Muffler/Tailpipe To Resonator Nuts 37 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-5-5 > Mar > 01 > PCM - Charge Lamp ON in Cold Temperatures Powertrain Control Module: Customer Interest PCM - Charge Lamp ON in Cold Temperatures Article No. 01-5-5 March 19, 2001 ELECTRICAL - CHARGING SYSTEM WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED - DURING COLD AMBIENT TEMPERATURES BELOW - 6 DEGREES CELSIUS (20 DEGREES F.) VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH 2.0L ZETEC ENGINE BUILT 7/8/2000 THROUGH 2/12/2001 ONLY FORD: 2001 ESCAPE ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a red charge lamp illumination in cold ambient temperatures below-6°C (20°F). This may be caused by the calibration of the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). ACTION Verify red charge lamp illumination. If normal diagnostics cannot resolve condition, reprogram the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with latest calibration. Refer to the PCM Calibration Information Chart shown for details. Obtain an Authorized Modifications Decal (FPS 8262 - obtainable through DOES II, 25/pkg) and list the date, dealer number, and summary of modifications performed. Select a prominent place adjacent to the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal suitable for installing the Authorized Modifications Decal. Clean the area, install the decal, and cover it with a clear plastic decal shield. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 203000, 203100, 204000, 204200, 206000, 290000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures Powertrain Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures TSB 04-24-14 12/13/04 FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS 1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis, Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement. ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed. ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs. Verify repair after reprogramming. SERVICE PROCEDURE PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement 1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle. 2. Use WDS if available. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 3038 a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply. b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level. 3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool, such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS. NOTE IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS, GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF. PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD 1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure. 2. Install the new PCM. NOTE IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER. 3. Attempt to start the vehicle. 4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM. 5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639. a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1. b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc. 6. Check for DTC B2900. a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during this procedure. b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7. 7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures. REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement 1. Verify all cables are properly connected. 2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level. 3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level. 4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again. 5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open previous session, and attempt reprogramming again. 6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure. BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure. 1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits. 2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity. NOTE IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 3039 INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC. 3. Connect WDS to vehicle. 4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK. 5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK. 6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK. 7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press TICK. 8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK. 9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK. 10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above". 11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK. 12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed above. Press TICK. 13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens. 14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 01-5-5 > Mar > 01 > PCM Charge Lamp ON in Cold Temperatures Powertrain Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins PCM - Charge Lamp ON in Cold Temperatures Article No. 01-5-5 March 19, 2001 ELECTRICAL - CHARGING SYSTEM WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED - DURING COLD AMBIENT TEMPERATURES BELOW - 6 DEGREES CELSIUS (20 DEGREES F.) VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH 2.0L ZETEC ENGINE BUILT 7/8/2000 THROUGH 2/12/2001 ONLY FORD: 2001 ESCAPE ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a red charge lamp illumination in cold ambient temperatures below-6°C (20°F). This may be caused by the calibration of the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). ACTION Verify red charge lamp illumination. If normal diagnostics cannot resolve condition, reprogram the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with latest calibration. Refer to the PCM Calibration Information Chart shown for details. Obtain an Authorized Modifications Decal (FPS 8262 - obtainable through DOES II, 25/pkg) and list the date, dealer number, and summary of modifications performed. Select a prominent place adjacent to the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal suitable for installing the Authorized Modifications Decal. Clean the area, install the decal, and cover it with a clear plastic decal shield. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 203000, 203100, 204000, 204200, 206000, 290000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures Powertrain Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures TSB 04-24-14 12/13/04 FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS 1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis, Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement. ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed. ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs. Verify repair after reprogramming. SERVICE PROCEDURE PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement 1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle. 2. Use WDS if available. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 3049 a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply. b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level. 3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool, such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS. NOTE IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS, GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF. PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD 1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure. 2. Install the new PCM. NOTE IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER. 3. Attempt to start the vehicle. 4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM. 5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639. a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1. b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc. 6. Check for DTC B2900. a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during this procedure. b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7. 7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures. REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement 1. Verify all cables are properly connected. 2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level. 3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level. 4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again. 5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open previous session, and attempt reprogramming again. 6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure. BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure. 1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits. 2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity. NOTE IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 3050 INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC. 3. Connect WDS to vehicle. 4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK. 5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK. 6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK. 7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press TICK. 8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK. 9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK. 10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above". 11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK. 12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed above. Press TICK. 13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens. 14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3051 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3052 Powertrain Control Module: Diagrams Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3053 Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3054 Part 3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3055 Powertrain Control Module: Description and Operation POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE - VEHICLE SPEED OUTPUT (VSO) The PCM-VSO (Powertrain Control Module - Vehicle Speed Output) speed signal subsystem generates vehicle speed information for distribution to the vehicle's electrical/electronic modules and subsystems that require vehicle speed data. This subsystem senses the transmission output shaft speed with a sensor. The data is processed by the PCM, and distributed as a hard-wired signal or as a multiplexed data message. The key features of the PCM-VSO system are to: ^ Infer vehicle movement from the output shaft sensor signal ^ Convert transmission output shaft rotational information to vehicle speed information ^ Compensate for tire size and axle ratio with a programmed calibration variable ^ Utilize a transfer case sensor for four wheel drive applications ^ Distribute vehicle speed information as a multiplexed message and/or an analog signal The signal from a non-contact shaft sensor (Output Shaft Sensor--OSS or Transfer Case Shaft Sensor--TCSS) mounted on the transmission (automatics, manuals, or 4X4 transfer cases) is sensed directly by the PCM. The PCM converts the OSS or TCSS information to 8000 pulses per mile, based on a tire and axle ratio conversion factor. This conversion factor is programmed into the PCM at the time the vehicle is assembled and can be reprogrammed in the field for servicing changes in the tire size and axle ratio. The PCM transmits the computed vehicle speed and distance traveled information to all the vehicle speed signal users on the vehicle. VSO information can be transmitted by a hard-wired interface between the vehicle speed signal user and the PCM, or by Speed and Odometer SCP multiplexed data messages. The VSO hard-wired signal wave form is a DC square wave with a voltage level of 0 to VBAT. Typical output operating range is 2.22Hz per MPH (1.3808 Hz pr 1 Km/h). Multiplexed data for speed and distance data are transmitted as separate SCP messages over the SCP multiplex link. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory Powertrain Control Module: Service and Repair Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory - Flash EEPROM Description Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) is contained in an Integrated Circuit (IC) internal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle and is capable of being reprogrammed or reflashed repeatedly. As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the Vehicle Identification (VID) block. The VID block must be programmed when replacing the PCM as under Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to perform this procedure may generate fault code: P1639, VID Block not programmed or is corrupt. The VID block in an existing Powertrain Control Module (PCM). can also be tailored to accommodate various hardware changes made to the vehicle since production. Failure to perform this procedure properly may generate fault code: P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of Acceptable Range. This is described under Making Changes to the VID Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The VID block contains many items used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items include the VIN number, octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the presence of speed control and four wheel drive electronic shift on the fly versus manual shift on the fly. Only items applicable to vehicle hardware and supported by the VID block will be displayed on the scan tool. When changing items in the VID block, the strategy will place range limits on certain items such as tire and axle ratio. The VID block is also limited to the number of times to be reconfigured. When this limit is reached, the scan tool will display a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again to reset the VID block. Each of the procedures described below use the Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS). Reprogramming can be performed by a local Ford dealer for any non Ford facility. There are other Enhanced Scan Tools that may have reprogramming capabilities available. Refer to the diagnostic tool manufacturers users manual for details. Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM A new PCM will contain the latest strategy and calibration level for a particular vehicle. However, the VID block will be blank and will need programming. There are two procedures available. The first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM and the second is manual data entry into the new PCM. Automatic data transfer will be performed if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by the use of a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The stored data can now be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been replaced. Manual data entry must be performed if the old module is damaged and is incapable of communicating. Remove and replace the old PCM. You may be instructed to contact the "AS BUILT" data center for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center ONLY if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford L-M technician's, contact your National Hotline for "AS Built" data. Non Ford technicians, use the Fed World website at "fedworld.gov". Select Auto Service Information and search for "Calibrations" or "Vehicle Calibrations" then specify vehicle manufacturer, model name and model year as required. Making Changes to the VID Block A PCM which is programmed may require changes to be made to certain VID information to accommodate vehicle hardware. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the Scan Tool. Making Changes to the PCM Calibration At certain times, the entire EEPROM will need to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to changes made to the strategy or calibration after production or the need to reset the VID block because it has reached its limit. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the Scan Tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory > Page 3058 Powertrain Control Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) cover. 1 Loosen the bolt and disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the nuts and the cover. 3. Remove the PCM. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module Power Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module Power Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 3062 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Emission Control Systems > Air Injection Pump Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation Air Injection Pump Relay: Description and Operation SOLID STATE RELAY Solid State Relay The solid state relay (Figure 124) switches the high current required for operation of the electric AIR pump. Input control to the solid state relay comes from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3071 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3072 Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3073 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Powertrain Control Module Power Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Powertrain Control Module Power Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 3077 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations Diagram 700-01-00-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3082 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3083 Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3084 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Absolute Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation THERMAL MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure (TMAP) Sensor The Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor (TMAP) (Figure 41) consists of a Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor and an integrated thermistor. The thermistor part of the sensor is currently not being used. The MAP part of the sensor measures intake manifold air absolute pressure. The PCM uses information from the MAP sensor, Throttle Position (TP) sensor, Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor, Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) or Cylinder Head Temperature (CKP) sensor and Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor to determine how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations > Page 3093 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations > Page 3094 Mass Air Flow Sensor: Description and Operation MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire (Figure 36). If the hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the air mass flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio (Figure 37). This input is also used in determining transmission Electronic Pressure Control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling. Some MAF sensors have Integrated Bypass Technology (IBT) with an integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor. The present applications with IBT are: Focus, Escort (4V), 2.0L Cougar, Escape, Taurus/Sable, Windstar, Explorer/Mountaineer and E-Series. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations > Page 3095 Mass Air Flow Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube. 2. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the four nuts and the MAF sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3099 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3100 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR The Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston No.1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and used for synchronizing the firing of sequential fuel injectors. The Coil On Plug (COP) Ignition applications also use the CMP signal to select the proper ignition coil to fire. The input circuit to the PCM is referred to as the CMP input or circuit. Typical Hall-Effect Sensor Typical Variable Reluctance Sensor There are two types of CMP sensors: the three pin connector Hall-effect type sensor (Figure 22) and the two pin connector variable reluctance sensor (Figure 23). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3101 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolt. 3 Remove the sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Clutch Switch: Description and Operation CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP)/Park-Neutral Position (PNP) Switches The Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) switch (Figure 24) is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position and, in some manual transmission applications, both the clutch pedal engagement position and the gear shift position. The PCM provides a 5-volt reference Vehicle Reference Voltage (VREF) signal to the CPP switch and/or a Park/Neutral Position (PNP) switch (on the CPP signal line). If the CPP switch (either or both CPP and PNP switches are closed) is closed, indicating the clutch pedal is engaged and the shift lever is in the NEUTRAL position, the output voltage (5 volts) from the PCM is grounded through the signal return line to the PCM, and there is 1 volt or less. One volt or less indicates there is a reduced load on the engine. If the CPP switch (or PNP switch on vehicle or both CPP and PNP switches open on the vehicle) is open, meaning the clutch pedal is disengaged (all systems) and the shift lever is not in NEUTRAL position (PNP switch systems), the input on the CPP signal to the PCM will be approximately 5 volts. Then, the 5-volt signal input at the PCM will indicate a load on the engine. The PCM uses the load information in mass air flow and fuel calculations. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3105 Clutch Switch: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) electrical connector. 2. Remove the CPP locknut and the switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3109 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3113 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3114 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (INTEGRATED IGNITION SYSTEMS) Three Different Types Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensors The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The trigger wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L ten cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the trigger wheel, the CKP indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to fixed reference (Figure 25). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3115 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the exhaust manifold. 2. Remove the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolt. 3 Remove the sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE SENSOR Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor The Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor (Figure 26) is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and increases as temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM would then initiate a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy details. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor > Page 3121 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor (Figure 27) is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The sensor is threaded into an engine coolant passage. The ECT sensor is similar in construction to the IAT sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3122 Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. Remove the generator. 2. Disconnect the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the CHT sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service Precautions WARNING: ^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3126 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor In-Line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor The Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) sensor (Figure 97) or inline Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) sensor (Figure 98) is used to measure the fuel tank pressure during the EVAP monitor test on vehicles equipped with the Running Loss-type system. Also, it is used to control excessive fuel tank pressure by forcing the system to purge. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3127 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 1. Disconnect the battery. WARNING: THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 2. Remove the rear seat assembly. 3. Remove the fuel tank sending unit access cover. 4. Disconnect the fuel tank pressure sensor electrical connector. 5. Remove the fuel tank pressure sensor. ^ Disconnect the vapor tubes. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3128 ^ Carry out a leak test. See: Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission System Leak Test ^ Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission Repair Verification Drive Cycle NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL(R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot and Cold Wire Terminals The Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensors (Figure 34) and integrated Mass Air Flow (MAF) type (Figure 37), are thermistor devices in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3132 Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The IAT provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air temperature information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel spark and MAF. The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT sensor. Supercharged 5.4L Lightning vehicles use (2) AT sensors. Both sensors operate as above. However, one is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for standard OBD II/cold weather input, while a second sensor Second Intake Air Temperature (IAT2) is located after the supercharger in the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air temperature information to the PCM to control border-line spark and to help determine intercooler efficiency. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3136 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Knock Sensor Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS) The Knock Sensor (KS) (Figure 35) is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3137 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Disconnect the KS electrical connector and remove the connector from the mounting bracket. NOTE: The Knock Sensor (KS) is located on the RH side of the cylinder block. 3. Remove the nut and the KS. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis Technical Service Bulletin # 01-9-7 Date: 010514 Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis Article No. 01-9-7 05/14/01 DRIVEABILITY - H025 (HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR), CATALYST, AND FUEL SYSTEM MONITORS - SERVICE TIPS - OBD II VEHICLES ONLY FORD: 1994-1997 THUNDERBIRD 1994-2001 MUSTANG 1995-2001 CROWN VICTORIA 1996-1997 PROBE 1996-2000 CONTOUR 1996-2001 ESCORT, TAURUS 2000-2001 FOCUS 1994-1997 F SUPER DUTY, F-250 HD, F-350 1995-2001 ECONOLINE, RANGER, WINDSTAR 1996 BRONCO 1996-1997 AEROSTAR 1996-2001 EXPLORER 1997-2001 EXPEDITION, F-150, F-250 LD 1999-2001 SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2001 EXCURSION 2001 ESCAPE LINCOLN: 1995-2001 CONTINENTAL, TOWN CAR 1996-1998 MARK VIII 2000-2001 LS 1998-2001 NAVIGATOR MERCURY: 1994-1997 COUGAR 1995-2001 GRAND MARQUIS 1996-1999 TRACER 1996-2000 MYSTIQUE 1996-2001 SABLE 1999-2001 COUGAR 1997-2001 MOUNTAINEER ISSUE This article is intended to be an aide in diagnosing conditions related to Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S), Catalyst, and Fuel System Monitor related Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Additional information is included to assist in diagnosing certain vehicle symptoms. This article is NOT intended to be a shortcut to the Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) Workshop Manual pinpoint tests. The pinpoint tests in the PC/ED Manual should ALWAYS be followed when diagnosing vehicle conditions. ACTION Use the following information and Service Tips to assist in the diagnosis of H025, Catalyst, and Fuel System Monitor related DTCs. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 98-23-10 WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 623000, 690000, 698298 Information ^ A. Description of Terms and Acronyms ^ B. HO2S Location Diagrams ^ C. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3142 ^ C1. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Information ^ C2. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) ^ D. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor ^ D1. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Information ^ D2. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) ^ E. Fuel System Monitor ^ E1. Fuel System Monitor - Information ^ E2. Fuel System Monitor Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) ^ F. Diagnostic Service Tips ^ F1. Tips - General ^ F2. Tips Related to Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor ^ F3. Tips Related to Catalyst Monitor ^ F4. Tips Related to Fuel System Monitor A. Description of Terms and Acronyms ^ CHT - Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor or PID ^ CKP - Crankshaft Position Sensor or PID ^ DTC - Diagnostic Trouble Code ^ ECT - Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor or PID ^ EGR - Exhaust Gas Recirculation ^ EEC - Electronic Engine Control ^ EVR - EGR Vacuum Regulator ^ FMEM - Failure Mode Effects Management ^ GND - Ground ^ HC - Hydrocarbons ^ HO2S - Heated Oxygen Sensor or PID ^ IAT - Inlet Air Temperature Sensor or PID ^ KAM - Keep Alive Memory ^ KOEO - Key On Engine Off ^ KOER - Key On Engine Running ^ LONGFT - Long Term Fuel Trim ^ MAF - Mass Air Flow Sensor or PID ^ MIL - Malfunction Indicator Lamp ("Check Engine") ^ NGS - New Generation Star Tester (Scan Tool) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3143 ^ OBD II - On-Board Diagnostics II ^ OSM - Output State Monitor ^ PC/ED - Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis ^ PCM - Powertrain Control Module ^ PCV - Positive Crankcase Ventilation ^ PID - Parameter Identification Display ^ RAM - Random Access Memory ^ RPM - Revolutions Per Minute ^ SHRTFT - Short Term Fuel Trim ^ Stoichiometric - 14.7:1 Air/Fuel Ratio (Gasoline Engines) ^ TP - Throttle Position Sensor or PID ^ VMV - Vapor Management Valve ^ VPWR - Vehicle Power (Battery Voltage) ^ VREF - Vehicle Reference Voltage (5 volts) B. HO2S Location Diagrams Refer to Figure 1 to better understand the H025 sensor names and locations. Regardless of how the engine is mounted in the vehicle, conventional or transverse, the HO2S naming convention stays the same in relationship to engine banks 1 and 2. Bank 1 will always be the bank containing the # 1 cylinder. C. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor C1.) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3144 The H025 Monitor is an on-board strategy designed to monitor the HO2S sensors for a malfunction or deterioration that can affect emissions. Under specific conditions, the fuel control or upstream HO2S sensors (Figures 1 and 3) are checked for proper output voltage and response rate (the time it takes to switch from lean to rich or rich to lean). Downstream HO2S sensors (Figures 1 and 3) used for Catalyst Monitor are also monitored for proper output voltage. Input is required from the ECT or CHT, IAT, MAF, TP and CKP sensors to activate the H025 Monitor. The Fuel System Monitor and Misfire Detection Monitor must also have completed successfully before the HO2S Monitor is enabled. The HO2S sensor senses the oxygen content in the exhaust flow and outputs a voltage between zero and 1.0 volt. Lean of stoichiometric (air/fuel ratio of approximately 14.7:1 for gasoline engines), the HO2S will generate a voltage between zero and 0.45 volt. Rich of stoichiometric, the HO2S will generate a voltage between 0.45 and 1.0 volt. ^ The HO2S Monitor evaluates both the upstream (Fuel Control) and downstream (Catalyst Monitor) HO2S for proper function. ^ Once the HO2S Monitor is enabled, the upstream H025 signal voltage amplitude and response frequency are checked. Excessive voltage is determined by comparing the HO2S signal voltage to a maximum calibratable threshold voltage. ^ A fixed frequency closed loop fuel control routine is executed and the upstream HO2S voltage amplitude and output response frequency are observed. A sample of the upstream HO2S signal is evaluated to determine if the sensor is capable of switching or has a slow response rate. ^ An HO2S heater circuit fault is determined by turning the heater on and off and looking for a corresponding change in the OSM and by measuring the current going through the heater circuit. ^ The MIL is activated after a fault is detected on two consecutive OBD II drive cycles. The HO2S Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows: ^ HO2S signal circuit malfunction - P0131, P0136, P0151, P0156 ^ HO2S slow response rate - P0133, P0153 ^ HO2S heater circuit malfunction - P0135, P0141, P0155, P0161 ^ Downstream HO2S not running in on-demand self test - P1127 ^ Swapped H025 connectors - P1128 and P1129 ^ H025 lack of switching - P1130, P1131, P1132, P1150, P1151, P1152 ^ HO2S lack of switching (sensor indicates lean) - P1137 ^ H025 lack of switching (sensor indicates rich) - P1138 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3145 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3146 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3147 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3148 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3149 C2.) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes D. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor D1.) Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Information The Federal Test Procedure Catalyst Monitor monitors for deterioration in the catalyst system and illuminates the MIL when tailpipe emissions exceed the appropriate HC emission thresholds. The Catalyst Monitor is enabled after the upstream and downstream HO2S sensors have been tested and verified to be functional. This monitor relies on the front and rear heated oxygen sensors (HO2S) to infer catalyst efficiency based upon oxygen storage capacity. Under normal closed loop fuel conditions, high efficiency catalysts have oxygen storage which makes the switching frequency of the rear HO2S quite slow compared with the frequency of the front HO2S. As catalyst efficiency deteriorates, its ability to store oxygen declines, and the rear HO2S begins to switch more rapidly, approaching the frequency of the front sensor. In general, as catalyst efficiency decreases, the switch ratio increases from a switch ratio of 0 for a low mileage catalyst to a switch ratio of 0.8 or 0.9 for a low efficiency catalyst. Some vehicles will monitor substantially less than the entire catalyst volume in order to meet the stringent catalyst monitoring malfunction thresholds. In many cases, only the front, light-off catalyst is monitored. Front and rear HO2S switches are counted under specified closed loop fuel conditions. After the required number of front switches are obtained, a rear-to-front HO2S switch ratio is calculated. The switch ratio is compared against a threshold value. If the switch ratio is greater than the calibrated maximum limit, the catalyst has failed. The test entry conditions for the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor are as follows: ECT or CHT (warmed engine), IAT (not at extreme ambient temperatures), MAF (greater than minimum engine load), VSS (within vehicle speed window) and TP (at part throttle) are required. ^ Because an exponentially weighted moving average is used for malfunction determination, up to six OBD II drive cycles may be required to illuminate the MIL. NOTE THE CATALYST MONITOR ON SOME EARLY OBD II VEHICLES (SOME 1994-1996 VEHICLES) WAS REFERRED TO AS THE "STEADY-STATE CATALYST MONITOR" AS OPPOSED TO THE "FTP CATALYST MONITOR" (DESCRIBED ABOVE) THAT IS MOST COMMON FOR VEHICLES BUILT AFTER 1996. BELOW IS A BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE STEADY-STATE CATALYST MONITOR: The Steady-State Catalyst Monitor performs a 20 second test during steady state rpm and load conditions. The Monitor transfers closed loop fuel control from the front to the rear 02 sensors. The Monitor then observes the switching frequency and compares it to a threshold frequency stored in an rpm/load table. A frequency higher than the maximum calibrated threshold indicates a malfunction. The Catalyst Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3150 ^ Catalyst system efficiency below threshold (Bank 1) - P0420 ^ Catalyst system efficiency below threshold (Bank 2) - P0430 D2.) Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes E. Fuel System Monitor E1.) Fuel System Monitor - Information The Fuel System Monitor is an on-board strategy designed to monitor the fuel trim system. The fuel control system uses fuel trim tables stored in the PCM's KAM to compensate for variability in fuel system components due to normal wear and aging. Fuel trim tables are based on vehicle speed and engine load. During closed loop vehicle operation, the fuel trim strategy learns the corrections needed to correct a "biased" rich or lean fuel system. The correction is stored in the fuel trim tables. The fuel trim has two means of adapting; a LONGFT and a SHRTFT. LONGFT relies on the fuel trim tables and SHRTFT refers to the desired air/fuel ratio parameter "LAMBSE". LAMBSE is calculated by the PCM from HO2S inputs and helps maintain a 14.7:1 air/fuel ratio during closed loop operation. SHRTFT and LONGFT work together. If the HO2S indicates the engine is running rich, the PCM will correct the rich condition by moving SHRTFT in the negative range (less fuel to correct for a rich combustion). If after a certain amount of time SHRTFT is still compensating for a rich condition, the PCM "learns" this and moves LONGFT into the negative range to compensate and allows SHRTFT to return to a value near 0%. Input from the ECT or CHT, IAT, and MAF sensors is required to activate the fuel trim system, which in turn activates the Fuel System Monitor. Once activated, the Fuel System Monitor looks for the fuel trim tables to reach the adaptive clip (adaptive limit) and LAMBSE to exceed a calibrated limit. The Fuel System Monitor will store the appropriate DTC when a fault is detected as described below. ^ The H025 detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and provides the PCM with feedback indicating a rich or lean condition. ^ A correction factor is added to the fuel injector pulsewidth calculation according to the Long and Short Term Fuel Trims as needed to compensate for variations in the fuel system. ^ When deviation in the parameter LAMBSE increases, air/fuel control suffers and emissions increase. When LAMBSE exceeds a calibrated limit and the fuel trim table has clipped (reached adaptive limit), the Fuel System Monitor sets a DTC. ^ The MIL is activated after a fault is detected on two consecutive OBD II drive cycles. The Fuel System Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows: ^ Fuel Delivery Error - P0148 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3151 ^ Lean shift in fuel system operation - P0171 (Bank 1) and P0174 (Bank 2) ^ Rich shift in fuel system operation - P0172 (Bank 1) and P0175 (Bank 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3152 E2.) Fuel System Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes F. Diagnostic Service Tips 1. Always reset KAM after performing a repair: After performing a repair on a vehicle with the MIL on, and/or DTCs present, always clear KAM. When a malfunction is present, the PCM adapts (attempts to correct) for this condition. Once the vehicle has been repaired, if the KAM is not reset, the PCM will once again have to adapt back to the normal operating conditions. Clearing the KAM will erase what the PCM has learned, so the PCM will be able to start with "base tables". 2. Always view and record Freeze Frame Data: Freeze Frame Data can be a valuable asset in duplicating and diagnosing concerns. This data (a snapshot of certain PID values, recorded at the time the MIL was activated) indicates the manner in which the vehicle was being driven at the time the fault occurred. This can be especially useful on intermittent concerns. Freeze Frame Data, in some cases, can also help to isolate possible areas of concern, as well as ruling out others. Always record (write down) the Freeze Frame Data. 3. Multiple DTCs (with the same meaning): When multiple (paired) DTCs with the same meaning are set for multiple sensors, it is unlikely that replacing both HO2S sensors will resolve the concern. In most cases, there will be another issue that is causing the codes. Examples of multiple (paired) DTCs: (P0135/P0155), (P0141/P0161), (P1131/P1151), (P1132/P1152). To further clarify this, see the more detailed scenario as follows: A vehicle comes in with a MIL On concern. KOEO self test reveals DTCs P0135 and P0155 (HTR-11 and HTR-21 circuit malfunction), with no other DTCs present. The most likely cause of these DTCs would be something in the heater power circuit that both of these HO2S sensors have in common (Example: open or shorted heater circuit wiring or splice). It is highly unlikely that multiple sensors would fail at the same time. When multiple DTCs of this nature are encountered, reviewing the appropriate wiring diagram(s) can help to isolate possible areas of concern. When reviewing the wiring diagram, look for things that the affected sensors have in common. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3153 In this example, the most likely cause of DTCs P0135 and P0155 (with no other DTCs present) would be a concern with Splice "B" (refer to Figure 2). NOTE THIS ILLUSTRATION IS ONLY AN EXAMPLE. SPLICE NAMES "A", "B", AND "C" ARE USED IN THIS EXAMPLE FOR CONVENIENCE ONLY. ON AN ACTUAL VEHICLE, SPLICE NAMES WILL DEPEND ON THE CIRCUIT NUMBER FOR THE VEHICLE UNDER REPAIR. NOTE ALSO THAT THIS FIGURE IS NOT INTENDED TO SHOW ALL SPLICES/CONNECTIONS ON ALL VEHICLES. OTHER EEC CIRCUITS, NOT SHOWN, MAY ALSO BE SPLICED IN WITH THE CIRCUITS SHOWN. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3154 4. View H025 PID data carefully: NGS PIDs for HO2S sensors that do not exist (with certain exhaust configurations) will show a value of "0" volts (refer to Figures 3 and 4). In this example, the vehicle (equipped with a 4-cylinder engine) has one upstream and one downstream HO2S. Notice that the NGS (scan tool) display shows two upstream and two downstream HO2S PIDs, and that the "unused" HO2S sensor PIDs display "0" volts. 5. H025 sensors measure oxygen in the exhaust, not fuel: The exhaust gas condition reported by the HO2S sensor is based on the presence of oxygen in the exhaust, not the presence of unburned fuel. Example: In the event of an ignition-related misfire, you might expect a rich HO2S reading, due to the amount of unburned fuel in the exhaust system. However, there is also a large amount of unburned oxygen, since no combustion took place in the misfiring cylinder. Since the H025 senses oxygen only, it would report a lean condition in this particular situation. F2.) Tips Related to Heated Oxygen Sensor (H025) Monitor 1. OBD II Response Rate Monitor: The OBD II Response Rate Monitor (P0133/P0153) is only run at vehicle speeds between approximately 50-95 km/h (30-60 mph), during steady-state conditions. The test lasts approximately 6 seconds. Therefore, P0133/P0153 cannot be diagnosed at idle in the repair bay. 2. Do not compare H025 switch rate - Bank-to-Bank or vehicle-to-vehicle: Different H025 switch rates, from Bank-to-Bank, are considered normal. The H025 switch rate, from one Bank to the other, should not be compared as a gauge of the H025's ability to switch/react. The PCM is continuously adjusting spark and fuel in reaction to engine operating conditions (rpm, load, air flow, throttle angle, etc.). The PCM is also continuously adapting to certain conditions (customer driving habits, engine and component wear, etc.). F3.) Tips Related to Catalyst Efficiency Monitor 1. Determining catalyst efficiency/switch ratio: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3155 The upstream H025 sensors will have a high switch frequency, due to normal closed loop fuel control. With an efficient catalyst, the downstream H025 will have a low switch frequency. The switch ratio is determined by dividing the number of downstream switches by the number of upstream switches over a given period of time. As the catalyst ages (or if the catalyst is damaged or contaminated), the downstream switches will increase. When the downstream switch rate crosses a threshold value (approximately 0.75 switch ratio), a code is stored (P0420 and/or P0430) and the MIL illuminates (refer to Figures 5 and 6). NOTE IF A CATALYST IS DETERMINED TO HAVE LOW EFFICIENCY AND REQUIRES REPLACEMENT, REPLACEMENT OF THE DOWNSTREAM H025 SENSORS WILL NOT BE NECESSARY. 2. Use care in handling H025 sensors: In the event of catalyst replacement, use care in the handling of H025 sensors to prevent damage or contamination. Do not use power tools in the removal or installation of sensors. Use a 22mm wrench or crow foot to remove and install H025 sensors; do not use slotted sockets, as these sockets may damage wires. H025 sensors should be torqued to 41 +/- 5 N.m (30 +/- 4 lb-ft). 3. Do not replace downstream HO2S sensors (H02S12/H02S22) for DTCs P0420 and/or P0430: When diagnosing a vehicle with a customer concern of MIL On and DTCs P0420/P0430 in continuous memory, do not replace the downstream HO2S sensors (H02S12/H02S22). Damaged or malfunctioning downstream HO2S sensors will not cause these DTCs to be set. Always verify the vehicle concern, then perform the pinpoint diagnostics in the appropriate PC/ED Service Manual. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3156 F4.) Tips Related to the Fuel System Monitor 1. HO2S sensors are not likely to be the cause of adaptive DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175: Most warranty-returned HO2S sensors (replaced for these DTCs) are found to function normally. Additional related DTCs will normally be present if there is a concern with the HO2S sensors. Do not replace an HO2S sensor unless verified through pinpoint diagnostic tests found in the PC/ED Service Manual. 2. DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174, and P0175 are not related to downstream H028 sensors: When diagnosing a vehicle with a MIL On and DTC(s) P0171, P0172, P0174, and/or P0175 in continuous memory, do not replace the downstream HO2S sensors. These DTCs have no connection to the downstream HO2S sensor function nor its diagnosis for faults. Always verify the vehicle concern, then perform the pinpoint diagnostics from the appropriate PC/ED Service Manual. 3. Diagnosing lean conditions and lean DTCs P0171, P0174: Freeze Frame Data can often help to identify the type of lean condition, even if the fault is intermittent, by indicating how the vehicle was being driven when the fault occurred. Diagnosis of lean conditions and lean adaptive DTCs can be difficult, especially if the concern is intermittent. Verifying the concern is extremely important. There are different types of lean conditions. The ability to identify the type of lean condition causing the concern can be crucial to a correct diagnosis. When DTCs P0171 and P0174 are both present, there is a strong likelihood of another concern being present: a. Vacuum leaks/unmetered air: In this type of condition, the engine may actually run lean of stoichiometry (14.7:1 air/fuel ratio) if the PCM is not able to compensate enough to correct for the condition. This condition is typically caused by air entering the engine through an abnormal source (opening), or due to a MAF malfunction. In this situation, the volume of air entering the engine is actually greater than what the MAF is indicating to the PCM. Vacuum leaks will normally be most apparent when high manifold vacuum is present, during idle or light throttle. If Freeze Frame Data indicates that the fault occurred at idle, a check for vacuum leaks/unmetered air when the engine is cold might be the best starting point. Examples: Loose, leaking or disconnected vacuum lines, intake manifold gaskets or 0-rings, throttle body gaskets, brake booster, air inlet tube, stuck/frozen/aftermarket PCV valve, unseated engine oil dipstick, MAF reading lower than normal, etc. b. Insufficient fueling: In this type of condition, the engine may actually run lean of stoichiometry (14.7:1 air/fuel ratio) if the PCM is not able to compensate enough to correct for the condition. This condition is typically caused by a fuel delivery system concern that restricts or limits the amount of fuel being delivered to the engine. This condition will normally be most apparent when the engine is under a heavy load, when a higher volume of fuel is required. If Freeze Frame Data indicates that the fault occurred under a heavy load, a check of the fuel delivery system (checking fuel pressure with engine under a load) might be the best starting point. Examples: Low fuel pressure (fuel pump, fuel filter, fuel leaks, restricted fuel supply lines), fuel injector concerns, etc. c. Exhaust system leaks: In this type of condition, the engine may actually be running near stoichiometry (14.7:1 air/fuel ratio), but the exhaust gas mixture will be lean. This condition is caused by oxygen-rich air entering the exhaust system through an external source. This condition will cause the exhaust gas mixture to be lean, even though the actual combustion in the engine may not be. Examples: Exhaust system leaks upstream or near HO2S, malfunctioning Secondary Air Injection system d. MAF concerns: If a MAF concern is suspected, see TSB 98-23-10. 4. Checking fuel pressure: Check fuel pressure with engine under a load when diagnosing a lean concern. A partially plugged fuel filter can be difficult to detect and can be easily overlooked if fuel pressure is only checked at idle. The same is true for other types of fuel supply concerns (e.g., bent or kinked lines, degraded fuel pump). At idle, an engine requires only a small volume of fuel. Due to the fact that there is a small volume of fuel needed at idle, a restriction in the fuel supply line in many cases will not cause the fuel pressure to be low. When the vehicle is under a load, the engine requires much more fuel than at idle. Under a load, a restriction in the fuel supply line will prevent the high rate of fuel flow that is needed to maintain the correct fuel pressure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3157 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Heated Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Find and Use These Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams ^ System Diagrams ^ Grounds Diagrams Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3160 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow. Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the diagram. Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be found. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3161 Fuse And Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. Fuse Circuits Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery. Ground Distribution Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text "partial". Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3162 Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of (1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces). The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number. Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the way out by a spring. Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control. A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the way in. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. circuit Numbering Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification Circuit Numbering: Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting electrical circuits. Function: The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter "S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit. System-Connection (including branch): Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate wires in one connection with the same function. Wire Identification (wire colors): The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3163 Wire Identification Example Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know the following information about the wire: Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit System: AC = Headlamp leveling Connection: 3 = Switch connection A = Branch Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe). Circuit Identification Charts Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3164 Circuit Identification Chart System Codes Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3165 Sample Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3166 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3167 Sample Diagram Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3168 Circuit Identification Chart SYSTEM CODES CHART Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3169 SAMPLE DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3170 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3171 Sample Diagram Electrical Symbols ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3172 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3173 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3174 Types of Diagrams Shown Types of Diagrams Shown Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them. Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations. Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system information suitable for diagnostic operations. Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a relationship to them, are also included. All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding of the system component interactions. Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type. Wire Color Code Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3175 Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3176 Heated Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3177 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3178 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3179 Heated Oxygen Sensor: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3180 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor Heated Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor Heated Oxygen Sensor Monitor The Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor is an on-board strategy designed to monitor the HO2S sensors for a malfunction or deterioration which can affect emissions. The fuel control or upstream HO2S is checked for proper output voltage and response rate (the time it takes to switch from lean to rich or rich to lean). Downstream HO2S used for Catalyst Monitor are also monitored for proper output voltage. The following illustration shows that input is required from the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) or Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT), Intake Air Temperature (IAT), Mass Air Flow (MAF) and Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensors to activate the HO2S Monitor. The Fuel System Monitor and Misfire Detection Monitor must also have completed successfully before the HO2S Monitor is enabled. 1. The HO2S sensor senses the oxygen content in the exhaust flow and outputs a voltage between zero and 1.0 volt. Lean of stoichiometric (air/fuel ratio of approximately 14.7:1), the HO2S will generate a voltage between zero and 0.45 volt. Rich of stoichiometric, the HO2S will generate a voltage between 0.45 and 1.0 volt. The HO2S Monitor evaluates both the upstream (fuel control) and downstream (Catalyst Monitor) HO2S for proper function. 2. Once the HO2S Monitor is enabled, the upstream HO2S signal voltage amplitude and response frequency are checked. Excessive voltage is determined by comparing the HO2S signal voltage to a maximum calibratable threshold voltage. A fixed frequency closed loop fuel control routine is executed and the upstream HO2S voltage amplitude and output response frequency are observed. A sample of the upstream HO2S signal is evaluated to determine if the sensor is capable of switching or has a slow response rate. A HO2S heater circuit fault is determined by turning the heater on and off and looking for a corresponding change in the Output State Monitor (OSM) and by measuring the current going through the heater circuit. The HO2S Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows: The Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTCs) associated with HO2S lack of switching are DTCs P1130, P1131, P1132, P1150, P1151 and P1152. The DTCs associated with HO2S slow response rate are DTCs P0133 and P0153. The DTCs associated with HO2S signal circuit malfunction are DTCs P0131, P0136, P0148, P0151 and P0156. The DTCs associated with a HO2S heater circuit malfunction are DTCs P0135, P0141, P0155 and P0161. The Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) associated with the downstream HO2S not running in on-demand is DTC P1127. The DTCs associated with swapped HO2S connectors are DTCs P1128 and P1129. 3. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) is activated after a fault is detected on two consecutive drive cycles. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor > Page 3183 Heated Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation PCM Inputs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) The Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) (Figure 33) detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in the exhaust produces a low voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich air/fuel ratio) produces a high voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts. Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to temperatures of 800°C (1400°F). At approximately 300°C (600°F) the engine can enter closed loop operation. The Vehicle Power (VPWR) circuit supplies voltage to the heater and the PCM will complete the ground when the proper conditions occur. For model year 1998 a new HO2S heater and heater control system are installed on some vehicles. The high power heater reaches closed loop fuel control temperatures. The use of this heater requires that the HO2S heater control be duty cycled, to prevent damage to the heater. The 6 ohm design is not interchangeable with new style 3.3 ohm heater. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Heated Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) EGO Sensor Wrench SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Using the special tool, remove the HO2S. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the HO2S with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the HO2S to aid in installation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 3186 Heated Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor EGO Sensor Wrench SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL EGO Sensor Wrench 1. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the catalyst monitor sensor with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor to aid in installation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3187 EGO Sensor Wrench Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Find and Use These Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams ^ System Diagrams ^ Grounds Diagrams Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3192 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow. Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the diagram. Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be found. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3193 Fuse And Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. Fuse Circuits Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery. Ground Distribution Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text "partial". Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3194 Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of (1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces). The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number. Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the way out by a spring. Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control. A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the way in. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. circuit Numbering Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification Circuit Numbering: Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting electrical circuits. Function: The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter "S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit. System-Connection (including branch): Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate wires in one connection with the same function. Wire Identification (wire colors): The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3195 Wire Identification Example Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know the following information about the wire: Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit System: AC = Headlamp leveling Connection: 3 = Switch connection A = Branch Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe). Circuit Identification Charts Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3196 Circuit Identification Chart System Codes Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3197 Sample Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3198 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3199 Sample Diagram Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3200 Circuit Identification Chart SYSTEM CODES CHART Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3201 SAMPLE DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3202 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3203 Sample Diagram Electrical Symbols ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3204 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3205 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3206 Types of Diagrams Shown Types of Diagrams Shown Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them. Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations. Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system information suitable for diagnostic operations. Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a relationship to them, are also included. All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding of the system component interactions. Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type. Wire Color Code Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3207 Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3208 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3209 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3210 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3211 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The Power Steering Pressure (PSP) switch (Figure 38) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust transmission Electronic Pressure Control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Page 3214 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Sensor POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The Power Steering Pressure (PSP) sensor (Figure 39) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM will change as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust transmission Electronic Pressure Control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect Technical Service Bulletin # 02M01S6 Date: 040831 Attachment I - Administrative Information Customer Satisfaction Program 02M01-S6 Certain Vehicles Equipped with a Tube-Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Additional EGR Pressure Sensor Warranty Coverage OASIS You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this program. Note: Submission of an "M" program claim will not remove the vehicle from OASIS because the affected vehicles are eligible for multiple repairs if the affected condition reoccurs during the extended warranty time/mileage period. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line that the FSA is claimed on. CLAIMING INSTRUCTIONS FOR REPAIRS WITH A REPAIR DATE ON OR AFTER 10/27/03 Claims for all vehicles that are within the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage must be submitted as a warranty repair. ACESII will not accept claims for reimbursement under the 02M01 program for vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage. Vehicles that have branded titles are eligible for this repair under the 02M01 program. Vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage Claims are to be submitted as a normal warranty claim in accordance with TSB 04-11-01. Vehicles beyond New Vehicle Warranty Coverage (including branded titled vehicles) Claims are to be submitted following program 02M01 guidelines. Future Warranty Extension Customer Satisfaction Programs (CSP) Future Warranty Extension CSPs will follow these claiming instructions; only those vehicles outside the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage will be submitted as a CSP type repair. OWNER REFUNDS Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid repairs made on or before the last day of the month of the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair was made away from the servicing dealer). Failure of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460) will not have an impact on any other component of the vehicle. Therefore, refunds will only be granted for the replacement of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460). All supporting documentation must be retained in accordance with the Warranty and Policy Manual. Refer to ACESII manual for refund information. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. Attachment II - Labor Allowances and Parts Ordering Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3223 LABOR ALLOWANCES [NEW] NOTE: If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service Support Center. Special Notes: ^ 02M01C labor operation is in effect for repairs performed on or after 10/27/03. ^ Diagnostics performed beyond retrieving continuous DTC will not be paid for under this program. ^ Pinpoint diagnostics are not required to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor; therefore labor time has been adjusted accordingly. ^ Due to the use of specific DTCs to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor, this program will not cover any other continuous DTCs; normal vehicle warranty would apply for any other DTCs. ^ There will be no related damage claims allowed for this program. PARTS REQUIREMENTS Parts will not be direct shipped for this program. Order your parts requirement through normal order processing. PARTS REQUIREMENTS/ORDERING INFORMATION NOTE: If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service Support Center. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3224 DEALER PRICE For latest prices, check DOES II or updated price book. PARTS RETENTION Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures." EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: If a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine and a dash-mounted EGR pressure sensor is encountered, call the Special Service Support Center. 1. Retrieve continuous DTCs. NOTE: Replace the EGR pressure sensor only if one or more of the following continuous DTCs are present: ^ P1400 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE DETECTED ^ P1401 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE DETECTED ^ P0401- EGR FLOW INSUFFICIENT DETECTED ^ P0402- EGR FLOW EXCESSIVE DETECTED Any other DTC present is not covered by this program. 2. If one or more of the DTCs listed above is present, replace the EGR pressure sensor (9J460) as follows: a) Key off. b) Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the EGR pressure sensor from the EGR tube. c) Install the new EGR pressure sensor onto the EGR tube and connect the electrical connector. Note: Refer to Section 303-08 of the appropriate workshop manual if additional information is required. 3. Clear continuous DTCs. 4. Perform KOEO and KOER self tests. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3225 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3226 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3227 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect Technical Service Bulletin # 02M01S6 Date: 040831 Attachment I - Administrative Information Customer Satisfaction Program 02M01-S6 Certain Vehicles Equipped with a Tube-Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Additional EGR Pressure Sensor Warranty Coverage OASIS You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this program. Note: Submission of an "M" program claim will not remove the vehicle from OASIS because the affected vehicles are eligible for multiple repairs if the affected condition reoccurs during the extended warranty time/mileage period. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line that the FSA is claimed on. CLAIMING INSTRUCTIONS FOR REPAIRS WITH A REPAIR DATE ON OR AFTER 10/27/03 Claims for all vehicles that are within the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage must be submitted as a warranty repair. ACESII will not accept claims for reimbursement under the 02M01 program for vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage. Vehicles that have branded titles are eligible for this repair under the 02M01 program. Vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage Claims are to be submitted as a normal warranty claim in accordance with TSB 04-11-01. Vehicles beyond New Vehicle Warranty Coverage (including branded titled vehicles) Claims are to be submitted following program 02M01 guidelines. Future Warranty Extension Customer Satisfaction Programs (CSP) Future Warranty Extension CSPs will follow these claiming instructions; only those vehicles outside the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage will be submitted as a CSP type repair. OWNER REFUNDS Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid repairs made on or before the last day of the month of the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair was made away from the servicing dealer). Failure of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460) will not have an impact on any other component of the vehicle. Therefore, refunds will only be granted for the replacement of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460). All supporting documentation must be retained in accordance with the Warranty and Policy Manual. Refer to ACESII manual for refund information. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. Attachment II - Labor Allowances and Parts Ordering Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3233 LABOR ALLOWANCES [NEW] NOTE: If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service Support Center. Special Notes: ^ 02M01C labor operation is in effect for repairs performed on or after 10/27/03. ^ Diagnostics performed beyond retrieving continuous DTC will not be paid for under this program. ^ Pinpoint diagnostics are not required to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor; therefore labor time has been adjusted accordingly. ^ Due to the use of specific DTCs to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor, this program will not cover any other continuous DTCs; normal vehicle warranty would apply for any other DTCs. ^ There will be no related damage claims allowed for this program. PARTS REQUIREMENTS Parts will not be direct shipped for this program. Order your parts requirement through normal order processing. PARTS REQUIREMENTS/ORDERING INFORMATION NOTE: If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service Support Center. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3234 DEALER PRICE For latest prices, check DOES II or updated price book. PARTS RETENTION Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures." EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: If a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine and a dash-mounted EGR pressure sensor is encountered, call the Special Service Support Center. 1. Retrieve continuous DTCs. NOTE: Replace the EGR pressure sensor only if one or more of the following continuous DTCs are present: ^ P1400 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE DETECTED ^ P1401 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE DETECTED ^ P0401- EGR FLOW INSUFFICIENT DETECTED ^ P0402- EGR FLOW EXCESSIVE DETECTED Any other DTC present is not covered by this program. 2. If one or more of the DTCs listed above is present, replace the EGR pressure sensor (9J460) as follows: a) Key off. b) Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the EGR pressure sensor from the EGR tube. c) Install the new EGR pressure sensor onto the EGR tube and connect the electrical connector. Note: Refer to Section 303-08 of the appropriate workshop manual if additional information is required. 3. Clear continuous DTCs. 4. Perform KOEO and KOER self tests. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3235 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3236 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3237 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set Article No. 04-11-1 06/08/2004 DRIVEABILITY - STREAMLINED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR VEHICLES WITH MIL ON AND DTCS P0401, P0402, P1400 OR P1401 - ADDITIONAL SYMPTOMS MAY INCLUDE RUNS ROUGH, LACKS POWER, SURGE, POOR FUEL ECONOMY FORD: 2000-2002 TAURUS 2001-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, FOCUS, MUSTANG 2001 EXPLORER USPS 2001-2002 E SERIES, ESCAPE, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 2002-2003 EXPLORER LINCOLN: 2001-2002 TOWN CAR MERCURY: 2000-2002 SABLE 2001-2002 COUGAR, GRAND MARQUIS 2002-2003 MOUNTAINEER This article supersedes TSB 04-3-1 to update service part information and applications. ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) "ON" with or without the following symptoms: Rough Running, Lack of Power, Surge or Poor Fuel Economy, along with diagnostic trouble codes (DTC's) P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401. This may be caused by an intermittently functioning tube-mounted delta pressure feedback EGR (DPFE) sensor (Figure 1). ACTION For vehicles equipped with a tube-mounted DPFE sensor, perform the following diagnostic procedure and repair action. This procedure supersedes the diagnostic procedure in the PC/ED Manual for the issue described above. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 3242 NOTE ALL LISTED APPLICATIONS CAN NOW BE SERVICED WITH DPFE SENSOR 4U7Z-9J460-AA NOTE THIS ARTICLE APPLIES TO THE FULL MODEL YEAR FOR ALL VEHICLES SHOWN EXCEPT THE FOLLOWING: ^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L DOHC - Built After May 2002 ^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L OHV - Built After February 2002 ^ 2002 Econoline And F-150 4.2L OHV - Built After April 9, 2002 ^ 2003 Explorer 4dr/Mountaineer 4.6L SOHC - Built After February 2, 2003 SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Retrieve continuous DTC(s). 2. If P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401 are present, turn ignition OFF and replace the DPFE sensor. 3. Clear continuous DTC(s). 4. Perform key on engine off (KOEO) and key on engine running (KOER) self-test. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 3243 Labor Operations Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9J460 42 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 3244 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 05-16-11 > Aug > 05 > Restraints - Seat Belts Slow to Retract Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set Article No. 04-11-1 06/08/2004 DRIVEABILITY - STREAMLINED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR VEHICLES WITH MIL ON AND DTCS P0401, P0402, P1400 OR P1401 - ADDITIONAL SYMPTOMS MAY INCLUDE RUNS ROUGH, LACKS POWER, SURGE, POOR FUEL ECONOMY FORD: 2000-2002 TAURUS 2001-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, FOCUS, MUSTANG 2001 EXPLORER USPS 2001-2002 E SERIES, ESCAPE, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 2002-2003 EXPLORER LINCOLN: 2001-2002 TOWN CAR MERCURY: 2000-2002 SABLE 2001-2002 COUGAR, GRAND MARQUIS 2002-2003 MOUNTAINEER This article supersedes TSB 04-3-1 to update service part information and applications. ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) "ON" with or without the following symptoms: Rough Running, Lack of Power, Surge or Poor Fuel Economy, along with diagnostic trouble codes (DTC's) P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401. This may be caused by an intermittently functioning tube-mounted delta pressure feedback EGR (DPFE) sensor (Figure 1). ACTION For vehicles equipped with a tube-mounted DPFE sensor, perform the following diagnostic procedure and repair action. This procedure supersedes the diagnostic procedure in the PC/ED Manual for the issue described above. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 05-16-11 > Aug > 05 > Restraints - Seat Belts Slow to Retract > Page 3250 NOTE ALL LISTED APPLICATIONS CAN NOW BE SERVICED WITH DPFE SENSOR 4U7Z-9J460-AA NOTE THIS ARTICLE APPLIES TO THE FULL MODEL YEAR FOR ALL VEHICLES SHOWN EXCEPT THE FOLLOWING: ^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L DOHC - Built After May 2002 ^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L OHV - Built After February 2002 ^ 2002 Econoline And F-150 4.2L OHV - Built After April 9, 2002 ^ 2003 Explorer 4dr/Mountaineer 4.6L SOHC - Built After February 2, 2003 SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Retrieve continuous DTC(s). 2. If P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401 are present, turn ignition OFF and replace the DPFE sensor. 3. Clear continuous DTC(s). 4. Perform key on engine off (KOEO) and key on engine running (KOER) self-test. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 05-16-11 > Aug > 05 > Restraints - Seat Belts Slow to Retract > Page 3251 Labor Operations Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9J460 42 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 05-16-11 > Aug > 05 > Restraints - Seat Belts Slow to Retract > Page 3252 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3253 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3254 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 86) is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback sensor receives this signal through two hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the aluminum differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3255 Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 87) is identical in operation as the larger metal or plastic DPFE sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the underside of the sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3256 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor by sliding up and off the EGR tube. NOTE: The 3.0L (4V) engine is shown, the 2.0L Zetec engine is similar. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3260 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > PCM Inputs Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation PCM Inputs THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Typical Throttle Position (TP) Sensor The Throttle Position (TP) sensor (Figure 42) is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a three-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases corrosion resistance on terminals and increases connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, four operating conditions are determined by the PCM from the TP. Those conditions are closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration), part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration), wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank), and throttle angle rate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > PCM Inputs > Page 3263 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Systems THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is monitored by the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) II system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government regulations. For additional information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System Hardware-PCM Inputs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications Digital Transmission Range Sensor: Specifications Park/neutral position (PNP) switch 18 ft.lb Transmission range (TR) sensor bolts 9 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3267 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3268 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3269 Digital Transmission Range Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Special Tools Special Tool(s) Removal 1. Place the vehicle in NEUTRAL. 2. Disconnect the battery cables. 3. Remove the battery and tray. 4. Disconnect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAP) sensor. 5. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3270 6. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 7. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the thermostat housing to gain access to the transmission range (TR) sensor. Remove the thermostat housing. 8. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor. 1. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the TR sensor. Installation 1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position. Install the transmission range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3271 2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts. ^ Connect the electrical connector. 3. Install the thermostat housing. 4. Install the air cleaner assembly. 5. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover. 6. Connect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAF) sensor. 7. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or incorrect routing position. Install the battery and tray. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3272 8. NOTE: When the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, some abnormal drive symptoms can occur while the vehicle relearns its adaptive strategy. The vehicle may need to be driven 160 km (100 miles) or more to relearn the strategy. Connect the battery cables. 9. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should be active only in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications Vehicle Speed Sensor: Specifications Vehicle speed sensor (VSS) bolt 62 in.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3276 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3277 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3278 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) The Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (Figure 45) is a variable reluctance or Hall-effect sensor that generates a waveform with a frequency that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the vehicle is moving at a relatively low velocity, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as fuel injection, ignition control, transmission/transaxle shift scheduling and torque converter clutch scheduling. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3279 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the VSS. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect Technical Service Bulletin # 02M01S6 Date: 040831 Attachment I - Administrative Information Customer Satisfaction Program 02M01-S6 Certain Vehicles Equipped with a Tube-Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Additional EGR Pressure Sensor Warranty Coverage OASIS You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this program. Note: Submission of an "M" program claim will not remove the vehicle from OASIS because the affected vehicles are eligible for multiple repairs if the affected condition reoccurs during the extended warranty time/mileage period. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line that the FSA is claimed on. CLAIMING INSTRUCTIONS FOR REPAIRS WITH A REPAIR DATE ON OR AFTER 10/27/03 Claims for all vehicles that are within the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage must be submitted as a warranty repair. ACESII will not accept claims for reimbursement under the 02M01 program for vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage. Vehicles that have branded titles are eligible for this repair under the 02M01 program. Vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage Claims are to be submitted as a normal warranty claim in accordance with TSB 04-11-01. Vehicles beyond New Vehicle Warranty Coverage (including branded titled vehicles) Claims are to be submitted following program 02M01 guidelines. Future Warranty Extension Customer Satisfaction Programs (CSP) Future Warranty Extension CSPs will follow these claiming instructions; only those vehicles outside the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage will be submitted as a CSP type repair. OWNER REFUNDS Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid repairs made on or before the last day of the month of the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair was made away from the servicing dealer). Failure of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460) will not have an impact on any other component of the vehicle. Therefore, refunds will only be granted for the replacement of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460). All supporting documentation must be retained in accordance with the Warranty and Policy Manual. Refer to ACESII manual for refund information. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. Attachment II - Labor Allowances and Parts Ordering Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3289 LABOR ALLOWANCES [NEW] NOTE: If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service Support Center. Special Notes: ^ 02M01C labor operation is in effect for repairs performed on or after 10/27/03. ^ Diagnostics performed beyond retrieving continuous DTC will not be paid for under this program. ^ Pinpoint diagnostics are not required to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor; therefore labor time has been adjusted accordingly. ^ Due to the use of specific DTCs to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor, this program will not cover any other continuous DTCs; normal vehicle warranty would apply for any other DTCs. ^ There will be no related damage claims allowed for this program. PARTS REQUIREMENTS Parts will not be direct shipped for this program. Order your parts requirement through normal order processing. PARTS REQUIREMENTS/ORDERING INFORMATION NOTE: If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service Support Center. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3290 DEALER PRICE For latest prices, check DOES II or updated price book. PARTS RETENTION Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures." EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: If a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine and a dash-mounted EGR pressure sensor is encountered, call the Special Service Support Center. 1. Retrieve continuous DTCs. NOTE: Replace the EGR pressure sensor only if one or more of the following continuous DTCs are present: ^ P1400 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE DETECTED ^ P1401 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE DETECTED ^ P0401- EGR FLOW INSUFFICIENT DETECTED ^ P0402- EGR FLOW EXCESSIVE DETECTED Any other DTC present is not covered by this program. 2. If one or more of the DTCs listed above is present, replace the EGR pressure sensor (9J460) as follows: a) Key off. b) Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the EGR pressure sensor from the EGR tube. c) Install the new EGR pressure sensor onto the EGR tube and connect the electrical connector. Note: Refer to Section 303-08 of the appropriate workshop manual if additional information is required. 3. Clear continuous DTCs. 4. Perform KOEO and KOER self tests. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3291 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3292 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3293 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect Technical Service Bulletin # 02M01S6 Date: 040831 Attachment I - Administrative Information Customer Satisfaction Program 02M01-S6 Certain Vehicles Equipped with a Tube-Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Additional EGR Pressure Sensor Warranty Coverage OASIS You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this program. Note: Submission of an "M" program claim will not remove the vehicle from OASIS because the affected vehicles are eligible for multiple repairs if the affected condition reoccurs during the extended warranty time/mileage period. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line that the FSA is claimed on. CLAIMING INSTRUCTIONS FOR REPAIRS WITH A REPAIR DATE ON OR AFTER 10/27/03 Claims for all vehicles that are within the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage must be submitted as a warranty repair. ACESII will not accept claims for reimbursement under the 02M01 program for vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage. Vehicles that have branded titles are eligible for this repair under the 02M01 program. Vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage Claims are to be submitted as a normal warranty claim in accordance with TSB 04-11-01. Vehicles beyond New Vehicle Warranty Coverage (including branded titled vehicles) Claims are to be submitted following program 02M01 guidelines. Future Warranty Extension Customer Satisfaction Programs (CSP) Future Warranty Extension CSPs will follow these claiming instructions; only those vehicles outside the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage will be submitted as a CSP type repair. OWNER REFUNDS Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid repairs made on or before the last day of the month of the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair was made away from the servicing dealer). Failure of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460) will not have an impact on any other component of the vehicle. Therefore, refunds will only be granted for the replacement of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460). All supporting documentation must be retained in accordance with the Warranty and Policy Manual. Refer to ACESII manual for refund information. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. Attachment II - Labor Allowances and Parts Ordering Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3299 LABOR ALLOWANCES [NEW] NOTE: If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service Support Center. Special Notes: ^ 02M01C labor operation is in effect for repairs performed on or after 10/27/03. ^ Diagnostics performed beyond retrieving continuous DTC will not be paid for under this program. ^ Pinpoint diagnostics are not required to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor; therefore labor time has been adjusted accordingly. ^ Due to the use of specific DTCs to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor, this program will not cover any other continuous DTCs; normal vehicle warranty would apply for any other DTCs. ^ There will be no related damage claims allowed for this program. PARTS REQUIREMENTS Parts will not be direct shipped for this program. Order your parts requirement through normal order processing. PARTS REQUIREMENTS/ORDERING INFORMATION NOTE: If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service Support Center. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3300 DEALER PRICE For latest prices, check DOES II or updated price book. PARTS RETENTION Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures." EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: If a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine and a dash-mounted EGR pressure sensor is encountered, call the Special Service Support Center. 1. Retrieve continuous DTCs. NOTE: Replace the EGR pressure sensor only if one or more of the following continuous DTCs are present: ^ P1400 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE DETECTED ^ P1401 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE DETECTED ^ P0401- EGR FLOW INSUFFICIENT DETECTED ^ P0402- EGR FLOW EXCESSIVE DETECTED Any other DTC present is not covered by this program. 2. If one or more of the DTCs listed above is present, replace the EGR pressure sensor (9J460) as follows: a) Key off. b) Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the EGR pressure sensor from the EGR tube. c) Install the new EGR pressure sensor onto the EGR tube and connect the electrical connector. Note: Refer to Section 303-08 of the appropriate workshop manual if additional information is required. 3. Clear continuous DTCs. 4. Perform KOEO and KOER self tests. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3301 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3302 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3303 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set Article No. 04-11-1 06/08/2004 DRIVEABILITY - STREAMLINED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR VEHICLES WITH MIL ON AND DTCS P0401, P0402, P1400 OR P1401 - ADDITIONAL SYMPTOMS MAY INCLUDE RUNS ROUGH, LACKS POWER, SURGE, POOR FUEL ECONOMY FORD: 2000-2002 TAURUS 2001-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, FOCUS, MUSTANG 2001 EXPLORER USPS 2001-2002 E SERIES, ESCAPE, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 2002-2003 EXPLORER LINCOLN: 2001-2002 TOWN CAR MERCURY: 2000-2002 SABLE 2001-2002 COUGAR, GRAND MARQUIS 2002-2003 MOUNTAINEER This article supersedes TSB 04-3-1 to update service part information and applications. ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) "ON" with or without the following symptoms: Rough Running, Lack of Power, Surge or Poor Fuel Economy, along with diagnostic trouble codes (DTC's) P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401. This may be caused by an intermittently functioning tube-mounted delta pressure feedback EGR (DPFE) sensor (Figure 1). ACTION For vehicles equipped with a tube-mounted DPFE sensor, perform the following diagnostic procedure and repair action. This procedure supersedes the diagnostic procedure in the PC/ED Manual for the issue described above. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 3308 NOTE ALL LISTED APPLICATIONS CAN NOW BE SERVICED WITH DPFE SENSOR 4U7Z-9J460-AA NOTE THIS ARTICLE APPLIES TO THE FULL MODEL YEAR FOR ALL VEHICLES SHOWN EXCEPT THE FOLLOWING: ^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L DOHC - Built After May 2002 ^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L OHV - Built After February 2002 ^ 2002 Econoline And F-150 4.2L OHV - Built After April 9, 2002 ^ 2003 Explorer 4dr/Mountaineer 4.6L SOHC - Built After February 2, 2003 SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Retrieve continuous DTC(s). 2. If P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401 are present, turn ignition OFF and replace the DPFE sensor. 3. Clear continuous DTC(s). 4. Perform key on engine off (KOEO) and key on engine running (KOER) self-test. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 3309 Labor Operations Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9J460 42 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 3310 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set Article No. 04-11-1 06/08/2004 DRIVEABILITY - STREAMLINED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR VEHICLES WITH MIL ON AND DTCS P0401, P0402, P1400 OR P1401 - ADDITIONAL SYMPTOMS MAY INCLUDE RUNS ROUGH, LACKS POWER, SURGE, POOR FUEL ECONOMY FORD: 2000-2002 TAURUS 2001-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, FOCUS, MUSTANG 2001 EXPLORER USPS 2001-2002 E SERIES, ESCAPE, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 2002-2003 EXPLORER LINCOLN: 2001-2002 TOWN CAR MERCURY: 2000-2002 SABLE 2001-2002 COUGAR, GRAND MARQUIS 2002-2003 MOUNTAINEER This article supersedes TSB 04-3-1 to update service part information and applications. ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) "ON" with or without the following symptoms: Rough Running, Lack of Power, Surge or Poor Fuel Economy, along with diagnostic trouble codes (DTC's) P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401. This may be caused by an intermittently functioning tube-mounted delta pressure feedback EGR (DPFE) sensor (Figure 1). ACTION For vehicles equipped with a tube-mounted DPFE sensor, perform the following diagnostic procedure and repair action. This procedure supersedes the diagnostic procedure in the PC/ED Manual for the issue described above. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 3316 NOTE ALL LISTED APPLICATIONS CAN NOW BE SERVICED WITH DPFE SENSOR 4U7Z-9J460-AA NOTE THIS ARTICLE APPLIES TO THE FULL MODEL YEAR FOR ALL VEHICLES SHOWN EXCEPT THE FOLLOWING: ^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L DOHC - Built After May 2002 ^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L OHV - Built After February 2002 ^ 2002 Econoline And F-150 4.2L OHV - Built After April 9, 2002 ^ 2003 Explorer 4dr/Mountaineer 4.6L SOHC - Built After February 2, 2003 SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Retrieve continuous DTC(s). 2. If P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401 are present, turn ignition OFF and replace the DPFE sensor. 3. Clear continuous DTC(s). 4. Perform key on engine off (KOEO) and key on engine running (KOER) self-test. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 3317 Labor Operations Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9J460 42 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 3318 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3319 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3320 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 86) is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback sensor receives this signal through two hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the aluminum differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3321 Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 87) is identical in operation as the larger metal or plastic DPFE sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the underside of the sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3322 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor by sliding up and off the EGR tube. NOTE: The 3.0L (4V) engine is shown, the 2.0L Zetec engine is similar. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations > Page 3327 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations > Page 3328 Mass Air Flow Sensor: Description and Operation MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire (Figure 36). If the hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the air mass flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio (Figure 37). This input is also used in determining transmission Electronic Pressure Control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling. Some MAF sensors have Integrated Bypass Technology (IBT) with an integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor. The present applications with IBT are: Focus, Escort (4V), 2.0L Cougar, Escape, Taurus/Sable, Windstar, Explorer/Mountaineer and E-Series. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations > Page 3329 Mass Air Flow Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube. 2. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the four nuts and the MAF sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3333 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3334 Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor The Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) sensor (Figure 31) is a diaphragm strain gauge device in which resistance changes with pressure. The electrical resistance of a strain gauge increases as pressure increases, and decreases as pressure decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to pressure. Strain gauge type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The FRP sensor measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This signal is used by the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulse width and meter fuel to each engine combustion cylinder. Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor The Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) sensor (Figure 32) senses the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The return fuel line to the fuel tank has been deleted in this type of fuel system. The differential fuel/intake manifold pressure together with measured fuel temperature provides an indication of the fuel vapors in the fuel rail. Both differential pressure and temperature feedback signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserve fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to decrease. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3338 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3339 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch The Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) switch (Figure 72) is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump. The purpose of the IFS switch is to shut off the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel ball held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the switch and shuts off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the Owner Guide for the location of the IFS. Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3340 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the cowl side trim panel. 1 Remove the pin-type retainers. 2 Remove the nut. 3 Remove the cowl side trim panel. 2. Remove the Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) switch. 1 Disconnect the connector. 2 Remove the screws and the IFS switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3344 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > PCM Inputs Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation PCM Inputs THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Typical Throttle Position (TP) Sensor The Throttle Position (TP) sensor (Figure 42) is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a three-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases corrosion resistance on terminals and increases connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, four operating conditions are determined by the PCM from the TP. Those conditions are closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration), part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration), wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank), and throttle angle rate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > PCM Inputs > Page 3347 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Systems THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is monitored by the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) II system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government regulations. For additional information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System Hardware-PCM Inputs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3352 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3353 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR The Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston No.1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and used for synchronizing the firing of sequential fuel injectors. The Coil On Plug (COP) Ignition applications also use the CMP signal to select the proper ignition coil to fire. The input circuit to the PCM is referred to as the CMP input or circuit. Typical Hall-Effect Sensor Typical Variable Reluctance Sensor There are two types of CMP sensors: the three pin connector Hall-effect type sensor (Figure 22) and the two pin connector variable reluctance sensor (Figure 23). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3354 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolt. 3 Remove the sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3358 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3359 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (INTEGRATED IGNITION SYSTEMS) Three Different Types Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensors The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The trigger wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L ten cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the trigger wheel, the CKP indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to fixed reference (Figure 25). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3360 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the exhaust manifold. 2. Remove the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolt. 3 Remove the sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the upper steering column shroud. 3. Remove the screws and the lower steering column shroud. 4. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. 5. Using a small tool, depress the ignition lock cylinder release button and pull the ignition lock cylinder out. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3368 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Knock Sensor Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS) The Knock Sensor (KS) (Figure 35) is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3369 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Disconnect the KS electrical connector and remove the connector from the mounting bracket. NOTE: The Knock Sensor (KS) is located on the RH side of the cylinder block. 3. Remove the nut and the KS. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation PRESSURE TEST POINT There is a pressure test point with a schrader fitting in the fuel rail that relieves fuel pressure and measures the fuel injector supply pressure for service and diagnostic procedures. Before servicing or testing the fuel system, read any CAUTION, WARNING, and HANDLING information. ON VEHICLES NOT EQUIPPED WITH A SCHRADER VALVE, USE ROTUNDA FUEL PRESSURE TEST KIT #134-ROO87 OR EQUIVALENT. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Hot Idle ................................................................................................................................................ ......................................................... 800 - 900 RPM Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Remove the battery tray. 3. Remove the bolt and the intake pipe. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. NOTE: Make sure the front sponge seal of the intake pipe is seated on the shroud panel correctly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve Eliminated Fuel Pressure Release: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve Eliminated Article No. 02-21-2 10/28/02 FUEL - FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE DISCONTINUED - 2.0L ENGINE FORD: 2000-2002 FOCUS 2001-2002 ESCORT ZX2, ESCAPE MERCURY: 1999-2002 COUGAR ISSUE Vehicles equipped with the 2.0L 4V Zetec and the 2.0L SPI no longer have the Fuel Pressure Relief Valve (Schrader Valve). ACTION To relieve or manually check fuel pressures, refer to the following Service Procedures for details. SERVICE PROCEDURE Service Procedure For Relieving Fuel Pressure 1. Remove the fuel pump relay in the engine compartment fuse box. 2. Start the engine and allow idling until the engine stalls. 3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately five seconds to ensure the fuel injection supply manifold pressure has been released. 4. When fuel system service is complete, Install Fuel Pump Relay. 5. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting engine. NOTE IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM. 6. Start vehicle and check for leaks. NOTE IT IS POSSIBLE THAT A DTC MAY BE SET DUE TO THE PUMP RELAY BEING PULLED AND THE ENGINE STARTED AND RUN OUT OF FUEL. IF DTC'S ARE SET, CLEAR ALL DTC'S BEFORE RETURNING VEHICLE TO THE CUSTOMER. Service Procedure For Manually Checking Fuel Pressure With A Gauge. 1. Remove the fuel pump relay in the engine compartment fuse box. 2. Start the engine and allow idling until the engine stalls. 3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately five seconds to make sure the fuel injection supply manifold pressure has been released. 4. Disconnect fuel line at the fuel rail to chassis line pierce point. a. If the vehicle is equipped with Quick Release Coupling Push Connector at the fuel rail to fuel line pierce point, separate the coupling by depressing the tabs and pulling on the fuel line. b. If the vehicle is equipped with a Spring Lock Coupling Connector using special tool 310-D00S or equivalent 5. Install the Schrader Valve service tool adaptor listed in the chart in this article. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve Eliminated > Page 3387 6. Install fuel pressure gauge special service tool 310-012 or equivalent. 7. Install fuel pump relay. 8. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for oaks before starting engine. NOTE IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM. 9. Start and run engine to surge air from fuel system (air trapped in the fuel system may effect test results). 10. Perform normal diagnosti35 ann service repairs as needed. 11. After fuel system service is complete, relieve fuel system pressure using fuel pressure gauge relief valve. 12. Remove special service tools 13. Re-connect fuel system lines 14. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting engine. NOTE IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM. 15. Start vehicle and check for leaks. NOTE IT IS POSSIBLE THAT A DTC MAY BE SET DUE TO THE PUMP RELAY BEING PULLED AND THE ENGINE STARTED AND RUN OUT OF FUEL. IF DTC'S ARE SET, CLEAR ALL DTC'S BEFORE RETURNING VEHICLE TO THE CUSTOMER. Service Tools Required Chart OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 404000, 490000, 497000, 499000, 603300, 607000, 698298 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3388 Fuel Pressure Release: Service Precautions WARNING: ^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3389 Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair 1. Remove the LH engine compartment relay panel cover. WARNING: ^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. NOTE: Before disconnecting any fuel tube, release the fuel pressure from the fuel system. 2. Remove the fuel pump relay. 3. Start the engine. 4. After the engine stalls, crank the engine over two more times to be sure all the pressure has been released. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. Install the fuel pump relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3390 Fuel Pressure Gauge Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications Firing Order: Specifications 4-Cyl Firing Order: 1 3 4 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3394 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Service Precautions Ignition Cable: Service Precautions CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the ignition wire directly, as the wire may separate from the connector inside the spark plug boot. ^ Correct installation of the ignition wires is critical to engine operation. If one spark plug wire is not correctly installed at either the spark plug or the ignition coil, both spark plugs connected to the ignition coil may not fire under load. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3402 Ignition Cable: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Grasp the spark plug boot firmly and with a twisting-pulling motion, disconnect the ignition wires from the spark plugs. CAUTION: Do not pull on the ignition wire directly, as the wire may separate from the connector inside the spark plug boot. 2. Disconnect the ignition wires from the ignition coil and remove the wires. INSTALLATION 1. Connect the ignition wires to the correct ignition coil terminals. CAUTION: Correct installation of the ignition wires is critical to engine operation. If one spark plug wire is not correctly installed at either the spark plug or the ignition coil, both spark plugs connected to the ignition coil may not fire under load. NOTE: ^ Whenever an ignition wire is reinstalled or a new one is installed, apply Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric compound to the interior surface of the ignition wire boot. ^ Before installing the ignition wires, inspect the ignition wires for any visible damage; install new ignition wires if necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3403 2. Connect the ignition wires to the correct spark plugs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Spark Plug Gap Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Gap Spark Plug Gap ................................................................................................................................... .................................................. 1.3 mm (0.051 inch) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Spark Plug Gap > Page 3408 Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Torque Spark Plug Torque ............................................................................................................................... ...................................................... 15 Nm (11 ft lbs) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3409 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark Plug Type Cylinders 1 And 3 ..................................................................................................... ................................................................ AZFS-32F Spark Plug Type Cylinders 2 And 4 .................. ................................................................................................................................................ AZFS-32FE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3410 Spark Plug: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the spark plug wires from the spark plugs. 2. Remove the spark plugs. NOTE: ^ If an original spark plug is reused, install it in the same cylinder from which it was removed. New spark plugs can be used in any cylinder. ^ Use compressed air to remove any foreign material from the spark plug well before removing the spark plugs. 3. Inspect the spark plugs. 4. Clean the spark plugs with a wire brush or a professional spark plug cleaner (follow the manufacturer's instructions). INSTALLATION 1. Adjust the plug gap as necessary. 2. Install the spark plugs. NOTE: Apply Anti-Seize Lubricant to the lower three threads of the spark plugs. Do not allow lubricant to contaminate the spark plug electrodes or insulator tips. 3. Connect the spark plug wires to the spark plugs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications The indicated compression pressure are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is within 75% of the highest reading. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 3414 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection General Remarks NOTE: Removing fuses and disconnecting electrical components causes the powertrain control module (PCM) to log an error message. After the measurements have been carried out this error message should be cleared from memory by connecting to PCM. NOTE: Only check the compression pressure with the valves set to the prescribed clearance (if this can be adjusted). The compression pressure should be checked with the engine at operating temperature. Check The Compression Pressure WARNING: On manual transmissions shift the transmission into neutral. On automatic transmission vehicles, select "P". Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. Remove the fuel pump relay. 2. Start the engine - the engine will start, run for a few seconds then stall. 3. Remove the spark plugs. 4. Install the compression tester. 5. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit. With the ignition switch OFF, using the auxiliary starter switch, crank the engine a minimum of five compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the approximate number of compression strokes required to obtain the highest reading. 6. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of compression strokes. 7. Install the components in reverse order, observing the specified tightening torques. 8. Reset the PCM fault memory. Interpretation of the Results The indicated compression pressure are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is within 75% of the highest reading. CAUTION: If engine oil is sprayed into the combustion chamber, after carrying out the measurement run the engine at 2000 rpm for about 15 minutes, in order to burn the oil and prevent damage to the catalytic converter. If the measurement on one or more cylinders is much lower than the specified value, spray some engine oil into the combustion chamber and repeat the compression measurement. If the reading greatly improves, the piston rings are damaged. If the reading stays the same, the cause is either damaged valve seats or valve stem seals. If the measurements for two cylinders next to each other are both too low then it is very likely that the cylinder head gasket between them is burnt through. This can also be recognized by traces of engine oil in the coolant and/or coolant in the engine oil. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve Clearance Intake 0.006 in Exhaust 0.012 in Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 3418 Valve Clearance: Adjustments Removal 1. Remove the timing belt. 2. NOTE: Measure each valve's clearance at base circle with the lobe pointed away from the tappet, before removing the camshafts. Failure to measure all clearances prior to removing the camshafts will necessitate repeated removal and installation and wasted labor time. Use a feeler gauge to measure each valve's clearance and record its location. 3. Remove the camshafts. 4. CAUTION: If the camshaft and valve tappets are to be reused, mark the location of the valve tappets to make sure that they are assembled in their original positions. Remove the valve tappets from the cylinder head. 5. NOTE: A mid-range clearance is the most desirable: ^ intake: 0.15 mm (0.006 inch) ^ exhaust: 0.3 mm (0.012 inch) NOTE: Select tappets using this formula: tappet thickness = measured clearance plus the base tappet thickness minus most desirable thickness. Select tappets and mark installation location. Installation 1. NOTE: Lubricate the valve tappets with Super Premium SAE 5W-20 Motor Oil or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C153-H. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 3419 Install the valve tappets. 2. Install the camshafts. 3. Confirm each valve's clearance at base circle with the lobe pointed away from the tappet. 4. Install the timing belt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Absolute Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation THERMAL MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure (TMAP) Sensor The Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor (TMAP) (Figure 41) consists of a Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor and an integrated thermistor. The thermistor part of the sensor is currently not being used. The MAP part of the sensor measures intake manifold air absolute pressure. The PCM uses information from the MAP sensor, Throttle Position (TP) sensor, Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor, Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) or Cylinder Head Temperature (CKP) sensor and Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor to determine how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations > Page 3427 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations > Page 3428 Mass Air Flow Sensor: Description and Operation MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire (Figure 36). If the hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the air mass flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio (Figure 37). This input is also used in determining transmission Electronic Pressure Control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling. Some MAF sensors have Integrated Bypass Technology (IBT) with an integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor. The present applications with IBT are: Focus, Escort (4V), 2.0L Cougar, Escape, Taurus/Sable, Windstar, Explorer/Mountaineer and E-Series. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations > Page 3429 Mass Air Flow Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube. 2. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the four nuts and the MAF sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot and Cold Wire Terminals The Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensors (Figure 34) and integrated Mass Air Flow (MAF) type (Figure 37), are thermistor devices in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3433 Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The IAT provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air temperature information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel spark and MAF. The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT sensor. Supercharged 5.4L Lightning vehicles use (2) AT sensors. Both sensors operate as above. However, one is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for standard OBD II/cold weather input, while a second sensor Second Intake Air Temperature (IAT2) is located after the supercharger in the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air temperature information to the PCM to control border-line spark and to help determine intercooler efficiency. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3440 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3441 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR The Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston No.1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and used for synchronizing the firing of sequential fuel injectors. The Coil On Plug (COP) Ignition applications also use the CMP signal to select the proper ignition coil to fire. The input circuit to the PCM is referred to as the CMP input or circuit. Typical Hall-Effect Sensor Typical Variable Reluctance Sensor There are two types of CMP sensors: the three pin connector Hall-effect type sensor (Figure 22) and the two pin connector variable reluctance sensor (Figure 23). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3442 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolt. 3 Remove the sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Clutch Switch: Description and Operation CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP)/Park-Neutral Position (PNP) Switches The Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) switch (Figure 24) is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position and, in some manual transmission applications, both the clutch pedal engagement position and the gear shift position. The PCM provides a 5-volt reference Vehicle Reference Voltage (VREF) signal to the CPP switch and/or a Park/Neutral Position (PNP) switch (on the CPP signal line). If the CPP switch (either or both CPP and PNP switches are closed) is closed, indicating the clutch pedal is engaged and the shift lever is in the NEUTRAL position, the output voltage (5 volts) from the PCM is grounded through the signal return line to the PCM, and there is 1 volt or less. One volt or less indicates there is a reduced load on the engine. If the CPP switch (or PNP switch on vehicle or both CPP and PNP switches open on the vehicle) is open, meaning the clutch pedal is disengaged (all systems) and the shift lever is not in NEUTRAL position (PNP switch systems), the input on the CPP signal to the PCM will be approximately 5 volts. Then, the 5-volt signal input at the PCM will indicate a load on the engine. The PCM uses the load information in mass air flow and fuel calculations. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3446 Clutch Switch: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) electrical connector. 2. Remove the CPP locknut and the switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3450 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3454 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3455 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (INTEGRATED IGNITION SYSTEMS) Three Different Types Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensors The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The trigger wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L ten cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the trigger wheel, the CKP indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to fixed reference (Figure 25). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3456 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the exhaust manifold. 2. Remove the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolt. 3 Remove the sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Data Link Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Find and Use These Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams ^ System Diagrams ^ Grounds Diagrams Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3462 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow. Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the diagram. Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be found. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3463 Fuse And Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. Fuse Circuits Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery. Ground Distribution Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text "partial". Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3464 Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of (1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces). The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number. Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the way out by a spring. Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control. A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the way in. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. circuit Numbering Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification Circuit Numbering: Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting electrical circuits. Function: The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter "S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit. System-Connection (including branch): Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate wires in one connection with the same function. Wire Identification (wire colors): The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3465 Wire Identification Example Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know the following information about the wire: Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit System: AC = Headlamp leveling Connection: 3 = Switch connection A = Branch Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe). Circuit Identification Charts Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3466 Circuit Identification Chart System Codes Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3467 Sample Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3468 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3469 Sample Diagram Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3470 Circuit Identification Chart SYSTEM CODES CHART Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3471 SAMPLE DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3472 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3473 Sample Diagram Electrical Symbols ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3474 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3475 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3476 Types of Diagrams Shown Types of Diagrams Shown Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them. Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations. Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system information suitable for diagnostic operations. Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a relationship to them, are also included. All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding of the system component interactions. Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type. Wire Color Code Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3477 Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3478 Data Link Connector: Diagnostic Aids These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3479 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3480 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3481 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-5-5 > Mar > 01 > PCM - Charge Lamp ON in Cold Temperatures Powertrain Control Module: Customer Interest PCM - Charge Lamp ON in Cold Temperatures Article No. 01-5-5 March 19, 2001 ELECTRICAL - CHARGING SYSTEM WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED - DURING COLD AMBIENT TEMPERATURES BELOW - 6 DEGREES CELSIUS (20 DEGREES F.) VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH 2.0L ZETEC ENGINE BUILT 7/8/2000 THROUGH 2/12/2001 ONLY FORD: 2001 ESCAPE ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a red charge lamp illumination in cold ambient temperatures below-6°C (20°F). This may be caused by the calibration of the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). ACTION Verify red charge lamp illumination. If normal diagnostics cannot resolve condition, reprogram the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with latest calibration. Refer to the PCM Calibration Information Chart shown for details. Obtain an Authorized Modifications Decal (FPS 8262 - obtainable through DOES II, 25/pkg) and list the date, dealer number, and summary of modifications performed. Select a prominent place adjacent to the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal suitable for installing the Authorized Modifications Decal. Clean the area, install the decal, and cover it with a clear plastic decal shield. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 203000, 203100, 204000, 204200, 206000, 290000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures Powertrain Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures TSB 04-24-14 12/13/04 FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS 1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis, Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement. ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed. ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs. Verify repair after reprogramming. SERVICE PROCEDURE PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement 1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle. 2. Use WDS if available. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 3495 a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply. b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level. 3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool, such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS. NOTE IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS, GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF. PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD 1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure. 2. Install the new PCM. NOTE IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER. 3. Attempt to start the vehicle. 4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM. 5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639. a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1. b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc. 6. Check for DTC B2900. a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during this procedure. b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7. 7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures. REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement 1. Verify all cables are properly connected. 2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level. 3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level. 4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again. 5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open previous session, and attempt reprogramming again. 6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure. BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure. 1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits. 2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity. NOTE IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 3496 INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC. 3. Connect WDS to vehicle. 4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK. 5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK. 6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK. 7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press TICK. 8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK. 9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK. 10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above". 11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK. 12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed above. Press TICK. 13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens. 14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 01-5-5 > Mar > 01 > PCM - Charge Lamp ON in Cold Temperatures Powertrain Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins PCM - Charge Lamp ON in Cold Temperatures Article No. 01-5-5 March 19, 2001 ELECTRICAL - CHARGING SYSTEM WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED - DURING COLD AMBIENT TEMPERATURES BELOW - 6 DEGREES CELSIUS (20 DEGREES F.) VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH 2.0L ZETEC ENGINE BUILT 7/8/2000 THROUGH 2/12/2001 ONLY FORD: 2001 ESCAPE ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a red charge lamp illumination in cold ambient temperatures below-6°C (20°F). This may be caused by the calibration of the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). ACTION Verify red charge lamp illumination. If normal diagnostics cannot resolve condition, reprogram the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with latest calibration. Refer to the PCM Calibration Information Chart shown for details. Obtain an Authorized Modifications Decal (FPS 8262 - obtainable through DOES II, 25/pkg) and list the date, dealer number, and summary of modifications performed. Select a prominent place adjacent to the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal suitable for installing the Authorized Modifications Decal. Clean the area, install the decal, and cover it with a clear plastic decal shield. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 203000, 203100, 204000, 204200, 206000, 290000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures Powertrain Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures TSB 04-24-14 12/13/04 FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS 1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis, Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement. ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed. ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs. Verify repair after reprogramming. SERVICE PROCEDURE PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement 1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle. 2. Use WDS if available. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 3506 a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply. b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level. 3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool, such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS. NOTE IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS, GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF. PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD 1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure. 2. Install the new PCM. NOTE IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER. 3. Attempt to start the vehicle. 4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM. 5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639. a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1. b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc. 6. Check for DTC B2900. a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during this procedure. b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7. 7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures. REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement 1. Verify all cables are properly connected. 2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level. 3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level. 4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again. 5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open previous session, and attempt reprogramming again. 6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure. BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure. 1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits. 2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity. NOTE IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 3507 INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC. 3. Connect WDS to vehicle. 4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK. 5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK. 6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK. 7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press TICK. 8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK. 9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK. 10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above". 11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK. 12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed above. Press TICK. 13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens. 14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3508 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3509 Powertrain Control Module: Diagrams Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3510 Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3511 Part 3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3512 Powertrain Control Module: Description and Operation POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE - VEHICLE SPEED OUTPUT (VSO) The PCM-VSO (Powertrain Control Module - Vehicle Speed Output) speed signal subsystem generates vehicle speed information for distribution to the vehicle's electrical/electronic modules and subsystems that require vehicle speed data. This subsystem senses the transmission output shaft speed with a sensor. The data is processed by the PCM, and distributed as a hard-wired signal or as a multiplexed data message. The key features of the PCM-VSO system are to: ^ Infer vehicle movement from the output shaft sensor signal ^ Convert transmission output shaft rotational information to vehicle speed information ^ Compensate for tire size and axle ratio with a programmed calibration variable ^ Utilize a transfer case sensor for four wheel drive applications ^ Distribute vehicle speed information as a multiplexed message and/or an analog signal The signal from a non-contact shaft sensor (Output Shaft Sensor--OSS or Transfer Case Shaft Sensor--TCSS) mounted on the transmission (automatics, manuals, or 4X4 transfer cases) is sensed directly by the PCM. The PCM converts the OSS or TCSS information to 8000 pulses per mile, based on a tire and axle ratio conversion factor. This conversion factor is programmed into the PCM at the time the vehicle is assembled and can be reprogrammed in the field for servicing changes in the tire size and axle ratio. The PCM transmits the computed vehicle speed and distance traveled information to all the vehicle speed signal users on the vehicle. VSO information can be transmitted by a hard-wired interface between the vehicle speed signal user and the PCM, or by Speed and Odometer SCP multiplexed data messages. The VSO hard-wired signal wave form is a DC square wave with a voltage level of 0 to VBAT. Typical output operating range is 2.22Hz per MPH (1.3808 Hz pr 1 Km/h). Multiplexed data for speed and distance data are transmitted as separate SCP messages over the SCP multiplex link. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory Powertrain Control Module: Service and Repair Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory - Flash EEPROM Description Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) is contained in an Integrated Circuit (IC) internal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle and is capable of being reprogrammed or reflashed repeatedly. As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the Vehicle Identification (VID) block. The VID block must be programmed when replacing the PCM as under Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to perform this procedure may generate fault code: P1639, VID Block not programmed or is corrupt. The VID block in an existing Powertrain Control Module (PCM). can also be tailored to accommodate various hardware changes made to the vehicle since production. Failure to perform this procedure properly may generate fault code: P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of Acceptable Range. This is described under Making Changes to the VID Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The VID block contains many items used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items include the VIN number, octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the presence of speed control and four wheel drive electronic shift on the fly versus manual shift on the fly. Only items applicable to vehicle hardware and supported by the VID block will be displayed on the scan tool. When changing items in the VID block, the strategy will place range limits on certain items such as tire and axle ratio. The VID block is also limited to the number of times to be reconfigured. When this limit is reached, the scan tool will display a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again to reset the VID block. Each of the procedures described below use the Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS). Reprogramming can be performed by a local Ford dealer for any non Ford facility. There are other Enhanced Scan Tools that may have reprogramming capabilities available. Refer to the diagnostic tool manufacturers users manual for details. Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM A new PCM will contain the latest strategy and calibration level for a particular vehicle. However, the VID block will be blank and will need programming. There are two procedures available. The first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM and the second is manual data entry into the new PCM. Automatic data transfer will be performed if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by the use of a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The stored data can now be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been replaced. Manual data entry must be performed if the old module is damaged and is incapable of communicating. Remove and replace the old PCM. You may be instructed to contact the "AS BUILT" data center for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center ONLY if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford L-M technician's, contact your National Hotline for "AS Built" data. Non Ford technicians, use the Fed World website at "fedworld.gov". Select Auto Service Information and search for "Calibrations" or "Vehicle Calibrations" then specify vehicle manufacturer, model name and model year as required. Making Changes to the VID Block A PCM which is programmed may require changes to be made to certain VID information to accommodate vehicle hardware. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the Scan Tool. Making Changes to the PCM Calibration At certain times, the entire EEPROM will need to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to changes made to the strategy or calibration after production or the need to reset the VID block because it has reached its limit. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the Scan Tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory > Page 3515 Powertrain Control Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) cover. 1 Loosen the bolt and disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the nuts and the cover. 3. Remove the PCM. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE SENSOR Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor The Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor (Figure 26) is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and increases as temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM would then initiate a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy details. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor > Page 3521 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor (Figure 27) is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The sensor is threaded into an engine coolant passage. The ECT sensor is similar in construction to the IAT sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3522 Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. Remove the generator. 2. Disconnect the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the CHT sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Pump Signal > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Pump Signal: Description and Operation FUEL PUMP MONITOR Applications Using a Fuel Pump Relay for Fuel Pump On/Off Control The Fuel Pump Monitor (FPM) circuit is spliced into the Fuel Pump Power (FP PWR) circuit and is used by the PCM for diagnostic purposes. The PCM sources a low current voltage down the FPM circuit. With the fuel pump off, this voltage is pulled low by the path to ground through the fuel pump. With the fuel pump off and the FPM circuit low, the PCM can verify that the FPM circuit and the FP PWR circuit are complete from the FPM splice through the fuel pump to ground. This also confirms that the FP PWR or FPM circuits are not shorted to power. With the fuel pump on, voltage is now being supplied from the fuel pump relay to the FP PWR and FPM circuits. With the fuel pump on and the FPM circuit high, the PCM can verify that the FP PWR circuit from the fuel pump relay to the FPM splice is complete. It can also verify that the fuel pump relay contacts are closed and there is a B+ supply to the fuel pump relay. Fuel Pump Driver Module Applications Fuel Pump Driver Module Duty Cycle Signals, Part 1 Fuel Pump Driver Module Duty Cycle Signals, Part 2 The Fuel Pump Driver Module (FPDM) communicates diagnostic information to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) through the Fuel Pump Monitor (FPM) circuit. This information is sent by the FPDM as a duty cycle signal. The three duty cycle signals that may be sent are listed in the table. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service Precautions WARNING: ^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3529 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor In-Line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor The Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) sensor (Figure 97) or inline Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) sensor (Figure 98) is used to measure the fuel tank pressure during the EVAP monitor test on vehicles equipped with the Running Loss-type system. Also, it is used to control excessive fuel tank pressure by forcing the system to purge. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3530 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 1. Disconnect the battery. WARNING: THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 2. Remove the rear seat assembly. 3. Remove the fuel tank sending unit access cover. 4. Disconnect the fuel tank pressure sensor electrical connector. 5. Remove the fuel tank pressure sensor. ^ Disconnect the vapor tubes. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3531 ^ Carry out a leak test. See: Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission System Leak Test ^ Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission Repair Verification Drive Cycle NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL(R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3535 Idle Air Control Valve: Description and Operation IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE Nippondenso Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Assembly Hitachi Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Assembly With Vent/Filter The Idle Air Control (IAC) valve assembly (Figure 117) and (Figure 118) controls engine idle speed and provides a dashpot function. The IAC valve assembly meters intake air around the throttle plate through a bypass within the IAC valve assembly and throttle body. The PCM determines the desired idle speed or bypass air and signals the IAC valve assembly through a specified duty cycle. The IAC valve responds by positioning the IAC valve to control the amount of bypassed air. The PCM monitors engine rpm and increases or decreases the IAC duty cycle in order to achieve the desired rpm. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3536 Hitachi Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Assembly With Air-Assist Injectors On applications with air-assisted injectors, the IAC valve (Figure 119) also supplies a small amount of air into the path of the fuel injectors. The jet of air causes an increase in fuel atomization at low speed and light load conditions. NOTE: The IAC Valve Assembly is NOT ADJUSTABLE and CANNOT BE CLEANED. The IAC valve (part of throttle body assembly) has an internal diode on some applications. If the internal diode is measured in crossed terminal position with a digital multimeter, there will be an incorrect or negative reading. It is important that the mating component and harness connectors correctly oriented. Diagnostic procedures emphasize this importance. The PCM uses the IAC valve assembly to control: ^ No touch start ^ Cold engine fast idle for rapid warm-up ^ Idle (corrects for engine load) ^ Stumble or stalling on deceleration (provides a dashpot function) ^ Over-temperature idle boost. ^ Air Assist to Injectors. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3537 Idle Air Control Valve: Testing and Inspection Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Noise 1. Open the hood. 2. Verify the condition by operating the vehicle for a short time. NOTE: ^ Key symptom is elevated idle speed while noise is occurring. ^ "Snapping" the throttle can induce the noise. 3. Inspect the IAC. If physical evidence of contamination exists, install a new IAC. 4. While the noise is occurring, either place an EngineEAR probe near the IAC valve and the inlet tube, or create a 6.35 mm (0.25 in)-12.7 mm (0.50 in) air gap between the inlet tube and the clean air tube. If the IAC valve is making the noise, install a new IAC valve. 5. Test the vehicle for normal operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3538 Idle Air Control Valve: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube. 2. Disconnect the Idle Air Control (IAC) valve electrical connector. 3. Remove the two bolts and the IAC valve. ^ Discard the gasket. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Install a new gasket. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Specifications General Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Module Communication Network: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Find and Use These Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams ^ System Diagrams ^ Grounds Diagrams Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3544 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow. Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the diagram. Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be found. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3545 Fuse And Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. Fuse Circuits Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery. Ground Distribution Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text "partial". Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3546 Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of (1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces). The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number. Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the way out by a spring. Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control. A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the way in. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. circuit Numbering Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification Circuit Numbering: Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting electrical circuits. Function: The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter "S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit. System-Connection (including branch): Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate wires in one connection with the same function. Wire Identification (wire colors): The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3547 Wire Identification Example Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know the following information about the wire: Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit System: AC = Headlamp leveling Connection: 3 = Switch connection A = Branch Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe). Circuit Identification Charts Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3548 Circuit Identification Chart System Codes Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3549 Sample Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3550 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3551 Sample Diagram Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3552 Circuit Identification Chart SYSTEM CODES CHART Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3553 SAMPLE DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3554 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3555 Sample Diagram Electrical Symbols ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3556 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3557 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3558 Types of Diagrams Shown Types of Diagrams Shown Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them. Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations. Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system information suitable for diagnostic operations. Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a relationship to them, are also included. All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding of the system component interactions. Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type. Wire Color Code Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3559 Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3560 Module Communication Network: Diagnostic Aids These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3561 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3562 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3563 Module Communication Network: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 418-00-00-1 Diagram 418-00-00-2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3564 Diagram 418-00-00-3 Diagram 418-00-00-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description and Operation Module Communication Network: Description and Operation The module communications network consists of the following items: ^ Standard Corporate Protocol (SCP) communications network ^ International Standards Organization (ISO) communications network ^ Generic Electronic Module (GEM) ^ Powertrain Control Module (PCM) ^ Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) module ^ Restraint Control Module (RCM) ^ Instrument Cluster (IC) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description and Operation > Page 3567 Module Communication Network: Description and Operation Principles and Operation The vehicle has two module communications networks. The Standard Corporate Protocol (SCP) network, which is an unshielded twisted pair cable (data bus plus, circuit 914 [TN/OG] and data bus minus, circuit 915 [PK/LB]); and the International Standards Organization (ISO) 9141 network which is a single wire (circuit 70 [LB/WH]). The diagnostic tool can connect to both networks through the Data Link Connector (DLC). This makes diagnosis and testing of these systems easier by allowing one smart tester to be able to diagnose and control any module on the two networks from one connector. The DLC can be found under the instrument panel between the steering column and the radio. The SCP communication network will remain operational even with the severing of one of the bus wires. Communications will also continue if one of the bus wires is shorted to ground or voltage, or if some, but not all, termination resistors are lost. The ISO 9141 communication network does not permit inter-module communication. When the diagnostic tool communicates to modules on the ISO 9141 communication network, the diagnostic tool must ask for all information; the modules cannot initiate communications. Unlike the SCP, the ISO 9141 communication network will not function if the wire is shorted to ground or battery voltage. Also, if one of the modules on the ISO 9141 communication network loses power or shorts internally, communications to that module will fail. There are two modules linked to the SCP communication network and three modules linked to the ISO 9141 communication network. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) is on the SCP communication network. The PCM controls the engine for better fuel economy, emissions control and failure mode detection and storage. The Passive Anti-theft System (PATS) is integrated into the PCM module. The PCM/PATS system is connected to the vehicle electrical system, the transceiver module, the vehicle SCP communications network and the vehicle anti-theft indicator located in the Instrument Cluster (IC). The PCM module uses a microprocessor to control the system functions as well as illumination of the anti-theft indicator. The illumination command is sent from the PCM through the SCP communications network to the IC, which in turn sends power to the anti-theft indicator. The PCM module microprocessor stores the ignition key codes in non-volatile memory. The PCM and IC modules can be diagnosed through the data link connector. The Restraint Control Module (RCM) is on the ISO 9141 communication network. The RCM controls the deployment of the air bags based on sensor input. The Generic Electronic Module (GEM) is on the ISO 9141 communication network. The GEM controls a variety of systems: ^ rear wiper ^ cargo lamps ^ interior lamps ^ exterior lamps ^ accessory delay ^ perimeter anti-theft (if equipped) The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) control module is on the ISO 9141 communication network. The ABS module controls the brake pressure to the four wheels to keep the vehicle under control while braking. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description and Operation > Page 3568 Module Communication Network: Description and Operation Principles of Operation Some modules support the ability to change specified factory configuration settings and preset preference items. The process used to change the settings and customer preference items is module configuration. There are two different methods of module configuration: ^ Programmable Module Installation (PMI) ^ customer preference items There are three storage locations for module configuration information. One primary storage location and two secondary (or backup) storage locations. ^ Primary location is the memory of the specific module. ^ First backup location is the VID block memory of the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). ^ Second backup is the As-Built Data Center. During PMI, the diagnostic tool will attempt to extract the module configuration information from the module to be changed. If this is unsuccessful, the diagnostic tool will use the first backup and attempt to extract the module configuration information from the VID block in the PCM. If this also fails, the diagnostic tool will display instructions to contact the As-Built Data Center. This is the only time the As-Built Data Center should be contacted. Programmable Module Installation (PMI) NOTE: If the powertrain control module (PCM) needs to have a powertrain calibration flash programmed, refer to Computers and Control Systems. Make sure to use the flash cable when programming calibrations or running a PMI routine on the PCM. The PMI configuration method is used when a new programmable module is to be installed. During the PMI routine the diagnostic tool attempts to gather two pieces of information: ^ option content information from the old module (module configuration and customer preference settings) ^ the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) from the PCM During PMI the diagnostic tool first looks to the PCM for the VIN of the vehicle. Once the VIN is retrieved the diagnostic tool will carry out a self-test of the suspect module to determine if the module has been configured. ^ If DTC B2477 is present the module does not contain complete configuration information. The PMI routine will then halt and give instructions on how to proceed. ^ If DTC B2477 is not present the module will allow the diagnostic tool to retrieve its option content information. The diagnostic tool will then store the option content information and the VIN. The diagnostic tool can store the combined option content information and VIN for only one module at a time. Once information is stored, the diagnostic tool cannot be used to retrieve any other option content information without erasing the previous option content information. Make sure the new module is on hand for installation before retrieving option content information data from the old module. After the new module is installed, use the diagnostic tool to restore the option content information into the new module. Vehicle Identification (VID) Block NOTE: ^ If the PCM needs to have a powertrain calibration flash programmed, refer to Computers and Control Systems. Make sure to use the flash cable when programming calibrations or running a PMI routine on the PCM. ^ When carrying out a PMI routine on any non-PCM module, use the OBDII cable. ^ Flash programming powertrain calibrations onto the PCM is different than PMI. It has no effect on the backup data in the VID block memory area of the PCM. The PCM contains a memory area called a vehicle identification (VID) block. A portion of the VID block is used to store the backup data for each programmable module on the vehicle. The VID block is the first backup of information when using the PMI configuration method. If the diagnostic tool cannot retrieve option content information from the suspect module, the diagnostic tool will attempt to extract backup information from the VID block of the PCM. The VID block is not related to or affected by the powertrain calibration information stored in the PCM. If a new powertrain calibration has been flashed onto the PCM, the VID block will not be affected. If using the PMI routine to install a new PCM, the diagnostic tool will reprogram only VID information. The engine calibration information may still need to be flashed. As-Built Data Center The As-Built Data Center keeps a record of the vehicle configuration in a database that is retrievable using the VIN. The As-Built Data Center records the applicable module configurations stored in each module before the vehicle leaves the factory. The As-Built Data Center will always reflect the original build of the vehicle as it left the factory. Only contact the As-Built Data Center when directed to do so by the diagnostic tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description and Operation > Page 3569 Customer Preference Items This method is used to enable or disable module-controlled items or systems to suit the preference of the customer. Not all features controlled by the module are listed in this configuration method. Refer to the Module Configuration Index for a list of features for each module. See: Testing and Inspection/Module Configuration/Scan Tool Testing/Module Configuration Index If a feature is changed using the customer preference items configuration method, the changed information will not be stored in the PCM VID block. The VID block will retain the original settings as they were recorded when the vehicle left the factory. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network Module Communication Network: Testing and Inspection Module Communications Network Initial Inspection 1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage. VISUAL INSPECTION CHART Electrical ^ Central Junction Box (CJB) Fuse ROOM (10 A) ^ Wiring harness ^ Connectors ^ Instrument Cluster (IC) ^ Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) control module ^ Restraint Control Module (RCM) ^ Generic Electronic Module (GEM) ^ Powertrain Control Module (PCM) 3. If the concern remains after the inspection, connect the diagnostic tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC) located beneath the instrument panel and select the vehicle to be tested from the diagnostic tool menu. If the diagnostic tool does not communicate with the vehicle: ^ check that the program card is correctly installed. ^ check the connections to the vehicle. ^ check the ignition switch position is in RUN. If the diagnostic tool still does not communicate with the vehicle, go to Pinpoint Test H. See: Pinpoint Tests/Pinpoint Tests/Test H: No Module/Network Communication 4. Go to Pinpoint Test PC. See: Pinpoint Tests/Pinpoint Test PC (Precheck) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3572 PC1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3573 A1 - A3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3574 A3 B1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3575 B2 - B3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3576 C1 - C3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3577 C3 Test D: IC Module Does Not Respond to the Diagnostic Tool D1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3578 D2 - D3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3579 D3 Test E: PCM Does Not Respond to the Diagnostic Tool E1 - E2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3580 E2 - E3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3581 E3 Test F: No Module/Network Communication - ISO 9141 Network F1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3582 F2 - F3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3583 F4 - F5 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3584 F6 - F7 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3585 F8 - F10 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3586 F10 - F12 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3587 F12 Test G: No Module/Network Communication-SCP Network G1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3588 G2 - G3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3589 G4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3590 G5 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3591 G6 - G7 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3592 G7 - G8 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3593 H1 - H3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3594 H4 Symptom Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3595 Module Communication Network: Testing and Inspection Module Configuration Initial Inspection 1. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage. Refer to the following chart: VISUAL INSPECTION CHART Electrical ^ Damaged wiring harness ^ Loose or corroded connectors ^ Instrument Cluster (IC) ^ Generic Electronic Module (GEM) ^ Powertrain Control Module (PCM) 2. If the concern remains after inspection, connect the diagnostic tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC) located beneath the instrument panel and select the vehicle to be tested from the diagnostic tool menu. If the diagnostic tool does not communicate with the vehicle: ^ check that the program card is correctly installed. ^ check the connections to the vehicle. ^ check that the ignition switch is in the RUN position. 3. If the diagnostic tool still does not communicate with the vehicle, refer to Module Communications Network (Information Bus). 4. Refer to the Symptom Chart. See: Diagnosis By Symptom Module Configuration Index Module Configuration Index NOTE: Do not contact the As-Built Data Center unless the diagnostic tool instructs you to do so. The diagnostic tool will not allow you to use as-built data information unless the diagnostic tool first prompts you for the As-Built Data Center information. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3596 Diagnostic Tool Message Index, Part 1 Diagnostic Tool Message Index, Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3597 A1 - A2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module Communications Network > Page 3598 A3 - A4 Symptom Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Communications Network Wiring Repair Module Communication Network: Service and Repair Communications Network Wiring Repair COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT WIRING REPAIR Heat Gun SPECIAL TOOL(S) 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Strip the wires. 3. Solder the wires. 1 Install the heat shrink tube. 2 Twist the wires together. 3 Solder the wires together. NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly Activated (RMA) solder, not acid core solder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Communications Network Wiring Repair > Page 3601 4. Bend the wires back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for the solder to cool before moving the wires. 5. Position the (A) heat shrink tube over the (B) wire repair. ^ Overlap the heat shrink tube on both wires. 6. Use the heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out both ends of the beat shrink tube. 7. Reconnect the battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Communications Network Wiring Repair > Page 3602 Module Communication Network: Service and Repair Module Configuration Programmable Module Installation NOTE: ^ If using the WDS, select Module Configuration and Programming, then follow the screen prompts. ^ Do not remove the original module from the vehicle until the diagnostic tool has retrieved the module's configuration information. ^ Make sure the module is listed as being supported by programmable module installation in the Module Configuration Index. ^ Make sure to use the flash cable when programming calibrations or running a PMI routine on the PCM. ^ It is important to keep a record of any error message given by the tester during the programmable module installation routine. Additionally, observe the point during the routine that the error message is given and refer to the Diagnostic Tool Message Index. This will help determine what is causing the error message. 1. Select Programmable Module Installation on the diagnostic tool. 2. Select Retrieve Module Configuration - Old ECU, and follow the text screens until successful. 3. Install the new module. 4. Select Restore Module Configuration - New ECU, and follow the text screens until successful. Programmable Module Installation - Using Backup Data NOTE: ^ If using the WDS, select Module Configuration and Programming, then follow the screen prompts. ^ Make sure to use the flash cable when programming calibrations or running a PMI routine on the PCM. 1. Select Programmable Module Installation on the diagnostic tool. 2. Select Retrieve Module Configuration - Old ECU. The diagnostic tool will give you a message to reinstall the old module or to continue for backup data. If the module to be replaced will not communicate or has incorrect data, continue and allow the diagnostic tool to find backup data. If the diagnostic tool successfully retrieves the backup data, GO to Step 7 in this procedure. If the diagnostic tool prompts you to contact the As-Built Data Center for backup information, contact the As-Built Data Center and obtain the backup data for the vehicle and continue on. 3. After the As-Built Data Center backup data is obtained continue with the routine by entering the VIN number of the vehicle when the diagnostic tool prompts you to do so. 4. The diagnostic tool will prompt you to enter the vehicle data. The vehicle data is listed on the As-Built Data Center sheet in the upper left-hand portion, directly underneath the VIN for the vehicle. 5. The diagnostic tool will prompt you to enter information for the module that needs to be reprogrammed. Enter all of the data that the diagnostic tool requests. If the diagnostic tool requests information that is not listed on the As-Built Data Center sheet, press NO. 6. Follow the text screens until all pertinent data is entered and the module data is stored. 7. Select Restore Module Configuration New ECU, and follow the text screens until successful. 8. Manually validate each customer preference item for correct setting. If necessary, ask the customer what setting would be their preference. Refer to the Module Configuration Index for the list of customer preference items. See: Testing and Inspection/Module Configuration/Scan Tool Testing/Module Configuration Index Customer Preference Items NOTE: ^ If using the WDS, select Module Configuration and Programming, then follow the screen prompts. ^ Make sure module is listed as supporting customer preference items and supports the specific item to be configured in the Module Configuration Index. 1. Select Service Bay Functions on the diagnostic tool. 2. Select the module that contains the customer preference item to be programmed. Refer to the Module Configuration Index. See: Testing and Inspection/Module Configuration/Scan Tool Testing/Module Configuration Index 3. Select Customer Preference Items on the diagnostic tool. 4. Select Module Option Content. 5. Select the item to be enabled or disabled. 6. Enable or disable the item as necessary to reflect the customer preference. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Tools and Equipment > Tools and Equipment Module Communication Network: Tools and Equipment Special Tool(s) Heat Gun Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Module Communication Network <--> [Information Bus] > Component Information > Tools and Equipment > Tools and Equipment > Page 3605 Module Communication Network: Tools and Equipment Diagnostic Special Service Tool(S) Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3609 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Knock Sensor Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS) The Knock Sensor (KS) (Figure 35) is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3610 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Disconnect the KS electrical connector and remove the connector from the mounting bracket. NOTE: The Knock Sensor (KS) is located on the RH side of the cylinder block. 3. Remove the nut and the KS. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module Power Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module Power Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 3614 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Check Engine, Service Engine Soon Or ISO Standard Engine Symbol The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) (Figure 15) alerts the driver that the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) has detected an OBD II emission-related component or system fault. When this occurs, an OBD II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be set. ^ The MIL is located on the instrument cluster and is labeled CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE SOON or ISO standard engine symbol (Figure 16). ^ Power is supplied to the MIL whenever the ignition switch is in the RUN or START position. ^ The MIL will remain on in the RUN/START mode as a bulb check during the instrument cluster proveout for approximately 4 seconds. ^ If the MIL remains on after the bulb check: The PCM illuminates the MIL for an emission related concern and a DTC will be present. - The instrument cluster will illuminate the MIL if the PCM does not send a control message to the instrument cluster. - The PCM is operating in the Hardware Limited Operation Strategy (HLOS). - The MIL circuit is shorted to ground. ^ If the MIL remains off (during the bulb check): Bulb is damaged. - MIL circuit is open. ^ To turn off the MIL after a repair, a reset command from the Scan Tool must be sent, or three consecutive drive cycles must be completed without a fault. ^ For any MIL concern, GO to Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection. ^ If the MIL blinks at a steady rate, a severe misfire condition could possibly exist. ^ If the MIL blinks erratically, an intermittent open B+ to the bulb or an intermittent short to ground in the MIL circuit exist. Also, the PCM can reset while cranking if battery voltage is low. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis Technical Service Bulletin # 01-9-7 Date: 010514 Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis Article No. 01-9-7 05/14/01 DRIVEABILITY - H025 (HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR), CATALYST, AND FUEL SYSTEM MONITORS - SERVICE TIPS - OBD II VEHICLES ONLY FORD: 1994-1997 THUNDERBIRD 1994-2001 MUSTANG 1995-2001 CROWN VICTORIA 1996-1997 PROBE 1996-2000 CONTOUR 1996-2001 ESCORT, TAURUS 2000-2001 FOCUS 1994-1997 F SUPER DUTY, F-250 HD, F-350 1995-2001 ECONOLINE, RANGER, WINDSTAR 1996 BRONCO 1996-1997 AEROSTAR 1996-2001 EXPLORER 1997-2001 EXPEDITION, F-150, F-250 LD 1999-2001 SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2001 EXCURSION 2001 ESCAPE LINCOLN: 1995-2001 CONTINENTAL, TOWN CAR 1996-1998 MARK VIII 2000-2001 LS 1998-2001 NAVIGATOR MERCURY: 1994-1997 COUGAR 1995-2001 GRAND MARQUIS 1996-1999 TRACER 1996-2000 MYSTIQUE 1996-2001 SABLE 1999-2001 COUGAR 1997-2001 MOUNTAINEER ISSUE This article is intended to be an aide in diagnosing conditions related to Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S), Catalyst, and Fuel System Monitor related Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Additional information is included to assist in diagnosing certain vehicle symptoms. This article is NOT intended to be a shortcut to the Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) Workshop Manual pinpoint tests. The pinpoint tests in the PC/ED Manual should ALWAYS be followed when diagnosing vehicle conditions. ACTION Use the following information and Service Tips to assist in the diagnosis of H025, Catalyst, and Fuel System Monitor related DTCs. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 98-23-10 WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 623000, 690000, 698298 Information ^ A. Description of Terms and Acronyms ^ B. HO2S Location Diagrams ^ C. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3622 ^ C1. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Information ^ C2. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) ^ D. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor ^ D1. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Information ^ D2. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) ^ E. Fuel System Monitor ^ E1. Fuel System Monitor - Information ^ E2. Fuel System Monitor Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) ^ F. Diagnostic Service Tips ^ F1. Tips - General ^ F2. Tips Related to Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor ^ F3. Tips Related to Catalyst Monitor ^ F4. Tips Related to Fuel System Monitor A. Description of Terms and Acronyms ^ CHT - Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor or PID ^ CKP - Crankshaft Position Sensor or PID ^ DTC - Diagnostic Trouble Code ^ ECT - Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor or PID ^ EGR - Exhaust Gas Recirculation ^ EEC - Electronic Engine Control ^ EVR - EGR Vacuum Regulator ^ FMEM - Failure Mode Effects Management ^ GND - Ground ^ HC - Hydrocarbons ^ HO2S - Heated Oxygen Sensor or PID ^ IAT - Inlet Air Temperature Sensor or PID ^ KAM - Keep Alive Memory ^ KOEO - Key On Engine Off ^ KOER - Key On Engine Running ^ LONGFT - Long Term Fuel Trim ^ MAF - Mass Air Flow Sensor or PID ^ MIL - Malfunction Indicator Lamp ("Check Engine") ^ NGS - New Generation Star Tester (Scan Tool) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3623 ^ OBD II - On-Board Diagnostics II ^ OSM - Output State Monitor ^ PC/ED - Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis ^ PCM - Powertrain Control Module ^ PCV - Positive Crankcase Ventilation ^ PID - Parameter Identification Display ^ RAM - Random Access Memory ^ RPM - Revolutions Per Minute ^ SHRTFT - Short Term Fuel Trim ^ Stoichiometric - 14.7:1 Air/Fuel Ratio (Gasoline Engines) ^ TP - Throttle Position Sensor or PID ^ VMV - Vapor Management Valve ^ VPWR - Vehicle Power (Battery Voltage) ^ VREF - Vehicle Reference Voltage (5 volts) B. HO2S Location Diagrams Refer to Figure 1 to better understand the H025 sensor names and locations. Regardless of how the engine is mounted in the vehicle, conventional or transverse, the HO2S naming convention stays the same in relationship to engine banks 1 and 2. Bank 1 will always be the bank containing the # 1 cylinder. C. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor C1.) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3624 The H025 Monitor is an on-board strategy designed to monitor the HO2S sensors for a malfunction or deterioration that can affect emissions. Under specific conditions, the fuel control or upstream HO2S sensors (Figures 1 and 3) are checked for proper output voltage and response rate (the time it takes to switch from lean to rich or rich to lean). Downstream HO2S sensors (Figures 1 and 3) used for Catalyst Monitor are also monitored for proper output voltage. Input is required from the ECT or CHT, IAT, MAF, TP and CKP sensors to activate the H025 Monitor. The Fuel System Monitor and Misfire Detection Monitor must also have completed successfully before the HO2S Monitor is enabled. The HO2S sensor senses the oxygen content in the exhaust flow and outputs a voltage between zero and 1.0 volt. Lean of stoichiometric (air/fuel ratio of approximately 14.7:1 for gasoline engines), the HO2S will generate a voltage between zero and 0.45 volt. Rich of stoichiometric, the HO2S will generate a voltage between 0.45 and 1.0 volt. ^ The HO2S Monitor evaluates both the upstream (Fuel Control) and downstream (Catalyst Monitor) HO2S for proper function. ^ Once the HO2S Monitor is enabled, the upstream H025 signal voltage amplitude and response frequency are checked. Excessive voltage is determined by comparing the HO2S signal voltage to a maximum calibratable threshold voltage. ^ A fixed frequency closed loop fuel control routine is executed and the upstream HO2S voltage amplitude and output response frequency are observed. A sample of the upstream HO2S signal is evaluated to determine if the sensor is capable of switching or has a slow response rate. ^ An HO2S heater circuit fault is determined by turning the heater on and off and looking for a corresponding change in the OSM and by measuring the current going through the heater circuit. ^ The MIL is activated after a fault is detected on two consecutive OBD II drive cycles. The HO2S Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows: ^ HO2S signal circuit malfunction - P0131, P0136, P0151, P0156 ^ HO2S slow response rate - P0133, P0153 ^ HO2S heater circuit malfunction - P0135, P0141, P0155, P0161 ^ Downstream HO2S not running in on-demand self test - P1127 ^ Swapped H025 connectors - P1128 and P1129 ^ H025 lack of switching - P1130, P1131, P1132, P1150, P1151, P1152 ^ HO2S lack of switching (sensor indicates lean) - P1137 ^ H025 lack of switching (sensor indicates rich) - P1138 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3625 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3626 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3627 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3628 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3629 C2.) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes D. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor D1.) Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Information The Federal Test Procedure Catalyst Monitor monitors for deterioration in the catalyst system and illuminates the MIL when tailpipe emissions exceed the appropriate HC emission thresholds. The Catalyst Monitor is enabled after the upstream and downstream HO2S sensors have been tested and verified to be functional. This monitor relies on the front and rear heated oxygen sensors (HO2S) to infer catalyst efficiency based upon oxygen storage capacity. Under normal closed loop fuel conditions, high efficiency catalysts have oxygen storage which makes the switching frequency of the rear HO2S quite slow compared with the frequency of the front HO2S. As catalyst efficiency deteriorates, its ability to store oxygen declines, and the rear HO2S begins to switch more rapidly, approaching the frequency of the front sensor. In general, as catalyst efficiency decreases, the switch ratio increases from a switch ratio of 0 for a low mileage catalyst to a switch ratio of 0.8 or 0.9 for a low efficiency catalyst. Some vehicles will monitor substantially less than the entire catalyst volume in order to meet the stringent catalyst monitoring malfunction thresholds. In many cases, only the front, light-off catalyst is monitored. Front and rear HO2S switches are counted under specified closed loop fuel conditions. After the required number of front switches are obtained, a rear-to-front HO2S switch ratio is calculated. The switch ratio is compared against a threshold value. If the switch ratio is greater than the calibrated maximum limit, the catalyst has failed. The test entry conditions for the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor are as follows: ECT or CHT (warmed engine), IAT (not at extreme ambient temperatures), MAF (greater than minimum engine load), VSS (within vehicle speed window) and TP (at part throttle) are required. ^ Because an exponentially weighted moving average is used for malfunction determination, up to six OBD II drive cycles may be required to illuminate the MIL. NOTE THE CATALYST MONITOR ON SOME EARLY OBD II VEHICLES (SOME 1994-1996 VEHICLES) WAS REFERRED TO AS THE "STEADY-STATE CATALYST MONITOR" AS OPPOSED TO THE "FTP CATALYST MONITOR" (DESCRIBED ABOVE) THAT IS MOST COMMON FOR VEHICLES BUILT AFTER 1996. BELOW IS A BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE STEADY-STATE CATALYST MONITOR: The Steady-State Catalyst Monitor performs a 20 second test during steady state rpm and load conditions. The Monitor transfers closed loop fuel control from the front to the rear 02 sensors. The Monitor then observes the switching frequency and compares it to a threshold frequency stored in an rpm/load table. A frequency higher than the maximum calibrated threshold indicates a malfunction. The Catalyst Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3630 ^ Catalyst system efficiency below threshold (Bank 1) - P0420 ^ Catalyst system efficiency below threshold (Bank 2) - P0430 D2.) Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes E. Fuel System Monitor E1.) Fuel System Monitor - Information The Fuel System Monitor is an on-board strategy designed to monitor the fuel trim system. The fuel control system uses fuel trim tables stored in the PCM's KAM to compensate for variability in fuel system components due to normal wear and aging. Fuel trim tables are based on vehicle speed and engine load. During closed loop vehicle operation, the fuel trim strategy learns the corrections needed to correct a "biased" rich or lean fuel system. The correction is stored in the fuel trim tables. The fuel trim has two means of adapting; a LONGFT and a SHRTFT. LONGFT relies on the fuel trim tables and SHRTFT refers to the desired air/fuel ratio parameter "LAMBSE". LAMBSE is calculated by the PCM from HO2S inputs and helps maintain a 14.7:1 air/fuel ratio during closed loop operation. SHRTFT and LONGFT work together. If the HO2S indicates the engine is running rich, the PCM will correct the rich condition by moving SHRTFT in the negative range (less fuel to correct for a rich combustion). If after a certain amount of time SHRTFT is still compensating for a rich condition, the PCM "learns" this and moves LONGFT into the negative range to compensate and allows SHRTFT to return to a value near 0%. Input from the ECT or CHT, IAT, and MAF sensors is required to activate the fuel trim system, which in turn activates the Fuel System Monitor. Once activated, the Fuel System Monitor looks for the fuel trim tables to reach the adaptive clip (adaptive limit) and LAMBSE to exceed a calibrated limit. The Fuel System Monitor will store the appropriate DTC when a fault is detected as described below. ^ The H025 detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and provides the PCM with feedback indicating a rich or lean condition. ^ A correction factor is added to the fuel injector pulsewidth calculation according to the Long and Short Term Fuel Trims as needed to compensate for variations in the fuel system. ^ When deviation in the parameter LAMBSE increases, air/fuel control suffers and emissions increase. When LAMBSE exceeds a calibrated limit and the fuel trim table has clipped (reached adaptive limit), the Fuel System Monitor sets a DTC. ^ The MIL is activated after a fault is detected on two consecutive OBD II drive cycles. The Fuel System Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows: ^ Fuel Delivery Error - P0148 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3631 ^ Lean shift in fuel system operation - P0171 (Bank 1) and P0174 (Bank 2) ^ Rich shift in fuel system operation - P0172 (Bank 1) and P0175 (Bank 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3632 E2.) Fuel System Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes F. Diagnostic Service Tips 1. Always reset KAM after performing a repair: After performing a repair on a vehicle with the MIL on, and/or DTCs present, always clear KAM. When a malfunction is present, the PCM adapts (attempts to correct) for this condition. Once the vehicle has been repaired, if the KAM is not reset, the PCM will once again have to adapt back to the normal operating conditions. Clearing the KAM will erase what the PCM has learned, so the PCM will be able to start with "base tables". 2. Always view and record Freeze Frame Data: Freeze Frame Data can be a valuable asset in duplicating and diagnosing concerns. This data (a snapshot of certain PID values, recorded at the time the MIL was activated) indicates the manner in which the vehicle was being driven at the time the fault occurred. This can be especially useful on intermittent concerns. Freeze Frame Data, in some cases, can also help to isolate possible areas of concern, as well as ruling out others. Always record (write down) the Freeze Frame Data. 3. Multiple DTCs (with the same meaning): When multiple (paired) DTCs with the same meaning are set for multiple sensors, it is unlikely that replacing both HO2S sensors will resolve the concern. In most cases, there will be another issue that is causing the codes. Examples of multiple (paired) DTCs: (P0135/P0155), (P0141/P0161), (P1131/P1151), (P1132/P1152). To further clarify this, see the more detailed scenario as follows: A vehicle comes in with a MIL On concern. KOEO self test reveals DTCs P0135 and P0155 (HTR-11 and HTR-21 circuit malfunction), with no other DTCs present. The most likely cause of these DTCs would be something in the heater power circuit that both of these HO2S sensors have in common (Example: open or shorted heater circuit wiring or splice). It is highly unlikely that multiple sensors would fail at the same time. When multiple DTCs of this nature are encountered, reviewing the appropriate wiring diagram(s) can help to isolate possible areas of concern. When reviewing the wiring diagram, look for things that the affected sensors have in common. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3633 In this example, the most likely cause of DTCs P0135 and P0155 (with no other DTCs present) would be a concern with Splice "B" (refer to Figure 2). NOTE THIS ILLUSTRATION IS ONLY AN EXAMPLE. SPLICE NAMES "A", "B", AND "C" ARE USED IN THIS EXAMPLE FOR CONVENIENCE ONLY. ON AN ACTUAL VEHICLE, SPLICE NAMES WILL DEPEND ON THE CIRCUIT NUMBER FOR THE VEHICLE UNDER REPAIR. NOTE ALSO THAT THIS FIGURE IS NOT INTENDED TO SHOW ALL SPLICES/CONNECTIONS ON ALL VEHICLES. OTHER EEC CIRCUITS, NOT SHOWN, MAY ALSO BE SPLICED IN WITH THE CIRCUITS SHOWN. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3634 4. View H025 PID data carefully: NGS PIDs for HO2S sensors that do not exist (with certain exhaust configurations) will show a value of "0" volts (refer to Figures 3 and 4). In this example, the vehicle (equipped with a 4-cylinder engine) has one upstream and one downstream HO2S. Notice that the NGS (scan tool) display shows two upstream and two downstream HO2S PIDs, and that the "unused" HO2S sensor PIDs display "0" volts. 5. H025 sensors measure oxygen in the exhaust, not fuel: The exhaust gas condition reported by the HO2S sensor is based on the presence of oxygen in the exhaust, not the presence of unburned fuel. Example: In the event of an ignition-related misfire, you might expect a rich HO2S reading, due to the amount of unburned fuel in the exhaust system. However, there is also a large amount of unburned oxygen, since no combustion took place in the misfiring cylinder. Since the H025 senses oxygen only, it would report a lean condition in this particular situation. F2.) Tips Related to Heated Oxygen Sensor (H025) Monitor 1. OBD II Response Rate Monitor: The OBD II Response Rate Monitor (P0133/P0153) is only run at vehicle speeds between approximately 50-95 km/h (30-60 mph), during steady-state conditions. The test lasts approximately 6 seconds. Therefore, P0133/P0153 cannot be diagnosed at idle in the repair bay. 2. Do not compare H025 switch rate - Bank-to-Bank or vehicle-to-vehicle: Different H025 switch rates, from Bank-to-Bank, are considered normal. The H025 switch rate, from one Bank to the other, should not be compared as a gauge of the H025's ability to switch/react. The PCM is continuously adjusting spark and fuel in reaction to engine operating conditions (rpm, load, air flow, throttle angle, etc.). The PCM is also continuously adapting to certain conditions (customer driving habits, engine and component wear, etc.). F3.) Tips Related to Catalyst Efficiency Monitor 1. Determining catalyst efficiency/switch ratio: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3635 The upstream H025 sensors will have a high switch frequency, due to normal closed loop fuel control. With an efficient catalyst, the downstream H025 will have a low switch frequency. The switch ratio is determined by dividing the number of downstream switches by the number of upstream switches over a given period of time. As the catalyst ages (or if the catalyst is damaged or contaminated), the downstream switches will increase. When the downstream switch rate crosses a threshold value (approximately 0.75 switch ratio), a code is stored (P0420 and/or P0430) and the MIL illuminates (refer to Figures 5 and 6). NOTE IF A CATALYST IS DETERMINED TO HAVE LOW EFFICIENCY AND REQUIRES REPLACEMENT, REPLACEMENT OF THE DOWNSTREAM H025 SENSORS WILL NOT BE NECESSARY. 2. Use care in handling H025 sensors: In the event of catalyst replacement, use care in the handling of H025 sensors to prevent damage or contamination. Do not use power tools in the removal or installation of sensors. Use a 22mm wrench or crow foot to remove and install H025 sensors; do not use slotted sockets, as these sockets may damage wires. H025 sensors should be torqued to 41 +/- 5 N.m (30 +/- 4 lb-ft). 3. Do not replace downstream HO2S sensors (H02S12/H02S22) for DTCs P0420 and/or P0430: When diagnosing a vehicle with a customer concern of MIL On and DTCs P0420/P0430 in continuous memory, do not replace the downstream HO2S sensors (H02S12/H02S22). Damaged or malfunctioning downstream HO2S sensors will not cause these DTCs to be set. Always verify the vehicle concern, then perform the pinpoint diagnostics in the appropriate PC/ED Service Manual. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3636 F4.) Tips Related to the Fuel System Monitor 1. HO2S sensors are not likely to be the cause of adaptive DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175: Most warranty-returned HO2S sensors (replaced for these DTCs) are found to function normally. Additional related DTCs will normally be present if there is a concern with the HO2S sensors. Do not replace an HO2S sensor unless verified through pinpoint diagnostic tests found in the PC/ED Service Manual. 2. DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174, and P0175 are not related to downstream H028 sensors: When diagnosing a vehicle with a MIL On and DTC(s) P0171, P0172, P0174, and/or P0175 in continuous memory, do not replace the downstream HO2S sensors. These DTCs have no connection to the downstream HO2S sensor function nor its diagnosis for faults. Always verify the vehicle concern, then perform the pinpoint diagnostics from the appropriate PC/ED Service Manual. 3. Diagnosing lean conditions and lean DTCs P0171, P0174: Freeze Frame Data can often help to identify the type of lean condition, even if the fault is intermittent, by indicating how the vehicle was being driven when the fault occurred. Diagnosis of lean conditions and lean adaptive DTCs can be difficult, especially if the concern is intermittent. Verifying the concern is extremely important. There are different types of lean conditions. The ability to identify the type of lean condition causing the concern can be crucial to a correct diagnosis. When DTCs P0171 and P0174 are both present, there is a strong likelihood of another concern being present: a. Vacuum leaks/unmetered air: In this type of condition, the engine may actually run lean of stoichiometry (14.7:1 air/fuel ratio) if the PCM is not able to compensate enough to correct for the condition. This condition is typically caused by air entering the engine through an abnormal source (opening), or due to a MAF malfunction. In this situation, the volume of air entering the engine is actually greater than what the MAF is indicating to the PCM. Vacuum leaks will normally be most apparent when high manifold vacuum is present, during idle or light throttle. If Freeze Frame Data indicates that the fault occurred at idle, a check for vacuum leaks/unmetered air when the engine is cold might be the best starting point. Examples: Loose, leaking or disconnected vacuum lines, intake manifold gaskets or 0-rings, throttle body gaskets, brake booster, air inlet tube, stuck/frozen/aftermarket PCV valve, unseated engine oil dipstick, MAF reading lower than normal, etc. b. Insufficient fueling: In this type of condition, the engine may actually run lean of stoichiometry (14.7:1 air/fuel ratio) if the PCM is not able to compensate enough to correct for the condition. This condition is typically caused by a fuel delivery system concern that restricts or limits the amount of fuel being delivered to the engine. This condition will normally be most apparent when the engine is under a heavy load, when a higher volume of fuel is required. If Freeze Frame Data indicates that the fault occurred under a heavy load, a check of the fuel delivery system (checking fuel pressure with engine under a load) might be the best starting point. Examples: Low fuel pressure (fuel pump, fuel filter, fuel leaks, restricted fuel supply lines), fuel injector concerns, etc. c. Exhaust system leaks: In this type of condition, the engine may actually be running near stoichiometry (14.7:1 air/fuel ratio), but the exhaust gas mixture will be lean. This condition is caused by oxygen-rich air entering the exhaust system through an external source. This condition will cause the exhaust gas mixture to be lean, even though the actual combustion in the engine may not be. Examples: Exhaust system leaks upstream or near HO2S, malfunctioning Secondary Air Injection system d. MAF concerns: If a MAF concern is suspected, see TSB 98-23-10. 4. Checking fuel pressure: Check fuel pressure with engine under a load when diagnosing a lean concern. A partially plugged fuel filter can be difficult to detect and can be easily overlooked if fuel pressure is only checked at idle. The same is true for other types of fuel supply concerns (e.g., bent or kinked lines, degraded fuel pump). At idle, an engine requires only a small volume of fuel. Due to the fact that there is a small volume of fuel needed at idle, a restriction in the fuel supply line in many cases will not cause the fuel pressure to be low. When the vehicle is under a load, the engine requires much more fuel than at idle. Under a load, a restriction in the fuel supply line will prevent the high rate of fuel flow that is needed to maintain the correct fuel pressure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3637 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Heated Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Find and Use These Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams ^ System Diagrams ^ Grounds Diagrams Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3640 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow. Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the diagram. Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be found. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3641 Fuse And Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. Fuse Circuits Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery. Ground Distribution Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text "partial". Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3642 Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of (1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces). The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number. Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the way out by a spring. Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control. A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the way in. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. circuit Numbering Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification Circuit Numbering: Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting electrical circuits. Function: The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter "S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit. System-Connection (including branch): Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate wires in one connection with the same function. Wire Identification (wire colors): The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3643 Wire Identification Example Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know the following information about the wire: Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit System: AC = Headlamp leveling Connection: 3 = Switch connection A = Branch Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe). Circuit Identification Charts Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3644 Circuit Identification Chart System Codes Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3645 Sample Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3646 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3647 Sample Diagram Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3648 Circuit Identification Chart SYSTEM CODES CHART Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3649 SAMPLE DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3650 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3651 Sample Diagram Electrical Symbols ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3652 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3653 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3654 Types of Diagrams Shown Types of Diagrams Shown Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them. Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations. Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system information suitable for diagnostic operations. Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a relationship to them, are also included. All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding of the system component interactions. Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type. Wire Color Code Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3655 Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3656 Heated Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3657 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3658 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3659 Heated Oxygen Sensor: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3660 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor Heated Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor Heated Oxygen Sensor Monitor The Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor is an on-board strategy designed to monitor the HO2S sensors for a malfunction or deterioration which can affect emissions. The fuel control or upstream HO2S is checked for proper output voltage and response rate (the time it takes to switch from lean to rich or rich to lean). Downstream HO2S used for Catalyst Monitor are also monitored for proper output voltage. The following illustration shows that input is required from the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) or Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT), Intake Air Temperature (IAT), Mass Air Flow (MAF) and Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensors to activate the HO2S Monitor. The Fuel System Monitor and Misfire Detection Monitor must also have completed successfully before the HO2S Monitor is enabled. 1. The HO2S sensor senses the oxygen content in the exhaust flow and outputs a voltage between zero and 1.0 volt. Lean of stoichiometric (air/fuel ratio of approximately 14.7:1), the HO2S will generate a voltage between zero and 0.45 volt. Rich of stoichiometric, the HO2S will generate a voltage between 0.45 and 1.0 volt. The HO2S Monitor evaluates both the upstream (fuel control) and downstream (Catalyst Monitor) HO2S for proper function. 2. Once the HO2S Monitor is enabled, the upstream HO2S signal voltage amplitude and response frequency are checked. Excessive voltage is determined by comparing the HO2S signal voltage to a maximum calibratable threshold voltage. A fixed frequency closed loop fuel control routine is executed and the upstream HO2S voltage amplitude and output response frequency are observed. A sample of the upstream HO2S signal is evaluated to determine if the sensor is capable of switching or has a slow response rate. A HO2S heater circuit fault is determined by turning the heater on and off and looking for a corresponding change in the Output State Monitor (OSM) and by measuring the current going through the heater circuit. The HO2S Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows: The Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTCs) associated with HO2S lack of switching are DTCs P1130, P1131, P1132, P1150, P1151 and P1152. The DTCs associated with HO2S slow response rate are DTCs P0133 and P0153. The DTCs associated with HO2S signal circuit malfunction are DTCs P0131, P0136, P0148, P0151 and P0156. The DTCs associated with a HO2S heater circuit malfunction are DTCs P0135, P0141, P0155 and P0161. The Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) associated with the downstream HO2S not running in on-demand is DTC P1127. The DTCs associated with swapped HO2S connectors are DTCs P1128 and P1129. 3. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) is activated after a fault is detected on two consecutive drive cycles. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor > Page 3663 Heated Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation PCM Inputs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) The Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) (Figure 33) detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in the exhaust produces a low voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich air/fuel ratio) produces a high voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts. Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to temperatures of 800°C (1400°F). At approximately 300°C (600°F) the engine can enter closed loop operation. The Vehicle Power (VPWR) circuit supplies voltage to the heater and the PCM will complete the ground when the proper conditions occur. For model year 1998 a new HO2S heater and heater control system are installed on some vehicles. The high power heater reaches closed loop fuel control temperatures. The use of this heater requires that the HO2S heater control be duty cycled, to prevent damage to the heater. The 6 ohm design is not interchangeable with new style 3.3 ohm heater. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Heated Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) EGO Sensor Wrench SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Using the special tool, remove the HO2S. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the HO2S with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the HO2S to aid in installation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 3666 Heated Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor EGO Sensor Wrench SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL EGO Sensor Wrench 1. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the catalyst monitor sensor with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor to aid in installation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3667 EGO Sensor Wrench Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Find and Use These Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams ^ System Diagrams ^ Grounds Diagrams Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3672 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow. Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the diagram. Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be found. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3673 Fuse And Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. Fuse Circuits Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery. Ground Distribution Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text "partial". Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3674 Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of (1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces). The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number. Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the way out by a spring. Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control. A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the way in. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. circuit Numbering Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification Circuit Numbering: Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting electrical circuits. Function: The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter "S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit. System-Connection (including branch): Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate wires in one connection with the same function. Wire Identification (wire colors): The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3675 Wire Identification Example Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know the following information about the wire: Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit System: AC = Headlamp leveling Connection: 3 = Switch connection A = Branch Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe). Circuit Identification Charts Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3676 Circuit Identification Chart System Codes Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3677 Sample Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3678 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3679 Sample Diagram Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3680 Circuit Identification Chart SYSTEM CODES CHART Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3681 SAMPLE DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3682 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3683 Sample Diagram Electrical Symbols ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3684 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3685 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3686 Types of Diagrams Shown Types of Diagrams Shown Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them. Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations. Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system information suitable for diagnostic operations. Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a relationship to them, are also included. All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding of the system component interactions. Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type. Wire Color Code Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3687 Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3688 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3689 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3690 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3691 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The Power Steering Pressure (PSP) switch (Figure 38) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust transmission Electronic Pressure Control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Page 3694 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Sensor POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The Power Steering Pressure (PSP) sensor (Figure 39) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM will change as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust transmission Electronic Pressure Control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect Technical Service Bulletin # 02M01S6 Date: 040831 Attachment I - Administrative Information Customer Satisfaction Program 02M01-S6 Certain Vehicles Equipped with a Tube-Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Additional EGR Pressure Sensor Warranty Coverage OASIS You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this program. Note: Submission of an "M" program claim will not remove the vehicle from OASIS because the affected vehicles are eligible for multiple repairs if the affected condition reoccurs during the extended warranty time/mileage period. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line that the FSA is claimed on. CLAIMING INSTRUCTIONS FOR REPAIRS WITH A REPAIR DATE ON OR AFTER 10/27/03 Claims for all vehicles that are within the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage must be submitted as a warranty repair. ACESII will not accept claims for reimbursement under the 02M01 program for vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage. Vehicles that have branded titles are eligible for this repair under the 02M01 program. Vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage Claims are to be submitted as a normal warranty claim in accordance with TSB 04-11-01. Vehicles beyond New Vehicle Warranty Coverage (including branded titled vehicles) Claims are to be submitted following program 02M01 guidelines. Future Warranty Extension Customer Satisfaction Programs (CSP) Future Warranty Extension CSPs will follow these claiming instructions; only those vehicles outside the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage will be submitted as a CSP type repair. OWNER REFUNDS Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid repairs made on or before the last day of the month of the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair was made away from the servicing dealer). Failure of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460) will not have an impact on any other component of the vehicle. Therefore, refunds will only be granted for the replacement of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460). All supporting documentation must be retained in accordance with the Warranty and Policy Manual. Refer to ACESII manual for refund information. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. Attachment II - Labor Allowances and Parts Ordering Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3703 LABOR ALLOWANCES [NEW] NOTE: If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service Support Center. Special Notes: ^ 02M01C labor operation is in effect for repairs performed on or after 10/27/03. ^ Diagnostics performed beyond retrieving continuous DTC will not be paid for under this program. ^ Pinpoint diagnostics are not required to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor; therefore labor time has been adjusted accordingly. ^ Due to the use of specific DTCs to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor, this program will not cover any other continuous DTCs; normal vehicle warranty would apply for any other DTCs. ^ There will be no related damage claims allowed for this program. PARTS REQUIREMENTS Parts will not be direct shipped for this program. Order your parts requirement through normal order processing. PARTS REQUIREMENTS/ORDERING INFORMATION NOTE: If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service Support Center. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3704 DEALER PRICE For latest prices, check DOES II or updated price book. PARTS RETENTION Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures." EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: If a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine and a dash-mounted EGR pressure sensor is encountered, call the Special Service Support Center. 1. Retrieve continuous DTCs. NOTE: Replace the EGR pressure sensor only if one or more of the following continuous DTCs are present: ^ P1400 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE DETECTED ^ P1401 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE DETECTED ^ P0401- EGR FLOW INSUFFICIENT DETECTED ^ P0402- EGR FLOW EXCESSIVE DETECTED Any other DTC present is not covered by this program. 2. If one or more of the DTCs listed above is present, replace the EGR pressure sensor (9J460) as follows: a) Key off. b) Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the EGR pressure sensor from the EGR tube. c) Install the new EGR pressure sensor onto the EGR tube and connect the electrical connector. Note: Refer to Section 303-08 of the appropriate workshop manual if additional information is required. 3. Clear continuous DTCs. 4. Perform KOEO and KOER self tests. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3705 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3706 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3707 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect Technical Service Bulletin # 02M01S6 Date: 040831 Attachment I - Administrative Information Customer Satisfaction Program 02M01-S6 Certain Vehicles Equipped with a Tube-Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Additional EGR Pressure Sensor Warranty Coverage OASIS You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this program. Note: Submission of an "M" program claim will not remove the vehicle from OASIS because the affected vehicles are eligible for multiple repairs if the affected condition reoccurs during the extended warranty time/mileage period. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line that the FSA is claimed on. CLAIMING INSTRUCTIONS FOR REPAIRS WITH A REPAIR DATE ON OR AFTER 10/27/03 Claims for all vehicles that are within the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage must be submitted as a warranty repair. ACESII will not accept claims for reimbursement under the 02M01 program for vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage. Vehicles that have branded titles are eligible for this repair under the 02M01 program. Vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage Claims are to be submitted as a normal warranty claim in accordance with TSB 04-11-01. Vehicles beyond New Vehicle Warranty Coverage (including branded titled vehicles) Claims are to be submitted following program 02M01 guidelines. Future Warranty Extension Customer Satisfaction Programs (CSP) Future Warranty Extension CSPs will follow these claiming instructions; only those vehicles outside the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage will be submitted as a CSP type repair. OWNER REFUNDS Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid repairs made on or before the last day of the month of the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair was made away from the servicing dealer). Failure of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460) will not have an impact on any other component of the vehicle. Therefore, refunds will only be granted for the replacement of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460). All supporting documentation must be retained in accordance with the Warranty and Policy Manual. Refer to ACESII manual for refund information. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. Attachment II - Labor Allowances and Parts Ordering Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3713 LABOR ALLOWANCES [NEW] NOTE: If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service Support Center. Special Notes: ^ 02M01C labor operation is in effect for repairs performed on or after 10/27/03. ^ Diagnostics performed beyond retrieving continuous DTC will not be paid for under this program. ^ Pinpoint diagnostics are not required to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor; therefore labor time has been adjusted accordingly. ^ Due to the use of specific DTCs to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor, this program will not cover any other continuous DTCs; normal vehicle warranty would apply for any other DTCs. ^ There will be no related damage claims allowed for this program. PARTS REQUIREMENTS Parts will not be direct shipped for this program. Order your parts requirement through normal order processing. PARTS REQUIREMENTS/ORDERING INFORMATION NOTE: If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service Support Center. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3714 DEALER PRICE For latest prices, check DOES II or updated price book. PARTS RETENTION Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures." EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: If a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine and a dash-mounted EGR pressure sensor is encountered, call the Special Service Support Center. 1. Retrieve continuous DTCs. NOTE: Replace the EGR pressure sensor only if one or more of the following continuous DTCs are present: ^ P1400 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE DETECTED ^ P1401 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE DETECTED ^ P0401- EGR FLOW INSUFFICIENT DETECTED ^ P0402- EGR FLOW EXCESSIVE DETECTED Any other DTC present is not covered by this program. 2. If one or more of the DTCs listed above is present, replace the EGR pressure sensor (9J460) as follows: a) Key off. b) Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the EGR pressure sensor from the EGR tube. c) Install the new EGR pressure sensor onto the EGR tube and connect the electrical connector. Note: Refer to Section 303-08 of the appropriate workshop manual if additional information is required. 3. Clear continuous DTCs. 4. Perform KOEO and KOER self tests. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3715 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3716 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3717 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set Article No. 04-11-1 06/08/2004 DRIVEABILITY - STREAMLINED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR VEHICLES WITH MIL ON AND DTCS P0401, P0402, P1400 OR P1401 - ADDITIONAL SYMPTOMS MAY INCLUDE RUNS ROUGH, LACKS POWER, SURGE, POOR FUEL ECONOMY FORD: 2000-2002 TAURUS 2001-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, FOCUS, MUSTANG 2001 EXPLORER USPS 2001-2002 E SERIES, ESCAPE, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 2002-2003 EXPLORER LINCOLN: 2001-2002 TOWN CAR MERCURY: 2000-2002 SABLE 2001-2002 COUGAR, GRAND MARQUIS 2002-2003 MOUNTAINEER This article supersedes TSB 04-3-1 to update service part information and applications. ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) "ON" with or without the following symptoms: Rough Running, Lack of Power, Surge or Poor Fuel Economy, along with diagnostic trouble codes (DTC's) P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401. This may be caused by an intermittently functioning tube-mounted delta pressure feedback EGR (DPFE) sensor (Figure 1). ACTION For vehicles equipped with a tube-mounted DPFE sensor, perform the following diagnostic procedure and repair action. This procedure supersedes the diagnostic procedure in the PC/ED Manual for the issue described above. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 3722 NOTE ALL LISTED APPLICATIONS CAN NOW BE SERVICED WITH DPFE SENSOR 4U7Z-9J460-AA NOTE THIS ARTICLE APPLIES TO THE FULL MODEL YEAR FOR ALL VEHICLES SHOWN EXCEPT THE FOLLOWING: ^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L DOHC - Built After May 2002 ^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L OHV - Built After February 2002 ^ 2002 Econoline And F-150 4.2L OHV - Built After April 9, 2002 ^ 2003 Explorer 4dr/Mountaineer 4.6L SOHC - Built After February 2, 2003 SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Retrieve continuous DTC(s). 2. If P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401 are present, turn ignition OFF and replace the DPFE sensor. 3. Clear continuous DTC(s). 4. Perform key on engine off (KOEO) and key on engine running (KOER) self-test. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 3723 Labor Operations Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9J460 42 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 3724 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02-11-2 > Jun > 02 > Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set Article No. 04-11-1 06/08/2004 DRIVEABILITY - STREAMLINED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR VEHICLES WITH MIL ON AND DTCS P0401, P0402, P1400 OR P1401 - ADDITIONAL SYMPTOMS MAY INCLUDE RUNS ROUGH, LACKS POWER, SURGE, POOR FUEL ECONOMY FORD: 2000-2002 TAURUS 2001-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, FOCUS, MUSTANG 2001 EXPLORER USPS 2001-2002 E SERIES, ESCAPE, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 2002-2003 EXPLORER LINCOLN: 2001-2002 TOWN CAR MERCURY: 2000-2002 SABLE 2001-2002 COUGAR, GRAND MARQUIS 2002-2003 MOUNTAINEER This article supersedes TSB 04-3-1 to update service part information and applications. ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) "ON" with or without the following symptoms: Rough Running, Lack of Power, Surge or Poor Fuel Economy, along with diagnostic trouble codes (DTC's) P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401. This may be caused by an intermittently functioning tube-mounted delta pressure feedback EGR (DPFE) sensor (Figure 1). ACTION For vehicles equipped with a tube-mounted DPFE sensor, perform the following diagnostic procedure and repair action. This procedure supersedes the diagnostic procedure in the PC/ED Manual for the issue described above. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02-11-2 > Jun > 02 > Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels > Page 3730 NOTE ALL LISTED APPLICATIONS CAN NOW BE SERVICED WITH DPFE SENSOR 4U7Z-9J460-AA NOTE THIS ARTICLE APPLIES TO THE FULL MODEL YEAR FOR ALL VEHICLES SHOWN EXCEPT THE FOLLOWING: ^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L DOHC - Built After May 2002 ^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L OHV - Built After February 2002 ^ 2002 Econoline And F-150 4.2L OHV - Built After April 9, 2002 ^ 2003 Explorer 4dr/Mountaineer 4.6L SOHC - Built After February 2, 2003 SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Retrieve continuous DTC(s). 2. If P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401 are present, turn ignition OFF and replace the DPFE sensor. 3. Clear continuous DTC(s). 4. Perform key on engine off (KOEO) and key on engine running (KOER) self-test. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02-11-2 > Jun > 02 > Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels > Page 3731 Labor Operations Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9J460 42 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02-11-2 > Jun > 02 > Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels > Page 3732 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3733 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3734 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 86) is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback sensor receives this signal through two hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the aluminum differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3735 Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 87) is identical in operation as the larger metal or plastic DPFE sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the underside of the sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3736 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor by sliding up and off the EGR tube. NOTE: The 3.0L (4V) engine is shown, the 2.0L Zetec engine is similar. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-5-5 > Mar > 01 > PCM - Charge Lamp ON in Cold Temperatures Powertrain Control Module: Customer Interest PCM - Charge Lamp ON in Cold Temperatures Article No. 01-5-5 March 19, 2001 ELECTRICAL - CHARGING SYSTEM WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED - DURING COLD AMBIENT TEMPERATURES BELOW - 6 DEGREES CELSIUS (20 DEGREES F.) VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH 2.0L ZETEC ENGINE BUILT 7/8/2000 THROUGH 2/12/2001 ONLY FORD: 2001 ESCAPE ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a red charge lamp illumination in cold ambient temperatures below-6°C (20°F). This may be caused by the calibration of the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). ACTION Verify red charge lamp illumination. If normal diagnostics cannot resolve condition, reprogram the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with latest calibration. Refer to the PCM Calibration Information Chart shown for details. Obtain an Authorized Modifications Decal (FPS 8262 - obtainable through DOES II, 25/pkg) and list the date, dealer number, and summary of modifications performed. Select a prominent place adjacent to the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal suitable for installing the Authorized Modifications Decal. Clean the area, install the decal, and cover it with a clear plastic decal shield. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 203000, 203100, 204000, 204200, 206000, 290000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls General PCM Programming Procedures Powertrain Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures TSB 04-24-14 12/13/04 FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS 1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis, Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement. ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed. ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs. Verify repair after reprogramming. SERVICE PROCEDURE PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement 1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle. 2. Use WDS if available. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 3751 a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply. b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level. 3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool, such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS. NOTE IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS, GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF. PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD 1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure. 2. Install the new PCM. NOTE IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER. 3. Attempt to start the vehicle. 4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM. 5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639. a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1. b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc. 6. Check for DTC B2900. a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during this procedure. b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7. 7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures. REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement 1. Verify all cables are properly connected. 2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level. 3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level. 4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again. 5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open previous session, and attempt reprogramming again. 6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure. BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure. 1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits. 2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity. NOTE IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 3752 INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC. 3. Connect WDS to vehicle. 4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK. 5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK. 6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK. 7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press TICK. 8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK. 9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK. 10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above". 11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK. 12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed above. Press TICK. 13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens. 14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 01-5-5 > Mar > 01 > PCM - Charge Lamp ON in Cold Temperatures Powertrain Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins PCM - Charge Lamp ON in Cold Temperatures Article No. 01-5-5 March 19, 2001 ELECTRICAL - CHARGING SYSTEM WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED - DURING COLD AMBIENT TEMPERATURES BELOW - 6 DEGREES CELSIUS (20 DEGREES F.) VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH 2.0L ZETEC ENGINE BUILT 7/8/2000 THROUGH 2/12/2001 ONLY FORD: 2001 ESCAPE ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a red charge lamp illumination in cold ambient temperatures below-6°C (20°F). This may be caused by the calibration of the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). ACTION Verify red charge lamp illumination. If normal diagnostics cannot resolve condition, reprogram the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with latest calibration. Refer to the PCM Calibration Information Chart shown for details. Obtain an Authorized Modifications Decal (FPS 8262 - obtainable through DOES II, 25/pkg) and list the date, dealer number, and summary of modifications performed. Select a prominent place adjacent to the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal suitable for installing the Authorized Modifications Decal. Clean the area, install the decal, and cover it with a clear plastic decal shield. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 203000, 203100, 204000, 204200, 206000, 290000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls General PCM Programming Procedures Powertrain Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures TSB 04-24-14 12/13/04 FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS 1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis, Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement. ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed. ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs. Verify repair after reprogramming. SERVICE PROCEDURE PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement 1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle. 2. Use WDS if available. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 3762 a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply. b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level. 3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool, such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS. NOTE IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS, GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF. PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD 1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure. 2. Install the new PCM. NOTE IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER. 3. Attempt to start the vehicle. 4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM. 5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639. a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1. b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc. 6. Check for DTC B2900. a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during this procedure. b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7. 7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures. REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement 1. Verify all cables are properly connected. 2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level. 3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level. 4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again. 5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open previous session, and attempt reprogramming again. 6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure. BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure. 1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits. 2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity. NOTE IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Powertrain Control Module: > 04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 3763 INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC. 3. Connect WDS to vehicle. 4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK. 5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK. 6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK. 7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press TICK. 8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK. 9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK. 10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above". 11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK. 12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed above. Press TICK. 13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens. 14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3764 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3765 Powertrain Control Module: Diagrams Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3766 Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3767 Part 3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3768 Powertrain Control Module: Description and Operation POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE - VEHICLE SPEED OUTPUT (VSO) The PCM-VSO (Powertrain Control Module - Vehicle Speed Output) speed signal subsystem generates vehicle speed information for distribution to the vehicle's electrical/electronic modules and subsystems that require vehicle speed data. This subsystem senses the transmission output shaft speed with a sensor. The data is processed by the PCM, and distributed as a hard-wired signal or as a multiplexed data message. The key features of the PCM-VSO system are to: ^ Infer vehicle movement from the output shaft sensor signal ^ Convert transmission output shaft rotational information to vehicle speed information ^ Compensate for tire size and axle ratio with a programmed calibration variable ^ Utilize a transfer case sensor for four wheel drive applications ^ Distribute vehicle speed information as a multiplexed message and/or an analog signal The signal from a non-contact shaft sensor (Output Shaft Sensor--OSS or Transfer Case Shaft Sensor--TCSS) mounted on the transmission (automatics, manuals, or 4X4 transfer cases) is sensed directly by the PCM. The PCM converts the OSS or TCSS information to 8000 pulses per mile, based on a tire and axle ratio conversion factor. This conversion factor is programmed into the PCM at the time the vehicle is assembled and can be reprogrammed in the field for servicing changes in the tire size and axle ratio. The PCM transmits the computed vehicle speed and distance traveled information to all the vehicle speed signal users on the vehicle. VSO information can be transmitted by a hard-wired interface between the vehicle speed signal user and the PCM, or by Speed and Odometer SCP multiplexed data messages. The VSO hard-wired signal wave form is a DC square wave with a voltage level of 0 to VBAT. Typical output operating range is 2.22Hz per MPH (1.3808 Hz pr 1 Km/h). Multiplexed data for speed and distance data are transmitted as separate SCP messages over the SCP multiplex link. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory Powertrain Control Module: Service and Repair Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory - Flash EEPROM Description Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) is contained in an Integrated Circuit (IC) internal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle and is capable of being reprogrammed or reflashed repeatedly. As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the Vehicle Identification (VID) block. The VID block must be programmed when replacing the PCM as under Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to perform this procedure may generate fault code: P1639, VID Block not programmed or is corrupt. The VID block in an existing Powertrain Control Module (PCM). can also be tailored to accommodate various hardware changes made to the vehicle since production. Failure to perform this procedure properly may generate fault code: P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of Acceptable Range. This is described under Making Changes to the VID Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The VID block contains many items used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items include the VIN number, octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the presence of speed control and four wheel drive electronic shift on the fly versus manual shift on the fly. Only items applicable to vehicle hardware and supported by the VID block will be displayed on the scan tool. When changing items in the VID block, the strategy will place range limits on certain items such as tire and axle ratio. The VID block is also limited to the number of times to be reconfigured. When this limit is reached, the scan tool will display a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again to reset the VID block. Each of the procedures described below use the Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS). Reprogramming can be performed by a local Ford dealer for any non Ford facility. There are other Enhanced Scan Tools that may have reprogramming capabilities available. Refer to the diagnostic tool manufacturers users manual for details. Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM A new PCM will contain the latest strategy and calibration level for a particular vehicle. However, the VID block will be blank and will need programming. There are two procedures available. The first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM and the second is manual data entry into the new PCM. Automatic data transfer will be performed if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by the use of a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The stored data can now be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been replaced. Manual data entry must be performed if the old module is damaged and is incapable of communicating. Remove and replace the old PCM. You may be instructed to contact the "AS BUILT" data center for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center ONLY if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford L-M technician's, contact your National Hotline for "AS Built" data. Non Ford technicians, use the Fed World website at "fedworld.gov". Select Auto Service Information and search for "Calibrations" or "Vehicle Calibrations" then specify vehicle manufacturer, model name and model year as required. Making Changes to the VID Block A PCM which is programmed may require changes to be made to certain VID information to accommodate vehicle hardware. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the Scan Tool. Making Changes to the PCM Calibration At certain times, the entire EEPROM will need to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to changes made to the strategy or calibration after production or the need to reset the VID block because it has reached its limit. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the Scan Tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module <--> [Engine Control Module] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory > Page 3771 Powertrain Control Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) cover. 1 Loosen the bolt and disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the nuts and the cover. 3. Remove the PCM. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module Power Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Powertrain Control Module Power Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 3775 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Absolute Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation THERMAL MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure (TMAP) Sensor The Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor (TMAP) (Figure 41) consists of a Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor and an integrated thermistor. The thermistor part of the sensor is currently not being used. The MAP part of the sensor measures intake manifold air absolute pressure. The PCM uses information from the MAP sensor, Throttle Position (TP) sensor, Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor, Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) or Cylinder Head Temperature (CKP) sensor and Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor to determine how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations > Page 3783 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations > Page 3784 Mass Air Flow Sensor: Description and Operation MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire (Figure 36). If the hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the air mass flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio (Figure 37). This input is also used in determining transmission Electronic Pressure Control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling. Some MAF sensors have Integrated Bypass Technology (IBT) with an integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor. The present applications with IBT are: Focus, Escort (4V), 2.0L Cougar, Escape, Taurus/Sable, Windstar, Explorer/Mountaineer and E-Series. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations > Page 3785 Mass Air Flow Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube. 2. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the four nuts and the MAF sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3789 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3790 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR The Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston No.1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and used for synchronizing the firing of sequential fuel injectors. The Coil On Plug (COP) Ignition applications also use the CMP signal to select the proper ignition coil to fire. The input circuit to the PCM is referred to as the CMP input or circuit. Typical Hall-Effect Sensor Typical Variable Reluctance Sensor There are two types of CMP sensors: the three pin connector Hall-effect type sensor (Figure 22) and the two pin connector variable reluctance sensor (Figure 23). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3791 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolt. 3 Remove the sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Clutch Switch: Description and Operation CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP)/Park-Neutral Position (PNP) Switches The Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) switch (Figure 24) is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position and, in some manual transmission applications, both the clutch pedal engagement position and the gear shift position. The PCM provides a 5-volt reference Vehicle Reference Voltage (VREF) signal to the CPP switch and/or a Park/Neutral Position (PNP) switch (on the CPP signal line). If the CPP switch (either or both CPP and PNP switches are closed) is closed, indicating the clutch pedal is engaged and the shift lever is in the NEUTRAL position, the output voltage (5 volts) from the PCM is grounded through the signal return line to the PCM, and there is 1 volt or less. One volt or less indicates there is a reduced load on the engine. If the CPP switch (or PNP switch on vehicle or both CPP and PNP switches open on the vehicle) is open, meaning the clutch pedal is disengaged (all systems) and the shift lever is not in NEUTRAL position (PNP switch systems), the input on the CPP signal to the PCM will be approximately 5 volts. Then, the 5-volt signal input at the PCM will indicate a load on the engine. The PCM uses the load information in mass air flow and fuel calculations. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3795 Clutch Switch: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) electrical connector. 2. Remove the CPP locknut and the switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3799 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3803 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3804 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (INTEGRATED IGNITION SYSTEMS) Three Different Types Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensors The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The trigger wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L ten cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the trigger wheel, the CKP indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to fixed reference (Figure 25). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3805 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the exhaust manifold. 2. Remove the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolt. 3 Remove the sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE SENSOR Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor The Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor (Figure 26) is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and increases as temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM would then initiate a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy details. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor > Page 3811 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor (Figure 27) is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The sensor is threaded into an engine coolant passage. The ECT sensor is similar in construction to the IAT sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3812 Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR REMOVAL 1. Remove the generator. 2. Disconnect the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the CHT sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service Precautions WARNING: ^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3816 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor In-Line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor The Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) sensor (Figure 97) or inline Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) sensor (Figure 98) is used to measure the fuel tank pressure during the EVAP monitor test on vehicles equipped with the Running Loss-type system. Also, it is used to control excessive fuel tank pressure by forcing the system to purge. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3817 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 1. Disconnect the battery. WARNING: THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 2. Remove the rear seat assembly. 3. Remove the fuel tank sending unit access cover. 4. Disconnect the fuel tank pressure sensor electrical connector. 5. Remove the fuel tank pressure sensor. ^ Disconnect the vapor tubes. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3818 ^ Carry out a leak test. See: Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission System Leak Test ^ Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission Repair Verification Drive Cycle NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL(R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot and Cold Wire Terminals The Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensors (Figure 34) and integrated Mass Air Flow (MAF) type (Figure 37), are thermistor devices in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3822 Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The IAT provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air temperature information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel spark and MAF. The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT sensor. Supercharged 5.4L Lightning vehicles use (2) AT sensors. Both sensors operate as above. However, one is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for standard OBD II/cold weather input, while a second sensor Second Intake Air Temperature (IAT2) is located after the supercharger in the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air temperature information to the PCM to control border-line spark and to help determine intercooler efficiency. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3826 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Knock Sensor Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS) The Knock Sensor (KS) (Figure 35) is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3827 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Disconnect the KS electrical connector and remove the connector from the mounting bracket. NOTE: The Knock Sensor (KS) is located on the RH side of the cylinder block. 3. Remove the nut and the KS. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis Technical Service Bulletin # 01-9-7 Date: 010514 Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis Article No. 01-9-7 05/14/01 DRIVEABILITY - H025 (HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR), CATALYST, AND FUEL SYSTEM MONITORS - SERVICE TIPS - OBD II VEHICLES ONLY FORD: 1994-1997 THUNDERBIRD 1994-2001 MUSTANG 1995-2001 CROWN VICTORIA 1996-1997 PROBE 1996-2000 CONTOUR 1996-2001 ESCORT, TAURUS 2000-2001 FOCUS 1994-1997 F SUPER DUTY, F-250 HD, F-350 1995-2001 ECONOLINE, RANGER, WINDSTAR 1996 BRONCO 1996-1997 AEROSTAR 1996-2001 EXPLORER 1997-2001 EXPEDITION, F-150, F-250 LD 1999-2001 SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2001 EXCURSION 2001 ESCAPE LINCOLN: 1995-2001 CONTINENTAL, TOWN CAR 1996-1998 MARK VIII 2000-2001 LS 1998-2001 NAVIGATOR MERCURY: 1994-1997 COUGAR 1995-2001 GRAND MARQUIS 1996-1999 TRACER 1996-2000 MYSTIQUE 1996-2001 SABLE 1999-2001 COUGAR 1997-2001 MOUNTAINEER ISSUE This article is intended to be an aide in diagnosing conditions related to Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S), Catalyst, and Fuel System Monitor related Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Additional information is included to assist in diagnosing certain vehicle symptoms. This article is NOT intended to be a shortcut to the Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) Workshop Manual pinpoint tests. The pinpoint tests in the PC/ED Manual should ALWAYS be followed when diagnosing vehicle conditions. ACTION Use the following information and Service Tips to assist in the diagnosis of H025, Catalyst, and Fuel System Monitor related DTCs. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 98-23-10 WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 623000, 690000, 698298 Information ^ A. Description of Terms and Acronyms ^ B. HO2S Location Diagrams ^ C. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3832 ^ C1. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Information ^ C2. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) ^ D. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor ^ D1. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Information ^ D2. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) ^ E. Fuel System Monitor ^ E1. Fuel System Monitor - Information ^ E2. Fuel System Monitor Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) ^ F. Diagnostic Service Tips ^ F1. Tips - General ^ F2. Tips Related to Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor ^ F3. Tips Related to Catalyst Monitor ^ F4. Tips Related to Fuel System Monitor A. Description of Terms and Acronyms ^ CHT - Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor or PID ^ CKP - Crankshaft Position Sensor or PID ^ DTC - Diagnostic Trouble Code ^ ECT - Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor or PID ^ EGR - Exhaust Gas Recirculation ^ EEC - Electronic Engine Control ^ EVR - EGR Vacuum Regulator ^ FMEM - Failure Mode Effects Management ^ GND - Ground ^ HC - Hydrocarbons ^ HO2S - Heated Oxygen Sensor or PID ^ IAT - Inlet Air Temperature Sensor or PID ^ KAM - Keep Alive Memory ^ KOEO - Key On Engine Off ^ KOER - Key On Engine Running ^ LONGFT - Long Term Fuel Trim ^ MAF - Mass Air Flow Sensor or PID ^ MIL - Malfunction Indicator Lamp ("Check Engine") ^ NGS - New Generation Star Tester (Scan Tool) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3833 ^ OBD II - On-Board Diagnostics II ^ OSM - Output State Monitor ^ PC/ED - Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis ^ PCM - Powertrain Control Module ^ PCV - Positive Crankcase Ventilation ^ PID - Parameter Identification Display ^ RAM - Random Access Memory ^ RPM - Revolutions Per Minute ^ SHRTFT - Short Term Fuel Trim ^ Stoichiometric - 14.7:1 Air/Fuel Ratio (Gasoline Engines) ^ TP - Throttle Position Sensor or PID ^ VMV - Vapor Management Valve ^ VPWR - Vehicle Power (Battery Voltage) ^ VREF - Vehicle Reference Voltage (5 volts) B. HO2S Location Diagrams Refer to Figure 1 to better understand the H025 sensor names and locations. Regardless of how the engine is mounted in the vehicle, conventional or transverse, the HO2S naming convention stays the same in relationship to engine banks 1 and 2. Bank 1 will always be the bank containing the # 1 cylinder. C. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor C1.) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3834 The H025 Monitor is an on-board strategy designed to monitor the HO2S sensors for a malfunction or deterioration that can affect emissions. Under specific conditions, the fuel control or upstream HO2S sensors (Figures 1 and 3) are checked for proper output voltage and response rate (the time it takes to switch from lean to rich or rich to lean). Downstream HO2S sensors (Figures 1 and 3) used for Catalyst Monitor are also monitored for proper output voltage. Input is required from the ECT or CHT, IAT, MAF, TP and CKP sensors to activate the H025 Monitor. The Fuel System Monitor and Misfire Detection Monitor must also have completed successfully before the HO2S Monitor is enabled. The HO2S sensor senses the oxygen content in the exhaust flow and outputs a voltage between zero and 1.0 volt. Lean of stoichiometric (air/fuel ratio of approximately 14.7:1 for gasoline engines), the HO2S will generate a voltage between zero and 0.45 volt. Rich of stoichiometric, the HO2S will generate a voltage between 0.45 and 1.0 volt. ^ The HO2S Monitor evaluates both the upstream (Fuel Control) and downstream (Catalyst Monitor) HO2S for proper function. ^ Once the HO2S Monitor is enabled, the upstream H025 signal voltage amplitude and response frequency are checked. Excessive voltage is determined by comparing the HO2S signal voltage to a maximum calibratable threshold voltage. ^ A fixed frequency closed loop fuel control routine is executed and the upstream HO2S voltage amplitude and output response frequency are observed. A sample of the upstream HO2S signal is evaluated to determine if the sensor is capable of switching or has a slow response rate. ^ An HO2S heater circuit fault is determined by turning the heater on and off and looking for a corresponding change in the OSM and by measuring the current going through the heater circuit. ^ The MIL is activated after a fault is detected on two consecutive OBD II drive cycles. The HO2S Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows: ^ HO2S signal circuit malfunction - P0131, P0136, P0151, P0156 ^ HO2S slow response rate - P0133, P0153 ^ HO2S heater circuit malfunction - P0135, P0141, P0155, P0161 ^ Downstream HO2S not running in on-demand self test - P1127 ^ Swapped H025 connectors - P1128 and P1129 ^ H025 lack of switching - P1130, P1131, P1132, P1150, P1151, P1152 ^ HO2S lack of switching (sensor indicates lean) - P1137 ^ H025 lack of switching (sensor indicates rich) - P1138 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3835 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3836 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3837 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3838 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3839 C2.) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes D. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor D1.) Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Information The Federal Test Procedure Catalyst Monitor monitors for deterioration in the catalyst system and illuminates the MIL when tailpipe emissions exceed the appropriate HC emission thresholds. The Catalyst Monitor is enabled after the upstream and downstream HO2S sensors have been tested and verified to be functional. This monitor relies on the front and rear heated oxygen sensors (HO2S) to infer catalyst efficiency based upon oxygen storage capacity. Under normal closed loop fuel conditions, high efficiency catalysts have oxygen storage which makes the switching frequency of the rear HO2S quite slow compared with the frequency of the front HO2S. As catalyst efficiency deteriorates, its ability to store oxygen declines, and the rear HO2S begins to switch more rapidly, approaching the frequency of the front sensor. In general, as catalyst efficiency decreases, the switch ratio increases from a switch ratio of 0 for a low mileage catalyst to a switch ratio of 0.8 or 0.9 for a low efficiency catalyst. Some vehicles will monitor substantially less than the entire catalyst volume in order to meet the stringent catalyst monitoring malfunction thresholds. In many cases, only the front, light-off catalyst is monitored. Front and rear HO2S switches are counted under specified closed loop fuel conditions. After the required number of front switches are obtained, a rear-to-front HO2S switch ratio is calculated. The switch ratio is compared against a threshold value. If the switch ratio is greater than the calibrated maximum limit, the catalyst has failed. The test entry conditions for the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor are as follows: ECT or CHT (warmed engine), IAT (not at extreme ambient temperatures), MAF (greater than minimum engine load), VSS (within vehicle speed window) and TP (at part throttle) are required. ^ Because an exponentially weighted moving average is used for malfunction determination, up to six OBD II drive cycles may be required to illuminate the MIL. NOTE THE CATALYST MONITOR ON SOME EARLY OBD II VEHICLES (SOME 1994-1996 VEHICLES) WAS REFERRED TO AS THE "STEADY-STATE CATALYST MONITOR" AS OPPOSED TO THE "FTP CATALYST MONITOR" (DESCRIBED ABOVE) THAT IS MOST COMMON FOR VEHICLES BUILT AFTER 1996. BELOW IS A BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE STEADY-STATE CATALYST MONITOR: The Steady-State Catalyst Monitor performs a 20 second test during steady state rpm and load conditions. The Monitor transfers closed loop fuel control from the front to the rear 02 sensors. The Monitor then observes the switching frequency and compares it to a threshold frequency stored in an rpm/load table. A frequency higher than the maximum calibrated threshold indicates a malfunction. The Catalyst Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3840 ^ Catalyst system efficiency below threshold (Bank 1) - P0420 ^ Catalyst system efficiency below threshold (Bank 2) - P0430 D2.) Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes E. Fuel System Monitor E1.) Fuel System Monitor - Information The Fuel System Monitor is an on-board strategy designed to monitor the fuel trim system. The fuel control system uses fuel trim tables stored in the PCM's KAM to compensate for variability in fuel system components due to normal wear and aging. Fuel trim tables are based on vehicle speed and engine load. During closed loop vehicle operation, the fuel trim strategy learns the corrections needed to correct a "biased" rich or lean fuel system. The correction is stored in the fuel trim tables. The fuel trim has two means of adapting; a LONGFT and a SHRTFT. LONGFT relies on the fuel trim tables and SHRTFT refers to the desired air/fuel ratio parameter "LAMBSE". LAMBSE is calculated by the PCM from HO2S inputs and helps maintain a 14.7:1 air/fuel ratio during closed loop operation. SHRTFT and LONGFT work together. If the HO2S indicates the engine is running rich, the PCM will correct the rich condition by moving SHRTFT in the negative range (less fuel to correct for a rich combustion). If after a certain amount of time SHRTFT is still compensating for a rich condition, the PCM "learns" this and moves LONGFT into the negative range to compensate and allows SHRTFT to return to a value near 0%. Input from the ECT or CHT, IAT, and MAF sensors is required to activate the fuel trim system, which in turn activates the Fuel System Monitor. Once activated, the Fuel System Monitor looks for the fuel trim tables to reach the adaptive clip (adaptive limit) and LAMBSE to exceed a calibrated limit. The Fuel System Monitor will store the appropriate DTC when a fault is detected as described below. ^ The H025 detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and provides the PCM with feedback indicating a rich or lean condition. ^ A correction factor is added to the fuel injector pulsewidth calculation according to the Long and Short Term Fuel Trims as needed to compensate for variations in the fuel system. ^ When deviation in the parameter LAMBSE increases, air/fuel control suffers and emissions increase. When LAMBSE exceeds a calibrated limit and the fuel trim table has clipped (reached adaptive limit), the Fuel System Monitor sets a DTC. ^ The MIL is activated after a fault is detected on two consecutive OBD II drive cycles. The Fuel System Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows: ^ Fuel Delivery Error - P0148 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3841 ^ Lean shift in fuel system operation - P0171 (Bank 1) and P0174 (Bank 2) ^ Rich shift in fuel system operation - P0172 (Bank 1) and P0175 (Bank 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3842 E2.) Fuel System Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes F. Diagnostic Service Tips 1. Always reset KAM after performing a repair: After performing a repair on a vehicle with the MIL on, and/or DTCs present, always clear KAM. When a malfunction is present, the PCM adapts (attempts to correct) for this condition. Once the vehicle has been repaired, if the KAM is not reset, the PCM will once again have to adapt back to the normal operating conditions. Clearing the KAM will erase what the PCM has learned, so the PCM will be able to start with "base tables". 2. Always view and record Freeze Frame Data: Freeze Frame Data can be a valuable asset in duplicating and diagnosing concerns. This data (a snapshot of certain PID values, recorded at the time the MIL was activated) indicates the manner in which the vehicle was being driven at the time the fault occurred. This can be especially useful on intermittent concerns. Freeze Frame Data, in some cases, can also help to isolate possible areas of concern, as well as ruling out others. Always record (write down) the Freeze Frame Data. 3. Multiple DTCs (with the same meaning): When multiple (paired) DTCs with the same meaning are set for multiple sensors, it is unlikely that replacing both HO2S sensors will resolve the concern. In most cases, there will be another issue that is causing the codes. Examples of multiple (paired) DTCs: (P0135/P0155), (P0141/P0161), (P1131/P1151), (P1132/P1152). To further clarify this, see the more detailed scenario as follows: A vehicle comes in with a MIL On concern. KOEO self test reveals DTCs P0135 and P0155 (HTR-11 and HTR-21 circuit malfunction), with no other DTCs present. The most likely cause of these DTCs would be something in the heater power circuit that both of these HO2S sensors have in common (Example: open or shorted heater circuit wiring or splice). It is highly unlikely that multiple sensors would fail at the same time. When multiple DTCs of this nature are encountered, reviewing the appropriate wiring diagram(s) can help to isolate possible areas of concern. When reviewing the wiring diagram, look for things that the affected sensors have in common. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3843 In this example, the most likely cause of DTCs P0135 and P0155 (with no other DTCs present) would be a concern with Splice "B" (refer to Figure 2). NOTE THIS ILLUSTRATION IS ONLY AN EXAMPLE. SPLICE NAMES "A", "B", AND "C" ARE USED IN THIS EXAMPLE FOR CONVENIENCE ONLY. ON AN ACTUAL VEHICLE, SPLICE NAMES WILL DEPEND ON THE CIRCUIT NUMBER FOR THE VEHICLE UNDER REPAIR. NOTE ALSO THAT THIS FIGURE IS NOT INTENDED TO SHOW ALL SPLICES/CONNECTIONS ON ALL VEHICLES. OTHER EEC CIRCUITS, NOT SHOWN, MAY ALSO BE SPLICED IN WITH THE CIRCUITS SHOWN. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3844 4. View H025 PID data carefully: NGS PIDs for HO2S sensors that do not exist (with certain exhaust configurations) will show a value of "0" volts (refer to Figures 3 and 4). In this example, the vehicle (equipped with a 4-cylinder engine) has one upstream and one downstream HO2S. Notice that the NGS (scan tool) display shows two upstream and two downstream HO2S PIDs, and that the "unused" HO2S sensor PIDs display "0" volts. 5. H025 sensors measure oxygen in the exhaust, not fuel: The exhaust gas condition reported by the HO2S sensor is based on the presence of oxygen in the exhaust, not the presence of unburned fuel. Example: In the event of an ignition-related misfire, you might expect a rich HO2S reading, due to the amount of unburned fuel in the exhaust system. However, there is also a large amount of unburned oxygen, since no combustion took place in the misfiring cylinder. Since the H025 senses oxygen only, it would report a lean condition in this particular situation. F2.) Tips Related to Heated Oxygen Sensor (H025) Monitor 1. OBD II Response Rate Monitor: The OBD II Response Rate Monitor (P0133/P0153) is only run at vehicle speeds between approximately 50-95 km/h (30-60 mph), during steady-state conditions. The test lasts approximately 6 seconds. Therefore, P0133/P0153 cannot be diagnosed at idle in the repair bay. 2. Do not compare H025 switch rate - Bank-to-Bank or vehicle-to-vehicle: Different H025 switch rates, from Bank-to-Bank, are considered normal. The H025 switch rate, from one Bank to the other, should not be compared as a gauge of the H025's ability to switch/react. The PCM is continuously adjusting spark and fuel in reaction to engine operating conditions (rpm, load, air flow, throttle angle, etc.). The PCM is also continuously adapting to certain conditions (customer driving habits, engine and component wear, etc.). F3.) Tips Related to Catalyst Efficiency Monitor 1. Determining catalyst efficiency/switch ratio: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3845 The upstream H025 sensors will have a high switch frequency, due to normal closed loop fuel control. With an efficient catalyst, the downstream H025 will have a low switch frequency. The switch ratio is determined by dividing the number of downstream switches by the number of upstream switches over a given period of time. As the catalyst ages (or if the catalyst is damaged or contaminated), the downstream switches will increase. When the downstream switch rate crosses a threshold value (approximately 0.75 switch ratio), a code is stored (P0420 and/or P0430) and the MIL illuminates (refer to Figures 5 and 6). NOTE IF A CATALYST IS DETERMINED TO HAVE LOW EFFICIENCY AND REQUIRES REPLACEMENT, REPLACEMENT OF THE DOWNSTREAM H025 SENSORS WILL NOT BE NECESSARY. 2. Use care in handling H025 sensors: In the event of catalyst replacement, use care in the handling of H025 sensors to prevent damage or contamination. Do not use power tools in the removal or installation of sensors. Use a 22mm wrench or crow foot to remove and install H025 sensors; do not use slotted sockets, as these sockets may damage wires. H025 sensors should be torqued to 41 +/- 5 N.m (30 +/- 4 lb-ft). 3. Do not replace downstream HO2S sensors (H02S12/H02S22) for DTCs P0420 and/or P0430: When diagnosing a vehicle with a customer concern of MIL On and DTCs P0420/P0430 in continuous memory, do not replace the downstream HO2S sensors (H02S12/H02S22). Damaged or malfunctioning downstream HO2S sensors will not cause these DTCs to be set. Always verify the vehicle concern, then perform the pinpoint diagnostics in the appropriate PC/ED Service Manual. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 3846 F4.) Tips Related to the Fuel System Monitor 1. HO2S sensors are not likely to be the cause of adaptive DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175: Most warranty-returned HO2S sensors (replaced for these DTCs) are found to function normally. Additional related DTCs will normally be present if there is a concern with the HO2S sensors. Do not replace an HO2S sensor unless verified through pinpoint diagnostic tests found in the PC/ED Service Manual. 2. DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174, and P0175 are not related to downstream H028 sensors: When diagnosing a vehicle with a MIL On and DTC(s) P0171, P0172, P0174, and/or P0175 in continuous memory, do not replace the downstream HO2S sensors. These DTCs have no connection to the downstream HO2S sensor function nor its diagnosis for faults. Always verify the vehicle concern, then perform the pinpoint diagnostics from the appropriate PC/ED Service Manual. 3. Diagnosing lean conditions and lean DTCs P0171, P0174: Freeze Frame Data can often help to identify the type of lean condition, even if the fault is intermittent, by indicating how the vehicle was being driven when the fault occurred. Diagnosis of lean conditions and lean adaptive DTCs can be difficult, especially if the concern is intermittent. Verifying the concern is extremely important. There are different types of lean conditions. The ability to identify the type of lean condition causing the concern can be crucial to a correct diagnosis. When DTCs P0171 and P0174 are both present, there is a strong likelihood of another concern being present: a. Vacuum leaks/unmetered air: In this type of condition, the engine may actually run lean of stoichiometry (14.7:1 air/fuel ratio) if the PCM is not able to compensate enough to correct for the condition. This condition is typically caused by air entering the engine through an abnormal source (opening), or due to a MAF malfunction. In this situation, the volume of air entering the engine is actually greater than what the MAF is indicating to the PCM. Vacuum leaks will normally be most apparent when high manifold vacuum is present, during idle or light throttle. If Freeze Frame Data indicates that the fault occurred at idle, a check for vacuum leaks/unmetered air when the engine is cold might be the best starting point. Examples: Loose, leaking or disconnected vacuum lines, intake manifold gaskets or 0-rings, throttle body gaskets, brake booster, air inlet tube, stuck/frozen/aftermarket PCV valve, unseated engine oil dipstick, MAF reading lower than normal, etc. b. Insufficient fueling: In this type of condition, the engine may actually run lean of stoichiometry (14.7:1 air/fuel ratio) if the PCM is not able to compensate enough to correct for the condition. This condition is typically caused by a fuel delivery system concern that restricts or limits the amount of fuel being delivered to the engine. This condition will normally be most apparent when the engine is under a heavy load, when a higher volume of fuel is required. If Freeze Frame Data indicates that the fault occurred under a heavy load, a check of the fuel delivery system (checking fuel pressure with engine under a load) might be the best starting point. Examples: Low fuel pressure (fuel pump, fuel filter, fuel leaks, restricted fuel supply lines), fuel injector concerns, etc. c. Exhaust system leaks: In this type of condition, the engine may actually be running near stoichiometry (14.7:1 air/fuel ratio), but the exhaust gas mixture will be lean. This condition is caused by oxygen-rich air entering the exhaust system through an external source. This condition will cause the exhaust gas mixture to be lean, even though the actual combustion in the engine may not be. Examples: Exhaust system leaks upstream or near HO2S, malfunctioning Secondary Air Injection system d. MAF concerns: If a MAF concern is suspected, see TSB 98-23-10. 4. Checking fuel pressure: Check fuel pressure with engine under a load when diagnosing a lean concern. A partially plugged fuel filter can be difficult to detect and can be easily overlooked if fuel pressure is only checked at idle. The same is true for other types of fuel supply concerns (e.g., bent or kinked lines, degraded fuel pump). At idle, an engine requires only a small volume of fuel. Due to the fact that there is a small volume of fuel needed at idle, a restriction in the fuel supply line in many cases will not cause the fuel pressure to be low. When the vehicle is under a load, the engine requires much more fuel than at idle. Under a load, a restriction in the fuel supply line will prevent the high rate of fuel flow that is needed to maintain the correct fuel pressure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3847 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Heated Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Find and Use These Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams ^ System Diagrams ^ Grounds Diagrams Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3850 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow. Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the diagram. Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be found. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3851 Fuse And Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. Fuse Circuits Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery. Ground Distribution Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text "partial". Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3852 Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of (1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces). The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number. Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the way out by a spring. Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control. A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the way in. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. circuit Numbering Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification Circuit Numbering: Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting electrical circuits. Function: The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter "S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit. System-Connection (including branch): Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate wires in one connection with the same function. Wire Identification (wire colors): The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3853 Wire Identification Example Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know the following information about the wire: Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit System: AC = Headlamp leveling Connection: 3 = Switch connection A = Branch Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe). Circuit Identification Charts Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3854 Circuit Identification Chart System Codes Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3855 Sample Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3856 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3857 Sample Diagram Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3858 Circuit Identification Chart SYSTEM CODES CHART Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3859 SAMPLE DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3860 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3861 Sample Diagram Electrical Symbols ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3862 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3863 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3864 Types of Diagrams Shown Types of Diagrams Shown Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them. Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations. Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system information suitable for diagnostic operations. Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a relationship to them, are also included. All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding of the system component interactions. Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type. Wire Color Code Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3865 Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3866 Heated Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3867 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3868 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3869 Heated Oxygen Sensor: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3870 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor Heated Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor Heated Oxygen Sensor Monitor The Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor is an on-board strategy designed to monitor the HO2S sensors for a malfunction or deterioration which can affect emissions. The fuel control or upstream HO2S is checked for proper output voltage and response rate (the time it takes to switch from lean to rich or rich to lean). Downstream HO2S used for Catalyst Monitor are also monitored for proper output voltage. The following illustration shows that input is required from the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) or Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT), Intake Air Temperature (IAT), Mass Air Flow (MAF) and Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensors to activate the HO2S Monitor. The Fuel System Monitor and Misfire Detection Monitor must also have completed successfully before the HO2S Monitor is enabled. 1. The HO2S sensor senses the oxygen content in the exhaust flow and outputs a voltage between zero and 1.0 volt. Lean of stoichiometric (air/fuel ratio of approximately 14.7:1), the HO2S will generate a voltage between zero and 0.45 volt. Rich of stoichiometric, the HO2S will generate a voltage between 0.45 and 1.0 volt. The HO2S Monitor evaluates both the upstream (fuel control) and downstream (Catalyst Monitor) HO2S for proper function. 2. Once the HO2S Monitor is enabled, the upstream HO2S signal voltage amplitude and response frequency are checked. Excessive voltage is determined by comparing the HO2S signal voltage to a maximum calibratable threshold voltage. A fixed frequency closed loop fuel control routine is executed and the upstream HO2S voltage amplitude and output response frequency are observed. A sample of the upstream HO2S signal is evaluated to determine if the sensor is capable of switching or has a slow response rate. A HO2S heater circuit fault is determined by turning the heater on and off and looking for a corresponding change in the Output State Monitor (OSM) and by measuring the current going through the heater circuit. The HO2S Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows: The Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTCs) associated with HO2S lack of switching are DTCs P1130, P1131, P1132, P1150, P1151 and P1152. The DTCs associated with HO2S slow response rate are DTCs P0133 and P0153. The DTCs associated with HO2S signal circuit malfunction are DTCs P0131, P0136, P0148, P0151 and P0156. The DTCs associated with a HO2S heater circuit malfunction are DTCs P0135, P0141, P0155 and P0161. The Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) associated with the downstream HO2S not running in on-demand is DTC P1127. The DTCs associated with swapped HO2S connectors are DTCs P1128 and P1129. 3. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) is activated after a fault is detected on two consecutive drive cycles. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor > Page 3873 Heated Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation PCM Inputs HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) The Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) (Figure 33) detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in the exhaust produces a low voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich air/fuel ratio) produces a high voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts. Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to temperatures of 800°C (1400°F). At approximately 300°C (600°F) the engine can enter closed loop operation. The Vehicle Power (VPWR) circuit supplies voltage to the heater and the PCM will complete the ground when the proper conditions occur. For model year 1998 a new HO2S heater and heater control system are installed on some vehicles. The high power heater reaches closed loop fuel control temperatures. The use of this heater requires that the HO2S heater control be duty cycled, to prevent damage to the heater. The 6 ohm design is not interchangeable with new style 3.3 ohm heater. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Heated Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) EGO Sensor Wrench SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Using the special tool, remove the HO2S. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the HO2S with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the HO2S to aid in installation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 3876 Heated Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor EGO Sensor Wrench SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL EGO Sensor Wrench 1. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the catalyst monitor sensor with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor to aid in installation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Heated Oxygen Sensor <--> [Oxygen Sensor] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3877 EGO Sensor Wrench Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Find and Use These Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams ^ System Diagrams ^ Grounds Diagrams Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3882 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow. Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the diagram. Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be found. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3883 Fuse And Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. Fuse Circuits Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery. Ground Distribution Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text "partial". Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3884 Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of (1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces). The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number. Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the way out by a spring. Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control. A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the way in. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. circuit Numbering Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification Circuit Numbering: Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting electrical circuits. Function: The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter "S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit. System-Connection (including branch): Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate wires in one connection with the same function. Wire Identification (wire colors): The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3885 Wire Identification Example Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know the following information about the wire: Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit System: AC = Headlamp leveling Connection: 3 = Switch connection A = Branch Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe). Circuit Identification Charts Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3886 Circuit Identification Chart System Codes Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3887 Sample Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3888 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3889 Sample Diagram Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3890 Circuit Identification Chart SYSTEM CODES CHART Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3891 SAMPLE DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3892 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3893 Sample Diagram Electrical Symbols ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3894 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3895 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3896 Types of Diagrams Shown Types of Diagrams Shown Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them. Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations. Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system information suitable for diagnostic operations. Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a relationship to them, are also included. All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding of the system component interactions. Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type. Wire Color Code Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3897 Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3898 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3899 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3900 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3901 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The Power Steering Pressure (PSP) switch (Figure 38) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust transmission Electronic Pressure Control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Page 3904 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Sensor POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The Power Steering Pressure (PSP) sensor (Figure 39) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM will change as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust transmission Electronic Pressure Control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect Technical Service Bulletin # 02M01S6 Date: 040831 Attachment I - Administrative Information Customer Satisfaction Program 02M01-S6 Certain Vehicles Equipped with a Tube-Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Additional EGR Pressure Sensor Warranty Coverage OASIS You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this program. Note: Submission of an "M" program claim will not remove the vehicle from OASIS because the affected vehicles are eligible for multiple repairs if the affected condition reoccurs during the extended warranty time/mileage period. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line that the FSA is claimed on. CLAIMING INSTRUCTIONS FOR REPAIRS WITH A REPAIR DATE ON OR AFTER 10/27/03 Claims for all vehicles that are within the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage must be submitted as a warranty repair. ACESII will not accept claims for reimbursement under the 02M01 program for vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage. Vehicles that have branded titles are eligible for this repair under the 02M01 program. Vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage Claims are to be submitted as a normal warranty claim in accordance with TSB 04-11-01. Vehicles beyond New Vehicle Warranty Coverage (including branded titled vehicles) Claims are to be submitted following program 02M01 guidelines. Future Warranty Extension Customer Satisfaction Programs (CSP) Future Warranty Extension CSPs will follow these claiming instructions; only those vehicles outside the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage will be submitted as a CSP type repair. OWNER REFUNDS Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid repairs made on or before the last day of the month of the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair was made away from the servicing dealer). Failure of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460) will not have an impact on any other component of the vehicle. Therefore, refunds will only be granted for the replacement of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460). All supporting documentation must be retained in accordance with the Warranty and Policy Manual. Refer to ACESII manual for refund information. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. Attachment II - Labor Allowances and Parts Ordering Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3913 LABOR ALLOWANCES [NEW] NOTE: If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service Support Center. Special Notes: ^ 02M01C labor operation is in effect for repairs performed on or after 10/27/03. ^ Diagnostics performed beyond retrieving continuous DTC will not be paid for under this program. ^ Pinpoint diagnostics are not required to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor; therefore labor time has been adjusted accordingly. ^ Due to the use of specific DTCs to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor, this program will not cover any other continuous DTCs; normal vehicle warranty would apply for any other DTCs. ^ There will be no related damage claims allowed for this program. PARTS REQUIREMENTS Parts will not be direct shipped for this program. Order your parts requirement through normal order processing. PARTS REQUIREMENTS/ORDERING INFORMATION NOTE: If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service Support Center. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3914 DEALER PRICE For latest prices, check DOES II or updated price book. PARTS RETENTION Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures." EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: If a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine and a dash-mounted EGR pressure sensor is encountered, call the Special Service Support Center. 1. Retrieve continuous DTCs. NOTE: Replace the EGR pressure sensor only if one or more of the following continuous DTCs are present: ^ P1400 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE DETECTED ^ P1401 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE DETECTED ^ P0401- EGR FLOW INSUFFICIENT DETECTED ^ P0402- EGR FLOW EXCESSIVE DETECTED Any other DTC present is not covered by this program. 2. If one or more of the DTCs listed above is present, replace the EGR pressure sensor (9J460) as follows: a) Key off. b) Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the EGR pressure sensor from the EGR tube. c) Install the new EGR pressure sensor onto the EGR tube and connect the electrical connector. Note: Refer to Section 303-08 of the appropriate workshop manual if additional information is required. 3. Clear continuous DTCs. 4. Perform KOEO and KOER self tests. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3915 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3916 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3917 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect Technical Service Bulletin # 02M01S6 Date: 040831 Attachment I - Administrative Information Customer Satisfaction Program 02M01-S6 Certain Vehicles Equipped with a Tube-Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Additional EGR Pressure Sensor Warranty Coverage OASIS You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this program. Note: Submission of an "M" program claim will not remove the vehicle from OASIS because the affected vehicles are eligible for multiple repairs if the affected condition reoccurs during the extended warranty time/mileage period. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line that the FSA is claimed on. CLAIMING INSTRUCTIONS FOR REPAIRS WITH A REPAIR DATE ON OR AFTER 10/27/03 Claims for all vehicles that are within the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage must be submitted as a warranty repair. ACESII will not accept claims for reimbursement under the 02M01 program for vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage. Vehicles that have branded titles are eligible for this repair under the 02M01 program. Vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage Claims are to be submitted as a normal warranty claim in accordance with TSB 04-11-01. Vehicles beyond New Vehicle Warranty Coverage (including branded titled vehicles) Claims are to be submitted following program 02M01 guidelines. Future Warranty Extension Customer Satisfaction Programs (CSP) Future Warranty Extension CSPs will follow these claiming instructions; only those vehicles outside the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage will be submitted as a CSP type repair. OWNER REFUNDS Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid repairs made on or before the last day of the month of the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair was made away from the servicing dealer). Failure of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460) will not have an impact on any other component of the vehicle. Therefore, refunds will only be granted for the replacement of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460). All supporting documentation must be retained in accordance with the Warranty and Policy Manual. Refer to ACESII manual for refund information. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. Attachment II - Labor Allowances and Parts Ordering Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3923 LABOR ALLOWANCES [NEW] NOTE: If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service Support Center. Special Notes: ^ 02M01C labor operation is in effect for repairs performed on or after 10/27/03. ^ Diagnostics performed beyond retrieving continuous DTC will not be paid for under this program. ^ Pinpoint diagnostics are not required to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor; therefore labor time has been adjusted accordingly. ^ Due to the use of specific DTCs to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor, this program will not cover any other continuous DTCs; normal vehicle warranty would apply for any other DTCs. ^ There will be no related damage claims allowed for this program. PARTS REQUIREMENTS Parts will not be direct shipped for this program. Order your parts requirement through normal order processing. PARTS REQUIREMENTS/ORDERING INFORMATION NOTE: If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service Support Center. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3924 DEALER PRICE For latest prices, check DOES II or updated price book. PARTS RETENTION Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures." EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: If a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine and a dash-mounted EGR pressure sensor is encountered, call the Special Service Support Center. 1. Retrieve continuous DTCs. NOTE: Replace the EGR pressure sensor only if one or more of the following continuous DTCs are present: ^ P1400 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE DETECTED ^ P1401 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE DETECTED ^ P0401- EGR FLOW INSUFFICIENT DETECTED ^ P0402- EGR FLOW EXCESSIVE DETECTED Any other DTC present is not covered by this program. 2. If one or more of the DTCs listed above is present, replace the EGR pressure sensor (9J460) as follows: a) Key off. b) Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the EGR pressure sensor from the EGR tube. c) Install the new EGR pressure sensor onto the EGR tube and connect the electrical connector. Note: Refer to Section 303-08 of the appropriate workshop manual if additional information is required. 3. Clear continuous DTCs. 4. Perform KOEO and KOER self tests. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3925 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3926 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 3927 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set Article No. 04-11-1 06/08/2004 DRIVEABILITY - STREAMLINED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR VEHICLES WITH MIL ON AND DTCS P0401, P0402, P1400 OR P1401 - ADDITIONAL SYMPTOMS MAY INCLUDE RUNS ROUGH, LACKS POWER, SURGE, POOR FUEL ECONOMY FORD: 2000-2002 TAURUS 2001-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, FOCUS, MUSTANG 2001 EXPLORER USPS 2001-2002 E SERIES, ESCAPE, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 2002-2003 EXPLORER LINCOLN: 2001-2002 TOWN CAR MERCURY: 2000-2002 SABLE 2001-2002 COUGAR, GRAND MARQUIS 2002-2003 MOUNTAINEER This article supersedes TSB 04-3-1 to update service part information and applications. ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) "ON" with or without the following symptoms: Rough Running, Lack of Power, Surge or Poor Fuel Economy, along with diagnostic trouble codes (DTC's) P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401. This may be caused by an intermittently functioning tube-mounted delta pressure feedback EGR (DPFE) sensor (Figure 1). ACTION For vehicles equipped with a tube-mounted DPFE sensor, perform the following diagnostic procedure and repair action. This procedure supersedes the diagnostic procedure in the PC/ED Manual for the issue described above. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 3932 NOTE ALL LISTED APPLICATIONS CAN NOW BE SERVICED WITH DPFE SENSOR 4U7Z-9J460-AA NOTE THIS ARTICLE APPLIES TO THE FULL MODEL YEAR FOR ALL VEHICLES SHOWN EXCEPT THE FOLLOWING: ^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L DOHC - Built After May 2002 ^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L OHV - Built After February 2002 ^ 2002 Econoline And F-150 4.2L OHV - Built After April 9, 2002 ^ 2003 Explorer 4dr/Mountaineer 4.6L SOHC - Built After February 2, 2003 SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Retrieve continuous DTC(s). 2. If P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401 are present, turn ignition OFF and replace the DPFE sensor. 3. Clear continuous DTC(s). 4. Perform key on engine off (KOEO) and key on engine running (KOER) self-test. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 3933 Labor Operations Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9J460 42 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 3934 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set Article No. 04-11-1 06/08/2004 DRIVEABILITY - STREAMLINED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR VEHICLES WITH MIL ON AND DTCS P0401, P0402, P1400 OR P1401 - ADDITIONAL SYMPTOMS MAY INCLUDE RUNS ROUGH, LACKS POWER, SURGE, POOR FUEL ECONOMY FORD: 2000-2002 TAURUS 2001-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, FOCUS, MUSTANG 2001 EXPLORER USPS 2001-2002 E SERIES, ESCAPE, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 2002-2003 EXPLORER LINCOLN: 2001-2002 TOWN CAR MERCURY: 2000-2002 SABLE 2001-2002 COUGAR, GRAND MARQUIS 2002-2003 MOUNTAINEER This article supersedes TSB 04-3-1 to update service part information and applications. ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) "ON" with or without the following symptoms: Rough Running, Lack of Power, Surge or Poor Fuel Economy, along with diagnostic trouble codes (DTC's) P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401. This may be caused by an intermittently functioning tube-mounted delta pressure feedback EGR (DPFE) sensor (Figure 1). ACTION For vehicles equipped with a tube-mounted DPFE sensor, perform the following diagnostic procedure and repair action. This procedure supersedes the diagnostic procedure in the PC/ED Manual for the issue described above. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 3940 NOTE ALL LISTED APPLICATIONS CAN NOW BE SERVICED WITH DPFE SENSOR 4U7Z-9J460-AA NOTE THIS ARTICLE APPLIES TO THE FULL MODEL YEAR FOR ALL VEHICLES SHOWN EXCEPT THE FOLLOWING: ^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L DOHC - Built After May 2002 ^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L OHV - Built After February 2002 ^ 2002 Econoline And F-150 4.2L OHV - Built After April 9, 2002 ^ 2003 Explorer 4dr/Mountaineer 4.6L SOHC - Built After February 2, 2003 SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Retrieve continuous DTC(s). 2. If P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401 are present, turn ignition OFF and replace the DPFE sensor. 3. Clear continuous DTC(s). 4. Perform key on engine off (KOEO) and key on engine running (KOER) self-test. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 3941 Labor Operations Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9J460 42 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 3942 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3943 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3944 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 86) is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback sensor receives this signal through two hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the aluminum differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3945 Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 87) is identical in operation as the larger metal or plastic DPFE sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the underside of the sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3946 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor by sliding up and off the EGR tube. NOTE: The 3.0L (4V) engine is shown, the 2.0L Zetec engine is similar. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3950 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > PCM Inputs Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation PCM Inputs THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Typical Throttle Position (TP) Sensor The Throttle Position (TP) sensor (Figure 42) is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a three-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases corrosion resistance on terminals and increases connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, four operating conditions are determined by the PCM from the TP. Those conditions are closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration), part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration), wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank), and throttle angle rate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > PCM Inputs > Page 3953 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Systems THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is monitored by the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) II system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government regulations. For additional information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System Hardware-PCM Inputs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications Digital Transmission Range Sensor: Specifications Park/neutral position (PNP) switch 18 ft.lb Transmission range (TR) sensor bolts 9 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3957 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3958 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3959 Digital Transmission Range Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Special Tools Special Tool(s) Removal 1. Place the vehicle in NEUTRAL. 2. Disconnect the battery cables. 3. Remove the battery and tray. 4. Disconnect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAP) sensor. 5. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3960 6. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 7. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the thermostat housing to gain access to the transmission range (TR) sensor. Remove the thermostat housing. 8. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor. 1. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the TR sensor. Installation 1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position. Install the transmission range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3961 2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts. ^ Connect the electrical connector. 3. Install the thermostat housing. 4. Install the air cleaner assembly. 5. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover. 6. Connect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAF) sensor. 7. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or incorrect routing position. Install the battery and tray. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3962 8. NOTE: When the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, some abnormal drive symptoms can occur while the vehicle relearns its adaptive strategy. The vehicle may need to be driven 160 km (100 miles) or more to relearn the strategy. Connect the battery cables. 9. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should be active only in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications Vehicle Speed Sensor: Specifications Vehicle speed sensor (VSS) bolt 62 in.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3966 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3967 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3968 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) The Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (Figure 45) is a variable reluctance or Hall-effect sensor that generates a waveform with a frequency that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the vehicle is moving at a relatively low velocity, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as fuel injection, ignition control, transmission/transaxle shift scheduling and torque converter clutch scheduling. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3969 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the VSS. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3973 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > PCM Inputs Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation PCM Inputs THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Typical Throttle Position (TP) Sensor The Throttle Position (TP) sensor (Figure 42) is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a three-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases corrosion resistance on terminals and increases connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, four operating conditions are determined by the PCM from the TP. Those conditions are closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration), part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration), wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank), and throttle angle rate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > PCM Inputs > Page 3976 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Systems THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is monitored by the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) II system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government regulations. For additional information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System Hardware-PCM Inputs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications Digital Transmission Range Sensor: Specifications Park/neutral position (PNP) switch 18 ft.lb Transmission range (TR) sensor bolts 9 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3980 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3981 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3982 Digital Transmission Range Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Special Tools Special Tool(s) Removal 1. Place the vehicle in NEUTRAL. 2. Disconnect the battery cables. 3. Remove the battery and tray. 4. Disconnect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAP) sensor. 5. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3983 6. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 7. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the thermostat housing to gain access to the transmission range (TR) sensor. Remove the thermostat housing. 8. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor. 1. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the TR sensor. Installation 1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position. Install the transmission range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3984 2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts. ^ Connect the electrical connector. 3. Install the thermostat housing. 4. Install the air cleaner assembly. 5. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover. 6. Connect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAF) sensor. 7. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or incorrect routing position. Install the battery and tray. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3985 8. NOTE: When the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, some abnormal drive symptoms can occur while the vehicle relearns its adaptive strategy. The vehicle may need to be driven 160 km (100 miles) or more to relearn the strategy. Connect the battery cables. 9. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should be active only in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Variable Cam Timing System Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation Variable Cam Timing System Variable Cam Timing System Overview The Variable Cam Timing System allows the exhaust cam to advance and retard at varying engine speeds. The purpose of this is to reduce exhaust emissions and increase fuel economy. As the exhaust cam retards in relation to the crankshaft position, residual exhaust gases are left in the combustion chamber. The residual gases cool the combustion chamber and are inert when mixed with the incoming fresh charge of fuel and air. This results in better fuel economy and lower Nitrogen Oxides (NOx) and Hydrocarbons (HG) the engine produces. The Exhaust Gas Recalculation System (EGR) is unnecessary on the 2.0L (4V) engine due to this feature. Variable Cam Timing The Variable Cam Timing (VCT) system consists of the control solenoid, five-tooth pulse ring (4+1) on exhaust camshaft, Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor, Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor, Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor, Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor, Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor, Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (Figure 129). 1. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) receives input signals from the Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor, Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor, Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor, Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor and Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor for determining the operating conditions of the engine. 2. The Variable Cam Timing (VCT) system is enabled by the PCM when the proper conditions are met. The PCM disables the VCT system if a fault is detected. 3. The PCM calculates relative cam position using the CMP sensor and data from the (4+1) pulse ring mounted on the exhaust camshaft. Relative cam position is calculated by measuring the time between the rising edge of Profile Ignition Pickup (PIP) and the falling edge of Variable Cam Timing (VCT) pulse. 4. The PCM continually calculates a cam position error value based on the difference between the desired and actual position and a duty cycle is commanded for the VCT solenoid valve. Engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT unit. 5. Oil flows to either side of the piston chamber changing a linear motion from the piston to a rotation motion from the helical mechanism in the VCT unit. During closed loop the PCM outputs a revised duty cycle to the VCT solenoid valve to correct for cam position error. Variable Cam Timing System HARDWARE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Variable Cam Timing System > Page 3990 Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Solenoid Valve Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Solenoid Valve The VCT solenoid valve (Figure 130) is an integral part of the VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil to the variable cam timing unit assembly. As the PCM duty cycles the solenoid valve, oil is allowed to flow to the VCT unit assembly and advance or retard the cam timing. Variable Cam Timing Unit Assembly Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Unit Assembly The variable cam timing unit assembly (Figure 131) is coupled to the camshaft through a helical spline in the VCT unit chamber. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil pressure forces the piston to move linearly along the axis of the camshaft. This linear motion is translated into rotational camshaft motion through the helical spline coupling. A spring installed Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Variable Cam Timing System > Page 3991 in the chamber is designed to hold the camshaft in the minimum overlap position (5 degrees) when oil pressure is too low to maintain adequate position control. The camshaft is allowed to rotate up to 30 degrees. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Variable Cam Timing System > Page 3992 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Unit Assembly Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Unit Assembly Variable Cam Timing Unit Assembly The variable cam timing unit assembly (Figure 131) is coupled to the camshaft through a helical spline in the VCT unit chamber. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil pressure forces the piston to move linearly along the axis of the camshaft. This linear motion is translated into rotational camshaft motion through the helical spline coupling. A spring installed in the chamber is designed to hold the camshaft in the minimum overlap position (5 degrees) when oil pressure is too low to maintain adequate position control. The camshaft is allowed to rotate up to 30 degrees. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Description and Operation Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Description and Operation VARIABLE CAM TIMING (VCT) SOLENOID VALVE Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Solenoid Valve The Variable Cam Timing (VCT) solenoid valve (Figure 130) is an integral part of the VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil to the variable cam timing unit assembly. As the PCM duty cycles the solenoid valve, oil is allowed to flow to the VCT unit assembly and advance or retard the cam timing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications Vehicle Speed Sensor: Specifications Vehicle speed sensor (VSS) bolt 62 in.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3999 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4001 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) The Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (Figure 45) is a variable reluctance or Hall-effect sensor that generates a waveform with a frequency that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the vehicle is moving at a relatively low velocity, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as fuel injection, ignition control, transmission/transaxle shift scheduling and torque converter clutch scheduling. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4002 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the VSS. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Diverter Solenoid > Component Information > Description and Operation Air Diverter Solenoid: Description and Operation AIR BYPASS SOLENOID Secondary Air Injection Bypass Solenoid The secondary air injection bypass (AIR bypass) solenoid (Figure 122) is used by the PCM to control vacuum to the secondary air injection diverter (AIR diverter) valve. The AIR bypass solenoid is a normally closed solenoid. The AIR bypass solenoid also has a filtered vent feature to permit vacuum release. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Diverter Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation Air Diverter Valve: Description and Operation AIR DIVERTER VALVE Air Injection Diverter (AIR Diverter) Valve The secondary air injection diverter (AIR diverter) valve (Figure 123) is used with the electric AIR pump to provide on/off control of air to the exhaust manifold and catalytic converter. When the electric AIR pump is on and vacuum is supplied to the AIR diverter valve, air passes the integral check valve disk. When the electric AIR pump is off, and vacuum is removed from the AIR diverter valve, the integral check valve disk is held on the seat and stops air from being drawn into the exhaust system and prevents the back flow of the exhaust into the Secondary Air Injection System. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Injection Pump > Component Information > Locations Air Injection Pump: Locations Electric Air Pump lower left side of engine compartment. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Injection Pump > Component Information > Locations > Page 4014 Air Injection Pump: Description and Operation ELECTRIC AIR PUMP Electric Air Pump The electric AIR pump (Figure 121) provides pressurized air to the Secondary Air Injection system. The electric AIR pump functions independently of rpm and is controlled by the PCM. The electric AIR pump is only used for short periods of time. Delivery of air is dependent on the amount of system backpressure and system voltage. The inlet system of the AIR pump incorporates a non-serviceable filter and splash cap which helps to guard against dirt and water. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Injection Pump Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation Air Injection Pump Relay: Description and Operation SOLID STATE RELAY Solid State Relay The solid state relay (Figure 124) switches the high current required for operation of the electric AIR pump. Input control to the solid state relay comes from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Vacuum Check Valve, AIR > Component Information > Description and Operation Vacuum Check Valve: Description and Operation VACUUM CHECK VALVES Vacuum Check Valve A vacuum check valve (Figure 125) blocks air flow in one direction. It allows free air flow in the other direction. The check side of this valve will hold the highest vacuum registered on the vacuum side. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis Technical Service Bulletin # 01-9-7 Date: 010514 Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis Article No. 01-9-7 05/14/01 DRIVEABILITY - H025 (HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR), CATALYST, AND FUEL SYSTEM MONITORS - SERVICE TIPS - OBD II VEHICLES ONLY FORD: 1994-1997 THUNDERBIRD 1994-2001 MUSTANG 1995-2001 CROWN VICTORIA 1996-1997 PROBE 1996-2000 CONTOUR 1996-2001 ESCORT, TAURUS 2000-2001 FOCUS 1994-1997 F SUPER DUTY, F-250 HD, F-350 1995-2001 ECONOLINE, RANGER, WINDSTAR 1996 BRONCO 1996-1997 AEROSTAR 1996-2001 EXPLORER 1997-2001 EXPEDITION, F-150, F-250 LD 1999-2001 SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2001 EXCURSION 2001 ESCAPE LINCOLN: 1995-2001 CONTINENTAL, TOWN CAR 1996-1998 MARK VIII 2000-2001 LS 1998-2001 NAVIGATOR MERCURY: 1994-1997 COUGAR 1995-2001 GRAND MARQUIS 1996-1999 TRACER 1996-2000 MYSTIQUE 1996-2001 SABLE 1999-2001 COUGAR 1997-2001 MOUNTAINEER ISSUE This article is intended to be an aide in diagnosing conditions related to Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S), Catalyst, and Fuel System Monitor related Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Additional information is included to assist in diagnosing certain vehicle symptoms. This article is NOT intended to be a shortcut to the Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) Workshop Manual pinpoint tests. The pinpoint tests in the PC/ED Manual should ALWAYS be followed when diagnosing vehicle conditions. ACTION Use the following information and Service Tips to assist in the diagnosis of H025, Catalyst, and Fuel System Monitor related DTCs. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 98-23-10 WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 623000, 690000, 698298 Information ^ A. Description of Terms and Acronyms ^ B. HO2S Location Diagrams ^ C. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 4025 ^ C1. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Information ^ C2. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) ^ D. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor ^ D1. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Information ^ D2. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) ^ E. Fuel System Monitor ^ E1. Fuel System Monitor - Information ^ E2. Fuel System Monitor Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) ^ F. Diagnostic Service Tips ^ F1. Tips - General ^ F2. Tips Related to Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor ^ F3. Tips Related to Catalyst Monitor ^ F4. Tips Related to Fuel System Monitor A. Description of Terms and Acronyms ^ CHT - Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor or PID ^ CKP - Crankshaft Position Sensor or PID ^ DTC - Diagnostic Trouble Code ^ ECT - Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor or PID ^ EGR - Exhaust Gas Recirculation ^ EEC - Electronic Engine Control ^ EVR - EGR Vacuum Regulator ^ FMEM - Failure Mode Effects Management ^ GND - Ground ^ HC - Hydrocarbons ^ HO2S - Heated Oxygen Sensor or PID ^ IAT - Inlet Air Temperature Sensor or PID ^ KAM - Keep Alive Memory ^ KOEO - Key On Engine Off ^ KOER - Key On Engine Running ^ LONGFT - Long Term Fuel Trim ^ MAF - Mass Air Flow Sensor or PID ^ MIL - Malfunction Indicator Lamp ("Check Engine") ^ NGS - New Generation Star Tester (Scan Tool) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 4026 ^ OBD II - On-Board Diagnostics II ^ OSM - Output State Monitor ^ PC/ED - Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis ^ PCM - Powertrain Control Module ^ PCV - Positive Crankcase Ventilation ^ PID - Parameter Identification Display ^ RAM - Random Access Memory ^ RPM - Revolutions Per Minute ^ SHRTFT - Short Term Fuel Trim ^ Stoichiometric - 14.7:1 Air/Fuel Ratio (Gasoline Engines) ^ TP - Throttle Position Sensor or PID ^ VMV - Vapor Management Valve ^ VPWR - Vehicle Power (Battery Voltage) ^ VREF - Vehicle Reference Voltage (5 volts) B. HO2S Location Diagrams Refer to Figure 1 to better understand the H025 sensor names and locations. Regardless of how the engine is mounted in the vehicle, conventional or transverse, the HO2S naming convention stays the same in relationship to engine banks 1 and 2. Bank 1 will always be the bank containing the # 1 cylinder. C. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor C1.) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 4027 The H025 Monitor is an on-board strategy designed to monitor the HO2S sensors for a malfunction or deterioration that can affect emissions. Under specific conditions, the fuel control or upstream HO2S sensors (Figures 1 and 3) are checked for proper output voltage and response rate (the time it takes to switch from lean to rich or rich to lean). Downstream HO2S sensors (Figures 1 and 3) used for Catalyst Monitor are also monitored for proper output voltage. Input is required from the ECT or CHT, IAT, MAF, TP and CKP sensors to activate the H025 Monitor. The Fuel System Monitor and Misfire Detection Monitor must also have completed successfully before the HO2S Monitor is enabled. The HO2S sensor senses the oxygen content in the exhaust flow and outputs a voltage between zero and 1.0 volt. Lean of stoichiometric (air/fuel ratio of approximately 14.7:1 for gasoline engines), the HO2S will generate a voltage between zero and 0.45 volt. Rich of stoichiometric, the HO2S will generate a voltage between 0.45 and 1.0 volt. ^ The HO2S Monitor evaluates both the upstream (Fuel Control) and downstream (Catalyst Monitor) HO2S for proper function. ^ Once the HO2S Monitor is enabled, the upstream H025 signal voltage amplitude and response frequency are checked. Excessive voltage is determined by comparing the HO2S signal voltage to a maximum calibratable threshold voltage. ^ A fixed frequency closed loop fuel control routine is executed and the upstream HO2S voltage amplitude and output response frequency are observed. A sample of the upstream HO2S signal is evaluated to determine if the sensor is capable of switching or has a slow response rate. ^ An HO2S heater circuit fault is determined by turning the heater on and off and looking for a corresponding change in the OSM and by measuring the current going through the heater circuit. ^ The MIL is activated after a fault is detected on two consecutive OBD II drive cycles. The HO2S Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows: ^ HO2S signal circuit malfunction - P0131, P0136, P0151, P0156 ^ HO2S slow response rate - P0133, P0153 ^ HO2S heater circuit malfunction - P0135, P0141, P0155, P0161 ^ Downstream HO2S not running in on-demand self test - P1127 ^ Swapped H025 connectors - P1128 and P1129 ^ H025 lack of switching - P1130, P1131, P1132, P1150, P1151, P1152 ^ HO2S lack of switching (sensor indicates lean) - P1137 ^ H025 lack of switching (sensor indicates rich) - P1138 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 4028 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 4029 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 4030 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 4031 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 4032 C2.) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes D. Catalyst Efficiency Monitor D1.) Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Information The Federal Test Procedure Catalyst Monitor monitors for deterioration in the catalyst system and illuminates the MIL when tailpipe emissions exceed the appropriate HC emission thresholds. The Catalyst Monitor is enabled after the upstream and downstream HO2S sensors have been tested and verified to be functional. This monitor relies on the front and rear heated oxygen sensors (HO2S) to infer catalyst efficiency based upon oxygen storage capacity. Under normal closed loop fuel conditions, high efficiency catalysts have oxygen storage which makes the switching frequency of the rear HO2S quite slow compared with the frequency of the front HO2S. As catalyst efficiency deteriorates, its ability to store oxygen declines, and the rear HO2S begins to switch more rapidly, approaching the frequency of the front sensor. In general, as catalyst efficiency decreases, the switch ratio increases from a switch ratio of 0 for a low mileage catalyst to a switch ratio of 0.8 or 0.9 for a low efficiency catalyst. Some vehicles will monitor substantially less than the entire catalyst volume in order to meet the stringent catalyst monitoring malfunction thresholds. In many cases, only the front, light-off catalyst is monitored. Front and rear HO2S switches are counted under specified closed loop fuel conditions. After the required number of front switches are obtained, a rear-to-front HO2S switch ratio is calculated. The switch ratio is compared against a threshold value. If the switch ratio is greater than the calibrated maximum limit, the catalyst has failed. The test entry conditions for the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor are as follows: ECT or CHT (warmed engine), IAT (not at extreme ambient temperatures), MAF (greater than minimum engine load), VSS (within vehicle speed window) and TP (at part throttle) are required. ^ Because an exponentially weighted moving average is used for malfunction determination, up to six OBD II drive cycles may be required to illuminate the MIL. NOTE THE CATALYST MONITOR ON SOME EARLY OBD II VEHICLES (SOME 1994-1996 VEHICLES) WAS REFERRED TO AS THE "STEADY-STATE CATALYST MONITOR" AS OPPOSED TO THE "FTP CATALYST MONITOR" (DESCRIBED ABOVE) THAT IS MOST COMMON FOR VEHICLES BUILT AFTER 1996. BELOW IS A BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE STEADY-STATE CATALYST MONITOR: The Steady-State Catalyst Monitor performs a 20 second test during steady state rpm and load conditions. The Monitor transfers closed loop fuel control from the front to the rear 02 sensors. The Monitor then observes the switching frequency and compares it to a threshold frequency stored in an rpm/load table. A frequency higher than the maximum calibrated threshold indicates a malfunction. The Catalyst Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 4033 ^ Catalyst system efficiency below threshold (Bank 1) - P0420 ^ Catalyst system efficiency below threshold (Bank 2) - P0430 D2.) Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes E. Fuel System Monitor E1.) Fuel System Monitor - Information The Fuel System Monitor is an on-board strategy designed to monitor the fuel trim system. The fuel control system uses fuel trim tables stored in the PCM's KAM to compensate for variability in fuel system components due to normal wear and aging. Fuel trim tables are based on vehicle speed and engine load. During closed loop vehicle operation, the fuel trim strategy learns the corrections needed to correct a "biased" rich or lean fuel system. The correction is stored in the fuel trim tables. The fuel trim has two means of adapting; a LONGFT and a SHRTFT. LONGFT relies on the fuel trim tables and SHRTFT refers to the desired air/fuel ratio parameter "LAMBSE". LAMBSE is calculated by the PCM from HO2S inputs and helps maintain a 14.7:1 air/fuel ratio during closed loop operation. SHRTFT and LONGFT work together. If the HO2S indicates the engine is running rich, the PCM will correct the rich condition by moving SHRTFT in the negative range (less fuel to correct for a rich combustion). If after a certain amount of time SHRTFT is still compensating for a rich condition, the PCM "learns" this and moves LONGFT into the negative range to compensate and allows SHRTFT to return to a value near 0%. Input from the ECT or CHT, IAT, and MAF sensors is required to activate the fuel trim system, which in turn activates the Fuel System Monitor. Once activated, the Fuel System Monitor looks for the fuel trim tables to reach the adaptive clip (adaptive limit) and LAMBSE to exceed a calibrated limit. The Fuel System Monitor will store the appropriate DTC when a fault is detected as described below. ^ The H025 detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and provides the PCM with feedback indicating a rich or lean condition. ^ A correction factor is added to the fuel injector pulsewidth calculation according to the Long and Short Term Fuel Trims as needed to compensate for variations in the fuel system. ^ When deviation in the parameter LAMBSE increases, air/fuel control suffers and emissions increase. When LAMBSE exceeds a calibrated limit and the fuel trim table has clipped (reached adaptive limit), the Fuel System Monitor sets a DTC. ^ The MIL is activated after a fault is detected on two consecutive OBD II drive cycles. The Fuel System Monitor DTCs can be categorized as follows: ^ Fuel Delivery Error - P0148 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 4034 ^ Lean shift in fuel system operation - P0171 (Bank 1) and P0174 (Bank 2) ^ Rich shift in fuel system operation - P0172 (Bank 1) and P0175 (Bank 2) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 4035 E2.) Fuel System Monitor - Diagnostic Trouble Codes F. Diagnostic Service Tips 1. Always reset KAM after performing a repair: After performing a repair on a vehicle with the MIL on, and/or DTCs present, always clear KAM. When a malfunction is present, the PCM adapts (attempts to correct) for this condition. Once the vehicle has been repaired, if the KAM is not reset, the PCM will once again have to adapt back to the normal operating conditions. Clearing the KAM will erase what the PCM has learned, so the PCM will be able to start with "base tables". 2. Always view and record Freeze Frame Data: Freeze Frame Data can be a valuable asset in duplicating and diagnosing concerns. This data (a snapshot of certain PID values, recorded at the time the MIL was activated) indicates the manner in which the vehicle was being driven at the time the fault occurred. This can be especially useful on intermittent concerns. Freeze Frame Data, in some cases, can also help to isolate possible areas of concern, as well as ruling out others. Always record (write down) the Freeze Frame Data. 3. Multiple DTCs (with the same meaning): When multiple (paired) DTCs with the same meaning are set for multiple sensors, it is unlikely that replacing both HO2S sensors will resolve the concern. In most cases, there will be another issue that is causing the codes. Examples of multiple (paired) DTCs: (P0135/P0155), (P0141/P0161), (P1131/P1151), (P1132/P1152). To further clarify this, see the more detailed scenario as follows: A vehicle comes in with a MIL On concern. KOEO self test reveals DTCs P0135 and P0155 (HTR-11 and HTR-21 circuit malfunction), with no other DTCs present. The most likely cause of these DTCs would be something in the heater power circuit that both of these HO2S sensors have in common (Example: open or shorted heater circuit wiring or splice). It is highly unlikely that multiple sensors would fail at the same time. When multiple DTCs of this nature are encountered, reviewing the appropriate wiring diagram(s) can help to isolate possible areas of concern. When reviewing the wiring diagram, look for things that the affected sensors have in common. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 4036 In this example, the most likely cause of DTCs P0135 and P0155 (with no other DTCs present) would be a concern with Splice "B" (refer to Figure 2). NOTE THIS ILLUSTRATION IS ONLY AN EXAMPLE. SPLICE NAMES "A", "B", AND "C" ARE USED IN THIS EXAMPLE FOR CONVENIENCE ONLY. ON AN ACTUAL VEHICLE, SPLICE NAMES WILL DEPEND ON THE CIRCUIT NUMBER FOR THE VEHICLE UNDER REPAIR. NOTE ALSO THAT THIS FIGURE IS NOT INTENDED TO SHOW ALL SPLICES/CONNECTIONS ON ALL VEHICLES. OTHER EEC CIRCUITS, NOT SHOWN, MAY ALSO BE SPLICED IN WITH THE CIRCUITS SHOWN. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 4037 4. View H025 PID data carefully: NGS PIDs for HO2S sensors that do not exist (with certain exhaust configurations) will show a value of "0" volts (refer to Figures 3 and 4). In this example, the vehicle (equipped with a 4-cylinder engine) has one upstream and one downstream HO2S. Notice that the NGS (scan tool) display shows two upstream and two downstream HO2S PIDs, and that the "unused" HO2S sensor PIDs display "0" volts. 5. H025 sensors measure oxygen in the exhaust, not fuel: The exhaust gas condition reported by the HO2S sensor is based on the presence of oxygen in the exhaust, not the presence of unburned fuel. Example: In the event of an ignition-related misfire, you might expect a rich HO2S reading, due to the amount of unburned fuel in the exhaust system. However, there is also a large amount of unburned oxygen, since no combustion took place in the misfiring cylinder. Since the H025 senses oxygen only, it would report a lean condition in this particular situation. F2.) Tips Related to Heated Oxygen Sensor (H025) Monitor 1. OBD II Response Rate Monitor: The OBD II Response Rate Monitor (P0133/P0153) is only run at vehicle speeds between approximately 50-95 km/h (30-60 mph), during steady-state conditions. The test lasts approximately 6 seconds. Therefore, P0133/P0153 cannot be diagnosed at idle in the repair bay. 2. Do not compare H025 switch rate - Bank-to-Bank or vehicle-to-vehicle: Different H025 switch rates, from Bank-to-Bank, are considered normal. The H025 switch rate, from one Bank to the other, should not be compared as a gauge of the H025's ability to switch/react. The PCM is continuously adjusting spark and fuel in reaction to engine operating conditions (rpm, load, air flow, throttle angle, etc.). The PCM is also continuously adapting to certain conditions (customer driving habits, engine and component wear, etc.). F3.) Tips Related to Catalyst Efficiency Monitor 1. Determining catalyst efficiency/switch ratio: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 4038 The upstream H025 sensors will have a high switch frequency, due to normal closed loop fuel control. With an efficient catalyst, the downstream H025 will have a low switch frequency. The switch ratio is determined by dividing the number of downstream switches by the number of upstream switches over a given period of time. As the catalyst ages (or if the catalyst is damaged or contaminated), the downstream switches will increase. When the downstream switch rate crosses a threshold value (approximately 0.75 switch ratio), a code is stored (P0420 and/or P0430) and the MIL illuminates (refer to Figures 5 and 6). NOTE IF A CATALYST IS DETERMINED TO HAVE LOW EFFICIENCY AND REQUIRES REPLACEMENT, REPLACEMENT OF THE DOWNSTREAM H025 SENSORS WILL NOT BE NECESSARY. 2. Use care in handling H025 sensors: In the event of catalyst replacement, use care in the handling of H025 sensors to prevent damage or contamination. Do not use power tools in the removal or installation of sensors. Use a 22mm wrench or crow foot to remove and install H025 sensors; do not use slotted sockets, as these sockets may damage wires. H025 sensors should be torqued to 41 +/- 5 N.m (30 +/- 4 lb-ft). 3. Do not replace downstream HO2S sensors (H02S12/H02S22) for DTCs P0420 and/or P0430: When diagnosing a vehicle with a customer concern of MIL On and DTCs P0420/P0430 in continuous memory, do not replace the downstream HO2S sensors (H02S12/H02S22). Damaged or malfunctioning downstream HO2S sensors will not cause these DTCs to be set. Always verify the vehicle concern, then perform the pinpoint diagnostics in the appropriate PC/ED Service Manual. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions/Engine Controls - Driveability Diagnosis > Page 4039 F4.) Tips Related to the Fuel System Monitor 1. HO2S sensors are not likely to be the cause of adaptive DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175: Most warranty-returned HO2S sensors (replaced for these DTCs) are found to function normally. Additional related DTCs will normally be present if there is a concern with the HO2S sensors. Do not replace an HO2S sensor unless verified through pinpoint diagnostic tests found in the PC/ED Service Manual. 2. DTCs P0171, P0172, P0174, and P0175 are not related to downstream H028 sensors: When diagnosing a vehicle with a MIL On and DTC(s) P0171, P0172, P0174, and/or P0175 in continuous memory, do not replace the downstream HO2S sensors. These DTCs have no connection to the downstream HO2S sensor function nor its diagnosis for faults. Always verify the vehicle concern, then perform the pinpoint diagnostics from the appropriate PC/ED Service Manual. 3. Diagnosing lean conditions and lean DTCs P0171, P0174: Freeze Frame Data can often help to identify the type of lean condition, even if the fault is intermittent, by indicating how the vehicle was being driven when the fault occurred. Diagnosis of lean conditions and lean adaptive DTCs can be difficult, especially if the concern is intermittent. Verifying the concern is extremely important. There are different types of lean conditions. The ability to identify the type of lean condition causing the concern can be crucial to a correct diagnosis. When DTCs P0171 and P0174 are both present, there is a strong likelihood of another concern being present: a. Vacuum leaks/unmetered air: In this type of condition, the engine may actually run lean of stoichiometry (14.7:1 air/fuel ratio) if the PCM is not able to compensate enough to correct for the condition. This condition is typically caused by air entering the engine through an abnormal source (opening), or due to a MAF malfunction. In this situation, the volume of air entering the engine is actually greater than what the MAF is indicating to the PCM. Vacuum leaks will normally be most apparent when high manifold vacuum is present, during idle or light throttle. If Freeze Frame Data indicates that the fault occurred at idle, a check for vacuum leaks/unmetered air when the engine is cold might be the best starting point. Examples: Loose, leaking or disconnected vacuum lines, intake manifold gaskets or 0-rings, throttle body gaskets, brake booster, air inlet tube, stuck/frozen/aftermarket PCV valve, unseated engine oil dipstick, MAF reading lower than normal, etc. b. Insufficient fueling: In this type of condition, the engine may actually run lean of stoichiometry (14.7:1 air/fuel ratio) if the PCM is not able to compensate enough to correct for the condition. This condition is typically caused by a fuel delivery system concern that restricts or limits the amount of fuel being delivered to the engine. This condition will normally be most apparent when the engine is under a heavy load, when a higher volume of fuel is required. If Freeze Frame Data indicates that the fault occurred under a heavy load, a check of the fuel delivery system (checking fuel pressure with engine under a load) might be the best starting point. Examples: Low fuel pressure (fuel pump, fuel filter, fuel leaks, restricted fuel supply lines), fuel injector concerns, etc. c. Exhaust system leaks: In this type of condition, the engine may actually be running near stoichiometry (14.7:1 air/fuel ratio), but the exhaust gas mixture will be lean. This condition is caused by oxygen-rich air entering the exhaust system through an external source. This condition will cause the exhaust gas mixture to be lean, even though the actual combustion in the engine may not be. Examples: Exhaust system leaks upstream or near HO2S, malfunctioning Secondary Air Injection system d. MAF concerns: If a MAF concern is suspected, see TSB 98-23-10. 4. Checking fuel pressure: Check fuel pressure with engine under a load when diagnosing a lean concern. A partially plugged fuel filter can be difficult to detect and can be easily overlooked if fuel pressure is only checked at idle. The same is true for other types of fuel supply concerns (e.g., bent or kinked lines, degraded fuel pump). At idle, an engine requires only a small volume of fuel. Due to the fact that there is a small volume of fuel needed at idle, a restriction in the fuel supply line in many cases will not cause the fuel pressure to be low. When the vehicle is under a load, the engine requires much more fuel than at idle. Under a load, a restriction in the fuel supply line will prevent the high rate of fuel flow that is needed to maintain the correct fuel pressure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4040 Catalytic Converter: Specifications Catalytic Converter TWC to Exhaust Manifold Nuts 35 ft.lb TWC Bracket Bolts 18 ft.lb TWC To Resonator Bolts 30 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation Acronyms and Definitions 2V - L ACRONYMS AND DEFINITIONS NOTE: This Acronyms and Definitions listing contains technical terms applicable to Ford Motor Company products. It is not intended to be an all-inclusive dictionary of components and their functions. If a detailed description of a particular system or component is desired, refer to the applicable Vehicle System for the specific vehicle being serviced. 2V: Two Valve engine configuration. 4V: Four Valve engine configuration. ABS: Anti-lock Brake System. A/C: Air Conditioning. A vehicle accessory system that modifies the passenger compartment air by cooling and dehydrating the air. ACC: Air Conditioning Clutch. Indicates status of the A/C clutch. ACCS: Air Conditioning Cycling Switch. Indicates status of the A/C cycling switch. ACD: Air Conditioning Demand. A signal input to the PCM from the Air Conditioning control panel. ACP: Air Conditioning Head Pressure or A/C cycling switch input state. ACPSW: Air Conditioning Pressure Switch. ACPV: Air Conditioning Head Pressure Volts. A voltage input to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) from the ACP switch or sensor. ACR: Air Conditioning Relay. Commanded output controlled by the PCM and acts as an A/C cutout control during heavy acceleration. A/D: Analog-to-Digital. Analog-to-Digital signal conversion. ADC: See ATDC. AFCM: Alternative Fuel Control Module. AIR: Secondary Air Injection. AIRB: Secondary Air Injection Bypass. Air Diverter: Air Diverter Valve. Part of the EAIR system. Diverts fresh air to the exhaust system when the electric air pump is commanded on. AIR EVAL: Air System Evaluated. Displays a YES or NO status indicating whether the Air System has been evaluated for OBD (On-Board Diagnostic) II purposes. Air/Fuel Ratio: Air to fuel mixture ratio. An air/fuel mixture that is 14.7:1 is also called stoichiometry. AIRM: Secondary AIR pump monitor. Ambient Air Temperature: Temperature of the air surrounding an object. Analog (Electrical/Electronic): An electrical signal that can obtain any value within the voltage limits of the signal. ARB: Air Resource Board. ARPMIDES: Ancillary RPM Desired. RPM required to maintain the vehicle speed commanded by Speed Control Command Switch (SCCS) inputs. ASCII: American Standard Code for Information Interchange. ATDC: After Top Dead Center. The location of the piston after it has reached the top of its stroke. Measured in degrees of crankshaft rotation. AVOM: Analog Volt-Ohm Multimeter. Readings are indicated by a sweep hand on a printed scale, rather than a digital display. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 4043 AWD: All-Wheel Drive. BARO: Barometric Pressure. Base Idle: Idle rpm determined by the throttle lever hardset on the throttle body with the IAC solenoid disconnected. Base Timing: Spark advance in degrees before top dead center of the base engine without any control from the PCM or ICM. Battery Positive Voltage (B+): The positive (+) voltage from the battery or any circuit connected directly to the battery. Compare "Vehicle Power (VPWR)." BAT TEMP: Battery Temperature. BJB: Battery Junction Box. BOB: Breakout Box. A test device which connects in series to the PCM and PCM harness. BPA: Brake Pedal Applied switch. Typically located on the braking system master cylinder. Can be hydraulic or electric. BPP: Brake Pedal Position. Indicates the position of the brake pedal, based on input from the Brake Pedal Position (BPP) switch. BRAKE LMP or BRKL: Brake Warning Lamp Status. Activates the Brake Warning Lamp by applying voltage to the control line. BTDC: Before Top Dead Center. The location of the piston before it has reached the top of its stroke. Measured in degrees of crankshaft rotation. Bus + or Bus -: Multiplex circuits that carry Standard Corporate Protocol (SCP) data from module to module and to the DLC. CAC: Charge Air Cooler. Formerly known as Intercooler. A device which lowers the temperature of pressurized intake air. CAFE: Corporate Average Fuel Economy. A set of federal requirements and regulations which govern fuel economy standards. CANVNT: Canister Vent Solenoid. Catalyst: Catalytic converter. An in-line exhaust system device used to reduce the level of engine exhaust emissions. CAT EVAL: Catalyst System Evaluated. This item indicates YES when the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor has successfully completed. CCM: Comprehensive Component Monitor. CCRM: Constant Control Relay Module. A relay module that provides ON-OFF control of various EEC components. CD A through J: Coil Driver 1 through 10. Centralized Testing Facility: State government operation. Provides Inspection/Maintenance (IM) and safety inspections. CGND or CSE GND: Case Ground. Provides a ground source for the PCM or ECU case. CHT: Cylinder Head Temperature. Units are displayed in either degrees Fahrenheit or Centigrade. CHTIL: Cylinder Head Temperature Indicator Lamp. CHTV: Cylinder Head Temperature Voltage. The actual voltage drop across the CHT sensor thermistor. CID: Cylinder Identification. PCM input signal from Camshaft Position Sensor. CKP: Crankshaft Position. Senses the position of the crankshaft. CKP+, CKP-: CKP+ is the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor signal wire. CKP - is the signal return. CL: Closed Loop. An operating condition or mode which enables operation based on sensor feedback. CMP: Camshaft Position. Indicates camshaft position. CMPFM: Camshaft Position Failure Mode. Indicates when the PCM identifies a CID/CMP fault. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 4044 CMS: Catalyst Monitor Sensor. Downstream H025. CMVSS: Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. CNG: Compressed Natural Gas. CO: Carbon Monoxide. A colorless, odorless and toxic gas that is a component of auto exhaust emissions. CO(2): Carbon Dioxide. A colorless, odorless gas that is a normal by-product of the combustion of fuel. Coil: A device consisting of windings around an iron core. In a spark ignition system, designed to increase voltage. Cold Soak: Time given to a vehicle to sit at a low temperature (typically below 68°F / 20°C) until the temperature of external and internal components stabilize. CONT: Continuous Memory. The portion of KAM (Keep Alive Memory) used to store DTCs generated during Continuous Memory Self-Test. Continuous Memory Self- Test: A continuous test of the EEC system conducted by the PCM whenever the vehicle is operating. CPP: Clutch Pedal Position. Indicates clutch pedal position. CPP Switch: Clutch Pedal Position Switch. Located on the clutch pedal and detects when the clutch pedal is depressed. CQIS: Common Quality Indicator System. CSE GND: Case Ground. CT: Closed Throttle Mode. A mode when the PCM varies the pulse width of the fuel injectors to obtain the air/fuel mixture appropriate for closed throttle operation. CTO: Clean Tach Output. Signal used to drive the instrument panel tachometer. Data Communications Link: A communication path between various in-vehicle electronic modules. Accessed by scan tools through the Data Link Connector (DLC). DC: 1. Direct Current. Electric current flowing in one direction. 2. Duty Cycle. The voltage measurement of ON time versus the full cycle period, expressed in percent. DCL: Data Communication Link. DI: Distributor Ignition. A system in which the ignition coil secondary circuit is sequenced by a distributor. Digital: Controls process information by switching the current or voltage ON and OFF. DLC: Data Link Connector. J1962 connector providing access to vehicle diagnostic information. DOHC: Dual Overhead Cam. An engine configuration that uses two camshafts positioned above the valves. DOL: Data Output Line. A circuit that sends certain information from the PCM to the instrument cluster. DPFEGR: Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation. System that uses a pressure transducer to control the operation of the Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Vacuum Regulator Valve. DRI: Deposit Resistant Injector. A fuel injector designed to prevent build-up of carbon and other unwanted deposits. DRL: Daytime Running Lamps. A system that keeps the vehicle running lamps on at all times while the vehicle is operating. DTM: Diagnostic Test Mode. A level of capability in an On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) system. DTC: Diagnostic Trouble Code. An alpha/numeric identifier for a fault condition identified by the On-Board Diagnostic System. DVOM: Digital Volt-Ohm Meter. E-85: Fuel containing 85% ethanol alcohol. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 4045 EAIR: Electric Secondary Air Injection. A pump-driven system for providing secondary air using an electric air pump. EAIRM: Electric Secondary Air Pump circuit Monitor. ECT: Engine Coolant Temperature. Displayed in either Fahrenheit or Centigrade. ECTV: Engine Coolant Temperature Voltage. The actual voltage drop across the ECT sensor thermistor. ECU: Electronic Control Unit. A module that handles the control strategy and monitors system inputs or outputs. EEC: Electronic Engine Control system. EEC-V: Fifth generation EEC system. EFT: Engine Fuel Temperature. EFTA: Bank 1 input. EFTA is displayed in either Fahrenheit or Centigrade. EFTAV: Voltage drop across the EFTA (Bank 1) sensor thermistor. EFTB: Bank 2 input. EFTB is displayed in either Fahrenheit or Centigrade. EFTBV: Voltage drop across the EFTB (Bank 2) sensor thermistor. EGR: Exhaust Gas Recirculation. A process in which a small amount of exhaust gas is routed into the combustion chamber. EGR EVAL: Exhaust Gas Recirculation System Evaluated. EGR EVAL will display YES when the monitor is complete. EGRMDSD: Electric Exhaust Gas Recirculation Motor Desired position. The PID name used to operate the Electric Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EEGR) valve with scan tool's output state control. EGRS: EGR Shutoff. A normally closed solenoid that applies vacuum to the EGR valve when energized by the PCM. EGRT: Exhaust Gas Recirculation Valve Temperature Sensor. A temperature sensor that is threaded into the bottom of the intake plenum. EGR Vacuum Regulator: Controls vacuum to the EGR valve by a duty cycle signal from the PCM. EGRVR: Exhaust Gas Recirculation Vacuum Regulator. Solenoid which varies the vacuum to the EGR valve by varying the duty cycle to the regulator. EGRVRA: Exhaust Gas Recirculation Vacuum Regulator Actual (volt). The actual state of the commanded output. EGRVRF: Exhaust Gas Recirculation Vacuum Regulator Fault. Represents whether a fault exists in the EGRV circuit. EI: Integrated Electronic Ignition. An Electronic Ignition system that has the Ignition Control Module (ICM) integrated into the PCM. EI-HDR: Electronic Ignition, High Data Rate. Formerly known as Electronic Distributorless Ignition System. EI-LDR: Electronic Ignition, Low Data Rate. Formerly known as Distributorless Ignition System. EMI: Electromagnetic Interference. Usually caused by ignition voltage spikes, solenoids, relay operation or noisy generator contacts. EOL: End Of Line. A system designed specifically for use at assembly plants to make sure all new vehicles perform to design specifications. EPA: Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. Government). EPROM: Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory. An electronic component in the PCM that requires the electronic storage of information. ESOF: Electronic Shift-on-the-Fly. EVAP: Evaporative Emissions. A system to prevent fuel vapor from escaping into the atmosphere. EVAPCP: Evaporative Canister Purge Solenoid. Controls a solenoid which allows venting of the evaporative purge canister. EVAPCPF: Evaporative Canister Purge Solenoid Fault. Identifies whether an electrical fault exists for the current commanded state. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 4046 EVAPCV: Evaporative Canister Vent Solenoid. Controls a solenoid which seals the EVAP system canister from atmospheric pressure during the EVAP OBD II Monitor test. Evaporative Emissions Canister: An evaporative emission canister, containing activated charcoal which absorbs and holds fuel vapors. EVAPPDC: Evaporative Canister Purge Duty Cycle. The duty cycle commanded to the Evap Canister Purge Solenoid by the PCM. EVO: Electronic Variable Orifice. EWP: Electric Water Pump. Exciter Ring: A toothed or notched iron or steel disk, which is the moveable part of a wheel speed sensor. FAN: Fan Speed. Used in conjunction with vehicles having multiple fan speed control. Displays OFF, LOW, or HIGH status. FC: Fan Control. FCS: Fuel Control Solenoid. FCIL: Fuel Cap Off Indicator Lamp. Indicates that the fuel filler cap was not properly installed. FEAD: Front End Accessory Drive. FEPS: Flash Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) Programming Signal. 18 volt DC signal sent by the scan tool to initiate PCM reprogramming. FF: 1. Flexible Fuel. A system capable of using a variety of fuels for vehicle operation. 2. A PID that displays the % alcohol content in fuel. FFLRN: Flex Fuel Learned. Displays when the PCM's Flex Fuel strategy has completed calculating the inferred alcohol content of fuel. FFFM: Flexible Fuel Failure Mode. Indicates whether the current Flex Fuel Sensor reading (FF) is reliable or not. Displays a YES or NO. FFTEMP: Flexible Fuel Sensor - Temperature. Alcohol concentration derived from the signal pulse width. FFV: Flexible Fuel Vehicle. FIFO: First In First Out. FILO: First In Last Out. FIM: Fuel Indicator Module. FLI: Fuel Level Input. Used by the Evap monitor to calculate fuel tank vapor volume. Displayed as a percentage. FLIV: Fuel Level Input Voltage. FMEM: Failure Mode Effects Management. Operating strategy that maintains limited vehicle function in the event of a PCM or EEC component failure. FP:1. Fuel Pump. Indicates whether the pump has been commanded ON or OFF by the PCM. 2. Fuel Pump (Modulated). Fuel pump duty cycle percentage. FPDM: Fuel Pump Driver Module. A module that controls the electric fuel pump. FPF: Fuel Pump Fault. Identifies whether a fault exists in the FP circuit. FPM: Fuel Pump Monitor. Monitors the Fuel Pump I circuits for faults. Freeze Frame: A block of memory containing the vehicle operating conditions at a specific time. FRP: Fuel Rail Pressure. Based on FRP V. FRP V: Fuel Rail Pressure Voltage. A voltage input to the PCM from the Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor. FSC: Fail-Safe Cooling. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 4047 FSV: Fuel Shut-off Valve. A component of Natural Gas Vehicles. This valve either allows or prevents Natural Gas flow to the fuel rail. FSVF: Fuel Shut-Off Valve Fault. Indicates if there is a fault in the FSV circuit. Displayed as YES or NO. FSVM: Fuel Shut-off Valve Monitor. Monitors operation of the Fuel Shut-Off Valve / circuit. FTP: Fuel Tank Pressure. Displayed as inches of water, kPa, or volts. FTP V: Fuel Tank Pressure Voltage. From the FTP transducer. FUEL PR: Fuel Pressure. Measurement of the force of the fuel delivered via the fuel pump. FUELPW: Fuel Pulse Width. Displays the commanded pulse width at time of last data update. FUELPW1: Fuel Injector Pulse Width #1. Corresponds to injectors normally affected by O2S1 (HEGO1). FUELPW2: Fuel Injector Pulse Width #2. Corresponds to injectors normally affected by O2S2 (HEGO2). FUELSYS: Fuel System Status (OPEN/CLOSED Loop). Formerly known as LOOP. Fuel Tank Vapor Valve: A valve mounted in the top of the fuel tank that vents excess vapor and pressure from the fuel tank into the Evaporative Emission Control System. FWD: Front Wheel Drive. GEM: Generic Electronic Module. GEN: Generator. GENF: Generator Output Fault. GENFDC: Generator Field Control Output. GFS: Generator field signal monitor. GND: Ground. GPM: Grams Per Mile. Also known as Gallons Per Minute. GPS: Global Positioning Satellite. Green State Vehicle: Formally known as California Emissions. A vehicle that is equipped with California on-board diagnostics. GSS: Gear Select Solenoid. GVW: Gross Vehicle Weight. Hall Effect: A process where current is passed through a small slice of semi-conductor material and a magnetic field to produce a small voltage in the semi-conductor. Hard Fault: A fault currently present in the system. HC: 1. Hydrocarbon. A by-product of combustion and a component of auto exhaust emissions. 2. High Compression. HCF: Hydraulic Cooling Fan. HCFD: Hydraulic Cooling Fan Drive. HFC: Hydraulic Cooling Fan. HFCF: High Fan Control Fault. Identifies if there is a fault in the HFC circuit. HFP: High Fuel Pump. HLOS: Hardware Limited Operating Strategy. A mode of operation where the PCM replaces output commands with fixed values in response to internal Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 4048 PCM malfunctions. HO: High Output. HO2S: Heated Oxygen Sensor. Formerly known as Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen (HEGO) Sensor. Provides information on rich or lean exhaust conditions to the PCM. Hot Soak: Period of time after an engine operates where localized combustion heat dissipates throughout the engine. HTR, HTR11, HTR12, HTR21 H1R22, HTRX1, HTRX2: HO2S Heater. Heater element for the HO2S sensor. Hydrogen: Chemical symbol H. Highly flammable gas. Hz: Hertz. Cycles per second. IAC: Idle Air Control. Electrical control of throttle bypass air. IAT: Intake Air Temperature. IATV: Intake Air Temperature Voltage. Actual voltage drop across the IAT sensor. IAT2: Intake Air Temperature 2. Displayed in either Fahrenheit or Centigrade. Used on supercharged vehicles. IAT2V: Intake Air Temperature 2 Voltage. Actual voltage drop across the IATV2 sensor. IC: Integrated Circuit. A small Semi-Conductor device capable of doing many separate circuit functions. ICM: Ignition Control Module. The module that controls the ignition system. IFDM: Integrated Fuel Delivery Module. IFS: Inertia Fuel Shutoff. IGN GND: Ignition Ground. Ignition: System used to provide high voltage spark for internal combustion engines. IGNKEY(IGKY): Ignition Key status. IGNSW (IGSW): Ignition Switch Position. IMRC: Intake Manifold Runner Control. Controls airflow through the high-speed runners in the intake manifold. IMRCM: Intake Manifold Runner Control Monitor. Monitors the IMRC / circuits for faults. IMTV: Intake Manifold Tuning Valve. Controls airflow through runners in a split intake manifold. INJ1, INJ2, INJ3, INJ4, INJ5, INJ6, INJ7, INJ8, INJ9, INJ1O: lnjector number or its signal output from the PCM. Injector: A device for delivering metered pressurized fuel to the intake system or the cylinders. Intake Air: Air drawn through a filter and distributed to each cylinder for use in combustion. Intercooler: See CAC. IPATS: Integrated Passive Anti-Theft System. ISO: international Standards Organization. KAM: Keep Alive Memory. A portion of the memory within the PCM that must have power even when the vehicle is not operating. KAPWR: Keep Alive Power. Dedicated, unswitched power circuit that maintains KAM. Key On Engine Off Self- Test: A test of the EEC system conducted by the PCM with power applied and the engine at rest. Key On Engine Running Self- Test: A test of the EEC system conducted by the PCM with the engine running and the vehicle at rest. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 4049 KEYPWR: Key Power. Battery voltage supplied when the ignition key is in the ON position. Knock: The sharp metallic sound produced when two combustion pressure fronts collide in the combustion chamber of an engine. KOEC: Key On Engine Continuous. KOEO: Key On Engine off. KOER: Key On Engine Running. KPA: Kilopascal. Unit of pressure. 3.386 kPa = 1 inch of mercury (Hg.). KPH: Kilometers Per Hour. KS: Knock Sensor. Detects engine knock. L: Liters. The unit of volume in the metric measuring system. One liter equals 1.06 quarts. LEV: Low Emissions Vehicle. LFC: Low Fan Control. LFP: Low Fuel Pump. Reduced operating speed for multi-speed fuel pumps. LIFO: Last In First Out. LILO: Last In Last Out. LONGFT1, LONGFT2: Long-Term Fuel Trim. Fuel flow adjustment determined by the PCM. LOOP: indicates OPEN or CLOSED loop status. LPG: Liquefied Petroleum Gas. LPLR: Low Pressure Low Resistance fuel injector. M-V ACRONYMS AND DEFINITIONS NOTE: This Acronyms and Definitions listing contains technical terms applicable to Ford Motor Company products. It is not intended to be an all-inclusive dictionary of components and their functions. If a detailed description of a particular system or component is desired, refer to the applicable Vehicle System for the specific vehicle being serviced. M-85: Fuel containing 85% methanol alcohol. MAF: Mass Air Flow. Used to measure the mass (weight) of the air entering the engine. MAF RTN: Mass Air Flow Return. A return circuit for the MAF sensor. MAP: Manifold Absolute Pressure. The internal pressure of the intake manifold. MFC: Medium Fan Control. MFI: Multiport Fuel Injection. A fuel-delivery system in which each cylinder is individually fueled. MFP: Modulated Fuel Pump. Microprocessor: A digital processor on a chip which perform arithmetic and control logic. MIL: Malfunction Indicator Lamp. An indicator lamp alerting the driver of an emission related malfunction. May also read "CHECK ENGINE" or "SERVICE ENGINE SOON." MISF: Misfire. Any event in the cylinder that causes a sudden change in acceleration of the crankshaft. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 4050 MON: Motor Octane Number. Monolithic Substrate: The ceramic honeycomb structure used in the catalytic converter. MSOF: Manual Shift-on-the-Fly. MY: Model Year. NA: Naturally Aspirated. Engine that is not supercharged or turbocharged. NAAO: North American Automotive Operations. NC: Normally Closed. NG: Natural Gas. A system capable of using natural gas for vehicle operation. NGS: New Generation STAR (Self-Test Automatic Readout) tester. NGVM: Natural Gas Vehicle Module. NO: Norm ally Open. NO(x): Oxides of Nitrogen. Formed at high combustion temperatures. NVH: Noise, Vibration, Harshness. A classification of vehicle concerns. OASIS: On-Line Automotive Service Information System. OBD, OBD-II: On-Board Diagnostics, On-Board Diagnostics Second Generation. A system that monitors PCM input and output control signals. On Demand Test: Technician initiated "KOEO" and "KOER" tests performed by the PCM. OC: Oxidation Catalytic converter. A catalytic converter system that reduces levels of HC and CO. OCT ADJ: Octane Adjust. Compensating strategy that adjusts for changes in fuel octane. OEM: Original Equipment Manufacturer. OHC: OverHead Cam. An engine configuration that uses a single camshaft positioned above the valves. OWL: Overheat Warning Lamp or its signal output from the PCM. Turns the TEMP warning lamp ON when engine oil temperature exceeds safe limits. Open Circuit: A circuit which does not provide a complete path for flow of current. OL: Open Loop. An operating condition based on instructions not modified by PCM feedback. O(2)S 11/12/21/22: Oxygen Sensor and its relative position in the exhaust system. Detects oxygen content in exhaust gasses. OSC: Output State Control. OSS: Output Shaft Speed. Ozone: A blue gaseous form of oxygen (O(3)) formed naturally by electric discharge or exposure to ultraviolet radiation. Particulate: Small solid matter found in exhaust gases, especially prevalent in diesel engines. PATS: Passive Anti-Theft System. PATSIL: Passive Anti-Theft System Indicator Light. PATSIN: Passive Anti-Theft System Receive Signal. PATSOUT: Passive Anti-Theft System Transmit Signal. PATSTRT: Passive Anti-Theft System Starter Relay Control Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 4051 PCM: Powertrain Control Module. Formerly known as the EEC (Electronic Engine Control) Processor. PCV: Positive Crankcase Ventilation. A system which allows the controlled flow of crankcase vapors into the combustion chamber. PF: Purge Flow. Amount of fuel vapor burned in the engine. Photochemical: Term describing the action of light on air pollutants which results in creating smog. PID: Parameter Identifier. Identifies an address in PCM memory which contains operating information. Powertrain: Engine and transmission/transaxle components. Pressure - Absolute: A pressure referenced to a perfect vacuum. Pressure - Atmospheric: The pressure of the surrounding air at any given temperature and altitude. Sometimes called Barometric Pressure. Pressure - Barometric: Pertaining to atmospheric pressure or the results obtained by a barometer. Pressure - Differential: The pressure difference between two regions, such as between the intake manifold and atmospheric pressure. Pressure - Gage: The amount by which absolute pressure exceeds the ambient atmospheric pressure. PIP: Profile Ignition Pickup. Provides crankshaft position information for ignition synchronization. Potentiometer: An adjustable resistance component commonly used as a sensor (Example: TP Sensor). PPM: Parts Per Million. A measure used in emission analysis. PROM: Programmable Read-Only Memory. Similar to ROM except without program instructions. Protocol: A set of rules for the exchange of information on a network. PSOM: Programmable Speedometer/Odometer Module. A module that processes vehicle speed information. PSP: Power Steering Pressure. Indicates the pressure in the power steering system. PSP V: Power Steering Pressure Input Voltage. PTEC: Powertrain Electronic Controller. PTO: Power Take-Off. PW: Pulse Width. The length of time an actuator, such as a fuel injector, remains energized. PWM: Pulse Width Modulation. Controls the intensity of an output by varying the signal duty cycle. PWR GND: Power Ground. The main ground circuit in the EEC system. Quick Test: A series of diagnostic tests of the EEC system consisting of KOEO, KOER and Continuous Memory Self-Tests. Results are displayed as a series of DTCs. RABS: Rear Antilock Brake System. RAM: Random Access Memory. Memory into which information can be written as well as read. REDOX: Reduction Oxidation Catalytic converter. A catalytic converter system designed to operate at high temperatures. Regulator: Controls the alternator/generator field current to maintain proper battery charge. Contained within the PCM in smart charging applications. Relay: An electromechanical device in which connections in one circuit are opened or closed by changes in another circuit. REM: Rear Electronic Module. Repetitive Spark: Multiple firings of individual spark plugs at engine speeds below 1000 RPM to improve idle quality and improve emissions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 4052 RF: Radio Frequency. RFI: Radio Frequency Interference. RFS: Returnless Fuel System. RM: Relay Module. A module containing two or more relays. ROM: Read-Only Memory. Computer memory that can be accessed and utilized, but not altered. RON: Research Octane Number. Routine: A group of related tasks, such as a series of diagnostic tests. RPM: Revolutions Per Minute. RS: Reverse Switch. RTN: Return. A dedicated sensor ground circuit. RWD: Rear Wheel Drive. SAE: Society of Automotive Engineers. SBS: Supercharger Bypass Solenoid or its signal output from the PCM. SC: Supercharged or Supercharger. SCB: Supercharger Bypass Control. A system that allows manifold vacuum to be bled away from the supercharger wastegate actuator to allow for maximum boost. SCBF: Supercharger Bypass Control Fault. Identifies whether a fault exists in the Supercharger Bypass circuit. SCICP: Supercharger Intercooler Pump Control. SCICPF: Supercharger Intercooler Pump Control Fault. SCIPC: The PID to monitor the operation of the Supercharger and Charge Air Cooler pump. SCP: Standard Corporate Protocol. Self- Test: See Quick Test. Sensor: A device that detects the value or change in a physical quantity, such as temperature, pressure or flow rate, and converts the data into an electrical signal. SFI: Sequential Multi port Fuel Injection. A multiport fuel delivery system where each injector is individually energized and timed relative to its cylinder intake event. Shield: A conducting sleeve that surrounds wires to be electronically isolated from Electromagnetic Interference (EMI). Short Circuit: An undesirable condition in a circuit where it is terminated at a point other than that intended. SHRT FT: Short-Term Fuel Trim. Fuel flow adjustment in response to the HO2S sensor(s) input during closed-loop operation. SIG RTN: Signal Return. A dedicated sensor ground circuit that is common to two or more sensors. SIL: Shift Indicator Lamp. Smart Driver: A PCM or ECU output driver that can detect faults (open or shorts) on its output circuit. SME: Society of Manufacturing Engineers. SOF: Shift-On-the-Fly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 4053 SOHC: Single Overhead Cam. Solenoid: A device consisting of an electrical coil which produces a magnetic field in a plunger and pulled to a central position. ST: Scan Tool. A device that interfaces with and communicates information on a data link. Stoichiometry: An air/fuel mixture that is neither too rich nor too lean. Stoichiometric ratio is 14.7 parts of air for every 1 part of fuel. Switch: A device for making, breaking, or changing the connections in an electrical circuit. TA: Traction Assist. TACH: Tachometer. TB: Throttle Body. A device that controls airflow through the engine via a butterfly valve, and has an air bypass channel around the throttle plate. TC: 1. Traction Control. Combines anti-lock braking and axle torque reduction to control wheel slippage. 2. Turbocharger. TDC: Top Dead Center. Tear Tag: The two-piece adhesive label attached to the PCM to identify its calibration. Thermistor: A temperature dependent resistor, like that used in CHT and ECT sensors. Timing: Relationship between spark plug firing and piston position expressed in crankshaft degrees before (BTDC) or after (ATDC) top dead center of the compression stroke. TMAP: Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor. A MAP Sensor that includes a thermistor to measure intake air temperature. TP: Throttle Position (sensor). A three-wire potentiometer that provides throttle angle and rate information for the PCM. TP V: Throttle Position Sensor Voltage. Transducer: A device that receives energy from one medium and transfers it to another. For example, thermal energy is converted to an electrical signal through a temperature probe. Transmissions/Transaxles: NOTE: All related items are grouped under the general heading "TRANSMISSIONS" located at the end. TSB: Technical Service Bulletin. Notifies service personnel of any known vehicle concerns, procedures, or general service information. Underspeed Mode: A control mode that prevents the engine from stalling in the event it stumbles while running. Also used during engine crank. Vacuum: Manifold pressure that is reduced below the ambient atmospheric pressure. Variable Reluctance: A process of passing a varying magnetic field through wire windings and inducing a voltage. VCT: Variable Camshaft Timing. VECI: Vehicle Emission Control Information label. VIN: Vehicle Identification Number. A unique identification number given to every vehicle produced. Includes information about the year, model, engine, and plant origin of the vehicle. VMV: Vapor Management Valve. Controls the flow of fuel vapors out of the carbon canister. VOM: Volt-Ohm Meter. Readings are indicated by sweep hand on a printed scale rather than a digital (DVOM) display. VPWR: Vehicle Power. A switched circuit that provides power to the EEC system. Compare "Battery Voltage VREF: Reference Voltage. A dedicated circuit that provides approximately a 5.0 volt signal used as a reference by certain sensors. WAC: Wide Open Throttle A/C Cut-off. Turns A/C system off during wide open throttle or certain other operating conditions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 4054 Wastegate Control: A device that opens the wastegate in case of overboost from a turbocharger. WOT: Wide Open Throttle. A condition of maximum airflow through the throttle body. Zip Tube: Another name for "fresh air duct" or "air inlet duct". TRANSMISSIONS: NOTE: The transmission naming convention is as follows: ^ The first character, a number, is the number of forward gears. ^ The second character, either the letter "F" or "R," represents front (transaxle) or rear (transmission) wheel drive. ^ The next set of characters, a grouping of numbers, represents the design torque capacity of the transmission/transaxle (for example, "27" represents 270ft./lbs. in the 4F27E transaxle). ^ The last character, if used, is one of the following: ^ "E" for electronic shift ^ "N" for non-synchronous shift ^ "S" for synchronous shift ^ "W" for wide ratio ^ 4F27E: Also known as the FN Focus automatic transmission. ^ 4F44E: Formerly known as the CD4E. ^ 4F46S: Formerly known as the Ax45 and regular-duty AXOD-E. ^ 4F50N: Formerly known as the Ax4N and heavy-duty AXOD-E. ^ 4R44E: Formerly known as A4LD for 3.0L applications. ^ 4R55E: Formerly known as A4LD for 4.0L applications. ^ 4R70W: Formerly known as AOD-E. ^ 4R100: Formerly known as E4OD. ^ 5R44E: Formerly known as A5LD for 3.0L applications. ^ 5R55E: Formerly known as A5LD for 4.0L applications. ^ 5R55N: Lincoln LS automatic transmission. ^ 5R55W: Wide-ratio truck transmission. ^ 4x4L: 4x4 Low. ^ A/T: Automatic Transmission. ^ CCS: Coast Clutch Solenoid. ^ CCSF: Coast Clutch Solenoid Fault. Displays a YES if fault exists. ^ EPC: Electronic Pressure Control. ^ EPCV: Electronic Pressure Control Volts. ^ ESS: Electronic Shift Scheduling. ^ HCDSS: High Clutch Drum Speed Sensor. PCM input from the 4R44E and 4R55E. ^ M5OD: Manual 5-Speed transmission with overdrive (RWD). ^ M/T: Manual Transmission/Transaxle. ^ NPS: Neutral Pressure Switch or its signal input to the PCM. ^ OCS: Overdrive Cancel Switch. ^ OSS: Output Shaft Speed. Indicates rotational speed of the transmission output shaft. ^ PNP: Park/Neutral Position switch. Also known as Neutral Drive Switch (NDS), Neutral Gear Switch (NGS), and Transmission Switch Neutral (TSN). ^ REVERSE or REV: Transmission Reverse Switch Input. ^ SIL: Shift Indicator Lamp. A lamp that indicates the preferred shift points on select manual transmission/transaxle vehicles. ^ S91/SS2/SS3: Shift solenoids. Devices that control the shifting in an automatic transmission. ^ TCC: Torque Converter Clutch. When energized, causes a mechanical engagement and disengagement of the Torque Converter Clutch. ^ TCIL: Transmission Control Indicator Lamp. Indicates that the Transmission Control Switch (TCS) has been activated. ^ TCS: Transmission Control Switch. Modifies the operation of electronically controlled transmissions. ^ Torque converter: A device which by its design multiplies the torque in a fluid coupling between an engine and transmission/transaxle. ^ TFT: Transmission Fluid Temperature. Indicates temperature of transmission fluid. ^ Transaxle: A device consisting of a transmission and axle drive gears assembled in the same case. Front-wheel drive applications. ^ Transmission: A device which selectively increases or decreases the ratio of relative rotation between its input and output shafts. Rear-wheel drive applications. ^ TR: Transmission Range. The range in which the transmission is operating. ^ TR Sensor: Formerly known as Manual Lever Position Sensor (MLPS). Provides information to the PCM on the transmission range selector position. ^ TR V: Transmission Range Voltage. ^ TSS: Turbine Shaft Speed. Indicates rotational speed of the transmission turbine shaft. ^ VSS: Vehicle Speed Sensor. A magnetic pickup device that generates an AC signal that is proportional to vehicle speed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 4055 Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Federal Test Procedure Catalyst Efficiency Monitor - Federal Test Procedure The Catalyst Efficiency Monitor uses an oxygen sensor before and after the catalyst to infer the hydrocarbon efficiency based on oxygen storage capacity of the catalyst. Under normal, close-loop fuel conditions, high efficiency catalysts have significant oxygen storage. This makes the switching frequency of the rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) very slow and reduces the amplitude of those switches as compared to the switching frequency and amplitude of the front HO2S. As the catalyst efficiency deteriorates, its ability to store oxygen declines. The post-catalyst or downstream HO2S signal begins to switch more rapidly with increasing amplitude, approaching the switching frequency and amplitude of the pre-catalyst or upstream HO2S. All applications utilize an FTP-based (Federal Test Procedure) catalyst monitor. This simply means that the catalyst monitor must run during a standard FTP emission test as opposed to the 20-second steady state catalyst monitor used in 1994 through some 1996 vehicles. Two slightly different versions of the catalyst monitor are used in the 2001 model year. Switch Ratio Method (1996 - 2001) 1. In order to assess catalyst oxygen storage, the monitor counts front and rear HO2S switches during part-throttle, close-loop fuel condition after the engine is warmed-up and inferred catalyst temperature is within limits. Front switches are accumulated in up to nine different air mass regions or cells although three air mass regions is typical. Rear switches are counted in a single cell for all air mass regions. When the required number of front switches has accumulated in each cell, the total number of rear switches is divided by the total number of front switches to compute a switch ratio. A switch ratio near 0.0 indicates high oxygen storage capacity, hence high HC efficiency. A switch ratio near 1.0 indicates low oxygen storage capacity, hence low HC efficiency. If the actual switch ratio exceeds a calibrated threshold switch ratio, the catalyst is considered failed. Inputs from Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) or Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) (warm engine), IAT (not extreme ambient temperatures), Mass Air Flow (MAF) (greater than minimum engine load), Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (within vehicle speed widow) and Throttle Position (TP) (at part-throttle) are required to enable the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor. 2. The DTCs associated with this test are Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0420 (Bank 1) and P0430 (Bank 2). Because an Exponentially Weight Moving Average algorithm is use for malfunction determination, up to six driving cycles may be required to illuminate the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) during normal customer driving. If Keep Alive Memory (KAM) is reset, a malfunction will illuminate the MIL in 2 drive cycles. Index Ratio Method (some 2001 and beyond) 1. In order to assess catalyst oxygen storage, the catalyst monitor counts front HO2S switches during part-throttle, closed-loop fuel conditions after the engine is warmed-up and inferred catalyst temperature is within limits. Front switches are accumulated in up to three different air mass regions or cells. While catalyst monitoring entry conditions are being met, the front and rear HO2S signal lengths are continually being calculated. When the required number of front switches has accumulated in each cell, the total signal length of the rear HO2S is divided by the total signal length of the front HO2S to compute a catalyst index ratio. An index ratio near 0.0 indicates high oxygen storage capacity, hence high efficiency. A switch ratio near 1.0 indicates low oxygen storage capacity, hence low HC efficiency. If the actual index ratio exceeds the threshold index ratio, the catalyst is considered failed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 4056 Inputs from ECT or CHT (warm engine), IAT (not extreme ambient temperatures), MAF (greater than minimum engine load), VSS (within vehicle speed widow) and TP (at part-throttle) are required to enable the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor. 2. The DTCs associated with this test are DTC P0420 (Bank 1) and P0430 (Bank 2). Because an Exponentially Weighted Moving Average algorithm is use for malfunction determination, up to six driving cycles may be required to illuminate the MIL during normal customer driving. If KAM is reset, a malfunction will illuminate the MIL in 2 drive cycles. If the catalyst monitor does not complete during a particular driving cycle, the already accumulated switch/signal data is retained in Keep Alive Memory and is used during the next driving cycle to allow the catalyst monitor a better opportunity to complete. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 4057 Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation Catalyst and Exhaust Systems Catalyst and Exhaust System Overview The Catalytic Converter and Exhaust Systems (Figure 135) work together to control the release of harmful engine exhaust emissions into the atmosphere. The engine exhaust gas consists mainly of Nitrogen (N), Carbon Dioxide (CO2) and Water Vapor (H2O). However, it also contains Carbon Monoxide (CO), Oxides Of Nitrogen (NOx), Hydrogen (H), and various unburned Hydrocarbons (HCs). CO, NO(x), and HCs are major air pollutants, and their emission into the atmosphere must be controlled. The exhaust system generally consists of an exhaust manifold, front exhaust pipe, upstream Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S), rear exhaust pipe, downstream HO2S, a muffler and an exhaust tailpipe. The catalytic converter is installed between the front and rear exhaust pipes. Catalytic converter efficiency is monitored by the On Board Diagnostic (OBD II) system. Generic Catalyst and Exhaust System Catalytic Converter A catalyst is a material that remains unchanged when it initiates and increases the speed of a chemical reaction. A catalyst will also enable a chemical reaction to occur at a lower temperature. The concentration of exhaust gas products released to the atmosphere must be controlled. The catalytic converter assists in this task. It contains a catalyst in the form of a specially treated honeycomb structure saturated with catalytically active precious metals. As the exhaust gases come in contact with the catalyst, they are changed into mostly harmless products. The catalyst initiates and speeds up heat producing chemical reactions of the exhaust gas components so they are used up as much as possible. Exhaust System The purpose of the exhaust system is to convey engine emissions from the exhaust manifold to the atmosphere. Engine exhaust emissions are directed from the engine exhaust manifold to the catalytic converter through the front exhaust pipe. An HO2S is mounted on the front exhaust pipe before the catalyst. The catalytic converter reduces the concentration of Carbon Monoxide (CO), unburned Hydrocarbons (HCs) and Oxides of Nitrogen (NO) in the exhaust emissions to an acceptable level. The reduced exhaust emissions are directed from the catalytic converter to a muffler through the rear exhaust pipe. Another HO2S is mounted on the rear exhaust pipe. Lastly, the exhaust emissions are directed to the atmosphere through an exhaust tailpipe. HARDWARE The downstream HO2S may be located after the light off catalyst or underbody catalyst. The underbody catalyst may be in-line with the light off catalyst, or the underbody catalyst may be common to two light off catalysts, forming a "Y" pipe configuration. For an exact configuration of the catalyst and exhaust system, refer to Exhaust System. Three Way Catalytic Converter The Three Way Catalytic (TWC) converter contains either platinum (Pt) and Rhodium (Rh) or Palladium (Pd) and Rhodium (Rh). The TWC converter catalyzes the oxidation reactions of unburned HCs and CO and the reduction reaction of NO. The three-way conversion can be best accomplished by always operating the engine air fuel/ratio at or close to stoichiometry. Exhaust Manifold/Runners The exhaust manifold runners collect exhaust gases from engine cylinders. The number of exhaust manifolds and exhaust manifold runners depends on the engine configuration and number of cylinders. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Acronyms and Definitions > Page 4058 Exhaust Pipes Exhaust pipes are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase the life of the product. The pipes serve as guides for the flow of exhaust gases from the engine exhaust manifold through the catalytic converter and the muffler. Upstream Heated and Downstream Heated Oxygen Sensors The HO2S provide the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with voltage and frequency information related to the oxygen content of the exhaust gas. In addition to providing the PCM with indications of how rich/lean the engine is operating, the upstream HO2S signal serves as an input to the HO2S monitor. The downstream HO2S signal is an input to the Catalyst Efficiency monitor. Muffler Mufflers are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase the life of the product. The muffler reduces the level of noise produced by the engine, and it also reduces the noise produced by exhaust gases as they travel from the catalytic converter to the atmosphere. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4059 Catalytic Converter: Testing and Inspection For information regarding diagnosis of this system refer to Computers and Control Systems Diagnosis. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4060 Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter-2.0L Zetec Removal and Installation 1. Remove the bolts and the heat shield. 2. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (H02S) and the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connectors. 3. Using the special tool, remove the H02S. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4061 4. Disconnect the Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) tube. 5. Remove and discard the nuts. 6. Raise and support the vehicle. 7. Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor. 8. Remove the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4062 9. Remove the spring bolts and the flag nuts. ^ Discard the nuts. 10. Remove the catalytic converter. ^ Discard the ring seal. ^ Discard the gasket. 11. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Install new flag nuts. ^ Install a new ring seal. ^ Install a new gasket. ^ Install new nuts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4067 Canister Purge Control Valve: Service Precautions WARNING: ^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4068 Canister Purge Control Valve: Description and Operation EVAP Canister Purge Valve EVAP Canister Purge Valve EVAP Canister Purge Valve The EVAP canister purge valve (Figure 95) and (Figure 96) is the part of the Enhanced EVAP system that is controlled by the PCM. This valve controls the flow of vapors (purging) from the EVAP canister to the intake manifold during various engine operating modes. The EVAP canister purge valve is normally closed valve. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4069 Canister Purge Control Valve: Service and Repair REMOVAL WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 1. Disconnect the battery. WARNING: THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 2. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve. ^ Disconnect the electrical connector. ^ Disconnect the vacuum tube. ^ Disconnect the EVAP canister outlet tube. ^ Disconnect the EVAP return tube. 3. Remove the EVAP canister purge valve. ^ Remove the two nuts. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Carry out a leak test. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission System Leak Test ^ Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission Repair Verification Drive Cycle NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL(R) O-ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service Precautions Evaporative Canister Filter: Service Precautions WARNING: ^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4073 Evaporative Canister Filter: Service and Repair REMOVAL WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 1. Disconnect the battery. WARNING: THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the EVAP canister outlet tube. 4. Disconnect the canister vent solenoid electrical connector and the remote canister vent hose. 5. Remove the EVAP canister bracket assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4074 6. Remove the remote canister vent hose. 7. Remove the dust separator. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Carry out a leak test. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission System Leak Test ^ Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission Repair Verification Drive Cycle NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL(R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Service Precautions Evaporative Check Valve: Service Precautions WARNING: ^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4078 Evaporative Check Valve: Service and Repair REMOVAL WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 1. Disconnect the battery. WARNING: THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the EVAP canister outlet tube. 4. Disconnect the canister vent solenoid electrical connector and the remote canister vent hose. 5. Remove the EVAP canister bracket assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4079 6. Remove the evaporative emission check valve. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Carry out a leak test. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission System Leak Test ^ Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission Repair Verification Drive Cycle NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL(R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Service Precautions Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Service Precautions WARNING: ^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4083 Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Service and Repair REMOVAL WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 1. Disconnect the battery. WARNING: THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the EVAP canister outlet tube. 4. Disconnect the canister vent solenoid electrical connector and the remote canister vent hose. 5. Remove the EVAP canister bracket assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4084 6. Remove the remote canister vent hose, dust separator and canister vent solenoid. 7. Remove the EVAP canister outlet tube. 8. Remove the EVAP canister. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Carry out a leak test. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission System Leak Test ^ Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission Repair Verification Drive Cycle NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL(R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service Precautions Evaporative Emissions Hose: Service Precautions WARNING: THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR LIQUID FUEL IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4088 Evaporative Emissions Hose: Service and Repair DISCONNECT 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. WARNING: THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR LIQUID FUEL IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 2. Disconnect the vapor tube from the fitting. 1 Squeeze the fitting. 2 Disconnect the vapor tube from the fitting. CONNECT 1. Clean and inspect the fitting and the tube for damage. 2. Remove any dirt or obstructions. 3. Push the tube into the fitting until it snaps in place. 4. Pull on the connection to make sure the fitting is secure. 5. Connect the battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Solenoid, Evaporative System > Component Information > Description and Operation Leak Detection Solenoid: Description and Operation Canister Vent Solenoid Typical Canister Vent (CV) Solenoid During the Enhanced EVAP System test monitor, the Canister Vent (CV) solenoid (Figure 99) seals the EVAP canister from atmospheric pressure. This allows the EVAP canister purge valve to obtain the target vacuum in the fuel tank during the monitor run. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4095 Leak Detection Valve: Service Precautions WARNING: ^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4096 Leak Detection Valve: Service and Repair REMOVAL WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 1. Disconnect the battery. WARNING: THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the EVAP canister outlet tube. 4. Disconnect the canister vent solenoid electrical connector and the remote canister vent hose. 5. Remove the EVAP canister bracket assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4097 6. Remove the remote canister vent hose and the dust separator. 7. Remove the canister vent solenoid. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Carry out a leak test. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission System Leak Test ^ Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission Repair Verification Drive Cycle NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL(R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid > Component Information > Description and Operation EGR Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid: Description and Operation EGR VACUUM REGULATOR SOLENOID EGR Vacuum Regulator Solenoid Test Graph EGR Vacuum Regulator Solenoid Data Chart The EGR vacuum regulator solenoid (Figure 88) is an electromagnetic device which is used to regulate the vacuum supply to the EGR valve. The solenoid contains a coil which magnetically controls the position of a disc to regulate the vacuum. As the duty cycle to the coil increases, the vacuum signal passed through the solenoid to the EGR valve also increases. Vacuum not directed to the EGR valve is vented through the solenoid vent to atmosphere. Note that at 0% duty cycle (no electrical signal applied), the EGR vacuum regulator solenoid allows some vacuum to pass, but not enough to open the EGR valve. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4102 EGR Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the EGR vacuum regulator valve. ^ Disconnect the electrical connector. ^ Disconnect the vacuum hoses. 3. Remove the nuts and remove the EGR vacuum regulator solenoid. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Tube > Component Information > Service Precautions EGR Tube: Service Precautions CAUTION: ^ When the EGR tube is disconnected from the EGR valve a new EGR tube must be installed. The aluminum threads on the EGR valve must be inspected, and a new EGR valve installed if the threads are damaged. ^ The EGR tube must be discarded after removal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Tube > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4106 EGR Tube: Description and Operation ORIFICE TUBE ASSEMBLY Orifice Tube Assembly The orifice tube assembly (Figure 90) is a section of tubing connecting the exhaust system to the intake manifold. The assembly provides the flow path for the EGR to the intake manifold and also contains the metering orifice and two pressure pick-up tubes. The internal metering orifice creates a measurable pressure drop across it as the EGR valve opens and closes. This pressure differential across the orifice is picked up by the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor which provides feedback to the PCM. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Tube > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4107 EGR Tube: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Disconnect the EGR tube fitting. 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe. 6. Disconnect the EGR tube from the EGR valve. CAUTION: When the EGR tube is disconnected from the EGR valve a new EGR tube must be installed. The aluminum threads on the EGR valve must be inspected, and a new EGR valve installed if the threads are damaged. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Tube > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4108 7. Remove the EGR tube bracket bolts. 8. Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor from the EGR tube. 9. Remove and discard the EGR tube. CAUTION: The EGR tube must be discarded after removal. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Service Precautions EGR Valve: Service Precautions CAUTION: When the EGR tube is disconnected from the EGR valve a new EGR tube must be installed. The aluminum threads on the EGR valve must be inspected and a new EGR valve installed if the threads are damaged. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR EGR Valve: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback EGR EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION VALVE EGR Valve Test Graph The EGR valve (Figure 89) in the Differential Pressure Feedback EGR system is a conventional, vacuum-actuated EGR valve. The valve increases or decreases the flow of exhaust gas recirculation. As vacuum applied to the EGR valve diaphragm overcomes the spring force, the valve begins to open. As the vacuum signal weakens, at 5.4 kPa (1.6 in-Hg) or less, the spring force closes the valve. The EGR valve is fully open at about 15 kPa (4.5 in-Hg). Since EGR flow requirement varies greatly, providing service specifications on flow rate is impractical. The on-board diagnostic system monitors the EGR valve function and triggers a Diagnostic Trouble Code if the test criteria is not met. The EGR valve flow rate is not measured directly as part of the field diagnostic procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR > Page 4114 EGR Valve: Description and Operation Electric Motor EGR System (EEGR) ELECTRIC EGR VALVE Electric EGR Motor/Valve Assembly Electric EGR The electric EGR valve (Figure 92) and (Figure 93) is a water cooled motor/valve assembly. The motor is commanded to move in 52 discrete steps as it acts directly on the the EGR valve. The position of the valve determines the rate of EGR. The built in spring works to close the valve (against the Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR > Page 4115 motor opening force). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4116 EGR Valve: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove and discard the exhaust manifold to EGR valve tube. 2. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe. 3. Remove the EGR valve. 1 Disconnect the vacuum line. 2 Remove the bolts. CAUTION: When the EGR tube is disconnected from the EGR valve a new EGR tube must be installed. The aluminum threads on the EGR valve must be inspected and a new EGR valve installed if the threads are damaged. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Carefully clean all sealing surfaces and install a new EGR valve gasket. NOTE: The EGR valve sealing surfaces are soft metals. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Exhaust Pressure Regulator Vacuum Valve, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect Technical Service Bulletin # 02M01S6 Date: 040831 Attachment I - Administrative Information Customer Satisfaction Program 02M01-S6 Certain Vehicles Equipped with a Tube-Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Additional EGR Pressure Sensor Warranty Coverage OASIS You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this program. Note: Submission of an "M" program claim will not remove the vehicle from OASIS because the affected vehicles are eligible for multiple repairs if the affected condition reoccurs during the extended warranty time/mileage period. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line that the FSA is claimed on. CLAIMING INSTRUCTIONS FOR REPAIRS WITH A REPAIR DATE ON OR AFTER 10/27/03 Claims for all vehicles that are within the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage must be submitted as a warranty repair. ACESII will not accept claims for reimbursement under the 02M01 program for vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage. Vehicles that have branded titles are eligible for this repair under the 02M01 program. Vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage Claims are to be submitted as a normal warranty claim in accordance with TSB 04-11-01. Vehicles beyond New Vehicle Warranty Coverage (including branded titled vehicles) Claims are to be submitted following program 02M01 guidelines. Future Warranty Extension Customer Satisfaction Programs (CSP) Future Warranty Extension CSPs will follow these claiming instructions; only those vehicles outside the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage will be submitted as a CSP type repair. OWNER REFUNDS Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid repairs made on or before the last day of the month of the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair was made away from the servicing dealer). Failure of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460) will not have an impact on any other component of the vehicle. Therefore, refunds will only be granted for the replacement of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460). All supporting documentation must be retained in accordance with the Warranty and Policy Manual. Refer to ACESII manual for refund information. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. Attachment II - Labor Allowances and Parts Ordering Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 4128 LABOR ALLOWANCES [NEW] NOTE: If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service Support Center. Special Notes: ^ 02M01C labor operation is in effect for repairs performed on or after 10/27/03. ^ Diagnostics performed beyond retrieving continuous DTC will not be paid for under this program. ^ Pinpoint diagnostics are not required to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor; therefore labor time has been adjusted accordingly. ^ Due to the use of specific DTCs to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor, this program will not cover any other continuous DTCs; normal vehicle warranty would apply for any other DTCs. ^ There will be no related damage claims allowed for this program. PARTS REQUIREMENTS Parts will not be direct shipped for this program. Order your parts requirement through normal order processing. PARTS REQUIREMENTS/ORDERING INFORMATION NOTE: If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service Support Center. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 4129 DEALER PRICE For latest prices, check DOES II or updated price book. PARTS RETENTION Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures." EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: If a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine and a dash-mounted EGR pressure sensor is encountered, call the Special Service Support Center. 1. Retrieve continuous DTCs. NOTE: Replace the EGR pressure sensor only if one or more of the following continuous DTCs are present: ^ P1400 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE DETECTED ^ P1401 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE DETECTED ^ P0401- EGR FLOW INSUFFICIENT DETECTED ^ P0402- EGR FLOW EXCESSIVE DETECTED Any other DTC present is not covered by this program. 2. If one or more of the DTCs listed above is present, replace the EGR pressure sensor (9J460) as follows: a) Key off. b) Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the EGR pressure sensor from the EGR tube. c) Install the new EGR pressure sensor onto the EGR tube and connect the electrical connector. Note: Refer to Section 303-08 of the appropriate workshop manual if additional information is required. 3. Clear continuous DTCs. 4. Perform KOEO and KOER self tests. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 4130 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 4131 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 4132 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect Technical Service Bulletin # 02M01S6 Date: 040831 Attachment I - Administrative Information Customer Satisfaction Program 02M01-S6 Certain Vehicles Equipped with a Tube-Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Additional EGR Pressure Sensor Warranty Coverage OASIS You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this program. Note: Submission of an "M" program claim will not remove the vehicle from OASIS because the affected vehicles are eligible for multiple repairs if the affected condition reoccurs during the extended warranty time/mileage period. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line that the FSA is claimed on. CLAIMING INSTRUCTIONS FOR REPAIRS WITH A REPAIR DATE ON OR AFTER 10/27/03 Claims for all vehicles that are within the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage must be submitted as a warranty repair. ACESII will not accept claims for reimbursement under the 02M01 program for vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage. Vehicles that have branded titles are eligible for this repair under the 02M01 program. Vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage Claims are to be submitted as a normal warranty claim in accordance with TSB 04-11-01. Vehicles beyond New Vehicle Warranty Coverage (including branded titled vehicles) Claims are to be submitted following program 02M01 guidelines. Future Warranty Extension Customer Satisfaction Programs (CSP) Future Warranty Extension CSPs will follow these claiming instructions; only those vehicles outside the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage will be submitted as a CSP type repair. OWNER REFUNDS Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid repairs made on or before the last day of the month of the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair was made away from the servicing dealer). Failure of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460) will not have an impact on any other component of the vehicle. Therefore, refunds will only be granted for the replacement of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460). All supporting documentation must be retained in accordance with the Warranty and Policy Manual. Refer to ACESII manual for refund information. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. Attachment II - Labor Allowances and Parts Ordering Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 4138 LABOR ALLOWANCES [NEW] NOTE: If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service Support Center. Special Notes: ^ 02M01C labor operation is in effect for repairs performed on or after 10/27/03. ^ Diagnostics performed beyond retrieving continuous DTC will not be paid for under this program. ^ Pinpoint diagnostics are not required to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor; therefore labor time has been adjusted accordingly. ^ Due to the use of specific DTCs to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor, this program will not cover any other continuous DTCs; normal vehicle warranty would apply for any other DTCs. ^ There will be no related damage claims allowed for this program. PARTS REQUIREMENTS Parts will not be direct shipped for this program. Order your parts requirement through normal order processing. PARTS REQUIREMENTS/ORDERING INFORMATION NOTE: If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service Support Center. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 4139 DEALER PRICE For latest prices, check DOES II or updated price book. PARTS RETENTION Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures." EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: If a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine and a dash-mounted EGR pressure sensor is encountered, call the Special Service Support Center. 1. Retrieve continuous DTCs. NOTE: Replace the EGR pressure sensor only if one or more of the following continuous DTCs are present: ^ P1400 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE DETECTED ^ P1401 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE DETECTED ^ P0401- EGR FLOW INSUFFICIENT DETECTED ^ P0402- EGR FLOW EXCESSIVE DETECTED Any other DTC present is not covered by this program. 2. If one or more of the DTCs listed above is present, replace the EGR pressure sensor (9J460) as follows: a) Key off. b) Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the EGR pressure sensor from the EGR tube. c) Install the new EGR pressure sensor onto the EGR tube and connect the electrical connector. Note: Refer to Section 303-08 of the appropriate workshop manual if additional information is required. 3. Clear continuous DTCs. 4. Perform KOEO and KOER self tests. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 4140 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 4141 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 4142 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set Article No. 04-11-1 06/08/2004 DRIVEABILITY - STREAMLINED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR VEHICLES WITH MIL ON AND DTCS P0401, P0402, P1400 OR P1401 - ADDITIONAL SYMPTOMS MAY INCLUDE RUNS ROUGH, LACKS POWER, SURGE, POOR FUEL ECONOMY FORD: 2000-2002 TAURUS 2001-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, FOCUS, MUSTANG 2001 EXPLORER USPS 2001-2002 E SERIES, ESCAPE, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 2002-2003 EXPLORER LINCOLN: 2001-2002 TOWN CAR MERCURY: 2000-2002 SABLE 2001-2002 COUGAR, GRAND MARQUIS 2002-2003 MOUNTAINEER This article supersedes TSB 04-3-1 to update service part information and applications. ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) "ON" with or without the following symptoms: Rough Running, Lack of Power, Surge or Poor Fuel Economy, along with diagnostic trouble codes (DTC's) P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401. This may be caused by an intermittently functioning tube-mounted delta pressure feedback EGR (DPFE) sensor (Figure 1). ACTION For vehicles equipped with a tube-mounted DPFE sensor, perform the following diagnostic procedure and repair action. This procedure supersedes the diagnostic procedure in the PC/ED Manual for the issue described above. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 4147 NOTE ALL LISTED APPLICATIONS CAN NOW BE SERVICED WITH DPFE SENSOR 4U7Z-9J460-AA NOTE THIS ARTICLE APPLIES TO THE FULL MODEL YEAR FOR ALL VEHICLES SHOWN EXCEPT THE FOLLOWING: ^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L DOHC - Built After May 2002 ^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L OHV - Built After February 2002 ^ 2002 Econoline And F-150 4.2L OHV - Built After April 9, 2002 ^ 2003 Explorer 4dr/Mountaineer 4.6L SOHC - Built After February 2, 2003 SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Retrieve continuous DTC(s). 2. If P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401 are present, turn ignition OFF and replace the DPFE sensor. 3. Clear continuous DTC(s). 4. Perform key on engine off (KOEO) and key on engine running (KOER) self-test. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 4148 Labor Operations Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9J460 42 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 4149 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set Article No. 04-11-1 06/08/2004 DRIVEABILITY - STREAMLINED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR VEHICLES WITH MIL ON AND DTCS P0401, P0402, P1400 OR P1401 - ADDITIONAL SYMPTOMS MAY INCLUDE RUNS ROUGH, LACKS POWER, SURGE, POOR FUEL ECONOMY FORD: 2000-2002 TAURUS 2001-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, FOCUS, MUSTANG 2001 EXPLORER USPS 2001-2002 E SERIES, ESCAPE, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 2002-2003 EXPLORER LINCOLN: 2001-2002 TOWN CAR MERCURY: 2000-2002 SABLE 2001-2002 COUGAR, GRAND MARQUIS 2002-2003 MOUNTAINEER This article supersedes TSB 04-3-1 to update service part information and applications. ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) "ON" with or without the following symptoms: Rough Running, Lack of Power, Surge or Poor Fuel Economy, along with diagnostic trouble codes (DTC's) P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401. This may be caused by an intermittently functioning tube-mounted delta pressure feedback EGR (DPFE) sensor (Figure 1). ACTION For vehicles equipped with a tube-mounted DPFE sensor, perform the following diagnostic procedure and repair action. This procedure supersedes the diagnostic procedure in the PC/ED Manual for the issue described above. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 4155 NOTE ALL LISTED APPLICATIONS CAN NOW BE SERVICED WITH DPFE SENSOR 4U7Z-9J460-AA NOTE THIS ARTICLE APPLIES TO THE FULL MODEL YEAR FOR ALL VEHICLES SHOWN EXCEPT THE FOLLOWING: ^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L DOHC - Built After May 2002 ^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L OHV - Built After February 2002 ^ 2002 Econoline And F-150 4.2L OHV - Built After April 9, 2002 ^ 2003 Explorer 4dr/Mountaineer 4.6L SOHC - Built After February 2, 2003 SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Retrieve continuous DTC(s). 2. If P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401 are present, turn ignition OFF and replace the DPFE sensor. 3. Clear continuous DTC(s). 4. Perform key on engine off (KOEO) and key on engine running (KOER) self-test. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 4156 Labor Operations Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9J460 42 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 4157 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4158 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4159 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 86) is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback sensor receives this signal through two hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the aluminum differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4160 Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 87) is identical in operation as the larger metal or plastic DPFE sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the underside of the sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4161 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor by sliding up and off the EGR tube. NOTE: The 3.0L (4V) engine is shown, the 2.0L Zetec engine is similar. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Oil Separator > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Separator: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the three way catalytic convertor. 2. Remove the crankcase vent oil separator. 1 Disconnect the Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) valve. 2 Remove the bolts and remove the separator. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Carefully clean all sealing surfaces and install a new crankcase vent oil separator gasket. NOTE: The oil separator sealing surfaces are soft metal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > PCV Valve Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair PCV Valve Hose: Service and Repair CRANKCASE VENTILATION HOSE AND TUBE REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the crankcase ventilation tube from the Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) valve. 2. Disconnect the hose from the tube. 3. Unclip the crankshaft position sensor wiring harness. 4. Remove the bolt from the tube bracket and remove the tube. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) valve. ^ Remove the crankcase ventilation hose from the PCV valve. ^ Remove the PCV valve from the grommet. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Emission Control Systems > Air Injection Pump Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation Air Injection Pump Relay: Description and Operation SOLID STATE RELAY Solid State Relay The solid state relay (Figure 124) switches the high current required for operation of the electric AIR pump. Input control to the solid state relay comes from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect Technical Service Bulletin # 02M01S6 Date: 040831 Attachment I - Administrative Information Customer Satisfaction Program 02M01-S6 Certain Vehicles Equipped with a Tube-Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Additional EGR Pressure Sensor Warranty Coverage OASIS You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this program. Note: Submission of an "M" program claim will not remove the vehicle from OASIS because the affected vehicles are eligible for multiple repairs if the affected condition reoccurs during the extended warranty time/mileage period. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line that the FSA is claimed on. CLAIMING INSTRUCTIONS FOR REPAIRS WITH A REPAIR DATE ON OR AFTER 10/27/03 Claims for all vehicles that are within the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage must be submitted as a warranty repair. ACESII will not accept claims for reimbursement under the 02M01 program for vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage. Vehicles that have branded titles are eligible for this repair under the 02M01 program. Vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage Claims are to be submitted as a normal warranty claim in accordance with TSB 04-11-01. Vehicles beyond New Vehicle Warranty Coverage (including branded titled vehicles) Claims are to be submitted following program 02M01 guidelines. Future Warranty Extension Customer Satisfaction Programs (CSP) Future Warranty Extension CSPs will follow these claiming instructions; only those vehicles outside the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage will be submitted as a CSP type repair. OWNER REFUNDS Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid repairs made on or before the last day of the month of the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair was made away from the servicing dealer). Failure of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460) will not have an impact on any other component of the vehicle. Therefore, refunds will only be granted for the replacement of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460). All supporting documentation must be retained in accordance with the Warranty and Policy Manual. Refer to ACESII manual for refund information. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. Attachment II - Labor Allowances and Parts Ordering Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 4185 LABOR ALLOWANCES [NEW] NOTE: If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service Support Center. Special Notes: ^ 02M01C labor operation is in effect for repairs performed on or after 10/27/03. ^ Diagnostics performed beyond retrieving continuous DTC will not be paid for under this program. ^ Pinpoint diagnostics are not required to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor; therefore labor time has been adjusted accordingly. ^ Due to the use of specific DTCs to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor, this program will not cover any other continuous DTCs; normal vehicle warranty would apply for any other DTCs. ^ There will be no related damage claims allowed for this program. PARTS REQUIREMENTS Parts will not be direct shipped for this program. Order your parts requirement through normal order processing. PARTS REQUIREMENTS/ORDERING INFORMATION NOTE: If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service Support Center. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 4186 DEALER PRICE For latest prices, check DOES II or updated price book. PARTS RETENTION Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures." EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: If a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine and a dash-mounted EGR pressure sensor is encountered, call the Special Service Support Center. 1. Retrieve continuous DTCs. NOTE: Replace the EGR pressure sensor only if one or more of the following continuous DTCs are present: ^ P1400 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE DETECTED ^ P1401 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE DETECTED ^ P0401- EGR FLOW INSUFFICIENT DETECTED ^ P0402- EGR FLOW EXCESSIVE DETECTED Any other DTC present is not covered by this program. 2. If one or more of the DTCs listed above is present, replace the EGR pressure sensor (9J460) as follows: a) Key off. b) Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the EGR pressure sensor from the EGR tube. c) Install the new EGR pressure sensor onto the EGR tube and connect the electrical connector. Note: Refer to Section 303-08 of the appropriate workshop manual if additional information is required. 3. Clear continuous DTCs. 4. Perform KOEO and KOER self tests. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 4187 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 4188 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 4189 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect Technical Service Bulletin # 02M01S6 Date: 040831 Attachment I - Administrative Information Customer Satisfaction Program 02M01-S6 Certain Vehicles Equipped with a Tube-Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Additional EGR Pressure Sensor Warranty Coverage OASIS You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this program. Note: Submission of an "M" program claim will not remove the vehicle from OASIS because the affected vehicles are eligible for multiple repairs if the affected condition reoccurs during the extended warranty time/mileage period. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line that the FSA is claimed on. CLAIMING INSTRUCTIONS FOR REPAIRS WITH A REPAIR DATE ON OR AFTER 10/27/03 Claims for all vehicles that are within the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage must be submitted as a warranty repair. ACESII will not accept claims for reimbursement under the 02M01 program for vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage. Vehicles that have branded titles are eligible for this repair under the 02M01 program. Vehicles within New Vehicle Warranty Coverage Claims are to be submitted as a normal warranty claim in accordance with TSB 04-11-01. Vehicles beyond New Vehicle Warranty Coverage (including branded titled vehicles) Claims are to be submitted following program 02M01 guidelines. Future Warranty Extension Customer Satisfaction Programs (CSP) Future Warranty Extension CSPs will follow these claiming instructions; only those vehicles outside the New Vehicle Warranty Coverage will be submitted as a CSP type repair. OWNER REFUNDS Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid repairs made on or before the last day of the month of the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair was made away from the servicing dealer). Failure of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460) will not have an impact on any other component of the vehicle. Therefore, refunds will only be granted for the replacement of the EGR Pressure Sensor (9J460). All supporting documentation must be retained in accordance with the Warranty and Policy Manual. Refer to ACESII manual for refund information. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. Attachment II - Labor Allowances and Parts Ordering Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 4195 LABOR ALLOWANCES [NEW] NOTE: If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service Support Center. Special Notes: ^ 02M01C labor operation is in effect for repairs performed on or after 10/27/03. ^ Diagnostics performed beyond retrieving continuous DTC will not be paid for under this program. ^ Pinpoint diagnostics are not required to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor; therefore labor time has been adjusted accordingly. ^ Due to the use of specific DTCs to identify a failed EGR Pressure Sensor, this program will not cover any other continuous DTCs; normal vehicle warranty would apply for any other DTCs. ^ There will be no related damage claims allowed for this program. PARTS REQUIREMENTS Parts will not be direct shipped for this program. Order your parts requirement through normal order processing. PARTS REQUIREMENTS/ORDERING INFORMATION NOTE: If service is requested on a dash mounted EGR pressure sensor (during the extended warranty coverage period) on a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine, call the Special Service Support Center. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 4196 DEALER PRICE For latest prices, check DOES II or updated price book. PARTS RETENTION Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures." EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE: If a 2002 Focus equipped with a 2.0L Zetec engine and a dash-mounted EGR pressure sensor is encountered, call the Special Service Support Center. 1. Retrieve continuous DTCs. NOTE: Replace the EGR pressure sensor only if one or more of the following continuous DTCs are present: ^ P1400 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE DETECTED ^ P1401 - DPF EGR SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE DETECTED ^ P0401- EGR FLOW INSUFFICIENT DETECTED ^ P0402- EGR FLOW EXCESSIVE DETECTED Any other DTC present is not covered by this program. 2. If one or more of the DTCs listed above is present, replace the EGR pressure sensor (9J460) as follows: a) Key off. b) Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the EGR pressure sensor from the EGR tube. c) Install the new EGR pressure sensor onto the EGR tube and connect the electrical connector. Note: Refer to Section 303-08 of the appropriate workshop manual if additional information is required. 3. Clear continuous DTCs. 4. Perform KOEO and KOER self tests. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 4197 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 4198 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02M01S6 > Aug > 04 > Recall - Tube Mounted EGR Pressure Sensor Defect > Page 4199 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set Article No. 04-11-1 06/08/2004 DRIVEABILITY - STREAMLINED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR VEHICLES WITH MIL ON AND DTCS P0401, P0402, P1400 OR P1401 - ADDITIONAL SYMPTOMS MAY INCLUDE RUNS ROUGH, LACKS POWER, SURGE, POOR FUEL ECONOMY FORD: 2000-2002 TAURUS 2001-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, FOCUS, MUSTANG 2001 EXPLORER USPS 2001-2002 E SERIES, ESCAPE, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 2002-2003 EXPLORER LINCOLN: 2001-2002 TOWN CAR MERCURY: 2000-2002 SABLE 2001-2002 COUGAR, GRAND MARQUIS 2002-2003 MOUNTAINEER This article supersedes TSB 04-3-1 to update service part information and applications. ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) "ON" with or without the following symptoms: Rough Running, Lack of Power, Surge or Poor Fuel Economy, along with diagnostic trouble codes (DTC's) P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401. This may be caused by an intermittently functioning tube-mounted delta pressure feedback EGR (DPFE) sensor (Figure 1). ACTION For vehicles equipped with a tube-mounted DPFE sensor, perform the following diagnostic procedure and repair action. This procedure supersedes the diagnostic procedure in the PC/ED Manual for the issue described above. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 4204 NOTE ALL LISTED APPLICATIONS CAN NOW BE SERVICED WITH DPFE SENSOR 4U7Z-9J460-AA NOTE THIS ARTICLE APPLIES TO THE FULL MODEL YEAR FOR ALL VEHICLES SHOWN EXCEPT THE FOLLOWING: ^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L DOHC - Built After May 2002 ^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L OHV - Built After February 2002 ^ 2002 Econoline And F-150 4.2L OHV - Built After April 9, 2002 ^ 2003 Explorer 4dr/Mountaineer 4.6L SOHC - Built After February 2, 2003 SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Retrieve continuous DTC(s). 2. If P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401 are present, turn ignition OFF and replace the DPFE sensor. 3. Clear continuous DTC(s). 4. Perform key on engine off (KOEO) and key on engine running (KOER) self-test. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 4205 Labor Operations Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9J460 42 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 04-11-1 > Jun > 04 > Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set > Page 4206 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/Driveability Issues/DTC's Set Article No. 04-11-1 06/08/2004 DRIVEABILITY - STREAMLINED DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR VEHICLES WITH MIL ON AND DTCS P0401, P0402, P1400 OR P1401 - ADDITIONAL SYMPTOMS MAY INCLUDE RUNS ROUGH, LACKS POWER, SURGE, POOR FUEL ECONOMY FORD: 2000-2002 TAURUS 2001-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, FOCUS, MUSTANG 2001 EXPLORER USPS 2001-2002 E SERIES, ESCAPE, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 2002-2003 EXPLORER LINCOLN: 2001-2002 TOWN CAR MERCURY: 2000-2002 SABLE 2001-2002 COUGAR, GRAND MARQUIS 2002-2003 MOUNTAINEER This article supersedes TSB 04-3-1 to update service part information and applications. ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) "ON" with or without the following symptoms: Rough Running, Lack of Power, Surge or Poor Fuel Economy, along with diagnostic trouble codes (DTC's) P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401. This may be caused by an intermittently functioning tube-mounted delta pressure feedback EGR (DPFE) sensor (Figure 1). ACTION For vehicles equipped with a tube-mounted DPFE sensor, perform the following diagnostic procedure and repair action. This procedure supersedes the diagnostic procedure in the PC/ED Manual for the issue described above. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored > Page 4212 NOTE ALL LISTED APPLICATIONS CAN NOW BE SERVICED WITH DPFE SENSOR 4U7Z-9J460-AA NOTE THIS ARTICLE APPLIES TO THE FULL MODEL YEAR FOR ALL VEHICLES SHOWN EXCEPT THE FOLLOWING: ^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L DOHC - Built After May 2002 ^ 2002 Taurus/Sable 3.0L OHV - Built After February 2002 ^ 2002 Econoline And F-150 4.2L OHV - Built After April 9, 2002 ^ 2003 Explorer 4dr/Mountaineer 4.6L SOHC - Built After February 2, 2003 SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Retrieve continuous DTC(s). 2. If P0401, P0402, P1400 or P1401 are present, turn ignition OFF and replace the DPFE sensor. 3. Clear continuous DTC(s). 4. Perform key on engine off (KOEO) and key on engine running (KOER) self-test. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored > Page 4213 Labor Operations Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9J460 42 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored > Page 4214 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4215 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4216 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 86) is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback sensor receives this signal through two hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the aluminum differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4217 Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 87) is identical in operation as the larger metal or plastic DPFE sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the underside of the sensor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4218 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor by sliding up and off the EGR tube. NOTE: The 3.0L (4V) engine is shown, the 2.0L Zetec engine is similar. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation PRESSURE TEST POINT There is a pressure test point with a schrader fitting in the fuel rail that relieves fuel pressure and measures the fuel injector supply pressure for service and diagnostic procedures. Before servicing or testing the fuel system, read any CAUTION, WARNING, and HANDLING information. ON VEHICLES NOT EQUIPPED WITH A SCHRADER VALVE, USE ROTUNDA FUEL PRESSURE TEST KIT #134-ROO87 OR EQUIVALENT. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve Eliminated Fuel Pressure Release: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve Eliminated Article No. 02-21-2 10/28/02 FUEL - FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE DISCONTINUED - 2.0L ENGINE FORD: 2000-2002 FOCUS 2001-2002 ESCORT ZX2, ESCAPE MERCURY: 1999-2002 COUGAR ISSUE Vehicles equipped with the 2.0L 4V Zetec and the 2.0L SPI no longer have the Fuel Pressure Relief Valve (Schrader Valve). ACTION To relieve or manually check fuel pressures, refer to the following Service Procedures for details. SERVICE PROCEDURE Service Procedure For Relieving Fuel Pressure 1. Remove the fuel pump relay in the engine compartment fuse box. 2. Start the engine and allow idling until the engine stalls. 3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately five seconds to ensure the fuel injection supply manifold pressure has been released. 4. When fuel system service is complete, Install Fuel Pump Relay. 5. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting engine. NOTE IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM. 6. Start vehicle and check for leaks. NOTE IT IS POSSIBLE THAT A DTC MAY BE SET DUE TO THE PUMP RELAY BEING PULLED AND THE ENGINE STARTED AND RUN OUT OF FUEL. IF DTC'S ARE SET, CLEAR ALL DTC'S BEFORE RETURNING VEHICLE TO THE CUSTOMER. Service Procedure For Manually Checking Fuel Pressure With A Gauge. 1. Remove the fuel pump relay in the engine compartment fuse box. 2. Start the engine and allow idling until the engine stalls. 3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately five seconds to make sure the fuel injection supply manifold pressure has been released. 4. Disconnect fuel line at the fuel rail to chassis line pierce point. a. If the vehicle is equipped with Quick Release Coupling Push Connector at the fuel rail to fuel line pierce point, separate the coupling by depressing the tabs and pulling on the fuel line. b. If the vehicle is equipped with a Spring Lock Coupling Connector using special tool 310-D00S or equivalent 5. Install the Schrader Valve service tool adaptor listed in the chart in this article. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve Eliminated > Page 4228 6. Install fuel pressure gauge special service tool 310-012 or equivalent. 7. Install fuel pump relay. 8. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for oaks before starting engine. NOTE IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM. 9. Start and run engine to surge air from fuel system (air trapped in the fuel system may effect test results). 10. Perform normal diagnosti35 ann service repairs as needed. 11. After fuel system service is complete, relieve fuel system pressure using fuel pressure gauge relief valve. 12. Remove special service tools 13. Re-connect fuel system lines 14. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting engine. NOTE IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM. 15. Start vehicle and check for leaks. NOTE IT IS POSSIBLE THAT A DTC MAY BE SET DUE TO THE PUMP RELAY BEING PULLED AND THE ENGINE STARTED AND RUN OUT OF FUEL. IF DTC'S ARE SET, CLEAR ALL DTC'S BEFORE RETURNING VEHICLE TO THE CUSTOMER. Service Tools Required Chart OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 404000, 490000, 497000, 499000, 603300, 607000, 698298 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4229 Fuel Pressure Release: Service Precautions WARNING: ^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4230 Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair 1. Remove the LH engine compartment relay panel cover. WARNING: ^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. NOTE: Before disconnecting any fuel tube, release the fuel pressure from the fuel system. 2. Remove the fuel pump relay. 3. Start the engine. 4. After the engine stalls, crank the engine over two more times to be sure all the pressure has been released. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. Install the fuel pump relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4231 Fuel Pressure Gauge Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Hot Idle ................................................................................................................................................ ......................................................... 800 - 900 RPM Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4238 Accelerator Pedal: Service Precautions WARNING: MAKE SURE SURROUNDING COMPONENTS SUCH AS WIRING, HOSES, SOUND INSULATION AND FLOOR CARPETING ARE NOT CONTACTING THE SLIDING INNER CABLE OF THE ACCELERATOR CABLE OR THE ACCELERATOR PEDAL AND SHAFT. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. CAUTION: Do not pull the accelerator cable out by the cable housing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4239 Accelerator Pedal: Description and Operation The acceleration control consists of the pedal and shaft assembly, accelerator cable and accelerator cable bracket. WARNING: MAKE SURE SURROUNDING COMPONENTS SUCH AS WIRING, HOSES, SOUND INSULATION AND FLOOR CARPETING ARE NOT CONTACTING THE SLIDING INNER CABLE OF THE ACCELERATOR CABLE OR THE ACCELERATOR PEDAL AND SHAFT. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. The throttle is controlled by an accelerator cable attached to the accelerator pedal and shaft. The accelerator pedal and shaft should travel smoothly from the idle to the wide-open throttle positions. Hesitation on return or prevention of return to the idle position must not occur. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Accelerator Pedal: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Verify the condition by operating the accelerator pedal and shaft from idle to wide open-throttle and back again. Check for any resistance in forward travel of the accelerator pedal and shaft or hesitation on return. If a concern exists, visually inspect all components of the accelerator pedal and shaft. Look for damage or binding of the accelerator cable. Look for obstructions at the throttle body and accelerator pedal and shaft. For vehicles equipped with speed control, examine the speed control cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4242 Accelerator Pedal: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Symptom Chart, Part 1 Symptom Chart, Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4243 Accelerator Pedal: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the accelerator cable from the throttle lever and bracket. 2. Remove the accelerator pedal and shaft assembly. 1 Disconnect the accelerator cable. 2 Remove the bolts. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. NOTE: To ease installation, remove the grommet from the throttle lever and install it onto the accelerator cable end. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Remove the battery tray. 3. Remove the bolt and the intake pipe. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. NOTE: Make sure the front sponge seal of the intake pipe is seated on the shroud panel correctly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations > Page 4251 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations > Page 4252 Mass Air Flow Sensor: Description and Operation MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire (Figure 36). If the hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the air mass flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio (Figure 37). This input is also used in determining transmission Electronic Pressure Control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling. Some MAF sensors have Integrated Bypass Technology (IBT) with an integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor. The present applications with IBT are: Focus, Escort (4V), 2.0L Cougar, Escape, Taurus/Sable, Windstar, Explorer/Mountaineer and E-Series. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations > Page 4253 Mass Air Flow Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube. 2. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the four nuts and the MAF sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Cap: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON Fuel Filler Cap: Customer Interest Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON Article No. 03-20-3 10/13/03 DRIVEABILITY - MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ILLUMINATED WITH DTC'S P0442, P0455, P0456, P0457, P1442 OR CHECK FUEL CAP LAMP ILLUMINATED WITH DTC P0457 FORD: 1997-2000 CONTOUR 1997-2002 ESCORT 1997-2003 CROWN VICTORIA, MUSTANG, TAURUS 1998-2003 ESCORT ZX2 2000-2003 FOCUS 2002-2003 THUNDERBIRD 1997 F-250 HD 1997-1999 F-250 LD 1997-2003 E SERIES, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 1999-2003 F SUPER DUTY 2000-2003 EXCURSION 2001-2003 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT LINCOLN: 1997-1998 MARK VIII 1997-2002 CONTINENTAL 1997-2003 TOWN CAR 2000-2003 LS 1998-2003 NAVIGATOR 2002-2003 BLACKWOOD MERCURY: 1997-1999 TRACER 1997-2000 MYSTIQUE 1997-2003 GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE 1999-2002 COUGAR 1997-2003 MOUNTAINEER This article supersedes TSB 03-9-8 to update the vehicle lines and Service Procedures. ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illuminated with Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) P0442, P0455, P0456, P0457 or P1442 or a "Check Fuel Cap" Lamp illuminated with DTC P0457 for the Evaporative Emission System. This may be caused by loose or leaking hoses, loose or broken fuel cap, a leak at the top of the fuel filler pipe neck, etc. ACTION Use the Rotunda Leak Detector Smoke Machine (Part 218-00001) or equivalent, to locate and repair leaks in the Evaporative Emission System. Refer to the following Service Procedure for details. Definitions of Acronyms ^ CVS Canister Vent Solenoid ^ DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code ^ EVAP Evaporative Emissions System ^ EVMV Electronic Vapor Management Valve ^ FTP Fuel Tank Pressure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Cap: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4262 ^ MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp ^ NGS New Generation STAR Tester ^ PID Parameter Identifier WDS Worldwide Diagnostic System SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE THIS PROCEDURE SUPERSEDES ALL OTHER PROCEDURES PUBLISHED IN SERVICE MANUALS AND TSB ARTICLES. NOTE MANY EVAP LEAKS ARE CAUSED BY A LOOSE OR FAULTY CAP. IF THE FUEL CAP IS SUSPECT DURING VISUAL INSPECTION, DO NOT DISTURB THE FUEL CAP UNTIL THE DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE IS COMPLETE. IF THE LEAK VERIFICATION FAILS, THE CAP CAN BE REPOSITIONED OR REPLACED AND THE TEST REPEATED. THIS ACTION WILL ISOLATE THE CAP FROM THE REST OF THE EVAP SYSTEM AS A POTENTIAL CONCERN. IF DEBRIS ON THE SEALING SURFACE OF THE CAP APPEARS TO BE THE SOURCE OF THE LEAK, CLEAN THE CAP AND REINSTALL. OVERVIEW OF TEST PROCEDURES Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Cap: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4263 NOTE SEE (FIGURE 1) AT END OF ARTICLE FOR TEST PROCEDURE FLOWCHART. This TSB provides the following procedures: ^ Check the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (9C915) for a no flow condition ^ Locate a leak so that a repair can be performed Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Cap: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4264 ^ Verify repair by utilizing a metered air pressure test EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE NO FLOW TEST 1. Using WDS Datalogger select the following PID's: EVAPVM # (or EVMV#), EVAPCV # and FTP. 2. Start the vehicle. 3. Close both the Canister Vent Solenoid (CVS) (EVAPCV # On or 100% duty cycle) and the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (EVAPVM# Off or zero % duty cycle). 4. While monitoring the FTP PID, command open the EVAP Canister Purge Valve with the EVAPVM# PID to 100% duty 5. If the FTP decreases and/or the RPM changes and/or the engine stalls, the test passed. Turn off engine and proceed to test procedures below. Otherwise replace the EVAP Canister Purge Valve, verify the repair by repeating the No Flow Test and return vehicle. SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE) 1. Disconnect the larger of two manifold vacuum lines at the EVAP Canister Purge Valve and cap it at the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (see Figure 2). 2. Connect the Smoke Machine power cables to vehicle battery The "Power Indicator Lamp" should be on indicating a good battery contact. 3. Position the selector valve on Rotunda's Smoke Machine Control Panel to "SMOKE". 4. Locate the vehicle's Evaporative Emission Service Test Port and remove the green cap. The EVAP Service Test Port is located close to or on the EVAP Canister Purge Valve. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Cap: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4265 WARNING DO NOT REMOVE THE SCHRADER VALVE. REMOVING THE SCHRADER VALVE FROM THE TEST PORT ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH THE ELECTRONIC VAPOR MANAGEMENT VALVE (9G641) AND/OR ELECTRONIC VAPOR MANAGEMENT VALVE & BRACKET ASSEMBLY (9G683) (SEE FIGURE 3), OR EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE (9C915) AND/OR EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE & BRACKET ASSEMBLY (9F933) (SEE FIGURE 2) WILL PERMANENTLY DAMAGE THE VALVE. 5. Install the EVAP Emission Test Port Adapter that is provided with the Rotunda's Smoke Machine to EVAP Canister Purge Valve test port. NOTE SPECIAL PROCEDURES HAVE BEEN DESIGNATED FOR WINDSTAR, LS, THUNDERBIRD & PZEV FOCUS BECAUSE THEY HAVE A CHECK VALVE THAT WILL PREVENT SMOKE FROM ENTERING THE FILLER NECK. 6. Connect black smoke hose nozzle tip to the EVAP Emission Test Port Adapter. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus Use NGS or WDS to close CVS. (CVS WILL REOPEN AFTER NINE (9) MINUTES OF CONTINUOUS OPERATION). 7. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus - Remove the fuel cap from the vehicle. Depress remote starter button: Smoke will be introduced into the EVAP Emission System. Secure the fuel cap once smoke is seen exiting from the fuel tank's neck area. For Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus, do not remove fuel cap. Depress starter button and introduce smoke to system until it can be seen exiting the CVS (located by filler neck). Once smoke is seen, use NGS or WDS to close CVS. (CVS WILL REOPEN AFTER NINE (9) MINUTES OF CONTINUOUS OPERATION). 8. Press and release the remote starter button in intervals of approximately 15 seconds on and 15 seconds off. Use the halogen light provided with the Smoke Machine to look for smoke in the engine compartment, EVAP hoses to EVAP Canister Purge Valve, CVS, carbon canister and area around the fuel cap. Wiggle fuel vapor lines to check for leaks. Check for leaks in areas that are difficult to access, such as connections on top of the tank where connections may be or inside frame rails. Use the black light to ensure that there are no leaks. If a leak is detected, repair as necessary. If the leak is not detected from the top, check under the bottom of vehicle. Inspect the EVAP hoses running to the carbon canister, fuel filler neck, CVS, and EVAP Canister Purge Valve. Go to LEAK VERIFICATION to verify any repair or if no leak is found. LEAK VERIFICATION (METERED AIR SYSTEM) 1. Position the selector valve located on the Smoke Machine control panel to "METER". 2. Verify calibration of the flow meter by using the .020" calibrated leak orifice. To do this, insert air supply hose (transparent hose) nozzle tip into appropriate EVAP System calibrated leak orifice located on the front of the Smoke Machine panel. 3. TURN ON: Depress the remote starter button. Observe the position of the flow meter indicator ball. Position the flow meter red pointer flag so it aligns with the measurement of the indicator ball. Release the button and remove the air supply hose nozzle tip from the EVAP System calibrated leak orifice. NOTE THIS FLOW METER CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT INDICATES THE VEHICLE PASS OR FAIL CRITERIA BASED ON THE .020" EVAP SYSTEM LEAK STANDARD. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Cap: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4266 4. Connect the transparent air supply hose nozzle tip into the EVAP Service Test Port adapter. 5. Use NGS or WDS Diagnostic tool to CLOSE the CVS. 6. Depress the remote starter button on the Rotunda's Smoke Leak Detector. The indicator ball in the flowmeter will go all the way to the top indicating the system is being pressurized. Continue to depress the remote starter button until the ball stops descending. Once the indicator ball has stopped descending, observe if it is above or below the red indicator flag. If performing this verification following a repair, go to Step 7. If performing this verification after performing the SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE), go to Step 8. 7. Leak Verification After Repair a. If the measurement is below the indicator flag the system has passed. The test procedure is complete. Remove the Smoke Machine Test equipment from the vehicle and reconnect the large EVAP Canister Purge Valve manifold vacuum hose and the test port's green cap. b. If the measurement is above the indicator flag, repeat SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE). 8. Leak Verification After Passing SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE) a. If the measurement is below the indicator flag the system has passed, go to Step 9. b. If the measurement is above the indicator flag, repeat SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE). 9. Using WDS Datalogger or NGS select the FTPV PID. 10. Remove Fuel Cap and turn the vehicle's ignition switch to the run position and check the FTPV PID. 11. The nominal value for the FTPV PID is 2.6V. If the value is greater than 2.8V or less than 2.4V, the FTP sensor is out of range and should be replaced. Verify the repair by checking to see if the new sensor is in range. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus - if the sensor is within range, the concern is no longer present. (Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus go to Step 12.) 12. For Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus only verify that filler neck clamps are in good working order and tightened. Repair as necessary. If no problem is found with clamps, replace the fuel cap. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 03-9-8 WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Cap: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON Fuel Filler Cap: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON Article No. 03-20-3 10/13/03 DRIVEABILITY - MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ILLUMINATED WITH DTC'S P0442, P0455, P0456, P0457, P1442 OR CHECK FUEL CAP LAMP ILLUMINATED WITH DTC P0457 FORD: 1997-2000 CONTOUR 1997-2002 ESCORT 1997-2003 CROWN VICTORIA, MUSTANG, TAURUS 1998-2003 ESCORT ZX2 2000-2003 FOCUS 2002-2003 THUNDERBIRD 1997 F-250 HD 1997-1999 F-250 LD 1997-2003 E SERIES, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 1999-2003 F SUPER DUTY 2000-2003 EXCURSION 2001-2003 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT LINCOLN: 1997-1998 MARK VIII 1997-2002 CONTINENTAL 1997-2003 TOWN CAR 2000-2003 LS 1998-2003 NAVIGATOR 2002-2003 BLACKWOOD MERCURY: 1997-1999 TRACER 1997-2000 MYSTIQUE 1997-2003 GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE 1999-2002 COUGAR 1997-2003 MOUNTAINEER This article supersedes TSB 03-9-8 to update the vehicle lines and Service Procedures. ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illuminated with Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) P0442, P0455, P0456, P0457 or P1442 or a "Check Fuel Cap" Lamp illuminated with DTC P0457 for the Evaporative Emission System. This may be caused by loose or leaking hoses, loose or broken fuel cap, a leak at the top of the fuel filler pipe neck, etc. ACTION Use the Rotunda Leak Detector Smoke Machine (Part 218-00001) or equivalent, to locate and repair leaks in the Evaporative Emission System. Refer to the following Service Procedure for details. Definitions of Acronyms ^ CVS Canister Vent Solenoid ^ DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code ^ EVAP Evaporative Emissions System ^ EVMV Electronic Vapor Management Valve ^ FTP Fuel Tank Pressure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Cap: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4272 ^ MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp ^ NGS New Generation STAR Tester ^ PID Parameter Identifier WDS Worldwide Diagnostic System SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE THIS PROCEDURE SUPERSEDES ALL OTHER PROCEDURES PUBLISHED IN SERVICE MANUALS AND TSB ARTICLES. NOTE MANY EVAP LEAKS ARE CAUSED BY A LOOSE OR FAULTY CAP. IF THE FUEL CAP IS SUSPECT DURING VISUAL INSPECTION, DO NOT DISTURB THE FUEL CAP UNTIL THE DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE IS COMPLETE. IF THE LEAK VERIFICATION FAILS, THE CAP CAN BE REPOSITIONED OR REPLACED AND THE TEST REPEATED. THIS ACTION WILL ISOLATE THE CAP FROM THE REST OF THE EVAP SYSTEM AS A POTENTIAL CONCERN. IF DEBRIS ON THE SEALING SURFACE OF THE CAP APPEARS TO BE THE SOURCE OF THE LEAK, CLEAN THE CAP AND REINSTALL. OVERVIEW OF TEST PROCEDURES Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Cap: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4273 NOTE SEE (FIGURE 1) AT END OF ARTICLE FOR TEST PROCEDURE FLOWCHART. This TSB provides the following procedures: ^ Check the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (9C915) for a no flow condition ^ Locate a leak so that a repair can be performed Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Cap: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4274 ^ Verify repair by utilizing a metered air pressure test EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE NO FLOW TEST 1. Using WDS Datalogger select the following PID's: EVAPVM # (or EVMV#), EVAPCV # and FTP. 2. Start the vehicle. 3. Close both the Canister Vent Solenoid (CVS) (EVAPCV # On or 100% duty cycle) and the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (EVAPVM# Off or zero % duty cycle). 4. While monitoring the FTP PID, command open the EVAP Canister Purge Valve with the EVAPVM# PID to 100% duty 5. If the FTP decreases and/or the RPM changes and/or the engine stalls, the test passed. Turn off engine and proceed to test procedures below. Otherwise replace the EVAP Canister Purge Valve, verify the repair by repeating the No Flow Test and return vehicle. SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE) 1. Disconnect the larger of two manifold vacuum lines at the EVAP Canister Purge Valve and cap it at the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (see Figure 2). 2. Connect the Smoke Machine power cables to vehicle battery The "Power Indicator Lamp" should be on indicating a good battery contact. 3. Position the selector valve on Rotunda's Smoke Machine Control Panel to "SMOKE". 4. Locate the vehicle's Evaporative Emission Service Test Port and remove the green cap. The EVAP Service Test Port is located close to or on the EVAP Canister Purge Valve. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Cap: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4275 WARNING DO NOT REMOVE THE SCHRADER VALVE. REMOVING THE SCHRADER VALVE FROM THE TEST PORT ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH THE ELECTRONIC VAPOR MANAGEMENT VALVE (9G641) AND/OR ELECTRONIC VAPOR MANAGEMENT VALVE & BRACKET ASSEMBLY (9G683) (SEE FIGURE 3), OR EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE (9C915) AND/OR EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE & BRACKET ASSEMBLY (9F933) (SEE FIGURE 2) WILL PERMANENTLY DAMAGE THE VALVE. 5. Install the EVAP Emission Test Port Adapter that is provided with the Rotunda's Smoke Machine to EVAP Canister Purge Valve test port. NOTE SPECIAL PROCEDURES HAVE BEEN DESIGNATED FOR WINDSTAR, LS, THUNDERBIRD & PZEV FOCUS BECAUSE THEY HAVE A CHECK VALVE THAT WILL PREVENT SMOKE FROM ENTERING THE FILLER NECK. 6. Connect black smoke hose nozzle tip to the EVAP Emission Test Port Adapter. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus Use NGS or WDS to close CVS. (CVS WILL REOPEN AFTER NINE (9) MINUTES OF CONTINUOUS OPERATION). 7. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus - Remove the fuel cap from the vehicle. Depress remote starter button: Smoke will be introduced into the EVAP Emission System. Secure the fuel cap once smoke is seen exiting from the fuel tank's neck area. For Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus, do not remove fuel cap. Depress starter button and introduce smoke to system until it can be seen exiting the CVS (located by filler neck). Once smoke is seen, use NGS or WDS to close CVS. (CVS WILL REOPEN AFTER NINE (9) MINUTES OF CONTINUOUS OPERATION). 8. Press and release the remote starter button in intervals of approximately 15 seconds on and 15 seconds off. Use the halogen light provided with the Smoke Machine to look for smoke in the engine compartment, EVAP hoses to EVAP Canister Purge Valve, CVS, carbon canister and area around the fuel cap. Wiggle fuel vapor lines to check for leaks. Check for leaks in areas that are difficult to access, such as connections on top of the tank where connections may be or inside frame rails. Use the black light to ensure that there are no leaks. If a leak is detected, repair as necessary. If the leak is not detected from the top, check under the bottom of vehicle. Inspect the EVAP hoses running to the carbon canister, fuel filler neck, CVS, and EVAP Canister Purge Valve. Go to LEAK VERIFICATION to verify any repair or if no leak is found. LEAK VERIFICATION (METERED AIR SYSTEM) 1. Position the selector valve located on the Smoke Machine control panel to "METER". 2. Verify calibration of the flow meter by using the .020" calibrated leak orifice. To do this, insert air supply hose (transparent hose) nozzle tip into appropriate EVAP System calibrated leak orifice located on the front of the Smoke Machine panel. 3. TURN ON: Depress the remote starter button. Observe the position of the flow meter indicator ball. Position the flow meter red pointer flag so it aligns with the measurement of the indicator ball. Release the button and remove the air supply hose nozzle tip from the EVAP System calibrated leak orifice. NOTE THIS FLOW METER CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT INDICATES THE VEHICLE PASS OR FAIL CRITERIA BASED ON THE .020" EVAP SYSTEM LEAK STANDARD. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Cap: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4276 4. Connect the transparent air supply hose nozzle tip into the EVAP Service Test Port adapter. 5. Use NGS or WDS Diagnostic tool to CLOSE the CVS. 6. Depress the remote starter button on the Rotunda's Smoke Leak Detector. The indicator ball in the flowmeter will go all the way to the top indicating the system is being pressurized. Continue to depress the remote starter button until the ball stops descending. Once the indicator ball has stopped descending, observe if it is above or below the red indicator flag. If performing this verification following a repair, go to Step 7. If performing this verification after performing the SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE), go to Step 8. 7. Leak Verification After Repair a. If the measurement is below the indicator flag the system has passed. The test procedure is complete. Remove the Smoke Machine Test equipment from the vehicle and reconnect the large EVAP Canister Purge Valve manifold vacuum hose and the test port's green cap. b. If the measurement is above the indicator flag, repeat SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE). 8. Leak Verification After Passing SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE) a. If the measurement is below the indicator flag the system has passed, go to Step 9. b. If the measurement is above the indicator flag, repeat SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE). 9. Using WDS Datalogger or NGS select the FTPV PID. 10. Remove Fuel Cap and turn the vehicle's ignition switch to the run position and check the FTPV PID. 11. The nominal value for the FTPV PID is 2.6V. If the value is greater than 2.8V or less than 2.4V, the FTP sensor is out of range and should be replaced. Verify the repair by checking to see if the new sensor is in range. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus - if the sensor is within range, the concern is no longer present. (Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus go to Step 12.) 12. For Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus only verify that filler neck clamps are in good working order and tightened. Repair as necessary. If no problem is found with clamps, replace the fuel cap. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 03-9-8 WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4277 Fuel Filler Cap: Description and Operation FUEL FILLER CAP Fuel Filler Cap The fuel filler cap (Figure 100) is used to prevent fuel spill and close the evaporative emission/fuel system to atmosphere. Some vehicles may have a Fuel Cap Off Indicator Lamp (FCIL) in the instrument cluster which will illuminate when there is a failure in the vapor management system that may be due to the fuel filler cap not being sealed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve Eliminated Fuel Pressure Release: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve Eliminated Article No. 02-21-2 10/28/02 FUEL - FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE DISCONTINUED - 2.0L ENGINE FORD: 2000-2002 FOCUS 2001-2002 ESCORT ZX2, ESCAPE MERCURY: 1999-2002 COUGAR ISSUE Vehicles equipped with the 2.0L 4V Zetec and the 2.0L SPI no longer have the Fuel Pressure Relief Valve (Schrader Valve). ACTION To relieve or manually check fuel pressures, refer to the following Service Procedures for details. SERVICE PROCEDURE Service Procedure For Relieving Fuel Pressure 1. Remove the fuel pump relay in the engine compartment fuse box. 2. Start the engine and allow idling until the engine stalls. 3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately five seconds to ensure the fuel injection supply manifold pressure has been released. 4. When fuel system service is complete, Install Fuel Pump Relay. 5. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting engine. NOTE IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM. 6. Start vehicle and check for leaks. NOTE IT IS POSSIBLE THAT A DTC MAY BE SET DUE TO THE PUMP RELAY BEING PULLED AND THE ENGINE STARTED AND RUN OUT OF FUEL. IF DTC'S ARE SET, CLEAR ALL DTC'S BEFORE RETURNING VEHICLE TO THE CUSTOMER. Service Procedure For Manually Checking Fuel Pressure With A Gauge. 1. Remove the fuel pump relay in the engine compartment fuse box. 2. Start the engine and allow idling until the engine stalls. 3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately five seconds to make sure the fuel injection supply manifold pressure has been released. 4. Disconnect fuel line at the fuel rail to chassis line pierce point. a. If the vehicle is equipped with Quick Release Coupling Push Connector at the fuel rail to fuel line pierce point, separate the coupling by depressing the tabs and pulling on the fuel line. b. If the vehicle is equipped with a Spring Lock Coupling Connector using special tool 310-D00S or equivalent 5. Install the Schrader Valve service tool adaptor listed in the chart in this article. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Fuel Pressure Relief Valve Eliminated > Page 4283 6. Install fuel pressure gauge special service tool 310-012 or equivalent. 7. Install fuel pump relay. 8. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for oaks before starting engine. NOTE IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM. 9. Start and run engine to surge air from fuel system (air trapped in the fuel system may effect test results). 10. Perform normal diagnosti35 ann service repairs as needed. 11. After fuel system service is complete, relieve fuel system pressure using fuel pressure gauge relief valve. 12. Remove special service tools 13. Re-connect fuel system lines 14. Cycle key and wait 3 seconds to re-pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting engine. NOTE IT MAY TAKE MORE THAN ONE KEY CYCLE TO RE-PRESSURIZE THE FUEL SYSTEM. 15. Start vehicle and check for leaks. NOTE IT IS POSSIBLE THAT A DTC MAY BE SET DUE TO THE PUMP RELAY BEING PULLED AND THE ENGINE STARTED AND RUN OUT OF FUEL. IF DTC'S ARE SET, CLEAR ALL DTC'S BEFORE RETURNING VEHICLE TO THE CUSTOMER. Service Tools Required Chart OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 404000, 490000, 497000, 499000, 603300, 607000, 698298 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4284 Fuel Pressure Release: Service Precautions WARNING: ^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4285 Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair 1. Remove the LH engine compartment relay panel cover. WARNING: ^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. NOTE: Before disconnecting any fuel tube, release the fuel pressure from the fuel system. 2. Remove the fuel pump relay. 3. Start the engine. 4. After the engine stalls, crank the engine over two more times to be sure all the pressure has been released. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. Install the fuel pump relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4286 Fuel Pressure Gauge Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Fuel Injector Wiring Harness > Component Information > Service Precautions Fuel Injector Wiring Harness: Service Precautions WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENTS. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Fuel Injector Wiring Harness > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4291 Fuel Injector Wiring Harness: Service and Repair REMOVAL WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENTS. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe. 2. Disconnect the following electrical connectors: 1 cylinder temperature sensor 2 throttle position sensor 3 wiring harness to vehicle 4 idle air control valve 5 camshaft position sensor 6 crankshaft position sensor 7 ignition coil 8 radio ignition noise suppressor 9 fuel injectors 3. Disconnect the wiring harness to vehicle connectors from bracket and remove harness. NOTE: Remove and reinstall new tie straps if necessary. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Line Coupler: > NHTSA00V277001 > Sep > 00 > Recall 00V277001: Fuel Line Connector Seal Leakage Fuel Line Coupler: Recalls Recall 00V277001: Fuel Line Connector Seal Leakage The O-ring seals in the fuel line connector at the outlet end of the fuel filter were damaged when the line was connected to the filter during vehicle assembly. In some cases, this damage could result in a fuel odor, or possibly in fuel dripping from the connection. Fuel leakage, in the presence of an ignition source, could result in a fire. Dealers will inspect and, if necessary, replace the fuel line. Owner notification began September 27, 2000. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon service date and do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673. Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Line Coupler: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect Technical Service Bulletin # 00S27 Date: 000901 Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect 00S27 SAFETY RECALL Certain 2001 Model Year Escape Vehicles - Fuel Line Inspection Dealer Letter Attachment I ^ Administrative Information Attachment II ^ Labor Allowances ^ Parts Ordering Information Attachment III ^ Technical Information Attachment IV ^ Escape Special Handling Letter Customer Notification Letter Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Line Coupler: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4304 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Line Coupler: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4305 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this recall. PROMPTLY CORRECT Promptly correct all affected vehicles on your dealer VIN list which you will receive in the Ford Dealer Consolidated Communicator (FDCC). Also, correct other eligible vehicles that are brought to your dealership. DEALER-OWNER CONTACT Immediately contact any affected owner whose name is not on the list. Give the owner a copy of the Owner Letter and schedule a service date. REGIONAL CONTACT Advise regional office if an owner: ^ cannot be contacted. ^ does not make a service date. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using DWE. ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. OWNER REFUNDS Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid fuel line repairs made before the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair was made away from the servicing dealer). Refer to ACESII manual for refund information. RENTAL CARS Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except for fuel, which will be at the customer's expense. Enter the word "LOANER" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area. See "Escape Special Handling Procedure", Attachment IV. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information PARTS REQUIREMENTS Parts Ordering Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Line Coupler: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4306 Of the total population of approximately 12,000 vehicles subject to inspection, potentially 120 units (1%) are expected to require fuel line replacement. Dealers must call the Recall Hotline at 1-800-325-5621 when repairs are required. DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to: ^ DOES II ^ Updated Price Book EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information ESCAPE FUEL LINE INSPECTION INSPECTION 1. Turn the ignition key to the ON position without starting the engine. 2. Raise and support the vehicle on a hoist. 3. Locate the fuel line at the filter outlet near the fuel tank. 4. Grasp the fuel line near the filter outlet tube and wiggle it gently. Check the filter outlet connector for leakage within 30 seconds. See Figure 1. 5. If no leak is present, no further action is required. Lower and release the vehicle. 6. If a leak appears within 30 seconds, the fuel line assembly must be replaced. Proceed to the Replacement procedure in this Attachment III. REPLACEMENT NOTE: A single fuel line has been released for this program. The entire fuel line bundle is not to be replaced during this service. 1. A single fuel line has been released for this program. The entire fuel line bundle is not to be replaced during this service. 2. Install a memory saver. Open the hood, disconnect the battery negative cable, then relieve fuel system pressure. 3. Access the fuel pump module as follows: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Line Coupler: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4307 a. Open the left rear door. b. Position the seat bench forward. c. Pull back the carpet to expose the fuel pump module access cover. d. Remove the screws and lift the access cover up, then disconnect the two electrical connectors. 4. Disconnect the outboard fuel line (the one closest to the door). See Figure 2. 5. Raise and support the vehicle. 6. Position a drain pan. Remove the bundle retainer, then disconnect the fuel line at the filter and at the supply line. See Figure 3. 7. Remove the line from the vehicle noting the path of the fuel line around other components. 8. Position the new fuel line in the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Line Coupler: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4308 9. Connect the fuel line to the filter outlet tube and the supply line leading forward toward the engine. 10. Install the bundle retainer. 11. Remove the supports and lower the vehicle. 12. Connect the fuel line to the fuel pump module. 13. Connect the two electrical connectors at the fuel pump module. 14. Connect the battery negative cable and remove the memory saver. Turn the key on without starting the engine to pressurize the fuel system and check for leaks around the new fuel line connections. Turn the key off. 15. Reinstall the fuel pump access cover. Position back the carpet and seat, then close the door. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Line Coupler: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4309 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Line Coupler: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4310 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Line Coupler: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4311 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Line Coupler: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4312 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Line Coupler: > NHTSA00V277001 > Sep > 00 > Recall 00V277001: Fuel Line Connector Seal Leakage Fuel Line Coupler: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 00V277001: Fuel Line Connector Seal Leakage The O-ring seals in the fuel line connector at the outlet end of the fuel filter were damaged when the line was connected to the filter during vehicle assembly. In some cases, this damage could result in a fuel odor, or possibly in fuel dripping from the connection. Fuel leakage, in the presence of an ignition source, could result in a fire. Dealers will inspect and, if necessary, replace the fuel line. Owner notification began September 27, 2000. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon service date and do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673. Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Line Coupler: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect Technical Service Bulletin # 00S27 Date: 000901 Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect 00S27 SAFETY RECALL Certain 2001 Model Year Escape Vehicles - Fuel Line Inspection Dealer Letter Attachment I ^ Administrative Information Attachment II ^ Labor Allowances ^ Parts Ordering Information Attachment III ^ Technical Information Attachment IV ^ Escape Special Handling Letter Customer Notification Letter Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Line Coupler: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4322 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Line Coupler: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4323 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this recall. PROMPTLY CORRECT Promptly correct all affected vehicles on your dealer VIN list which you will receive in the Ford Dealer Consolidated Communicator (FDCC). Also, correct other eligible vehicles that are brought to your dealership. DEALER-OWNER CONTACT Immediately contact any affected owner whose name is not on the list. Give the owner a copy of the Owner Letter and schedule a service date. REGIONAL CONTACT Advise regional office if an owner: ^ cannot be contacted. ^ does not make a service date. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using DWE. ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. OWNER REFUNDS Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid fuel line repairs made before the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair was made away from the servicing dealer). Refer to ACESII manual for refund information. RENTAL CARS Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except for fuel, which will be at the customer's expense. Enter the word "LOANER" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area. See "Escape Special Handling Procedure", Attachment IV. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information PARTS REQUIREMENTS Parts Ordering Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Line Coupler: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4324 Of the total population of approximately 12,000 vehicles subject to inspection, potentially 120 units (1%) are expected to require fuel line replacement. Dealers must call the Recall Hotline at 1-800-325-5621 when repairs are required. DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to: ^ DOES II ^ Updated Price Book EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information ESCAPE FUEL LINE INSPECTION INSPECTION 1. Turn the ignition key to the ON position without starting the engine. 2. Raise and support the vehicle on a hoist. 3. Locate the fuel line at the filter outlet near the fuel tank. 4. Grasp the fuel line near the filter outlet tube and wiggle it gently. Check the filter outlet connector for leakage within 30 seconds. See Figure 1. 5. If no leak is present, no further action is required. Lower and release the vehicle. 6. If a leak appears within 30 seconds, the fuel line assembly must be replaced. Proceed to the Replacement procedure in this Attachment III. REPLACEMENT NOTE: A single fuel line has been released for this program. The entire fuel line bundle is not to be replaced during this service. 1. A single fuel line has been released for this program. The entire fuel line bundle is not to be replaced during this service. 2. Install a memory saver. Open the hood, disconnect the battery negative cable, then relieve fuel system pressure. 3. Access the fuel pump module as follows: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Line Coupler: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4325 a. Open the left rear door. b. Position the seat bench forward. c. Pull back the carpet to expose the fuel pump module access cover. d. Remove the screws and lift the access cover up, then disconnect the two electrical connectors. 4. Disconnect the outboard fuel line (the one closest to the door). See Figure 2. 5. Raise and support the vehicle. 6. Position a drain pan. Remove the bundle retainer, then disconnect the fuel line at the filter and at the supply line. See Figure 3. 7. Remove the line from the vehicle noting the path of the fuel line around other components. 8. Position the new fuel line in the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Line Coupler: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4326 9. Connect the fuel line to the filter outlet tube and the supply line leading forward toward the engine. 10. Install the bundle retainer. 11. Remove the supports and lower the vehicle. 12. Connect the fuel line to the fuel pump module. 13. Connect the two electrical connectors at the fuel pump module. 14. Connect the battery negative cable and remove the memory saver. Turn the key on without starting the engine to pressurize the fuel system and check for leaks around the new fuel line connections. Turn the key off. 15. Reinstall the fuel pump access cover. Position back the carpet and seat, then close the door. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Line Coupler: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4327 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Line Coupler: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4328 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Line Coupler: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4329 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Line Coupler: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4330 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Fuel Line Coupler: Technician Safety Information WARNING: ^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ FUEL IN THE FUEL SYSTEM REMAINS UNDER HIGH PRESSURE EVEN WHEN THE ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING. BEFORE REPAIRING OR DISCONNECTING ANY OF THE FUEL LINES OR FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS, THE FUEL PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED TO PREVENT ACCIDENTAL SPRAYING OF FUEL, CAUSING PERSONAL INJURY OR A FIRE HAZARD. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 4333 Fuel Line Coupler: Vehicle Damage Warnings CAUTION: Do not use any tools. The use of tools may cause a deformity in the clip components which may cause fuel leaks. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Push Connect Fittings Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Push Connect Fittings DISCONNECT 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. WARNING: ^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ FUEL IN THE FUEL SYSTEM REMAINS UNDER HIGH PRESSURE EVEN WHEN THE ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING. BEFORE REPAIRING OR DISCONNECTING ANY OF THE FUEL LINES OR FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS, THE FUEL PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED TO PREVENT ACCIDENTAL SPRAYING OF FUEL, CAUSING PERSONAL INJURY OR A FIRE HAZARD. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Separate the coupling. 1 Depress the tabs 2 Separate the coupling. CONNECT 1. Clean and inspect the coupling and the tube for damage. 2. Align the tube to the coupling and push until you hear a click. 3. Pull on the coupling to make sure it is fully engaged. 4. Connect the battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Push Connect Fittings > Page 4336 Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair R-Clip Fittings DISCONNECT WARNING: ^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ FUEL IN THE FUEL SYSTEM REMAINS UNDER HIGH PRESSURE EVEN WHEN THE ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING. BEFORE REPAIRING OR DISCONNECTING ANY OF THE FUEL LINES OR FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS, THE FUEL PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED TO PREVENT ACCIDENTAL SPRAYING OF FUEL, CAUSING PERSONAL INJURY OR A FIRE HAZARD. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. CAUTION: Do not use any tools. The use of tools may cause a deformity in the clip components which may cause fuel leaks. 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Remove the shipping tab by bending downward. 4. Spread the R-clip legs and push the clip into the fitting. 5. Separate the fitting from the tube. CONNECT 1. Clean and inspect the fitting and the tube for damage. Remove any foreign material or obstructions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Push Connect Fittings > Page 4337 2. Insert the R-clip into the fitting. 3. Align the tube and the fitting. 4. Insert the tube in the fitting and push together until a click is heard. 5. Pull on the connection to make sure it is fully engaged. 6. Connect the battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Push Connect Fittings > Page 4338 Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Spring Lock Couplings Fuel Pipe 1/2 Inch Remover SPECIAL TOOL(S) DISCONNECT WARNING: ^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ FUEL IN THE FUEL SYSTEM REMAINS UNDER HIGH PRESSURE EVEN WHEN THE ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING. BEFORE REPAIRING OR DISCONNECTING ANY OF THE FUEL LINES OR FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS, THE FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Remove the fuel line clip. 4. Install the special tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Push Connect Fittings > Page 4339 5. Close and push the special tool into the open side of the cage. 6. Separate the coupling. 7. Remove the special tool. CONNECT 1. Clean and inspect both coupling ends. Install new O-ring seals and garter springs if necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Push Connect Fittings > Page 4340 2. Fit the male coupling into the female end and push until the garter spring snaps over the flared end of the female coupling. 3. Verify coupling engagement by pulling on the lines. 4. Install the fuel line clip. 5. Connect the battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4341 Fuel Pipe 1/2 Inch Remover Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Pressure Regulator: Description and Operation FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR Fuel Pressure Regulator The fuel pressure regulator (Figure 70) is attached to the fuel rail downstream of the fuel injectors. It regulates fuel pressure supplied to the fuel injectors. The regulator is a diaphragm-operated relief valve. One side of the diaphragm senses fuel pressure and the other side is connected to the intake manifold vacuum. Fuel pressure is established by a spring preload applied to the diaphragm. Balancing one side of the diaphragm with manifold vacuum maintains a constant fuel pressure drop across the fuel injectors. Fuel pressure is high when engine vacuum is low. Excess fuel is bypassed through the fuel pressure regulator and returned through the fuel return line to the fuel tank. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4348 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4349 Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor The Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) sensor (Figure 31) is a diaphragm strain gauge device in which resistance changes with pressure. The electrical resistance of a strain gauge increases as pressure increases, and decreases as pressure decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to pressure. Strain gauge type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The FRP sensor measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This signal is used by the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulse width and meter fuel to each engine combustion cylinder. Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor The Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) sensor (Figure 32) senses the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The return fuel line to the fuel tank has been deleted in this type of fuel system. The differential fuel/intake manifold pressure together with measured fuel temperature provides an indication of the fuel vapors in the fuel rail. Both differential pressure and temperature feedback signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserve fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to decrease. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation PRESSURE TEST POINT There is a pressure test point with a schrader fitting in the fuel rail that relieves fuel pressure and measures the fuel injector supply pressure for service and diagnostic procedures. Before servicing or testing the fuel system, read any CAUTION, WARNING, and HANDLING information. ON VEHICLES NOT EQUIPPED WITH A SCHRADER VALVE, USE ROTUNDA FUEL PRESSURE TEST KIT #134-ROO87 OR EQUIVALENT. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper: Technician Safety Information WARNING: ^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENTS. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ FUEL IN THE FUEL SYSTEM REMAINS UNDER HIGH PRESSURE EVEN WHEN THE ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING. BEFORE WORKING ON OR DISCONNECTING ANY OF THE FUEL LINES OR FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS, THE FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 4357 Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper: Vehicle Damage Warnings CAUTION: ^ Use an O-ring seal made of fuel-resistant material. Use of incorrect O-ring seals may result in fuel leakage. ^ Never use silicone grease. Silicone grease may clog the fuel injectors. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4358 Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper: Description and Operation FUEL RAIL PULSE DAMPER Pulse Damper The fuel rail pulse damper (Figure 71) located on the fuel rail reduces fuel system noise caused by the pulsing of the fuel injectors. The vacuum port located on the damper is connected to manifold vacuum to avoid fuel spillage in the event the pulse damper diaphragm were to rupture. (The pulse damper should not be confused with a fuel pressure regulator, it does not regulate fuel rail pressure.) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4359 Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper: Service and Repair REMOVAL WARNING: ^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENTS. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ FUEL IN THE FUEL SYSTEM REMAINS UNDER HIGH PRESSURE EVEN WHEN THE ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING. BEFORE WORKING ON OR DISCONNECTING ANY OF THE FUEL LINES OR FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS, THE FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. 2. Remove the fuel pulse damper. 1 Disconnect the vacuum line. 2 Remove the bolts and the damper. 3. Inspect the O-ring seal and install a new seal if damaged. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. CAUTION: ^ Use an O-ring seal made of fuel-resistant material. Use of incorrect O-ring seals may result in fuel leakage. ^ Never use silicone grease. Silicone grease may clog the fuel injectors. NOTE: Lubricate the O-ring seal with clean Super Premium SAE 5W-30 Motor Oil XO-5W30-QSP or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C153-G to aid installation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation PRESSURE TEST POINT There is a pressure test point with a schrader fitting in the fuel rail that relieves fuel pressure and measures the fuel injector supply pressure for service and diagnostic procedures. Before servicing or testing the fuel system, read any CAUTION, WARNING, and HANDLING information. ON VEHICLES NOT EQUIPPED WITH A SCHRADER VALVE, USE ROTUNDA FUEL PRESSURE TEST KIT #134-ROO87 OR EQUIVALENT. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4368 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4369 Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4370 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Fuel Rail: Technician Safety Information WARNING: ^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENTS. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ FUEL IN THE FUEL SYSTEM REMAINS UNDER HIGH PRESSURE EVEN WHEN THE ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING. BEFORE WORKING ON OR DISCONNECTING ANY OF THE FUEL LINES OR FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS, THE FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 4375 Fuel Rail: Vehicle Damage Warnings CAUTION: ^ Use O-ring seals made of fuel-resistant material. Use of incorrect O-ring seals may result in fuel leakage. ^ Never use silicone grease. Silicone grease may clog fuel injectors. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4376 Fuel Rail: Service and Repair Fuel Pipe 1/2 Inch Remover SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: ^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENTS. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ FUEL IN THE FUEL SYSTEM REMAINS UNDER HIGH PRESSURE EVEN WHEN THE ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING. BEFORE WORKING ON OR DISCONNECTING ANY OF THE FUEL LINES OR FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS, THE FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe. 4. Using the special tool, disconnect the fuel line. 5. Disconnect the accelerator cable and, if equipped, the speed control actuator cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4377 6. Disconnect the fuel pulse damper vacuum hose. 7. Disconnect the fuel injector electrical connectors. 8. Remove the bolts and remove the fuel supply manifold. 9. Inspect the O-ring seals. Discard if damaged INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. CAUTION: ^ Use O-ring seals made of fuel-resistant material. Use of incorrect O-ring seals may result in fuel leakage. ^ Never use silicone grease. Silicone grease may clog fuel injectors. NOTE: Lubricate the O-ring seals with clean Super Premium SAE 5W-30 Motor Oil XO-5W30-QSP or equivalent meeting Ford specification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4378 WSS-M2C153-G to aid installation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4379 Fuel Pipe 1/2 Inch Remover Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Supply Line: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect Technical Service Bulletin # 00S27 Date: 000901 Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect 00S27 SAFETY RECALL Certain 2001 Model Year Escape Vehicles - Fuel Line Inspection Dealer Letter Attachment I ^ Administrative Information Attachment II ^ Labor Allowances ^ Parts Ordering Information Attachment III ^ Technical Information Attachment IV ^ Escape Special Handling Letter Customer Notification Letter Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Supply Line: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4388 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Supply Line: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4389 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this recall. PROMPTLY CORRECT Promptly correct all affected vehicles on your dealer VIN list which you will receive in the Ford Dealer Consolidated Communicator (FDCC). Also, correct other eligible vehicles that are brought to your dealership. DEALER-OWNER CONTACT Immediately contact any affected owner whose name is not on the list. Give the owner a copy of the Owner Letter and schedule a service date. REGIONAL CONTACT Advise regional office if an owner: ^ cannot be contacted. ^ does not make a service date. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using DWE. ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. OWNER REFUNDS Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid fuel line repairs made before the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair was made away from the servicing dealer). Refer to ACESII manual for refund information. RENTAL CARS Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except for fuel, which will be at the customer's expense. Enter the word "LOANER" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area. See "Escape Special Handling Procedure", Attachment IV. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information PARTS REQUIREMENTS Parts Ordering Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Supply Line: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4390 Of the total population of approximately 12,000 vehicles subject to inspection, potentially 120 units (1%) are expected to require fuel line replacement. Dealers must call the Recall Hotline at 1-800-325-5621 when repairs are required. DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to: ^ DOES II ^ Updated Price Book EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information ESCAPE FUEL LINE INSPECTION INSPECTION 1. Turn the ignition key to the ON position without starting the engine. 2. Raise and support the vehicle on a hoist. 3. Locate the fuel line at the filter outlet near the fuel tank. 4. Grasp the fuel line near the filter outlet tube and wiggle it gently. Check the filter outlet connector for leakage within 30 seconds. See Figure 1. 5. If no leak is present, no further action is required. Lower and release the vehicle. 6. If a leak appears within 30 seconds, the fuel line assembly must be replaced. Proceed to the Replacement procedure in this Attachment III. REPLACEMENT NOTE: A single fuel line has been released for this program. The entire fuel line bundle is not to be replaced during this service. 1. A single fuel line has been released for this program. The entire fuel line bundle is not to be replaced during this service. 2. Install a memory saver. Open the hood, disconnect the battery negative cable, then relieve fuel system pressure. 3. Access the fuel pump module as follows: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Supply Line: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4391 a. Open the left rear door. b. Position the seat bench forward. c. Pull back the carpet to expose the fuel pump module access cover. d. Remove the screws and lift the access cover up, then disconnect the two electrical connectors. 4. Disconnect the outboard fuel line (the one closest to the door). See Figure 2. 5. Raise and support the vehicle. 6. Position a drain pan. Remove the bundle retainer, then disconnect the fuel line at the filter and at the supply line. See Figure 3. 7. Remove the line from the vehicle noting the path of the fuel line around other components. 8. Position the new fuel line in the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Supply Line: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4392 9. Connect the fuel line to the filter outlet tube and the supply line leading forward toward the engine. 10. Install the bundle retainer. 11. Remove the supports and lower the vehicle. 12. Connect the fuel line to the fuel pump module. 13. Connect the two electrical connectors at the fuel pump module. 14. Connect the battery negative cable and remove the memory saver. Turn the key on without starting the engine to pressurize the fuel system and check for leaks around the new fuel line connections. Turn the key off. 15. Reinstall the fuel pump access cover. Position back the carpet and seat, then close the door. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Supply Line: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4393 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Supply Line: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4394 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Supply Line: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4395 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Fuel Supply Line: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4396 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Supply Line: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect Technical Service Bulletin # 00S27 Date: 000901 Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect 00S27 SAFETY RECALL Certain 2001 Model Year Escape Vehicles - Fuel Line Inspection Dealer Letter Attachment I ^ Administrative Information Attachment II ^ Labor Allowances ^ Parts Ordering Information Attachment III ^ Technical Information Attachment IV ^ Escape Special Handling Letter Customer Notification Letter Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Supply Line: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4402 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Supply Line: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4403 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this recall. PROMPTLY CORRECT Promptly correct all affected vehicles on your dealer VIN list which you will receive in the Ford Dealer Consolidated Communicator (FDCC). Also, correct other eligible vehicles that are brought to your dealership. DEALER-OWNER CONTACT Immediately contact any affected owner whose name is not on the list. Give the owner a copy of the Owner Letter and schedule a service date. REGIONAL CONTACT Advise regional office if an owner: ^ cannot be contacted. ^ does not make a service date. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using DWE. ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. OWNER REFUNDS Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid fuel line repairs made before the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair was made away from the servicing dealer). Refer to ACESII manual for refund information. RENTAL CARS Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except for fuel, which will be at the customer's expense. Enter the word "LOANER" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area. See "Escape Special Handling Procedure", Attachment IV. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information PARTS REQUIREMENTS Parts Ordering Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Supply Line: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4404 Of the total population of approximately 12,000 vehicles subject to inspection, potentially 120 units (1%) are expected to require fuel line replacement. Dealers must call the Recall Hotline at 1-800-325-5621 when repairs are required. DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to: ^ DOES II ^ Updated Price Book EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information ESCAPE FUEL LINE INSPECTION INSPECTION 1. Turn the ignition key to the ON position without starting the engine. 2. Raise and support the vehicle on a hoist. 3. Locate the fuel line at the filter outlet near the fuel tank. 4. Grasp the fuel line near the filter outlet tube and wiggle it gently. Check the filter outlet connector for leakage within 30 seconds. See Figure 1. 5. If no leak is present, no further action is required. Lower and release the vehicle. 6. If a leak appears within 30 seconds, the fuel line assembly must be replaced. Proceed to the Replacement procedure in this Attachment III. REPLACEMENT NOTE: A single fuel line has been released for this program. The entire fuel line bundle is not to be replaced during this service. 1. A single fuel line has been released for this program. The entire fuel line bundle is not to be replaced during this service. 2. Install a memory saver. Open the hood, disconnect the battery negative cable, then relieve fuel system pressure. 3. Access the fuel pump module as follows: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Supply Line: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4405 a. Open the left rear door. b. Position the seat bench forward. c. Pull back the carpet to expose the fuel pump module access cover. d. Remove the screws and lift the access cover up, then disconnect the two electrical connectors. 4. Disconnect the outboard fuel line (the one closest to the door). See Figure 2. 5. Raise and support the vehicle. 6. Position a drain pan. Remove the bundle retainer, then disconnect the fuel line at the filter and at the supply line. See Figure 3. 7. Remove the line from the vehicle noting the path of the fuel line around other components. 8. Position the new fuel line in the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Supply Line: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4406 9. Connect the fuel line to the filter outlet tube and the supply line leading forward toward the engine. 10. Install the bundle retainer. 11. Remove the supports and lower the vehicle. 12. Connect the fuel line to the fuel pump module. 13. Connect the two electrical connectors at the fuel pump module. 14. Connect the battery negative cable and remove the memory saver. Turn the key on without starting the engine to pressurize the fuel system and check for leaks around the new fuel line connections. Turn the key off. 15. Reinstall the fuel pump access cover. Position back the carpet and seat, then close the door. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Supply Line: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4407 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Supply Line: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4408 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Supply Line: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4409 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Supply Line: > 00S27 > Sep > 00 > Recall - Possible Fuel Line Connector O-Ring Defect > Page 4410 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Hose: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON Fuel Filler Hose: Customer Interest Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON Article No. 03-20-3 10/13/03 DRIVEABILITY - MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ILLUMINATED WITH DTC'S P0442, P0455, P0456, P0457, P1442 OR CHECK FUEL CAP LAMP ILLUMINATED WITH DTC P0457 FORD: 1997-2000 CONTOUR 1997-2002 ESCORT 1997-2003 CROWN VICTORIA, MUSTANG, TAURUS 1998-2003 ESCORT ZX2 2000-2003 FOCUS 2002-2003 THUNDERBIRD 1997 F-250 HD 1997-1999 F-250 LD 1997-2003 E SERIES, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 1999-2003 F SUPER DUTY 2000-2003 EXCURSION 2001-2003 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT LINCOLN: 1997-1998 MARK VIII 1997-2002 CONTINENTAL 1997-2003 TOWN CAR 2000-2003 LS 1998-2003 NAVIGATOR 2002-2003 BLACKWOOD MERCURY: 1997-1999 TRACER 1997-2000 MYSTIQUE 1997-2003 GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE 1999-2002 COUGAR 1997-2003 MOUNTAINEER This article supersedes TSB 03-9-8 to update the vehicle lines and Service Procedures. ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illuminated with Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) P0442, P0455, P0456, P0457 or P1442 or a "Check Fuel Cap" Lamp illuminated with DTC P0457 for the Evaporative Emission System. This may be caused by loose or leaking hoses, loose or broken fuel cap, a leak at the top of the fuel filler pipe neck, etc. ACTION Use the Rotunda Leak Detector Smoke Machine (Part 218-00001) or equivalent, to locate and repair leaks in the Evaporative Emission System. Refer to the following Service Procedure for details. Definitions of Acronyms ^ CVS Canister Vent Solenoid ^ DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code ^ EVAP Evaporative Emissions System ^ EVMV Electronic Vapor Management Valve ^ FTP Fuel Tank Pressure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Hose: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4420 ^ MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp ^ NGS New Generation STAR Tester ^ PID Parameter Identifier WDS Worldwide Diagnostic System SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE THIS PROCEDURE SUPERSEDES ALL OTHER PROCEDURES PUBLISHED IN SERVICE MANUALS AND TSB ARTICLES. NOTE MANY EVAP LEAKS ARE CAUSED BY A LOOSE OR FAULTY CAP. IF THE FUEL CAP IS SUSPECT DURING VISUAL INSPECTION, DO NOT DISTURB THE FUEL CAP UNTIL THE DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE IS COMPLETE. IF THE LEAK VERIFICATION FAILS, THE CAP CAN BE REPOSITIONED OR REPLACED AND THE TEST REPEATED. THIS ACTION WILL ISOLATE THE CAP FROM THE REST OF THE EVAP SYSTEM AS A POTENTIAL CONCERN. IF DEBRIS ON THE SEALING SURFACE OF THE CAP APPEARS TO BE THE SOURCE OF THE LEAK, CLEAN THE CAP AND REINSTALL. OVERVIEW OF TEST PROCEDURES Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Hose: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4421 NOTE SEE (FIGURE 1) AT END OF ARTICLE FOR TEST PROCEDURE FLOWCHART. This TSB provides the following procedures: ^ Check the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (9C915) for a no flow condition ^ Locate a leak so that a repair can be performed Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Hose: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4422 ^ Verify repair by utilizing a metered air pressure test EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE NO FLOW TEST 1. Using WDS Datalogger select the following PID's: EVAPVM # (or EVMV#), EVAPCV # and FTP. 2. Start the vehicle. 3. Close both the Canister Vent Solenoid (CVS) (EVAPCV # On or 100% duty cycle) and the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (EVAPVM# Off or zero % duty cycle). 4. While monitoring the FTP PID, command open the EVAP Canister Purge Valve with the EVAPVM# PID to 100% duty 5. If the FTP decreases and/or the RPM changes and/or the engine stalls, the test passed. Turn off engine and proceed to test procedures below. Otherwise replace the EVAP Canister Purge Valve, verify the repair by repeating the No Flow Test and return vehicle. SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE) 1. Disconnect the larger of two manifold vacuum lines at the EVAP Canister Purge Valve and cap it at the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (see Figure 2). 2. Connect the Smoke Machine power cables to vehicle battery The "Power Indicator Lamp" should be on indicating a good battery contact. 3. Position the selector valve on Rotunda's Smoke Machine Control Panel to "SMOKE". 4. Locate the vehicle's Evaporative Emission Service Test Port and remove the green cap. The EVAP Service Test Port is located close to or on the EVAP Canister Purge Valve. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Hose: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4423 WARNING DO NOT REMOVE THE SCHRADER VALVE. REMOVING THE SCHRADER VALVE FROM THE TEST PORT ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH THE ELECTRONIC VAPOR MANAGEMENT VALVE (9G641) AND/OR ELECTRONIC VAPOR MANAGEMENT VALVE & BRACKET ASSEMBLY (9G683) (SEE FIGURE 3), OR EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE (9C915) AND/OR EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE & BRACKET ASSEMBLY (9F933) (SEE FIGURE 2) WILL PERMANENTLY DAMAGE THE VALVE. 5. Install the EVAP Emission Test Port Adapter that is provided with the Rotunda's Smoke Machine to EVAP Canister Purge Valve test port. NOTE SPECIAL PROCEDURES HAVE BEEN DESIGNATED FOR WINDSTAR, LS, THUNDERBIRD & PZEV FOCUS BECAUSE THEY HAVE A CHECK VALVE THAT WILL PREVENT SMOKE FROM ENTERING THE FILLER NECK. 6. Connect black smoke hose nozzle tip to the EVAP Emission Test Port Adapter. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus Use NGS or WDS to close CVS. (CVS WILL REOPEN AFTER NINE (9) MINUTES OF CONTINUOUS OPERATION). 7. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus - Remove the fuel cap from the vehicle. Depress remote starter button: Smoke will be introduced into the EVAP Emission System. Secure the fuel cap once smoke is seen exiting from the fuel tank's neck area. For Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus, do not remove fuel cap. Depress starter button and introduce smoke to system until it can be seen exiting the CVS (located by filler neck). Once smoke is seen, use NGS or WDS to close CVS. (CVS WILL REOPEN AFTER NINE (9) MINUTES OF CONTINUOUS OPERATION). 8. Press and release the remote starter button in intervals of approximately 15 seconds on and 15 seconds off. Use the halogen light provided with the Smoke Machine to look for smoke in the engine compartment, EVAP hoses to EVAP Canister Purge Valve, CVS, carbon canister and area around the fuel cap. Wiggle fuel vapor lines to check for leaks. Check for leaks in areas that are difficult to access, such as connections on top of the tank where connections may be or inside frame rails. Use the black light to ensure that there are no leaks. If a leak is detected, repair as necessary. If the leak is not detected from the top, check under the bottom of vehicle. Inspect the EVAP hoses running to the carbon canister, fuel filler neck, CVS, and EVAP Canister Purge Valve. Go to LEAK VERIFICATION to verify any repair or if no leak is found. LEAK VERIFICATION (METERED AIR SYSTEM) 1. Position the selector valve located on the Smoke Machine control panel to "METER". 2. Verify calibration of the flow meter by using the .020" calibrated leak orifice. To do this, insert air supply hose (transparent hose) nozzle tip into appropriate EVAP System calibrated leak orifice located on the front of the Smoke Machine panel. 3. TURN ON: Depress the remote starter button. Observe the position of the flow meter indicator ball. Position the flow meter red pointer flag so it aligns with the measurement of the indicator ball. Release the button and remove the air supply hose nozzle tip from the EVAP System calibrated leak orifice. NOTE THIS FLOW METER CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT INDICATES THE VEHICLE PASS OR FAIL CRITERIA BASED ON THE .020" EVAP SYSTEM LEAK STANDARD. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Hose: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4424 4. Connect the transparent air supply hose nozzle tip into the EVAP Service Test Port adapter. 5. Use NGS or WDS Diagnostic tool to CLOSE the CVS. 6. Depress the remote starter button on the Rotunda's Smoke Leak Detector. The indicator ball in the flowmeter will go all the way to the top indicating the system is being pressurized. Continue to depress the remote starter button until the ball stops descending. Once the indicator ball has stopped descending, observe if it is above or below the red indicator flag. If performing this verification following a repair, go to Step 7. If performing this verification after performing the SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE), go to Step 8. 7. Leak Verification After Repair a. If the measurement is below the indicator flag the system has passed. The test procedure is complete. Remove the Smoke Machine Test equipment from the vehicle and reconnect the large EVAP Canister Purge Valve manifold vacuum hose and the test port's green cap. b. If the measurement is above the indicator flag, repeat SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE). 8. Leak Verification After Passing SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE) a. If the measurement is below the indicator flag the system has passed, go to Step 9. b. If the measurement is above the indicator flag, repeat SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE). 9. Using WDS Datalogger or NGS select the FTPV PID. 10. Remove Fuel Cap and turn the vehicle's ignition switch to the run position and check the FTPV PID. 11. The nominal value for the FTPV PID is 2.6V. If the value is greater than 2.8V or less than 2.4V, the FTP sensor is out of range and should be replaced. Verify the repair by checking to see if the new sensor is in range. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus - if the sensor is within range, the concern is no longer present. (Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus go to Step 12.) 12. For Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus only verify that filler neck clamps are in good working order and tightened. Repair as necessary. If no problem is found with clamps, replace the fuel cap. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 03-9-8 WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Hose: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON Fuel Filler Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON Article No. 03-20-3 10/13/03 DRIVEABILITY - MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ILLUMINATED WITH DTC'S P0442, P0455, P0456, P0457, P1442 OR CHECK FUEL CAP LAMP ILLUMINATED WITH DTC P0457 FORD: 1997-2000 CONTOUR 1997-2002 ESCORT 1997-2003 CROWN VICTORIA, MUSTANG, TAURUS 1998-2003 ESCORT ZX2 2000-2003 FOCUS 2002-2003 THUNDERBIRD 1997 F-250 HD 1997-1999 F-250 LD 1997-2003 E SERIES, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 1999-2003 F SUPER DUTY 2000-2003 EXCURSION 2001-2003 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT LINCOLN: 1997-1998 MARK VIII 1997-2002 CONTINENTAL 1997-2003 TOWN CAR 2000-2003 LS 1998-2003 NAVIGATOR 2002-2003 BLACKWOOD MERCURY: 1997-1999 TRACER 1997-2000 MYSTIQUE 1997-2003 GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE 1999-2002 COUGAR 1997-2003 MOUNTAINEER This article supersedes TSB 03-9-8 to update the vehicle lines and Service Procedures. ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illuminated with Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) P0442, P0455, P0456, P0457 or P1442 or a "Check Fuel Cap" Lamp illuminated with DTC P0457 for the Evaporative Emission System. This may be caused by loose or leaking hoses, loose or broken fuel cap, a leak at the top of the fuel filler pipe neck, etc. ACTION Use the Rotunda Leak Detector Smoke Machine (Part 218-00001) or equivalent, to locate and repair leaks in the Evaporative Emission System. Refer to the following Service Procedure for details. Definitions of Acronyms ^ CVS Canister Vent Solenoid ^ DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code ^ EVAP Evaporative Emissions System ^ EVMV Electronic Vapor Management Valve ^ FTP Fuel Tank Pressure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Hose: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4430 ^ MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp ^ NGS New Generation STAR Tester ^ PID Parameter Identifier WDS Worldwide Diagnostic System SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE THIS PROCEDURE SUPERSEDES ALL OTHER PROCEDURES PUBLISHED IN SERVICE MANUALS AND TSB ARTICLES. NOTE MANY EVAP LEAKS ARE CAUSED BY A LOOSE OR FAULTY CAP. IF THE FUEL CAP IS SUSPECT DURING VISUAL INSPECTION, DO NOT DISTURB THE FUEL CAP UNTIL THE DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE IS COMPLETE. IF THE LEAK VERIFICATION FAILS, THE CAP CAN BE REPOSITIONED OR REPLACED AND THE TEST REPEATED. THIS ACTION WILL ISOLATE THE CAP FROM THE REST OF THE EVAP SYSTEM AS A POTENTIAL CONCERN. IF DEBRIS ON THE SEALING SURFACE OF THE CAP APPEARS TO BE THE SOURCE OF THE LEAK, CLEAN THE CAP AND REINSTALL. OVERVIEW OF TEST PROCEDURES Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Hose: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4431 NOTE SEE (FIGURE 1) AT END OF ARTICLE FOR TEST PROCEDURE FLOWCHART. This TSB provides the following procedures: ^ Check the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (9C915) for a no flow condition ^ Locate a leak so that a repair can be performed Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Hose: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4432 ^ Verify repair by utilizing a metered air pressure test EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE NO FLOW TEST 1. Using WDS Datalogger select the following PID's: EVAPVM # (or EVMV#), EVAPCV # and FTP. 2. Start the vehicle. 3. Close both the Canister Vent Solenoid (CVS) (EVAPCV # On or 100% duty cycle) and the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (EVAPVM# Off or zero % duty cycle). 4. While monitoring the FTP PID, command open the EVAP Canister Purge Valve with the EVAPVM# PID to 100% duty 5. If the FTP decreases and/or the RPM changes and/or the engine stalls, the test passed. Turn off engine and proceed to test procedures below. Otherwise replace the EVAP Canister Purge Valve, verify the repair by repeating the No Flow Test and return vehicle. SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE) 1. Disconnect the larger of two manifold vacuum lines at the EVAP Canister Purge Valve and cap it at the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (see Figure 2). 2. Connect the Smoke Machine power cables to vehicle battery The "Power Indicator Lamp" should be on indicating a good battery contact. 3. Position the selector valve on Rotunda's Smoke Machine Control Panel to "SMOKE". 4. Locate the vehicle's Evaporative Emission Service Test Port and remove the green cap. The EVAP Service Test Port is located close to or on the EVAP Canister Purge Valve. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Hose: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4433 WARNING DO NOT REMOVE THE SCHRADER VALVE. REMOVING THE SCHRADER VALVE FROM THE TEST PORT ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH THE ELECTRONIC VAPOR MANAGEMENT VALVE (9G641) AND/OR ELECTRONIC VAPOR MANAGEMENT VALVE & BRACKET ASSEMBLY (9G683) (SEE FIGURE 3), OR EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE (9C915) AND/OR EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE & BRACKET ASSEMBLY (9F933) (SEE FIGURE 2) WILL PERMANENTLY DAMAGE THE VALVE. 5. Install the EVAP Emission Test Port Adapter that is provided with the Rotunda's Smoke Machine to EVAP Canister Purge Valve test port. NOTE SPECIAL PROCEDURES HAVE BEEN DESIGNATED FOR WINDSTAR, LS, THUNDERBIRD & PZEV FOCUS BECAUSE THEY HAVE A CHECK VALVE THAT WILL PREVENT SMOKE FROM ENTERING THE FILLER NECK. 6. Connect black smoke hose nozzle tip to the EVAP Emission Test Port Adapter. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus Use NGS or WDS to close CVS. (CVS WILL REOPEN AFTER NINE (9) MINUTES OF CONTINUOUS OPERATION). 7. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus - Remove the fuel cap from the vehicle. Depress remote starter button: Smoke will be introduced into the EVAP Emission System. Secure the fuel cap once smoke is seen exiting from the fuel tank's neck area. For Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus, do not remove fuel cap. Depress starter button and introduce smoke to system until it can be seen exiting the CVS (located by filler neck). Once smoke is seen, use NGS or WDS to close CVS. (CVS WILL REOPEN AFTER NINE (9) MINUTES OF CONTINUOUS OPERATION). 8. Press and release the remote starter button in intervals of approximately 15 seconds on and 15 seconds off. Use the halogen light provided with the Smoke Machine to look for smoke in the engine compartment, EVAP hoses to EVAP Canister Purge Valve, CVS, carbon canister and area around the fuel cap. Wiggle fuel vapor lines to check for leaks. Check for leaks in areas that are difficult to access, such as connections on top of the tank where connections may be or inside frame rails. Use the black light to ensure that there are no leaks. If a leak is detected, repair as necessary. If the leak is not detected from the top, check under the bottom of vehicle. Inspect the EVAP hoses running to the carbon canister, fuel filler neck, CVS, and EVAP Canister Purge Valve. Go to LEAK VERIFICATION to verify any repair or if no leak is found. LEAK VERIFICATION (METERED AIR SYSTEM) 1. Position the selector valve located on the Smoke Machine control panel to "METER". 2. Verify calibration of the flow meter by using the .020" calibrated leak orifice. To do this, insert air supply hose (transparent hose) nozzle tip into appropriate EVAP System calibrated leak orifice located on the front of the Smoke Machine panel. 3. TURN ON: Depress the remote starter button. Observe the position of the flow meter indicator ball. Position the flow meter red pointer flag so it aligns with the measurement of the indicator ball. Release the button and remove the air supply hose nozzle tip from the EVAP System calibrated leak orifice. NOTE THIS FLOW METER CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT INDICATES THE VEHICLE PASS OR FAIL CRITERIA BASED ON THE .020" EVAP SYSTEM LEAK STANDARD. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Hose: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4434 4. Connect the transparent air supply hose nozzle tip into the EVAP Service Test Port adapter. 5. Use NGS or WDS Diagnostic tool to CLOSE the CVS. 6. Depress the remote starter button on the Rotunda's Smoke Leak Detector. The indicator ball in the flowmeter will go all the way to the top indicating the system is being pressurized. Continue to depress the remote starter button until the ball stops descending. Once the indicator ball has stopped descending, observe if it is above or below the red indicator flag. If performing this verification following a repair, go to Step 7. If performing this verification after performing the SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE), go to Step 8. 7. Leak Verification After Repair a. If the measurement is below the indicator flag the system has passed. The test procedure is complete. Remove the Smoke Machine Test equipment from the vehicle and reconnect the large EVAP Canister Purge Valve manifold vacuum hose and the test port's green cap. b. If the measurement is above the indicator flag, repeat SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE). 8. Leak Verification After Passing SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE) a. If the measurement is below the indicator flag the system has passed, go to Step 9. b. If the measurement is above the indicator flag, repeat SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE). 9. Using WDS Datalogger or NGS select the FTPV PID. 10. Remove Fuel Cap and turn the vehicle's ignition switch to the run position and check the FTPV PID. 11. The nominal value for the FTPV PID is 2.6V. If the value is greater than 2.8V or less than 2.4V, the FTP sensor is out of range and should be replaced. Verify the repair by checking to see if the new sensor is in range. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus - if the sensor is within range, the concern is no longer present. (Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus go to Step 12.) 12. For Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus only verify that filler neck clamps are in good working order and tightened. Repair as necessary. If no problem is found with clamps, replace the fuel cap. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 03-9-8 WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4435 Fuel Filler Hose: Service Precautions WARNING: ^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. ^ THE FUEL TANK MAY BE PRESSURIZED. REMOVE THE FUEL TANK FILLER CAP SLOWLY. IF A HISSING SOUND IS HEARD, WAIT UNTIL THE CONDITION STOPS BEFORE REMOVING THE FUEL TANK FILLER CAP. IF THESE PRECAUTIONS ARE NOT FOLLOWED, FUEL MAY SPRAY AND CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4436 Fuel Filler Hose: Service and Repair FUEL FILLER TUBE Heavy-Duty Riveter SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL 1. Remove the left rear wheel. WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. 2. Remove the gas cap. WARNING: THE FUEL TANK MAY BE PRESSURIZED. REMOVE THE FUEL TANK FILLER CAP SLOWLY. IF A HISSING SOUND IS HEARD, WAIT UNTIL THE CONDITION STOPS BEFORE REMOVING THE FUEL TANK FILLER CAP. IF THESE PRECAUTIONS ARE NOT FOLLOWED, FUEL MAY SPRAY AND CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY. 3. Remove the filler neck retaining screws. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4437 4. Remove the rivets and the fuel tank filler tube shield. 5. Remove the fuel filler tube. 1 Disconnect the hoses. 2 Remove the bolt and the fuel filler tube. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Use the Heavy-Duty Riveter to install the rivets. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4438 Heavy-Duty Riveter Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON Fuel Filler Neck: Customer Interest Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON Article No. 03-20-3 10/13/03 DRIVEABILITY - MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ILLUMINATED WITH DTC'S P0442, P0455, P0456, P0457, P1442 OR CHECK FUEL CAP LAMP ILLUMINATED WITH DTC P0457 FORD: 1997-2000 CONTOUR 1997-2002 ESCORT 1997-2003 CROWN VICTORIA, MUSTANG, TAURUS 1998-2003 ESCORT ZX2 2000-2003 FOCUS 2002-2003 THUNDERBIRD 1997 F-250 HD 1997-1999 F-250 LD 1997-2003 E SERIES, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 1999-2003 F SUPER DUTY 2000-2003 EXCURSION 2001-2003 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT LINCOLN: 1997-1998 MARK VIII 1997-2002 CONTINENTAL 1997-2003 TOWN CAR 2000-2003 LS 1998-2003 NAVIGATOR 2002-2003 BLACKWOOD MERCURY: 1997-1999 TRACER 1997-2000 MYSTIQUE 1997-2003 GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE 1999-2002 COUGAR 1997-2003 MOUNTAINEER This article supersedes TSB 03-9-8 to update the vehicle lines and Service Procedures. ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illuminated with Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) P0442, P0455, P0456, P0457 or P1442 or a "Check Fuel Cap" Lamp illuminated with DTC P0457 for the Evaporative Emission System. This may be caused by loose or leaking hoses, loose or broken fuel cap, a leak at the top of the fuel filler pipe neck, etc. ACTION Use the Rotunda Leak Detector Smoke Machine (Part 218-00001) or equivalent, to locate and repair leaks in the Evaporative Emission System. Refer to the following Service Procedure for details. Definitions of Acronyms ^ CVS Canister Vent Solenoid ^ DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code ^ EVAP Evaporative Emissions System ^ EVMV Electronic Vapor Management Valve ^ FTP Fuel Tank Pressure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4447 ^ MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp ^ NGS New Generation STAR Tester ^ PID Parameter Identifier WDS Worldwide Diagnostic System SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE THIS PROCEDURE SUPERSEDES ALL OTHER PROCEDURES PUBLISHED IN SERVICE MANUALS AND TSB ARTICLES. NOTE MANY EVAP LEAKS ARE CAUSED BY A LOOSE OR FAULTY CAP. IF THE FUEL CAP IS SUSPECT DURING VISUAL INSPECTION, DO NOT DISTURB THE FUEL CAP UNTIL THE DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE IS COMPLETE. IF THE LEAK VERIFICATION FAILS, THE CAP CAN BE REPOSITIONED OR REPLACED AND THE TEST REPEATED. THIS ACTION WILL ISOLATE THE CAP FROM THE REST OF THE EVAP SYSTEM AS A POTENTIAL CONCERN. IF DEBRIS ON THE SEALING SURFACE OF THE CAP APPEARS TO BE THE SOURCE OF THE LEAK, CLEAN THE CAP AND REINSTALL. OVERVIEW OF TEST PROCEDURES Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4448 NOTE SEE (FIGURE 1) AT END OF ARTICLE FOR TEST PROCEDURE FLOWCHART. This TSB provides the following procedures: ^ Check the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (9C915) for a no flow condition ^ Locate a leak so that a repair can be performed Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4449 ^ Verify repair by utilizing a metered air pressure test EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE NO FLOW TEST 1. Using WDS Datalogger select the following PID's: EVAPVM # (or EVMV#), EVAPCV # and FTP. 2. Start the vehicle. 3. Close both the Canister Vent Solenoid (CVS) (EVAPCV # On or 100% duty cycle) and the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (EVAPVM# Off or zero % duty cycle). 4. While monitoring the FTP PID, command open the EVAP Canister Purge Valve with the EVAPVM# PID to 100% duty 5. If the FTP decreases and/or the RPM changes and/or the engine stalls, the test passed. Turn off engine and proceed to test procedures below. Otherwise replace the EVAP Canister Purge Valve, verify the repair by repeating the No Flow Test and return vehicle. SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE) 1. Disconnect the larger of two manifold vacuum lines at the EVAP Canister Purge Valve and cap it at the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (see Figure 2). 2. Connect the Smoke Machine power cables to vehicle battery The "Power Indicator Lamp" should be on indicating a good battery contact. 3. Position the selector valve on Rotunda's Smoke Machine Control Panel to "SMOKE". 4. Locate the vehicle's Evaporative Emission Service Test Port and remove the green cap. The EVAP Service Test Port is located close to or on the EVAP Canister Purge Valve. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4450 WARNING DO NOT REMOVE THE SCHRADER VALVE. REMOVING THE SCHRADER VALVE FROM THE TEST PORT ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH THE ELECTRONIC VAPOR MANAGEMENT VALVE (9G641) AND/OR ELECTRONIC VAPOR MANAGEMENT VALVE & BRACKET ASSEMBLY (9G683) (SEE FIGURE 3), OR EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE (9C915) AND/OR EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE & BRACKET ASSEMBLY (9F933) (SEE FIGURE 2) WILL PERMANENTLY DAMAGE THE VALVE. 5. Install the EVAP Emission Test Port Adapter that is provided with the Rotunda's Smoke Machine to EVAP Canister Purge Valve test port. NOTE SPECIAL PROCEDURES HAVE BEEN DESIGNATED FOR WINDSTAR, LS, THUNDERBIRD & PZEV FOCUS BECAUSE THEY HAVE A CHECK VALVE THAT WILL PREVENT SMOKE FROM ENTERING THE FILLER NECK. 6. Connect black smoke hose nozzle tip to the EVAP Emission Test Port Adapter. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus Use NGS or WDS to close CVS. (CVS WILL REOPEN AFTER NINE (9) MINUTES OF CONTINUOUS OPERATION). 7. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus - Remove the fuel cap from the vehicle. Depress remote starter button: Smoke will be introduced into the EVAP Emission System. Secure the fuel cap once smoke is seen exiting from the fuel tank's neck area. For Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus, do not remove fuel cap. Depress starter button and introduce smoke to system until it can be seen exiting the CVS (located by filler neck). Once smoke is seen, use NGS or WDS to close CVS. (CVS WILL REOPEN AFTER NINE (9) MINUTES OF CONTINUOUS OPERATION). 8. Press and release the remote starter button in intervals of approximately 15 seconds on and 15 seconds off. Use the halogen light provided with the Smoke Machine to look for smoke in the engine compartment, EVAP hoses to EVAP Canister Purge Valve, CVS, carbon canister and area around the fuel cap. Wiggle fuel vapor lines to check for leaks. Check for leaks in areas that are difficult to access, such as connections on top of the tank where connections may be or inside frame rails. Use the black light to ensure that there are no leaks. If a leak is detected, repair as necessary. If the leak is not detected from the top, check under the bottom of vehicle. Inspect the EVAP hoses running to the carbon canister, fuel filler neck, CVS, and EVAP Canister Purge Valve. Go to LEAK VERIFICATION to verify any repair or if no leak is found. LEAK VERIFICATION (METERED AIR SYSTEM) 1. Position the selector valve located on the Smoke Machine control panel to "METER". 2. Verify calibration of the flow meter by using the .020" calibrated leak orifice. To do this, insert air supply hose (transparent hose) nozzle tip into appropriate EVAP System calibrated leak orifice located on the front of the Smoke Machine panel. 3. TURN ON: Depress the remote starter button. Observe the position of the flow meter indicator ball. Position the flow meter red pointer flag so it aligns with the measurement of the indicator ball. Release the button and remove the air supply hose nozzle tip from the EVAP System calibrated leak orifice. NOTE THIS FLOW METER CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT INDICATES THE VEHICLE PASS OR FAIL CRITERIA BASED ON THE .020" EVAP SYSTEM LEAK STANDARD. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4451 4. Connect the transparent air supply hose nozzle tip into the EVAP Service Test Port adapter. 5. Use NGS or WDS Diagnostic tool to CLOSE the CVS. 6. Depress the remote starter button on the Rotunda's Smoke Leak Detector. The indicator ball in the flowmeter will go all the way to the top indicating the system is being pressurized. Continue to depress the remote starter button until the ball stops descending. Once the indicator ball has stopped descending, observe if it is above or below the red indicator flag. If performing this verification following a repair, go to Step 7. If performing this verification after performing the SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE), go to Step 8. 7. Leak Verification After Repair a. If the measurement is below the indicator flag the system has passed. The test procedure is complete. Remove the Smoke Machine Test equipment from the vehicle and reconnect the large EVAP Canister Purge Valve manifold vacuum hose and the test port's green cap. b. If the measurement is above the indicator flag, repeat SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE). 8. Leak Verification After Passing SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE) a. If the measurement is below the indicator flag the system has passed, go to Step 9. b. If the measurement is above the indicator flag, repeat SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE). 9. Using WDS Datalogger or NGS select the FTPV PID. 10. Remove Fuel Cap and turn the vehicle's ignition switch to the run position and check the FTPV PID. 11. The nominal value for the FTPV PID is 2.6V. If the value is greater than 2.8V or less than 2.4V, the FTP sensor is out of range and should be replaced. Verify the repair by checking to see if the new sensor is in range. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus - if the sensor is within range, the concern is no longer present. (Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus go to Step 12.) 12. For Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus only verify that filler neck clamps are in good working order and tightened. Repair as necessary. If no problem is found with clamps, replace the fuel cap. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 03-9-8 WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON Fuel Filler Neck: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON Article No. 03-20-3 10/13/03 DRIVEABILITY - MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ILLUMINATED WITH DTC'S P0442, P0455, P0456, P0457, P1442 OR CHECK FUEL CAP LAMP ILLUMINATED WITH DTC P0457 FORD: 1997-2000 CONTOUR 1997-2002 ESCORT 1997-2003 CROWN VICTORIA, MUSTANG, TAURUS 1998-2003 ESCORT ZX2 2000-2003 FOCUS 2002-2003 THUNDERBIRD 1997 F-250 HD 1997-1999 F-250 LD 1997-2003 E SERIES, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 1999-2003 F SUPER DUTY 2000-2003 EXCURSION 2001-2003 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT LINCOLN: 1997-1998 MARK VIII 1997-2002 CONTINENTAL 1997-2003 TOWN CAR 2000-2003 LS 1998-2003 NAVIGATOR 2002-2003 BLACKWOOD MERCURY: 1997-1999 TRACER 1997-2000 MYSTIQUE 1997-2003 GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE 1999-2002 COUGAR 1997-2003 MOUNTAINEER This article supersedes TSB 03-9-8 to update the vehicle lines and Service Procedures. ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illuminated with Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) P0442, P0455, P0456, P0457 or P1442 or a "Check Fuel Cap" Lamp illuminated with DTC P0457 for the Evaporative Emission System. This may be caused by loose or leaking hoses, loose or broken fuel cap, a leak at the top of the fuel filler pipe neck, etc. ACTION Use the Rotunda Leak Detector Smoke Machine (Part 218-00001) or equivalent, to locate and repair leaks in the Evaporative Emission System. Refer to the following Service Procedure for details. Definitions of Acronyms ^ CVS Canister Vent Solenoid ^ DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code ^ EVAP Evaporative Emissions System ^ EVMV Electronic Vapor Management Valve ^ FTP Fuel Tank Pressure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4457 ^ MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp ^ NGS New Generation STAR Tester ^ PID Parameter Identifier WDS Worldwide Diagnostic System SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE THIS PROCEDURE SUPERSEDES ALL OTHER PROCEDURES PUBLISHED IN SERVICE MANUALS AND TSB ARTICLES. NOTE MANY EVAP LEAKS ARE CAUSED BY A LOOSE OR FAULTY CAP. IF THE FUEL CAP IS SUSPECT DURING VISUAL INSPECTION, DO NOT DISTURB THE FUEL CAP UNTIL THE DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE IS COMPLETE. IF THE LEAK VERIFICATION FAILS, THE CAP CAN BE REPOSITIONED OR REPLACED AND THE TEST REPEATED. THIS ACTION WILL ISOLATE THE CAP FROM THE REST OF THE EVAP SYSTEM AS A POTENTIAL CONCERN. IF DEBRIS ON THE SEALING SURFACE OF THE CAP APPEARS TO BE THE SOURCE OF THE LEAK, CLEAN THE CAP AND REINSTALL. OVERVIEW OF TEST PROCEDURES Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4458 NOTE SEE (FIGURE 1) AT END OF ARTICLE FOR TEST PROCEDURE FLOWCHART. This TSB provides the following procedures: ^ Check the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (9C915) for a no flow condition ^ Locate a leak so that a repair can be performed Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4459 ^ Verify repair by utilizing a metered air pressure test EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE NO FLOW TEST 1. Using WDS Datalogger select the following PID's: EVAPVM # (or EVMV#), EVAPCV # and FTP. 2. Start the vehicle. 3. Close both the Canister Vent Solenoid (CVS) (EVAPCV # On or 100% duty cycle) and the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (EVAPVM# Off or zero % duty cycle). 4. While monitoring the FTP PID, command open the EVAP Canister Purge Valve with the EVAPVM# PID to 100% duty 5. If the FTP decreases and/or the RPM changes and/or the engine stalls, the test passed. Turn off engine and proceed to test procedures below. Otherwise replace the EVAP Canister Purge Valve, verify the repair by repeating the No Flow Test and return vehicle. SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE) 1. Disconnect the larger of two manifold vacuum lines at the EVAP Canister Purge Valve and cap it at the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (see Figure 2). 2. Connect the Smoke Machine power cables to vehicle battery The "Power Indicator Lamp" should be on indicating a good battery contact. 3. Position the selector valve on Rotunda's Smoke Machine Control Panel to "SMOKE". 4. Locate the vehicle's Evaporative Emission Service Test Port and remove the green cap. The EVAP Service Test Port is located close to or on the EVAP Canister Purge Valve. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4460 WARNING DO NOT REMOVE THE SCHRADER VALVE. REMOVING THE SCHRADER VALVE FROM THE TEST PORT ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH THE ELECTRONIC VAPOR MANAGEMENT VALVE (9G641) AND/OR ELECTRONIC VAPOR MANAGEMENT VALVE & BRACKET ASSEMBLY (9G683) (SEE FIGURE 3), OR EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE (9C915) AND/OR EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE & BRACKET ASSEMBLY (9F933) (SEE FIGURE 2) WILL PERMANENTLY DAMAGE THE VALVE. 5. Install the EVAP Emission Test Port Adapter that is provided with the Rotunda's Smoke Machine to EVAP Canister Purge Valve test port. NOTE SPECIAL PROCEDURES HAVE BEEN DESIGNATED FOR WINDSTAR, LS, THUNDERBIRD & PZEV FOCUS BECAUSE THEY HAVE A CHECK VALVE THAT WILL PREVENT SMOKE FROM ENTERING THE FILLER NECK. 6. Connect black smoke hose nozzle tip to the EVAP Emission Test Port Adapter. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus Use NGS or WDS to close CVS. (CVS WILL REOPEN AFTER NINE (9) MINUTES OF CONTINUOUS OPERATION). 7. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus - Remove the fuel cap from the vehicle. Depress remote starter button: Smoke will be introduced into the EVAP Emission System. Secure the fuel cap once smoke is seen exiting from the fuel tank's neck area. For Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus, do not remove fuel cap. Depress starter button and introduce smoke to system until it can be seen exiting the CVS (located by filler neck). Once smoke is seen, use NGS or WDS to close CVS. (CVS WILL REOPEN AFTER NINE (9) MINUTES OF CONTINUOUS OPERATION). 8. Press and release the remote starter button in intervals of approximately 15 seconds on and 15 seconds off. Use the halogen light provided with the Smoke Machine to look for smoke in the engine compartment, EVAP hoses to EVAP Canister Purge Valve, CVS, carbon canister and area around the fuel cap. Wiggle fuel vapor lines to check for leaks. Check for leaks in areas that are difficult to access, such as connections on top of the tank where connections may be or inside frame rails. Use the black light to ensure that there are no leaks. If a leak is detected, repair as necessary. If the leak is not detected from the top, check under the bottom of vehicle. Inspect the EVAP hoses running to the carbon canister, fuel filler neck, CVS, and EVAP Canister Purge Valve. Go to LEAK VERIFICATION to verify any repair or if no leak is found. LEAK VERIFICATION (METERED AIR SYSTEM) 1. Position the selector valve located on the Smoke Machine control panel to "METER". 2. Verify calibration of the flow meter by using the .020" calibrated leak orifice. To do this, insert air supply hose (transparent hose) nozzle tip into appropriate EVAP System calibrated leak orifice located on the front of the Smoke Machine panel. 3. TURN ON: Depress the remote starter button. Observe the position of the flow meter indicator ball. Position the flow meter red pointer flag so it aligns with the measurement of the indicator ball. Release the button and remove the air supply hose nozzle tip from the EVAP System calibrated leak orifice. NOTE THIS FLOW METER CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT INDICATES THE VEHICLE PASS OR FAIL CRITERIA BASED ON THE .020" EVAP SYSTEM LEAK STANDARD. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4461 4. Connect the transparent air supply hose nozzle tip into the EVAP Service Test Port adapter. 5. Use NGS or WDS Diagnostic tool to CLOSE the CVS. 6. Depress the remote starter button on the Rotunda's Smoke Leak Detector. The indicator ball in the flowmeter will go all the way to the top indicating the system is being pressurized. Continue to depress the remote starter button until the ball stops descending. Once the indicator ball has stopped descending, observe if it is above or below the red indicator flag. If performing this verification following a repair, go to Step 7. If performing this verification after performing the SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE), go to Step 8. 7. Leak Verification After Repair a. If the measurement is below the indicator flag the system has passed. The test procedure is complete. Remove the Smoke Machine Test equipment from the vehicle and reconnect the large EVAP Canister Purge Valve manifold vacuum hose and the test port's green cap. b. If the measurement is above the indicator flag, repeat SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE). 8. Leak Verification After Passing SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE) a. If the measurement is below the indicator flag the system has passed, go to Step 9. b. If the measurement is above the indicator flag, repeat SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE). 9. Using WDS Datalogger or NGS select the FTPV PID. 10. Remove Fuel Cap and turn the vehicle's ignition switch to the run position and check the FTPV PID. 11. The nominal value for the FTPV PID is 2.6V. If the value is greater than 2.8V or less than 2.4V, the FTP sensor is out of range and should be replaced. Verify the repair by checking to see if the new sensor is in range. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus - if the sensor is within range, the concern is no longer present. (Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus go to Step 12.) 12. For Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus only verify that filler neck clamps are in good working order and tightened. Repair as necessary. If no problem is found with clamps, replace the fuel cap. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 03-9-8 WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Neck: > NHTSA00V210001 > Aug > 00 > Recall 00V210001: Speed Control Cable Corrosion/Binding Cruise Control Servo Cable: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 00V210001: Speed Control Cable Corrosion/Binding The speed control cable can have a cracked or missing speed control cable servo cap locating tab. The locating tab could enter the servo clutch cavity and interfere with the speed control servo clutch. Also, water could enter those units that contain a cracked or missing servo cap locating tab, eventually causing corrosion that could interfere with the function of the speed control. If either of these conditions occurs and the speed control is used, the speed control could prevent the throttle from returning to idle, resulting in a stuck throttle. A stuck throttle could result in a crash. Dealers will inspect the speed control cables. Vehicles with speed control cables from cavities 3 and 4 will have the cable the speed control servo replaced. Owner notification began August 6, 2000. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon service date and do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673. Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Tank Mounting Straps > Component Information > Service and Repair Fuel Tank Mounting Straps: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Use a suitable jack to support the fuel tank. 3. Disconnect the pin-type retainer from the fuel tank strap and position the parking brake cable aside. 4. Remove the bolts and the fuel tank straps. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Service Precautions Fuel Tank Unit: Service Precautions WARNING: Adhere to the following procedures any time the fuel system is being worked on in order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury: - Keep a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher near the work area. - Place a "CAUTION FLAMMABLE" sign in the work area. - Work in a well-ventilated area. Do not smoke, and keep sparks and open flames away. - Wear eye protection. - Use caution when working near the catalytic converter to prevent the possibility of burns or fire. (The temperatures within the converter can exceed 537 °C (1000 °F). - Relieve the fuel system pressure prior to disconnecting fuel system components. - Disconnect the negative battery cable except for tests where battery voltage is required. - Use a suitable container to store or catch fuel. - Do not replace fuel pipe with fuel hose. - Plug all disconnected fuel line fittings and hoses. - After making any fuel system repairs ALWAYS inspect for fuel leaks. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4481 Idle Air Control Valve: Description and Operation IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE Nippondenso Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Assembly Hitachi Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Assembly With Vent/Filter The Idle Air Control (IAC) valve assembly (Figure 117) and (Figure 118) controls engine idle speed and provides a dashpot function. The IAC valve assembly meters intake air around the throttle plate through a bypass within the IAC valve assembly and throttle body. The PCM determines the desired idle speed or bypass air and signals the IAC valve assembly through a specified duty cycle. The IAC valve responds by positioning the IAC valve to control the amount of bypassed air. The PCM monitors engine rpm and increases or decreases the IAC duty cycle in order to achieve the desired rpm. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4482 Hitachi Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Assembly With Air-Assist Injectors On applications with air-assisted injectors, the IAC valve (Figure 119) also supplies a small amount of air into the path of the fuel injectors. The jet of air causes an increase in fuel atomization at low speed and light load conditions. NOTE: The IAC Valve Assembly is NOT ADJUSTABLE and CANNOT BE CLEANED. The IAC valve (part of throttle body assembly) has an internal diode on some applications. If the internal diode is measured in crossed terminal position with a digital multimeter, there will be an incorrect or negative reading. It is important that the mating component and harness connectors correctly oriented. Diagnostic procedures emphasize this importance. The PCM uses the IAC valve assembly to control: ^ No touch start ^ Cold engine fast idle for rapid warm-up ^ Idle (corrects for engine load) ^ Stumble or stalling on deceleration (provides a dashpot function) ^ Over-temperature idle boost. ^ Air Assist to Injectors. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4483 Idle Air Control Valve: Testing and Inspection Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Noise 1. Open the hood. 2. Verify the condition by operating the vehicle for a short time. NOTE: ^ Key symptom is elevated idle speed while noise is occurring. ^ "Snapping" the throttle can induce the noise. 3. Inspect the IAC. If physical evidence of contamination exists, install a new IAC. 4. While the noise is occurring, either place an EngineEAR probe near the IAC valve and the inlet tube, or create a 6.35 mm (0.25 in)-12.7 mm (0.50 in) air gap between the inlet tube and the clean air tube. If the IAC valve is making the noise, install a new IAC valve. 5. Test the vehicle for normal operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Air Control Valve <--> [Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4484 Idle Air Control Valve: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube. 2. Disconnect the Idle Air Control (IAC) valve electrical connector. 3. Remove the two bolts and the IAC valve. ^ Discard the gasket. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Install a new gasket. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4488 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4489 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch The Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) switch (Figure 72) is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump. The purpose of the IFS switch is to shut off the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel ball held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the switch and shuts off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the Owner Guide for the location of the IFS. Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4490 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the cowl side trim panel. 1 Remove the pin-type retainers. 2 Remove the nut. 3 Remove the cowl side trim panel. 2. Remove the Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) switch. 1 Disconnect the connector. 2 Remove the screws and the IFS switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Intake Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair Intake Air Duct: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the air cleaner outlet pipe at the mass air flow sensor. ^ Unclip the throttle cable from the outlet pipe. ^ Loosen the screw clamp and disconnect the pipe. 2. Remove the outlet pipe. 1 Disconnect the outlet pipe from the throttle body. 2 Unclip the hose from the outlet pipe. 3 Disconnect the crankcase vent tube and remove the air cleaner outlet pipe. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. NOTE: The air cleaner outlet pipe should be securely sealed to prevent unmetered air from entering the engine. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Powertrain Control Module Power Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Powertrain Control Module Power Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 4497 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4502 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4503 Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4504 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Powertrain Control Module Power Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Powertrain Control Module Power Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 4508 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Resonator, Intake Air > Component Information > Service and Repair Resonator: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the left front wheel. 2. Remove the seven pin-type retainers and four screws and position aside the left inner fender splash shield. 3. Remove the bolt and remove the intake air resonator. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. NOTE: Make sure the front rubber grommet is seated in the bracket. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations > Page 4516 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations > Page 4517 Mass Air Flow Sensor: Description and Operation MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire (Figure 36). If the hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the air mass flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio (Figure 37). This input is also used in determining transmission Electronic Pressure Control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling. Some MAF sensors have Integrated Bypass Technology (IBT) with an integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor. The present applications with IBT are: Focus, Escort (4V), 2.0L Cougar, Escape, Taurus/Sable, Windstar, Explorer/Mountaineer and E-Series. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Mass Air Flow Sensor <--> [Air Flow Meter/Sensor] > Component Information > Locations > Page 4518 Mass Air Flow Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube. 2. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the four nuts and the MAF sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4522 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4523 Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor The Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) sensor (Figure 31) is a diaphragm strain gauge device in which resistance changes with pressure. The electrical resistance of a strain gauge increases as pressure increases, and decreases as pressure decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to pressure. Strain gauge type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The FRP sensor measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This signal is used by the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulse width and meter fuel to each engine combustion cylinder. Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor The Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) sensor (Figure 32) senses the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The return fuel line to the fuel tank has been deleted in this type of fuel system. The differential fuel/intake manifold pressure together with measured fuel temperature provides an indication of the fuel vapors in the fuel rail. Both differential pressure and temperature feedback signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserve fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to decrease. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4527 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4528 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch The Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) switch (Figure 72) is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump. The purpose of the IFS switch is to shut off the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel ball held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the switch and shuts off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the Owner Guide for the location of the IFS. Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4529 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the cowl side trim panel. 1 Remove the pin-type retainers. 2 Remove the nut. 3 Remove the cowl side trim panel. 2. Remove the Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) switch. 1 Disconnect the connector. 2 Remove the screws and the IFS switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4533 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > PCM Inputs Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation PCM Inputs THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Typical Throttle Position (TP) Sensor The Throttle Position (TP) sensor (Figure 42) is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a three-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases corrosion resistance on terminals and increases connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, four operating conditions are determined by the PCM from the TP. Those conditions are closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration), part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration), wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank), and throttle angle rate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > PCM Inputs > Page 4536 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Systems THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is monitored by the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) II system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government regulations. For additional information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System Hardware-PCM Inputs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Throttle Body: Technician Safety Information WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENTS. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 4541 Throttle Body: Vehicle Damage Warnings CAUTION: ^ Throttle body bore and plate area have a special coating and should not be cleaned. ^ The throttle body sealing surfaces are soft materials. Use care if cleaning is necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Description and Operation > Throttle Body Housing Throttle Body: Description and Operation Throttle Body Housing THROTTLE BODY HOUSING The throttle body housing assembly is a single piece of aluminum casting with an air passage and a butterfly throttle plate with linkage mechanisms. When the throttle plate is in the idle (or closed) position, the throttle lever arm should be in contact with the Throttle Return Stop. The throttle return stop prevents the throttle plate from contacting the bore and sticking closed. The setting also establishes the amount of air flow between the throttle plate and bore. To minimize the closed plate air flow, a special coating is applied to the throttle plate and bore to help seal this area. This sealant/coating also makes the throttle body resistant to engine intake sludge accumulation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Description and Operation > Throttle Body Housing > Page 4544 Throttle Body: Description and Operation Throttle Body System Overview THROTTLE BODY SYSTEM OVERVIEW The throttle body system meters air to the engine during idle, part throttle, and Wide Open Throttle (WOT) conditions. The throttle body system consists of an Idle Air Control (IAC) valve assembly, idle air orifice, single or dual bores with butterfly valve throttle plates and a Throttle Position (TP) sensor. One other source of idle air flow is the Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) system. The combined idle air flow (from idle air orifice IAC flow and PCV flow) is measured by the MAF sensor on all applications. During idle, the throttle body assembly provides a set amount of air flow to the engine through the idle air passage and PCV valve. The IAC valve assembly provides additional air when commanded by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) to maintain the proper engine idle speed under varying conditions. The IAC valve assembly mounts directly to the throttle body assembly in most applications, but is remote-mounted to the intake manifold in some applications. Idle speed is controlled by the PCM and cannot be adjusted. NOTE: The traditional idle air adjust procedure as well as throttle return screw are no longer used on OBD II applications. Throttle rotation is controlled by a cam/cable linkage to slow the initial opening rate of the throttle plate. The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. Some throttle body applications provide an air supply channel upstream of the throttle plate to provide fresh air to the Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) or IAC systems. Other throttle body applications provide individual vacuum taps downstream of the throttle plate for PCV return, Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR), Evaporative Emission (EVAP), and miscellaneous control signals. Throttle Body System Hardware The major components of the throttle body assembly include the TP sensor, IAC valve assembly, and throttle body housing assembly. Throttle Position Sensor The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is monitored by the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) II system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government regulations. For additional information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System Hardware-PCM Inputs. Idle Air Control Valve Nippondenso Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Assembly Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Description and Operation > Throttle Body Housing > Page 4545 Hitachi Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Assembly With Vent/Filter The Idle Air Control (IAC) valve assembly (Figure 117) and (Figure 118) controls engine idle speed and provides a dashpot function. The IAC valve assembly meters intake air around the throttle plate through a bypass within the IAC valve assembly and throttle body. The PCM determines the desired idle speed or bypass air and signals the IAC valve assembly through a specified duty cycle. The IAC valve responds by positioning the IAC valve to control the amount of bypassed air. The PCM monitors engine rpm and increases or decreases the IAC duty cycle in order to achieve the desired rpm. Hitachi Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Assembly With Air-Assist Injectors On applications with air-assisted injectors, the IAC valve (Figure 119) also supplies a small amount of air into the path of the fuel injectors. The jet of air causes an increase in fuel atomization at low speed and light load conditions. NOTE: The IAC Valve Assembly is NOT ADJUSTABLE and CANNOT BE CLEANED. The IAC valve (part of throttle body assembly) has an internal diode on some applications. If the internal diode is measured in crossed terminal position with a digital multimeter, there will be an incorrect or negative reading. It is important that the mating component and harness connectors correctly oriented. Diagnostic procedures emphasize this importance. The PCM uses the IAC valve assembly to control: ^ No touch start Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Description and Operation > Throttle Body Housing > Page 4546 ^ Cold engine fast idle for rapid warm-up ^ Idle (corrects for engine load) ^ Stumble or stalling on deceleration (provides a dashpot function) ^ Over-temperature idle boost. ^ Air Assist to Injectors. Throttle Body Housing The throttle body housing assembly is a single piece of aluminum casting with an air passage and a butterfly throttle plate with linkage mechanisms. When the throttle plate is in the idle (or closed) position, the throttle lever arm should be in contact with the Throttle Return Stop. The throttle return stop prevents the throttle plate from contacting the bore and sticking closed. The setting also establishes the amount of air flow between the throttle plate and bore. To minimize the closed plate air flow, a special coating is applied to the throttle plate and bore to help seal this area. This sealant/coating also makes the throttle body resistant to engine intake sludge accumulation. Typical Attention Decal Locations Features of the Throttle Body Assembly include: 1. Idle Air Control (IAC) valve assembly mounted directly to the throttle body assembly (some vehicles). 2. A pre-set stop to locate the WOT position. 3. An air supply channel upstream of the throttle plate to provide fresh air to the PCV system (some vehicles only). 4. Individual vacuum taps for PCV, EGR, Evaporative Emission (EVAP) and miscellaneous control signals (some vehicles only). 5. PCV air return (it applicable). 6. A throttle body-mounted Throttle Position (TP) sensor. 7. A sealant/coating on the throttle bore and throttle plate makes the throttle body air flow tolerant to engine intake sludge accumulation. These throttle body assemblies MUST NOT BE CLEANED and have a white/black attention decal (Figure 116) advising not to clean. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4547 Throttle Body: Service and Repair REMOVAL WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENTS. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. CAUTION: Throttle body bore and plate area have a special coating and should not be cleaned. 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe. 2. Remove the throttle body. 1 Disconnect the accelerator cable and, if equipped, the speed control actuator cable. 2 Disconnect the throttle position sensor electrical connector. 3 Remove the screws and throttle body. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. CAUTION: The throttle body sealing surfaces are soft materials. Use care if cleaning is necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4551 Throttle Cable/Linkage: Service Precautions WARNING: MAKE SURE SURROUNDING COMPONENTS SUCH AS WIRING, HOSES, SOUND INSULATION AND FLOOR CARPETING ARE NOT CONTACTING THE SLIDING INNER CABLE OF THE ACCELERATOR CABLE OR THE ACCELERATOR PEDAL AND SHAFT. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. CAUTION: Do not pull the accelerator cable out by the cable housing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4552 Throttle Cable/Linkage: Description and Operation The acceleration control consists of the pedal and shaft assembly, accelerator cable and accelerator cable bracket. WARNING: MAKE SURE SURROUNDING COMPONENTS SUCH AS WIRING, HOSES, SOUND INSULATION AND FLOOR CARPETING ARE NOT CONTACTING THE SLIDING INNER CABLE OF THE ACCELERATOR CABLE OR THE ACCELERATOR PEDAL AND SHAFT. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. The throttle is controlled by an accelerator cable attached to the accelerator pedal and shaft. The accelerator pedal and shaft should travel smoothly from the idle to the wide-open throttle positions. Hesitation on return or prevention of return to the idle position must not occur. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4553 Throttle Cable/Linkage: Testing and Inspection For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is part of, please refer to Accelerator Pedal; Testing and Inspection. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cable Throttle Cable/Linkage: Service and Repair Cable REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the accelerator cable from the throttle lever and bracket. 1 Disconnect the accelerator cable from the throttle lever. 2 Disconnect the accelerator cable from the bracket. 2. Disconnect the accelerator cable from the pedal. 3. Remove the accelerator cable. 1 Remove the bracket bolt. 2 Disconnect the accelerator cable from the air cleaner outlet tube. 3 Remove the accelerator cable from the dash panel. CAUTION: Do not pull the accelerator cable out by the cable housing. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. NOTE: To ease installation, remove the grommet from the throttle lever and install it onto the accelerator cable end. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cable > Page 4556 Throttle Cable/Linkage: Service and Repair Cable Bracket REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the crankcase ventilation hose. 2. Remove the bolt, nuts and the engine appearance cover. 3. Disconnect the throttle control linkage from the throttle lever. 1 If equipped, disconnect the speed control cable from the throttle lever. 2 Rotate the throttle lever. 3 Slide the accelerator cable end out of the throttle lever. 4. Disconnect the throttle control linkage from the accelerator cable bracket. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cable > Page 4557 1 Disconnect the accelerator cable from the bracket. 2 If equipped, squeeze the tabs and disconnect the speed control cable from the accelerator cable bracket. 5. Remove the bolts and the accelerator cable bracket. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4561 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > PCM Inputs Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation PCM Inputs THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Typical Throttle Position (TP) Sensor The Throttle Position (TP) sensor (Figure 42) is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a three-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases corrosion resistance on terminals and increases connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, four operating conditions are determined by the PCM from the TP. Those conditions are closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration), part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration), wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank), and throttle angle rate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > PCM Inputs > Page 4564 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Systems THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is monitored by the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) II system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government regulations. For additional information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System Hardware-PCM Inputs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Variable Induction System > Variable Induction Control Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation Variable Induction Control Valve: Description and Operation INTAKE MANIFOLD TUNING VALVE (IMTV) Intake Manifold Tuning Valve (IMTV) 3.0L LS6 Intake Air System Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Variable Induction System > Variable Induction Control Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4569 4.6L E/F-Series Intake Air System Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Variable Induction System > Variable Induction Control Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4570 5.4L (4) Intake Air System The Intake Manifold Tuning Valve (IMTV) (Figure 107) is a motorized actuated unit mounted directly to the intake manifold. The IMTV actuator controls a shutter device attached to the actuator shaft. There is no monitor input to the PCM with this system to indicate shutter position. The motorized IMTV unit will not be energized below approximately 2600 rpm or higher on some vehicles. The shutter will be in the closed position not allowing airflow blend to occur in the intake manifold. Above approximately 2600 rpm or higher, the motorized unit will be energized. The motorized unit will be commanded on by the PCM initially at a 100 percent duty cycle to move the shutter to the open position and then falling to approximately 50 percent to continue to hold the shutter open. 1. The PCM uses the TP sensor and CKP signals to determine activation of the IMTV system. There must be a positive change in voltage from the TP sensor along with the increase in rpm to open the shutter. 2. The PCM uses the information from the input signals to control the IMTV. 3. When commanded on by the PCM, the motorized actuator shutter opens up the end of the vertical separating wall at high engine speeds to allow both sides of the manifold to blend together. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications Firing Order: Specifications 4-Cyl Firing Order: 1 3 4 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4575 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Timing > Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4583 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4584 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR The Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston No.1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and used for synchronizing the firing of sequential fuel injectors. The Coil On Plug (COP) Ignition applications also use the CMP signal to select the proper ignition coil to fire. The input circuit to the PCM is referred to as the CMP input or circuit. Typical Hall-Effect Sensor Typical Variable Reluctance Sensor There are two types of CMP sensors: the three pin connector Hall-effect type sensor (Figure 22) and the two pin connector variable reluctance sensor (Figure 23). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4585 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolt. 3 Remove the sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4589 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4590 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (INTEGRATED IGNITION SYSTEMS) Three Different Types Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensors The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The trigger wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L ten cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the trigger wheel, the CKP indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to fixed reference (Figure 25). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4591 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the exhaust manifold. 2. Remove the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolt. 3 Remove the sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Service Precautions Ignition Cable: Service Precautions CAUTION: ^ Do not pull on the ignition wire directly, as the wire may separate from the connector inside the spark plug boot. ^ Correct installation of the ignition wires is critical to engine operation. If one spark plug wire is not correctly installed at either the spark plug or the ignition coil, both spark plugs connected to the ignition coil may not fire under load. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4595 Ignition Cable: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Grasp the spark plug boot firmly and with a twisting-pulling motion, disconnect the ignition wires from the spark plugs. CAUTION: Do not pull on the ignition wire directly, as the wire may separate from the connector inside the spark plug boot. 2. Disconnect the ignition wires from the ignition coil and remove the wires. INSTALLATION 1. Connect the ignition wires to the correct ignition coil terminals. CAUTION: Correct installation of the ignition wires is critical to engine operation. If one spark plug wire is not correctly installed at either the spark plug or the ignition coil, both spark plugs connected to the ignition coil may not fire under load. NOTE: ^ Whenever an ignition wire is reinstalled or a new one is installed, apply Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric compound to the interior surface of the ignition wire boot. ^ Before installing the ignition wires, inspect the ignition wires for any visible damage; install new ignition wires if necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4596 2. Connect the ignition wires to the correct spark plugs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips Ignition Coil: Technical Service Bulletins Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips TSB 05-22-8 11/14/05 WDS COP KIT DIAGNOSTIC TIPS - COIL ON PLUG (COP) IGNITION SYSTEMS - ENGINE MISFIRE OR ROUGH RUNNING FORD: 1996-1999 Taurus SHO 1998-2006 Crown Victoria, Mustang 2000 Taurus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2003-2006 Focus 2004-2006 Taurus 2005-2006 Five Hundred, Freestyle 1997-2006 E-Series, Expedition, F-150 1999-2006 F-Super Duty 2000-2005 Excursion, F-53 2001-2006 Escape 2002-2005 Explorer 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1998-2002 Continental 1998-2006 Town Car 2000-2006 LS 1998-2006 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator MERCURY: 1998-2006 Grand Marquis 2000 Sable 2004-2005 Sable 2005-2006 Montego 2002-2005 Mountaineer 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 04-16-01 to update the vehicle applications and model years. NOTE FOLLOW THIS TSB PROCEDURE ONLY IF THERE ARE NO SPECIFIC MISFIRE TSBs/SSMs RELEASED FOR THE VEHICLE SYMPTOM BEING EXPERIENCED. ISSUE Approximately 50% of coil on plug (COP) coils returned for warranty do not have a problem. ACTION The misfiring cylinder must be identified through Self-Test misfire codes or through WDS Power Balance. Rule out base engine problems, rule out fuel problems, and then look at ignition problems (be sure to rule out coil primary circuit issues). Once the above steps have been completed, and the issue is in the secondary part of the ignition system, the oscilloscope procedure outlined in this TSB can isolate the difference between a coil or spark plug problem. SERVICE PROCEDURE The optional WDS COP Kit available through Rotunda will provide more accurate diagnosis and help reduce replacement of non-defective parts. The Kit (418-F5528) can be purchased through 1-800-ROTUNDA. The following material will detail the diagnostic steps on WDS to take the guesswork out of misfire diagnosis using the COP Kit. The following Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips > Page 4601 procedure is for cylinder specific misfires and not random misfires. Random misfires have a different root cause and are not covered by this TSB. Misfire Definition: A misfiring cylinder is lacking power relative to the other cylinders. The causes for a cylinder specific misfire could be fuel, spark, or mechanical problems. Perform a thorough visual inspection. If no visible concerns are found use the following WDS tools for misfire diagnosis: ^ Self-test (Check for codes first) Power Balance (Identify the cylinder of concern) ^ Relative Compression (Rule out a possible mechanical issue) ^ Fuel (Make sure fuel injectors are not restricted) ^ Ignition (Make sure spark plugs and coils are working properly) ^ Oscilloscope (Detailed signal analysis) NOTE USE THE ENCYCLOPEDIA BUTTON IN THE LOWER LEFT CORNER OF THE SCREEN FOR DETAILED INFORMATION ON THE WDS TOOL BEING DISPLAYED. If there is a self-test code identifying a particular cylinder then you just need to determine if it is a fuel, ignition, or possibly a mechanical problem. Proceed to Step 2 after running Relative Compression to rule out any mechanical issues. If there is no self-test code and the customer concern is a miss, proceed to Step 1. Step 1: (Select Toolbox Icon, then Powertrain, then Power Balance) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips > Page 4602 The cylinder specific miss has to be identified as shown in the example in Figure 2 in order to proceed with the remaining steps. If the miss does not occur at idle (in the bay), try to brake torque the engine. This extra loading should reproduce the miss in the bay. If the miss cannot be reproduced during brake torque, select Relative Compression under Powertrain on WDS before going on a road test to rule out mechanical problems. If Relative Compression shows a problem then the base engine issue must be serviced. If Relative Compression results are good (Figure 3), road test under as many different driving conditions as possible until the miss occurs on Power Balance. Some misses may be very intermiffent so be patient and concentrate on steady load conditions. Once a cylinder dropout is identified proceed to Step 2. Step 2: (Select Toolbox Icon, then Powertrain, then Fuel System Test) Run Fuel System Test on WDS to determine if there may be a fuel problem. After completing fuel Pressure/Leakdown test, select Injector flow to isolate Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips > Page 4603 a restricted injector as shown in Figure 4. If all the injectors are within specification, proceed to Step 3. Step 3: (Select Toolbox Icon, then Powertrain, then Ignition System Test) Run Ignition System Test on WDS to determine if there is an ignition problem. Look at both duration (DUR) and kilovolts (KV) and look for values that standout from the rest as shown in Figure 5 and Figure 6. NOTE LIVE DISPLAY HAS TO AVERAGE IGNITION VALUES BECAUSE THERE IS TOO MUCH DATA TO DISPLAY. MAKE A CAPTURE TO VIEW EACH ENGINE EVENT WITHOUT AVERAGING. THIS CAN BE HELPFUL WHEN THE PROBLEM IS INTERMITTENT. IF THE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips > Page 4604 MISS IS EXTREMELY INTERMITTENT AND DOES NOT SHOW UP IN IGNITION, PROCEED TO STEP 4. If either spark duration or peak KV on the Red Probe (Suspect Cylinder) are offset from the values displayed on the Black Probe (Known Good Cylinder) then the problem is in the ignition system. Rule out coil primary circuit issues before proceeding to coil secondary issues such as the spark plug , coil boot, or possibly the coil. Use the WDS Oscilloscope with the COP kit to determine if the issue is the coil or the spark plug. Step 4: (Select Toolbox, then Oscilloscope) WARNING SECONDARY IGNITION VOLTAGES ARE VERY HIGH. KEEP HANDS AND TOOLS AWAY FROM THE END OF THE COIL THAT SUPPLIES THE SPARK. SET-UP: With the engine off, pull the suspect coil from the cylinder well and turn it upside down so the coil cannot spark to any other surface as shown in Figure 1. Wrap a clean shop cloth around the hard shell of the coil to help keep the coil propped up and stable. CAUTION THE COIL BOOT CAN BE DAMAGED IF THE COIL SPARKS TO ANOTHER SURFACE DURING THIS PROCEDURE. Keep the coil connected to the harness and leave the WDS COP clip attached to the coil. Route the coil clip wire and cable away from the coil being tested as well as other coils to avoid noise interference. Disconnect the injector of the cylinder being tested so raw fuel is not washing the cylinder. This is a stress test for the coil. The type of waveform displayed on the oscilloscope will show whether a coil or the plug is the problem if all previous steps have been followed. Keep hands and tools away from the end of the coil that supplies the spark. COP Stress Test Procedure: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips > Page 4605 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips > Page 4606 Go to the Oscilloscope Tool and select Channel 3, then select Auto, then select COP_STRESS_TEST_RED. This pre-configured setting will zoom-in on the peak firing of the coil being tested. Start the engine and be sure the coil is not sparking to any surface. If the coil is sparking to other surfaces, turn the engine off immediately and readjust the coil so it cannot spark to any other surface. Restart the engine and touch the Red Man icon to start the oscilloscope. All settings are pre-configured and no adjustments are necessary. Compare the waveform you get with the examples provided in Figures 7, 8, and 9). Figure 7 is a good waveform. If your waveform is similar to Figure 7 the coil is working correctly. Suspect the spark plug. Figure 8 and Figure 9 are examples of problem coils. Replace the coil if the waveform is similar to Figures 8 or 9. The coil is causing the misfire when the peak firing appears like those shown in Figures 8 and 9. Notice the difference in the peak-firing signal when compared to the good peak signal in Figure 7. Figure 9 shows a more dramatic fault in the peak failure. Most root causes of misfire issues can be identified quickly using the steps outlined above. Some misfire issues can be difficult making the oscilloscope an important part of your diagnostic toolbox. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 05-13-4 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil on Plug (CoP) #1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil on Plug (CoP) #1 > Page 4609 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil on Plug (CoP) #1 > Page 4610 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil on Plug (CoP) #1 > Page 4611 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil on Plug (CoP) #1 > Page 4612 Ignition Coil: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil on Plug (CoP) #1 > Page 4613 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4614 Ignition Coil: Service Precautions CAUTION: Correct installation of the ignition wires is critical to engine operation. If one spark plug wire is not correctly installed at either the spark plugs or the ignition coil, both spark plugs connected to the ignition coil may not fire under load. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4615 Ignition Coil: Description and Operation Coil Pack Horizontal Connector Six Tower Coil Pack Series 5 Six Tower Coil Pack Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4616 Four - Tower Coil Packs Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4617 Series 5 Four Tower Coil Pack Coil packs come in four tower, Series 5 four tower, six-tower horizontal connector and Series 5 Six tower models. Two adjacent coil towers share a common coil and are called a matched pair. For six-tower coil pack (six cylinder) applications the matched pairs are 1 and 5, 2 and 6, and 3 and 4 (Figure 56)and (Figure 57). For four-tower coil pack (four cylinder) applications the matched pairs are 1 and 4, and 2 and 3 (Figure 58) and (Figure 59). When the coil is fired by the PCM, spark is delivered through the matched pair towers to their respective spark plugs. The spark plugs are fired simultaneously and are paired so that as one fires on the compression stroke, the other spark plug fires on the exhaust stroke. The next time the coil is fired the situation is reversed. The next pair of spark plugs fire according to the engine firing order. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coil Bracket Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Coil Bracket REMOVAL 1. Remove the ignition coil. 2. Remove the bracket. 1 Remove the Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) tube bracket bolt. 2 Remove the three bolts and remove the ignition coil bracket. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coil Bracket > Page 4620 Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Coil Pack REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Disconnect the ignition wires. 3. Disconnect the ignition coil electrical connectors. 4. Remove the bolts and remove the ignition coil. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. CAUTION: Correct installation of the ignition wires is critical to engine operation. If one spark plug wire is not correctly installed at either the spark plugs or the ignition coil, both spark plugs connected to the ignition coil may not fire under load. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations Diagram 700-01-00-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4624 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4625 Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4626 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4630 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Knock Sensor Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS) The Knock Sensor (KS) (Figure 35) is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4631 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Disconnect the KS electrical connector and remove the connector from the mounting bracket. NOTE: The Knock Sensor (KS) is located on the RH side of the cylinder block. 3. Remove the nut and the KS. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations Diagram 700-01-00-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4636 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4637 Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4638 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4643 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4644 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR The Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston No.1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and used for synchronizing the firing of sequential fuel injectors. The Coil On Plug (COP) Ignition applications also use the CMP signal to select the proper ignition coil to fire. The input circuit to the PCM is referred to as the CMP input or circuit. Typical Hall-Effect Sensor Typical Variable Reluctance Sensor There are two types of CMP sensors: the three pin connector Hall-effect type sensor (Figure 22) and the two pin connector variable reluctance sensor (Figure 23). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4645 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolt. 3 Remove the sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4649 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4650 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (INTEGRATED IGNITION SYSTEMS) Three Different Types Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensors The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The trigger wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L ten cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the trigger wheel, the CKP indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to fixed reference (Figure 25). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4651 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the exhaust manifold. 2. Remove the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolt. 3 Remove the sensor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the upper steering column shroud. 3. Remove the screws and the lower steering column shroud. 4. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. 5. Using a small tool, depress the ignition lock cylinder release button and pull the ignition lock cylinder out. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4659 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Knock Sensor Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS) The Knock Sensor (KS) (Figure 35) is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4660 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Disconnect the KS electrical connector and remove the connector from the mounting bracket. NOTE: The Knock Sensor (KS) is located on the RH side of the cylinder block. 3. Remove the nut and the KS. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Spark Plug Gap Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Gap Spark Plug Gap ................................................................................................................................... .................................................. 1.3 mm (0.051 inch) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Spark Plug Gap > Page 4665 Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Torque Spark Plug Torque ............................................................................................................................... ...................................................... 15 Nm (11 ft lbs) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4666 Spark Plug: Application and ID Spark Plug Type Cylinders 1 And 3 ..................................................................................................... ................................................................ AZFS-32F Spark Plug Type Cylinders 2 And 4 .................. ................................................................................................................................................ AZFS-32FE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4667 Spark Plug: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the spark plug wires from the spark plugs. 2. Remove the spark plugs. NOTE: ^ If an original spark plug is reused, install it in the same cylinder from which it was removed. New spark plugs can be used in any cylinder. ^ Use compressed air to remove any foreign material from the spark plug well before removing the spark plugs. 3. Inspect the spark plugs. 4. Clean the spark plugs with a wire brush or a professional spark plug cleaner (follow the manufacturer's instructions). INSTALLATION 1. Adjust the plug gap as necessary. 2. Install the spark plugs. NOTE: Apply Anti-Seize Lubricant to the lower three threads of the spark plugs. Do not allow lubricant to contaminate the spark plug electrodes or insulator tips. 3. Connect the spark plug wires to the spark plugs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Shift Solenoid: Specifications Solenoid valve body bolts 89 in.lb Solenoid body-to-case bolts 89 in.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL INDICATOR LAMP The Transmission Control Indicator Lamp (TCIL) is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Refer to Transmission Control Switch, PCM Inputs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4688 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4689 Shift Interlock Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4690 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Transmission Control Switch (TCS) The Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (Figures 43 and 44) signals the PCM with key power whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the Transmission Control Indicator Lamp (TCIL) lights when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. The operator of the vehicle controls the position of the TCS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications Digital Transmission Range Sensor: Specifications Park/neutral position (PNP) switch 18 ft.lb Transmission range (TR) sensor bolts 9 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4699 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4700 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4701 Digital Transmission Range Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Special Tools Special Tool(s) Removal 1. Place the vehicle in NEUTRAL. 2. Disconnect the battery cables. 3. Remove the battery and tray. 4. Disconnect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAP) sensor. 5. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4702 6. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 7. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the thermostat housing to gain access to the transmission range (TR) sensor. Remove the thermostat housing. 8. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor. 1. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the TR sensor. Installation 1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position. Install the transmission range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4703 2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts. ^ Connect the electrical connector. 3. Install the thermostat housing. 4. Install the air cleaner assembly. 5. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover. 6. Connect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAF) sensor. 7. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or incorrect routing position. Install the battery and tray. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4704 8. NOTE: When the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, some abnormal drive symptoms can occur while the vehicle relearns its adaptive strategy. The vehicle may need to be driven 160 km (100 miles) or more to relearn the strategy. Connect the battery cables. 9. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should be active only in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored Transmission Speed Sensor: Customer Interest A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored Article No. 02-2-4 02/04/02 TRANSAXLE - CD4E - HARSH AND DELAYED 1-2/2-3 UPSHIFTS - AFTER TRANSAXLE OR TURBINE SHAFT SPEED SENSOR (TSS) REPLACEMENT - POSSIBLE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTC) 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, AND P1744 FORD: 1994-1997 PROBE 1995-2000 CONTOUR 2001-2002 ESCAPE MERCURY: 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR ISSUE Some vehicles equipped with the CD4E transaxle may exhibit harsh and delayed 1-2/2-3 upshifts along with DTCs for gear ratio errors after the Transaxle or Turbine Shaft Speed sensor (TSS) have been replaced. DTCs may include OBD1 codes 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, or OBD II codes P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, and P1744 ACTION If the condition occurred after servicing the Transaxle or TSS, refer to the following TSS Selection Chart and select the correct TSS for the vehicle application. Note that each TSS has the Ford engineering part number on it. Also note that there is a TSS kit that includes an instruction sheet, TSS sensor and correct bolt. SERVICE PROCEDURE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored > Page 4713 If the condition occurred after replacing the Transaxle or TSS, use the TSS Selection Chart and determine the correct sensor for the vehicle. 1. Remove the existing TSS from the CD4E pump body. 2. Reinstall the original TSS sensor, if available, or install the correct TSS as indicated in the Selection Chart. 3. Clear all codes and verify repair. 4. If the condition still exists, follow normal diagnostics as listed in the appropriate model year Workshop Manual. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 501000, 502000, 503000, 504000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored Article No. 02-2-4 02/04/02 TRANSAXLE - CD4E - HARSH AND DELAYED 1-2/2-3 UPSHIFTS - AFTER TRANSAXLE OR TURBINE SHAFT SPEED SENSOR (TSS) REPLACEMENT - POSSIBLE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTC) 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, AND P1744 FORD: 1994-1997 PROBE 1995-2000 CONTOUR 2001-2002 ESCAPE MERCURY: 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR ISSUE Some vehicles equipped with the CD4E transaxle may exhibit harsh and delayed 1-2/2-3 upshifts along with DTCs for gear ratio errors after the Transaxle or Turbine Shaft Speed sensor (TSS) have been replaced. DTCs may include OBD1 codes 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, or OBD II codes P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, and P1744 ACTION If the condition occurred after servicing the Transaxle or TSS, refer to the following TSS Selection Chart and select the correct TSS for the vehicle application. Note that each TSS has the Ford engineering part number on it. Also note that there is a TSS kit that includes an instruction sheet, TSS sensor and correct bolt. SERVICE PROCEDURE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored > Page 4719 If the condition occurred after replacing the Transaxle or TSS, use the TSS Selection Chart and determine the correct sensor for the vehicle. 1. Remove the existing TSS from the CD4E pump body. 2. Reinstall the original TSS sensor, if available, or install the correct TSS as indicated in the Selection Chart. 3. Clear all codes and verify repair. 4. If the condition still exists, follow normal diagnostics as listed in the appropriate model year Workshop Manual. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 501000, 502000, 503000, 504000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4720 Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications Turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb Output shaft speed (OSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 4723 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4726 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4727 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED SENSOR The Output Shaft Speed Sensor (OSS), provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft. The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information generated. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel. 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor. ^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector. ^ Remove the bolt. ^ Inspect the OSS bore. 5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4730 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation. Install the OSS sensor. ^ Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4731 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel. 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor. 5. Remove the TSS sensor. ^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector. ^ Remove the bolt. ^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore. 6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4732 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation. Install the TSS sensor. ^ Connect the TSS electrical connector. 2. Remove the drain pan. 3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 7. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all near positions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Specifications Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications Turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb Output shaft speed (OSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 4739 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4742 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4743 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED SENSOR The Output Shaft Speed Sensor (OSS), provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft. The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information generated. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel. 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor. ^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector. ^ Remove the bolt. ^ Inspect the OSS bore. 5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4746 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation. Install the OSS sensor. ^ Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4747 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel. 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor. 5. Remove the TSS sensor. ^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector. ^ Remove the bolt. ^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore. 6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4748 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation. Install the TSS sensor. ^ Connect the TSS electrical connector. 2. Remove the drain pan. 3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 7. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all near positions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures TSB 04-24-14 12/13/04 FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS 1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis, Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement. ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed. ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs. Verify repair after reprogramming. SERVICE PROCEDURE PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement 1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle. 2. Use WDS if available. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 4753 a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply. b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level. 3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool, such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS. NOTE IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS, GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF. PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD 1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure. 2. Install the new PCM. NOTE IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER. 3. Attempt to start the vehicle. 4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM. 5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639. a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1. b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc. 6. Check for DTC B2900. a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during this procedure. b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7. 7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures. REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement 1. Verify all cables are properly connected. 2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level. 3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level. 4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again. 5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open previous session, and attempt reprogramming again. 6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure. BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure. 1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits. 2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity. NOTE IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 4754 INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC. 3. Connect WDS to vehicle. 4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK. 5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK. 6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK. 7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press TICK. 8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK. 9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK. 10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above". 11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK. 12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed above. Press TICK. 13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens. 14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Shift Solenoid: Specifications Solenoid valve body bolts 89 in.lb Solenoid body-to-case bolts 89 in.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Shift Solenoid: Specifications Solenoid valve body bolts 89 in.lb Solenoid body-to-case bolts 89 in.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band Apply Servo, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Band Apply Servo: Service and Repair Overdrive Servo Special Tool(s) Removal 1. NOTE: Servicing the intermediate/overdrive servo in the vehicle is only recommended in the event of a leak. If servicing is required due to a servo condition, it is necessary to remove and disassemble the transaxle to inspect the intermediate/overdrive band assembly and direct clutch for damage. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. WARNING: The servo is under pressure. Servo and servo cover are under high spring force. Use caution when removing servo cover. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Assemble the special tool. 3. CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver to remove the retaining ring or damage to the case may occur. Use only snap ring pliers to remove the retaining ring. Using the special tool, remove the servo assembly. 1. Install the special tool. 2. Compress the servo assembly by tightening the bolt. 3. Remove the retaining ring. 4. Remove the servo cover assembly. 5. Remove the intermediate and overdrive servo piston and return spring. 6. Wipe the servo piston and the servo cover cap with a lint-free cloth. 7. CAUTION: Do not clean the rubber sealing surfaces of the servo piston and the servo cover cap with cleaning solvent or damage to the sealing surface may result. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band Apply Servo, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4773 Inspect the servo piston for cracks on its pressure surfaces and in the sealing area. Look for damage near the point where the servo piston is attached to the servo rod. 8. Squeeze the servo piston lip for flexibility. If the lip feels brittle, install a new piston. 9. Inspect the servo retainer spring for cracks, breaks or deformation. Installation 1. WARNING: Servo return spring force is very high. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Assemble the special tool. 2. Install the special tool. 3. CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver to install the retaining ring or damage to the case may occur. Use only snap ring pliers to install the retaining ring. NOTE: If the servo cover will not seat deep enough in the bore to install the servo cover retaining ring, use a blunt punch or small hammer and gently tap the cover around the outer edge until the servo cover retaining ring can be installed. Tighten the special tool bolt. ^ Install the servo cover retaining ring. 4. If the case is stamped "WG", install a wide-groove snap ring, or the servo will be damaged. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band Apply Servo, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4774 5. Loosen the special tool bolt. ^ When the spring tension is released, remove the special tool. 6. Lower the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Bell Housing, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Bell Housing: Specifications fide bell housing bolts 30 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Case, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Case: Specifications Transaxle case-to-engine bolts 35 ft.lb Case pressure taps 71 in.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clutch: > 00-18-2 > Sep > 00 > A/T - No Forward Gear Engagement Clutch: Customer Interest A/T - No Forward Gear Engagement Article No. 00-18-2 09/04/00 TRANSAXLE - CD4E - NO FORWARD ENGAGEMENT - FORWARD CLUTCH CYLINDER SNAP RING POSITION - SERVICE TIP FORD: 1994-1997 PROBE 1994-2000 CONTOUR 2001 ESCAPE MERCURY: 1994-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2001 COUGAR ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit no forward gear ranges due to the misalignment of the forward/coast clutch cylinder snap ring with respect to the legs of the forward clutch piston. ACTION During assembly of the forward/coast clutch cylinder, the gap in the select fit retaining ring should be located midway (i.e., 45 degrees) between adjacent legs of the forward clutch piston. Refer to the following Service Procedure for details. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Prior to installing the forward and coast clutch plates into the cylinder, note the location of the four (4) forward piston legs (Figure 1). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clutch: > 00-18-2 > Sep > 00 > A/T - No Forward Gear Engagement > Page 4789 2. Mark the top of the cylinder with a felt tip marker midway between any two adjacent legs (i.e., 45 degrees or 4 external spline teeth from the center of any leg) (Figure 2). NOTE: THE FORWARD PISTON LEGS WILL NO LONGER BE VISIBLE WHEN CLUTCH PACK AND RETAINER IS INSTALLED. 3. Following the Service or Workshop Manual procedure, install the clutch plates. 4. Position the ends of the snap ring such that the gap is aligned with the mark on the top of the cylinder (the 45 degree mark) (Figure 3). 5. Perform end clearance check as required. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clutch: > 00-18-2 > Sep > 00 > A/T - No Forward Gear Engagement > Page 4790 WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 501000, 502000, 503000, 504000, 506000, 597997 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clutch: > 00-18-2 > Sep > 00 > A/T - No Forward Gear Engagement Clutch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - No Forward Gear Engagement Article No. 00-18-2 09/04/00 TRANSAXLE - CD4E - NO FORWARD ENGAGEMENT - FORWARD CLUTCH CYLINDER SNAP RING POSITION - SERVICE TIP FORD: 1994-1997 PROBE 1994-2000 CONTOUR 2001 ESCAPE MERCURY: 1994-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2001 COUGAR ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit no forward gear ranges due to the misalignment of the forward/coast clutch cylinder snap ring with respect to the legs of the forward clutch piston. ACTION During assembly of the forward/coast clutch cylinder, the gap in the select fit retaining ring should be located midway (i.e., 45 degrees) between adjacent legs of the forward clutch piston. Refer to the following Service Procedure for details. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Prior to installing the forward and coast clutch plates into the cylinder, note the location of the four (4) forward piston legs (Figure 1). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clutch: > 00-18-2 > Sep > 00 > A/T - No Forward Gear Engagement > Page 4796 2. Mark the top of the cylinder with a felt tip marker midway between any two adjacent legs (i.e., 45 degrees or 4 external spline teeth from the center of any leg) (Figure 2). NOTE: THE FORWARD PISTON LEGS WILL NO LONGER BE VISIBLE WHEN CLUTCH PACK AND RETAINER IS INSTALLED. 3. Following the Service or Workshop Manual procedure, install the clutch plates. 4. Position the ends of the snap ring such that the gap is aligned with the mark on the top of the cylinder (the 45 degree mark) (Figure 3). 5. Perform end clearance check as required. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clutch: > 00-18-2 > Sep > 00 > A/T - No Forward Gear Engagement > Page 4797 WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 501000, 502000, 503000, 504000, 506000, 597997 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic Transaxle > Differential Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Differential Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Fluid (2.0L) 2.95 pt (US) Use SAE 80W-90 High Perfomance Rear Axle Lubricant F1TZ-19580-B or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSP-M2C197-A. Fill the rear axle 3-5 mm (1/8-3/16 inch) from the bottom of filler hole. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic Transaxle > Differential Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4803 Differential Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Ford Part Name - MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid Ford Part Number - XT-5-QM Ford Specification - MERCON(R) V Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Automatic Transmission Dipstick - Dipstick Tube > Component Information > Specifications Automatic Transmission Dipstick - Dipstick Tube: Specifications Filler tube bolt 10 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drain Plug, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Drain Plug: Specifications Drain plug 20 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage TSB 06-14-4 07/24/06 MERCON ATF IS BEING REPLACED BY MERCON V ATF AS A SERVICE FLUID. FORD: 1980-1997 Crown Victoria 1981-1997 Mustang, Thunderbird 1981-2003 Escort 1986-1993 Festiva 1986-1997 Taurus 1989-1997 Probe 1994-1997 Aspire 1995-2000 Contour 1980-1996 Bronco 1981-2003 F-150 1981-2004 E-Series, F-Super Duty 1983-1996 Ranger 1986-1996 Aerostar 1991-1997 Explorer 1993-2004 F-53 Motorhome Chassis 1995-1998 Windstar 1997-2004 Expedition 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2007 Escape 1987-2000 F-B-Series 2000-2007 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 1980-1997 Town Car 1981-1997 Continental 1993-1997 Mark VIII 1998-2004 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood MERCURY: 1980-1997 Grand Marquis 1981-1997 Cougar 1986-1997 Sable 1987-1999 Tracer 1995-2000 Mystique 1999-2002 Cougar 1993-2002 Villager 1997 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner MERKUR: 1985-1989 XR4TI This article supersedes TSB 01-15-7 to update the vehicle application chart. ISSUE MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid is being replaced by MERCON(R) V as a service fluid. ACTION Beginning immediately all automatic transmission / transaxle applications requiring MERCON(R) can now be serviced using MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V. After July 1, 2007, MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid will no longer be manufactured, therefore, availability of this fluid will only continue for however long it takes to deplete what remains in inventory. SERVICE PROCEDURE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage > Page 4814 Service automatic transmissions requiring MERCON(R) with MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V For proper fluid application on current and past model vehicles equipped with automatic transmissions I transaxles refer to the fluid usage chart. (Figure 1) CAUTION AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS / TRANSAXLES THAT REQUIRE MERCON® V SHOULD STILL ONLY USE MERCON(R) V OR DUAL USAGE FLUID LABELED MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage > Page 4815 CAUTION MERCON(R) SP, MOTORCRAFT PREMIUM AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID AND MOTORCRAFT M5 ATFS ARE UNIQUE FLUIDS AND MUST BE USED IN APPLICATIONS RECOMMENDING THAT PARTICULAR FLUID. USE OF ANY OTHER FLUID MAY CAUSE REDUCED FUNCTIONALITY OR TRANSMISSION DAMAGE. CAUTION THE FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS OF FLUIDS FOR CVT TRANSMISSIONS ARE VERY DIFFERENT THAN THOSE OF OTHER AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUIDS (ATFS). USE OF A FLUID OTHER THAN MOTORCRAFT CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE CHAIN TYPE TRANSMISSION FLUID OR ONE LABELED AS MEETING MERCON(R) C WILL CAUSE FUNCTIONALITY CONCERNS AND INTERNAL TRANSMISSION DAMAGE. CAUTION DO NOT USE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID SUPPLEMENTS, ADDITIVES, TREATMENTS OR CLEANING AGENTS. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Transmission Fluid .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................. 10 Qt 9.5L Note: Approximately Dry Fill Capacity Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4818 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Ford Part Name - MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid Ford Part Number - XT-5-QM Ford Specification - MERCON(R) V Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4819 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Place a suitable container under the transaxle drain plug. 3. NOTE: If an integral problem is suspected, drain the fluid through a paper filter. A small amount of metal or friction particles may be found from normal wear. However, if excessive metal and friction particles are present, internal service will be required. Remove the transaxle drain plug and drain transmission fluid. Installation 1. Install the transaxle drain plug. ^ After the fluid has been drained, clean the drain plug threads and apply a small amount of Pipe Sealant with Teflon 09 D8AZ- 19554-A or XW7Z-19554-AA or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSK-M2G350-A2. 2. Lower the vehicle 3. Add 3.7 liters (3.9 quarts) of MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 4. Start the engine and run through all gears for a total of five minutes at idle. Turn off the engine. 5. Repeat the previous steps to help flush fluid from the torque converter. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Specifications Fluid Filter - A/T: Specifications Transmission filler tube bolt 71 in.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4823 Fluid Filter - A/T: Locations Part 1 Of 7 Transmission Fluid Filter Location Filter is located at exploded view position number 8 internal. See Transmission Disassembly/Assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4824 Special Tool Seal Removal Transmission Filter Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Fluid Line/Hose: Specifications Auxiliary cooler bolts 89 in.lb Cooler tube bracket bolt 18 ft.lb Cooler tube fittings 18 ft.lb Transaxle cooler lines 17 ft.lb Cooler line fitting 30 ft.lb Cooler inlet line 17 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4828 Fluid Line/Hose: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front bumper cover. 2. Disconnect the cooler tubes. 3. Disconnect the front cooler tube. 4. Disconnect and remove the front cooler tube. 5. Disconnect the rear cooler tube. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4829 6. Remove the rear transmission cooler tube bracket bolt and the cooler tube. 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Disconnect and remove the integral to auxiliary cooler tube. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Fill the transaxle to the specified level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Fluid Pan: Specifications Main Control Cover Bolts 20 Nm (15 lb-ft) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Fluid Pump: Specifications Pump assembly bolts 10 ft.lb Pump support bolts 10 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL INDICATOR LAMP The Transmission Control Indicator Lamp (TCIL) is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Refer to Transmission Control Switch, PCM Inputs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4844 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4845 Shift Interlock Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4846 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Transmission Control Switch (TCS) The Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (Figures 43 and 44) signals the PCM with key power whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the Transmission Control Indicator Lamp (TCIL) lights when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. The operator of the vehicle controls the position of the TCS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications Digital Transmission Range Sensor: Specifications Park/neutral position (PNP) switch 18 ft.lb Transmission range (TR) sensor bolts 9 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4854 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4855 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4856 Digital Transmission Range Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Special Tools Special Tool(s) Removal 1. Place the vehicle in NEUTRAL. 2. Disconnect the battery cables. 3. Remove the battery and tray. 4. Disconnect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAP) sensor. 5. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4857 6. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 7. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the thermostat housing to gain access to the transmission range (TR) sensor. Remove the thermostat housing. 8. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor. 1. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the TR sensor. Installation 1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position. Install the transmission range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4858 2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts. ^ Connect the electrical connector. 3. Install the thermostat housing. 4. Install the air cleaner assembly. 5. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover. 6. Connect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAF) sensor. 7. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or incorrect routing position. Install the battery and tray. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4859 8. NOTE: When the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, some abnormal drive symptoms can occur while the vehicle relearns its adaptive strategy. The vehicle may need to be driven 160 km (100 miles) or more to relearn the strategy. Connect the battery cables. 9. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should be active only in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored Transmission Speed Sensor: Customer Interest A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored Article No. 02-2-4 02/04/02 TRANSAXLE - CD4E - HARSH AND DELAYED 1-2/2-3 UPSHIFTS - AFTER TRANSAXLE OR TURBINE SHAFT SPEED SENSOR (TSS) REPLACEMENT - POSSIBLE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTC) 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, AND P1744 FORD: 1994-1997 PROBE 1995-2000 CONTOUR 2001-2002 ESCAPE MERCURY: 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR ISSUE Some vehicles equipped with the CD4E transaxle may exhibit harsh and delayed 1-2/2-3 upshifts along with DTCs for gear ratio errors after the Transaxle or Turbine Shaft Speed sensor (TSS) have been replaced. DTCs may include OBD1 codes 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, or OBD II codes P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, and P1744 ACTION If the condition occurred after servicing the Transaxle or TSS, refer to the following TSS Selection Chart and select the correct TSS for the vehicle application. Note that each TSS has the Ford engineering part number on it. Also note that there is a TSS kit that includes an instruction sheet, TSS sensor and correct bolt. SERVICE PROCEDURE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored > Page 4868 If the condition occurred after replacing the Transaxle or TSS, use the TSS Selection Chart and determine the correct sensor for the vehicle. 1. Remove the existing TSS from the CD4E pump body. 2. Reinstall the original TSS sensor, if available, or install the correct TSS as indicated in the Selection Chart. 3. Clear all codes and verify repair. 4. If the condition still exists, follow normal diagnostics as listed in the appropriate model year Workshop Manual. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 501000, 502000, 503000, 504000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored Article No. 02-2-4 02/04/02 TRANSAXLE - CD4E - HARSH AND DELAYED 1-2/2-3 UPSHIFTS - AFTER TRANSAXLE OR TURBINE SHAFT SPEED SENSOR (TSS) REPLACEMENT - POSSIBLE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTC) 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, AND P1744 FORD: 1994-1997 PROBE 1995-2000 CONTOUR 2001-2002 ESCAPE MERCURY: 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR ISSUE Some vehicles equipped with the CD4E transaxle may exhibit harsh and delayed 1-2/2-3 upshifts along with DTCs for gear ratio errors after the Transaxle or Turbine Shaft Speed sensor (TSS) have been replaced. DTCs may include OBD1 codes 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, or OBD II codes P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, and P1744 ACTION If the condition occurred after servicing the Transaxle or TSS, refer to the following TSS Selection Chart and select the correct TSS for the vehicle application. Note that each TSS has the Ford engineering part number on it. Also note that there is a TSS kit that includes an instruction sheet, TSS sensor and correct bolt. SERVICE PROCEDURE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored > Page 4874 If the condition occurred after replacing the Transaxle or TSS, use the TSS Selection Chart and determine the correct sensor for the vehicle. 1. Remove the existing TSS from the CD4E pump body. 2. Reinstall the original TSS sensor, if available, or install the correct TSS as indicated in the Selection Chart. 3. Clear all codes and verify repair. 4. If the condition still exists, follow normal diagnostics as listed in the appropriate model year Workshop Manual. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 501000, 502000, 503000, 504000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4875 Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications Turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb Output shaft speed (OSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 4878 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4881 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4882 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED SENSOR The Output Shaft Speed Sensor (OSS), provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft. The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information generated. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel. 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor. ^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector. ^ Remove the bolt. ^ Inspect the OSS bore. 5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4885 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation. Install the OSS sensor. ^ Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4886 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel. 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor. 5. Remove the TSS sensor. ^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector. ^ Remove the bolt. ^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore. 6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4887 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation. Install the TSS sensor. ^ Connect the TSS electrical connector. 2. Remove the drain pan. 3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 7. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all near positions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4892 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4893 Shift Interlock Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4894 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Shift Solenoid: Specifications Solenoid valve body bolts 89 in.lb Solenoid body-to-case bolts 89 in.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Specifications Shifter A/T: Specifications Gearshift assembly bolt 89 in.lb Nuts selector lever 80 in.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4901 Shifter A/T: Service and Repair Selector Lever Removal and Installation NOTE: LH drive is shown, RH drive is similar. 1. Remove the multifunction switch. 2. Disconnect the gearshift cable. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the three bolts and the gearshift lever assembly. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Shift Cable: Specifications Gearshift cable bracket bolts 17 ft.lb Gearshift cable nuts 89 in.lb Shift cable bracket bolts 17 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4906 Shift Cable: Adjustments Selector Lever Cable Adjustment Special Tool(s) 1. Remove the upper steering column shroud. 2. Remove the lower steering column shroud. 1. Remove the screws. 2. Remove the lower steering column shroud. 3. Position a feeler gauge between the gearshift lever selector and the gearshift lever detent. 4. Place the gearshift lever in the DRIVE position and hang a 1.4 kg (3 lb.) weight from the gearshift lever. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4907 5. Loosen the gearshift cable adjuster to adjust the cable then tighten. 6. Install the lower steering column shroud. 1. Position the lower steering column shroud. 2. Install the screws. 7. Install the upper steering column shroud. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4908 Shift Cable: Service and Repair Selector Lever Cable Special Tool(s) Removal NOTE: LH drive is shown, RH drive is similar. 1. Remove the upper steering column shroud. 2. Remove the lower steering column shroud. 1. Remove the screws. 2. Remove the lower steering column shroud. 3. Disconnect the gearshift cable from the steering column bracket. 1. Disconnect the gearshift cable from the gearshift lever. 2. Disconnect the gearshift cable from the steering column bracket. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4909 4. Remove the gearshift cable nuts. 5. Detach the gearshift cable from the transaxle shifter lever. 6. Remove the bolts. 7. Remove the gearshift cable. Installation NOTE: LH drive is shown RH drive is similar. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4910 1. Install the gearshift cable. 2. Position the gearshift cable bracket and install the bolts. 3. Connect the gearshift cable to the transaxle shifter lever. 4. Install the gearshift cable nuts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4911 5. Connect the gearshift cable to the gearshift lever. 1. Attach the gearshift cable to the steering column bracket. 2. Connect the gearshift cable to the gearshift lever. 6. Position a feeler gauge between the gearshift lever selector and the gearshift lever detent. 7. Place the gearshift lever in the DRIVE position and hang a 1.4 kg (3 lb.) weight from the gearshift lever. 8. Loosen the gearshift cable adjuster to adjust the cable then tighten. 9. Install the lower steering column shroud. 1. Position the lower steering column shroud. 2. Install the screws. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4912 10. Install the upper steering column shroud. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Specifications Torque Converter: Specifications Torque converter nuts 27 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T CD4E - Cold Weather Transmission Failure Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T CD4E - Cold Weather Transmission Failure TSB 09-25-4 12/28/09 CD4E TRANSMISSION FAILURE - REPLACE OR INSTALL TRANSMISSION FLUID COOLER COLD WEATHER BYPASS KIT FORD: 2001-2008 Escape MERCURY: 2001-2008 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 4-14-1 to update the model year coverage, Part List and Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2001-2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a CD4E transmission may experience a transmission failure due to inadequate lube flow during warm up in cold weather. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Follow the Workshop Manual, Section 307-01 service procedure to repair the transmission. When overhauling or replacing a CD4E transmission, always install a new cold weather transmission fluid bypass kit, even if not previously equipped. Do not flush or back flush existing transmission cooler bypass valve system or cooler tube system. Follow instruction sheets included in the new Cold Weather Transmission Fluid Cooler Bypass Kit. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT092504 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual Performed As Actual Time Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7K177 55 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T CD4E - Cold Weather Transmission Failure > Page 4920 Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Cooler Flushing Service Tips Article No. 03-14-8 07/21/03 TRANSMISSION - NEW TRANSMISSION COOLER FLUSHER - SERVICE TIPS FORD: 1992-1997 CROWN VICTORIA, PROBE, THUNDERBIRD 1992-2003 ESCORT, MUSTANG, TAURUS 1994-1997 ASPIRE 1995-2000 CONTOUR 2000-2003 FOCUS 2002-2003 THUNDERBIRD 1992-1996 BRONCO 1992-1997 AEROSTAR, F SUPER DUTY, F-250 HD, F-350 1992-1999 F-250 LD 1992-2003 ECONOLINE, EXPLORER, F-150, RANGER 1995-2003 WINDSTAR 1997-2003 EXPEDITION 1999-2003 SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2003 EXCURSION 2001-2003 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT LINCOLN: 1992-1997 TOWN CAR 1992-2002 CONTINENTAL 1993-1998 MARK VIII 2000-2003 LS 1998-2003 NAVIGATOR 2002-2003 BLACKWOOD 2003 AVIATOR MERCURY: 1992-1997 COUGAR, GRAND MARQUIS 1992-2000 TRACER 1992-2003 SABLE 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR 1993-2002 VILLAGER 1997-2003 MOUNTAINEER This article supersedes TSB 00-1-5. ISSUE The number one cause for repeat transmission repairs is that contamination from the transmission cooler system (lines and tank) will work their way back into the rebuilt or new transmission. For this reason a new transmission cooler flusher has been released, "Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher" Rotunda Tool number 22-00001. ACTION The transmission cooling system (cooler and lines) MUST be flushed every time the transmission is overhauled or replaced in order to minimize the likelihood of repeat repairs. The use of this new "Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher" (222-00001) is the most effective way to remove contamination from its cooling system. Refer to the following Service Procedure and Equipment instructions (supplied with the "Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher"). SERVICE PROCEDURE Prior methods of cooler flushing have not obtained the level of cooler cleaning and contaminant removal that is required to prevent repeat repairs. The "Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher" uses heated Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) and a pulsating action to loosen system contamination. Previous equipment used solvents to clean & flush coolers, lines and torque-converters. There are 2 issues with this method: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T CD4E - Cold Weather Transmission Failure > Page 4921 ^ Residual solvent contamination can cause damage to friction bonding materials within the transmission (Clutches and Bands). ^ Lack of fluid heating and agitation prevents this method from completely removing contamination from lines, in-radiator coolers and auxiliary coolers. Aerosol Solvents should never be used for several reasons. ^ They do not provide the volume necessary to remove heavy contaminants. ^ They evaporate quickly and essentially leave contaminants in pockets, bends, or wherever they are as the solvent dries. NOTE YOU MUST IDENTIFY THE RETURN COOLER LINE TO START THE BACK FLUSHING PROCEDURE. A quick way to identify the return cooler line (fluid coming out of the cooler and returning to the transmission) is to locate the return cooler line fitting on the transmission case. Refer to the following lists: Rear Wheel Drive ^ TORQSHIFT, 4R100, E40D, C6 - The REAR transmission case filling receives the return line. ^ 4R70W, AODE, AOD - The TOP transmission case filling receives the return line. ^ A4LD, 4R44/55E, 5R55E, 5R55N, 5R55W, 5R55S - The TOP transmission case filling receives the return line. Front Wheel Drive ^ CD4E - The REAR or Pump End transaxle case fitting receives the return line. ^ 4F27E - The REAR or Cover End transaxle case fitting receives the return line. ^ AXOD, AXODE, AX4S, AX4N, 4F50N - The BOTTOM transaxle cooler line fitting receives the return line. NOTE IF AN IN-LINE FILTER HAS BEEN INSTALLED IN THE COOLER LINE, IT MUST BE REMOVED BEFORE FLUSHING THE COOLER OR COOLER LINES. Purge the cooler and cooler line before flushing: Located on the "Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher" is a fluid transfer and purge valve. This valve can be used to purge the cooler and cooler lines of contaminated fluid before starting the back flush procedure of the fluid cooling system (refer to step 5a of this Service Procedure or Equipment instructions, supplied with the "Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher"). Flush Procedure 1. Check and top off fluid level of the "Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher" tank with transmission fluid. 2. Allow the fluid in the flusher 15-30 minutes to heat up to 140° F (60° C) before using. 3. Install line adapters into the transmission cooler lines. 4. Attach the flusher's blue line to the transmission return cooler line quick disconnect. 5. Attach the flusher's red line to the transmission outlet cooler line quick disconnect. a. Follow equipment instructions, to purge cooler lines and cooler prior to starting flushing procedure (using factory installed purge valve and clear hose on "Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher"). 6. Allow the cooling system to back-flush for 10-15 minutes, then flush the cooler in a forward/normal flow direction for an additional 10-15 minutes. For ordering information on this new "Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher" (222-00001), contact Rotunda at 800-ROTUNDA (800-768-8632 or outside U.S. 262-656-5805). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T CD4E - Cold Weather Transmission Failure > Page 4922 CAUTION THIS FLUSHER CANNOT BE USED TO FLUSH COOLERS ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH THE TEMPERATURE BYPASS-TYPE TRANSMISSION COOLER CURRENTLY FOUND IN 1998-2003 CROWN VICTORIA, GRAND MARQUIS, AND TOWN CAR VEHICLES. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 00-1-5 WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4923 Transmission Cooler: Description and Operation Transaxle Cooling All vehicles with automatic transmissions are equipped with a transmission fluid cooler integral to the radiator which cannot be repaired separately. The integral transmission fluid cooler transfers heat from the transmission fluid to the engine coolant. The auxiliary transmission fluid cooler transfers heat from the transmission fluid to the outside air. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Transmission Cooler: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Inspection and Verification 1. Verify the customer's concern by operating the vehicle to duplicate the condition. 2. If the inspection reveals obvious concern(s) that can be readily identified, repair as necessary. 3. Install new components if a fluid leak is found in any of the transaxle cooling components. 4. If the concern(s) remains after the inspection, determine the symptom(s) and go to the following Symptom Chart. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4926 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Auxiliary Transmission Cooler: Service and Repair Auxiliary Auxiliary Transmission Fluid Cooler Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front bumper cover. 2. Disconnect the cooler tubes. 3. Remove the bolts and the auxiliary transmission fluid cooler. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Fill the transaxle to the specified level. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Auxiliary > Page 4929 Transmission Cooler: Service and Repair General Procedures Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning Special Tool(s) CAUTION: Test the Torque Converter Cleaner to make sure that a vigorous fluid flow is present before proceeding. Install a new system filter if flow is weak or contaminated. 1. NOTE: Rubber hoses must be attached to the ends of this fluid cooler tubes to connect them to the cleaner. Connect the cleaner pressure and return lines appropriately. 1. Connect the pressure line to the fluid cooler inlet tube. 2. Connect the return line to the fluid cooler outlet tube. 3. Place the outlet end of the return line in the solvent tank reservoir. 2. NOTE: Cycling the solvent pump on and off will help dislodge contaminants in the cooler system. Switch the solvent pumps on. Allow the solvent to circulate a minimum of five minutes. 3. Switch the solvent pump off. 4. Disconnect the cleaner pressure line at the fluid cooler tube. 5. Using compressed air, blow through the fluid cooler inlet tube until all solvent is removed. 6. Remove the rubber hoses from the fluid cooler tubes. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL INDICATOR LAMP The Transmission Control Indicator Lamp (TCIL) is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Refer to Transmission Control Switch, PCM Inputs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Transmission Control Switch (TCS) The Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (Figures 43 and 44) signals the PCM with key power whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the Transmission Control Indicator Lamp (TCIL) lights when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. The operator of the vehicle controls the position of the TCS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Support Insulator - LH Transaxle Support Insulator LH Special Tool(s) Removal 1. Disconnect the battery cables. 2. Remove the battery and tray. 3. Disconnect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAF) sensor. 4. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4940 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 6. Install the special tools. 7. Remove both electrical connectors from the valve cover to gain access to the engine lifting bracket. 8. Install the special tools. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4941 9. Install the special tools. 10. Remove the wire harness bracket nut and bracket. 11. Position the wire harness bracket out of the way and remove the spacer. 12. Remove the upper transaxle mount plate assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4942 13. Disassemble the upper transaxle mount plate assembly. ^ Remove the bolt, nut, and bottom mount plate. 14. Remove the top and bottom mount cups. Installation 1. Assemble the upper transaxle mount plate assembly using a new mount. ^ Install the top and bottom mount cups. 2. Install the bottom mount plate, bolt and nut. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4943 3. Install the upper transaxle mount plate assembly. 4. Install the spacer. 5. Install the wire harness bracket and nut. 6. Remove the special tool. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4944 7. Remove the special tool. 8. Remove the special tool. 9. Connect the electrical connectors to the valve cover. 10. Install the air cleaner assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4945 11. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover. 12. Connect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAP) sensor. 13. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or incorrect routing position. Install the battery and tray. 14. NOTE: When the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, some abnormal drive symptoms can occur while the vehicle relearns its adaptive strategy. The vehicle may need to be driven 160 km (100 miles) or more to relearn the strategy. Connect the battery cables. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4946 Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower Rear Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower Rear Removal 1. Disconnect the battery cables. 2. Remove the battery tray. 3. Disconnect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAF) sensor. 4. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover. 5. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 6. Remove the bolts from the rack. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4947 7. Remove the bolts and nuts from the mount, and remove the mount. Installation 1. NOTE: Prior to tightening the mount nuts install the mount bolt for correct alignment. Install a new mount and bolts. 1. Install the mount. 2. Loosely install the bolt for correct alignment. 3. Install the nuts and bolt. 2. Install the bolts to the rack. 3. Install the air cleaner assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4948 4. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover. 5. Connect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAP) sensor. 6. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray cheek the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or incorrect routing position. Install the battery and tray. 7. NOTE: When the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, some abnormal drive symptoms can occur while the vehicle relearns its adaptive strategy. The vehicle may need to be driven 160 km (100 miles) or more to relearn the strategy. Connect the battery cables. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4949 Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower Front Transaxle Support Insulator Lower, Front Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the splash shield. 3. Remove the cross brace. 4. Remove the cross brace. 5. Remove the top and bottom mount cups. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4950 6. Remove the rubber mount. Installation 1. Install a new rubber mount. 2. Install the top and bottom mount cups. 3. Install the cross brace. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4951 4. Install the cross brace. 5. Install the splash shield. 6. Lower the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications Digital Transmission Range Sensor: Specifications Park/neutral position (PNP) switch 18 ft.lb Transmission range (TR) sensor bolts 9 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4955 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4956 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4957 Digital Transmission Range Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Special Tools Special Tool(s) Removal 1. Place the vehicle in NEUTRAL. 2. Disconnect the battery cables. 3. Remove the battery and tray. 4. Disconnect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAP) sensor. 5. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4958 6. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 7. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the thermostat housing to gain access to the transmission range (TR) sensor. Remove the thermostat housing. 8. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor. 1. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the TR sensor. Installation 1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position. Install the transmission range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4959 2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts. ^ Connect the electrical connector. 3. Install the thermostat housing. 4. Install the air cleaner assembly. 5. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover. 6. Connect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAF) sensor. 7. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or incorrect routing position. Install the battery and tray. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4960 8. NOTE: When the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, some abnormal drive symptoms can occur while the vehicle relearns its adaptive strategy. The vehicle may need to be driven 160 km (100 miles) or more to relearn the strategy. Connect the battery cables. 9. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should be active only in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored Transmission Speed Sensor: Customer Interest A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored Article No. 02-2-4 02/04/02 TRANSAXLE - CD4E - HARSH AND DELAYED 1-2/2-3 UPSHIFTS - AFTER TRANSAXLE OR TURBINE SHAFT SPEED SENSOR (TSS) REPLACEMENT - POSSIBLE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTC) 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, AND P1744 FORD: 1994-1997 PROBE 1995-2000 CONTOUR 2001-2002 ESCAPE MERCURY: 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR ISSUE Some vehicles equipped with the CD4E transaxle may exhibit harsh and delayed 1-2/2-3 upshifts along with DTCs for gear ratio errors after the Transaxle or Turbine Shaft Speed sensor (TSS) have been replaced. DTCs may include OBD1 codes 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, or OBD II codes P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, and P1744 ACTION If the condition occurred after servicing the Transaxle or TSS, refer to the following TSS Selection Chart and select the correct TSS for the vehicle application. Note that each TSS has the Ford engineering part number on it. Also note that there is a TSS kit that includes an instruction sheet, TSS sensor and correct bolt. SERVICE PROCEDURE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored > Page 4969 If the condition occurred after replacing the Transaxle or TSS, use the TSS Selection Chart and determine the correct sensor for the vehicle. 1. Remove the existing TSS from the CD4E pump body. 2. Reinstall the original TSS sensor, if available, or install the correct TSS as indicated in the Selection Chart. 3. Clear all codes and verify repair. 4. If the condition still exists, follow normal diagnostics as listed in the appropriate model year Workshop Manual. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 501000, 502000, 503000, 504000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored Article No. 02-2-4 02/04/02 TRANSAXLE - CD4E - HARSH AND DELAYED 1-2/2-3 UPSHIFTS - AFTER TRANSAXLE OR TURBINE SHAFT SPEED SENSOR (TSS) REPLACEMENT - POSSIBLE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTC) 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, AND P1744 FORD: 1994-1997 PROBE 1995-2000 CONTOUR 2001-2002 ESCAPE MERCURY: 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR ISSUE Some vehicles equipped with the CD4E transaxle may exhibit harsh and delayed 1-2/2-3 upshifts along with DTCs for gear ratio errors after the Transaxle or Turbine Shaft Speed sensor (TSS) have been replaced. DTCs may include OBD1 codes 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, or OBD II codes P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, and P1744 ACTION If the condition occurred after servicing the Transaxle or TSS, refer to the following TSS Selection Chart and select the correct TSS for the vehicle application. Note that each TSS has the Ford engineering part number on it. Also note that there is a TSS kit that includes an instruction sheet, TSS sensor and correct bolt. SERVICE PROCEDURE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored > Page 4975 If the condition occurred after replacing the Transaxle or TSS, use the TSS Selection Chart and determine the correct sensor for the vehicle. 1. Remove the existing TSS from the CD4E pump body. 2. Reinstall the original TSS sensor, if available, or install the correct TSS as indicated in the Selection Chart. 3. Clear all codes and verify repair. 4. If the condition still exists, follow normal diagnostics as listed in the appropriate model year Workshop Manual. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 501000, 502000, 503000, 504000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4976 Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications Turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb Output shaft speed (OSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 4979 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4982 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4983 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED SENSOR The Output Shaft Speed Sensor (OSS), provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft. The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information generated. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel. 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor. ^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector. ^ Remove the bolt. ^ Inspect the OSS bore. 5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4986 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation. Install the OSS sensor. ^ Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4987 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel. 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor. 5. Remove the TSS sensor. ^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector. ^ Remove the bolt. ^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore. 6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4988 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation. Install the TSS sensor. ^ Connect the TSS electrical connector. 2. Remove the drain pan. 3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 7. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all near positions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Turbine Shaft, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Turbine Shaft: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored Turbine Shaft: Customer Interest A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored Article No. 02-2-4 02/04/02 TRANSAXLE - CD4E - HARSH AND DELAYED 1-2/2-3 UPSHIFTS - AFTER TRANSAXLE OR TURBINE SHAFT SPEED SENSOR (TSS) REPLACEMENT - POSSIBLE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTC) 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, AND P1744 FORD: 1994-1997 PROBE 1995-2000 CONTOUR 2001-2002 ESCAPE MERCURY: 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR ISSUE Some vehicles equipped with the CD4E transaxle may exhibit harsh and delayed 1-2/2-3 upshifts along with DTCs for gear ratio errors after the Transaxle or Turbine Shaft Speed sensor (TSS) have been replaced. DTCs may include OBD1 codes 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, or OBD II codes P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, and P1744 ACTION If the condition occurred after servicing the Transaxle or TSS, refer to the following TSS Selection Chart and select the correct TSS for the vehicle application. Note that each TSS has the Ford engineering part number on it. Also note that there is a TSS kit that includes an instruction sheet, TSS sensor and correct bolt. SERVICE PROCEDURE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Turbine Shaft, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Turbine Shaft: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored > Page 4997 If the condition occurred after replacing the Transaxle or TSS, use the TSS Selection Chart and determine the correct sensor for the vehicle. 1. Remove the existing TSS from the CD4E pump body. 2. Reinstall the original TSS sensor, if available, or install the correct TSS as indicated in the Selection Chart. 3. Clear all codes and verify repair. 4. If the condition still exists, follow normal diagnostics as listed in the appropriate model year Workshop Manual. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 501000, 502000, 503000, 504000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Turbine Shaft, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Turbine Shaft: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored Turbine Shaft: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored Article No. 02-2-4 02/04/02 TRANSAXLE - CD4E - HARSH AND DELAYED 1-2/2-3 UPSHIFTS - AFTER TRANSAXLE OR TURBINE SHAFT SPEED SENSOR (TSS) REPLACEMENT - POSSIBLE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTC) 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, AND P1744 FORD: 1994-1997 PROBE 1995-2000 CONTOUR 2001-2002 ESCAPE MERCURY: 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR ISSUE Some vehicles equipped with the CD4E transaxle may exhibit harsh and delayed 1-2/2-3 upshifts along with DTCs for gear ratio errors after the Transaxle or Turbine Shaft Speed sensor (TSS) have been replaced. DTCs may include OBD1 codes 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, or OBD II codes P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, and P1744 ACTION If the condition occurred after servicing the Transaxle or TSS, refer to the following TSS Selection Chart and select the correct TSS for the vehicle application. Note that each TSS has the Ford engineering part number on it. Also note that there is a TSS kit that includes an instruction sheet, TSS sensor and correct bolt. SERVICE PROCEDURE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Turbine Shaft, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Turbine Shaft: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored > Page 5003 If the condition occurred after replacing the Transaxle or TSS, use the TSS Selection Chart and determine the correct sensor for the vehicle. 1. Remove the existing TSS from the CD4E pump body. 2. Reinstall the original TSS sensor, if available, or install the correct TSS as indicated in the Selection Chart. 3. Clear all codes and verify repair. 4. If the condition still exists, follow normal diagnostics as listed in the appropriate model year Workshop Manual. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 501000, 502000, 503000, 504000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Valve Body: Specifications Control valve body-to-transfer plate bolts 9 ft.lb Main control cover bolts 15 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5007 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5008 Valve Body: Service and Repair Main Control Valve Body Special Tool(s) Removal 1. Disconnect the battery cables. 2. Remove the battery and tray. 3. Disconnect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAP) sensor. 4. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover. 5. Disconnect the transaxle wiring harness electrical connector, and TR sensor connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5009 6. Disconnect the shift cable. 7. Remove the shift cable and bracket, and position out of the way. 8. Remove the vent tube hose. 9. Raise and support the vehicle. 10. Remove the LH front wheel. 11. Remove the splash shield. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5010 12. NOTE: Remove the bolts in the indicated sequence. Remove the main control cover. 13. Remove the main control cover gasket. 14. NOTE: Remove the bolts in the indicated sequence. Remove the main control valve body bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5011 15. NOTE: Do not damage the manual valve. Lift the main control valve body while disconnecting the manual valve link. 16. Depress the retaining tabs and push the solenoid valve body electrical connector down through the transaxle ease. 17. Make sure the manual valve control lever does not fall out of the main control valve body while removing from the vehicle. Installation 1. Install the manual control valve. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5012 2. NOTE: Inspect the solenoid valve body harness connector O-ring seal for damage. Install a new O-ring seal, if damaged, before installing the connector into the case. Push the solenoid valve body harness connector into the case. 3. Connect the manual valve link to the main control valve body. 4. Install the main control valve body and tighten the bolts in sequence as indicated. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5013 5. Loosen the nut on the ball stud for the manual valve detent lever actuating rod assembly. 6. Remove the manual control lever outer assembly bolt. 7. Using the special tool and pin, align the shifter shaft. 8. Move the manual valve detent lever assembly to the "D" position. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5014 9. Tighten the nut on the ball and remove the special tool. 10. Tighten the detent nut. Rotate back to the "D" position and check the adjustment. 11. Using the special tool and pin, align the shifter shaft. 12. Install the manual control lever. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5015 13. Install and rotate the manual valve detent lever assembly to the neutral position. 1. Low 1 2. Low 2 3. Drive 4. Neutral 5. Reverse 6. Park 14. Install a new gasket on the main control cover. 15. Install the main control cover, and tighten the bolts in sequence as shown. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5016 16. Install the splash shield. 17. Install the LH front wheel. 18. Lower the vehicle. 19. Install the shift cable and bracket. 20. Connect the shift cable. 21. NOTE: Before installing the vent tube hose, clean out any obstructions in the hose using low air pressure. Install the vent tube hose, and clamp. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5017 22. Connect the transaxle harness connector, and the TR sensor connector. 23. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover. 24. Connect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAP) sensor. 25. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or incorrect routing position. Install the battery tray and battery. 26. NOTE: When the battery is disconnected and reconnected, some abnormal drive symptoms can occur while the vehicle relearns its adaptive strategy. The vehicle may need to be driven 160 km (100 miles) or more to relearn the strategy. Connect the battery cables. 27. Check the transmission fluid, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 28. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions. Refill as necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Specifications Clutch Disc: Specifications Clutch disc inner diameter 5.91 in Clutch disc outer diameter 8.86 in Maximum runout 0.027 in Set load 1.102 in Discard thickness from outer face to rivet head Clutch disc lining thicknes 0.012 in Flywheel side 0.138 in Pressure plate side 0.138 in Minimum thickness 0.012 in Maximum runout 0.0276 in Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5022 Clutch Disc: Service and Repair Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate Special Tools Removal WARNING: Clutches and brakes contain asbestos fibers. Avoid breathing dust. Breathing asbestos dust may cause asbestosis and cancer. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Breathing asbestos dust is hazardous to your health. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Dust and dirt present on wheel brake and clutch assemblies may contain asbestos fibers that are hazardous to your health when made airborne by cleaning with compressed air or by dry brushing. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Wheel brake assemblies and clutch facings should be cleaned using a vacuum cleaner recommended for use with asbestos fibers such as brake/clutch/service vacuum 164-1R3600. Dust and dirt from vacuum should be disposed of in a manner that prevents dust exposure such as sealed bags. The bag must be labeled as per OSHA instructions and the trash hauler notified as to the bag's contents. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: If a vacuum suitable for asbestos is not available, cleaning should be done wet. If dust generation is still possible, technicians should wear government approved toxic dust purifying respirators. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Grinding or sanding on brake linings, pads, rotors, drums or clutch facings should be done only while using correctly exhaust-ventilated equipment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: OSHA requires areas where asbestos dust generation is possible to be isolated and posted with warning signs. Only technicians concerned with carrying out brake or clutch service should be present in the area. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. Remove the transaxle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5023 2. Using the special tool, lock the flywheel to the engine. 3. WARNING: The clutch disc and clutch pressure plate are heavy and may fall if not held when the bolts are removed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Loosen bolts evenly to prevent pressure plate damage. Remove the bolts, clutch pressure plate and clutch disc. 4. CAUTION: Do not use cleaners with a petroleum base and do not immerse the clutch pressure plate in solvent. Using a suitable commercial alcohol base solvent, clean the clutch pressure plate. 5. Inspect the clutch pressure plate surface for burn marks, scores, flatness or ridges. 6. Inspect the clutch pressure plate diaphragm fingers for wear. Install a new clutch pressure plate as necessary. 7. Measure the depth to the rivet heads. Install a new clutch disc if any rivet head measurement is not within specifications. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5024 8. CAUTION: If the clutch disc is saturated with oil, inspect the rear engine crankshaft seal for leakage. If leakage is found, install a new seal prior to clutch disc installation. NOTE: Use an emery cloth to remove minor imperfections in the clutch disc lining surface. NOTE: Install a new clutch disc if any of the following conditions are present. Inspect the clutch disc for: ^ oil or grease saturation ^ worn or loose facings ^ warpage or loose rivets at the hub ^ loose or broken torsion dampening springs ^ wear or rust on splines 9. Using the special tool, check clutch disc runout.Install a new clutch disc if not within specifications. 10. NOTE: Install a new clutch release fork if any of the following conditions are present. Inspect the clutch release fork for: ^ cracks ^ distortion ^ excessive wear on the release bearing contact surface Installation 1. Using the special tool, position the clutch disc on the flywheel. 2. Position the clutch pressure plate on the flywheel, install the pressure plate bolts and tighten them in sequence to specification. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5025 3. Remove the special tool. 4. Install the transaxle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Clutch Fluid: Specifications Ford High Performance DOT3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB ESA-M6C25-A, DOT3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 06-9-4 > May > 06 > M/T - Clutch Master Cylinder Squeaking Noise Clutch Master Cylinder: Customer Interest M/T - Clutch Master Cylinder Squeaking Noise TSB 06-9-4 05/15/06 SQUEAKING NOISE FROM CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER FORD: 2001-2004 Escape ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit a squeaking noise from the clutch master cylinder as the clutch pedal is depressed or released. This noise is typically only present in ambient temperatures of 70° F (21° C) or higher. This condition may be caused by the design of the master cylinder seal. ACTION Install an updated master cylinder containing a seal with an improved design. Replace the master cylinder following the procedure in Workshop Manual, Section 308-02. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 060904A 2001-2004 Escape 0.8 hr. 4X2/4X4: Replace Clutch Master Cylinder (Do Not Use With 7543A) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7A543 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 01-24-1 > Oct > 01 > Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage Clutch Master Cylinder: Customer Interest Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage Article No. 01-24-1 12/10/01 CLUTCH - CLUTCH PEDAL STAYS ON FLOOR-NOT ABLE TO DISENGAGE CLUTCH - FLUID LEAK FROM HYDRAULIC CLUTCH LINE FORD: 2001 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER, SUPER DUTY F SERIES, F-650, F-750 ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a condition of not being able to disengage clutch as the clutch pedal is stroked or the clutch pedal remains on floor. This may be caused by a roll pin that is loose or protruding and no longer securing the clutch hydraulic line to the Clutch Master Cylinder or External Slave Cylinder. ACTION Check to insure clutch hydraulic line is connected to the Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder and the roll pin is not loose or protruding outside the cylinder body. Check for the proper amount of fluid in reservoir. It the hydraulic line is not connected to the Master Cylinder or External Slave Cylinder and no fluid is present in reservoir, refer to the following Service Procedure for details. SERVICE PROCEDURE Use Service kit part number 2C3Z-7C522-AA. kit includes: 2 roll pins, 2 quad seals and 2 cotter pins. NOTE MASTER CYLINDERS AND EXTERNAL SLAVE CYLINDERS SHOULD BE SERVICED AT THE SAME TIME. VEHICLE LINES AFFECTED ARE ESCAPE, SUPER DUTY F-SERIES AND F650-750. NOTE VEHICLE LINES EQUIPPED WITH AN INTERNAL CSC (CONCENTRIC SLAVE CYLINDER) REQUIRE ONLY THE MASTER CYLINDER TO BE SERVICED. VEHICLE LINES AFFECTED ARE EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, RANGER AND F150. 1. Confirm if roll pin is dislodged at clutch hydraulic system Master Cylinder and/or External Slave Cylinder (see previous notes) and the hydraulic line is disconnected or leaking. 2. If so, refer to Workshop Manual (Section 308) for instructions on removing Master Cylinder, External Slave Cylinder and system bleed procedure. 3. Use an 1/8" punch and small hammer to remove roll pin from Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder. 4. Remove old quad seal from Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder. 5. Install new quad seal in Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder. 6. Reconnect hydraulic line and use a hammer to install a new roll pin at the Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder. 7. Install a cotter pin through the center of each roll pin and secure (Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 01-24-1 > Oct > 01 > Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage > Page 5042 8. Refer to Workshop Manual (Section 308) for bleed procedure and reinstall. Labor Operation Claiming Chart Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7C522 39 OASIS CODES: 505200, 506000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 06-9-4 > May > 06 > M/T - Clutch Master Cylinder Squeaking Noise Clutch Master Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Clutch Master Cylinder Squeaking Noise TSB 06-9-4 05/15/06 SQUEAKING NOISE FROM CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER FORD: 2001-2004 Escape ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit a squeaking noise from the clutch master cylinder as the clutch pedal is depressed or released. This noise is typically only present in ambient temperatures of 70° F (21° C) or higher. This condition may be caused by the design of the master cylinder seal. ACTION Install an updated master cylinder containing a seal with an improved design. Replace the master cylinder following the procedure in Workshop Manual, Section 308-02. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 060904A 2001-2004 Escape 0.8 hr. 4X2/4X4: Replace Clutch Master Cylinder (Do Not Use With 7543A) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7A543 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 01-24-1 > Oct > 01 > Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage Clutch Master Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage Article No. 01-24-1 12/10/01 CLUTCH - CLUTCH PEDAL STAYS ON FLOOR-NOT ABLE TO DISENGAGE CLUTCH - FLUID LEAK FROM HYDRAULIC CLUTCH LINE FORD: 2001 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER, SUPER DUTY F SERIES, F-650, F-750 ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a condition of not being able to disengage clutch as the clutch pedal is stroked or the clutch pedal remains on floor. This may be caused by a roll pin that is loose or protruding and no longer securing the clutch hydraulic line to the Clutch Master Cylinder or External Slave Cylinder. ACTION Check to insure clutch hydraulic line is connected to the Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder and the roll pin is not loose or protruding outside the cylinder body. Check for the proper amount of fluid in reservoir. It the hydraulic line is not connected to the Master Cylinder or External Slave Cylinder and no fluid is present in reservoir, refer to the following Service Procedure for details. SERVICE PROCEDURE Use Service kit part number 2C3Z-7C522-AA. kit includes: 2 roll pins, 2 quad seals and 2 cotter pins. NOTE MASTER CYLINDERS AND EXTERNAL SLAVE CYLINDERS SHOULD BE SERVICED AT THE SAME TIME. VEHICLE LINES AFFECTED ARE ESCAPE, SUPER DUTY F-SERIES AND F650-750. NOTE VEHICLE LINES EQUIPPED WITH AN INTERNAL CSC (CONCENTRIC SLAVE CYLINDER) REQUIRE ONLY THE MASTER CYLINDER TO BE SERVICED. VEHICLE LINES AFFECTED ARE EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, RANGER AND F150. 1. Confirm if roll pin is dislodged at clutch hydraulic system Master Cylinder and/or External Slave Cylinder (see previous notes) and the hydraulic line is disconnected or leaking. 2. If so, refer to Workshop Manual (Section 308) for instructions on removing Master Cylinder, External Slave Cylinder and system bleed procedure. 3. Use an 1/8" punch and small hammer to remove roll pin from Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder. 4. Remove old quad seal from Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder. 5. Install new quad seal in Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder. 6. Reconnect hydraulic line and use a hammer to install a new roll pin at the Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder. 7. Install a cotter pin through the center of each roll pin and secure (Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 01-24-1 > Oct > 01 > Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage > Page 5052 8. Refer to Workshop Manual (Section 308) for bleed procedure and reinstall. Labor Operation Claiming Chart Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7C522 39 OASIS CODES: 505200, 506000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5053 Clutch Master Cylinder: Specifications Clutch master cylinder nuts 17 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5054 Clutch Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Clutch Master Cylinder Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the clutch master cylinder rod from the clutch pedal. 2. Remove the clutch pedal bracket nut. 3. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycols ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Brake tepid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, wash it immediately with water. Disconnect the clutch master cylinder hose from the clutch master cylinder and plug it to prevent excess fluid loss. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5055 4. Disconnect the clutch slave cylinder tube from the clutch master cylinder. 5. Remove the clutch master cylinder. 1. Remove the clutch master cylinder nut. 2. Remove the clutch master cylinder. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Bleed the air from the system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Slave Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clutch Slave Cylinder: > 01-24-1 > Oct > 01 > Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage Clutch Slave Cylinder: Customer Interest Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage Article No. 01-24-1 12/10/01 CLUTCH - CLUTCH PEDAL STAYS ON FLOOR-NOT ABLE TO DISENGAGE CLUTCH - FLUID LEAK FROM HYDRAULIC CLUTCH LINE FORD: 2001 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER, SUPER DUTY F SERIES, F-650, F-750 ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a condition of not being able to disengage clutch as the clutch pedal is stroked or the clutch pedal remains on floor. This may be caused by a roll pin that is loose or protruding and no longer securing the clutch hydraulic line to the Clutch Master Cylinder or External Slave Cylinder. ACTION Check to insure clutch hydraulic line is connected to the Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder and the roll pin is not loose or protruding outside the cylinder body. Check for the proper amount of fluid in reservoir. It the hydraulic line is not connected to the Master Cylinder or External Slave Cylinder and no fluid is present in reservoir, refer to the following Service Procedure for details. SERVICE PROCEDURE Use Service kit part number 2C3Z-7C522-AA. kit includes: 2 roll pins, 2 quad seals and 2 cotter pins. NOTE MASTER CYLINDERS AND EXTERNAL SLAVE CYLINDERS SHOULD BE SERVICED AT THE SAME TIME. VEHICLE LINES AFFECTED ARE ESCAPE, SUPER DUTY F-SERIES AND F650-750. NOTE VEHICLE LINES EQUIPPED WITH AN INTERNAL CSC (CONCENTRIC SLAVE CYLINDER) REQUIRE ONLY THE MASTER CYLINDER TO BE SERVICED. VEHICLE LINES AFFECTED ARE EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, RANGER AND F150. 1. Confirm if roll pin is dislodged at clutch hydraulic system Master Cylinder and/or External Slave Cylinder (see previous notes) and the hydraulic line is disconnected or leaking. 2. If so, refer to Workshop Manual (Section 308) for instructions on removing Master Cylinder, External Slave Cylinder and system bleed procedure. 3. Use an 1/8" punch and small hammer to remove roll pin from Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder. 4. Remove old quad seal from Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder. 5. Install new quad seal in Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder. 6. Reconnect hydraulic line and use a hammer to install a new roll pin at the Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder. 7. Install a cotter pin through the center of each roll pin and secure (Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Slave Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clutch Slave Cylinder: > 01-24-1 > Oct > 01 > Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage > Page 5064 8. Refer to Workshop Manual (Section 308) for bleed procedure and reinstall. Labor Operation Claiming Chart Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7C522 39 OASIS CODES: 505200, 506000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Slave Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clutch Slave Cylinder: > 01-24-1 > Oct > 01 > Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage Clutch Slave Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage Article No. 01-24-1 12/10/01 CLUTCH - CLUTCH PEDAL STAYS ON FLOOR-NOT ABLE TO DISENGAGE CLUTCH - FLUID LEAK FROM HYDRAULIC CLUTCH LINE FORD: 2001 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER, SUPER DUTY F SERIES, F-650, F-750 ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a condition of not being able to disengage clutch as the clutch pedal is stroked or the clutch pedal remains on floor. This may be caused by a roll pin that is loose or protruding and no longer securing the clutch hydraulic line to the Clutch Master Cylinder or External Slave Cylinder. ACTION Check to insure clutch hydraulic line is connected to the Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder and the roll pin is not loose or protruding outside the cylinder body. Check for the proper amount of fluid in reservoir. It the hydraulic line is not connected to the Master Cylinder or External Slave Cylinder and no fluid is present in reservoir, refer to the following Service Procedure for details. SERVICE PROCEDURE Use Service kit part number 2C3Z-7C522-AA. kit includes: 2 roll pins, 2 quad seals and 2 cotter pins. NOTE MASTER CYLINDERS AND EXTERNAL SLAVE CYLINDERS SHOULD BE SERVICED AT THE SAME TIME. VEHICLE LINES AFFECTED ARE ESCAPE, SUPER DUTY F-SERIES AND F650-750. NOTE VEHICLE LINES EQUIPPED WITH AN INTERNAL CSC (CONCENTRIC SLAVE CYLINDER) REQUIRE ONLY THE MASTER CYLINDER TO BE SERVICED. VEHICLE LINES AFFECTED ARE EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, RANGER AND F150. 1. Confirm if roll pin is dislodged at clutch hydraulic system Master Cylinder and/or External Slave Cylinder (see previous notes) and the hydraulic line is disconnected or leaking. 2. If so, refer to Workshop Manual (Section 308) for instructions on removing Master Cylinder, External Slave Cylinder and system bleed procedure. 3. Use an 1/8" punch and small hammer to remove roll pin from Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder. 4. Remove old quad seal from Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder. 5. Install new quad seal in Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder. 6. Reconnect hydraulic line and use a hammer to install a new roll pin at the Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder. 7. Install a cotter pin through the center of each roll pin and secure (Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Slave Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clutch Slave Cylinder: > 01-24-1 > Oct > 01 > Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage > Page 5070 8. Refer to Workshop Manual (Section 308) for bleed procedure and reinstall. Labor Operation Claiming Chart Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7C522 39 OASIS CODES: 505200, 506000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Slave Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5071 Clutch Slave Cylinder: Specifications Clutch slave cylinder bolts 15 ft.lb Clutch slave cylinder line bracket bolts 15 ft.lb Clutch slave cylinder bolts 15 ft.lb Clutch slave cylinder tube nut 18 ft.lb Clutch slave cylinder tube fitting 22 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Slave Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5072 Clutch Slave Cylinder: Service and Repair Slave Cylinder Removal and Installation 1. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, wash it immediately with water. Disconnect the clutch slave cylinder tube and plug it to prevent excess fluid loss. 2. Remove the clutch slave cylinder. 1. Remove the clutch slave cylinder bolts. 2. Remove the clutch slave cylinder. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Bleed the air from the system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Hydraulic Hose, Clutch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Hydraulic Hose: > 01-24-1 > Oct > 01 > Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage Hydraulic Hose: Customer Interest Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage Article No. 01-24-1 12/10/01 CLUTCH - CLUTCH PEDAL STAYS ON FLOOR-NOT ABLE TO DISENGAGE CLUTCH - FLUID LEAK FROM HYDRAULIC CLUTCH LINE FORD: 2001 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER, SUPER DUTY F SERIES, F-650, F-750 ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a condition of not being able to disengage clutch as the clutch pedal is stroked or the clutch pedal remains on floor. This may be caused by a roll pin that is loose or protruding and no longer securing the clutch hydraulic line to the Clutch Master Cylinder or External Slave Cylinder. ACTION Check to insure clutch hydraulic line is connected to the Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder and the roll pin is not loose or protruding outside the cylinder body. Check for the proper amount of fluid in reservoir. It the hydraulic line is not connected to the Master Cylinder or External Slave Cylinder and no fluid is present in reservoir, refer to the following Service Procedure for details. SERVICE PROCEDURE Use Service kit part number 2C3Z-7C522-AA. kit includes: 2 roll pins, 2 quad seals and 2 cotter pins. NOTE MASTER CYLINDERS AND EXTERNAL SLAVE CYLINDERS SHOULD BE SERVICED AT THE SAME TIME. VEHICLE LINES AFFECTED ARE ESCAPE, SUPER DUTY F-SERIES AND F650-750. NOTE VEHICLE LINES EQUIPPED WITH AN INTERNAL CSC (CONCENTRIC SLAVE CYLINDER) REQUIRE ONLY THE MASTER CYLINDER TO BE SERVICED. VEHICLE LINES AFFECTED ARE EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, RANGER AND F150. 1. Confirm if roll pin is dislodged at clutch hydraulic system Master Cylinder and/or External Slave Cylinder (see previous notes) and the hydraulic line is disconnected or leaking. 2. If so, refer to Workshop Manual (Section 308) for instructions on removing Master Cylinder, External Slave Cylinder and system bleed procedure. 3. Use an 1/8" punch and small hammer to remove roll pin from Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder. 4. Remove old quad seal from Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder. 5. Install new quad seal in Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder. 6. Reconnect hydraulic line and use a hammer to install a new roll pin at the Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder. 7. Install a cotter pin through the center of each roll pin and secure (Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Hydraulic Hose, Clutch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Hydraulic Hose: > 01-24-1 > Oct > 01 > Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage > Page 5081 8. Refer to Workshop Manual (Section 308) for bleed procedure and reinstall. Labor Operation Claiming Chart Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7C522 39 OASIS CODES: 505200, 506000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Hydraulic Hose, Clutch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Hose: > 01-24-1 > Oct > 01 > Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage Hydraulic Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage Article No. 01-24-1 12/10/01 CLUTCH - CLUTCH PEDAL STAYS ON FLOOR-NOT ABLE TO DISENGAGE CLUTCH - FLUID LEAK FROM HYDRAULIC CLUTCH LINE FORD: 2001 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER, SUPER DUTY F SERIES, F-650, F-750 ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a condition of not being able to disengage clutch as the clutch pedal is stroked or the clutch pedal remains on floor. This may be caused by a roll pin that is loose or protruding and no longer securing the clutch hydraulic line to the Clutch Master Cylinder or External Slave Cylinder. ACTION Check to insure clutch hydraulic line is connected to the Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder and the roll pin is not loose or protruding outside the cylinder body. Check for the proper amount of fluid in reservoir. It the hydraulic line is not connected to the Master Cylinder or External Slave Cylinder and no fluid is present in reservoir, refer to the following Service Procedure for details. SERVICE PROCEDURE Use Service kit part number 2C3Z-7C522-AA. kit includes: 2 roll pins, 2 quad seals and 2 cotter pins. NOTE MASTER CYLINDERS AND EXTERNAL SLAVE CYLINDERS SHOULD BE SERVICED AT THE SAME TIME. VEHICLE LINES AFFECTED ARE ESCAPE, SUPER DUTY F-SERIES AND F650-750. NOTE VEHICLE LINES EQUIPPED WITH AN INTERNAL CSC (CONCENTRIC SLAVE CYLINDER) REQUIRE ONLY THE MASTER CYLINDER TO BE SERVICED. VEHICLE LINES AFFECTED ARE EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, RANGER AND F150. 1. Confirm if roll pin is dislodged at clutch hydraulic system Master Cylinder and/or External Slave Cylinder (see previous notes) and the hydraulic line is disconnected or leaking. 2. If so, refer to Workshop Manual (Section 308) for instructions on removing Master Cylinder, External Slave Cylinder and system bleed procedure. 3. Use an 1/8" punch and small hammer to remove roll pin from Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder. 4. Remove old quad seal from Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder. 5. Install new quad seal in Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder. 6. Reconnect hydraulic line and use a hammer to install a new roll pin at the Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder. 7. Install a cotter pin through the center of each roll pin and secure (Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Hydraulic Hose, Clutch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Hydraulic Hose: > 01-24-1 > Oct > 01 > Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage > Page 5087 8. Refer to Workshop Manual (Section 308) for bleed procedure and reinstall. Labor Operation Claiming Chart Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7C522 39 OASIS CODES: 505200, 506000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Pedal Assembly > Component Information > Specifications Clutch Pedal Assembly: Specifications Clutch pedal bracket bolt and nuts 17 ft.lb Clutch pedal disengagement height 2.3 in Clutch pedal free play 0.22-0.59 in Clutch pedal height 8.35-8.54 in Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Pedal Assembly > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5091 Clutch Pedal Assembly: Service and Repair Clutch Pedal Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the clutch master cylinder nut. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 4. Disconnect the clutch master cylinder rod from the clutch pedal. 5. Remove the clutch pedal. 1. Remove the nuts. 2. Remove the clutch pedal. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations Clutch Switch: Locations The Clutch Switch is located near the left hand rocker panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cutoff Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cutoff Switch > Page 5097 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Release Fork, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Clutch Release Fork: Service and Repair Clutch Release Fork Removal and Installation 1. Remove the transaxle. 2. Remove the rubber boot. 3. Remove the clutch release fork and bearing. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pilot Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair Pilot Bearing: Service and Repair Pilot Bearing Special Tool(s) Removal 1. Remove the flywheel. 2. Inspect the pilot bearing for: ^ misalignment and looseness in the crankshaft ^ needle rollers for scoring, worn or broken rollers, inadequate grease or discoloration ^ seal leakage 3. NOTE: Install a new pilot bearing only if it is damaged. Using the special tool, remove the pilot bearing. 1. Install the special tool. 2. Remove the pilot bearing. 4. Clean the transaxle input shaft with a wire brush. 5. Inspect the transmission input shaft for: ^ burrs ^ rust ^ damage to the input shaft spline ^ damage to the input shaft on the pilot bearing contact surface Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pilot Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5104 1. Using the special tools, install the pilot bearing. 2. Apply a light coating of Premium Long-Life Grease XG-1-C, XG-1-K or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M1C75-B to the transaxle input shaft. 3. Install the flywheel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications Pressure Plate: Specifications Pressure Plate Bolts 29 Nm (21 lb-ft) Maximum Depth 0.020 in Maximum Clearance 0.020 in Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate Pressure Plate: Service and Repair Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate "For information regarding this component please refer to Clutch Disc Service and Repair" Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate > Page 5110 Pressure Plate: Service and Repair Clutch Pressure Plate Locating Dowels Clutch Pressure Plate Locating Dowels Removal 1. Remove the transmission. 2. NOTE: Care should be taken not to damage the dowel holes or the surrounding surface areas during removal. Remove the flywheel dowels. Installation 1. NOTE: Care should be taken to install the dowel squarely into place until it is fully seated and to not damage the surrounding surface areas. Install the flywheel dowels. 2. Install the transmission. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Carrier > Carrier Bearings > Component Information > Service and Repair Carrier Bearings: Service and Repair Stub Shaft Pilot Bearing Housing and Seal Special Tool(s) Removal 1. Remove the halfshaft assembly. 2. Using the special tools, remove the stub shaft pilot bearing and seal. Installation 1. NOTE: Lubricate the new stub shaft pilot bearing with rear axle lubricant. Using the special tools, install the stub shaft pilot bearing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Carrier > Carrier Bearings > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5120 2. NOTE: Lubricate the new stub shaft pilot bearing housing seal with premium long-life grease. Using the special tools, install the stub shaft pilot bearing housing seal. 3. CAUTION: Inspect the inboard CV joint seal journal for rust or nicks/scratches prior to installing the halfshaft. Polish the seal journal with fine crocus cloth, if necessary. Install the halfshaft assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair Differential Cover: Service and Repair Differential Housing Cover Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. NOTE: Drain the differential fluid into a suitable drain pan. Remove the bolts and the rear differential cover. ^ Drain the differential fluid from the housing. Installation 1. CAUTION: Make sure the machined surfaces on the rear axle housing, the differential housing cover and the rotary blade coupling housing are clean and free of oil before installing the new silicone sealant. The inside of the rear axle must be covered when cleaning the machined surface to prevent contamination. Clean the gasket mating surfaces of the differential housing, the differential housing cover and the rotary blade coupling housing. 2. NOTE: The differential housing cover must be installed within 15 minutes of application of the silicone, or new sealant must be applied. If possible, allow one hour before filling with lubricant to make sure the silicone sealant has correctly cured. Apply a new continuous bead of clear silicone rubber. 3. Install the differential housing cover and bolts. 4. Fill the rear axle with 1.4 liters (2.95 pints) of rear axle lubricant. ^ Tighten the filler plug. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Lock > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Bearing, Differential > Component Information > Specifications Pinion Bearing: Specifications Pinion bearing preload (drive pinion collapsible spacer) used bearing 6-10 in.lb new bearing 15-30 in.lb Pinion nut 1 500 ft.lb max Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > LH Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair LH Differential Fluid Seals LH Special Tool(s) Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. NOTE: Place a suitable drain pan under the vehicle. Remove the transaxle drain plug and drain the fluid. 3. Remove the LH halfshaft. 4. Using the special tools, remove and discard the LH differential seal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 5135 Installation 1. Using the special tool, install the LH differential seal. 2. Install the LH halfshaft. 3. Remove the drain pan and lower the vehicle. 4. Install the transaxle drain plug. ^ After the fluid has been drained, clean the drain plug threads and apply a small amount of Pipe Sealant with Teflon (D D8AZ-19554-A or XW7Z-19554-AA or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSK-M2G350-A2. 5. Add MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions. Refill as necessary. 7. Allow the transmission fluid to reach operating temperature and fill as necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 5136 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair RH Differential Fluid Seals RH Special Tool(s) Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. NOTE: Determine the source of the fluid leak. If the leak is from the transaxle, continue with this procedure. If it is determined that the fluid leak is coming from the PTU, remove the PTU. 3. NOTE: Place a suitable drain pan under the vehicle. Remove the transaxle drain plug and drain the fluid. 4. Remove the RH halfshaft. 5. If equipped remove the PTU. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 5137 6. If the vehicle is equipped with a PTU, use the special tools to remove the RH differential seal. 7. If the vehicle is not equipped with a PTU, use the special tools to remove the RH differential seal. Installation 1. If the vehicle is equipped with a PTU, use the special tools to install the RH differential seal. 2. If the vehicle is not equipped with a PTU, use the special tools to install the RH differential seal. 3. If equipped install the PTU. 4. Install the RH halfshaft. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 5138 5. Install the transaxle drain plug. ^ After the fluid has been drained, clean the drain plug threads and apply a small amount of Pipe Sealant with Teflon tip D8AZ- 19554-A or XW7Z-19554-AA or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSK-M2G350-A2. 6. Remove the drain pan and lower the vehicle. 7. Add MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 8. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions. Refill as necessary. 9. Allow the transmission fluid to reach operating temperature and fill as necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Specifications Axle Shaft: Specifications Inner halfshaft bearing nuts 220 ft.lb Front CV joint bolts 30 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5144 Axle Shaft: Description and Operation Rear Drive Halfshafts CAUTION: An inspection of the outer and inner boots is necessary so that if damage or grease leakage is evident, installation of a new halfshaft can take place immediately. Continued operation with damage or grease leakage will result in CV joint wear and noise due to contamination and loss of the CV joint grease. ^ The RH and LH halfshafts are the same length. ^ Inboard and outboard CV joints connect to a splined shaft. A circlip stopper holds the cross groove inboard race assembly (inboard CV joint) together. ^ An axle circlip (4B422) retains the spliced inboard CV joint to the differential side gear. Install a new axle circlip each time the halfshaft is removed from the vehicle. ^ A rear axle wheel hub nut secures the side shaft assembly (interconnecting shaft and outboard CV joint) to the rear hub. Install a new rear axle wheel hub nut each time the halfshaft is removed from the vehicle. Halfshaft Handling CAUTION: Never pick up or hold the halfshaft only by the inboard or outboard CV joint. CAUTION: Do not over-angle the CV joints. CAUTION: Damage will occur to an assembled inboard CV joint if it is over-plunged outward from the joint housing. CAUTION: Never use a hammer to remove or install the halfshafts. CAUTION: Never use the halfshaft assembly as a lever to position other components. Always support the free end of the halfshaft. CAUTION: Do not allow the boots to contact sharp edges or hot exhaust components. CAUTION: Handle the halfshaft only by the interconnecting shaft to avoid pull-apart and potential damage to the CV joints. CAUTION: Do not drop assembled halfshafts. The impact will cut the boots from the inside without evidence of external damage. Handle all halfshaft components carefully during removal and installation procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5145 Axle Shaft: Service and Repair Halfshaft Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear coil spring. 2. CAUTION: Make sure to support the wheel knuckle. Remove the nuts and separate the upper and lower ball joints. 3. NOTE: Make sure to mark the position of the knuckle bolt and cam assembly for correct installation. Remove the bolt and separate the rear knuckle from the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5146 4. Remove and discard the nut. 5. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the knuckle. 6. Using the special tool, remove the halfshaft. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair Constant Velocity Joint: Service and Repair DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Halfshaft Joint Special Tools Special Tool(s) Disassembly 1. Remove the halfshaft. 2. Secure the halfshaft and constant velocity (CV) joint in a vise using protective jaw covers. 3. Remove the inboard halfshaft boot clamps. 4. Slide the inboard halfshaft boot off the inboard CV joint housing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5150 5. If reinstalling the original inner joint, mark the inner joint and the halfshaft to make sure of correct installation. 6. Using a soft face hammer, separate the halfshaft from the inboard joint housing. 7. Remove and discard the bearing retainer circlip. 8. Remove and discard the snap ring. 9. Remove the inboard halfshaft boot from the halfshaft. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5151 10. Remove the two outboard halfshaft boot clamps. 11. Slide the outboard halfshaft joint boot back out of the way exposing the outboard CV joint. 12. If reinstalling the original outboard CV joint, mark the outboard CV joint and halfshaft to make sure of correct installation. 13. Use a soft-face hammer to separate the outboard CV joint by gently tapping it off the halfshaft. 14. Remove the halfshaft bearing retainer circlip and discard. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5152 15. Remove the snap ring from the halfshaft. 16. Slide the outboard halfshaft boot off of the halfshaft. Assembly 1. Lubricate the inboard and outboard CV joint with joint grease. 2. Install the outboard halfshaft boot. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5153 3. Install the snap ring on the halfshaft. 4. Install a new halfshaft shaft bearing retainer circlip. 5. Use a soft-face hammer to install the inboard CV joint by gently tapping it onto the halfshaft. 6. Remove any excess grease on the mating surfaces and slide the outboard halfshaft joint boot forward onto the outboard CV joint. 7. Remove any excess air trapped in the outboard halfshaft boot using a cloth covered screwdriver after adjusting the outboard halfshaft boot spacing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5154 8. Using the special tool, crimp two new outboard halfshaft boot clamps. 9. Position the inboard halfshaft boot. 10. Install the snap ring. 11. Install the bearing retainer circlip. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5155 12. Using a soft face hammer, install the halfshaft on the inboard joint. 13. Position the inboard halfshaft boot. 14. Remove any excess air trapped in the halfshaft boot using a cloth covered screwdriver after adjusting the halfshaft boot spacing. 15. Using the special tool, install two new inboard joint boot clamps. 16. Install the front wheel halfshaft. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 01-7-7 > Apr > 01 > Rear Axle - Pinion Seal Oil Leaks Seals and Gaskets: Customer Interest Rear Axle - Pinion Seal Oil Leaks Article No. 01-7-7 04/16/01 AXLE - FLUID LEAK FROM REAR AXLE PINION SEAL - 4X4 VEHICLES ONLY FORD: 2001 ESCAPE ISSUE Some 4X4 equipped vehicles may exhibit a rear axle pinion seal leak at the Rotary Blade Coupling (RBC). This may be caused by the design of the pinion seal. ACTION Replace the pinion seal at the RBC. Refer to the following Service Procedure for details SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE THE CLUTCH ASSEMBLY IS A BALANCED UNIT. IF THE FOLLOWING INDEXING PROCEDURE IS NOT UTILIZED, A VIBRATION MAY OCCUR. 1. Index mark the driveshaft and end yoke before removing. 2 Remove driveshaft (Refer to Workshop Manual Section 205-01). 3. Remove pinion nut. 4. Using a punch, mark one of the splines on the yoke (Figure 1). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 01-7-7 > Apr > 01 > Rear Axle - Pinion Seal Oil Leaks > Page 5164 5. Mark the corresponding spline on the pinion gear (Figure 2). NOTE A SMALL PUNCH THAT CAN BE INSERTED BETWEEN THE END YOKE SPLINE AND PINION GEAR IS REQUIRED. 6. Remove end yoke. 7. Remove pinion seal. 8. Install new Pinion Seal (YL8Z-4N046-AA) using seal installer tool. SPECIAL TOOL PART NUMBER T80T-4000-C (205-137). 9. Assemble end yoke to pinion gear spline. Align the marks made during disassembly. 10. Install pinion nut and torque to 217-271 Nm (160-200 lb-ft) (Figure 3). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 01-7-7 > Apr > 01 > Rear Axle - Pinion Seal Oil Leaks > Page 5165 11. Assemble driveshaft to end yoke (Figure 4) and torque to 23Nm (17lb-ft). Refer to Workshop Manual Section 205-01. PARTS BLOCK OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions of Bumper To Bumper warranty Coverage. OPERATION/DESCRIPTION/TIME DEALER CODING OASIS CODES: 509000, 510000, 590000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 01-7-7 > Apr > 01 > Rear Axle - Pinion Seal Oil Leaks Seals and Gaskets: All Technical Service Bulletins Rear Axle - Pinion Seal Oil Leaks Article No. 01-7-7 04/16/01 AXLE - FLUID LEAK FROM REAR AXLE PINION SEAL - 4X4 VEHICLES ONLY FORD: 2001 ESCAPE ISSUE Some 4X4 equipped vehicles may exhibit a rear axle pinion seal leak at the Rotary Blade Coupling (RBC). This may be caused by the design of the pinion seal. ACTION Replace the pinion seal at the RBC. Refer to the following Service Procedure for details SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE THE CLUTCH ASSEMBLY IS A BALANCED UNIT. IF THE FOLLOWING INDEXING PROCEDURE IS NOT UTILIZED, A VIBRATION MAY OCCUR. 1. Index mark the driveshaft and end yoke before removing. 2 Remove driveshaft (Refer to Workshop Manual Section 205-01). 3. Remove pinion nut. 4. Using a punch, mark one of the splines on the yoke (Figure 1). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 01-7-7 > Apr > 01 > Rear Axle - Pinion Seal Oil Leaks > Page 5171 5. Mark the corresponding spline on the pinion gear (Figure 2). NOTE A SMALL PUNCH THAT CAN BE INSERTED BETWEEN THE END YOKE SPLINE AND PINION GEAR IS REQUIRED. 6. Remove end yoke. 7. Remove pinion seal. 8. Install new Pinion Seal (YL8Z-4N046-AA) using seal installer tool. SPECIAL TOOL PART NUMBER T80T-4000-C (205-137). 9. Assemble end yoke to pinion gear spline. Align the marks made during disassembly. 10. Install pinion nut and torque to 217-271 Nm (160-200 lb-ft) (Figure 3). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 01-7-7 > Apr > 01 > Rear Axle - Pinion Seal Oil Leaks > Page 5172 11. Assemble driveshaft to end yoke (Figure 4) and torque to 23Nm (17lb-ft). Refer to Workshop Manual Section 205-01. PARTS BLOCK OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions of Bumper To Bumper warranty Coverage. OPERATION/DESCRIPTION/TIME DEALER CODING OASIS CODES: 509000, 510000, 590000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 5173 Seals and Gaskets: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 01-7-7 Date: 010416 Rear Axle - Pinion Seal Oil Leaks Article No. 01-7-7 04/16/01 AXLE - FLUID LEAK FROM REAR AXLE PINION SEAL - 4X4 VEHICLES ONLY FORD: 2001 ESCAPE ISSUE Some 4X4 equipped vehicles may exhibit a rear axle pinion seal leak at the Rotary Blade Coupling (RBC). This may be caused by the design of the pinion seal. ACTION Replace the pinion seal at the RBC. Refer to the following Service Procedure for details SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE THE CLUTCH ASSEMBLY IS A BALANCED UNIT. IF THE FOLLOWING INDEXING PROCEDURE IS NOT UTILIZED, A VIBRATION MAY OCCUR. 1. Index mark the driveshaft and end yoke before removing. 2 Remove driveshaft (Refer to Workshop Manual Section 205-01). 3. Remove pinion nut. 4. Using a punch, mark one of the splines on the yoke (Figure 1). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 5174 5. Mark the corresponding spline on the pinion gear (Figure 2). NOTE A SMALL PUNCH THAT CAN BE INSERTED BETWEEN THE END YOKE SPLINE AND PINION GEAR IS REQUIRED. 6. Remove end yoke. 7. Remove pinion seal. 8. Install new Pinion Seal (YL8Z-4N046-AA) using seal installer tool. SPECIAL TOOL PART NUMBER T80T-4000-C (205-137). 9. Assemble end yoke to pinion gear spline. Align the marks made during disassembly. 10. Install pinion nut and torque to 217-271 Nm (160-200 lb-ft) (Figure 3). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 5175 11. Assemble driveshaft to end yoke (Figure 4) and torque to 23Nm (17lb-ft). Refer to Workshop Manual Section 205-01. PARTS BLOCK OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions of Bumper To Bumper warranty Coverage. OPERATION/DESCRIPTION/TIME DEALER CODING OASIS CODES: 509000, 510000, 590000 Technical Service Bulletin # 01-7-7 Date: 010416 Rear Axle - Pinion Seal Oil Leaks Article No. 01-7-7 04/16/01 AXLE - FLUID LEAK FROM REAR AXLE PINION SEAL - 4X4 VEHICLES ONLY FORD: 2001 ESCAPE ISSUE Some 4X4 equipped vehicles may exhibit a rear axle pinion seal leak at the Rotary Blade Coupling (RBC). This may be caused by the design of the pinion seal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 5176 ACTION Replace the pinion seal at the RBC. Refer to the following Service Procedure for details SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE THE CLUTCH ASSEMBLY IS A BALANCED UNIT. IF THE FOLLOWING INDEXING PROCEDURE IS NOT UTILIZED, A VIBRATION MAY OCCUR. 1. Index mark the driveshaft and end yoke before removing. 2 Remove driveshaft (Refer to Workshop Manual Section 205-01). 3. Remove pinion nut. 4. Using a punch, mark one of the splines on the yoke (Figure 1). 5. Mark the corresponding spline on the pinion gear (Figure 2). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 5177 NOTE A SMALL PUNCH THAT CAN BE INSERTED BETWEEN THE END YOKE SPLINE AND PINION GEAR IS REQUIRED. 6. Remove end yoke. 7. Remove pinion seal. 8. Install new Pinion Seal (YL8Z-4N046-AA) using seal installer tool. SPECIAL TOOL PART NUMBER T80T-4000-C (205-137). 9. Assemble end yoke to pinion gear spline. Align the marks made during disassembly. 10. Install pinion nut and torque to 217-271 Nm (160-200 lb-ft) (Figure 3). 11. Assemble driveshaft to end yoke (Figure 4) and torque to 23Nm (17lb-ft). Refer to Workshop Manual Section 205-01. PARTS BLOCK Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 5178 OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions of Bumper To Bumper warranty Coverage. OPERATION/DESCRIPTION/TIME DEALER CODING OASIS CODES: 509000, 510000, 590000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Wheel Bearing Check 1. Raise the vehicle until the front tires are off the floor. ^ Make sure the wheels are in a straight forward position. 2. Spin the tire by hand to check the wheel bearings for roughness. NOTE: Make sure the wheel rotates freely and that the brake pads are retraced sufficiently to allow free movement of the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Grip each front tire at the top and bottom and move the wheel inward and outward while lifting the weight of the tire off the front wheel bearing. 4. If the tire and wheel (hub) is loose on the spindle, does not rotate freely, or has a rough feeling when spun, carry out one of the following: 1 On vehicles with inner and outer bearings, inspect the bearings and cups for wear or damage. Adjust or install new bearing and cups as Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5182 necessary. 2 On vehicles with one sealed bearing install a new wheel hub. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Special Tools Special Tools Special Tools Removal NOTE: Install a new wheel bearing when the wheel hub is removed. All vehicles 1. Remove the brake disc. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5185 2. Remove the wheel hub nut. 3. Remove the tie rod end nut. 1 Remove the cotter pin. 2 Remove the nut. 4. Using the special tool, separate the tie rod end from the knuckle. Vehicles with ABS 5. Remove the bolt and position the anti-lock brake sensor aside. All vehicles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5186 6. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle. 1 Remove the pinch bolt. 2 Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle. 7. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the wheel knuckle. ^ Position the halfshaft aside and support. 8. Remove the wheel knuckle. 1 Remove the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts. 2 Remove the wheel knuckle. 9. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing and knuckle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5187 10. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle, after removing the wheel hub. Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub. 11. Remove the snap ring. 12. Using the special tools, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle. NOTE: The brake disc shield is pressed on. 13. If necessary, remove the brake disc shield. Installation All vehicles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5188 1. If necessary, install a disc brake shield. 2. Using the special tool, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. 3. Install the snap ring. 4. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5189 5. Install the wheel knuckle. 1 Position the wheel knuckle. 2 Install the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts. 6. Using the special tool, insert the halfshaft into the wheel hub. 7. Install the pinch bolt into the wheel knuckle. ^ Position and align the ball joint stud into the wheel knuckle. Vehicles with ABS 8. Install the anti-lock brake sensor and tighten the bolt. All vehicles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5190 9. Install the tie rod end into the wheel knuckle. 1 Install the tie rod end nut. 2 Install a new cotter pin. 10. Install the wheel hub nut. 11. Install the brake disc. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5191 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Special Tools Removal 1. Remove the brake drum. 2. Remove the wheel hub nut. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5192 3. Using the special tool, remove the wheel hub. 4. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle, after removing the wheel hub. Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub. 5. Remove the snap ring. 6. Using the special tools, remove the wheel bearing outer race from the wheel knuckle. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5193 1. Using the special tools, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. 2. Install the snap ring. 3. Using the special tool, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. 4. Install the wheel hub nut. 5. Install the brake drum. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Front Wheel Hub Nut 290 Nm (214 lb-ft) Rear Wheel Hub Nut (2WD) 290 Nm (214 lb-ft) Rear Wheel Hub Nut (4WD) 290 Nm (214 lb-ft) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak Technical Service Bulletin # 00T06 Date: 000801 Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak 00T06 SPECIAL SERVICE INSTRUCTION Certain 2001 Model Year Escape Vehicles - Rear Driveshaft Replacement ^ August 2OOO ^ Dealer Letter ^ Attachment I ^ Administrative Information ^ Attachment II ^ Labor Allowances ^ Attachment III ^ Technical Information ^ Special Service Instruction 00T06-S1 Certain 2001 Model Year Escape 4x4 Vehicles - Rear Driveshaft Replacement and Rear Differential Leak ^ Dealer Letter ^ Attachment I ^ Administrative Information ^ Attachment II ^ Labor Allowances ^ Attachment III ^ Technical Information, Supplement 00T06-S1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5207 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5208 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5209 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this Special Service Instruction. PLEASE NOTE: Correct all vehicles in stock before delivery. PROMPTLY CORRECT Promptly correct all affected vehicles at your dealership and other eligible vehicles which are brought to your dealership within the applicable 36 month / 36,000 mile warranty coverage period. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using DWE. ^ Refer to ACESII Manual for claims preparation and submission information. NOTE: Prepare and submit claims on the ACESII warranty screen rather than the ACESII recall screen. ^ Use code information shown below: ^ Program Code - 00T06 ^ Causal Component - 4602 ^ Condition Code - 12 ^ Labor Operation - Refer to Attachment II Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5210 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENT Parts Ordering Information Parts will not be direct shipped for this recall. Order your parts requirement through the Recall Hotline (1-800-325-5621). Parts will be shipped Priority Next Day delivery, beginning the week of August 28, 2000 once sufficient quantities of parts are available at the PDC's. NOTE: Removed parts must be mutilated and properly scrapped to prevent their use on another vehicle. ORDER INFORMATION DOR/COR DOR/COR number 50175 identifies parts ordered for this campaign through the Recall Hotline (1-800-325-5621). DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to: ^ DOES II ^ Updated Price Book EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information SERVICE PROCEDURE CAUTION: Do not reuse any driveshaft retaining fasteners. Install new fasteners only or damage to vehicle will occur. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5211 2. Position a safety stand under the driveshaft center bearing support. See Figure 1. 3. Remove the bolts and straps securing the rear of the driveshaft to the differential yoke. Discard the bolts. See Figure 2. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5212 4. Remove and discard the center bearing support nuts. See Figure 3. 5. Remove the center bearing support ground strap bolt from the floor pan. See Figure 3. 6. Remove and discard the bolts and washers securing the front of the driveshaft to the power take off. See Figure 4. 7. With the aid of an assistant, remove the driveshaft from the safety stand. Discard the driveshaft. 8. With the aid of an assistant, position the center bearing support of the new driveshaft onto the safety stand. Position the rear of the driveshaft into the differential yoke, then position the front of the driveshaft into the power take off. CAUTION: The rear of the driveshaft must be bolted to the differential yoke before the center bearing support nuts are installed. 9. Install the straps with new bolts to secure the rear of the driveshaft to the differential yoke. Tighten the bolts to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 10. Install new nuts to the center bearing support. Tighten the nuts to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5213 11. Install the center bearing support ground strap to the floor pan. Tighten the bolt to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). NOTE: If front driveshaft bolts are missing or damaged, order Part Number YL8Z-4529-AA, quantity of one (1). 12. Install new bolts and washers to secure the front of the driveshaft to the power take off. Tighten the bolts to 37 Nm (27 lb-ft). 13. Remove the safety stand from under the center bearing support. 14. Lower the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5214 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5215 Special Service Instruction - Attachment I OASIS You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this Special Service Instruction. PLEASE NOTE: Correct all vehicles in stock before delivery. PROMPTLY CORRECT Promptly correct all affected vehicles at your dealership and other eligible vehicles which are brought to your dealership within the applicable 36 month / 36,000 mile warranty coverage period. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using DWE. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5216 ^ Refer to ACESII Manual for claims preparation and submission information. NOTE: Prepare and submit claims on the ACESII warranty screen rather than the ACESII recall screen. ^ Use code information shown below: ^ Program Code - 00T06 ^ Causal Component-4602 ^ Condition Code - 12 ^ Labor Operation - Refer to Attachment II MATERIAL ALLOWANCE Special Service Instruction - Attachment II LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5217 Parts Ordering Information Parts will not be direct shipped for this recall. Order your parts requirement through the Recall Hotline (1-800-325-5621). Parts will be shipped Priority Next Day delivery. NOTE: Removed parts must be mutilated and properly scrapped to prevent their use on another vehicle. ORDER INFORMATION DOR/COR DOR/COR number 50175 identifies parts ordered for this campaign through the Recall Hotline (1-800-325-5621). DEALER PRICE ^ DOES II ^ Updated Price Book EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000 Special Service Instruction - Attachment III OVERVIEW This program combines two procedures, a driveshaft replacement and a differential leak inspection/repair. These two procedures are closely related, and performing them together will save time. DRIVESHAFT REPLACEMENT: All affected vehicles will have a new driveshaft installed. DIFFERENTIAL LEAK INSPECTION/REPAIR: The mass damper is a weight bolted to the right side of the differential assembly. The damper may have been installed using the wrong tightening sequence. When installed incorrectly the damper does not contact all three mounting pads as the bolts are tightened. This creates a leak in the silicone seal between the rotary blade coupling housing and the differential housing. An inspection will be performed to identify leaking differential assemblies. If a leak is found, the coupling housing will be removed and resealed with silicone (F7TZ-1 9554-AA). The damper will be reinstalled using the correct tightening sequence. INSPECTION 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5218 2. Wipe clean the seam between the rotary blade coupling and the differential housing. Check for fluid seepage at the seam. See Figure 1. ^ If no signs of fluid are found at the seam, perform Driveshaft Replacement only. ^ If signs of fluid are found at the seam, perform Driveshaft Replacement and Differential Reseal and Mass Damper Re-Installation. DRIVESHAFT REPLACEMENT CAUTION: Do not reuse any driveshaft retaining fasteners. Install new fasteners only or damage to vehicle may occur. 1. Position a safety stand under the driveshaft center bearing support. See Figure 2. 2. Remove the bolts and straps securing the rear of the driveshaft to the differential yoke. Discard the bolts. See Figure 3. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5219 3. Remove and discard the center bearing support nuts. See Figure 4. 4. Remove the center bearing support ground strap bolt from the floor pan. See Figure 4. 5. Remove and discard the bolts and washers securing the front of the driveshaft to the power take off. See Figure 5. 6. With the aid of an assistant, remove the driveshaft from the safety stand. Discard the driveshaft. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5220 7. With the aid of an assistant, position the center bearing support of the new driveshaft onto the safety stand. Position the rear of the driveshaft into the differential yoke, then position the front of the driveshaft into the power take off. CAUTION: The rear of the driveshaft must be bolted to the differential yoke before the center bearing support nuts are installed. 8. Install the straps with new bolts to secure the rear of the driveshaft to the differential yoke. Tighten the bolts to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 9. Install new nuts to the center bearing support. Tighten the nuts to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 10. Install the center bearing support ground strap to the floor pan. Tighten the bolt to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). NOTE: If front driveshaft bolts are missing or damaged, order Part Number YL8Z-4529-AA, quantity of one (1). 11. Install new bolts and washers to secure the front of the driveshaft to the power take off. Tighten the bolts to 37 Nm (27 lb-ft). 12. Remove the safety stand from under the center bearing support. 13. Lower the vehicle. DIFFERENTIAL RESEAL AND MASS DAMPER RE-INSTALLATION 1. Disconnect the electrical connector from the rotary blade coupling. 2. Remove the mass damper. See Figure 6. 3. Position a drain pan under the differential assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5221 4. Remove the six bolts, then remove the rotary blade coupling. See Figure 7. CAUTION: Make sure the mating surfaces of the rotary blade coupling and the differential housing are clean and free of oil before applying silicone sealant. Do not use abrasive cleaning pads. The inside of the differential housing must be covered when cleaning to prevent debris from entering the differential. 5. Clean the gasket mating surfaces of the rotary blade coupling and the differential housing with Ford Metal Surface Cleaner (F4AZ-19A536-RA). NOTE: The rotary blade coupling must be installed within five (5) minutes of applying the silicone, or new silicone must be applied. If possible, allow one (1) hour before filling with lubricant to allow proper curing of the silicone. 6. Apply a continuous bead of silicone sealant (F7TZ-19554-AA) or equivalent to the mating surface of the rotary blade coupling. Make sure the bead covers 360 degrees around each bolt hole. Make sure the rubber wiring grommet does not touch or damage the new silicone bead. NOTE: The rubber wiring grommet must be guided into the slot on the differential housing during installation of the rotary blade coupling. 7. Install the rotary blade coupling. Tighten bolts to 32 Nm (24 lb-ft). CAUTION: The proper torque sequence must be followed when installing the mass damper. Improper sequence will create a leak at the seam between the differential housing and the rotary blade coupling. CAUTION: The initial torque for the damper rear bolt should NOT exceed 4 Nm (35 LB-INCHES). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5222 8. Install the mass damper and finger tighten the bolts. Torque the damper as follows. See Figure 8. ^ Step 1: Torque rear damper bolt to 4 Nm (35 LB-INCHES) MAXIMUM. ^ Step 2: Torque front bottom damper bolt to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). ^ Step 3: Torque front top damper bolt to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). ^ Step 4: Torque rear bottom damper bolt to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 9. Connect the electrical connector to the rotary blade coupling. 10. Remove the fill plug from the differential cover. 11. Fill differential with approximately 2 pints of XY-80W90-QL rear axle lubricant. Fluid level should be between 6 mm (1/4 inch) and 14 mm (9/16 inch) from bottom of filler plug opening. 12. Tighten the fill plug to 27 Nm (20 lb-ft). 13. Return to Step No.7 to complete driveshaft installation procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak Technical Service Bulletin # 00T06 Date: 000801 Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak 00T06 SPECIAL SERVICE INSTRUCTION Certain 2001 Model Year Escape Vehicles - Rear Driveshaft Replacement ^ August 2OOO ^ Dealer Letter ^ Attachment I ^ Administrative Information ^ Attachment II ^ Labor Allowances ^ Attachment III ^ Technical Information ^ Special Service Instruction 00T06-S1 Certain 2001 Model Year Escape 4x4 Vehicles - Rear Driveshaft Replacement and Rear Differential Leak ^ Dealer Letter ^ Attachment I ^ Administrative Information ^ Attachment II ^ Labor Allowances ^ Attachment III ^ Technical Information, Supplement 00T06-S1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5228 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5229 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5230 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this Special Service Instruction. PLEASE NOTE: Correct all vehicles in stock before delivery. PROMPTLY CORRECT Promptly correct all affected vehicles at your dealership and other eligible vehicles which are brought to your dealership within the applicable 36 month / 36,000 mile warranty coverage period. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using DWE. ^ Refer to ACESII Manual for claims preparation and submission information. NOTE: Prepare and submit claims on the ACESII warranty screen rather than the ACESII recall screen. ^ Use code information shown below: ^ Program Code - 00T06 ^ Causal Component - 4602 ^ Condition Code - 12 ^ Labor Operation - Refer to Attachment II Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5231 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENT Parts Ordering Information Parts will not be direct shipped for this recall. Order your parts requirement through the Recall Hotline (1-800-325-5621). Parts will be shipped Priority Next Day delivery, beginning the week of August 28, 2000 once sufficient quantities of parts are available at the PDC's. NOTE: Removed parts must be mutilated and properly scrapped to prevent their use on another vehicle. ORDER INFORMATION DOR/COR DOR/COR number 50175 identifies parts ordered for this campaign through the Recall Hotline (1-800-325-5621). DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to: ^ DOES II ^ Updated Price Book EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information SERVICE PROCEDURE CAUTION: Do not reuse any driveshaft retaining fasteners. Install new fasteners only or damage to vehicle will occur. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5232 2. Position a safety stand under the driveshaft center bearing support. See Figure 1. 3. Remove the bolts and straps securing the rear of the driveshaft to the differential yoke. Discard the bolts. See Figure 2. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5233 4. Remove and discard the center bearing support nuts. See Figure 3. 5. Remove the center bearing support ground strap bolt from the floor pan. See Figure 3. 6. Remove and discard the bolts and washers securing the front of the driveshaft to the power take off. See Figure 4. 7. With the aid of an assistant, remove the driveshaft from the safety stand. Discard the driveshaft. 8. With the aid of an assistant, position the center bearing support of the new driveshaft onto the safety stand. Position the rear of the driveshaft into the differential yoke, then position the front of the driveshaft into the power take off. CAUTION: The rear of the driveshaft must be bolted to the differential yoke before the center bearing support nuts are installed. 9. Install the straps with new bolts to secure the rear of the driveshaft to the differential yoke. Tighten the bolts to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 10. Install new nuts to the center bearing support. Tighten the nuts to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5234 11. Install the center bearing support ground strap to the floor pan. Tighten the bolt to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). NOTE: If front driveshaft bolts are missing or damaged, order Part Number YL8Z-4529-AA, quantity of one (1). 12. Install new bolts and washers to secure the front of the driveshaft to the power take off. Tighten the bolts to 37 Nm (27 lb-ft). 13. Remove the safety stand from under the center bearing support. 14. Lower the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5235 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5236 Special Service Instruction - Attachment I OASIS You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this Special Service Instruction. PLEASE NOTE: Correct all vehicles in stock before delivery. PROMPTLY CORRECT Promptly correct all affected vehicles at your dealership and other eligible vehicles which are brought to your dealership within the applicable 36 month / 36,000 mile warranty coverage period. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using DWE. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5237 ^ Refer to ACESII Manual for claims preparation and submission information. NOTE: Prepare and submit claims on the ACESII warranty screen rather than the ACESII recall screen. ^ Use code information shown below: ^ Program Code - 00T06 ^ Causal Component-4602 ^ Condition Code - 12 ^ Labor Operation - Refer to Attachment II MATERIAL ALLOWANCE Special Service Instruction - Attachment II LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5238 Parts Ordering Information Parts will not be direct shipped for this recall. Order your parts requirement through the Recall Hotline (1-800-325-5621). Parts will be shipped Priority Next Day delivery. NOTE: Removed parts must be mutilated and properly scrapped to prevent their use on another vehicle. ORDER INFORMATION DOR/COR DOR/COR number 50175 identifies parts ordered for this campaign through the Recall Hotline (1-800-325-5621). DEALER PRICE ^ DOES II ^ Updated Price Book EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000 Special Service Instruction - Attachment III OVERVIEW This program combines two procedures, a driveshaft replacement and a differential leak inspection/repair. These two procedures are closely related, and performing them together will save time. DRIVESHAFT REPLACEMENT: All affected vehicles will have a new driveshaft installed. DIFFERENTIAL LEAK INSPECTION/REPAIR: The mass damper is a weight bolted to the right side of the differential assembly. The damper may have been installed using the wrong tightening sequence. When installed incorrectly the damper does not contact all three mounting pads as the bolts are tightened. This creates a leak in the silicone seal between the rotary blade coupling housing and the differential housing. An inspection will be performed to identify leaking differential assemblies. If a leak is found, the coupling housing will be removed and resealed with silicone (F7TZ-1 9554-AA). The damper will be reinstalled using the correct tightening sequence. INSPECTION 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5239 2. Wipe clean the seam between the rotary blade coupling and the differential housing. Check for fluid seepage at the seam. See Figure 1. ^ If no signs of fluid are found at the seam, perform Driveshaft Replacement only. ^ If signs of fluid are found at the seam, perform Driveshaft Replacement and Differential Reseal and Mass Damper Re-Installation. DRIVESHAFT REPLACEMENT CAUTION: Do not reuse any driveshaft retaining fasteners. Install new fasteners only or damage to vehicle may occur. 1. Position a safety stand under the driveshaft center bearing support. See Figure 2. 2. Remove the bolts and straps securing the rear of the driveshaft to the differential yoke. Discard the bolts. See Figure 3. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5240 3. Remove and discard the center bearing support nuts. See Figure 4. 4. Remove the center bearing support ground strap bolt from the floor pan. See Figure 4. 5. Remove and discard the bolts and washers securing the front of the driveshaft to the power take off. See Figure 5. 6. With the aid of an assistant, remove the driveshaft from the safety stand. Discard the driveshaft. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5241 7. With the aid of an assistant, position the center bearing support of the new driveshaft onto the safety stand. Position the rear of the driveshaft into the differential yoke, then position the front of the driveshaft into the power take off. CAUTION: The rear of the driveshaft must be bolted to the differential yoke before the center bearing support nuts are installed. 8. Install the straps with new bolts to secure the rear of the driveshaft to the differential yoke. Tighten the bolts to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 9. Install new nuts to the center bearing support. Tighten the nuts to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 10. Install the center bearing support ground strap to the floor pan. Tighten the bolt to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). NOTE: If front driveshaft bolts are missing or damaged, order Part Number YL8Z-4529-AA, quantity of one (1). 11. Install new bolts and washers to secure the front of the driveshaft to the power take off. Tighten the bolts to 37 Nm (27 lb-ft). 12. Remove the safety stand from under the center bearing support. 13. Lower the vehicle. DIFFERENTIAL RESEAL AND MASS DAMPER RE-INSTALLATION 1. Disconnect the electrical connector from the rotary blade coupling. 2. Remove the mass damper. See Figure 6. 3. Position a drain pan under the differential assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5242 4. Remove the six bolts, then remove the rotary blade coupling. See Figure 7. CAUTION: Make sure the mating surfaces of the rotary blade coupling and the differential housing are clean and free of oil before applying silicone sealant. Do not use abrasive cleaning pads. The inside of the differential housing must be covered when cleaning to prevent debris from entering the differential. 5. Clean the gasket mating surfaces of the rotary blade coupling and the differential housing with Ford Metal Surface Cleaner (F4AZ-19A536-RA). NOTE: The rotary blade coupling must be installed within five (5) minutes of applying the silicone, or new silicone must be applied. If possible, allow one (1) hour before filling with lubricant to allow proper curing of the silicone. 6. Apply a continuous bead of silicone sealant (F7TZ-19554-AA) or equivalent to the mating surface of the rotary blade coupling. Make sure the bead covers 360 degrees around each bolt hole. Make sure the rubber wiring grommet does not touch or damage the new silicone bead. NOTE: The rubber wiring grommet must be guided into the slot on the differential housing during installation of the rotary blade coupling. 7. Install the rotary blade coupling. Tighten bolts to 32 Nm (24 lb-ft). CAUTION: The proper torque sequence must be followed when installing the mass damper. Improper sequence will create a leak at the seam between the differential housing and the rotary blade coupling. CAUTION: The initial torque for the damper rear bolt should NOT exceed 4 Nm (35 LB-INCHES). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 00T06 > Aug > 00 > Campaign - Rear Driveshaft Replacement, Diff. Leak > Page 5243 8. Install the mass damper and finger tighten the bolts. Torque the damper as follows. See Figure 8. ^ Step 1: Torque rear damper bolt to 4 Nm (35 LB-INCHES) MAXIMUM. ^ Step 2: Torque front bottom damper bolt to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). ^ Step 3: Torque front top damper bolt to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). ^ Step 4: Torque rear bottom damper bolt to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 9. Connect the electrical connector to the rotary blade coupling. 10. Remove the fill plug from the differential cover. 11. Fill differential with approximately 2 pints of XY-80W90-QL rear axle lubricant. Fluid level should be between 6 mm (1/4 inch) and 14 mm (9/16 inch) from bottom of filler plug opening. 12. Tighten the fill plug to 27 Nm (20 lb-ft). 13. Return to Step No.7 to complete driveshaft installation procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5244 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Specifications Center bearing mount nuts 35 ft.lb Rear end universal joint caps bolts 17 ft.lb Driveshaft to power take off bolts 27 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5245 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Description and Operation Driveshaft CAUTION: All Driveshaft assemblies are balanced. If undercoating the vehicle, protect the driveshaft to prevent overspray of any undercoating material. CAUTION: Manual and automatic transmission driveshafts are different. Make sure that the Driveshaft being installed is compatible with the vehicle or damage to the vehicle may occur. The Driveshaft has traditional balance weights attached (spot-welded) by the manufacturer. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > General Procedures Drive/Propeller Shaft: Service and Repair General Procedures Indexing Driveshaft Indexing NOTE: If a driveshaft is installed and driveshaft vibration is encountered after installation, index the drive shaft. NOTE: If indexing the driveshaft does not eliminate the vibration, balance the driveshaft. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Disconnect the front driveshaft and rotate the front flange 60 degrees. 3. Connect the front driveshaft. 4. Disconnect the rear driveshaft universal joint and rotate 180 degrees. 5. Connect the rear driveshaft. 6. Lower the vehicle and test drive. 7. Repeat the procedure if necessary. Runout and Balance Driveshaft Runout and Balance 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the rear tires. ^ Install the lug nuts to retain the brake drums. 3. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not run the vehicle on the hoist for an extended period of time. ^ Record base line speed with the transmission in gear. ^ Increase the vehicle speed to the maximum vibration level. ^ Record the speed of the vibration as a base line. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > General Procedures > Page 5248 4. Check the rear driveshaft attachment. If there are any worn parts, new parts need to be installed. 5. WARNING: Keep hands away from the balance weights while the driveshaft is rotating. With the transmission in gear, run the vehicle with the driveshaft rotating 97-113 km/h (60-70 mph). 6. WARNING: Keep hands away from the balance weights while the driveshaft is rotating. Have an assistant contact the driveshaft with a marker in the rear, middle and front end to indicate heavy spots. 7. WARNING: Keep hands away from the balance weights while the driveshaft is rotating. To balance the driveshaft, install two screw-type hose clamps on the driveshaft and rotate them in 90 degree intervals. Check the vibration for each position and place the screws at the position that produces the least vibration. 8. Run the vehicle at the base line speed. 9. If the vibration is still evident, rotate the clamps away from each other until the driveshaft is balanced. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > General Procedures > Page 5249 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Driveshaft Removal and Installation WARNING: The normal operating temperature of the exhaust system is very high. Never attempt to remove any part of the system until it has cooled. Be especially careful when working around the catalytic converters. The temperature of the converter rises to a high level after only a few minutes of engine operation. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Index-mark the pinion and yoke to the rear of the driveshaft. 3. Remove the ground strap bolt. 4. CAUTION: Do not reuse center bearing nuts. Install new nuts only or damage to the vehicle will occur. Remove and discard the driveshaft center bearing nuts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > General Procedures > Page 5250 5. CAUTION: Do not reuse the CV joint bolts and washers. Install new bolts and washers only or damage to the vehicle may occur. Remove the front driveshaft to power take off bolts and washers. ^ Discard the bolts and washers. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Description and Operation Universal Joint: Description and Operation Universal Joints The Driveshaft is repaired by installing a new complete assembly. The single center joint is: ^ a lubed-for-life design that requires no periodic lubrication. ^ equipped with nylon thrust washers, located at the base of each bearing cup, which control end play, position the needle bearings and improve grease movement. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications Flex Plate: Specifications Flex Plate Tightening Torque 59 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5257 Flex Plate: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. Remove the transaxle. 2. Remove the bolts and the flexplate. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications Flywheel: Specifications Flywheel Tightening Torque 83 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5261 Flywheel: Service and Repair Removal 1. Remove the clutch. 2. Remove the bolts and the flywheel. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL INDICATOR LAMP The Transmission Control Indicator Lamp (TCIL) is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Refer to Transmission Control Switch, PCM Inputs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Bell Housing, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Bell Housing: Service and Repair Clutch Housing Locating Dowels Removal 1. Remove the flywheel. 2. NOTE: Care should be taken not to damage the dowel holes or the surrounding surface areas during removal. Remove the clutch housing locating dowels. Installation 1. NOTE: Care should be taken to install the dowel squarely into place until it is fully seated and to not damage the surrounding surface areas. Install the clutch housing locating dowels. 2. Install the flywheel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Case, M/T > Component Information > Specifications Case: Specifications Case cover bolts 89 in.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Manual Transaxle > Differential Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Differential Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications Please refer to Manual Transmission Fluid; Specifications for capacities of the manual transaxle assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Manual Transaxle > Differential Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 5279 Differential Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications Fluid Type SAE 75W-90 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Drain Plug, M/T > Component Information > Specifications Drain Plug: Specifications Drain plug 35 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Drain Plug, M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5283 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications Manual Transmission Capacity ............................................................................................................................................... ................................................................... 2.8 Quarts Note: Approximate refill. Service refill capacity is determined by filling the transmission to the bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a level surface. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 5288 Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications Manual Transmission Fluid Type Type ..................................................................................................................................................... .................. Motorcraft SAE 75W-90 Gear Oil GL-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Flywheel Gear, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Flywheel Gear: Service and Repair Flywheel Ring Gear Removal WARNING: This procedure should be carried out only by a correctly equipped and experienced acetylene torch operator. To avoid personal injury, tongs must be used or asbestos gloves worn when handling the heated flywheel ring gear. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. Remove the flywheel. 2. CAUTION: Tap the flywheel ring gear evenly to prevent binding. Remove the flywheel ring gear from the flywheel. ^ Evenly heat the flywheel ring gear and use a brass drift to drive the flywheel ring gear off the flywheel. Installation WARNING: This procedure should be carried out only by a correctly equipped and experienced acetylene torch operator. To avoid personal injury, tongs must be used or asbestos gloves worn when handling the heated flywheel ring gear. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. CAUTION: Do not heat the flywheel ring gear beyond 278°C (532°F). Use heat indicating crayons to prevent overheating. CAUTION: Keep the torch moving to prevent hot spots. Evenly heat the flywheel ring gear. 2. CAUTION: The bevel on the flywheel ring gear must face the rear of the flywheel. Install the flywheel ring gear. ^ Use a brass drift to tap the flywheel ring gear into position. 3. Install the flywheel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Input Shaft, M/T > Component Information > Specifications Input Shaft: Specifications Input shaft lock nut 118 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, M/T > System Information > Service and Repair Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Halfshaft Oil Seal Special Tool(s) Removal 1. Remove the halfshaft. 2. NOTE: RH side shown, LH side similar. Remove the halfshaft seal. Installation 1. NOTE: RH side shown, LH side similar. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, M/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 5298 Using the special tool, install the new halfshaft seal. 2. Install the halfshaft. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Specifications Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications Turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb Output shaft speed (OSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 5305 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5308 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5309 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED SENSOR The Output Shaft Speed Sensor (OSS), provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft. The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information generated. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel. 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor. ^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector. ^ Remove the bolt. ^ Inspect the OSS bore. 5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5312 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation. Install the OSS sensor. ^ Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5313 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel. 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor. 5. Remove the TSS sensor. ^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector. ^ Remove the bolt. ^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore. 6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5314 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation. Install the TSS sensor. ^ Connect the TSS electrical connector. 2. Remove the drain pan. 3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 7. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all near positions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component Information > Specifications Shifter M/T: Specifications Shift control shaft selector lever bolt 10 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5318 Shifter M/T: Service and Repair Gearshift Lever Removal and Installation 1. Remove the center console trim and gearshift lever boot. 1. Remove the gearshift lever knob. 2. Remove the center console trim and gearshift lever boot. 2. Remove the snap ring. 3. Remove the plastic clip. 4. Remove the rubber bushing. 5. Raise and support the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5319 6. Disconnect the gearshift linkage. 1. Remove the bolt and nut. 2. Disconnect the gearshift linkage. 7. Remove the gearshift lever. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift Boot, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Shift Boot: Service and Repair Gearshift Lever Boot Removal and Installation 1. Remove the center console trim and gearshift lever boot. 1. Remove the Gearshift lever knob. 2. Remove the center console trim and Gearshift lever boot. 2. Remove the gearshift lever boot. 1. Remove the screws. 2. Remove the Gearshift lever boot. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T > Component Information > Specifications Transmission Mount: Specifications Front transaxle support insulator bracket bolts 41 ft.lb Front transaxle support insulator bolt 66 ft.lb Rear transaxle support insulator bolt 66 ft.lb Rear transaxle support insulator to subframe bolt and nuts 66 ft.lb Rear transaxle support insulator bracket to transaxle bolts 66 ft.lb LH transaxle support insulator bracket to transaxle bolt and nuts 66 ft.lb LH transaxle support insulator to bracket bolt 66 ft.lb LH transaxle support insulator to body bolts 41 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Support Insulator - LH Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Support Insulator - LH Transaxle LH Support Insulator Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation 1. Using the special tool, support the engine. 2. Remove the air cleaner. 3. Remove the LH transaxle support insulator. 1. Remove the bolt. 2. Remove the four bolts. 3. Remove the LH transaxle support insulator. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Support Insulator - LH > Page 5329 Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Front Support Insulator Transaxle Front Support Insulator Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation 1. Using the special tool, support the engine. 2. Remove the front transaxle support insulator bolt. 3. Raise and support the vehicle. 4. Remove the transverse crossmember. 1. Remove the bolts. 2. Remove the transverse crossmember. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Support Insulator - LH > Page 5330 5. Remove the front-to-aft crossmember. 1. Remove the splash shield screw. 2. Remove the bolts and the nut. 3. Remove the front-to-aft crossmember. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Support Insulator - LH > Page 5331 Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Rear Support Insulator Transaxle Rear Support Insulator Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation 1. Using the special tool, support the engine. 2. Remove the rear transaxle support insulator. 1. Remove the bolt. 2. Remove the bolt and the nuts. 3. Remove the rear transaxle support insulator. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Specifications Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications Turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb Output shaft speed (OSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 5337 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5340 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5341 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED SENSOR The Output Shaft Speed Sensor (OSS), provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft. The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information generated. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel. 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor. ^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector. ^ Remove the bolt. ^ Inspect the OSS bore. 5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5344 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation. Install the OSS sensor. ^ Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5345 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel. 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor. 5. Remove the TSS sensor. ^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector. ^ Remove the bolt. ^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore. 6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5346 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation. Install the TSS sensor. ^ Connect the TSS electrical connector. 2. Remove the drain pan. 3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 7. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all near positions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5352 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5353 Shift Interlock Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5354 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Transmission Control Switch (TCS) The Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (Figures 43 and 44) signals the PCM with key power whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the Transmission Control Indicator Lamp (TCIL) lights when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. The operator of the vehicle controls the position of the TCS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications Digital Transmission Range Sensor: Specifications Park/neutral position (PNP) switch 18 ft.lb Transmission range (TR) sensor bolts 9 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5363 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5364 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5365 Digital Transmission Range Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Special Tools Special Tool(s) Removal 1. Place the vehicle in NEUTRAL. 2. Disconnect the battery cables. 3. Remove the battery and tray. 4. Disconnect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAP) sensor. 5. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5366 6. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 7. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the thermostat housing to gain access to the transmission range (TR) sensor. Remove the thermostat housing. 8. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor. 1. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the TR sensor. Installation 1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position. Install the transmission range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5367 2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts. ^ Connect the electrical connector. 3. Install the thermostat housing. 4. Install the air cleaner assembly. 5. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover. 6. Connect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAF) sensor. 7. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or incorrect routing position. Install the battery and tray. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5368 8. NOTE: When the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, some abnormal drive symptoms can occur while the vehicle relearns its adaptive strategy. The vehicle may need to be driven 160 km (100 miles) or more to relearn the strategy. Connect the battery cables. 9. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should be active only in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored Transmission Speed Sensor: Customer Interest A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored Article No. 02-2-4 02/04/02 TRANSAXLE - CD4E - HARSH AND DELAYED 1-2/2-3 UPSHIFTS - AFTER TRANSAXLE OR TURBINE SHAFT SPEED SENSOR (TSS) REPLACEMENT - POSSIBLE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTC) 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, AND P1744 FORD: 1994-1997 PROBE 1995-2000 CONTOUR 2001-2002 ESCAPE MERCURY: 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR ISSUE Some vehicles equipped with the CD4E transaxle may exhibit harsh and delayed 1-2/2-3 upshifts along with DTCs for gear ratio errors after the Transaxle or Turbine Shaft Speed sensor (TSS) have been replaced. DTCs may include OBD1 codes 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, or OBD II codes P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, and P1744 ACTION If the condition occurred after servicing the Transaxle or TSS, refer to the following TSS Selection Chart and select the correct TSS for the vehicle application. Note that each TSS has the Ford engineering part number on it. Also note that there is a TSS kit that includes an instruction sheet, TSS sensor and correct bolt. SERVICE PROCEDURE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored > Page 5377 If the condition occurred after replacing the Transaxle or TSS, use the TSS Selection Chart and determine the correct sensor for the vehicle. 1. Remove the existing TSS from the CD4E pump body. 2. Reinstall the original TSS sensor, if available, or install the correct TSS as indicated in the Selection Chart. 3. Clear all codes and verify repair. 4. If the condition still exists, follow normal diagnostics as listed in the appropriate model year Workshop Manual. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 501000, 502000, 503000, 504000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored Article No. 02-2-4 02/04/02 TRANSAXLE - CD4E - HARSH AND DELAYED 1-2/2-3 UPSHIFTS - AFTER TRANSAXLE OR TURBINE SHAFT SPEED SENSOR (TSS) REPLACEMENT - POSSIBLE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTC) 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, AND P1744 FORD: 1994-1997 PROBE 1995-2000 CONTOUR 2001-2002 ESCAPE MERCURY: 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR ISSUE Some vehicles equipped with the CD4E transaxle may exhibit harsh and delayed 1-2/2-3 upshifts along with DTCs for gear ratio errors after the Transaxle or Turbine Shaft Speed sensor (TSS) have been replaced. DTCs may include OBD1 codes 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, or OBD II codes P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, and P1744 ACTION If the condition occurred after servicing the Transaxle or TSS, refer to the following TSS Selection Chart and select the correct TSS for the vehicle application. Note that each TSS has the Ford engineering part number on it. Also note that there is a TSS kit that includes an instruction sheet, TSS sensor and correct bolt. SERVICE PROCEDURE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored > Page 5383 If the condition occurred after replacing the Transaxle or TSS, use the TSS Selection Chart and determine the correct sensor for the vehicle. 1. Remove the existing TSS from the CD4E pump body. 2. Reinstall the original TSS sensor, if available, or install the correct TSS as indicated in the Selection Chart. 3. Clear all codes and verify repair. 4. If the condition still exists, follow normal diagnostics as listed in the appropriate model year Workshop Manual. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 501000, 502000, 503000, 504000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5384 Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications Turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb Output shaft speed (OSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 5387 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5390 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5391 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED SENSOR The Output Shaft Speed Sensor (OSS), provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft. The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information generated. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel. 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor. ^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector. ^ Remove the bolt. ^ Inspect the OSS bore. 5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5394 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation. Install the OSS sensor. ^ Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5395 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel. 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor. 5. Remove the TSS sensor. ^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector. ^ Remove the bolt. ^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore. 6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5396 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation. Install the TSS sensor. ^ Connect the TSS electrical connector. 2. Remove the drain pan. 3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 7. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all near positions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Specifications Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications Turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb Output shaft speed (OSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 5403 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5406 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5407 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED SENSOR The Output Shaft Speed Sensor (OSS), provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft. The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information generated. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel. 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor. ^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector. ^ Remove the bolt. ^ Inspect the OSS bore. 5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5410 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation. Install the OSS sensor. ^ Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5411 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel. 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor. 5. Remove the TSS sensor. ^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector. ^ Remove the bolt. ^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore. 6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5412 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation. Install the TSS sensor. ^ Connect the TSS electrical connector. 2. Remove the drain pan. 3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 7. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all near positions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Shift Solenoid: Specifications Solenoid valve body bolts 89 in.lb Solenoid body-to-case bolts 89 in.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL INDICATOR LAMP The Transmission Control Indicator Lamp (TCIL) is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Refer to Transmission Control Switch, PCM Inputs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5433 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5434 Shift Interlock Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5435 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Transmission Control Switch (TCS) The Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (Figures 43 and 44) signals the PCM with key power whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the Transmission Control Indicator Lamp (TCIL) lights when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. The operator of the vehicle controls the position of the TCS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications Digital Transmission Range Sensor: Specifications Park/neutral position (PNP) switch 18 ft.lb Transmission range (TR) sensor bolts 9 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5444 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5445 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5446 Digital Transmission Range Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Special Tools Special Tool(s) Removal 1. Place the vehicle in NEUTRAL. 2. Disconnect the battery cables. 3. Remove the battery and tray. 4. Disconnect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAP) sensor. 5. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5447 6. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 7. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the thermostat housing to gain access to the transmission range (TR) sensor. Remove the thermostat housing. 8. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor. 1. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the TR sensor. Installation 1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position. Install the transmission range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5448 2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts. ^ Connect the electrical connector. 3. Install the thermostat housing. 4. Install the air cleaner assembly. 5. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover. 6. Connect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAF) sensor. 7. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or incorrect routing position. Install the battery and tray. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Digital Transmission Range Sensor <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5449 8. NOTE: When the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, some abnormal drive symptoms can occur while the vehicle relearns its adaptive strategy. The vehicle may need to be driven 160 km (100 miles) or more to relearn the strategy. Connect the battery cables. 9. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should be active only in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored Transmission Speed Sensor: Customer Interest A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored Article No. 02-2-4 02/04/02 TRANSAXLE - CD4E - HARSH AND DELAYED 1-2/2-3 UPSHIFTS - AFTER TRANSAXLE OR TURBINE SHAFT SPEED SENSOR (TSS) REPLACEMENT - POSSIBLE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTC) 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, AND P1744 FORD: 1994-1997 PROBE 1995-2000 CONTOUR 2001-2002 ESCAPE MERCURY: 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR ISSUE Some vehicles equipped with the CD4E transaxle may exhibit harsh and delayed 1-2/2-3 upshifts along with DTCs for gear ratio errors after the Transaxle or Turbine Shaft Speed sensor (TSS) have been replaced. DTCs may include OBD1 codes 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, or OBD II codes P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, and P1744 ACTION If the condition occurred after servicing the Transaxle or TSS, refer to the following TSS Selection Chart and select the correct TSS for the vehicle application. Note that each TSS has the Ford engineering part number on it. Also note that there is a TSS kit that includes an instruction sheet, TSS sensor and correct bolt. SERVICE PROCEDURE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored > Page 5458 If the condition occurred after replacing the Transaxle or TSS, use the TSS Selection Chart and determine the correct sensor for the vehicle. 1. Remove the existing TSS from the CD4E pump body. 2. Reinstall the original TSS sensor, if available, or install the correct TSS as indicated in the Selection Chart. 3. Clear all codes and verify repair. 4. If the condition still exists, follow normal diagnostics as listed in the appropriate model year Workshop Manual. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 501000, 502000, 503000, 504000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored Transmission Speed Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored Article No. 02-2-4 02/04/02 TRANSAXLE - CD4E - HARSH AND DELAYED 1-2/2-3 UPSHIFTS - AFTER TRANSAXLE OR TURBINE SHAFT SPEED SENSOR (TSS) REPLACEMENT - POSSIBLE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTC) 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, AND P1744 FORD: 1994-1997 PROBE 1995-2000 CONTOUR 2001-2002 ESCAPE MERCURY: 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR ISSUE Some vehicles equipped with the CD4E transaxle may exhibit harsh and delayed 1-2/2-3 upshifts along with DTCs for gear ratio errors after the Transaxle or Turbine Shaft Speed sensor (TSS) have been replaced. DTCs may include OBD1 codes 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, or OBD II codes P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, and P1744 ACTION If the condition occurred after servicing the Transaxle or TSS, refer to the following TSS Selection Chart and select the correct TSS for the vehicle application. Note that each TSS has the Ford engineering part number on it. Also note that there is a TSS kit that includes an instruction sheet, TSS sensor and correct bolt. SERVICE PROCEDURE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Speed Sensor: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored > Page 5464 If the condition occurred after replacing the Transaxle or TSS, use the TSS Selection Chart and determine the correct sensor for the vehicle. 1. Remove the existing TSS from the CD4E pump body. 2. Reinstall the original TSS sensor, if available, or install the correct TSS as indicated in the Selection Chart. 3. Clear all codes and verify repair. 4. If the condition still exists, follow normal diagnostics as listed in the appropriate model year Workshop Manual. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 501000, 502000, 503000, 504000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5465 Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications Turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb Output shaft speed (OSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 5468 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5471 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5472 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED SENSOR The Output Shaft Speed Sensor (OSS), provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft. The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information generated. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel. 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor. ^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector. ^ Remove the bolt. ^ Inspect the OSS bore. 5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5475 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation. Install the OSS sensor. ^ Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5476 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel. 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor. 5. Remove the TSS sensor. ^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector. ^ Remove the bolt. ^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore. 6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5477 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation. Install the TSS sensor. ^ Connect the TSS electrical connector. 2. Remove the drain pan. 3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 7. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all near positions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Specifications Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications Turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb Output shaft speed (OSS) sensor bolt 10 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 5484 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5487 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5488 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED SENSOR The Output Shaft Speed Sensor (OSS), provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft. The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information generated. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel. 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor. ^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector. ^ Remove the bolt. ^ Inspect the OSS bore. 5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5491 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation. Install the OSS sensor. ^ Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector. 2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5492 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel. 3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor. 5. Remove the TSS sensor. ^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector. ^ Remove the bolt. ^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore. 6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5493 1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation. Install the TSS sensor. ^ Connect the TSS electrical connector. 2. Remove the drain pan. 3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 7. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all near positions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Diagnostic Connector - ABS > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Diagnostic Connector - ABS > Component Information > Locations > Page 5499 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair Technical Service Bulletin # 07S51S2 Date: 091009 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5508 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes. OASIS was activated April 10, 2007. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes. Available through the website. Owner names and addresses were made available April 30, 2007. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5509 NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles have been directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. OWNER REFUNDS ^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan, which is posted with this bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC). The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or, at their option, directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251 Dearborn, MI 48121-6251. ^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund claims that include other non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be accepted for reimbursement. ^ This safety recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair. Claiming a refund will not close the recall on the vehicle. ^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.) - Program Code: 07S51 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN - Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs. RENTAL VEHICLES If an ABS module needs to be ordered, Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except for fuel and insurance which will be at the owner's expense. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for rental dollar amounts. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall claim form. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Handling Allowance: An allowance of $1.00 per repair is being provided to cover the costs of locally obtained materials and XG-12 Electrical Grease. To claim the allowance, enter $1.00 as "HANDLG" in the "MISC EXPENSE" area of the claim form. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5510 ^ Refund or related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires approval from Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires approval from Special Service Support Center. ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5511 Parts will not be direct shipped for this program Order your parts requirements through normal order processing channels. The DOR/COR number for this safety recall is 50376. Questions regarding parts should be directed to the Special Support Center or E-mailed. DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to DOES II. PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN Affected ABS Modules (Part number YL8Z-2C065-AA and YL8Z-2B373-BA) and the removed ABS connector are subject to random selection for return to the Ford Warranty Parts Analysis Center (WPAC). Refer to your daily PEARS (Parts Entry and Return System) register for part disposition and return instructions. Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures". EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW This program includes making sure the wiring harness connector is properly sealed against moisture/contamination, and inspecting the ABS module for evidence of corrosion resulting from an inadequately sealed connector. During the inspection, we expect that most of the affected vehicles will not have any evidence of corrosion in the ABS module. However, the ABS wiring harness connector still needs to be inspected for missing or improperly seated seals and/or incorrect connector number. If the ABS module is corroded, the ABS module and connector must be replaced. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5512 A flow chart has been developed to help direct you to the proper repair. See Figure 1. Inspect Connector Seals INSPECTION 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. NOTE: When disconnecting the ABS module connector, be sure the blue connector lock stays engaged with the harness connector and does not remain in the module. Remove it from the module if necessary and make sure the white 0-ring seal is properly installed. Disconnect the ABS module 25-pin connector by sliding the lock mechanism out (towards the passenger side of the vehicle) and pulling the connector off the module. 3. Disconnect the speed sensor harness, then remove the 2 harness retainers from the studs and position the harness above the air cleaner assembly to provide access for inspection. 4. Inspect the top of the ABS module connector cover for 2 yellow "X" marks. ^ If 2 yellow "X" marks are present, perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply Electrical Grease. ^ If no yellow "X" marks are present, proceed to Step 5. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5513 5. Inspect the ABS module connector pins for corrosion. See Figure 2. ^ If corrosion is present, perform Labor Operation E - Install Pigtail, New ABS Module and Apply Electrical Grease. ^ If corrosion is not present, proceed to Step 6. 6. CAUTION: Do not cut any of the harness wires or the wire insulation when cutting off the tie strap. Remove the tie strap from the connector dress cover, then slide the cover off the connector. See Figure 3. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5514 7. Verify the wire seals are present on the 4 heavier gauge wires. See Figure 4. 8. Verify the numbers 054" are stamped on the slide-lock end of the mat cover (wipe the mat cover clean if necessary to view). See Figure 5. NOTE: Mat covers with any other number will be missing plugs in the unused pin locations. 9. Perform Labor Operation C - Install Pigtail and Apply Electrical Grease if: ^ any seals are missing or, ^ if the number on the mat cover is not "054". 10. Perform Labor Operation D - Seat Connector and Apply Electrical Grease if: ^ Any of the 4 wire seals are not fully seated in the connector cavities. ^ Each seal should sit approximately 1-2 mm (1/16 in) below the top of the round cavity. See Figure 4. 11. Perform Labor Operation A - Apply Electrical Grease if: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5515 ^ The module is not corroded. and ^ All seals are present. and ^ All seals are fully seated. and ^ The number on the mat cover is "054". LABOR OPERATION A - APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE 1. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: a) Reinstall the dress cover. b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 6. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 6. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a "hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 2. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 3. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. LABOR OPERATION C - INSTALL PIGTAIL AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5516 USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 7. 1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module connector. See Figure 8. 2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness (all wires) to the same length. See Figure 8. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5517 3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/2 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See Figure 9. CAUTION: The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag. Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing circuits when splicing wires. NOTE: The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation. NOTE: The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5518 4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness. Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903. See Figure 10. 5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice connector. 6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit, shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all wires are insulated. See Figure 11. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5519 7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on the other. See Figure 12. 8. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: a) Reinstall the dress cover. b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 13. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5520 connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 13. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 9. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 10. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. 11. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds). ^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle. ^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special Support Service Center. LABOR OPERATION D - SEAT CONNECTOR SEALS AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE 1. If the seals are not fully seated, reseat any seals not fully seated with a blunt tool. DO NOT use anything sharp such as a screwdriver, awl or punch that could penetrate the seal and allow moisture to enter the terminal. See Figure 14. 2. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: a) Reinstall the dress cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5521 b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 15. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 15. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 3. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 4. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. LABOR OPERATION E - INSTALL PIGTAIL, NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5522 USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 16. PROCEDURE TO REPLACE VEHICLE HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module connector. See Figure 17. 2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness (all wires) to the same length. See Figure 17. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5523 3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See Figure 18. CAUTION: The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag. Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing circuits when splicing wires. NOTE: The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation. NOTE: The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5524 4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness. Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903. See Figure 19. 5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice connector. 6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit, shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all wires are insulated. See Figure 20. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5525 7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on the other. See Figure 21. 8. Install a new ABS module. Perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply Electrical Grease. 9. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. 10. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds). ^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle. ^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special Support Service Center. LABOR OPERATION F - INSTALL NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE NOTE: Module configuration or reprogramming is not required when installing a new ABS module. 1. Disconnect the 2-wire electrical connector at the ABS module. 2. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 3. Remove the screws and the ABS module. 4. Position the new module and install the screws. Tighten the screws no more than 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 5. Lower the hoist. 6. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5526 ^ Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 22. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 22. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 7. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 8. Reconnect the 2-wire connector to the ABS module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5527 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5528 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5529 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5530 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5531 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5532 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > NHTSA07V156000 > Mar > 07 > Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect Electronic Brake Control Module: Recalls Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2001-2004 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V156000 MFR'S REPORT DATE: March 30, 2007 COMPONENT: Service Brakes, Hydraulic: Antilock: Control Unit/Module POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 446460 SUMMARY: On certain sport utility vehicles equipped with Antilock Brakes (ABS), the ABS module connector may have missing or dislodged wire seals. This condition could allow contamination to enter the module connector, creating a potential for an electrical short. CONSEQUENCE: An electrical short might cause an ABS malfunction that would illuminate the ABS warning light, and in some cases, the module may overheat resulting in burning odor, smoke, and/or fire. This condition could occur either when the vehicle ignition switch is in the off position or while the vehicle is being operated. Remedy: Dealers will inspect the wire harness connector to the ABS module for missing or dislodged wire seals, and repair or replace the harness connector as appropriate. The dealer will also inspect the connector on the ABS module and replace it if it is found to be corroded or damaged. The recall began on April 23, 2007. Owners may contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673. NOTES: Ford recall No. 07S51. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair Technical Service Bulletin # 07S51S2 Date: 091009 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5542 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes. OASIS was activated April 10, 2007. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes. Available through the website. Owner names and addresses were made available April 30, 2007. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5543 NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles have been directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. OWNER REFUNDS ^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan, which is posted with this bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC). The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or, at their option, directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251 Dearborn, MI 48121-6251. ^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund claims that include other non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be accepted for reimbursement. ^ This safety recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair. Claiming a refund will not close the recall on the vehicle. ^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.) - Program Code: 07S51 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN - Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs. RENTAL VEHICLES If an ABS module needs to be ordered, Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except for fuel and insurance which will be at the owner's expense. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for rental dollar amounts. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall claim form. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Handling Allowance: An allowance of $1.00 per repair is being provided to cover the costs of locally obtained materials and XG-12 Electrical Grease. To claim the allowance, enter $1.00 as "HANDLG" in the "MISC EXPENSE" area of the claim form. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5544 ^ Refund or related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires approval from Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires approval from Special Service Support Center. ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5545 Parts will not be direct shipped for this program Order your parts requirements through normal order processing channels. The DOR/COR number for this safety recall is 50376. Questions regarding parts should be directed to the Special Support Center or E-mailed. DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to DOES II. PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN Affected ABS Modules (Part number YL8Z-2C065-AA and YL8Z-2B373-BA) and the removed ABS connector are subject to random selection for return to the Ford Warranty Parts Analysis Center (WPAC). Refer to your daily PEARS (Parts Entry and Return System) register for part disposition and return instructions. Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures". EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW This program includes making sure the wiring harness connector is properly sealed against moisture/contamination, and inspecting the ABS module for evidence of corrosion resulting from an inadequately sealed connector. During the inspection, we expect that most of the affected vehicles will not have any evidence of corrosion in the ABS module. However, the ABS wiring harness connector still needs to be inspected for missing or improperly seated seals and/or incorrect connector number. If the ABS module is corroded, the ABS module and connector must be replaced. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5546 A flow chart has been developed to help direct you to the proper repair. See Figure 1. Inspect Connector Seals INSPECTION 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. NOTE: When disconnecting the ABS module connector, be sure the blue connector lock stays engaged with the harness connector and does not remain in the module. Remove it from the module if necessary and make sure the white 0-ring seal is properly installed. Disconnect the ABS module 25-pin connector by sliding the lock mechanism out (towards the passenger side of the vehicle) and pulling the connector off the module. 3. Disconnect the speed sensor harness, then remove the 2 harness retainers from the studs and position the harness above the air cleaner assembly to provide access for inspection. 4. Inspect the top of the ABS module connector cover for 2 yellow "X" marks. ^ If 2 yellow "X" marks are present, perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply Electrical Grease. ^ If no yellow "X" marks are present, proceed to Step 5. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5547 5. Inspect the ABS module connector pins for corrosion. See Figure 2. ^ If corrosion is present, perform Labor Operation E - Install Pigtail, New ABS Module and Apply Electrical Grease. ^ If corrosion is not present, proceed to Step 6. 6. CAUTION: Do not cut any of the harness wires or the wire insulation when cutting off the tie strap. Remove the tie strap from the connector dress cover, then slide the cover off the connector. See Figure 3. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5548 7. Verify the wire seals are present on the 4 heavier gauge wires. See Figure 4. 8. Verify the numbers 054" are stamped on the slide-lock end of the mat cover (wipe the mat cover clean if necessary to view). See Figure 5. NOTE: Mat covers with any other number will be missing plugs in the unused pin locations. 9. Perform Labor Operation C - Install Pigtail and Apply Electrical Grease if: ^ any seals are missing or, ^ if the number on the mat cover is not "054". 10. Perform Labor Operation D - Seat Connector and Apply Electrical Grease if: ^ Any of the 4 wire seals are not fully seated in the connector cavities. ^ Each seal should sit approximately 1-2 mm (1/16 in) below the top of the round cavity. See Figure 4. 11. Perform Labor Operation A - Apply Electrical Grease if: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5549 ^ The module is not corroded. and ^ All seals are present. and ^ All seals are fully seated. and ^ The number on the mat cover is "054". LABOR OPERATION A - APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE 1. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: a) Reinstall the dress cover. b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 6. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 6. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a "hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 2. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 3. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. LABOR OPERATION C - INSTALL PIGTAIL AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5550 USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 7. 1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module connector. See Figure 8. 2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness (all wires) to the same length. See Figure 8. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5551 3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/2 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See Figure 9. CAUTION: The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag. Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing circuits when splicing wires. NOTE: The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation. NOTE: The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5552 4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness. Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903. See Figure 10. 5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice connector. 6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit, shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all wires are insulated. See Figure 11. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5553 7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on the other. See Figure 12. 8. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: a) Reinstall the dress cover. b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 13. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5554 connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 13. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 9. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 10. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. 11. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds). ^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle. ^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special Support Service Center. LABOR OPERATION D - SEAT CONNECTOR SEALS AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE 1. If the seals are not fully seated, reseat any seals not fully seated with a blunt tool. DO NOT use anything sharp such as a screwdriver, awl or punch that could penetrate the seal and allow moisture to enter the terminal. See Figure 14. 2. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: a) Reinstall the dress cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5555 b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 15. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 15. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 3. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 4. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. LABOR OPERATION E - INSTALL PIGTAIL, NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5556 USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 16. PROCEDURE TO REPLACE VEHICLE HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module connector. See Figure 17. 2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness (all wires) to the same length. See Figure 17. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5557 3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See Figure 18. CAUTION: The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag. Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing circuits when splicing wires. NOTE: The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation. NOTE: The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5558 4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness. Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903. See Figure 19. 5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice connector. 6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit, shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all wires are insulated. See Figure 20. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5559 7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on the other. See Figure 21. 8. Install a new ABS module. Perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply Electrical Grease. 9. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. 10. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds). ^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle. ^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special Support Service Center. LABOR OPERATION F - INSTALL NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE NOTE: Module configuration or reprogramming is not required when installing a new ABS module. 1. Disconnect the 2-wire electrical connector at the ABS module. 2. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 3. Remove the screws and the ABS module. 4. Position the new module and install the screws. Tighten the screws no more than 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 5. Lower the hoist. 6. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5560 ^ Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 22. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 22. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 7. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 8. Reconnect the 2-wire connector to the ABS module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5561 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5562 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5563 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5564 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5565 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5566 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > NHTSA07V156000 > Mar > 07 > Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2001-2004 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V156000 MFR'S REPORT DATE: March 30, 2007 COMPONENT: Service Brakes, Hydraulic: Antilock: Control Unit/Module POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 446460 SUMMARY: On certain sport utility vehicles equipped with Antilock Brakes (ABS), the ABS module connector may have missing or dislodged wire seals. This condition could allow contamination to enter the module connector, creating a potential for an electrical short. CONSEQUENCE: An electrical short might cause an ABS malfunction that would illuminate the ABS warning light, and in some cases, the module may overheat resulting in burning odor, smoke, and/or fire. This condition could occur either when the vehicle ignition switch is in the off position or while the vehicle is being operated. Remedy: Dealers will inspect the wire harness connector to the ABS module for missing or dislodged wire seals, and repair or replace the harness connector as appropriate. The dealer will also inspect the connector on the ABS module and replace it if it is found to be corroded or damaged. The recall began on April 23, 2007. Owners may contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673. NOTES: Ford recall No. 07S51. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5571 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5572 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5573 Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation Anti-Lock Brake Control Module NOTE: The 4x2 service replacement module cannot be interchanged with the 4x4 module. The service replacement 4x4 module is interchangeable with the 4x2 module. The anti-lock brake control module is mounted to the HCU. It is an on-board diagnostic, non-repairable unit consisting of two microprocessors and the necessary circuitry for their operation. The anti-lock brake control module monitors system operation during normal driving as well as during anti-lock braking. Anti-lock brake module operation is as follows: ^ Under normal driving conditions, the microprocessor produces short test pulses to the solenoid valves that check the electrical system without any mechanical reaction. ^ Impending wheel lock conditions trigger signals from the anti-lock brake control module that open and close the appropriate solenoid valves. This results in moderate pulsations in the brake pedal. ^ The anti-lock brake module used in 4x4 application includes a G-sensor. It detects vehicle movement during a brake lockup event that is transferred to other wheels through the powertrain. During normal braking, the brake pedal feel is identical to a standard brake system. Most faults that occur in the anti-lock brake system will be stored as a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) in the keep-alive memory of the anti-lock brake control module. The DTCs can be retrieved by following the or-board diagnostic procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5574 Electronic Brake Control Module: Testing and Inspection For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is part of, please refer to Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems; Testing and Inspection. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5575 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Module-Anti-Lock Brake Control Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the air cleaner and the air cleaner outlet pipe. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 4. Remove the bolts. 5. Remove the bolt. 6. Raise and support the vehicle. 7. Remove the screws and the control module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5576 8. NOTE: The 4x2 module cannot be interchanged with the 4x4 module. The 4x4 module is interchangeable with the 4x2 module. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Description and Operation Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Description and Operation Hydraulic Control Unit The HCU consists of the following components: ^ brake pressure control valve block ^ pump motor New brake pressure control valve block and pump motor are installed as an assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5580 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Testing and Inspection For further information regarding this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems; Testing and Inspection. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5581 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Hydraulic Control Unit Removal and Installation WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the air cleaner and the air cleaner outlet pipe. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Disconnect the brake lines. 5. Remove the bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5582 6. Remove the bolts and the HCU. 7. NOTE: The 4x2 module cannot be interchanged with the 4x4 module. The 4x4 module is interchangeable with the 4x2 module. Remove the screws and the control module, if necessary. 8. NOTE: Bleed the HCU after performing this procedure. . To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips Wheel Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips TSB 04-23-2 11/29/04 WHEEL SPEED SENSOR REMOVAL TIP FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid MERCURY: 2005 Mariner ISSUE When servicing the wheel speed sensors on a 2001-2005 Escape or 2005 Mariner and Escape Hybrid, care must be taken during removal to prevent damage. The wheel speed sensor wire has a body plug attached to it. This plug can be damaged if not removed correctly, such as removal for pinpoint testing. If the body plug is damaged, sensor replacement may be necessary even though the sensor is functional in all other respects. ACTION When removing the body plug, rotate the plug into a position which allows the use of a small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the body plug. These two tabs are at right angles (directly above and below) to the sensor wire. See Figures 1 and 2 for reference. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips > Page 5587 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5588 Wheel Speed Sensor: Specifications Anti-lock brake sensor bolt Rear 20 ft.lb Anti-lock brake sensor bolt (4X2) Front 9-10 ft.lb Anti-lock brake sensor bolt (4X4) 62-80 in.lb Anti-lock brake sensor wire retaining bolt (4X4) 62-80 in.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 5591 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 5592 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 5593 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 5596 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 5597 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 5598 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5599 Wheel Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Anti-Lock Brake Sensor NOTE: Any time an anti-lock brake sensor is removed, thoroughly clean the mounting surfaces. On front anti-lock brake sensors, apply High-Temperature 4x4 Front Axle and Wheel Bearing Grease. The anti-lock brake system uses four "active" sensors and four sensor indicators to detect the speed of each wheel. The teeth on the sensor indicator rotate past the stationary sensor at wheel speed. As the teeth pass the sensor, a digital input signal is generated. The control module uses the input to compute the speed of each wheel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor, Front Sensor-Front Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Detach the grommet from the body and pull the connector through the hole. 3. Disconnect the sensor wiring. 4. Detach the retainer. 5. Remove the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 5602 6. NOTE: Clean off any dirt that may have collected around the sensor before removal. Remove the bolt and the sensor. 7. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 5603 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor, Rear Sensor-Rear Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Detach the grommet from the body and pull the connector through the hole. 3. Disconnect the sensor wiring. 4. Detach the bolt. 5. Remove the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 5604 6. NOTE: Clean off any dirt that may have collected around the sensor before removal. Remove the bolt and the sensor. 7. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Specifications Brake Bleeding: Specifications Disc Brake Caliper Bleeder Screws 12 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed Brake Master Cylinder-Bench Bleed WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. 1. Support the brake master cylinder body in a soft jaw vise, and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with specified brake fluid. ^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 2. Install plugs in the front and rear brake outlet ports. 3. Loosen the plug in the front outlet port and slowly depress the primary piston. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5610 4. Tighten the plug in the front outlet port and release the primary piston. 5. Repeat this procedure until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows. 6. Repeat Steps 3, 4, and 5 for the rear outlet port with the front outlet port plugged. 7. Tighten the plugs and attempt to depress the primary piston. The piston will not depress if all the air is bled out of the system. 8. Install the reservoir cap and install the brake master cylinder in the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5611 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake Master Cylinder - In-Vehicle Bleed Brake Master Cylinder-In-Vehicle Bleed WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and Polyglycol. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. 1. Disconnect the brake outlet lines from the brake master cylinder and cap the lines. 2. Install short brake hoses to the master cylinder outlet ports with the ends submerged in the brake master cylinder reservoir. 3. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows from both brake hoses. 5. Remove the short brake hoses and install the brake outlet lines. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5612 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Gravity Bleeding Gravity Bleed Brake system 1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do not let it run dry. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, then to the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front wheel. Rear drum brakes 3. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do not let it run dry. Loosen the rear wheel cylinder bleeder screw and leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows. 4. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. Front disc brakes 5. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do not let it run dry. Open the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. Leave open until clear bubble-free brake fluid flows. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5613 6. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. 7. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with fluid and install the reservoir cap. ^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5614 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Manual Bleeding Manual Bleed WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. Brake system 1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do not let it run dry. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, then to the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front wheel. Rear drum brakes 3. Attach a rubber drain hose to the rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 5. Loosen the bleeder screw until fluid flow stops. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal and tighten the bleeder screw. 6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows. 7. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. 8. Continue bleeding the rest of the system. Front disc brakes Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5615 9. Attach a rubber drain hose to the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 10. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 11. Loosen the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw until fluid flow stops. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal and tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. 12. Repeat Steps 10 and 11 until clear, bubble-free fluid flows. 13. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. 14. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir and install the reservoir cap. ^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5616 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed Brake Master Cylinder-Bench Bleed WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. 1. Support the brake master cylinder body in a soft jaw vise, and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with specified brake fluid. ^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 2. Install plugs in the front and rear brake outlet ports. 3. Loosen the plug in the front outlet port and slowly depress the primary piston. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5617 4. Tighten the plug in the front outlet port and release the primary piston. 5. Repeat this procedure until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows. 6. Repeat Steps 3, 4, and 5 for the rear outlet port with the front outlet port plugged. 7. Tighten the plugs and attempt to depress the primary piston. The piston will not depress if all the air is bled out of the system. 8. Install the reservoir cap and install the brake master cylinder in the vehicle. Brake Master Cylinder - In-Vehicle Bleed Brake Master Cylinder-In-Vehicle Bleed WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and Polyglycol. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. 1. Disconnect the brake outlet lines from the brake master cylinder and cap the lines. 2. Install short brake hoses to the master cylinder outlet ports with the ends submerged in the brake master cylinder reservoir. 3. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows from both brake hoses. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5618 5. Remove the short brake hoses and install the brake outlet lines. Brake System Gravity Bleeding Gravity Bleed Brake system 1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do not let it run dry. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, then to the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front wheel. Rear drum brakes 3. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do not let it run dry. Loosen the rear wheel cylinder bleeder screw and leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows. 4. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. Front disc brakes Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5619 5. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do not let it run dry. Open the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. Leave open until clear bubble-free brake fluid flows. 6. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. 7. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with fluid and install the reservoir cap. ^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. Brake System Manual Bleeding Manual Bleed WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. Brake system 1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do not let it run dry. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5620 Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, then to the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front wheel. Rear drum brakes 3. Attach a rubber drain hose to the rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 5. Loosen the bleeder screw until fluid flow stops. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal and tighten the bleeder screw. 6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows. 7. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. 8. Continue bleeding the rest of the system. Front disc brakes 9. Attach a rubber drain hose to the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 10. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 11. Loosen the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw until fluid flow stops. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal and tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. 12. Repeat Steps 10 and 11 until clear, bubble-free fluid flows. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5621 13. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. 14. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir and install the reservoir cap. ^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. Brake System Pressure Bleeding Brake System Pressure Bleeding Special Tool(s) WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or replacement, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. 1. Clean the outside of the brake master cylinder reservoir. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5622 2. Remove the reservoir cap and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with brake fluid. ^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 3. NOTE: Master cylinder pressure bleeder adapter tools are available from various manufacturers of pressure bleeding equipment. Follow the instructions of the manufacturer when installing the adapter. Install Brake Bleeder to the brake master cylinder reservoir, and attach the Brake Bleeder tank hose to the fitting on the adapter. 4. Attach a rubber drain hose to the RH rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 5. Open the valve on the Brake Bleeder tank. 6. Loosen the bleeder screw. Leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows, then close the bleeder screw and remove the rubber hose. 7. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. 8. Continue bleeding the rest of the system, going in order from the LH rear wheel to the RH front wheel, ending with the LH front wheel. 9. Close the Brake Bleeder tank valve and remove the tank hose from the adapter, and remove the adapter. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5623 10. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir and install the reservoir cap. ^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. Four Wheel Antilock Brake System Bleeding Brake System Bleeding Special Tool(s) Anti-Lock Brakes Bleed 1. NOTE: Carrying out the System Bleed function drives trapped air from the hydraulic control unit (HCU). Subsequent bleeding removes the air from the brake hydraulic system to the bleeder screws. NOTE: The engine must be running to provide adequate voltage to the HCU module during the anti-lock control portion of the system bleed. Connect the diagnostic tool. 2. Start the engine and depress the brake pedal to half of the full travel position. 3. Access FUNCTION TEST mode and press the trigger to run the SYSTEM BLEED FUNCTION. 4. Manually bleed the brake hydraulic system. 5. Repeat the procedure carrying out a total of two diagnostic tool cycles and two manual bleed cycles. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Specifications Brake Pedal Assy: Specifications Pedal free play 0.3-0.47 in Brake Pedal bracket Nuts 17 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5627 Brake Pedal Assy: Testing and Inspection For further information regarding this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Brakes and Traction Control; Testing and Inspection. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5628 Brake Pedal Assy: Service and Repair Brake Pedal and Bracket Removal and Installation 1. Remove the brake pedal position (BPP) switch. 2. If equipped, remove the speed control deactivator switch. 3. Disconnect the push rod from the brake pedal pin. ^ Remove the cotter pin and bushing. 4. Remove the brake pedal and bracket. ^ Remove the nuts. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Specifications Brake Caliper: Specifications Brake Caliper Anchor Plate Bolts 111 ft.lb Brake Caliper Bolts 26 ft.lb Front Disc Brake Caliper Bore 2.36 in Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Caliper Removal and Installation Brake Caliper Removal WARNING: Asbestos fiber dust may be present on brake and clutch assemblies and is hazardous to health if inhaled. Brake and clutch assemblies should be cleaned using a vacuum cleaner recommended for use with asbestos fibers such as a brake/clutch/service vacuum. The bag must be labeled per OSHA instructions, sealed, and the trash hauler notified as to the bag's contents. If a vacuum suitable for asbestos is not available, cleaning should be done wet. If dust generation is still possible, technicians should wear government-approved toxic dust purifying respirators. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the brake caliper clip. 3. Position the caliper aside. 1 Remove the brake caliper bolt caps and bolts. 2 Position the caliper aside. 4. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation > Page 5635 with water. Note: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new component has been installed, air may get into the system and cause spongy brake pedal action. This requires bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. The hydraulic system can be bled manually or with a Brake Bleeder. Disconnect the brake line from the caliper and remove the caliper. 5. CAUTION: Do no use denatured alcohol for flushing the brake system or cleaning assemblies where alcohol could be trapped. If denatured alcohol is trapped, it can cause eventual failure of rubber components in the system. CAUTION: Never allow any petroleum product or mineral oil to contact the inside of a brake hydraulic system. Mineral oil and petroleum products deteriorate the natural rubber seals used in brake hydraulic systems. If a brake system becomes contaminated, it must be flushed with clean brake fluid and all rubber seals and flex hoses replaced. Use High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. To install reverse the removal procedure. ^ Bleed the brake system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation > Page 5636 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Caliper Disassembly and Assembly Brake Caliper Disassembly 1. Remove front disc brake caliper from the vehicle. 2. Remove the front caliper slide pins and boots. 3. Remove the dust seal. 4. WARNING: Use only as much compressed air as necessary to remove the piston. Excessive pressure can force the piston out of the caliper bore with enough force to cause personal injury. Never attempt to catch the piston by hand as it comes out of the bore. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver or any other similar tool to pry the piston out of the bore. Piston damage could result. Note: Inspect the piston for wear, rust, or pits. If any of these conditions exist, a new piston must be installed. Remove the caliper piston. 1 Position a block of wood between the piston and the disc brake caliper. 2 Apply compressed air to caliper to remove piston. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation > Page 5637 5. Remove the bleeder screw. 6. CAUTION: Use a plastic or wooden pick to remove the piston seal Tom the caliper bore. A metal tool may scratch or nick the seal groove, which could result in a seal leak. Note: Inspect the caliper bore for wear, rust, or pits. If any of these conditions exist, do not hone; a new caliper must be installed. Remove the piston seal. Assembly 1. CAUTION: Do not use denatured alcohol to clean rubber components or assemblies that have rubber components. Cleaning rubber components with denatured alcohol weakens the rubber and may result in failure of the component. CAUTION: Never allow any petroleum product or mineral oil to contact the inside of a brake hydraulic system. Mineral oil and petroleum products deteriorate the natural rubber seals used in brake hydraulic system If a brake system becomes contaminated, it must be flushed with clean brake hold and all rubber seals and flex hoses replaced. Use High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake ladled C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. Note: Be sure the seal is not twisted and is firmly seated in the caliper bore. Note: Clean all brake caliper components. All parts must be air-dried completely. Coat all internal parts and piston seal with High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3 before installation. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation > Page 5638 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Anchor Plate Brake Caliper Anchor Plate Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the brake caliper clip. 3. Position the caliper aside. 1 Remove the brake caliper bolt caps and the bolts. 2 Position the caliper aside and support. 4. Remove the outboard brake pad. 5. Remove the bolts and brake caliper anchor plate. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Brake Pad: > 02-11-2 > Jun > 02 > Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels Brake Pad: Customer Interest Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels Article No. 02-11-2 06/10/02 BRAKES - EXCESSIVE BRAKE DUST - INFORMATION AND CLEANING TIPS FORD: 1999-2002 ESCORT 1999-2003 CROWN VICTORIA 2000-2002 FOCUS 2001-2002 ESCAPE MERCURY: 1999-2003 GRAND MARQUIS ISSUE Under normal operating conditions, customers may notice accumulation of brake dust on their wheels. Some brake dust is inevitable as brakes wear and does not contribute to brake noise. The use of modern friction materials with emphasis on improved performance and environmental considerations can lead to more dust than in the past. ACTION Brake dust can be cleaned by weekly washing with Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A) and a soft sponge. Heavier deposits can be removed with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A). Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 108000, 301000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Pad: > 02-11-2 > Jun > 02 > Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels Brake Pad: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels Article No. 02-11-2 06/10/02 BRAKES - EXCESSIVE BRAKE DUST - INFORMATION AND CLEANING TIPS FORD: 1999-2002 ESCORT 1999-2003 CROWN VICTORIA 2000-2002 FOCUS 2001-2002 ESCAPE MERCURY: 1999-2003 GRAND MARQUIS ISSUE Under normal operating conditions, customers may notice accumulation of brake dust on their wheels. Some brake dust is inevitable as brakes wear and does not contribute to brake noise. The use of modern friction materials with emphasis on improved performance and environmental considerations can lead to more dust than in the past. ACTION Brake dust can be cleaned by weekly washing with Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A) and a soft sponge. Heavier deposits can be removed with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A). Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 108000, 301000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5652 Brake Pad: Specifications Brake lining thickness 0.50 in Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5653 Brake Pad: Service and Repair Brake Pads Removal WARNING: Asbestos fiber dust may be present on brake and clutch assemblies and is hazardous to health if inhaled. Brake and clutch assemblies should be cleaned using a vacuum cleaner recommended for use with asbestos fibers such as a brake/clutch/service vacuum. The bag must be labeled per OSHA instructions, sealed, and the trash hauler notified as to the bag's contents. If a vacuum suitable for asbestos is not available, cleaning should be done wet. If dust generation is still possible, technicians should wear government-approved toxic dust purifying respirators. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the brake caliper clip. 3. Position the caliper aside. 1 Remove brake caliper bolt caps and the bolts. 2 Position the caliper aside and support. 4. Remove the brake pads. ^ Remove the outer brake pad from the anchor. ^ Remove the inner brake pad from the caliper piston. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Specifications Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications .............................................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ Min Thickness Front .................................................................................................................................................... .................................................. 0.8661 inch (22mm) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5657 Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Brake Disc Runout Check Special Tool(s) CAUTION: The brake disc runout specification must be met to make sure of correct brake performance without roughness complaints. CAUTION: Do not install brake discs that are less than the minimum thickness specified. Do not machine a brake disc below the minimum thickness specification. NOTE: When installing brake discs, always align the painted match marks on the brake disc with those on the front hub. NOTE: When installing brake discs, always apply High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the brake disc-to-front hub mating surfaces. 1. Do not remove the tire and wheel assembly. Tighten the wheel nuts to specification. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Assemble the special tool, using the spherical tip extension. 4. Locate an opening on the inboard side of the dust shield that will allow the dial indicator tip to be positioned between 5 mm (0.2 inch) and 15 mm (0.6 inch) from the outer edge of the brake disc. 5. NOTE: Do not clamp the gauge set to a vehicle component separated from the brake disc by a flexible joint, such as a ball joint or body mount. Clamp the special tool on the vehicle, making sure the flexible indicator arm and probe tip do not touch the dust shield or tire while rotating. 6. Rotate the wheel for six revolutions and record the total indicated runout. 7. If the total runout exceeds the maximum specification, remove the brake disc. 8. Clean the disc brake mounting face of dirt, rust and foreign material. 9. Measure and record the total indicated runout of the hub face outside the stud circle. 10. Install a new front hub if the total indicated runout exceeds the maximum specification. ^ Repeat the hub runout measurement. 11. If the brake disc total indicated runout is still out of specification, measure and record the thickness of the brake disc. If thickness is sufficient to Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5658 machine the brake disc to the runout specification, go to Step 12. If the thickness is not sufficient, install a new brake disc and recheck the total indicated runout. 12. NOTE: Brake disc machining must be done with an on-vehicle lathe. Follow the lathe manufacturer's instructions. Using the special tool, machine the brake disc if final thickness will not be less than the minimum specification. Recheck the brake disc runout. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Front Brake Disc 1. Remove the brake caliper anchor plate. 2. Remove the brake disc retaining clips (if equipped) and the brake disc. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5661 Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Brake Disc Machining Brake Disc Machining CAUTION: Do not install brake discs that are less than the minimum thickness specified. Do not machine a brake disc below the minimum thickness specification. 1. Check wheel bearing end-play and correct as necessary. 2. Remove the tire and wheel. NOTE: Begin at the front of the vehicle unless the vibration has been isolated to the rear. 3. Remove the brake caliper. 4. Inspect the brake linings. Install new brake linings if below specification. 5. Measure and record the brake disc thickness. Install a new brake disc if the thickness after machining will be at or below specification. The specification is stamped on the brake disc. Do not machine a new brake disc. 6. For vehicles with a two-piece hub and brake disc assembly: ^ Match-mark before disassembly. ^ Remove the brake disc. ^ Using a die grinder with a mild abrasive (Scotch Brite(R) type), remove any rust or corrosion from the hub and brake disc mounting surfaces. ^ Align the match-marks and reinstall the brake disc on the hub. 7. Using the special tool, machine the brake discs. Follow the manufacturer's instructions. After machining, make sure the brake disc still meets the thickness specification. CAUTION: Do not use a bench lathe to machine brake discs. NOTE: The depth of cut must be between 0.10 and 0.20 mm (0.004 and 0.008 inch). Lighter cuts will cause heat and wear. Heavier cuts will cause poor brake disc surface finish. 8. Using a dial indicator, verify that the brake disc lateral runout is now within specification. 9. Remove the special tool hub adapter. 10. Remove any remaining metal chips from the machining operation. 11. For vehicles with a two-piece hub and brake disc assembly: ^ Remove the brake disc from the hub. ^ Remove any remaining metal chips from hub and brake disc mounting surfaces and from the ABS sensor. ^ Apply a high temperature anti-seize lubricant to the mounting surfaces. ^ Using the match marks, mount the brake disc on the hub. 12. Install the caliper. 13. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 14. Test the system for normal operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Backing Plate > Component Information > Specifications Backing Plate: Specifications Brake backing plate bolts 49 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Backing Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5666 Backing Plate: Service and Repair Brake Backing Plate Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear wheel cylinder. 2. Remove the rear wheel hub. 3. Remove the parking brake cable from the brake backing plate. 1 Remove the bolt. 2 Remove the parking brake cable. 4. Remove the brake backing plate. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Remove the brake backing plate. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Specifications Brake Drum: Specifications .............................................................................................................................................................. .............................................. Max Drum Diameter Rear From 06/12/2007 ........................................................................................................................ ........................................... 9.0590 inch (230.10mm) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5670 Brake Drum: Service and Repair Brake Drum Special Tool(s) Removal WARNING: Asbestos fiber dust can be present on brake and clutch assemblies and is hazardous to health if inhaled. Brake and clutch assemblies must be cleaned using a vacuum cleaner recommended for use with asbestos filters, such as brake/clutch/service vacuum. The bag must be labeled per the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) instructions, sealed, and the trash hauler notified as to the bag's contents. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: If a vacuum suitable for asbestos is not available, cleaning must be done wet. If dust generation is still possible, technicians must wear government-approved toxic dust purifying respirators. The Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) requires where asbestos dust generation is possible to be isolated and posted with warning signs. Only technicians carrying out brake or clutch repair are to be present in the area. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: To reduce the possibility of uneven braking, always install new rear brake shoes at both ends of an axle. 1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 2. CAUTION: Use of a brake drum puller or a torch is not recommended. Brake drum distortion can result. NOTE: If the brake drum is rusted to the axle shaft pilot diameter, tap the center of the brake drum between the wheel studs. Remove the brake drum. ^ If equipped, remove the brake drum retaining clips. 3. If the brake drums will not come off, follow these steps. 1 Move the brake shoe adjusting lever off the brake adjuster screw. 2 Loosen the brake shoe adjuster screw nut by adjusting the nut upward. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5671 4. Using the special tool, measure the brake drum inside diameter. ^ Install a new brake drum if the maximum inside diameter exceeds the specification shown on the outside of the brake drum. Installation 1. NOTE: If adjusting the rear brakes, refer to Brake Shoe Adjustment. Position the brake drum on the vehicle. 2. WARNING: Whenever a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign material present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion, causing loss of control. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Clean the wheel hub mounting surface and wheel pilot. 3. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Brake Shoe: > 02-11-2 > Jun > 02 > Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels Brake Shoe: Customer Interest Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels Article No. 02-11-2 06/10/02 BRAKES - EXCESSIVE BRAKE DUST - INFORMATION AND CLEANING TIPS FORD: 1999-2002 ESCORT 1999-2003 CROWN VICTORIA 2000-2002 FOCUS 2001-2002 ESCAPE MERCURY: 1999-2003 GRAND MARQUIS ISSUE Under normal operating conditions, customers may notice accumulation of brake dust on their wheels. Some brake dust is inevitable as brakes wear and does not contribute to brake noise. The use of modern friction materials with emphasis on improved performance and environmental considerations can lead to more dust than in the past. ACTION Brake dust can be cleaned by weekly washing with Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A) and a soft sponge. Heavier deposits can be removed with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A). Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 108000, 301000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Shoe: > 02-11-2 > Jun > 02 > Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels Brake Shoe: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels Article No. 02-11-2 06/10/02 BRAKES - EXCESSIVE BRAKE DUST - INFORMATION AND CLEANING TIPS FORD: 1999-2002 ESCORT 1999-2003 CROWN VICTORIA 2000-2002 FOCUS 2001-2002 ESCAPE MERCURY: 1999-2003 GRAND MARQUIS ISSUE Under normal operating conditions, customers may notice accumulation of brake dust on their wheels. Some brake dust is inevitable as brakes wear and does not contribute to brake noise. The use of modern friction materials with emphasis on improved performance and environmental considerations can lead to more dust than in the past. ACTION Brake dust can be cleaned by weekly washing with Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A) and a soft sponge. Heavier deposits can be removed with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A). Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 108000, 301000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5685 Brake Shoe: Specifications Minimum Shoe Thickness 0.04 in Standard Shoe Thickness 0.17 in Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5686 Brake Shoe: Adjustments Brake Shoe Adjustment Special Tool(s) 1. Remove the brake drum. 2. Using the special tool, measure the inside diameter of the brake drum. 3. Position the special tool on the brake shoes and linings and adjust accordingly. 4. Install the brake drum. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5687 Brake Shoe: Service and Repair Brake Shoes Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation 1. Remove the brake drum. 2. Use the Brake/Clutch/Service Vacuum to remove brake dust and dirt from the brake assemblies. 3. NOTE: If new rear brake shoes and linings are being installed, resurface the brake drums to remove glazing and to ensure an equal friction surface from side-to-side. Resurfacing will also correct out-of-round and bell conditions. Using the special tool, measure the braking surface diameter. If the inside diameter measures more than the maximum specification shown on the outside of the brake drum, install a new brake drum. 4. Remove the parking brake cable from the parking brake cable lever. 5. Remove the hold-down clips and pins. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5688 6. Remove the lower spring. 7. Remove the rear brake shoes. 1 Pull the bottom of the brake shoe forward. 2 Release the upper return spring. Remove both brake shoes together. 8. Remove the self adjuster lever. 9. Remove the self adjuster and spring assembly. ^ Return the self adjuster to the fully seated position. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5689 10. Remove the parking brake lever. 1 Remove the horseshoe clip. 2 Remove the parking brake lever. 11. Inspect the rear brake shoes for minimum thickness above the backing plate, and install new as necessary. 12. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Cylinder: Specifications Wheel Cylinder inner diameter 0.937 in Rear Wheel Cylinder bolts 9 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Wheel Cylinder Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear brake drum. 2. Using the Brake/Clutch/Service Vacuum, remove brake dust and dirt from the brake assemblies. 3. Remove the parking brake cable from the parking bake cable lever. 4. Remove the hold-down clips and pins. 5. Remove the lower spring. 6. Remove the rear brake shoes. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5695 1 Pull the bottom of the brake shoe forward. 2 Release the upper return spring. Remove both brake shoes together. 7. WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 4 or DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or replacement, air may get into the system and cause spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. Disconnect the brake line fitting from the wheel cylinder. 8. Remove the wheel cylinder. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Remove the wheel cylinder. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Bleed the brake hydraulic system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5696 Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly Wheel Cylinder Disassembly 1. Remove the rear wheel cylinder. 2. CAUTION: Do not use denatured alcohol for flushing the brake system or cleaning assemblies where alcohol could be trapped. If denatured alcohol is trapped, it can cause eventual failure of rubber components in the system. CAUTION: Never allow any petroleum product or mineral oil to contact the inside of a brake hydraulic system. Mineral oil and petroleum products deteriorate the natural rubber seals used in brake hydraulic system. If a brake system becomes contaminated, it must be flushed with clean brake fluid and all new rubber seals and flex hoses must be installed. Use High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C2S-A, DOT 3. Disassemble the rear wheel cylinder. 1 Remove the bleeder screw cap 2 Remove the bleeder screw. 3 Remove the dust boots 4 Remove the pistons and piston seals. 5 Remove the spring. 3. Inspect the rear wheel cylinder bore for wear, rust or pits. If any of these conditions exist, install a new wheel cylinder. Assembly 1. CAUTION: Always install new piston seals and dust boots when assembling the rear wheel cylinder. Always lubricate the bore with new brake fluid. Use High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Specifications Brake Bleeding: Specifications Disc Brake Caliper Bleeder Screws 12 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed Brake Master Cylinder-Bench Bleed WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. 1. Support the brake master cylinder body in a soft jaw vise, and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with specified brake fluid. ^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 2. Install plugs in the front and rear brake outlet ports. 3. Loosen the plug in the front outlet port and slowly depress the primary piston. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5703 4. Tighten the plug in the front outlet port and release the primary piston. 5. Repeat this procedure until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows. 6. Repeat Steps 3, 4, and 5 for the rear outlet port with the front outlet port plugged. 7. Tighten the plugs and attempt to depress the primary piston. The piston will not depress if all the air is bled out of the system. 8. Install the reservoir cap and install the brake master cylinder in the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5704 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake Master Cylinder - In-Vehicle Bleed Brake Master Cylinder-In-Vehicle Bleed WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and Polyglycol. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. 1. Disconnect the brake outlet lines from the brake master cylinder and cap the lines. 2. Install short brake hoses to the master cylinder outlet ports with the ends submerged in the brake master cylinder reservoir. 3. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows from both brake hoses. 5. Remove the short brake hoses and install the brake outlet lines. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5705 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Gravity Bleeding Gravity Bleed Brake system 1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do not let it run dry. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, then to the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front wheel. Rear drum brakes 3. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do not let it run dry. Loosen the rear wheel cylinder bleeder screw and leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows. 4. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. Front disc brakes 5. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do not let it run dry. Open the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. Leave open until clear bubble-free brake fluid flows. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5706 6. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. 7. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with fluid and install the reservoir cap. ^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5707 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Manual Bleeding Manual Bleed WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. Brake system 1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do not let it run dry. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, then to the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front wheel. Rear drum brakes 3. Attach a rubber drain hose to the rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 5. Loosen the bleeder screw until fluid flow stops. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal and tighten the bleeder screw. 6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows. 7. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. 8. Continue bleeding the rest of the system. Front disc brakes Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5708 9. Attach a rubber drain hose to the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 10. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 11. Loosen the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw until fluid flow stops. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal and tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. 12. Repeat Steps 10 and 11 until clear, bubble-free fluid flows. 13. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. 14. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir and install the reservoir cap. ^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5709 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed Brake Master Cylinder-Bench Bleed WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. 1. Support the brake master cylinder body in a soft jaw vise, and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with specified brake fluid. ^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 2. Install plugs in the front and rear brake outlet ports. 3. Loosen the plug in the front outlet port and slowly depress the primary piston. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5710 4. Tighten the plug in the front outlet port and release the primary piston. 5. Repeat this procedure until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows. 6. Repeat Steps 3, 4, and 5 for the rear outlet port with the front outlet port plugged. 7. Tighten the plugs and attempt to depress the primary piston. The piston will not depress if all the air is bled out of the system. 8. Install the reservoir cap and install the brake master cylinder in the vehicle. Brake Master Cylinder - In-Vehicle Bleed Brake Master Cylinder-In-Vehicle Bleed WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and Polyglycol. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. 1. Disconnect the brake outlet lines from the brake master cylinder and cap the lines. 2. Install short brake hoses to the master cylinder outlet ports with the ends submerged in the brake master cylinder reservoir. 3. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows from both brake hoses. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5711 5. Remove the short brake hoses and install the brake outlet lines. Brake System Gravity Bleeding Gravity Bleed Brake system 1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do not let it run dry. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, then to the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front wheel. Rear drum brakes 3. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do not let it run dry. Loosen the rear wheel cylinder bleeder screw and leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows. 4. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. Front disc brakes Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5712 5. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do not let it run dry. Open the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. Leave open until clear bubble-free brake fluid flows. 6. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. 7. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with fluid and install the reservoir cap. ^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. Brake System Manual Bleeding Manual Bleed WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. Brake system 1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do not let it run dry. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5713 Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, then to the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front wheel. Rear drum brakes 3. Attach a rubber drain hose to the rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 5. Loosen the bleeder screw until fluid flow stops. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal and tighten the bleeder screw. 6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows. 7. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. 8. Continue bleeding the rest of the system. Front disc brakes 9. Attach a rubber drain hose to the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 10. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 11. Loosen the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw until fluid flow stops. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal and tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. 12. Repeat Steps 10 and 11 until clear, bubble-free fluid flows. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5714 13. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. 14. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir and install the reservoir cap. ^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. Brake System Pressure Bleeding Brake System Pressure Bleeding Special Tool(s) WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or replacement, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. 1. Clean the outside of the brake master cylinder reservoir. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5715 2. Remove the reservoir cap and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with brake fluid. ^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. 3. NOTE: Master cylinder pressure bleeder adapter tools are available from various manufacturers of pressure bleeding equipment. Follow the instructions of the manufacturer when installing the adapter. Install Brake Bleeder to the brake master cylinder reservoir, and attach the Brake Bleeder tank hose to the fitting on the adapter. 4. Attach a rubber drain hose to the RH rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 5. Open the valve on the Brake Bleeder tank. 6. Loosen the bleeder screw. Leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows, then close the bleeder screw and remove the rubber hose. 7. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. 8. Continue bleeding the rest of the system, going in order from the LH rear wheel to the RH front wheel, ending with the LH front wheel. 9. Close the Brake Bleeder tank valve and remove the tank hose from the adapter, and remove the adapter. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed > Page 5716 10. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir and install the reservoir cap. ^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. Four Wheel Antilock Brake System Bleeding Brake System Bleeding Special Tool(s) Anti-Lock Brakes Bleed 1. NOTE: Carrying out the System Bleed function drives trapped air from the hydraulic control unit (HCU). Subsequent bleeding removes the air from the brake hydraulic system to the bleeder screws. NOTE: The engine must be running to provide adequate voltage to the HCU module during the anti-lock control portion of the system bleed. Connect the diagnostic tool. 2. Start the engine and depress the brake pedal to half of the full travel position. 3. Access FUNCTION TEST mode and press the trigger to run the SYSTEM BLEED FUNCTION. 4. Manually bleed the brake hydraulic system. 5. Repeat the procedure carrying out a total of two diagnostic tool cycles and two manual bleed cycles. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Specifications Brake Caliper: Specifications Brake Caliper Anchor Plate Bolts 111 ft.lb Brake Caliper Bolts 26 ft.lb Front Disc Brake Caliper Bore 2.36 in Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Caliper Removal and Installation Brake Caliper Removal WARNING: Asbestos fiber dust may be present on brake and clutch assemblies and is hazardous to health if inhaled. Brake and clutch assemblies should be cleaned using a vacuum cleaner recommended for use with asbestos fibers such as a brake/clutch/service vacuum. The bag must be labeled per OSHA instructions, sealed, and the trash hauler notified as to the bag's contents. If a vacuum suitable for asbestos is not available, cleaning should be done wet. If dust generation is still possible, technicians should wear government-approved toxic dust purifying respirators. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the brake caliper clip. 3. Position the caliper aside. 1 Remove the brake caliper bolt caps and bolts. 2 Position the caliper aside. 4. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation > Page 5722 with water. Note: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new component has been installed, air may get into the system and cause spongy brake pedal action. This requires bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. The hydraulic system can be bled manually or with a Brake Bleeder. Disconnect the brake line from the caliper and remove the caliper. 5. CAUTION: Do no use denatured alcohol for flushing the brake system or cleaning assemblies where alcohol could be trapped. If denatured alcohol is trapped, it can cause eventual failure of rubber components in the system. CAUTION: Never allow any petroleum product or mineral oil to contact the inside of a brake hydraulic system. Mineral oil and petroleum products deteriorate the natural rubber seals used in brake hydraulic systems. If a brake system becomes contaminated, it must be flushed with clean brake fluid and all rubber seals and flex hoses replaced. Use High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. To install reverse the removal procedure. ^ Bleed the brake system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation > Page 5723 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Caliper Disassembly and Assembly Brake Caliper Disassembly 1. Remove front disc brake caliper from the vehicle. 2. Remove the front caliper slide pins and boots. 3. Remove the dust seal. 4. WARNING: Use only as much compressed air as necessary to remove the piston. Excessive pressure can force the piston out of the caliper bore with enough force to cause personal injury. Never attempt to catch the piston by hand as it comes out of the bore. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver or any other similar tool to pry the piston out of the bore. Piston damage could result. Note: Inspect the piston for wear, rust, or pits. If any of these conditions exist, a new piston must be installed. Remove the caliper piston. 1 Position a block of wood between the piston and the disc brake caliper. 2 Apply compressed air to caliper to remove piston. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation > Page 5724 5. Remove the bleeder screw. 6. CAUTION: Use a plastic or wooden pick to remove the piston seal Tom the caliper bore. A metal tool may scratch or nick the seal groove, which could result in a seal leak. Note: Inspect the caliper bore for wear, rust, or pits. If any of these conditions exist, do not hone; a new caliper must be installed. Remove the piston seal. Assembly 1. CAUTION: Do not use denatured alcohol to clean rubber components or assemblies that have rubber components. Cleaning rubber components with denatured alcohol weakens the rubber and may result in failure of the component. CAUTION: Never allow any petroleum product or mineral oil to contact the inside of a brake hydraulic system. Mineral oil and petroleum products deteriorate the natural rubber seals used in brake hydraulic system If a brake system becomes contaminated, it must be flushed with clean brake hold and all rubber seals and flex hoses replaced. Use High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake ladled C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. Note: Be sure the seal is not twisted and is firmly seated in the caliper bore. Note: Clean all brake caliper components. All parts must be air-dried completely. Coat all internal parts and piston seal with High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3 before installation. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation > Page 5725 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Anchor Plate Brake Caliper Anchor Plate Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the brake caliper clip. 3. Position the caliper aside. 1 Remove the brake caliper bolt caps and the bolts. 2 Position the caliper aside and support. 4. Remove the outboard brake pad. 5. Remove the bolts and brake caliper anchor plate. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid, C6AZ-19542-AB ESA-M6C25-A, DOT3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5729 Brake Fluid: Description and Operation Brake Fluid WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. ^ Do not reuse brake fluid drained or bled from the brake system. ^ Do not use brake fluid that has been stored in an open container. ^ Do not mix different types of brake fluid. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5733 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Brake Fluid Level, Warning Switch The brake fluid level warning switch is an integral part of the brake master cylinder reservoir. It consists of a float containing a magnet and a reed switch mounted in the bottom of the brake master cylinder reservoir. When the brake fluid in the brake master cylinder reservoir gets to a predetermined level, the float and magnet actuates the reed switch that causes the red brake warning indicator to illuminate. Loss of brake fluid from either the primary (front) or secondary (rear) system will cause this system to activate. If the brake fluid level warning switch is inoperative, a new brake master cylinder reservoir must be installed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Specifications Brake Hose/Line: Specifications Brake line to rear wheel cylinder fitting 10 ft.lb Brake Line fitting to brake pressure Control valve fittings 10 ft.lb Brake line master cylinder fittings 11 ft.lb Inlet brake line to HCU nuts (M10-1) 17 ft.lb Outlet Brake Line to HCU nuts (M12-1) 13 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5737 Brake Hose/Line: Description and Operation Brake Lines and Hoses CAUTION: Never use copper tubing. It is subject to fatigue, cracking and corrosion which could result in brake tube failure. Steel tubing is used throughout the brake hydraulic system. All brake tube fittings must be correctly double flared to provide strong leakproof connections. If a section of brake tube is damaged, the entire section must be removed and a new tube of the same type, size, shape and length installed. When installing new hydraulic brake lines, hoses or connectors, tighten all connections securely. After installation, bleed the brake system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Proportioning/Combination Valve > Component Information > Specifications Brake Proportioning/Combination Valve: Specifications Brake Pressure Control Valve Bolts 80 in.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Proportioning/Combination Valve > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5741 Brake Proportioning/Combination Valve: Service and Repair Brake Pressure Control Valve Removal and Installation WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. 1. Remove the brake pressure control valve. 1 Disconnect the six brake line fittings and plug the brake lines. 2 Remove the brake pressure control valve bolts. 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Bleed the brake system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Description and Operation Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Description and Operation Hydraulic Control Unit The HCU consists of the following components: ^ brake pressure control valve block ^ pump motor New brake pressure control valve block and pump motor are installed as an assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5745 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Testing and Inspection For further information regarding this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems; Testing and Inspection. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5746 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Hydraulic Control Unit Removal and Installation WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the air cleaner and the air cleaner outlet pipe. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Disconnect the brake lines. 5. Remove the bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5747 6. Remove the bolts and the HCU. 7. NOTE: The 4x2 module cannot be interchanged with the 4x4 module. The 4x4 module is interchangeable with the 4x2 module. Remove the screws and the control module, if necessary. 8. NOTE: Bleed the HCU after performing this procedure. . To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Specifications Brake Master Cylinder: Specifications Brake Master Cylinder Nuts 18 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Master Cylinder Brake Master Cylinder: Description and Operation Brake Master Cylinder Brake Master Cylinder The brake master cylinder is a dual-piston type. The brake master cylinder operates as follows: ^ When the brake pedal is depressed, pressure is applied by mechanical linkage to the primary and secondary piston. ^ Brake master cylinder pistons apply hydraulic pressure to the two hydraulic circuits. The brake master cylinder consists of the following components: ^ brake master cylinder reservoir ^ brake master cylinder body ^ primary piston ^ secondary piston ^ snap ring Whenever the brake master cylinder is removed from the brake booster, new nuts must be installed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Master Cylinder > Page 5753 Brake Master Cylinder: Description and Operation Brake Fluid Reservoir Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir NOTE: Whenever the brake master cylinder reservoir is removed from the brake master cylinder, new seals must be installed. The brake master cylinder reservoir: ^ is mounted to the brake master cylinder. ^ holds fluid supply for each brake master cylinder hydraulic piston. ^ provides visual fluid level markings. ^ contains the brake master cylinder fluid level warning switch. On vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, the reservoir is shared with the clutch master cylinder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Abnormal Conditions Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Abnormal Conditions Brake Master Cylinder-Abnormal Conditions Changes in brake pedal feel and travel are indications that a brake system concern exists. Refer to the Symptom Chart at Brakes and Traction Control /Testing and Inspection for abnormal condition diagnosis. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Abnormal Conditions > Page 5756 Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Normal Conditions Brake Master Cylinder-Normal Conditions The following conditions are considered normal and are not indications that the brake master cylinder is in need of repair or new installation. Condition 1. During normal operation of the brake master cylinder, the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir will fall during brake application and rise during release. The net brake fluid level will remain unchanged after brake application and release. Condition 2. A trace of brake fluid may exist on the power brake booster shell below the brake master cylinder mounting flange. This is the result of the normal internal lubricating action of the brake master cylinder. Condition 3. Brake fluid level will decrease as the brake shoes and linings wear. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Abnormal Conditions > Page 5757 Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Bypass Condition Test Brake Master Cylinder-Bypass Condition Test 1. Check the brake hydraulic system for leaks or insufficient brake fluid. Repair as necessary. 2. Observe the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir as the brake pedal is slowly pressed and quickly released. If the brake fluid level rises when the brake pedal is pressed and drops when the brake pedal is released, but the net brake fluid level remains unchanged, the brake master cylinder is bypassing. Repair or install a new brake master cylinder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Abnormal Conditions > Page 5758 Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Compensator Port Check Brake Master Cylinder-Compensator Port Check The purpose of the compensator ports in the brake master cylinder is to: ^ Supply additional brake fluid from the brake master cylinder reservoir needed by the brake system due to brake shoe and lining wear. ^ Allow brake fluid to return to the brake master cylinder reservoir when the brakes are released. The returning brake fluid will create a slight turbulence in the brake master cylinder reservoir. This is a normal condition and indicates that the compensator ports are not clogged. Clogged compensator ports may cause the brakes to hang up or not fully release. If clogged compensator ports are suspected, proceed as follows: 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. With the brakes released, attempt to rotate each wheel. If an excessive amount of brake drag exists, continue with the test. If an excessive amount of brake drag exists at only one wheel, it indicates a possible seized rear disc brake caliper, front disc brake caliper, rear wheel cylinder, or parking brake component. Repair or install new components as necessary. 3. Check the brake pedal position (BPP) switch adjustment, and brake pedal free play to verify that the brake pedal is not partially applied. 4. Loosen the nuts attaching the brake master cylinder to the power brake booster and pull the brake master cylinder away from the power brake booster. 5. Repeat Steps 1 and 2. If the brake drag disappears, the power brake booster is binding and new one must be installed. If the brake drag continues, the brake master cylinder is binding and new one must be installed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Brake Master Cylinder Removal and Installation WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, Rush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. 1. Disconnect the brake fluid level warning switch electrical connector. 2. Using a suitable suction device, drain the brake master cylinder reservoir. 3. If equipped with manual transmission, disconnect the clutch master cylinder feed. 4. Disconnect the brake lines and plug the lines and the brake master cylinder ports. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5761 5. NOTE: Whenever the brake master cylinder is removed from the brake booster, new nuts must be installed. Remove the nuts and the brake master cylinder. 6. NOTE: Whenever installing a new brake master cylinder reservoir, install new seals. Lubricate the new seals with clean brake fluid. Transfer the brake master cylinder reservoir if a new master cylinder is to be installed. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Bleed the master cylinder. ^ If equipped with manual transmission, bleed the clutch master cylinder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5762 Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly Brake Master Cylinder Disassembly WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. 1. Remove the brake master cylinder. 2. Clean the outside of the brake master cylinder. 3. Remove the brake master cylinder reservoir. 4. Remove the seals. 5. Remove the snap ring. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5763 6. Remove the primary and secondary piston. 7. NOTE: If the brake master cylinder bore is damaged, a new brake master cylinder must be installed. Use isopropyl alcohol to clean and inspect the brake master cylinder bore for damage. Assembly WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. 1. Use clean brake fluid to lubricate the new piston assembly seals and the brake master cylinder bore. 2. Install the secondary piston assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5764 3. Install the primary piston assembly. 4. Install the snap ring. 5. Install the seals ^ Lubricate the seals with clean brake fluid and insert the seals into the brake master cylinder. 6. Install the brake master cylinder reservoir. ^ Press the brake master cylinder reservoir into the seals until it snaps in securely. 7. Install master cylinder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5765 Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Brake Fluid Reservoir Brake Fluid Reservoir Removal WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal inquiry. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. 1. Disconnect the fluid level electrical connector. 2. Using a suitable suction device, drain the brake master cylinder reservoir. 3. If equipped with manual transmission, disconnect the clutch master cylinder feed. 4. Remove the brake master cylinder reservoir. Installation NOTE: Whenever installing a new brake master cylinder reservoir, install new seals. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5766 1. Install the new brake master cylinder reservoir. 1 Lubricate the two seals with clean brake fluid and insert the seals into the brake master cylinder. 2 Press the brake master cylinder reservoir into the seals until it snaps in securely. 3 Connect the brake master cylinder fluid level warning switch electrical connector. 2. If equipped with manual transmission, connect the clutch master cylinder feed. ^ Bleed the clutch master cylinder. 3. Bleed the master cylinder. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Cylinder: Specifications Wheel Cylinder inner diameter 0.937 in Rear Wheel Cylinder bolts 9 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Wheel Cylinder Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear brake drum. 2. Using the Brake/Clutch/Service Vacuum, remove brake dust and dirt from the brake assemblies. 3. Remove the parking brake cable from the parking bake cable lever. 4. Remove the hold-down clips and pins. 5. Remove the lower spring. 6. Remove the rear brake shoes. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5772 1 Pull the bottom of the brake shoe forward. 2 Release the upper return spring. Remove both brake shoes together. 7. WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 4 or DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to brake components and will render brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or replacement, air may get into the system and cause spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. Disconnect the brake line fitting from the wheel cylinder. 8. Remove the wheel cylinder. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Remove the wheel cylinder. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Bleed the brake hydraulic system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5773 Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly Wheel Cylinder Disassembly 1. Remove the rear wheel cylinder. 2. CAUTION: Do not use denatured alcohol for flushing the brake system or cleaning assemblies where alcohol could be trapped. If denatured alcohol is trapped, it can cause eventual failure of rubber components in the system. CAUTION: Never allow any petroleum product or mineral oil to contact the inside of a brake hydraulic system. Mineral oil and petroleum products deteriorate the natural rubber seals used in brake hydraulic system. If a brake system becomes contaminated, it must be flushed with clean brake fluid and all new rubber seals and flex hoses must be installed. Use High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C2S-A, DOT 3. Disassemble the rear wheel cylinder. 1 Remove the bleeder screw cap 2 Remove the bleeder screw. 3 Remove the dust boots 4 Remove the pistons and piston seals. 5 Remove the spring. 3. Inspect the rear wheel cylinder bore for wear, rust or pits. If any of these conditions exist, install a new wheel cylinder. Assembly 1. CAUTION: Always install new piston seals and dust boots when assembling the rear wheel cylinder. Always lubricate the bore with new brake fluid. Use High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Adjustments Parking Brake Cable: Adjustments Parking Brake Cable Adjustment 1. Remove the parking brake handle trim. 2. Turn the parking brake control adjustment nut so that the parking brake control stroke is three to five notches when pulled. 3. Confirm the parking brake is applied. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cable and Conduit - Front Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Cable and Conduit - Front Parking Brake Cable-Front Removal and Installation 1. Remove the parking brake control. 2. Remove the two bolts and the floor console bracket. 3. Raise and support the vehicle. 4. Remove the front parking brake cable. 1 Disconnect the parking brake cable from the RH side rear parking brake cable. 2 Disconnect the front parking brake cable from the parking brake cable equalizer. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cable and Conduit - Front > Page 5780 Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Cable and Conduit - Rear Parking Brake Cable-Rear Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear drum brake shoes. 2. Remove the rear parking brake cable to knuckle bucket bolts. 3. Disconnect the rear parking brake cable from the backing plates. 4. Remove the rear parking brake cable bracket bolts. 5. Remove the RH side rear parking brake cable. 1 Disconnect the RH side rear parking brake cable from the front parking brake cable. 2 Disconnect the RH side rear parking brake cable from the parking brake bracket. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cable and Conduit - Front > Page 5781 6. Disconnect the rear parking brake cable to fuel tank support strap. 7. Disconnect the front parking brake cable. 8. Remove the LH rear parking brake cable. 1 Remove the two bolts. 2 Disconnect the rear parking bake cable from the parking brake bracket. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Control > Component Information > Service and Repair Parking Brake Control: Service and Repair Parking Brake Control Removal and Installation 1. Remove the floor console. 2. Release the parking brake control. 3. Disconnect the parking brake warning indicator switch electrical connector. 4. Remove the parking brake adjusting nut. 5. Remove the parking brake control. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Remove the parking brake cable. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Adjust the parking brake cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Release Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Parking Brake Release Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the parking brake control. 2. Remove the parking brake warning indicator switch. ^ Remove the screws. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Specifications Vacuum Brake Booster: Specifications Power brake booster pushrod bracket nuts 17 in.lb Purge valve bracket nuts 89 in.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5795 Vacuum Brake Booster: Description and Operation Brake Booster The brake booster consists of the following components: ^ power brake booster ^ vacuum booster hose ^ power brake booster check valve The power brake booster reduces the effort required to push the brake pedal to actuate the brakes. The vacuum booster hose supplies vacuum to the brake booster. The vacuum booster check valve closes when the engine is turned off and traps engine vacuum in the power brake booster. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5796 Vacuum Brake Booster: Testing and Inspection Brake Booster-Operation Check 1. Inspect all vacuum hoses and connections. All unused vacuum connectors must be capped. Hoses and their connections must be correctly secured and in good condition with no holes, cracks, or collapsed areas. 2. Check the brake hydraulic system for leaks or insufficient brake fluid. Repair as necessary. 3. With the engine off, place the transaxle in PARK (A/T) or NEUTRAL (M/T) and apply the parking brake. 4. NOTE: If the power brake booster is noisy when the brakes are applied, new one must be installed. Press the brake pedal several times to exhaust all of the vacuum from the system. 5. Press and hold the brake pedal. 6. Start the engine. If the vacuum system is operating, the bake pedal will move downward under constant foot pressure. If no movement occurs, the power brake booster system is not functioning. 7. Remove the vacuum booster hose from the power brake booster. 8. Place the transaxle in PARK (A/T) or NEUTRAL (M/T) and apply the parking brake. Start the engine. Manifold vacuum should be available from the vacuum booster hose. If manifold vacuum is not available, inspect all of the hoses and hose connections. Repair as necessary. 9. Reconnect the vacuum booster hose and run the engine at fast idle for 10 seconds. 10. Stop the engine and let the vehicle stand for 10 minutes. 11. Apply the brake pedal with approximately 89 Nm (20 ft. lbs.) of force. The brake pedal feel should be the same as normal power assisted brake operation for at least one application. If the brake pedal feel is normal, then the power brake booster is OK. If the brake pedal feels hard, continue with the test. 12. Remove the vacuum booster hose from the power brake booster. Apply 57.3 kPa (17 in-Ha) of vacuum to the vacuum booster hose. If the vacuum does not leak off after 10 minutes, install a new power brake booster. If the vacuum does leak off, install a new check valve and/or new vacuum booster hoses. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5797 Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. Remove the brake pedal push rod cotter pin and washer. 2. Remove the four power brake booster pushrod bracket nuts. 3. Disconnect the brake pedal pushrod. 3.0 L (4V) 4. Disconnect the Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve and position it aside. 1 Disconnect the cable locator. 2 Remove the nuts. Position the evaporative emission canister purge valve aside. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5798 All vehicles 5. Disconnect the master cylinder and position aside. ^ Remove the nuts ^ Position the master cylinder aside. 6. Remove the brake booster. 1 Disconnect the vacuum hose. 2 Remove the brake booster. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: Testing and Inspection Check Valve 1. Remove the vacuum booster hose from the power brake booster. 2. Apply 57.3 kPa (17 in-Ha) of vacuum to the vacuum booster hose. If the vacuum does not leak off after ten minutes, the check valve is OK. Otherwise, install a new check valve. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair Technical Service Bulletin # 07S51S2 Date: 091009 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5811 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes. OASIS was activated April 10, 2007. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes. Available through the website. Owner names and addresses were made available April 30, 2007. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5812 NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles have been directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. OWNER REFUNDS ^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan, which is posted with this bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC). The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or, at their option, directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251 Dearborn, MI 48121-6251. ^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund claims that include other non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be accepted for reimbursement. ^ This safety recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair. Claiming a refund will not close the recall on the vehicle. ^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.) - Program Code: 07S51 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN - Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs. RENTAL VEHICLES If an ABS module needs to be ordered, Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except for fuel and insurance which will be at the owner's expense. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for rental dollar amounts. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall claim form. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Handling Allowance: An allowance of $1.00 per repair is being provided to cover the costs of locally obtained materials and XG-12 Electrical Grease. To claim the allowance, enter $1.00 as "HANDLG" in the "MISC EXPENSE" area of the claim form. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5813 ^ Refund or related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires approval from Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires approval from Special Service Support Center. ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5814 Parts will not be direct shipped for this program Order your parts requirements through normal order processing channels. The DOR/COR number for this safety recall is 50376. Questions regarding parts should be directed to the Special Support Center or E-mailed. DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to DOES II. PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN Affected ABS Modules (Part number YL8Z-2C065-AA and YL8Z-2B373-BA) and the removed ABS connector are subject to random selection for return to the Ford Warranty Parts Analysis Center (WPAC). Refer to your daily PEARS (Parts Entry and Return System) register for part disposition and return instructions. Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures". EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW This program includes making sure the wiring harness connector is properly sealed against moisture/contamination, and inspecting the ABS module for evidence of corrosion resulting from an inadequately sealed connector. During the inspection, we expect that most of the affected vehicles will not have any evidence of corrosion in the ABS module. However, the ABS wiring harness connector still needs to be inspected for missing or improperly seated seals and/or incorrect connector number. If the ABS module is corroded, the ABS module and connector must be replaced. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5815 A flow chart has been developed to help direct you to the proper repair. See Figure 1. Inspect Connector Seals INSPECTION 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. NOTE: When disconnecting the ABS module connector, be sure the blue connector lock stays engaged with the harness connector and does not remain in the module. Remove it from the module if necessary and make sure the white 0-ring seal is properly installed. Disconnect the ABS module 25-pin connector by sliding the lock mechanism out (towards the passenger side of the vehicle) and pulling the connector off the module. 3. Disconnect the speed sensor harness, then remove the 2 harness retainers from the studs and position the harness above the air cleaner assembly to provide access for inspection. 4. Inspect the top of the ABS module connector cover for 2 yellow "X" marks. ^ If 2 yellow "X" marks are present, perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply Electrical Grease. ^ If no yellow "X" marks are present, proceed to Step 5. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5816 5. Inspect the ABS module connector pins for corrosion. See Figure 2. ^ If corrosion is present, perform Labor Operation E - Install Pigtail, New ABS Module and Apply Electrical Grease. ^ If corrosion is not present, proceed to Step 6. 6. CAUTION: Do not cut any of the harness wires or the wire insulation when cutting off the tie strap. Remove the tie strap from the connector dress cover, then slide the cover off the connector. See Figure 3. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5817 7. Verify the wire seals are present on the 4 heavier gauge wires. See Figure 4. 8. Verify the numbers 054" are stamped on the slide-lock end of the mat cover (wipe the mat cover clean if necessary to view). See Figure 5. NOTE: Mat covers with any other number will be missing plugs in the unused pin locations. 9. Perform Labor Operation C - Install Pigtail and Apply Electrical Grease if: ^ any seals are missing or, ^ if the number on the mat cover is not "054". 10. Perform Labor Operation D - Seat Connector and Apply Electrical Grease if: ^ Any of the 4 wire seals are not fully seated in the connector cavities. ^ Each seal should sit approximately 1-2 mm (1/16 in) below the top of the round cavity. See Figure 4. 11. Perform Labor Operation A - Apply Electrical Grease if: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5818 ^ The module is not corroded. and ^ All seals are present. and ^ All seals are fully seated. and ^ The number on the mat cover is "054". LABOR OPERATION A - APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE 1. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: a) Reinstall the dress cover. b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 6. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 6. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a "hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 2. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 3. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. LABOR OPERATION C - INSTALL PIGTAIL AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5819 USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 7. 1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module connector. See Figure 8. 2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness (all wires) to the same length. See Figure 8. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5820 3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/2 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See Figure 9. CAUTION: The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag. Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing circuits when splicing wires. NOTE: The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation. NOTE: The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5821 4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness. Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903. See Figure 10. 5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice connector. 6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit, shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all wires are insulated. See Figure 11. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5822 7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on the other. See Figure 12. 8. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: a) Reinstall the dress cover. b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 13. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5823 connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 13. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 9. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 10. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. 11. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds). ^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle. ^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special Support Service Center. LABOR OPERATION D - SEAT CONNECTOR SEALS AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE 1. If the seals are not fully seated, reseat any seals not fully seated with a blunt tool. DO NOT use anything sharp such as a screwdriver, awl or punch that could penetrate the seal and allow moisture to enter the terminal. See Figure 14. 2. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: a) Reinstall the dress cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5824 b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 15. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 15. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 3. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 4. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. LABOR OPERATION E - INSTALL PIGTAIL, NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5825 USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 16. PROCEDURE TO REPLACE VEHICLE HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module connector. See Figure 17. 2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness (all wires) to the same length. See Figure 17. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5826 3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See Figure 18. CAUTION: The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag. Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing circuits when splicing wires. NOTE: The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation. NOTE: The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5827 4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness. Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903. See Figure 19. 5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice connector. 6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit, shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all wires are insulated. See Figure 20. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5828 7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on the other. See Figure 21. 8. Install a new ABS module. Perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply Electrical Grease. 9. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. 10. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds). ^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle. ^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special Support Service Center. LABOR OPERATION F - INSTALL NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE NOTE: Module configuration or reprogramming is not required when installing a new ABS module. 1. Disconnect the 2-wire electrical connector at the ABS module. 2. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 3. Remove the screws and the ABS module. 4. Position the new module and install the screws. Tighten the screws no more than 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 5. Lower the hoist. 6. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5829 ^ Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 22. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 22. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 7. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 8. Reconnect the 2-wire connector to the ABS module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5830 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5831 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5832 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5833 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5834 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5835 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: > NHTSA07V156000 > Mar > 07 > Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect Electronic Brake Control Module: Recalls Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2001-2004 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V156000 MFR'S REPORT DATE: March 30, 2007 COMPONENT: Service Brakes, Hydraulic: Antilock: Control Unit/Module POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 446460 SUMMARY: On certain sport utility vehicles equipped with Antilock Brakes (ABS), the ABS module connector may have missing or dislodged wire seals. This condition could allow contamination to enter the module connector, creating a potential for an electrical short. CONSEQUENCE: An electrical short might cause an ABS malfunction that would illuminate the ABS warning light, and in some cases, the module may overheat resulting in burning odor, smoke, and/or fire. This condition could occur either when the vehicle ignition switch is in the off position or while the vehicle is being operated. Remedy: Dealers will inspect the wire harness connector to the ABS module for missing or dislodged wire seals, and repair or replace the harness connector as appropriate. The dealer will also inspect the connector on the ABS module and replace it if it is found to be corroded or damaged. The recall began on April 23, 2007. Owners may contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673. NOTES: Ford recall No. 07S51. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair Technical Service Bulletin # 07S51S2 Date: 091009 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5845 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes. OASIS was activated April 10, 2007. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes. Available through the website. Owner names and addresses were made available April 30, 2007. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5846 NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles have been directed to dealers for repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this recall performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. OWNER REFUNDS ^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan, which is posted with this bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC). The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or, at their option, directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251 Dearborn, MI 48121-6251. ^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund claims that include other non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be accepted for reimbursement. ^ This safety recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair. Claiming a refund will not close the recall on the vehicle. ^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.) - Program Code: 07S51 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN - Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs. RENTAL VEHICLES If an ABS module needs to be ordered, Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except for fuel and insurance which will be at the owner's expense. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for rental dollar amounts. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall claim form. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Handling Allowance: An allowance of $1.00 per repair is being provided to cover the costs of locally obtained materials and XG-12 Electrical Grease. To claim the allowance, enter $1.00 as "HANDLG" in the "MISC EXPENSE" area of the claim form. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5847 ^ Refund or related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires approval from Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires approval from Special Service Support Center. ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5848 Parts will not be direct shipped for this program Order your parts requirements through normal order processing channels. The DOR/COR number for this safety recall is 50376. Questions regarding parts should be directed to the Special Support Center or E-mailed. DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to DOES II. PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN Affected ABS Modules (Part number YL8Z-2C065-AA and YL8Z-2B373-BA) and the removed ABS connector are subject to random selection for return to the Ford Warranty Parts Analysis Center (WPAC). Refer to your daily PEARS (Parts Entry and Return System) register for part disposition and return instructions. Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures". EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW This program includes making sure the wiring harness connector is properly sealed against moisture/contamination, and inspecting the ABS module for evidence of corrosion resulting from an inadequately sealed connector. During the inspection, we expect that most of the affected vehicles will not have any evidence of corrosion in the ABS module. However, the ABS wiring harness connector still needs to be inspected for missing or improperly seated seals and/or incorrect connector number. If the ABS module is corroded, the ABS module and connector must be replaced. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5849 A flow chart has been developed to help direct you to the proper repair. See Figure 1. Inspect Connector Seals INSPECTION 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. NOTE: When disconnecting the ABS module connector, be sure the blue connector lock stays engaged with the harness connector and does not remain in the module. Remove it from the module if necessary and make sure the white 0-ring seal is properly installed. Disconnect the ABS module 25-pin connector by sliding the lock mechanism out (towards the passenger side of the vehicle) and pulling the connector off the module. 3. Disconnect the speed sensor harness, then remove the 2 harness retainers from the studs and position the harness above the air cleaner assembly to provide access for inspection. 4. Inspect the top of the ABS module connector cover for 2 yellow "X" marks. ^ If 2 yellow "X" marks are present, perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply Electrical Grease. ^ If no yellow "X" marks are present, proceed to Step 5. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5850 5. Inspect the ABS module connector pins for corrosion. See Figure 2. ^ If corrosion is present, perform Labor Operation E - Install Pigtail, New ABS Module and Apply Electrical Grease. ^ If corrosion is not present, proceed to Step 6. 6. CAUTION: Do not cut any of the harness wires or the wire insulation when cutting off the tie strap. Remove the tie strap from the connector dress cover, then slide the cover off the connector. See Figure 3. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5851 7. Verify the wire seals are present on the 4 heavier gauge wires. See Figure 4. 8. Verify the numbers 054" are stamped on the slide-lock end of the mat cover (wipe the mat cover clean if necessary to view). See Figure 5. NOTE: Mat covers with any other number will be missing plugs in the unused pin locations. 9. Perform Labor Operation C - Install Pigtail and Apply Electrical Grease if: ^ any seals are missing or, ^ if the number on the mat cover is not "054". 10. Perform Labor Operation D - Seat Connector and Apply Electrical Grease if: ^ Any of the 4 wire seals are not fully seated in the connector cavities. ^ Each seal should sit approximately 1-2 mm (1/16 in) below the top of the round cavity. See Figure 4. 11. Perform Labor Operation A - Apply Electrical Grease if: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5852 ^ The module is not corroded. and ^ All seals are present. and ^ All seals are fully seated. and ^ The number on the mat cover is "054". LABOR OPERATION A - APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE 1. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: a) Reinstall the dress cover. b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 6. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 6. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a "hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 2. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 3. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. LABOR OPERATION C - INSTALL PIGTAIL AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5853 USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 7. 1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module connector. See Figure 8. 2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness (all wires) to the same length. See Figure 8. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5854 3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/2 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See Figure 9. CAUTION: The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag. Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing circuits when splicing wires. NOTE: The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation. NOTE: The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5855 4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness. Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903. See Figure 10. 5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice connector. 6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit, shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all wires are insulated. See Figure 11. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5856 7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on the other. See Figure 12. 8. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: a) Reinstall the dress cover. b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 13. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5857 connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 13. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 9. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 10. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. 11. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds). ^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle. ^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special Support Service Center. LABOR OPERATION D - SEAT CONNECTOR SEALS AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE 1. If the seals are not fully seated, reseat any seals not fully seated with a blunt tool. DO NOT use anything sharp such as a screwdriver, awl or punch that could penetrate the seal and allow moisture to enter the terminal. See Figure 14. 2. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: a) Reinstall the dress cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5858 b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 15. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 15. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 3. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 4. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. LABOR OPERATION E - INSTALL PIGTAIL, NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5859 USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 16. PROCEDURE TO REPLACE VEHICLE HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module connector. See Figure 17. 2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness (all wires) to the same length. See Figure 17. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5860 3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See Figure 18. CAUTION: The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag. Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing circuits when splicing wires. NOTE: The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation. NOTE: The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5861 4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness. Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903. See Figure 19. 5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice connector. 6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit, shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all wires are insulated. See Figure 20. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5862 7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on the other. See Figure 21. 8. Install a new ABS module. Perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply Electrical Grease. 9. Reconnect the battery negative terminal. 10. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds). ^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle. ^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special Support Service Center. LABOR OPERATION F - INSTALL NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE NOTE: Module configuration or reprogramming is not required when installing a new ABS module. 1. Disconnect the 2-wire electrical connector at the ABS module. 2. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 3. Remove the screws and the ABS module. 4. Position the new module and install the screws. Tighten the screws no more than 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 5. Lower the hoist. 6. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as follows: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5863 ^ Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 22. - With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 22. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place. 7. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the harness and connect it to the ABS module. 8. Reconnect the 2-wire connector to the ABS module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5864 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5865 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5866 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5867 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5868 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5869 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Brake Control Module: > NHTSA07V156000 > Mar > 07 > Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2001-2004 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V156000 MFR'S REPORT DATE: March 30, 2007 COMPONENT: Service Brakes, Hydraulic: Antilock: Control Unit/Module POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 446460 SUMMARY: On certain sport utility vehicles equipped with Antilock Brakes (ABS), the ABS module connector may have missing or dislodged wire seals. This condition could allow contamination to enter the module connector, creating a potential for an electrical short. CONSEQUENCE: An electrical short might cause an ABS malfunction that would illuminate the ABS warning light, and in some cases, the module may overheat resulting in burning odor, smoke, and/or fire. This condition could occur either when the vehicle ignition switch is in the off position or while the vehicle is being operated. Remedy: Dealers will inspect the wire harness connector to the ABS module for missing or dislodged wire seals, and repair or replace the harness connector as appropriate. The dealer will also inspect the connector on the ABS module and replace it if it is found to be corroded or damaged. The recall began on April 23, 2007. Owners may contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673. NOTES: Ford recall No. 07S51. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5874 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5875 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5876 Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation Anti-Lock Brake Control Module NOTE: The 4x2 service replacement module cannot be interchanged with the 4x4 module. The service replacement 4x4 module is interchangeable with the 4x2 module. The anti-lock brake control module is mounted to the HCU. It is an on-board diagnostic, non-repairable unit consisting of two microprocessors and the necessary circuitry for their operation. The anti-lock brake control module monitors system operation during normal driving as well as during anti-lock braking. Anti-lock brake module operation is as follows: ^ Under normal driving conditions, the microprocessor produces short test pulses to the solenoid valves that check the electrical system without any mechanical reaction. ^ Impending wheel lock conditions trigger signals from the anti-lock brake control module that open and close the appropriate solenoid valves. This results in moderate pulsations in the brake pedal. ^ The anti-lock brake module used in 4x4 application includes a G-sensor. It detects vehicle movement during a brake lockup event that is transferred to other wheels through the powertrain. During normal braking, the brake pedal feel is identical to a standard brake system. Most faults that occur in the anti-lock brake system will be stored as a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) in the keep-alive memory of the anti-lock brake control module. The DTCs can be retrieved by following the or-board diagnostic procedures. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5877 Electronic Brake Control Module: Testing and Inspection For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is part of, please refer to Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems; Testing and Inspection. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5878 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Module-Anti-Lock Brake Control Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the air cleaner and the air cleaner outlet pipe. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 4. Remove the bolts. 5. Remove the bolt. 6. Raise and support the vehicle. 7. Remove the screws and the control module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5879 8. NOTE: The 4x2 module cannot be interchanged with the 4x4 module. The 4x4 module is interchangeable with the 4x2 module. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5884 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Brake Fluid Level, Warning Switch The brake fluid level warning switch is an integral part of the brake master cylinder reservoir. It consists of a float containing a magnet and a reed switch mounted in the bottom of the brake master cylinder reservoir. When the brake fluid in the brake master cylinder reservoir gets to a predetermined level, the float and magnet actuates the reed switch that causes the red brake warning indicator to illuminate. Loss of brake fluid from either the primary (front) or secondary (rear) system will cause this system to activate. If the brake fluid level warning switch is inoperative, a new brake master cylinder reservoir must be installed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Release Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Parking Brake Release Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the parking brake control. 2. Remove the parking brake warning indicator switch. ^ Remove the screws. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips Wheel Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips TSB 04-23-2 11/29/04 WHEEL SPEED SENSOR REMOVAL TIP FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid MERCURY: 2005 Mariner ISSUE When servicing the wheel speed sensors on a 2001-2005 Escape or 2005 Mariner and Escape Hybrid, care must be taken during removal to prevent damage. The wheel speed sensor wire has a body plug attached to it. This plug can be damaged if not removed correctly, such as removal for pinpoint testing. If the body plug is damaged, sensor replacement may be necessary even though the sensor is functional in all other respects. ACTION When removing the body plug, rotate the plug into a position which allows the use of a small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the body plug. These two tabs are at right angles (directly above and below) to the sensor wire. See Figures 1 and 2 for reference. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips > Page 5895 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5896 Wheel Speed Sensor: Specifications Anti-lock brake sensor bolt Rear 20 ft.lb Anti-lock brake sensor bolt (4X2) Front 9-10 ft.lb Anti-lock brake sensor bolt (4X4) 62-80 in.lb Anti-lock brake sensor wire retaining bolt (4X4) 62-80 in.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 5899 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 5900 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 5901 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 5904 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 5905 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 5906 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5907 Wheel Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Anti-Lock Brake Sensor NOTE: Any time an anti-lock brake sensor is removed, thoroughly clean the mounting surfaces. On front anti-lock brake sensors, apply High-Temperature 4x4 Front Axle and Wheel Bearing Grease. The anti-lock brake system uses four "active" sensors and four sensor indicators to detect the speed of each wheel. The teeth on the sensor indicator rotate past the stationary sensor at wheel speed. As the teeth pass the sensor, a digital input signal is generated. The control module uses the input to compute the speed of each wheel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor, Front Sensor-Front Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Detach the grommet from the body and pull the connector through the hole. 3. Disconnect the sensor wiring. 4. Detach the retainer. 5. Remove the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 5910 6. NOTE: Clean off any dirt that may have collected around the sensor before removal. Remove the bolt and the sensor. 7. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 5911 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor, Rear Sensor-Rear Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Detach the grommet from the body and pull the connector through the hole. 3. Disconnect the sensor wiring. 4. Detach the bolt. 5. Remove the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 5912 6. NOTE: Clean off any dirt that may have collected around the sensor before removal. Remove the bolt and the sensor. 7. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations Clutch Switch: Locations The Clutch Switch is located near the left hand rocker panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cutoff Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cutoff Switch > Page 5920 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the upper steering column shroud. 3. Remove the screws and the lower steering column shroud. 4. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. 5. Using a small tool, depress the ignition lock cylinder release button and pull the ignition lock cylinder out. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5929 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair Battery Cable: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 3. Remove the fuse junction box cover. 4. Remove the cables. 1 Remove the nuts and the cable. 2 Release the lock clip and pull down on the connector. 5. Remove the bolt from the inner fender. 6. Remove the bolt holding the ground cable to the transaxle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5934 7. Disconnect the harness clip. 8. Disconnect the harness clip at the back of the engine. 9. Remove the cable clip from under the battery support. 10. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 11. Remove the cable ends from the starter solenoid. 1 Remove the upper nut. 2 Remove the lower nut. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5935 12. Remove the nut and the cable end from the generator B+ connector. 13. Remove the battery cable harness assembly. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Alternator: Electrical Specifications Generator Output (Minimum) 58 A at 2,000 rpm Generator Output 13.0 - 15.0 V at 2,000 rpm Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 5941 Torque Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Alternator: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Find and Use These Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams ^ System Diagrams ^ Grounds Diagrams Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5944 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow. Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the diagram. Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be found. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5945 Fuse And Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. Fuse Circuits Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery. Ground Distribution Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text "partial". Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5946 Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of (1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces). The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number. Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the way out by a spring. Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control. A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the way in. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. circuit Numbering Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification Circuit Numbering: Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting electrical circuits. Function: The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter "S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit. System-Connection (including branch): Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate wires in one connection with the same function. Wire Identification (wire colors): The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5947 Wire Identification Example Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know the following information about the wire: Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit System: AC = Headlamp leveling Connection: 3 = Switch connection A = Branch Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe). Circuit Identification Charts Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5948 Circuit Identification Chart System Codes Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5949 Sample Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5950 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5951 Sample Diagram Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5952 Circuit Identification Chart SYSTEM CODES CHART Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5953 SAMPLE DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5954 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5955 Sample Diagram Electrical Symbols ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5956 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5957 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5958 Types of Diagrams Shown Types of Diagrams Shown Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them. Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations. Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system information suitable for diagnostic operations. Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a relationship to them, are also included. All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding of the system component interactions. Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type. Wire Color Code Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5959 Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5960 Alternator: Diagnostic Aids These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5961 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5962 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5963 Alternator: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5964 Alternator: Service Precautions CAUTION: ^ To prevent damage to the generator, do not make the jumper wire connections except as directed. ^ Do not allow any metal object to come in contact with the housing and the internal diode cooling fins with key on or off. A short circuit will result and burn out the diodes. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5965 Alternator: Description and Operation The charging system consists of the following components: ^ generator ^ integral voltage regulator The generator maximum output provides 110 amps. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Generator Testing Alternator: Testing and Inspection Generator Testing CAUTION: ^ To prevent damage to the generator, do not make the jumper wire connections except as directed. ^ Do not allow any metal object to come in contact with the housing and the internal diode cooling fins with key on or off. A short circuit will result and burn out the diodes. NOTE: ^ Battery posts and cable clamps must be clean and tight for accurate meter indications. ^ Refer to the battery tester manual for complete directions for testing the charging system. 1. Turn off all lamps and electrical components. 2. Place the transmission range selector lever in NEUTRAL and apply the parking brake. 3. Carry out the Load Test and No-Load Test according to the following component tests: Generator On-Vehicle Test-Load Test 1. Switch the battery tester to the ammeter function. 2. Connect the positive and negative leads of the battery tester to the corresponding battery terminals. 3. Connect the current probe to the generator B+ output terminal, circuit 36 (YE/WH). 4. With the engine running, turn the A/C on, the blower motor on high speed and the headlamps on high beam. 5. Increase the engine speed to approximately 2,000 rpm. The voltage should increase a minimum of 0.5 volt above the base voltage. ^ If the voltage does not increase as specified, carry out the Generator On-Vehicle Tests. ^ If the voltage increases as specified, the charging system is operating normally. 6. Adjust the tester load bank to determine the output of the generator. Generator output should be at least 58 amps. Generator On-Vehicle Test-No Load Test 1. Switch the battery tester to the voltmeter function. 2. Connect the voltmeter positive lead to the generator B+ output terminal, circuit 36 (YE/WH) and the negative lead to ground. 3. Turn all electrical accessories off. 4. With the engine running at 2,000 rpm, check the generator output voltage. The voltage should be between 13.0 and 15.0 volts. If not, refer to the Symptom Chart. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Generator Testing > Page 5968 Alternator: Testing and Inspection Other Diagnosis and Testing For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component, please refer to Charging System; Testing and Inspection. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5969 Alternator: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cables. 2. Remove the drive belt. Refer to Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 1 Remove the nut and disconnect the B+ cable. 2 Remove the connector. 4. Remove the lower generator bolts. 5. Loosen the upper generator bolt from the engine but do not remove it from the generator. NOTE: Insufficient clearance does not allow the bolt to be completely removed. 6. Move the generator to the rear of the vehicle, then lift up and out of the engine compartment. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. NOTE: Before reassembling, place the upper bolt into the generator. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations Clutch Switch: Locations The Clutch Switch is located near the left hand rocker panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cutoff Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cutoff Switch > Page 5976 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the upper steering column shroud. 3. Remove the screws and the lower steering column shroud. 4. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. 5. Using a small tool, depress the ignition lock cylinder release button and pull the ignition lock cylinder out. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Starter Drive/Bendix > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Starter Drive/Bendix: Testing and Inspection Starter Drive and Flywheel Ring Gear Inspection 1. Remove the starter motor. 2. Check the wear patterns on the starter drive gear and the flywheel ring gear. If the wear pattern is normal, install the starter motor. 3. If the starter drive gear and the flywheel ring gear are not fully meshing and both of the gears are scored or damaged, install a new starter motor. If necessary, install a new flywheel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5988 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Find and Use These Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams ^ System Diagrams ^ Grounds Diagrams Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5994 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow. Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the diagram. Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be found. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5995 Fuse And Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. Fuse Circuits Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery. Ground Distribution Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text "partial". Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5996 Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of (1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces). The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number. Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the way out by a spring. Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control. A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the way in. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. circuit Numbering Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification Circuit Numbering: Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting electrical circuits. Function: The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter "S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit. System-Connection (including branch): Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate wires in one connection with the same function. Wire Identification (wire colors): The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5997 Wire Identification Example Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know the following information about the wire: Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit System: AC = Headlamp leveling Connection: 3 = Switch connection A = Branch Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe). Circuit Identification Charts Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5998 Circuit Identification Chart System Codes Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5999 Sample Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6000 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6001 Sample Diagram Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6002 Circuit Identification Chart SYSTEM CODES CHART Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6003 SAMPLE DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6004 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6005 Sample Diagram Electrical Symbols ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6006 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6007 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6008 Types of Diagrams Shown Types of Diagrams Shown Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them. Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations. Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system information suitable for diagnostic operations. Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a relationship to them, are also included. All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding of the system component interactions. Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type. Wire Color Code Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6009 Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6010 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Aids These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6011 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6012 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6013 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6014 Diagram 501-12-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electrical Accessory Panel > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box Electrical Accessory Panel: Diagrams Central Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electrical Accessory Panel > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 6019 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electrical Accessory Panel > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 6020 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electrical Accessory Panel > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 6021 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electrical Accessory Panel > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 6022 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electrical Accessory Panel > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 6023 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electrical Accessory Panel > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 6024 Electrical Accessory Panel: Diagrams Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers Technical Service Bulletin # 02-16-4 Date: 020819 Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers Article No. 02-16-4 08/19/02 ^ FUEL SYSTEM - FUEL PUMP "WHINING"/"BUZZING" NOISE COMES THROUGH ENTERTAINMENT OR TWO-WAY RADIO SPEAKER ^ RADIO - ENTERTAINMENT OR TWO-WAY COMMUNICATION - "WHINING"/"BUZZING" NOISE IN SPEAKERS CAUSED BY FUEL PUMP ^ NOISE - "WHINING"/"BUZZING" - COMES THROUGH SPEAKERS OF ENTERTAINMENT OR TWO-WAY RADIO FORD: 1990-1994 TEMPO 1990-1997 ESCORT, PROBE, THUNDERBIRD 1990-1998 MUSTANG 1990-1999 TAURUS 1990-2002 CROWN VICTORIA 1997-1999 CONTOUR 2001 TAURUS 1990 BRONCO II 1990-1996 BRONCO 1990-1997 AEROSTAR, F SUPER DUTY, F-250 HD, F-350 1990-1999 F-250 LD 1990-2002 ECONOLINE, F-150, RANGER 1991-2002 EXPLORER 1995-2002 WINDSTAR 1997-2003 EXPEDITION 1999-2002 SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2002 EXCURSION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT 2001-2002 ESCAPE LINCOLN: 1990-1992 MARK VII 1990-1994 CONTINENTAL 1990-2002 TOWN CAR 1998-2003 NAVIGATOR 2002 BLACKWOOD MERCURY: 1990-1994 TOPAZ 1990-1997 COUGAR 1990-1999 SABLE 1990-2002 GRAND MARQUIS 1991-1997 TRACER 1997-1999 MYSTIQUE 2001 SABLE 1993-2002 VILLAGER 1997-2002 MOUNTAINEER TSB 01-7-3 is being republished in its entirety to update the model year coverage and vehicle line coverage. ISSUE A "whining"/"buzzing" noise in the speakers of the entertainment radio or two-way radio on vehicles with an in-tank electric fuel pump may be caused by electrical noise from the fuel pump. ACTION Install an electronic noise Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) Filter (F1PZ-18B925-A) on the fuel pump inside the fuel tank. Refer to the following Test Procedure to confirm that the concern exists, then refer to the Service Procedure for repair details. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6033 NOTE IF THE VEHICLE HAS AN ELECTRONIC RETURNLESS FUEL SYSTEM, DO NOT INSTALL A RFI FILTER INLINE TO THE FUEL PUMP . ONLY VEHICLES WITH MECHANICAL RETURNLESS FUEL SYSTEMS (PRESSURE REGULATOR IN THE TANK), OR SYSTEMS WITH THE PRESSURE REGULATOR ON THE FUEL RAIL SHOULD BE APPROVED FOR THE RFI FILTER INSTALLATION. NOTE SOME LIGHT TRUCKS REQUIRE ONE (1) RFI FILTER FOR EACH IN-TANK ELECTRIC FUEL PUMP ON MULTI-TANK VEHICLES. NOTE THIS TSB DOES NOT INCLUDE TAURUS FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLES (FFVS) OR 1999 RANGER 3.0L FFVS. TEST PROCEDURE Fuel pump radio noise is relatively constant and changes only slightly with vehicle speed. If the frequency of the noise varies or the noise comes and goes with the vehicle speed, then it is not the fuel pump and this fix will not be effective. The following procedure will help determine if the fuel pump is the cause of the radio noise: 1. Turn on the radio before the key is turned on (assuming the radio will operate without the ignition key - you may need to put the ignition key in the Accessory position). 2. Turn the ignition key to the Run position (do not start the engine). 3. The fuel pump should run for about 1 second with the key in the Run position with the engine not running. Listen for noise in the radio. If noise is present while the pump is running and stops when the pump stops, then the noise is being generated by the pump and this procedure should help. Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 01-7-3 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 021604AA Diagnose And Install RFI 2.1 Hrs. Filter 1990-1997 Thunderbird/Cougar 021604BA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.4 Hrs. Filter 1990-1999 And 2001 Taurus/Sable 021604CA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.2 Hrs. Filter 1992-1997 Crown Victoria/Grand Marquis/Town Car 021604CB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs. Filter 1990-1991 Crown Victoria/Grand Marquis/Town Car 021604CC Diagnose And Install RFI 2.2 Hrs. Filter 1998-2002 Crown Victoria/Grand Marquis 021604DA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.9 Hrs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6034 Filter 1998-2002 Town Car 021604EA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.7 Hrs. Filter 1990-1998 Mustang 021604FA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs. Filter 1990-1998 Mustang 021604GA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.5 Hrs. Filter 1990-1994 Continental 021604HA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs. Filter 1990 Escort 021604IA Diagnose And Install RFI 0.8 Hr. Filter 1991-1996 Escort Tracer 021604IB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs. Filter 1997 Escort/Tracer 021604JA Diagnose And Install RFI 0.8 Hr. Filter 1997 Contour/Mystique 021604JB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.8 Hrs. Filter 1998-1999 Contour/Mystique 021604KA Diagnose And Install RFI 2.0 Hrs. Filter 1990-1992 Mark VII 021604LA Diagnose And Install RFI 0.8 Hr. Filter 1990-1992 Probe 021604LB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.8 Hrs. Filter 1993-1997 Probe 021604MA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs. Filter 1990-2002 Econoline Single Fuel Tank 021604MB Diagnose And Install RFI 2.6 Hrs. Filter 1990-1991 Econoline Both Fuel Tanks 021604NA Diagnose And Install RFI 2.0 Hrs. Filter 1990-1996 Bronco 0216040A Diagnose And Install RFI 1.8 Hrs. Filter 1991-1994 Explorer 0216040B Diagnose And Install RFI 1.5 Hrs. Filter 1995-2002 Explorer 021604PA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.5 Hrs. Filter 1997-2002 Mountaineer 0216040A Diagnose And Install RFI 1.4 Hrs. Filter 1995-2002 Windstar 021604RA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.9 Hrs. Filter 1993-2002 Villager Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6035 021604SA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.7 Hrs. Filter 1997-2003 Expedition/Navigator 021604TA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.3 Hrs. Filter 1990-1997 Ranger Standard Cab 021604TB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.8 Hrs. Filter 1990-1997 Ranger Super Cab 021604TC Diagnose And Install RFI 1.8 Hrs. Filter 1998-2002 Ranger 4X4 021604TD Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs. Filter 1998-2002 Ranger 4X2 021604UA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.5 Hrs. Filter 1990-1997 Aerostar 021604VA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.9 Hrs. Filter 1990 Bronco II 021604WA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.4 Hrs. Filter 1990-1996 F-150/250/350/Super Duty And 1997 F-350/Superduty Rear 021604WB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.4 Hrs. Filter 1990-1996 F-150/250/350/Super Duty And 1997 F-350/Superduty Front 021604WC Diagnose And Install RFI 2.1 Hrs. Filter 1990-1996 F-150/250/350/Super Duty And 1997 F-350/Superduty Both Tanks 021604WD Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs. Filter 1998-2002 F-150 021604XA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs. Filter 2000-2002 Excursion 021604XB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs. Filter 1999-2002 Super Duty F-Series: Front Tank 021604XC Diagnose And Install RFI 1.5 Hrs. Filter 1999-2002 Super Duty F-Series: Rear Tank 021604XD Diagnose And Install RFI 2.7 Hrs. Filter 1999-2002 Super Duty F-Series: Both Tanks 021604YA Diagnose And Install RFI 0.8 Hr. Filter 2001-2002 Escape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6036 021604ZA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.9 Hrs. Filter 2002 Blackwood DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18B925 42 OASIS CODES: 205000, 207000, 404000, 702000, 702300 Service Procedure 1. Remove the fuel pump sender assembly from the fuel tank. Refer to the appropriate model year Workshop Manual for removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6037 2. On vehicles without a fuel delivery module, remove the negative and positive connectors from the fuel pump, Figure 1. a. Cut the wires to the fuel pump 76 mm (3") from the flange of the fuel pump and discard the wires. b. Connect the RFI filter connectors to the spade terminal on the fuel pump. c. Cut and solder both the red and black wires of the RFI filter to the red and black wires of the flange. Use Heat Shrink Tubing (F5AZ-14A099-AA) over the solder connections. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6038 NOTE HEAT SHRINK TUBING MUST BE USED OVER ALL SOLDERED CONNECTIONS MADE PER THIS TSB. USE SUFFICIENT TUBING (ABOUT 50 mm (2 ")) OF THE SPECIFIED TYPE TO ENTIRELY COVER EACH SOLDERED CONNECTION AND SHRINK APPROPRIATELY TO PREVENT EXPOSURE OF THE CONNECTIONS. NOTE FOR SOME VEHICLES WITH EXTREMELY LONG FUEL PUMP GROUND WIRE CIRCUITS, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO SHORTEN THE GROUND WIRE TO A POINT CLOSE TO THE FUEL TANK. IF THE GROUND IS MOVED, BE SURE IT IS SECURE AND PROTECTED FROM CORROSION SINCE IT IS THE OPERATING GROUND FOR THE PUMP. CHECK SERVICE LITERATURE (EVTM, ETC.) FOR GROUND LOCATIONS. WARNING ALL SOLDERING AND HEAT SHRINKING MUST BE COMPLETED AWAY FROM THE FUEL TANK AREA. USE A SOLDERING IRON ONLY FOR SOLDERING AND HEAT GUN ONLY FOR APPLYING SHRINK TUBING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6039 3. On light trucks and compact trucks with a fuel delivery module, cut the fuel pump wires to the fuel delivery module 50 mm (2") from the flange and discard the wires, Figure 2. a. Cut the connectors from the RFI filter and solder wires to the fuel delivery module (red to red and black to black). Use heat shrink tubing over solder connections. b. Solder wires from the RFI filter to the flange wires (red to red and black to black). Use heat shrink tubing over soldered connections. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6040 NOTE HEAT SHRINK TUBING MUST BE USED OVER ALL SOLDERED CONNECTIONS MADE PER THIS TSB. USE SUFFICIENT TUBING (ABOUT 50 mm (2 ")) OF THE SPECIFIED TYPE TO ENTIRELY COVER EACH SOLDERED CONNECTION AND SHRINK APPROPRIATELY TO PREVENT EXPOSURE OF THE CONNECTIONS. NOTE FOR SOME VEHICLES WITH EXTREMELY LONG FUEL PUMP GROUND WIRE CIRCUITS, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO SHORTEN THE GROUND WIRE TO A POINT CLOSE TO THE FUEL TANK. IF THE GROUND IS MOVED, BE SURE IT IS SECURE AND PROTECTED FROM CORROSION SINCE IT IS THE OPERATING GROUND FOR THE PUMP. CHECK SERVICE LITERATURE (EVTM, ETC.) FOR GROUND LOCATIONS. WARNING ALL SOLDERING AND HEAT SHRINKING MUST BE COMPLETED AWAY FROM THE FUEL TANK AREA. USE A SOLDERING IRON ONLY FOR SOLDERING AND HEAT GUN ONLY FOR APPLYING SHRINK TUBING. 4. Secure the RFI filter to the fuel pump and sender assembly with a Bundling Strap (95873-S101) to prevent rattling in the tank, Figures 1 and 2. 5. Reinstall the fuel pump sender assembly into the fuel tank. CAUTION INSTALL NEW GASKETS WHEN REINSTALLING SENDER TO PREVENT LEAKS. REFER TO THE PARTS CATALOG FOR PROPER APPLICATIONS. 6. Check the appropriate Electrical and Vacuum Troubleshooting Manual (EVTM) (or other service literature) for the location of the fuel pump ground. If ground is more than 0.9m (3 ') from the tank, cut wire and ground fuel pump end within 0.9m (3 ') of the tank to prevent ground wire from acting as an antenna. Be sure ground is secure and protected from corrosion since it is the operating ground for the fuel pump. 7. Install the fuel tank in the vehicle as outlined in the appropriate Service or Workshop Manual. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers Technical Service Bulletin # 02-16-4 Date: 020819 Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers Article No. 02-16-4 08/19/02 ^ FUEL SYSTEM - FUEL PUMP "WHINING"/"BUZZING" NOISE COMES THROUGH ENTERTAINMENT OR TWO-WAY RADIO SPEAKER ^ RADIO - ENTERTAINMENT OR TWO-WAY COMMUNICATION - "WHINING"/"BUZZING" NOISE IN SPEAKERS CAUSED BY FUEL PUMP ^ NOISE - "WHINING"/"BUZZING" - COMES THROUGH SPEAKERS OF ENTERTAINMENT OR TWO-WAY RADIO FORD: 1990-1994 TEMPO 1990-1997 ESCORT, PROBE, THUNDERBIRD 1990-1998 MUSTANG 1990-1999 TAURUS 1990-2002 CROWN VICTORIA 1997-1999 CONTOUR 2001 TAURUS 1990 BRONCO II 1990-1996 BRONCO 1990-1997 AEROSTAR, F SUPER DUTY, F-250 HD, F-350 1990-1999 F-250 LD 1990-2002 ECONOLINE, F-150, RANGER 1991-2002 EXPLORER 1995-2002 WINDSTAR 1997-2003 EXPEDITION 1999-2002 SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2002 EXCURSION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT 2001-2002 ESCAPE LINCOLN: 1990-1992 MARK VII 1990-1994 CONTINENTAL 1990-2002 TOWN CAR 1998-2003 NAVIGATOR 2002 BLACKWOOD MERCURY: 1990-1994 TOPAZ 1990-1997 COUGAR 1990-1999 SABLE 1990-2002 GRAND MARQUIS 1991-1997 TRACER 1997-1999 MYSTIQUE 2001 SABLE 1993-2002 VILLAGER 1997-2002 MOUNTAINEER TSB 01-7-3 is being republished in its entirety to update the model year coverage and vehicle line coverage. ISSUE A "whining"/"buzzing" noise in the speakers of the entertainment radio or two-way radio on vehicles with an in-tank electric fuel pump may be caused by electrical noise from the fuel pump. ACTION Install an electronic noise Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) Filter (F1PZ-18B925-A) on the fuel pump inside the fuel tank. Refer to the following Test Procedure to confirm that the concern exists, then refer to the Service Procedure for repair details. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6046 NOTE IF THE VEHICLE HAS AN ELECTRONIC RETURNLESS FUEL SYSTEM, DO NOT INSTALL A RFI FILTER INLINE TO THE FUEL PUMP . ONLY VEHICLES WITH MECHANICAL RETURNLESS FUEL SYSTEMS (PRESSURE REGULATOR IN THE TANK), OR SYSTEMS WITH THE PRESSURE REGULATOR ON THE FUEL RAIL SHOULD BE APPROVED FOR THE RFI FILTER INSTALLATION. NOTE SOME LIGHT TRUCKS REQUIRE ONE (1) RFI FILTER FOR EACH IN-TANK ELECTRIC FUEL PUMP ON MULTI-TANK VEHICLES. NOTE THIS TSB DOES NOT INCLUDE TAURUS FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLES (FFVS) OR 1999 RANGER 3.0L FFVS. TEST PROCEDURE Fuel pump radio noise is relatively constant and changes only slightly with vehicle speed. If the frequency of the noise varies or the noise comes and goes with the vehicle speed, then it is not the fuel pump and this fix will not be effective. The following procedure will help determine if the fuel pump is the cause of the radio noise: 1. Turn on the radio before the key is turned on (assuming the radio will operate without the ignition key - you may need to put the ignition key in the Accessory position). 2. Turn the ignition key to the Run position (do not start the engine). 3. The fuel pump should run for about 1 second with the key in the Run position with the engine not running. Listen for noise in the radio. If noise is present while the pump is running and stops when the pump stops, then the noise is being generated by the pump and this procedure should help. Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 01-7-3 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 021604AA Diagnose And Install RFI 2.1 Hrs. Filter 1990-1997 Thunderbird/Cougar 021604BA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.4 Hrs. Filter 1990-1999 And 2001 Taurus/Sable 021604CA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.2 Hrs. Filter 1992-1997 Crown Victoria/Grand Marquis/Town Car 021604CB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs. Filter 1990-1991 Crown Victoria/Grand Marquis/Town Car 021604CC Diagnose And Install RFI 2.2 Hrs. Filter 1998-2002 Crown Victoria/Grand Marquis 021604DA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.9 Hrs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6047 Filter 1998-2002 Town Car 021604EA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.7 Hrs. Filter 1990-1998 Mustang 021604FA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs. Filter 1990-1998 Mustang 021604GA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.5 Hrs. Filter 1990-1994 Continental 021604HA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs. Filter 1990 Escort 021604IA Diagnose And Install RFI 0.8 Hr. Filter 1991-1996 Escort Tracer 021604IB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs. Filter 1997 Escort/Tracer 021604JA Diagnose And Install RFI 0.8 Hr. Filter 1997 Contour/Mystique 021604JB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.8 Hrs. Filter 1998-1999 Contour/Mystique 021604KA Diagnose And Install RFI 2.0 Hrs. Filter 1990-1992 Mark VII 021604LA Diagnose And Install RFI 0.8 Hr. Filter 1990-1992 Probe 021604LB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.8 Hrs. Filter 1993-1997 Probe 021604MA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs. Filter 1990-2002 Econoline Single Fuel Tank 021604MB Diagnose And Install RFI 2.6 Hrs. Filter 1990-1991 Econoline Both Fuel Tanks 021604NA Diagnose And Install RFI 2.0 Hrs. Filter 1990-1996 Bronco 0216040A Diagnose And Install RFI 1.8 Hrs. Filter 1991-1994 Explorer 0216040B Diagnose And Install RFI 1.5 Hrs. Filter 1995-2002 Explorer 021604PA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.5 Hrs. Filter 1997-2002 Mountaineer 0216040A Diagnose And Install RFI 1.4 Hrs. Filter 1995-2002 Windstar 021604RA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.9 Hrs. Filter 1993-2002 Villager Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6048 021604SA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.7 Hrs. Filter 1997-2003 Expedition/Navigator 021604TA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.3 Hrs. Filter 1990-1997 Ranger Standard Cab 021604TB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.8 Hrs. Filter 1990-1997 Ranger Super Cab 021604TC Diagnose And Install RFI 1.8 Hrs. Filter 1998-2002 Ranger 4X4 021604TD Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs. Filter 1998-2002 Ranger 4X2 021604UA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.5 Hrs. Filter 1990-1997 Aerostar 021604VA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.9 Hrs. Filter 1990 Bronco II 021604WA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.4 Hrs. Filter 1990-1996 F-150/250/350/Super Duty And 1997 F-350/Superduty Rear 021604WB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.4 Hrs. Filter 1990-1996 F-150/250/350/Super Duty And 1997 F-350/Superduty Front 021604WC Diagnose And Install RFI 2.1 Hrs. Filter 1990-1996 F-150/250/350/Super Duty And 1997 F-350/Superduty Both Tanks 021604WD Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs. Filter 1998-2002 F-150 021604XA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs. Filter 2000-2002 Excursion 021604XB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs. Filter 1999-2002 Super Duty F-Series: Front Tank 021604XC Diagnose And Install RFI 1.5 Hrs. Filter 1999-2002 Super Duty F-Series: Rear Tank 021604XD Diagnose And Install RFI 2.7 Hrs. Filter 1999-2002 Super Duty F-Series: Both Tanks 021604YA Diagnose And Install RFI 0.8 Hr. Filter 2001-2002 Escape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6049 021604ZA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.9 Hrs. Filter 2002 Blackwood DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18B925 42 OASIS CODES: 205000, 207000, 404000, 702000, 702300 Service Procedure 1. Remove the fuel pump sender assembly from the fuel tank. Refer to the appropriate model year Workshop Manual for removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6050 2. On vehicles without a fuel delivery module, remove the negative and positive connectors from the fuel pump, Figure 1. a. Cut the wires to the fuel pump 76 mm (3") from the flange of the fuel pump and discard the wires. b. Connect the RFI filter connectors to the spade terminal on the fuel pump. c. Cut and solder both the red and black wires of the RFI filter to the red and black wires of the flange. Use Heat Shrink Tubing (F5AZ-14A099-AA) over the solder connections. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6051 NOTE HEAT SHRINK TUBING MUST BE USED OVER ALL SOLDERED CONNECTIONS MADE PER THIS TSB. USE SUFFICIENT TUBING (ABOUT 50 mm (2 ")) OF THE SPECIFIED TYPE TO ENTIRELY COVER EACH SOLDERED CONNECTION AND SHRINK APPROPRIATELY TO PREVENT EXPOSURE OF THE CONNECTIONS. NOTE FOR SOME VEHICLES WITH EXTREMELY LONG FUEL PUMP GROUND WIRE CIRCUITS, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO SHORTEN THE GROUND WIRE TO A POINT CLOSE TO THE FUEL TANK. IF THE GROUND IS MOVED, BE SURE IT IS SECURE AND PROTECTED FROM CORROSION SINCE IT IS THE OPERATING GROUND FOR THE PUMP. CHECK SERVICE LITERATURE (EVTM, ETC.) FOR GROUND LOCATIONS. WARNING ALL SOLDERING AND HEAT SHRINKING MUST BE COMPLETED AWAY FROM THE FUEL TANK AREA. USE A SOLDERING IRON ONLY FOR SOLDERING AND HEAT GUN ONLY FOR APPLYING SHRINK TUBING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6052 3. On light trucks and compact trucks with a fuel delivery module, cut the fuel pump wires to the fuel delivery module 50 mm (2") from the flange and discard the wires, Figure 2. a. Cut the connectors from the RFI filter and solder wires to the fuel delivery module (red to red and black to black). Use heat shrink tubing over solder connections. b. Solder wires from the RFI filter to the flange wires (red to red and black to black). Use heat shrink tubing over soldered connections. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6053 NOTE HEAT SHRINK TUBING MUST BE USED OVER ALL SOLDERED CONNECTIONS MADE PER THIS TSB. USE SUFFICIENT TUBING (ABOUT 50 mm (2 ")) OF THE SPECIFIED TYPE TO ENTIRELY COVER EACH SOLDERED CONNECTION AND SHRINK APPROPRIATELY TO PREVENT EXPOSURE OF THE CONNECTIONS. NOTE FOR SOME VEHICLES WITH EXTREMELY LONG FUEL PUMP GROUND WIRE CIRCUITS, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO SHORTEN THE GROUND WIRE TO A POINT CLOSE TO THE FUEL TANK. IF THE GROUND IS MOVED, BE SURE IT IS SECURE AND PROTECTED FROM CORROSION SINCE IT IS THE OPERATING GROUND FOR THE PUMP. CHECK SERVICE LITERATURE (EVTM, ETC.) FOR GROUND LOCATIONS. WARNING ALL SOLDERING AND HEAT SHRINKING MUST BE COMPLETED AWAY FROM THE FUEL TANK AREA. USE A SOLDERING IRON ONLY FOR SOLDERING AND HEAT GUN ONLY FOR APPLYING SHRINK TUBING. 4. Secure the RFI filter to the fuel pump and sender assembly with a Bundling Strap (95873-S101) to prevent rattling in the tank, Figures 1 and 2. 5. Reinstall the fuel pump sender assembly into the fuel tank. CAUTION INSTALL NEW GASKETS WHEN REINSTALLING SENDER TO PREVENT LEAKS. REFER TO THE PARTS CATALOG FOR PROPER APPLICATIONS. 6. Check the appropriate Electrical and Vacuum Troubleshooting Manual (EVTM) (or other service literature) for the location of the fuel pump ground. If ground is more than 0.9m (3 ') from the tank, cut wire and ground fuel pump end within 0.9m (3 ') of the tank to prevent ground wire from acting as an antenna. Be sure ground is secure and protected from corrosion since it is the operating ground for the fuel pump. 7. Install the fuel tank in the vehicle as outlined in the appropriate Service or Workshop Manual. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6058 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6059 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6060 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6061 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6062 Fuse: Locations Central Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6063 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6064 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6065 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6066 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Find and Use These Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams ^ System Diagrams ^ Grounds Diagrams Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6069 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow. Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the diagram. Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be found. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6070 Fuse And Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. Fuse Circuits Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery. Ground Distribution Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text "partial". Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6071 Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of (1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces). The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number. Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the way out by a spring. Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control. A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the way in. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. circuit Numbering Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification Circuit Numbering: Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting electrical circuits. Function: The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter "S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit. System-Connection (including branch): Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate wires in one connection with the same function. Wire Identification (wire colors): The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6072 Wire Identification Example Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know the following information about the wire: Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit System: AC = Headlamp leveling Connection: 3 = Switch connection A = Branch Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe). Circuit Identification Charts Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6073 Circuit Identification Chart System Codes Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6074 Sample Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6075 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6076 Sample Diagram Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6077 Circuit Identification Chart SYSTEM CODES CHART Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6078 SAMPLE DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6079 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6080 Sample Diagram Electrical Symbols ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6081 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6082 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6083 Types of Diagrams Shown Types of Diagrams Shown Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them. Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations. Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system information suitable for diagnostic operations. Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a relationship to them, are also included. All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding of the system component interactions. Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type. Wire Color Code Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6084 Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6085 Fuse: Diagnostic Aids These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6086 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6087 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6090 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6091 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6092 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6093 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6094 Fuse: Application and ID Central Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6095 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6096 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6097 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6098 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box Fuse Block: Locations Battery Junction Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6103 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6104 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6105 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6106 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6107 Fuse Block: Locations Central Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6108 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6109 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6110 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6111 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Find and Use These Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams ^ System Diagrams ^ Grounds Diagrams Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6114 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow. Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the diagram. Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be found. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6115 Fuse And Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. Fuse Circuits Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery. Ground Distribution Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text "partial". Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6116 Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of (1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces). The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number. Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the way out by a spring. Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control. A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the way in. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. circuit Numbering Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification Circuit Numbering: Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting electrical circuits. Function: The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter "S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit. System-Connection (including branch): Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate wires in one connection with the same function. Wire Identification (wire colors): The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6117 Wire Identification Example Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know the following information about the wire: Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit System: AC = Headlamp leveling Connection: 3 = Switch connection A = Branch Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe). Circuit Identification Charts Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6118 Circuit Identification Chart System Codes Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6119 Sample Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6120 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6121 Sample Diagram Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6122 Circuit Identification Chart SYSTEM CODES CHART Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6123 SAMPLE DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6124 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6125 Sample Diagram Electrical Symbols ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6126 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6127 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6128 Types of Diagrams Shown Types of Diagrams Shown Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them. Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations. Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system information suitable for diagnostic operations. Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a relationship to them, are also included. All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding of the system component interactions. Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type. Wire Color Code Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6129 Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6130 Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6131 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6132 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6133 Fuse Block: Connector Views Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6134 Diagram 700-01-00-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6135 Diagram 700-01-00-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box Fuse Block: Application and ID Battery Junction Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6138 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6139 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6140 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6141 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6142 Fuse Block: Application and ID Central Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6143 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6144 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6145 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6146 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6150 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6154 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set Multiple Junction Connector: Customer Interest Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set TSB 06-9-3 05/15/06 PCM FAILURE - ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES INTERMITTENT - INOPERATIVE FORD: 2001-2004 Escape ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a powertrain control module (PCM) concern that results in no crank, no start, or malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) with one or more diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) present. There may also be intermittent or inoperative power windows, door locks, keyless entry system, lighting, speed control, radio, instrument cluster warning lamps (possibly dimly illuminated instead of being off), or other electrical accessories. The concern is typically more noticeable in wet and/or cold weather conditions. This may be the result of connector terminal corrosion in C134, C263, or the central junction box (CJB) which results in either high resistance between the male and female terminals or a short between two or more circuits due to bridging through any corrosion that may be present. Corrosion in C134 may be the result of improper positioning/sealing of C134. Corrosion in C263 or the CJB may be due to a water leak in the left hand A-Pillar area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to inspect and repair the connector terminals for evidence of corrosion. Repair any sources of water entry. If no signs of corrosion or water entry are found, follow normal diagnostics. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE WHEN DIAGNOSING THE CAUSE OF A PCM FAILURE IT IS CRITICAL THAT THIS INSPECTION AND REPAIR PROCEDURE BE COMPLETED IN ITS ENTIRETY BEFORE INSTALLING A REPLACEMENT SERVICE PART. THE POSSIBILITY EXISTS FOR A 12 VOLT SHORT TO THE 5 VOLT VREF (CIRCUIT). INSTALLATION OF A SERVICE REPLACEMENT PCM WITHOUT ELIMINATING THE 12 VOLT SHORT WILL RESULT IN REPEAT PCM FAILURE. Inspect and repair the following connectors: C134 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6163 1. Open the hood and locate C134 (Figure 1). 2. Disconnect the connector halves and thoroughly inspect the terminals. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals. 3. Use shop air to blow out any moisture that may be present in the terminals, then apply dielectric grease to the terminals in both halves of the connector. 4. Reconnect the connector halves and close the hood. C263 1. Open the drivers door and remove the lower kick panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6164 2. Locate C263 as shown in Figure 2. 3. Disconnect the connector halves. 4. Pry out the terminal retainer as shown in Figure 3 and thoroughly inspect the terminals. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6165 NOTE THE CORROSION WILL NOT BE VISIBLE UNLESS THE TERMINAL RETAINER IS REMOVED. 5. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals. 6. Work dielectric grease into the side opening in the connector, then reinstall the terminal retainer. 7. Apply dielectric grease to the terminals in both halves of the connector. 8. Reconnect the connector halves. CJB (Central Junction Box) 1. Locate the CJB (Figure 2). 2. Disconnect the four harness connectors from the front and the two connectors from the rear of the CJB, and remove the CJB. 3. Inspect the terminals and also the back side of the CJB or evidence of water damage or corrosion. 4. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals or components. 5. Apply dielectric grease to the terminals in the harness connectors. 6. Reconnect the six harness connectors and reinstall the CJB. 7. Reinstall the lower kick panel. NOTE IF ANY CORROSION WAS FOUND IN EITHER C263 OR THE CJB, THE SOURCE OF THE WATER ENTRY MUST BE IDENTIFIED TO PREVENT A REPEAT REPAIR. Follow standard water testing procedures to identify the source of any leaks. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6166 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6167 Figures 4 through 8 identify some common sources of water leaks. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT060903 Claim Labor As Actual Actual Time Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14A187 68 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set TSB 06-9-3 05/15/06 PCM FAILURE - ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES INTERMITTENT - INOPERATIVE FORD: 2001-2004 Escape ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a powertrain control module (PCM) concern that results in no crank, no start, or malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) with one or more diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) present. There may also be intermittent or inoperative power windows, door locks, keyless entry system, lighting, speed control, radio, instrument cluster warning lamps (possibly dimly illuminated instead of being off), or other electrical accessories. The concern is typically more noticeable in wet and/or cold weather conditions. This may be the result of connector terminal corrosion in C134, C263, or the central junction box (CJB) which results in either high resistance between the male and female terminals or a short between two or more circuits due to bridging through any corrosion that may be present. Corrosion in C134 may be the result of improper positioning/sealing of C134. Corrosion in C263 or the CJB may be due to a water leak in the left hand A-Pillar area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to inspect and repair the connector terminals for evidence of corrosion. Repair any sources of water entry. If no signs of corrosion or water entry are found, follow normal diagnostics. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE WHEN DIAGNOSING THE CAUSE OF A PCM FAILURE IT IS CRITICAL THAT THIS INSPECTION AND REPAIR PROCEDURE BE COMPLETED IN ITS ENTIRETY BEFORE INSTALLING A REPLACEMENT SERVICE PART. THE POSSIBILITY EXISTS FOR A 12 VOLT SHORT TO THE 5 VOLT VREF (CIRCUIT). INSTALLATION OF A SERVICE REPLACEMENT PCM WITHOUT ELIMINATING THE 12 VOLT SHORT WILL RESULT IN REPEAT PCM FAILURE. Inspect and repair the following connectors: C134 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6173 1. Open the hood and locate C134 (Figure 1). 2. Disconnect the connector halves and thoroughly inspect the terminals. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals. 3. Use shop air to blow out any moisture that may be present in the terminals, then apply dielectric grease to the terminals in both halves of the connector. 4. Reconnect the connector halves and close the hood. C263 1. Open the drivers door and remove the lower kick panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6174 2. Locate C263 as shown in Figure 2. 3. Disconnect the connector halves. 4. Pry out the terminal retainer as shown in Figure 3 and thoroughly inspect the terminals. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6175 NOTE THE CORROSION WILL NOT BE VISIBLE UNLESS THE TERMINAL RETAINER IS REMOVED. 5. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals. 6. Work dielectric grease into the side opening in the connector, then reinstall the terminal retainer. 7. Apply dielectric grease to the terminals in both halves of the connector. 8. Reconnect the connector halves. CJB (Central Junction Box) 1. Locate the CJB (Figure 2). 2. Disconnect the four harness connectors from the front and the two connectors from the rear of the CJB, and remove the CJB. 3. Inspect the terminals and also the back side of the CJB or evidence of water damage or corrosion. 4. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals or components. 5. Apply dielectric grease to the terminals in the harness connectors. 6. Reconnect the six harness connectors and reinstall the CJB. 7. Reinstall the lower kick panel. NOTE IF ANY CORROSION WAS FOUND IN EITHER C263 OR THE CJB, THE SOURCE OF THE WATER ENTRY MUST BE IDENTIFIED TO PREVENT A REPEAT REPAIR. Follow standard water testing procedures to identify the source of any leaks. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6176 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6177 Figures 4 through 8 identify some common sources of water leaks. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT060903 Claim Labor As Actual Actual Time Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14A187 68 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON Coolant Level Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON Article No. 03-25-2 12/22/03 ENGINE - COOLING SYSTEM - LOW COOLANT WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED COOLANT DEGAS BOTTLE INSPECTION - SERVICE TIP FORD: 2001-2003 ESCAPE This article supersedes TSB 03-08-5 to update the vehicle model years and service procedure. ISSUE Some 2001-2003 Escape 3.0L vehicles may exhibit a low coolant warning indicator lamp illuminated. This may be caused by a low coolant level, even if it appears there is significant coolant in the degas bottle. Analysis of coolant degas bottles indicate that bottle replacement may not be necessary. Adjusting the coolant to the proper level may be all that is required to correct the condition. ACTION The following Service Procedure provides tips to help in veritying proper coolant levels. Additional diagnostic and service information can be found in the appropriate Workshop Manual Section 303-03. SERVICE PROCEDURE PROPER INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF COOLANT LEVEL IN THE DEGAS BOTTLE There are four (4) different cells within the Escape degas bottle. The front cells of the degas bottle are not a good visual indicator of proper coolant level, as these cells will always give the appearance of being full (Figure 1). The actual COLD FILL RANGE is the larger cell with the fill cap, just below the seam. It can be difficult to see if not properly examined. If the vehicle is HOT when inspecting, the coolant level should be at the bottle seam (minimum) or above the seam by 1/2 inch, well above the LOW mark. When hot, if the coolant level is not at least to the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), there is a possibility of illuminating the low coolant lamp when the vehicle cools down and the coolant is drawn back into the engine cooling system. DIAGNOSIS Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Not Illuminated (OFF): 1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten pressure cap and return vehicle to customer. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON > Page 6183 Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Illuminated (ON): 1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten pressure cap, verify that the warning lamp turns off after key cycle and return to customer. 2. If the coolant level is verified to be at the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), disconnect the coolant level sensor and verify that the warning lamp turns off. If the lamp does turn off then replace the degas bottle. If the lamp remains on with the sensor disconnected then perform diagnostics on the circuit beyond degas bottle/low coolant sensor. NOTE IT TAKES APPROXIMATELY 25 SECONDS FOR THE LOW COOLANT LAMP TO TURN OFF AFTER THE SENSOR CIRCUIT IS OPENED. (EXAMPLE: WHEN ADDING COOLANT TO A LOW BOTTLE WITH LAMP ON.) NOTE DO NOT REPLACE THE DEGAS BOTTLE UNLESS DIRECTED BY DIAGNOSTICS IN STEP 2. Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 03-08-5 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON > Page 6189 Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Illuminated (ON): 1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten pressure cap, verify that the warning lamp turns off after key cycle and return to customer. 2. If the coolant level is verified to be at the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), disconnect the coolant level sensor and verify that the warning lamp turns off. If the lamp does turn off then replace the degas bottle. If the lamp remains on with the sensor disconnected then perform diagnostics on the circuit beyond degas bottle/low coolant sensor. NOTE IT TAKES APPROXIMATELY 25 SECONDS FOR THE LOW COOLANT LAMP TO TURN OFF AFTER THE SENSOR CIRCUIT IS OPENED. (EXAMPLE: WHEN ADDING COOLANT TO A LOW BOTTLE WITH LAMP ON.) NOTE DO NOT REPLACE THE DEGAS BOTTLE UNLESS DIRECTED BY DIAGNOSTICS IN STEP 2. Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 03-08-5 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6192 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6193 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6194 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6195 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6196 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6197 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6198 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6199 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6200 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6201 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6202 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6203 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6204 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6205 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6210 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6214 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6219 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6220 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6221 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6222 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6223 Relay Box: Locations Central Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6224 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6225 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6226 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6227 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box Relay Box: Diagrams Central Junction Box Diagram 700-01-00-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 6230 Diagram 700-01-00-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 6231 Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6234 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6235 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6236 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6237 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6238 Relay Box: Application and ID Central Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6239 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6240 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6241 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6242 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6247 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6248 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6249 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6250 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6251 Relay Box: Locations Central Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6252 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6253 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6254 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6255 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box Relay Box: Diagrams Central Junction Box Diagram 700-01-00-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 6258 Diagram 700-01-00-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 6259 Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6262 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6263 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6264 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6265 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6266 Relay Box: Application and ID Central Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6267 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6268 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6269 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6270 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-26-12 > Dec > 04 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1994 or B1998 Set Wiring Harness: Customer Interest SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1994 or B1998 Set TSB 04-26-12 12/31/04 SIDE AIR BAG DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1994 OR B1998 FORD: 2001-2004 Escape ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit the air bag warning lamp illuminating intermiffently with DTC B1994 (driver side, side mount air bag circuit open) or B1998 (passenger side, side mount air bag circuit open). This condition may be caused by a variation in the electrical continuity at connector C337 (passenger side) or C367 (driver side) at the body harness wire terminal crimp. ACTION Install a replacement body harness pigtail connector in the affected circuit. Refer to the instruction sheet included in the connector repair kit. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 042612A 2001-2004 Escape One 1.2 Hrs. Seat: Check For Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Install A Replacement Body Harness Pigtail (Includes Time To Depower And Repower The Supplemental Restraints System, Remove And Install Seat) 042612B 2001-2004 Escape Both 1.8 Hrs. Seats: Check For Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Install A Replacement Body Harness Pigtail (Includes Time To Depower And Repower The Supplemental Restraints System, Remove And Install Seats) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14405 X2 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips Technical Service Bulletin # 05-18-7 Date: 050922 Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips TSB 05-18-7 09/22/05 WIRING - SOLDERING AND CRIMPING REPAIRS - SERVICE TIPS FORD: 2000-2006 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2006 Five Hundred, Ford GT, Freestyle 2006 Fusion 2000-2003 Explorer Sport, Windstar 2000-2005 Excursion 2000-2006 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2001-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004-2006 Freestar 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid 2000-2006 F-650, F-750 2006 Low Cab Forward LINCOLN: 2000-2006 LS, Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2000-2006 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006 Mark LT MERCURY: 2000-2002 Cougar 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2006 Grand Marquis 2005-2006 Montego 2006 Milan 2000-2006 Mountaineer 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 03-11-6 to update the service procedure, vehicle lines and model years. ISSUE Wire harness repairs are supported through the availability of individual components such as: ^ Wire terminals with machine crimped pigtails ^ Hard shell connectors ^ Dual wall heat shrink tubing ^ Complete, loaded, wiring pigtail kits Some of the available tools and service parts that are helpful when performing wiring harness repairs are: ^ Motorcraft Wiring Pigtail Catalog (see website for more information) ^ Rotunda Wire Splice Tool kit 164-R5903 ^ General Wire Terminal Repair Kit (order through Ford Component Sales) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6284 Information on the pigtail and terminal repair kits can also be accessed by technicians via the P15 web site. To access on PTS: ^ Select the year/model of the vehicle on the P15 home page ^ Select the wiring tab ^ Select the link to the pigtail or terminal repair kit at the top right of screen. Additional service information contained in this TSB detailing wire folding, soldering, and crimping techniques may be helpful. ACTION REPAIR VS REPLACEMENT The approved procedure is to repair wiring harnesses with pigtail kits, wire terminals, or hard shell connectors when available. The only exceptions to this procedure are when: ^ The repair cost exceeds the cost to replace the wiring harness ^ There are no component parts released to service the wiring harness RESTRAINTS RELATED WIRING REPAIRS If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in a stand-alone harness, do not repair them; replace the restraints harness unless directed to repair the circuit by a TSB or other Ford Motor Company publication. If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in the main vehicle wiring harnesses (14401, 14A005, etc.), they should be repaired using the solder and heat-shrink repair procedure specified in this TSB. The General Wire Terminal Repair Kit contains gold plated terminated pigtails (with white insulation) and dual wall heat shrink tubing to perform these repairs. Loaded wiring pigtail kits with gold plated terminals are also available in the parts catalog. Disclaimer Service Tips Refer to applicable model year wiring diagrams for circuit information. Twisted Wire Circuits For "Twisted Wire" circuit repair (Figure 1), the twisting must not be disrupted for more than 2" (51 mm) Twist the repaired wires in the same direction and with the same general twist rate as the original wiring. Reapply the shielding on shielded circuits. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6285 Stagger the repairs to minimize harness diameter and maintain harness length (Figure 2). Any leads that are not going to be used need to be sealed with dual wall heat shrink and stowed (Figure 2). Silicone must not be used. Excess wire from the harness can be folded back on itself to maintain the harness length. Reapply any convolute and tape that was removed to make the repair. For 16 AGW and Smaller Diameter Wire Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6286 1. Strip 1-1/2" (37.2 mm) of insulation from Wire # 1 and 3/4" (19.5 mm) of insulation from Wire # 2, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands (Figure 3). Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire is pulled at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during stripping, cut off the end and re-strip. 2. Install heat shrink tubing at least 1" (26 mm) away from one of the stripped ends being spliced. Twist wires together. Solder wires together (Figure 4). NOTE USE ROSIN CORE MILDLY ACTIVATED (RMS) SOLDER. DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER FOR WIRE REPAIR. 3. Bend Wire # 1 back in a straight line for sealing (Figure 4). Inspect solder joint bond. NOTE WAIT FOR SOLDER TO COOL BEFORE MOVING WIRES. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6287 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6288 4. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5). NOTE OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES. 5. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the solder point (Figure 5). For 14 AGW and Larger Diameter Wire (Excluding Restraints Wiring Repairs) 1. Strip 1/4" (6.35 mm) of insulation from pigtail wire end once the wire lengths are sized so repairs can be staggered. Take care not to nick or cut wire strands. Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire is pulled at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during stripping, cut off the end and re-strip. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6289 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6290 NOTE THE STRIP LENGTH WILL VARY DEPENDING ON THE BUTT SPLICE AND WIRE IN HARNESS. LONGER STRIP LENGTHS ARE REQUIRED WHEN THE WIRE NEEDS TO BE FOLDED TO MATE WITH THE BUTT SPLICE. REFER TO FIGURE 10 CHART FOR STRIP LENGTHS AND FOLDING TECHNIQUES. 2. Slide heat shrink tubing onto one (1) of the wire ends to be crimped, must be at least 1" (25.4 mm) away from stripped end (Figure 6). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6291 3. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber of the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper (or equivalent) by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice (Figure 7). Hold the crimping tool so the identified wire sizes are facing you. Squeeze tool handles together until the ratchet releases, then allow the jaws of the tool to open fully. 4. Center one (1) end of the butt splice on the appropriate crimping chamber. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam of the butt splice toward the indenter (Figure 8). 5. Hold the butt splice in place and squeeze the tool handles together until the ratchet engages sufficiently to hold the butt splice in position (typically one (1) or two (2) clicks). DO NOT deform the butt splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6292 6. Insert stripped wire into the buff splice, making sure the insulation on wire does not enter the butt splice (Figure 8). 7. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles together until ratchet releases. Allow tool handles to open, then remove crimped butt splice. 8. To crimp the other half of the splice, reposition the un-crimped wire barrel in the same crimping chamber, and repeat Steps 3-8. If splice cannot be turned for crimping the other half, turn the tool around. 9. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. It is acceptable for crimp to be slightly off center, but not off the end of the buff splice (Figure 9-a). b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. Wire is flush with or extends slightly beyond end of buff splice (Figure 9-b). c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices (Figure 9-c). 10. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5). NOTE OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES. 11. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the solder point (Figure 5). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 04-26-12 > Dec > 04 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1994 or B1998 Set Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1994 or B1998 Set TSB 04-26-12 12/31/04 SIDE AIR BAG DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1994 OR B1998 FORD: 2001-2004 Escape ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit the air bag warning lamp illuminating intermiffently with DTC B1994 (driver side, side mount air bag circuit open) or B1998 (passenger side, side mount air bag circuit open). This condition may be caused by a variation in the electrical continuity at connector C337 (passenger side) or C367 (driver side) at the body harness wire terminal crimp. ACTION Install a replacement body harness pigtail connector in the affected circuit. Refer to the instruction sheet included in the connector repair kit. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 042612A 2001-2004 Escape One 1.2 Hrs. Seat: Check For Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Install A Replacement Body Harness Pigtail (Includes Time To Depower And Repower The Supplemental Restraints System, Remove And Install Seat) 042612B 2001-2004 Escape Both 1.8 Hrs. Seats: Check For Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Install A Replacement Body Harness Pigtail (Includes Time To Depower And Repower The Supplemental Restraints System, Remove And Install Seats) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14405 X2 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips Technical Service Bulletin # 05-18-7 Date: 050922 Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips TSB 05-18-7 09/22/05 WIRING - SOLDERING AND CRIMPING REPAIRS - SERVICE TIPS FORD: 2000-2006 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2006 Five Hundred, Ford GT, Freestyle 2006 Fusion 2000-2003 Explorer Sport, Windstar 2000-2005 Excursion 2000-2006 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2001-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004-2006 Freestar 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid 2000-2006 F-650, F-750 2006 Low Cab Forward LINCOLN: 2000-2006 LS, Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2000-2006 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006 Mark LT MERCURY: 2000-2002 Cougar 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2006 Grand Marquis 2005-2006 Montego 2006 Milan 2000-2006 Mountaineer 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 03-11-6 to update the service procedure, vehicle lines and model years. ISSUE Wire harness repairs are supported through the availability of individual components such as: ^ Wire terminals with machine crimped pigtails ^ Hard shell connectors ^ Dual wall heat shrink tubing ^ Complete, loaded, wiring pigtail kits Some of the available tools and service parts that are helpful when performing wiring harness repairs are: ^ Motorcraft Wiring Pigtail Catalog (see website for more information) ^ Rotunda Wire Splice Tool kit 164-R5903 ^ General Wire Terminal Repair Kit (order through Ford Component Sales) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6302 Information on the pigtail and terminal repair kits can also be accessed by technicians via the P15 web site. To access on PTS: ^ Select the year/model of the vehicle on the P15 home page ^ Select the wiring tab ^ Select the link to the pigtail or terminal repair kit at the top right of screen. Additional service information contained in this TSB detailing wire folding, soldering, and crimping techniques may be helpful. ACTION REPAIR VS REPLACEMENT The approved procedure is to repair wiring harnesses with pigtail kits, wire terminals, or hard shell connectors when available. The only exceptions to this procedure are when: ^ The repair cost exceeds the cost to replace the wiring harness ^ There are no component parts released to service the wiring harness RESTRAINTS RELATED WIRING REPAIRS If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in a stand-alone harness, do not repair them; replace the restraints harness unless directed to repair the circuit by a TSB or other Ford Motor Company publication. If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in the main vehicle wiring harnesses (14401, 14A005, etc.), they should be repaired using the solder and heat-shrink repair procedure specified in this TSB. The General Wire Terminal Repair Kit contains gold plated terminated pigtails (with white insulation) and dual wall heat shrink tubing to perform these repairs. Loaded wiring pigtail kits with gold plated terminals are also available in the parts catalog. Disclaimer Service Tips Refer to applicable model year wiring diagrams for circuit information. Twisted Wire Circuits For "Twisted Wire" circuit repair (Figure 1), the twisting must not be disrupted for more than 2" (51 mm) Twist the repaired wires in the same direction and with the same general twist rate as the original wiring. Reapply the shielding on shielded circuits. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6303 Stagger the repairs to minimize harness diameter and maintain harness length (Figure 2). Any leads that are not going to be used need to be sealed with dual wall heat shrink and stowed (Figure 2). Silicone must not be used. Excess wire from the harness can be folded back on itself to maintain the harness length. Reapply any convolute and tape that was removed to make the repair. For 16 AGW and Smaller Diameter Wire Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6304 1. Strip 1-1/2" (37.2 mm) of insulation from Wire # 1 and 3/4" (19.5 mm) of insulation from Wire # 2, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands (Figure 3). Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire is pulled at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during stripping, cut off the end and re-strip. 2. Install heat shrink tubing at least 1" (26 mm) away from one of the stripped ends being spliced. Twist wires together. Solder wires together (Figure 4). NOTE USE ROSIN CORE MILDLY ACTIVATED (RMS) SOLDER. DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER FOR WIRE REPAIR. 3. Bend Wire # 1 back in a straight line for sealing (Figure 4). Inspect solder joint bond. NOTE WAIT FOR SOLDER TO COOL BEFORE MOVING WIRES. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6305 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6306 4. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5). NOTE OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES. 5. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the solder point (Figure 5). For 14 AGW and Larger Diameter Wire (Excluding Restraints Wiring Repairs) 1. Strip 1/4" (6.35 mm) of insulation from pigtail wire end once the wire lengths are sized so repairs can be staggered. Take care not to nick or cut wire strands. Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire is pulled at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during stripping, cut off the end and re-strip. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6307 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6308 NOTE THE STRIP LENGTH WILL VARY DEPENDING ON THE BUTT SPLICE AND WIRE IN HARNESS. LONGER STRIP LENGTHS ARE REQUIRED WHEN THE WIRE NEEDS TO BE FOLDED TO MATE WITH THE BUTT SPLICE. REFER TO FIGURE 10 CHART FOR STRIP LENGTHS AND FOLDING TECHNIQUES. 2. Slide heat shrink tubing onto one (1) of the wire ends to be crimped, must be at least 1" (25.4 mm) away from stripped end (Figure 6). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6309 3. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber of the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper (or equivalent) by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice (Figure 7). Hold the crimping tool so the identified wire sizes are facing you. Squeeze tool handles together until the ratchet releases, then allow the jaws of the tool to open fully. 4. Center one (1) end of the butt splice on the appropriate crimping chamber. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam of the butt splice toward the indenter (Figure 8). 5. Hold the butt splice in place and squeeze the tool handles together until the ratchet engages sufficiently to hold the butt splice in position (typically one (1) or two (2) clicks). DO NOT deform the butt splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6310 6. Insert stripped wire into the buff splice, making sure the insulation on wire does not enter the butt splice (Figure 8). 7. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles together until ratchet releases. Allow tool handles to open, then remove crimped butt splice. 8. To crimp the other half of the splice, reposition the un-crimped wire barrel in the same crimping chamber, and repeat Steps 3-8. If splice cannot be turned for crimping the other half, turn the tool around. 9. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. It is acceptable for crimp to be slightly off center, but not off the end of the buff splice (Figure 9-a). b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. Wire is flush with or extends slightly beyond end of buff splice (Figure 9-b). c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices (Figure 9-c). 10. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5). NOTE OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES. 11. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the solder point (Figure 5). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Find and Use These Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams ^ System Diagrams ^ Grounds Diagrams Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6316 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow. Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the diagram. Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be found. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6317 Fuse And Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. Fuse Circuits Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery. Ground Distribution Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text "partial". Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6318 Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of (1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces). The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number. Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the way out by a spring. Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control. A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the way in. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. circuit Numbering Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification Circuit Numbering: Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting electrical circuits. Function: The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter "S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit. System-Connection (including branch): Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate wires in one connection with the same function. Wire Identification (wire colors): The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6319 Wire Identification Example Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know the following information about the wire: Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit System: AC = Headlamp leveling Connection: 3 = Switch connection A = Branch Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe). Circuit Identification Charts Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6320 Circuit Identification Chart System Codes Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6321 Sample Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6322 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6323 Sample Diagram Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6324 Circuit Identification Chart SYSTEM CODES CHART Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6325 SAMPLE DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6326 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6327 Sample Diagram Electrical Symbols ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6328 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6329 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6330 Types of Diagrams Shown Types of Diagrams Shown Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them. Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations. Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system information suitable for diagnostic operations. Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a relationship to them, are also included. All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding of the system component interactions. Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type. Wire Color Code Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6331 Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6332 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Aids These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6333 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6334 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6335 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6336 Diagram 501-12-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electrical Accessory Panel > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box Electrical Accessory Panel: Diagrams Central Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electrical Accessory Panel > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 6341 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electrical Accessory Panel > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 6342 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electrical Accessory Panel > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 6343 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electrical Accessory Panel > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 6344 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electrical Accessory Panel > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 6345 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electrical Accessory Panel > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 6346 Electrical Accessory Panel: Diagrams Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers Technical Service Bulletin # 02-16-4 Date: 020819 Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers Article No. 02-16-4 08/19/02 ^ FUEL SYSTEM - FUEL PUMP "WHINING"/"BUZZING" NOISE COMES THROUGH ENTERTAINMENT OR TWO-WAY RADIO SPEAKER ^ RADIO - ENTERTAINMENT OR TWO-WAY COMMUNICATION - "WHINING"/"BUZZING" NOISE IN SPEAKERS CAUSED BY FUEL PUMP ^ NOISE - "WHINING"/"BUZZING" - COMES THROUGH SPEAKERS OF ENTERTAINMENT OR TWO-WAY RADIO FORD: 1990-1994 TEMPO 1990-1997 ESCORT, PROBE, THUNDERBIRD 1990-1998 MUSTANG 1990-1999 TAURUS 1990-2002 CROWN VICTORIA 1997-1999 CONTOUR 2001 TAURUS 1990 BRONCO II 1990-1996 BRONCO 1990-1997 AEROSTAR, F SUPER DUTY, F-250 HD, F-350 1990-1999 F-250 LD 1990-2002 ECONOLINE, F-150, RANGER 1991-2002 EXPLORER 1995-2002 WINDSTAR 1997-2003 EXPEDITION 1999-2002 SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2002 EXCURSION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT 2001-2002 ESCAPE LINCOLN: 1990-1992 MARK VII 1990-1994 CONTINENTAL 1990-2002 TOWN CAR 1998-2003 NAVIGATOR 2002 BLACKWOOD MERCURY: 1990-1994 TOPAZ 1990-1997 COUGAR 1990-1999 SABLE 1990-2002 GRAND MARQUIS 1991-1997 TRACER 1997-1999 MYSTIQUE 2001 SABLE 1993-2002 VILLAGER 1997-2002 MOUNTAINEER TSB 01-7-3 is being republished in its entirety to update the model year coverage and vehicle line coverage. ISSUE A "whining"/"buzzing" noise in the speakers of the entertainment radio or two-way radio on vehicles with an in-tank electric fuel pump may be caused by electrical noise from the fuel pump. ACTION Install an electronic noise Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) Filter (F1PZ-18B925-A) on the fuel pump inside the fuel tank. Refer to the following Test Procedure to confirm that the concern exists, then refer to the Service Procedure for repair details. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6355 NOTE IF THE VEHICLE HAS AN ELECTRONIC RETURNLESS FUEL SYSTEM, DO NOT INSTALL A RFI FILTER INLINE TO THE FUEL PUMP . ONLY VEHICLES WITH MECHANICAL RETURNLESS FUEL SYSTEMS (PRESSURE REGULATOR IN THE TANK), OR SYSTEMS WITH THE PRESSURE REGULATOR ON THE FUEL RAIL SHOULD BE APPROVED FOR THE RFI FILTER INSTALLATION. NOTE SOME LIGHT TRUCKS REQUIRE ONE (1) RFI FILTER FOR EACH IN-TANK ELECTRIC FUEL PUMP ON MULTI-TANK VEHICLES. NOTE THIS TSB DOES NOT INCLUDE TAURUS FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLES (FFVS) OR 1999 RANGER 3.0L FFVS. TEST PROCEDURE Fuel pump radio noise is relatively constant and changes only slightly with vehicle speed. If the frequency of the noise varies or the noise comes and goes with the vehicle speed, then it is not the fuel pump and this fix will not be effective. The following procedure will help determine if the fuel pump is the cause of the radio noise: 1. Turn on the radio before the key is turned on (assuming the radio will operate without the ignition key - you may need to put the ignition key in the Accessory position). 2. Turn the ignition key to the Run position (do not start the engine). 3. The fuel pump should run for about 1 second with the key in the Run position with the engine not running. Listen for noise in the radio. If noise is present while the pump is running and stops when the pump stops, then the noise is being generated by the pump and this procedure should help. Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 01-7-3 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 021604AA Diagnose And Install RFI 2.1 Hrs. Filter 1990-1997 Thunderbird/Cougar 021604BA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.4 Hrs. Filter 1990-1999 And 2001 Taurus/Sable 021604CA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.2 Hrs. Filter 1992-1997 Crown Victoria/Grand Marquis/Town Car 021604CB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs. Filter 1990-1991 Crown Victoria/Grand Marquis/Town Car 021604CC Diagnose And Install RFI 2.2 Hrs. Filter 1998-2002 Crown Victoria/Grand Marquis 021604DA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.9 Hrs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6356 Filter 1998-2002 Town Car 021604EA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.7 Hrs. Filter 1990-1998 Mustang 021604FA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs. Filter 1990-1998 Mustang 021604GA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.5 Hrs. Filter 1990-1994 Continental 021604HA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs. Filter 1990 Escort 021604IA Diagnose And Install RFI 0.8 Hr. Filter 1991-1996 Escort Tracer 021604IB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs. Filter 1997 Escort/Tracer 021604JA Diagnose And Install RFI 0.8 Hr. Filter 1997 Contour/Mystique 021604JB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.8 Hrs. Filter 1998-1999 Contour/Mystique 021604KA Diagnose And Install RFI 2.0 Hrs. Filter 1990-1992 Mark VII 021604LA Diagnose And Install RFI 0.8 Hr. Filter 1990-1992 Probe 021604LB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.8 Hrs. Filter 1993-1997 Probe 021604MA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs. Filter 1990-2002 Econoline Single Fuel Tank 021604MB Diagnose And Install RFI 2.6 Hrs. Filter 1990-1991 Econoline Both Fuel Tanks 021604NA Diagnose And Install RFI 2.0 Hrs. Filter 1990-1996 Bronco 0216040A Diagnose And Install RFI 1.8 Hrs. Filter 1991-1994 Explorer 0216040B Diagnose And Install RFI 1.5 Hrs. Filter 1995-2002 Explorer 021604PA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.5 Hrs. Filter 1997-2002 Mountaineer 0216040A Diagnose And Install RFI 1.4 Hrs. Filter 1995-2002 Windstar 021604RA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.9 Hrs. Filter 1993-2002 Villager Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6357 021604SA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.7 Hrs. Filter 1997-2003 Expedition/Navigator 021604TA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.3 Hrs. Filter 1990-1997 Ranger Standard Cab 021604TB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.8 Hrs. Filter 1990-1997 Ranger Super Cab 021604TC Diagnose And Install RFI 1.8 Hrs. Filter 1998-2002 Ranger 4X4 021604TD Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs. Filter 1998-2002 Ranger 4X2 021604UA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.5 Hrs. Filter 1990-1997 Aerostar 021604VA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.9 Hrs. Filter 1990 Bronco II 021604WA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.4 Hrs. Filter 1990-1996 F-150/250/350/Super Duty And 1997 F-350/Superduty Rear 021604WB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.4 Hrs. Filter 1990-1996 F-150/250/350/Super Duty And 1997 F-350/Superduty Front 021604WC Diagnose And Install RFI 2.1 Hrs. Filter 1990-1996 F-150/250/350/Super Duty And 1997 F-350/Superduty Both Tanks 021604WD Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs. Filter 1998-2002 F-150 021604XA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs. Filter 2000-2002 Excursion 021604XB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs. Filter 1999-2002 Super Duty F-Series: Front Tank 021604XC Diagnose And Install RFI 1.5 Hrs. Filter 1999-2002 Super Duty F-Series: Rear Tank 021604XD Diagnose And Install RFI 2.7 Hrs. Filter 1999-2002 Super Duty F-Series: Both Tanks 021604YA Diagnose And Install RFI 0.8 Hr. Filter 2001-2002 Escape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6358 021604ZA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.9 Hrs. Filter 2002 Blackwood DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18B925 42 OASIS CODES: 205000, 207000, 404000, 702000, 702300 Service Procedure 1. Remove the fuel pump sender assembly from the fuel tank. Refer to the appropriate model year Workshop Manual for removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6359 2. On vehicles without a fuel delivery module, remove the negative and positive connectors from the fuel pump, Figure 1. a. Cut the wires to the fuel pump 76 mm (3") from the flange of the fuel pump and discard the wires. b. Connect the RFI filter connectors to the spade terminal on the fuel pump. c. Cut and solder both the red and black wires of the RFI filter to the red and black wires of the flange. Use Heat Shrink Tubing (F5AZ-14A099-AA) over the solder connections. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6360 NOTE HEAT SHRINK TUBING MUST BE USED OVER ALL SOLDERED CONNECTIONS MADE PER THIS TSB. USE SUFFICIENT TUBING (ABOUT 50 mm (2 ")) OF THE SPECIFIED TYPE TO ENTIRELY COVER EACH SOLDERED CONNECTION AND SHRINK APPROPRIATELY TO PREVENT EXPOSURE OF THE CONNECTIONS. NOTE FOR SOME VEHICLES WITH EXTREMELY LONG FUEL PUMP GROUND WIRE CIRCUITS, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO SHORTEN THE GROUND WIRE TO A POINT CLOSE TO THE FUEL TANK. IF THE GROUND IS MOVED, BE SURE IT IS SECURE AND PROTECTED FROM CORROSION SINCE IT IS THE OPERATING GROUND FOR THE PUMP. CHECK SERVICE LITERATURE (EVTM, ETC.) FOR GROUND LOCATIONS. WARNING ALL SOLDERING AND HEAT SHRINKING MUST BE COMPLETED AWAY FROM THE FUEL TANK AREA. USE A SOLDERING IRON ONLY FOR SOLDERING AND HEAT GUN ONLY FOR APPLYING SHRINK TUBING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6361 3. On light trucks and compact trucks with a fuel delivery module, cut the fuel pump wires to the fuel delivery module 50 mm (2") from the flange and discard the wires, Figure 2. a. Cut the connectors from the RFI filter and solder wires to the fuel delivery module (red to red and black to black). Use heat shrink tubing over solder connections. b. Solder wires from the RFI filter to the flange wires (red to red and black to black). Use heat shrink tubing over soldered connections. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6362 NOTE HEAT SHRINK TUBING MUST BE USED OVER ALL SOLDERED CONNECTIONS MADE PER THIS TSB. USE SUFFICIENT TUBING (ABOUT 50 mm (2 ")) OF THE SPECIFIED TYPE TO ENTIRELY COVER EACH SOLDERED CONNECTION AND SHRINK APPROPRIATELY TO PREVENT EXPOSURE OF THE CONNECTIONS. NOTE FOR SOME VEHICLES WITH EXTREMELY LONG FUEL PUMP GROUND WIRE CIRCUITS, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO SHORTEN THE GROUND WIRE TO A POINT CLOSE TO THE FUEL TANK. IF THE GROUND IS MOVED, BE SURE IT IS SECURE AND PROTECTED FROM CORROSION SINCE IT IS THE OPERATING GROUND FOR THE PUMP. CHECK SERVICE LITERATURE (EVTM, ETC.) FOR GROUND LOCATIONS. WARNING ALL SOLDERING AND HEAT SHRINKING MUST BE COMPLETED AWAY FROM THE FUEL TANK AREA. USE A SOLDERING IRON ONLY FOR SOLDERING AND HEAT GUN ONLY FOR APPLYING SHRINK TUBING. 4. Secure the RFI filter to the fuel pump and sender assembly with a Bundling Strap (95873-S101) to prevent rattling in the tank, Figures 1 and 2. 5. Reinstall the fuel pump sender assembly into the fuel tank. CAUTION INSTALL NEW GASKETS WHEN REINSTALLING SENDER TO PREVENT LEAKS. REFER TO THE PARTS CATALOG FOR PROPER APPLICATIONS. 6. Check the appropriate Electrical and Vacuum Troubleshooting Manual (EVTM) (or other service literature) for the location of the fuel pump ground. If ground is more than 0.9m (3 ') from the tank, cut wire and ground fuel pump end within 0.9m (3 ') of the tank to prevent ground wire from acting as an antenna. Be sure ground is secure and protected from corrosion since it is the operating ground for the fuel pump. 7. Install the fuel tank in the vehicle as outlined in the appropriate Service or Workshop Manual. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers Technical Service Bulletin # 02-16-4 Date: 020819 Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers Article No. 02-16-4 08/19/02 ^ FUEL SYSTEM - FUEL PUMP "WHINING"/"BUZZING" NOISE COMES THROUGH ENTERTAINMENT OR TWO-WAY RADIO SPEAKER ^ RADIO - ENTERTAINMENT OR TWO-WAY COMMUNICATION - "WHINING"/"BUZZING" NOISE IN SPEAKERS CAUSED BY FUEL PUMP ^ NOISE - "WHINING"/"BUZZING" - COMES THROUGH SPEAKERS OF ENTERTAINMENT OR TWO-WAY RADIO FORD: 1990-1994 TEMPO 1990-1997 ESCORT, PROBE, THUNDERBIRD 1990-1998 MUSTANG 1990-1999 TAURUS 1990-2002 CROWN VICTORIA 1997-1999 CONTOUR 2001 TAURUS 1990 BRONCO II 1990-1996 BRONCO 1990-1997 AEROSTAR, F SUPER DUTY, F-250 HD, F-350 1990-1999 F-250 LD 1990-2002 ECONOLINE, F-150, RANGER 1991-2002 EXPLORER 1995-2002 WINDSTAR 1997-2003 EXPEDITION 1999-2002 SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2002 EXCURSION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT 2001-2002 ESCAPE LINCOLN: 1990-1992 MARK VII 1990-1994 CONTINENTAL 1990-2002 TOWN CAR 1998-2003 NAVIGATOR 2002 BLACKWOOD MERCURY: 1990-1994 TOPAZ 1990-1997 COUGAR 1990-1999 SABLE 1990-2002 GRAND MARQUIS 1991-1997 TRACER 1997-1999 MYSTIQUE 2001 SABLE 1993-2002 VILLAGER 1997-2002 MOUNTAINEER TSB 01-7-3 is being republished in its entirety to update the model year coverage and vehicle line coverage. ISSUE A "whining"/"buzzing" noise in the speakers of the entertainment radio or two-way radio on vehicles with an in-tank electric fuel pump may be caused by electrical noise from the fuel pump. ACTION Install an electronic noise Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) Filter (F1PZ-18B925-A) on the fuel pump inside the fuel tank. Refer to the following Test Procedure to confirm that the concern exists, then refer to the Service Procedure for repair details. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6368 NOTE IF THE VEHICLE HAS AN ELECTRONIC RETURNLESS FUEL SYSTEM, DO NOT INSTALL A RFI FILTER INLINE TO THE FUEL PUMP . ONLY VEHICLES WITH MECHANICAL RETURNLESS FUEL SYSTEMS (PRESSURE REGULATOR IN THE TANK), OR SYSTEMS WITH THE PRESSURE REGULATOR ON THE FUEL RAIL SHOULD BE APPROVED FOR THE RFI FILTER INSTALLATION. NOTE SOME LIGHT TRUCKS REQUIRE ONE (1) RFI FILTER FOR EACH IN-TANK ELECTRIC FUEL PUMP ON MULTI-TANK VEHICLES. NOTE THIS TSB DOES NOT INCLUDE TAURUS FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLES (FFVS) OR 1999 RANGER 3.0L FFVS. TEST PROCEDURE Fuel pump radio noise is relatively constant and changes only slightly with vehicle speed. If the frequency of the noise varies or the noise comes and goes with the vehicle speed, then it is not the fuel pump and this fix will not be effective. The following procedure will help determine if the fuel pump is the cause of the radio noise: 1. Turn on the radio before the key is turned on (assuming the radio will operate without the ignition key - you may need to put the ignition key in the Accessory position). 2. Turn the ignition key to the Run position (do not start the engine). 3. The fuel pump should run for about 1 second with the key in the Run position with the engine not running. Listen for noise in the radio. If noise is present while the pump is running and stops when the pump stops, then the noise is being generated by the pump and this procedure should help. Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 01-7-3 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 021604AA Diagnose And Install RFI 2.1 Hrs. Filter 1990-1997 Thunderbird/Cougar 021604BA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.4 Hrs. Filter 1990-1999 And 2001 Taurus/Sable 021604CA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.2 Hrs. Filter 1992-1997 Crown Victoria/Grand Marquis/Town Car 021604CB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs. Filter 1990-1991 Crown Victoria/Grand Marquis/Town Car 021604CC Diagnose And Install RFI 2.2 Hrs. Filter 1998-2002 Crown Victoria/Grand Marquis 021604DA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.9 Hrs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6369 Filter 1998-2002 Town Car 021604EA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.7 Hrs. Filter 1990-1998 Mustang 021604FA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs. Filter 1990-1998 Mustang 021604GA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.5 Hrs. Filter 1990-1994 Continental 021604HA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs. Filter 1990 Escort 021604IA Diagnose And Install RFI 0.8 Hr. Filter 1991-1996 Escort Tracer 021604IB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs. Filter 1997 Escort/Tracer 021604JA Diagnose And Install RFI 0.8 Hr. Filter 1997 Contour/Mystique 021604JB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.8 Hrs. Filter 1998-1999 Contour/Mystique 021604KA Diagnose And Install RFI 2.0 Hrs. Filter 1990-1992 Mark VII 021604LA Diagnose And Install RFI 0.8 Hr. Filter 1990-1992 Probe 021604LB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.8 Hrs. Filter 1993-1997 Probe 021604MA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs. Filter 1990-2002 Econoline Single Fuel Tank 021604MB Diagnose And Install RFI 2.6 Hrs. Filter 1990-1991 Econoline Both Fuel Tanks 021604NA Diagnose And Install RFI 2.0 Hrs. Filter 1990-1996 Bronco 0216040A Diagnose And Install RFI 1.8 Hrs. Filter 1991-1994 Explorer 0216040B Diagnose And Install RFI 1.5 Hrs. Filter 1995-2002 Explorer 021604PA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.5 Hrs. Filter 1997-2002 Mountaineer 0216040A Diagnose And Install RFI 1.4 Hrs. Filter 1995-2002 Windstar 021604RA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.9 Hrs. Filter 1993-2002 Villager Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6370 021604SA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.7 Hrs. Filter 1997-2003 Expedition/Navigator 021604TA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.3 Hrs. Filter 1990-1997 Ranger Standard Cab 021604TB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.8 Hrs. Filter 1990-1997 Ranger Super Cab 021604TC Diagnose And Install RFI 1.8 Hrs. Filter 1998-2002 Ranger 4X4 021604TD Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs. Filter 1998-2002 Ranger 4X2 021604UA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.5 Hrs. Filter 1990-1997 Aerostar 021604VA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.9 Hrs. Filter 1990 Bronco II 021604WA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.4 Hrs. Filter 1990-1996 F-150/250/350/Super Duty And 1997 F-350/Superduty Rear 021604WB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.4 Hrs. Filter 1990-1996 F-150/250/350/Super Duty And 1997 F-350/Superduty Front 021604WC Diagnose And Install RFI 2.1 Hrs. Filter 1990-1996 F-150/250/350/Super Duty And 1997 F-350/Superduty Both Tanks 021604WD Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs. Filter 1998-2002 F-150 021604XA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs. Filter 2000-2002 Excursion 021604XB Diagnose And Install RFI 1.6 Hrs. Filter 1999-2002 Super Duty F-Series: Front Tank 021604XC Diagnose And Install RFI 1.5 Hrs. Filter 1999-2002 Super Duty F-Series: Rear Tank 021604XD Diagnose And Install RFI 2.7 Hrs. Filter 1999-2002 Super Duty F-Series: Both Tanks 021604YA Diagnose And Install RFI 0.8 Hr. Filter 2001-2002 Escape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6371 021604ZA Diagnose And Install RFI 1.9 Hrs. Filter 2002 Blackwood DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18B925 42 OASIS CODES: 205000, 207000, 404000, 702000, 702300 Service Procedure 1. Remove the fuel pump sender assembly from the fuel tank. Refer to the appropriate model year Workshop Manual for removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6372 2. On vehicles without a fuel delivery module, remove the negative and positive connectors from the fuel pump, Figure 1. a. Cut the wires to the fuel pump 76 mm (3") from the flange of the fuel pump and discard the wires. b. Connect the RFI filter connectors to the spade terminal on the fuel pump. c. Cut and solder both the red and black wires of the RFI filter to the red and black wires of the flange. Use Heat Shrink Tubing (F5AZ-14A099-AA) over the solder connections. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6373 NOTE HEAT SHRINK TUBING MUST BE USED OVER ALL SOLDERED CONNECTIONS MADE PER THIS TSB. USE SUFFICIENT TUBING (ABOUT 50 mm (2 ")) OF THE SPECIFIED TYPE TO ENTIRELY COVER EACH SOLDERED CONNECTION AND SHRINK APPROPRIATELY TO PREVENT EXPOSURE OF THE CONNECTIONS. NOTE FOR SOME VEHICLES WITH EXTREMELY LONG FUEL PUMP GROUND WIRE CIRCUITS, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO SHORTEN THE GROUND WIRE TO A POINT CLOSE TO THE FUEL TANK. IF THE GROUND IS MOVED, BE SURE IT IS SECURE AND PROTECTED FROM CORROSION SINCE IT IS THE OPERATING GROUND FOR THE PUMP. CHECK SERVICE LITERATURE (EVTM, ETC.) FOR GROUND LOCATIONS. WARNING ALL SOLDERING AND HEAT SHRINKING MUST BE COMPLETED AWAY FROM THE FUEL TANK AREA. USE A SOLDERING IRON ONLY FOR SOLDERING AND HEAT GUN ONLY FOR APPLYING SHRINK TUBING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6374 3. On light trucks and compact trucks with a fuel delivery module, cut the fuel pump wires to the fuel delivery module 50 mm (2") from the flange and discard the wires, Figure 2. a. Cut the connectors from the RFI filter and solder wires to the fuel delivery module (red to red and black to black). Use heat shrink tubing over solder connections. b. Solder wires from the RFI filter to the flange wires (red to red and black to black). Use heat shrink tubing over soldered connections. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic Noise Suppressor: > 02-16-4 > Aug > 02 > Audio System - Whining/Buzzing Noise From Speakers > Page 6375 NOTE HEAT SHRINK TUBING MUST BE USED OVER ALL SOLDERED CONNECTIONS MADE PER THIS TSB. USE SUFFICIENT TUBING (ABOUT 50 mm (2 ")) OF THE SPECIFIED TYPE TO ENTIRELY COVER EACH SOLDERED CONNECTION AND SHRINK APPROPRIATELY TO PREVENT EXPOSURE OF THE CONNECTIONS. NOTE FOR SOME VEHICLES WITH EXTREMELY LONG FUEL PUMP GROUND WIRE CIRCUITS, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO SHORTEN THE GROUND WIRE TO A POINT CLOSE TO THE FUEL TANK. IF THE GROUND IS MOVED, BE SURE IT IS SECURE AND PROTECTED FROM CORROSION SINCE IT IS THE OPERATING GROUND FOR THE PUMP. CHECK SERVICE LITERATURE (EVTM, ETC.) FOR GROUND LOCATIONS. WARNING ALL SOLDERING AND HEAT SHRINKING MUST BE COMPLETED AWAY FROM THE FUEL TANK AREA. USE A SOLDERING IRON ONLY FOR SOLDERING AND HEAT GUN ONLY FOR APPLYING SHRINK TUBING. 4. Secure the RFI filter to the fuel pump and sender assembly with a Bundling Strap (95873-S101) to prevent rattling in the tank, Figures 1 and 2. 5. Reinstall the fuel pump sender assembly into the fuel tank. CAUTION INSTALL NEW GASKETS WHEN REINSTALLING SENDER TO PREVENT LEAKS. REFER TO THE PARTS CATALOG FOR PROPER APPLICATIONS. 6. Check the appropriate Electrical and Vacuum Troubleshooting Manual (EVTM) (or other service literature) for the location of the fuel pump ground. If ground is more than 0.9m (3 ') from the tank, cut wire and ground fuel pump end within 0.9m (3 ') of the tank to prevent ground wire from acting as an antenna. Be sure ground is secure and protected from corrosion since it is the operating ground for the fuel pump. 7. Install the fuel tank in the vehicle as outlined in the appropriate Service or Workshop Manual. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6380 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6381 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6382 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6383 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6384 Fuse: Locations Central Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6385 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6386 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6387 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6388 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Find and Use These Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams ^ System Diagrams ^ Grounds Diagrams Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6391 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow. Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the diagram. Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be found. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6392 Fuse And Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. Fuse Circuits Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery. Ground Distribution Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text "partial". Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6393 Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of (1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces). The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number. Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the way out by a spring. Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control. A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the way in. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. circuit Numbering Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification Circuit Numbering: Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting electrical circuits. Function: The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter "S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit. System-Connection (including branch): Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate wires in one connection with the same function. Wire Identification (wire colors): The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6394 Wire Identification Example Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know the following information about the wire: Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit System: AC = Headlamp leveling Connection: 3 = Switch connection A = Branch Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe). Circuit Identification Charts Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6395 Circuit Identification Chart System Codes Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6396 Sample Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6397 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6398 Sample Diagram Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6399 Circuit Identification Chart SYSTEM CODES CHART Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6400 SAMPLE DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6401 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6402 Sample Diagram Electrical Symbols ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6403 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6404 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6405 Types of Diagrams Shown Types of Diagrams Shown Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them. Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations. Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system information suitable for diagnostic operations. Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a relationship to them, are also included. All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding of the system component interactions. Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type. Wire Color Code Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6406 Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6407 Fuse: Diagnostic Aids These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6408 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6409 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6412 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6413 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6414 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6415 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6416 Fuse: Application and ID Central Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6417 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6418 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6419 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6420 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box Fuse Block: Locations Battery Junction Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6425 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6426 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6427 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6428 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6429 Fuse Block: Locations Central Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6430 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6431 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6432 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6433 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Find and Use These Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams ^ System Diagrams ^ Grounds Diagrams Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6436 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow. Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the diagram. Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be found. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6437 Fuse And Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. Fuse Circuits Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery. Ground Distribution Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text "partial". Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6438 Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of (1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces). The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number. Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the way out by a spring. Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control. A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the way in. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. circuit Numbering Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification Circuit Numbering: Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting electrical circuits. Function: The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter "S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit. System-Connection (including branch): Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate wires in one connection with the same function. Wire Identification (wire colors): The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6439 Wire Identification Example Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know the following information about the wire: Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit System: AC = Headlamp leveling Connection: 3 = Switch connection A = Branch Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe). Circuit Identification Charts Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6440 Circuit Identification Chart System Codes Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6441 Sample Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6442 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6443 Sample Diagram Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6444 Circuit Identification Chart SYSTEM CODES CHART Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6445 SAMPLE DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6446 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6447 Sample Diagram Electrical Symbols ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6448 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6449 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6450 Types of Diagrams Shown Types of Diagrams Shown Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them. Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations. Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system information suitable for diagnostic operations. Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a relationship to them, are also included. All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding of the system component interactions. Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type. Wire Color Code Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6451 Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6452 Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6453 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6454 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6455 Fuse Block: Connector Views Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6456 Diagram 700-01-00-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6457 Diagram 700-01-00-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box Fuse Block: Application and ID Battery Junction Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6460 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6461 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6462 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6463 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6464 Fuse Block: Application and ID Central Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6465 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6466 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6467 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6468 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6472 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6476 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set Multiple Junction Connector: Customer Interest Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set TSB 06-9-3 05/15/06 PCM FAILURE - ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES INTERMITTENT - INOPERATIVE FORD: 2001-2004 Escape ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a powertrain control module (PCM) concern that results in no crank, no start, or malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) with one or more diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) present. There may also be intermittent or inoperative power windows, door locks, keyless entry system, lighting, speed control, radio, instrument cluster warning lamps (possibly dimly illuminated instead of being off), or other electrical accessories. The concern is typically more noticeable in wet and/or cold weather conditions. This may be the result of connector terminal corrosion in C134, C263, or the central junction box (CJB) which results in either high resistance between the male and female terminals or a short between two or more circuits due to bridging through any corrosion that may be present. Corrosion in C134 may be the result of improper positioning/sealing of C134. Corrosion in C263 or the CJB may be due to a water leak in the left hand A-Pillar area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to inspect and repair the connector terminals for evidence of corrosion. Repair any sources of water entry. If no signs of corrosion or water entry are found, follow normal diagnostics. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE WHEN DIAGNOSING THE CAUSE OF A PCM FAILURE IT IS CRITICAL THAT THIS INSPECTION AND REPAIR PROCEDURE BE COMPLETED IN ITS ENTIRETY BEFORE INSTALLING A REPLACEMENT SERVICE PART. THE POSSIBILITY EXISTS FOR A 12 VOLT SHORT TO THE 5 VOLT VREF (CIRCUIT). INSTALLATION OF A SERVICE REPLACEMENT PCM WITHOUT ELIMINATING THE 12 VOLT SHORT WILL RESULT IN REPEAT PCM FAILURE. Inspect and repair the following connectors: C134 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6485 1. Open the hood and locate C134 (Figure 1). 2. Disconnect the connector halves and thoroughly inspect the terminals. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals. 3. Use shop air to blow out any moisture that may be present in the terminals, then apply dielectric grease to the terminals in both halves of the connector. 4. Reconnect the connector halves and close the hood. C263 1. Open the drivers door and remove the lower kick panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6486 2. Locate C263 as shown in Figure 2. 3. Disconnect the connector halves. 4. Pry out the terminal retainer as shown in Figure 3 and thoroughly inspect the terminals. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6487 NOTE THE CORROSION WILL NOT BE VISIBLE UNLESS THE TERMINAL RETAINER IS REMOVED. 5. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals. 6. Work dielectric grease into the side opening in the connector, then reinstall the terminal retainer. 7. Apply dielectric grease to the terminals in both halves of the connector. 8. Reconnect the connector halves. CJB (Central Junction Box) 1. Locate the CJB (Figure 2). 2. Disconnect the four harness connectors from the front and the two connectors from the rear of the CJB, and remove the CJB. 3. Inspect the terminals and also the back side of the CJB or evidence of water damage or corrosion. 4. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals or components. 5. Apply dielectric grease to the terminals in the harness connectors. 6. Reconnect the six harness connectors and reinstall the CJB. 7. Reinstall the lower kick panel. NOTE IF ANY CORROSION WAS FOUND IN EITHER C263 OR THE CJB, THE SOURCE OF THE WATER ENTRY MUST BE IDENTIFIED TO PREVENT A REPEAT REPAIR. Follow standard water testing procedures to identify the source of any leaks. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6488 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6489 Figures 4 through 8 identify some common sources of water leaks. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT060903 Claim Labor As Actual Actual Time Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14A187 68 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set TSB 06-9-3 05/15/06 PCM FAILURE - ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES INTERMITTENT - INOPERATIVE FORD: 2001-2004 Escape ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a powertrain control module (PCM) concern that results in no crank, no start, or malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) with one or more diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) present. There may also be intermittent or inoperative power windows, door locks, keyless entry system, lighting, speed control, radio, instrument cluster warning lamps (possibly dimly illuminated instead of being off), or other electrical accessories. The concern is typically more noticeable in wet and/or cold weather conditions. This may be the result of connector terminal corrosion in C134, C263, or the central junction box (CJB) which results in either high resistance between the male and female terminals or a short between two or more circuits due to bridging through any corrosion that may be present. Corrosion in C134 may be the result of improper positioning/sealing of C134. Corrosion in C263 or the CJB may be due to a water leak in the left hand A-Pillar area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to inspect and repair the connector terminals for evidence of corrosion. Repair any sources of water entry. If no signs of corrosion or water entry are found, follow normal diagnostics. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE WHEN DIAGNOSING THE CAUSE OF A PCM FAILURE IT IS CRITICAL THAT THIS INSPECTION AND REPAIR PROCEDURE BE COMPLETED IN ITS ENTIRETY BEFORE INSTALLING A REPLACEMENT SERVICE PART. THE POSSIBILITY EXISTS FOR A 12 VOLT SHORT TO THE 5 VOLT VREF (CIRCUIT). INSTALLATION OF A SERVICE REPLACEMENT PCM WITHOUT ELIMINATING THE 12 VOLT SHORT WILL RESULT IN REPEAT PCM FAILURE. Inspect and repair the following connectors: C134 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6495 1. Open the hood and locate C134 (Figure 1). 2. Disconnect the connector halves and thoroughly inspect the terminals. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals. 3. Use shop air to blow out any moisture that may be present in the terminals, then apply dielectric grease to the terminals in both halves of the connector. 4. Reconnect the connector halves and close the hood. C263 1. Open the drivers door and remove the lower kick panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6496 2. Locate C263 as shown in Figure 2. 3. Disconnect the connector halves. 4. Pry out the terminal retainer as shown in Figure 3 and thoroughly inspect the terminals. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6497 NOTE THE CORROSION WILL NOT BE VISIBLE UNLESS THE TERMINAL RETAINER IS REMOVED. 5. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals. 6. Work dielectric grease into the side opening in the connector, then reinstall the terminal retainer. 7. Apply dielectric grease to the terminals in both halves of the connector. 8. Reconnect the connector halves. CJB (Central Junction Box) 1. Locate the CJB (Figure 2). 2. Disconnect the four harness connectors from the front and the two connectors from the rear of the CJB, and remove the CJB. 3. Inspect the terminals and also the back side of the CJB or evidence of water damage or corrosion. 4. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals or components. 5. Apply dielectric grease to the terminals in the harness connectors. 6. Reconnect the six harness connectors and reinstall the CJB. 7. Reinstall the lower kick panel. NOTE IF ANY CORROSION WAS FOUND IN EITHER C263 OR THE CJB, THE SOURCE OF THE WATER ENTRY MUST BE IDENTIFIED TO PREVENT A REPEAT REPAIR. Follow standard water testing procedures to identify the source of any leaks. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6498 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 6499 Figures 4 through 8 identify some common sources of water leaks. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT060903 Claim Labor As Actual Actual Time Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14A187 68 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6502 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6503 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6504 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6505 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6506 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6507 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6508 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6509 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6510 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6511 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6512 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6513 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6514 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 6515 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6520 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6524 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6529 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6530 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6531 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6532 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6533 Relay Box: Locations Central Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6534 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6535 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6536 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6537 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box Relay Box: Diagrams Central Junction Box Diagram 700-01-00-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 6540 Diagram 700-01-00-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 6541 Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6544 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6545 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6546 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6547 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6548 Relay Box: Application and ID Central Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6549 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6550 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6551 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6552 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6557 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6558 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6559 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6560 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6561 Relay Box: Locations Central Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6562 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6563 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6564 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 6565 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box Relay Box: Diagrams Central Junction Box Diagram 700-01-00-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 6568 Diagram 700-01-00-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 6569 Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Location Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6572 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6573 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6574 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6575 Battery Junction Box/Power Distribution Box Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6576 Relay Box: Application and ID Central Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6577 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6578 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6579 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 6580 Central Junction Box/Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Legend Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-26-12 > Dec > 04 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1994 or B1998 Set Wiring Harness: Customer Interest SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1994 or B1998 Set TSB 04-26-12 12/31/04 SIDE AIR BAG DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1994 OR B1998 FORD: 2001-2004 Escape ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit the air bag warning lamp illuminating intermiffently with DTC B1994 (driver side, side mount air bag circuit open) or B1998 (passenger side, side mount air bag circuit open). This condition may be caused by a variation in the electrical continuity at connector C337 (passenger side) or C367 (driver side) at the body harness wire terminal crimp. ACTION Install a replacement body harness pigtail connector in the affected circuit. Refer to the instruction sheet included in the connector repair kit. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 042612A 2001-2004 Escape One 1.2 Hrs. Seat: Check For Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Install A Replacement Body Harness Pigtail (Includes Time To Depower And Repower The Supplemental Restraints System, Remove And Install Seat) 042612B 2001-2004 Escape Both 1.8 Hrs. Seats: Check For Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Install A Replacement Body Harness Pigtail (Includes Time To Depower And Repower The Supplemental Restraints System, Remove And Install Seats) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14405 X2 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips Technical Service Bulletin # 05-18-7 Date: 050922 Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips TSB 05-18-7 09/22/05 WIRING - SOLDERING AND CRIMPING REPAIRS - SERVICE TIPS FORD: 2000-2006 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2006 Five Hundred, Ford GT, Freestyle 2006 Fusion 2000-2003 Explorer Sport, Windstar 2000-2005 Excursion 2000-2006 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2001-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004-2006 Freestar 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid 2000-2006 F-650, F-750 2006 Low Cab Forward LINCOLN: 2000-2006 LS, Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2000-2006 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006 Mark LT MERCURY: 2000-2002 Cougar 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2006 Grand Marquis 2005-2006 Montego 2006 Milan 2000-2006 Mountaineer 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 03-11-6 to update the service procedure, vehicle lines and model years. ISSUE Wire harness repairs are supported through the availability of individual components such as: ^ Wire terminals with machine crimped pigtails ^ Hard shell connectors ^ Dual wall heat shrink tubing ^ Complete, loaded, wiring pigtail kits Some of the available tools and service parts that are helpful when performing wiring harness repairs are: ^ Motorcraft Wiring Pigtail Catalog (see website for more information) ^ Rotunda Wire Splice Tool kit 164-R5903 ^ General Wire Terminal Repair Kit (order through Ford Component Sales) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6594 Information on the pigtail and terminal repair kits can also be accessed by technicians via the P15 web site. To access on PTS: ^ Select the year/model of the vehicle on the P15 home page ^ Select the wiring tab ^ Select the link to the pigtail or terminal repair kit at the top right of screen. Additional service information contained in this TSB detailing wire folding, soldering, and crimping techniques may be helpful. ACTION REPAIR VS REPLACEMENT The approved procedure is to repair wiring harnesses with pigtail kits, wire terminals, or hard shell connectors when available. The only exceptions to this procedure are when: ^ The repair cost exceeds the cost to replace the wiring harness ^ There are no component parts released to service the wiring harness RESTRAINTS RELATED WIRING REPAIRS If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in a stand-alone harness, do not repair them; replace the restraints harness unless directed to repair the circuit by a TSB or other Ford Motor Company publication. If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in the main vehicle wiring harnesses (14401, 14A005, etc.), they should be repaired using the solder and heat-shrink repair procedure specified in this TSB. The General Wire Terminal Repair Kit contains gold plated terminated pigtails (with white insulation) and dual wall heat shrink tubing to perform these repairs. Loaded wiring pigtail kits with gold plated terminals are also available in the parts catalog. Disclaimer Service Tips Refer to applicable model year wiring diagrams for circuit information. Twisted Wire Circuits For "Twisted Wire" circuit repair (Figure 1), the twisting must not be disrupted for more than 2" (51 mm) Twist the repaired wires in the same direction and with the same general twist rate as the original wiring. Reapply the shielding on shielded circuits. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6595 Stagger the repairs to minimize harness diameter and maintain harness length (Figure 2). Any leads that are not going to be used need to be sealed with dual wall heat shrink and stowed (Figure 2). Silicone must not be used. Excess wire from the harness can be folded back on itself to maintain the harness length. Reapply any convolute and tape that was removed to make the repair. For 16 AGW and Smaller Diameter Wire Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6596 1. Strip 1-1/2" (37.2 mm) of insulation from Wire # 1 and 3/4" (19.5 mm) of insulation from Wire # 2, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands (Figure 3). Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire is pulled at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during stripping, cut off the end and re-strip. 2. Install heat shrink tubing at least 1" (26 mm) away from one of the stripped ends being spliced. Twist wires together. Solder wires together (Figure 4). NOTE USE ROSIN CORE MILDLY ACTIVATED (RMS) SOLDER. DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER FOR WIRE REPAIR. 3. Bend Wire # 1 back in a straight line for sealing (Figure 4). Inspect solder joint bond. NOTE WAIT FOR SOLDER TO COOL BEFORE MOVING WIRES. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6597 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6598 4. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5). NOTE OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES. 5. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the solder point (Figure 5). For 14 AGW and Larger Diameter Wire (Excluding Restraints Wiring Repairs) 1. Strip 1/4" (6.35 mm) of insulation from pigtail wire end once the wire lengths are sized so repairs can be staggered. Take care not to nick or cut wire strands. Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire is pulled at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during stripping, cut off the end and re-strip. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6599 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6600 NOTE THE STRIP LENGTH WILL VARY DEPENDING ON THE BUTT SPLICE AND WIRE IN HARNESS. LONGER STRIP LENGTHS ARE REQUIRED WHEN THE WIRE NEEDS TO BE FOLDED TO MATE WITH THE BUTT SPLICE. REFER TO FIGURE 10 CHART FOR STRIP LENGTHS AND FOLDING TECHNIQUES. 2. Slide heat shrink tubing onto one (1) of the wire ends to be crimped, must be at least 1" (25.4 mm) away from stripped end (Figure 6). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6601 3. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber of the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper (or equivalent) by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice (Figure 7). Hold the crimping tool so the identified wire sizes are facing you. Squeeze tool handles together until the ratchet releases, then allow the jaws of the tool to open fully. 4. Center one (1) end of the butt splice on the appropriate crimping chamber. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam of the butt splice toward the indenter (Figure 8). 5. Hold the butt splice in place and squeeze the tool handles together until the ratchet engages sufficiently to hold the butt splice in position (typically one (1) or two (2) clicks). DO NOT deform the butt splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6602 6. Insert stripped wire into the buff splice, making sure the insulation on wire does not enter the butt splice (Figure 8). 7. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles together until ratchet releases. Allow tool handles to open, then remove crimped butt splice. 8. To crimp the other half of the splice, reposition the un-crimped wire barrel in the same crimping chamber, and repeat Steps 3-8. If splice cannot be turned for crimping the other half, turn the tool around. 9. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. It is acceptable for crimp to be slightly off center, but not off the end of the buff splice (Figure 9-a). b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. Wire is flush with or extends slightly beyond end of buff splice (Figure 9-b). c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices (Figure 9-c). 10. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5). NOTE OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES. 11. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the solder point (Figure 5). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 04-26-12 > Dec > 04 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1994 or B1998 Set Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1994 or B1998 Set TSB 04-26-12 12/31/04 SIDE AIR BAG DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1994 OR B1998 FORD: 2001-2004 Escape ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit the air bag warning lamp illuminating intermiffently with DTC B1994 (driver side, side mount air bag circuit open) or B1998 (passenger side, side mount air bag circuit open). This condition may be caused by a variation in the electrical continuity at connector C337 (passenger side) or C367 (driver side) at the body harness wire terminal crimp. ACTION Install a replacement body harness pigtail connector in the affected circuit. Refer to the instruction sheet included in the connector repair kit. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 042612A 2001-2004 Escape One 1.2 Hrs. Seat: Check For Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Install A Replacement Body Harness Pigtail (Includes Time To Depower And Repower The Supplemental Restraints System, Remove And Install Seat) 042612B 2001-2004 Escape Both 1.8 Hrs. Seats: Check For Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Install A Replacement Body Harness Pigtail (Includes Time To Depower And Repower The Supplemental Restraints System, Remove And Install Seats) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14405 X2 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips Technical Service Bulletin # 05-18-7 Date: 050922 Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips TSB 05-18-7 09/22/05 WIRING - SOLDERING AND CRIMPING REPAIRS - SERVICE TIPS FORD: 2000-2006 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2006 Five Hundred, Ford GT, Freestyle 2006 Fusion 2000-2003 Explorer Sport, Windstar 2000-2005 Excursion 2000-2006 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2001-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004-2006 Freestar 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid 2000-2006 F-650, F-750 2006 Low Cab Forward LINCOLN: 2000-2006 LS, Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2000-2006 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006 Mark LT MERCURY: 2000-2002 Cougar 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2006 Grand Marquis 2005-2006 Montego 2006 Milan 2000-2006 Mountaineer 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 03-11-6 to update the service procedure, vehicle lines and model years. ISSUE Wire harness repairs are supported through the availability of individual components such as: ^ Wire terminals with machine crimped pigtails ^ Hard shell connectors ^ Dual wall heat shrink tubing ^ Complete, loaded, wiring pigtail kits Some of the available tools and service parts that are helpful when performing wiring harness repairs are: ^ Motorcraft Wiring Pigtail Catalog (see website for more information) ^ Rotunda Wire Splice Tool kit 164-R5903 ^ General Wire Terminal Repair Kit (order through Ford Component Sales) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6612 Information on the pigtail and terminal repair kits can also be accessed by technicians via the P15 web site. To access on PTS: ^ Select the year/model of the vehicle on the P15 home page ^ Select the wiring tab ^ Select the link to the pigtail or terminal repair kit at the top right of screen. Additional service information contained in this TSB detailing wire folding, soldering, and crimping techniques may be helpful. ACTION REPAIR VS REPLACEMENT The approved procedure is to repair wiring harnesses with pigtail kits, wire terminals, or hard shell connectors when available. The only exceptions to this procedure are when: ^ The repair cost exceeds the cost to replace the wiring harness ^ There are no component parts released to service the wiring harness RESTRAINTS RELATED WIRING REPAIRS If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in a stand-alone harness, do not repair them; replace the restraints harness unless directed to repair the circuit by a TSB or other Ford Motor Company publication. If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in the main vehicle wiring harnesses (14401, 14A005, etc.), they should be repaired using the solder and heat-shrink repair procedure specified in this TSB. The General Wire Terminal Repair Kit contains gold plated terminated pigtails (with white insulation) and dual wall heat shrink tubing to perform these repairs. Loaded wiring pigtail kits with gold plated terminals are also available in the parts catalog. Disclaimer Service Tips Refer to applicable model year wiring diagrams for circuit information. Twisted Wire Circuits For "Twisted Wire" circuit repair (Figure 1), the twisting must not be disrupted for more than 2" (51 mm) Twist the repaired wires in the same direction and with the same general twist rate as the original wiring. Reapply the shielding on shielded circuits. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6613 Stagger the repairs to minimize harness diameter and maintain harness length (Figure 2). Any leads that are not going to be used need to be sealed with dual wall heat shrink and stowed (Figure 2). Silicone must not be used. Excess wire from the harness can be folded back on itself to maintain the harness length. Reapply any convolute and tape that was removed to make the repair. For 16 AGW and Smaller Diameter Wire Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6614 1. Strip 1-1/2" (37.2 mm) of insulation from Wire # 1 and 3/4" (19.5 mm) of insulation from Wire # 2, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands (Figure 3). Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire is pulled at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during stripping, cut off the end and re-strip. 2. Install heat shrink tubing at least 1" (26 mm) away from one of the stripped ends being spliced. Twist wires together. Solder wires together (Figure 4). NOTE USE ROSIN CORE MILDLY ACTIVATED (RMS) SOLDER. DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER FOR WIRE REPAIR. 3. Bend Wire # 1 back in a straight line for sealing (Figure 4). Inspect solder joint bond. NOTE WAIT FOR SOLDER TO COOL BEFORE MOVING WIRES. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6615 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6616 4. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5). NOTE OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES. 5. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the solder point (Figure 5). For 14 AGW and Larger Diameter Wire (Excluding Restraints Wiring Repairs) 1. Strip 1/4" (6.35 mm) of insulation from pigtail wire end once the wire lengths are sized so repairs can be staggered. Take care not to nick or cut wire strands. Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire is pulled at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during stripping, cut off the end and re-strip. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6617 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6618 NOTE THE STRIP LENGTH WILL VARY DEPENDING ON THE BUTT SPLICE AND WIRE IN HARNESS. LONGER STRIP LENGTHS ARE REQUIRED WHEN THE WIRE NEEDS TO BE FOLDED TO MATE WITH THE BUTT SPLICE. REFER TO FIGURE 10 CHART FOR STRIP LENGTHS AND FOLDING TECHNIQUES. 2. Slide heat shrink tubing onto one (1) of the wire ends to be crimped, must be at least 1" (25.4 mm) away from stripped end (Figure 6). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6619 3. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber of the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper (or equivalent) by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice (Figure 7). Hold the crimping tool so the identified wire sizes are facing you. Squeeze tool handles together until the ratchet releases, then allow the jaws of the tool to open fully. 4. Center one (1) end of the butt splice on the appropriate crimping chamber. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam of the butt splice toward the indenter (Figure 8). 5. Hold the butt splice in place and squeeze the tool handles together until the ratchet engages sufficiently to hold the butt splice in position (typically one (1) or two (2) clicks). DO NOT deform the butt splice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 6620 6. Insert stripped wire into the buff splice, making sure the insulation on wire does not enter the butt splice (Figure 8). 7. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles together until ratchet releases. Allow tool handles to open, then remove crimped butt splice. 8. To crimp the other half of the splice, reposition the un-crimped wire barrel in the same crimping chamber, and repeat Steps 3-8. If splice cannot be turned for crimping the other half, turn the tool around. 9. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. It is acceptable for crimp to be slightly off center, but not off the end of the buff splice (Figure 9-a). b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. Wire is flush with or extends slightly beyond end of buff splice (Figure 9-b). c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices (Figure 9-c). 10. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5). NOTE OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES. 11. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the solder point (Figure 5). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics Alignment: By Symptom Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics TSB 04-21-4 11/01/04 STEERING DRIFT/PULL - IMPROVED DIAGNOSTIC AND REPAIR PROCEDURE - SERVICE TIP FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid MERCURY: 2005 Mariner ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull to either the right or left. This condition may occur even if the alignment settings are within specifications. ACTION The following procedure is designed to supplement the Workshop Manual. It contains a more detailed description of the camber/caster adjustment, updated diagnostics to help determine cause and an updated camber adjustment procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 6630 1. Refer to the Drift/Pull diagnostic flow chart (Figure 1). 2. Use procedures in TSB when adjusting alignment if directed by the diagnostic flow chart. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 6631 3. Complete worksheet as needed (Figure 5). GENERAL FRONT SUSPENSION UPPER STRUT MOUNT ADJUSTMENT INFORMATION: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 6632 Adjustment of camber and caster can be made by rotating the upper strut mount into one (1) of four (4) positions. The orientation of the strut rod relative to the center of the hole for the mount determines the alignment change. The strut rod is offset 180 degrees from the paint mark on the strut bushing. Moving the strut rod inboard or outboard changes camber and moving the strut rod forward or rearward changes caster. Regardless of the start setting, a 90 degree rotation will only change one of the settings (caster or camber), and a 180 degree rotation will change both settings (caster and camber). ADDITIONAL FRONT CAMBER ADJUSTMENT: The clearance between the bolts and the holes in the knuckle to strut joint allows front camber adjustment beyond what the strut mount orientation provides. This additional adjustment can be used on either of the front wheels to increase or decrease a camber split. Rotating the upper strut mount is the primary and preferred method to adjust front camber. If rotating the upper strut mount does not provide enough camber adjustment, perform the following steps to achieve an approximate camber change of up to +/- 0.24 degrees per side: 1. Lift the vehicle up off its tires. 2. Replace the old strut to knuckle fasteners (bolts and nuts) with new fasteners, but do not torque the new fasteners. 3. Move the top of the tire inboard or outboard to adjust camber (Figure 4). a. If more negative camber is desired, push the top of the tire inboard. b. If less negative camber is desired, pull the top of the tire outboard. 4. With the tire at the desired position, torque the new fasteners to 85 lb-ft (115 N.m). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 6633 5. Lower the vehicle back down. 6. Place vehicle on alignment rack and measure the alignment to confirm the desired camber change was achieved. NOTE DO NOT ADJUST THE ALIGNMENT SETTINGS (INDIVIDUAL CAMBER) BEYOND THE RELEASED SPECIFICATIONS. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE FRONT W6 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics TSB 04-21-4 11/01/04 STEERING DRIFT/PULL - IMPROVED DIAGNOSTIC AND REPAIR PROCEDURE - SERVICE TIP FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid MERCURY: 2005 Mariner ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull to either the right or left. This condition may occur even if the alignment settings are within specifications. ACTION The following procedure is designed to supplement the Workshop Manual. It contains a more detailed description of the camber/caster adjustment, updated diagnostics to help determine cause and an updated camber adjustment procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 6639 1. Refer to the Drift/Pull diagnostic flow chart (Figure 1). 2. Use procedures in TSB when adjusting alignment if directed by the diagnostic flow chart. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 6640 3. Complete worksheet as needed (Figure 5). GENERAL FRONT SUSPENSION UPPER STRUT MOUNT ADJUSTMENT INFORMATION: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 6641 Adjustment of camber and caster can be made by rotating the upper strut mount into one (1) of four (4) positions. The orientation of the strut rod relative to the center of the hole for the mount determines the alignment change. The strut rod is offset 180 degrees from the paint mark on the strut bushing. Moving the strut rod inboard or outboard changes camber and moving the strut rod forward or rearward changes caster. Regardless of the start setting, a 90 degree rotation will only change one of the settings (caster or camber), and a 180 degree rotation will change both settings (caster and camber). ADDITIONAL FRONT CAMBER ADJUSTMENT: The clearance between the bolts and the holes in the knuckle to strut joint allows front camber adjustment beyond what the strut mount orientation provides. This additional adjustment can be used on either of the front wheels to increase or decrease a camber split. Rotating the upper strut mount is the primary and preferred method to adjust front camber. If rotating the upper strut mount does not provide enough camber adjustment, perform the following steps to achieve an approximate camber change of up to +/- 0.24 degrees per side: 1. Lift the vehicle up off its tires. 2. Replace the old strut to knuckle fasteners (bolts and nuts) with new fasteners, but do not torque the new fasteners. 3. Move the top of the tire inboard or outboard to adjust camber (Figure 4). a. If more negative camber is desired, push the top of the tire inboard. b. If less negative camber is desired, pull the top of the tire outboard. 4. With the tire at the desired position, torque the new fasteners to 85 lb-ft (115 N.m). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 6642 5. Lower the vehicle back down. 6. Place vehicle on alignment rack and measure the alignment to confirm the desired camber change was achieved. NOTE DO NOT ADJUST THE ALIGNMENT SETTINGS (INDIVIDUAL CAMBER) BEYOND THE RELEASED SPECIFICATIONS. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE FRONT W6 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6643 Alignment: Specifications Front Alignment Specifications Camber -0.84 deg Caster 1.93 deg Toe 3 +/- 3 mm Steering Axis Inclination 11.4 deg Steering Axis Offset 4.16 mm (tire size P215/70R16) -1.6 mm (-0.06 inch) (tire size P225/70R15)1.41 mm (0.05 inch) (tire size P235/70R16) Ride height 476.6 +/- 20 mm Rear Alignment Specifications Camber 0.04 deg Toe 2.4 +/- 2.8 mm Ride height 491 +/- 20 mm Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6644 Alignment: Description and Operation Camber Camber is the inward or outward tilting of the wheels at the top. When the wheel tilts out at the top, then the camber is positive (+). When the wheel tilts in at the top, then the camber is negative (-). Caster Caster is the tilting of the steering axis either forward or backward from vertical. A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Front caster adjustment is not a separate procedure on this vehicle. Front caster should fall within specification when the front camber is adjusted. Toe Toe is a measurement of how much the front of the wheels are turned in or out from the straight-ahead position. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6645 When the wheels are turned in toward the front of the vehicle, toe is positive (+) (toe in). When the wheels are turned out toward the front of the vehicle, toe is negative (-) (toe out). Toe is measured in degrees, from side to side, and totaled. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment Alignment: Service and Repair Camber and Caster Adjustment 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the front shock absorber upper mounting bracket nuts. 3. Push the front shock absorber upper mounting bracket downward and turn it to the desired position to set camber and caster. Both camber and caster for front suspension are adjustable within a maximum of 30 degree angle. 4. Tighten the front shock absorber upper mounting bracket nuts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 6648 Alignment: Service and Repair Lean Correction NOTE: When installing a new coil spring, install a new one with the same part number and the same spring code. Refer to the Vehicle Certification (VC) Label on the driver side door. 1. Measure the distance from the wheelhouse opening to the center of the wheel and tire at the same point on both sides of the vehicle. 2. If the difference exceeds 10 mm (0.4 inch), a lean correction is necessary. Compare the original with a new coil spring. Note the difference. 3. Remove the higher side coil spring. 1 If the original coil spring exceeds the height of the new one by 10 mm (0.4 inch), install the new coil spring in the vehicle. 2 If the original coil spring is shorter than the new one by 10 mm (0.4 inch), remove the low side coil spring from the vehicle. 4. Compare all three coil springs and select the two most evenly matched for installation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 6649 Alignment: Service and Repair Toe Adjustment Front 1. Start the engine and center the steering wheel. 2. Turn the engine off, and lock the steering wheel in position. 3. Check the toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 4. NOTE: Do not allow the steering gear bellows to twist when the front wheel spindle tie rod is rotated. Remove the clamps. 5. Loosen the nuts. ^ Clean and lubricate the nut(s) and front wheel spindle tie rod threads. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 6650 6. Rotate the front wheel spindle tie rods. 7. Tighten the nuts. 8. Install the clamp(s). 9. Recheck the toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. Rear 1. NOTE: Jounce the vehicle to make sure that the suspension is in its normal resting position. Check the toe setting using suitable wheel alignment equipment. 2. Loosen the LH and RH rear suspension trailing arm and bushing bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 6651 3. Turn the LH and RH adjusting cams simultaneously until the toe is within specification. 4. Tighten the LH and RH rear suspension trailing arm and bushing bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Find and Use These Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams ^ System Diagrams ^ Grounds Diagrams Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6658 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow. Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the diagram. Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be found. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6659 Fuse And Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. Fuse Circuits Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery. Ground Distribution Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text "partial". Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6660 Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of (1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces). The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number. Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the way out by a spring. Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control. A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the way in. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. circuit Numbering Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification Circuit Numbering: Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting electrical circuits. Function: The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter "S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit. System-Connection (including branch): Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate wires in one connection with the same function. Wire Identification (wire colors): The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6661 Wire Identification Example Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know the following information about the wire: Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit System: AC = Headlamp leveling Connection: 3 = Switch connection A = Branch Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe). Circuit Identification Charts Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6662 Circuit Identification Chart System Codes Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6663 Sample Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6664 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6665 Sample Diagram Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6666 Circuit Identification Chart SYSTEM CODES CHART Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6667 SAMPLE DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6668 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6669 Sample Diagram Electrical Symbols ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6670 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6671 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6672 Types of Diagrams Shown Types of Diagrams Shown Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them. Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations. Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system information suitable for diagnostic operations. Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a relationship to them, are also included. All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding of the system component interactions. Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type. Wire Color Code Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6673 Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6674 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6675 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6676 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6677 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The Power Steering Pressure (PSP) switch (Figure 38) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust transmission Electronic Pressure Control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Page 6680 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Sensor POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The Power Steering Pressure (PSP) sensor (Figure 39) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM will change as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust transmission Electronic Pressure Control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair Power Steering Bleeding: Service and Repair Special Tools Special Tools CAUTION: If the air is not purged from the power steering system correctly, premature power steering pump failure can result. This condition can occur on pre-delivery vehicles with evidence of aerated fluid or on vehicles that have had steering component repairs. 1. NOTE: A whine heard from the power steering pump may be caused by air in the system. The power steering purge procedure must be performed prior to any component repair for which power steering noise complaints are accompanied by evidence of aerated fluid. Remove the power steering pump reservoir cap. Check the fluid. ^ Use Motorcraft MERCON Multi-Purpose ATE XT-2-QDX or equivalent MERCON fluid. 2. Tightly insert the stopper of the vacuum pump into the reservoir. 3. Start the vehicle. 4. Apply maximum vacuum and maintain it for a minimum of three minutes with the engine speed at idle. 5. Release the vacuum and remove the vacuum pump. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 6686 6. CAUTION: Do not overfill the reservoir. Fill the reservoir. ^ Use Motorcraft MERCON Multi-Purpose ATE XT-2-QDX or MERCON equivalent. 7. Reinstall the vacuum pump. Apply and maintain maximum vacuum. 8. CAUTION: Do not hold the steering wheel against the stops for more than three to five seconds at a time. Damage to the power steering pump can occur. Cycle the steering wheel fully to the left and right every 30 seconds for approximately five minutes. 9. Stop the engine, release the vacuum, and remove the vacuum pump. 10. Install the reservoir cap. 11. Check for fluid leaks at all of the connections. If the power steering fluid shows signs of air, repeat this procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering - Mercon V(R) Fluid Usage Power Steering Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Mercon V(R) Fluid Usage TSB 07-1-7 01/22/07 MERCON(R) ATF REPLACED BY MERCON(R) V AS A SERVICE FLUID FOR SOME POWER STEERING SYSTEMS FORD: 1996-1997 Thunderbird 1996-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 1998-2003 Escort 2000-2007 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2006 Ford GT 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1996-1997 Aerostar 1996-2007 E-Series, Explorer, Ranger 1997-2004 F-53 Motorhome Chassis 1997-2007 Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty 1998-2003 Windstar 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2007 Escape 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1996-1997 Cargo 1996-1998 L-Series 1996-1999 F- B-Series 2000-2007 F-650, F-750 2006-2007 Low Cab Forward LINCOLN: 1996-1998 Mark VIII 1996-1999 Continental 1996-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT 2007 MKX MERCURY: 1996-1997 Cougar 1996-2005 Sable 1996-2007 Grand Marquis 1999-2002 Cougar 2003-2004 Marauder 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2007 Mountaineer 1998-2002 Villager 2004-2007 Monterey 2005-2007 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid is being replaced by MERCON(R) V as a service fluid for power steering systems originally requiring MERCON(R). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering - Mercon V(R) Fluid Usage > Page 6691 ACTION Beginning immediately all power steering applications requiring MERCON(R) can now be serviced using MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V. After July 1, 2007, MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid will no longer be manufactured, therefore, availability of this fluid will continue until remaining inventory has been depleted. SERVICE PROCEDURE Service power steering Systems requiring MERCON(R) with MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V. CAUTION APPLICATIONS RECOMMENDING TYPE F AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION AND POWER STEERING FLUID MUST CONTINUE TO USE THAT PARTICULAR FLUID. USE OF ANY OTHER FLUID MAY CAUSE REDUCED FUNCTIONALITY OR DAMAGE Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Capacity Specifications Power Steering Fluid Capacity 2.0 qt (US) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 6694 Power Steering Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications / / Power Steering Fluid Type MERCON(R) ATF Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Cooler > Component Information > Specifications Power Steering Fluid Cooler: Specifications Power Steering Fluid Cooler Mounting Bolts 89 in.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Cooler > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6698 Power Steering Fluid Cooler: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the hose from the power steering fluid reservoir. 2. Disconnect the power steering cooler hose. 3. Remove the front bumper cover. 4. Remove the nuts and the power steering fluid cooler. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Fill, bleed and leak check the power steering system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Reservoir > Component Information > Specifications Power Steering Fluid Reservoir: Specifications Power Steering Pump fluid Reservoir Mounting Bolts 89 in.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Reservoir > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6702 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: Drain the power steering fluid into a suitable drain pain. Disconnect the power steering fluid return hose. 2. Disconnect the power steering low pressure hose. 3. Remove the bolts and the power steering pump reservoir. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Fill power steering system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 02-5-2 > Mar > 02 > Power Steering - Leaks in Extreme Cold Power Steering Line/Hose: Customer Interest Power Steering - Leaks in Extreme Cold Article No. 02-5-2 03/01/02 STEERING - POWER STEERING FLUID LEAK DURING EXTREME COLD AMBIENT TEMPERATURES -20 TO -28C (-5 TO -20F) - VEHICLES PRODUCED 2/12/2002 ONLY FORD: 2001-2002 ESCAPE ISSUE Some vehicles built before 2/12/2002 may exhibit a power steering fluid leak at the Return Hose and/or Cooler Hose at the Intermediate Tube Assembly during extreme cold ambient temperatures -20 to -28°C (-5 to -20 °F). This may be caused by hose blow out due to an increase in fluid viscosity during extreme cold temperatures. ACTION Replace the Intermediate Tube with a steel intermediate tube and replace spring type clamps on Return Hose and Cooler Hose with worm type clamps to increase hose retention. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Perform procedure in Workshop Manual Section 211-02 to remove Return Hose and Cooler Hose from Intermediate Tube. 2. Replace Intermediate Tube with new part 2L8Z-3A713-AA. 3. Reinstall Cooler and Return Hoses using worm clamps 376240-S100. 4. Bleed all of the air from steering system using bleed procedure in Section 211-00 of the appropriate year Workshop Manual. Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 020502A Replace Metal Section Of 1.0 Hr. Power Steering Return Hose (Includes Time To Bleed Air From System) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A713 42 OASIS CODES: 303000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Steering Line/Hose: > 02-5-2 > Mar > 02 > Power Steering - Leaks in Extreme Cold Power Steering Line/Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Power Steering - Leaks in Extreme Cold Article No. 02-5-2 03/01/02 STEERING - POWER STEERING FLUID LEAK DURING EXTREME COLD AMBIENT TEMPERATURES -20 TO -28C (-5 TO -20F) - VEHICLES PRODUCED 2/12/2002 ONLY FORD: 2001-2002 ESCAPE ISSUE Some vehicles built before 2/12/2002 may exhibit a power steering fluid leak at the Return Hose and/or Cooler Hose at the Intermediate Tube Assembly during extreme cold ambient temperatures -20 to -28°C (-5 to -20 °F). This may be caused by hose blow out due to an increase in fluid viscosity during extreme cold temperatures. ACTION Replace the Intermediate Tube with a steel intermediate tube and replace spring type clamps on Return Hose and Cooler Hose with worm type clamps to increase hose retention. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Perform procedure in Workshop Manual Section 211-02 to remove Return Hose and Cooler Hose from Intermediate Tube. 2. Replace Intermediate Tube with new part 2L8Z-3A713-AA. 3. Reinstall Cooler and Return Hoses using worm clamps 376240-S100. 4. Bleed all of the air from steering system using bleed procedure in Section 211-00 of the appropriate year Workshop Manual. Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 020502A Replace Metal Section Of 1.0 Hr. Power Steering Return Hose (Includes Time To Bleed Air From System) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3A713 42 OASIS CODES: 303000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6716 Power Steering Line/Hose: Specifications Power Steering Pressure Line-To-Pump Fitting 48 ft.lb Power Steering Pressure Line Bracket-To-Engine Bolt 18 ft.lb Power Steering Pressure And Return Line Retainer Plate-To-Gear Bolt 18 ft.lb Power Steering Pressure Line Bracket-To-Gear Bolt 89 in.lb Power Steering Return Line Bracket-To-Gear Bolt 89 in.lb Power Steering Pressure Line Bracket-To-Lifting Eye Bolt 89 in.lb Power Steering Pressure Hose To Steering Gear Fitting 21 - 25 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hose Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Hose Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: Drain the excess power steering fluid into a suitable drain pan. NOTE: Make sure not to drop the O-ring seals. Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines. 1 Remove the bolt. 2 Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines. 2. Remove the power steering return line bracket-to-gear bolt. 3. Release the clamp and remove the power steering return line. 4. NOTE: Make sure the O-ring seals are on the power steering pressure and return lines. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Fill, bleed and leak check the power steering system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hose > Page 6719 Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Pump to Gear Pressure Line Special Tools Removal 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. NOTE: Drain the excess power steering fluid into a suitable drain pan. Disconnect the power steering pressure line from the power steering pump. 3. Lower the vehicle. 4. NOTE: Do not drop the O-ring seals. Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines. 1 Remove the bolt. 2 Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hose > Page 6720 5. Remove the power steering pressure line bracket bolt to the steering gear. 6. Remove the power steering pressure line bracket bolt to the engine lifting hook. 7. Remove the power steering pressure line bracket to engine bolt and the power steering pressure line. Installation 1. Using the special tool, install a new seal on the power steering pressure line fitting. ^ Remove and discard the original seal. ^ Stretch the seal over the special tool and slide it onto the tube nut. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hose > Page 6721 2. Install the power steering pressure line bucket to engine bolt. 3. Install the power steering pressure line bracket bolt to the engine lifting hook. 4. Install the power steering pressure line bracket bolt to the steering gear. 5. NOTE: Make sure the O-ring seals are on the power steering pressure and return lines. Connect the power steering pressure and return lines to the steering gear and install the bolt. 6. Raise the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hose > Page 6722 7. Connect the power steering pressure line to the power steering pump. 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Fill, bleed and leak check the power steering system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications Power Steering Pump: Mechanical Specifications Power Steering Pump Mounting Bolts 18 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 6727 Power Steering Pump: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications Steering Pump Free flow rate 1.79 - 2.19 gal/min @ 165 degrees - 175 degrees F And Engine Set At Idle Back pressure 60 psi @ 165 degrees - 175 degrees F And Engine Set At Idle (With Gate Valve Open) Minimum flow rate 1 15 g/min @ 165 degrees - 175 degrees F and 740 psi Relief pressure 1300 - 1480 psi Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Power Steering Pump Removal 1. Remove the accessory drive belt. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. NOTE: Drain the power steering fluid into a suitable drain pan. Disconnect the power steering pressure line. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump > Page 6730 4. Remove the lower power steering pump bolts. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Remove the power steering pressure line bracket bolt. 7. Disconnect the power steering low pressure hose. 8. Remove the bolts and the power steering pump. 9. Using the special tool, remove the power steering pump pulley. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump > Page 6731 1. CAUTION: Install a new power steering pump pulley after the second removal and installation. Inspect the pulley for paint marks in the web area near the hub. If there are two paint marks, install a new pulley. If there is no paint or one paint mark, use a paint pencil to mark the web area of the pulley near the hub. Using the special tool, install the power steering pump pulley. 2. Using the special tool, install a new seal on the power steering pressure hose fitting. ^ Remove and discard the original seal. ^ Stretch the seal over the seal replacer and slide it onto the tube nut. 3. Position the power steering pump and install the upper bolts. 4. Connect the power steering low pressure hose. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump > Page 6732 5. Position the power steering pressure line bracket and install the bolt. 6. Raise the vehicle. 7. Install the lower power steering pump bolts. 8. Connect the power steering pressure line. 9. Connect the electrical connector. 10. Install the drive belt. 11. Fill, bleed and leak check the power steering system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump > Page 6733 Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Power Steering Pump Pulley Removal and Installation 1. Loosen the power steering pump pulley bolt. 2. Remove the drive belt. 3. Remove the bolt and the power steering pump pulley. 4. To install. reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Find and Use These Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams ^ System Diagrams ^ Grounds Diagrams Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6739 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow. Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the diagram. Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be found. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6740 Fuse And Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. Fuse Circuits Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery. Ground Distribution Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text "partial". Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6741 Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of (1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces). The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number. Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the way out by a spring. Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control. A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the way in. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. circuit Numbering Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification Circuit Numbering: Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting electrical circuits. Function: The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter "S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit. System-Connection (including branch): Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate wires in one connection with the same function. Wire Identification (wire colors): The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6742 Wire Identification Example Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know the following information about the wire: Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit System: AC = Headlamp leveling Connection: 3 = Switch connection A = Branch Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe). Circuit Identification Charts Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6743 Circuit Identification Chart System Codes Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6744 Sample Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6745 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6746 Sample Diagram Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6747 Circuit Identification Chart SYSTEM CODES CHART Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6748 SAMPLE DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6749 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6750 Sample Diagram Electrical Symbols ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6751 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6752 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6753 Types of Diagrams Shown Types of Diagrams Shown Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them. Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations. Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system information suitable for diagnostic operations. Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a relationship to them, are also included. All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding of the system component interactions. Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type. Wire Color Code Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6754 Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6755 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6756 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6757 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6758 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The Power Steering Pressure (PSP) switch (Figure 38) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust transmission Electronic Pressure Control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Page 6761 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Sensor POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The Power Steering Pressure (PSP) sensor (Figure 39) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM will change as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust transmission Electronic Pressure Control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Customer Safety Information WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. ^ THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information > Page 6767 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Technician Safety Information WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. ^ THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming Seats Removed There are two deactivation procedures. ^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing side air bag concerns, and also when repairing any in-seat component in vehicles equipped with side air bags. ^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal. This procedure will be used when diagnosing a concern not related to the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag system is being serviced, the airbag system must be deactivated using the appropriate deactivation procedure. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system, the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring behind the access panel on the bottom of the steering wheel. 4. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 5. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the passenger air bag. 7. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, remove the front seats. 9. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag floor electrical connector. 10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side floor electrical connector. 12. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable. Seats Not Removed There are two deactivation procedures. ^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing side air bag concerns, and also when repairing any in-seat component in vehicles equipped with side air bags. ^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal. This procedure will be used when diagnosing a concern not related to the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). 1. Move and tilt the front seats to their highest and most forward position. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6770 SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag system is being serviced, the airbag system must be deactivated using the appropriate deactivation procedure. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system, the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. 3. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 4. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring behind the access panel in the bottom of the steering wheel. 5. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring. 6. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector beneath the front seat. 10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag electrical connector beneath the passenger seat. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 12. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the driver seat. 13. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the front seat. 14. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle electrical connector. 15. Reconnect the battery ground cable. Depowering and Repowering Procedure Depowering Procedure WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. WARNING: Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which can result in personal injury. WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be depowered. NOTE: The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the central junction box (CJB), located below the LH side of the instrument panel, remove the cover and the restraints control module (RCM) fuse F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) from the CJB. 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6771 proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Repowering Procedure 1. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected. 2. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 3. Install RCM fuses F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) to the CJB and close the cover. 4. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front of any air bag module when the battery ground cable is connected. Connect the battery ground cable. 5. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool. Seats Removed 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 4. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6772 5. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 7. Install the front seats. 8. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. ^ Reconnect the electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 10. Reconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 11. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 12. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure Seats Not Removed 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. ^ Reconnect the electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 4. If equipped with side air bags, remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 5. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 7. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6773 8. If equipped with side air bags, connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. 9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 10. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 11. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6774 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag System Reconnect Checklist Air Bag Reconnect Checklist The checklist below should be completed following diagnosis or repair of any air bag system concern: 1. All in-seat electrical connectors connected? 2. All air bag modules connected? 3. Restraints Control Module (RCM) connected? 4. All safety belt pretensioners connectors connected? 5. All sensors (side impact) connected? 6. Battery connected? Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6775 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position and visually monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either: ^ fail to light. ^ remain lit continuously. ^ flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the RUN position. This is the time required for the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component Information > Description and Operation Steering Column Lock: Description and Operation The steering column lock is integral to the lock cylinder. When the ignition key is removed or turned to the LOCK position, a small key inside the steering column lock engages with the steering column tube, locking it into position. When the ignition key is turned to the OFF, START, or ON position, the steering column lock key withdraws, unlocking the steering column tube and allowing it to rotate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Specifications Steering Gear: Specifications Type Rack And Pinion Maximum Steering Gear Lateral Movement 0.05 in Tie Rod Articulation 0.4 - 2.5 ft.lb Steering Gear Mounting Bolts 35 - 46 ft.lb Steering Gear Mounting Bolts 93 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6782 Steering Gear: Testing and Inspection Steering Gear Grunt/Shudder Test 1. Start and run the vehicle to operating temperature. 2. Set engine idle speed to 1,200 rpm. 3. Rotate the steering wheel to the RH stop, then turn the steering wheel 90 degrees back from that position. Turn the steering wheel slowly in a 15 to 30 degree arc. CAUTION: Do not hold the steering wheel against the stops for more than three to five seconds at a time. Damage to the power steering pump will occur. 4. Turn the steering wheel another 90 degrees. Turn the steering wheel slowly in a 15 to 30 degree arc. 5. Repeat the test with power steering fluid at different temperatures. 6. If a light grunt is heard or a low (50-200 Hz) shudder is present, this is a normal steering system condition. 7. If a loud grunt is heard or a strong shudder is felt, fill and purge the power steering system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Steering Gear: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Special Tools Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. NOTE: 2.0L Zetec shown, 3.0L (4V) similar. Remove the rear transaxle insulator. 1 Remove the bolts and nuts. 2 Remove the rear transaxle insulator. Vehicles equipped with automatic transmission 2. Remove the bolts and the rear transaxle insulator bracket. All vehicles 3. Remove the front wheels. Vehicles equipped with manual transmission Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6785 4. Remove the bolts and the rear transaxle insulator bracket. All vehicles 5. NOTE: LH side shown, RH similar. Remove the tie rod end nut. 1 Remove the cotter pin. 2 Remove the nut. 6. NOTE: LH side shown, RH similar. Using the special tool, separate the tie rod end from the knuckle. 7. NOTE: Record the number of turns required to remove the tie rod end. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6786 Remove the tie rod ends and the tie rod end jam nuts. 8. Remove the steering gear coupling pinch bolt. 1 Slide the boot up. 2 Remove the steering gear coupling pinch bolt. 9. NOTE: Drain the excess power steering fluid into a suitable drain pan. NOTE: Do not drop the O-ring seals. Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines. 1 Remove the bolt. 2 Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines. 10. Remove the power steering pressure and return line bracket bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6787 11. Remove the two steering gear mounting bolts. 12. NOTE: With the mounting bolts removed, slide the gear forward to separate the steering coupling from the steering gear shaft. Remove the steering gear. Installation All vehicles 1. NOTE: With the mounting bolts removed, slide the gear rearward to connect the steering coupling to the steering gear shaft. Position the steering gear in the vehicle. 2. Install the two steering gear mounting bolts. 3. Install the power steering pressure and return line bracket bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6788 4. NOTE: Make sure the O-ring seals are on the power steering pressure and return lines. Connect the power steering pressure and return lines to the steering gear and install the bolt. 5. Install the steering gear coupling pinch bolt and slide the boot down. 6. Thread the tie rod end jam nuts onto the front wheel spindle tie rods. 7. NOTE: Use the numbers recorded from removal to install the tie rod ends. Thread the tie rod ends onto the front wheel spindle tie rods. 8. Tighten the tie rod end jam nuts. 9. NOTE: LH side shown, RH similar. Connect the tie rod end to the knuckle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6789 1 Install the nut. 2 Install the cotter pin. Vehicles equipped with manual transmission 10. Install the rear transaxle insulator bracket and the bolts. All vehicles 11. Install the front wheels. Vehicles equipped with automatic transmission 12. Install the rear transaxle insulator bracket and the bolts. All vehicles 13. NOTE: 2.0L Zetec shown, 3.0L (4V) similar. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6790 Install the rear transaxle insulator. 14. Fill, bleed and leak check the power steering system. 15. Align the front wheels to specifications. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6791 Steering Gear: Service and Repair Steering Gear Boot Removal and Installation 1. Position the steering gear boot cover aside. 2. NOTE: The nut cannot be reused. Install a new nut. Disconnect the steering column shaft from the flexible coupling. 1 Remove and discard the nut. 2 Disconnect the steering column shaft from the flexible coupling. 3. Remove the steering gear boot. 1 Remove the nuts. 2 Remove the steering gear boot. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair Steering Shaft: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. Position the boot aside. 2. Remove and discard the pinch bolt/nut and disconnect the steering column shaft from the flexible coupling. 3. Remove the steering column shaft pin and the steering column shaft. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair Steering Shaft Coupler: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. Position the boot aside. 2. Loosen the pinch bolt/nut and disconnect the steering column shaft from the flexible coupling. 3. Remove the steering gear coupling. 1 Position aside the rubber boot. 2 Remove the pinch bolt. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > NHTSA00V223001 > Aug > 00 > Recall 00V223001: Steering Wheel Nut Cracked/Fractured Steering Wheel: Recalls Recall 00V223001: Steering Wheel Nut Cracked/Fractured These vehicles may have mis-assembled or incorrectly manufactured nut that attaches the steering wheel assembly to the steering column. The nut could be upside down in the steering wheel assembly, which could overstress the steering column shaft when the nut is tightened. In addition, some of the nuts may have been cracked during manufacture resulting in the nut fracturing when it is tightened during vehicle assembly. Either of these conditions can lead to the steering wheel becoming loose or separating from the steering column, resulting in loss of steering control. Dealers will inspect and replace the steering wheel retention armature and, if necessary, the steering column to correct this condition. Owner notification began September 6, 2000. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon service date and do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673. Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 00S19 > Aug > 00 > Recall - Steering Wheel Retention Quality Issue Technical Service Bulletin # 00S19 Date: 000801 Recall - Steering Wheel Retention Quality Issue 00S19 SAFETY RECALL Advance Announcement of Safety Recall 00S19: ALL 2001 Model Year Escape Vehicles - Steering Wheel Retention Quality Issue ^ Advance Announcement Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is Loose Steering Wheel: Customer Interest Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is Loose TSB 07-4-3 03/05/07 LEATHER - WRAPPED STEERING WHEEL - LEATHER COMING LOOSE FORD: 2000-2005 Thunderbird 2000-2007 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1999-2003 Windstar 1999-2008 F-Super Duty 2000-2005 Excursion 2000-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, Ranger 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2008 Escape 2004-2007 F-150, Freestar 2005-2008 Escape Hybrid 2007 Edge 2004-2007 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 2000-2002 Continental 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2000-2007 Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 2000-2007 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT 2007 MKX MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 2000-2007 Mountaineer 2004-2007 Monterey 2005-2008 Mariner 2006-2008 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 04-24-3 to update the vehicle model years. ISSUE Some vehicles equipped with leather-wrapped steering wheels may exhibit the leather coming loose from the spoke area. ACTION Apply Motorcraft Instant Gel Adhesive to re-adhere the loose leather to the wheel spoke. Refer to the following Service Procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE IF RE-ADHERING LEATHER TO THE FRONT SIDE OF THE STEERING WHEEL ONLY, OMIT STEPS 1 AND 6. STEERING WHEEL/AIR BAG ASSEMBLY REMOVAL IS NECESSARY ONLY WHEN REPAIRING LOOSE LEATHER ON THE BACKSIDE OF THE STEERING WHEEL. CAUTION AVOID SKIN CONTACT WITH MOTORCRAFT INSTANT GEL ADHESIVE. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is Loose > Page 6815 1. Remove the steering wheel (ONLY NECESSARY TO REPAIR BACKSIDE OF STEERING WHEEL). Refer to Workshop Manual Sections 211-04 and 501-20B. 2. Fold loose leather out of the way. 3. Apply Motorcraft Instant Gel Adhesive evenly over the wheel spoke. 4. Fold the leather back into its original position. 5. Smooth the leather tuck in for neat appearance, and apply pressure until the leather is bonded to the wheel spoke (apply pressure for at least 30 seconds). NOTE THE ADHESIVE SHOULD BE COMPLETELY SET AFTER 5 MINUTES. DO NOT PULL ON THE REPAIR AREA. 6. Reinstall steering wheel. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT070403 Use SLIS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3600 33 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is Loose Steering Wheel: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is Loose TSB 07-4-3 03/05/07 LEATHER - WRAPPED STEERING WHEEL - LEATHER COMING LOOSE FORD: 2000-2005 Thunderbird 2000-2007 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1999-2003 Windstar 1999-2008 F-Super Duty 2000-2005 Excursion 2000-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, Ranger 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2008 Escape 2004-2007 F-150, Freestar 2005-2008 Escape Hybrid 2007 Edge 2004-2007 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 2000-2002 Continental 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2000-2007 Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 2000-2007 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT 2007 MKX MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 2000-2007 Mountaineer 2004-2007 Monterey 2005-2008 Mariner 2006-2008 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 04-24-3 to update the vehicle model years. ISSUE Some vehicles equipped with leather-wrapped steering wheels may exhibit the leather coming loose from the spoke area. ACTION Apply Motorcraft Instant Gel Adhesive to re-adhere the loose leather to the wheel spoke. Refer to the following Service Procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE IF RE-ADHERING LEATHER TO THE FRONT SIDE OF THE STEERING WHEEL ONLY, OMIT STEPS 1 AND 6. STEERING WHEEL/AIR BAG ASSEMBLY REMOVAL IS NECESSARY ONLY WHEN REPAIRING LOOSE LEATHER ON THE BACKSIDE OF THE STEERING WHEEL. CAUTION AVOID SKIN CONTACT WITH MOTORCRAFT INSTANT GEL ADHESIVE. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is Loose > Page 6821 1. Remove the steering wheel (ONLY NECESSARY TO REPAIR BACKSIDE OF STEERING WHEEL). Refer to Workshop Manual Sections 211-04 and 501-20B. 2. Fold loose leather out of the way. 3. Apply Motorcraft Instant Gel Adhesive evenly over the wheel spoke. 4. Fold the leather back into its original position. 5. Smooth the leather tuck in for neat appearance, and apply pressure until the leather is bonded to the wheel spoke (apply pressure for at least 30 seconds). NOTE THE ADHESIVE SHOULD BE COMPLETELY SET AFTER 5 MINUTES. DO NOT PULL ON THE REPAIR AREA. 6. Reinstall steering wheel. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT070403 Use SLIS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3600 33 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > NHTSA00V223001 > Aug > 00 > Recall 00V223001: Steering Wheel Nut Cracked/Fractured Steering Wheel: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 00V223001: Steering Wheel Nut Cracked/Fractured These vehicles may have mis-assembled or incorrectly manufactured nut that attaches the steering wheel assembly to the steering column. The nut could be upside down in the steering wheel assembly, which could overstress the steering column shaft when the nut is tightened. In addition, some of the nuts may have been cracked during manufacture resulting in the nut fracturing when it is tightened during vehicle assembly. Either of these conditions can lead to the steering wheel becoming loose or separating from the steering column, resulting in loss of steering control. Dealers will inspect and replace the steering wheel retention armature and, if necessary, the steering column to correct this condition. Owner notification began September 6, 2000. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon service date and do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673. Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 00S19 > Aug > 00 > Recall - Steering Wheel Retention Quality Issue Technical Service Bulletin # 00S19 Date: 000801 Recall - Steering Wheel Retention Quality Issue 00S19 SAFETY RECALL Advance Announcement of Safety Recall 00S19: ALL 2001 Model Year Escape Vehicles - Steering Wheel Retention Quality Issue ^ Advance Announcement Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is Loose Steering Wheel: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is Loose TSB 07-4-3 03/05/07 LEATHER - WRAPPED STEERING WHEEL - LEATHER COMING LOOSE FORD: 2000-2005 Thunderbird 2000-2007 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1999-2003 Windstar 1999-2008 F-Super Duty 2000-2005 Excursion 2000-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, Ranger 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2008 Escape 2004-2007 F-150, Freestar 2005-2008 Escape Hybrid 2007 Edge 2004-2007 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 2000-2002 Continental 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2000-2007 Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 2000-2007 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT 2007 MKX MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 2000-2007 Mountaineer 2004-2007 Monterey 2005-2008 Mariner 2006-2008 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 04-24-3 to update the vehicle model years. ISSUE Some vehicles equipped with leather-wrapped steering wheels may exhibit the leather coming loose from the spoke area. ACTION Apply Motorcraft Instant Gel Adhesive to re-adhere the loose leather to the wheel spoke. Refer to the following Service Procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE IF RE-ADHERING LEATHER TO THE FRONT SIDE OF THE STEERING WHEEL ONLY, OMIT STEPS 1 AND 6. STEERING WHEEL/AIR BAG ASSEMBLY REMOVAL IS NECESSARY ONLY WHEN REPAIRING LOOSE LEATHER ON THE BACKSIDE OF THE STEERING WHEEL. CAUTION AVOID SKIN CONTACT WITH MOTORCRAFT INSTANT GEL ADHESIVE. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is Loose > Page 6835 1. Remove the steering wheel (ONLY NECESSARY TO REPAIR BACKSIDE OF STEERING WHEEL). Refer to Workshop Manual Sections 211-04 and 501-20B. 2. Fold loose leather out of the way. 3. Apply Motorcraft Instant Gel Adhesive evenly over the wheel spoke. 4. Fold the leather back into its original position. 5. Smooth the leather tuck in for neat appearance, and apply pressure until the leather is bonded to the wheel spoke (apply pressure for at least 30 seconds). NOTE THE ADHESIVE SHOULD BE COMPLETELY SET AFTER 5 MINUTES. DO NOT PULL ON THE REPAIR AREA. 6. Reinstall steering wheel. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT070403 Use SLIS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3600 33 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > NHTSA00V223001 > Aug > 00 > Recall 00V223001: Steering Wheel Nut Cracked/Fractured Steering Wheel: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 00V223001: Steering Wheel Nut Cracked/Fractured These vehicles may have mis-assembled or incorrectly manufactured nut that attaches the steering wheel assembly to the steering column. The nut could be upside down in the steering wheel assembly, which could overstress the steering column shaft when the nut is tightened. In addition, some of the nuts may have been cracked during manufacture resulting in the nut fracturing when it is tightened during vehicle assembly. Either of these conditions can lead to the steering wheel becoming loose or separating from the steering column, resulting in loss of steering control. Dealers will inspect and replace the steering wheel retention armature and, if necessary, the steering column to correct this condition. Owner notification began September 6, 2000. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon service date and do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673. Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 00S19 > Aug > 00 > Recall - Steering Wheel Retention Quality Issue Technical Service Bulletin # 00S19 Date: 000801 Recall - Steering Wheel Retention Quality Issue 00S19 SAFETY RECALL Advance Announcement of Safety Recall 00S19: ALL 2001 Model Year Escape Vehicles - Steering Wheel Retention Quality Issue ^ Advance Announcement Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6845 Steering Wheel: Specifications Steering Wheel Turning Effort .................................................................................................................................. 30 N maximum 6.75 lbs. maximum Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6846 Steering Wheel: Service and Repair Removal 1. Position the front seats rearward. 2. Depower the supplemental restraint system (SRS). See: Steering Column/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Air Bag Disarming and Arming/Depowering and Repowering Procedure 3. Lower the steering wheel air bag connector access cover. 4. Turn the pinion shaft to release the steering wheel from the column shaft. 5. Remove the steering wheel. - Position the steering wheel rearward. - Disconnect the electrical connector. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6847 1. Install the steering wheel. - Connect the electrical connector. - Position the steering wheel onto the steering column shaft. 2. Tighten the pinion shaft. 3. Close the steering wheel air bag connector access cover. 4. Repower the supplemental restraint system (SRS). See: Steering Column/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Air Bag Disarming and Arming/Depowering and Repowering Procedure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering - Tie Rod End Inspection Procedures Tie Rod End: Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Tie Rod End Inspection Procedures Article No. 03-15-13 08/04/03 STEERING - TIE ROD END INSPECTION PROCEDURE FORD: 1997-2002 EXPEDITION 1997-2003 F-150 2001-2004 ESCAPE LINCOLN: 1998-2002 NAVIGATOR 2002-2003 BLACKWOOD This article supersedes 03-9-9 to update the vehicle models covered. ISSUE This article is to be used as an updated procedure for inspecting tie rod end wear. ACTION This procedure is designed to supplement the Workshop Manual, as it provides a more detailed tie rod end inspection procedure. SERVICE INFORMATION NOTE FOR ESCAPE VEHICLES, THIS TIE ROD END INSPECTION PROCEDURE SHOULD ONLY BE COMPLETED ON THE OUTER TIE RODS. FOR ESCAPE INNER TIE ROD INSPECTION PROCEDURES, REFER TO WORKSHOP MANUAL SECTION 211-00. Step 1 - Free Play: Check the outer tie rod ends by grasping by hand and push up and down. Check the inner tie rod ends, pushing them front to rear. If any free play is observed in a joint, it is worn and should be replaced. Step 2 - Stud Lash - Free Play: While vehicle is on the ground or on a drive-on hoist, have an assistant rotate the steering wheel rapidly back and forth from 10 o'clock to 2 o'clock to 10 o'clock while observing the inner and outer tie rods. If the outer tie rod ends have any vertical movement or the inner tie rod ends have any horizontal movement, the tie rod end with the observed movement should be replaced. Step 3 - Seal Inspection: Raise the vehicle on a hoist and remove the front wheels. The wheels will need to be turned to the right in order to inspect the passenger side inner tie rod end and to the left to inspect the drivers side inner tie rod end. Inspect all four seals for tears, perforations and wear. If there is any indication of wear or perforations on the seal, that tie rod end should be replaced. Step 4 - Stud Corrosion: For Escape Vehicles - If Squeak is noticed during Step 2, disconnect tie rod from knuckle and articulate stud in socket. If squeak is verified, replace part. While pushing down on seal, at stud end, if corrosion present at contact point at base of stud, replace part. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering - Tie Rod End Inspection Procedures > Page 6853 For All Other Vehicles Covered In This Article: Using a wrench, rotate the tie rod end so that the front of the seal on the outer tie rod end is expanded (Figure 1). Using a puffy knife or other hard, flat, dull object, lift the bottom of the seal up, exposing the stud (Figure 2). If any water escapes from the seal in the form of bubbles or in a liquid form, that tie rod end should be replaced. Closely examine the stud for signs of corrosion, especially around the interface with the knuckle. A rag might be needed to clean off any grease on the stud that impairs a good visual inspection. If there is any sign of corrosion, that tie rod end should be replaced. Rotate the tie rod end in the opposite direction to expand the inner tie rod seal. Repeat the inspection procedure used on the outer tie rod. Repeat this entire procedure on the other side of the vehicle. If there is sign of corrosion, that tie rod end should be replaced. NOTE IF ANY TIE ROD ENDS ARE REMOVED, INSPECT THE SEAL AND THE STUD AGAIN NOTING ANY DIFFERENCES IN VISUAL PERCEPTIONS FROM WHEN THE PART WAS ON THE VEHICLE. CHECKING THE STUD AFTER REMOVAL HELPS IMPROVE CONSCIOUSNESS OF ISSUES WHEN INSPECTING PARTS ON VEHICLE. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 03-9-9 WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering - Tie Rod End Inspection Procedures > Page 6854 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6855 Tie Rod End: Specifications Tie Rod End Jam Nuts 55 Nm Tie Rod End Nuts 55 Nm Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6856 Tie Rod End: Service and Repair Special Tools Removal and Installation 1. Turn the ignition switch to the unlock position. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the castellated nut. 1 Remove the cotter pin. 2 Remove the castellated nut. 4. Loosen the tie rod end jam nut. 5. Using the special tool, separate the tie rod end. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6857 6. Remove the tie rod end. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Adjust the front toe. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications > Front Suspension Balljoint Inspection Job Aid Ball Joint: Specifications Front Suspension Balljoint Inspection Job Aid Front Lower Balljoint Measurement .................................................................................................................................................. Between lower control arm and knuckle Deflection ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................... 0-0.008 in (0-0.2mm) Reference Diagram ............................................................................................................................. ............................................................................. D Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications > Front Suspension Balljoint Inspection Job Aid > Page 6863 Ball Joint: Specifications Ball Joint, Lower Lower Ball Joint Radial Play - Maximum 1/32 inch Ball Joint Pinch Bolt 52 ft. lbs. Lower Ball Joint Nut 85 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications > Front Suspension Balljoint Inspection Job Aid > Page 6864 Ball Joint: Specifications Rear Suspension Rear Suspension Upper Ball Joint Nut 85 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front Suspension Balljoint Inspection Job Aid Ball Joint: Testing and Inspection Front Suspension Balljoint Inspection Job Aid Front Lower Balljoint Measurement .................................................................................................................................................. Between lower control arm and knuckle Deflection ............................................................................................................................................. ........................................... 0-0.008 in (0-0.2mm) Reference Diagram ............................................................................................................................. ............................................................................. D Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front Suspension Balljoint Inspection Job Aid > Page 6867 Ball Joint: Testing and Inspection Ball Joint, Lower Ball Joint Inspection-Front Suspension Lower Arm Prior to carrying out this test, check the front wheel hub for excessive end play. 1. Raise and support the vehicle so no load is on the front suspension lower arm. 2. Grasp the upper and lower edges of the (1) tire and move the wheel in and out from the (2) pivot center line. 3. The front suspension lower arm ball joint is worn if excessive movement is felt while the wheel is being moved. 4. Install a new front suspension lower arm if the movement exceeds 0.794 mm (1/32 inch). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front Suspension Balljoint Inspection Job Aid > Page 6868 Ball Joint: Testing and Inspection Ball Joint, Upper Ball Joint Inspection-Front Suspension Lower Arm Prior to carrying out this test, check the front wheel hub for excessive end play. 1. Raise and support the vehicle so no load is on the front suspension lower arm. 2. Grasp the upper and lower edges of the (1) tire and move the wheel in and out from the (2) pivot center line. 3. The front suspension lower arm ball joint is worn if excessive movement is felt while the wheel is being moved. 4. Install a new front suspension lower arm if the movement exceeds 0.794 mm (1/32 inch). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Control Arm Bushing Inspection Control Arm Bushing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Control Arm Bushing Inspection TSB 09-5-1 03/23/09 LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING INSPECTION PROCEDURE FORD: 2001-2009 Escape 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid ISSUE Many states and Canadian provinces require annual safety inspections which include the evaluation of suspension components. The information in this procedure is intended to assist the technician performing the inspection with specific criteria for 2001-2009 Escape and Mariner lower control arm (LCA) bushings and will prevent the unnecessary replacement of good components. ACTION Inspect according to the procedure below. INSPECTION PROCEDURE The LCA bushing is located at the rear of the front suspension lower control arm. The bushing is identified as number 1 of Figure 1. The control arm is mounted in the front subframe with bolts number 2 and number 3. The bushing is part of the LCA and cannot be serviced separately from the arm. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Control Arm Bushing Inspection > Page 6874 Figure 2 - Shows a new bushing prior to assembly into the control arm. Bolt number 2 passes through the inner sleeve and the outer sleeve is pressed into the control arm. The rubber bushing is bonded to both the inner and outer sleeves. Figure 3 - Illustrates a generic bushing showing minor sur[ace cracks that do not adversely affect the performance of the bushing. Bushings exhibiting sur[ace cracks with a depth less than 3/8" (10 mm) are acceptable and will continue to function normally. These do not require replacement. Figure 4 - Illustrates a partial separation between the rubber and the outer sleeve. The bushing may show signs of movement on the rubber surface, making the surface shiny. Bushings with a separation or crack depth less than or equal to 3/8" (10 mm) are acceptable and meet all functional requirements. These do not require replacement. Bushings with a separation or crack greater than 3/8" (10 mm) in depth should be replaced. The customer may hear a bang or clunk in the front suspension if there is enough separation for the arm to contact the subframe. This does not affect the retention of the control arm to the vehicle as the bushing is sandwiched in the subframe and held in place with the bolt. The vehicle can be safely operated in this condition until the bushing is replaced. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Control Arm Bushing Inspection > Page 6875 WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Radius Arm > Component Information > Specifications Radius Arm: Specifications Strut Piston Rod To Bearing Plate Nut 76 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Specifications Rear Knuckle: Specifications Wheel Knuckle Cam Bolt 85 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Knuckle-2WD Rear Knuckle: Service and Repair Wheel Knuckle-2WD Special Tools Removal NOTE: When a new wheel knuckle is installed a new wheel bearing must also be installed. All vehicles 1. Remove the brake shoes. 2. Remove the wheel hub nut. 3. Using the special tool, remove the wheel hub. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Knuckle-2WD > Page 6884 4. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle, after removing the wheel hub. Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub. 5. Remove the snap ring. Vehicles with ABS 6. Position the Anti-Lock Brake Sensor (ABS) aside. 1 Remove the ABS sensor bolt and bracket bolts. 2 Position the ABS sensor aside. All vehicles 7. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the brake backing plate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Knuckle-2WD > Page 6885 ^ Remove the parking brake cable bolt from the wheel knuckle. 8. Disconnect the brake line from the wheel cylinder. ^ Remove the brake line bracket bolt. 9. Support the wheel knuckle. 10. Remove the lower shock absorber nut. 11. NOTE: It may be necessary to hold the ball joint stud to keep it from turning while removing the nut. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle. 1 Remove the nut. 2 Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Knuckle-2WD > Page 6886 12. NOTE: It may be necessary to hold the ball joint stud to keep it from turning while removing the nut. Separate the upper ball joint from the wheel knuckle. 1 Remove the nut. 2 Separate the upper ball joint from the wheel knuckle. 13. NOTE: Note the position of the spring insulator and spring for installation. Remove the spring. ^ Lower the support to the wheel knuckle. 14. Remove the wheel knuckle cam bolt. 1 Mark the position of the adjustment cam notch. 2 Remove the wheel knuckle cam bolt. 15. Remove the wheel knuckle. 1 Remove the wheel knuckle cam. 2 Remove the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Knuckle-2WD > Page 6887 16. Remove the brake backing plate from the wheel knuckle. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Remove the brake backing plate from the wheel knuckle. Installation All vehicles 1. Using the special tools, install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. 2. Install the snap ring into the wheel knuckle. 3. Position the brake backing plate to the wheel knuckle and install the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Knuckle-2WD > Page 6888 4. Using the wheel hub washer and the special tool, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. 5. Install the wheel hub nut. 6. Position the wheel knuckle and install the wheel 7. Install the wheel knuckle cam bolt loosely. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Knuckle-2WD > Page 6889 8. Support the wheel knuckle and install the spring. 9. Install the lower shock absorber nut. 10. Position the upper ball joint and install the nut. 11. Position the lower ball joint and install the nut. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Knuckle-2WD > Page 6890 12. Tighten the wheel knuckle cam bolt. 1 Align the wheel knuckle cam. 2 Tighten the wheel knuckle cam bolt. 13. Connect the brake line to the wheel cylinder. ^ Install the brake line bracket bolt. 14. Install the parking brake cable through the brake backing plate. ^ Install the bolt. Vehicles with ABS 15. Position the ABS sensor and bracket bolts. ^ Install the bolts. All vehicles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Knuckle-2WD > Page 6891 16. Install the brake shoes. 17. Bleed the brake system. 18. Check and adjust the wheel alignment as necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Knuckle-2WD > Page 6892 Rear Knuckle: Service and Repair Wheel Knuckle 4WD Special Tools Removal and Installation NOTE: When a new wheel knuckle is installed a new wheel bearing must also be installed. All vehicles 1. Remove the brake shoes. 2. Remove the rear halfshaft nut. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Knuckle-2WD > Page 6893 3. Using the special tool, loosen the halfshaft from the wheel hub. 4. Using the special tools, remove the wheel hub. 5. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle, after removing the wheel hub. Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub. 6. Remove the snap ring. Vehicles with ABS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Knuckle-2WD > Page 6894 7. Position the Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) sensor aside. 1 Remove the ABS sensor bolt and bucket bolts. 2 Position the ABS sensor aside. All vehicles 8. Disconnect the parking brake cable. ^ Remove the parking brake cable bolt from the wheel knuckle. 9. Disconnect the brake line from the wheel cylinder. ^ Remove brake line bracket bolt. 10. Support the wheel knuckle. 11. Remove the lower shock absorber nut. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Knuckle-2WD > Page 6895 12. NOTE: It may be necessary to hold the ball joint stud to keep it from turning while removing the nut. Disconnect the lower ball joint. ^ Remove the nut. 13. NOTE: It may be necessary to hold the ball joint stud to keep it from turning while removing the nut. Disconnect the upper ball joint. ^ Remove the nut. 14. NOTE: Note the position of the spring insulator and spring for installation. Remove the spring. ^ Lower the support to the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Knuckle-2WD > Page 6896 15. Remove the wheel knuckle cam bolt. 1 Mark the position of the adjustment cam notch. 2 Remove the wheel knuckle cam bolt. 16. Remove the wheel knuckle. 1 Remove the wheel knuckle cam. 2 Remove the wheel knuckle. 17. Remove the brake backing plate from the wheel knuckle. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Remove the brake backing plate from the wheel knuckle. Installation All vehicles 1. Using the special tools, install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Knuckle-2WD > Page 6897 2. Install the snap ring into the wheel knuckle. 3. Install the bake backing plate into the wheel knuckle. ^ Install the bolts. 4. Using the special tools, install the wheel hub. 5. Position the wheel knuckle and install the wheel knuckle cam. ^ Position the halfshaft into the wheel hub. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Knuckle-2WD > Page 6898 6. Install the wheel knuckle cam bolt loosely. 7. Support the wheel knuckle and install the spring. 8. Install the lower shock absorber nut. 9. Install the upper ball joint. ^ Install the nut. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Knuckle-2WD > Page 6899 10. Install the lower ball joint. ^ Install the nut. 11. Tighten the wheel knuckle cam bolt. 1 Align the wheel knuckle cam. 2 Tighten the wheel knuckle cam bolt. 12. Install the brake line to the wheel cylinder. ^ Install brake line bracket bolt. 13. Install the parking brake cable through the brake backing plate. 1 Install the bolt. 2 Install the parking brake cable through the brake backing plate. Vehicles with ABS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Knuckle-2WD > Page 6900 14. Position the ABS brake sensor and bracket bolts. ^ Install the bolts. All vehicles 15. Install the halfshaft nut. 16. Install the brake shoes. 17. Bleed the brake system. 18. Check and adjust the wheel alignment as necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Bushing > Component Information > Specifications Stabilizer Bushing: Specifications FRONT SUSPENSION Stabilizer Bar Bushing Mount .............................................................................................................. .................................................. 70 Nm 52 ft. lbs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Specifications Stabilizer Link: Specifications Stabilizer Bar Links 48 Nm Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6908 Stabilizer Link: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Remove the stabilizer bar link. 1 Remove the upper and lower stabilizer bar link nuts. 2 Remove the stabilizer bar link. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Front Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6918 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6919 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Front Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6925 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6926 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6927 Front Subframe: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6928 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6929 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6930 MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6931 (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6932 Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6933 Front Subframe: Service and Repair SUBFRAME - FRONT Special Tool(S) Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the rear transmission mount nuts and bolt. 3. Using the special tool, support the engine. 4. Remove the two front wheel and tire assemblies. 5. Remove the two engine air deflectors. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6934 6. Remove the two lower control arm ball joint pinch bolts and nuts (one on each side). 7. Disconnect the stabilizer bar link. 1 Remove the nuts. 2 Disconnect the link from the stabilizer bar. 8. Remove the lateral support crossmember. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Remove the crossmember. 9. Remove the front transmission mount bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6935 10. Remove the engine support crossmember bolts. 11. Remove the nut and the engine support crossmember. 12. Remove the two steering gear bolts. 13. Position the steering gear out of the subframe mounts. 14. Remove the dual converter Y-pipe on the 3.0L (4V) engine or the muffler inlet pipe on the 2.0L (Zetec) engine. Vehicles with manual transmission Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6936 15. Remove the two bolts and disconnect the manual transmission shift linkage. Vehicles with 4WD 16. Remove the driveshaft. 17. NOTE: Lower the rear of the engine to allow the subframe to clear the companion flange on the transfer case. Lower the rear of the engine approximately 150 mm (6 in). All vehicles 18. CAUTION: Do not allow the rear subframe bolts to come out of the lower control arm bushing. Completely loosen the two front subframe bolts, but do not remove them. 19. NOTE: The lower control arm ball joints must be disconnected from the spindles at the same time the subframe is lowered. With an assistant, remove the two subframe nuts lower the subframe from the vehicle. 20. Transfer all necessary components. 21. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Front Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6945 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6946 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Front Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6952 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6953 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6954 Front Subframe Mount: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6955 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6956 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6957 MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6958 (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6959 Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Rear Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6968 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6969 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Rear Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6975 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6976 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6977 Rear Subframe: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6978 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6979 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6980 MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6981 (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6982 Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6983 Rear Subframe: Service and Repair SUBFRAME - REAR Removal Vehicles with 4WD 1. Remove the rear axle assembly. All vehicles 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Remove the four bolts and position the rear control arm aside. 4. Disconnect the exhaust hanger from the subframe. 5. With an assistant, remove the four bolts and rear subframe. Installation All vehicles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6984 1. With an assistant, position the rear subframe and loosely install the bolts. 2. With a 19 mm (0.76 in) rod, align the rear subframe with the alignment holes. 3. Tighten the rear subframe bolts. 4. Connect the exhaust hanger on the subframe. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6985 5. Position the four rear control arms in the subframe. - Loosely install the bolts. Vehicles with 4WD 6. Install the rear axle assembly. All vehicles 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. NOTE: The vehicles must be at ride height before tightening the bolts. Tighten the four control arms bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Front Removal and Installation Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Disconnect the brake hose grommet from the bracket. Vehicles with ABS 3. Disconnect the anti-lock brake harness from the strut and spring assembly. 1 Remove the bolt. 2 Position the bracket aside. All vehicles 4. Position the stabilizer bar link aside. 1 Remove the upper stabilizer bar link nut. 2 Position the stabilizer bar link aside. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6990 5. Remove the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts. 6. NOTE: Support the strut and spring assembly when removing upper nuts. Remove the strut and spring assembly. ^ Remove the nuts. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Align the front wheels to specifications. Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly and Assembly 1. Remove the strut and spring assembly. 2. WARNING: Always wear safety goggles when using a spring compressors Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Mount the assembly in a suitable holding fixture and use a suitable spring compressor to compress the front coil spring. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6991 3. Remove the strut piston rod nut. 4. Disassemble the strut and spring assembly. 1 Remove the metal sheet plate. 2 Remove the upper strut mount. 3 Remove the thrust bearing plate. 4 Remove the thrust bearing. 5 Remove the upper spring seat. 6 Remove the upper spring seat isolator. 7 Remove the spring. 8 Remove the dust boot. 9 Remove the rubber bump stopper. 10 Remove the lower spring seat. 5. NOTE: New fasteners must be used when old fasteners are loosened and/or removed. NOTE: Make sure that an alignment procedure is carried out any time the strut and spring assembly or the front shock absorber mounting bracket bolts are loosened. NOTE: Be sure the spring is correctly seated in the insulator. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6992 Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Rear Removal and Installation NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. NOTE: After removing the wheel, finger-tighten one lug nut to retain the drum if the drum retainers have been removed. All vehicles 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Disconnect the brake line from the wheel cylinder. ^ Remove the brake line bracket bolt. Vehicles with ABS 3. Position the Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) sensor aside. 1 Remove the ABS sensor bolt and bracket bolts. 2 Position the ABS sensor aside. All vehicles 4. Support the rear wheel knuckle. 5. Loosen both inside upper and lower arm bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 6993 6. Remove the lower shock nut and position aside. 7. NOTE: Note the position of the spring insulator and spring for installation. Remove the spring. ^ Lower the support to the wheel knuckle. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Bleed the brake system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Customer Interest Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises TSB 09-6-5 04/06/09 NOISE - FRONT STRUT AREA FORD: 2001-2009 Escape 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid ISSUE Some 2001-2009 Escape, 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a pop, rub, grunt, squeak, and/or creak noise from the front strut area during slow, lock-to-lock turns such as parking maneuvers. Vehicles built on or before 1/13/2009 may also exhibit a clunk, crunch, thump, and/or knocking noise from the front strut area while driving over a series of bumps and/or rough roads. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Using chassis ears on the front strut mounts is pop, rub, grunt, squeak, creak, clunk, crunch, thump, and/or knocking noise present from the front strut area during slow parking lot type maneuvers? a. No - Procedure does not apply, proceed with normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00 diagnostics. b. Yes on turns - Boot may be binding, go to Step 2 Dust Boot Greasing Procedure. c. Yes over bumps (built on or before 1/13/2009) - Go to Step 3 Dust Boot Replacement Procedure and install new dust boot designed for this concern. d. Yes over bumps (built after 1/13/09) - Procedure does not apply. Proceed with normal WSM, Section 204-00 diagnostics. 2. Dust Boot Greasing Procedure. a. Raise the vehicle per WSM, Section 100-02. b. Reach through the spring and pull the strut dust boot and jounce bumper assembly straight down, out of the upper spring seat. c. Apply Motorcraft(R) Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1) (1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around the rod. (2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust cover. d. Raise dust cover so that jounce bumper is accessible and apply 360 degrees to the jounce bumper itself. e. Slide the dust cover and jounce bumper upward into its original location on the strut. f. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle. 3. Dust Boot Replacement Procedure (vehicles built on/before 1/13/2009). a. Remove front strut per WSM, Section 204-01. b. Disassemble front strut and replace dust boot with latest level part per WSM, Section 204-01. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 7002 C. Apply Motorcraft Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1) (1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around the rod. (2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust boot. (3) Apply 360 degrees to the jounce bumper itself. d. Assemble front strut and install per WSM, Section 204-01. e. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090605A 2001-2009 Escape, 0.7 Hr. 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Apply Grease Following Service Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears and Road Test (Do Not Use With 1007D, 18124A) 090605B 2001-2009 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Strut Dust Boots, Apply Grease Following Service Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears and Road Test Can Be Claimed With Operations C And D (Do Not Use With 1007D, 18124A) 090605C 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Check Caster, Camber and, Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation B And D (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) 090605D 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Correct Caster, Camber And Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 7003 Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation B And C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18A179 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises TSB 09-6-5 04/06/09 NOISE - FRONT STRUT AREA FORD: 2001-2009 Escape 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid ISSUE Some 2001-2009 Escape, 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a pop, rub, grunt, squeak, and/or creak noise from the front strut area during slow, lock-to-lock turns such as parking maneuvers. Vehicles built on or before 1/13/2009 may also exhibit a clunk, crunch, thump, and/or knocking noise from the front strut area while driving over a series of bumps and/or rough roads. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Using chassis ears on the front strut mounts is pop, rub, grunt, squeak, creak, clunk, crunch, thump, and/or knocking noise present from the front strut area during slow parking lot type maneuvers? a. No - Procedure does not apply, proceed with normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00 diagnostics. b. Yes on turns - Boot may be binding, go to Step 2 Dust Boot Greasing Procedure. c. Yes over bumps (built on or before 1/13/2009) - Go to Step 3 Dust Boot Replacement Procedure and install new dust boot designed for this concern. d. Yes over bumps (built after 1/13/09) - Procedure does not apply. Proceed with normal WSM, Section 204-00 diagnostics. 2. Dust Boot Greasing Procedure. a. Raise the vehicle per WSM, Section 100-02. b. Reach through the spring and pull the strut dust boot and jounce bumper assembly straight down, out of the upper spring seat. c. Apply Motorcraft(R) Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1) (1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around the rod. (2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust cover. d. Raise dust cover so that jounce bumper is accessible and apply 360 degrees to the jounce bumper itself. e. Slide the dust cover and jounce bumper upward into its original location on the strut. f. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle. 3. Dust Boot Replacement Procedure (vehicles built on/before 1/13/2009). a. Remove front strut per WSM, Section 204-01. b. Disassemble front strut and replace dust boot with latest level part per WSM, Section 204-01. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 7009 C. Apply Motorcraft Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1) (1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around the rod. (2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust boot. (3) Apply 360 degrees to the jounce bumper itself. d. Assemble front strut and install per WSM, Section 204-01. e. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090605A 2001-2009 Escape, 0.7 Hr. 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Apply Grease Following Service Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears and Road Test (Do Not Use With 1007D, 18124A) 090605B 2001-2009 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Strut Dust Boots, Apply Grease Following Service Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears and Road Test Can Be Claimed With Operations C And D (Do Not Use With 1007D, 18124A) 090605C 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Check Caster, Camber and, Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation B And D (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) 090605D 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Correct Caster, Camber And Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 7010 Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation B And C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18A179 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Specifications > Shock Absorber Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Specifications Front Shock Absorber Upper Mounting Bracket Nuts 80 Nm Lower Shock Absorber Nut 85 Nm Upper Shock Absorber Nut 13 Nm Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Specifications > Shock Absorber > Page 7013 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Specifications Upper Strut Mount Bolts 80 Nm Strut-To-Wheel Knuckle Bolts 115 Nm Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Disconnect the brake hose grommet from the bracket. Vehicles with ABS 3. Disconnect the anti-lock brake harness from the strut and spring assembly. 1 Remove the bolt. 2 Position the bracket aside. All vehicles 4. Position the stabilizer bar link aside. 1 Remove the upper stabilizer bar link nut. 2 Position the stabilizer bar link aside. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7016 5. Remove the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts. 6. NOTE: Support the strut and spring assembly when removing upper nuts. Remove the strut and spring assembly. ^ Remove the nuts. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Align the front wheels to specifications. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7017 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly and Assembly 1. Remove the strut and spring assembly. 2. WARNING: Always wear safety goggles when using a spring compressors Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Mount the assembly in a suitable holding fixture and use a suitable spring compressor to compress the front coil spring. 3. Remove the strut piston rod nut. 4. Disassemble the strut and spring assembly. 1 Remove the metal sheet plate. 2 Remove the upper strut mount. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7018 3 Remove the thrust bearing plate. 4 Remove the thrust bearing. 5 Remove the upper spring seat. 6 Remove the upper spring seat isolator. 7 Remove the spring. 8 Remove the dust boot. 9 Remove the rubber bump stopper. 10 Remove the lower spring seat. 5. NOTE: New fasteners must be used when old fasteners are loosened and/or removed. NOTE: Make sure that an alignment procedure is carried out any time the strut and spring assembly or the front shock absorber mounting bracket bolts are loosened. NOTE: Be sure the spring is correctly seated in the insulator. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7019 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Rear Removal and Installation 1. Remove the upper shock absorber nut. ^ Remove the rear quarter trim panel and upper shock absorber nut. 2. Raise and support the vehicle enough to relax the suspension system. 3. Remove the shock absorber. ^ Remove the lower shock absorber nut. ^ Remove the shock absorber. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Trailing Arm > Component Information > Specifications Trailing Arm: Specifications Rear Suspension Trailing Arm and Bushing Bolt 85 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Wheel Bearing Check 1. Raise the vehicle until the front tires are off the floor. ^ Make sure the wheels are in a straight forward position. 2. Spin the tire by hand to check the wheel bearings for roughness. NOTE: Make sure the wheel rotates freely and that the brake pads are retraced sufficiently to allow free movement of the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Grip each front tire at the top and bottom and move the wheel inward and outward while lifting the weight of the tire off the front wheel bearing. 4. If the tire and wheel (hub) is loose on the spindle, does not rotate freely, or has a rough feeling when spun, carry out one of the following: 1 On vehicles with inner and outer bearings, inspect the bearings and cups for wear or damage. Adjust or install new bearing and cups as Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 7026 necessary. 2 On vehicles with one sealed bearing install a new wheel hub. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Special Tools Special Tools Special Tools Removal NOTE: Install a new wheel bearing when the wheel hub is removed. All vehicles 1. Remove the brake disc. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7029 2. Remove the wheel hub nut. 3. Remove the tie rod end nut. 1 Remove the cotter pin. 2 Remove the nut. 4. Using the special tool, separate the tie rod end from the knuckle. Vehicles with ABS 5. Remove the bolt and position the anti-lock brake sensor aside. All vehicles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7030 6. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle. 1 Remove the pinch bolt. 2 Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle. 7. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the wheel knuckle. ^ Position the halfshaft aside and support. 8. Remove the wheel knuckle. 1 Remove the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts. 2 Remove the wheel knuckle. 9. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing and knuckle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7031 10. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle, after removing the wheel hub. Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub. 11. Remove the snap ring. 12. Using the special tools, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle. NOTE: The brake disc shield is pressed on. 13. If necessary, remove the brake disc shield. Installation All vehicles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7032 1. If necessary, install a disc brake shield. 2. Using the special tool, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. 3. Install the snap ring. 4. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7033 5. Install the wheel knuckle. 1 Position the wheel knuckle. 2 Install the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts. 6. Using the special tool, insert the halfshaft into the wheel hub. 7. Install the pinch bolt into the wheel knuckle. ^ Position and align the ball joint stud into the wheel knuckle. Vehicles with ABS 8. Install the anti-lock brake sensor and tighten the bolt. All vehicles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7034 9. Install the tie rod end into the wheel knuckle. 1 Install the tie rod end nut. 2 Install a new cotter pin. 10. Install the wheel hub nut. 11. Install the brake disc. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7035 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Special Tools Removal 1. Remove the brake drum. 2. Remove the wheel hub nut. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7036 3. Using the special tool, remove the wheel hub. 4. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle, after removing the wheel hub. Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub. 5. Remove the snap ring. 6. Using the special tools, remove the wheel bearing outer race from the wheel knuckle. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7037 1. Using the special tools, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. 2. Install the snap ring. 3. Using the special tool, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. 4. Install the wheel hub nut. 5. Install the brake drum. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Front Wheel Hub Nut 290 Nm (214 lb-ft) Rear Wheel Hub Nut (2WD) 290 Nm (214 lb-ft) Rear Wheel Hub Nut (4WD) 290 Nm (214 lb-ft) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and Operation Vehicle Lifting: Description and Operation JACKING WARNING: ^ DO NOT RUN THE ENGINE WHEN JACKING THE VEHICLE. THE WHEELS CONTACTING THE GROUND COULD CAUSE THE VEHICLE TO MOVE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ MAKE SURE THE JACK AND JACK STANDS ARE CORRECTLY LOCATED TO PREVENT THE VEHICLE FROM FALLING. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ WHEEL CHOCKS SHOULD BE USED TO PREVENT THE VEHICLE FROM ROLLING AND FALLING OFF THE JACK. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. CAUTION: The service jack provided with the vehicle is only intended to be used in an emergency for changing a deflated tire. Never use the service jack to hoist the vehicle for any other service. Refer to the Owner Guide when using the jack supplied with the vehicle. Jacking Points - Front 1. The front jacking point is at the bolt head of the lower control arm. Jacking Points - Rear 1. The rear jacking points are located on the rear trailing arms. LIFTING Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7046 Lifting Points 1. The lifting points are part of the uni-body structure. CAUTION: Damage to the suspension, exhaust or steering linkage components may occur if care is not exercised when positioning the hoist adapters prior to lifting the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment Technical Service Bulletin # 02-1-6 Date: 020121 Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment Article No. 02-1-6 01/21/02 ^ WHEELS - ROAD FORCE MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT HUNTER G5P9700 - SERVICE TIPS ^ VIBRATION - ROAD FORCE MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT HUNTER G5P9700 - SERVICE TIPS FORD: 1997 THUNDERBIRD 1997-2000 CONTOUR 1997-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, ESCORT, MUSTANG, TAURUS 2000-2002 FOCUS 2002 THUNDERBIRD 1997-2002 E SERIES, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 1999-2002 SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2002 EXCURSION 2001-2002 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT LINCOLN: 1997-1998 MARK VIII 1997-2002 CONTINENTAL, TOWN CAR 2000-2002 LS 1998-2002 NAVIGATOR 2002 BLACKWOOD MERCURY: 1997 COUGAR 1997-2000 MYSTIQUE 1997-2002 GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE 1999-2002 COUGAR 1997-2002 MOUNTAINEER, VILLAGER ISSUE The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance when using tire/wheel assembly road force measurement equipment such as the Hunter GSP97OO. This bulletin is authored and endorsed by Hunter, Michelin, Goodyear, Continental/General, Hankook, Bridgestone/Firestone and Pirelli. Items addressed are software upgrades, road test (exercise tires), assembly center verification and warranty restrictions. This type of equipment can be a valuable tool to improve customer satisfaction when used as a vibration repair tool. This type of equipment can also provide a high level of customer satisfaction when used as an assembly too! when the customer has purchased new wheels/tires in the "Around-the-Wheel" program. ACTION The Hunter GSP9700/9712 road force measurement tool is NOT to be used for determining if a tire or wheel meets a specification. It can be used as a service diagnostic tool to minimize road force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. The tool such as the Hunter GSP97OO can approximate the low point of the "'1heel and the high point of the tire. This allows the tire to be matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly road force variation. This will minimize the contribution to vibration from the tire/wheel assembly. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 306000, 703000 Service Information NOTE TRADITIONAL WHEEL BALANCER "MATCH-MOUNTING" OR "WEIGHT OPTIMIZATION" ACHIEVES WEIGHT MINIMIZATION AND WILL NOT ACHIEVE THE SAME RESULTS. NOTE WARRANTY CLAIMS CANNOT BE SUBMITTED FOR TIRE/WHEEL REPLACEMENT BASED ON HUNTER G5P9700 RESULTS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7051 NOTE UPGRADING SOFTWARE TO VERSION 2.1 OR GREATER WILL ENHANCE THE TECHNICIANS CAPABILITY TO MINIMIZE THE ROAD FORCE VARIATION OF THE TIRE/WHEEL ASSEMBLY. THE VERSION OF SOFTWARE CAN BE IDENTIFIED FROM THE START-UP SCREEN BY PRESSING THE CENTER SHIFT KEY ONCE (I.E. HAS TWO GREEN ARROWS) AND SELECTING THE K1 KEY ("IDENTIFY SOFTWARE"). IF THE SYSTEM IS IN THE BALANCE MODE, THE START-UP SCREEN CAN BE ACCESSED BY PRESSING THE "R" KEY TWICE (THIS IS JUST TO THE LEFT OF THE START KEY). CONTACT YOUR LOCAL HUNTER ENGINEERING REPRESENTATIVE TO ORDER SOFTWARE UPGRADES. 1. Check the inflation pressure of all four tires and adjust to the vehicle manufacturers recommended pressure. The vehicle manufacturers recommended tire pressure for the original equipment tires can be found on the drivers side door placard. 2. Road test the vehicle on a smooth road for a minimum of 10 miles. Performance of the road test at highway speeds is preferred. NOTE THIS MUST BE PERFORMED TO "EXERCISE" THE TIRES AND ELIMINATE "COLD" FLAT SPOTTING THAT OCCURS DUE TO SHORT-PERIOD VEHICLE STORAGE OR PARKING. IF THE VEHICLE'S TIRES ARE NOT EXERCISED FIRST, ACCURACY OF THE ROAD FORCE MEASUREMENTS CAN VARY SIGNIFICANTLY, EVEN IF THE VEHICLE IS PARKED/STORED IN ONE LOCATION FOR ONLY A SHORT PERIOD OF TIME (E.G. 20 MINUTES). 3. Perform the road force measurement IMMEDIATELY after exercising the tires. If the road force measurement cannot be performed immediately, lift all four tires off the ground with a hoist or jack stands to prevent measurement errors due to further flat spotting. 4. Assembly centering verification MUST be performed and PASSED prior to any road force measurement. For those with a software version other than 2.1 the centering verification must be performed manually. a. Spin assembly to measure. Record the assembly R1H. b. Loosen wing-nut. c. Rotate and reposition assembly and cone/adapter to a different mounting location (180 degrees). d. Tighten wing-nut. e. Re-spin to measure. Record the assembly R1H. f. Compare results obtained in STEP a with those obtained in STEP e. g. If the difference in assembly R1H measurements is less than 5 lbs., the assembly centering verification PASSES and technician can proceed to the measurement/repair process. If the centering verification FAILS proceed to STEP h. h. The following items may contribute to an assembly centering verification FAILURE. ^ Cone/adapter does not fit properly or is incorrect for the application ^ The wheel mounting surface is damaged 5. For those with software version 2.1 the following procedure will lead the technician through a Centering Check. a. From the balance mode screen press the center SHIFT KEY ONCE (i.e. has two green arrows). b. Push the "K1" button to select Perform Centering Check. c. Follow the instructions. d. If Centering Check PASSES proceed to the measurement/repair process. If the Centering Check fails proceed to step e. e. The following items may contribute to an assembly centering verification FAILURE. ^ Cone/adapter does not fit properly or is incorrect for the application ^ The wheel mounting surface is damaged 6. Prior to installing assembly on the vehicle balance assembly utilizing the two-plane dynamic balancing mode. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7052 Technical Service Bulletin # 00L12 Date: 010101 Information 00L12 SPECIAL FIELD ACTION All 2001 Model Year Passenger Cars and Light Trucks up to and Including F550 Super Duty Vehicles Sold in the U.S., U.S. Territories, Mexico, and Canada - Warranty Guide Supplement Original - January 2001 Dealer Letter Attachment I ^ Administrative Information Attachment II ^ Labor Allowances Attachment III ^ Technical Information Customer Notification Letter Supplement # 1, February 5, 2001 - Updated Information All 2001 Model Year Passenger Cars and Light Trucks up to and Including F550 Super Duty Vehicles Sold in the U.S., U.S. Territories, Mexico, and Canada - Warranty Guide Supplement Supplement # 2, February 19, 2001 - Updated Information All 2001 Model Year Passenger Cars and light Trucks up to and Including F550 Super Duty Vehicles Sold in the U.S., U.S. Territories, Mexico, and Canada - Warranty Guide Supplement Special Field Action 00L12, Supplement # 1 dated 2/05/01 - Updated Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7053 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7054 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS Will not be active for this program. PLEASE NOTE Correct all units in dealer inventory prior to delivery to the customer. DEALER - OWNER CONTACT An owner list will not be provided for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using DWE. ^ Refer to ACES II manual for claims preparation and submission information. Attachment II - Labor Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7055 LABOR ALLOWANCES Attachment III - Technical Information SPECIAL FIELD ACTION 00L12 WARRANTY GUIDE SUPPLEMENT VEHICLES COVERED BY THE NEW TIRE WARRANTY All 2001 model year passenger cars and light trucks up to and including F550 Super Duty vehicles sold in the U.S., U.S. Territories, Mexico, and Canada, built through December 31, 2000. NOTE: Information regarding tire warranty will be included in the Warranty Guide for vehicles produced after December 31, 2000. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Obtain a copy of the Warranty Guide Supplement. NOTE: Beginning January 2001, dealers will begin to receive vehicle notification letters, which includes the Warranty Guide Supplement, for in-stock units. In the interim, until notification letters begin to arrive at the dealership, please make copies of the Warranty Guide Supplement (attached to this document). 2. Locate the vehicle Warranty Guide (located in the glove compartment). 3. Place a copy of the Warranty Guide Supplement in the Warranty Guide of the vehicle. PLEASE NOTE: This procedure is for dealer stock units only. Owners of vehicles previously delivered will receive a copy of the Warranty Guide Supplement with their notification letter. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7056 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7057 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7058 Supplement # 1 - Information Supplement # 1, February 5, 2001 - Updated Information Cover Letter Dealer Letter Attachment I ^ Administrative Information Attachment II ^ Labor Allowances Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7059 Attachment III ^ Technical Information Customer Notification Letter Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7060 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7061 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7062 Supplement # 1 - Attachment I OASIS Will not be active for this program. PLEASE NOTE Correct all units in dealer inventory prior to delivery to the customer. DEALER - OWNER CONTACT An owner list will not be provided for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using DWE. ^ Refer to ACES II manual for claims preparation and submission information. Supplement # 1 - Attachment II Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7063 LABOR ALLOWANCES Supplement # 1 - Attachment III WARRANTY GUIDE SUPPLEMENT NOTE: Information regarding tire warranty will be included in the Warranty Guide for vehicles produced after the end date listed above. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7064 SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Obtain a copy of the Warranty Guide Supplement. NOTE: Beginning January 2001, dealers will begin to receive vehicle notification letters, which includes the Warranty Guide Supplement, for in-stock units. In the interim, until notification letters begin to arrive at the dealership, please make copies of the Warranty Guide Supplement (included in this document). 2. Locate the vehicle Warranty Guide (located in the glove compartment). 3. Place a copy of the Warranty Guide Supplement in the Warranty Guide of the vehicle. PLEASE NOTE: This procedure is for dealer stock units only. Owners of vehicles previously delivered will receive a copy of the Warranty Guide Supplement with their notification letter. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7065 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7066 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7067 Supplement # 2 - Information Supplement # 2, February 19, 2001 - Updated Information Cover Letter Dealer Letter Attachment I ^ Administrative Information Attachment II ^Labor Allowances Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7068 Attachment III ^ Technical Information Apology Letter Customer Notification Letter Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7069 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7070 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7071 Supplement # 2 - Attachment I OASIS Will not be active for this program. PLEASE NOTE Correct all units in dealer inventory prior to delivery to the customer. DEALER - OWNER CONTACT An owner list will not be provided for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using DWE. ^ Refer to ACES II manual for claims preparation and submission information. Supplement # 2 - Attachment II Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7072 LABOR ALLOWANCES Supplement # 2 - Attachment III WARRANTY GUIDE SUPPLEMENT NOTE: Information regarding tire warranty will be included in the Warranty Guide for vehicles produced after the end date listed above. SERVICE PROCEDURE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7073 1. Obtain a copy of the Warranty Guide Supplement. Note: Beginning January 2001, dealers will begin to receive vehicle notification letters, which includes the Warranty Guide Supplement, for in-stock units. In the interim, until notification letters begin to arrive at the dealership, please make copies of the Warranty Guide Supplement (attached to this document). 2. Locate the vehicle Warranty Guide (located in the glove compartment). 3. Place a copy of the Warranty Guide Supplement in the Warranty Guide of the vehicle. PLEASE NOTE: This procedure is for dealer stock units only. Owners of vehicles previously delivered will receive a copy of the Warranty Guide Supplement with their notification letter. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7074 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7075 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7076 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7077 Tires: Specifications Aluminum Max. Radial Runout 0.06 in Max. Lateral Runout 0.08 in Steel Max. Radial Runout 0.06 in Max. Lateral Runout 0.08 in Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > NHTSA00V260001 > Sep > 00 > Recall 00V260001: Wheel Separation From Vehicle Wheels: Recalls Recall 00V260001: Wheel Separation From Vehicle Some 4x2 sport utility vehicles not equipped with an antilock braking system may have inadvertently been built with 4x4 rear hubs instead of 4x2 hubs. If the incorrect hubs are installed on a 4x2 vehicle, the rear wheels can loosen, or in some cases, separate from the vehicle. This condition could cause loss of control of the vehicle, increasing the risk of a crash. Dealers will inspect the rear hubs and, if necessary, replace them. Owner notification began September 25, 2000. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon service date and do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673. Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 02-11-2 > Jun > 02 > Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels Wheels: Customer Interest Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels Article No. 02-11-2 06/10/02 BRAKES - EXCESSIVE BRAKE DUST - INFORMATION AND CLEANING TIPS FORD: 1999-2002 ESCORT 1999-2003 CROWN VICTORIA 2000-2002 FOCUS 2001-2002 ESCAPE MERCURY: 1999-2003 GRAND MARQUIS ISSUE Under normal operating conditions, customers may notice accumulation of brake dust on their wheels. Some brake dust is inevitable as brakes wear and does not contribute to brake noise. The use of modern friction materials with emphasis on improved performance and environmental considerations can lead to more dust than in the past. ACTION Brake dust can be cleaned by weekly washing with Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A) and a soft sponge. Heavier deposits can be removed with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A). Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 108000, 301000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 02-11-2 > Jun > 02 > Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels Article No. 02-11-2 06/10/02 BRAKES - EXCESSIVE BRAKE DUST - INFORMATION AND CLEANING TIPS FORD: 1999-2002 ESCORT 1999-2003 CROWN VICTORIA 2000-2002 FOCUS 2001-2002 ESCAPE MERCURY: 1999-2003 GRAND MARQUIS ISSUE Under normal operating conditions, customers may notice accumulation of brake dust on their wheels. Some brake dust is inevitable as brakes wear and does not contribute to brake noise. The use of modern friction materials with emphasis on improved performance and environmental considerations can lead to more dust than in the past. ACTION Brake dust can be cleaned by weekly washing with Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A) and a soft sponge. Heavier deposits can be removed with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A). Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 108000, 301000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 02-1-6 > Jan > 02 > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment Technical Service Bulletin # 02-1-6 Date: 020121 Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment Article No. 02-1-6 01/21/02 ^ WHEELS - ROAD FORCE MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT HUNTER G5P9700 - SERVICE TIPS ^ VIBRATION - ROAD FORCE MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT HUNTER G5P9700 - SERVICE TIPS FORD: 1997 THUNDERBIRD 1997-2000 CONTOUR 1997-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, ESCORT, MUSTANG, TAURUS 2000-2002 FOCUS 2002 THUNDERBIRD 1997-2002 E SERIES, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 1999-2002 SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2002 EXCURSION 2001-2002 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT LINCOLN: 1997-1998 MARK VIII 1997-2002 CONTINENTAL, TOWN CAR 2000-2002 LS 1998-2002 NAVIGATOR 2002 BLACKWOOD MERCURY: 1997 COUGAR 1997-2000 MYSTIQUE 1997-2002 GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE 1999-2002 COUGAR 1997-2002 MOUNTAINEER, VILLAGER ISSUE The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance when using tire/wheel assembly road force measurement equipment such as the Hunter GSP97OO. This bulletin is authored and endorsed by Hunter, Michelin, Goodyear, Continental/General, Hankook, Bridgestone/Firestone and Pirelli. Items addressed are software upgrades, road test (exercise tires), assembly center verification and warranty restrictions. This type of equipment can be a valuable tool to improve customer satisfaction when used as a vibration repair tool. This type of equipment can also provide a high level of customer satisfaction when used as an assembly too! when the customer has purchased new wheels/tires in the "Around-the-Wheel" program. ACTION The Hunter GSP9700/9712 road force measurement tool is NOT to be used for determining if a tire or wheel meets a specification. It can be used as a service diagnostic tool to minimize road force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. The tool such as the Hunter GSP97OO can approximate the low point of the "'1heel and the high point of the tire. This allows the tire to be matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly road force variation. This will minimize the contribution to vibration from the tire/wheel assembly. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 306000, 703000 Service Information NOTE TRADITIONAL WHEEL BALANCER "MATCH-MOUNTING" OR "WEIGHT OPTIMIZATION" ACHIEVES WEIGHT MINIMIZATION AND WILL NOT ACHIEVE THE SAME RESULTS. NOTE WARRANTY CLAIMS CANNOT BE SUBMITTED FOR TIRE/WHEEL REPLACEMENT BASED ON HUNTER G5P9700 RESULTS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 02-1-6 > Jan > 02 > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7100 NOTE UPGRADING SOFTWARE TO VERSION 2.1 OR GREATER WILL ENHANCE THE TECHNICIANS CAPABILITY TO MINIMIZE THE ROAD FORCE VARIATION OF THE TIRE/WHEEL ASSEMBLY. THE VERSION OF SOFTWARE CAN BE IDENTIFIED FROM THE START-UP SCREEN BY PRESSING THE CENTER SHIFT KEY ONCE (I.E. HAS TWO GREEN ARROWS) AND SELECTING THE K1 KEY ("IDENTIFY SOFTWARE"). IF THE SYSTEM IS IN THE BALANCE MODE, THE START-UP SCREEN CAN BE ACCESSED BY PRESSING THE "R" KEY TWICE (THIS IS JUST TO THE LEFT OF THE START KEY). CONTACT YOUR LOCAL HUNTER ENGINEERING REPRESENTATIVE TO ORDER SOFTWARE UPGRADES. 1. Check the inflation pressure of all four tires and adjust to the vehicle manufacturers recommended pressure. The vehicle manufacturers recommended tire pressure for the original equipment tires can be found on the drivers side door placard. 2. Road test the vehicle on a smooth road for a minimum of 10 miles. Performance of the road test at highway speeds is preferred. NOTE THIS MUST BE PERFORMED TO "EXERCISE" THE TIRES AND ELIMINATE "COLD" FLAT SPOTTING THAT OCCURS DUE TO SHORT-PERIOD VEHICLE STORAGE OR PARKING. IF THE VEHICLE'S TIRES ARE NOT EXERCISED FIRST, ACCURACY OF THE ROAD FORCE MEASUREMENTS CAN VARY SIGNIFICANTLY, EVEN IF THE VEHICLE IS PARKED/STORED IN ONE LOCATION FOR ONLY A SHORT PERIOD OF TIME (E.G. 20 MINUTES). 3. Perform the road force measurement IMMEDIATELY after exercising the tires. If the road force measurement cannot be performed immediately, lift all four tires off the ground with a hoist or jack stands to prevent measurement errors due to further flat spotting. 4. Assembly centering verification MUST be performed and PASSED prior to any road force measurement. For those with a software version other than 2.1 the centering verification must be performed manually. a. Spin assembly to measure. Record the assembly R1H. b. Loosen wing-nut. c. Rotate and reposition assembly and cone/adapter to a different mounting location (180 degrees). d. Tighten wing-nut. e. Re-spin to measure. Record the assembly R1H. f. Compare results obtained in STEP a with those obtained in STEP e. g. If the difference in assembly R1H measurements is less than 5 lbs., the assembly centering verification PASSES and technician can proceed to the measurement/repair process. If the centering verification FAILS proceed to STEP h. h. The following items may contribute to an assembly centering verification FAILURE. ^ Cone/adapter does not fit properly or is incorrect for the application ^ The wheel mounting surface is damaged 5. For those with software version 2.1 the following procedure will lead the technician through a Centering Check. a. From the balance mode screen press the center SHIFT KEY ONCE (i.e. has two green arrows). b. Push the "K1" button to select Perform Centering Check. c. Follow the instructions. d. If Centering Check PASSES proceed to the measurement/repair process. If the Centering Check fails proceed to step e. e. The following items may contribute to an assembly centering verification FAILURE. ^ Cone/adapter does not fit properly or is incorrect for the application ^ The wheel mounting surface is damaged 6. Prior to installing assembly on the vehicle balance assembly utilizing the two-plane dynamic balancing mode. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > NHTSA00V260001 > Sep > 00 > Recall 00V260001: Wheel Separation From Vehicle Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 00V260001: Wheel Separation From Vehicle Some 4x2 sport utility vehicles not equipped with an antilock braking system may have inadvertently been built with 4x4 rear hubs instead of 4x2 hubs. If the incorrect hubs are installed on a 4x2 vehicle, the rear wheels can loosen, or in some cases, separate from the vehicle. This condition could cause loss of control of the vehicle, increasing the risk of a crash. Dealers will inspect the rear hubs and, if necessary, replace them. Owner notification began September 25, 2000. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon service date and do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673. Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 02-11-2 > Jun > 02 > Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Excessive Brake Dust on Wheels Article No. 02-11-2 06/10/02 BRAKES - EXCESSIVE BRAKE DUST - INFORMATION AND CLEANING TIPS FORD: 1999-2002 ESCORT 1999-2003 CROWN VICTORIA 2000-2002 FOCUS 2001-2002 ESCAPE MERCURY: 1999-2003 GRAND MARQUIS ISSUE Under normal operating conditions, customers may notice accumulation of brake dust on their wheels. Some brake dust is inevitable as brakes wear and does not contribute to brake noise. The use of modern friction materials with emphasis on improved performance and environmental considerations can lead to more dust than in the past. ACTION Brake dust can be cleaned by weekly washing with Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A) and a soft sponge. Heavier deposits can be removed with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A). Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 108000, 301000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 02-1-6 > Jan > 02 > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment Technical Service Bulletin # 02-1-6 Date: 020121 Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment Article No. 02-1-6 01/21/02 ^ WHEELS - ROAD FORCE MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT HUNTER G5P9700 - SERVICE TIPS ^ VIBRATION - ROAD FORCE MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT HUNTER G5P9700 - SERVICE TIPS FORD: 1997 THUNDERBIRD 1997-2000 CONTOUR 1997-2002 CROWN VICTORIA, ESCORT, MUSTANG, TAURUS 2000-2002 FOCUS 2002 THUNDERBIRD 1997-2002 E SERIES, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER, F-150, RANGER, WINDSTAR 1999-2002 SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2002 EXCURSION 2001-2002 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT LINCOLN: 1997-1998 MARK VIII 1997-2002 CONTINENTAL, TOWN CAR 2000-2002 LS 1998-2002 NAVIGATOR 2002 BLACKWOOD MERCURY: 1997 COUGAR 1997-2000 MYSTIQUE 1997-2002 GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE 1999-2002 COUGAR 1997-2002 MOUNTAINEER, VILLAGER ISSUE The purpose of this bulletin is to provide guidance when using tire/wheel assembly road force measurement equipment such as the Hunter GSP97OO. This bulletin is authored and endorsed by Hunter, Michelin, Goodyear, Continental/General, Hankook, Bridgestone/Firestone and Pirelli. Items addressed are software upgrades, road test (exercise tires), assembly center verification and warranty restrictions. This type of equipment can be a valuable tool to improve customer satisfaction when used as a vibration repair tool. This type of equipment can also provide a high level of customer satisfaction when used as an assembly too! when the customer has purchased new wheels/tires in the "Around-the-Wheel" program. ACTION The Hunter GSP9700/9712 road force measurement tool is NOT to be used for determining if a tire or wheel meets a specification. It can be used as a service diagnostic tool to minimize road force variation of the tire/wheel assembly. The tool such as the Hunter GSP97OO can approximate the low point of the "'1heel and the high point of the tire. This allows the tire to be matched mounted to the wheel for lowest tire/wheel assembly road force variation. This will minimize the contribution to vibration from the tire/wheel assembly. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 306000, 703000 Service Information NOTE TRADITIONAL WHEEL BALANCER "MATCH-MOUNTING" OR "WEIGHT OPTIMIZATION" ACHIEVES WEIGHT MINIMIZATION AND WILL NOT ACHIEVE THE SAME RESULTS. NOTE WARRANTY CLAIMS CANNOT BE SUBMITTED FOR TIRE/WHEEL REPLACEMENT BASED ON HUNTER G5P9700 RESULTS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 02-1-6 > Jan > 02 > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7114 NOTE UPGRADING SOFTWARE TO VERSION 2.1 OR GREATER WILL ENHANCE THE TECHNICIANS CAPABILITY TO MINIMIZE THE ROAD FORCE VARIATION OF THE TIRE/WHEEL ASSEMBLY. THE VERSION OF SOFTWARE CAN BE IDENTIFIED FROM THE START-UP SCREEN BY PRESSING THE CENTER SHIFT KEY ONCE (I.E. HAS TWO GREEN ARROWS) AND SELECTING THE K1 KEY ("IDENTIFY SOFTWARE"). IF THE SYSTEM IS IN THE BALANCE MODE, THE START-UP SCREEN CAN BE ACCESSED BY PRESSING THE "R" KEY TWICE (THIS IS JUST TO THE LEFT OF THE START KEY). CONTACT YOUR LOCAL HUNTER ENGINEERING REPRESENTATIVE TO ORDER SOFTWARE UPGRADES. 1. Check the inflation pressure of all four tires and adjust to the vehicle manufacturers recommended pressure. The vehicle manufacturers recommended tire pressure for the original equipment tires can be found on the drivers side door placard. 2. Road test the vehicle on a smooth road for a minimum of 10 miles. Performance of the road test at highway speeds is preferred. NOTE THIS MUST BE PERFORMED TO "EXERCISE" THE TIRES AND ELIMINATE "COLD" FLAT SPOTTING THAT OCCURS DUE TO SHORT-PERIOD VEHICLE STORAGE OR PARKING. IF THE VEHICLE'S TIRES ARE NOT EXERCISED FIRST, ACCURACY OF THE ROAD FORCE MEASUREMENTS CAN VARY SIGNIFICANTLY, EVEN IF THE VEHICLE IS PARKED/STORED IN ONE LOCATION FOR ONLY A SHORT PERIOD OF TIME (E.G. 20 MINUTES). 3. Perform the road force measurement IMMEDIATELY after exercising the tires. If the road force measurement cannot be performed immediately, lift all four tires off the ground with a hoist or jack stands to prevent measurement errors due to further flat spotting. 4. Assembly centering verification MUST be performed and PASSED prior to any road force measurement. For those with a software version other than 2.1 the centering verification must be performed manually. a. Spin assembly to measure. Record the assembly R1H. b. Loosen wing-nut. c. Rotate and reposition assembly and cone/adapter to a different mounting location (180 degrees). d. Tighten wing-nut. e. Re-spin to measure. Record the assembly R1H. f. Compare results obtained in STEP a with those obtained in STEP e. g. If the difference in assembly R1H measurements is less than 5 lbs., the assembly centering verification PASSES and technician can proceed to the measurement/repair process. If the centering verification FAILS proceed to STEP h. h. The following items may contribute to an assembly centering verification FAILURE. ^ Cone/adapter does not fit properly or is incorrect for the application ^ The wheel mounting surface is damaged 5. For those with software version 2.1 the following procedure will lead the technician through a Centering Check. a. From the balance mode screen press the center SHIFT KEY ONCE (i.e. has two green arrows). b. Push the "K1" button to select Perform Centering Check. c. Follow the instructions. d. If Centering Check PASSES proceed to the measurement/repair process. If the Centering Check fails proceed to step e. e. The following items may contribute to an assembly centering verification FAILURE. ^ Cone/adapter does not fit properly or is incorrect for the application ^ The wheel mounting surface is damaged 6. Prior to installing assembly on the vehicle balance assembly utilizing the two-plane dynamic balancing mode. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 02-1-6 > Jan > 02 > Wheels/Tires - Road Force Measurement Equipment > Page 7120 NOTE UPGRADING SOFTWARE TO VERSION 2.1 OR GREATER WILL ENHANCE THE TECHNICIANS CAPABILITY TO MINIMIZE THE ROAD FORCE VARIATION OF THE TIRE/WHEEL ASSEMBLY. THE VERSION OF SOFTWARE CAN BE IDENTIFIED FROM THE START-UP SCREEN BY PRESSING THE CENTER SHIFT KEY ONCE (I.E. HAS TWO GREEN ARROWS) AND SELECTING THE K1 KEY ("IDENTIFY SOFTWARE"). IF THE SYSTEM IS IN THE BALANCE MODE, THE START-UP SCREEN CAN BE ACCESSED BY PRESSING THE "R" KEY TWICE (THIS IS JUST TO THE LEFT OF THE START KEY). CONTACT YOUR LOCAL HUNTER ENGINEERING REPRESENTATIVE TO ORDER SOFTWARE UPGRADES. 1. Check the inflation pressure of all four tires and adjust to the vehicle manufacturers recommended pressure. The vehicle manufacturers recommended tire pressure for the original equipment tires can be found on the drivers side door placard. 2. Road test the vehicle on a smooth road for a minimum of 10 miles. Performance of the road test at highway speeds is preferred. NOTE THIS MUST BE PERFORMED TO "EXERCISE" THE TIRES AND ELIMINATE "COLD" FLAT SPOTTING THAT OCCURS DUE TO SHORT-PERIOD VEHICLE STORAGE OR PARKING. IF THE VEHICLE'S TIRES ARE NOT EXERCISED FIRST, ACCURACY OF THE ROAD FORCE MEASUREMENTS CAN VARY SIGNIFICANTLY, EVEN IF THE VEHICLE IS PARKED/STORED IN ONE LOCATION FOR ONLY A SHORT PERIOD OF TIME (E.G. 20 MINUTES). 3. Perform the road force measurement IMMEDIATELY after exercising the tires. If the road force measurement cannot be performed immediately, lift all four tires off the ground with a hoist or jack stands to prevent measurement errors due to further flat spotting. 4. Assembly centering verification MUST be performed and PASSED prior to any road force measurement. For those with a software version other than 2.1 the centering verification must be performed manually. a. Spin assembly to measure. Record the assembly R1H. b. Loosen wing-nut. c. Rotate and reposition assembly and cone/adapter to a different mounting location (180 degrees). d. Tighten wing-nut. e. Re-spin to measure. Record the assembly R1H. f. Compare results obtained in STEP a with those obtained in STEP e. g. If the difference in assembly R1H measurements is less than 5 lbs., the assembly centering verification PASSES and technician can proceed to the measurement/repair process. If the centering verification FAILS proceed to STEP h. h. The following items may contribute to an assembly centering verification FAILURE. ^ Cone/adapter does not fit properly or is incorrect for the application ^ The wheel mounting surface is damaged 5. For those with software version 2.1 the following procedure will lead the technician through a Centering Check. a. From the balance mode screen press the center SHIFT KEY ONCE (i.e. has two green arrows). b. Push the "K1" button to select Perform Centering Check. c. Follow the instructions. d. If Centering Check PASSES proceed to the measurement/repair process. If the Centering Check fails proceed to step e. e. The following items may contribute to an assembly centering verification FAILURE. ^ Cone/adapter does not fit properly or is incorrect for the application ^ The wheel mounting surface is damaged 6. Prior to installing assembly on the vehicle balance assembly utilizing the two-plane dynamic balancing mode. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheels: > NHTSA00V260001 > Sep > 00 > Recall 00V260001: Wheel Separation From Vehicle Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 00V260001: Wheel Separation From Vehicle Some 4x2 sport utility vehicles not equipped with an antilock braking system may have inadvertently been built with 4x4 rear hubs instead of 4x2 hubs. If the incorrect hubs are installed on a 4x2 vehicle, the rear wheels can loosen, or in some cases, separate from the vehicle. This condition could cause loss of control of the vehicle, increasing the risk of a crash. Dealers will inspect the rear hubs and, if necessary, replace them. Owner notification began September 25, 2000. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon service date and do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673. Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7125 Wheels: Specifications Aluminum Max. Radial Runout 0.06 in Max. Lateral Runout 0.08 in Steel Max. Radial Runout 0.06 in Max. Lateral Runout 0.08 in Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Service and Repair > Straightening Wheels, Rims or Components Wheels: Service and Repair Straightening Wheels, Rims or Components 1. NOTE: Do not heat wheels in an attempt to soften them for straightening to repair damage. The special alloy used in these wheels is heat-treated. Uncontrolled heating from welding affects the properties of the material. Do not weld the wheels for any reason. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Service and Repair > Straightening Wheels, Rims or Components > Page 7128 Wheels: Service and Repair Wheel Leaks 1. Pinhole leaks in cast aluminum wheels compromise the wheel integrity. Install a new wheel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Wheel Bearing Check 1. Raise the vehicle until the front tires are off the floor. ^ Make sure the wheels are in a straight forward position. 2. Spin the tire by hand to check the wheel bearings for roughness. NOTE: Make sure the wheel rotates freely and that the brake pads are retraced sufficiently to allow free movement of the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Grip each front tire at the top and bottom and move the wheel inward and outward while lifting the weight of the tire off the front wheel bearing. 4. If the tire and wheel (hub) is loose on the spindle, does not rotate freely, or has a rough feeling when spun, carry out one of the following: 1 On vehicles with inner and outer bearings, inspect the bearings and cups for wear or damage. Adjust or install new bearing and cups as Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 7132 necessary. 2 On vehicles with one sealed bearing install a new wheel hub. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Special Tools Special Tools Special Tools Removal NOTE: Install a new wheel bearing when the wheel hub is removed. All vehicles 1. Remove the brake disc. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7135 2. Remove the wheel hub nut. 3. Remove the tie rod end nut. 1 Remove the cotter pin. 2 Remove the nut. 4. Using the special tool, separate the tie rod end from the knuckle. Vehicles with ABS 5. Remove the bolt and position the anti-lock brake sensor aside. All vehicles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7136 6. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle. 1 Remove the pinch bolt. 2 Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle. 7. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the wheel knuckle. ^ Position the halfshaft aside and support. 8. Remove the wheel knuckle. 1 Remove the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts. 2 Remove the wheel knuckle. 9. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing and knuckle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7137 10. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle, after removing the wheel hub. Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub. 11. Remove the snap ring. 12. Using the special tools, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle. NOTE: The brake disc shield is pressed on. 13. If necessary, remove the brake disc shield. Installation All vehicles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7138 1. If necessary, install a disc brake shield. 2. Using the special tool, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. 3. Install the snap ring. 4. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7139 5. Install the wheel knuckle. 1 Position the wheel knuckle. 2 Install the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts. 6. Using the special tool, insert the halfshaft into the wheel hub. 7. Install the pinch bolt into the wheel knuckle. ^ Position and align the ball joint stud into the wheel knuckle. Vehicles with ABS 8. Install the anti-lock brake sensor and tighten the bolt. All vehicles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7140 9. Install the tie rod end into the wheel knuckle. 1 Install the tie rod end nut. 2 Install a new cotter pin. 10. Install the wheel hub nut. 11. Install the brake disc. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7141 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Special Tools Removal 1. Remove the brake drum. 2. Remove the wheel hub nut. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7142 3. Using the special tool, remove the wheel hub. 4. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle, after removing the wheel hub. Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub. 5. Remove the snap ring. 6. Using the special tools, remove the wheel bearing outer race from the wheel knuckle. Installation Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7143 1. Using the special tools, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. 2. Install the snap ring. 3. Using the special tool, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. 4. Install the wheel hub nut. 5. Install the brake drum. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Front Wheel Hub Nut 290 Nm (214 lb-ft) Rear Wheel Hub Nut (2WD) 290 Nm (214 lb-ft) Rear Wheel Hub Nut (4WD) 290 Nm (214 lb-ft) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Fastener: Specifications Wheel Nuts (all wheels) 133 Nm (98 lb-ft) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front wheel bearing. 2. Press out the wheel studs. 3. To install. reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7153 Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Rear Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wheel bearing. 2. Press out the wheel studs. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Accumulator HVAC > Component Information > Locations Accumulator HVAC: Locations Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Accumulator HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7158 Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Accumulator HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7159 Accumulator HVAC: Service Precautions CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Accumulator HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7160 Accumulator HVAC: Description and Operation NOTE: Installation of a new suction accumulator is not necessary when repairing the air conditioning system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the suction accumulator. The suction accumulator is mounted to the A/C accumulator bracket. The inlet tube of the suction accumulator is connected to the A/C evaporator outlet tube. The outlet tube is connected to the A/C manifold and tube assembly. After entering the inlet of the suction accumulator, heavier oil-laden refrigerant contacts an internally mounted dome (which serves as an umbrella) and drips down onto the bottom of the canister. ^ A small diameter oil bleed hole, in the bottom of the vapor return tube, allows the accumulated heavier liquid refrigerant and oil mixture to re-enter the compressor suction line at a controlled rate. ^ As the heavier mixture passes through the small diameter liquid bleed hole, it has a second chance to vaporize and recirculate through the A/C compressor without causing compressor damage due to slugging. ^ A fine mesh screened filter fits tightly around the bottom of the vapor return tube to filter out refrigerant system contaminant particles. ^ A desiccant bag is mounted inside the canister to absorb any moisture which may be in the refrigerant system. ^ A fitting located on the top of the suction accumulator is used to attach the A/C cycling switch. A long-travel Schrader-type valve stem core is installed in the fitting so that the A/C cycling switch can be removed without discharging the A/C system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Accumulator HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7161 Accumulator HVAC: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Perform the Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure. 2. Remove the A/C cycling switch. 3. Remove the nuts from the A/C manifold and tube mounting bracket. 4. Disconnect the A/C manifold and tube from the suction accumulator. CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture. 5. Remove the two suction accumulator mounting bracket nuts. 6. Disconnect the suction line from the A/C evaporator core. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Accumulator HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7162 CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture. 7. Remove the suction accumulator. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Lubricate the new suction accumulator with the correct amount of PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. See: Refrigerant Oil Addition. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Accumulator HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7163 Accumulator HVAC: Tools and Equipment Spring Lock Coupling Disconnect Tool Set Spring Lock Coupling Disconnect Tool Set Disconnect Tool, Spring Lock Coupling Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Conditioning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Conditioning Switch: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel. 2. Remove the function selector switch knob. 3. Remove the function selector switch. ^ Push in the locking tab on one side of the function selector switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. NOTE: Align the function selector switch locking tabs with the holes in the housing and press the function selector into the housing. Verify that both locking tabs are secured. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Defrost Vacuum Control Motor Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Defrost Vacuum Control Motor REMOVAL 1. Remove the vacuum control motor. 1 Disconnect the vacuum line. 2 Remove the two screws. 3 Disconnect the vacuum control motor from the door lever. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Defrost Vacuum Control Motor > Page 7172 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Footwell Vent Vacuum Control Motor REMOVAL 1. Remove the vacuum control motor. 1 Disconnect the vacuum line. 2 Remove the two screws. 3 Disconnect the vacuum control motor from the door lever. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Defrost Vacuum Control Motor > Page 7173 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Outside Air Inlet Vacuum Control Motor REMOVAL 1. Remove the vacuum control motor. 1 Disconnect the vacuum line. 2 Remove the two screws. 3 Disconnect the vacuum control motor from the door lever. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Defrost Vacuum Control Motor > Page 7174 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Panel Vent Vacuum Control Motor REMOVAL 1. Remove the vacuum control motor. 1 Disconnect the vacuum line. 2 Remove the two screws. 3 Disconnect the vacuum control motor from the door lever. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Cable, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Door Cable: Service and Repair Alignment Pin, Temperature Blend Door SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Lower the glove compartment door. ^ Press the glove compartment release tabs inward while pulling downward on the glove compartment. 3. Disconnect the temperature blend door control cable. 1 Align the locator holes and insert the special tool. 2 Release the locking tab. 3 Remove the temperature blend door control cable from the blend door shaft. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Cable, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7178 4. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel. ^ Disconnect the electrical connectors. 5. Depress the three tabs and remove the temperature blend door control cable. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. NOTE: Rotate the gear to align the locking tab with the notch in the gear before installing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Defroster Duct Air Duct: Service and Repair Defroster Duct REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to: Body and Frame, Interior Trim, Dashboard/Instrument Panel, Service and Repair, Removal and Installation, See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation 2. Remove the screws and the retaining guides. 3. Remove the screws and remove the duct. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Defroster Duct > Page 7183 Air Duct: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Air Distribution Ducts REMOVAL 1. Remove the defroster duct. 2. Remove the screws from the front side of the instrument panel. 3. Remove the screw for the left vent duct. 4. Remove the screw for the right vent duct. 5. Remove the screws for the center vent duct and remove the vent duct. INSTALLATION Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Defroster Duct > Page 7184 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Defroster Duct > Page 7185 Air Duct: Service and Repair Rear Footwell Duct REMOVAL 1. Remove the driver and front passenger seats. 2. Remove the utility compartment. 1 Remove the four plastic fasteners. 2 Remove the utility compartment. ^ Disconnect the electrical connection. 3. Remove LH and RH front door scuff plates. 4. Remove LH and RH lower A-pillar panels. 5. Remove the LH foot rest. 6. Pull back the carpet to gain access to the rear floor vent. 7. Remove the wire harness pin-type retainer. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Defroster Duct > Page 7186 8. Remove the floor duct pin-type retainers and remove the duct. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Register: > 04-25-13 > Dec > 04 > A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to Adjust Air Register: Customer Interest A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to Adjust TSB 04-25-13 12/27/04 SERVICEABILITY OF INSTRUMENT PANEL REGISTER VENTS FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid MERCURY: 2005 Mariner ISSUE Some 2001-2005 vehicles may exhibit instrument panel (IP) register vents that are difficult to adjust or are limited in their adjustability. ACTION Register vents for the IP center finish panel can now be ordered and replaced individually. Replacement of an entire center finish panel assembly to correct a register vent condition is no longer necessary. The IP outboard register vents can be replaced similarly without replacing the entire housing assembly, however, the outboard vent must be ordered as an assembly with the housing. Refer to the following Service Procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE CENTER REGISTER REPLACEMENT 1. Remove center finish panel. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 501-12. 2. With center finish panel removed, release the register retention tabs and remove the register. 3. Replace register with Part Number YL8Z-19893-CAA left or YL8Z-19893-CAB right. 4. Reinstall the center finish panel. OUTBOARD REGISTER REPLACEMENT 1. Tilt the vehicle's outboard register to the down most position. Pull the top of the register out until it is released from the housing. 2. Remove the new register from the service replacement register housing assembly (base # -19893-), as described in Step 1. 3. Snap the new register into the vehicle's existing outboard register housing. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 042513A Register Replace Right 0.2 Hr. Outboard Vent Only 042513B Register Replace Left 0.2 Hr. Outboard Vent Only 042513C Register Replace Both 0.4 Hr. Center Vents (Includes Time To Remove And Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Register: > 04-25-13 > Dec > 04 > A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to Adjust > Page 7195 Install Center Finish Panel) 042513D Register Replace All Vents 0.4 Hr. (Includes Time To Remove And Install Center Finish Panel) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19893 41 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Register: > 04-25-13 > Dec > 04 > A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to Adjust Air Register: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to Adjust TSB 04-25-13 12/27/04 SERVICEABILITY OF INSTRUMENT PANEL REGISTER VENTS FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid MERCURY: 2005 Mariner ISSUE Some 2001-2005 vehicles may exhibit instrument panel (IP) register vents that are difficult to adjust or are limited in their adjustability. ACTION Register vents for the IP center finish panel can now be ordered and replaced individually. Replacement of an entire center finish panel assembly to correct a register vent condition is no longer necessary. The IP outboard register vents can be replaced similarly without replacing the entire housing assembly, however, the outboard vent must be ordered as an assembly with the housing. Refer to the following Service Procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE CENTER REGISTER REPLACEMENT 1. Remove center finish panel. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 501-12. 2. With center finish panel removed, release the register retention tabs and remove the register. 3. Replace register with Part Number YL8Z-19893-CAA left or YL8Z-19893-CAB right. 4. Reinstall the center finish panel. OUTBOARD REGISTER REPLACEMENT 1. Tilt the vehicle's outboard register to the down most position. Pull the top of the register out until it is released from the housing. 2. Remove the new register from the service replacement register housing assembly (base # -19893-), as described in Step 1. 3. Snap the new register into the vehicle's existing outboard register housing. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 042513A Register Replace Right 0.2 Hr. Outboard Vent Only 042513B Register Replace Left 0.2 Hr. Outboard Vent Only 042513C Register Replace Both 0.4 Hr. Center Vents (Includes Time To Remove And Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Register: > 04-25-13 > Dec > 04 > A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to Adjust > Page 7201 Install Center Finish Panel) 042513D Register Replace All Vents 0.4 Hr. (Includes Time To Remove And Install Center Finish Panel) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19893 41 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Locations Electrical Components Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Blower Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Find and Use These Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams ^ System Diagrams ^ Grounds Diagrams Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7207 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow. Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the diagram. Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be found. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7208 Fuse And Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. Fuse Circuits Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery. Ground Distribution Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text "partial". Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7209 Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of (1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces). The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number. Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the way out by a spring. Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control. A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the way in. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. circuit Numbering Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification Circuit Numbering: Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting electrical circuits. Function: The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter "S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit. System-Connection (including branch): Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate wires in one connection with the same function. Wire Identification (wire colors): The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7210 Wire Identification Example Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know the following information about the wire: Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit System: AC = Headlamp leveling Connection: 3 = Switch connection A = Branch Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe). Circuit Identification Charts Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7211 Circuit Identification Chart System Codes Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7212 Sample Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7213 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7214 Sample Diagram Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7215 Circuit Identification Chart SYSTEM CODES CHART Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7216 SAMPLE DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7217 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7218 Sample Diagram Electrical Symbols ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7219 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7220 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7221 Types of Diagrams Shown Types of Diagrams Shown Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them. Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations. Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system information suitable for diagnostic operations. Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a relationship to them, are also included. All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding of the system component interactions. Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type. Wire Color Code Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7222 Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7223 Blower Motor: Diagnostic Aids These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7224 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7225 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7226 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7227 Blower Motor: Electrical Diagrams DETAILED DIAGRAMS Diagram 412-00-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7228 Diagram 412-00-00-2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7229 Diagram 412-00-00-3 RELATED DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7230 Diagram 413-00-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7231 Blower Motor: Description and Operation Blower Motor The blower motor pulls air from the air inlet and forces it into the heater core housing where it is mixed and distributed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7232 Blower Motor: Testing and Inspection For further information regarding this component please refer to: Heating and Air Conditioning; Testing and Inspection. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blower Motor Blower Motor: Service and Repair Blower Motor REMOVAL 1. Remove the RH A-pillar lower trim. 2. Remove the blower motor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the washer screws. 3 Remove the blower motor and cover, lower the assembly from the housing. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blower Motor > Page 7235 Blower Motor: Service and Repair Blower Motor Wheel Blower Motor Wheel REMOVAL 1. Remove the blower motor. 2. Remove the blower motor wheel retainer from the motor shaft, and remove the wheel. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. NOTE: Install a new blower wheel retainer. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Blower Motor Relay: Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7239 Electrical Components Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7240 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7241 Blower Motor Relay: Description and Operation The blower motor relay supplies voltage to the blower motor and is activated when the key is ON and the function selector switch is in any position besides OFF. The blower motor relay is located under the instrument panel next to the steering column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7242 Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7243 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7247 Blower Motor Resistor: Description and Operation The four-speed operation of the blower motor is achieved through the blower motor switch resistor and contains a thermal limiter which is used as a temperature protecting fuse. The assembly is located on the passenger side on the evaporator core housing behind the glove compartment. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel. 2. Remove the blower motor switch knob. 3. Remove the blower motor switch. ^ Depress the locking tab. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair NOTE: The air distribution system of this vehicle cannot be equipped with a cabin air filter. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications General Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Compressor Clutch: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Find and Use These Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams ^ System Diagrams ^ Grounds Diagrams Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7260 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow. Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the diagram. Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be found. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7261 Fuse And Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. Fuse Circuits Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery. Ground Distribution Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text "partial". Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7262 Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of (1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces). The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number. Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the way out by a spring. Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control. A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the way in. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. circuit Numbering Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification Circuit Numbering: Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting electrical circuits. Function: The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter "S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit. System-Connection (including branch): Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate wires in one connection with the same function. Wire Identification (wire colors): The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7263 Wire Identification Example Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know the following information about the wire: Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit System: AC = Headlamp leveling Connection: 3 = Switch connection A = Branch Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe). Circuit Identification Charts Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7264 Circuit Identification Chart System Codes Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7265 Sample Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7266 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7267 Sample Diagram Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7268 Circuit Identification Chart SYSTEM CODES CHART Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7269 SAMPLE DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7270 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7271 Sample Diagram Electrical Symbols ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7272 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7273 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7274 Types of Diagrams Shown Types of Diagrams Shown Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them. Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations. Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system information suitable for diagnostic operations. Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a relationship to them, are also included. All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding of the system component interactions. Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type. Wire Color Code Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7275 Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7276 Compressor Clutch: Diagnostic Aids These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7277 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7278 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7279 A/C Compressor Clutch Assy. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7280 Compressor Clutch: Electrical Diagrams DETAILED DIAGRAMS Diagram 412-00-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7281 Diagram 412-00-00-2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7282 Diagram 412-00-00-3 RELATED DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7283 Diagram 413-00-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7284 Compressor Clutch: Service Precautions CAUTION: Do not use air tools. The A/C clutch field coil can be easily damaged. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7285 Compressor Clutch: Description and Operation A/C compressor and Clutch Assembly NOTE: ^ Internal A/C compressor components are not repaired separately. Install a new FS-10 A/C compressor only as an assembly. The A/C clutch, A/C clutch pulley, A/C clutch field coil and the shaft seals are repairable. ^ Installation of a new suction accumulator is not required when repairing the air conditioning system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the suction accumulator. The FS-10 A/C compressor has the following characteristics: ^ a 10-cylinder swashplate design utilizing the tangential design mount ^ displacement of 170 cc (10.4 cubic inches) ^ A one-piece lip-type seal (repaired from the front of the A/C compressor) is used to seal it at the shaft opening in the assembly. ^ Five double-acting pistons operate within the cylinder assembly. The pistons are actuated by a swashplate that changes the rotating action of the shaft to a reciprocating force. ^ Reed-type discharge valves are located between the cylinder assembly and the head at each end of the A/C compressor. ^ The A/C compressor uses PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. This oil contains special additives necessary for the A/C compressor. ^ The A/C compressor oil from vehicles equipped with an FS-10 A/C compressor may have a dark color while maintaining a normal oil viscosity. This is normal for this A/C compressor because carbon from the piston rings will discolor the oil. Compressor Clutch Components The magnetic A/C clutch has the following characteristics: ^ It drives the compressor shaft. ^ When battery positive voltage (B+) is applied to the A/C clutch field coil, the clutch disc and hub assembly is drawn toward the A/C clutch pulley. ^ The magnetic force locks the clutch disc and hub assembly and the A/C clutch pulley together as one unit, causing the compressor shaft to rotate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7286 ^ When B+ is removed from the A/C clutch field coil, springs in the clutch disc and hub assembly move the clutch disc away from the A/C clutch pulley. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7287 Compressor Clutch: Testing and Inspection For further information regarding this component please refer to: Heating and Air Conditioning; Testing and Inspection. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7288 Compressor Clutch: Adjustments 1. Check the A/C clutch air gap at three equally-spaced places between the clutch hub and the A/C clutch pulley. Compressor Clutch Components 2. Remove the A/C clutch. Add or remove spacers between the A/C clutch and the compressor shaft until clearance is within specification. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7289 Compressor Clutch: Service and Repair SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL 1. Remove the A/C compressor. 2. Using the special tool, remove the A/C clutch bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7290 Compressor Clutch Components 3. Remove the disk and hub assembly and the A/C clutch hub spacer. 1 Thread an 8 x 1.25 mm bolt into the A/C clutch to force it from the compressor shaft. 2 Lift the disk and hub assembly and the A/C clutch hub spacer from the compressor shaft. 4. Remove the pulley snap ring. 5. Remove the A/C clutch pulley. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7291 6. Remove the A/C clutch field coil. 1 Note the location of the A/C clutch field coil electrical connector. 2 Using the special tools, remove the A/C clutch field coil. CAUTION: Do not use air tools. The A/C clutch field coil can be easily damaged. INSTALLATION 1. Clean the A/C clutch field coil and pulley mounting surfaces. 2. Using the special tools, install the A/C clutch field coil. CAUTION: Do not use air tools. The A/C clutch field coil can be easily damaged. NOTE: Position the clutch field coil on the A/C compressor as previously marked. 3. Install the A/C clutch pulley. NOTE: The A/C clutch pulley is a tight fit on the A/C compressor head. It must be correctly aligned during installation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7292 4. Install the pulley snap ring with the bevel side out. 5. Place one nominal thickness A/C clutch hub spacer inside the clutch hub spline opening. 6. Install the disk and hub assembly. 7. Using the special tool, install and tighten the A/C clutch bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7293 Compressor Clutch Components 8. Measure and adjust the clutch air gap by removing or adding A/C clutch hub spacers. 9. Install the A/C compressor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7294 Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component Information > Locations Electrical Components Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views A/C Compressor Clutch Assy. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 7300 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7301 Compressor Clutch Coil: Service Precautions CAUTION: Do not use air tools. The A/C clutch field coil can be easily damaged. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7302 Compressor Clutch Coil: Description and Operation A/C compressor and Clutch Assembly NOTE: ^ Internal A/C compressor components are not repaired separately. Install a new FS-10 A/C compressor only as an assembly. The A/C clutch, A/C clutch pulley, A/C clutch field coil and the shaft seals are repairable. ^ Installation of a new suction accumulator is not required when repairing the air conditioning system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the suction accumulator. The FS-10 A/C compressor has the following characteristics: ^ a 10-cylinder swashplate design utilizing the tangential design mount ^ displacement of 170 cc (10.4 cubic inches) ^ A one-piece lip-type seal (repaired from the front of the A/C compressor) is used to seal it at the shaft opening in the assembly. ^ Five double-acting pistons operate within the cylinder assembly. The pistons are actuated by a swashplate that changes the rotating action of the shaft to a reciprocating force. ^ Reed-type discharge valves are located between the cylinder assembly and the head at each end of the A/C compressor. ^ The A/C compressor uses PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. This oil contains special additives necessary for the A/C compressor. ^ The A/C compressor oil from vehicles equipped with an FS-10 A/C compressor may have a dark color while maintaining a normal oil viscosity. This is normal for this A/C compressor because carbon from the piston rings will discolor the oil. Compressor Clutch Components The magnetic A/C clutch has the following characteristics: ^ It drives the compressor shaft. ^ When battery positive voltage (B+) is applied to the A/C clutch field coil, the clutch disc and hub assembly is drawn toward the A/C clutch pulley. ^ The magnetic force locks the clutch disc and hub assembly and the A/C clutch pulley together as one unit, causing the compressor shaft to rotate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7303 ^ When B+ is removed from the A/C clutch field coil, springs in the clutch disc and hub assembly move the clutch disc away from the A/C clutch pulley. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7304 Compressor Clutch Coil: Service and Repair SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL 1. Remove the A/C compressor. 2. Using the special tool, remove the A/C clutch bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7305 Compressor Clutch Components 3. Remove the disk and hub assembly and the A/C clutch hub spacer. 1 Thread an 8 x 1.25 mm bolt into the A/C clutch to force it from the compressor shaft. 2 Lift the disk and hub assembly and the A/C clutch hub spacer from the compressor shaft. 4. Remove the pulley snap ring. 5. Remove the A/C clutch pulley. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7306 6. Remove the A/C clutch field coil. 1 Note the location of the A/C clutch field coil electrical connector. 2 Using the special tools, remove the A/C clutch field coil. CAUTION: Do not use air tools. The A/C clutch field coil can be easily damaged. INSTALLATION 1. Clean the A/C clutch field coil and pulley mounting surfaces. 2. Using the special tools, install the A/C clutch field coil. CAUTION: Do not use air tools. The A/C clutch field coil can be easily damaged. NOTE: Position the clutch field coil on the A/C compressor as previously marked. 3. Install the A/C clutch pulley. NOTE: The A/C clutch pulley is a tight fit on the A/C compressor head. It must be correctly aligned during installation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7307 4. Install the pulley snap ring with the bevel side out. 5. Place one nominal thickness A/C clutch hub spacer inside the clutch hub spline opening. 6. Install the disk and hub assembly. 7. Using the special tool, install and tighten the A/C clutch bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7308 Compressor Clutch Components 8. Measure and adjust the clutch air gap by removing or adding A/C clutch hub spacers. 9. Install the A/C compressor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7309 Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Pulley > Component Information > Diagrams A/C Compressor Clutch Assy. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component Information > Service Precautions Compressor Shaft Seal: Service Precautions CAUTION: To prevent refrigerant system contamination, do not allow dirt or other foreign materials to enter the A/C compressor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7316 Compressor Shaft Seal: Service and Repair SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL 1. Remove the disk and hub assembly from the A/C compressor. 2. Using the special tool, remove the shaft seal felt from the nose of the A/C compressor. 3. Clean the compressor nose area. CAUTION: To prevent refrigerant system contamination, do not allow dirt or other foreign materials to enter the A/C compressor. 4. Using the special tool, remove the shaft seal snap ring. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7317 5. Using the special tool, remove the shaft seal from the A/C compressor. INSTALLATION 1. Clean the A/C compressor nose area. CAUTION: To prevent refrigerant system contamination, do not allow dirt or other foreign materials to enter the A/C compressor. 2. Lubricate the shaft seal and special tool with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. Place the shaft seal on the special tool. 3. Position the special tool, with the shaft seal, over the A/C compressor shaft. 4. Using the special tool, push the shaft seal onto the A/C compressor shaft until seated. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7318 5. Using the special tool, install the shaft seal snap ring. 6. Carry out the A/C compressor external leak test. See: Testing and Inspection/External Leak Test 7. Using the special tool, install the shaft seal felt. 8. Install the disk and hub assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7319 Compressor Shaft Seal: Tools and Equipment Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7323 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Compressor Clutch Relay Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation Compressor Clutch Relay The A/C compressor clutch relay supplies voltage to the A/C compressor clutch and is located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB). The Power Control Module (PCM) can interrupt the A/C compressor operation through the A/C compressor clutch relay under the following conditions: ^ during engine start-up ^ Wide Open Throttle (WOT) ^ low engine idle conditions ^ excessively high engine temperatures Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Compressor Clutch Relay > Page 7326 Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation Compressor Cut-Off Relay WIDE OPEN THROTTLE A/C CUT-OFF The Wide Open Throttle A/C Cut-Off Relay (may be referred to as the A/C clutch relay) is normally open. There is no direct electrical connection between the A/C switch or EATC Module and the A/C clutch. The PCM will receive a signal indicating that A/C is requested (for some applications, this message is sent through the BUS + and BUS - circuits). When A/C is requested, the PCM will check other A/C related inputs that are available (such as ACP (SW), A/C Cycling Switch (ACCS)). If these inputs indicate A/C operation is OK, and the engine conditions are OK (such as coolant temperature, engine rpm, throttle position), the PCM will ground the Wide Open Throttle A/C (WAC) output, closing the relay contacts and sending voltage to the A/C clutch. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7327 Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7328 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Fitting HVAC > Component Information > Service Precautions Compressor Fitting HVAC: Service Precautions CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Fitting HVAC > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7332 Compressor Fitting HVAC: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the nuts from the A/C manifold and tube mounting bracket. 2. Disconnect the A/C manifold and tube from the suction accumulator. CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture. 3. Remove the front bumper cover. 4. Remove the nut and disconnect the A/C manifold and tube to A/C condenser core air conditioning line (peanut) fitting. CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture. 5. Raise and support the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Fitting HVAC > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7333 6. Remove the RH splash shield. 7. If equipped, disconnect the engine block heater electrical connector. 8. Disconnect the A/C clutch field coil electrical connector. 9. Remove the A/C manifold and tube assembly bolt. CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture. NOTE: Vehicles with 2.0L Zetec engine shown, vehicles with 3.0L (4V) engine similar. 10. Remove the A/C manifold and tube assembly through the bottom of the vehicle. INSTALLATION Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Fitting HVAC > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7334 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. ^ Apply Pipe Sealant with Teflon (R) D8AZ-19554-A or equivalent meeting Ford specifications WSK-M2G350-A2 and ESR-M18P7-A to the threads of the A/C manifold retaining bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Fitting HVAC > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7335 Compressor Fitting HVAC: Tools and Equipment Spring Lock Coupling Disconnect Tool (5/8 Inch) Disconnect Tool, Spring Lock Coupling Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Fitting HVAC > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7336 Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Locations Condenser HVAC: Locations Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7340 Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7341 Condenser HVAC: Service Precautions CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7342 Condenser HVAC: Description and Operation NOTE: Installation of a new suction accumulator is not necessary when repairing the air conditioning system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the suction accumulator. The A/C condenser core has the following characteristics: ^ It is an aluminum fin-and-tube design heat exchanger located in front of the vehicle radiator. ^ It cools compressed refrigerant gas by allowing air to pass over the fins and tubes to extract heat and by condensing gas to liquid refrigerant as it is cooled. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7343 Condenser HVAC: Testing and Inspection ON-VEHICLE LEAK TEST 1. Perform the Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure. 2. Disconnect the suspect A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core from the A/C system. NOTE: DO NOT leak test an A/C evaporator core with the suction accumulator/drier attached to the core tubes. 3. Clean the spring lock couplings. 4. Connect the appropriate test fittings from the A/C Test Fitting Set to the evaporator or condenser tube connections. 5. Connect the red and blue hoses from the manifold gauge set to the test fittings on the A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core. Connect the yellow hose to a known good vacuum pump. NOTE: The automatic shut-off valves on some gauge set hoses do not open when connected to the test fittings. If available, use hoses without shut-off valves. If hoses with shut-off valves are used, make sure the valve opens when attached to the test fittings or install an adapter which will activate the valve. The test is not valid if the shut-off valve does not open. 6. Open both gauge set valves and start the vacuum pump. Allow the vacuum pump to operate for a minimum of 45 minutes after the gauge set low pressure gauge indicates 101 kPa (30 in-Hg). The 45-minute evacuation is necessary to remove any refrigerant from oil left in the A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core. If the refrigerant is not completely removed from the oil, outgassing will degrade the vacuum and appear as a refrigerant leak. 7. If the low pressure gauge reading will not drop to 101 kPa (30 in-Hg) when the valves on the gauge and manifold set are open and the vacuum pump is operating, close the gauge set valves and observe the low pressure gauge. If the pressure rises rapidly to zero, a large leak is indicated. Recheck the test fitting connections and gauge set connections before installing a new A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core. 8. After evacuating for 45 minutes, close the gauge set valves and stop the vacuum pump. Observe the low pressure gauge; it should remain at the 101 kPa (30 in-Hg) mark. ^ If the low pressure gauge reading rises 34 or more kPa (10 or more in-Hg) of vacuum from the 101 kPa (30 in-Hg) position in 10 minutes, a leak is indicated. ^ If a very small leak is suspected, wait 30 minutes and observe the vacuum gauge. ^ If a small amount of vacuum is lost, operate the vacuum pump with gauge valves open for an additional 30 minutes to remove any remaining refrigerant from the oil in the A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core. Then recheck for loss of vacuum. ^ If a very small leak is suspected, allow the system to sit overnight with vacuum applied and check for vacuum loss. 9. If the A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core does leak, as verified by the above procedure, install a new A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7344 Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair REMOVAL NOTE: ^ Installation of a new suction accumulator is not necessary when repairing the air conditioning system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the suction accumulator. ^ If an A/C condenser core leak is suspected, the A/C condenser core must be leak tested before it is removed from the vehicle. 1. Perform the Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure. 2. Remove the front bumper cover. 3. Remove the nuts from the two condenser core air conditioning line (peanut) fittings. CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture. 4. Remove the screws and the A/C condenser core brackets. 5. Remove the A/C condenser core. NOTE: When removing the A/C condenser core, disconnect the two air conditioning line (peanut) fittings from the A/C condenser core. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Lubricate the new A/C condenser core with the correct amount of PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. See: Refrigerant Oil Addition. ^ Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7345 Condenser HVAC: Tools and Equipment Spring Lock Coupling Disconnect Tool Set Spring Lock Coupling Disconnect Tool Set Disconnect Tool, Spring Lock Coupling Heater Hose Disconnect Tool Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7346 Special Tool(s) Set, A/C Fittings Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Control Assembly: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Find and Use These Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams ^ System Diagrams ^ Grounds Diagrams Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7351 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow. Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the diagram. Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be found. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7352 Fuse And Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. Fuse Circuits Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery. Ground Distribution Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text "partial". Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7353 Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of (1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces). The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number. Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the way out by a spring. Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control. A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the way in. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. circuit Numbering Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification Circuit Numbering: Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting electrical circuits. Function: The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter "S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit. System-Connection (including branch): Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate wires in one connection with the same function. Wire Identification (wire colors): The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7354 Wire Identification Example Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know the following information about the wire: Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit System: AC = Headlamp leveling Connection: 3 = Switch connection A = Branch Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe). Circuit Identification Charts Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7355 Circuit Identification Chart System Codes Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7356 Sample Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7357 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7358 Sample Diagram Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7359 Circuit Identification Chart SYSTEM CODES CHART Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7360 SAMPLE DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7361 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7362 Sample Diagram Electrical Symbols ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7363 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7364 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7365 Types of Diagrams Shown Types of Diagrams Shown Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them. Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations. Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system information suitable for diagnostic operations. Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a relationship to them, are also included. All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding of the system component interactions. Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type. Wire Color Code Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7366 Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7367 Control Assembly: Diagnostic Aids These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7368 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7369 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7370 Control Assembly: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7371 Control Assembly: Electrical Diagrams DETAILED DIAGRAMS Diagram 412-00-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7372 Diagram 412-00-00-2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7373 Diagram 412-00-00-3 RELATED DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7374 Diagram 413-00-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7375 Control Assembly: Description and Operation The manual climate control system heats or cools the vehicle interior depending on the position of the function selector switch and the temperature selected. The position of the function selector switch determines heating or cooling and air distribution. The temperature control setting determines air temperature. The manual climate control system components include: ^ blower motor switch resistor ^ vacuum reservoir tank ^ climate control assembly ^ blower motor relay ^ A/C compressor clutch relay ^ footwell vent vacuum control motor ^ defrost vacuum control motor ^ panel vent vacuum control motor ^ outside air inlet vacuum control motor ^ temperature blend door control cable The climate control assembly has three system controls: ^ The A/C heater function selector switch combines a vacuum selector valve with two electrical switches to supply battery positive voltage (B+) to the A/C clutch circuit and the blower motor control circuit. ^ The temperature selection is accomplished through cable-controlled positioning of the temperature blend door located in the heater core housing. ^ The blower motor switch controls the blower motor speed by adding or bypassing resistors in the heater blower motor switch resistor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > System Testing Control Assembly: Testing and Inspection System Testing For further information regarding this component please refer to : Heating and Air Conditioning; Testing and Inspection. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > System Testing > Page 7378 Control Assembly: Testing and Inspection Component Tests Function Selector Switch Vacuum Connector Function Selector Switch Vavuum Application Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Main Climate Control Control Assembly: Service and Repair Main Climate Control REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel. 2. Remove the four screws and the climate control assembly. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Main Climate Control > Page 7381 Control Assembly: Service and Repair Control Assembly Bulbs REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel. 2. Remove the illumination bulb(s) by turning a quarter turn counterclockwise and lifting straight up. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Main Climate Control > Page 7382 Control Assembly: Service and Repair Temperature Control Switch REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel. 2. Remove the temperature control switch knob. 3. Depress the three tabs and remove the temperature blend door control cable. 4. Remove the temperature control switch. 1 Remove the screw. 2 Depress the tab and rotate the temperature control switch counterclockwise. INSTALLATION Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Main Climate Control > Page 7383 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. NOTE: Rotate the gear to align the locking tab with the notch in the gear before installing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Peanut Fitting Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Peanut Fitting > Page 7388 Spring Lock Coupling Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7389 Coupler HVAC: Service Precautions CAUTION: ^ Do not use metal tools to remove the O-ring seals. They can cause axial scratches across the O-ring seal grooves resulting in refrigerant leaks. ^ Do not use a screwdriver or similar tool to remove the A/C tube lock coupling spring; this can cause axial scratches across the O-ring seal grooves resulting in refrigerant leaks. ^ Maintain low speed drill rotation when inserting or removing the cleaning tool to prevent axial scratches which may cause future leaks. ^ Use only new green O-ring seals. The use of any O-ring seals other than specified may result in intermittent leakage during vehicle operation. ^ Support the female fitting with a wrench to prevent the tubes from twisting. ^ Use only new purple O-ring seals. The use of any O-ring seals other than specified may result in intermittent leakage during vehicle operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Spring Lock Coupling Coupler HVAC: Description and Operation Spring Lock Coupling Spring Lock Coupling The spring lock coupling is a refrigerant line coupling held together by a garter spring inside a circular cage. ^ When the coupling is connected together, the flared end of the female fitting slips behind the garter spring inside the cage of the male fitting. ^ The garter spring and cage then prevent the flared end of the female fitting from pulling out of the cage. ^ The O-ring seals are green in color and are made of a special material. ^ Use only the green O-ring seals listed in the Ford Master Parts Catalog for the spring lock coupling. ^ A plastic indicator ring is used on the spring lock couplings of the A/C evaporator core to indicate, during vehicle assembly, that the coupling is connected. Once the coupling is connected, the indicator ring is no longer necessary but will remain captive by the coupling near the cage opening. ^ An A/C tube lock coupling clip may be used to secure the coupling but is not necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Spring Lock Coupling > Page 7392 Coupler HVAC: Description and Operation Peanut Fitting The air conditioning line (peanut) fitting is an integral part of the refrigeration line or component. ^ The male and female blocks of the air conditioning line (peanut) fitting are retained with a nut. ^ An O-ring seal is installed around the tube on the male block. ^ The female block is welded to the tube and is not adjustable. ^ Support the female fittings with a wrench to prevent twisting of the tubes. ^ The male block will pivot around the tube to allow for alignment with the female block during assembly. ^ When correctly assembled the male and female fittings should be flush. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Coupling Connect and Disconnect Procedure Coupler HVAC: Service and Repair Spring Lock Coupling Connect and Disconnect Procedure Spring Lock Coupling Disconnect Tool Set SPECIAL TOOL(S) DISCONNECT 1. Perform the Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure. 2. Remove the A/C tube lock coupling clip. 3. Using the special tool, disengage the spring lock coupling fittings. 4. Remove the O-ring seals with a non-metallic tool. CAUTION: Do not use metal tools to remove the O-ring seals. They can cause axial scratches across the O-ring seal grooves resulting in refrigerant leaks. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Coupling Connect and Disconnect Procedure > Page 7395 5. Remove the A/C tube lock coupling spring with a small hooked wire. CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver or similar tool to remove the A/C tube lock coupling spring; this can cause axial scratches across the O-ring seal grooves resulting in refrigerant leaks. CLEANING 1. Fabricate a cleaning tool from a 1/8 inch diameter brazing rod. 2. Cut an abrasive pad from maroon colored 3M Scotch Brite (R) with the dimensions corresponding to the coupling size. 3. Assemble the pad to the tool. 4. Coat the abrasive pad with PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) F7AZ-19589-DA (Motorcraft YN-12-C) or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. 5. Roll the pad on the tool and install it in a variable speed motor drill. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Coupling Connect and Disconnect Procedure > Page 7396 6. Polish for one minute at moderate speed (less than 1,500 rpm) or until the surface is clean and free of scratches or foreign material. CAUTION: Maintain low speed drill rotation when inserting or removing the cleaning tool to prevent axial scratches which may cause future leaks. 7. Clean the fitting with a lint-free cloth. 8. Inspect the surface for grooves or scratches. If grooves or scratches are still present, install a new component. 9. Clean the O-ring seal grooves with a 300 mm (12 inch) length of natural fiber string. ^ Loop the string around the grooves and pull the string back and forth. 10. Remove any foreign material from the grooves with a lint-free cloth. CONNECT 1. Install the A/C tube lock coupling spring. 2. Lubricate the inside of the coupling with PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) F7AZ-19589-DA (Motorcraft YN-12-C) or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Coupling Connect and Disconnect Procedure > Page 7397 3. Install the O-ring seals. 1 Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) F7AZ-19589-DA (Motorcraft YN-12-C) or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. NOTE: Some connections may have two or three O-ring seals. CAUTION: Use only new green O-ring seals. The use of any O-ring seals other than specified may result in intermittent leakage during vehicle operation. 4. Connect the spring lock coupling fittings with a twisting motion until the A/C tube lock coupling spring snaps over the flared end of the female fitting. 5. Install the A/C tube lock coupling clip. 6. Charge the system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Coupling Connect and Disconnect Procedure > Page 7398 Coupler HVAC: Service and Repair Peanut Fitting Connect and Disconnect Procedure DISCONNECT 1. Perform the Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure. 2. Remove the nut from the air conditioning line (peanut) fitting. CAUTION: Support the female fitting with a wrench to prevent the tubes from twisting. 3. Pull the air conditioning line (peanut) fitting apart. 4. Remove the O-ring seal with a non-metallic tool. CAUTION: Do not use metal tools to remove the O-ring seal. They can cause axial scratches across the O-ring seal groove resulting in refrigerant leaks. CONNECT 1. Clean all dirt or foreign material from the fittings. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Coupling Connect and Disconnect Procedure > Page 7399 2. Install the O-ring seal. 1 Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) F7AZ-19589-DA (Motorcraft YN-12-C) or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. CAUTION: Use only new purple O-ring seals. The use of any O-ring seals other than specified may result in intermittent leakage during vehicle operation. 3. Lubricate the inside of the fittings with PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) F7AZ-19589-DA (Motorcraft YN-12-C) or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. 4. Assemble the male and female fittings together. NOTE: When correctly assembled, the male and female fittings should be flush. 5. Charge the system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Case > Component Information > Service and Repair Evaporator Case: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Perform the Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure. 2. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to: Body and Frame, Interior Trim, Dashboard/Instrument Panel, Service and Repair, Removal and Installation, See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation 3. Disconnect the refrigerant line spring lock couplings from the A/C evaporator core. 4. Disconnect the vacuum hose. 5. Remove the evaporator core housing. 1 Remove the nuts. 2 Carefully remove the evaporator core housing to avoid spilling PAG compressor oil in the passenger area. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. NOTE: ^ Feed the vacuum hose through the opening in the cowl while installing the housing. ^ Before installing the temperature control cable, make sure the blend door, cable and temperature switch are correctly positioned. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7403 Evaporator Case: Tools and Equipment Heater Hose Disconnect Tool Spring Lock Coupling Disconnect Tool (5/8 Inch) Disconnect Tool, Spring Lock Coupling Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7404 Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 03-5-6 > Mar > 03 > A/C - Musty or Mildew Type Odors Technical Service Bulletin # 03-5-6 Date: 030317 A/C - Musty or Mildew Type Odors Article No. 03-5-6 03/17/03 CLIMATE CONTROL - MUSTY OR MILDEW TYPE ODOR FROM CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM FORD: 2001-2003 ESCAPE ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a musty and/or mildew type odor coming from the climate control system. This odor is caused by mildew-type fungi growth in the A/C evaporator. It is most noticeable when the A/C is first turned on. ACTION Apply Motorcraft A/C Cooling Coil Coating to the A/C system, which encapsulates the mildew to help reduce odors. Install air inlet vacuum motor bleed valve, which operates the recirculation/fresh air door to default to fresh mode when the vehicle is parked to dry out the evaporator core. Refer to the following Service Procedure for details. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 030506A Apply Motorcraft A/C 1.5 Hrs. Cooling Coil Coating To The A/C System Then Install Air Inlet Vacuum Motor Bleed Valve DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19B55 53 OASIS CODES: 208000, 208300, 208999 Disclaimer Odor Service Tips Types Of Odors, Their Sources And Treatments There are typically four (4) types of objectionable odors found in a vehicle, they are: ^ Chemical odors ^ Environmental odors ^ Microbiological odors ^ Human and other interior-generated odors Odors can be described in a number of ways: ^ Musty ^ Mildew Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 03-5-6 > Mar > 03 > A/C - Musty or Mildew Type Odors > Page 7413 ^ Fishy ^ Sweet ^ Burning ^ Chemical ^ Fuel ^ Oil ^ Exhaust ^ Wet cement ^ Urine ^ Tar ^ Fragrance ^ Body odor Chemical odors: ^ Coolant: sweet smell ^ Fuel: gasoline or diesel fuel smell ^ Oil: oil type or burning smell ^ Power Steering Fluid: oil type or burning smell ^ Transmission Fluid: oil type or burning smell ^ Washer Fluid: alcohol type smell ^ Gear Lube: garlic/sulphur smell ^ Refrigerant/Oil: ether type smell ^ Carpet/Trim Adhesives: fishy, urine, or sweet smell ^ Evaporator Core Coating: wet cement type smell Environmental odors: ^ Exhaust: exhaust, fuel, burning type smell ^ Industrial Pollutants: all types of smells ^ Dust: musty, mildew, wet cement type smell ^ Pollen: sweet smell ^ Tobacco: burning, tar smell Microbiological odors: Microbial growth supported by warm temperatures and moisture may occur on: ^ Foam Seals: musty, mildew smell ^ Rubber Seals: musty, mildew smell Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 03-5-6 > Mar > 03 > A/C - Musty or Mildew Type Odors > Page 7414 ^ Adhesives: musty, mildew smell ^ Standing Water: musty, mildew smell ^ Water Soaked Carpet/Trim: musty, mildew smell Human and other interior-generated odors: ^ Secretion From The Human Body: body odors ^ Perfuming Agents: sweet or fragrance smell ^ Dirty Clothes, Shoes, Socks: musty, mildew, body odors ^ Food/Beverage: sweet, musty, mildew, fishy smell The first step in diagnosing an odor concern is to verify the concern. To verify an odor you must determine when and under what circumstances the odor occurs and what type of odor it is. Chemical odors are usually constant regardless of A/C setting and can be enhanced by A/C system operation. Most chemical odors are caused by fluid leaks and some are caused by improperly cured carpet and trim adhesives or evaporator core coatings. Environmental odors usually occur for a short time and go away after the vehicle has passed through the affected area. These odors are usually only detected when a window is open or the A/C system is operating in a function that allows outside air to enter the vehicle. Microbiological odors, if in the A/C system, usually last for about 30 seconds when first turned on and will be detected in both Max and Normal A/C. Microbiological odors occurring elsewhere such as from standing water in doors or kick panels or wet carpeting may last indefinitely and will be more intense in Max A/C. Microbiological odors will not occur at temperatures below 50° F (10° C). Human and other interior-generated odors occur while the source is present and may linger for a short time after removal. These odors can be more noticeable during operation of the A/C system. They can be detected in the outside air position and may be more noticeable in recirculation mode. The first step in getting rid of odors is to find the source of the odor. Once the source is found, it must be removed and the affected area cleaned or treated. Chemical odors can be removed by repairing or replacing the component that causes the odor and then cleaning any residue that may have accumulated from the component failure. Environmental odors usually cannot be removed due to the fact that they occur from external sources and are an everyday occurrence. They can, however, be minimized by switching to Max A/C or recirculation mode. Microbiological odors can be eliminated by removing the source and then treating the affected area. Standing water must be allowed to drain and dry out. A/C systems may be treated by using Motorcraft A/C Cooling Coil Coating (YN-29), or equivalent meeting Ford specification (WSS-M99B187-A) as described in the Service Procedure in this article. Human and other interior-generated odors can be eliminated by removing the source and cleaning the affected area. A/C Odor Treatment Procedure 1. Try to reasonably rule out any other source for the odor. Check the carpet on the passenger side for signs of being wet. Continue diagnosis if water is found on carpet and repair as needed. Check the blower motor and cover for signs of moisture. This may be as a result of water bypassing the cowl baffling system that prevents rain intrusion. 2. Remove the engine side fasteners for the plenum cover. This will allow access to the Cowl Top Panel - Water RH. Remove this and inspect the air inlet screen. Use a shop vacuum if there is debris present. This debris may work its way into the evaporator case and act as food for the microbes to grow. Re-install the cowl components. 3. Check to see that the evaporator drain tube (or hose) is not plugged or restricted by debris. Clear anything that may be obstructing the drainage of water. 4. Open vehicle windows. 5. Disconnect A/C cycling switch electrical connector. 6. Set the following: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 03-5-6 > Mar > 03 > A/C - Musty or Mildew Type Odors > Page 7415 ^ Function selector switch in A/C mode ^ Temperature at full heat Blower at high speed ^ Engine running at normal operating temperature 7. Run vehicle (Steps 4-6 conditions) for 25 minutes. This will dry out the system. 8. Turn ignition off. 9. Disconnect and remove the blower motor and blower motor resistor by referring to Workshop Manual, Section 412-02 - Blower Motor. (This provides ease of access to the evaporator core and eliminates the possibility of contaminating the blower motor and/or blower motor resister with the Motorcraft A/C Cooling Coil Coating.) NOTE TO AVOID ANY POSSIBLE DAMAGE, DO NOT SPILL OR SPRAY THIS PRODUCT ON ANY INTERIOR SURFACE (E.G., INSTRUMENT PANEL) OR MATERIAL (E.G., CARPETING). 10. Add the full four (4) fluid ounces (1 bottle) of Motorcraft A/C Cooling Coil Coating (YN-29) to the Rotunda A/C Disodorizer Sprayer (Rotunda 164-R4700). For effective treatment, use the full four (4) fluid ounces on one vehicle application. Insert the A/C Disodorizer sprayer nozzle into the opening in the evaporator case and direct toward the face of the evaporator core. Spray Motorcraft A/C Cooling Coil Coating until empty. 11. Reinstall and reconnect blower motor resistor and blower motor. 12. Repeat Steps 6, 7, and 8 to cure the Cooling Coil Coating. 13. Reconnect A/C cycling switch. Air Inlet Vacuum Motor Bleed Valve Tee Installation 1. Remove the passenger front air bag. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 501-20B for procedure. 2. Disconnect vacuum line at air inlet door vacuum motor. Install bleed valve tee Part Number 3L8Z-19B888-AA into vacuum line 90 degree connector, and attach vacuum line with the vacuum bleed tee to air inlet door vacuum motor. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 412-04 (Vacuum Control Motor - Outside Air Inlet) for component location. 3. Follow Workshop Manual procedures for reinstalling passenger front air bag. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 03-5-6 > Mar > 03 > A/C - Musty or Mildew Type Odors Technical Service Bulletin # 03-5-6 Date: 030317 A/C - Musty or Mildew Type Odors Article No. 03-5-6 03/17/03 CLIMATE CONTROL - MUSTY OR MILDEW TYPE ODOR FROM CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM FORD: 2001-2003 ESCAPE ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a musty and/or mildew type odor coming from the climate control system. This odor is caused by mildew-type fungi growth in the A/C evaporator. It is most noticeable when the A/C is first turned on. ACTION Apply Motorcraft A/C Cooling Coil Coating to the A/C system, which encapsulates the mildew to help reduce odors. Install air inlet vacuum motor bleed valve, which operates the recirculation/fresh air door to default to fresh mode when the vehicle is parked to dry out the evaporator core. Refer to the following Service Procedure for details. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 030506A Apply Motorcraft A/C 1.5 Hrs. Cooling Coil Coating To The A/C System Then Install Air Inlet Vacuum Motor Bleed Valve DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19B55 53 OASIS CODES: 208000, 208300, 208999 Disclaimer Odor Service Tips Types Of Odors, Their Sources And Treatments There are typically four (4) types of objectionable odors found in a vehicle, they are: ^ Chemical odors ^ Environmental odors ^ Microbiological odors ^ Human and other interior-generated odors Odors can be described in a number of ways: ^ Musty ^ Mildew Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 03-5-6 > Mar > 03 > A/C - Musty or Mildew Type Odors > Page 7421 ^ Fishy ^ Sweet ^ Burning ^ Chemical ^ Fuel ^ Oil ^ Exhaust ^ Wet cement ^ Urine ^ Tar ^ Fragrance ^ Body odor Chemical odors: ^ Coolant: sweet smell ^ Fuel: gasoline or diesel fuel smell ^ Oil: oil type or burning smell ^ Power Steering Fluid: oil type or burning smell ^ Transmission Fluid: oil type or burning smell ^ Washer Fluid: alcohol type smell ^ Gear Lube: garlic/sulphur smell ^ Refrigerant/Oil: ether type smell ^ Carpet/Trim Adhesives: fishy, urine, or sweet smell ^ Evaporator Core Coating: wet cement type smell Environmental odors: ^ Exhaust: exhaust, fuel, burning type smell ^ Industrial Pollutants: all types of smells ^ Dust: musty, mildew, wet cement type smell ^ Pollen: sweet smell ^ Tobacco: burning, tar smell Microbiological odors: Microbial growth supported by warm temperatures and moisture may occur on: ^ Foam Seals: musty, mildew smell ^ Rubber Seals: musty, mildew smell Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 03-5-6 > Mar > 03 > A/C - Musty or Mildew Type Odors > Page 7422 ^ Adhesives: musty, mildew smell ^ Standing Water: musty, mildew smell ^ Water Soaked Carpet/Trim: musty, mildew smell Human and other interior-generated odors: ^ Secretion From The Human Body: body odors ^ Perfuming Agents: sweet or fragrance smell ^ Dirty Clothes, Shoes, Socks: musty, mildew, body odors ^ Food/Beverage: sweet, musty, mildew, fishy smell The first step in diagnosing an odor concern is to verify the concern. To verify an odor you must determine when and under what circumstances the odor occurs and what type of odor it is. Chemical odors are usually constant regardless of A/C setting and can be enhanced by A/C system operation. Most chemical odors are caused by fluid leaks and some are caused by improperly cured carpet and trim adhesives or evaporator core coatings. Environmental odors usually occur for a short time and go away after the vehicle has passed through the affected area. These odors are usually only detected when a window is open or the A/C system is operating in a function that allows outside air to enter the vehicle. Microbiological odors, if in the A/C system, usually last for about 30 seconds when first turned on and will be detected in both Max and Normal A/C. Microbiological odors occurring elsewhere such as from standing water in doors or kick panels or wet carpeting may last indefinitely and will be more intense in Max A/C. Microbiological odors will not occur at temperatures below 50° F (10° C). Human and other interior-generated odors occur while the source is present and may linger for a short time after removal. These odors can be more noticeable during operation of the A/C system. They can be detected in the outside air position and may be more noticeable in recirculation mode. The first step in getting rid of odors is to find the source of the odor. Once the source is found, it must be removed and the affected area cleaned or treated. Chemical odors can be removed by repairing or replacing the component that causes the odor and then cleaning any residue that may have accumulated from the component failure. Environmental odors usually cannot be removed due to the fact that they occur from external sources and are an everyday occurrence. They can, however, be minimized by switching to Max A/C or recirculation mode. Microbiological odors can be eliminated by removing the source and then treating the affected area. Standing water must be allowed to drain and dry out. A/C systems may be treated by using Motorcraft A/C Cooling Coil Coating (YN-29), or equivalent meeting Ford specification (WSS-M99B187-A) as described in the Service Procedure in this article. Human and other interior-generated odors can be eliminated by removing the source and cleaning the affected area. A/C Odor Treatment Procedure 1. Try to reasonably rule out any other source for the odor. Check the carpet on the passenger side for signs of being wet. Continue diagnosis if water is found on carpet and repair as needed. Check the blower motor and cover for signs of moisture. This may be as a result of water bypassing the cowl baffling system that prevents rain intrusion. 2. Remove the engine side fasteners for the plenum cover. This will allow access to the Cowl Top Panel - Water RH. Remove this and inspect the air inlet screen. Use a shop vacuum if there is debris present. This debris may work its way into the evaporator case and act as food for the microbes to grow. Re-install the cowl components. 3. Check to see that the evaporator drain tube (or hose) is not plugged or restricted by debris. Clear anything that may be obstructing the drainage of water. 4. Open vehicle windows. 5. Disconnect A/C cycling switch electrical connector. 6. Set the following: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 03-5-6 > Mar > 03 > A/C - Musty or Mildew Type Odors > Page 7423 ^ Function selector switch in A/C mode ^ Temperature at full heat Blower at high speed ^ Engine running at normal operating temperature 7. Run vehicle (Steps 4-6 conditions) for 25 minutes. This will dry out the system. 8. Turn ignition off. 9. Disconnect and remove the blower motor and blower motor resistor by referring to Workshop Manual, Section 412-02 - Blower Motor. (This provides ease of access to the evaporator core and eliminates the possibility of contaminating the blower motor and/or blower motor resister with the Motorcraft A/C Cooling Coil Coating.) NOTE TO AVOID ANY POSSIBLE DAMAGE, DO NOT SPILL OR SPRAY THIS PRODUCT ON ANY INTERIOR SURFACE (E.G., INSTRUMENT PANEL) OR MATERIAL (E.G., CARPETING). 10. Add the full four (4) fluid ounces (1 bottle) of Motorcraft A/C Cooling Coil Coating (YN-29) to the Rotunda A/C Disodorizer Sprayer (Rotunda 164-R4700). For effective treatment, use the full four (4) fluid ounces on one vehicle application. Insert the A/C Disodorizer sprayer nozzle into the opening in the evaporator case and direct toward the face of the evaporator core. Spray Motorcraft A/C Cooling Coil Coating until empty. 11. Reinstall and reconnect blower motor resistor and blower motor. 12. Repeat Steps 6, 7, and 8 to cure the Cooling Coil Coating. 13. Reconnect A/C cycling switch. Air Inlet Vacuum Motor Bleed Valve Tee Installation 1. Remove the passenger front air bag. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 501-20B for procedure. 2. Disconnect vacuum line at air inlet door vacuum motor. Install bleed valve tee Part Number 3L8Z-19B888-AA into vacuum line 90 degree connector, and attach vacuum line with the vacuum bleed tee to air inlet door vacuum motor. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 412-04 (Vacuum Control Motor - Outside Air Inlet) for component location. 3. Follow Workshop Manual procedures for reinstalling passenger front air bag. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7424 Evaporator Core: Locations Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7425 Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7426 Evaporator Core: Description and Operation NOTE: Installation of a new suction accumulator is not necessary when repairing the air conditioning system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed A/C component or damage to the suction accumulator. The A/C evaporator housing contains the A/C evaporator core. The A/C evaporator core is the plate/fin type with a unique refrigerant flow path. ^ A mixture of refrigerant and oil enters the bottom of the A/C evaporator core through the A/C evaporator core inlet tube and is routed so it flows through the partitioned first four plate/fin sections. ^ The next four plate/fin sections are partitioned to force the refrigerant to flow toward the other end of the A/C evaporator core. ^ The next five plate/fin sections are partitioned to force the refrigerant to flow toward the bottom of the A/C evaporator core. ^ Refrigerant then continues through to the remaining five plate/fin sections and then moves out of the A/C evaporator core through the A/C evaporator core outlet tube. ^ This W-pass flow pattern transfers the flow of refrigerant and oil through the A/C evaporator core. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7427 Evaporator Core: Testing and Inspection ON-VEHICLE LEAK TEST 1. Perform the Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure. 2. Disconnect the suspect A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core from the A/C system. NOTE: DO NOT leak test an A/C evaporator core with the suction accumulator/drier attached to the core tubes. 3. Clean the spring lock couplings. 4. Connect the appropriate test fittings from the A/C Test Fitting Set to the evaporator or condenser tube connections. 5. Connect the red and blue hoses from the manifold gauge set to the test fittings on the A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core. Connect the yellow hose to a known good vacuum pump. NOTE: The automatic shut-off valves on some gauge set hoses do not open when connected to the test fittings. If available, use hoses without shut-off valves. If hoses with shut-off valves are used, make sure the valve opens when attached to the test fittings or install an adapter which will activate the valve. The test is not valid if the shut-off valve does not open. 6. Open both gauge set valves and start the vacuum pump. Allow the vacuum pump to operate for a minimum of 45 minutes after the gauge set low pressure gauge indicates 101 kPa (30 in-Hg). The 45-minute evacuation is necessary to remove any refrigerant from oil left in the A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core. If the refrigerant is not completely removed from the oil, outgassing will degrade the vacuum and appear as a refrigerant leak. 7. If the low pressure gauge reading will not drop to 101 kPa (30 in-Hg) when the valves on the gauge and manifold set are open and the vacuum pump is operating, close the gauge set valves and observe the low pressure gauge. If the pressure rises rapidly to zero, a large leak is indicated. Recheck the test fitting connections and gauge set connections before installing a new A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core. 8. After evacuating for 45 minutes, close the gauge set valves and stop the vacuum pump. Observe the low pressure gauge; it should remain at the 101 kPa (30 in-Hg) mark. ^ If the low pressure gauge reading rises 34 or more kPa (10 or more in-Hg) of vacuum from the 101 kPa (30 in-Hg) position in 10 minutes, a leak is indicated. ^ If a very small leak is suspected, wait 30 minutes and observe the vacuum gauge. ^ If a small amount of vacuum is lost, operate the vacuum pump with gauge valves open for an additional 30 minutes to remove any remaining refrigerant from the oil in the A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core. Then recheck for loss of vacuum. ^ If a very small leak is suspected, allow the system to sit overnight with vacuum applied and check for vacuum loss. 9. If the A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core does leak, as verified by the above procedure, install a new A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7428 Evaporator Core: Service and Repair REMOVAL NOTE: ^ Installation of a new suction accumulator is not necessary when repairing the air conditioning system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed A/C component or damage to the suction accumulator. ^ If an A/C evaporator core leak is suspected, the A/C evaporator core must be leak tested before it is removed from the vehicle. ^ The evaporator core and evaporator housing must be installed as a complete unit. 1. Remove the A/C evaporator core housing. 2. Transfer, the components from the old evaporator core housing to the new evaporator core housing. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Lubricate the new A/C evaporator core with the correct amount of PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. See: Refrigerant Oil Addition. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7429 Evaporator Core: Tools and Equipment Spring Lock Coupling Disconnect Tool Set Spring Lock Coupling Disconnect Tool Set Disconnect Tool, Spring Lock Coupling Heater Hose Disconnect Tool Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7430 Special Tool(s) Set, A/C Fittings Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information > Locations Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Locations Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Refrigerant System Components, Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information > Locations > Page 7434 Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Refrigerant System Components, Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information > Locations > Page 7435 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information > Locations > Page 7436 Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Service Precautions CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information > Locations > Page 7437 Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Description and Operation A/C Evaporator Core Orifice NOTE: Install a new A/C evaporator core orifice whenever a new A/C compressor is installed. The A/C evaporator core orifice has the following characteristics: ^ color-coded green ^ an orifice diameter of 1.25 mm (0.052 inch) ^ located in the condenser to evaporator line ^ Changes the high-pressure liquid refrigerant into a low-pressure liquid. ^ filter screens located on the inlet and outlet ends of the orifice body ^ The inlet filter screen acts as a strainer for the liquid refrigerant flowing through the A/C evaporator core orifice. ^ O-ring seals on the A/C evaporator core orifice prevent the high-pressure liquid refrigerant from bypassing the A/C evaporator core orifice. ^ Adjustment or repair cannot be made to the A/C evaporator core orifice. A new A/C evaporator core orifice must be installed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information > Locations > Page 7438 Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Service and Repair SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the condenser to evaporator line at the orifice tube. CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture. 2. Engage the special tool onto the A/C evaporator core orifice. 3. Hold the special tool T-handle stationary and rotate the special tool body to remove the A/C evaporator core orifice. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information > Locations > Page 7439 4. If the A/C evaporator core orifice is broken, screw the end of the special tool into the broken A/C evaporator core orifice. 5. Hold the special tool T-handle stationary and rotate the special tool body to remove the broken A/C evaporator core orifice. INSTALLATION 1. Lubricate and install the O-ring seals on the A/C evaporator core orifice. ^ Use PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. 2. Place the A/C evaporator core orifice into the special tool. 3. Using the special tool, insert the A/C evaporator core orifice into the condenser to evaporator line until seated. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information > Locations > Page 7440 4. Remove the special tool. 5. Connect the condenser to evaporator line at the orifice tube. 6. Recharge the A/C system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information > Locations > Page 7441 Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Tools and Equipment Spring Lock Coupling Disconnect Tool Set Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Valve > Component Information > Locations Expansion Valve: Locations For further information regarding this component please refer to: Heating and Air Conditioning; Expansion Block/Orifice Tube. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 7445 Expansion Valve: Service and Repair For further information regarding this component please refer to: Heating and Air Conditioning; Expansion Block/Orifice Tube. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage Heater Core: Customer Interest A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage TSB 06-21-19 10/30/06 HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY) FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250 Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004 F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure. ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have occurred. ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant: a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely due to due to high flow rate - replace the Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 7454 heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference Workshop Manual, Section 412. b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis. Testing For Electrolysis Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system. Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible. 1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable. a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle. b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant. NOTE POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING. c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect battery cables and proceed to Step 2. d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly. e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V. f. Reconnect battery cables. g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant. 2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions. a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine. b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK. d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections. e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper wire to ground. f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test. g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V. h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped. 3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds. a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. b. Crank engine but do not start. c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter. e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm. f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell phone, etc. g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 7455 h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair ground to the accessory just identified. j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts. l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4. m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower motor and any fan motors. n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it up then retest. o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck. NOTE If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor voltage when they are on and when off. CAUTION DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE GROUND PATH. 4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03. NOTE IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18476 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage Heater Core: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage TSB 06-21-19 10/30/06 HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY) FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250 Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004 F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure. ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have occurred. ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant: a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely due to due to high flow rate - replace the Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 7461 heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference Workshop Manual, Section 412. b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis. Testing For Electrolysis Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system. Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible. 1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable. a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle. b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant. NOTE POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING. c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect battery cables and proceed to Step 2. d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly. e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V. f. Reconnect battery cables. g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant. 2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions. a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine. b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK. d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections. e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper wire to ground. f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test. g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V. h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped. 3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds. a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. b. Crank engine but do not start. c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter. e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm. f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell phone, etc. g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 7462 h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair ground to the accessory just identified. j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts. l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4. m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower motor and any fan motors. n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it up then retest. o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck. NOTE If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor voltage when they are on and when off. CAUTION DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE GROUND PATH. 4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03. NOTE IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18476 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Heater Core: Technician Safety Information WARNING: ^ CARBON MONOXIDE IS COLORLESS, ODORLESS AND DANGEROUS. IF IT IS NECESSARY TO OPERATE THE ENGINE WITH THE VEHICLE IN A CLOSED AREA SUCH AS A GARAGE, ALWAYS USE AN EXHAUST COLLECTOR TO VENT THE EXHAUST GASES OUTSIDE THE CLOSED AREA. ^ THE HEATER CORE INLET HOSE WILL BECOME TOO HOT TO HANDLE IF THE SYSTEM IS WORKING CORRECTLY. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 7465 Heater Core: Vehicle Damage Warnings CAUTION: Spring-type clamps are installed as original equipment. Installation and overtightening of non-specification clamps can cause leakage at the heater water hose connection and damage the heater core. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7466 Heater Core: Description and Operation Heater Core The heater core consists of fins and tubes arranged to extract heat from the engine coolant and transfer the heat to air passing through the heater core housing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7467 Heater Core: Testing and Inspection WARNING: CARBON MONOXIDE GAS IS COLORLESS, ODORLESS AND DANGEROUS. IF IT IS NECESSARY TO OPERATE THE ENGINE WITH THE VEHICLE IN A CLOSED AREA SUCH AS A GARAGE, ALWAYS USE AN EXHAUST COLLECTOR TO VENT THE EXHAUST GASES OUTSIDE THE CLOSED AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 1. Inspect for evidence of coolant leakage at the heater water hose to heater core attachments. A coolant leak in the heater water hose could follow the heater core tube to the heater core and appear as a leak in the heater core. CAUTION: Spring-type clamps are installed as original equipment. Installation and overtightening of non-specification clamps can cause leakage at the heater water hose connection and damage the heater core. NOTE: Testing of returned heater cores reveals that a large percentage of heater cores are good and did not require installation of a new heater core. If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be tested by following the Plugged Heater Core Component Test before the Heater Core Pressure Test. Carry out a system inspection by checking the heater system thoroughly. 2. Check the integrity of the heater water hose clamps. Heater Core - Plugged WARNING: THE HEATER CORE INLET HOSE WILL BECOME TOO HOT TO HANDLE IF THE SYSTEM IS WORKING CORRECTLY. 1. Check to see that the engine coolant is at the correct level. 2. Start the engine and turn on the heater 3. When the engine coolant reaches operating temperature, feel the heater core outlet hose to see if it is hot. If it is not hot: ^ the heater core may have an air pocket. ^ the heater core may be plugged, or ^ the thermostat is not working correctly. Heater Core - Pressure Test Use the radiator/heater core pressure tester to carry out the pressure test. 1. Drain the coolant from the cooling system. NOTE: Due to space limitations, a bench test may be necessary for pressure testing. 2. Disconnect the heater water hoses from the heater core. 3. Install a short piece of heater water hose, approximately 101 mm (4 inches) long on each heater core tube. 4. Fill the heater core and heater water hoses with water and install plug BT-7422-B and adapter BT-7422-A from the radiator/heater core pressure tester in the heater water hose ends. Secure the heater water hoses, plug and adapter with hose clamps. 5. Attach the pump and gauge assembly from the radiator/heater core pressure tester to the adapter. 6. Close the bleed valve at the base of the gauge. Pump 241 kPa (35 psi) of air pressure into the heater core. 7. Observe the pressure gauge for a minimum of three minutes. 8. If the pressure drops, check the heater water hose connections to the core tubes for leaks. If the heater water hoses do not leak, remove the heater core from the vehicle and carry out the bench test. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7468 Heater Core - Bench Test 1. Remove the heater core from the vehicle. 2. Drain all of the coolant from the heater core. 3. Connect the 101 mm (4 inch) test heater water hoses with plug and adapter to the core tubes. Then connect the radiator/heater core pressure tester to the adapter. 4. Apply 241 kPa (35 psi) of air pressure to the heater core. Submerge the heater core in water. 5. If a leak is observed, install a new heater core. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7469 Heater Core: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Drain the engine coolant. NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be leak tested before the heater core is removed. 2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core. 3. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to: Body and Frame, Interior Trim, Dashboard/Instrument Panel, Service and Repair, Removal and Installation, See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation 4. Remove the heater blending door levers. 1 Remove the screw for heater blending door. 2 Remove the levers for the blending door. 5. Remove the heater core. 1 Remove the three screws. 2 Remove the cover for the heater core and pull the heater core out of the housing. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. NOTE: Before installing the temperature control cable, make sure the blend door, cable and temperature switch are correctly positioned. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core Case > Component Information > Description and Operation Heater Core Case: Description and Operation The heater core housing contains the following components: ^ heater core ^ air temperature control door ^ panel air flow control door ^ defrost/floor air flow control door Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7473 Heater Core Case: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core. 3. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to: Body and Frame, Interior Trim, Dashboard/Instrument Panel, Service and Repair, Removal and Installation, See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation 4. If equipped with A/C, remove the A/C evaporator core housing. 5. Remove the heater core housing. 1 Remove the heater core housing retaining nuts. 2 Carefully remove the heater core housing to avoid spilling engine coolant in the passenger area. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage Heater Hose: Customer Interest A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage TSB 06-21-19 10/30/06 HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY) FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250 Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004 F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure. ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have occurred. ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant: a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely due to due to high flow rate - replace the Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 7482 heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference Workshop Manual, Section 412. b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis. Testing For Electrolysis Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system. Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible. 1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable. a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle. b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant. NOTE POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING. c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect battery cables and proceed to Step 2. d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly. e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V. f. Reconnect battery cables. g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant. 2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions. a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine. b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK. d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections. e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper wire to ground. f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test. g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V. h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped. 3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds. a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. b. Crank engine but do not start. c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter. e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm. f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell phone, etc. g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 7483 h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair ground to the accessory just identified. j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts. l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4. m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower motor and any fan motors. n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it up then retest. o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck. NOTE If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor voltage when they are on and when off. CAUTION DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE GROUND PATH. 4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03. NOTE IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18476 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage Heater Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage TSB 06-21-19 10/30/06 HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY) FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250 Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004 F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure. ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have occurred. ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant: a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely due to due to high flow rate - replace the Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 7489 heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference Workshop Manual, Section 412. b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis. Testing For Electrolysis Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system. Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible. 1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable. a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle. b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant. NOTE POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING. c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect battery cables and proceed to Step 2. d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly. e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V. f. Reconnect battery cables. g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant. 2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions. a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine. b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK. d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections. e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper wire to ground. f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test. g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V. h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped. 3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds. a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. b. Crank engine but do not start. c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter. e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm. f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell phone, etc. g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 7490 h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair ground to the accessory just identified. j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts. l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4. m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower motor and any fan motors. n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it up then retest. o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck. NOTE If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor voltage when they are on and when off. CAUTION DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE GROUND PATH. 4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03. NOTE IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18476 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises TSB 09-6-5 04/06/09 NOISE - FRONT STRUT AREA FORD: 2001-2009 Escape 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid ISSUE Some 2001-2009 Escape, 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a pop, rub, grunt, squeak, and/or creak noise from the front strut area during slow, lock-to-lock turns such as parking maneuvers. Vehicles built on or before 1/13/2009 may also exhibit a clunk, crunch, thump, and/or knocking noise from the front strut area while driving over a series of bumps and/or rough roads. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Using chassis ears on the front strut mounts is pop, rub, grunt, squeak, creak, clunk, crunch, thump, and/or knocking noise present from the front strut area during slow parking lot type maneuvers? a. No - Procedure does not apply, proceed with normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00 diagnostics. b. Yes on turns - Boot may be binding, go to Step 2 Dust Boot Greasing Procedure. c. Yes over bumps (built on or before 1/13/2009) - Go to Step 3 Dust Boot Replacement Procedure and install new dust boot designed for this concern. d. Yes over bumps (built after 1/13/09) - Procedure does not apply. Proceed with normal WSM, Section 204-00 diagnostics. 2. Dust Boot Greasing Procedure. a. Raise the vehicle per WSM, Section 100-02. b. Reach through the spring and pull the strut dust boot and jounce bumper assembly straight down, out of the upper spring seat. c. Apply Motorcraft(R) Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1) (1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around the rod. (2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust cover. d. Raise dust cover so that jounce bumper is accessible and apply 360 degrees to the jounce bumper itself. e. Slide the dust cover and jounce bumper upward into its original location on the strut. f. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle. 3. Dust Boot Replacement Procedure (vehicles built on/before 1/13/2009). a. Remove front strut per WSM, Section 204-01. b. Disassemble front strut and replace dust boot with latest level part per WSM, Section 204-01. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 7496 C. Apply Motorcraft Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1) (1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around the rod. (2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust boot. (3) Apply 360 degrees to the jounce bumper itself. d. Assemble front strut and install per WSM, Section 204-01. e. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090605A 2001-2009 Escape, 0.7 Hr. 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Apply Grease Following Service Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears and Road Test (Do Not Use With 1007D, 18124A) 090605B 2001-2009 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Strut Dust Boots, Apply Grease Following Service Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears and Road Test Can Be Claimed With Operations C And D (Do Not Use With 1007D, 18124A) 090605C 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Check Caster, Camber and, Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation B And D (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) 090605D 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Correct Caster, Camber And Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 7497 Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation B And C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18A179 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 7503 C. Apply Motorcraft Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1) (1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around the rod. (2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust boot. (3) Apply 360 degrees to the jounce bumper itself. d. Assemble front strut and install per WSM, Section 204-01. e. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090605A 2001-2009 Escape, 0.7 Hr. 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Apply Grease Following Service Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears and Road Test (Do Not Use With 1007D, 18124A) 090605B 2001-2009 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Strut Dust Boots, Apply Grease Following Service Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears and Road Test Can Be Claimed With Operations C And D (Do Not Use With 1007D, 18124A) 090605C 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Check Caster, Camber and, Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation B And D (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) 090605D 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Correct Caster, Camber And Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 7504 Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation B And C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18A179 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7505 Heater Hose: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core. 3. Disconnect the heater hose from the hose connection. 4. Remove the RH front wheel. 5. Disconnect the heater hose from the hose connection. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Lubricate the hoses with Rubber Suspension Insulator Lube E25Y-19553-A or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESF-M99B112-A. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC > Component Information > Locations High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC: Locations Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7509 Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7510 High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC: Description and Operation An A/C compressor pressure relief valve is incorporated in the compressor A/C manifold and tube to: ^ relieve unusually high refrigerant system discharge pressure buildups of (3,792 kPa [550 psi] and above). ^ prevent damage to the A/C compressor and other system components. ^ avoid total refrigerant loss by closing after the excessive pressure has been relieved. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7511 High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Perform the Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Remove the RH splash shield. 4. If equipped, disconnect the engine block heater electrical connector. 5. Remove the A/C compressor pressure relief valve. NOTE: Vehicles with the 2.0L Zetec engine shown, vehicles with the 3.0L (4V) engine similar. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service Precautions Hose/Line HVAC: Service Precautions CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7515 Hose/Line HVAC: Description and Operation NOTE: Installation of a new suction accumulator is not necessary when repairing the air conditioning system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the suction accumulator. The condenser to evaporator line contains high-pressure liquid refrigerant upstream of the A/C evaporator core orifice. The A/C manifold and tube assembly is attached to the A/C compressor with O-ring seals. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7516 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the A/C pressure cut-off switch. 2. Remove the evaporator core orifice. 3. Disconnect the condenser to evaporator line from the A/C evaporator core. CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture. 4. Remove the front bumper cover. 5. Remove the nut and disconnect the condenser to evaporator line from the A/C condenser core and remove the condenser to evaporator line. CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7517 Spring Lock Coupling Disconnect Tool Set Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Description and Operation Receiver Dryer: Description and Operation For further information regarding this component and the system that it is part of, please refer to: Accumulator HVAC. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7521 Receiver Dryer: Service and Repair For further information regarding this component and the system that it is part of, please refer to: Accumulator HVAC. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications Capacity ............................................................................................................................................... .................................................. 850 kg (1 lb, 14 oz) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 7526 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications A/C Refrigerant .................................................................................................................................... ....................................... R-134a Refrigerant YN-19 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7527 Refrigerant: Diagrams Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7528 Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service Precautions > Environmental Impact Information Refrigerant: Environmental Impact Information The Ozone Layer A thin layer of ozone molecules, located 10 to 30 miles above the earth, form a protective cover by absorbing a portion of the ultraviolet (UV) radiation emitted from the Sun. Ozone Depletion Scientific research performed over the past 15 years links the release of chlorofluorocarbons (CFC)s, also know by the trade name Freon) into the atmosphere to ozone depletion. When CFCs are released into the atmosphere, they eventually reach the ozone layer located in the stratosphere where they react with and destroy ozone molecules. Harmful Effects Ozone depletion and the corresponding increase in UV radiation has been shown to lead to higher incidents of cancer as well as global warming. When viewed from a global perspective, ozone depletion holds an enormous potential for damage. Upper Level Vs. Ground Level Ozone Confusion often arises when we hear about the necessity of the ozone layer and ground level ozone. The ozone layer existing high above the earth is beneficial but the same compound, when located at ground level, is harmful to humans, animals, crops and vegetation. Ground level ozone is a component of smog and forms when hydrocarbons (HC) react with nitrogen oxides (NOx) in the presence of sunlight and heat. Montreal Protocol In response to the growing body of evidence demonstrating the detrimental effects of (CFC)s, 24 countries and the European community met in Montreal, Canada, in 1987 to establish standards for the control of (CFC)s. Since that time, a total of 132 countries have become signatories to this agreement leading to an end of production of R12 in December, 1995, in all developed countries. As established by the Montreal Protocol, R12 production in developed countries has ceased. Clean Air Act The United States Congress, acting in response to the Montreal Protocol, banned production of (CFC)s by the year 2000. Congress also amended the Clean Air Act in an effort to control both the production and use of (CFC)s for refrigerant applications including mobile vehicle air conditioning systems. Additional Information Sources For more complete and detailed explanations of the above policies, please refer to: http://www.epa.gov/ozone/ Technician Certification Organizations providing technician refrigerant recovery and recycling certification include: National Institute for Automotive Service Excellence (ASE) 13505 Dulles Technology Drive, Suite 2 Herndon, VA 22071-3421 Phone: (703) 713-3800 Fax: (703) 713-0727 http://www.asecert.org/ International Mobile Air Conditioning Association (IMACA) P.O. Box 9000 Fort Worth, TX 76147-2000 Phone: (817) 732-4600 Fax: (817) 732-9610 http://www.imaca.org/ Mobile Air Conditioning Society (MACS) Worldwide P.O. Box 100 East Greenville, PA 18041 Phone: 215-679-2220 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service Precautions > Environmental Impact Information > Page 7531 Fax: 215-541-4635 http://www.macsw.org/ Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service Precautions > Environmental Impact Information > Page 7532 Refrigerant: Technician Safety Information WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE INJURY, THE AIR BAG SYSTEM BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING ANY CLIMATE CONTROL COMPONENTS. TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY POSITIVE CABLE AND WAIT ONE MINUTE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ CARBON MONOXIDE IS COLORLESS, ODORLESS AND DANGEROUS. IF IT IS NECESSARY TO OPERATE THE ENGINE WITH VEHICLE IN A CLOSED AREA SUCH AS A GARAGE, ALWAYS USE AN EXHAUST COLLECTOR TO VENT THE EXHAUST GASES OUTSIDE THE CLOSED AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ R-134A IS CLASSIFIED AS A SAFE REFRIGERANT, BUT MISUSE CAN MAKE IT DANGEROUS. THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS MUST BE OBSERVED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GOGGLES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM. ^ AVOID CONTACT WITH LIQUID REFRIGERANT R-134A. R-134A VAPORIZES AT APPROXIMATELY -25°C (-13°F) UNDER ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE AND IT WILL FREEZE SKIN TISSUE. ^ NEVER ALLOW REFRIGERANT R-134A GAS TO ESCAPE IN QUANTITY IN AN OCCUPIED SPACE. R-134A IS NON-TOXIC, BUT IT WILL DISPLACE THE OXYGEN NEEDED TO SUPPORT LIFE. ^ DO NOT ALLOW ANY PORTION OF THE CHARGED AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM TO BECOME TOO HOT. THE PRESSURE IN AN AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM RISES AS THE TEMPERATURE RISES AND TEMPERATURES OF APPROXIMATELY 85°C (185°F) CAN BE DANGEROUS. ^ ALLOW THE ENGINE TO COOL SUFFICIENTLY PRIOR TO CARRYING OUT MAINTENANCE OR SERIOUS BURNS AND INJURY CAN OCCUR. ^ USE EXTREME CARE AND OBSERVE ALL SAFETY AND SERVICE PRECAUTIONS RELATED TO THE USE OF REFRIGERANTS. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ DUE TO REFRIGERANT HAZARDS, ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GOGGLES AND NON-PENETRABLE GLOVES WHEN WORKING ON OR FLUSHING A/C SYSTEMS. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service Precautions > Environmental Impact Information > Page 7533 Refrigerant: Vehicle Damage Warnings CAUTION: - To avoid damaging the vehicle or A/C components, the following precautions must be observed: ^ The A/C refrigerant of all vehicles must be identified and analyzed prior to refrigerant charging. Failure to do so can contaminate the shop bulk refrigerant and other vehicles. ^ Do not add R-12 refrigerant to an A/C system that requires the use of R-134a refrigerant. These two types of refrigerant must never be mixed. Doing so can damage the A/C system. ^ Charge the A/C system with the engine running only at the low-pressure side to prevent refrigerant slugging from damaging the A/C compressor. ^ Use only R-134a refrigerant. Due to environmental concerns, when the air conditioning system is drained, the refrigerant must be collected using refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment. R-134a must never be removed without the appropriate equipment or released into the atmosphere. Use of a recovery machine dedicated to R-134a is necessary to reduce the possibility of oil and refrigerant incompatibility concerns. Refer to the instructions provided by the equipment manufacturer when removing refrigerant from or charging the air conditioning system. ^ Refrigerant R-134a must not be mixed with air for leak testing or used with air for any other purpose above atmospheric pressure. R-134a is combustible when mixed with high concentrations of air and at higher pressures. ^ A number of manufacturers are producing refrigerant products that are described as direct substitutes for refrigerant R-134a. The use of any unauthorized substitute refrigerant can severely damage the A/C components. If repair is necessary, use only new or recycled refrigerant R-134a. - To avoid contamination of the A/C system: ^ Keep service tools and the work area clean. ^ Never open or loosen a connection before discharging the system. ^ When loosening a connection, if any residual pressure is evident, allow it to leak out before opening the fitting. ^ Evacuate a system that has been opened to install a new component or a system that has discharged through leakage before charging. ^ Seal open fittings with a cap or plug immediately after disconnecting a component from the system. ^ Clean the outside of the fittings thoroughly before disconnecting a component from the system. ^ Do not remove the sealing caps from a new component until ready to install. ^ Refrigerant oil will absorb moisture from the atmosphere if left uncapped. Do not open an oil container until ready to use, and install the cap immediately after using. Store the oil in a clean, moisture-free container. ^ Install a new O-ring seal before connecting an open fitting. Coat the fitting and O-ring seal with refrigerant oil before connecting. ^ When installing a refrigerant line, avoid sharp bends. Position the line away from the exhaust or any sharp edges that can chafe the line. ^ Tighten threaded fittings only to specifications. The steel and aluminum fittings used in the refrigerant system will not tolerate overtightening. ^ When disconnecting a fitting, use a wrench on both halves of the fitting to prevent twisting of the refrigerant lines or tubes. ^ Do not open a refrigerant system or uncap a new component unless it is as close as possible to room temperature. This will prevent condensation from forming inside a component that is cooler than the surrounding air. - Good ventilation is necessary in the area where electronic A/C leak testing is to be carried out. If the surrounding air is contaminated with refrigerant gas, the leak detector will indicate this gas all the time. Odors from other chemicals such as antifreeze, diesel fuel, disc brake cleaner, or other cleaning solvents can cause the same problem. A fan, even in a well-ventilated area, is very helpful in removing small traces of contamination from the air that might affect the leak detector. - A/C Refrigerant Analyzer must be used before the recovery of any vehicle's A/C refrigerant. Failure to do so puts the shop's bulk refrigerant at risk of contamination. If the vehicle's A/C refrigerant is contaminated, refer the customer to the service facility that carried out the last A/C service. If the customer wishes to pay the additional cost, use the A/C recovery equipment that is designated for recovering contaminated A/C refrigerant. All contaminated A/C refrigerant must be disposed of as hazardous waste. For all equipment, follow the equipment manufacturer's procedures and instructions. - Suction accumulator/drier, muffler, hoses, thermal expansion valve, and fixed orifice tube should be removed when flushing the A/C system. Internal plumbing of these devices makes it impossible to correctly remove any residual-flushing agent. Except for the hoses, these components are typically discarded after A/C system contamination. Hoses can normally be reused unless they are clogged with foreign material. The 3.785 liters (1 gallon) of A/C Systems Flushing Solvent F4AZ-19579-A and FL1-A filter used in A/C Flusher 219-00001 are intended for use on one vehicle only. They may be used to flush both the A/C condenser core and the A/C evaporator core on an individual vehicle, but under no circumstances should they be used on more than one vehicle. - During normal A/C operation, oil is circulated through the system with the refrigerant, and a small amount is retained in each component. If certain components of the system are removed for new installation, some of the refrigerant oil will go with the component. To maintain the original total oil charge, it is necessary to compensate for the oil lost by adding oil to the system with the new part. - If contaminated refrigerant is detected, DO NOT recover the refrigerant into your recovery/recycling equipment. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) 1. Prior to recovering or charging the refrigerant system, you must verify the purity of the refrigerant. 2. Connect the R-134a A/C Refrigerant Center to the low and high pressure service gauge port valves. NOTE: Some R-134a service centers require the use of an A/C manifold gauge set. 3. Recover the refrigerant from the system following the operating instructions provided by the equipment manufacturer. 4. Once the service center has recovered the vehicle A/C system refrigerant, close the service center inlet valve (if so equipped). Then switch off the power supply. 5. Allow the vehicle A/C system to remain closed for about two minutes. Observe the system vacuum level as shown on the gauge. If the pressure does not rise, disconnect the recovery station hose(s). 6. If the system pressure rises, repeat Steps 2 through 5 until the vacuum level remains stable for two minutes. 7. Carry out the required repairs, then evacuate and recharge the A/C system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 7536 Refrigerant: Service and Repair Identifying Refrigerants Delux A/C Refrigerant Analyzer SPECIAL TOOL(S) 1. Follow the instructions included with the refrigerant analyzer to obtain the sample for testing. NOTE: Prior to recovering or charging the refrigerant system, you must use an A/C refrigerant analyzer to identify gas samples taken directly from the refrigeration system or storage containers. 2. The analyzer will display one of the following: ^ A green "PASS" Light Emitting Diode (LED) will light if the purity of the R-134, R-12 or the R-22 is better than 98% by weight. ^ A red "FAIL" LED will light if the purity of the gases does not meet the 98% purity standard. ^ A red "FAIL" LED and "HYDROCARBON" light will illuminate and a horn will sound if a hydrocarbon is detected above 5%. This will alert the user of potential hazards. 3. If contaminated refrigerant is detected, DO NOT recover the refrigerant into your recovery/recycling equipment. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 7537 Refrigerant: Service and Repair Handling of Contaminated Refrigerants 1. Recover the contaminated refrigerant using suitable recovery-only equipment designed for capturing and storing contaminated refrigerant. ^ This equipment must only be used to recover contaminated refrigerant to prevent the spread to other vehicles. ^ If this equipment is not available, contact an A/C service facility in your area with the correct equipment to carry out this service. CAUTION: If contaminated refrigerant is detected, DO NOT recover the refrigerant into your recovery/recycling equipment. 2. Determine and correct the cause of the customer's initial concern. 3. Remove the suction accumulator/drier. NOTE: ^ Residual refrigerant oil in the suction accumulator/drier must be drained and measured for correct oil system matching. ^ The suction accumulator/drier cannot be cleaned and a new suction accumulator/drier must be installed. 4. Clean the A/C evaporator core and the A/C condenser core by flushing. 5. Install the new suction accumulator/drier. 6. Correctly oil match the system. 7. Evacuate and charge the system. 8. Dispose of contaminated refrigerant according to all federal, state and local regulations. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 7538 Refrigerant: Service and Repair Evacuation and Charging Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) 1. Prior to charging the refrigerant system, you must verify the purity of the refrigerant. See: Service and Repair/Identifying Refrigerants 2. Connect the R-134a A/C Refrigerant Center to the low and high pressure service gauge port valves. NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a charging station to carry out evacuation and charging of the refrigerant system. If a charging station is not available, system charging may be accomplished using a separate vacuum pump, charging cylinder, and manifold gauge set. 3. Evacuate the system until the low-pressure gauge reads at least 99.4 kPa (29.5 in-Hg) (vacuum) and as close to 101.1 kPa (30 in-Hg) as possible. Continue to operate the vacuum pump for a minimum of 45 minutes. 4. Turn off the evacuation pump. Observe the low-pressure gauge for five minutes to make sure that the system vacuum is held. If vacuum is not held for five minutes, leak test the system, service the leaks, and evacuate the system again. 5. Correctly oil match the system to verify that the correct amount of refrigerant oil is present in the system. 6. Charge the system with the specified weight of refrigerant and refrigerant oil. 7. When no more refrigerant is being drawn into the system, start the engine and select MAX A/C operation. Adjust the blower motor speed to maximum and allow the remaining refrigerant to be drawn into the system. Continue to add refrigerant into the system until the specified weight of R-134a has been added. Close the charging cylinder valve and allow the system to pull any remaining refrigerant from the hose. When the suction pressure drops to approximately 207 kPa (30 psi), close the charging hose valve. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 7539 Refrigerant: Service and Repair Leak Detection Electronic Leak Detection Refrigerent Leak Detector SPECIAL TOOL(S) CAUTION: Good ventilation is necessary in the area where electronic A/C leak testing is to be carried out. If the surrounding air is contaminated with refrigerant gas, the leak detector will indicate this gas all the time. Odors from other chemicals such as antifreeze, diesel fuel, disc brake cleaner, or other cleaning solvents can cause the same problem. A fan, even in a well-ventilated area, is very helpful in removing small traces of contamination from the air that might affect the leak detector. 1. Leak test the refrigerant system using the Refrigerant Leak Detector. Follow instructions included with leak detector for handling and operation techniques. NOTE: System pressure should be between 413-551 kPa (60-80 psi) at 24°C (75°F) with the engine off. 2. If a leak is found, recover the refrigerant and repair the system. Tracer Dye Leak Detection Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 7540 Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) NOTE: Ford Motor Company vehicles are produced with R-134a Leak Tracer Dye incorporated into the A/C system. The location of leaks can be pinpointed by the bright yellow-green glow of the tracer dye. Since more than one leak can exist, always inspect each component. 1. Check for leaks using a 120-watt UV spot lamp. 2. Scan all components, fittings and lines of the A/C system. 3. After the leak is repaired, remove any traces of leak dye with a general purpose oil solvent. 4. Verify the repair by operating the system for a short time and inspecting with the UV spot lamp. Tracer Dye Injection NOTE: System pressure should be between 413-551 kPa (60-80 psi) at 24°C (75°F) with the engine off. 1. Install the Manifold Gauge Set or a recovery station. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 7541 2. Turn the valve on the fluorescent tracer dye injector all the way to the left to close the valve. 3. Fill the reservoir with 7 ml (0.25 ounce) of R-134a Fluorescent Tracer Dye 164-R3712. 4. Install the injector between the low-side quick disconnect and the vehicle low-pressure service gauge port valve. 5. Open all quick disconnect valves and charge the refrigerant system. 6. When system charging is complete, recover the refrigerant from the dye injector. 7. Remove the dye injector from the low-side quick disconnect valve. NOTE: Only connect the dye-injector to the Manifold Gauge Set or the charging/recovery station when dye is to be injected. The dye injector has a one-way check valve that will prevent system refrigerant recovery and evacuation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications General Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 7546 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil R-134a Systems ................................................................................................................... F7AZ-19589-DA (Motorcraft YN-12-C) WSH-M1C231-B Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7547 Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair Refrigerant Oil Addition CAUTION: During normal A/C operation, oil is circulated through the system with the refrigerant, and a small amount is retained in each component. If certain components of the system are removed for new installation, some of the refrigerant oil will go with the component. To maintain the original total oil charge, it is necessary to compensate for the oil lost by adding oil to the system with the new part. 1. Rotate the A/C compressor shaft six to eight revolutions while collecting oil in a clean measuring device. ^ If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is between 85-142 ml (3-5 ounces), pour the same amount plus 30 ml (1 ounce) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B into the new A/C compressor. ^ If the amount of oil that was removed from the old A/C compressor is greater than 142 ml (5 ounces), pour the same amount drained of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B into the new A/C compressor. ^ If the amount of oil that was removed from the old A/C compressor is less than 85 ml (3 ounces), pour 85 ml (3 ounces) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B into the new A/C compressor. NOTE: Service A/C compressors are shipped without compressor oil. 2. For the suction accumulator/drier, drill two 1/2 inch holes in the suction accumulator/drier cylinder and drain the oil into a calibrated container. ^ Add a quantity of new oil to match that drained from the old suction accumulator/drier plus 60 ml (2 ounces) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. 3. For the A/C evaporator core, add 89 ml (3 ounces) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B to the suction accumulator/drier inlet tube. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7548 4. For the A/C condenser core, add 30 ml (1 ounce) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B to the A/C condenser core or the suction accumulator/drier inlet tube. 5. Add 60 ml (2 ounces) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B to the suction accumulator/drier inlet tube when carrying out each of the following repairs: ^ installation of a new A/C evaporator core orifice ^ installation of a new A/C compressor pressure relief valve ^ installation of a new refrigerant line ^ repair of an O-ring seal leak ^ repair of a charge port leak 6. Installation of new components that do not require discharge of refrigerant and resulting oil loss, such as the A/C cycling switch and the A/C pressure transducer, do not require additional oil. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations Electrical Components Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7552 Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7553 Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Compressor Cut-Off/Cycling Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Compressor Cut-Off/Cycling Switch > Page 7556 Dual Pressure Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation A/C Cycling Switch A/C Cycling Switch The A/C cycling switch is mounted on a Schrader valve-type fitting on the top of the suction accumulator. ^ A valve depressor, located inside the threaded end of the A/C cycling switch, presses in on the Schrader valve stem. ^ This allows the suction pressure inside the suction accumulator to control the operation of the A/C cycling switch. ^ The electrical switch contacts open when the suction pressure drops to 152-193 kPa (22-28 psi). ^ The contacts close when the suction pressure rises to 276-324 kPa (40-47 psi). ^ When the A/C cycling switch contacts close, the signal to energize the A/C clutch is sent to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) which energizes the A/C relay and supplies B+ voltage to the A/C clutch field coil. ^ When the A/C cycling switch contacts open, the A/C clutch field coil is deenergized and compressor operation stops. ^ The A/C cycling switch will control the A/C evaporator core pressure at a point where the plate/fin surface temperature will be maintained slightly above freezing. ^ This prevents icing of the A/C evaporator core and blockage of airflow. ^ It is not necessary to discharge the refrigerant system to remove the A/C cycling switch. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch > Page 7559 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Cycling Switch PCM Inputs AIR CONDITIONING CYCLING SWITCH The Air Conditioning (A/C) cycling switch may be wired to either the A/C Cycling Switch (ACCS) or ACPSW Powertrain Control Module (PCM) input. When the A/C cycling switch opens, the PCM will turn off the Air Conditioning (A/C) clutch For information on the specific function of the A/C cycling switch, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning. The A/C Cycling Switch (ACCS) circuit to the PCM provides a voltage signal which indicates when the A/C is requested. When the A/C demand switch is turned on, and both the A/C cycling switch and the high pressure contacts of the A/C high pressure switch (if equipped and in circuit) are closed, voltage is supplied to the ACCS circuit at the PCM. Refer to Vehicle/Diagrams for vehicle specific wiring. If the ACCS signal is not received by the PCM, the PCM circuit will not allow the A/C to operate. For additional information, refer to PCM outputs, wide open throttle air conditioning cutoff. See: Powertrain Management/Description and Operation/PCM Outputs NOTE: Some applications do not have a dedicated (separate) input to the PCM indicating that A/C is requested. This information is received by the PCM through the BUS + and BUS - Standard Corporate Protocol (SCP) communication. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch > Page 7560 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning High Pressure Switch The A/C pressure cut-off switch is used to interrupt A/C compressor operation in the event of high system discharge pressures. ^ The A/C pressure cut-off switch is mounted on a Schrader valve-type fitting on the high pressure side of the condenser to evaporator line. ^ A valve depressor, located inside the threaded end of the A/C pressure cut-off switch, is used to monitor the compressor discharge pressure. ^ It is not necessary to discharge the refrigerant system to remove the A/C pressure cut-off switch. ^ The A/C pressure cut-off switch has two sets of contacts. One electrical contact is normally closed. ^ When the compressor discharge pressure rises to approximately 3,103 kPa (450 psi), the switch contacts open, disengaging the A/C compressor. ^ When the pressure drops to approximately 1,724 kPa (250 psi), the contacts close to allow operation of the A/C compressor. The switch contains a second set of electrical contacts used for high-speed fan control. ^ When the compressor discharge pressure reaches approximately 2,241 kPa (325 psi), these contacts close and engage the high-speed fan control. ^ When the pressure drops to approximately 1,896 kPa (275 psi), the contacts again open and the high speed fan control is disengaged. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Cut-Off/Cycling Switch Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Compressor Cut-Off/Cycling Switch REMOVAL 1. Remove the A/C cycling switch. 1 Disconnect the A/C cycling switch electrical connector. 2 Remove the A/C cycling switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Cut-Off/Cycling Switch > Page 7563 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Pressure Cutoff Switch REMOVAL 1. Remove the pressure cut-off switch. 1 Disconnect the A/C pressure cut-off switch electrical connector. 2 Remove the A/C pressure cut-off switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Blower Motor Relay: Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7568 Electrical Components Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7569 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7570 Blower Motor Relay: Description and Operation The blower motor relay supplies voltage to the blower motor and is activated when the key is ON and the function selector switch is in any position besides OFF. The blower motor relay is located under the instrument panel next to the steering column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7571 Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7572 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7576 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Compressor Clutch Relay Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation Compressor Clutch Relay The A/C compressor clutch relay supplies voltage to the A/C compressor clutch and is located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB). The Power Control Module (PCM) can interrupt the A/C compressor operation through the A/C compressor clutch relay under the following conditions: ^ during engine start-up ^ Wide Open Throttle (WOT) ^ low engine idle conditions ^ excessively high engine temperatures Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Compressor Clutch Relay > Page 7579 Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation Compressor Cut-Off Relay WIDE OPEN THROTTLE A/C CUT-OFF The Wide Open Throttle A/C Cut-Off Relay (may be referred to as the A/C clutch relay) is normally open. There is no direct electrical connection between the A/C switch or EATC Module and the A/C clutch. The PCM will receive a signal indicating that A/C is requested (for some applications, this message is sent through the BUS + and BUS - circuits). When A/C is requested, the PCM will check other A/C related inputs that are available (such as ACP (SW), A/C Cycling Switch (ACCS)). If these inputs indicate A/C operation is OK, and the engine conditions are OK (such as coolant temperature, engine rpm, throttle position), the PCM will ground the Wide Open Throttle A/C (WAC) output, closing the relay contacts and sending voltage to the A/C clutch. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7580 Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7581 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Air Conditioning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Conditioning Switch: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel. 2. Remove the function selector switch knob. 3. Remove the function selector switch. ^ Push in the locking tab on one side of the function selector switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. NOTE: Align the function selector switch locking tabs with the holes in the housing and press the function selector into the housing. Verify that both locking tabs are secured. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel. 2. Remove the blower motor switch knob. 3. Remove the blower motor switch. ^ Depress the locking tab. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations Electrical Components Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7592 Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7593 Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Compressor Cut-Off/Cycling Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Compressor Cut-Off/Cycling Switch > Page 7596 Dual Pressure Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation A/C Cycling Switch A/C Cycling Switch The A/C cycling switch is mounted on a Schrader valve-type fitting on the top of the suction accumulator. ^ A valve depressor, located inside the threaded end of the A/C cycling switch, presses in on the Schrader valve stem. ^ This allows the suction pressure inside the suction accumulator to control the operation of the A/C cycling switch. ^ The electrical switch contacts open when the suction pressure drops to 152-193 kPa (22-28 psi). ^ The contacts close when the suction pressure rises to 276-324 kPa (40-47 psi). ^ When the A/C cycling switch contacts close, the signal to energize the A/C clutch is sent to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) which energizes the A/C relay and supplies B+ voltage to the A/C clutch field coil. ^ When the A/C cycling switch contacts open, the A/C clutch field coil is deenergized and compressor operation stops. ^ The A/C cycling switch will control the A/C evaporator core pressure at a point where the plate/fin surface temperature will be maintained slightly above freezing. ^ This prevents icing of the A/C evaporator core and blockage of airflow. ^ It is not necessary to discharge the refrigerant system to remove the A/C cycling switch. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch > Page 7599 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Cycling Switch PCM Inputs AIR CONDITIONING CYCLING SWITCH The Air Conditioning (A/C) cycling switch may be wired to either the A/C Cycling Switch (ACCS) or ACPSW Powertrain Control Module (PCM) input. When the A/C cycling switch opens, the PCM will turn off the Air Conditioning (A/C) clutch For information on the specific function of the A/C cycling switch, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning. The A/C Cycling Switch (ACCS) circuit to the PCM provides a voltage signal which indicates when the A/C is requested. When the A/C demand switch is turned on, and both the A/C cycling switch and the high pressure contacts of the A/C high pressure switch (if equipped and in circuit) are closed, voltage is supplied to the ACCS circuit at the PCM. Refer to Vehicle/Diagrams for vehicle specific wiring. If the ACCS signal is not received by the PCM, the PCM circuit will not allow the A/C to operate. For additional information, refer to PCM outputs, wide open throttle air conditioning cutoff. See: Powertrain Management/Description and Operation/PCM Outputs NOTE: Some applications do not have a dedicated (separate) input to the PCM indicating that A/C is requested. This information is received by the PCM through the BUS + and BUS - Standard Corporate Protocol (SCP) communication. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch > Page 7600 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning High Pressure Switch The A/C pressure cut-off switch is used to interrupt A/C compressor operation in the event of high system discharge pressures. ^ The A/C pressure cut-off switch is mounted on a Schrader valve-type fitting on the high pressure side of the condenser to evaporator line. ^ A valve depressor, located inside the threaded end of the A/C pressure cut-off switch, is used to monitor the compressor discharge pressure. ^ It is not necessary to discharge the refrigerant system to remove the A/C pressure cut-off switch. ^ The A/C pressure cut-off switch has two sets of contacts. One electrical contact is normally closed. ^ When the compressor discharge pressure rises to approximately 3,103 kPa (450 psi), the switch contacts open, disengaging the A/C compressor. ^ When the pressure drops to approximately 1,724 kPa (250 psi), the contacts close to allow operation of the A/C compressor. The switch contains a second set of electrical contacts used for high-speed fan control. ^ When the compressor discharge pressure reaches approximately 2,241 kPa (325 psi), these contacts close and engage the high-speed fan control. ^ When the pressure drops to approximately 1,896 kPa (275 psi), the contacts again open and the high speed fan control is disengaged. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Cut-Off/Cycling Switch Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Compressor Cut-Off/Cycling Switch REMOVAL 1. Remove the A/C cycling switch. 1 Disconnect the A/C cycling switch electrical connector. 2 Remove the A/C cycling switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor Cut-Off/Cycling Switch > Page 7603 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Pressure Cutoff Switch REMOVAL 1. Remove the pressure cut-off switch. 1 Disconnect the A/C pressure cut-off switch electrical connector. 2 Remove the A/C pressure cut-off switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Locations Service Port HVAC: Locations Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7607 Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 2 The high-pressure gauge port valve is located on the condenser to evaporator line. The low-pressure gauge port valve is located on the A/C manifold and tube assembly. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7608 Service Port HVAC: Description and Operation Service Gauge Port Valve The high-pressure gauge port valve is located on the condenser to evaporator line. The low-pressure gauge port valve is located on the A/C manifold and tube assembly. The fitting is an integral part of the refrigeration line or component. ^ Special couplings are required for both the high-side and low-side gauge ports. ^ The Schrader-type valve core can be repaired if the seal leaks. ^ Always install the A/C charging valve cap on the gauge port valves after repairing the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Vacuum Harness HVAC > Component Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information Vacuum Harness HVAC: Customer Safety Information WARNING: BEFORE USING, OR HANDLING COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE PAINT THINNER CONTAINING METHYL ETHYL KETONE (MEK), READ AND FOLLOW THE WARNING INFORMATION ON THE PRODUCT LABEL. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Vacuum Harness HVAC > Component Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information > Page 7613 Vacuum Harness HVAC: Technician Safety Information WARNING: BEFORE USING, OR HANDLING COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE PAINT THINNER CONTAINING METHYL ETHYL KETONE (MEK), READ AND FOLLOW THE WARNING INFORMATION ON THE PRODUCT LABEL. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Vacuum Harness HVAC > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7614 Vacuum Harness HVAC: Service and Repair Vacuum Tester Kit SPECIAL TOOL(S) 1. Measure the length of the damaged area of the mini-tube vacuum hose. 2. Cut a piece of standard 3 mm (0.125 inch) inner diameter vacuum hose approximately 25 mm (1 inch) longer than the damaged area of the mini-tube vacuum hose. 3. Cut off the mini-tube vacuum hose on each side of the damaged area. 4. Dip the mini-tube hose ends in commercially available paint thinner containing Methyl Ethyl Ketone (MEK). This solvent will seal the mini-tube in the vacuum hose. WARNING: READ THE WARNING INFORMATION ON THE PRODUCT LABEL. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 5. Insert the ends of the mini-tube vacuum hose approximately 9 mm (0.375 inch) into the ends of the standard 3 mm (0.125 inch) service vacuum hose section. 6. Shake the service joint after assembly to make sure the O-ring seal solvent is dispersed and the vacuum line is not plugged. 7. Test the system for a vacuum leak in the repair area. ^ Use the Vacuum Tester or equivalent. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Vacuum Harness HVAC > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7615 Vacuum Tester Kit Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair > Inspection and Repair After A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Inspection and Repair After A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment Inspection and Repair After a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment WARNING: Remove restraint system diagnostic tools from the vehicle prior to road testing. If tools are not removed, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) device may not deploy in a crash. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash and possibly violate vehicle safety standards. NOTE: After diagnosing or repairing a supplemental restraint system (SRS), the restraint system diagnostic tools (if required) must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. NOTE: Deployable devices (such as air bag modules, pretensioners) may deploy alone or in various combinations depending on the impact event. NOTE: Always refer to the appropriate workshop manual procedures prior to carrying out vehicle repairs affecting the SRS and safety belt system. NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. All vehicles 1. NOTE: Refer to the correct removal and installation procedure for all SRS components being installed. When any deployable device or combination of devices are deployed and/or the restraints control module (RCM) has the DTC B1231 (Event Threshold Exceeded) in memory, the repair of the vehicle's SRS is to include the removal of all deployed devices and the installation of new deployable devices, the removal and installation of new impact sensors, and the removal and installation of a new RCM. DTCs must cleared from all required modules after repairs are carried out. Vehicles with occupant classification sensor (OCS) system 2. NOTE: After installation of new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system components carry out the OCS System Reset procedure as instructed in the workshop manual. Refer to the appropriate workshop manual for OCS system removal and installation procedure. When a vehicle has been involved in a collision and the occupant classification system module (OCSM) has DTC B1231 stored in memory, the repair of the OCS system is to include the following procedures for the specified system: - For rail type OCS system, inspect the passenger side floorpan for damage and repair as necessary. Install new OCS system rails. - For weight sensor bolt type OCS system, inspect the passenger side floorpan for damage and repair as necessary. Install a new seat track with OCS system weight sensor bolts. DTC must be cleared from the OCSM before carrying out Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset. Do not install a new OCSM unless DTC B1231 cannot be cleared. - NOTE: Most bladder type OCSM do not store a DTC B1231 in memory after deployment. The DTC B1231 is stored only by the RCM. For bladder type OCS system, inspect for damage and repair as necessary. If installation of an OCS system component is required, an OCS system service kit must be installed. All vehicles 3. When any damage to the impact sensor mounting points or mounting hardware has occurred, repair or install new mounting points and mounting hardware as needed. 4. When the driver air bag module has deployed, a new clockspring must be installed. 5. New driver and/or front passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in deployment of the driver and/or front passenger safety belt pretensioners. For additional information, refer to Safety Belt System. 6. Inspect the entire vehicle for damage, including the following components: Steering column (deployable column if equipped) Instrument panel knee bolsters and mounting points Instrument panel braces and brackets Instrument panel and mounting points Seats and seat mounting points Safety belts, safety belt buckles and safety belt retractors. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair > Inspection and Repair After A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment > Page 7621 SRS wiring, wiring harnesses and connectors 7. After carrying out the review and inspection of the entire vehicle for damage, repair or install new components as needed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair > Inspection and Repair After A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment > Page 7622 Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Safety Belt Procedure After A Collision SAFETY BELT PROCEDURE AFTER A COLLISION WARNING: All safety belt assemblies including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar), shoulder belt height adjusters, child safety seat tether attachments (if equipped), and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. New belt assemblies should be installed unless a qualified technician finds the assemblies show no damage and operate correctly. Belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or incorrect operation is noted. NOTE: Safety belt assemblies should be periodically inspected to make sure they have not become damaged and that they remain in correct operating condition, particularly if they have been subjected to severe stress. Before installing the new safety belt assembly, the safety belt attaching areas must be inspected for damage and distortion. If the attaching points are damaged and distorted, the sheet metal must be reworked back to its original shape and structural integrity. Install the new safety belt(s) using the appropriate instructions. Perform the Functional Test. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Customer Safety Information WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. ^ THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information > Page 7628 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Technician Safety Information WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. ^ THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming Seats Removed There are two deactivation procedures. ^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing side air bag concerns, and also when repairing any in-seat component in vehicles equipped with side air bags. ^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal. This procedure will be used when diagnosing a concern not related to the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag system is being serviced, the airbag system must be deactivated using the appropriate deactivation procedure. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system, the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring behind the access panel on the bottom of the steering wheel. 4. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 5. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the passenger air bag. 7. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, remove the front seats. 9. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag floor electrical connector. 10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side floor electrical connector. 12. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable. Seats Not Removed There are two deactivation procedures. ^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing side air bag concerns, and also when repairing any in-seat component in vehicles equipped with side air bags. ^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal. This procedure will be used when diagnosing a concern not related to the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). 1. Move and tilt the front seats to their highest and most forward position. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7631 SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag system is being serviced, the airbag system must be deactivated using the appropriate deactivation procedure. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system, the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. 3. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 4. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring behind the access panel in the bottom of the steering wheel. 5. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring. 6. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector beneath the front seat. 10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag electrical connector beneath the passenger seat. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 12. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the driver seat. 13. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the front seat. 14. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle electrical connector. 15. Reconnect the battery ground cable. Depowering and Repowering Procedure Depowering Procedure WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. WARNING: Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which can result in personal injury. WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be depowered. NOTE: The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the central junction box (CJB), located below the LH side of the instrument panel, remove the cover and the restraints control module (RCM) fuse F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) from the CJB. 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7632 proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Repowering Procedure 1. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected. 2. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 3. Install RCM fuses F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) to the CJB and close the cover. 4. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front of any air bag module when the battery ground cable is connected. Connect the battery ground cable. 5. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool. Seats Removed 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 4. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7633 5. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 7. Install the front seats. 8. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. ^ Reconnect the electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 10. Reconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 11. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 12. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure Seats Not Removed 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. ^ Reconnect the electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 4. If equipped with side air bags, remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 5. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 7. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7634 8. If equipped with side air bags, connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. 9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 10. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 11. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7635 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag System Reconnect Checklist Air Bag Reconnect Checklist The checklist below should be completed following diagnosis or repair of any air bag system concern: 1. All in-seat electrical connectors connected? 2. All air bag modules connected? 3. Restraints Control Module (RCM) connected? 4. All safety belt pretensioners connectors connected? 5. All sensors (side impact) connected? 6. Battery connected? Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7636 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position and visually monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either: ^ fail to light. ^ remain lit continuously. ^ flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the RUN position. This is the time required for the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Specifications Air Bag: Specifications Passenger Air Bag Module Bolts 8 Nm Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Passenger Air Bag Module Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Passenger Air Bag Module > Page 7642 Air Bag: Locations Side Air Bag Module Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Passenger Air Bag Module > Page 7643 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Air Bag Module Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7646 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7647 Air Bag: Diagrams Side Air Bag Module Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Air Bag: Technician Safety Information WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ CARRY A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TRIM COVER POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ DO NOT SET A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN WITH THE TRIM COVER FACE DOWN. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ AIR BAG MODULES WITH DISCOLORED OR DAMAGED TRIM COVERS MUST BE INSTALLED NEW, NOT REPAINTED. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 7650 Air Bag: Vehicle Damage Warnings CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7651 Air Bag: Description and Operation Driver Air Bag Module NOTE: References to the driver air bag module must not be confused with the seat-mounted air bag components of the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). The driver air bag module: ^ is steering wheel mounted. ^ will deploy upon receiving a signal from the Restraints Control Module (RCM). ^ has no subassemblies. ^ is serviced with the steering wheel as an assembly. Passenger Air Bag Module NOTE: References to the passenger air bag module must not be confused with the seat-mounted air bag components of the supplemental restraint system (SRS). The passenger air bag module: ^ has no separately repairable parts and is installed as an assembly. ^ is mounted in the RH side of the instrument panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module Air Bag: Service and Repair Driver Air Bag Module Removal and Installation WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. WARNING: Carry a live air bag module with the air bag and trim cover pointed away from your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. WARNING: Do not set a live air bag module down with the trim cover face down. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. WARNING: After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water afterwards. WARNING: Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which can result in personal injury. WARNING: Air bag modules with discolored or damaged trim covers must be installed new, not repainted. WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Depower the system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Air Bag Disarming and Arming/Depowering and Repowering Procedure 2. NOTE: The driver air bag module and steering wheel must be serviced as an assembly. These components are not serviced separately NOTE: Make sure to follow all steps and instructions in the removal of the steering wheel. Remove the steering wheel. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 4. Repower the system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Air Bag Disarming and Arming/Depowering and Repowering Procedure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7654 Air Bag: Service and Repair Passenger Air Bag Module Vehicles With Side Air Bags Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ CARRY A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND DEPLOYMENT DOOR POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ DO NOT SET A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN WITH THE DEPLOYMENT DOOR FACE DOWN. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ AIR BAG MODULES WITH DISCOLORED OR DAMAGED DEPLOYMENT DOORS MUST BE INSTALLED NEW, NOT REPAINTED. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7655 ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 2. Open the glove box past its stops. 3. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the Instrument Panel (I/P), disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7656 5. Remove the steering wheel access cover. 6. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the steering column. 8. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 1 Slide and release the driver side air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7657 9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver side air bag module floor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat bracket. 2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip. 3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. 12. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. 1 Slide and release the passenger side air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the side air bag module electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7658 13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger side air bag module floor electrical connector. 14. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket under the seat. 2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip. 3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 15. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. 17. With the restraint system diagnostic tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure 18. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 19. Remove the four passenger air bag module bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7659 20. Reaching one hand into the glove box opening, push outward on the passenger air bag module and remove it from the instrument panel. CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. INSTALLATION WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ CARRY A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND DEPLOYMENT DOOR POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ DO NOT SET A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN WITH THE DEPLOYMENT DOOR FACE DOWN. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ AIR BAG MODULES WITH DISCOLORED OR DAMAGED DEPLOYMENT DOORS MUST BE INSTALLED NEW, NOT REPAINTED. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7660 ^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Make sure the J-clips are correctly aligned to the holes in the passenger air bag module before positioning it in the instrument panel. 2. Position and align the two passenger air bag module trim cover alignment pins (one shown) to the instrument panel openings. 3. Install the passenger air bag module trim cover into the instrument panel. ^ Install the trim cover alignment pins into the instrument panel. ^ When aligned correctly, the passenger air bag module trim cover will have an even gap around its perimeter and sit flat up against the instrument panel. 4. Install the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7661 5. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 6. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 7. Close the glove box. 8. Connect the battery ground cable. 9. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still installed at the remaining deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure 10. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). 11. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the steering column. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7662 VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 12. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 13. Install the steering wheel access cover. 14. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 15. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7663 16. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 17. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver side air bag module electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 18. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7664 19. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 20. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag module floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 21. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Install the passenger side air bag module electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 22. Connect the battery ground cable. 23. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Vehicles Without Side Air Bags Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7665 Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ CARRY A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND DEPLOYMENT DOOR POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ DO NOT SET A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN WITH THE DEPLOYMENT DOOR FACE DOWN. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ AIR BAG MODULES WITH DISCOLORED OR DAMAGED DEPLOYMENT DOORS MUST BE INSTALLED NEW, NOT REPAINTED. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7666 2. Open the glove box past its stops. 3. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the Instrument Panel (I/P), disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 5. Remove the steering wheel access cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7667 6. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the steering column. 8. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat bracket. 2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip. 3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7668 10. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket under the seat. 2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip. 3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. 12. Connect the battery ground cable. 13. With the restraint system diagnostic tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure 14. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 15. Remove the four passenger air bag module bolts. 16. Reaching one hand into the glove box opening, push outward on the passenger air bag module and remove it from the instrument panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7669 CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. INSTALLATION WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ CARRY A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND DEPLOYMENT DOOR POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ DO NOT SET A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN WITH THE DEPLOYMENT DOOR FACE DOWN. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ AIR BAG MODULES WITH DISCOLORED OR DAMAGED DEPLOYMENT DOORS MUST BE INSTALLED NEW, NOT REPAINTED. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7670 1. Make sure the J-clips are correctly aligned to the holes in the passenger air bag module before positioning it in the instrument panel. 2. Position and align the two passenger air bag module trim cover alignment pins (one shown) to the instrument panel openings. 3. Install the passenger air bag module trim cover into the instrument panel. ^ Install the trim cover alignment pins into the instrument panel. ^ When aligned correctly, the passenger air bag module trim cover will have an even gap around its perimeter and sit flat up against the instrument panel. 4. Install the bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7671 5. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 6. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 7. Close the glove box. 8. Connect the battery ground cable. 9. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still installed at the remaining deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure 10. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). 11. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the steering column. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7672 VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 12. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 13. Install the steering wheel access cover. 14. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 15. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 16. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 7673 WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 17. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 18. Connect the battery ground cable. 19. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7674 Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications Air Bag Control Module: Specifications Restraint Control Module Bolts 12 Nm Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7678 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7679 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7680 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Air Bag Control Module: Technician Safety Information WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. ^ THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 7683 Air Bag Control Module: Vehicle Damage Warnings CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage can result. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7684 Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation The Restraints Control Module (RCM) carries out the following functions: ^ signals the inflators to deploy the air bags in the event of a deployable crash ^ monitors the air bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) for faults ^ illuminates the air bag indicator if a fault is detected ^ flashes the air bag indicator to indicate the Lamp Fault Code (LFC) detected ^ communicates through the Data Link Connector (DLC) the current or historical Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) ^ signals the instrument cluster to activate a chime if the air bag indicator is not available and another SRS fault exists NOTE: The safing Sensor is internal to the RCM and is not serviced separately. The RCM monitors the SRS for possible faults. If a fault is detected while the ignition switch is in the RUN position, the RCM will flash the air bag indicator located in the instrument cluster. When the ignition is cycled (turned off and then on), the air bag indicator will prove out by lighting for six seconds and then off for two seconds. After the prove out, the air bag indicator will then flash the two-digit LFC for any current SRS fault. If an SRS fault exists, the air bag indicator will flash the LFC five times, and then remain illuminated for the rest of the key cycle. The RCM will also communicate the current and historical DTCs through the DLC, to the scan tool. If the air bag indicator does not function, and the system detects a fault condition, the RCM will signal the instrument cluster to activate an audible chime. The chime is a series of five sets of five tone bursts. If the chime is heard, the SRS and the air bag indicator require repair. LFCs are prioritized. If two or more faults occur at the same time, the fault having the highest priority will be displayed. After that fault has been corrected, the next highest priority fault will be displayed. The RCM includes a backup power supply. This feature provides sufficient backup power to deploy the air bags in the event that the ignition circuit is damaged in a collision before the safing and air bag sensors determine that a deployment is required. The backup power supply will deplete its stored energy approximately one minute after the battery ground cable is disconnected. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7685 Air Bag Control Module: Testing and Inspection For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Air Bag Systems; Testing and Inspection. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Restraints Control Module (RCM) Vehicles With Side Air Bags Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage can result. NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7688 procedure again. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. 2. Remove the steering wheel access cover. 3. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7689 4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the steering column. 5. Open the glove box past its stops. 6. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the instrument panel, disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket under the seat. 2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip. 3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7690 9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. 1 Slide and release the passenger side air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. 11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger side air bag module floor electrical connector. 12. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat bracket. 2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip. 3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7691 13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. 14. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 1 Slide and release the driver side air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 15. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver side air bag module floor electrical connector. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. 17. With the restraint system diagnostic tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure 18. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 19. Position the carpet back at the right-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel. 20. Remove the right-hand side restraint control module (RCM) retaining bolts. 21. Position the carpet back at the left-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7692 22. Remove the RCM. 1 Slide and disengage the two RCM electrical connector locking clips. 2 Push down to pivot the RCM electrical connector tabs and pull out to disconnect. 3 Remove the retaining bolt. 4 Remove the RCM. INSTALLATION WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage can result. NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Position the RCM to the center tunnel area and install the three bolts hand-tight. WARNING: ^ THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7693 NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. 2. Tighten the right-hand side RCM bolts. WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. 3. Reposition the carpet back at the right-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel. 4. Connect the RCM. 1 Tighten the bolt. 2 Connect the RCM electrical connectors. 3 Slide and engage the RCM electrical connector locking clips. WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. 5. Reposition the carpet back at the left-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel. 6. Connect the battery ground cable. 7. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure 8. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7694 9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 10. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 11. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 12. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver side air bag module electrical connector onto the bracket under the Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7695 seat. 13. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 14. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 15. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag module floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7696 16. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Install the passenger side air bag module electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 17. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 18. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 19. Close the glove box. 20. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the steering column. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7697 VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 21. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 22. Install the steering wheel access cover. 23. Connect the battery ground cable. 24. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Vehicles Without Side Air Bags Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7698 WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage can result. NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7699 2. Remove the steering wheel access cover. 3. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the steering column. 5. Open the glove box past its stops. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7700 6. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the instrument panel, disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket under the seat. 2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip. 3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7701 10. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat bracket. 2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip. 3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. 12. Connect the battery ground cable. 13. With the restraint system diagnostic tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure 14. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 15. Position the carpet back at the right-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel. 16. Remove the right-hand side restraint control module (RCM) retaining bolts. 17. Position the carpet back at the left-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel. 18. Remove the RCM. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7702 1 Slide and disengage the two RCM electrical connector locking clips. 2 Push down to pivot the RCM electrical connector tabs and pull out to disconnect. 3 Remove the retaining bolt. 4 Remove the RCM. INSTALLATION WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage can result. NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Position the RCM to the center tunnel area and install the three bolts hand-tight. WARNING: ^ THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7703 2. Tighten the right-hand side RCM bolts. WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. 3. Reposition the carpet back at the right-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel. 4. Connect the RCM. 1 Tighten the bolt. 2 Connect the RCM electrical connectors. 3 Slide and engage the RCM electrical connector locking clips. WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. 5. Reposition the carpet back at the left-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel. 6. Connect the battery ground cable. 7. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure 8. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7704 10. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 11. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 12. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 13. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7705 VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 14. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 15. Close the glove box. 16. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the steering column. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 17. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 18. Install the steering wheel access cover. 19. Connect the battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7706 20. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7707 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Weld Nut Repair "J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). NOTE: ^ There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld nut(s). Read both this procedures and Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair. ^ If two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts in this procedure. Weld nuts must be installed in Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor. ^ The following procedure applies to vehicles that have a rectangular hole in the sheet metal that is in close proximity to the missing weld nut. 1. Obtain a "J" nut (part number N623332-S301) or any of the following optional "J" nuts (part numbers: N623342-S101, N800854-S100, N800925-S100). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-S190) or equivalent. 3. Install the "J" nut through the rectangular hole in the sheet metal. 4. Install the crash sensor. NOTE: Be sure the threaded portion of the "J" nut is aligned with the clearance hole in the sheet metal. 5. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications. Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). NOTE: ^ There are two procedures to repairs a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld nut(s). Read both this procedure and Weld Nut Repair-"J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair. ^ Use only this procedure if two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts in Weld Nut Repair-"J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Crash Sensor. ^ Radiator support repair shown, others are similar. 1. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) weld nut (part number N806285-S190). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-S190). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7708 3. Route a sufficient length of copper welding wire through the weld nut clearance hole and back out an adjacent access hole. 4. Feed the copper welding wire through the weld nut, then through a standard flat washer. 5. Secure the flat washer so that it cannot be pulled off the end of the copper welding wire. 6. Pull the copper welding wire back through the clearance hole, allowing the weld nut and flat washer to follow the copper welding wire through. 7. Position the weld nut to the weld nut clearance hole, firmly pulling on the copper welding wire allowing the secured flat washer to hold the weld nut in position. 8. Holding the weld nut securely in place and using a MIG welder, weld in four places around the edge of the weld nut. 9. Metal finish as required. 10. Verify the nut is securely in place. 11. Install the crash sensor. 12. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications. Stripped Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). 1. Obtain an 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw (part number N802455-S190). 2. Drill out the internal threads of the stripped-out weld nut to 7.37 mm (0.29 in) using a letter "L" size drill bit. 3. Position the crash sensor to the vehicle. 4. Install the 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw into the drilled-out weld nut. 5. Install the remaining attaching screws. 6. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7709 Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Technician Safety Information WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ CARRY A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TRIM COVER POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ DO NOT SET A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN WITH THE TRIM COVER FACE DOWN. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ AIR BAG MODULES WITH DISCOLORED OR DAMAGED TRIM COVERS MUST BE INSTALLED NEW, NOT REPAINTED. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. ^ TO REDUCE THE RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY, READ AND FOLLOW ALL WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, NOTES, AND INSTRUCTIONS IN THE STEERING WHEEL REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION PROCEDURE. ^ INCORRECT CENTRALIZATION MAY RESULT IN PREMATURE COMPONENT FAILURE. IF IN DOUBT WHEN CENTRALIZING THE CLOCKSPRING, REPEAT THE CENTRALIZING PROCEDURE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THIS INSTRUCTION MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ TO REDUCE THE RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY, READ AND FOLLOW ALL WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, NOTES, AND INSTRUCTIONS IN THE STEERING WHEEL REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION PROCEDURE. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 7715 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Vehicle Damage Warnings CAUTION: ^ Overturning will destroy the clockspring. The internal ribbon wire acts as the stop and can be broken from its internal connection. ^ Make sure the road wheels are in the straight ahead position. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7716 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Description and Operation The clockspring: ^ is mounted on the steering column, behind the steering wheel. ^ provides a continuous electrical path between the Restraints Control Module (RCM) and the driver air bag module. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7717 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service and Repair Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ CARRY A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TRIM COVER POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ DO NOT SET A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN WITH THE TRIM COVER FACE DOWN. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ AIR BAG MODULES WITH DISCOLORED OR DAMAGED TRIM COVERS MUST BE INSTALLED NEW, NOT REPAINTED. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tool MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7718 removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat Systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. All vehicles 1. Make sure the wheels are in the straight-ahead position. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 3. Remove the steering wheel. WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY, READ AND FOLLOW ALL WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, NOTES, AND INSTRUCTIONS IN THE STEERING WHEEL REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION PROCEDURE. Vehicles with tilt column 4. Position the steering column completely downward. All vehicles 5. Push in where indicated, releasing the retaining tabs, and remove the upper steering column shroud. 6. Remove the lower steering column shroud. 1 Release the tilt column locking lever, if equipped. 2 Remove the three screws. 3 Remove the lower steering column shroud. NOTE: The steering column must be in the raised position, with the tilt column lever released (if equipped), to remove the lower steering column shroud. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7719 7. Apply two strips of masking tape across the clockspring to prevent accidental rotation when the clockspring is removed. 8. Separate the clockspring from the steering column. 1 Remove the screws. 2 Pull out and separate the clockspring from the steering column. 9. Remove the clockspring. 1 Disconnect the accessory electrical connector. 2 Push to release the clockspring electrical connector locking clip. 3 With the clockspring electrical connector locking clip in the released position, pull and disconnect the clockspring electrical connector. 4 Remove the clockspring. 10. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the clockspring electrical connector at the steering column. INSTALLATION WARNING: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7720 ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ CARRY A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TRIM COVER POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ DO NOT SET A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN WITH THE TRIM COVER FACE DOWN. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ AIR BAG MODULES WITH DISCOLORED OR DAMAGED TRIM COVERS MUST BE INSTALLED NEW, NOT REPAINTED. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat Systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. All vehicles 1. Connect the battery ground cable. 2. With the restraint system diagnostic tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure 3. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Vehicles receiving a new clockspring 4. Remove the key from the clockspring, holding the rotor in its centralized position. ^ Do not allow the clockspring rotor to turn from this position. NOTE: A new clockspring is supplied in a centralized position and held there with a key. Vehicles needing clockspring recentering Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7721 5. Centralize the clockspring. 1 Hold the clockspring outer housing stationary. 2 While turning the rotor clockwise, carefully feel for the ribbon wire to run out of length, and a slight resistance is felt. Stop turning at this point. CAUTION: Overturning will destroy the clockspring. The internal ribbon wire acts as the stop and can be broken from its internal connection. 3 Turn the rotor counterclockwise approximately 2-3/4 turns. This is the center point of the clockspring. ^ Do not allow the rotor to turn from this position. WARNING: INCORRECT CENTRALIZATION MAY RESULT IN PREMATURE COMPONENT FAILURE. IF IN DOUBT WHEN CENTRALIZING THE CLOCKSPRING, REPEAT THE CENTRALIZING PROCEDURE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THIS INSTRUCTION MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. CAUTION: Make sure the road wheels are in the straight ahead position. NOTE: If a clockspring has rotated out of center, follow through with this step. All vehicles 6. Make sure the road wheels are in the straight ahead position. 7. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the clockspring electrical connector at the steering column. 8. Connect the clockspring electrical connectors. 1 Connect the clockspring electrical connector. 2 Connect the accessory electrical connector. Vehicle repairs reusing the same clockspring Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7722 9. Remove the tape applied during clockspring removal. NOTE: When the tape is removed, do not allow the clockspring to turn. All vehicles 10. Align the clockspring for installation. ^ Align the large slot to the large tab in the clockspring. ^ Align the small slot to the small tab in the clockspring. NOTE: The clockspring is shown from the back for clarity. 11. Install the clockspring. 1 With the slots and tabs aligned, slide the clockspring over the steering column. 2 With the clockspring sitting flush against the multi-function switch, install the screws. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7723 12. Install the lower steering column shroud. 1 Release the tilt column locking lever, if equipped. 2 Position the lower steering column shroud to the steering column. NOTE: The steering column must be in the raised position, with the tilt column lever released (if equipped), to install the lower steering column shroud. 3 Install the three screws. Vehicles with tilt column 13. Position the steering column completely downward. All vehicles 14. Position the upper steering column shroud to the steering column and completely engage the retaining tabs. ^ Make sure the upper steering column shroud is aligned correctly and the retaining tabs are completely engaged. 15. Install the steering wheel. WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY, READ AND FOLLOW ALL WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, NOTES, AND INSTRUCTIONS IN THE STEERING WHEEL REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION PROCEDURE. 16. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7724 Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Specifications Impact Sensor: Specifications Side Impact Sensor Bolts 12 Nm Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Air Bag Sensor, Left Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Air Bag Sensor, Left > Page 7730 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Air Bag Sensor, Left Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Air Bag Sensor, Left > Page 7733 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information Impact Sensor: Customer Safety Information WARNING: THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR CORRECT SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information > Page 7736 Impact Sensor: Technician Safety Information WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. ^ THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE AIR BAG SIDE CRASH SENSOR RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7737 Impact Sensor: Description and Operation WARNING: THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR CORRECT SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION. For this vehicle, the SRS employs three crash sensors. One of the sensors is integral to the RCM and is not serviceable separately. In addition, there are two side crash sensors located in the LH and RH B-pillars. The RCM is mounted on the center tunnel under the instrument panel. Mounting orientation is critical for correct operation of all crash sensors. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor Driver Side Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7740 vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). 2. Remove the steering wheel access cover. 3. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7741 4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the steering column. 5. Open the glove box past its stops. 6. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the Instrument Panel (I/P), disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7742 8. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. 1 Slide and release the passenger side air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. 9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger side air bag module floor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket under the seat. 2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip. 3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7743 12. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 1 Slide and release the driver side air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver side air bag module floor electrical connector. 14. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat bracket. 2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip. 3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 15. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. 17. With the restraint system diagnostic tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure 18. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7744 19. Remove the B-pillar trim panel. 20. Remove the side crash sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolts. 3 Remove the side crash sensor. INSTALLATION WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7745 1. Install the side crash sensor. 1 Position the side crash sensor to the B-pillar. 2 Install the bolts. 3 Connect the side crash sensor electrical connector. WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE AIR BAG SIDE CRASH SENSOR RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. 2. Connect the battery ground cable. 3. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still in place at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure 4. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 5. Install the B-pillar trim panel. 6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 7. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7746 8. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 9. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver side air bag module electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 10. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 11. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7747 onto the bracket under the seat. 12. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag module floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 13. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Install the passenger side air bag module electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 14. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7748 15. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 16. Close the glove box. 17. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the steering column. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 18. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 19. Install the steering wheel access cover. 20. Connect the battery ground cable. 21. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7749 WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 22. Check the restraint system for correct operation. Passenger Side Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7750 ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat Systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). 2. Open the glove box past its stops. 3. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the Instrument Panel (I/P), disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7751 4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 5. Remove the steering wheel access cover. 6. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the steering column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7752 8. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 1 Slide and release the driver side air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver side air bag module floor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat bracket. 2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip. 3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7753 12. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. 1 Slide and release the passenger side air bag module electrical connector locking dip. 2 Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. 13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger side air bag module floor electrical connector. 14. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket under the seat. 2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip. 3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 15. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. 17. With the restraint system diagnostic tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure 18. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7754 19. Remove the B-pillar trim panel. 20. Remove the side crash sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolts. 3 Remove the side crash sensor. INSTALLATION WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat Systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7755 1. Install the side crash sensor. 1 Position the side crash sensor to the B-pillar. 2 Install the bolts. 3 Connect the side crash sensor electrical connector. WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE AIR BAG SIDE CRASH SENSOR RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. 2. Connect the battery ground cable. 3. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still in place at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure 4. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 5. Install the B-pillar trim panel. 6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 7. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7756 8. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag module floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 9. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Install the passenger side air bag module electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 10. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 11. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7757 the bracket under the seat. 12. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 13. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver side air bag module electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 14. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the steering column. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7758 15. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 16. Install the steering wheel access cover. 17. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 18. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 19. Close the glove box. 20. Connect the battery ground cable. 21. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7759 WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 22. Check the restraint system for correct operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7760 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Weld Nut Repair "J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). NOTE: ^ There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld nut(s). Read both this procedures and Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair. ^ If two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts in this procedure. Weld nuts must be installed in Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor. ^ The following procedure applies to vehicles that have a rectangular hole in the sheet metal that is in close proximity to the missing weld nut. 1. Obtain a "J" nut (part number N623332-S301) or any of the following optional "J" nuts (part numbers: N623342-S101, N800854-S100, N800925-S100). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-S190) or equivalent. 3. Install the "J" nut through the rectangular hole in the sheet metal. 4. Install the crash sensor. NOTE: Be sure the threaded portion of the "J" nut is aligned with the clearance hole in the sheet metal. 5. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications. Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). NOTE: ^ There are two procedures to repairs a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld nut(s). Read both this procedure and Weld Nut Repair-"J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair. ^ Use only this procedure if two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts in Weld Nut Repair-"J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Crash Sensor. ^ Radiator support repair shown, others are similar. 1. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) weld nut (part number N806285-S190). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-S190). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 7761 3. Route a sufficient length of copper welding wire through the weld nut clearance hole and back out an adjacent access hole. 4. Feed the copper welding wire through the weld nut, then through a standard flat washer. 5. Secure the flat washer so that it cannot be pulled off the end of the copper welding wire. 6. Pull the copper welding wire back through the clearance hole, allowing the weld nut and flat washer to follow the copper welding wire through. 7. Position the weld nut to the weld nut clearance hole, firmly pulling on the copper welding wire allowing the secured flat washer to hold the weld nut in position. 8. Holding the weld nut securely in place and using a MIG welder, weld in four places around the edge of the weld nut. 9. Metal finish as required. 10. Verify the nut is securely in place. 11. Install the crash sensor. 12. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications. Stripped Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). 1. Obtain an 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw (part number N802455-S190). 2. Drill out the internal threads of the stripped-out weld nut to 7.37 mm (0.29 in) using a letter "L" size drill bit. 3. Position the crash sensor to the vehicle. 4. Install the 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw into the drilled-out weld nut. 5. Install the remaining attaching screws. 6. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7762 Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Safing Sensor, Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation Safing Sensor: Description and Operation Safing Sensor The Safing Sensor is part of the Restraints Control Module (RCM) and is not serviced separately. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Specifications Side Air Bag: Specifications Side Air Bag Module 5 Nm Seat Pivot Nut 5 Nm Seat Backrest Bolts 40 Nm Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Left Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Left > Page 7771 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Right Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Right > Page 7774 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Side Air Bag: Technician Safety Information WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. ^ TO REDUCE THE RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY, READ AND FOLLOW ALL WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, NOTES, AND INSTRUCTIONS IN THE SEAT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION PROCEDURE. ^ FRONT SEAT BACK TRIM COVERS INSTALLED ON SEATS EQUIPPED WITH SIDE AIR BAGS CANNOT BE REPAIRED; THEY ARE TO BE REPLACED (CLEANING IS PERMISSIBLE). ^ INSPECT THE MOUNTING SURFACES OF THE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE AND THE SEAT BACK FRAME MOUNTING BRACKET FOR ANY FOREIGN OBJECTS BEFORE INSTALLING THE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE. IF ANY FOREIGN OBJECTS ARE FOUND, REMOVE THEM. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY, IN THE EVENT OF AN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT. ^ BEFORE INSTALLING THE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE, CHECK IT FOR DAMAGE AND FOREIGN OBJECTS. IF THE AIR BAG MODULE IS DAMAGED, REPLACE IT. IF ANY FOREIGN OBJECTS ARE FOUND, REMOVE THEM. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY, IN THE EVENT OF AN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT. ^ IF THE AIR BAG COVER HAS SEPARATED OR THE AIR BAG MATERIAL HAS BEEN EXPOSED, INSTALL A NEW SIDE AIR BAG MODULE. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REPAIR THE AIR BAG MODULE. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT. ^ INSPECT THE SIDE AIR BAG CAVITY IN THE SEAT BACK PAD FOR ANY FOREIGN OBJECTS. IF ANY FOREIGN OBJECTS ARE FOUND, REMOVE THEM. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 7777 Side Air Bag: Vehicle Damage Warnings CAUTION: ^ Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. ^ Make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not pinched between the side air bag module and the mounting bracket. ^ When positioning the seat or installing the seat bottom to the seat back, be careful not to damage the seat back pivot or the recliner mechanism. This can cause damage to the seat components. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7778 Side Air Bag: Description and Operation Driver Side Air Bag Module NOTE: ^ References to side air bag modules refer to the seat-mounted and not to the steering wheel or instrument panel mounted air bag components of the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). ^ When installing a new side air bag module after deployment, refer to Seats. The driver side air bag module: ^ will deploy upon receiving a signal from the Restraints Control Module (RCM) initiated by the driver side crash sensor. ^ is installed as an assembly. ^ is mounted in the driver seat back. Passenger Side Air Bag Module NOTE: ^ References to side air bag modules refer to the seat-mounted and not to the steering wheel or instrument panel mounted air bag components of the supplemental restraint system (SRS). ^ When installing a new side air bag module after deployment, refer to Seats. The passenger side air bag module: ^ will deploy upon receiving a signal from the restraints control module (RCM) initiated by the passenger side crash sensor. ^ is installed as an assembly. ^ is mounted in the passenger seat back. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7779 Side Air Bag: Service and Repair Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7780 removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat Systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. ^ If a side air bag deployment took place the seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module must be replaced. The seatback frame should be replaced if necessary. ^ When replacing the side air bag after deployment, refer to Seats. ^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 2. Remove the affected seat from the vehicle. WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY, READ AND FOLLOW ALL WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, NOTES, AND INSTRUCTIONS IN THE SEAT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION PROCEDURE. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. NOTE: The driver side air bag module removal is shown, the passenger side air bag module removal is similar. 3. Pry out and remove the seat cushion adjuster handle center plug. NOTE: Use care not to damage the center hole plug. 4. Remove the seat cushion adjuster handle. 1 Release the retaining tabs. 2 Pull and remove the seat cushion adjusted handle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7781 5. Remove the outboard seat cushion side shield. 1 Remove the seat backrest lever cover. 2 Remove the screw. 3 Pull out to release the retaining clips and remove the seat cushion side shield. ^ If equipped, disconnect the power seat switch electrical connector. 6. Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield. ^ Pull out to release the retaining clips. 7. Release the pin-type retainers and separate the side air bag electrical connector and wire harness from the seat. NOTE: Note the wire harness routing for installation. 8. Remove the seat backrest pivot nut. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7782 9. Remove the seat backrest. 1 Remove the seat backrest bolts. 2 Slide the seat backrest pivot stud out of the seat cushion frame and remove the seat backrest. CAUTION: When positioning the seat or separating the seat bottom from the back, be careful not to damage the seat back pivot or the recliner mechanism. This can cause damage to the seat components. 10. Turn the manual lumbar handle clockwise until it stops, releasing all tension on the manual lumbar support cable. 11. Pull and remove the manual lumbar support adjustment handle. 12. Separate the seat backrest trim cover J-retainers. 13. Remove the seat backrest trim cover. 1 Placing a hand between the seat backrest trim cover and pad, carefully separate the hook and loop strips. 2 Roll up the seat back trim cover, in an inside out fashion, and remove the seat backrest trim cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7783 WARNING: FRONT SEAT BACK TRIM COVERS INSTALLED ON SEATS EQUIPPED WITH SIDE AIR BAGS CANNOT BE REPAIRED; THEY ARE TO BE REPLACED (CLEANING IS PERMISSIBLE). CAUTION: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook and loop strip. The hook and loop strip can be torn from the seat cushion foam. 14. Remove the seat backrest pad from the frame. 15. Separate the side air bag module wiring harness pin-type retainers from the seat back frame. 16. Remove the side air bag module. 1 Remove the nuts. 2 Remove the side air bag module. NOTE: If installing a new side air bag module, use new retaining nuts. If the same side air bag module is to be reused, then reuse the side air bag module retaining nuts. INSTALLATION WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7784 GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat Systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. ^ When replacing the side air bag after deployment, refer to Seats. ^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. ^ The driver side air bag module installation is shown, the passenger side air bag module installation is similar. 1. Install the side air bag module onto the seat backrest frame mounting bracket. 1 Position the side air bag module to the seat backrest frame mounting bracket. 2 Install the nuts. WARNING: ^ INSPECT THE MOUNTING SURFACES OF THE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE AND THE SEAT BACK FRAME MOUNTING BRACKET FOR ANY FOREIGN OBJECTS BEFORE INSTALLING THE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE. IF ANY FOREIGN OBJECTS ARE FOUND, REMOVE THEM. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY, IN THE EVENT OF AN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT. ^ BEFORE INSTALLING THE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE, CHECK IT FOR DAMAGE AND FOREIGN OBJECTS. IF THE AIR BAG MODULE IS DAMAGED, REPLACE IT. IF ANY FOREIGN OBJECTS ARE FOUND, REMOVE THEM. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY, IN THE EVENT OF AN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT. ^ IF THE AIR BAG COVER HAS SEPARATED OR THE AIR BAG MATERIAL HAS BEEN EXPOSED, INSTALL A NEW SIDE AIR BAG MODULE. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REPAIR THE AIR BAG MODULE. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7785 PERSONAL INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT. CAUTION: Make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not pinched between the side air bag module and the mounting bracket. 2. Route the side air bag module wire harness. Install the pin-type retainers to the seat backrest frame. 3. Position the seat backrest pad onto the seat backrest frame. WARNING: INSPECT THE SIDE AIR BAG CAVITY IN THE SEAT BACK PAD FOR ANY FOREIGN OBJECTS. IF ANY FOREIGN OBJECTS ARE FOUND, REMOVE THEM. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT. 4. Install the seat backrest trim cover. 1 Position and roll the seat backrest trim cover down over the seat backrest frame and pad. 2 Attach the hook and loop strips. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7786 5. Attach the seat back trim cover J-retainers. 6. Install the manual lumbar control knob. 7. Install the seat backrest bolts. 1 Align the seat backrest to the seat bottom. 2 Install the seat backrest bolts. CAUTION: When positioning the seat or installing the seat bottom to the seat back, be careful not to damage the seat back pivot or the recliner mechanism. This can cause damage to the seat components. 8. Install the pivot nut. 9. Route the side air bag module wire harness as noted in removal. Install the wire harness and electrical connector pin-type retainers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7787 10. Install the outboard seat cushion side shield. 1 Align the retaining clips and push inward, seating the retaining clips. ^ If equipped, connect the power seat switch electrical connector. 2 Install the screw. 3 Install the seat backrest lever cover. 11. Install the seat cushion adjuster handle. 12. Install the seat cushion adjuster handle center plug. 13. Align the retaining clips and push inward, installing the inboard seat cushion side shield. 14. Install the affected seat into the vehicle. WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY, READ AND FOLLOW ALL WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, NOTES AND INSTRUCTIONS IN THE SEAT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION PROCEDURE. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7788 CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. 15. Connect the battery ground cable. 16. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 17. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7789 Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications Air Bag Control Module: Specifications Restraint Control Module Bolts 12 Nm Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7794 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7795 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7796 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Air Bag Control Module: Technician Safety Information WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. ^ THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 7799 Air Bag Control Module: Vehicle Damage Warnings CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage can result. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7800 Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation The Restraints Control Module (RCM) carries out the following functions: ^ signals the inflators to deploy the air bags in the event of a deployable crash ^ monitors the air bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) for faults ^ illuminates the air bag indicator if a fault is detected ^ flashes the air bag indicator to indicate the Lamp Fault Code (LFC) detected ^ communicates through the Data Link Connector (DLC) the current or historical Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) ^ signals the instrument cluster to activate a chime if the air bag indicator is not available and another SRS fault exists NOTE: The safing Sensor is internal to the RCM and is not serviced separately. The RCM monitors the SRS for possible faults. If a fault is detected while the ignition switch is in the RUN position, the RCM will flash the air bag indicator located in the instrument cluster. When the ignition is cycled (turned off and then on), the air bag indicator will prove out by lighting for six seconds and then off for two seconds. After the prove out, the air bag indicator will then flash the two-digit LFC for any current SRS fault. If an SRS fault exists, the air bag indicator will flash the LFC five times, and then remain illuminated for the rest of the key cycle. The RCM will also communicate the current and historical DTCs through the DLC, to the scan tool. If the air bag indicator does not function, and the system detects a fault condition, the RCM will signal the instrument cluster to activate an audible chime. The chime is a series of five sets of five tone bursts. If the chime is heard, the SRS and the air bag indicator require repair. LFCs are prioritized. If two or more faults occur at the same time, the fault having the highest priority will be displayed. After that fault has been corrected, the next highest priority fault will be displayed. The RCM includes a backup power supply. This feature provides sufficient backup power to deploy the air bags in the event that the ignition circuit is damaged in a collision before the safing and air bag sensors determine that a deployment is required. The backup power supply will deplete its stored energy approximately one minute after the battery ground cable is disconnected. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7801 Air Bag Control Module: Testing and Inspection For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Air Bag Systems; Testing and Inspection. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Restraints Control Module (RCM) Vehicles With Side Air Bags Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage can result. NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7804 procedure again. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. 2. Remove the steering wheel access cover. 3. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7805 4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the steering column. 5. Open the glove box past its stops. 6. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the instrument panel, disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket under the seat. 2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip. 3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7806 9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. 1 Slide and release the passenger side air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. 11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger side air bag module floor electrical connector. 12. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat bracket. 2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip. 3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7807 13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. 14. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 1 Slide and release the driver side air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 15. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver side air bag module floor electrical connector. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. 17. With the restraint system diagnostic tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure 18. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 19. Position the carpet back at the right-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel. 20. Remove the right-hand side restraint control module (RCM) retaining bolts. 21. Position the carpet back at the left-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7808 22. Remove the RCM. 1 Slide and disengage the two RCM electrical connector locking clips. 2 Push down to pivot the RCM electrical connector tabs and pull out to disconnect. 3 Remove the retaining bolt. 4 Remove the RCM. INSTALLATION WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage can result. NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Position the RCM to the center tunnel area and install the three bolts hand-tight. WARNING: ^ THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7809 NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. 2. Tighten the right-hand side RCM bolts. WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. 3. Reposition the carpet back at the right-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel. 4. Connect the RCM. 1 Tighten the bolt. 2 Connect the RCM electrical connectors. 3 Slide and engage the RCM electrical connector locking clips. WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. 5. Reposition the carpet back at the left-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel. 6. Connect the battery ground cable. 7. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure 8. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7810 9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 10. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 11. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 12. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver side air bag module electrical connector onto the bracket under the Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7811 seat. 13. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 14. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 15. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag module floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7812 16. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Install the passenger side air bag module electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 17. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 18. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 19. Close the glove box. 20. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the steering column. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7813 VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 21. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 22. Install the steering wheel access cover. 23. Connect the battery ground cable. 24. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Vehicles Without Side Air Bags Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7814 WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage can result. NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7815 2. Remove the steering wheel access cover. 3. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the steering column. 5. Open the glove box past its stops. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7816 6. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the instrument panel, disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket under the seat. 2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip. 3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7817 10. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat bracket. 2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip. 3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. 12. Connect the battery ground cable. 13. With the restraint system diagnostic tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure 14. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 15. Position the carpet back at the right-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel. 16. Remove the right-hand side restraint control module (RCM) retaining bolts. 17. Position the carpet back at the left-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel. 18. Remove the RCM. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7818 1 Slide and disengage the two RCM electrical connector locking clips. 2 Push down to pivot the RCM electrical connector tabs and pull out to disconnect. 3 Remove the retaining bolt. 4 Remove the RCM. INSTALLATION WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage can result. NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Position the RCM to the center tunnel area and install the three bolts hand-tight. WARNING: ^ THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7819 2. Tighten the right-hand side RCM bolts. WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. 3. Reposition the carpet back at the right-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel. 4. Connect the RCM. 1 Tighten the bolt. 2 Connect the RCM electrical connectors. 3 Slide and engage the RCM electrical connector locking clips. WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. 5. Reposition the carpet back at the left-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel. 6. Connect the battery ground cable. 7. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure 8. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7820 10. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 11. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 12. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 13. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7821 VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 14. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 15. Close the glove box. 16. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the steering column. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 17. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 18. Install the steering wheel access cover. 19. Connect the battery ground cable. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7822 20. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7823 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Weld Nut Repair "J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). NOTE: ^ There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld nut(s). Read both this procedures and Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair. ^ If two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts in this procedure. Weld nuts must be installed in Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor. ^ The following procedure applies to vehicles that have a rectangular hole in the sheet metal that is in close proximity to the missing weld nut. 1. Obtain a "J" nut (part number N623332-S301) or any of the following optional "J" nuts (part numbers: N623342-S101, N800854-S100, N800925-S100). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-S190) or equivalent. 3. Install the "J" nut through the rectangular hole in the sheet metal. 4. Install the crash sensor. NOTE: Be sure the threaded portion of the "J" nut is aligned with the clearance hole in the sheet metal. 5. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications. Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). NOTE: ^ There are two procedures to repairs a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld nut(s). Read both this procedure and Weld Nut Repair-"J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair. ^ Use only this procedure if two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts in Weld Nut Repair-"J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Crash Sensor. ^ Radiator support repair shown, others are similar. 1. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) weld nut (part number N806285-S190). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-S190). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Restraints Control Module (RCM) > Page 7824 3. Route a sufficient length of copper welding wire through the weld nut clearance hole and back out an adjacent access hole. 4. Feed the copper welding wire through the weld nut, then through a standard flat washer. 5. Secure the flat washer so that it cannot be pulled off the end of the copper welding wire. 6. Pull the copper welding wire back through the clearance hole, allowing the weld nut and flat washer to follow the copper welding wire through. 7. Position the weld nut to the weld nut clearance hole, firmly pulling on the copper welding wire allowing the secured flat washer to hold the weld nut in position. 8. Holding the weld nut securely in place and using a MIG welder, weld in four places around the edge of the weld nut. 9. Metal finish as required. 10. Verify the nut is securely in place. 11. Install the crash sensor. 12. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications. Stripped Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). 1. Obtain an 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw (part number N802455-S190). 2. Drill out the internal threads of the stripped-out weld nut to 7.37 mm (0.29 in) using a letter "L" size drill bit. 3. Position the crash sensor to the vehicle. 4. Install the 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw into the drilled-out weld nut. 5. Install the remaining attaching screws. 6. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7825 Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Customer Safety Information WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. ^ THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information > Page 7831 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Technician Safety Information WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. ^ THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming Seats Removed There are two deactivation procedures. ^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing side air bag concerns, and also when repairing any in-seat component in vehicles equipped with side air bags. ^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal. This procedure will be used when diagnosing a concern not related to the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag system is being serviced, the airbag system must be deactivated using the appropriate deactivation procedure. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system, the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring behind the access panel on the bottom of the steering wheel. 4. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 5. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the passenger air bag. 7. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, remove the front seats. 9. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag floor electrical connector. 10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side floor electrical connector. 12. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable. Seats Not Removed There are two deactivation procedures. ^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing side air bag concerns, and also when repairing any in-seat component in vehicles equipped with side air bags. ^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal. This procedure will be used when diagnosing a concern not related to the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). 1. Move and tilt the front seats to their highest and most forward position. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7834 SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag system is being serviced, the airbag system must be deactivated using the appropriate deactivation procedure. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system, the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. 3. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 4. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring behind the access panel in the bottom of the steering wheel. 5. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring. 6. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector beneath the front seat. 10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag electrical connector beneath the passenger seat. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 12. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the driver seat. 13. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the front seat. 14. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle electrical connector. 15. Reconnect the battery ground cable. Depowering and Repowering Procedure Depowering Procedure WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. WARNING: Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which can result in personal injury. WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be depowered. NOTE: The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the central junction box (CJB), located below the LH side of the instrument panel, remove the cover and the restraints control module (RCM) fuse F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) from the CJB. 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7835 proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Repowering Procedure 1. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected. 2. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 3. Install RCM fuses F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) to the CJB and close the cover. 4. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front of any air bag module when the battery ground cable is connected. Connect the battery ground cable. 5. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool. Seats Removed 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 4. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7836 5. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 7. Install the front seats. 8. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. ^ Reconnect the electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 10. Reconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 11. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 12. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure Seats Not Removed 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. ^ Reconnect the electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 4. If equipped with side air bags, remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 5. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 7. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7837 8. If equipped with side air bags, connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. 9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 10. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 11. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7838 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag System Reconnect Checklist Air Bag Reconnect Checklist The checklist below should be completed following diagnosis or repair of any air bag system concern: 1. All in-seat electrical connectors connected? 2. All air bag modules connected? 3. Restraints Control Module (RCM) connected? 4. All safety belt pretensioners connectors connected? 5. All sensors (side impact) connected? 6. Battery connected? Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7839 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position and visually monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either: ^ fail to light. ^ remain lit continuously. ^ flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the RUN position. This is the time required for the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Specifications Child Seat Tether Attachment: Specifications Child Safety Seat Tether Anchor 22 Nm Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7844 Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service Precautions WARNING: ^ ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTERS (IF SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND ATTACHING HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT ASSEMBLIES SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE ASSEMBLIES SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN USE DURING A COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER DAMAGE OR IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED. ^ IT IS IMPORTANT THAT THE BOLT/ANCHOR BE SECURELY TIGHTENED TO SPECIFICATION. OTHERWISE, THE CHILD'S SAFETY SEAT MAY NOT BE PROPERLY SECURED, AND THE CHILD CAN BE INJURED IN CASE OF A SUDDEN STOP OR ACCIDENT. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7845 Child Seat Tether Attachment: Description and Operation Some manufacturers make child safety seats that include a tether strap that goes over the back of the vehicle seat and attaches to an anchoring point. Other manufacturers offer the tether strap as an accessory. Contact the manufacturer of the child safety seat for information about ordering a tether strap. Child safety seat tether anchors are manufactured into the vehicle. See the owners manual for locations. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7846 Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service and Repair REMOVAL WARNING: ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTERS (IF SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND ATTACHING HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT ASSEMBLIES SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE ASSEMBLIES SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN USE DURING A COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER DAMAGE OR IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED. 1. At the roof, near the rear liftgate door, remove the child safety seat tether anchor cover. 2. Remove the child safety seat tether anchor. 1 Remove the bolt. 2 Remove the child safety seat tether anchor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. WARNING: IT IS IMPORTANT THAT THE BOLT/ANCHOR BE SECURELY TIGHTENED TO SPECIFICATION. OTHERWISE, THE CHILD'S SAFETY SEAT MAY NOT BE PROPERLY SECURED, AND THE CHILD CAN BE INJURED IN CASE OF A SUDDEN STOP OR ACCIDENT. NOTE: ^ Rework the sheet metal to its original condition and structural integrity. ^ Make sure to tighten the bolts to specification. 2. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-17-11 > Sep > 05 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set Seat Belt: Customer Interest SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set TSB 05-17-11 09/05/05 RESTRAINT SYSTEM - SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1877 AND/OR B1881 FORD: 2001-2004 Escape This article supersedes TSB 04-24-4 to update the service procedure. ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit an intermittent air bag lamp on and diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1877 and/or B1881. This may be caused by a variation in the electrical continuity between the pins of the driver and/or passenger side wiring harness and the buckle pretensioner connector. If this condition were to occur, the air bag system remains fully functional. ACTION Install a replacement harness connector kit ON BOTH the driver and passenger safety belt buckle pretensioners, even if the DTC is present for only one side. The kit includes improved connector halves to replace the existing connectors on both the body harness and the safety belt buckle pretensioner. One kit is required per side (2 kits per vehicle). Refer to the instruction sheet included in the kit for complete repair procedure. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 051711A 2001-2004 Escape Install 2.0 Hrs. A Replacement Harness Connector On Both The Body Side And Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner Harness For Both Driver And Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioners (Do Not Use With 14056D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7861202 OR 7861203 X2 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt: > 05-17-11 > Sep > 05 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set Seat Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set TSB 05-17-11 09/05/05 RESTRAINT SYSTEM - SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1877 AND/OR B1881 FORD: 2001-2004 Escape This article supersedes TSB 04-24-4 to update the service procedure. ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit an intermittent air bag lamp on and diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1877 and/or B1881. This may be caused by a variation in the electrical continuity between the pins of the driver and/or passenger side wiring harness and the buckle pretensioner connector. If this condition were to occur, the air bag system remains fully functional. ACTION Install a replacement harness connector kit ON BOTH the driver and passenger safety belt buckle pretensioners, even if the DTC is present for only one side. The kit includes improved connector halves to replace the existing connectors on both the body harness and the safety belt buckle pretensioner. One kit is required per side (2 kits per vehicle). Refer to the instruction sheet included in the kit for complete repair procedure. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 051711A 2001-2004 Escape Install 2.0 Hrs. A Replacement Harness Connector On Both The Body Side And Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner Harness For Both Driver And Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioners (Do Not Use With 14056D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7861202 OR 7861203 X2 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt: > 05-3-10 > Feb > 05 > Restraints - Seat Belt Stop Button Service Seat Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Stop Button Service TSB 05-3-10 02/21/05 SAFETY BELT WEB STOP BUTTON SERVICE FORD: 2000-2004 Mustang 2000-2005 Crown Victoria, Focus, Taurus 1999-2005 F-Super Duty 2000-2003 Windstar 2000-2005 Excursion, F-150, Ranger 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2002-2005 Explorer 2003-2004 Expedition 2004-2005 Freestar 2005 Escape Hybrid LINCOLN: 2000-2005 LS, Town Car 2003-2004 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2001-2005 Mariner 2002-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey ISSUE To service a safety belt web stop button (the button that keeps the belt tongue from sliding down when not in use), a service kit is now available. ACTION Install the safety belt button kit, DO NOT replace the entire safety belt assembly. Follow the Service Procedure in the Instruction Sheet that comes with the kit. Refer to Section 501-20A of the appropriate model year Workshop Manual for additional information if needed. NOTE ONE KIT WILL REPAIR ONE SEAT BELT BUTTON. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 70611B09 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Belt: > 05-3-10 > Feb > 05 > Restraints - Seat Belt Stop Button Service Seat Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Stop Button Service TSB 05-3-10 02/21/05 SAFETY BELT WEB STOP BUTTON SERVICE FORD: 2000-2004 Mustang 2000-2005 Crown Victoria, Focus, Taurus 1999-2005 F-Super Duty 2000-2003 Windstar 2000-2005 Excursion, F-150, Ranger 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2002-2005 Explorer 2003-2004 Expedition 2004-2005 Freestar 2005 Escape Hybrid LINCOLN: 2000-2005 LS, Town Car 2003-2004 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2001-2005 Mariner 2002-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey ISSUE To service a safety belt web stop button (the button that keeps the belt tongue from sliding down when not in use), a service kit is now available. ACTION Install the safety belt button kit, DO NOT replace the entire safety belt assembly. Follow the Service Procedure in the Instruction Sheet that comes with the kit. Refer to Section 501-20A of the appropriate model year Workshop Manual for additional information if needed. NOTE ONE KIT WILL REPAIR ONE SEAT BELT BUTTON. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 70611B09 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7869 Seat Belt: Specifications Second Row Safety Belt Bolt 47 Nm Safety Belt Anchor Bolt 47 Nm Safety Belt Guide Bolt 47 Nm Front Row Safety Belt Retractor Lower Bolt 47 Nm Front Row Safety Belt Retractor Upper Bolt 9 Nm Second Row Safety Belt Retractor Bolt 47 Nm Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information Seat Belt: Customer Safety Information WARNING: REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS SHOULD NEVER BE PLACED IN THE FRONT SEATS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information > Page 7872 Seat Belt: Technician Safety Information WARNING: ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTERS (IF SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND ATTACHING HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT ASSEMBLIES SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE ASSEMBLIES SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN USE DURING A COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER DAMAGE OR IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7873 Seat Belt: Description and Operation WARNING: REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS SHOULD NEVER BE PLACED IN THE FRONT SEATS. The dual locking mode retractor on the shoulder belt portion of the combination lap/shoulder safety belt for the front outboard passenger and both rear outboard seating positions, operates in two ways. The driver single locking mode retractor on the shoulder belt portion of the combination lap/shoulder safety belt works only in the vehicle sensitive mode. 1. In the vehicle-sensitive (emergency locking) mode, the shoulder belt retractor allows the occupant freedom of movement, locking tight only on hard braking, hard cornering or impacts of approximately 8 km/h (5 mph) or more. The front and rear outboard seat belt retractors can also be made to lock by pulling/jerking on the belt. 2. In the automatic locking mode, the shoulder belt retractor automatically locks and remains locked when the combination lap/shoulder safety belt is buckled and does not allow the occupant freedom of movement. This mode provides tight lap/shoulder belt fit on the occupant and on a child safety seat. 3. When the combination lap/shoulder belt is unbuckled and allowed to retract completely, the retractor switches to the vehicle-sensitive (emergency) locking mode. The automatic locking mode must be used when installing a child safety seat in the front outboard passenger and both rear outboard passenger seating positions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Seat Belt: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Front Safety Belt and Retractor Safety Belt Bolt Bit SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTERS (IF SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND ATTACHING HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT ASSEMBLIES SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE ASSEMBLIES SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN USE DURING A COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER DAMAGE OR IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED. NOTE: The driver side is shown, the passenger side is similar. 1. Remove the B-pillar trim panel. 2. Remove the safety belt anchor. 1 Using the special tool, remove the bolt. 2 Remove the safety belt anchor. 3. Separate the front safety belt retractor from the B-pillar. 1 Remove the bolt. 2 Using the special tool, remove the bolt. 3 Separate the front safety belt retractor from the B-pillar. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7876 4. Remove the front safety belt retractor. 1 Disconnect the front safety belt retractor. 2 Remove the front safety belt retractor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Make sure that after the front passenger safety belt retractor is installed, the retractor is not in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode. NOTE: ^ Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation. ^ Make sure to tighten bolts to specification. 2. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. ^ Carry out the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) Mode Functional Test to make sure that the new retractor operates correctly. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Functional Test - Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) Mode Safety Belt and Buckle - Center and Driver Side Safety Belt Bolt Bit SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTERS (IF SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND ATTACHING HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT ASSEMBLIES SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE ASSEMBLIES SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN USE DURING A COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER DAMAGE OR IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED. 1. Pivot the seat bottom forward. 2. Pivot the seat backrest back. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7877 3. Remove the safety belt and buckle assembly. 1 Position the carpet out of the way. 2 Using the special tool, remove the bolt. 3 Feed the safety belt and buckle through the carpet and remove the assembly. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. NOTE: ^ Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted after repositioning the seat. ^ Make sure that the safety belt and buckle are accessible after repositioning the seat. ^ Make sure to tighten the bolt to specification. 2. Check the restraint system for correct operation. Rear Safety Belt and Retractor Safety Belt Bolt Bit SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTERS (IF SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND ATTACHING HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT ASSEMBLIES SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE ASSEMBLIES SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN USE DURING A COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER DAMAGE OR IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED. NOTE: The driver side is shown, the passenger side is similar. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7878 1. Remove the rear door scuff plate. 1 Open the cover. 2 Remove the two pin-type retainers (one shown). 3 Remove the rear door scuff plate. 2. Separate the weather-stripping from the C-pillar. 3. Remove the safety belt anchor. 1 Using the special tool, remove the bolt. 2 Remove the safety belt anchor. 4. From behind the rear safety belt guide cover, release the retaining tabs, slide the cover up and remove it. NOTE: The rear safety belt guide has been removed for clarity. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7879 5. Remove the rear safety belt guide. 1 Using the special tool, remove the bolt. 2 Remove the safety belt guide. 6. Lower the second row seat backrest. 7. Separate the rear hatch weather-stripping along the scuff plate and rear quarter trim panel on the side of the safety belt retractor being serviced. 8. Remove the rear hatch scuff plate. 1 Remove the pin-type retainers. 2 Pull up to release the retaining clips and remove the rear hatch scuff plate. 9. Pull out to release the retaining clips and remove the rear quarter trim panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7880 10. Remove the rear safety belt retractor. 1 Using the special tool, remove the bolt. 2 Remove the rear safety belt retractor. INSTALLATION 1. Install the rear safety belt retractor. 1 Position the rear safety belt retractor to the C-pillar. 2 Using the special tool, install the bolt. 2. Install the quarter trim panel. 1 Position the quarter trim panel and feed the safety belt webbing through the opening. 2 Align the quarter trim panel and push in, fastening the retainers. NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation. 3. Install the rear hatch scuff plate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7881 1 Align the rear hatch scuff plate and push in, fastening the retainers. 2 Install the pin-type retainers. 4. Install the rear hatch weather-stripping. 5. Install the spacer onto the rear safety belt guide bolt. 6. Install the rear safety belt guide. 1 Position the safety belt guide. 2 Using the special tool, install the bolt. NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation. 7. Install the rear safety belt guide cover. NOTE: If the safety belt guide cover is damaged or if it does not remain in position, install a new cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7882 8. Raise the second row seat backrest. 9. Install the safety belt anchor. 1 Position the safety belt anchor. 2 Using the special tool, install the bolt. NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation. 10. Install the C-pillar weatherstripping. 11. Install the rear door scuff plate. 1 Position the rear door scuff plate. 2 Install the two pin-type retainers (one shown). 3 Close the cover. 12. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. 1 Make sure that after the rear safety belt retractor is installed, the retractor is not in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode. 2 Carry out the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) Mode Functional Test to make sure that the new retractor operates correctly. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Functional Test - Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) Mode Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7883 Seat Belt: Service and Repair Safety Belt Pretensioner Disposal Deployed 1. Dispose of the deployed safety belt pretensioner in the same manner as any other part to be scrapped. WARNING: ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING A SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR/PRETENSIONER ASSEMBLY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. Undeployed, Inoperative WARNING: CARRY A LIVE SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR/PRETENSIONER ASSEMBLY SO AS TO KEEP FINGERS AND CLOTHING AWAY FROM MOVEABLE PARTS. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. NOTE: All inoperative safety belt retractor/pretensioner assemblies have been placed on the Mandatory Return List. All damaged safety belt retractor/pretensioners must be treated the same as any inoperative live safety belt retractor/pretensioner being returned. 1. Remove the inoperative safety belt retractor/pretensioner assembly from the vehicle. 2. Package and return the inoperative safety belt retractor/pretensioner assembly to Ford Motor Company. Undeployed, Scrapped Vehicle REMOTE DEPLOYMENT WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE OR SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR/PRETENSIONER ASSEMBLY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ CARRY A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TRIM COVER OR DEPLOYMENT DOOR POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ REMOTE DEPLOYMENT IS TO BE PERFORMED OUTDOORS WITH ALL PERSONNEL AT LEAST 6.1 METERS (20 FEET) AWAY TO ENSURE PERSONAL SAFETY. DUE TO THE LOUD REPORT WHICH OCCURS WHEN THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED, HEARING PROTECTION IS REQUIRED. ^ DO NOT PLACE THE DRIVER OR PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE TRIM COVER OR DEPLOYMENT DOOR FACING DOWN, AS THE FORCES OF THE DEPLOYING AIR BAG COULD CAUSE IT TO RICOCHET AND CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY. 1. Remove the safety belt pretensioner from the vehicle. 2. Cut and strip the wires near the electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7884 3. Obtain two wires (20 gauge minimum) at least 6.1 meters (20 feet) long and attach one end of each wire to stripped ends of the pretensioner wires. 4. Place the pretensioner on a flat surface in an open outdoor area. 5. Remain at least 6.1 meters (20 feet) away from the safety belt pretensioner. 6. Deploy the safety belt pretensioner by touching the other ends of the two wires to the terminals of a 12 volt battery. 7. To allow for cooling, wait at least ten minutes before approaching the deployed safety belt pretensioner. 8. Dispose of the deployed safety belt pretensioner in the same manner as any other part to be scrapped. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7885 Seat Belt Bolt Bit Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Belt Buckle: > 03S10 > Feb > 04 > Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckle Cover Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 03S10 Date: 040201 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Belt Buckle: > 03S10 > Feb > 04 > Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckle Cover Replacement > Page 7894 Attachment I - Administrative Information Safety Recall 03S10 Certain 2001 Model Year Escape Vehicles Front Safety Belt Buckle Cover Replacement OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states provinces and countries. Accordingly you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected stock vehicles before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs ^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Also correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. RELATED DAMAGE ^ Related damage claims are not approved for this program. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Belt Buckle: > 03S10 > Feb > 04 > Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckle Cover Replacement > Page 7895 ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ This repair will require no additional labor time to complete. Claims submitted with "MT" labor will not be accepted for reimbursement. OWNER REFUNDS ^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this Safety Recall if the repair was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan which is posted with this bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC). The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or at their option directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 1904, Dearborn, MI 48121. ^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund claims that include other non-covered repairs or those judged by Ford to be excessive will not be accepted for reimbursement. ^ This safety recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair. Claiming a refund will not close out the VIN for this recall. ^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.) - Program Code: 03S10 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN - Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refund must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the FSA's repair line. Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information LABOR ALLOWANCES Note: If either safety belt buckle fails to latch properly during the operational checks specified in the repair procedure call the Special Service Support Center at 1-800-325-5621 to obtain authorization for the replacement of the safety belt assembly. SPECIAL TOOL One buckle cover removal tool was sent to each dealer at no cost. A limited supply will be available until March 1 2004 from the Special Service Support Center (1-800-325-5621). Tools may also be fabricated locally by referring to the instructions at the end of Attachment Ill. PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts will not be direct shipped for this recall. Order your parts requirements through order processing channels as noted below. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Belt Buckle: > 03S10 > Feb > 04 > Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckle Cover Replacement > Page 7896 ^ For Stock Orders effective immediately follow normal order process. ^ For Interim Orders effective immediately follow normal order process. ^ For Emergency Orders within the first 30 days after launch call 1-800-325-5621. ^ For Emergency Orders 31 days after launch follow normal order process. The DOR/COR for this program is 50314. This number identifies parts ordered for this recall through the Special Service Support Center (1-800-325-5621). DEALER PRICE For latest prices refer to DOES II. PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures." EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information SERVICE PROCEDURE SPECIAL TOOL INFORMATION One (1) buckle cover removal tool is being supplied to each dealer. A limited number of additional tools will be available until March 1, 2004 from the Special Service Support Center at 1-800-325-5621. Tools may also be fabricated locally by referring to the instructions at the end of this attachment. CAUTION: Care should be taken when using the buckle cover removal tool to avoid damage to the vehicle interior. Always pull the removal tool in a direction away from the seat and center console. NOTE: Sitting in the seat during buckle cover removal will allow better control of the tool should it slip off the buckle during removal. NOTE: Any supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault or air bag indicator light issues must be corrected before this procedure is performed. Any SRS fault or air bag indicator light issues present are NOT covered by this program. 1. Buckle Cover Removal: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Belt Buckle: > 03S10 > Feb > 04 > Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckle Cover Replacement > Page 7897 a) Securely insert the hooked end of the buckle cover removal tool into the buckle assembly as shown. See Figure 1. b) While sitting in the seat, firmly pull the tool up and away from the seat and center console to separate the safety belt buckle cover halves. 2. Buckle Operation Check 1: With both front safety belt covers removed, verify the operation of both safety belt buckles. a) Insert the safety belt tongue into the buckle. Make sure the buckle makes a "click" noise. b) Pull on the safety belt to make sure it is securely locked in the buckle. c) Push the buckle release button and make sure the buckle releases the safety belt. d) If the buckle fails to securely lock and retain the safety belt, call the Special Service Support Center at 1-800-325-5621. 3. Buckle Cover Installation: CAUTION: Do not overtighten the screws. NOTE: Verify that the plastic anti-rattle spring is in place on the lower cover prior to installation. See Figure 2. NOTE: Replacement buckle covers go together more easily when the upper cover is positioned first (inboard side), and the lower cover positioned second (outboard side). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Belt Buckle: > 03S10 > Feb > 04 > Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckle Cover Replacement > Page 7898 a) Install the new safety belt buckle cover with the felt patch on the passenger side buckle assembly. Install four (4) supplied screws to secure the cover and tighten the screws. See Figure 3. b) Install the other safety belt cover (without felt patch) onto the driver side seat belt assembly. Install four (4) supplied screws to secure the cover and tighten the screws. The two remaining screws in the kit are spare screws. 4. Buckle Operation Check 2: With the new safety belt buckle covers in place, verify the operation of both safety belt buckles. a) Insert the safety belt tongue into the buckle. Make sure the buckle makes a "click" noise. b) Pull on the safety belt to make sure it is securely locked into the buckle. c) Push the buckle release button and make sure the buckle releases the safety belt. d) If the buckle fails to securely lock and retain the safety belt, call the Special Service Support Center at 1-800-325-5621. NOTE: Special Service Support Center will authorize replacement of the buckle assembly if the latch fails to operate properly. Replacement covers must be installed on the new assembly to maintain uniform appearance. 5. Move the seats back to their original positions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Belt Buckle: > 03S10 > Feb > 04 > Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckle Cover Replacement > Page 7899 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Belt Buckle: > 03S10 > Feb > 04 > Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckle Cover Replacement > Page 7900 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Seat Belt Buckle: > NHTSA03V507000 > Dec > 03 > Recall 03V507000: Seat Belt Buckle Cover Replacement Seat Belt Buckle: Recalls Recall 03V507000: Seat Belt Buckle Cover Replacement DEFECT: On certain sport utility vehicles, a post within the safety belt buckle covers could fracture, which could affect latch function, resulting in either a "no latch" or "partial latch" condition. In the "partial latch" condition, the buckle tongue can be inserted into the buckle and appear to be engaged, but will release from the buckle without the push button being depressed when a relatively low load is applied, such as when an occupant moves slightly in the seat. In the event of a crash, the seat occupant may not be properly restrained, increasing the risk of injury. REMEDY: Dealers will have the driver and front passenger safety belt buckle cover removed and replaced with a newly designed service buckle cover. The manufacturer has reported that owner notification began on February 2, 2004. Owners may contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 03S10 > Feb > 04 > Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckle Cover Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 03S10 Date: 040201 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 03S10 > Feb > 04 > Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckle Cover Replacement > Page 7910 Attachment I - Administrative Information Safety Recall 03S10 Certain 2001 Model Year Escape Vehicles Front Safety Belt Buckle Cover Replacement OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states provinces and countries. Accordingly you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affected stock vehicles before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs ^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Also correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. RELATED DAMAGE ^ Related damage claims are not approved for this program. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 03S10 > Feb > 04 > Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckle Cover Replacement > Page 7911 ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ This repair will require no additional labor time to complete. Claims submitted with "MT" labor will not be accepted for reimbursement. OWNER REFUNDS ^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this Safety Recall if the repair was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan which is posted with this bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC). The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or at their option directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 1904, Dearborn, MI 48121. ^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund claims that include other non-covered repairs or those judged by Ford to be excessive will not be accepted for reimbursement. ^ This safety recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair. Claiming a refund will not close out the VIN for this recall. ^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.) - Program Code: 03S10 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN - Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refund must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the FSA's repair line. Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information LABOR ALLOWANCES Note: If either safety belt buckle fails to latch properly during the operational checks specified in the repair procedure call the Special Service Support Center at 1-800-325-5621 to obtain authorization for the replacement of the safety belt assembly. SPECIAL TOOL One buckle cover removal tool was sent to each dealer at no cost. A limited supply will be available until March 1 2004 from the Special Service Support Center (1-800-325-5621). Tools may also be fabricated locally by referring to the instructions at the end of Attachment Ill. PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts will not be direct shipped for this recall. Order your parts requirements through order processing channels as noted below. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 03S10 > Feb > 04 > Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckle Cover Replacement > Page 7912 ^ For Stock Orders effective immediately follow normal order process. ^ For Interim Orders effective immediately follow normal order process. ^ For Emergency Orders within the first 30 days after launch call 1-800-325-5621. ^ For Emergency Orders 31 days after launch follow normal order process. The DOR/COR for this program is 50314. This number identifies parts ordered for this recall through the Special Service Support Center (1-800-325-5621). DEALER PRICE For latest prices refer to DOES II. PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures." EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information SERVICE PROCEDURE SPECIAL TOOL INFORMATION One (1) buckle cover removal tool is being supplied to each dealer. A limited number of additional tools will be available until March 1, 2004 from the Special Service Support Center at 1-800-325-5621. Tools may also be fabricated locally by referring to the instructions at the end of this attachment. CAUTION: Care should be taken when using the buckle cover removal tool to avoid damage to the vehicle interior. Always pull the removal tool in a direction away from the seat and center console. NOTE: Sitting in the seat during buckle cover removal will allow better control of the tool should it slip off the buckle during removal. NOTE: Any supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault or air bag indicator light issues must be corrected before this procedure is performed. Any SRS fault or air bag indicator light issues present are NOT covered by this program. 1. Buckle Cover Removal: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 03S10 > Feb > 04 > Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckle Cover Replacement > Page 7913 a) Securely insert the hooked end of the buckle cover removal tool into the buckle assembly as shown. See Figure 1. b) While sitting in the seat, firmly pull the tool up and away from the seat and center console to separate the safety belt buckle cover halves. 2. Buckle Operation Check 1: With both front safety belt covers removed, verify the operation of both safety belt buckles. a) Insert the safety belt tongue into the buckle. Make sure the buckle makes a "click" noise. b) Pull on the safety belt to make sure it is securely locked in the buckle. c) Push the buckle release button and make sure the buckle releases the safety belt. d) If the buckle fails to securely lock and retain the safety belt, call the Special Service Support Center at 1-800-325-5621. 3. Buckle Cover Installation: CAUTION: Do not overtighten the screws. NOTE: Verify that the plastic anti-rattle spring is in place on the lower cover prior to installation. See Figure 2. NOTE: Replacement buckle covers go together more easily when the upper cover is positioned first (inboard side), and the lower cover positioned second (outboard side). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 03S10 > Feb > 04 > Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckle Cover Replacement > Page 7914 a) Install the new safety belt buckle cover with the felt patch on the passenger side buckle assembly. Install four (4) supplied screws to secure the cover and tighten the screws. See Figure 3. b) Install the other safety belt cover (without felt patch) onto the driver side seat belt assembly. Install four (4) supplied screws to secure the cover and tighten the screws. The two remaining screws in the kit are spare screws. 4. Buckle Operation Check 2: With the new safety belt buckle covers in place, verify the operation of both safety belt buckles. a) Insert the safety belt tongue into the buckle. Make sure the buckle makes a "click" noise. b) Pull on the safety belt to make sure it is securely locked into the buckle. c) Push the buckle release button and make sure the buckle releases the safety belt. d) If the buckle fails to securely lock and retain the safety belt, call the Special Service Support Center at 1-800-325-5621. NOTE: Special Service Support Center will authorize replacement of the buckle assembly if the latch fails to operate properly. Replacement covers must be installed on the new assembly to maintain uniform appearance. 5. Move the seats back to their original positions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 03S10 > Feb > 04 > Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckle Cover Replacement > Page 7915 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > 03S10 > Feb > 04 > Recall - Front Seat Belt Buckle Cover Replacement > Page 7916 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle: > NHTSA03V507000 > Dec > 03 > Recall 03V507000: Seat Belt Buckle Cover Replacement Seat Belt Buckle: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 03V507000: Seat Belt Buckle Cover Replacement DEFECT: On certain sport utility vehicles, a post within the safety belt buckle covers could fracture, which could affect latch function, resulting in either a "no latch" or "partial latch" condition. In the "partial latch" condition, the buckle tongue can be inserted into the buckle and appear to be engaged, but will release from the buckle without the push button being depressed when a relatively low load is applied, such as when an occupant moves slightly in the seat. In the event of a crash, the seat occupant may not be properly restrained, increasing the risk of injury. REMEDY: Dealers will have the driver and front passenger safety belt buckle cover removed and replaced with a newly designed service buckle cover. The manufacturer has reported that owner notification began on February 2, 2004. Owners may contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7921 Seat Belt Buckle: Specifications Safety Belt Buckle And Pretensioner Bolt 47 Nm Second Row Safety Belt Buckle Bolt 47 Nm Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Seat Belt Buckle: Technician Safety Information WARNING: ^ THE BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER IS A PYROTECHNIC DEVICE. ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN SERVICING AN AIR BAG-EQUIPPED VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING A BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ THE BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER IS A PYROTECHNIC DEVICE. NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON A PYROTECHNIC DEVICE. DOING SO COULD RESULT IN BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER OR AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT AND COULD RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTERS (IF SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND ATTACHING HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT ASSEMBLIES SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE ASSEMBLIES SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN USE DURING A COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER DAMAGE OR IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 7924 Seat Belt Buckle: Vehicle Damage Warnings CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7925 Seat Belt Buckle: Description and Operation The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt buckle and pretensioner are secured to the front seat cushion frame assembly. This allows the front safety belt buckle end to move with the front seat. The belt and buckle assembly pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device that removes excess webbing from the safety belt system. The belt and buckle assembly pretensioner uses the same crash sensor system as the air bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). When the belt and buckle assembly pretensioner deploys, the buckle moves downward, pulling excess webbing from the lap and shoulder safety belts. If the safety belt buckle and pretensioner assembly is deployed, a new assembly must be installed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner Safety Belt Bolt Bit SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: ^ THE BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER IS A PYROTECHNIC DEVICE. ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN SERVICING AN AIR BAG-EQUIPPED VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING A BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ THE BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER IS A PYROTECHNIC DEVICE. NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON A PYROTECHNIC DEVICE. DOING SO COULD RESULT IN BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER OR AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT AND COULD RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. Refer to Air Bag Systems. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 7928 ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). 2. Remove the affected seat from the vehicle. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. NOTE: ^ Make sure to follow all steps and instructions in the removal procedure of the affected seat. ^ The driver seat safety belt buckle and pretensioner is shown, the passenger side is similar. 3. Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield. ^ Pull out to release the retaining clips. 4. Release the pin-type retainers and separate the safety belt buckle and pretensioner electrical connector and wire harness from the seat. NOTE: Note the wire harness routing for installation. 5. Remove the safety belt buckle and pretensioner. 1 Using the special tool, remove the bolt. 2 Remove the safety belt buckle and pretensioner. NOTE: Do not handle the safety belt buckle and pretensioner in the area of the safety belt buckle and pretensioner cable or retaining nut. Accidental pretensioner deployment could occur and result in personal injury. INSTALLATION Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 7929 WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. Refer to Air Bag Systems. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. ^ The driver seat safety belt buckle and pretensioner is shown, the passenger side is similar. 1. Install the safety belt buckle and pretensioner. 1 Position the safety belt buckle and pretensioner to the seat cushion frame. 2 Align and install the anti-rotation tab of the safety belt buckle and pretensioner to the slot in the seat cushion frame. 3 Using the special tool, install the bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 7930 2. Route the safety belt buckle and pretensioner wire harness as noted in removal. Install the wire harness and electrical connector pin-type retainers. 3. Align the retaining clips and push in, installing the inboard seat cushion side shield. 4. Install the affected seat into the vehicle. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. NOTE: Make sure to follow all steps and instructions in the installation procedure of the affected seat. 5. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 6. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 7931 Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Rear Safety Belt Buckle - Center and Passenger Side Safety Belt Bolt Bit SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTERS (IF SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND ATTACHING HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT ASSEMBLIES SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE ASSEMBLIES SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN USE DURING A COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER DAMAGE OR IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED. 1. Pivot the seat bottom forward. 2. Pivot the seat backrest back. 3. Remove the safety belt buckle assembly. 1 Position the carpet out of the way. 2 Using the special tool, remove the bolt. 3 Remove the safety belt buckle assembly. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. NOTE: ^ Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to repositioning the seat. ^ Make sure that the safety belt buckles are accessible after repositioning the seat. ^ Make sure to tighten the bolt to specification. 2. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 7932 Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Rear Safety Belt and Buckle - Center and Driver Side Safety Belt Bolt Bit SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTERS (IF SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND ATTACHING HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT ASSEMBLIES SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE ASSEMBLIES SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN USE DURING A COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER DAMAGE OR IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED. 1. Pivot the seat bottom forward. 2. Pivot the seat backrest back. 3. Remove the safety belt and buckle assembly. 1 Position the carpet out of the way. 2 Using the special tool, remove the bolt. 3 Feed the safety belt and buckle through the carpet and remove the assembly. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. NOTE: ^ Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted after repositioning the seat. ^ Make sure that the safety belt and buckle are accessible after repositioning the seat. ^ Make sure to tighten the bolt to specification. 2. Check the restraint system for correct operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7933 Seat Belt Bolt Bit Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Belt Buckle Switch: > 05-17-11 > Sep > 05 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Customer Interest SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set TSB 05-17-11 09/05/05 RESTRAINT SYSTEM - SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1877 AND/OR B1881 FORD: 2001-2004 Escape This article supersedes TSB 04-24-4 to update the service procedure. ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit an intermittent air bag lamp on and diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1877 and/or B1881. This may be caused by a variation in the electrical continuity between the pins of the driver and/or passenger side wiring harness and the buckle pretensioner connector. If this condition were to occur, the air bag system remains fully functional. ACTION Install a replacement harness connector kit ON BOTH the driver and passenger safety belt buckle pretensioners, even if the DTC is present for only one side. The kit includes improved connector halves to replace the existing connectors on both the body harness and the safety belt buckle pretensioner. One kit is required per side (2 kits per vehicle). Refer to the instruction sheet included in the kit for complete repair procedure. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 051711A 2001-2004 Escape Install 2.0 Hrs. A Replacement Harness Connector On Both The Body Side And Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner Harness For Both Driver And Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioners (Do Not Use With 14056D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7861202 OR 7861203 X2 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle Switch: > 05-17-11 > Sep > 05 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set Seat Belt Buckle Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set TSB 05-17-11 09/05/05 RESTRAINT SYSTEM - SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1877 AND/OR B1881 FORD: 2001-2004 Escape This article supersedes TSB 04-24-4 to update the service procedure. ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit an intermittent air bag lamp on and diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1877 and/or B1881. This may be caused by a variation in the electrical continuity between the pins of the driver and/or passenger side wiring harness and the buckle pretensioner connector. If this condition were to occur, the air bag system remains fully functional. ACTION Install a replacement harness connector kit ON BOTH the driver and passenger safety belt buckle pretensioners, even if the DTC is present for only one side. The kit includes improved connector halves to replace the existing connectors on both the body harness and the safety belt buckle pretensioner. One kit is required per side (2 kits per vehicle). Refer to the instruction sheet included in the kit for complete repair procedure. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 051711A 2001-2004 Escape Install 2.0 Hrs. A Replacement Harness Connector On Both The Body Side And Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner Harness For Both Driver And Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioners (Do Not Use With 14056D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7861202 OR 7861203 X2 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7947 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Extension > Component Information > Description and Operation Seat Belt Extension: Description and Operation A safety belt that is too short even when fully extended can be lengthened. The safety belt extension is available. This assembly will add approximately 20 cm (8 inches) to the length of the safety belt. Use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short when fully extended. Do not use the safety belt extension to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso. Safety belt extensions are available at no cost from any authorized Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information > Specifications Seat Belt Height Adjuster: Specifications Safety Belt Shoulder Height Adjuster Bolts 47 Nm Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7954 Seat Belt Height Adjuster: Service Precautions WARNING: ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTERS (IF SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND ATTACHING HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT ASSEMBLIES SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE ASSEMBLIES SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN USE DURING A COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER DAMAGE OR IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Seat Belt Height Adjuster: Service and Repair Removal and Installation REMOVAL WARNING: ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTERS (IF SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND ATTACHING HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT ASSEMBLIES SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE ASSEMBLIES SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN USE DURING A COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER DAMAGE OR IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED. NOTE: The driver side is shown, the passenger side is similar. 1. Remove the B-pillar trim panel. 2. Lower the height adjuster. 3. Remove the upper height adjuster bolt. 4. Raise the height adjuster. 5. Remove the height adjuster. 1 Remove the bolt. 2 Remove the height adjuster. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Make sure that the front safety belt retractor is not in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode. NOTE: ^ Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation. ^ Make sure to tighten bolts to specification. 2. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. ^ Carry out the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) Mode Functional Test to make sure that the new retractor operates correctly. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Functional Test - Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) Mode Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7957 Seat Belt Height Adjuster: Service and Repair General Procedures D-Ring Installation Kit SPECIAL TOOL(S) 1. Remove the trim panels. 2. Use the half-inch drill provided in D-Ring Installation Kit 100-F012 (134-00018) or equivalent to drill out the damaged threads in the upper B-pillar structure. 3. Apply a suitable lubricant to the M14 x 1.5 tap provided in D-Ring Installation Kit 100-F012 (134-00018) and tap new threads. NOTE: After each rotation, back tap off slightly to remove new cuttings and be sure to clean out any chips before proceeding. 4. Use a threaded insert (N807170-S190) provided in D-Ring Installation Kit 100-F012 (134-00018) or equivalent and screw it into the retapped hole until it is slightly below the surface of the hole. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7958 5. Use a hammer to lightly tap the installation tool provided in D-Ring Installation Kit 100-F012 (134-00018) several times to drive down the insert keys. NOTE: If the two hex-head bolts on the front seat shoulder strap adjuster are not stripped, refer to Seat Belt Height Adjuster to install the height adjuster to the body. If the front seat shoulder strap adjuster bolts are stripped, replace the adjuster. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7959 D-Ring Installation Kit Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Belt Retractor: > 05-16-11 > Aug > 05 > Restraints - Seat Belts Slow to Retract Seat Belt Retractor: Customer Interest Restraints - Seat Belts Slow to Retract TSB 05-16-11 08/22/05 SAFETY BELT RETRACTION SPEED FORD: 2000-2003 Mustang 2000-2006 Crown Victoria, Taurus 2000-2003 Explorer Sport, Windstar 2000-2005 Excursion, Explorer 2000-2006 E-Series, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2001-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004-2006 Freestar 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid 2004-2006 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 2000-2002 Continental 2000-2006 LS, Town Car, Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2006 Grand Marquis 2000-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 04-24-21 to update the vehicle model years. ISSUE A service kit is now available to improve safety belt retraction speed. ACTION See the part application chart and select the appropriate kit. Follow the Instruction Sheet included in the kit. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 501-20A for additional information. NOTE TEFLON TAPE SHOULD ONLY BE USED ON THE FRONT ROW SEATS FOR VEHICLES LISTED IN THIS TSB, WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR AND THE MOUNTAINEER. TEFLON TAPE CAN ALSO BE USED ON SECOND ROW SEATS FOR THESE THREE VEHICLES. NOTE FOR MUSTANG, AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR AND MOUNTAINEER, REFER TO THE FOLLOWING BUILD DATE INFORMATION BEFORE PERFORMING THIS TSB. TEFLON TAPE HAS ALREADY BEEN INSTALLED DURING PRODUCTION ON SOME OF THESE VEHICLES. ^ MUSTANG: Only install on vehicles built through 6/15/2003. Teflon tape was already installed on vehicles built on/after 6/16/2003. ^ AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR/MOUNTAINEER (FRONT ROW SEATS): Only install on vehicles built through 6/24/2004. Teflon tape was already installed on vehicles built on/after 6/25/2004. ^ AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR/MOUNTAINEER (SECOND ROW SEATS): Only install on vehicles built through 10/21/2004. Teflon tape was already installed on vehicles built on/after 10/22/2004. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Belt Retractor: > 05-16-11 > Aug > 05 > Restraints - Seat Belts Slow to Retract > Page 7968 Parts Block NOTE THE LABOR OPERATIONS WITHIN THIS TSB CAN BE CLAIMED IN COMBINATION AS NEEDED TO COVER THE REQUIRED REPAIRS. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 051611A Install Teflon Tape B 0.8 Hr. Pillars Both Sides (Includes Time To Remove And Install Trim Panels If Necessary) 051611B Install Teflon Tape C 1.1 Hrs. Pillars Both Sides (Includes Time To Remove And Install Trim Panels And Seats If Necessary) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 70611B08 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Retractor: > 05-16-11 > Aug > 05 > Restraints Seat Belts Slow to Retract Seat Belt Retractor: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belts Slow to Retract TSB 05-16-11 08/22/05 SAFETY BELT RETRACTION SPEED FORD: 2000-2003 Mustang 2000-2006 Crown Victoria, Taurus 2000-2003 Explorer Sport, Windstar 2000-2005 Excursion, Explorer 2000-2006 E-Series, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2001-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004-2006 Freestar 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid 2004-2006 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 2000-2002 Continental 2000-2006 LS, Town Car, Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2006 Grand Marquis 2000-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 04-24-21 to update the vehicle model years. ISSUE A service kit is now available to improve safety belt retraction speed. ACTION See the part application chart and select the appropriate kit. Follow the Instruction Sheet included in the kit. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 501-20A for additional information. NOTE TEFLON TAPE SHOULD ONLY BE USED ON THE FRONT ROW SEATS FOR VEHICLES LISTED IN THIS TSB, WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR AND THE MOUNTAINEER. TEFLON TAPE CAN ALSO BE USED ON SECOND ROW SEATS FOR THESE THREE VEHICLES. NOTE FOR MUSTANG, AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR AND MOUNTAINEER, REFER TO THE FOLLOWING BUILD DATE INFORMATION BEFORE PERFORMING THIS TSB. TEFLON TAPE HAS ALREADY BEEN INSTALLED DURING PRODUCTION ON SOME OF THESE VEHICLES. ^ MUSTANG: Only install on vehicles built through 6/15/2003. Teflon tape was already installed on vehicles built on/after 6/16/2003. ^ AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR/MOUNTAINEER (FRONT ROW SEATS): Only install on vehicles built through 6/24/2004. Teflon tape was already installed on vehicles built on/after 6/25/2004. ^ AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR/MOUNTAINEER (SECOND ROW SEATS): Only install on vehicles built through 10/21/2004. Teflon tape was already installed on vehicles built on/after 10/22/2004. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Retractor: > 05-16-11 > Aug > 05 > Restraints Seat Belts Slow to Retract > Page 7974 Parts Block NOTE THE LABOR OPERATIONS WITHIN THIS TSB CAN BE CLAIMED IN COMBINATION AS NEEDED TO COVER THE REQUIRED REPAIRS. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 051611A Install Teflon Tape B 0.8 Hr. Pillars Both Sides (Includes Time To Remove And Install Trim Panels If Necessary) 051611B Install Teflon Tape C 1.1 Hrs. Pillars Both Sides (Includes Time To Remove And Install Trim Panels And Seats If Necessary) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 70611B08 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7975 Seat Belt Retractor: Specifications Front Row Safety Belt Retractor Lower Bolt 47 Nm Front Row Safety Belt Retractor Upper Bolt 9 Nm Second Row Safety Belt Retractor Bolt 47 Nm Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7976 Seat Belt Retractor: Service Precautions WARNING: ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTERS (IF SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND ATTACHING HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT ASSEMBLIES SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE ASSEMBLIES SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN USE DURING A COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER DAMAGE OR IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7977 Seat Belt Retractor: Description and Operation WARNING: REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS SHOULD NEVER BE PLACED IN THE FRONT SEATS. The dual locking mode retractor on the shoulder belt portion of the combination lap/shoulder safety belt for the front outboard passenger and both rear outboard seating positions, operates in two ways. The driver single locking mode retractor on the shoulder belt portion of the combination lap/shoulder safety belt works only in the vehicle sensitive mode. 1. In the vehicle-sensitive (emergency locking) mode, the shoulder belt retractor allows the occupant freedom of movement, locking tight only on hard braking, hard cornering or impacts of approximately 8 km/h (5 mph) or more. The front and rear outboard seat belt retractors can also be made to lock by pulling/jerking on the belt. 2. In the automatic locking mode, the shoulder belt retractor automatically locks and remains locked when the combination lap/shoulder safety belt is buckled and does not allow the occupant freedom of movement. This mode provides tight lap/shoulder belt fit on the occupant and on a child safety seat. 3. When the combination lap/shoulder belt is unbuckled and allowed to retract completely, the retractor switches to the vehicle-sensitive (emergency) locking mode. The automatic locking mode must be used when installing a child safety seat in the front outboard passenger and both rear outboard passenger seating positions. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Front Safety Belt Bolt Bit SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTERS (IF SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND ATTACHING HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT ASSEMBLIES SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE ASSEMBLIES SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN USE DURING A COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER DAMAGE OR IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED. NOTE: The driver side is shown, the passenger side is similar. 1. Remove the B-pillar trim panel. 2. Remove the safety belt anchor. 1 Using the special tool, remove the bolt. 2 Remove the safety belt anchor. 3. Separate the front safety belt retractor from the B-pillar. 1 Remove the bolt. 2 Using the special tool, remove the bolt. 3 Separate the front safety belt retractor from the B-pillar. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7980 4. Remove the front safety belt retractor. 1 Disconnect the front safety belt retractor. 2 Remove the front safety belt retractor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Make sure that after the front passenger safety belt retractor is installed, the retractor is not in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode. NOTE: ^ Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation. ^ Make sure to tighten bolts to specification. 2. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. ^ Carry out the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) Mode Functional Test to make sure that the new retractor operates correctly. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Functional Test - Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) Mode Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7981 Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Rear Safety Belt Bolt Bit SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTERS (IF SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND ATTACHING HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT ASSEMBLIES SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE ASSEMBLIES SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN USE DURING A COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER DAMAGE OR IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED. NOTE: The driver side is shown, the passenger side is similar. 1. Remove the rear door scuff plate. 1 Open the cover. 2 Remove the two pin-type retainers (one shown). 3 Remove the rear door scuff plate. 2. Separate the weather-stripping from the C-pillar. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7982 3. Remove the safety belt anchor. 1 Using the special tool, remove the bolt. 2 Remove the safety belt anchor. 4. From behind the rear safety belt guide cover, release the retaining tabs, slide the cover up and remove it. NOTE: The rear safety belt guide has been removed for clarity. 5. Remove the rear safety belt guide. 1 Using the special tool, remove the bolt. 2 Remove the safety belt guide. 6. Lower the second row seat backrest. 7. Separate the rear hatch weather-stripping along the scuff plate and rear quarter trim panel on the side of the safety belt retractor being serviced. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7983 8. Remove the rear hatch scuff plate. 1 Remove the pin-type retainers. 2 Pull up to release the retaining clips and remove the rear hatch scuff plate. 9. Pull out to release the retaining clips and remove the rear quarter trim panel. 10. Remove the rear safety belt retractor. 1 Using the special tool, remove the bolt. 2 Remove the rear safety belt retractor. INSTALLATION 1. Install the rear safety belt retractor. 1 Position the rear safety belt retractor to the C-pillar. 2 Using the special tool, install the bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7984 2. Install the quarter trim panel. 1 Position the quarter trim panel and feed the safety belt webbing through the opening. 2 Align the quarter trim panel and push in, fastening the retainers. NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation. 3. Install the rear hatch scuff plate. 1 Align the rear hatch scuff plate and push in, fastening the retainers. 2 Install the pin-type retainers. 4. Install the rear hatch weather-stripping. 5. Install the spacer onto the rear safety belt guide bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7985 6. Install the rear safety belt guide. 1 Position the safety belt guide. 2 Using the special tool, install the bolt. NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation. 7. Install the rear safety belt guide cover. NOTE: If the safety belt guide cover is damaged or if it does not remain in position, install a new cover. 8. Raise the second row seat backrest. 9. Install the safety belt anchor. 1 Position the safety belt anchor. 2 Using the special tool, install the bolt. NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7986 10. Install the C-pillar weatherstripping. 11. Install the rear door scuff plate. 1 Position the rear door scuff plate. 2 Install the two pin-type retainers (one shown). 3 Close the cover. 12. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. 1 Make sure that after the rear safety belt retractor is installed, the retractor is not in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode. 2 Carry out the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) Mode Functional Test to make sure that the new retractor operates correctly. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Functional Test - Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) Mode Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7987 Seat Belt Bolt Bit Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications Seat Belt Tensioner: Specifications Safety Belt Buckle And Pretensioner Bolt 47 Nm Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Seat Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Seat > Page 7993 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Seat Belt Tensioner: Technician Safety Information WARNING: ^ THE BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER IS A PYROTECHNIC DEVICE. ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN SERVICING AN AIR BAG-EQUIPPED VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING A BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ THE BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER IS A PYROTECHNIC DEVICE. NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON A PYROTECHNIC DEVICE. DOING SO COULD RESULT IN BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER OR AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT AND COULD RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ CARRY A LIVE SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR/PRETENSIONER ASSEMBLY SO AS TO KEEP FINGERS AND CLOTHING AWAY FROM MOVEABLE PARTS. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ REMOTE DEPLOYMENT IS TO BE PERFORMED OUTDOORS WITH ALL PERSONNEL AT LEAST 6.1 METERS (20 FEET) AWAY TO ENSURE PERSONAL SAFETY. DUE TO THE LOUD REPORT WHICH OCCURS WHEN THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED, HEARING PROTECTION IS REQUIRED. ^ DO NOT PLACE THE DRIVER OR PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE TRIM COVER OR DEPLOYMENT DOOR FACING DOWN, AS THE FORCES OF THE DEPLOYING AIR BAG COULD CAUSE IT TO RICOCHET AND CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 7996 Seat Belt Tensioner: Vehicle Damage Warnings CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Description and Operation > Occupant Restraints - Active Seat Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation Occupant Restraints - Active The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt buckle and pretensioner are secured to the front seat cushion frame assembly. This allows the front safety belt buckle end to move with the front seat. The belt and buckle assembly pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device that removes excess webbing from the safety belt system. The belt and buckle assembly pretensioner uses the same crash sensor system as the air bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). When the belt and buckle assembly pretensioner deploys, the buckle moves downward, pulling excess webbing from the lap and shoulder safety belts. If the safety belt buckle and pretensioner assembly is deployed, a new assembly must be installed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Description and Operation > Occupant Restraints - Active > Page 7999 Seat Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation Occupant Restraints - Passive As part of the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), the safety belt buckles are equipped with pretensioners. The safety belt buckle pretensioners remove excess slack from the safety belt webbing. The pretensioners are activated by the Restraints Control Module (RCM) when the module detects a crash event force exceeding a programmed unit. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner Seat Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner Safety Belt Bolt Bit SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: ^ THE BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER IS A PYROTECHNIC DEVICE. ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN SERVICING AN AIR BAG-EQUIPPED VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING A BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ THE BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER IS A PYROTECHNIC DEVICE. NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON A PYROTECHNIC DEVICE. DOING SO COULD RESULT IN BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER OR AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT AND COULD RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. Refer to Air Bag Systems. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 8002 ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). 2. Remove the affected seat from the vehicle. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. NOTE: ^ Make sure to follow all steps and instructions in the removal procedure of the affected seat. ^ The driver seat safety belt buckle and pretensioner is shown, the passenger side is similar. 3. Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield. ^ Pull out to release the retaining clips. 4. Release the pin-type retainers and separate the safety belt buckle and pretensioner electrical connector and wire harness from the seat. NOTE: Note the wire harness routing for installation. 5. Remove the safety belt buckle and pretensioner. 1 Using the special tool, remove the bolt. 2 Remove the safety belt buckle and pretensioner. NOTE: Do not handle the safety belt buckle and pretensioner in the area of the safety belt buckle and pretensioner cable or retaining nut. Accidental pretensioner deployment could occur and result in personal injury. INSTALLATION Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 8003 WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. Refer to Air Bag Systems. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. ^ The driver seat safety belt buckle and pretensioner is shown, the passenger side is similar. 1. Install the safety belt buckle and pretensioner. 1 Position the safety belt buckle and pretensioner to the seat cushion frame. 2 Align and install the anti-rotation tab of the safety belt buckle and pretensioner to the slot in the seat cushion frame. 3 Using the special tool, install the bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 8004 2. Route the safety belt buckle and pretensioner wire harness as noted in removal. Install the wire harness and electrical connector pin-type retainers. 3. Align the retaining clips and push in, installing the inboard seat cushion side shield. 4. Install the affected seat into the vehicle. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. NOTE: Make sure to follow all steps and instructions in the installation procedure of the affected seat. 5. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 6. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 8005 Seat Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Safety Belt Pretensioner Disposal Deployed 1. Dispose of the deployed safety belt pretensioner in the same manner as any other part to be scrapped. WARNING: ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING A SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR/PRETENSIONER ASSEMBLY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. Undeployed, Inoperative WARNING: CARRY A LIVE SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR/PRETENSIONER ASSEMBLY SO AS TO KEEP FINGERS AND CLOTHING AWAY FROM MOVEABLE PARTS. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. NOTE: All inoperative safety belt retractor/pretensioner assemblies have been placed on the Mandatory Return List. All damaged safety belt retractor/pretensioners must be treated the same as any inoperative live safety belt retractor/pretensioner being returned. 1. Remove the inoperative safety belt retractor/pretensioner assembly from the vehicle. 2. Package and return the inoperative safety belt retractor/pretensioner assembly to Ford Motor Company. Undeployed, Scrapped Vehicle REMOTE DEPLOYMENT WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE OR SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR/PRETENSIONER ASSEMBLY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ CARRY A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TRIM COVER OR DEPLOYMENT DOOR POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ REMOTE DEPLOYMENT IS TO BE PERFORMED OUTDOORS WITH ALL PERSONNEL AT LEAST 6.1 METERS (20 FEET) AWAY TO ENSURE PERSONAL SAFETY. DUE TO THE LOUD REPORT WHICH OCCURS WHEN THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED, HEARING PROTECTION IS REQUIRED. ^ DO NOT PLACE THE DRIVER OR PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE TRIM COVER OR DEPLOYMENT DOOR FACING DOWN, AS THE FORCES OF THE DEPLOYING AIR BAG COULD CAUSE IT TO RICOCHET AND CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY. 1. Remove the safety belt pretensioner from the vehicle. 2. Cut and strip the wires near the electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 8006 3. Obtain two wires (20 gauge minimum) at least 6.1 meters (20 feet) long and attach one end of each wire to stripped ends of the pretensioner wires. 4. Place the pretensioner on a flat surface in an open outdoor area. 5. Remain at least 6.1 meters (20 feet) away from the safety belt pretensioner. 6. Deploy the safety belt pretensioner by touching the other ends of the two wires to the terminals of a 12 volt battery. 7. To allow for cooling, wait at least ten minutes before approaching the deployed safety belt pretensioner. 8. Dispose of the deployed safety belt pretensioner in the same manner as any other part to be scrapped. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8007 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Warning Timer > Component Information > Description and Operation Seat Belt Warning Timer: Description and Operation Safety Belt Warning System The safety belt warning indicator illuminates and a chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts. The conditions of operation for the safety belt warning indicator and chime are as follows: ^ If the driver's safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is turned to RUN, the safety belt warning indicator illuminates for 1-2 minutes and the warning chime sounds for 4-8 seconds. ^ If the driver's safety belt is buckled while the warning indicator is illuminated and the reminder chime is sounding, the safety belt warning indicator and reminder chime turn off. ^ If the driver's safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to RUN, the safety belt warning indicator and reminder chime remain off. Belt Minder The Belt Minder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function. This feature provides additional reminders to the driver that the driver's safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster. To activate or deactivate the Belt Minder feature, refer to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Specifications Impact Sensor: Specifications Side Impact Sensor Bolts 12 Nm Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Air Bag Sensor, Left Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Side Air Bag Sensor, Left > Page 8017 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Air Bag Sensor, Left Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Air Bag Sensor, Left > Page 8020 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information Impact Sensor: Customer Safety Information WARNING: THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR CORRECT SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information > Page 8023 Impact Sensor: Technician Safety Information WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. ^ THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE AIR BAG SIDE CRASH SENSOR RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 8024 Impact Sensor: Description and Operation WARNING: THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR CORRECT SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION. For this vehicle, the SRS employs three crash sensors. One of the sensors is integral to the RCM and is not serviceable separately. In addition, there are two side crash sensors located in the LH and RH B-pillars. The RCM is mounted on the center tunnel under the instrument panel. Mounting orientation is critical for correct operation of all crash sensors. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor Driver Side Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8027 vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). 2. Remove the steering wheel access cover. 3. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8028 4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the steering column. 5. Open the glove box past its stops. 6. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the Instrument Panel (I/P), disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8029 8. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. 1 Slide and release the passenger side air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. 9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger side air bag module floor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket under the seat. 2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip. 3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8030 12. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 1 Slide and release the driver side air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver side air bag module floor electrical connector. 14. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat bracket. 2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip. 3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 15. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. 17. With the restraint system diagnostic tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure 18. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8031 19. Remove the B-pillar trim panel. 20. Remove the side crash sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolts. 3 Remove the side crash sensor. INSTALLATION WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8032 1. Install the side crash sensor. 1 Position the side crash sensor to the B-pillar. 2 Install the bolts. 3 Connect the side crash sensor electrical connector. WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE AIR BAG SIDE CRASH SENSOR RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. 2. Connect the battery ground cable. 3. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still in place at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure 4. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 5. Install the B-pillar trim panel. 6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 7. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8033 8. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 9. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver side air bag module electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 10. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 11. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8034 onto the bracket under the seat. 12. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag module floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 13. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Install the passenger side air bag module electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 14. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8035 15. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 16. Close the glove box. 17. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the steering column. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 18. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 19. Install the steering wheel access cover. 20. Connect the battery ground cable. 21. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8036 WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 22. Check the restraint system for correct operation. Passenger Side Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8037 ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat Systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). 2. Open the glove box past its stops. 3. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the Instrument Panel (I/P), disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8038 4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 5. Remove the steering wheel access cover. 6. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the steering column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8039 8. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 1 Slide and release the driver side air bag module electrical connector locking clip. 2 Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver side air bag module floor electrical connector. 10. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat bracket. 2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip. 3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8040 12. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. 1 Slide and release the passenger side air bag module electrical connector locking dip. 2 Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. 13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger side air bag module floor electrical connector. 14. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket under the seat. 2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip. 3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. 15. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. 17. With the restraint system diagnostic tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure 18. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8041 19. Remove the B-pillar trim panel. 20. Remove the side crash sensor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolts. 3 Remove the side crash sensor. INSTALLATION WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat Systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8042 1. Install the side crash sensor. 1 Position the side crash sensor to the B-pillar. 2 Install the bolts. 3 Connect the side crash sensor electrical connector. WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE AIR BAG SIDE CRASH SENSOR RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. 2. Connect the battery ground cable. 3. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still in place at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure 4. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 5. Install the B-pillar trim panel. 6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 7. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8043 8. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag module floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 9. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Install the passenger side air bag module electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 10. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 11. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8044 the bracket under the seat. 12. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module floor electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 13. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver side air bag module electrical connector onto the bracket under the seat. 14. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the steering column. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8045 15. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 16. Install the steering wheel access cover. 17. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 18. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 19. Close the glove box. 20. Connect the battery ground cable. 21. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8046 WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 22. Check the restraint system for correct operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8047 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Weld Nut Repair "J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). NOTE: ^ There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld nut(s). Read both this procedures and Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair. ^ If two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts in this procedure. Weld nuts must be installed in Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor. ^ The following procedure applies to vehicles that have a rectangular hole in the sheet metal that is in close proximity to the missing weld nut. 1. Obtain a "J" nut (part number N623332-S301) or any of the following optional "J" nuts (part numbers: N623342-S101, N800854-S100, N800925-S100). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-S190) or equivalent. 3. Install the "J" nut through the rectangular hole in the sheet metal. 4. Install the crash sensor. NOTE: Be sure the threaded portion of the "J" nut is aligned with the clearance hole in the sheet metal. 5. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications. Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). NOTE: ^ There are two procedures to repairs a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld nut(s). Read both this procedure and Weld Nut Repair-"J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair. ^ Use only this procedure if two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts in Weld Nut Repair-"J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Crash Sensor. ^ Radiator support repair shown, others are similar. 1. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) weld nut (part number N806285-S190). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-S190). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Impact Sensor > Page 8048 3. Route a sufficient length of copper welding wire through the weld nut clearance hole and back out an adjacent access hole. 4. Feed the copper welding wire through the weld nut, then through a standard flat washer. 5. Secure the flat washer so that it cannot be pulled off the end of the copper welding wire. 6. Pull the copper welding wire back through the clearance hole, allowing the weld nut and flat washer to follow the copper welding wire through. 7. Position the weld nut to the weld nut clearance hole, firmly pulling on the copper welding wire allowing the secured flat washer to hold the weld nut in position. 8. Holding the weld nut securely in place and using a MIG welder, weld in four places around the edge of the weld nut. 9. Metal finish as required. 10. Verify the nut is securely in place. 11. Install the crash sensor. 12. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications. Stripped Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). 1. Obtain an 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw (part number N802455-S190). 2. Drill out the internal threads of the stripped-out weld nut to 7.37 mm (0.29 in) using a letter "L" size drill bit. 3. Position the crash sensor to the vehicle. 4. Install the 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw into the drilled-out weld nut. 5. Install the remaining attaching screws. 6. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8049 Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Safing Sensor, Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation Safing Sensor: Description and Operation Safing Sensor The Safing Sensor is part of the Restraints Control Module (RCM) and is not serviced separately. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Belt Buckle Switch: > 05-17-11 > Sep > 05 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Customer Interest SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set TSB 05-17-11 09/05/05 RESTRAINT SYSTEM - SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1877 AND/OR B1881 FORD: 2001-2004 Escape This article supersedes TSB 04-24-4 to update the service procedure. ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit an intermittent air bag lamp on and diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1877 and/or B1881. This may be caused by a variation in the electrical continuity between the pins of the driver and/or passenger side wiring harness and the buckle pretensioner connector. If this condition were to occur, the air bag system remains fully functional. ACTION Install a replacement harness connector kit ON BOTH the driver and passenger safety belt buckle pretensioners, even if the DTC is present for only one side. The kit includes improved connector halves to replace the existing connectors on both the body harness and the safety belt buckle pretensioner. One kit is required per side (2 kits per vehicle). Refer to the instruction sheet included in the kit for complete repair procedure. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 051711A 2001-2004 Escape Install 2.0 Hrs. A Replacement Harness Connector On Both The Body Side And Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner Harness For Both Driver And Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioners (Do Not Use With 14056D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7861202 OR 7861203 X2 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle Switch: > 05-17-11 > Sep > 05 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set Seat Belt Buckle Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set TSB 05-17-11 09/05/05 RESTRAINT SYSTEM - SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1877 AND/OR B1881 FORD: 2001-2004 Escape This article supersedes TSB 04-24-4 to update the service procedure. ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit an intermittent air bag lamp on and diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1877 and/or B1881. This may be caused by a variation in the electrical continuity between the pins of the driver and/or passenger side wiring harness and the buckle pretensioner connector. If this condition were to occur, the air bag system remains fully functional. ACTION Install a replacement harness connector kit ON BOTH the driver and passenger safety belt buckle pretensioners, even if the DTC is present for only one side. The kit includes improved connector halves to replace the existing connectors on both the body harness and the safety belt buckle pretensioner. One kit is required per side (2 kits per vehicle). Refer to the instruction sheet included in the kit for complete repair procedure. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 051711A 2001-2004 Escape Install 2.0 Hrs. A Replacement Harness Connector On Both The Body Side And Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner Harness For Both Driver And Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioners (Do Not Use With 14056D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7861202 OR 7861203 X2 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8066 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations Accessory Delay Relay: Locations Diagram 700-01-00-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8072 Diagram 700-01-00-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Relay Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Relay > Page 8075 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay > Page 8078 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay > Page 8079 Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection Micro ISO Relay Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay > Page 8080 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair Antenna Cable: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the audio unit. 2. Remove the right lower A-pillar trim. 3. Disconnect the antenna cable connector. 4. Lower the glove box door. 5. Remove the three pin-type retainers holding the lead-in cable. 6. Remove the antenna cable clip fastened to the center instrument panel support. 7. Remove the cable through the glove box opening. INSTALLATION Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8086 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Application and ID Alarm Module: Application and ID For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules (General Module). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 8091 Alarm Module: Testing and Inspection Testing and Inspection For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8095 Alarm System Transponder: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Pull the tilt wheel lever down in open position, as necessary. 3. Remove the lower instrument panel steering column cover. 1 Remove the lower instrument panel steering column cover. 2 Remove the screws. 3 Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds. 4. Remove the transceiver assembly. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the screw. 3 Remove the transceiver assembly. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. NOTE: No key replacement or re-initialization needs to occur with the removal or installation of a new PATS transceiver. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics TSB 06-15-8 08/07/06 KEYPAD DIAGNOSTICS - DEALER INSTALLED ACCESSORY FORD: 1998-2006 Taurus 1999-2003 Escort 1999-2006 Mustang 2000-2006 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2006 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006 Crown Victoria, Fusion 1998-2006 Expedition, Explorer, F-150, Ranger 1999 F-250 Light Duty 1999-2003 Windstar 1999-2006 F-Super Duty 2000-2005 Excursion 2000-2006 E-Series 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004 F-150 Heritage 2004-2006 Freestar LINCOLN: 1998-2006 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 1998-2006 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006 Mark LT MERCURY: 1998-2005 Sable 1999-2002 Cougar 2005-2006 Montego 2006 Grand Marquis, Milan 1998-2006 Mountaineer 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner ISSUE Some vehicles may experience a concern with the keyless entry keypad. In order to properly diagnose the concern with the keyless entry keypad, it is important to identify whether the keypad is a factory installed style (wired) or a Genuine Ford Accessory (GFA) radio frequency (RF) style keypad. ACTION Use the following Service Procedure to identify GFA RF keypads and provide diagnostic service tips. SERVICE PROCEDURE IDENTIFICATION: 1. Production installed keyless entry keypads are mounted flush with the surface of the vehicle and are wired directly to the module controlling the vehicle's keyless entry system. This style keypad can be diagnosed using the appropriate Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics > Page 8104 2. Dealer installed GFA RF keypads are adhesive backed and protrude approximately 1/2" (13 mm) from the surface of the vehicle and there are no specific diagnostics available in the WSM (Figure 1). NOTE THIS RF KEYPAD WAS ALSO US[D IN PRODUCTION ON 2004 F-SUPER DUTY VEHICLES BUILT PRIOR TO 12/3/2003. REFER TO WSM, SECTION 501-14 FOR RF KEYPAD DIAGNOSTICS FOR THESE VEHICLES. GENUINE FORD ACCESSORY KEYPAD DIAGNOSTIC TIPS 1. The keypad operates similarly to a remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter and is programmed using a similar procedure. Although the RF keypad is not specifically addressed in the WSM, the RKE transmitter programming portion of the WSM, Section 501-14 can be used as a guide NOTE THE 7-8 AND 9-0 BUTTONS ON THE KEYPAD MUST BE PRESSED SIMULTANEOUSLY DURING THE PROCEDURE IN ORDER FOR THE KEYPAD TO BE RECOGNIZED AS AN ADDITIONAL REMOTE TRANSMITTER. Since the GFA RF keypad is essentially another RKE transmitter, the transmitter diagnostic pinpoint tests in the vehicle's WSM can also be referenced even though the buttons serving the lock / unlock functions will differ 2. The GFA RF keypad is serviced as an assembly. The internal battery cannot be replaced separately. 3. If the master code or owner selectable code is lost or forgotten, the GFA RF keypad must be replaced. These codes are not stored in any vehicle module (with the exception of 2004 F-Super Duty vehicles produced prior to 12/3/2003). 4. The GFA RF keypad and all RKE transmitters (the number of transmitters allowable will vary by vehicle) must be reprogrammed together anytime the keypad is replaced, an RKE transmitter is replaced, or the module controlling the keyless entry system on the vehicle (GEM/SJB/VSM/DDM etc.) is replaced. NOTE THERE IS AN EXCEPTION TO TIP 4 FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH INTEGRATED KEYHEAD TRANSMITTERS (IKTs) (FUSION/MILAN/ZEPHYR). THE GFA RF KEYPADS FOR VEHICLES WITH IKTs MUST BE PROGRAMMED INDEPENDENTLY FROM THE IKTs. TURN THE IGNITION FROM "OFF" TO "RUN" 8 TIMES WITHIN 10 SECONDS, WITH THE 8TH TIME ENDING IN "RUN". THE DOOR LOCKS WILL CYCLE TO CONFIRM ENTERING PROGRAMMING MODE. PRESS THE 7-8 AND 9-0 BUTTON ON THE KEYPAD SIMULTANEOUSLY TO SEND A LOCK SIGNAL. TURN IGNITION TO OFF. THE LOCKS WILL CYCLE AGAIN TO INDICATE THE END OF THE PROGRAMMING MODE. 5. The keypad will normally illuminate for 5 seconds after one or more buttons are pressed, and the illumination will immediately turn off if the 7-8 and 9-0 buttons are pressed simultaneously (lock all doors). The keypad contains an optical sensor and will not illuminate under bright lighting conditions. The keypad may only illuminate briefly in colder temperatures in order to maximize the battery power available to transmit a lock/unlock signal. The temperature at which this occurs will vary depending upon the keypad battery age and condition. Both of these conditions are a normal function of the Power Save Mode and do not indicate a need to replace the keypad. 6. After entering the keypad code, the system may unlock the driver's door, lock it, then unlock it again, and the keypad will not even briefly illuminate. This is the Alert Mode and is an indication that battery power is very low and the keypad must be replaced. 7. The keypad also contains an Anti-scan feature. If the wrong code has been entered 7 times (35 consecutive button presses) the keypad is disabled for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash during this time. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics > Page 8105 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14A626 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Application and ID Keyless Entry Module: Application and ID For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules (General Module). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 8109 Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection Testing and Inspection For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 8115 Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Connector Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Find and Use These Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams ^ System Diagrams ^ Grounds Diagrams Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8118 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow. Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the diagram. Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be found. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8119 Fuse And Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. Fuse Circuits Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery. Ground Distribution Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text "partial". Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8120 Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of (1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces). The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number. Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the way out by a spring. Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control. A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the way in. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. circuit Numbering Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification Circuit Numbering: Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting electrical circuits. Function: The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter "S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit. System-Connection (including branch): Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate wires in one connection with the same function. Wire Identification (wire colors): The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8121 Wire Identification Example Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know the following information about the wire: Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit System: AC = Headlamp leveling Connection: 3 = Switch connection A = Branch Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe). Circuit Identification Charts Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8122 Circuit Identification Chart System Codes Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8123 Sample Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8124 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8125 Sample Diagram Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8126 Circuit Identification Chart SYSTEM CODES CHART Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8127 SAMPLE DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8128 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8129 Sample Diagram Electrical Symbols ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8130 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8131 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8132 Types of Diagrams Shown Types of Diagrams Shown Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them. Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations. Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system information suitable for diagnostic operations. Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a relationship to them, are also included. All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding of the system component interactions. Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type. Wire Color Code Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8133 Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8134 Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Diagnostic Aids These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8135 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8136 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8137 Diagram 419-10-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Description and Operation > System Description Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Description and Operation System Description The multifunction module consists of the Generic Electronic Module (GEM). The GEM controls the following features: ^ interval rear window wiper ^ battery saver ^ illuminated entry ^ headlamp control ^ interior lamp control ^ power door locks ^ Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ^ accessory delay ^ perimeter anti-theft system ^ door ajar output control Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Description and Operation > System Description > Page 8140 Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Description and Operation Principles of Operation (How Does It Work?) The Generic Electronic Module (GEM) constantly monitors its subsystems for concerns. If a concern is found in one of the subsystems, the GEM will record the concern in the form of a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). The ignition switch position is very important to the GEM function. Erratic or unexpected GEM function can often be traced to problems with these GEM inputs. The GEM controls a variety of systems: ^ interval rear window wiper ^ battery saver ^ illuminated entry ^ headlamp control ^ interior lamp control ^ power door locks ^ Remote Key Less Entry (RKE) ^ accessory delay ^ perimeter anti-theft system ^ door ajar output control Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview 1. Verify the customer concern by operating the system in question. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical and electrical damage. VISUAL INSPECTION CHART Electrical ^ Fuse ^ Wiring harness ^ Connector(s) ^ Circuitry ^ Generic Electronic Module (GEM) 3. If the concern remains after the inspection, connect the diagnostic tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC) located beneath the instrument panel and select the vehicle to be tested from the diagnostic tool menu. If the diagnostic tool does not communicate with the vehicle: ^ check that the program card is correctly installed. ^ check the connections to the vehicle. ^ check the ignition switch position. 4. If the diagnostic tool still does not communicate with the vehicle, refer to the diagnostic tool manual. 5. Carry out the DATA LINK DIAGNOSTICS test. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Module Communication Network/Testing and Inspection/Module Communications Network/Pinpoint Tests/Pinpoint Test PC (Precheck) If the diagnostic tool responds with: ^ CKT914, CKT915 or CKT70 = ALL ECUS NO RESP/NOT EQUIP, refer to Module Communications Network (Information Bus). ^ NO RESP/NOT EQUIP for generic electronic module (GEM), go to Pinpoint Test A. ^ SYSTEM PASSED, retrieve and record the continuous Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs), erase the continuous DTCs and carry out self-test diagnostics for the GEM. 6. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to the GEM Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index to continue diagnostics. See: Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures 7. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, refer to the appropriate Vehicle System to continue diagnostics. Additional Testing For additional information on warning chime concerns, refer to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators. For additional information on courtesy lamps/illuminated entry and battery saver concerns, refer to Lighting and Horns. For additional information on Rear interval timer concerns, refer to Wiper and Washer Systems. For additional information on keyless entry concerns, refer to Keyless Entry. For additional information on Power Door Lock concerns, refer to Power Locks. For additional information on anti-theft concerns, refer to Antitheft and Alarm Systems. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8143 Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures DTC Index B1217 - B1325 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8144 DTC Index B1327 - C1962 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8145 Symptom Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8146 Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Pinpoint Tests A1 - A2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8147 A2 - A4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8148 A4 - A5 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8149 Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. NOTE: Prior to removal of the GEM, it is necessary to upload module configuration information to a diagnostic tool. This information needs to be downloaded into the new module once installed. 2. Remove the floor console. Refer to Console. 3. Disconnect the GEM electrical connectors. 4. Remove the GEM 1 Pull back the insulation and remove the nuts. 2 Remove the GEM. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Configure the GEM. Refer to Module Communications Network (Information Bus). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8150 Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers Radio/Stereo Noise Filter: Customer Interest Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers Article No. 01-7-3 04/16/01 ^ FUEL SYSTEM - FUEL PUMP "WHINING"/"BUZZING" NOISE COMES THROUGH ENTERTAINMENT OR TWO - WAY RADIO SPEAKER ^ RADIO - ENTERTAINMENT OR TWO - WAY COMMUNICATION - "WHINING"/"BUZZING" NOISE IN SPEAKERS CAUSED BY FUEL PUMP ^ NOISE - "WHINING"/"BUZZING" - COMES THROUGH SPEAKERS OF ENTERTAINMENT OR TWO-WAY RADIO FORD: 1990-1994 TEMPO 1990-1997 PROBE, THUNDERBIRD 1990-1999 ESCORT, MUSTANG, TAURUS 1990-2001 CROWN VICTORIA 1997-1999 CONTOUR 2001 TAURUS 1990 BRONCO II 1990-1996 BRONCO 1990-1997 AEROSTAR, F SUPER DUTY, F-250 HD, F-350 1990-1999 F-250 LD 1990-2001 ECONOLINE, F-150, RANGER 1991-2001 EXPLORER 1995-2001 WINDSTAR 1997-2001 EXPEDITION 1999-2001 SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2001 EXCURSION 2001 ESCAPE LINCOLN: 1990-1992 MARK VII 1990-1999 CONTINENTAL 1990-2001 TOWN CAR 1997-1998 MARK VIII 1998-2001 NAVIGATOR MERCURY: 1990-1994 TOPAZ 1990-1997 COUGAR 1990-1999 SABLE 1990-2001 GRAND MARQUIS 1991-1999 TRACER 1997-1999 MYSTIQUE 1999 COUGAR 2001 SABLE 1993-2001 VILLAGER 1997-2001 MOUNTAINEER This TSB article is being republished in its entirety to update the model year vehicles. ISSUE A "whining"/"buzzing" noise in the speakers of the entertainment radio or two-way radio on vehicles with an in-tank electric fuel pump may be caused by electrical noise from the fuel pump. ACTION Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8164 Install an electronic noise Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) Filter (F1PZ-18B925-A) on the fuel pump inside the fuel tank. Refer to the following Test Procedure to confirm that the concern exists, then refer to the Service Procedure for repair details. NOTE SOME LIGHT TRUCKS REQUIRE ONE (1) RFI FILTER FOR EACH IN-TANK ELECTRIC FUEL PUMP ON MULTI-TANK VEHICLES. NOTE THIS TSB DOES NOT INCLUDE TAURUS FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLES (FFVS) OR 1999 RANGER 3.0L FFVS. TEST PROCEDURE Fuel pump radio noise is relatively constant and changes only slightly with vehicle speed. If the frequency of the noise varies or the noise comes and goes with the vehicle speed, then it is not the fuel pump and this fix will not be effective. The following procedure will help determine if the fuel pump is the cause of the radio noise: 1. Turn on the radio before the key is turned on (assuming the radio will operate without the ignition key - you may need to put the ignition key in the Accessory position). 2. Turn the ignition key to the Run position (do not start the engine). 3. The fuel pump should run for about 1 second with the key in the Run position with the engine not running. Listen for noise in the radio. If noise is present while the pump is running and stops when the pump stops, then the noise is being generated by the pump and this procedure should help. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuel pump sender assembly from the fuel tank. Refer to the appropriate model year Workshop Manual for removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8165 2. On vehicles without a fuel delivery module, remove the negative and positive connectors from the fuel pump, Figure 1. a. Cut the wires to the fuel pump 76 mm (3") from the flange of the fuel pump and discard the wires. b. Connect the RFI filter connectors to the spade terminal on the fuel pump. c. Cut and solder both the red and black wires of the RFI filter to the red and black wires of the flange. Use Heat Shrink Tubing (F5AZ-14A099-M) over the solder connections. NOTE HEAT SHRINK TUBING MUST BE USED OVER ALL SOLDERED CONNECTIONS MADE PRIOR TO THIS TSB. USE SUFFICIENT Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8166 TUBING (ABOUT 50 mm (2",)) OF THE SPECIFIED TYPE TO ENTIRELY COVER EACH SOLDERED CONNECTION AND SHRINK APPROPRIATELY TO PREVENT EXPOSURE OF THE CONNECTIONS. NOTE FOR SOME VEHICLES WITH EXTREMELY LONG FUEL PUMP GROUND WIRE CIRCUITS, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO SHORTEN THE GROUND WIRE TO A POINT CLOSE TO THE FUEL TANK. IF THE GROUND IS MOVED, BE SURE IT IS SECURE AND PROTECTED FROM CORROSION SINCE IT IS THE OPERATING GROUND FOR THE PUMP. CHECK SERVICE LITERATURE (EVTM, ETC.) FOR GROUND LOCATIONS. WARNING ALL SOLDERING AND HEAT SHRINKING MUST BE COMPLETED AWAY FROM THE FUEL TANK AREA. USE A SOLDERING IRON ONLY FOR SOLDERING AND HEAT GUN ONLY FOR APPLYING SHRINK TUBING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8167 3. On light trucks and compact trucks with a fuel delivery module, cut the fuel pump wires to the fuel delivery module 50 mm (2") from the flange and discard the wires, Figure 2. a. Cut the connectors from the RFI filter and solder wires to the fuel delivery module (red to red and black to black). Use heat shrink tubing over soldering connections. b. Solder wires from the RFI filter to the flange wires (red to red and black to black). Use heat shrink tubing over soldered connections. NOTE: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8168 HEAT SHRINK TUBING MUST BE USED OVER ALL SOLDERED CONNECTIONS MADE PRIOR TO THIS TSB. USE SUFFICIENT TUBING (ABOUT 50 mm (2")) OF THE SPECIFIED TYPE TO ENTIRELY COVER EACH SOLDERED CONNECTION AND SHRINK APPROPRIATELY TO PREVENT EXPOSURE OF THE CONNECTIONS. NOTE: FOR SOME VEHICLES WITH EXTREMELY LONG FUEL PUMP GROUND WIRE CIRCUITS, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO SHORTEN THE WIRE TO A POINT CLOSE TO THE FUEL TANK IF THE GROUND IS MOVED, BE SURE IT IS SECURE AND PROTECTED FROM CORROSION. SINCE IT IS THE OPERATING GROUND FOR THE PUMP. CHECK SERVICE LITERATURE (EVTM, ETC.) FOR GROUND LOCATIONS. WARNING ALL SOLDERING AND HEAT SHRINKING MUST BE COMPLETED AWAY FROM THE FUEL TANK AREA. USE A SOLDERING IRON ONLY FOR SOLDERING AND HEAT GUN ONLY FOR APPLYING SHRINK TUBING. 4. Secure the RFI filter to the fuel pump and sender assembly with a Bundling Strap (95873-S101) to prevent rattling in the tank, Figures 1 and 2. 5. Reinstall the fuel pump sender assembly into the fuel tank. CAUTION INSTALL NEW GASKETS WHEN REINSTALLING SENDER TO PREVENT LEAKS. REFER TO THE PARTS CATALOG FOR PROPER APPLICATIONS. 6. Check the appropriate Electrical and vacuum troubleshooting manual (EVTM) (or other Service Literature) for the location of the fuel pump pump ground. If ground is more than 0.9m (3') from the tank, cut wire and ground fuel pump end within 0.9m (3') of the tank to prevent ground wire from acting as an antenna. Be sure ground is secure and protected from corrosion since it is the operating ground for the fuel pump. 7. Install the fuel tank in the vehicle as outlined in the appropriate Service or Workshop manual. PARTS BLOCK OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 90-18-3, 91-17-5 SUPERSEDES: 99-12-9 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8169 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8170 OPERATION/DESCRIPTION/TIME DEALER CODING OASIS CODES: 205000, 207000, 404000, 702000, 702300 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers Radio/Stereo Noise Filter: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers Article No. 01-7-3 04/16/01 ^ FUEL SYSTEM - FUEL PUMP "WHINING"/"BUZZING" NOISE COMES THROUGH ENTERTAINMENT OR TWO - WAY RADIO SPEAKER ^ RADIO - ENTERTAINMENT OR TWO - WAY COMMUNICATION - "WHINING"/"BUZZING" NOISE IN SPEAKERS CAUSED BY FUEL PUMP ^ NOISE - "WHINING"/"BUZZING" - COMES THROUGH SPEAKERS OF ENTERTAINMENT OR TWO-WAY RADIO FORD: 1990-1994 TEMPO 1990-1997 PROBE, THUNDERBIRD 1990-1999 ESCORT, MUSTANG, TAURUS 1990-2001 CROWN VICTORIA 1997-1999 CONTOUR 2001 TAURUS 1990 BRONCO II 1990-1996 BRONCO 1990-1997 AEROSTAR, F SUPER DUTY, F-250 HD, F-350 1990-1999 F-250 LD 1990-2001 ECONOLINE, F-150, RANGER 1991-2001 EXPLORER 1995-2001 WINDSTAR 1997-2001 EXPEDITION 1999-2001 SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2001 EXCURSION 2001 ESCAPE LINCOLN: 1990-1992 MARK VII 1990-1999 CONTINENTAL 1990-2001 TOWN CAR 1997-1998 MARK VIII 1998-2001 NAVIGATOR MERCURY: 1990-1994 TOPAZ 1990-1997 COUGAR 1990-1999 SABLE 1990-2001 GRAND MARQUIS 1991-1999 TRACER 1997-1999 MYSTIQUE 1999 COUGAR 2001 SABLE 1993-2001 VILLAGER 1997-2001 MOUNTAINEER This TSB article is being republished in its entirety to update the model year vehicles. ISSUE A "whining"/"buzzing" noise in the speakers of the entertainment radio or two-way radio on vehicles with an in-tank electric fuel pump may be caused by electrical noise from the fuel pump. ACTION Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8176 Install an electronic noise Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) Filter (F1PZ-18B925-A) on the fuel pump inside the fuel tank. Refer to the following Test Procedure to confirm that the concern exists, then refer to the Service Procedure for repair details. NOTE SOME LIGHT TRUCKS REQUIRE ONE (1) RFI FILTER FOR EACH IN-TANK ELECTRIC FUEL PUMP ON MULTI-TANK VEHICLES. NOTE THIS TSB DOES NOT INCLUDE TAURUS FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLES (FFVS) OR 1999 RANGER 3.0L FFVS. TEST PROCEDURE Fuel pump radio noise is relatively constant and changes only slightly with vehicle speed. If the frequency of the noise varies or the noise comes and goes with the vehicle speed, then it is not the fuel pump and this fix will not be effective. The following procedure will help determine if the fuel pump is the cause of the radio noise: 1. Turn on the radio before the key is turned on (assuming the radio will operate without the ignition key - you may need to put the ignition key in the Accessory position). 2. Turn the ignition key to the Run position (do not start the engine). 3. The fuel pump should run for about 1 second with the key in the Run position with the engine not running. Listen for noise in the radio. If noise is present while the pump is running and stops when the pump stops, then the noise is being generated by the pump and this procedure should help. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuel pump sender assembly from the fuel tank. Refer to the appropriate model year Workshop Manual for removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8177 2. On vehicles without a fuel delivery module, remove the negative and positive connectors from the fuel pump, Figure 1. a. Cut the wires to the fuel pump 76 mm (3") from the flange of the fuel pump and discard the wires. b. Connect the RFI filter connectors to the spade terminal on the fuel pump. c. Cut and solder both the red and black wires of the RFI filter to the red and black wires of the flange. Use Heat Shrink Tubing (F5AZ-14A099-M) over the solder connections. NOTE HEAT SHRINK TUBING MUST BE USED OVER ALL SOLDERED CONNECTIONS MADE PRIOR TO THIS TSB. USE SUFFICIENT Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8178 TUBING (ABOUT 50 mm (2",)) OF THE SPECIFIED TYPE TO ENTIRELY COVER EACH SOLDERED CONNECTION AND SHRINK APPROPRIATELY TO PREVENT EXPOSURE OF THE CONNECTIONS. NOTE FOR SOME VEHICLES WITH EXTREMELY LONG FUEL PUMP GROUND WIRE CIRCUITS, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO SHORTEN THE GROUND WIRE TO A POINT CLOSE TO THE FUEL TANK. IF THE GROUND IS MOVED, BE SURE IT IS SECURE AND PROTECTED FROM CORROSION SINCE IT IS THE OPERATING GROUND FOR THE PUMP. CHECK SERVICE LITERATURE (EVTM, ETC.) FOR GROUND LOCATIONS. WARNING ALL SOLDERING AND HEAT SHRINKING MUST BE COMPLETED AWAY FROM THE FUEL TANK AREA. USE A SOLDERING IRON ONLY FOR SOLDERING AND HEAT GUN ONLY FOR APPLYING SHRINK TUBING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8179 3. On light trucks and compact trucks with a fuel delivery module, cut the fuel pump wires to the fuel delivery module 50 mm (2") from the flange and discard the wires, Figure 2. a. Cut the connectors from the RFI filter and solder wires to the fuel delivery module (red to red and black to black). Use heat shrink tubing over soldering connections. b. Solder wires from the RFI filter to the flange wires (red to red and black to black). Use heat shrink tubing over soldered connections. NOTE: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8180 HEAT SHRINK TUBING MUST BE USED OVER ALL SOLDERED CONNECTIONS MADE PRIOR TO THIS TSB. USE SUFFICIENT TUBING (ABOUT 50 mm (2")) OF THE SPECIFIED TYPE TO ENTIRELY COVER EACH SOLDERED CONNECTION AND SHRINK APPROPRIATELY TO PREVENT EXPOSURE OF THE CONNECTIONS. NOTE: FOR SOME VEHICLES WITH EXTREMELY LONG FUEL PUMP GROUND WIRE CIRCUITS, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO SHORTEN THE WIRE TO A POINT CLOSE TO THE FUEL TANK IF THE GROUND IS MOVED, BE SURE IT IS SECURE AND PROTECTED FROM CORROSION. SINCE IT IS THE OPERATING GROUND FOR THE PUMP. CHECK SERVICE LITERATURE (EVTM, ETC.) FOR GROUND LOCATIONS. WARNING ALL SOLDERING AND HEAT SHRINKING MUST BE COMPLETED AWAY FROM THE FUEL TANK AREA. USE A SOLDERING IRON ONLY FOR SOLDERING AND HEAT GUN ONLY FOR APPLYING SHRINK TUBING. 4. Secure the RFI filter to the fuel pump and sender assembly with a Bundling Strap (95873-S101) to prevent rattling in the tank, Figures 1 and 2. 5. Reinstall the fuel pump sender assembly into the fuel tank. CAUTION INSTALL NEW GASKETS WHEN REINSTALLING SENDER TO PREVENT LEAKS. REFER TO THE PARTS CATALOG FOR PROPER APPLICATIONS. 6. Check the appropriate Electrical and vacuum troubleshooting manual (EVTM) (or other Service Literature) for the location of the fuel pump pump ground. If ground is more than 0.9m (3') from the tank, cut wire and ground fuel pump end within 0.9m (3') of the tank to prevent ground wire from acting as an antenna. Be sure ground is secure and protected from corrosion since it is the operating ground for the fuel pump. 7. Install the fuel tank in the vehicle as outlined in the appropriate Service or Workshop manual. PARTS BLOCK OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 90-18-3, 91-17-5 SUPERSEDES: 99-12-9 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8181 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8182 OPERATION/DESCRIPTION/TIME DEALER CODING OASIS CODES: 205000, 207000, 404000, 702000, 702300 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Radio/Stereo Noise Filter: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored Turbine Shaft: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored Article No. 02-2-4 02/04/02 TRANSAXLE - CD4E - HARSH AND DELAYED 1-2/2-3 UPSHIFTS - AFTER TRANSAXLE OR TURBINE SHAFT SPEED SENSOR (TSS) REPLACEMENT - POSSIBLE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTC) 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, AND P1744 FORD: 1994-1997 PROBE 1995-2000 CONTOUR 2001-2002 ESCAPE MERCURY: 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR ISSUE Some vehicles equipped with the CD4E transaxle may exhibit harsh and delayed 1-2/2-3 upshifts along with DTCs for gear ratio errors after the Transaxle or Turbine Shaft Speed sensor (TSS) have been replaced. DTCs may include OBD1 codes 628, 642, 645, 646, 647, 648, or OBD II codes P0731, P0732, P0734, P0741, and P1744 ACTION If the condition occurred after servicing the Transaxle or TSS, refer to the following TSS Selection Chart and select the correct TSS for the vehicle application. Note that each TSS has the Ford engineering part number on it. Also note that there is a TSS kit that includes an instruction sheet, TSS sensor and correct bolt. SERVICE PROCEDURE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Radio/Stereo Noise Filter: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored > Page 8188 If the condition occurred after replacing the Transaxle or TSS, use the TSS Selection Chart and determine the correct sensor for the vehicle. 1. Remove the existing TSS from the CD4E pump body. 2. Reinstall the original TSS sensor, if available, or install the correct TSS as indicated in the Selection Chart. 3. Clear all codes and verify repair. 4. If the condition still exists, follow normal diagnostics as listed in the appropriate model year Workshop Manual. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 501000, 502000, 503000, 504000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Radio/Stereo Noise Filter: > 02-2-4 > Feb > 02 > A/T - CD4E Harsh and Delayed Upshifts/DTC's Stored > Page 8194 If the condition occurred after replacing the Transaxle or TSS, use the TSS Selection Chart and determine the correct sensor for the vehicle. 1. Remove the existing TSS from the CD4E pump body. 2. Reinstall the original TSS sensor, if available, or install the correct TSS as indicated in the Selection Chart. 3. Clear all codes and verify repair. 4. If the condition still exists, follow normal diagnostics as listed in the appropriate model year Workshop Manual. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 501000, 502000, 503000, 504000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Speaker: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers Speaker: Customer Interest Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers Article No. 01-7-3 04/16/01 ^ FUEL SYSTEM - FUEL PUMP "WHINING"/"BUZZING" NOISE COMES THROUGH ENTERTAINMENT OR TWO - WAY RADIO SPEAKER ^ RADIO - ENTERTAINMENT OR TWO - WAY COMMUNICATION - "WHINING"/"BUZZING" NOISE IN SPEAKERS CAUSED BY FUEL PUMP ^ NOISE - "WHINING"/"BUZZING" - COMES THROUGH SPEAKERS OF ENTERTAINMENT OR TWO-WAY RADIO FORD: 1990-1994 TEMPO 1990-1997 PROBE, THUNDERBIRD 1990-1999 ESCORT, MUSTANG, TAURUS 1990-2001 CROWN VICTORIA 1997-1999 CONTOUR 2001 TAURUS 1990 BRONCO II 1990-1996 BRONCO 1990-1997 AEROSTAR, F SUPER DUTY, F-250 HD, F-350 1990-1999 F-250 LD 1990-2001 ECONOLINE, F-150, RANGER 1991-2001 EXPLORER 1995-2001 WINDSTAR 1997-2001 EXPEDITION 1999-2001 SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2001 EXCURSION 2001 ESCAPE LINCOLN: 1990-1992 MARK VII 1990-1999 CONTINENTAL 1990-2001 TOWN CAR 1997-1998 MARK VIII 1998-2001 NAVIGATOR MERCURY: 1990-1994 TOPAZ 1990-1997 COUGAR 1990-1999 SABLE 1990-2001 GRAND MARQUIS 1991-1999 TRACER 1997-1999 MYSTIQUE 1999 COUGAR 2001 SABLE 1993-2001 VILLAGER 1997-2001 MOUNTAINEER This TSB article is being republished in its entirety to update the model year vehicles. ISSUE A "whining"/"buzzing" noise in the speakers of the entertainment radio or two-way radio on vehicles with an in-tank electric fuel pump may be caused by electrical noise from the fuel pump. ACTION Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Speaker: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8203 Install an electronic noise Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) Filter (F1PZ-18B925-A) on the fuel pump inside the fuel tank. Refer to the following Test Procedure to confirm that the concern exists, then refer to the Service Procedure for repair details. NOTE SOME LIGHT TRUCKS REQUIRE ONE (1) RFI FILTER FOR EACH IN-TANK ELECTRIC FUEL PUMP ON MULTI-TANK VEHICLES. NOTE THIS TSB DOES NOT INCLUDE TAURUS FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLES (FFVS) OR 1999 RANGER 3.0L FFVS. TEST PROCEDURE Fuel pump radio noise is relatively constant and changes only slightly with vehicle speed. If the frequency of the noise varies or the noise comes and goes with the vehicle speed, then it is not the fuel pump and this fix will not be effective. The following procedure will help determine if the fuel pump is the cause of the radio noise: 1. Turn on the radio before the key is turned on (assuming the radio will operate without the ignition key - you may need to put the ignition key in the Accessory position). 2. Turn the ignition key to the Run position (do not start the engine). 3. The fuel pump should run for about 1 second with the key in the Run position with the engine not running. Listen for noise in the radio. If noise is present while the pump is running and stops when the pump stops, then the noise is being generated by the pump and this procedure should help. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuel pump sender assembly from the fuel tank. Refer to the appropriate model year Workshop Manual for removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Speaker: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8204 2. On vehicles without a fuel delivery module, remove the negative and positive connectors from the fuel pump, Figure 1. a. Cut the wires to the fuel pump 76 mm (3") from the flange of the fuel pump and discard the wires. b. Connect the RFI filter connectors to the spade terminal on the fuel pump. c. Cut and solder both the red and black wires of the RFI filter to the red and black wires of the flange. Use Heat Shrink Tubing (F5AZ-14A099-M) over the solder connections. NOTE HEAT SHRINK TUBING MUST BE USED OVER ALL SOLDERED CONNECTIONS MADE PRIOR TO THIS TSB. USE SUFFICIENT Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Speaker: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8205 TUBING (ABOUT 50 mm (2",)) OF THE SPECIFIED TYPE TO ENTIRELY COVER EACH SOLDERED CONNECTION AND SHRINK APPROPRIATELY TO PREVENT EXPOSURE OF THE CONNECTIONS. NOTE FOR SOME VEHICLES WITH EXTREMELY LONG FUEL PUMP GROUND WIRE CIRCUITS, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO SHORTEN THE GROUND WIRE TO A POINT CLOSE TO THE FUEL TANK. IF THE GROUND IS MOVED, BE SURE IT IS SECURE AND PROTECTED FROM CORROSION SINCE IT IS THE OPERATING GROUND FOR THE PUMP. CHECK SERVICE LITERATURE (EVTM, ETC.) FOR GROUND LOCATIONS. WARNING ALL SOLDERING AND HEAT SHRINKING MUST BE COMPLETED AWAY FROM THE FUEL TANK AREA. USE A SOLDERING IRON ONLY FOR SOLDERING AND HEAT GUN ONLY FOR APPLYING SHRINK TUBING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Speaker: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8206 3. On light trucks and compact trucks with a fuel delivery module, cut the fuel pump wires to the fuel delivery module 50 mm (2") from the flange and discard the wires, Figure 2. a. Cut the connectors from the RFI filter and solder wires to the fuel delivery module (red to red and black to black). Use heat shrink tubing over soldering connections. b. Solder wires from the RFI filter to the flange wires (red to red and black to black). Use heat shrink tubing over soldered connections. NOTE: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Speaker: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8207 HEAT SHRINK TUBING MUST BE USED OVER ALL SOLDERED CONNECTIONS MADE PRIOR TO THIS TSB. USE SUFFICIENT TUBING (ABOUT 50 mm (2")) OF THE SPECIFIED TYPE TO ENTIRELY COVER EACH SOLDERED CONNECTION AND SHRINK APPROPRIATELY TO PREVENT EXPOSURE OF THE CONNECTIONS. NOTE: FOR SOME VEHICLES WITH EXTREMELY LONG FUEL PUMP GROUND WIRE CIRCUITS, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO SHORTEN THE WIRE TO A POINT CLOSE TO THE FUEL TANK IF THE GROUND IS MOVED, BE SURE IT IS SECURE AND PROTECTED FROM CORROSION. SINCE IT IS THE OPERATING GROUND FOR THE PUMP. CHECK SERVICE LITERATURE (EVTM, ETC.) FOR GROUND LOCATIONS. WARNING ALL SOLDERING AND HEAT SHRINKING MUST BE COMPLETED AWAY FROM THE FUEL TANK AREA. USE A SOLDERING IRON ONLY FOR SOLDERING AND HEAT GUN ONLY FOR APPLYING SHRINK TUBING. 4. Secure the RFI filter to the fuel pump and sender assembly with a Bundling Strap (95873-S101) to prevent rattling in the tank, Figures 1 and 2. 5. Reinstall the fuel pump sender assembly into the fuel tank. CAUTION INSTALL NEW GASKETS WHEN REINSTALLING SENDER TO PREVENT LEAKS. REFER TO THE PARTS CATALOG FOR PROPER APPLICATIONS. 6. Check the appropriate Electrical and vacuum troubleshooting manual (EVTM) (or other Service Literature) for the location of the fuel pump pump ground. If ground is more than 0.9m (3') from the tank, cut wire and ground fuel pump end within 0.9m (3') of the tank to prevent ground wire from acting as an antenna. Be sure ground is secure and protected from corrosion since it is the operating ground for the fuel pump. 7. Install the fuel tank in the vehicle as outlined in the appropriate Service or Workshop manual. PARTS BLOCK OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 90-18-3, 91-17-5 SUPERSEDES: 99-12-9 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Speaker: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8208 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Speaker: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8209 OPERATION/DESCRIPTION/TIME DEALER CODING OASIS CODES: 205000, 207000, 404000, 702000, 702300 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Speaker: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers Speaker: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers Article No. 01-7-3 04/16/01 ^ FUEL SYSTEM - FUEL PUMP "WHINING"/"BUZZING" NOISE COMES THROUGH ENTERTAINMENT OR TWO - WAY RADIO SPEAKER ^ RADIO - ENTERTAINMENT OR TWO - WAY COMMUNICATION - "WHINING"/"BUZZING" NOISE IN SPEAKERS CAUSED BY FUEL PUMP ^ NOISE - "WHINING"/"BUZZING" - COMES THROUGH SPEAKERS OF ENTERTAINMENT OR TWO-WAY RADIO FORD: 1990-1994 TEMPO 1990-1997 PROBE, THUNDERBIRD 1990-1999 ESCORT, MUSTANG, TAURUS 1990-2001 CROWN VICTORIA 1997-1999 CONTOUR 2001 TAURUS 1990 BRONCO II 1990-1996 BRONCO 1990-1997 AEROSTAR, F SUPER DUTY, F-250 HD, F-350 1990-1999 F-250 LD 1990-2001 ECONOLINE, F-150, RANGER 1991-2001 EXPLORER 1995-2001 WINDSTAR 1997-2001 EXPEDITION 1999-2001 SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2001 EXCURSION 2001 ESCAPE LINCOLN: 1990-1992 MARK VII 1990-1999 CONTINENTAL 1990-2001 TOWN CAR 1997-1998 MARK VIII 1998-2001 NAVIGATOR MERCURY: 1990-1994 TOPAZ 1990-1997 COUGAR 1990-1999 SABLE 1990-2001 GRAND MARQUIS 1991-1999 TRACER 1997-1999 MYSTIQUE 1999 COUGAR 2001 SABLE 1993-2001 VILLAGER 1997-2001 MOUNTAINEER This TSB article is being republished in its entirety to update the model year vehicles. ISSUE A "whining"/"buzzing" noise in the speakers of the entertainment radio or two-way radio on vehicles with an in-tank electric fuel pump may be caused by electrical noise from the fuel pump. ACTION Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Speaker: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8215 Install an electronic noise Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) Filter (F1PZ-18B925-A) on the fuel pump inside the fuel tank. Refer to the following Test Procedure to confirm that the concern exists, then refer to the Service Procedure for repair details. NOTE SOME LIGHT TRUCKS REQUIRE ONE (1) RFI FILTER FOR EACH IN-TANK ELECTRIC FUEL PUMP ON MULTI-TANK VEHICLES. NOTE THIS TSB DOES NOT INCLUDE TAURUS FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLES (FFVS) OR 1999 RANGER 3.0L FFVS. TEST PROCEDURE Fuel pump radio noise is relatively constant and changes only slightly with vehicle speed. If the frequency of the noise varies or the noise comes and goes with the vehicle speed, then it is not the fuel pump and this fix will not be effective. The following procedure will help determine if the fuel pump is the cause of the radio noise: 1. Turn on the radio before the key is turned on (assuming the radio will operate without the ignition key - you may need to put the ignition key in the Accessory position). 2. Turn the ignition key to the Run position (do not start the engine). 3. The fuel pump should run for about 1 second with the key in the Run position with the engine not running. Listen for noise in the radio. If noise is present while the pump is running and stops when the pump stops, then the noise is being generated by the pump and this procedure should help. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuel pump sender assembly from the fuel tank. Refer to the appropriate model year Workshop Manual for removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Speaker: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8216 2. On vehicles without a fuel delivery module, remove the negative and positive connectors from the fuel pump, Figure 1. a. Cut the wires to the fuel pump 76 mm (3") from the flange of the fuel pump and discard the wires. b. Connect the RFI filter connectors to the spade terminal on the fuel pump. c. Cut and solder both the red and black wires of the RFI filter to the red and black wires of the flange. Use Heat Shrink Tubing (F5AZ-14A099-M) over the solder connections. NOTE HEAT SHRINK TUBING MUST BE USED OVER ALL SOLDERED CONNECTIONS MADE PRIOR TO THIS TSB. USE SUFFICIENT Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Speaker: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8217 TUBING (ABOUT 50 mm (2",)) OF THE SPECIFIED TYPE TO ENTIRELY COVER EACH SOLDERED CONNECTION AND SHRINK APPROPRIATELY TO PREVENT EXPOSURE OF THE CONNECTIONS. NOTE FOR SOME VEHICLES WITH EXTREMELY LONG FUEL PUMP GROUND WIRE CIRCUITS, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO SHORTEN THE GROUND WIRE TO A POINT CLOSE TO THE FUEL TANK. IF THE GROUND IS MOVED, BE SURE IT IS SECURE AND PROTECTED FROM CORROSION SINCE IT IS THE OPERATING GROUND FOR THE PUMP. CHECK SERVICE LITERATURE (EVTM, ETC.) FOR GROUND LOCATIONS. WARNING ALL SOLDERING AND HEAT SHRINKING MUST BE COMPLETED AWAY FROM THE FUEL TANK AREA. USE A SOLDERING IRON ONLY FOR SOLDERING AND HEAT GUN ONLY FOR APPLYING SHRINK TUBING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Speaker: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8218 3. On light trucks and compact trucks with a fuel delivery module, cut the fuel pump wires to the fuel delivery module 50 mm (2") from the flange and discard the wires, Figure 2. a. Cut the connectors from the RFI filter and solder wires to the fuel delivery module (red to red and black to black). Use heat shrink tubing over soldering connections. b. Solder wires from the RFI filter to the flange wires (red to red and black to black). Use heat shrink tubing over soldered connections. NOTE: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Speaker: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8219 HEAT SHRINK TUBING MUST BE USED OVER ALL SOLDERED CONNECTIONS MADE PRIOR TO THIS TSB. USE SUFFICIENT TUBING (ABOUT 50 mm (2")) OF THE SPECIFIED TYPE TO ENTIRELY COVER EACH SOLDERED CONNECTION AND SHRINK APPROPRIATELY TO PREVENT EXPOSURE OF THE CONNECTIONS. NOTE: FOR SOME VEHICLES WITH EXTREMELY LONG FUEL PUMP GROUND WIRE CIRCUITS, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO SHORTEN THE WIRE TO A POINT CLOSE TO THE FUEL TANK IF THE GROUND IS MOVED, BE SURE IT IS SECURE AND PROTECTED FROM CORROSION. SINCE IT IS THE OPERATING GROUND FOR THE PUMP. CHECK SERVICE LITERATURE (EVTM, ETC.) FOR GROUND LOCATIONS. WARNING ALL SOLDERING AND HEAT SHRINKING MUST BE COMPLETED AWAY FROM THE FUEL TANK AREA. USE A SOLDERING IRON ONLY FOR SOLDERING AND HEAT GUN ONLY FOR APPLYING SHRINK TUBING. 4. Secure the RFI filter to the fuel pump and sender assembly with a Bundling Strap (95873-S101) to prevent rattling in the tank, Figures 1 and 2. 5. Reinstall the fuel pump sender assembly into the fuel tank. CAUTION INSTALL NEW GASKETS WHEN REINSTALLING SENDER TO PREVENT LEAKS. REFER TO THE PARTS CATALOG FOR PROPER APPLICATIONS. 6. Check the appropriate Electrical and vacuum troubleshooting manual (EVTM) (or other Service Literature) for the location of the fuel pump pump ground. If ground is more than 0.9m (3') from the tank, cut wire and ground fuel pump end within 0.9m (3') of the tank to prevent ground wire from acting as an antenna. Be sure ground is secure and protected from corrosion since it is the operating ground for the fuel pump. 7. Install the fuel tank in the vehicle as outlined in the appropriate Service or Workshop manual. PARTS BLOCK OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 90-18-3, 91-17-5 SUPERSEDES: 99-12-9 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Speaker: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8220 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Speaker: > 01-7-3 > Apr > 01 > Fuel Pump - Whine Heard Through Radio Speakers > Page 8221 OPERATION/DESCRIPTION/TIME DEALER CODING OASIS CODES: 205000, 207000, 404000, 702000, 702300 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8222 Torque Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker Speaker: Diagrams Speaker Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker > Page 8225 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker > Page 8226 Speaker: Diagrams Tweeter Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8227 Speaker: Description and Operation All vehicles are equipped with four radio speakers mounted in the doors. The optional tweeters are mounted in the sail panels and the optional woofer is mounted in the right rear quarter panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations Accessory Delay Relay: Locations Diagram 700-01-00-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8233 Diagram 700-01-00-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Relay Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Relay > Page 8236 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay > Page 8239 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay > Page 8240 Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection Micro ISO Relay Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay > Page 8241 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Application and ID Alarm Module: Application and ID For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules (General Module). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 8245 Alarm Module: Testing and Inspection Testing and Inspection For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 8251 Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Connector Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Find and Use These Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams ^ System Diagrams ^ Grounds Diagrams Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8254 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow. Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the diagram. Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be found. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8255 Fuse And Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. Fuse Circuits Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery. Ground Distribution Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text "partial". Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8256 Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of (1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces). The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number. Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the way out by a spring. Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control. A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the way in. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. circuit Numbering Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification Circuit Numbering: Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting electrical circuits. Function: The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter "S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit. System-Connection (including branch): Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate wires in one connection with the same function. Wire Identification (wire colors): The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8257 Wire Identification Example Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know the following information about the wire: Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit System: AC = Headlamp leveling Connection: 3 = Switch connection A = Branch Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe). Circuit Identification Charts Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8258 Circuit Identification Chart System Codes Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8259 Sample Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8260 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8261 Sample Diagram Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8262 Circuit Identification Chart SYSTEM CODES CHART Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8263 SAMPLE DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8264 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8265 Sample Diagram Electrical Symbols ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8266 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8267 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8268 Types of Diagrams Shown Types of Diagrams Shown Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them. Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations. Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system information suitable for diagnostic operations. Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a relationship to them, are also included. All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding of the system component interactions. Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type. Wire Color Code Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8269 Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8270 Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Diagnostic Aids These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8271 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8272 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8273 Diagram 419-10-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Description and Operation > System Description Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Description and Operation System Description The multifunction module consists of the Generic Electronic Module (GEM). The GEM controls the following features: ^ interval rear window wiper ^ battery saver ^ illuminated entry ^ headlamp control ^ interior lamp control ^ power door locks ^ Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ^ accessory delay ^ perimeter anti-theft system ^ door ajar output control Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Description and Operation > System Description > Page 8276 Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Description and Operation Principles of Operation (How Does It Work?) The Generic Electronic Module (GEM) constantly monitors its subsystems for concerns. If a concern is found in one of the subsystems, the GEM will record the concern in the form of a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). The ignition switch position is very important to the GEM function. Erratic or unexpected GEM function can often be traced to problems with these GEM inputs. The GEM controls a variety of systems: ^ interval rear window wiper ^ battery saver ^ illuminated entry ^ headlamp control ^ interior lamp control ^ power door locks ^ Remote Key Less Entry (RKE) ^ accessory delay ^ perimeter anti-theft system ^ door ajar output control Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview 1. Verify the customer concern by operating the system in question. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical and electrical damage. VISUAL INSPECTION CHART Electrical ^ Fuse ^ Wiring harness ^ Connector(s) ^ Circuitry ^ Generic Electronic Module (GEM) 3. If the concern remains after the inspection, connect the diagnostic tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC) located beneath the instrument panel and select the vehicle to be tested from the diagnostic tool menu. If the diagnostic tool does not communicate with the vehicle: ^ check that the program card is correctly installed. ^ check the connections to the vehicle. ^ check the ignition switch position. 4. If the diagnostic tool still does not communicate with the vehicle, refer to the diagnostic tool manual. 5. Carry out the DATA LINK DIAGNOSTICS test. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Module Communication Network/Testing and Inspection/Module Communications Network/Pinpoint Tests/Pinpoint Test PC (Precheck) If the diagnostic tool responds with: ^ CKT914, CKT915 or CKT70 = ALL ECUS NO RESP/NOT EQUIP, refer to Module Communications Network (Information Bus). ^ NO RESP/NOT EQUIP for generic electronic module (GEM), go to Pinpoint Test A. ^ SYSTEM PASSED, retrieve and record the continuous Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs), erase the continuous DTCs and carry out self-test diagnostics for the GEM. 6. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to the GEM Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index to continue diagnostics. See: Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures 7. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, refer to the appropriate Vehicle System to continue diagnostics. Additional Testing For additional information on warning chime concerns, refer to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators. For additional information on courtesy lamps/illuminated entry and battery saver concerns, refer to Lighting and Horns. For additional information on Rear interval timer concerns, refer to Wiper and Washer Systems. For additional information on keyless entry concerns, refer to Keyless Entry. For additional information on Power Door Lock concerns, refer to Power Locks. For additional information on anti-theft concerns, refer to Antitheft and Alarm Systems. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8279 Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures DTC Index B1217 - B1325 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8280 DTC Index B1327 - C1962 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8281 Symptom Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8282 Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Pinpoint Tests A1 - A2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8283 A2 - A4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8284 A4 - A5 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8285 Multifunction Electronic Control Modules: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. NOTE: Prior to removal of the GEM, it is necessary to upload module configuration information to a diagnostic tool. This information needs to be downloaded into the new module once installed. 2. Remove the floor console. Refer to Console. 3. Disconnect the GEM electrical connectors. 4. Remove the GEM 1 Pull back the insulation and remove the nuts. 2 Remove the GEM. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Configure the GEM. Refer to Module Communications Network (Information Bus). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Multifunction Electronic Control Modules <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8286 Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Application and ID Keyless Entry Module: Application and ID For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules (General Module). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 8290 Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection Testing and Inspection For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Trailer Lamps: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview 1. Verify the customer concern by operating the trailer tow lights. 2. Verify the exterior lighting system of the vehicle is operating correctly. If not, refer to the appropriate pinpoint test. See: Pinpoint Tests 3. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage. VISUAL INSPECTION CHART Electrical ^ Central Junction Box (CJB) fuse: 21 (10A) - 16 (10A) ^ Connections ^ Circuity ^ Relays ^ Bulb(s) 4. If the fault is not visually evident, determine the symptom and proceed to the Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8303 Symptom Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8304 Trailer Lamps: Pinpoint Tests Connector Circuit Reference Refer to Vehicle/Diagrams for schematic and connector information. Z1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8305 AA1 - AA2 AC1 AC1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8306 AD1 AE1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8307 AE1 - AE2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8308 73III Automotive Meter Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8309 73III Automotive Meter Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair FRONT BUMPER COVER Removal and Installation 1. Remove the six pin-type retainers (three each side). 2. Remove the four front bumper cover bolts (two each side). 3. Remove the two front bumper cover to front fender pin-type retainers (one each side). 4. If equipped, disconnect the fog lamp electrical connectors. 5. Remove the lower front bumper cover bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8319 6. Remove the pin-type retainers. 7. Remove the two upper bolts (one each side) and the front bumper cover. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - When installing, be sure to position the front bumper cover into the bumper slides. - Transfer components as necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Service and Repair Front Bumper Reinforcement: Service and Repair FRONT BUMPER Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front bumper cover. 2. Remove the front bumper. 1 Remove the four front bumper nuts (two each side). 2 Remove the front bumper. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair REAR BUMPER COVER Removal and Installation 1. Remove the six rear splash shield bolts (three each side). 2. Remove the two rear bumper cover to rear quarter panel screws (one each side). 3. Remove the four pin-type retainers. 4. Remove the rear bumper cover. 1 Remove the screws. 2 Remove the bolts and the liftgate alignment bumpers. 3 Remove the rear bumper cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8327 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - When installing, be sure to position the rear bumper cover into the bumper slides. - Transfer components as necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Bumper Reinforcement: Service and Repair REAR BUMPER Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear bumper cover. 2. Remove the rear bumper. 1 Remove the four rear bumper nuts (two each side). 2 Remove the rear bumper. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair COWL PANEL GRILLE Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wiper pivot arms. 1 Remove the nuts. 2 Remove the wiper pivot arms. 2. Remove the driver side cowl grille. 1 Remove the pin-type retainers. 2 Remove the screw caps and screws. 3 Remove the cowl grille. 3. Remove the passenger side cowl grille. 1 Remove the pin-type retainers. 2 Remove the screw caps and screws. 3 Remove the cowl grille. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Position the watershield aside. 3. Remove the screws and the anti-theft guard. 4. Remove the exterior door handle screw. 5. Disconnect the exterior door handle actuating rod. 1 Release the clip. 2 Disconnect the actuating rod. 6. Remove the exterior door handle lock cylinder cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8342 7. Remove the exterior door handle. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the door trim panel. 2. Position the watershield aside. 3. Remove the interior door handle. ^ Release the clip. 4. Remove the door latch cable. 1 Disconnect the cable conduit. 2 Remove the door latch cable. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Adjustments Front Door Hinge: Adjustments HINGE ADJUSTMENT - FRONT DOOR NOTE: Make sure the rear door is within specification before making any adjustments to the front door. Refer to the specification chart. See: Specifications LH and RH sides 1. Remove the fender. 2. Mark the positions of the front door hinges to use as reference points. 3. Loosen the two front door hinge-to-body bolts just enough to permit movement. 4. Remove the A-pillar lower trim panel. 1 Remove the pin-type retainer. 2 Remove the A-pillar lower trim panel. LH side Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Adjustments > Page 8349 5. Position the central junction box (CJB) aside. 1 Remove the nuts. 2 Position the CJB aside. RH side 6. Position the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch bracket aside. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Position the bracket aside. LH and RH sides 7. Loosen the lower door hinge bolt just enough to permit movement. 8. Adjust the front door to specification. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Adjustments > Page 8350 9. Tighten the three front door hinge to body bolts. LH side 10. Install the CJB. 1 Position the CJB. 2 Install the nuts. RH side 11. Install the IFS bracket. 1 Position the bracket. 2 Install the bolts. LH and RH sides Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Adjustments > Page 8351 12. Install the A-pillar lower trim panel. 1 Position the A-pillar lower trim panel. 2 Install the pin-type retainers. 13. Install the fender. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to Open Technical Service Bulletin # 02-9-3 Date: 020513 Doors - Unable to Open Article No. 02-9-3 05/13/02 BODY - UNABLE TO OPEN DOORS FORD: 2001-2002 ESCAPE ISSUE Some vehicles built before 12/15/01 may exhibit door latches that will not open. The outside handle and inside handle can be moved freely but latch remains locked. This may occur if the locked door's outside handle is lifted at the same time as the power lock button on either the key fob or the door panel is pressed. ACTION Refer to the follow Service Procedure to open door(s) and replace door latch per Workshop Manual Section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems. Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 020903A Follow Service Procedure 1.5 Hrs. To Open Door And Replace Door Latch: One Front Door 020903B Follow Service Procedure 2.3 Hrs. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front Doors 020903C Follow Service Procedure 1.8 Hrs. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: One Front Door One Rear Door 020903D Follow Service Procedure 2.8 Hrs. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front Doors One Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8360 Rear Door 020903E Follow Service Procedure 2.2 Hrs. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: One Front Door Both Rear Doors 020903F Follow Service Procedure 0.6 Hr. To Open Door And Replace Door Latch: One Rear Door 020903G Follow Service Procedure 0.9 Hr. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Rear Doors 020903H Follow Service Procedure 3.1 Hrs. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front And Both Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5421813 41 OASIS CODES: 112000 Information Front Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement Use the procedure below titled "Front Door Non-Functional Latch Replacement" to gain access and replace the failed door latch mechanism. Rear Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement Use the procedure below titled "Rear Door Non-Functional Latch Replacement" to gain access and replace the failed door latch mechanism. All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement Use the procedure below titled "All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement" to gain access and replace the failed door latch mechanism. Front Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement REMOVAL WARNING ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. WARNING TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. NOTE TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). NOTE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE INSTALLED UNDER THE SEATS IN THE SIDE AIR BAG TO FLOOR CONNECTOR. WARNING Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8361 THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. ALL VEHICLES NOTE VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE ACCESSED FROM AN ALTERNATE DOOR TO BEGIN PROCEDURE. 1. Move the front seat(s) to center position and the affected door glass completely down. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". 3. Lower the glove compartment by depressing the locking tabs, and disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 4. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover on steering wheel and disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with side air bags: 5. Disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles: 6. Disconnect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the passenger seat safety' belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with side air bags: 8. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles: 9. Connect the battery ground cable. 10. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor nuts. CAUTION USE CARE WHEN HANDLING THE SEAT AND TRACK ASSEMBLY. DROPPING THE ASSEMBLY OR SITTING ON A SEAT NOT SECURED IN THE VEHICLE MAY RESULT IN DAMAGED COMPONENTS. 11. Remove the front seat, front seat-track to floor bolts and remove the seat. 12. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover(s) and bolt(s). 13. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside and remove the upper B-pillar trim panel(s). 14. Remove the front and rear door scuff plate trim panel(s). ^ Remove the pin-type retainers ^ Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel(s) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8362 15. Remove lower B-pillar trim to gain access to screw that is horizontal in door panel and remove screw (Figure 1). NOTE ONE SCREW AT TOP FRONT CORNER OF DOOR PANEL, WHICH TOUCHES DASH, CANNOT BE REMOVED UNTIL DOOR IS OPEN. 16. Remove the screw from front door latch release handle bezel and remove bezel. 17. Remove door handle cup screw. CAUTION DO NOT TO SCRATCH DOOR WHEN POSITIONING ASIDE DOOR PANEL. CAUTION MOVING DOOR PANEL ASIDE MORE THAN 6 INCHES WILL CAUSE DOOR PANEL TO CREASE OR BREAK. 18. To gain access to latch area, peel back water shield and position aside. NOTE TO PREVENT DAMAGING DOOR WHEN ACCESSING LATCH, PROTECT WITH FENDER COVER. NOTE IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO FREE LEVER. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8363 19. From outside vehicle, reach in with a small screwdriver, insert screwdriver into latch assembly at outside base of electrical connector below metal actuating lever and pry up (Figure 2, passenger front door shown, all doors similar). CAUTION WHEN OPENING DOOR BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE DOOR PANEL. 20. Open door, and move glass to the up position. 21. Remove last screw and remove and the door trim panel. 22. Remove front door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems Removal and Installation. INSTALLATION All vehicles: Install new latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems "Front Door Latch Removal and Installation." 1. Install B-pillar trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "B-pillar Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 2. Install door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Front Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 3. Install the seat(s) and install the seat track to floor bolts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft). 4. Install the rear seat track to floor nuts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft). 5. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". Vehicles equipped with side air bags: 6. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector and connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles: 7. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector and connect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8364 8. Remove the special tool from the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector and connect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with air bags: 9. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector and connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles: 10. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector and connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver air bag connector access cover. 11. Remove the special tool from the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector and connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. Close the glove compartment. 12. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". 13.. Prove out the air bag system. For additional information, refer to section 501-20B: Occupant Restraints - Passive - Supplemental Air Bag System Diagnosis and Testing. 14. Check the restraint system for correct operation. Rear Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement REMOVAL 1. Remove rear-seat lower cushion(s). All vehicles: 2. Remove door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 3. Position aside water shield. NOTE IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO FREE LEVER. NOTE USING A SMALL SCREWDRIVER, INSERT SCREWDRIVER INTO LATCH ASSEMBLY AT OUTSIDE BASE OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR BELOW METAL ACTUATING LEVER AND PRY UP (FIGURE 2, PASSENGER FRONT DOOR SHOWN, ALL DOORS SIMILAR). 4. Remove latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Latches and Entry Systems Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation". INSTALLATION 1. Install new latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems "Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation." 2. Install door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 3. Install rear-seat lower cushion(s). All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement REMOVAL 1. Open tailgate to access rear doors. NOTE REAR DOORS MUST BE OPENED BEFORE FRONT DOORS CAN BE OPENED. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8365 2. Remove rear-seat lower cushion(s). All vehicles: 3. Remove rear door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 4. Position watershield aside. NOTE IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO FREE LEVER. NOTE USING A SMALL SCREWDRIVER, INSERT SCREWDRIVER INTO LATCH ASSEMBLY AT OUTSIDE BASE OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR BELOW METAL ACTUATING LEVER AND PRY UP (FIGURE 2, PASSENGER FRONT DOOR SHOWN, ALL DOORS SIMILAR). 5. Remove latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Latches and Entry Systems " Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation". WARNING ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. WARNING NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. WARNING TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. NOTE TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). NOTE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE INSTALLED UNDER THE SEATS IN THE SIDE AIR BAG TO FLOOR CONNECTOR. WARNING THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE ACCESSED FROM AN ALTERNATE DOOR TO BEGIN PROCEDURE. ALL VEHICLES 6. Move the front seat(s) to center position and the affected door glass into the completely down. 7. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". 8. Lower the glove compartment by depressing the locking tabs and disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover on steering wheel and disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with side air bags: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8366 10. Disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles: 11. Disconnect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. 12. Disconnect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with side air bags: 13. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles: 14. Connect the battery ground cable. 15. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor nuts. CAUTION USE CARE WHEN HANDLING THE SEAT AND TRACK ASSEMBLY. DROPPING THE ASSEMBLY OR SITTING ON A SEAT NOT SECURED IN THE VEHICLE MAY RESULT IN DAMAGED COMPONENTS. 16. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor bolts and remove the seat through rear doors. 17. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover(s) and bolt(s). 18. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside and remove the upper B-pillar trim panel(s). 19. Remove the front and rear door scuff plate trim panel(s). ^ Remove the pin-type retainers ^ Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel(s) 20. Remove lower B-pillar trim to gain access to screw that is horizontal in door panel and remove screw (Figure 1). NOTE ONE SCREW AT TOP FRONT CORNER OF DOOR PANEL, WHICH TOUCHES DASH, CANNOT BE REMOVED UNTIL DOOR IS OPEN. 21. Remove the screw from front door latch release handle bezel and remove bezel. 22. Remove door handle cup screw. CAUTION DO NOT SCRATCH DOOR WHEN POSITIONING ASIDE DOOR PANEL. CAUTION MOVING DOOR PANEL ASIDE MORE THAN 6 INCHES WILL CAUSE DOOR PANEL TO CREASE OR BREAK. 23. To gain access to latch area, peel back water shield and position aside. NOTE TO PREVENT DAMAGING DOOR WHEN ACCESSING LATCH, PROTECT WITH FENDER COVER. NOTE IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO FREE LEVER. 24. From outside vehicle, reach in with a small screwdriver, insert screwdriver into latch assembly at outside base of electrical connector below metal actuating fever and pry up (Figure 2, passenger front door shown, all doors similar). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8367 CAUTION WHEN OPENING DOOR BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE DOOR PANEL. 25. Open door(s), and move glass to the up position. 26. Remove last screw and remove and the door trim panel(s). 27. Remove door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems Removal and Installation. INSTALLATION All Vehicles: 1. Install new rear door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems "Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation." 2. Install rear door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 3. Install B-pillar trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "B-pillar Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 4. Install rear-seat lower cushion(s). 5. Install new front door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems "Front Door Latch Removal and Installation." 6. Install front door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Front Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 7. Install the seat(s) and install the seat track to floor bolts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft). 8. Install the rear seat track to floor nuts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft). 9. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". Vehicles equipped with side air bags: 10. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector and connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles: 11. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector and connect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. 12. Remove the special tool from the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector and connect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with air bags: 13. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector and connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles: 14. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector and connect the driver air bag module electrical connector, and install the driver air bag connector access cover. 15. Remove the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector and connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector, and close the glove compartment. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8368 Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". 17. Prove out the air bag system. For additional information, refer to section 501-2DB: Occupant Restraints Passive - Supplemental Air Bag System Diagnosis and Testing. 18. Check the restraint system for correct operation. 19. Close tailgate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to Open Technical Service Bulletin # 02-9-3 Date: 020513 Doors - Unable to Open Article No. 02-9-3 05/13/02 BODY - UNABLE TO OPEN DOORS FORD: 2001-2002 ESCAPE ISSUE Some vehicles built before 12/15/01 may exhibit door latches that will not open. The outside handle and inside handle can be moved freely but latch remains locked. This may occur if the locked door's outside handle is lifted at the same time as the power lock button on either the key fob or the door panel is pressed. ACTION Refer to the follow Service Procedure to open door(s) and replace door latch per Workshop Manual Section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems. Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 020903A Follow Service Procedure 1.5 Hrs. To Open Door And Replace Door Latch: One Front Door 020903B Follow Service Procedure 2.3 Hrs. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front Doors 020903C Follow Service Procedure 1.8 Hrs. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: One Front Door One Rear Door 020903D Follow Service Procedure 2.8 Hrs. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front Doors One Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8374 Rear Door 020903E Follow Service Procedure 2.2 Hrs. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: One Front Door Both Rear Doors 020903F Follow Service Procedure 0.6 Hr. To Open Door And Replace Door Latch: One Rear Door 020903G Follow Service Procedure 0.9 Hr. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Rear Doors 020903H Follow Service Procedure 3.1 Hrs. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front And Both Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5421813 41 OASIS CODES: 112000 Information Front Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement Use the procedure below titled "Front Door Non-Functional Latch Replacement" to gain access and replace the failed door latch mechanism. Rear Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement Use the procedure below titled "Rear Door Non-Functional Latch Replacement" to gain access and replace the failed door latch mechanism. All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement Use the procedure below titled "All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement" to gain access and replace the failed door latch mechanism. Front Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement REMOVAL WARNING ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. WARNING TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. NOTE TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). NOTE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE INSTALLED UNDER THE SEATS IN THE SIDE AIR BAG TO FLOOR CONNECTOR. WARNING Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8375 THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. ALL VEHICLES NOTE VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE ACCESSED FROM AN ALTERNATE DOOR TO BEGIN PROCEDURE. 1. Move the front seat(s) to center position and the affected door glass completely down. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". 3. Lower the glove compartment by depressing the locking tabs, and disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 4. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover on steering wheel and disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with side air bags: 5. Disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles: 6. Disconnect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the passenger seat safety' belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with side air bags: 8. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles: 9. Connect the battery ground cable. 10. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor nuts. CAUTION USE CARE WHEN HANDLING THE SEAT AND TRACK ASSEMBLY. DROPPING THE ASSEMBLY OR SITTING ON A SEAT NOT SECURED IN THE VEHICLE MAY RESULT IN DAMAGED COMPONENTS. 11. Remove the front seat, front seat-track to floor bolts and remove the seat. 12. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover(s) and bolt(s). 13. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside and remove the upper B-pillar trim panel(s). 14. Remove the front and rear door scuff plate trim panel(s). ^ Remove the pin-type retainers ^ Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel(s) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8376 15. Remove lower B-pillar trim to gain access to screw that is horizontal in door panel and remove screw (Figure 1). NOTE ONE SCREW AT TOP FRONT CORNER OF DOOR PANEL, WHICH TOUCHES DASH, CANNOT BE REMOVED UNTIL DOOR IS OPEN. 16. Remove the screw from front door latch release handle bezel and remove bezel. 17. Remove door handle cup screw. CAUTION DO NOT TO SCRATCH DOOR WHEN POSITIONING ASIDE DOOR PANEL. CAUTION MOVING DOOR PANEL ASIDE MORE THAN 6 INCHES WILL CAUSE DOOR PANEL TO CREASE OR BREAK. 18. To gain access to latch area, peel back water shield and position aside. NOTE TO PREVENT DAMAGING DOOR WHEN ACCESSING LATCH, PROTECT WITH FENDER COVER. NOTE IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO FREE LEVER. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8377 19. From outside vehicle, reach in with a small screwdriver, insert screwdriver into latch assembly at outside base of electrical connector below metal actuating lever and pry up (Figure 2, passenger front door shown, all doors similar). CAUTION WHEN OPENING DOOR BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE DOOR PANEL. 20. Open door, and move glass to the up position. 21. Remove last screw and remove and the door trim panel. 22. Remove front door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems Removal and Installation. INSTALLATION All vehicles: Install new latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems "Front Door Latch Removal and Installation." 1. Install B-pillar trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "B-pillar Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 2. Install door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Front Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 3. Install the seat(s) and install the seat track to floor bolts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft). 4. Install the rear seat track to floor nuts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft). 5. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". Vehicles equipped with side air bags: 6. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector and connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles: 7. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector and connect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8378 8. Remove the special tool from the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector and connect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with air bags: 9. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector and connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles: 10. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector and connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver air bag connector access cover. 11. Remove the special tool from the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector and connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. Close the glove compartment. 12. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". 13.. Prove out the air bag system. For additional information, refer to section 501-20B: Occupant Restraints - Passive - Supplemental Air Bag System Diagnosis and Testing. 14. Check the restraint system for correct operation. Rear Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement REMOVAL 1. Remove rear-seat lower cushion(s). All vehicles: 2. Remove door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 3. Position aside water shield. NOTE IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO FREE LEVER. NOTE USING A SMALL SCREWDRIVER, INSERT SCREWDRIVER INTO LATCH ASSEMBLY AT OUTSIDE BASE OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR BELOW METAL ACTUATING LEVER AND PRY UP (FIGURE 2, PASSENGER FRONT DOOR SHOWN, ALL DOORS SIMILAR). 4. Remove latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Latches and Entry Systems Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation". INSTALLATION 1. Install new latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems "Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation." 2. Install door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 3. Install rear-seat lower cushion(s). All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement REMOVAL 1. Open tailgate to access rear doors. NOTE REAR DOORS MUST BE OPENED BEFORE FRONT DOORS CAN BE OPENED. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8379 2. Remove rear-seat lower cushion(s). All vehicles: 3. Remove rear door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 4. Position watershield aside. NOTE IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO FREE LEVER. NOTE USING A SMALL SCREWDRIVER, INSERT SCREWDRIVER INTO LATCH ASSEMBLY AT OUTSIDE BASE OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR BELOW METAL ACTUATING LEVER AND PRY UP (FIGURE 2, PASSENGER FRONT DOOR SHOWN, ALL DOORS SIMILAR). 5. Remove latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Latches and Entry Systems " Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation". WARNING ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. WARNING NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. WARNING TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. NOTE TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). NOTE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE INSTALLED UNDER THE SEATS IN THE SIDE AIR BAG TO FLOOR CONNECTOR. WARNING THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE ACCESSED FROM AN ALTERNATE DOOR TO BEGIN PROCEDURE. ALL VEHICLES 6. Move the front seat(s) to center position and the affected door glass into the completely down. 7. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". 8. Lower the glove compartment by depressing the locking tabs and disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover on steering wheel and disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with side air bags: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8380 10. Disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles: 11. Disconnect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. 12. Disconnect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with side air bags: 13. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles: 14. Connect the battery ground cable. 15. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor nuts. CAUTION USE CARE WHEN HANDLING THE SEAT AND TRACK ASSEMBLY. DROPPING THE ASSEMBLY OR SITTING ON A SEAT NOT SECURED IN THE VEHICLE MAY RESULT IN DAMAGED COMPONENTS. 16. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor bolts and remove the seat through rear doors. 17. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover(s) and bolt(s). 18. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside and remove the upper B-pillar trim panel(s). 19. Remove the front and rear door scuff plate trim panel(s). ^ Remove the pin-type retainers ^ Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel(s) 20. Remove lower B-pillar trim to gain access to screw that is horizontal in door panel and remove screw (Figure 1). NOTE ONE SCREW AT TOP FRONT CORNER OF DOOR PANEL, WHICH TOUCHES DASH, CANNOT BE REMOVED UNTIL DOOR IS OPEN. 21. Remove the screw from front door latch release handle bezel and remove bezel. 22. Remove door handle cup screw. CAUTION DO NOT SCRATCH DOOR WHEN POSITIONING ASIDE DOOR PANEL. CAUTION MOVING DOOR PANEL ASIDE MORE THAN 6 INCHES WILL CAUSE DOOR PANEL TO CREASE OR BREAK. 23. To gain access to latch area, peel back water shield and position aside. NOTE TO PREVENT DAMAGING DOOR WHEN ACCESSING LATCH, PROTECT WITH FENDER COVER. NOTE IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO FREE LEVER. 24. From outside vehicle, reach in with a small screwdriver, insert screwdriver into latch assembly at outside base of electrical connector below metal actuating fever and pry up (Figure 2, passenger front door shown, all doors similar). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8381 CAUTION WHEN OPENING DOOR BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE DOOR PANEL. 25. Open door(s), and move glass to the up position. 26. Remove last screw and remove and the door trim panel(s). 27. Remove door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems Removal and Installation. INSTALLATION All Vehicles: 1. Install new rear door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems "Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation." 2. Install rear door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 3. Install B-pillar trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "B-pillar Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 4. Install rear-seat lower cushion(s). 5. Install new front door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems "Front Door Latch Removal and Installation." 6. Install front door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Front Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 7. Install the seat(s) and install the seat track to floor bolts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft). 8. Install the rear seat track to floor nuts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft). 9. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". Vehicles equipped with side air bags: 10. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector and connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles: 11. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector and connect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. 12. Remove the special tool from the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector and connect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with air bags: 13. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector and connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles: 14. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector and connect the driver air bag module electrical connector, and install the driver air bag connector access cover. 15. Remove the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector and connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector, and close the glove compartment. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8382 Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". 17. Prove out the air bag system. For additional information, refer to section 501-2DB: Occupant Restraints Passive - Supplemental Air Bag System Diagnosis and Testing. 18. Check the restraint system for correct operation. 19. Close tailgate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 8383 Front Door Latch: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 02-9-3 Date: 020513 Doors - Unable to Open Article No. 02-9-3 05/13/02 BODY - UNABLE TO OPEN DOORS FORD: 2001-2002 ESCAPE ISSUE Some vehicles built before 12/15/01 may exhibit door latches that will not open. The outside handle and inside handle can be moved freely but latch remains locked. This may occur if the locked door's outside handle is lifted at the same time as the power lock button on either the key fob or the door panel is pressed. ACTION Refer to the follow Service Procedure to open door(s) and replace door latch per Workshop Manual Section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems. Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 020903A Follow Service Procedure 1.5 Hrs. To Open Door And Replace Door Latch: One Front Door 020903B Follow Service Procedure 2.3 Hrs. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front Doors 020903C Follow Service Procedure 1.8 Hrs. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: One Front Door One Rear Door 020903D Follow Service Procedure 2.8 Hrs. To Open Doors And Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 8384 Replace Door Latches: Both Front Doors One Rear Door 020903E Follow Service Procedure 2.2 Hrs. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: One Front Door Both Rear Doors 020903F Follow Service Procedure 0.6 Hr. To Open Door And Replace Door Latch: One Rear Door 020903G Follow Service Procedure 0.9 Hr. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Rear Doors 020903H Follow Service Procedure 3.1 Hrs. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front And Both Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5421813 41 OASIS CODES: 112000 Information Front Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement Use the procedure below titled "Front Door Non-Functional Latch Replacement" to gain access and replace the failed door latch mechanism. Rear Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement Use the procedure below titled "Rear Door Non-Functional Latch Replacement" to gain access and replace the failed door latch mechanism. All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement Use the procedure below titled "All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement" to gain access and replace the failed door latch mechanism. Front Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement REMOVAL WARNING ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. WARNING TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. NOTE TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). NOTE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE INSTALLED UNDER THE SEATS IN THE SIDE AIR BAG TO FLOOR CONNECTOR. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 8385 WARNING THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. ALL VEHICLES NOTE VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE ACCESSED FROM AN ALTERNATE DOOR TO BEGIN PROCEDURE. 1. Move the front seat(s) to center position and the affected door glass completely down. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". 3. Lower the glove compartment by depressing the locking tabs, and disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 4. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover on steering wheel and disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with side air bags: 5. Disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles: 6. Disconnect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the passenger seat safety' belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with side air bags: 8. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles: 9. Connect the battery ground cable. 10. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor nuts. CAUTION USE CARE WHEN HANDLING THE SEAT AND TRACK ASSEMBLY. DROPPING THE ASSEMBLY OR SITTING ON A SEAT NOT SECURED IN THE VEHICLE MAY RESULT IN DAMAGED COMPONENTS. 11. Remove the front seat, front seat-track to floor bolts and remove the seat. 12. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover(s) and bolt(s). 13. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside and remove the upper B-pillar trim panel(s). 14. Remove the front and rear door scuff plate trim panel(s). ^ Remove the pin-type retainers ^ Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel(s) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 8386 15. Remove lower B-pillar trim to gain access to screw that is horizontal in door panel and remove screw (Figure 1). NOTE ONE SCREW AT TOP FRONT CORNER OF DOOR PANEL, WHICH TOUCHES DASH, CANNOT BE REMOVED UNTIL DOOR IS OPEN. 16. Remove the screw from front door latch release handle bezel and remove bezel. 17. Remove door handle cup screw. CAUTION DO NOT TO SCRATCH DOOR WHEN POSITIONING ASIDE DOOR PANEL. CAUTION MOVING DOOR PANEL ASIDE MORE THAN 6 INCHES WILL CAUSE DOOR PANEL TO CREASE OR BREAK. 18. To gain access to latch area, peel back water shield and position aside. NOTE TO PREVENT DAMAGING DOOR WHEN ACCESSING LATCH, PROTECT WITH FENDER COVER. NOTE IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO FREE LEVER. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 8387 19. From outside vehicle, reach in with a small screwdriver, insert screwdriver into latch assembly at outside base of electrical connector below metal actuating lever and pry up (Figure 2, passenger front door shown, all doors similar). CAUTION WHEN OPENING DOOR BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE DOOR PANEL. 20. Open door, and move glass to the up position. 21. Remove last screw and remove and the door trim panel. 22. Remove front door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems Removal and Installation. INSTALLATION All vehicles: Install new latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems "Front Door Latch Removal and Installation." 1. Install B-pillar trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "B-pillar Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 2. Install door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Front Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 3. Install the seat(s) and install the seat track to floor bolts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft). 4. Install the rear seat track to floor nuts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft). 5. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". Vehicles equipped with side air bags: 6. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector and connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles: 7. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector and connect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 8388 8. Remove the special tool from the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector and connect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with air bags: 9. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector and connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles: 10. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector and connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver air bag connector access cover. 11. Remove the special tool from the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector and connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. Close the glove compartment. 12. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". 13.. Prove out the air bag system. For additional information, refer to section 501-20B: Occupant Restraints - Passive - Supplemental Air Bag System Diagnosis and Testing. 14. Check the restraint system for correct operation. Rear Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement REMOVAL 1. Remove rear-seat lower cushion(s). All vehicles: 2. Remove door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 3. Position aside water shield. NOTE IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO FREE LEVER. NOTE USING A SMALL SCREWDRIVER, INSERT SCREWDRIVER INTO LATCH ASSEMBLY AT OUTSIDE BASE OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR BELOW METAL ACTUATING LEVER AND PRY UP (FIGURE 2, PASSENGER FRONT DOOR SHOWN, ALL DOORS SIMILAR). 4. Remove latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Latches and Entry Systems Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation". INSTALLATION 1. Install new latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems "Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation." 2. Install door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 3. Install rear-seat lower cushion(s). All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement REMOVAL 1. Open tailgate to access rear doors. NOTE REAR DOORS MUST BE OPENED BEFORE FRONT DOORS CAN BE OPENED. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 8389 2. Remove rear-seat lower cushion(s). All vehicles: 3. Remove rear door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 4. Position watershield aside. NOTE IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO FREE LEVER. NOTE USING A SMALL SCREWDRIVER, INSERT SCREWDRIVER INTO LATCH ASSEMBLY AT OUTSIDE BASE OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR BELOW METAL ACTUATING LEVER AND PRY UP (FIGURE 2, PASSENGER FRONT DOOR SHOWN, ALL DOORS SIMILAR). 5. Remove latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Latches and Entry Systems " Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation". WARNING ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. WARNING NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. WARNING TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. NOTE TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). NOTE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE INSTALLED UNDER THE SEATS IN THE SIDE AIR BAG TO FLOOR CONNECTOR. WARNING THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE ACCESSED FROM AN ALTERNATE DOOR TO BEGIN PROCEDURE. ALL VEHICLES 6. Move the front seat(s) to center position and the affected door glass into the completely down. 7. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". 8. Lower the glove compartment by depressing the locking tabs and disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover on steering wheel and disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with side air bags: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 8390 10. Disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles: 11. Disconnect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. 12. Disconnect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with side air bags: 13. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles: 14. Connect the battery ground cable. 15. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor nuts. CAUTION USE CARE WHEN HANDLING THE SEAT AND TRACK ASSEMBLY. DROPPING THE ASSEMBLY OR SITTING ON A SEAT NOT SECURED IN THE VEHICLE MAY RESULT IN DAMAGED COMPONENTS. 16. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor bolts and remove the seat through rear doors. 17. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover(s) and bolt(s). 18. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside and remove the upper B-pillar trim panel(s). 19. Remove the front and rear door scuff plate trim panel(s). ^ Remove the pin-type retainers ^ Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel(s) 20. Remove lower B-pillar trim to gain access to screw that is horizontal in door panel and remove screw (Figure 1). NOTE ONE SCREW AT TOP FRONT CORNER OF DOOR PANEL, WHICH TOUCHES DASH, CANNOT BE REMOVED UNTIL DOOR IS OPEN. 21. Remove the screw from front door latch release handle bezel and remove bezel. 22. Remove door handle cup screw. CAUTION DO NOT SCRATCH DOOR WHEN POSITIONING ASIDE DOOR PANEL. CAUTION MOVING DOOR PANEL ASIDE MORE THAN 6 INCHES WILL CAUSE DOOR PANEL TO CREASE OR BREAK. 23. To gain access to latch area, peel back water shield and position aside. NOTE TO PREVENT DAMAGING DOOR WHEN ACCESSING LATCH, PROTECT WITH FENDER COVER. NOTE IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO FREE LEVER. 24. From outside vehicle, reach in with a small screwdriver, insert screwdriver into latch assembly at outside base of electrical connector below metal actuating fever and pry up (Figure 2, passenger front door shown, all doors similar). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 8391 CAUTION WHEN OPENING DOOR BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE DOOR PANEL. 25. Open door(s), and move glass to the up position. 26. Remove last screw and remove and the door trim panel(s). 27. Remove door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems Removal and Installation. INSTALLATION All Vehicles: 1. Install new rear door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems "Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation." 2. Install rear door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 3. Install B-pillar trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "B-pillar Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 4. Install rear-seat lower cushion(s). 5. Install new front door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems "Front Door Latch Removal and Installation." 6. Install front door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Front Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 7. Install the seat(s) and install the seat track to floor bolts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft). 8. Install the rear seat track to floor nuts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft). 9. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". Vehicles equipped with side air bags: 10. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector and connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles: 11. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector and connect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. 12. Remove the special tool from the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector and connect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with air bags: 13. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector and connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles: 14. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector and connect the driver air bag module electrical connector, and install the driver air bag connector access cover. 15. Remove the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector and connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector, and close the glove compartment. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 8392 Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". 17. Prove out the air bag system. For additional information, refer to section 501-2DB: Occupant Restraints Passive - Supplemental Air Bag System Diagnosis and Testing. 18. Check the restraint system for correct operation. 19. Close tailgate. Technical Service Bulletin # 02-9-3 Date: 020513 Doors - Unable to Open Article No. 02-9-3 05/13/02 BODY - UNABLE TO OPEN DOORS FORD: 2001-2002 ESCAPE ISSUE Some vehicles built before 12/15/01 may exhibit door latches that will not open. The outside handle and inside handle can be moved freely but latch remains locked. This may occur if the locked door's outside handle is lifted at the same time as the power lock button on either the key fob or the door panel is pressed. ACTION Refer to the follow Service Procedure to open door(s) and replace door latch per Workshop Manual Section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems. Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 020903A Follow Service Procedure 1.5 Hrs. To Open Door And Replace Door Latch: One Front Door 020903B Follow Service Procedure 2.3 Hrs. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front Doors 020903C Follow Service Procedure 1.8 Hrs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 8393 To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: One Front Door One Rear Door 020903D Follow Service Procedure 2.8 Hrs. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front Doors One Rear Door 020903E Follow Service Procedure 2.2 Hrs. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: One Front Door Both Rear Doors 020903F Follow Service Procedure 0.6 Hr. To Open Door And Replace Door Latch: One Rear Door 020903G Follow Service Procedure 0.9 Hr. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Rear Doors 020903H Follow Service Procedure 3.1 Hrs. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front And Both Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5421813 41 OASIS CODES: 112000 Information Front Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement Use the procedure below titled "Front Door Non-Functional Latch Replacement" to gain access and replace the failed door latch mechanism. Rear Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement Use the procedure below titled "Rear Door Non-Functional Latch Replacement" to gain access and replace the failed door latch mechanism. All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement Use the procedure below titled "All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement" to gain access and replace the failed door latch mechanism. Front Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement REMOVAL WARNING ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. WARNING TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 8394 NOTE TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). NOTE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE INSTALLED UNDER THE SEATS IN THE SIDE AIR BAG TO FLOOR CONNECTOR. WARNING THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. ALL VEHICLES NOTE VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE ACCESSED FROM AN ALTERNATE DOOR TO BEGIN PROCEDURE. 1. Move the front seat(s) to center position and the affected door glass completely down. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". 3. Lower the glove compartment by depressing the locking tabs, and disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 4. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover on steering wheel and disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with side air bags: 5. Disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles: 6. Disconnect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the passenger seat safety' belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with side air bags: 8. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles: 9. Connect the battery ground cable. 10. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor nuts. CAUTION USE CARE WHEN HANDLING THE SEAT AND TRACK ASSEMBLY. DROPPING THE ASSEMBLY OR SITTING ON A SEAT NOT SECURED IN THE VEHICLE MAY RESULT IN DAMAGED COMPONENTS. 11. Remove the front seat, front seat-track to floor bolts and remove the seat. 12. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover(s) and bolt(s). 13. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside and remove the upper B-pillar trim panel(s). 14. Remove the front and rear door scuff plate trim panel(s). ^ Remove the pin-type retainers Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 8395 ^ Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel(s) 15. Remove lower B-pillar trim to gain access to screw that is horizontal in door panel and remove screw (Figure 1). NOTE ONE SCREW AT TOP FRONT CORNER OF DOOR PANEL, WHICH TOUCHES DASH, CANNOT BE REMOVED UNTIL DOOR IS OPEN. 16. Remove the screw from front door latch release handle bezel and remove bezel. 17. Remove door handle cup screw. CAUTION DO NOT TO SCRATCH DOOR WHEN POSITIONING ASIDE DOOR PANEL. CAUTION MOVING DOOR PANEL ASIDE MORE THAN 6 INCHES WILL CAUSE DOOR PANEL TO CREASE OR BREAK. 18. To gain access to latch area, peel back water shield and position aside. NOTE TO PREVENT DAMAGING DOOR WHEN ACCESSING LATCH, PROTECT WITH FENDER COVER. NOTE IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO FREE LEVER. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 8396 19. From outside vehicle, reach in with a small screwdriver, insert screwdriver into latch assembly at outside base of electrical connector below metal actuating lever and pry up (Figure 2, passenger front door shown, all doors similar). CAUTION WHEN OPENING DOOR BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE DOOR PANEL. 20. Open door, and move glass to the up position. 21. Remove last screw and remove and the door trim panel. 22. Remove front door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems Removal and Installation. INSTALLATION All vehicles: Install new latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems "Front Door Latch Removal and Installation." 1. Install B-pillar trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "B-pillar Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 2. Install door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Front Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 3. Install the seat(s) and install the seat track to floor bolts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft). 4. Install the rear seat track to floor nuts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft). 5. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". Vehicles equipped with side air bags: 6. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector and connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles: 7. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector and connect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 8397 8. Remove the special tool from the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector and connect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with air bags: 9. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector and connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles: 10. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector and connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver air bag connector access cover. 11. Remove the special tool from the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector and connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. Close the glove compartment. 12. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". 13.. Prove out the air bag system. For additional information, refer to section 501-20B: Occupant Restraints - Passive - Supplemental Air Bag System Diagnosis and Testing. 14. Check the restraint system for correct operation. Rear Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement REMOVAL 1. Remove rear-seat lower cushion(s). All vehicles: 2. Remove door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 3. Position aside water shield. NOTE IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO FREE LEVER. NOTE USING A SMALL SCREWDRIVER, INSERT SCREWDRIVER INTO LATCH ASSEMBLY AT OUTSIDE BASE OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR BELOW METAL ACTUATING LEVER AND PRY UP (FIGURE 2, PASSENGER FRONT DOOR SHOWN, ALL DOORS SIMILAR). 4. Remove latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Latches and Entry Systems Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation". INSTALLATION 1. Install new latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems "Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation." 2. Install door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 3. Install rear-seat lower cushion(s). All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement REMOVAL 1. Open tailgate to access rear doors. NOTE REAR DOORS MUST BE OPENED BEFORE FRONT DOORS CAN BE OPENED. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 8398 2. Remove rear-seat lower cushion(s). All vehicles: 3. Remove rear door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 4. Position watershield aside. NOTE IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO FREE LEVER. NOTE USING A SMALL SCREWDRIVER, INSERT SCREWDRIVER INTO LATCH ASSEMBLY AT OUTSIDE BASE OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR BELOW METAL ACTUATING LEVER AND PRY UP (FIGURE 2, PASSENGER FRONT DOOR SHOWN, ALL DOORS SIMILAR). 5. Remove latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Latches and Entry Systems " Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation". WARNING ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. WARNING NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. WARNING TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. NOTE TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). NOTE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE INSTALLED UNDER THE SEATS IN THE SIDE AIR BAG TO FLOOR CONNECTOR. WARNING THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE ACCESSED FROM AN ALTERNATE DOOR TO BEGIN PROCEDURE. ALL VEHICLES 6. Move the front seat(s) to center position and the affected door glass into the completely down. 7. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". 8. Lower the glove compartment by depressing the locking tabs and disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover on steering wheel and disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with side air bags: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 8399 10. Disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles: 11. Disconnect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. 12. Disconnect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with side air bags: 13. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles: 14. Connect the battery ground cable. 15. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor nuts. CAUTION USE CARE WHEN HANDLING THE SEAT AND TRACK ASSEMBLY. DROPPING THE ASSEMBLY OR SITTING ON A SEAT NOT SECURED IN THE VEHICLE MAY RESULT IN DAMAGED COMPONENTS. 16. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor bolts and remove the seat through rear doors. 17. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover(s) and bolt(s). 18. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside and remove the upper B-pillar trim panel(s). 19. Remove the front and rear door scuff plate trim panel(s). ^ Remove the pin-type retainers ^ Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel(s) 20. Remove lower B-pillar trim to gain access to screw that is horizontal in door panel and remove screw (Figure 1). NOTE ONE SCREW AT TOP FRONT CORNER OF DOOR PANEL, WHICH TOUCHES DASH, CANNOT BE REMOVED UNTIL DOOR IS OPEN. 21. Remove the screw from front door latch release handle bezel and remove bezel. 22. Remove door handle cup screw. CAUTION DO NOT SCRATCH DOOR WHEN POSITIONING ASIDE DOOR PANEL. CAUTION MOVING DOOR PANEL ASIDE MORE THAN 6 INCHES WILL CAUSE DOOR PANEL TO CREASE OR BREAK. 23. To gain access to latch area, peel back water shield and position aside. NOTE TO PREVENT DAMAGING DOOR WHEN ACCESSING LATCH, PROTECT WITH FENDER COVER. NOTE IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO FREE LEVER. 24. From outside vehicle, reach in with a small screwdriver, insert screwdriver into latch assembly at outside base of electrical connector below metal actuating fever and pry up (Figure 2, passenger front door shown, all doors similar). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 8400 CAUTION WHEN OPENING DOOR BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE DOOR PANEL. 25. Open door(s), and move glass to the up position. 26. Remove last screw and remove and the door trim panel(s). 27. Remove door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems Removal and Installation. INSTALLATION All Vehicles: 1. Install new rear door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems "Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation." 2. Install rear door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 3. Install B-pillar trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "B-pillar Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 4. Install rear-seat lower cushion(s). 5. Install new front door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems "Front Door Latch Removal and Installation." 6. Install front door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Front Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 7. Install the seat(s) and install the seat track to floor bolts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft). 8. Install the rear seat track to floor nuts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft). 9. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". Vehicles equipped with side air bags: 10. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector and connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles: 11. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector and connect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. 12. Remove the special tool from the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector and connect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with air bags: 13. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector and connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles: 14. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector and connect the driver air bag module electrical connector, and install the driver air bag connector access cover. 15. Remove the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector and connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector, and close the glove compartment. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Latch: > Page 8401 Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". 17. Prove out the air bag system. For additional information, refer to section 501-2DB: Occupant Restraints Passive - Supplemental Air Bag System Diagnosis and Testing. 18. Check the restraint system for correct operation. 19. Close tailgate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8402 Front Door Latch: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Position the watershield aside. 3. Position the interior door handle aside. ^ Release the clip. 4. Disconnect the exterior door handle actuating rod. 1 Release the two clips. 2 Disconnect the rod. 5. Remove the screws and the anti-theft guard. 6. Remove and discard the door latch screws. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8403 7. Disconnect the door lock cylinder actuating rod. 1 Open the clip. 2 Disconnect the rod. 8. Disconnect the door latch electrical connector. 1 Release the clip. 2 Disconnect the electrical connector. 9. Remove the front door latch. 10. Disconnect the interior door handle cable. 1 Release the cable conduit. 2 Disconnect the cable. 11. Remove the exterior door handle actuating rod. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Panel: Service and Repair FRONT DOOR TRIM PANEL Removal and Installation Vehicles with power windows 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the front door window control switch. - Disconnect the electrical connector. Vehicles with manual windows 3. Remove the front door manual window regulator handle. 1 Release the clip. 2 Remove the front door manual window regulator handle. All vehicles 4. Remove the front door latch release handle bezel. 1 Remove the screw. 2 Remove the front door latch release handle bezel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8407 5. Remove the door handle cup screw. 6. Remove the front door trim panel. 1 Remove the screws. 2 Remove the front door trim panel. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Striker > System Information > Adjustments Front Door Striker: Adjustments STRIKER ADJUSTMENT NOTE: Before adjusting the door latch striker plate, verify that the door can be closed easily and fits tightly. 1. Loosen the door latch striker bolts. 2. Reposition the door latch striker plate from side to side or up and down as necessary. 3. Tighten the door latch striker plate bolts. 4. NOTE: The rear door is shown, the front door is similar. Check the adjustment. Repeat the procedure as necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the exterior mirror. 2. Remove the screw and the door trim panel bracket. 3. Position the water shield aside. 4. Remove the front door interior glass weatherstrip. 5. Remove the front door exterior belt line moulding. 6. Lower the front door window glass to gain access to the screws. 7. Remove the front door window glass screws. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8414 8. Remove the front door window glass. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 8419 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair REMOVAL All vehicles 1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Remove the screw and the front door trim panel bracket. 3. Position the water shield aside. 4. Lower the front door window glass to gain access to the screws. 5. Remove the front door window glass screws. 6. Support the front door window glass in the full up position. Vehicles with power windows 7. Disconnect the front door power window regulator motor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8423 8. Remove the front door power window regulator assembly. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Remove the nuts. Vehicles with manual windows 9. Remove the front door window regulator assembly. 1 Remove the bolt. 2 Remove the nuts. INSTALLATION All vehicles 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Cycle the door window glass to make sure of correct door window glass engagement. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear door trim panel. 2. Position the watershield aside. 3. Disconnect the door latch electrical connector. 1 Release the clip. 2 Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Position the rear door glass top run aside. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Position the rear door glass top run aside. 5. Disconnect the exterior door handle actuating rod. 1 Open the clip. 2 Disconnect the actuating rod. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8429 6. Remove the exterior door handle screws. 7. Remove the exterior door handle. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the door trim panel. 2. Position the watershield aside. 3. Remove the interior door handle. ^ Release the clip. 4. Remove the door latch cable. 1 Disconnect the cable conduit. 2 Remove the door latch cable. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Adjustments Rear Door Hinge: Adjustments HINGE ADJUSTMENT - REAR DOOR 1. Remove the front seat safety belt retractor. 2. Mark the positions of the rear door hinges to use as reference points. 3. Loosen the rear door hinge-to-body bolts just enough to permit movement. 4. Loosen the two rear door hinge-to-body bolts just enough to permit movement. 5. Adjust the rear door to specification. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Adjustments > Page 8436 6. Tighten the four rear door hinge-to-body bolts. 7. Check the front door adjustments. 8. Install the front seat safety belt retractor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to Open Technical Service Bulletin # 02-9-3 Date: 020513 Doors - Unable to Open Article No. 02-9-3 05/13/02 BODY - UNABLE TO OPEN DOORS FORD: 2001-2002 ESCAPE ISSUE Some vehicles built before 12/15/01 may exhibit door latches that will not open. The outside handle and inside handle can be moved freely but latch remains locked. This may occur if the locked door's outside handle is lifted at the same time as the power lock button on either the key fob or the door panel is pressed. ACTION Refer to the follow Service Procedure to open door(s) and replace door latch per Workshop Manual Section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems. Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 020903A Follow Service Procedure 1.5 Hrs. To Open Door And Replace Door Latch: One Front Door 020903B Follow Service Procedure 2.3 Hrs. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front Doors 020903C Follow Service Procedure 1.8 Hrs. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: One Front Door One Rear Door 020903D Follow Service Procedure 2.8 Hrs. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front Doors One Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8445 Rear Door 020903E Follow Service Procedure 2.2 Hrs. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: One Front Door Both Rear Doors 020903F Follow Service Procedure 0.6 Hr. To Open Door And Replace Door Latch: One Rear Door 020903G Follow Service Procedure 0.9 Hr. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Rear Doors 020903H Follow Service Procedure 3.1 Hrs. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front And Both Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5421813 41 OASIS CODES: 112000 Information Front Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement Use the procedure below titled "Front Door Non-Functional Latch Replacement" to gain access and replace the failed door latch mechanism. Rear Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement Use the procedure below titled "Rear Door Non-Functional Latch Replacement" to gain access and replace the failed door latch mechanism. All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement Use the procedure below titled "All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement" to gain access and replace the failed door latch mechanism. Front Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement REMOVAL WARNING ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. WARNING TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. NOTE TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). NOTE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE INSTALLED UNDER THE SEATS IN THE SIDE AIR BAG TO FLOOR CONNECTOR. WARNING Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8446 THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. ALL VEHICLES NOTE VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE ACCESSED FROM AN ALTERNATE DOOR TO BEGIN PROCEDURE. 1. Move the front seat(s) to center position and the affected door glass completely down. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". 3. Lower the glove compartment by depressing the locking tabs, and disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 4. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover on steering wheel and disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with side air bags: 5. Disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles: 6. Disconnect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the passenger seat safety' belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with side air bags: 8. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles: 9. Connect the battery ground cable. 10. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor nuts. CAUTION USE CARE WHEN HANDLING THE SEAT AND TRACK ASSEMBLY. DROPPING THE ASSEMBLY OR SITTING ON A SEAT NOT SECURED IN THE VEHICLE MAY RESULT IN DAMAGED COMPONENTS. 11. Remove the front seat, front seat-track to floor bolts and remove the seat. 12. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover(s) and bolt(s). 13. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside and remove the upper B-pillar trim panel(s). 14. Remove the front and rear door scuff plate trim panel(s). ^ Remove the pin-type retainers ^ Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel(s) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8447 15. Remove lower B-pillar trim to gain access to screw that is horizontal in door panel and remove screw (Figure 1). NOTE ONE SCREW AT TOP FRONT CORNER OF DOOR PANEL, WHICH TOUCHES DASH, CANNOT BE REMOVED UNTIL DOOR IS OPEN. 16. Remove the screw from front door latch release handle bezel and remove bezel. 17. Remove door handle cup screw. CAUTION DO NOT TO SCRATCH DOOR WHEN POSITIONING ASIDE DOOR PANEL. CAUTION MOVING DOOR PANEL ASIDE MORE THAN 6 INCHES WILL CAUSE DOOR PANEL TO CREASE OR BREAK. 18. To gain access to latch area, peel back water shield and position aside. NOTE TO PREVENT DAMAGING DOOR WHEN ACCESSING LATCH, PROTECT WITH FENDER COVER. NOTE IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO FREE LEVER. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8448 19. From outside vehicle, reach in with a small screwdriver, insert screwdriver into latch assembly at outside base of electrical connector below metal actuating lever and pry up (Figure 2, passenger front door shown, all doors similar). CAUTION WHEN OPENING DOOR BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE DOOR PANEL. 20. Open door, and move glass to the up position. 21. Remove last screw and remove and the door trim panel. 22. Remove front door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems Removal and Installation. INSTALLATION All vehicles: Install new latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems "Front Door Latch Removal and Installation." 1. Install B-pillar trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "B-pillar Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 2. Install door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Front Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 3. Install the seat(s) and install the seat track to floor bolts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft). 4. Install the rear seat track to floor nuts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft). 5. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". Vehicles equipped with side air bags: 6. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector and connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles: 7. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector and connect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8449 8. Remove the special tool from the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector and connect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with air bags: 9. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector and connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles: 10. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector and connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver air bag connector access cover. 11. Remove the special tool from the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector and connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. Close the glove compartment. 12. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". 13.. Prove out the air bag system. For additional information, refer to section 501-20B: Occupant Restraints - Passive - Supplemental Air Bag System Diagnosis and Testing. 14. Check the restraint system for correct operation. Rear Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement REMOVAL 1. Remove rear-seat lower cushion(s). All vehicles: 2. Remove door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 3. Position aside water shield. NOTE IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO FREE LEVER. NOTE USING A SMALL SCREWDRIVER, INSERT SCREWDRIVER INTO LATCH ASSEMBLY AT OUTSIDE BASE OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR BELOW METAL ACTUATING LEVER AND PRY UP (FIGURE 2, PASSENGER FRONT DOOR SHOWN, ALL DOORS SIMILAR). 4. Remove latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Latches and Entry Systems Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation". INSTALLATION 1. Install new latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems "Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation." 2. Install door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 3. Install rear-seat lower cushion(s). All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement REMOVAL 1. Open tailgate to access rear doors. NOTE REAR DOORS MUST BE OPENED BEFORE FRONT DOORS CAN BE OPENED. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8450 2. Remove rear-seat lower cushion(s). All vehicles: 3. Remove rear door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 4. Position watershield aside. NOTE IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO FREE LEVER. NOTE USING A SMALL SCREWDRIVER, INSERT SCREWDRIVER INTO LATCH ASSEMBLY AT OUTSIDE BASE OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR BELOW METAL ACTUATING LEVER AND PRY UP (FIGURE 2, PASSENGER FRONT DOOR SHOWN, ALL DOORS SIMILAR). 5. Remove latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Latches and Entry Systems " Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation". WARNING ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. WARNING NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. WARNING TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. NOTE TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). NOTE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE INSTALLED UNDER THE SEATS IN THE SIDE AIR BAG TO FLOOR CONNECTOR. WARNING THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE ACCESSED FROM AN ALTERNATE DOOR TO BEGIN PROCEDURE. ALL VEHICLES 6. Move the front seat(s) to center position and the affected door glass into the completely down. 7. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". 8. Lower the glove compartment by depressing the locking tabs and disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover on steering wheel and disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with side air bags: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8451 10. Disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles: 11. Disconnect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. 12. Disconnect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with side air bags: 13. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles: 14. Connect the battery ground cable. 15. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor nuts. CAUTION USE CARE WHEN HANDLING THE SEAT AND TRACK ASSEMBLY. DROPPING THE ASSEMBLY OR SITTING ON A SEAT NOT SECURED IN THE VEHICLE MAY RESULT IN DAMAGED COMPONENTS. 16. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor bolts and remove the seat through rear doors. 17. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover(s) and bolt(s). 18. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside and remove the upper B-pillar trim panel(s). 19. Remove the front and rear door scuff plate trim panel(s). ^ Remove the pin-type retainers ^ Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel(s) 20. Remove lower B-pillar trim to gain access to screw that is horizontal in door panel and remove screw (Figure 1). NOTE ONE SCREW AT TOP FRONT CORNER OF DOOR PANEL, WHICH TOUCHES DASH, CANNOT BE REMOVED UNTIL DOOR IS OPEN. 21. Remove the screw from front door latch release handle bezel and remove bezel. 22. Remove door handle cup screw. CAUTION DO NOT SCRATCH DOOR WHEN POSITIONING ASIDE DOOR PANEL. CAUTION MOVING DOOR PANEL ASIDE MORE THAN 6 INCHES WILL CAUSE DOOR PANEL TO CREASE OR BREAK. 23. To gain access to latch area, peel back water shield and position aside. NOTE TO PREVENT DAMAGING DOOR WHEN ACCESSING LATCH, PROTECT WITH FENDER COVER. NOTE IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO FREE LEVER. 24. From outside vehicle, reach in with a small screwdriver, insert screwdriver into latch assembly at outside base of electrical connector below metal actuating fever and pry up (Figure 2, passenger front door shown, all doors similar). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8452 CAUTION WHEN OPENING DOOR BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE DOOR PANEL. 25. Open door(s), and move glass to the up position. 26. Remove last screw and remove and the door trim panel(s). 27. Remove door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems Removal and Installation. INSTALLATION All Vehicles: 1. Install new rear door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems "Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation." 2. Install rear door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 3. Install B-pillar trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "B-pillar Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 4. Install rear-seat lower cushion(s). 5. Install new front door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems "Front Door Latch Removal and Installation." 6. Install front door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Front Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 7. Install the seat(s) and install the seat track to floor bolts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft). 8. Install the rear seat track to floor nuts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft). 9. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". Vehicles equipped with side air bags: 10. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector and connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles: 11. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector and connect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. 12. Remove the special tool from the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector and connect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with air bags: 13. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector and connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles: 14. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector and connect the driver air bag module electrical connector, and install the driver air bag connector access cover. 15. Remove the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector and connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector, and close the glove compartment. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8453 Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". 17. Prove out the air bag system. For additional information, refer to section 501-2DB: Occupant Restraints Passive - Supplemental Air Bag System Diagnosis and Testing. 18. Check the restraint system for correct operation. 19. Close tailgate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to Open Technical Service Bulletin # 02-9-3 Date: 020513 Doors - Unable to Open Article No. 02-9-3 05/13/02 BODY - UNABLE TO OPEN DOORS FORD: 2001-2002 ESCAPE ISSUE Some vehicles built before 12/15/01 may exhibit door latches that will not open. The outside handle and inside handle can be moved freely but latch remains locked. This may occur if the locked door's outside handle is lifted at the same time as the power lock button on either the key fob or the door panel is pressed. ACTION Refer to the follow Service Procedure to open door(s) and replace door latch per Workshop Manual Section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems. Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 020903A Follow Service Procedure 1.5 Hrs. To Open Door And Replace Door Latch: One Front Door 020903B Follow Service Procedure 2.3 Hrs. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front Doors 020903C Follow Service Procedure 1.8 Hrs. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: One Front Door One Rear Door 020903D Follow Service Procedure 2.8 Hrs. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front Doors One Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8459 Rear Door 020903E Follow Service Procedure 2.2 Hrs. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: One Front Door Both Rear Doors 020903F Follow Service Procedure 0.6 Hr. To Open Door And Replace Door Latch: One Rear Door 020903G Follow Service Procedure 0.9 Hr. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Rear Doors 020903H Follow Service Procedure 3.1 Hrs. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front And Both Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5421813 41 OASIS CODES: 112000 Information Front Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement Use the procedure below titled "Front Door Non-Functional Latch Replacement" to gain access and replace the failed door latch mechanism. Rear Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement Use the procedure below titled "Rear Door Non-Functional Latch Replacement" to gain access and replace the failed door latch mechanism. All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement Use the procedure below titled "All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement" to gain access and replace the failed door latch mechanism. Front Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement REMOVAL WARNING ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. WARNING TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. NOTE TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). NOTE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE INSTALLED UNDER THE SEATS IN THE SIDE AIR BAG TO FLOOR CONNECTOR. WARNING Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8460 THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. ALL VEHICLES NOTE VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE ACCESSED FROM AN ALTERNATE DOOR TO BEGIN PROCEDURE. 1. Move the front seat(s) to center position and the affected door glass completely down. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". 3. Lower the glove compartment by depressing the locking tabs, and disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 4. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover on steering wheel and disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with side air bags: 5. Disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles: 6. Disconnect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the passenger seat safety' belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with side air bags: 8. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles: 9. Connect the battery ground cable. 10. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor nuts. CAUTION USE CARE WHEN HANDLING THE SEAT AND TRACK ASSEMBLY. DROPPING THE ASSEMBLY OR SITTING ON A SEAT NOT SECURED IN THE VEHICLE MAY RESULT IN DAMAGED COMPONENTS. 11. Remove the front seat, front seat-track to floor bolts and remove the seat. 12. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover(s) and bolt(s). 13. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside and remove the upper B-pillar trim panel(s). 14. Remove the front and rear door scuff plate trim panel(s). ^ Remove the pin-type retainers ^ Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel(s) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8461 15. Remove lower B-pillar trim to gain access to screw that is horizontal in door panel and remove screw (Figure 1). NOTE ONE SCREW AT TOP FRONT CORNER OF DOOR PANEL, WHICH TOUCHES DASH, CANNOT BE REMOVED UNTIL DOOR IS OPEN. 16. Remove the screw from front door latch release handle bezel and remove bezel. 17. Remove door handle cup screw. CAUTION DO NOT TO SCRATCH DOOR WHEN POSITIONING ASIDE DOOR PANEL. CAUTION MOVING DOOR PANEL ASIDE MORE THAN 6 INCHES WILL CAUSE DOOR PANEL TO CREASE OR BREAK. 18. To gain access to latch area, peel back water shield and position aside. NOTE TO PREVENT DAMAGING DOOR WHEN ACCESSING LATCH, PROTECT WITH FENDER COVER. NOTE IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO FREE LEVER. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8462 19. From outside vehicle, reach in with a small screwdriver, insert screwdriver into latch assembly at outside base of electrical connector below metal actuating lever and pry up (Figure 2, passenger front door shown, all doors similar). CAUTION WHEN OPENING DOOR BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE DOOR PANEL. 20. Open door, and move glass to the up position. 21. Remove last screw and remove and the door trim panel. 22. Remove front door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems Removal and Installation. INSTALLATION All vehicles: Install new latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems "Front Door Latch Removal and Installation." 1. Install B-pillar trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "B-pillar Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 2. Install door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Front Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 3. Install the seat(s) and install the seat track to floor bolts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft). 4. Install the rear seat track to floor nuts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft). 5. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". Vehicles equipped with side air bags: 6. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector and connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles: 7. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector and connect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8463 8. Remove the special tool from the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector and connect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with air bags: 9. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector and connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles: 10. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector and connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver air bag connector access cover. 11. Remove the special tool from the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector and connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. Close the glove compartment. 12. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". 13.. Prove out the air bag system. For additional information, refer to section 501-20B: Occupant Restraints - Passive - Supplemental Air Bag System Diagnosis and Testing. 14. Check the restraint system for correct operation. Rear Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement REMOVAL 1. Remove rear-seat lower cushion(s). All vehicles: 2. Remove door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 3. Position aside water shield. NOTE IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO FREE LEVER. NOTE USING A SMALL SCREWDRIVER, INSERT SCREWDRIVER INTO LATCH ASSEMBLY AT OUTSIDE BASE OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR BELOW METAL ACTUATING LEVER AND PRY UP (FIGURE 2, PASSENGER FRONT DOOR SHOWN, ALL DOORS SIMILAR). 4. Remove latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Latches and Entry Systems Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation". INSTALLATION 1. Install new latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems "Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation." 2. Install door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 3. Install rear-seat lower cushion(s). All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement REMOVAL 1. Open tailgate to access rear doors. NOTE REAR DOORS MUST BE OPENED BEFORE FRONT DOORS CAN BE OPENED. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8464 2. Remove rear-seat lower cushion(s). All vehicles: 3. Remove rear door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 4. Position watershield aside. NOTE IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO FREE LEVER. NOTE USING A SMALL SCREWDRIVER, INSERT SCREWDRIVER INTO LATCH ASSEMBLY AT OUTSIDE BASE OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR BELOW METAL ACTUATING LEVER AND PRY UP (FIGURE 2, PASSENGER FRONT DOOR SHOWN, ALL DOORS SIMILAR). 5. Remove latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Latches and Entry Systems " Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation". WARNING ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. WARNING NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. WARNING TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. NOTE TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). NOTE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE INSTALLED UNDER THE SEATS IN THE SIDE AIR BAG TO FLOOR CONNECTOR. WARNING THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE ACCESSED FROM AN ALTERNATE DOOR TO BEGIN PROCEDURE. ALL VEHICLES 6. Move the front seat(s) to center position and the affected door glass into the completely down. 7. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". 8. Lower the glove compartment by depressing the locking tabs and disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover on steering wheel and disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with side air bags: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8465 10. Disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles: 11. Disconnect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. 12. Disconnect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with side air bags: 13. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles: 14. Connect the battery ground cable. 15. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor nuts. CAUTION USE CARE WHEN HANDLING THE SEAT AND TRACK ASSEMBLY. DROPPING THE ASSEMBLY OR SITTING ON A SEAT NOT SECURED IN THE VEHICLE MAY RESULT IN DAMAGED COMPONENTS. 16. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor bolts and remove the seat through rear doors. 17. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover(s) and bolt(s). 18. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside and remove the upper B-pillar trim panel(s). 19. Remove the front and rear door scuff plate trim panel(s). ^ Remove the pin-type retainers ^ Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel(s) 20. Remove lower B-pillar trim to gain access to screw that is horizontal in door panel and remove screw (Figure 1). NOTE ONE SCREW AT TOP FRONT CORNER OF DOOR PANEL, WHICH TOUCHES DASH, CANNOT BE REMOVED UNTIL DOOR IS OPEN. 21. Remove the screw from front door latch release handle bezel and remove bezel. 22. Remove door handle cup screw. CAUTION DO NOT SCRATCH DOOR WHEN POSITIONING ASIDE DOOR PANEL. CAUTION MOVING DOOR PANEL ASIDE MORE THAN 6 INCHES WILL CAUSE DOOR PANEL TO CREASE OR BREAK. 23. To gain access to latch area, peel back water shield and position aside. NOTE TO PREVENT DAMAGING DOOR WHEN ACCESSING LATCH, PROTECT WITH FENDER COVER. NOTE IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO FREE LEVER. 24. From outside vehicle, reach in with a small screwdriver, insert screwdriver into latch assembly at outside base of electrical connector below metal actuating fever and pry up (Figure 2, passenger front door shown, all doors similar). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8466 CAUTION WHEN OPENING DOOR BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE DOOR PANEL. 25. Open door(s), and move glass to the up position. 26. Remove last screw and remove and the door trim panel(s). 27. Remove door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems Removal and Installation. INSTALLATION All Vehicles: 1. Install new rear door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems "Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation." 2. Install rear door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 3. Install B-pillar trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "B-pillar Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 4. Install rear-seat lower cushion(s). 5. Install new front door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems "Front Door Latch Removal and Installation." 6. Install front door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Front Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 7. Install the seat(s) and install the seat track to floor bolts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft). 8. Install the rear seat track to floor nuts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft). 9. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". Vehicles equipped with side air bags: 10. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector and connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles: 11. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector and connect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. 12. Remove the special tool from the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector and connect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with air bags: 13. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector and connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles: 14. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector and connect the driver air bag module electrical connector, and install the driver air bag connector access cover. 15. Remove the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector and connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector, and close the glove compartment. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > 02-9-3 > May > 02 > Doors - Unable to Open > Page 8467 Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". 17. Prove out the air bag system. For additional information, refer to section 501-2DB: Occupant Restraints Passive - Supplemental Air Bag System Diagnosis and Testing. 18. Check the restraint system for correct operation. 19. Close tailgate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 8468 Rear Door Latch: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 02-9-3 Date: 020513 Doors - Unable to Open Article No. 02-9-3 05/13/02 BODY - UNABLE TO OPEN DOORS FORD: 2001-2002 ESCAPE ISSUE Some vehicles built before 12/15/01 may exhibit door latches that will not open. The outside handle and inside handle can be moved freely but latch remains locked. This may occur if the locked door's outside handle is lifted at the same time as the power lock button on either the key fob or the door panel is pressed. ACTION Refer to the follow Service Procedure to open door(s) and replace door latch per Workshop Manual Section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems. Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 020903A Follow Service Procedure 1.5 Hrs. To Open Door And Replace Door Latch: One Front Door 020903B Follow Service Procedure 2.3 Hrs. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front Doors 020903C Follow Service Procedure 1.8 Hrs. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: One Front Door One Rear Door 020903D Follow Service Procedure 2.8 Hrs. To Open Doors And Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 8469 Replace Door Latches: Both Front Doors One Rear Door 020903E Follow Service Procedure 2.2 Hrs. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: One Front Door Both Rear Doors 020903F Follow Service Procedure 0.6 Hr. To Open Door And Replace Door Latch: One Rear Door 020903G Follow Service Procedure 0.9 Hr. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Rear Doors 020903H Follow Service Procedure 3.1 Hrs. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front And Both Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5421813 41 OASIS CODES: 112000 Information Front Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement Use the procedure below titled "Front Door Non-Functional Latch Replacement" to gain access and replace the failed door latch mechanism. Rear Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement Use the procedure below titled "Rear Door Non-Functional Latch Replacement" to gain access and replace the failed door latch mechanism. All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement Use the procedure below titled "All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement" to gain access and replace the failed door latch mechanism. Front Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement REMOVAL WARNING ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. WARNING TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. NOTE TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). NOTE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE INSTALLED UNDER THE SEATS IN THE SIDE AIR BAG TO FLOOR CONNECTOR. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 8470 WARNING THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. ALL VEHICLES NOTE VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE ACCESSED FROM AN ALTERNATE DOOR TO BEGIN PROCEDURE. 1. Move the front seat(s) to center position and the affected door glass completely down. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". 3. Lower the glove compartment by depressing the locking tabs, and disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 4. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover on steering wheel and disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with side air bags: 5. Disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles: 6. Disconnect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the passenger seat safety' belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with side air bags: 8. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles: 9. Connect the battery ground cable. 10. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor nuts. CAUTION USE CARE WHEN HANDLING THE SEAT AND TRACK ASSEMBLY. DROPPING THE ASSEMBLY OR SITTING ON A SEAT NOT SECURED IN THE VEHICLE MAY RESULT IN DAMAGED COMPONENTS. 11. Remove the front seat, front seat-track to floor bolts and remove the seat. 12. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover(s) and bolt(s). 13. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside and remove the upper B-pillar trim panel(s). 14. Remove the front and rear door scuff plate trim panel(s). ^ Remove the pin-type retainers ^ Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel(s) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 8471 15. Remove lower B-pillar trim to gain access to screw that is horizontal in door panel and remove screw (Figure 1). NOTE ONE SCREW AT TOP FRONT CORNER OF DOOR PANEL, WHICH TOUCHES DASH, CANNOT BE REMOVED UNTIL DOOR IS OPEN. 16. Remove the screw from front door latch release handle bezel and remove bezel. 17. Remove door handle cup screw. CAUTION DO NOT TO SCRATCH DOOR WHEN POSITIONING ASIDE DOOR PANEL. CAUTION MOVING DOOR PANEL ASIDE MORE THAN 6 INCHES WILL CAUSE DOOR PANEL TO CREASE OR BREAK. 18. To gain access to latch area, peel back water shield and position aside. NOTE TO PREVENT DAMAGING DOOR WHEN ACCESSING LATCH, PROTECT WITH FENDER COVER. NOTE IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO FREE LEVER. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 8472 19. From outside vehicle, reach in with a small screwdriver, insert screwdriver into latch assembly at outside base of electrical connector below metal actuating lever and pry up (Figure 2, passenger front door shown, all doors similar). CAUTION WHEN OPENING DOOR BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE DOOR PANEL. 20. Open door, and move glass to the up position. 21. Remove last screw and remove and the door trim panel. 22. Remove front door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems Removal and Installation. INSTALLATION All vehicles: Install new latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems "Front Door Latch Removal and Installation." 1. Install B-pillar trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "B-pillar Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 2. Install door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Front Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 3. Install the seat(s) and install the seat track to floor bolts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft). 4. Install the rear seat track to floor nuts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft). 5. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". Vehicles equipped with side air bags: 6. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector and connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles: 7. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector and connect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 8473 8. Remove the special tool from the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector and connect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with air bags: 9. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector and connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles: 10. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector and connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver air bag connector access cover. 11. Remove the special tool from the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector and connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. Close the glove compartment. 12. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". 13.. Prove out the air bag system. For additional information, refer to section 501-20B: Occupant Restraints - Passive - Supplemental Air Bag System Diagnosis and Testing. 14. Check the restraint system for correct operation. Rear Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement REMOVAL 1. Remove rear-seat lower cushion(s). All vehicles: 2. Remove door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 3. Position aside water shield. NOTE IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO FREE LEVER. NOTE USING A SMALL SCREWDRIVER, INSERT SCREWDRIVER INTO LATCH ASSEMBLY AT OUTSIDE BASE OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR BELOW METAL ACTUATING LEVER AND PRY UP (FIGURE 2, PASSENGER FRONT DOOR SHOWN, ALL DOORS SIMILAR). 4. Remove latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Latches and Entry Systems Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation". INSTALLATION 1. Install new latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems "Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation." 2. Install door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 3. Install rear-seat lower cushion(s). All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement REMOVAL 1. Open tailgate to access rear doors. NOTE REAR DOORS MUST BE OPENED BEFORE FRONT DOORS CAN BE OPENED. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 8474 2. Remove rear-seat lower cushion(s). All vehicles: 3. Remove rear door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 4. Position watershield aside. NOTE IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO FREE LEVER. NOTE USING A SMALL SCREWDRIVER, INSERT SCREWDRIVER INTO LATCH ASSEMBLY AT OUTSIDE BASE OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR BELOW METAL ACTUATING LEVER AND PRY UP (FIGURE 2, PASSENGER FRONT DOOR SHOWN, ALL DOORS SIMILAR). 5. Remove latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Latches and Entry Systems " Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation". WARNING ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. WARNING NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. WARNING TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. NOTE TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). NOTE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE INSTALLED UNDER THE SEATS IN THE SIDE AIR BAG TO FLOOR CONNECTOR. WARNING THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE ACCESSED FROM AN ALTERNATE DOOR TO BEGIN PROCEDURE. ALL VEHICLES 6. Move the front seat(s) to center position and the affected door glass into the completely down. 7. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". 8. Lower the glove compartment by depressing the locking tabs and disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover on steering wheel and disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with side air bags: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 8475 10. Disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles: 11. Disconnect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. 12. Disconnect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with side air bags: 13. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles: 14. Connect the battery ground cable. 15. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor nuts. CAUTION USE CARE WHEN HANDLING THE SEAT AND TRACK ASSEMBLY. DROPPING THE ASSEMBLY OR SITTING ON A SEAT NOT SECURED IN THE VEHICLE MAY RESULT IN DAMAGED COMPONENTS. 16. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor bolts and remove the seat through rear doors. 17. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover(s) and bolt(s). 18. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside and remove the upper B-pillar trim panel(s). 19. Remove the front and rear door scuff plate trim panel(s). ^ Remove the pin-type retainers ^ Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel(s) 20. Remove lower B-pillar trim to gain access to screw that is horizontal in door panel and remove screw (Figure 1). NOTE ONE SCREW AT TOP FRONT CORNER OF DOOR PANEL, WHICH TOUCHES DASH, CANNOT BE REMOVED UNTIL DOOR IS OPEN. 21. Remove the screw from front door latch release handle bezel and remove bezel. 22. Remove door handle cup screw. CAUTION DO NOT SCRATCH DOOR WHEN POSITIONING ASIDE DOOR PANEL. CAUTION MOVING DOOR PANEL ASIDE MORE THAN 6 INCHES WILL CAUSE DOOR PANEL TO CREASE OR BREAK. 23. To gain access to latch area, peel back water shield and position aside. NOTE TO PREVENT DAMAGING DOOR WHEN ACCESSING LATCH, PROTECT WITH FENDER COVER. NOTE IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO FREE LEVER. 24. From outside vehicle, reach in with a small screwdriver, insert screwdriver into latch assembly at outside base of electrical connector below metal actuating fever and pry up (Figure 2, passenger front door shown, all doors similar). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 8476 CAUTION WHEN OPENING DOOR BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE DOOR PANEL. 25. Open door(s), and move glass to the up position. 26. Remove last screw and remove and the door trim panel(s). 27. Remove door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems Removal and Installation. INSTALLATION All Vehicles: 1. Install new rear door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems "Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation." 2. Install rear door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 3. Install B-pillar trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "B-pillar Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 4. Install rear-seat lower cushion(s). 5. Install new front door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems "Front Door Latch Removal and Installation." 6. Install front door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Front Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 7. Install the seat(s) and install the seat track to floor bolts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft). 8. Install the rear seat track to floor nuts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft). 9. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". Vehicles equipped with side air bags: 10. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector and connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles: 11. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector and connect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. 12. Remove the special tool from the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector and connect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with air bags: 13. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector and connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles: 14. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector and connect the driver air bag module electrical connector, and install the driver air bag connector access cover. 15. Remove the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector and connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector, and close the glove compartment. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 8477 Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". 17. Prove out the air bag system. For additional information, refer to section 501-2DB: Occupant Restraints Passive - Supplemental Air Bag System Diagnosis and Testing. 18. Check the restraint system for correct operation. 19. Close tailgate. Technical Service Bulletin # 02-9-3 Date: 020513 Doors - Unable to Open Article No. 02-9-3 05/13/02 BODY - UNABLE TO OPEN DOORS FORD: 2001-2002 ESCAPE ISSUE Some vehicles built before 12/15/01 may exhibit door latches that will not open. The outside handle and inside handle can be moved freely but latch remains locked. This may occur if the locked door's outside handle is lifted at the same time as the power lock button on either the key fob or the door panel is pressed. ACTION Refer to the follow Service Procedure to open door(s) and replace door latch per Workshop Manual Section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems. Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 020903A Follow Service Procedure 1.5 Hrs. To Open Door And Replace Door Latch: One Front Door 020903B Follow Service Procedure 2.3 Hrs. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front Doors 020903C Follow Service Procedure 1.8 Hrs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 8478 To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: One Front Door One Rear Door 020903D Follow Service Procedure 2.8 Hrs. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front Doors One Rear Door 020903E Follow Service Procedure 2.2 Hrs. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: One Front Door Both Rear Doors 020903F Follow Service Procedure 0.6 Hr. To Open Door And Replace Door Latch: One Rear Door 020903G Follow Service Procedure 0.9 Hr. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Rear Doors 020903H Follow Service Procedure 3.1 Hrs. To Open Doors And Replace Door Latches: Both Front And Both Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5421813 41 OASIS CODES: 112000 Information Front Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement Use the procedure below titled "Front Door Non-Functional Latch Replacement" to gain access and replace the failed door latch mechanism. Rear Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement Use the procedure below titled "Rear Door Non-Functional Latch Replacement" to gain access and replace the failed door latch mechanism. All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement Use the procedure below titled "All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement" to gain access and replace the failed door latch mechanism. Front Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement REMOVAL WARNING ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. WARNING TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 8479 NOTE TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). NOTE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE INSTALLED UNDER THE SEATS IN THE SIDE AIR BAG TO FLOOR CONNECTOR. WARNING THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. ALL VEHICLES NOTE VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE ACCESSED FROM AN ALTERNATE DOOR TO BEGIN PROCEDURE. 1. Move the front seat(s) to center position and the affected door glass completely down. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". 3. Lower the glove compartment by depressing the locking tabs, and disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 4. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover on steering wheel and disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with side air bags: 5. Disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles: 6. Disconnect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the passenger seat safety' belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with side air bags: 8. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles: 9. Connect the battery ground cable. 10. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor nuts. CAUTION USE CARE WHEN HANDLING THE SEAT AND TRACK ASSEMBLY. DROPPING THE ASSEMBLY OR SITTING ON A SEAT NOT SECURED IN THE VEHICLE MAY RESULT IN DAMAGED COMPONENTS. 11. Remove the front seat, front seat-track to floor bolts and remove the seat. 12. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover(s) and bolt(s). 13. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside and remove the upper B-pillar trim panel(s). 14. Remove the front and rear door scuff plate trim panel(s). ^ Remove the pin-type retainers Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 8480 ^ Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel(s) 15. Remove lower B-pillar trim to gain access to screw that is horizontal in door panel and remove screw (Figure 1). NOTE ONE SCREW AT TOP FRONT CORNER OF DOOR PANEL, WHICH TOUCHES DASH, CANNOT BE REMOVED UNTIL DOOR IS OPEN. 16. Remove the screw from front door latch release handle bezel and remove bezel. 17. Remove door handle cup screw. CAUTION DO NOT TO SCRATCH DOOR WHEN POSITIONING ASIDE DOOR PANEL. CAUTION MOVING DOOR PANEL ASIDE MORE THAN 6 INCHES WILL CAUSE DOOR PANEL TO CREASE OR BREAK. 18. To gain access to latch area, peel back water shield and position aside. NOTE TO PREVENT DAMAGING DOOR WHEN ACCESSING LATCH, PROTECT WITH FENDER COVER. NOTE IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO FREE LEVER. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 8481 19. From outside vehicle, reach in with a small screwdriver, insert screwdriver into latch assembly at outside base of electrical connector below metal actuating lever and pry up (Figure 2, passenger front door shown, all doors similar). CAUTION WHEN OPENING DOOR BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE DOOR PANEL. 20. Open door, and move glass to the up position. 21. Remove last screw and remove and the door trim panel. 22. Remove front door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems Removal and Installation. INSTALLATION All vehicles: Install new latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems "Front Door Latch Removal and Installation." 1. Install B-pillar trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "B-pillar Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 2. Install door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Front Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 3. Install the seat(s) and install the seat track to floor bolts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft). 4. Install the rear seat track to floor nuts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft). 5. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". Vehicles equipped with side air bags: 6. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector and connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles: 7. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector and connect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 8482 8. Remove the special tool from the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector and connect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with air bags: 9. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector and connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles: 10. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector and connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver air bag connector access cover. 11. Remove the special tool from the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector and connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. Close the glove compartment. 12. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". 13.. Prove out the air bag system. For additional information, refer to section 501-20B: Occupant Restraints - Passive - Supplemental Air Bag System Diagnosis and Testing. 14. Check the restraint system for correct operation. Rear Door Non-Functional - Latch Replacement REMOVAL 1. Remove rear-seat lower cushion(s). All vehicles: 2. Remove door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 3. Position aside water shield. NOTE IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO FREE LEVER. NOTE USING A SMALL SCREWDRIVER, INSERT SCREWDRIVER INTO LATCH ASSEMBLY AT OUTSIDE BASE OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR BELOW METAL ACTUATING LEVER AND PRY UP (FIGURE 2, PASSENGER FRONT DOOR SHOWN, ALL DOORS SIMILAR). 4. Remove latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Latches and Entry Systems Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation". INSTALLATION 1. Install new latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems "Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation." 2. Install door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 3. Install rear-seat lower cushion(s). All Doors Non-Functional - Latch Replacement REMOVAL 1. Open tailgate to access rear doors. NOTE REAR DOORS MUST BE OPENED BEFORE FRONT DOORS CAN BE OPENED. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 8483 2. Remove rear-seat lower cushion(s). All vehicles: 3. Remove rear door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 4. Position watershield aside. NOTE IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO FREE LEVER. NOTE USING A SMALL SCREWDRIVER, INSERT SCREWDRIVER INTO LATCH ASSEMBLY AT OUTSIDE BASE OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR BELOW METAL ACTUATING LEVER AND PRY UP (FIGURE 2, PASSENGER FRONT DOOR SHOWN, ALL DOORS SIMILAR). 5. Remove latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Latches and Entry Systems " Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation". WARNING ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. WARNING NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. WARNING TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. NOTE TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). NOTE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE INSTALLED UNDER THE SEATS IN THE SIDE AIR BAG TO FLOOR CONNECTOR. WARNING THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE ACCESSED FROM AN ALTERNATE DOOR TO BEGIN PROCEDURE. ALL VEHICLES 6. Move the front seat(s) to center position and the affected door glass into the completely down. 7. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". 8. Lower the glove compartment by depressing the locking tabs and disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover on steering wheel and disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with side air bags: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 8484 10. Disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles: 11. Disconnect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. 12. Disconnect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F470) to the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with side air bags: 13. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector located under seat and connect the special tool (# 418-F468) to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles: 14. Connect the battery ground cable. 15. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor nuts. CAUTION USE CARE WHEN HANDLING THE SEAT AND TRACK ASSEMBLY. DROPPING THE ASSEMBLY OR SITTING ON A SEAT NOT SECURED IN THE VEHICLE MAY RESULT IN DAMAGED COMPONENTS. 16. Remove the front seat rear seat-track to floor bolts and remove the seat through rear doors. 17. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover(s) and bolt(s). 18. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside and remove the upper B-pillar trim panel(s). 19. Remove the front and rear door scuff plate trim panel(s). ^ Remove the pin-type retainers ^ Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel(s) 20. Remove lower B-pillar trim to gain access to screw that is horizontal in door panel and remove screw (Figure 1). NOTE ONE SCREW AT TOP FRONT CORNER OF DOOR PANEL, WHICH TOUCHES DASH, CANNOT BE REMOVED UNTIL DOOR IS OPEN. 21. Remove the screw from front door latch release handle bezel and remove bezel. 22. Remove door handle cup screw. CAUTION DO NOT SCRATCH DOOR WHEN POSITIONING ASIDE DOOR PANEL. CAUTION MOVING DOOR PANEL ASIDE MORE THAN 6 INCHES WILL CAUSE DOOR PANEL TO CREASE OR BREAK. 23. To gain access to latch area, peel back water shield and position aside. NOTE TO PREVENT DAMAGING DOOR WHEN ACCESSING LATCH, PROTECT WITH FENDER COVER. NOTE IF LEVER WILL NOT MOVE FREELY, CYCLE THE DOOR LOCK BUTTON AND HANDLE TO FREE LEVER. 24. From outside vehicle, reach in with a small screwdriver, insert screwdriver into latch assembly at outside base of electrical connector below metal actuating fever and pry up (Figure 2, passenger front door shown, all doors similar). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 8485 CAUTION WHEN OPENING DOOR BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE DOOR PANEL. 25. Open door(s), and move glass to the up position. 26. Remove last screw and remove and the door trim panel(s). 27. Remove door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems Removal and Installation. INSTALLATION All Vehicles: 1. Install new rear door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems "Rear Door Latch Removal and Installation." 2. Install rear door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Rear Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 3. Install B-pillar trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "B-pillar Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 4. Install rear-seat lower cushion(s). 5. Install new front door latch. For additional information refer to section 501-14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems "Front Door Latch Removal and Installation." 6. Install front door trim panel. For additional information refer to section 501-05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation "Front Door Trim Panel Removal and Installation." 7. Install the seat(s) and install the seat track to floor bolts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft). 8. Install the rear seat track to floor nuts and torque to 48 N.m (35 Lb-ft). 9. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". Vehicles equipped with side air bags: 10. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector and connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles: 11. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector and connect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. 12. Remove the special tool from the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector and connect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. Vehicles equipped with air bags: 13. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector and connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles: 14. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector and connect the driver air bag module electrical connector, and install the driver air bag connector access cover. 15. Remove the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector and connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector, and close the glove compartment. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to section 414-01: Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Latch: > Page 8486 Battery, Mounting and Cables General Procedures "Battery Disconnect". 17. Prove out the air bag system. For additional information, refer to section 501-2DB: Occupant Restraints Passive - Supplemental Air Bag System Diagnosis and Testing. 18. Check the restraint system for correct operation. 19. Close tailgate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8487 Rear Door Latch: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear door trim panel. 2. Disconnect the door latch electrical connector. 1 Release the clip. 2 Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Position the rear door glass top run aside. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Position the door glass top run aside. 4. Disconnect the exterior door handle actuating rod. 1 Open the clip. 2 Disconnect the actuating rod. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8488 5. Remove and discard the rear door latch screws. 6. Remove the rear door latch. 7. Disconnect the interior door handle cable. 1 Release the cable conduit. 2 Disconnect the cable. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair REAR DOOR TRIM PANEL Removal and Installation Vehicles with power windows 1. Remove the rear door window control switch. - Disconnect the electrical connector. Vehicles with manual windows 2. Remove the rear door manual window regulator handle. 1 Release the clip. 2 Remove the rear door manual window regulator handle. All vehicles 3. Remove the rear door latch release handle bezel. 1 Remove the screw. 2 Remove the rear door latch release handle bezel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8492 4. Remove the door handle cup screw. 5. Remove the rear door sail panel. 6. Remove the rear door trim panel. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Striker > System Information > Adjustments Rear Door Striker: Adjustments STRIKER ADJUSTMENT NOTE: Before adjusting the door latch striker plate, verify that the door can be closed easily and fits tightly. 1. Loosen the door latch striker bolts. 2. Reposition the door latch striker plate from side to side or up and down as necessary. 3. Tighten the door latch striker plate bolts. 4. NOTE: The rear door is shown, the front door is similar. Check the adjustment. Repeat the procedure as necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Glass: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear door glass top run. 2. Remove the rear door window glass. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair REMOVAL All vehicles 1. Remove the rear door trim panel. 2. Remove the screw and the rear door trim panel bracket. 3. Position the water shield aside. 4. Lower the rear door window glass to gain access to the screws. 5. Remove the rear door window glass screws. 6. Support the rear door window glass in the full up position. Vehicles with power windows 7. Disconnect the rear door power window regulator electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8502 8. Remove the rear door power window regulator assembly. 1 Remove the bolts 2 Remove the nuts. Vehicles with manual windows 9. Remove the rear door window regulator assembly. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Remove the nuts. INSTALLATION All vehicles 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Cycle the door glass to make sure of correct window glass engagement. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service Precautions Hood Latch: Service Precautions CAUTION: Make sure the hood latch is fully engaged. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 8507 Hood Latch: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the hood latch nut. 2. Remove the hood latch bolts. NOTE: Mark the hood latch position prior to removal of the bolts. 3. Remove the hood latch. 1 Release the cable conduit. 2 Disconnect the cable. 3 Remove the hood latch. INSTALLATION Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 8508 1. Connect the hood latch release cable and conduit. 1 Connect the cable. 2 Engage the cable conduit. 2. Position the hood latch with alignment marks and install the bolts. 3. Install the hood latch nut. 4. Verify the hood alignment. 5. Adjust the hood latch. 1 Loosen the bolts. 2 Loosen the nut. 3 Align the hood latch with the hood latch striker. 6. Tighten the hood latch bolts and nut. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 8509 7. Verify the hood latch striker is fully engaging the hood latch. ^ Repeat previous steps as necessary. CAUTION: Make sure the hood latch is fully engaged. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release > Component Information > Service and Repair Hood Latch Release: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the hood latch release handle bolts. 2. Remove the hood latch. 3. Remove the two hood latch release handle cable locators. 4. Remove the hood latch release handle. NOTE: The hood latch release handle cable must be pulled through the dash panel into the passenger compartment. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Open the liftgate glass. 2. Remove the two liftgate nut access covers (one on each side). 3. Disconnect the rear window glass electrical harness connector. 4. Disconnect the heated window grid wire electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the two liftgate window glass cylinders. 1 Slide the spring retainer to the end of the socket. 2 Disconnect the socket from the ball stud. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8521 6. Remove the two liftgate window glass hinge nuts. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Transfer components as necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8528 Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8529 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance Technical Service Bulletin # 04C09 Date: 050318 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes. OASIS was activated January 20, 2004. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED: Yes Available through the website by March 21, 2005. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 8538 Owner names and addresses will be available March 31, 2005. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affect units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action. RELATED DAMAGE Related damage claims are not approved for this program. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME This repair will require no additional labor time to complete. Claims submitted with "MT" labor will not be accepted for reimbursement. OWNER REFUNDS ^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan, which is posted with this bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC). The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or, at their option, directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251, Dearborn, MI 48121-6251. ^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund claims that included other non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be accepted for reimbursement. ^ This compliance recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair. Claiming a refund will not close out the VIN for this recall. ^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.) - Program Code: 04C09 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN - Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 8539 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts will not be direct shipped for this recall. Order your parts requirements through normal order processing channels. DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to DOES II. EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. CLAIM HANDLING PROCEDURE FOR RETURNING PRIOR LEVEL PARTS Immediate Purge Required: -4L8Z-7843150-DB LATCH ASY - TAILGATE (LIFTGATE) -3L8Z-7843400-FAA HANDLE Prepare and submit a PCS claim as described below: ^ REASON CODE: GB ^ SHIPPER NBR: 04C09 ^ LINE EXPLANATION: Purge Required When preparing your PCS claim, list the part number being returned on the claim, and indicate the quantity of that part number being returned. Your PCS claim must be submitted by March 31, 2005. Claims filed after this date will be denied. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW This program involves performing specific liftgate latch system repairs on two (2) specific vehicle populations. Each repair procedure identifies the affected vehicles requiring that particular repair. See the list below for specific repairs needed for each vehicle population. 2004 model year Escape vehicles and 2001-2003 Escape vehicles serviced with subject parts: ^ replace the liftgate latch release rod ^ replace release rod clip ^ replace handle assembly return spring and circlip 2005 model year Escape vehicles: ^ replace the liftgate latch release rod ^ replace release rod clip LIFTGATE HANDLE REMOVAL AND REPAIR AFFECTED VEHICLES: 2004 MODEL YEAR ESCAPE VEHICLES AND 2001-2003 MODEL YEAR ESCAPE VEHICLES SERVICED WITH SUBJECT PARTS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 8540 1. Open the liftgate. 2. If equipped, remove the rear wiper motor cover. 3. Remove the four (4) screws and remove the liftgate trim panel. 4. Disconnect the liftgate window latch, liftgate handle and liftgate latch release rods by opening the clips. See Figure 1. 5. Release the liftgate window latch ajar switch wiring harness locator and if equipped, disconnect the liftgate latch actuator electrical connector. See Figure 2. 6. Remove the liftgate latch remote control assembly retaining screw and all four (4) retaining nuts. See Figure 3. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 8541 7. Disconnect the liftgate handle-to-remote release rod from the remote control assembly, then remove the remote control. See Figure 4. 8. Remove the liftgate handle assembly and place it on a bench. See Figure 5. 9. Disassemble the handle as follows: a) Remove the circlip b) Pull the pivot rod out of the handle assembly. c) Note the position of the spring then remove the spring from the handle assembly. 10. NOTE: the new circlip is supplied in the bag with the new spring. Make sure to retain the new circlip for installation to the original pivot rod and handle. LIFTGATE LATCH REMOVAL AND RELEASE ROD REPLACEMENT AFFECTED VEHICLES: ALL VEHICLES COVERED BY 04C09 NOTE: For 2001-2004 model year vehicles, proceed to Step 4. Ford 2005 model year vehicles, begin the repair on step 1. 1. Open the liftgate. 2. If equipped, remove the rear wiper motor cover. 3. Remove the four (4) screws and remove the liftgate trim panel. 4. Disconnect the liftgate ajar switch electrical connector (located on the liftgate latch). 5. Remove the three (3) liftgate latch bolts and retain. 6. Remove the liftgate latch. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 8542 7. Remove the liftgate latch release rod and install the new rod. See Figure 6. 8. Remove the original release rod clip and replace with the new clip. LIFTGATE LATCH INSTALLATION AFFECTED VEHICLES: ALL VEHICLES COVERED BY 04C09 1. Position the latch assembly in the vehicle. 2. Apply Motorcraft Medium-Strength Threadlocker TA-25 (blue) to the bolts and install the three (3) liftgate latch bolts. See Figure 7. 3. Tight the bolts to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 4. Connect the liftgate ajar switch electrical connector. NOTE: Fore 2001-2004 model year vehicles, proceed to Liftgate Handle Installation. For 2005 model year vehicles, continue with Step 5 of this procedure. 5. Install the liftgate trim panel and four (4) screws. 6. If equipped, install the rear wiper motor cover. 7. Close the liftgate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 8543 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 8544 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 8545 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 8546 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > NHTSA04V602000 > Dec > 04 > Recall 04V602000: Liftgate Latch Release Rod Replacement Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Recalls Recall 04V602000: Liftgate Latch Release Rod Replacement MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2001-2005 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 04V602000 RECALL DATE: Dec 17, 2004 COMPONENT: Latches/Locks/Linkages: Doors: Latch POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 262113 SUMMARY: Certain 2004-2005 sport utility vehicles and certain 2001-2003 sport utiity vehicles having rear liftgate components serviced with 2004 equivalent components fail to comply with the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 206, "Door Locks and Door Retention Components." The rear liftgate latching system does not meet the inertia load requirement in one direction. CONSEQUENCE: If the liftgate is left unlocked, there is the potential that it may open during a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the rear liftgate latch release rod, the release rod attachment clip and the door handle return spring. The recall is expected to begin on January 24, 2005. Owners should contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673. NOTES: Ford recall No. 04C09. Customers can also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236. 888-327-4236. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance Technical Service Bulletin # 04C09 Date: 050318 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes. OASIS was activated January 20, 2004. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED: Yes Available through the website by March 21, 2005. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 8556 Owner names and addresses will be available March 31, 2005. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall action. STOCK VEHICLES Correct all affect units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter (when available) and schedule a service date. ^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action. RELATED DAMAGE Related damage claims are not approved for this program. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME This repair will require no additional labor time to complete. Claims submitted with "MT" labor will not be accepted for reimbursement. OWNER REFUNDS ^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan, which is posted with this bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC). The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or, at their option, directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251, Dearborn, MI 48121-6251. ^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund claims that included other non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be accepted for reimbursement. ^ This compliance recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair. Claiming a refund will not close out the VIN for this recall. ^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.) - Program Code: 04C09 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN - Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 8557 LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION Parts will not be direct shipped for this recall. Order your parts requirements through normal order processing channels. DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to DOES II. EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. CLAIM HANDLING PROCEDURE FOR RETURNING PRIOR LEVEL PARTS Immediate Purge Required: -4L8Z-7843150-DB LATCH ASY - TAILGATE (LIFTGATE) -3L8Z-7843400-FAA HANDLE Prepare and submit a PCS claim as described below: ^ REASON CODE: GB ^ SHIPPER NBR: 04C09 ^ LINE EXPLANATION: Purge Required When preparing your PCS claim, list the part number being returned on the claim, and indicate the quantity of that part number being returned. Your PCS claim must be submitted by March 31, 2005. Claims filed after this date will be denied. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW This program involves performing specific liftgate latch system repairs on two (2) specific vehicle populations. Each repair procedure identifies the affected vehicles requiring that particular repair. See the list below for specific repairs needed for each vehicle population. 2004 model year Escape vehicles and 2001-2003 Escape vehicles serviced with subject parts: ^ replace the liftgate latch release rod ^ replace release rod clip ^ replace handle assembly return spring and circlip 2005 model year Escape vehicles: ^ replace the liftgate latch release rod ^ replace release rod clip LIFTGATE HANDLE REMOVAL AND REPAIR AFFECTED VEHICLES: 2004 MODEL YEAR ESCAPE VEHICLES AND 2001-2003 MODEL YEAR ESCAPE VEHICLES SERVICED WITH SUBJECT PARTS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 8558 1. Open the liftgate. 2. If equipped, remove the rear wiper motor cover. 3. Remove the four (4) screws and remove the liftgate trim panel. 4. Disconnect the liftgate window latch, liftgate handle and liftgate latch release rods by opening the clips. See Figure 1. 5. Release the liftgate window latch ajar switch wiring harness locator and if equipped, disconnect the liftgate latch actuator electrical connector. See Figure 2. 6. Remove the liftgate latch remote control assembly retaining screw and all four (4) retaining nuts. See Figure 3. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 8559 7. Disconnect the liftgate handle-to-remote release rod from the remote control assembly, then remove the remote control. See Figure 4. 8. Remove the liftgate handle assembly and place it on a bench. See Figure 5. 9. Disassemble the handle as follows: a) Remove the circlip b) Pull the pivot rod out of the handle assembly. c) Note the position of the spring then remove the spring from the handle assembly. 10. NOTE: the new circlip is supplied in the bag with the new spring. Make sure to retain the new circlip for installation to the original pivot rod and handle. LIFTGATE LATCH REMOVAL AND RELEASE ROD REPLACEMENT AFFECTED VEHICLES: ALL VEHICLES COVERED BY 04C09 NOTE: For 2001-2004 model year vehicles, proceed to Step 4. Ford 2005 model year vehicles, begin the repair on step 1. 1. Open the liftgate. 2. If equipped, remove the rear wiper motor cover. 3. Remove the four (4) screws and remove the liftgate trim panel. 4. Disconnect the liftgate ajar switch electrical connector (located on the liftgate latch). 5. Remove the three (3) liftgate latch bolts and retain. 6. Remove the liftgate latch. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 8560 7. Remove the liftgate latch release rod and install the new rod. See Figure 6. 8. Remove the original release rod clip and replace with the new clip. LIFTGATE LATCH INSTALLATION AFFECTED VEHICLES: ALL VEHICLES COVERED BY 04C09 1. Position the latch assembly in the vehicle. 2. Apply Motorcraft Medium-Strength Threadlocker TA-25 (blue) to the bolts and install the three (3) liftgate latch bolts. See Figure 7. 3. Tight the bolts to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 4. Connect the liftgate ajar switch electrical connector. NOTE: Fore 2001-2004 model year vehicles, proceed to Liftgate Handle Installation. For 2005 model year vehicles, continue with Step 5 of this procedure. 5. Install the liftgate trim panel and four (4) screws. 6. If equipped, install the rear wiper motor cover. 7. Close the liftgate. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 8561 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 8562 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 8563 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 8564 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > NHTSA04V602000 > Dec > 04 > Recall 04V602000: Liftgate Latch Release Rod Replacement Trunk / Liftgate Latch: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 04V602000: Liftgate Latch Release Rod Replacement MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2001-2005 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 04V602000 RECALL DATE: Dec 17, 2004 COMPONENT: Latches/Locks/Linkages: Doors: Latch POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 262113 SUMMARY: Certain 2004-2005 sport utility vehicles and certain 2001-2003 sport utiity vehicles having rear liftgate components serviced with 2004 equivalent components fail to comply with the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 206, "Door Locks and Door Retention Components." The rear liftgate latching system does not meet the inertia load requirement in one direction. CONSEQUENCE: If the liftgate is left unlocked, there is the potential that it may open during a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the rear liftgate latch release rod, the release rod attachment clip and the door handle return spring. The recall is expected to begin on January 24, 2005. Owners should contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673. NOTES: Ford recall No. 04C09. Customers can also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236. 888-327-4236. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Latch Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Liftgate Latch REMOVAL 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Disconnect the liftgate ajar switch electrical connector. 3. Disconnect the liftgate latch actuating rod. 1 Open the clip. 2 Disconnect the actuating rod. 4. Remove and discard the liftgate latch bolts. 5. Remove the liftgate latch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. NOTE: ^ Make sure the liftgate latch release rod is not pre loading the latch. It should be clipped in a relaxed state with no slack. ^ Position the liftgate latch release rod by pushing outboard to remove the slack. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Latch > Page 8571 Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Liftgate Latch Remote Control REMOVAL 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Disconnect the liftgate lock cylinder actuating rod. 1 Release the clip. 2 Disconnect the actuating rod. 3. Disconnect the liftgate latch remote control actuating rods. 1 Open the clip and disconnect the liftgate window latch actuating rod. 2 Open the clip and disconnect the liftgate latch actuating rod. 4. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 1 If equipped, disconnect the liftgate latch actuator electrical connector. 2 Release the liftgate window latch ajar switch wiring harness locator. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Latch > Page 8572 5. Remove the liftgate latch remote control assembly. 1 Remove the screw. 2 Remove the nuts. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Transfer all necessary components. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Latch > Page 8573 Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Liftgate window Latch REMOVAL NOTE: Make sure the liftgate window glass is in the raised position. 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Disconnect the liftgate window latch. 1 Disconnect the liftgate window latch ajar switch electrical connector. 2 Open the clip and disconnect the actuating rod. 3. Remove the liftgate window latch. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Remove the latch. NOTE: Mark the position of the liftgate window latch prior to removing the nuts. INSTALLATION 1. Position the liftgate window latch and loosely install the bolts. 2. Adjust the liftgate window latch. ^ Set the liftgate window glass flushness to 1.5 mm (0.06 in) under flush. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Latch > Page 8574 3. Tighten the liftgate window latch bolts. 4. Connect the liftgate window latch. 1 Connect the liftgate window latch ajar switch electrical connector. 2 Connect the actuating rod and close the clip. INSTALLATION 1. Install the liftgate trim panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair REMOVAL NOTE: Individual lock cylinders are repaired by discarding the inoperative cylinder and building a new lock cylinder using the appropriate lock repair package. The lock repair package includes a detailed instruction sheet to build the new lock cylinder to the current key code of the vehicle. 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Remove the liftgate lock cylinder. 1 Disconnect the actuating rod. 2 Remove the nuts. 3 Remove the lock cylinder. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Solenoid: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the liftgate latch remote control. 2. Remove the screws and the liftgate latch actuator. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch > Page 8585 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair COWL PANEL GRILLE Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wiper pivot arms. 1 Remove the nuts. 2 Remove the wiper pivot arms. 2. Remove the driver side cowl grille. 1 Remove the pin-type retainers. 2 Remove the screw caps and screws. 3 Remove the cowl grille. 3. Remove the passenger side cowl grille. 1 Remove the pin-type retainers. 2 Remove the screw caps and screws. 3 Remove the cowl grille. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair FENDER SPLASH SHIELD Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the fender splash shield pin-type retainers. 3. Remove the fender splash shield screws. 4. Remove the fender splash shield. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Remove the fender splash shield. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Front Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8605 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8606 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Front Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8612 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8613 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 8614 Front Subframe: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 8615 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 8616 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 8617 MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 8618 (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 8619 Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8620 Front Subframe: Service and Repair SUBFRAME - FRONT Special Tool(S) Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the rear transmission mount nuts and bolt. 3. Using the special tool, support the engine. 4. Remove the two front wheel and tire assemblies. 5. Remove the two engine air deflectors. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8621 6. Remove the two lower control arm ball joint pinch bolts and nuts (one on each side). 7. Disconnect the stabilizer bar link. 1 Remove the nuts. 2 Disconnect the link from the stabilizer bar. 8. Remove the lateral support crossmember. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Remove the crossmember. 9. Remove the front transmission mount bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8622 10. Remove the engine support crossmember bolts. 11. Remove the nut and the engine support crossmember. 12. Remove the two steering gear bolts. 13. Position the steering gear out of the subframe mounts. 14. Remove the dual converter Y-pipe on the 3.0L (4V) engine or the muffler inlet pipe on the 2.0L (Zetec) engine. Vehicles with manual transmission Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8623 15. Remove the two bolts and disconnect the manual transmission shift linkage. Vehicles with 4WD 16. Remove the driveshaft. 17. NOTE: Lower the rear of the engine to allow the subframe to clear the companion flange on the transfer case. Lower the rear of the engine approximately 150 mm (6 in). All vehicles 18. CAUTION: Do not allow the rear subframe bolts to come out of the lower control arm bushing. Completely loosen the two front subframe bolts, but do not remove them. 19. NOTE: The lower control arm ball joints must be disconnected from the spindles at the same time the subframe is lowered. With an assistant, remove the two subframe nuts lower the subframe from the vehicle. 20. Transfer all necessary components. 21. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Front Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8632 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8633 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Front Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8639 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8640 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 8641 Front Subframe Mount: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 8642 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 8643 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 8644 MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 8645 (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 8646 Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Rear Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8655 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8656 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Rear Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8662 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8663 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 8664 Rear Subframe: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 8665 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 8666 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 8667 MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 8668 (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 8669 Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8670 Rear Subframe: Service and Repair SUBFRAME - REAR Removal Vehicles with 4WD 1. Remove the rear axle assembly. All vehicles 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Remove the four bolts and position the rear control arm aside. 4. Disconnect the exhaust hanger from the subframe. 5. With an assistant, remove the four bolts and rear subframe. Installation All vehicles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8671 1. With an assistant, position the rear subframe and loosely install the bolts. 2. With a 19 mm (0.76 in) rod, align the rear subframe with the alignment holes. 3. Tighten the rear subframe bolts. 4. Connect the exhaust hanger on the subframe. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8672 5. Position the four rear control arms in the subframe. - Loosely install the bolts. Vehicles with 4WD 6. Install the rear axle assembly. All vehicles 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. NOTE: The vehicles must be at ride height before tightening the bolts. Tighten the four control arms bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Rear Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8681 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8682 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Rear Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8688 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 8689 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 04-25-13 > Dec > 04 > A/C Instrument Panel Vents Hard to Adjust Air Register: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to Adjust TSB 04-25-13 12/27/04 SERVICEABILITY OF INSTRUMENT PANEL REGISTER VENTS FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid MERCURY: 2005 Mariner ISSUE Some 2001-2005 vehicles may exhibit instrument panel (IP) register vents that are difficult to adjust or are limited in their adjustability. ACTION Register vents for the IP center finish panel can now be ordered and replaced individually. Replacement of an entire center finish panel assembly to correct a register vent condition is no longer necessary. The IP outboard register vents can be replaced similarly without replacing the entire housing assembly, however, the outboard vent must be ordered as an assembly with the housing. Refer to the following Service Procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE CENTER REGISTER REPLACEMENT 1. Remove center finish panel. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 501-12. 2. With center finish panel removed, release the register retention tabs and remove the register. 3. Replace register with Part Number YL8Z-19893-CAA left or YL8Z-19893-CAB right. 4. Reinstall the center finish panel. OUTBOARD REGISTER REPLACEMENT 1. Tilt the vehicle's outboard register to the down most position. Pull the top of the register out until it is released from the housing. 2. Remove the new register from the service replacement register housing assembly (base # -19893-), as described in Step 1. 3. Snap the new register into the vehicle's existing outboard register housing. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 042513A Register Replace Right 0.2 Hr. Outboard Vent Only 042513B Register Replace Left 0.2 Hr. Outboard Vent Only 042513C Register Replace Both 0.4 Hr. Center Vents (Includes Time To Remove And Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 04-25-13 > Dec > 04 > A/C Instrument Panel Vents Hard to Adjust > Page 8695 Install Center Finish Panel) 042513D Register Replace All Vents 0.4 Hr. (Includes Time To Remove And Install Center Finish Panel) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19893 41 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 8696 Rear Subframe Mount: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 8697 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 8698 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 8699 MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 8700 (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 8701 Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair Grille: Service and Repair RADIATOR GRILLE Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front bumper cover. 2. Release the nine clips and remove the radiator grille. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Specifications Console: Specifications Torque Specifications, Part 1 Torque Specifications, Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8709 Console: Description and Operation Overhead Console The overhead console may consists of the following components: ^ garage door opener compartment ^ lamp switch ^ roof opening panel control switch (with roof opening panel) ^ sunglass compartment(s) ^ center dome lamp/map lamps Floor Console The high series floor console consists of the following components: ^ arm rest ^ floor console finish panel ^ rear cup holders ^ storage compartment The low series floor console consists of the following components: ^ floor console front finish panel ^ floor console rear finish panel Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > High Series Floor Console Console: Service and Repair High Series Floor Console REMOVAL 1. Remove the floor console finish panel. 1 Apply the parking brake. 2 Remove the floor console finish panel. 2. Remove the floor console front bolts. 3. Remove the floor console. 1 Remove the two rear bolts. 2 Remove the floor console. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > High Series Floor Console > Page 8712 Console: Service and Repair Low Series Floor Console REMOVAL 1. Remove the floor console front finish panel. 1 If equipped, remove the manual transmission shifter knob by turning counterclockwise. 2 Remove the floor console front finish panel. 2. Remove the floor console rear finish panel. 1 Apply the parking brake. 2 Remove the floor console rear finish panel. 3. Remove the floor console front bolts. 4. Remove the floor console. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > High Series Floor Console > Page 8713 1 Remove the rear two bolts. 2 Remove the floor console. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Customer Safety Information WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. ^ THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information > Page 8719 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Technician Safety Information WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. ^ THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming Seats Removed There are two deactivation procedures. ^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing side air bag concerns, and also when repairing any in-seat component in vehicles equipped with side air bags. ^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal. This procedure will be used when diagnosing a concern not related to the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag system is being serviced, the airbag system must be deactivated using the appropriate deactivation procedure. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system, the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring behind the access panel on the bottom of the steering wheel. 4. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 5. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the passenger air bag. 7. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, remove the front seats. 9. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag floor electrical connector. 10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side floor electrical connector. 12. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable. Seats Not Removed There are two deactivation procedures. ^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing side air bag concerns, and also when repairing any in-seat component in vehicles equipped with side air bags. ^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal. This procedure will be used when diagnosing a concern not related to the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). 1. Move and tilt the front seats to their highest and most forward position. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8722 SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag system is being serviced, the airbag system must be deactivated using the appropriate deactivation procedure. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system, the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. 3. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 4. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring behind the access panel in the bottom of the steering wheel. 5. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring. 6. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector beneath the front seat. 10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag electrical connector beneath the passenger seat. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 12. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the driver seat. 13. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the front seat. 14. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle electrical connector. 15. Reconnect the battery ground cable. Depowering and Repowering Procedure Depowering Procedure WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. WARNING: Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which can result in personal injury. WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be depowered. NOTE: The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the central junction box (CJB), located below the LH side of the instrument panel, remove the cover and the restraints control module (RCM) fuse F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) from the CJB. 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8723 proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Repowering Procedure 1. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected. 2. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 3. Install RCM fuses F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) to the CJB and close the cover. 4. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front of any air bag module when the battery ground cable is connected. Connect the battery ground cable. 5. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool. Seats Removed 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 4. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8724 5. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 7. Install the front seats. 8. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. ^ Reconnect the electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 10. Reconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 11. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 12. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure Seats Not Removed 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. ^ Reconnect the electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 4. If equipped with side air bags, remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 5. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 7. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8725 8. If equipped with side air bags, connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. 9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 10. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 11. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8726 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag System Reconnect Checklist Air Bag Reconnect Checklist The checklist below should be completed following diagnosis or repair of any air bag system concern: 1. All in-seat electrical connectors connected? 2. All air bag modules connected? 3. Restraints Control Module (RCM) connected? 4. All safety belt pretensioners connectors connected? 5. All sensors (side impact) connected? 6. Battery connected? Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8727 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position and visually monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either: ^ fail to light. ^ remain lit continuously. ^ flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the RUN position. This is the time required for the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass Headliner: Customer Interest Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass Article No. 03-25-3 12/22/03 BODY - HEADLINER - SAG/LOOSE AT REAR QUARTER GLASS FORD: 2001-2004 ESCAPE This article supersedes TSB 01-23-7 to update the vehicle model years. ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a headliner sag/loose condition at rear quarter glass area near C/D pillar. ACTION Verify condition. Inspect headliner for amount of sag and overall condition. Repair or replace headliner. Refer to the following Service Procedure for details. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE PRIOR TO REPAIRING THE HEADLINER, PLEASE READ THROUGH THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE IN ITS ENTIRETY. REMEMBER TO INSTALL THE PROTECTIVE TUBING SLEEVE ONTO THE DRILL BIT TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE ROOF. DO NOT DRILL THE HOLES UNTIL STEP 12. Prior to repair, inspect the vehicle for the following conditions to determine if the headliner should be replaced: 1. If the headliner sags in excess of 30 mm (1.180 inch) below quarter window black-out paint, the headliner must be replaced (refer to Workshop Manual Section 501). Do not attempt repair. 2. Inspect for delamination of headliner cloth to substrate. If cloth has come loose the headliner must be replaced (refer to Workshop Manual Section 501). Do not attempt repair. If headliner does not meet the above replacement criteria, the headliner can be repaired. Continue with procedure. To repair the headliner, use the Headliner Retainer Installation Kit. ^ For Parchment interior, use part number 2L8Z-78519D80-AAA ^ For Graphite interior, use part number 2L8Z-78519D80-AAB HEADLINER REPAIR PROCEDURE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass > Page 8736 1. Locate new push-pin holes (See Figure 1 for example locations). 2. Cut template along the curves printed on both sides of template. 3. Make two holes on template along the printed circles. 4. Align template with glass and C-pillar or D-pillar as noted on template. Make sure arrow points to front of the vehicle. Use template for locating proper push-pin spacing (Figure 2). 5. Fit the D-pillar side edge as noted on template and the D-pillar to locate the new push-pin positions between D-pillar and C-pillar (Figure 2). 6. Mark both left-hand side and right-hand side new pin position holes as noted on template. Make sure arrow points to front of the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass > Page 8737 NOTE DO NOT DRILL AT THIS POINT. ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR AND HARNESS NEED TO BE TEMPORARILY MOVED TO PREVENT DAMAGE. CONNECTOR MUST BE ROTATED 90 DEGREES ON LEFT HAND SIDE ONLY AS VIEWED FROM REAR OF VEHICLE (FIGURE 5). 7. Remove the push-pin and child seat tether cap on left hand side only. This allows headliner to flex and helps prevent crease damage (Figure 3). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass > Page 8738 8. Remove top portion of left hand D-pillar trim to allow headliner to flex down. Be careful not to bend or over flex headliner too much or creasing will occur (Figure 4). 9. Rotate electrical connector 90 degrees. Pull harness toward rear of vehicle to avoid drill damage (Figure 5). 10. Install protective tubing sleeve onto 7 mm (9/32 inch) drill bit with 7-10 mm of the drill bit exposed beyond the end of the tube (Figure 6). NOTE THIS SLEEVE MUST BE USED TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE ROOF. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass > Page 8739 11. Align drill perpendicular (90 degrees to surface of headliner) so that pin will be flush with headliner surface (Figure 7). NOTE USE SAFETY GLASSES OR GOGGLES TO PROTECT EYES FROM CHIPS WHEN DRILLING HOLES. 12. Drill holes using the 7 mm (9/32 inch) drill bit with protective sleeve. 13. Before inserting the push-pins, remove any debris/metal shavings that have accumulated on the headliner and/or rear cargo department as a result of drilling the holes. NOTE DO NOT INSERT PUSH-PINS YET. 14. Rotate electrical connector and harness to original position. 15. Insert new pins into holes until headliner is 2 mm (.080 inch) above glass blackout line. NOTE BE CAREFUL NOT TO PULL HEADLINER UP TOO FAR. THIS WILL CAUSE GAPPING AT C AND D PILLAR TRIM. PUSH-PINS CAN BE REMOVED AND RE-INSTALLED TO DESIRED LENGTH. 16. Verify electrical function of center dome lamp, rear dome lamp and rear wiper. 17. Install D-pillar trim and push-pins in original locations. Make sure clips and pins are properly positioned and seated. 18. Inspect headliner and trim positioning. Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 01-23-7 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass > Page 8740 032503A Verify Concern And 2.3 Hrs. Replace Headliner (Includes Time For Overhead Console And Sun/Moon Roof) 032503B Verify Concern And 0.5 Hr. Perform Repair Procedure: DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7851944 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass Headliner: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass Article No. 03-25-3 12/22/03 BODY - HEADLINER - SAG/LOOSE AT REAR QUARTER GLASS FORD: 2001-2004 ESCAPE This article supersedes TSB 01-23-7 to update the vehicle model years. ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a headliner sag/loose condition at rear quarter glass area near C/D pillar. ACTION Verify condition. Inspect headliner for amount of sag and overall condition. Repair or replace headliner. Refer to the following Service Procedure for details. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE PRIOR TO REPAIRING THE HEADLINER, PLEASE READ THROUGH THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE IN ITS ENTIRETY. REMEMBER TO INSTALL THE PROTECTIVE TUBING SLEEVE ONTO THE DRILL BIT TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE ROOF. DO NOT DRILL THE HOLES UNTIL STEP 12. Prior to repair, inspect the vehicle for the following conditions to determine if the headliner should be replaced: 1. If the headliner sags in excess of 30 mm (1.180 inch) below quarter window black-out paint, the headliner must be replaced (refer to Workshop Manual Section 501). Do not attempt repair. 2. Inspect for delamination of headliner cloth to substrate. If cloth has come loose the headliner must be replaced (refer to Workshop Manual Section 501). Do not attempt repair. If headliner does not meet the above replacement criteria, the headliner can be repaired. Continue with procedure. To repair the headliner, use the Headliner Retainer Installation Kit. ^ For Parchment interior, use part number 2L8Z-78519D80-AAA ^ For Graphite interior, use part number 2L8Z-78519D80-AAB HEADLINER REPAIR PROCEDURE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass > Page 8746 1. Locate new push-pin holes (See Figure 1 for example locations). 2. Cut template along the curves printed on both sides of template. 3. Make two holes on template along the printed circles. 4. Align template with glass and C-pillar or D-pillar as noted on template. Make sure arrow points to front of the vehicle. Use template for locating proper push-pin spacing (Figure 2). 5. Fit the D-pillar side edge as noted on template and the D-pillar to locate the new push-pin positions between D-pillar and C-pillar (Figure 2). 6. Mark both left-hand side and right-hand side new pin position holes as noted on template. Make sure arrow points to front of the vehicle. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass > Page 8747 NOTE DO NOT DRILL AT THIS POINT. ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR AND HARNESS NEED TO BE TEMPORARILY MOVED TO PREVENT DAMAGE. CONNECTOR MUST BE ROTATED 90 DEGREES ON LEFT HAND SIDE ONLY AS VIEWED FROM REAR OF VEHICLE (FIGURE 5). 7. Remove the push-pin and child seat tether cap on left hand side only. This allows headliner to flex and helps prevent crease damage (Figure 3). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass > Page 8748 8. Remove top portion of left hand D-pillar trim to allow headliner to flex down. Be careful not to bend or over flex headliner too much or creasing will occur (Figure 4). 9. Rotate electrical connector 90 degrees. Pull harness toward rear of vehicle to avoid drill damage (Figure 5). 10. Install protective tubing sleeve onto 7 mm (9/32 inch) drill bit with 7-10 mm of the drill bit exposed beyond the end of the tube (Figure 6). NOTE THIS SLEEVE MUST BE USED TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE ROOF. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass > Page 8749 11. Align drill perpendicular (90 degrees to surface of headliner) so that pin will be flush with headliner surface (Figure 7). NOTE USE SAFETY GLASSES OR GOGGLES TO PROTECT EYES FROM CHIPS WHEN DRILLING HOLES. 12. Drill holes using the 7 mm (9/32 inch) drill bit with protective sleeve. 13. Before inserting the push-pins, remove any debris/metal shavings that have accumulated on the headliner and/or rear cargo department as a result of drilling the holes. NOTE DO NOT INSERT PUSH-PINS YET. 14. Rotate electrical connector and harness to original position. 15. Insert new pins into holes until headliner is 2 mm (.080 inch) above glass blackout line. NOTE BE CAREFUL NOT TO PULL HEADLINER UP TOO FAR. THIS WILL CAUSE GAPPING AT C AND D PILLAR TRIM. PUSH-PINS CAN BE REMOVED AND RE-INSTALLED TO DESIRED LENGTH. 16. Verify electrical function of center dome lamp, rear dome lamp and rear wiper. 17. Install D-pillar trim and push-pins in original locations. Make sure clips and pins are properly positioned and seated. 18. Inspect headliner and trim positioning. Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 01-23-7 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass > Page 8750 032503A Verify Concern And 2.3 Hrs. Replace Headliner (Includes Time For Overhead Console And Sun/Moon Roof) 032503B Verify Concern And 0.5 Hr. Perform Repair Procedure: DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7851944 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Headliner: Procedures REMOVAL Vehicles with overhead console 1. Remove the overhead console. 1 Open the front console door. 2 Remove the screws. 3 Remove the overhead console. ^ If equipped, disconnect the electrical connector. All vehicles 2. Remove the two sun visors and two clips. 1 Remove the six screws. 2 Remove the two sun visors and two clips. 3. Remove the eight passenger assist handle covers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8753 4. Remove the four passenger assist handles. 1 Remove the eight bolts. 2 Remove the four passenger assist handles. 5. Open the four A-pillar passenger assist handle covers. 6. Remove the two A-pillar passenger assist handles. 1 Remove the four bolts. 2 Remove the two A-pillar passenger assist handles. 7. Remove the two windshield side garnish mouldings. 8. If equipped, remove the roof opening panel moulding. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8754 9. Remove the safety belt D-ring covers. 10. Remove the safety belt D-ring bolts. 11. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside. 12. Remove the upper B-pillar trim panels. 13. Remove the two C-pillar trim panels. 14. Remove the two D-pillar trim panels. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8755 15. Remove the front interior lamp lens. 16. Remove the front interior lamp. 1 Remove the screws. 2 Remove the front interior lamp. ^ Disconnect the electrical connector. 17. Remove the rear interior lamp. ^ Disconnect the electrical connector. 18. Remove the five pin-type retainers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8756 19. If equipped, remove the three child seat tether anchor covers. 20. If equipped, remove the three bolts and the child seat tether anchors. 21. Remove the headliner. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8757 Headliner: Removal and Replacement HEADLINER Removal and Installation Vehicles with overhead console 1. Remove the overhead console. 1 Open the front console door. 2 Remove the screws. 3 Remove the overhead console. If equipped, disconnect the electrical connector. All vehicles 2. Remove the two sun visors and two clips. 1 Remove the six screws. 2 Remove the two sun visors and two clips. 3. Remove the eight passenger assist handle covers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8758 4. Remove the four passenger assist handles. 1 Remove the eight bolts. 2 Remove the four passenger assist handles. 5. Open the four A-pillar passenger assist handle covers. 6. Remove the two A-pillar passenger assist handles. 1 Remove the four bolts. 2 Remove the two A-pillar passenger assist handles. 7. Remove the two windshield side garnish mouldings. 8. If equipped, remove the roof opening panel moulding. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8759 9. Remove the safety belt D-ring covers 10. Remove the safety belt D-ring bolts. 11. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside. 12. Remove the upper B-pillar trim panels. 13. Remove the two C-pillar trim panels. 14. Remove the two D-pillar trim panels. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8760 15. Remove the front interior lamp lens. 16. Remove the front interior lamp. 1 Remove the screws. 2 Remove the front interior lamp. Disconnect the electrical connector. 17. Remove the rear interior lamp. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 18. Remove the five pin-type retainers. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8761 19. If equipped, remove the three child seat tether anchor covers. 20. If equipped, remove the three bolts and the child seat tether anchors. 21. Remove the headliner. 22. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Trim Panel: Procedures B-Pillar Trim Panel REMOVAL 1. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover. 2. Remove the safety belt D-ring bolt. 3. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside. 4. Remove the upper B-pillar trim panel. 5. Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel. 1 Remove the pin-type retainers. 2 Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8766 6. Remove the rear door scuff plate trim panel. 1 Remove the pin-type retainers. 2 Remove the rear door scuff plate trim panel. 7. Remove the lower B-pillar trim panel. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. C-Pillar Trim Panel REMOVAL LH side 1. If equipped with a power point on the LH quarter trim panel, disconnect the battery ground cable. Both sides 2. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8767 3. Remove the safety belt D-ring bolt. 4. Remove the pin-type retainers and the liftgate scuff plate trim panel. 5. Position the liftgate weatherstrip aside. 6. If equipped, remove the cargo net hold-down. 7. Remove the rear quarter trim panel. ^ If equipped with a power point on the LH quarter trim panel, disconnect the electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8768 8. Remove the C-pillar trim panel. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8769 Trim Panel: Removal and Replacement B-Pillar Trim Panel B-PILLAR TRIM PANEL Removal and Installation 1. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover. 2. Remove the safety belt D-ring bolt. 3. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside. 4. Remove the upper B-pillar trim panel. 5. Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8770 1 Remove the pin-type retainers. 2 Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel. 6. Remove the rear door scuff plate trim panel. 1 Remove the pin-type retainers. 2 Remove the rear door scuff plate trim panel. 7. Remove the lower B-pillar trim panel. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. C-Pillar Trim Panel C-PILLAR TRIM PANEL Removal and Installation LH side 1. If equipped with a power point on the LH quarter trim panel, disconnect the battery ground cable. Both sides 2. Remove the safety belt D-ring cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8771 3. Remove the safety belt D-ring bolt. 4. Remove the pin-type retainers and the liftgate scuff plate trim panel. 5. Position the liftgate weatherstrip aside. 6. If equipped, remove the cargo net hold-down. 7. Remove the rear quarter trim panel. - If equipped with a power point on the LH quarter trim panel, disconnect the electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8772 8. Remove the C-pillar trim panel. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Door Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair REMOVAL NOTE: ^ When a new lock cylinder is installed, the door lock cylinder, liftgate lock cylinder and ignition lock cylinder should be installed as a set. This will eliminate carrying an extra key which will fit only one lock. If a new key is to be used, the new key code number is stamped on a metal tag attached to the key. ^ Individual lock cylinders are repaired by discarding the inoperative cylinder and building a new lock cylinder using the appropriate lock repair package. The lock repair package includes a detailed instruction sheet to build the new lock cylinder to the current key code of the vehicle. 1. Remove the exterior front door handle. NOTE: Make sure the window glass is in the raised position. 2. Remove and discard the door latch screws. 3. Remove the door lock cylinder actuating rod. 1 Open the two clips. 2 Remove the rod. 4. Remove the exterior door handle bracket. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8778 5. Remove the door lock cylinder. 1 Release the clips. 2 Remove the lock cylinder. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics TSB 06-15-8 08/07/06 KEYPAD DIAGNOSTICS - DEALER INSTALLED ACCESSORY FORD: 1998-2006 Taurus 1999-2003 Escort 1999-2006 Mustang 2000-2006 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2006 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006 Crown Victoria, Fusion 1998-2006 Expedition, Explorer, F-150, Ranger 1999 F-250 Light Duty 1999-2003 Windstar 1999-2006 F-Super Duty 2000-2005 Excursion 2000-2006 E-Series 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004 F-150 Heritage 2004-2006 Freestar LINCOLN: 1998-2006 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 1998-2006 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006 Mark LT MERCURY: 1998-2005 Sable 1999-2002 Cougar 2005-2006 Montego 2006 Grand Marquis, Milan 1998-2006 Mountaineer 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner ISSUE Some vehicles may experience a concern with the keyless entry keypad. In order to properly diagnose the concern with the keyless entry keypad, it is important to identify whether the keypad is a factory installed style (wired) or a Genuine Ford Accessory (GFA) radio frequency (RF) style keypad. ACTION Use the following Service Procedure to identify GFA RF keypads and provide diagnostic service tips. SERVICE PROCEDURE IDENTIFICATION: 1. Production installed keyless entry keypads are mounted flush with the surface of the vehicle and are wired directly to the module controlling the vehicle's keyless entry system. This style keypad can be diagnosed using the appropriate Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics > Page 8784 2. Dealer installed GFA RF keypads are adhesive backed and protrude approximately 1/2" (13 mm) from the surface of the vehicle and there are no specific diagnostics available in the WSM (Figure 1). NOTE THIS RF KEYPAD WAS ALSO US[D IN PRODUCTION ON 2004 F-SUPER DUTY VEHICLES BUILT PRIOR TO 12/3/2003. REFER TO WSM, SECTION 501-14 FOR RF KEYPAD DIAGNOSTICS FOR THESE VEHICLES. GENUINE FORD ACCESSORY KEYPAD DIAGNOSTIC TIPS 1. The keypad operates similarly to a remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter and is programmed using a similar procedure. Although the RF keypad is not specifically addressed in the WSM, the RKE transmitter programming portion of the WSM, Section 501-14 can be used as a guide NOTE THE 7-8 AND 9-0 BUTTONS ON THE KEYPAD MUST BE PRESSED SIMULTANEOUSLY DURING THE PROCEDURE IN ORDER FOR THE KEYPAD TO BE RECOGNIZED AS AN ADDITIONAL REMOTE TRANSMITTER. Since the GFA RF keypad is essentially another RKE transmitter, the transmitter diagnostic pinpoint tests in the vehicle's WSM can also be referenced even though the buttons serving the lock / unlock functions will differ 2. The GFA RF keypad is serviced as an assembly. The internal battery cannot be replaced separately. 3. If the master code or owner selectable code is lost or forgotten, the GFA RF keypad must be replaced. These codes are not stored in any vehicle module (with the exception of 2004 F-Super Duty vehicles produced prior to 12/3/2003). 4. The GFA RF keypad and all RKE transmitters (the number of transmitters allowable will vary by vehicle) must be reprogrammed together anytime the keypad is replaced, an RKE transmitter is replaced, or the module controlling the keyless entry system on the vehicle (GEM/SJB/VSM/DDM etc.) is replaced. NOTE THERE IS AN EXCEPTION TO TIP 4 FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH INTEGRATED KEYHEAD TRANSMITTERS (IKTs) (FUSION/MILAN/ZEPHYR). THE GFA RF KEYPADS FOR VEHICLES WITH IKTs MUST BE PROGRAMMED INDEPENDENTLY FROM THE IKTs. TURN THE IGNITION FROM "OFF" TO "RUN" 8 TIMES WITHIN 10 SECONDS, WITH THE 8TH TIME ENDING IN "RUN". THE DOOR LOCKS WILL CYCLE TO CONFIRM ENTERING PROGRAMMING MODE. PRESS THE 7-8 AND 9-0 BUTTON ON THE KEYPAD SIMULTANEOUSLY TO SEND A LOCK SIGNAL. TURN IGNITION TO OFF. THE LOCKS WILL CYCLE AGAIN TO INDICATE THE END OF THE PROGRAMMING MODE. 5. The keypad will normally illuminate for 5 seconds after one or more buttons are pressed, and the illumination will immediately turn off if the 7-8 and 9-0 buttons are pressed simultaneously (lock all doors). The keypad contains an optical sensor and will not illuminate under bright lighting conditions. The keypad may only illuminate briefly in colder temperatures in order to maximize the battery power available to transmit a lock/unlock signal. The temperature at which this occurs will vary depending upon the keypad battery age and condition. Both of these conditions are a normal function of the Power Save Mode and do not indicate a need to replace the keypad. 6. After entering the keypad code, the system may unlock the driver's door, lock it, then unlock it again, and the keypad will not even briefly illuminate. This is the Alert Mode and is an indication that battery power is very low and the keypad must be replaced. 7. The keypad also contains an Anti-scan feature. If the wrong code has been entered 7 times (35 consecutive button presses) the keypad is disabled for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash during this time. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics > Page 8785 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 14A626 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Application and ID Keyless Entry Module: Application and ID For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules (General Module). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 8789 Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection Testing and Inspection For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Side Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams Driver Side Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Side > Page 8795 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Side > Page 8796 Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams Passenger Side Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Side > Page 8797 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Control Module > Component Information > Application and ID Power Door Lock Control Module: Application and ID For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules (General Module). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Control Module > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 8801 Power Door Lock Control Module: Testing and Inspection Testing and Inspection For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8806 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Driver Side Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Driver Side Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Driver Side > Page 8809 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Driver Side > Page 8810 Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Passenger Side Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Driver Side > Page 8811 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair REMOVAL NOTE: Individual lock cylinders are repaired by discarding the inoperative cylinder and building a new lock cylinder using the appropriate lock repair package. The lock repair package includes a detailed instruction sheet to build the new lock cylinder to the current key code of the vehicle. 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Remove the liftgate lock cylinder. 1 Disconnect the actuating rod. 2 Remove the nuts. 3 Remove the lock cylinder. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8819 Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8820 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Paint Codes Paint: Application and ID Paint Codes Part 1 Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Paint Codes > Page 8826 The upper portion of the Vehicle Certification (VC) label contains the manufacturer's name, the month and year of manufacture, the certification statement and the VIN. It also includes Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR). The VC label is located on the left-hand front door jamb. VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL REFERENCE Paint Code Paint Codes The first set to numbers/letters indicate the vehicle primary body color code. The second set of numbers/letters (if applicable), indicate a lower body, two-tone paint code. All colors are base coat/clear coat. BZ - Chrome Yellow - BQ - Light Parchment Gold - E4 - Bright Red - FL - Medium Toreador Red - LL - Medium Wedgewood Blue - UA - Ebony - FY - Woodland Green - YZ - Oxford White - YN - Silver Metallic Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Paint Codes > Page 8827 Tape/Paint Stripe Code Tape and paint stripe codes do not apply. Revision Level Revision level - will advance as revisions occur. Not printed on label. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Paint Codes > Page 8828 Paint: Application and ID Paint Code Sticker Location VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL REFERENCE The VC label is located on the left-hand front door or door jamb and is in a similar location on trucks. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Paint Codes > Page 8829 Paint: Application and ID Vehicle Certification (VC) Label Part 1 Part 2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Paint Codes > Page 8830 The upper portion of the Vehicle Certification (VC) label contains the manufacturer's name, the month and year of manufacture, the certification statement and the VIN. It also includes Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR). The VC label is located on the left-hand front door jamb. VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL REFERENCE Paint Code Paint Codes The first set to numbers/letters indicate the vehicle primary body color code. The second set of numbers/letters (if applicable), indicate a lower body, two-tone paint code. All colors are base coat/clear coat. BZ - Chrome Yellow - BQ - Light Parchment Gold - E4 - Bright Red - FL - Medium Toreador Red - LL - Medium Wedgewood Blue - UA - Ebony - FY - Woodland Green - YZ - Oxford White - YN - Silver Metallic Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Paint Codes > Page 8831 Tape/Paint Stripe Code Tape and paint stripe codes do not apply. Revision Level Revision level - will advance as revisions occur. Not printed on label. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Application and ID Keyless Entry Module: Application and ID For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules (General Module). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 8836 Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection Testing and Inspection For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Control Module > Component Information > Application and ID Power Door Lock Control Module: Application and ID For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules (General Module). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Control Module > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 8840 Power Door Lock Control Module: Testing and Inspection Testing and Inspection For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8844 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8850 Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Close the roof opening panel. 2. Remove the headliner. 3. Remove the roof opening panel motor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connectors. 2 Remove the bolts. 3 Remove the roof opening panel motor. INSTALLATION 1. Connect the roof opening panel motor electrical connector. NOTE: The roof opening panel should be in the closed position. 2. With the motor still removed, bump the roof opening panel switch one time only towards the close or vent open position. 3. Install the roof opening panel motor. 1 Position the roof opening panel motor. 2 Install the bolts 4. Check for correct operation of the roof opening panel motor. 5. Install the headliner. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Roof Opening Panel Position Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Roof Opening Panel Position Switch > Page 8855 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Service and Repair Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Open the roof opening panel. 2. Remove the roof opening panel frame. 3. Remove the air deflector. ^ Lift up the air deflector and slide the air deflector to the rear to release the air deflector arms. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8862 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8870 Power Seat Switch: Service Precautions WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARD. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8871 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8872 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8873 Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair REMOVAL WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARD. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag system is being repaired the air bag system must be deactivated per the deactivation procedure contained in Air Bag Systems. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the vehicle. ^ Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side air bag to floor connector. ^ A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. ^ If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the seat control switch knob. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8874 3. Remove the front seat cushion side shield, 1 Remove the seat backrest handle. 2 Remove the screw. 3 Remove the shield. ^ Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the seat control switch. 1 Remove the screws. 2 Remove the switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Seat Cushion: Technician Safety Information WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARD. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 8879 Seat Cushion: Vehicle Damage Warnings CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Driver Seat Cushion Seat Cushion: Service and Repair Front Driver Seat Cushion Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) DISASSEMBLY WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARD. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag system is being repaired the air bag system must be deactivated per the deactivation procedure contained in Air Bag Systems. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor connector. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the vehicle and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8882 the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the vehicle. ^ Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side air bag to floor connector. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed before operating the vehicle. ^ A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. ^ If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary. ^ Manual seat shown, power seat similar. All vehicles 1. Position the front seats forward. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Vehicles with side air bag 3. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. 4. Connect the special tool to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles 5. Disconnect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8883 6. Connect the special tool to the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. 8. Connect the special tool to the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. Vehicles with side air bag 9. Disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8884 10. Connect the special tool to the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles 11. Lower the glove compartment. ^ Depress the locking tabs. 12. Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 13. Connect the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 14. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8885 15. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 16. Connect the special tool to the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 17. Connect the battery ground cable. 18. Prove out the air bag system. 19. Remove the seat track to floor nuts. 20. Position the driver seat rearward. 21. If equipped with power seats, disconnect the negative battery cable. 22. Remove the driver seat. ^ If equipped with power seats, disconnect the electrical connector. 1 Remove the seat track to floor bolts. 2 Remove the driver seat. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8886 CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. 23. Disconnect the seat cushion trim cover J-clips. 24. Remove the front seat cushion trim and pad from the front seat cushion frame. 25. Separate the front seat cushion trim from the front seat cushion pad. ASSEMBLY WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARD. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8887 SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag system is being repaired the air bag system must be deactivated per the deactivation procedure contained in Air Bag Systems. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor connector. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the vehicle. ^ Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side air bag to floor connector. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed before operating the vehicle. ^ A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. ^ If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary. All vehicles 1. Install the front seat cushion trim to the front seat cushion pad. 2. Install the front seat cushion trim and pad to the front seat cushion frame. 3. Connect the seat cushion trim cover J-clips. 4. Install the driver seat. 1 Position the driver seat. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8888 2 Install the seat track to floor bolts. ^ If equipped with power seats, connect the electrical connector. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. 5. If equipped with power seats, connect the battery ground cable. 6. Position the driver seat forward. 7. Install the seat track to floor nuts. 8. If equipped with power seats, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait one minute. Vehicles with side air bag 9. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 10. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8889 11. Remove the special tool from the driver side safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 12. Connect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. 13. Connect the battery ground cable. 14. With the remaining special tools still in place, prove out the air bag system. 15. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 16. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8890 17. Connect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. Vehicles with side air bag 18. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 19. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles 20. Remove the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8891 WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 21. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 22. Raise the glove compartment. ^ Depress the locking tabs. 23. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 24. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8892 25. Install the driver air bag connector access cover. 26. Connect the battery ground cable. 27. Prove out the air bag system. 28. Check the restraint system for correct operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8893 Seat Cushion: Service and Repair Front Passenger Seat Cushion Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) DISASSEMBLY WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARD. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag system is being repaired the air bag system must be deactivated per the deactivation procedure contained in Air Bag Systems. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor connector. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the vehicle and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8894 the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the vehicle. ^ Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side air bag to floor connector. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed before operating the vehicle. ^ A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. ^ If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary. All vehicles 1. Position the front seats forward. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Vehicles with side air bag 3. Disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. 4. Connect the special tool to the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles 5. Disconnect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8895 6. Connect the special tool to the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. 8. Connect the special tool to the driver side seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. Vehicles with side air bag 9. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8896 10. Connect the special tool to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles 11. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover. 12. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 13. Connect the special tool to the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 14. Lower the glove compartment. ^ Depress the locking tabs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8897 15. Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 16. Connect the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 17. Connect the battery ground cable. 18. Prove out the air bag system. 19. Remove the seat track to floor nuts. 20. Position the passenger seat rearward. 21. Remove the passenger seat. 1 Remove the seat track to floor bolts. 2 Remove the passenger seat. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a sent not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8898 22. Disconnect the seat cushion trim cover J-clips. 23. Remove the the front seat cushion trim and pad from the front seat cushion frame. 24. Separate the front seat cushion trim from the front seat cushion pad. ASSEMBLY WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARD. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag system is being repaired the air bag system must be deactivated per the deactivation procedure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8899 contained in Air Bag Systems. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor connector. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the vehicle. ^ Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side air bag to floor connector. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed before operating the vehicle. ^ A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. ^ If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary. All vehicles 1. Install the front seat cushion trim to the front seat cushion pad. 2. Install the front seat cushion trim and pad to the front seat cushion frame. 3. Connect the seat cushion trim cover J-clips. 4. Install the passenger seat. 1 Position the passenger seat. 2 Install the seat track to floor bolts. 5. Position the passenger seat forward. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8900 CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. 6. Install the seat track to floor nuts. 7. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Vehicles with side air bag 8. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 9. Connect the passenger seat air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8901 10. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 11. Connect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. 12. Connect the battery ground cable. 13. With the remaining special tools still in place, prove out the air bag system. 14. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 15. Remove the special tool from the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8902 16. Connect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. Vehicles with side air bag 17. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 18. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles 19. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8903 VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 20. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 21. Install the driver air bag connector access cover. 22. Remove the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 23. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 24. Raise the glove compartment. ^ Depress the locking tabs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8904 25. Connect the battery ground cable. 26. Prove out the air bag system. 27. Check the restraint system for correct operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8905 Seat Cushion: Service and Repair Rear Seat Cushion DISASSEMBLY NOTE: 60% split bench seat shown, 40% and bench seat similar. 1. Lift up the rear seat cushion. 2. Remove the rear seat cushion. ^ Pull up on release lever and slide the seat out of the floor bracket. 3. Release the J-retainer. 4. Unzip the rear seat cushion trim. 5. Remove the rear seat cushion trim from the rear seat cushion pad. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Driver Seat Cushion > Page 8906 6. Remove the rear seat cushion bracket. 1 Remove the two bolts. 2 Remove the rear seat cushion bracket. ASSEMBLY 1. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair Seat Latch: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear seat backrest. 2. Remove the rear seat backrest side trim panel. 3. Remove the rear seat backrest latch. 1 Remove the bolt. 2 Remove the nut. 3 Remove the latch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Seat Track: Technician Safety Information WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO 'THE' SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARD. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 8914 Seat Track: Vehicle Damage Warnings CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat Seat Track: Service and Repair Driver Seat Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO 'THE' SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARD. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag system is being repaired the air bag system must be deactivated per the deactivation procedure contained in Air Bag Systems. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor connector. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the vehicle and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 8917 the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the vehicle. ^ Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side air bag to floor connector. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed before operating the vehicle. ^ A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. ^ If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary. ^ Manual seat track shown, power seat track similar. All vehicles 1. Position the front seats forward. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Vehicles with side air bag 3. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. 4. Connect the special tool to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles 5. Disconnect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 8918 6. Connect the special tool to the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. 8. Connect the special tool to the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. Vehicles with side air bag 9. Disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 8919 10. Connect the special tool to the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles 11. Lower the glove compartment. ^ Depress the locking tabs. 12. Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 13. Connect the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 14. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 8920 15. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 16. Connect the special tool to the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 17. Connect the battery ground cable. 18. Prove out the air bag system. 19. Remove the seat track to floor nuts. 20. Position the driver seat rearward. 21. If equipped with power seats, disconnect the negative battery cable. 22. Remove the driver seat. ^ If equipped with power seats, disconnect the electrical connector. 1 Remove the seat track to floor bolts. 2 Remove the driver seat. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 8921 in damaged components. 23. If equipped, remove the seat height adjustment control. 24. Remove the outboard seat cushion side shield. 1 Remove the seat backrest handle. 2 Remove the screw. 3 Remove the shield. ^ If equipped with a power seat, disconnect the electrical connector. 25. Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield. 26. Remove the front seat backrest bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 8922 27. Remove the front seat backrest. 1 Remove the pivot nut. 2 Remove the backrest. NOTE: If equipped with a side air bag module, note the routing of the wiring harness for installation. 28. Remove the front seat cushion pan. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Remove the front seat cushion pan. 29. If equipped with manual seats, remove the seat adjuster. ^ Unclip the seat adjuster pins. 30. Remove the safety belt pretensioner from the seat track. 1 Remove the bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 8923 2 Remove the safety belt pretensioner. NOTE: Note the routing of the wiring harness for installation. INSTALLATION WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARD. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag system is being repaired the air bag system must be deactivated per the deactivation procedure contained in Air Bag Systems. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor connector. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the vehicle. ^ Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side air bag to floor connector. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed before operating the vehicle. ^ A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. ^ If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary. All vehicles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 8924 1. Install the safety belt pretensioner. 1 Position the safety belt pretensioner. 2 Install the bolt. 2. If equipped with manual seats, install the seat adjuster. ^ Connect the seat adjuster pins. 3. Install the front seat cushion pan. 1 Position the front seat cushion pan. 2 Install the bolts. 4. Install the front seat backrest. 1 Install the backrest. 2 Install the pivot nut. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 8925 5. Install the front seat backrest bolts. 6. Install the inboard seat cushion side shield. 7. Install the outboard seat cushion side shield. 1 Install the shield. ^ If equipped with a power seat, connect the electrical connector. 2 Install the screw 3 Install the seat backrest handle. 8. If equipped, install the seat height adjustment control. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 8926 9. Install the driver seat. 1 Position the driver seat. ^ If equipped with power seats, connect the electrical connector. 2 Install the seat track to floor bolts. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. 10. If equipped with power seats, connect the battery ground cable. 11. Position the driver seat forward. 12. Install the seat track to floor nuts. 13. If equipped with power seats, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait one minute. Vehicles with side air bag 14. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 8927 15. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles 16. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 17. Connect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. 18. Connect the battery ground cable. 19. With the remaining special tools still in place, prove out the air bag system. 20. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 21. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 8928 WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 22. Connect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. Vehicles with side air bag 23. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 24. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 8929 25. Remove the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 26. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 27. Raise the glove compartment. ^ Depress the locking tabs. 28. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 8930 29. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 30. Install the driver air bag connector access cover. 31. Connect the battery ground cable. 32. Prove out the air bag system. 33. Check the restraint system for correct operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 8931 Seat Track: Service and Repair Passenger Seat Special Tool(s) SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARD. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag system is being repaired the air bag system must be deactivated per the deactivation procedure contained in Air Bag Systems. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor connector. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the vehicle and Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 8932 the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the vehicle. ^ Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side air bag to floor connector. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed before operating the vehicle. ^ A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. ^ If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary. All vehicles 1. Position the front seats forward. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Vehicles with side air bag 3. Disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. 4. Connect the special tool to the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles 5. Disconnect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 8933 6. Connect the special tool to the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. 8. Connect the special tool to the driver seat safety belt pretensioners body harness electrical connector. Vehicles with side air bag 9. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 8934 10. Connect the special tool to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. All vehicles 11. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover. 12. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 13. Connect the special tool to the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 14. Lower the glove compartment. ^ Depress the locking tabs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 8935 15. Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 16. Connect the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 17. Connect the battery ground cable. 18. Prove out the air bag system. 19. Remove the seat track to floor nuts. 20. Position the passenger seat rearward. 21. Remove the passenger seat. 1 Remove the seat track to floor bolts. 2 Remove the passenger seat. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 8936 22. Remove the outboard seat cushion side shield. 1 Remove the seat backrest handle. 2 Remove the screw. 3 Remove the shield. 23. Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield. 24. Remove the front seat backrest bolts. 25. Remove the front seat backrest. 1 Remove the pivot nut. 2 Remove the backrest. NOTE: If equipped with a side air bag module, note the routing of the wiring harness for installation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 8937 26. If equipped, remove the under seat storage bin. 27. Remove the front seat cushion pan. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Remove the front seat cushion pan. 28. Remove the seat adjuster. ^ Unclip the seat adjuster pins. 29. Remove the safety belt pretensioner. 1 Remove the bolt. 2 Remove the safety belt pretensioner. NOTE: Note the routing of the wiring harness for installation. INSTALLATION WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 8938 AFTERWARD. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag system is being repaired the air bag system must be deactivated per the deactivation procedure contained in Air Bag Systems. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor connector. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the vehicle. ^ Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side air bag to floor connector. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed before operating the vehicle. ^ A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. ^ If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary. All vehicles 1. Install the safety belt pretensioner. 1 Install the safety belt pretensioner. 2 Install the bolt. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 8939 2. Install the seat adjuster. ^ Connect the seat adjuster pins. 3. Install the front seat cushion pan. 1 Position the front seat cushion pan. 2 Install the bolts. 4. If equipped, install the under seat storage bin. 5. Install the front seat backrest. 1 Install the backrest. 2 Install the pivot nut. 6. Install the front seat backrest bolts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 8940 7. Install the inboard seat cushion side shield. 8. Install the outboard seat cushion side shield. 1 Install the shield. 2 Install the screw. 3 Install the seat backrest handle. 9. Install the passenger seat. 1 Position the passenger seat. 2 Install the seat track to floor bolts. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components. 10. Position the passenger seat forward. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 8941 11. Install the seat track to floor nuts. Vehicles with side air bag 12. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 13. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles 14. Remove the special tool from the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 8942 WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 15. Connect the passenger seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. 17. With the remaining special tools still in place, prove out the air bag system. 18. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 19. Remove the special tool from the driver seat safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 20. Connect the driver seat safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. Vehicles with side air bag Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 8943 21. Remove the special tool from the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 22. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. All vehicles 23. Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Seat > Page 8944 24. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 25. Install the driver air bag connector access cover. 26. Remove the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 27. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 28. Raise the glove compartment. ^ Depress the locking tabs. 29. Connect the battery ground cable. 30. Prove out the air bag system. 31. Check the restraint system for correct operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8945 Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8955 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Driver Side Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Driver Side Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Driver Side > Page 8958 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Driver Side > Page 8959 Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Passenger Side Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Driver Side > Page 8960 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8964 Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8965 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8969 Power Seat Switch: Service Precautions WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARD. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8970 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8971 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8972 Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair REMOVAL WARNING: ^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT. ^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARD. ^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED. ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag system is being repaired the air bag system must be deactivated per the deactivation procedure contained in Air Bag Systems. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the vehicle. ^ Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side air bag to floor connector. ^ A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. ^ If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the seat control switch knob. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8973 3. Remove the front seat cushion side shield, 1 Remove the seat backrest handle. 2 Remove the screw. 3 Remove the shield. ^ Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the seat control switch. 1 Remove the screws. 2 Remove the switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8977 Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8978 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Roof Opening Panel Position Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Roof Opening Panel Position Switch > Page 8983 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch > Page 8988 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Description and Operation Sound Proofing / Insulation: Description and Operation INSULATION Insulation is made of urethane, PVC, and recycled felt. Insulation is installed: - under the roof panel. - above and below the instrument panel. - on the cowl sides. - over the front and rear floor areas. - in the A, B, and D-pillar sections. - behind the rear quarter trim panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Unibody > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair COWL PANEL GRILLE Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wiper pivot arms. 1 Remove the nuts. 2 Remove the wiper pivot arms. 2. Remove the driver side cowl grille. 1 Remove the pin-type retainers. 2 Remove the screw caps and screws. 3 Remove the cowl grille. 3. Remove the passenger side cowl grille. 1 Remove the pin-type retainers. 2 Remove the screw caps and screws. 3 Remove the cowl grille. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Weatherstrip: > 05-22-11 > Nov > 05 > Body - Door Seal Squeaking Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Door Seal Squeaking TSB 05-22-11 11/14/05 DOOR SEAL SQUEAKS FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid MERCURY: 2005 Mariner ISSUE Some 2001-2005 Escape, 2005 Escape Hybrid and Mariners may exhibit squeaks from the shedlip seal for the doors. This seal runs along the top edge of the doors, above the top section of the individual door inner seals. This is most likely to be noticed at slow speeds and when the body is put into a twist. ACTION Replace the seals. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 052211A 2001-2005 Escape, 2005 0.2 Hr. Escape Hybrid, 2005 Mariner: Replace The Shedlip Seal For Both Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7851222 41 OASIS CODES: 110000, 702000 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Weatherstrip: > 05-22-11 > Nov > 05 > Body - Door Seal Squeaking Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Door Seal Squeaking TSB 05-22-11 11/14/05 DOOR SEAL SQUEAKS FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid MERCURY: 2005 Mariner ISSUE Some 2001-2005 Escape, 2005 Escape Hybrid and Mariners may exhibit squeaks from the shedlip seal for the doors. This seal runs along the top edge of the doors, above the top section of the individual door inner seals. This is most likely to be noticed at slow speeds and when the body is put into a twist. ACTION Replace the seals. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 052211A 2001-2005 Escape, 2005 0.2 Hr. Escape Hybrid, 2005 Mariner: Replace The Shedlip Seal For Both Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7851222 41 OASIS CODES: 110000, 702000 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Deactivator Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Deactivator Switch > Page 9015 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9016 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Service Precautions CAUTION: Initial installation of a deactivator switch allows for one adjustment. If additional adjustments are required, install a new switch. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9017 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the deactivator switch. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Rotate counterclockwise 45 degrees and remove the deactivator switch. INSTALLATION CAUTION: Initial installation of a deactivator switch allows for one adjustment. If additional adjustments are required, install a new switch. 1. Release the plunger lock. ^ Turn the lock knob counterclockwise until the first click is felt. 2. Depress the brake pedal. 3. Install the deactivator switch. 1 Position the deactivator switch in the bracket and rotate clockwise 45 degrees. 2 Connect the electrical connector. 4. Slowly release the brake pedal and tug moderately once the pedal reaches the rest position. NOTE: There should be an extra click heard when tugging on the brake pedal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9021 Cruise Control Servo: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Release the speed control cable cap. 1 Squeeze the speed control cable cap retaining tab. 2 Rotate the speed control cable cap. 3. Remove the speed control cable. 1 Depress the spring retainer. 2 Slide the core wire end out of the speed control servo pulley and remove the speed control cable. 4. Remove the speed control actuator assembly. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Separate the wire harness from the bracket. 3 Remove the nuts. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9022 5. Remove the bolts and separate the speed control actuator from the bracket. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Cruise Control Servo Cable: > NHTSA00V210001 > Aug > 00 > Recall 00V210001: Speed Control Cable Corrosion/Binding Cruise Control Servo Cable: Recalls Recall 00V210001: Speed Control Cable Corrosion/Binding The speed control cable can have a cracked or missing speed control cable servo cap locating tab. The locating tab could enter the servo clutch cavity and interfere with the speed control servo clutch. Also, water could enter those units that contain a cracked or missing servo cap locating tab, eventually causing corrosion that could interfere with the function of the speed control. If either of these conditions occurs and the speed control is used, the speed control could prevent the throttle from returning to idle, resulting in a stuck throttle. A stuck throttle could result in a crash. Dealers will inspect the speed control cables. Vehicles with speed control cables from cavities 3 and 4 will have the cable the speed control servo replaced. Owner notification began August 6, 2000. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon service date and do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673. Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cruise Control Servo Cable: > NHTSA00V210001 > Aug > 00 > Recall 00V210001: Speed Control Cable Corrosion/Binding Cruise Control Servo Cable: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 00V210001: Speed Control Cable Corrosion/Binding The speed control cable can have a cracked or missing speed control cable servo cap locating tab. The locating tab could enter the servo clutch cavity and interfere with the speed control servo clutch. Also, water could enter those units that contain a cracked or missing servo cap locating tab, eventually causing corrosion that could interfere with the function of the speed control. If either of these conditions occurs and the speed control is used, the speed control could prevent the throttle from returning to idle, resulting in a stuck throttle. A stuck throttle could result in a crash. Dealers will inspect the speed control cables. Vehicles with speed control cables from cavities 3 and 4 will have the cable the speed control servo replaced. Owner notification began August 6, 2000. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon service date and do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673. Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9036 Cruise Control Servo Cable: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the speed control cable from the throttle control linkage and bracket. 2. Release the speed control cable cap. 1 Depress the speed control cable cap retaining tab. 2 Rotate the speed control cable cap. 3. Remove the speed control cable. 1 Depress the spring retainer. 2 Slide the core wire end out of the speed control servo pulley and remove the speed control cable. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service Precautions Cruise Control Switch: Service Precautions WARNING: WHEN CARRYING A LIVE AIR BAG, MAKE SURE THE BAG AND TRIM COVER ARE POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT, THE BAG WILL THEN DEPLOY WITH MINIMAL CHANCE OF INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 9040 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the steering wheel. 2. Remove the steering wheel cover. WARNING: WHEN CARRYING A LIVE AIR BAG, MAKE SURE THE BAG AND TRIM COVER ARE POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT, THE BAG WILL THEN DEPLOY WITH MINIMAL CHANCE OF INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 3. Remove the steering wheel frame. 1 Remove the nuts. 2 Disconnect the ground wire. 3 Remove the steering wheel frame. 4. Disconnect the speed control switches electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 9041 5. Remove the speed control switches. 1 Remove the screws. 2 Remove the speed control switches. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Deactivator Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Deactivator Switch > Page 9047 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9048 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Service Precautions CAUTION: Initial installation of a deactivator switch allows for one adjustment. If additional adjustments are required, install a new switch. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9049 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the deactivator switch. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Rotate counterclockwise 45 degrees and remove the deactivator switch. INSTALLATION CAUTION: Initial installation of a deactivator switch allows for one adjustment. If additional adjustments are required, install a new switch. 1. Release the plunger lock. ^ Turn the lock knob counterclockwise until the first click is felt. 2. Depress the brake pedal. 3. Install the deactivator switch. 1 Position the deactivator switch in the bracket and rotate clockwise 45 degrees. 2 Connect the electrical connector. 4. Slowly release the brake pedal and tug moderately once the pedal reaches the rest position. NOTE: There should be an extra click heard when tugging on the brake pedal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service Precautions Cruise Control Switch: Service Precautions WARNING: WHEN CARRYING A LIVE AIR BAG, MAKE SURE THE BAG AND TRIM COVER ARE POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT, THE BAG WILL THEN DEPLOY WITH MINIMAL CHANCE OF INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 9053 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the steering wheel. 2. Remove the steering wheel cover. WARNING: WHEN CARRYING A LIVE AIR BAG, MAKE SURE THE BAG AND TRIM COVER ARE POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT, THE BAG WILL THEN DEPLOY WITH MINIMAL CHANCE OF INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 3. Remove the steering wheel frame. 1 Remove the nuts. 2 Disconnect the ground wire. 3 Remove the steering wheel frame. 4. Disconnect the speed control switches electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 9054 5. Remove the speed control switches. 1 Remove the screws. 2 Remove the speed control switches. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Audible Warning Device: Testing and Inspection For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators; Testing and Inspection. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Charge Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 01-5-5 > Mar > 01 > PCM - Charge Lamp ON in Cold Temperatures Charge Lamp/Indicator: Customer Interest PCM - Charge Lamp ON in Cold Temperatures Article No. 01-5-5 March 19, 2001 ELECTRICAL - CHARGING SYSTEM WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED - DURING COLD AMBIENT TEMPERATURES BELOW - 6 DEGREES CELSIUS (20 DEGREES F.) VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH 2.0L ZETEC ENGINE BUILT 7/8/2000 THROUGH 2/12/2001 ONLY FORD: 2001 ESCAPE ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a red charge lamp illumination in cold ambient temperatures below-6°C (20°F). This may be caused by the calibration of the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). ACTION Verify red charge lamp illumination. If normal diagnostics cannot resolve condition, reprogram the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with latest calibration. Refer to the PCM Calibration Information Chart shown for details. Obtain an Authorized Modifications Decal (FPS 8262 - obtainable through DOES II, 25/pkg) and list the date, dealer number, and summary of modifications performed. Select a prominent place adjacent to the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal suitable for installing the Authorized Modifications Decal. Clean the area, install the decal, and cover it with a clear plastic decal shield. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 203000, 203100, 204000, 204200, 206000, 290000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Charge Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 01-5-5 > Mar > 01 > PCM - Charge Lamp ON in Cold Temperatures Charge Lamp/Indicator: All Technical Service Bulletins PCM - Charge Lamp ON in Cold Temperatures Article No. 01-5-5 March 19, 2001 ELECTRICAL - CHARGING SYSTEM WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED - DURING COLD AMBIENT TEMPERATURES BELOW - 6 DEGREES CELSIUS (20 DEGREES F.) VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH 2.0L ZETEC ENGINE BUILT 7/8/2000 THROUGH 2/12/2001 ONLY FORD: 2001 ESCAPE ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a red charge lamp illumination in cold ambient temperatures below-6°C (20°F). This may be caused by the calibration of the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). ACTION Verify red charge lamp illumination. If normal diagnostics cannot resolve condition, reprogram the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with latest calibration. Refer to the PCM Calibration Information Chart shown for details. Obtain an Authorized Modifications Decal (FPS 8262 - obtainable through DOES II, 25/pkg) and list the date, dealer number, and summary of modifications performed. Select a prominent place adjacent to the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal suitable for installing the Authorized Modifications Decal. Clean the area, install the decal, and cover it with a clear plastic decal shield. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 203000, 203100, 204000, 204200, 206000, 290000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Charge Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Charge Lamp/Indicator: > 01-24-1 > Oct > 01 > Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage Clutch Slave Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage Article No. 01-24-1 12/10/01 CLUTCH - CLUTCH PEDAL STAYS ON FLOOR-NOT ABLE TO DISENGAGE CLUTCH - FLUID LEAK FROM HYDRAULIC CLUTCH LINE FORD: 2001 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, F-150, RANGER, SUPER DUTY F SERIES, F-650, F-750 ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a condition of not being able to disengage clutch as the clutch pedal is stroked or the clutch pedal remains on floor. This may be caused by a roll pin that is loose or protruding and no longer securing the clutch hydraulic line to the Clutch Master Cylinder or External Slave Cylinder. ACTION Check to insure clutch hydraulic line is connected to the Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder and the roll pin is not loose or protruding outside the cylinder body. Check for the proper amount of fluid in reservoir. It the hydraulic line is not connected to the Master Cylinder or External Slave Cylinder and no fluid is present in reservoir, refer to the following Service Procedure for details. SERVICE PROCEDURE Use Service kit part number 2C3Z-7C522-AA. kit includes: 2 roll pins, 2 quad seals and 2 cotter pins. NOTE MASTER CYLINDERS AND EXTERNAL SLAVE CYLINDERS SHOULD BE SERVICED AT THE SAME TIME. VEHICLE LINES AFFECTED ARE ESCAPE, SUPER DUTY F-SERIES AND F650-750. NOTE VEHICLE LINES EQUIPPED WITH AN INTERNAL CSC (CONCENTRIC SLAVE CYLINDER) REQUIRE ONLY THE MASTER CYLINDER TO BE SERVICED. VEHICLE LINES AFFECTED ARE EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, RANGER AND F150. 1. Confirm if roll pin is dislodged at clutch hydraulic system Master Cylinder and/or External Slave Cylinder (see previous notes) and the hydraulic line is disconnected or leaking. 2. If so, refer to Workshop Manual (Section 308) for instructions on removing Master Cylinder, External Slave Cylinder and system bleed procedure. 3. Use an 1/8" punch and small hammer to remove roll pin from Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder. 4. Remove old quad seal from Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder. 5. Install new quad seal in Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder. 6. Reconnect hydraulic line and use a hammer to install a new roll pin at the Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder. 7. Install a cotter pin through the center of each roll pin and secure (Master Cylinder and External Slave Cylinder). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Charge Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Charge Lamp/Indicator: > 01-24-1 > Oct > 01 > Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage > Page 9077 8. Refer to Workshop Manual (Section 308) for bleed procedure and reinstall. Labor Operation Claiming Chart Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7C522 39 OASIS CODES: 505200, 506000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Charge Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Charge Lamp/Indicator: > 01-24-1 > Oct > 01 > Clutch - Pedal Stays On Floor/Does Not Disengage > Page 9083 8. Refer to Workshop Manual (Section 308) for bleed procedure and reinstall. Labor Operation Claiming Chart Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7C522 39 OASIS CODES: 505200, 506000 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Cigarette Lighter: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Find and Use These Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams ^ System Diagrams ^ Grounds Diagrams Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9088 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow. Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the diagram. Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be found. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9089 Fuse And Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. Fuse Circuits Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery. Ground Distribution Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text "partial". Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9090 Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of (1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces). The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number. Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the way out by a spring. Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control. A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the way in. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. circuit Numbering Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification Circuit Numbering: Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting electrical circuits. Function: The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter "S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit. System-Connection (including branch): Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate wires in one connection with the same function. Wire Identification (wire colors): The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9091 Wire Identification Example Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know the following information about the wire: Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit System: AC = Headlamp leveling Connection: 3 = Switch connection A = Branch Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe). Circuit Identification Charts Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9092 Circuit Identification Chart System Codes Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9093 Sample Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9094 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9095 Sample Diagram Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9096 Circuit Identification Chart SYSTEM CODES CHART Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9097 SAMPLE DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9098 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9099 Sample Diagram Electrical Symbols ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9100 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9101 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9102 Types of Diagrams Shown Types of Diagrams Shown Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them. Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations. Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system information suitable for diagnostic operations. Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a relationship to them, are also included. All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding of the system component interactions. Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type. Wire Color Code Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9103 Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9104 Cigarette Lighter: Diagnostic Aids These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9105 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9106 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9107 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9108 Diagram 501-12-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Customer Safety Information WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. ^ THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information > Page 9114 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Technician Safety Information WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. ^ THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming Seats Removed There are two deactivation procedures. ^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing side air bag concerns, and also when repairing any in-seat component in vehicles equipped with side air bags. ^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal. This procedure will be used when diagnosing a concern not related to the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag system is being serviced, the airbag system must be deactivated using the appropriate deactivation procedure. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system, the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring behind the access panel on the bottom of the steering wheel. 4. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 5. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the passenger air bag. 7. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, remove the front seats. 9. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag floor electrical connector. 10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side floor electrical connector. 12. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable. Seats Not Removed There are two deactivation procedures. ^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing side air bag concerns, and also when repairing any in-seat component in vehicles equipped with side air bags. ^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal. This procedure will be used when diagnosing a concern not related to the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). 1. Move and tilt the front seats to their highest and most forward position. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 9117 SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag system is being serviced, the airbag system must be deactivated using the appropriate deactivation procedure. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system, the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. 3. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 4. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring behind the access panel in the bottom of the steering wheel. 5. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring. 6. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector beneath the front seat. 10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag electrical connector beneath the passenger seat. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 12. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the driver seat. 13. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the front seat. 14. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle electrical connector. 15. Reconnect the battery ground cable. Depowering and Repowering Procedure Depowering Procedure WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. WARNING: Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which can result in personal injury. WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be depowered. NOTE: The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the central junction box (CJB), located below the LH side of the instrument panel, remove the cover and the restraints control module (RCM) fuse F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) from the CJB. 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 9118 proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Repowering Procedure 1. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected. 2. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 3. Install RCM fuses F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) to the CJB and close the cover. 4. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front of any air bag module when the battery ground cable is connected. Connect the battery ground cable. 5. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool. Seats Removed 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 4. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 9119 5. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 7. Install the front seats. 8. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. ^ Reconnect the electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 10. Reconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 11. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 12. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure Seats Not Removed 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. ^ Reconnect the electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 4. If equipped with side air bags, remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 5. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 7. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 9120 8. If equipped with side air bags, connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. 9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 10. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 11. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 9121 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag System Reconnect Checklist Air Bag Reconnect Checklist The checklist below should be completed following diagnosis or repair of any air bag system concern: 1. All in-seat electrical connectors connected? 2. All air bag modules connected? 3. Restraints Control Module (RCM) connected? 4. All safety belt pretensioners connectors connected? 5. All sensors (side impact) connected? 6. Battery connected? Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 9122 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position and visually monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either: ^ fail to light. ^ remain lit continuously. ^ flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the RUN position. This is the time required for the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9126 Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9127 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pin 3 using a fused (10 A) jumper to 12V DC power and pin 5 to ground. Measure the voltage between pin 3 and pin 5 while rotating the thumbwell from full illumination to no illumination. If the voltage smoothly decreases from near 12 volts to near 0 volts, the illumination dimmer is okay. If not, replace the main light switch. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Customer Safety Information WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. ^ THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information > Page 9133 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Technician Safety Information WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. ^ THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming Seats Removed There are two deactivation procedures. ^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing side air bag concerns, and also when repairing any in-seat component in vehicles equipped with side air bags. ^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal. This procedure will be used when diagnosing a concern not related to the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag system is being serviced, the airbag system must be deactivated using the appropriate deactivation procedure. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system, the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring behind the access panel on the bottom of the steering wheel. 4. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector. 5. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the passenger air bag. 7. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, remove the front seats. 9. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag floor electrical connector. 10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side floor electrical connector. 12. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable. Seats Not Removed There are two deactivation procedures. ^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing side air bag concerns, and also when repairing any in-seat component in vehicles equipped with side air bags. ^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal. This procedure will be used when diagnosing a concern not related to the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). 1. Move and tilt the front seats to their highest and most forward position. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. WARNING: ^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 9136 SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE, DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES. ^ PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS. ^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR. ^ TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED). ^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. NOTE: ^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag system is being serviced, the airbag system must be deactivated using the appropriate deactivation procedure. ^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors. ^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the side airbag system, the seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed in the side airbag floor connectors. The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road. ^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the seats in the side airbag floor connectors. ^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. 3. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 4. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring behind the access panel in the bottom of the steering wheel. 5. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring. 6. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector beneath the front seat. 10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag electrical connector beneath the passenger seat. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 12. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the driver seat. 13. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the front seat. 14. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle electrical connector. 15. Reconnect the battery ground cable. Depowering and Repowering Procedure Depowering Procedure WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. WARNING: Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment, which can result in personal injury. WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices. NOTE: If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system is being serviced, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be depowered. NOTE: The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the central junction box (CJB), located below the LH side of the instrument panel, remove the cover and the restraints control module (RCM) fuse F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) from the CJB. 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 9137 proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Repowering Procedure 1. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected. 2. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 3. Install RCM fuses F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) to the CJB and close the cover. 4. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front of any air bag module when the battery ground cable is connected. Connect the battery ground cable. 5. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool. Seats Removed 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 4. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 9138 5. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 7. Install the front seats. 8. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. ^ Reconnect the electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 10. Reconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 11. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 12. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure Seats Not Removed 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. 2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. ^ Reconnect the electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 4. If equipped with side air bags, remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 5. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 7. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 9139 8. If equipped with side air bags, connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. 9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS. 10. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 11. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 9140 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag System Reconnect Checklist Air Bag Reconnect Checklist The checklist below should be completed following diagnosis or repair of any air bag system concern: 1. All in-seat electrical connectors connected? 2. All air bag modules connected? 3. Restraints Control Module (RCM) connected? 4. All safety belt pretensioners connectors connected? 5. All sensors (side impact) connected? 6. Battery connected? Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 9141 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position and visually monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either: ^ fail to light. ^ remain lit continuously. ^ flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the RUN position. This is the time required for the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever Indicator Bulb Instrument Panel Bulb: Service and Repair Selector Lever Indicator Bulb REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument cluster. 2. Remove the selector lever indicator bulb. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever Indicator Bulb > Page 9146 Instrument Panel Bulb: Service and Repair Instrument Cluster Bulb REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument cluster. 2. Remove the instrument cluster bulbs. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Selector Lever Indicator Bulb > Page 9147 Instrument Panel Bulb: Service and Repair Warning Indicator Bulb REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument cluster. 2. Remove the desired miniature bulb by turning it a quarter turn counterclockwise and lifting straight up. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Lamp Out Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Find and Use These Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams ^ System Diagrams ^ Grounds Diagrams Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9152 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow. Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the diagram. Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be found. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9153 Fuse And Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. Fuse Circuits Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery. Ground Distribution Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text "partial". Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9154 Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of (1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces). The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number. Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the way out by a spring. Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control. A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the way in. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. circuit Numbering Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification Circuit Numbering: Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting electrical circuits. Function: The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter "S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit. System-Connection (including branch): Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate wires in one connection with the same function. Wire Identification (wire colors): The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9155 Wire Identification Example Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know the following information about the wire: Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit System: AC = Headlamp leveling Connection: 3 = Switch connection A = Branch Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe). Circuit Identification Charts Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9156 Circuit Identification Chart System Codes Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9157 Sample Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9158 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9159 Sample Diagram Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9160 Circuit Identification Chart SYSTEM CODES CHART Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9161 SAMPLE DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9162 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9163 Sample Diagram Electrical Symbols ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9164 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9165 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9166 Types of Diagrams Shown Types of Diagrams Shown Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them. Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations. Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system information suitable for diagnostic operations. Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a relationship to them, are also included. All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding of the system component interactions. Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type. Wire Color Code Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9167 Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9168 Lamp Out Indicator: Diagnostic Aids These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9169 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9170 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9171 Lamp Out Indicator: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 413-09-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9172 Diagram 413-09-00-2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9173 Diagram 413-09-00-3 Diagram 413-09-00-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9174 Diagram 413-09-00-5 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation SERVICE ENGINE SOON Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine's emission control system. This is commonly known as the On Board Diagnostic System (OBD II). This OBD II system protects the environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet government emission standards. The OBD II system also assists the service technician in properly servicing your vehicle. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON indicator light illuminates when the ignition is first turned to the ON position to check the bulb. If it comes on after the engine is started, on of the engine's emission control systems may be malfunctioning. The light may illuminate without a driveability concern being noted. The vehicle will ususally be drivable and will not require towing. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 9178 Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair Solid SERVICE ENGINE SOON light This means that the On Board Diagnostic System (OBD II) has detected a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause your SERVICE ENGINE SOON light to illuminate. Examples are: 1. The vehicle has run out of fuel. (The engine may misfire or run poorly.) 2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel. 3. The fuel cap may not have been properly installed and securely tightened. The temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank with good quality fuel and/or properly installing and securely tightening the gas cap. After three driving cycles with out these or any other temporary malfunctions present, the SERVICE ENGINE SOON light should turn off. (A driving cycle consists of a cold engine start-up followed by mixed city/highway driving.) No additional vehicle service is required. Blinking SERVICE ENGINE SOON light Engine misfire is occurring which could cause damage to your catalytic converter. You should drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Check Engine, Service Engine Soon Or ISO Standard Engine Symbol The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) (Figure 15) alerts the driver that the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) has detected an OBD II emission-related component or system fault. When this occurs, an OBD II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be set. ^ The MIL is located on the instrument cluster and is labeled CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE SOON or ISO standard engine symbol (Figure 16). ^ Power is supplied to the MIL whenever the ignition switch is in the RUN or START position. ^ The MIL will remain on in the RUN/START mode as a bulb check during the instrument cluster proveout for approximately 4 seconds. ^ If the MIL remains on after the bulb check: The PCM illuminates the MIL for an emission related concern and a DTC will be present. - The instrument cluster will illuminate the MIL if the PCM does not send a control message to the instrument cluster. - The PCM is operating in the Hardware Limited Operation Strategy (HLOS). - The MIL circuit is shorted to ground. ^ If the MIL remains off (during the bulb check): Bulb is damaged. - MIL circuit is open. ^ To turn off the MIL after a repair, a reset command from the Scan Tool must be sent, or three consecutive drive cycles must be completed without a fault. ^ For any MIL concern, GO to Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection. ^ If the MIL blinks at a steady rate, a severe misfire condition could possibly exist. ^ If the MIL blinks erratically, an intermittent open B+ to the bulb or an intermittent short to ground in the MIL circuit exist. Also, the PCM can reset while cranking if battery voltage is low. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair The manufacturer does NOT show that this vehicle is equipped with an oil change reminder lamp. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Specifications Oil Pressure Sender: Specifications Oil Pressure Sender Tightening Torque 20 ft.lb Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Specifications > Page 9188 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Specifications > Page 9189 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: The halfshaft is removed for clarity. Disconnect the oil pressure sender electrical connector. 2. Remove the oil pressure sender. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9197 Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9198 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pin 3 using a fused (10 A) jumper to 12V DC power and pin 5 to ground. Measure the voltage between pin 3 and pin 5 while rotating the thumbwell from full illumination to no illumination. If the voltage smoothly decreases from near 12 volts to near 0 volts, the illumination dimmer is okay. If not, replace the main light switch. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL INDICATOR LAMP The Transmission Control Indicator Lamp (TCIL) is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Refer to Transmission Control Switch, PCM Inputs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Brake Lamp: > 02-17-6 > Sep > 02 > A/T - Inadvertent Shift Interlock Disabling Brake Lamp: Customer Interest A/T - Inadvertent Shift Interlock Disabling Article No. 02-17-6 09/02/02 LAMP - BRAKE - INADVERTENT DISABLING OF BRAKE SHIFT INTERLOCK FORD: 1992-1993 FESTIVA 1992-1994 TEMPO 1992-1997 THUNDERBIRD 1992-2003 CROWN VICTORIA, ESCORT, MUSTANG, TAURUS 1993-1997 PROBE 1994-1997 ASPIRE 1995-2000 CONTOUR 2002-2003 THUNDERBIRD 1992-1997 AEROSTAR 1992-2003 E SERIES 1993-1997 F SUPER DUTY 1994-1996 BRONCO 1994-1997 F-250, F-350 1994-2003 F-150 1995-2003 EXPLORER, RANGER, WINDSTAR 1997-2003 EXPEDITION 1998-1999 F-250 LD 1999-2003 SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2003 EXCURSION, EXPLORER SPORT 2001-2003 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC LINCOLN: 1992-2003 CONTINENTAL, TOWN CAR 1993-1998 MARK VIII 2000-2003 LS 1998-2003 NAVIGATOR MERCURY: 1992-1994 TOPAZ 1992-1997 COUGAR 1992-1999 TRACER 1992-2003 SABLE 1993-2003 GRAND MARQUIS 1994 CAPRI 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2003 COUGAR 1993-2002 VILLAGER 1997-2003 MOUNTAINEER Article 01-18-1 is being republished in its entirety to update the model year coverage and vehicle line applications. ISSUE Corporate, municipal, or police fleets may have had their Ford Motor Company vehicle modified to flash the brake lamps whenever the "police lights" or other aftermarket lights are turned on. These added "police lights" have the potential to disable the brake shift interlock system. The brake shift interlock feature prevents the vehicle from being shifted from park unless the brake pedal is depressed. Disabling of the brake shift interlock feature may enable the operator to inadvertently apply the accelerator instead of the brake pedal when shifting from Park to Drive or Reverse gears. ACTION As appropriate, dealers should advise owners (including corporate, municipal, and police agencies) that any vehicle that has been modified with a connection to the brake circuit, or that electrically interfaces with the brake lamps in that manner, should be disconnected IMMEDIATELY and the emergency lighting system should be modified in a manner that does not interfere with normal service operation or the brake shift interlock. In addition, if the high-mount stoplamp flashes when the "police lights" are on, the modification does not conform with the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Brake Lamp: > 02-17-6 > Sep > 02 > A/T - Inadvertent Shift Interlock Disabling > Page 9218 (FMVSS) 108 which requires that the high-mount stoplamp only illuminate when applying the brakes. Installation of warning lights should only be performed with a completely separate electrical system, without connection to any existing vehicle wiring. Connection of aftermarket electrical equipment into the brake lamp circuit or any other circuit which is connected to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), anti-lock brake computer, air bag system, or any other vehicle system, will cause vehicle malfunction. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 01-18-1 WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 203000, 203200, 205000, 301000, 503300 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Lamp: > 02-17-6 > Sep > 02 > A/T - Inadvertent Shift Interlock Disabling Brake Lamp: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Inadvertent Shift Interlock Disabling Article No. 02-17-6 09/02/02 LAMP - BRAKE - INADVERTENT DISABLING OF BRAKE SHIFT INTERLOCK FORD: 1992-1993 FESTIVA 1992-1994 TEMPO 1992-1997 THUNDERBIRD 1992-2003 CROWN VICTORIA, ESCORT, MUSTANG, TAURUS 1993-1997 PROBE 1994-1997 ASPIRE 1995-2000 CONTOUR 2002-2003 THUNDERBIRD 1992-1997 AEROSTAR 1992-2003 E SERIES 1993-1997 F SUPER DUTY 1994-1996 BRONCO 1994-1997 F-250, F-350 1994-2003 F-150 1995-2003 EXPLORER, RANGER, WINDSTAR 1997-2003 EXPEDITION 1998-1999 F-250 LD 1999-2003 SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2003 EXCURSION, EXPLORER SPORT 2001-2003 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC LINCOLN: 1992-2003 CONTINENTAL, TOWN CAR 1993-1998 MARK VIII 2000-2003 LS 1998-2003 NAVIGATOR MERCURY: 1992-1994 TOPAZ 1992-1997 COUGAR 1992-1999 TRACER 1992-2003 SABLE 1993-2003 GRAND MARQUIS 1994 CAPRI 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2003 COUGAR 1993-2002 VILLAGER 1997-2003 MOUNTAINEER Article 01-18-1 is being republished in its entirety to update the model year coverage and vehicle line applications. ISSUE Corporate, municipal, or police fleets may have had their Ford Motor Company vehicle modified to flash the brake lamps whenever the "police lights" or other aftermarket lights are turned on. These added "police lights" have the potential to disable the brake shift interlock system. The brake shift interlock feature prevents the vehicle from being shifted from park unless the brake pedal is depressed. Disabling of the brake shift interlock feature may enable the operator to inadvertently apply the accelerator instead of the brake pedal when shifting from Park to Drive or Reverse gears. ACTION As appropriate, dealers should advise owners (including corporate, municipal, and police agencies) that any vehicle that has been modified with a connection to the brake circuit, or that electrically interfaces with the brake lamps in that manner, should be disconnected IMMEDIATELY and the emergency lighting system should be modified in a manner that does not interfere with normal service operation or the brake shift interlock. In addition, if the high-mount stoplamp flashes when the "police lights" are on, the modification does not conform with the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Lamp: > 02-17-6 > Sep > 02 > A/T - Inadvertent Shift Interlock Disabling > Page 9224 (FMVSS) 108 which requires that the high-mount stoplamp only illuminate when applying the brakes. Installation of warning lights should only be performed with a completely separate electrical system, without connection to any existing vehicle wiring. Connection of aftermarket electrical equipment into the brake lamp circuit or any other circuit which is connected to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), anti-lock brake computer, air bag system, or any other vehicle system, will cause vehicle malfunction. OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 01-18-1 WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 203000, 203200, 205000, 301000, 503300 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Brake Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Find and Use These Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams ^ System Diagrams ^ Grounds Diagrams Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9227 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow. Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the diagram. Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be found. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9228 Fuse And Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. Fuse Circuits Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery. Ground Distribution Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text "partial". Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9229 Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of (1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces). The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number. Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the way out by a spring. Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control. A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the way in. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. circuit Numbering Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification Circuit Numbering: Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting electrical circuits. Function: The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter "S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit. System-Connection (including branch): Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate wires in one connection with the same function. Wire Identification (wire colors): The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9230 Wire Identification Example Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know the following information about the wire: Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit System: AC = Headlamp leveling Connection: 3 = Switch connection A = Branch Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe). Circuit Identification Charts Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9231 Circuit Identification Chart System Codes Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9232 Sample Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9233 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9234 Sample Diagram Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9235 Circuit Identification Chart SYSTEM CODES CHART Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9236 SAMPLE DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9237 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9238 Sample Diagram Electrical Symbols ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9239 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9240 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9241 Types of Diagrams Shown Types of Diagrams Shown Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them. Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations. Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system information suitable for diagnostic operations. Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a relationship to them, are also included. All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding of the system component interactions. Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type. Wire Color Code Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9242 Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9243 Brake Lamp: Diagnostic Aids These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9244 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9245 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9246 Brake Lamp: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9247 Brake Lamp: Electrical Diagrams DETAILED DIAGRAMS Diagram 417-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9248 Diagram 417-01-00-2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9249 Diagram 417-01-00-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9250 Diagram 417-01-00-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9251 Diagram 417-01-00-5 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9252 Diagram 417-01-00-6 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9253 Diagram 417-01-00-7 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9254 Diagram 417-01-00-8 RELATED DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9255 Diagram 413-00-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9256 Diagram 413-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Brake Lamp: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview 1. Verify the customer concern by operating the stoplamps. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical and electrical damage. Visual Inspection Chart 3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the next step. 4. If the fault is not visually evident, verify the symptom and proceed to the Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9259 Symptom Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9260 Brake Lamp: Pinpoint Tests H1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9261 H2 - H3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9262 I1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9263 I2 J1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9264 73III Automotive Meter Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Pedal Position Switch <--> [Brake Light Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Pedal Position Switch <--> [Brake Light Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9268 Brake Pedal Position Switch: Description and Operation BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH Typical Brake Pedal Position Switch The Brake Pedal Position (BPP) switch (Figure 21) is used by the PCM to disengage the transmission torque converter clutch and on some applications as an input to the idle speed control for idle quality. On most applications the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and supplies battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. On other applications the BPP switch signal is broadcast over the SCP link via another module to be received by the PCM. On applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stoplamp circuit, if all stoplamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stop amp bulbs has failed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Pedal Position Switch <--> [Brake Light Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9269 Brake Pedal Position Switch: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the Brake Pedal Position (BPP) switch. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Rotate clockwise and remove the BPP switch. INSTALLATION NOTE: Initial installation of brake pedal position (BPP) switch allows for one adjustment. If additional adjustments are necessary, install a new switch. 1. To unlock, rotate the lock knob counterclockwise to the stop. 2. With the engine running, fully depress and hold the brake pedal. 3. Install the brake pedal position (BPP) switch. 1 Position the BPP switch in the bracket and rotate counterclockwise. 2 Connect the electrical connector. 4. Slowly release the brake pedal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams Cargo Lamp: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9273 Cargo Lamp: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the cargo lamp assembly from the headliner. 3. Remove the cargo lamp assembly. 1 Disconnect the electrical connectors. 2 Remove the cargo lamp assembly. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Center Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Center Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the high-mounted stoplamp assembly. ^ Remove and discard the screws and washers. 2. Remove the high-mounted stoplamp bulb holder from the lamp assembly by disengaging the snaps. 3. Remove the bulb(s). INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cornering Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Cornering Lamp: Testing and Inspection For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Lighting and Horns; Turn Signals; Testing and Inspection. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Courtesy Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Find and Use These Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams ^ System Diagrams ^ Grounds Diagrams Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9285 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow. Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the diagram. Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be found. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9286 Fuse And Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. Fuse Circuits Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery. Ground Distribution Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text "partial". Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9287 Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of (1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces). The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number. Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the way out by a spring. Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control. A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the way in. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. circuit Numbering Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification Circuit Numbering: Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting electrical circuits. Function: The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter "S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit. System-Connection (including branch): Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate wires in one connection with the same function. Wire Identification (wire colors): The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9288 Wire Identification Example Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know the following information about the wire: Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit System: AC = Headlamp leveling Connection: 3 = Switch connection A = Branch Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe). Circuit Identification Charts Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9289 Circuit Identification Chart System Codes Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9290 Sample Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9291 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9292 Sample Diagram Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9293 Circuit Identification Chart SYSTEM CODES CHART Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9294 SAMPLE DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9295 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9296 Sample Diagram Electrical Symbols ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9297 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9298 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9299 Types of Diagrams Shown Types of Diagrams Shown Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them. Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations. Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system information suitable for diagnostic operations. Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a relationship to them, are also included. All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding of the system component interactions. Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type. Wire Color Code Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9300 Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9301 Courtesy Lamp: Diagnostic Aids These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9302 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9303 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9304 Courtesy Lamp: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9305 Diagram 417-02-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9306 Courtesy Lamp: Description and Operation The Generic Electronic Module (GEM) supplies voltage and ground to the interior courtesy lamps when any of the following inputs are received: ^ any door becomes ajar ^ liftgate or liftgate glass becomes ajar ^ remote keyless entry unlock signal is received ^ a key cylinder switch is turned to UNLOCK All interior courtesy lamps are turned off when any of the following occurs: ^ all the doors, liftgate and liftgate glass are closed ^ the ignition switch is turned to RUN ^ a key cylinder switch is turned to LOCK ^ remote keyless entry lock signal is received The illuminated entry feature is another feature which activates the interior lamps. This feature operates as follows: The GEM illuminates the interior lamps at 80 percent brightness when an unlock signal is received from a remote keyless entry transmitter, key cylinder switch, or door handle lifted when locked. If no door ajar signal is received the GEM will time out and turn the interior lights off. The illuminated entry feature will be canceled when any of the following conditions are met: ^ the remote transmitter lock button is pressed and the courtesy lamp control is not activated. ^ the ignition is in the RUN or START position and the interior lamp control is not activated. Battery Saver The GEM is equipped with a battery saver which will turn the lights off after 45 minutes of inactivity. This feature is an internal function of the GEM software. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Courtesy Lamp: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview 1. Verify the customer concern by operating the system. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical and electrical damage. Visual Inspection Chart 3. If an obvious cause for an observed of reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the next step. 4. If the diagnostic tool does not power up, refer to the diagnostic tool manual. 5. Carry out the DATA LINK DIAGNOSTICS test. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Module Communication Network/Testing and Inspection/Module Communications Network/Pinpoint Tests/Pinpoint Test PC (Precheck) If the diagnostic tool responds with: ^ CKT914, CKT915 or CKT70 = ALL ECUS NO RESP/NOT EQUIP, refer to Module Communications Network (Information Bus). ^ NO RESP/NOT EQUIP for GEM, Refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Module (General Module). ^ SYSTEM PASSED, retrieve and record the continuous Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs), erase the continuous DTCs, and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the GEM. 6. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to the GEM Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index to continue diagnostics. See: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions 7. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, proceed to the Symptom Chart to continue diagnostics. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures 8. If the DTCs are retrieved that are not found in the following GEM Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index, refer to the master GEM Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index in Multifunction Electronic Control Module (General Module). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9309 DTC Index B1317 - B1571 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9310 Symptom Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9311 Courtesy Lamp: Pinpoint Tests Test A: Interior Lamps Are Inoperative A1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9312 A2 - A3 A3 - A4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9313 A5 - A6 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9314 A6 - A8 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9315 A8 Test B: Interior Lamps Stay On Continuously - Do Not Fade Out B1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9316 B2 - B3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9317 B4 - B5 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9318 B6 - B7 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9319 B8 - B10 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9320 B11 - B12 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9321 B13 - B15 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9322 B16 - B17 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9323 B18 - B20 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9324 B21 - B22 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9325 B23 - B25 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9326 B26 - B27 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9327 B28 - B30 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9328 B31 - B32 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9329 B33 - B35 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9330 B35 - B36 Test C: Courtesy Lamp Do Not Turn ON With One Door Open Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9331 C1 - C2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9332 C2 - C4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9333 C4 D1 - D2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9334 D2 Test E: Demand Lighting Is Inoperative E1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9335 E2 - E4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9336 E4 F1 - F2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9337 F2 - F3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9338 Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 9343 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 9344 Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the nut and the DRL module. ^ Disconnect the electrical connectors. ^ Transfer parts as necessary. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9348 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9349 Daytime Running Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9350 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9354 Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9355 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pin 3 using a fused (10 A) jumper to 12V DC power and pin 5 to ground. Measure the voltage between pin 3 and pin 5 while rotating the thumbwell from full illumination to no illumination. If the voltage smoothly decreases from near 12 volts to near 0 volts, the illumination dimmer is okay. If not, replace the main light switch. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Battery Discharge Protection Relay, Lighting > Component Information > Application and ID Battery Discharge Protection Relay: Application and ID For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules (General Module). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Dome Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Find and Use These Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams ^ System Diagrams ^ Grounds Diagrams Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9363 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow. Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the diagram. Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be found. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9364 Fuse And Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. Fuse Circuits Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery. Ground Distribution Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text "partial". Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9365 Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of (1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces). The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number. Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the way out by a spring. Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control. A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the way in. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. circuit Numbering Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification Circuit Numbering: Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting electrical circuits. Function: The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter "S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit. System-Connection (including branch): Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate wires in one connection with the same function. Wire Identification (wire colors): The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9366 Wire Identification Example Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know the following information about the wire: Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit System: AC = Headlamp leveling Connection: 3 = Switch connection A = Branch Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe). Circuit Identification Charts Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9367 Circuit Identification Chart System Codes Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9368 Sample Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9369 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9370 Sample Diagram Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9371 Circuit Identification Chart SYSTEM CODES CHART Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9372 SAMPLE DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9373 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9374 Sample Diagram Electrical Symbols ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9375 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9376 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9377 Types of Diagrams Shown Types of Diagrams Shown Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them. Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations. Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system information suitable for diagnostic operations. Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a relationship to them, are also included. All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding of the system component interactions. Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type. Wire Color Code Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9378 Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9379 Dome Lamp: Diagnostic Aids These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9380 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9381 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9382 Diagram 417-02-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Exterior Lighting Module > Component Information > Application and ID Exterior Lighting Module: Application and ID For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules (General Module). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Exterior Lighting Module > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 9386 Exterior Lighting Module: Testing and Inspection Testing and Inspection For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb: Technician Safety Information WARNING: THE HALOGEN FOG LAMP BULB CONTAINS GAS UNDER PRESSURE. THE BULB MAY SHATTER IF THE GLASS ENVELOPE IS SCRATCHED OR IF THE BULB IS DROPPED. HANDLE THE BULB CAREFULLY. GRASP THE BULB ONLY BY ITS BASE. AVOID TOUCHING THE GLASS ENVELOPE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 9392 Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb: Vehicle Damage Warnings CAUTION: The fog lamp bulb should not be removed from the fog lamp until just before a new bulb is installed. Removing the bulb for an extended period of time may affect fog lamp bulb performance. Contaminants may enter the fog lamp where they can settle on the lens and reflector. Never turn on the fog lamps with the bulb removed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 9393 Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair REMOVAL WARNING: THE HALOGEN FOG LAMP BULB CONTAINS GAS UNDER PRESSURE. THE BULB MAY SHATTER IF THE GLASS ENVELOPE IS SCRATCHED OR IF THE BULB IS DROPPED. HANDLE THE BULB CAREFULLY. GRASP THE BULB ONLY BY ITS BASE. AVOID TOUCHING THE GLASS ENVELOPE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. CAUTION: The fog lamp bulb should not be removed from the fog lamp until just before a new bulb is installed. Removing the bulb for an extended period of time may affect fog lamp bulb performance. Contaminants may enter the fog lamp where they can settle on the lens and reflector. Never turn on the fog lamps with the bulb removed. 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Position the inner fender well aside. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Remove the pin-type retainers. 3 Remove the screw. 4 Position the inner fender well aside. 3. Remove the lamp socket from the lamp assembly. ^ Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9397 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9398 Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9399 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9403 Fog/Driving Lamp Switch: Service Precautions CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver to remove fog lamp switch or damage to the finish panel may occur. Adding tape to the end of a thin tool will reduce marring to the finish panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9404 Fog/Driving Lamp Switch: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver to remove fog lamp switch or damage to the finish panel may occur. Adding tape to the end of a thin tool will reduce marring to the finish panel. 2. Use a thin tool to remove the fog lamp switch. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component Information > Locations > Page 9409 Hazard Warning Flasher: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9413 Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Position the instrument panel center finish panel rearward from the instrument panel. 3. Remove the Hazard flasher switch. 1. Disconnect Electrical connector. 2. Remove the hazard flasher switch. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Headlamp Bulb: Technician Safety Information WARNING: THE HALOGEN HEADLAMP BULB CONTAINS GAS UNDER PRESSURE. THE BULB MAY SHATTER IF THE GLASS ENVELOPE IS SCRATCHED OR IF THE BULB IS DROPPED. HANDLE THE BULB CAREFULLY. GRASP THE BULB ONLY BY ITS BASE. AVOID TOUCHING THE GLASS ENVELOPE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 9419 Headlamp Bulb: Vehicle Damage Warnings CAUTION: The headlamp bulb should not be removed from the headlamp until just before a new bulb is installed. Removing the bulb for an extended period of time may affect headlamp bulb performance. Contaminants may enter the headlamp where they can settle on the lens and reflector. Never turn on the headlamps with the bulb removed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 9420 Headlamp Bulb: Service and Repair REMOVAL WARNING: THE HALOGEN HEADLAMP BULB CONTAINS GAS UNDER PRESSURE. THE BULB MAY SHATTER IF THE GLASS ENVELOPE IS SCRATCHED OR IF THE BULB IS DROPPED. HANDLE THE BULB CAREFULLY. GRASP THE BULB ONLY BY ITS BASE. AVOID TOUCHING THE GLASS ENVELOPE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. CAUTION: The headlamp bulb should not be removed from the headlamp until just before a new bulb is installed. Removing the bulb for an extended period of time may affect headlamp bulb performance. Contaminants may enter the headlamp where they can settle on the lens and reflector. Never turn on the headlamps with the bulb removed. 1. Disconnect the headlamp electrical connector. NOTE: Make sure that the headlamp switch and the ignition switch are in the OFF position. 2. Remove the rubber boot. 3. Depress the retainer clip and position aside. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 9421 4. Remove the bulb. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9425 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9426 Headlamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9427 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9431 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations Diagram 700-01-00-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9436 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9437 Horn Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9438 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Application and ID Interior Lighting Module: Application and ID For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules (General Module). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 9442 Interior Lighting Module: Testing and Inspection Testing and Inspection For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Control Module > Component Information > Application and ID Lamp Control Module: Application and ID For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules (General Module). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Lamp Out Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Find and Use These Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams ^ System Diagrams ^ Grounds Diagrams Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9450 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow. Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the diagram. Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be found. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9451 Fuse And Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. Fuse Circuits Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery. Ground Distribution Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text "partial". Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9452 Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of (1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces). The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number. Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the way out by a spring. Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control. A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the way in. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. circuit Numbering Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification Circuit Numbering: Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting electrical circuits. Function: The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter "S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit. System-Connection (including branch): Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate wires in one connection with the same function. Wire Identification (wire colors): The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9453 Wire Identification Example Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know the following information about the wire: Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit System: AC = Headlamp leveling Connection: 3 = Switch connection A = Branch Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe). Circuit Identification Charts Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9454 Circuit Identification Chart System Codes Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9455 Sample Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9456 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9457 Sample Diagram Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9458 Circuit Identification Chart SYSTEM CODES CHART Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9459 SAMPLE DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9460 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9461 Sample Diagram Electrical Symbols ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9462 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9463 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9464 Types of Diagrams Shown Types of Diagrams Shown Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them. Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations. Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system information suitable for diagnostic operations. Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a relationship to them, are also included. All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding of the system component interactions. Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type. Wire Color Code Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9465 Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9466 Lamp Out Indicator: Diagnostic Aids These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9467 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9468 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9469 Lamp Out Indicator: Electrical Diagrams Diagram 413-09-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9470 Diagram 413-09-00-2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9471 Diagram 413-09-00-3 Diagram 413-09-00-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Lamp Out Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9472 Diagram 413-09-00-5 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions License Plate Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Find and Use These Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams ^ System Diagrams ^ Grounds Diagrams Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9477 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow. Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the diagram. Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be found. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9478 Fuse And Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. Fuse Circuits Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery. Ground Distribution Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text "partial". Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9479 Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of (1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces). The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number. Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the way out by a spring. Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control. A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the way in. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. circuit Numbering Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification Circuit Numbering: Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting electrical circuits. Function: The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter "S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit. System-Connection (including branch): Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate wires in one connection with the same function. Wire Identification (wire colors): The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9480 Wire Identification Example Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know the following information about the wire: Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit System: AC = Headlamp leveling Connection: 3 = Switch connection A = Branch Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe). Circuit Identification Charts Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9481 Circuit Identification Chart System Codes Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9482 Sample Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9483 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9484 Sample Diagram Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9485 Circuit Identification Chart SYSTEM CODES CHART Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9486 SAMPLE DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9487 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9488 Sample Diagram Electrical Symbols ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9489 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9490 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9491 Types of Diagrams Shown Types of Diagrams Shown Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them. Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations. Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system information suitable for diagnostic operations. Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a relationship to them, are also included. All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding of the system component interactions. Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type. Wire Color Code Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9492 Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9493 License Plate Lamp: Diagnostic Aids These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9494 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9495 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9496 License Plate Lamp: Connector Views Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9497 License Plate Lamp: Electrical Diagrams DETAILED DIAGRAMS Diagram 417-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9498 Diagram 417-01-00-2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9499 Diagram 417-01-00-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9500 Diagram 417-01-00-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9501 Diagram 417-01-00-5 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9502 Diagram 417-01-00-6 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9503 Diagram 417-01-00-7 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9504 Diagram 417-01-00-8 RELATED DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9505 Diagram 413-00-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9506 Diagram 413-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9507 License Plate Lamp: Testing and Inspection For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Lighting and Horns; Parking Lamp; Testing and Inspection. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9508 License Plate Lamp: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the license plate lamp assembly. ^ Push the license lamp to the right and pull out. 2. Disconnect the socket from the lens. ^ Remove the bulb. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Map Light: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Find and Use These Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams ^ System Diagrams ^ Grounds Diagrams Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9513 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow. Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the diagram. Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be found. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9514 Fuse And Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. Fuse Circuits Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery. Ground Distribution Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text "partial". Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9515 Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of (1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces). The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number. Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the way out by a spring. Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control. A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the way in. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. circuit Numbering Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification Circuit Numbering: Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting electrical circuits. Function: The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter "S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit. System-Connection (including branch): Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate wires in one connection with the same function. Wire Identification (wire colors): The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9516 Wire Identification Example Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know the following information about the wire: Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit System: AC = Headlamp leveling Connection: 3 = Switch connection A = Branch Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe). Circuit Identification Charts Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9517 Circuit Identification Chart System Codes Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9518 Sample Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9519 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9520 Sample Diagram Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9521 Circuit Identification Chart SYSTEM CODES CHART Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9522 SAMPLE DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9523 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9524 Sample Diagram Electrical Symbols ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9525 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9526 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9527 Types of Diagrams Shown Types of Diagrams Shown Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them. Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations. Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system information suitable for diagnostic operations. Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a relationship to them, are also included. All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding of the system component interactions. Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type. Wire Color Code Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9528 Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9529 Map Light: Diagnostic Aids These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9530 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9531 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9532 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9533 Diagram 417-02-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9534 Map Light: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the interior/map reading lamp lens. 3. Remove the interior/map reading lamp assembly. 1 Remove the screws. 2 Remove the interior/map reading lamp. ^ Disconnect the electrical connector. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair Marker Lamp: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Position the inner fender well aside. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Remove the pin-type retainers. 3 Remove the screw. 4 Position the inner fender well aside. 3. Remove the lamp socket from the lamp assembly. 4. Remove the bulb. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Diagram 700-01-00-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9542 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9543 Parking Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9544 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Battery Discharge Protection Relay, Lighting > Component Information > Application and ID Battery Discharge Protection Relay: Application and ID For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules (General Module). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 9552 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 9553 Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the nut and the DRL module. ^ Disconnect the electrical connectors. ^ Transfer parts as necessary. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9557 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9558 Daytime Running Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9559 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Exterior Lighting Module > Component Information > Application and ID Exterior Lighting Module: Application and ID For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules (General Module). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Exterior Lighting Module > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 9563 Exterior Lighting Module: Testing and Inspection Testing and Inspection For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9567 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9568 Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9569 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9573 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9574 Headlamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9575 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations Diagram 700-01-00-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9579 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9580 Horn Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9581 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Application and ID Interior Lighting Module: Application and ID For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules (General Module). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 9585 Interior Lighting Module: Testing and Inspection Testing and Inspection For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Lamp Control Module > Component Information > Application and ID Lamp Control Module: Application and ID For further information regarding this component please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules (General Module). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Diagram 700-01-00-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9592 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9593 Parking Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9594 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 2 and 3 to 12V DC power and pin 1 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 5 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 2 and measure voltage between pin 4 and pin 1. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Pedal Position Switch <--> [Brake Light Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Pedal Position Switch <--> [Brake Light Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9602 Brake Pedal Position Switch: Description and Operation BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH Typical Brake Pedal Position Switch The Brake Pedal Position (BPP) switch (Figure 21) is used by the PCM to disengage the transmission torque converter clutch and on some applications as an input to the idle speed control for idle quality. On most applications the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and supplies battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. On other applications the BPP switch signal is broadcast over the SCP link via another module to be received by the PCM. On applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stoplamp circuit, if all stoplamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stop amp bulbs has failed. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Pedal Position Switch <--> [Brake Light Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9603 Brake Pedal Position Switch: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the Brake Pedal Position (BPP) switch. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Rotate clockwise and remove the BPP switch. INSTALLATION NOTE: Initial installation of brake pedal position (BPP) switch allows for one adjustment. If additional adjustments are necessary, install a new switch. 1. To unlock, rotate the lock knob counterclockwise to the stop. 2. With the engine running, fully depress and hold the brake pedal. 3. Install the brake pedal position (BPP) switch. 1 Position the BPP switch in the bracket and rotate counterclockwise. 2 Connect the electrical connector. 4. Slowly release the brake pedal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9607 Fog/Driving Lamp Switch: Service Precautions CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver to remove fog lamp switch or damage to the finish panel may occur. Adding tape to the end of a thin tool will reduce marring to the finish panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9608 Fog/Driving Lamp Switch: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver to remove fog lamp switch or damage to the finish panel may occur. Adding tape to the end of a thin tool will reduce marring to the finish panel. 2. Use a thin tool to remove the fog lamp switch. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9612 Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Position the instrument panel center finish panel rearward from the instrument panel. 3. Remove the Hazard flasher switch. 1. Disconnect Electrical connector. 2. Remove the hazard flasher switch. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9616 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Turn Signal Switch: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9620 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Tail Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Find and Use These Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams ^ System Diagrams ^ Grounds Diagrams Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9625 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow. Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the diagram. Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be found. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9626 Fuse And Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. Fuse Circuits Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery. Ground Distribution Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text "partial". Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9627 Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of (1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces). The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number. Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the way out by a spring. Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control. A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the way in. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. circuit Numbering Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification Circuit Numbering: Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting electrical circuits. Function: The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter "S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit. System-Connection (including branch): Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate wires in one connection with the same function. Wire Identification (wire colors): The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9628 Wire Identification Example Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know the following information about the wire: Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit System: AC = Headlamp leveling Connection: 3 = Switch connection A = Branch Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe). Circuit Identification Charts Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9629 Circuit Identification Chart System Codes Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9630 Sample Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9631 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9632 Sample Diagram Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9633 Circuit Identification Chart SYSTEM CODES CHART Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9634 SAMPLE DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9635 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9636 Sample Diagram Electrical Symbols ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9637 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9638 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9639 Types of Diagrams Shown Types of Diagrams Shown Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them. Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations. Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system information suitable for diagnostic operations. Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a relationship to them, are also included. All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding of the system component interactions. Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type. Wire Color Code Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9640 Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9641 Tail Lamp: Diagnostic Aids These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9642 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9643 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9644 Tail Lamp: Electrical Diagrams DETAILED DIAGRAMS Diagram 417-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9645 Diagram 417-01-00-2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9646 Diagram 417-01-00-3 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9647 Diagram 417-01-00-4 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9648 Diagram 417-01-00-5 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9649 Diagram 417-01-00-6 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9650 Diagram 417-01-00-7 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9651 Diagram 417-01-00-8 RELATED DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9652 Diagram 413-00-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9653 Diagram 413-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9654 Tail Lamp: Testing and Inspection For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Lighting and Horns; Parking Lamp; Testing and Inspection. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9655 Tail Lamp: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear lamp assembly. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Pull straight back to remove the rear lamp assembly. ^ Disconnect the electrical connectors. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Trailer Lamps: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview 1. Verify the customer concern by operating the trailer tow lights. 2. Verify the exterior lighting system of the vehicle is operating correctly. If not, refer to the appropriate pinpoint test. See: Pinpoint Tests 3. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage. VISUAL INSPECTION CHART Electrical ^ Central Junction Box (CJB) fuse: 21 (10A) - 16 (10A) ^ Connections ^ Circuity ^ Relays ^ Bulb(s) 4. If the fault is not visually evident, determine the symptom and proceed to the Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9660 Symptom Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9661 Trailer Lamps: Pinpoint Tests Connector Circuit Reference Refer to Vehicle/Diagrams for schematic and connector information. Z1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9662 AA1 - AA2 AC1 AC1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9663 AD1 AE1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9664 AE1 - AE2 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 9665 73III Automotive Meter Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9666 73III Automotive Meter Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Trunk Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Find and Use These Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams ^ System Diagrams ^ Grounds Diagrams Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9671 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow. Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the diagram. Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be found. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9672 Fuse And Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. Fuse Circuits Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery. Ground Distribution Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text "partial". Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9673 Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of (1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces). The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number. Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the way out by a spring. Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control. A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the way in. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. circuit Numbering Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification Circuit Numbering: Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting electrical circuits. Function: The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter "S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit. System-Connection (including branch): Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate wires in one connection with the same function. Wire Identification (wire colors): The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9674 Wire Identification Example Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know the following information about the wire: Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit System: AC = Headlamp leveling Connection: 3 = Switch connection A = Branch Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe). Circuit Identification Charts Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9675 Circuit Identification Chart System Codes Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9676 Sample Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9677 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9678 Sample Diagram Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9679 Circuit Identification Chart SYSTEM CODES CHART Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9680 SAMPLE DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9681 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9682 Sample Diagram Electrical Symbols ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9683 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9684 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9685 Types of Diagrams Shown Types of Diagrams Shown Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them. Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations. Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system information suitable for diagnostic operations. Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a relationship to them, are also included. All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding of the system component interactions. Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type. Wire Color Code Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9686 Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9687 Trunk Lamp: Diagnostic Aids These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9688 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9689 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9690 Diagram 417-02-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Locations > Page 9695 Turn Signal Flasher: Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Turn Signal Bulb: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Position the inner fender well aside. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Remove the pin-type retainers. 3 Remove the screw. 4 Position the inner fender well aside. 3. Remove the lamp socket from the lamp assembly. 4. Remove the bulb. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Turn Signal Switch: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9703 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Vanity Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions How to Find and Use These Diagrams Diagrams are presented in three main categories: ^ Power Distribution Diagrams ^ System Diagrams ^ Grounds Diagrams Note: All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9708 Current Flow (1) Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch were OFF). Splices (3) An arrow indicates that the splice is not shown completely. If the splice is not shown completely in the diagram but is complete within the set of diagrams, the number of the diagram where the splice is completed is indicated next to the arrow. Boxes (4) A thin dashed box on a diagram indicates a pan of the circuit which is only present for a particular vehicle model, country, or option. These qualifiers are shown next to the box on the diagram. Component Names and Notes (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included here. Component Identification Numbers (6) Each component on each diagram has a component identification number located to the upper right hand side of the component. By finding this number in the A-Z Component List, the Component Location description for that component can easily be found. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9709 Fuse And Relay Information Fuse and Relay Information Fuse Box/Locations and Relay Box/Locations contain views of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and relays are identified. Power Distribution Power Distribution "Power Distribution" shows the current feed circuit. The Current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. Fuse Circuits Fuse Circuits The first diagram in "Fuse Circuits" shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Any subsequent diagrams will show circuits feeding the fuse, all the way back to the battery. Ground Distribution Ground Distribution "Ground Distribution" contains the diagrams that show the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual sets of diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Splices with a large number of wires may be split in order to improve the graphic representation. A thin line is used to indicate the unity of the splice. The splice is then marked with the additional text "partial". Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9710 Component Identification Information Component Identification Information consists of (1) A-Z Component List, (2) Component Location Views, and (3) Connector views (Faces). The A-Z Component List helps the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given. The Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. The Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number. Vacuum Motor Operation Vacuum motors operate like electrical solenoids, mechanically pushing or pulling a shaft between two fixed positions. When vacuum is not applied, the shaft is pushed all the way out by a spring. Some vacuum motors can position the actuating arm at any position between fully extended and fully retracted. The Servo is operated by a control valve that applies varying amounts of vacuum to the motor. The higher the vacuum level, the greater the retraction of the motor arm. Servo Motors work nearly the same way as two-position motors, except for the way the vacuum is applied. Servo Motors are generally larger and provide a calibrated control. A double diaphragm motor has three positions (it is actually two motors in one housing). When the top port gets vacuum, the shaft pulls halfway in. When both ports get vacuum, the shaft pulls all the way in. WARNINGS ^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. ^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. ^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. ^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. ^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. ^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. ^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tall pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. ^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. An explosion could occur. ^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. ^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose clothing. circuit Numbering Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification Circuit Numbering: Ford has introduced a world-wide uniform system for circuit numbering and wire identification. The system is called Function, System-Connection, or FSC for short. FSC was developed mainly to assist in vehicle development and production processes, but is also helpful in troubleshooting electrical circuits. Function: The first two digits identify the function of the wire. In this case, the function code includes the letter "S" to indicate it is an additionally switched function. The function part of the circuit number is the most helpful to the technician in troubleshooting a circuit. System-Connection (including branch): Systems are related to subsets of the vehicle circuitry. Immediately following the system letter code is the connection number specific to that system. A branch identification is used to differentiate wires in one connection with the same function. Wire Identification (wire colors): The wire identification consists of a basic color and an identification color, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the schematics the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The basic and identification colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. Each function code has a specific basic color associated with it. A colored stripe is used to differentiate several wires with the same function within one component connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9711 Wire Identification Example Using the circuit number and wire identification used in the Wire Identification Example, we know the following information about the wire: Function: 31 = Ground S = Additionally switched circuit System: AC = Headlamp leveling Connection: 3 = Switch connection A = Branch Size: 1.5 = 1.5 sq.mm Color: BK = Basic color black (determined by function 31) RD = Identification color red (red stripe). Circuit Identification Charts Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9712 Circuit Identification Chart System Codes Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9713 Sample Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9714 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9715 Sample Diagram Circuit Identification Charts and System Codes CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS Circuit Identification Chart Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9716 Circuit Identification Chart SYSTEM CODES CHART Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9717 SAMPLE DIAGRAMS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9718 Sample Diagram Sample Diagram Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9719 Sample Diagram Electrical Symbols ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9720 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9721 Symbols Symbols Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9722 Types of Diagrams Shown Types of Diagrams Shown Block Diagrams can be found at the beginning of some sets of diagrams. These block diagrams provide an overview of the systems that are detailed on the detailed diagrams that follow them. Block diagrams are not suitable for diagnostic operations. Detailed Diagrams (usually provided in sets of more than one diagram) provide detailed system information suitable for diagnostic operations. Related Diagrams that are not an intergal part of the detailed diagrams, but may have a relationship to them, are also included. All components connected to the control module are shown in order to provide easy understanding of the system component interactions. Unless otherwise identified, diagrams shown in a set will be of the Detailed Diagrams type. Wire Color Code Identification Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9723 Wire colors BK : Black BN : Brown BU : Blue GN : Green GY : Gray LG : Lightgreen NA : Natural OG : Orange RD : Red SR : Silver VT : Violet WH : White YE : Yellow Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9724 Vanity Lamp: Diagnostic Aids These illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9725 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9726 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9727 Diagram 417-02-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9733 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9734 Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9735 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9739 Heated Glass Element Switch: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the audio unit. 2. Push outward on the rear window defrost switch to remove it from the instrument panel center finish panel. ^ Disconnect the electrical connector. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C/Audio - Defroster/Antenna Grid Diagnosis/Repair Rear Defogger: Technical Service Bulletins A/C/Audio - Defroster/Antenna Grid Diagnosis/Repair TSB 04-24-5 12/13/04 REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER GRID/INTEGRAL ANTENNA DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR TERMINAL TAB REPAIR FORD: 1999-2000 Contour 1999-2002 Escort 1999-2003 Escort ZX2 1999-2005 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2005 Focus 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 1999-2003 Windstar 1999-2005 Expedition, Explorer 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Escape 2004-2005 F-150, Freestar 2005 Escape Hybrid LINCOLN: 1999-2002 Continental 1999-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS 1999-2005 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator MERCURY: 1999 Tracer 1999-2000 Mystique 1999-2005 and Marquis, Sable 2005 Montego 1999-2002 Villager 1999-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey 2005 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 04-18-9 to update vehicle applications and service procedure. ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit inoperative electric rear window defroster (heated back lite) grid lines, integral antenna concerns causing radio reception issues or terminal tabs pulled from the rear window glass. ACTION Follow the diagnostic and repair procedures included in this article to inspect and service rear defroster grid lines, integral antenna concerns or broken terminal tabs. SERVICE PROCEDURE Warrantable/Non Warrantable repairs Warrantable grid line repairs typically can be identified by one inoperative grid line with a small discoloration at the area of concern, approximately the size of a pinhead. Grid line(s) that are scratched or have the silver material removed are not warrantable and should be addressed with the customer. Replacement of backglass for grid line or bus bar tarnishing is not a warrantable repair. Tarnishing of the silver lines or bus bars is a normal condition. Please refer to the Heated Back Lite Damageability Job Aid for additional information and examples of defects and damage. NOTE THE GRID LINE MATERIAL IS NOT EMBEDDED INTO THE GLASS BUT IS BAKED TO THE GLASS SURFACE AND CONSEQUENTLY CAN BE SCRAPED OFF. INOPERATIVE LINES MAY APPEAR TO THE EYE TO BE UNDAMAGED DUE TO RESIDUE REMAINING ON Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C/Audio - Defroster/Antenna Grid Diagnosis/Repair > Page 9744 THE GLASS AND WILL REQUIRE DIAGNOSIS WITH A VOLTMETER OR 12V TEST LAMP AS EXPLAINED IN THIS ARTICLE. Examples Of Non-Warrantable Grid Line Damage ^ Ice scraper damage to grid lines ^ Animal scratches on grid lines ^ Window tint film/removal of the film which damages grid lines ^ Stickers placed over grids which upon removal, removes the grid line material ^ License plate (steel type placed against the inside of back glass) which rubs on the grid line causing damage ^ Temporary license plate (paper stuck on to the inside of the back glass) which upon removal removes grid line material ^ Cargo or lumber rubbing against the glass which removes grid line material ^ Cellular phone antenna installation/removal which damages grid line material NOTE AN UNDAMAGED GRIDLINE WILL HAVE SMALL RIDGES THAT PROJECT ABOVE THE SURFACE OF THE GLASS AND CAN EASILY BE FELT WHEN RUNNING A FINGERNAIL ACROSS THEM. GRIDLINES THAT HAVE BEEN "RAZOR BLADED" WILL FEEL SMOOTH WHEN A FINGERNAIL IS DRAGGED ACROSS THE AFFECTED AREA. THERE MAY BE SOME RESIDUE LEFT ON THE GLASS THAT APPEARS TO BE GRID MATERIAL BUT A CHECK WITH A VOLTMETER OR 12V TEST LAMP, AS EXPLAINED IN THIS ARTICLE, WILL CONFIRM AN OPEN CIRCUIT. GRID LINE INOPERATIVE - DIAGNOSTICS 1. Reference Workshop Manual Section 501-11 and the Wiring Diagram Section 56 to verify power and ground to the back-glass. 2. Connect a test lamp or DVOM to a good body ground. 3. Turn the ignition key to the run position and depress and release the rear defroster button to turn the system on. THE GRID IS ENERGIZED FOR APPROXIMATELY 10 MINUTES EACH TIME THE DEFROSTER BUTTON IS PRESSED. 4. Starting from the top grid line at the center of the back-glass, touch the test lamp or DVOM + lead to each grid line. (Use caution not to damage grid lines). The DVOM should read approximately 1/2 of the battery voltage on each line at the center of the back-glass. If using a test light, the bulb should be approximately the same brightness on each line from top to bottom. If the DVOM or light indicates a high voltage or no voltage on any grid line, move along the concern grid line with the + test lead or test lamp until the voltage changes suddenly. This is the area of concern, use chalk to mark the area of concern and mark the outside of the glass at that same area. 5. Repair per the Grid Line Repair Procedure. GRID LINE REPAIR PROCEDURE NOTE LONG GAPS ARE ALMOST ALWAYS DUE TO DAMAGE AND ARE NOT WARRANTABLE, HOWEVER THEY CAN BE REPAIRED. THE LONGER THE GAP THE MORE IMPORTANT IT IS TO APPLY A MINIMUM SIX (6) COATS OF CONDUCTIVE REPAIR MATERIAL WITH THE FIVE (5) MINUTE DRY TIME BETWEEN EACH COAT. APPLYING LESS COATS OR NOT ALLOWING DRY TIME BETWEEN COATS WILL PRODUCE REPAIRED RESISTANCE THAT IS GREATER THAN OEM RESISTANCE, RESULTING IN POOR DEFROST PERFORMANCE AND EXCESSIVE LOCALIZED HEATING. REPAIRED LONG GAPS ARE GENERALLY NOT VISUALLY PLEASING UNLESS EXTREME CARE IS TAKEN WHEN TAPING AFFECTED GRID LINE AREAS. NOTE IF THE BROWN COLOR UNDER THE GRID LINE IS DAMAGED OR MISSING (THIS IS VERY RARE), IT WILL BE NECESSARY TO APPLY BROWN ACRYLIC LACQUER TOUCH-UP PAINT FOR COLOR MATCH. THIS PAINT MUST MEET SPECIFICATION ESR-M2P100-C AND SHOULD BE APPLIED TO THE GLASS PRIOR TO APPLYING THE REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER REPAIR COMPOUND. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C/Audio - Defroster/Antenna Grid Diagnosis/Repair > Page 9745 Service inoperative grid lines on rear window glass using Motorcraft Defroster Repair PM-11 or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESB-M4J58-A as follows: Surface Preparation 1. Bring vehicle inside and warm it to 60° F (16° C) or above. 2. Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the rear window glass as this may cause damage to the grid lines. Clean the entire grid line service area with Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC-23 or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESR-M14P5-A to remove all dirt, wax, grease, oil or other foreign matter. It is important that the repair area be clean and dry. NOTE THE REPAIR AREA HOWEVER SHOULD BE CLEANED WITH STEEL WOOL OR AN ABRASIVE PAD SUCH AS SCOTCHBRITE TO REMOVE GRIME. Mixing The bottle of Rear Window Defroster Repair compound and touch-up paint (if needed) must be at room temperature. Shake the bottle for at least one (1) minute for thorough mixing. Shake frequently during use. Application 1. Mark location of open grid on the outside of the back window glass (performed in diagnostics). Place protective covering over the package tray as necessary. 2. Using "fine line tape", mask off the area directly above and below open grid line (Figure 1). It is best to extend the tape 26 mm (1") beyond the concern area in both directions. The open should be at the center of the mask and tape gap must be no wider than the existing grid line. Other types of tape may be used but end results of the repair may not appear as visually acceptable due to ease of application and tape edge finish. 3. If the brown layer of the grid is not broken or missing, apply only the silver grid repair compound to the open grid line. Apply the correct coating in several smooth continuous strokes (allowing five (5) minutes drying time between coats) across the open grid line area using the brush applicator in the cap. Extend the service coating at least 6 mm (.25") on both sides of the open grid line area. Apply a minimum of six (6) coats of the grid repair compound. 4. If both brown and silver layers of the grid are broken or missing, apply a coating of brown lacquer touch-up paint across the open line area first. Take care to paint only the area missing the color. Two (2) coats may be necessary to obtain the proper color. Allow the touch-up paint to dry at least five (5) minutes between coats. Apply six (6) coats of grid repair compound. NOTE THE INTERIOR SIDE OF THE GRID LINES ARE NOT PAINTED, BUT DUE TO THE SILVER TARNISHING WILL TEND TO CHANGE THE GRID TO A GOLD OR BROWN COLOR. THE REPAIRED AREA WILL BE BRIGHT SILVER AND WILL ALSO TARNISH OVER Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C/Audio - Defroster/Antenna Grid Diagnosis/Repair > Page 9746 TIME TO MATCH THE REST OF THE GRID. 5. After five (5) minutes of dry time of the final coat of grid repair compound, remove the tape, step outside and inspect the repaired area. If the repair compound is visible above or below the grid, the excess can be removed. This may be done by placing a single-edge razor blade on the back window glass parallel to grid and scrape gently toward grid. A wider/thicker line will perform better but may not be cosmetically appealing. CAUTION BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE GRID LINE WITH RAZOR BLADE. VERIFY ALL OF THE GRID LINES FUNCTION PROPERLY WHEN FINISHED. Curing The service coating will air-dry in approximately one (1) minute and the system can be energized after five minutes. Maximum hardness and adhesion occur after approximately 24 hours. SOLDER METHOD OF LEAD TERMINAL NOTE THE REAR WINDOW MUST BE AT A MINIMUM OF 60° F (16° C) BEFORE A REPAIR IS MADE. PLACE PROTECTIVE COVERING OVER THE PACKAGE TRAY AS NECESSARY. The new terminal will cover the original terminal location, but must be placed so that the new terminal conductive areas will be placed on a good conductive base. This area should be cleaned with steel wool or an abrasive pad to remove grime from the buss-bar. The area should then be cleaned with Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, ZC-23, or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESR-M14P5-A to remove all dirt, wax, grease, oil or other foreign matter. It is important that the repair area be clean and dry and appear metallic. Depending on the buss-bar condition, rigorous polishing with steel wool may be required. Please note that the entire buss-bar may be cleaned to improve appearance. CAUTION DO NOT USE ANY TYPE OF FLAME TORCH OR FLAME HEATED SOLDERING GUN FOR THIS PROCEDURE. TESTING INDICATED INADEQUATE HEAT GENERATION AT THE TIP AND THE EXHAUST HEAT CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO PLASTIC TRIM PARTS IN THE AREA. USE ONLY AN ELECTRIC SOLDERING GUN WITH 100 WATTS OR MORE OF POWER. BEFORE USING THE SOLDERING GUN, BE SURE TO MELT A SMALL AMOUNT OF ROSIN CORE SOLDER TO THE TIP. THE SOLDER WILL ASSIST IN ACHIEVING BETTER HEAT TRANSFER FROM THE SOLDERING GUN TIP TO THE NEW TERMINAL. The new terminal has pre-applied solder, flux and temperature sensitive paint. The paint provides a visual indication when the terminal has reached the proper temperature to melt the solder on the terminal. When the proper temperature is achieved the temperature paint will liquefy and change color. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C/Audio - Defroster/Antenna Grid Diagnosis/Repair > Page 9747 Use terminal type A (Figure 2) for all tab locations except on the Focus vehicle line. For the Focus, use type B (Figure 3). NOTE DEPENDING ON THE ORIGINAL TERMINAL LOCATION, AND WHETHER THE TERMINAL IS COVERED BY PILLAR TRIM, WILL DETERMINE WHERE TO LOCATE THE NEW TERMINAL. SOME GRID LINE BUSS-BARS MAY ONLY ALLOW THE PLACEMENT OF THE TERMINAL ABOVE OR BELOW THE ORIGINAL TAB LOCATION DUE TO SPACE LIMITATIONS, BUT FOR MOST VEHICLE APPLICATIONS THE REPLACEMENT TAB LOCATION WILL COVER THE ORIGINAL TAB LOCATION BUT STILL ALLOW THE REPLACEMENT TAB TO ATTACH TO THE BUSS-BAR ON GOOD CONDUCTIVE MATERIAL. 1. Place the replacement terminal over the original tab location making sure the conductive areas of the terminal will be on a good conductive area. Do not place the terminal tab foot on the original location which does not have conductive material (figure 4). 2. Hold the terminal in place with an item such as regular lead pencil at a 90 degree angle from the terminal. (Terminal type B can be held in place with tape.) (Holding at other than a 90 degree angle may allow the terminal to slip when the solder liquefies). 3. Place the soldering gun tip on the top of the terminal but not on the painted areas of the tab. Energize the soldering gun and watch for the painted area of the terminal to liquefy and change color. The paint should liquefy in approximately 25-45 seconds after heating. As soon as the paint color completely changes on either side of the terminal, de-energize the soldering gun and continue to hold the terminal in place with the soldering gun and pencil for an additional thirty (30) seconds. 4. Remove the soldering gun and pencil from the terminal. The terminal should be allowed to cool for another two (2) minutes before the wiring lead is attached to the terminal. 5. Attach the electrical lead connection to this terminal, turn on the rear defroster, and verify operation. Parts Block Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C/Audio - Defroster/Antenna Grid Diagnosis/Repair > Page 9748 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 042405A Repair Grid Lines (Includes 0.7 Hr. Time To Diagnose And Recheck) 042405B Replace Terminal (Includes 0.4 Hr. Time To Diagnose And Recheck) 042405C Repair Grid Lines And 0.8 Hr. Replace Terminal (Includes Time To Diagnose And Recheck) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7042006 28 Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Diagram 700-01-00-1 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9753 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9754 Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9755 COMPONENT TESTING PROCEDURE (Voltage Applied) Disconnect the ohmmeter; connect pins 30 and 85 to 12V DC power and pin 86 to ground. Measure voltage between pin 87 and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, continue with the test. If not, replace the relay. Disconnect power from pin 85 and measure voltage between pin 87a and pin 86. If the voltage is 12V, the relay is okay. If not, replace the relay. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9760 Heated Glass Element Switch: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the audio unit. 2. Push outward on the rear window defrost switch to remove it from the instrument panel center finish panel. ^ Disconnect the electrical connector. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 9765 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Adjust Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 9766 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Rear Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Left Rear Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 9769 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 9770 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 9771 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 9772 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Passenger Side Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 9773 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 9774 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Right Rear Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 9775 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9776 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair REMOVAL NOTE: The removal and installation procedures for all window control switches are similar. Front door 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. All doors 2. Release the locking clip and remove the window control switch. ^ Disconnect the electrical connector. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 9783 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 9788 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Adjust Switch Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 9789 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Rear Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Left Rear Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 9792 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 9793 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 9794 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 9795 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Passenger Side Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 9796 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 9797 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Right Rear Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Rear > Page 9798 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9799 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair REMOVAL NOTE: The removal and installation procedures for all window control switches are similar. Front door 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. All doors 2. Release the locking clip and remove the window control switch. ^ Disconnect the electrical connector. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Glass Top Run Window Frame: Service and Repair Front Door Glass Top Run REMOVAL 1. Remove the front door window glass. 2. Remove the front door interior sail panel. ^ If equipped, disconnect the speaker electrical connector. 3. Remove the door glass top run bolts. 4. Remove the door glass top run. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Glass Top Run > Page 9804 Window Frame: Service and Repair Rear Door Glass Top Run REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear door window regulator. 2. Position the rear door window glass to the full down position. 3. Remove the screws and the rear door exterior sail panel. 4. Remove the rear door interior glass weatherstrip. 5. Remove the rear door exterior belt line moulding. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Glass Top Run > Page 9805 6. Remove the rear door glass top run bolts. 7. Position the rear door window glass down and forward. 8. Remove the rear door glass top run. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the exterior mirror. 2. Remove the screw and the door trim panel bracket. 3. Position the water shield aside. 4. Remove the front door interior glass weatherstrip. 5. Remove the front door exterior belt line moulding. 6. Lower the front door window glass to gain access to the screws. 7. Remove the front door window glass screws. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 9810 8. Remove the front door window glass. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Open the liftgate glass. 2. Remove the two liftgate nut access covers (one on each side). 3. Disconnect the rear window glass electrical harness connector. 4. Disconnect the heated window grid wire electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the two liftgate window glass cylinders. 1 Slide the spring retainer to the end of the socket. 2 Disconnect the socket from the ball stud. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9814 6. Remove the two liftgate window glass hinge nuts. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Transfer components as necessary. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair Quarter Window Glass: Service and Repair REAR QUARTER WINDOW GLASS REMOVAL 1. Remove the C-pillar trim panel. 2. Remove the D-pillar trim panel. 3. Remove the rear quarter window glass. 1 Remove the nuts. 2 Remove the window glass. 4. Remove the excess foam butyl from the rear quarter window opening. INSTALLATION 1. Apply foam butyl or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSB-M2G234-C to the rear quarter window opening. NOTE: When applying foam butyl, leave a slight overlap at the rear of the window opening to allow drainage. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9818 2. Install the rear quarter window glass. ^ Tighten the nuts in the sequence shown. NOTE: Loosely install the nuts before tightening. 3. Install the D-pillar trim panel. 4. Install the C-pillar trim panel. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Glass: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear door glass top run. 2. Remove the rear door window glass. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair REMOVAL All vehicles 1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Remove the screw and the front door trim panel bracket. 3. Position the water shield aside. 4. Lower the front door window glass to gain access to the screws. 5. Remove the front door window glass screws. 6. Support the front door window glass in the full up position. Vehicles with power windows 7. Disconnect the front door power window regulator motor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 9826 8. Remove the front door power window regulator assembly. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Remove the nuts. Vehicles with manual windows 9. Remove the front door window regulator assembly. 1 Remove the bolt. 2 Remove the nuts. INSTALLATION All vehicles 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Cycle the door window glass to make sure of correct door window glass engagement. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair REMOVAL All vehicles 1. Remove the rear door trim panel. 2. Remove the screw and the rear door trim panel bracket. 3. Position the water shield aside. 4. Lower the rear door window glass to gain access to the screws. 5. Remove the rear door window glass screws. 6. Support the rear door window glass in the full up position. Vehicles with power windows 7. Disconnect the rear door power window regulator electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 9830 8. Remove the rear door power window regulator assembly. 1 Remove the bolts 2 Remove the nuts. Vehicles with manual windows 9. Remove the rear door window regulator assembly. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Remove the nuts. INSTALLATION All vehicles 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Cycle the door glass to make sure of correct window glass engagement. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Windshield: Technician Safety Information WARNING: TO PREVENT GLASS SPLINTERS FROM ENTERING THE EYES OR CUTTING HANDS, WEAR SAFETY GLASSES AND HEAVY GLOVES WHEN CUTTING THE GLASS FROM THE VEHICLE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 9835 Windshield: Vehicle Damage Warnings CAUTION: ^ After installing the urethane installed glass, the vehicle should not be driven until the urethane adhesive has cured. The curing times at temperatures above 13°C (55°F) and relative humidity above 59% is 12-24 hours (Refer to the Essex drive away chart for the cure times as temperatures and humidity vary.). Inadequate curing of the urethane adhesive may adversely affect the strength of the urethane bond. ^ Do not scratch the pinch weld area. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 9836 Windshield: Service and Repair SPECIAL TOOL(S) REMOVAL WARNING: TO PREVENT GLASS SPLINTERS FROM ENTERING THE EYES OR CUTTING HANDS, WEAR SAFETY GLASSES AND HEAVY GLOVES WHEN CUTTING THE GLASS FROM THE VEHICLE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 1. Open the four A-pillar passenger assist handle covers. 2. Remove the two A-pillar passenger assist handles. 1 Remove the four bolts. 2 Remove the two A-pillar passenger assist handles. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 9837 3. Remove the two windshield side garnish mouldings. 4. Remove the overhead console. 1 Open the front console door. 2 Remove the screws. 3 Remove the overhead console. ^ If equipped, disconnect electrical connector. 5. Remove the two sun visors and two clips. 1 Remove the six screws. 2 Remove the sun visors and clips. 6. Remove the driver and passenger assist handles. 7. Remove the interior rear view mirror. 8. Lower the front portion of the headliner. 9. Remove the cowl grille. 10. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any dirt or foreign material from the pinch weld. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 9838 11. Using the special tool, cut the urethane adhesive from the windshield glass starting at the top center and work toward the bottom corners. NOTE: Lubricate the urethane adhesive with water to aid the special tool when cutting. 12. Using the special tool, distance the windshield glass from the body. 13. Using the special tool, cut the remaining urethane adhesive and remove the windshield glass. 14. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any foreign material or dirt from the pinch weld. INSTALLATION CAUTION: After installing the urethane installed glass, the vehicle should not be driven until the urethane adhesive has cured. The curing times at temperatures above 13°C (55°F) and relative humidity above 59% is 12-24 hours (Refer to the Essex drive away chart for the cure times as temperatures and humidity vary.). Inadequate curing of the urethane adhesive may adversely affect the strength of the urethane bond. 1. Dry fit the windshield glass, making alignment marks with tape or non-staining grease pencil. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 9839 2. Trim the remaining urethane adhesive on the pinch weld to within the specification. ^ The existing urethane adhesive surface should be smooth and free of cuts and contamination. CAUTION: Do not scratch the pinch weld area. 3. Use a wool applicator to apply Urethane Metal Primer Essex U-413 meeting Ford specification WSB-M2G234-C to any exposed metal on the pinch weld. Allow 6 to 10 minutes to dry. 4. If reinstalling the original windshield glass, remove the excess urethane adhesive and the windshield moulding. 5. Clean the inside of the windshield glass surface with an alcohol-free cleaner making sure the ceramic coated area is clean. 6. If installing a new windshield glass, apply Urethane Glass Prep Essex U-401 meeting Ford specification WSB-M2G314-B twice around the glass surface to be urethaned. NOTE: Wipe off the glass prep immediately after each application because it flash dries. 7. If installing a new windshield, apply Glass Primer Essex U-402 meeting Ford specification WSB-M5B280-C to the same area that was prepped in the pervious step. Allow five minutes to dry. 8. Apply foam dam meeting Ford specification EBS-M3G137-A to the bottom of the windshield glass. 9. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 9840 10. Apply a bead of Urethane Adhesive Essex 400-HV or Essex U-216, which meets Ford specification WSB-M2G316-B to the sides and top of the windshield glass. 11. Apply a bead of Urethane Adhesive Essex 400-HV which meets Ford specification WSB-M2G316-B to the bottom of the windshield glass outside the foam dam. 12. Install the windshield glass aligning it to the marks previously made. 13. After the windshield glass is set, check for water leaks and add urethane adhesive where needed. 14. If necessary, remove excess urethane adhesive from the outside surface of the windshield glass. 15. Install the cowl grille. 16. Reposition the front portion of the headliner. 17. Install the overhead console. 1 Position the overhead console. ^ If equipped , connect the electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 9841 2 Install the screws. 18. Install the two sun visors and two clips. 1 Position the sun visors and clips. 2 Install the six screws. 19. Install the interior rear view mirror. 20. Install the two windshield side garnish mouldings. 21. Install the two A-pillar passenger assist handles. 22. Install the driver and passenger assist handles. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 9842 Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 00S49 Date: 001101 Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement 00S49 SAFETY RECALL Certain 2001 Model Year Escape Vehicles - Windshield Wiper Module Inspection and Possible Replacement November 2000 Advance Announcement Dealer Letter Attachment I ^ Administrative Information Attachment II ^ Labor Allowances ^ Parts Ordering Information Attachment III ^ Technical Information Owner Letter Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9853 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9854 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9855 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this recall. PLEASE NOTE Correct all vehicles in stock before delivery. PROMPTLY CORRECT Promptly correct all affected vehicles on your dealer VIN list which you will receive in the Ford Dealer Consolidated Communicator (FDCC). Also, correct other eligible vehicles which are brought to your dealership. DEALER-OWNER CONTACT If you have recently sold a vehicle, please contact that owner immediately and provide them a copy of the owner letter and schedule a service date. REGIONAL CONTACT Advise regional office if an owner: ^ cannot be contacted. ^ does not make a service date. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using DWE. ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. OWNER REFUNDS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9856 Ford Motor Company will refund owner-paid wiper module repairs made before the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair was made away from the servicing dealer). Refer to ACESII manual for refund information. RENTAL CARS For vehicles which fail the inspection, and if parts are not available, Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except for fuel which will be at the owner's expense. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall claim. Follow ESP cost guidelines. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS CRITICAL PARTS SUPPLY NOTE - PLEASE READ CAREFULLY Parts will be in limited supply for several weeks. Therefore, parts will be prioritized for vehicles which Ford records show as sold as of November 16, 2000. Dealers are to report the results of inspections on all affected units that fail the inspection (for the first 30 days) by calling the Recall Hotline at 1-800-325-5621 with the following required information: -- VIN number -- Results of (4) ball stud inspections -- Results of (4) plastic ball socket inspections -- Dealer P&A; Code Based on the inspection results reported. dealers will be advised if the vehicle can be released or if it must be held for repair. Please note that FCS-700 tags will be issued and all replaced parts must be returned to the Warranty Parts Return Center where they will be inspected to assure that only suspect parts are being replaced. The cost of parts not properly inspected or not returned will be charged back to the dealer. A fair and equitable distribution of parts will be made based on the number of vehicles which fail the inspection and are properly reported to the Recall Hotline. Each Dealer who calls in will receive a shipment of parts for reported units before any dealer receives a second shipment. No seed stock distribution is planned at this time. No parts will be sent until inspected units are reported to the Recall Hotline. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9857 Please note that vehicles sold after November 16, 2000 will not receive priority handling for parts. We urge you to carefully conduct inspections and manage your allocation of parts for this program. NOTE: All orders must be placed through the Recall Hotline (1-800 325-5621) for the first 30 days, until December 21, 2000. After that date, use the normal order process. ORDER INFORMATION DOR/COR DOR/COR number 50197 identifies parts ordered for this campaign through the Recall Hotline (1-800-325-5621). FCS-700 TAGS FCS-700 Tags will be issued for each claim involving a wiper module (less motor) replacement. These returned assemblies will be inspected and dealers will be "charged-back" for units that pass inspection criteria. Less than 6% of the wiper module assemblies will require replacement. DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to: ^ DOES II ^ Updated Price Book EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW The affected vehicles in this program may require the replacement of the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly (wiper module assembly less motor). A two-part inspection must be performed to determine if replacement is required. The inspection includes the following: ^ An inspection of the wiper link ball studs. ^ An inspection of the wiper link plastic ball sockets. If the vehicle fails the inspection process, a new windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly must be installed. This procedure gives details of the inspection process and refers you to the service procedures in the Workshop Manual if replacement is required. INSPECTION CAUTION Whenever the wiper arms are removed and reinstalled, proper torquing of the wiper arm nuts is critical. 1. Verify that the wipers are in the "PARK" position and the key is in the "OFF" position before proceeding with inspection. 2. Remove the windshield wiper arm nuts, then remove the wiper arms. 3. Remove the left side cowl top vent panel. 4. Disconnect the wiper motor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9858 5. Remove the three (3) bolts, then remove the wiper module. See Figure 1. IMPORTANT: USING A PERMANENT MARKER, PLACE A MARK ON THE WIPER LINKS NEXT TO ALL BALL STUDS/SOCKETS THAT FAIL INSPECTION. DEFECTIVE WINDSHIELD WIPER MOUNTING ARM AND PIVOT SHAFT ASSEMBLIES MUST BE RETURNED TO THE WARRANTY PARTS RETURN CENTER. SEE THE ATTACHMENT II FOR MORE INFORMATION. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9859 6. Inspect the four (4) ball studs (positions A-D). The backside of each ball stud should be riveted (mushroomed) over as shown in the illustration. Please note, the ball stud at position B is the most suspect. See Figure 2 for ball stud location and Figure 3 for detail of ball studs. ^ If ANY of the ball studs are not mushroomed over, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. ^ If all of the ball studs are mushroomed over, continue the inspection procedure. 7. Visually inspect the tabs on the four (4) plastic ball sockets located at the ends of the wiper links. Each tab should be undamaged and fully engaged in the corresponding hole located in the wiper arm link. See Figure 2 for location of ball sockets and Figure 4 for detail of tabs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9860 a. If the tab is missing, damaged, or detached from the rim on ANY of the sockets, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 5. b. If the tab is aligned but not fully engaged into the corresponding hole in the link on ANY one of the sockets but is not otherwise damaged or detached from the rim, press the tab with your thumb (no tools) to fully engage it in the hole. If force greater than thumb pressure is required to engage the tab into the hole, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 6. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9861 c. If the tab is not aligned with the corresponding hole in the link on ANY one of the sockets, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 7. d. Beginning at the tab, carefully lift the lip of the rubber seal using a flat screwdriver or similar tool. Verify that there is a continuous rim of plastic material around the base of EACH socket. If there are any sections of material broken away or any visible damage (cracks) on ANY one of the sockets, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9862 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 8. e. Inspect the dome section of the sockets for cracks. If grease is present on the dome of the socket, this may be evidence of a crack. If ANY one of the sockets is cracked, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 9. If the wiper module passes all the inspections described in A-E, no replacement is required. 8. Install the wiper module. Tighten the bolts to 12 Nm (107 lb-in). WARNING: THE IGNITION KEY MUST BE IN THE "OFF" POSITION BEFORE CONNECTING THE WIPER MOTOR. IF NOT, SUDDEN MOVEMENT OF THE WIPER LINKS MAY OCCUR WHEN THE MOTOR IS CONNECTED. 9. Connect the wiper motor electrical connector. 10. Install the left side cowl vent panel. CAUTION The wiper motor must be in the "PARK" position before installing the wiper arms or damage to the vehicle will result. 11. Cycle and park the wiper motor. CAUTION Proper torquing of the wiper arm nuts is critical. 12. Install the windshield wiper arms. Tighten the nuts to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9863 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9864 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 00S49 Date: 001101 Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement 00S49 SAFETY RECALL Certain 2001 Model Year Escape Vehicles - Windshield Wiper Module Inspection and Possible Replacement November 2000 Advance Announcement Dealer Letter Attachment I ^ Administrative Information Attachment II ^ Labor Allowances ^ Parts Ordering Information Attachment III ^ Technical Information Owner Letter Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9870 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9871 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9872 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this recall. PLEASE NOTE Correct all vehicles in stock before delivery. PROMPTLY CORRECT Promptly correct all affected vehicles on your dealer VIN list which you will receive in the Ford Dealer Consolidated Communicator (FDCC). Also, correct other eligible vehicles which are brought to your dealership. DEALER-OWNER CONTACT If you have recently sold a vehicle, please contact that owner immediately and provide them a copy of the owner letter and schedule a service date. REGIONAL CONTACT Advise regional office if an owner: ^ cannot be contacted. ^ does not make a service date. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using DWE. ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. OWNER REFUNDS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9873 Ford Motor Company will refund owner-paid wiper module repairs made before the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair was made away from the servicing dealer). Refer to ACESII manual for refund information. RENTAL CARS For vehicles which fail the inspection, and if parts are not available, Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except for fuel which will be at the owner's expense. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall claim. Follow ESP cost guidelines. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS CRITICAL PARTS SUPPLY NOTE - PLEASE READ CAREFULLY Parts will be in limited supply for several weeks. Therefore, parts will be prioritized for vehicles which Ford records show as sold as of November 16, 2000. Dealers are to report the results of inspections on all affected units that fail the inspection (for the first 30 days) by calling the Recall Hotline at 1-800-325-5621 with the following required information: -- VIN number -- Results of (4) ball stud inspections -- Results of (4) plastic ball socket inspections -- Dealer P&A; Code Based on the inspection results reported. dealers will be advised if the vehicle can be released or if it must be held for repair. Please note that FCS-700 tags will be issued and all replaced parts must be returned to the Warranty Parts Return Center where they will be inspected to assure that only suspect parts are being replaced. The cost of parts not properly inspected or not returned will be charged back to the dealer. A fair and equitable distribution of parts will be made based on the number of vehicles which fail the inspection and are properly reported to the Recall Hotline. Each Dealer who calls in will receive a shipment of parts for reported units before any dealer receives a second shipment. No seed stock distribution is planned at this time. No parts will be sent until inspected units are reported to the Recall Hotline. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9874 Please note that vehicles sold after November 16, 2000 will not receive priority handling for parts. We urge you to carefully conduct inspections and manage your allocation of parts for this program. NOTE: All orders must be placed through the Recall Hotline (1-800 325-5621) for the first 30 days, until December 21, 2000. After that date, use the normal order process. ORDER INFORMATION DOR/COR DOR/COR number 50197 identifies parts ordered for this campaign through the Recall Hotline (1-800-325-5621). FCS-700 TAGS FCS-700 Tags will be issued for each claim involving a wiper module (less motor) replacement. These returned assemblies will be inspected and dealers will be "charged-back" for units that pass inspection criteria. Less than 6% of the wiper module assemblies will require replacement. DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to: ^ DOES II ^ Updated Price Book EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW The affected vehicles in this program may require the replacement of the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly (wiper module assembly less motor). A two-part inspection must be performed to determine if replacement is required. The inspection includes the following: ^ An inspection of the wiper link ball studs. ^ An inspection of the wiper link plastic ball sockets. If the vehicle fails the inspection process, a new windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly must be installed. This procedure gives details of the inspection process and refers you to the service procedures in the Workshop Manual if replacement is required. INSPECTION CAUTION Whenever the wiper arms are removed and reinstalled, proper torquing of the wiper arm nuts is critical. 1. Verify that the wipers are in the "PARK" position and the key is in the "OFF" position before proceeding with inspection. 2. Remove the windshield wiper arm nuts, then remove the wiper arms. 3. Remove the left side cowl top vent panel. 4. Disconnect the wiper motor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9875 5. Remove the three (3) bolts, then remove the wiper module. See Figure 1. IMPORTANT: USING A PERMANENT MARKER, PLACE A MARK ON THE WIPER LINKS NEXT TO ALL BALL STUDS/SOCKETS THAT FAIL INSPECTION. DEFECTIVE WINDSHIELD WIPER MOUNTING ARM AND PIVOT SHAFT ASSEMBLIES MUST BE RETURNED TO THE WARRANTY PARTS RETURN CENTER. SEE THE ATTACHMENT II FOR MORE INFORMATION. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9876 6. Inspect the four (4) ball studs (positions A-D). The backside of each ball stud should be riveted (mushroomed) over as shown in the illustration. Please note, the ball stud at position B is the most suspect. See Figure 2 for ball stud location and Figure 3 for detail of ball studs. ^ If ANY of the ball studs are not mushroomed over, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. ^ If all of the ball studs are mushroomed over, continue the inspection procedure. 7. Visually inspect the tabs on the four (4) plastic ball sockets located at the ends of the wiper links. Each tab should be undamaged and fully engaged in the corresponding hole located in the wiper arm link. See Figure 2 for location of ball sockets and Figure 4 for detail of tabs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9877 a. If the tab is missing, damaged, or detached from the rim on ANY of the sockets, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 5. b. If the tab is aligned but not fully engaged into the corresponding hole in the link on ANY one of the sockets but is not otherwise damaged or detached from the rim, press the tab with your thumb (no tools) to fully engage it in the hole. If force greater than thumb pressure is required to engage the tab into the hole, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 6. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9878 c. If the tab is not aligned with the corresponding hole in the link on ANY one of the sockets, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 7. d. Beginning at the tab, carefully lift the lip of the rubber seal using a flat screwdriver or similar tool. Verify that there is a continuous rim of plastic material around the base of EACH socket. If there are any sections of material broken away or any visible damage (cracks) on ANY one of the sockets, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9879 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 8. e. Inspect the dome section of the sockets for cracks. If grease is present on the dome of the socket, this may be evidence of a crack. If ANY one of the sockets is cracked, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 9. If the wiper module passes all the inspections described in A-E, no replacement is required. 8. Install the wiper module. Tighten the bolts to 12 Nm (107 lb-in). WARNING: THE IGNITION KEY MUST BE IN THE "OFF" POSITION BEFORE CONNECTING THE WIPER MOTOR. IF NOT, SUDDEN MOVEMENT OF THE WIPER LINKS MAY OCCUR WHEN THE MOTOR IS CONNECTED. 9. Connect the wiper motor electrical connector. 10. Install the left side cowl vent panel. CAUTION The wiper motor must be in the "PARK" position before installing the wiper arms or damage to the vehicle will result. 11. Cycle and park the wiper motor. CAUTION Proper torquing of the wiper arm nuts is critical. 12. Install the windshield wiper arms. Tighten the nuts to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9880 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9881 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9882 Wiper Control Module: Application and ID For further information regarding the Rear Interval Wiper please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules (General Module). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9883 Wiper Control Module: Testing and Inspection Testing and Inspection For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9888 Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9889 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9890 Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the steering column shroud. NOTE: The windshield wiper/washer switch is part of the multifunction switch assembly. 2. Remove the screws. 3. Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9894 Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9895 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9896 Wiper Switch: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the steering column shroud. NOTE: The windshield wiper/washer switch is part of the multifunction switch assembly. 2. Remove the screws. 3. Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Windshield Washer Hose: Service and Repair 1. Locate and verify the leaking washer hose. 2. Cut the hose cleanly and remove the damaged portion of the washer hose. 3. Install a windshield washer hose adapter between the cut ends of the hose. 4. Install a segment of 6.4 mm (0.25 in) i.d. black rubber hose over the ends of the washer hose, and clamp both ends of the rubber hose using spring clamps. NOTE: In difficult cases, clamping may be required. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Rear Window Washer Pump Motor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Rear Window Washer Pump Motor > Page 9904 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Windshield Washer Pump: Technician Safety Information WARNING: WINDSHIELD WASHER SOLUTION CONTAINS METHANOL, WHICH IS POISONOUS. OBSERVE ALL CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS INDICATED ON THE LABEL OF THE WASHER SOLUTION CONTAINER. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 9909 Windshield Washer Pump: Vehicle Damage Warnings CAUTION: Do not operate the windshield washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer reservoir to prevent component damage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield Washer Pump Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Windshield Washer Pump REMOVAL 1. Remove the RH front wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the RH front splash shield. 3. Remove the windshield washer pump. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Disconnect the hose. 3 Remove the windshield washer pump. WARNING: WINDSHIELD WASHER SOLUTION CONTAINS METHANOL, WHICH IS POISONOUS. OBSERVE ALL CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS INDICATED ON THE LABEL OF THE WASHER SOLUTION CONTAINER. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before washer pump removal. INSTALLATION 1. Fill the windshield washer reservoir with Ultra-Clear Windshield Washer Concentrate C9AZ-19550-AC or BC or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESR-M17P5-A. CAUTION: Do not operate the windshield washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer reservoir to prevent component damage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. To install, reverse the removal procedure. WARNING: WINDSHIELD WASHER SOLUTION CONTAINS METHANOL, WHICH IS POISONOUS. OBSERVE ALL CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS INDICATED ON THE LABEL OF THE WASHER SOLUTION CONTAINER. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield Washer Pump > Page 9912 Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Rear Window Washer Pump REMOVAL 1. Remove the RH front wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the RH front splash shield. 3. Remove the windshield washer pump. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Disconnect the hose. 3 Remove the windshield washer pump. WARNING: WINDSHIELD WASHER SOLUTION CONTAINS METHANOL, WHICH IS POISONOUS. OBSERVE ALL CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS INDICATED ON THE LABEL OF THE WASHER SOLUTION CONTAINER. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before washer pump removal. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Fill the windshield washer reservoir with Ultra-Clear Windshield Washer Concentrate C9AZ-19550-AC or BC or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESR-M17P5-A. WARNING: WINDSHIELD WASHER SOLUTION CONTAINS METHANOL, WHICH IS POISONOUS. OBSERVE ALL CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS INDICATED ON THE LABEL OF THE WASHER SOLUTION CONTAINER. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. CAUTION: Do not operate the windshield washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer reservoir. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield Washer Pump > Page 9913 Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Washer Pump and Reservoir REMOVAL 1. Remove the right front wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the right front splash shield. 3. Position the windshield washer reservoir aside. 1 Remove the bolts. 2 Position the windshield washer reservoir aside. WARNING: WINDSHIELD WASHER SOLUTION CONTAINS METHANOL, WHICH IS POISONOUS. OBSERVE ALL CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS INDICATED ON THE LABEL OF THE WASHER SOLUTION CONTAINER. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before removal. 4. Remove the windshield washer reservoir. 1 Disconnect the electrical connectors. 2 Disconnect the hoses. 3 Remove the windshield washer reservoir. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Fill the windshield washer reservoir with Ultra-Clear Windshield Washer Concentrate C9AZ-19550-AC or BC or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESR-M17P5-A. WARNING: WINDSHIELD WASHER SOLUTION CONTAINS METHANOL, WHICH IS POISONOUS. OBSERVE ALL CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS INDICATED ON THE LABEL OF THE WASHER SOLUTION CONTAINER. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. CAUTION: Do not operate the windshield washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer reservoir. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9917 Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9918 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9919 Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the steering column shroud. NOTE: The windshield wiper/washer switch is part of the multifunction switch assembly. 2. Remove the screws. 3. Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiper Arm: > 03-20-1 > Oct > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized to Motor Wiper Arm: Customer Interest Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized to Motor Article No. 03-20-1 10/13/03 ELECTRICAL - REAR WIPER ARM REMOVAL - SERVICE TIP FORD: 2001-2004 ESCAPE ISSUE Some Escape vehicles may exhibit the rear wiper arm being seized to the motor and difficult to remove. This may be caused by an insufficient amount of anti-seize compound on the arm/motor shaft splines. ACTION For vehicle service requiring the removal of the rear wiper arm, the following Service Procedure will help to free the wiper arm from the motor shaft. NOTE DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE THE WIPER ARM BY CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT WITH A HACKSAW OR GRIND TOOL. CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT WILL MAKE THE MOTOR UNUSABLE REQUIRING REPLACEMENT. IN ADDITION, DAMAGE TO THE LIFTGATE GLASS MAY OCCUR. HOWEVER IF THE REASON FOR SERVICE IS DUE TO AN INOPERABLE REAR WIPER MOTOR AND THE WIPER ARM IS SEIZED, THEN CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT IS AN ACCEPTABLE MEANS OF REMOVAL. USE CAUTION AS TO NOT DAMAGE THE VEHICLE'S PAINT, GLASS, BODY PANELS, ETC. INSTALL PROTECTIVE TAPE AND/OR AN PROTECTIVE COVERING AROUND THE LIFTGATE AREA AND BELOW REAR WIPER MOTOR. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Confirm that wiper arm is seized on motor and that the wiper arm retainer latch is in the "release" position. 2. Mark and LIGHTLY center punch the exact center of arm mount "circle" (area over motor shaft). 3. Carefully drill through wiper arm using 1/8" drill bit. Do not drill into the motor shaft. NOTE PREVENT METAL SHAVINGS FROM FALLING ONTO THE BODY OR PAINT AS DAMAGE MAY OCCUR. 4. Enlarge the drilled hole using 3/8" drill bit. 5. Apply a small amount of penetrating oil at contact area of splines for wiper arm and motor. 6. Tap on joint area lightly to create vibration and facilitate penetrating oil working into splines of arm and motor. 7. Allow the oil to sit and penetrate for several minutes. NOTE BE SURE THE WIPER ARM RETAINER CLIP IS IN THE "RELEASE" POSITION BEFORE CONTINUING WITH STEP 8. 8. Install a puller with a 5/16" or smaller center screw (e.g. Battery Clamp Puller) to the wiper arm so that jaws of puller are pulling against the arm, and center post of puller is pressing against center of wiper motor shaft. NOTE ENSURE THAT JAWS OF PULLER ARE PULLING AGAINST WIPER ARM AND NOT MOTOR SHAFT BUSHING. 9. Tighten puller in very small increments while tapping lightly on the wiper arm and center shaft of puller. With pressure applied to the wiper arm and shaft a light shock should pop arm off of motor shaft. NOTE BE CAREFUL THAT ARM & PULLER DO NOT FALL AND DAMAGE THE LIFTGATE AND/OR BUMPER. 10. When installing the new wiper arm, remove all corrosion/rust from motor splines and apply anti-seize compound to splines of arm and motor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiper Arm: > 03-20-1 > Oct > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized to Motor > Page 9928 NOTE IF AFTER PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE THE WIPER ARM STILL CANNOT BE REMOVED, THEN CAREFULLY CUT MOTOR SHAFT AND REPLACE MOTOR AND WIPER ARM. USE CAUTION AS TO NOT DAMAGE THE VEHICLE'S PAINT, GLASS, BODY PANELS, ETC. INSTALL PROTECTIVE TAPE AND/OR AN PROTECTIVE COVERING AROUND THE LIFTGATE AREA AND BELOW REAR WIPER MOTOR. Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Arm: > 03-20-1 > Oct > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized to Motor Wiper Arm: All Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized to Motor Article No. 03-20-1 10/13/03 ELECTRICAL - REAR WIPER ARM REMOVAL - SERVICE TIP FORD: 2001-2004 ESCAPE ISSUE Some Escape vehicles may exhibit the rear wiper arm being seized to the motor and difficult to remove. This may be caused by an insufficient amount of anti-seize compound on the arm/motor shaft splines. ACTION For vehicle service requiring the removal of the rear wiper arm, the following Service Procedure will help to free the wiper arm from the motor shaft. NOTE DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE THE WIPER ARM BY CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT WITH A HACKSAW OR GRIND TOOL. CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT WILL MAKE THE MOTOR UNUSABLE REQUIRING REPLACEMENT. IN ADDITION, DAMAGE TO THE LIFTGATE GLASS MAY OCCUR. HOWEVER IF THE REASON FOR SERVICE IS DUE TO AN INOPERABLE REAR WIPER MOTOR AND THE WIPER ARM IS SEIZED, THEN CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT IS AN ACCEPTABLE MEANS OF REMOVAL. USE CAUTION AS TO NOT DAMAGE THE VEHICLE'S PAINT, GLASS, BODY PANELS, ETC. INSTALL PROTECTIVE TAPE AND/OR AN PROTECTIVE COVERING AROUND THE LIFTGATE AREA AND BELOW REAR WIPER MOTOR. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Confirm that wiper arm is seized on motor and that the wiper arm retainer latch is in the "release" position. 2. Mark and LIGHTLY center punch the exact center of arm mount "circle" (area over motor shaft). 3. Carefully drill through wiper arm using 1/8" drill bit. Do not drill into the motor shaft. NOTE PREVENT METAL SHAVINGS FROM FALLING ONTO THE BODY OR PAINT AS DAMAGE MAY OCCUR. 4. Enlarge the drilled hole using 3/8" drill bit. 5. Apply a small amount of penetrating oil at contact area of splines for wiper arm and motor. 6. Tap on joint area lightly to create vibration and facilitate penetrating oil working into splines of arm and motor. 7. Allow the oil to sit and penetrate for several minutes. NOTE BE SURE THE WIPER ARM RETAINER CLIP IS IN THE "RELEASE" POSITION BEFORE CONTINUING WITH STEP 8. 8. Install a puller with a 5/16" or smaller center screw (e.g. Battery Clamp Puller) to the wiper arm so that jaws of puller are pulling against the arm, and center post of puller is pressing against center of wiper motor shaft. NOTE ENSURE THAT JAWS OF PULLER ARE PULLING AGAINST WIPER ARM AND NOT MOTOR SHAFT BUSHING. 9. Tighten puller in very small increments while tapping lightly on the wiper arm and center shaft of puller. With pressure applied to the wiper arm and shaft a light shock should pop arm off of motor shaft. NOTE BE CAREFUL THAT ARM & PULLER DO NOT FALL AND DAMAGE THE LIFTGATE AND/OR BUMPER. 10. When installing the new wiper arm, remove all corrosion/rust from motor splines and apply anti-seize compound to splines of arm and motor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Arm: > 03-20-1 > Oct > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized to Motor > Page 9934 NOTE IF AFTER PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE THE WIPER ARM STILL CANNOT BE REMOVED, THEN CAREFULLY CUT MOTOR SHAFT AND REPLACE MOTOR AND WIPER ARM. USE CAUTION AS TO NOT DAMAGE THE VEHICLE'S PAINT, GLASS, BODY PANELS, ETC. INSTALL PROTECTIVE TAPE AND/OR AN PROTECTIVE COVERING AROUND THE LIFTGATE AREA AND BELOW REAR WIPER MOTOR. Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Adjustments > Windshield Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment Wiper Arm: Adjustments Windshield Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment 1. Cycle and park the windshield wipers 2. Verify that the RH and LH wiper blades are located at the specified position. 3. If not within specification, remove the windshield wiper pivot arms and reposition to the correct locations. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Adjustments > Windshield Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment > Page 9937 Wiper Arm: Adjustments Rear Window Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment 1. Cycle and park the rear window wiper. 2. Verify that the rear window wiper blade is located at the specified position. 3. If not within specification, remove the rear window wiper pivot arm and reposition to the correct location. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wiper Pivot Arm Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Front Wiper Pivot Arm REMOVAL 1. Remove the pivot arm nut. 2. Remove the windshield wiper pivot arm. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Adjust the windshield wiper pivot arms. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wiper Pivot Arm > Page 9940 Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Rear Wiper Pivot Arm REMOVAL 1. Remove the pivot arm. 1 Lift pivot arm to the upright position. 2 Slide the locking tab out. 3 Pull up and remove the pivot arm. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Adjust the windshield wiper pivot arm. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Adjustments > Windshield Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment Wiper Blade: Adjustments Windshield Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment 1. Cycle and park the windshield wipers 2. Verify that the RH and LH wiper blades are located at the specified position. 3. If not within specification, remove the windshield wiper pivot arms and reposition to the correct locations; refer to Wiper Arm. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Adjustments > Windshield Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment > Page 9945 Wiper Blade: Adjustments Rear Window Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment 1. Cycle and park the rear window wiper. 2. Verify that the rear window wiper blade is located at the specified position. 3. If not within specification, remove the rear window wiper pivot arm and reposition to the correct location; refer to Wiper Arm. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 00S49 Date: 001101 Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement 00S49 SAFETY RECALL Certain 2001 Model Year Escape Vehicles - Windshield Wiper Module Inspection and Possible Replacement November 2000 Advance Announcement Dealer Letter Attachment I ^ Administrative Information Attachment II ^ Labor Allowances ^ Parts Ordering Information Attachment III ^ Technical Information Owner Letter Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9954 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9955 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9956 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this recall. PLEASE NOTE Correct all vehicles in stock before delivery. PROMPTLY CORRECT Promptly correct all affected vehicles on your dealer VIN list which you will receive in the Ford Dealer Consolidated Communicator (FDCC). Also, correct other eligible vehicles which are brought to your dealership. DEALER-OWNER CONTACT If you have recently sold a vehicle, please contact that owner immediately and provide them a copy of the owner letter and schedule a service date. REGIONAL CONTACT Advise regional office if an owner: ^ cannot be contacted. ^ does not make a service date. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using DWE. ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. OWNER REFUNDS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9957 Ford Motor Company will refund owner-paid wiper module repairs made before the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair was made away from the servicing dealer). Refer to ACESII manual for refund information. RENTAL CARS For vehicles which fail the inspection, and if parts are not available, Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except for fuel which will be at the owner's expense. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall claim. Follow ESP cost guidelines. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS CRITICAL PARTS SUPPLY NOTE - PLEASE READ CAREFULLY Parts will be in limited supply for several weeks. Therefore, parts will be prioritized for vehicles which Ford records show as sold as of November 16, 2000. Dealers are to report the results of inspections on all affected units that fail the inspection (for the first 30 days) by calling the Recall Hotline at 1-800-325-5621 with the following required information: -- VIN number -- Results of (4) ball stud inspections -- Results of (4) plastic ball socket inspections -- Dealer P&A; Code Based on the inspection results reported. dealers will be advised if the vehicle can be released or if it must be held for repair. Please note that FCS-700 tags will be issued and all replaced parts must be returned to the Warranty Parts Return Center where they will be inspected to assure that only suspect parts are being replaced. The cost of parts not properly inspected or not returned will be charged back to the dealer. A fair and equitable distribution of parts will be made based on the number of vehicles which fail the inspection and are properly reported to the Recall Hotline. Each Dealer who calls in will receive a shipment of parts for reported units before any dealer receives a second shipment. No seed stock distribution is planned at this time. No parts will be sent until inspected units are reported to the Recall Hotline. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9958 Please note that vehicles sold after November 16, 2000 will not receive priority handling for parts. We urge you to carefully conduct inspections and manage your allocation of parts for this program. NOTE: All orders must be placed through the Recall Hotline (1-800 325-5621) for the first 30 days, until December 21, 2000. After that date, use the normal order process. ORDER INFORMATION DOR/COR DOR/COR number 50197 identifies parts ordered for this campaign through the Recall Hotline (1-800-325-5621). FCS-700 TAGS FCS-700 Tags will be issued for each claim involving a wiper module (less motor) replacement. These returned assemblies will be inspected and dealers will be "charged-back" for units that pass inspection criteria. Less than 6% of the wiper module assemblies will require replacement. DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to: ^ DOES II ^ Updated Price Book EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW The affected vehicles in this program may require the replacement of the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly (wiper module assembly less motor). A two-part inspection must be performed to determine if replacement is required. The inspection includes the following: ^ An inspection of the wiper link ball studs. ^ An inspection of the wiper link plastic ball sockets. If the vehicle fails the inspection process, a new windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly must be installed. This procedure gives details of the inspection process and refers you to the service procedures in the Workshop Manual if replacement is required. INSPECTION CAUTION Whenever the wiper arms are removed and reinstalled, proper torquing of the wiper arm nuts is critical. 1. Verify that the wipers are in the "PARK" position and the key is in the "OFF" position before proceeding with inspection. 2. Remove the windshield wiper arm nuts, then remove the wiper arms. 3. Remove the left side cowl top vent panel. 4. Disconnect the wiper motor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9959 5. Remove the three (3) bolts, then remove the wiper module. See Figure 1. IMPORTANT: USING A PERMANENT MARKER, PLACE A MARK ON THE WIPER LINKS NEXT TO ALL BALL STUDS/SOCKETS THAT FAIL INSPECTION. DEFECTIVE WINDSHIELD WIPER MOUNTING ARM AND PIVOT SHAFT ASSEMBLIES MUST BE RETURNED TO THE WARRANTY PARTS RETURN CENTER. SEE THE ATTACHMENT II FOR MORE INFORMATION. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9960 6. Inspect the four (4) ball studs (positions A-D). The backside of each ball stud should be riveted (mushroomed) over as shown in the illustration. Please note, the ball stud at position B is the most suspect. See Figure 2 for ball stud location and Figure 3 for detail of ball studs. ^ If ANY of the ball studs are not mushroomed over, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. ^ If all of the ball studs are mushroomed over, continue the inspection procedure. 7. Visually inspect the tabs on the four (4) plastic ball sockets located at the ends of the wiper links. Each tab should be undamaged and fully engaged in the corresponding hole located in the wiper arm link. See Figure 2 for location of ball sockets and Figure 4 for detail of tabs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9961 a. If the tab is missing, damaged, or detached from the rim on ANY of the sockets, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 5. b. If the tab is aligned but not fully engaged into the corresponding hole in the link on ANY one of the sockets but is not otherwise damaged or detached from the rim, press the tab with your thumb (no tools) to fully engage it in the hole. If force greater than thumb pressure is required to engage the tab into the hole, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 6. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9962 c. If the tab is not aligned with the corresponding hole in the link on ANY one of the sockets, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 7. d. Beginning at the tab, carefully lift the lip of the rubber seal using a flat screwdriver or similar tool. Verify that there is a continuous rim of plastic material around the base of EACH socket. If there are any sections of material broken away or any visible damage (cracks) on ANY one of the sockets, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9963 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 8. e. Inspect the dome section of the sockets for cracks. If grease is present on the dome of the socket, this may be evidence of a crack. If ANY one of the sockets is cracked, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 9. If the wiper module passes all the inspections described in A-E, no replacement is required. 8. Install the wiper module. Tighten the bolts to 12 Nm (107 lb-in). WARNING: THE IGNITION KEY MUST BE IN THE "OFF" POSITION BEFORE CONNECTING THE WIPER MOTOR. IF NOT, SUDDEN MOVEMENT OF THE WIPER LINKS MAY OCCUR WHEN THE MOTOR IS CONNECTED. 9. Connect the wiper motor electrical connector. 10. Install the left side cowl vent panel. CAUTION The wiper motor must be in the "PARK" position before installing the wiper arms or damage to the vehicle will result. 11. Cycle and park the wiper motor. CAUTION Proper torquing of the wiper arm nuts is critical. 12. Install the windshield wiper arms. Tighten the nuts to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9964 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9965 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 00S49 Date: 001101 Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement 00S49 SAFETY RECALL Certain 2001 Model Year Escape Vehicles - Windshield Wiper Module Inspection and Possible Replacement November 2000 Advance Announcement Dealer Letter Attachment I ^ Administrative Information Attachment II ^ Labor Allowances ^ Parts Ordering Information Attachment III ^ Technical Information Owner Letter Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9971 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9972 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9973 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this recall. PLEASE NOTE Correct all vehicles in stock before delivery. PROMPTLY CORRECT Promptly correct all affected vehicles on your dealer VIN list which you will receive in the Ford Dealer Consolidated Communicator (FDCC). Also, correct other eligible vehicles which are brought to your dealership. DEALER-OWNER CONTACT If you have recently sold a vehicle, please contact that owner immediately and provide them a copy of the owner letter and schedule a service date. REGIONAL CONTACT Advise regional office if an owner: ^ cannot be contacted. ^ does not make a service date. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using DWE. ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. OWNER REFUNDS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9974 Ford Motor Company will refund owner-paid wiper module repairs made before the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair was made away from the servicing dealer). Refer to ACESII manual for refund information. RENTAL CARS For vehicles which fail the inspection, and if parts are not available, Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except for fuel which will be at the owner's expense. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall claim. Follow ESP cost guidelines. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS CRITICAL PARTS SUPPLY NOTE - PLEASE READ CAREFULLY Parts will be in limited supply for several weeks. Therefore, parts will be prioritized for vehicles which Ford records show as sold as of November 16, 2000. Dealers are to report the results of inspections on all affected units that fail the inspection (for the first 30 days) by calling the Recall Hotline at 1-800-325-5621 with the following required information: -- VIN number -- Results of (4) ball stud inspections -- Results of (4) plastic ball socket inspections -- Dealer P&A; Code Based on the inspection results reported. dealers will be advised if the vehicle can be released or if it must be held for repair. Please note that FCS-700 tags will be issued and all replaced parts must be returned to the Warranty Parts Return Center where they will be inspected to assure that only suspect parts are being replaced. The cost of parts not properly inspected or not returned will be charged back to the dealer. A fair and equitable distribution of parts will be made based on the number of vehicles which fail the inspection and are properly reported to the Recall Hotline. Each Dealer who calls in will receive a shipment of parts for reported units before any dealer receives a second shipment. No seed stock distribution is planned at this time. No parts will be sent until inspected units are reported to the Recall Hotline. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9975 Please note that vehicles sold after November 16, 2000 will not receive priority handling for parts. We urge you to carefully conduct inspections and manage your allocation of parts for this program. NOTE: All orders must be placed through the Recall Hotline (1-800 325-5621) for the first 30 days, until December 21, 2000. After that date, use the normal order process. ORDER INFORMATION DOR/COR DOR/COR number 50197 identifies parts ordered for this campaign through the Recall Hotline (1-800-325-5621). FCS-700 TAGS FCS-700 Tags will be issued for each claim involving a wiper module (less motor) replacement. These returned assemblies will be inspected and dealers will be "charged-back" for units that pass inspection criteria. Less than 6% of the wiper module assemblies will require replacement. DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to: ^ DOES II ^ Updated Price Book EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW The affected vehicles in this program may require the replacement of the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly (wiper module assembly less motor). A two-part inspection must be performed to determine if replacement is required. The inspection includes the following: ^ An inspection of the wiper link ball studs. ^ An inspection of the wiper link plastic ball sockets. If the vehicle fails the inspection process, a new windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly must be installed. This procedure gives details of the inspection process and refers you to the service procedures in the Workshop Manual if replacement is required. INSPECTION CAUTION Whenever the wiper arms are removed and reinstalled, proper torquing of the wiper arm nuts is critical. 1. Verify that the wipers are in the "PARK" position and the key is in the "OFF" position before proceeding with inspection. 2. Remove the windshield wiper arm nuts, then remove the wiper arms. 3. Remove the left side cowl top vent panel. 4. Disconnect the wiper motor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9976 5. Remove the three (3) bolts, then remove the wiper module. See Figure 1. IMPORTANT: USING A PERMANENT MARKER, PLACE A MARK ON THE WIPER LINKS NEXT TO ALL BALL STUDS/SOCKETS THAT FAIL INSPECTION. DEFECTIVE WINDSHIELD WIPER MOUNTING ARM AND PIVOT SHAFT ASSEMBLIES MUST BE RETURNED TO THE WARRANTY PARTS RETURN CENTER. SEE THE ATTACHMENT II FOR MORE INFORMATION. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9977 6. Inspect the four (4) ball studs (positions A-D). The backside of each ball stud should be riveted (mushroomed) over as shown in the illustration. Please note, the ball stud at position B is the most suspect. See Figure 2 for ball stud location and Figure 3 for detail of ball studs. ^ If ANY of the ball studs are not mushroomed over, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. ^ If all of the ball studs are mushroomed over, continue the inspection procedure. 7. Visually inspect the tabs on the four (4) plastic ball sockets located at the ends of the wiper links. Each tab should be undamaged and fully engaged in the corresponding hole located in the wiper arm link. See Figure 2 for location of ball sockets and Figure 4 for detail of tabs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9978 a. If the tab is missing, damaged, or detached from the rim on ANY of the sockets, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 5. b. If the tab is aligned but not fully engaged into the corresponding hole in the link on ANY one of the sockets but is not otherwise damaged or detached from the rim, press the tab with your thumb (no tools) to fully engage it in the hole. If force greater than thumb pressure is required to engage the tab into the hole, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 6. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9979 c. If the tab is not aligned with the corresponding hole in the link on ANY one of the sockets, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 7. d. Beginning at the tab, carefully lift the lip of the rubber seal using a flat screwdriver or similar tool. Verify that there is a continuous rim of plastic material around the base of EACH socket. If there are any sections of material broken away or any visible damage (cracks) on ANY one of the sockets, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9980 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 8. e. Inspect the dome section of the sockets for cracks. If grease is present on the dome of the socket, this may be evidence of a crack. If ANY one of the sockets is cracked, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 9. If the wiper module passes all the inspections described in A-E, no replacement is required. 8. Install the wiper module. Tighten the bolts to 12 Nm (107 lb-in). WARNING: THE IGNITION KEY MUST BE IN THE "OFF" POSITION BEFORE CONNECTING THE WIPER MOTOR. IF NOT, SUDDEN MOVEMENT OF THE WIPER LINKS MAY OCCUR WHEN THE MOTOR IS CONNECTED. 9. Connect the wiper motor electrical connector. 10. Install the left side cowl vent panel. CAUTION The wiper motor must be in the "PARK" position before installing the wiper arms or damage to the vehicle will result. 11. Cycle and park the wiper motor. CAUTION Proper torquing of the wiper arm nuts is critical. 12. Install the windshield wiper arms. Tighten the nuts to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9981 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Control Module: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 9982 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9983 Wiper Control Module: Application and ID For further information regarding the Rear Interval Wiper please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules (General Module). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9984 Wiper Control Module: Testing and Inspection Testing and Inspection For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Modules. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiper Motor: > 03-20-1 > Oct > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized to Motor Wiper Motor: Customer Interest Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized to Motor Article No. 03-20-1 10/13/03 ELECTRICAL - REAR WIPER ARM REMOVAL - SERVICE TIP FORD: 2001-2004 ESCAPE ISSUE Some Escape vehicles may exhibit the rear wiper arm being seized to the motor and difficult to remove. This may be caused by an insufficient amount of anti-seize compound on the arm/motor shaft splines. ACTION For vehicle service requiring the removal of the rear wiper arm, the following Service Procedure will help to free the wiper arm from the motor shaft. NOTE DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE THE WIPER ARM BY CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT WITH A HACKSAW OR GRIND TOOL. CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT WILL MAKE THE MOTOR UNUSABLE REQUIRING REPLACEMENT. IN ADDITION, DAMAGE TO THE LIFTGATE GLASS MAY OCCUR. HOWEVER IF THE REASON FOR SERVICE IS DUE TO AN INOPERABLE REAR WIPER MOTOR AND THE WIPER ARM IS SEIZED, THEN CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT IS AN ACCEPTABLE MEANS OF REMOVAL. USE CAUTION AS TO NOT DAMAGE THE VEHICLE'S PAINT, GLASS, BODY PANELS, ETC. INSTALL PROTECTIVE TAPE AND/OR AN PROTECTIVE COVERING AROUND THE LIFTGATE AREA AND BELOW REAR WIPER MOTOR. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Confirm that wiper arm is seized on motor and that the wiper arm retainer latch is in the "release" position. 2. Mark and LIGHTLY center punch the exact center of arm mount "circle" (area over motor shaft). 3. Carefully drill through wiper arm using 1/8" drill bit. Do not drill into the motor shaft. NOTE PREVENT METAL SHAVINGS FROM FALLING ONTO THE BODY OR PAINT AS DAMAGE MAY OCCUR. 4. Enlarge the drilled hole using 3/8" drill bit. 5. Apply a small amount of penetrating oil at contact area of splines for wiper arm and motor. 6. Tap on joint area lightly to create vibration and facilitate penetrating oil working into splines of arm and motor. 7. Allow the oil to sit and penetrate for several minutes. NOTE BE SURE THE WIPER ARM RETAINER CLIP IS IN THE "RELEASE" POSITION BEFORE CONTINUING WITH STEP 8. 8. Install a puller with a 5/16" or smaller center screw (e.g. Battery Clamp Puller) to the wiper arm so that jaws of puller are pulling against the arm, and center post of puller is pressing against center of wiper motor shaft. NOTE ENSURE THAT JAWS OF PULLER ARE PULLING AGAINST WIPER ARM AND NOT MOTOR SHAFT BUSHING. 9. Tighten puller in very small increments while tapping lightly on the wiper arm and center shaft of puller. With pressure applied to the wiper arm and shaft a light shock should pop arm off of motor shaft. NOTE BE CAREFUL THAT ARM & PULLER DO NOT FALL AND DAMAGE THE LIFTGATE AND/OR BUMPER. 10. When installing the new wiper arm, remove all corrosion/rust from motor splines and apply anti-seize compound to splines of arm and motor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiper Motor: > 03-20-1 > Oct > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized to Motor > Page 9993 NOTE IF AFTER PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE THE WIPER ARM STILL CANNOT BE REMOVED, THEN CAREFULLY CUT MOTOR SHAFT AND REPLACE MOTOR AND WIPER ARM. USE CAUTION AS TO NOT DAMAGE THE VEHICLE'S PAINT, GLASS, BODY PANELS, ETC. INSTALL PROTECTIVE TAPE AND/OR AN PROTECTIVE COVERING AROUND THE LIFTGATE AREA AND BELOW REAR WIPER MOTOR. Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor: > 03-20-1 > Oct > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized to Motor Wiper Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized to Motor Article No. 03-20-1 10/13/03 ELECTRICAL - REAR WIPER ARM REMOVAL - SERVICE TIP FORD: 2001-2004 ESCAPE ISSUE Some Escape vehicles may exhibit the rear wiper arm being seized to the motor and difficult to remove. This may be caused by an insufficient amount of anti-seize compound on the arm/motor shaft splines. ACTION For vehicle service requiring the removal of the rear wiper arm, the following Service Procedure will help to free the wiper arm from the motor shaft. NOTE DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE THE WIPER ARM BY CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT WITH A HACKSAW OR GRIND TOOL. CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT WILL MAKE THE MOTOR UNUSABLE REQUIRING REPLACEMENT. IN ADDITION, DAMAGE TO THE LIFTGATE GLASS MAY OCCUR. HOWEVER IF THE REASON FOR SERVICE IS DUE TO AN INOPERABLE REAR WIPER MOTOR AND THE WIPER ARM IS SEIZED, THEN CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT IS AN ACCEPTABLE MEANS OF REMOVAL. USE CAUTION AS TO NOT DAMAGE THE VEHICLE'S PAINT, GLASS, BODY PANELS, ETC. INSTALL PROTECTIVE TAPE AND/OR AN PROTECTIVE COVERING AROUND THE LIFTGATE AREA AND BELOW REAR WIPER MOTOR. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Confirm that wiper arm is seized on motor and that the wiper arm retainer latch is in the "release" position. 2. Mark and LIGHTLY center punch the exact center of arm mount "circle" (area over motor shaft). 3. Carefully drill through wiper arm using 1/8" drill bit. Do not drill into the motor shaft. NOTE PREVENT METAL SHAVINGS FROM FALLING ONTO THE BODY OR PAINT AS DAMAGE MAY OCCUR. 4. Enlarge the drilled hole using 3/8" drill bit. 5. Apply a small amount of penetrating oil at contact area of splines for wiper arm and motor. 6. Tap on joint area lightly to create vibration and facilitate penetrating oil working into splines of arm and motor. 7. Allow the oil to sit and penetrate for several minutes. NOTE BE SURE THE WIPER ARM RETAINER CLIP IS IN THE "RELEASE" POSITION BEFORE CONTINUING WITH STEP 8. 8. Install a puller with a 5/16" or smaller center screw (e.g. Battery Clamp Puller) to the wiper arm so that jaws of puller are pulling against the arm, and center post of puller is pressing against center of wiper motor shaft. NOTE ENSURE THAT JAWS OF PULLER ARE PULLING AGAINST WIPER ARM AND NOT MOTOR SHAFT BUSHING. 9. Tighten puller in very small increments while tapping lightly on the wiper arm and center shaft of puller. With pressure applied to the wiper arm and shaft a light shock should pop arm off of motor shaft. NOTE BE CAREFUL THAT ARM & PULLER DO NOT FALL AND DAMAGE THE LIFTGATE AND/OR BUMPER. 10. When installing the new wiper arm, remove all corrosion/rust from motor splines and apply anti-seize compound to splines of arm and motor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor: > 03-20-1 > Oct > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized to Motor > Page 9999 NOTE IF AFTER PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE THE WIPER ARM STILL CANNOT BE REMOVED, THEN CAREFULLY CUT MOTOR SHAFT AND REPLACE MOTOR AND WIPER ARM. USE CAUTION AS TO NOT DAMAGE THE VEHICLE'S PAINT, GLASS, BODY PANELS, ETC. INSTALL PROTECTIVE TAPE AND/OR AN PROTECTIVE COVERING AROUND THE LIFTGATE AREA AND BELOW REAR WIPER MOTOR. Parts Block OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY Disclaimer Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Windshield Wiper Motor Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Windshield Wiper Motor > Page 10002 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10003 Wiper Motor: Testing and Inspection WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR Use an Alternator, Regulator, Battery and Starter Tester (ARBST) to test the wiper motor on the vehicle. To test the wiper motor, disconnect the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft from the windshield wiper motor; refer to Wiper Arm. Disconnect the wiper motor. Connect the (1) green lead from (2) Alternator, Regulator, Battery and Starter Tester (ARBST) to the battery negative (-) post. Connect the (3) red lead from ARBST to the wiper motor (4) common brush terminal (terminal 3). Test the low-speed mode by connecting a (5) cable from the battery positive (+) post to the (6) low-speed brush terminal (terminal 4) and measure the current draw. If the current draw is greater than 3.5 amperes, install a new windshield wiper motor. Test the high-speed mode by connecting a cable from the battery positive (+) post to the (7) high-speed brush terminal (terminal 5) and measure the current draw. If the current draw is greater than 5.5 amperes, install a new wiper motor. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield Wiper Motor Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Windshield Wiper Motor REMOVAL 1. Remove the wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft refer to, Wiper Motor Linkage. 2. Remove the windshield wiper motor. 1 Remove the bolt and windshield wiper motor linkage. 2 Remove the windshield wiper motor mounting bolts. 3 Remove the windshield wiper motor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield Wiper Motor > Page 10006 Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Rear Window Wiper Motor REMOVAL 1. Remove the pivot arm. 1 Lift pivot arm to the upright position. 2 Slide the locking tab out. 3 Pull up and remove the pivot arm. 2. Remove the rear wiper motor shaft nut cover. 3. Remove the rear wiper motor shaft nut. 4. Open the liftgate. 5. Remove the rear wiper motor plastic cover. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Windshield Wiper Motor > Page 10007 6. Remove rear wiper motor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the nut. 3 Remove the bolt. 4 Remove the rear wiper motor. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor Linkage: > NHTSA00V387002 > Nov > 00 > Recall 00V387002: Windshield Wiper Linkage Failure Wiper Motor Linkage: Recalls Recall 00V387002: Windshield Wiper Linkage Failure The windshield wiper linkage can disengage due to a broken ball socket. This condition will likely result in sudden and complete loss of the windshield wiper function, or of the wiper function on the driver side only, increasing the risk of a crash. Dealers will inspect and, if necessary, replace the wiper module. Owner notification is expected to begin during December 2000. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon service date and do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673. Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 00S49 Date: 001101 Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement 00S49 SAFETY RECALL Certain 2001 Model Year Escape Vehicles - Windshield Wiper Module Inspection and Possible Replacement November 2000 Advance Announcement Dealer Letter Attachment I ^ Administrative Information Attachment II ^ Labor Allowances ^ Parts Ordering Information Attachment III ^ Technical Information Owner Letter Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 10020 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 10021 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 10022 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this recall. PLEASE NOTE Correct all vehicles in stock before delivery. PROMPTLY CORRECT Promptly correct all affected vehicles on your dealer VIN list which you will receive in the Ford Dealer Consolidated Communicator (FDCC). Also, correct other eligible vehicles which are brought to your dealership. DEALER-OWNER CONTACT If you have recently sold a vehicle, please contact that owner immediately and provide them a copy of the owner letter and schedule a service date. REGIONAL CONTACT Advise regional office if an owner: ^ cannot be contacted. ^ does not make a service date. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using DWE. ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. OWNER REFUNDS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 10023 Ford Motor Company will refund owner-paid wiper module repairs made before the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair was made away from the servicing dealer). Refer to ACESII manual for refund information. RENTAL CARS For vehicles which fail the inspection, and if parts are not available, Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except for fuel which will be at the owner's expense. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall claim. Follow ESP cost guidelines. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS CRITICAL PARTS SUPPLY NOTE - PLEASE READ CAREFULLY Parts will be in limited supply for several weeks. Therefore, parts will be prioritized for vehicles which Ford records show as sold as of November 16, 2000. Dealers are to report the results of inspections on all affected units that fail the inspection (for the first 30 days) by calling the Recall Hotline at 1-800-325-5621 with the following required information: -- VIN number -- Results of (4) ball stud inspections -- Results of (4) plastic ball socket inspections -- Dealer P&A; Code Based on the inspection results reported. dealers will be advised if the vehicle can be released or if it must be held for repair. Please note that FCS-700 tags will be issued and all replaced parts must be returned to the Warranty Parts Return Center where they will be inspected to assure that only suspect parts are being replaced. The cost of parts not properly inspected or not returned will be charged back to the dealer. A fair and equitable distribution of parts will be made based on the number of vehicles which fail the inspection and are properly reported to the Recall Hotline. Each Dealer who calls in will receive a shipment of parts for reported units before any dealer receives a second shipment. No seed stock distribution is planned at this time. No parts will be sent until inspected units are reported to the Recall Hotline. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 10024 Please note that vehicles sold after November 16, 2000 will not receive priority handling for parts. We urge you to carefully conduct inspections and manage your allocation of parts for this program. NOTE: All orders must be placed through the Recall Hotline (1-800 325-5621) for the first 30 days, until December 21, 2000. After that date, use the normal order process. ORDER INFORMATION DOR/COR DOR/COR number 50197 identifies parts ordered for this campaign through the Recall Hotline (1-800-325-5621). FCS-700 TAGS FCS-700 Tags will be issued for each claim involving a wiper module (less motor) replacement. These returned assemblies will be inspected and dealers will be "charged-back" for units that pass inspection criteria. Less than 6% of the wiper module assemblies will require replacement. DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to: ^ DOES II ^ Updated Price Book EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW The affected vehicles in this program may require the replacement of the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly (wiper module assembly less motor). A two-part inspection must be performed to determine if replacement is required. The inspection includes the following: ^ An inspection of the wiper link ball studs. ^ An inspection of the wiper link plastic ball sockets. If the vehicle fails the inspection process, a new windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly must be installed. This procedure gives details of the inspection process and refers you to the service procedures in the Workshop Manual if replacement is required. INSPECTION CAUTION Whenever the wiper arms are removed and reinstalled, proper torquing of the wiper arm nuts is critical. 1. Verify that the wipers are in the "PARK" position and the key is in the "OFF" position before proceeding with inspection. 2. Remove the windshield wiper arm nuts, then remove the wiper arms. 3. Remove the left side cowl top vent panel. 4. Disconnect the wiper motor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 10025 5. Remove the three (3) bolts, then remove the wiper module. See Figure 1. IMPORTANT: USING A PERMANENT MARKER, PLACE A MARK ON THE WIPER LINKS NEXT TO ALL BALL STUDS/SOCKETS THAT FAIL INSPECTION. DEFECTIVE WINDSHIELD WIPER MOUNTING ARM AND PIVOT SHAFT ASSEMBLIES MUST BE RETURNED TO THE WARRANTY PARTS RETURN CENTER. SEE THE ATTACHMENT II FOR MORE INFORMATION. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 10026 6. Inspect the four (4) ball studs (positions A-D). The backside of each ball stud should be riveted (mushroomed) over as shown in the illustration. Please note, the ball stud at position B is the most suspect. See Figure 2 for ball stud location and Figure 3 for detail of ball studs. ^ If ANY of the ball studs are not mushroomed over, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. ^ If all of the ball studs are mushroomed over, continue the inspection procedure. 7. Visually inspect the tabs on the four (4) plastic ball sockets located at the ends of the wiper links. Each tab should be undamaged and fully engaged in the corresponding hole located in the wiper arm link. See Figure 2 for location of ball sockets and Figure 4 for detail of tabs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 10027 a. If the tab is missing, damaged, or detached from the rim on ANY of the sockets, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 5. b. If the tab is aligned but not fully engaged into the corresponding hole in the link on ANY one of the sockets but is not otherwise damaged or detached from the rim, press the tab with your thumb (no tools) to fully engage it in the hole. If force greater than thumb pressure is required to engage the tab into the hole, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 6. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 10028 c. If the tab is not aligned with the corresponding hole in the link on ANY one of the sockets, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 7. d. Beginning at the tab, carefully lift the lip of the rubber seal using a flat screwdriver or similar tool. Verify that there is a continuous rim of plastic material around the base of EACH socket. If there are any sections of material broken away or any visible damage (cracks) on ANY one of the sockets, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 10029 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 8. e. Inspect the dome section of the sockets for cracks. If grease is present on the dome of the socket, this may be evidence of a crack. If ANY one of the sockets is cracked, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 9. If the wiper module passes all the inspections described in A-E, no replacement is required. 8. Install the wiper module. Tighten the bolts to 12 Nm (107 lb-in). WARNING: THE IGNITION KEY MUST BE IN THE "OFF" POSITION BEFORE CONNECTING THE WIPER MOTOR. IF NOT, SUDDEN MOVEMENT OF THE WIPER LINKS MAY OCCUR WHEN THE MOTOR IS CONNECTED. 9. Connect the wiper motor electrical connector. 10. Install the left side cowl vent panel. CAUTION The wiper motor must be in the "PARK" position before installing the wiper arms or damage to the vehicle will result. 11. Cycle and park the wiper motor. CAUTION Proper torquing of the wiper arm nuts is critical. 12. Install the windshield wiper arms. Tighten the nuts to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 10030 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 10031 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor Linkage: > NHTSA00V387002 > Nov > 00 > Recall 00V387002: Windshield Wiper Linkage Failure Wiper Motor Linkage: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 00V387002: Windshield Wiper Linkage Failure The windshield wiper linkage can disengage due to a broken ball socket. This condition will likely result in sudden and complete loss of the windshield wiper function, or of the wiper function on the driver side only, increasing the risk of a crash. Dealers will inspect and, if necessary, replace the wiper module. Owner notification is expected to begin during December 2000. Owners who take their vehicles to an authorized dealer on an agreed upon service date and do not receive the free remedy within a reasonable time should contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673. Also contact the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 00S49 Date: 001101 Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement 00S49 SAFETY RECALL Certain 2001 Model Year Escape Vehicles - Windshield Wiper Module Inspection and Possible Replacement November 2000 Advance Announcement Dealer Letter Attachment I ^ Administrative Information Attachment II ^ Labor Allowances ^ Parts Ordering Information Attachment III ^ Technical Information Owner Letter Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 10041 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 10042 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 10043 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS You must use OASIS to determine if a vehicle is eligible for this recall. PLEASE NOTE Correct all vehicles in stock before delivery. PROMPTLY CORRECT Promptly correct all affected vehicles on your dealer VIN list which you will receive in the Ford Dealer Consolidated Communicator (FDCC). Also, correct other eligible vehicles which are brought to your dealership. DEALER-OWNER CONTACT If you have recently sold a vehicle, please contact that owner immediately and provide them a copy of the owner letter and schedule a service date. REGIONAL CONTACT Advise regional office if an owner: ^ cannot be contacted. ^ does not make a service date. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using DWE. ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. OWNER REFUNDS Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 10044 Ford Motor Company will refund owner-paid wiper module repairs made before the date of the Owner Letter (or after the date of the Owner Letter if an emergency repair was made away from the servicing dealer). Refer to ACESII manual for refund information. RENTAL CARS For vehicles which fail the inspection, and if parts are not available, Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except for fuel which will be at the owner's expense. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall claim. Follow ESP cost guidelines. Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information LABOR ALLOWANCES PARTS REQUIREMENTS CRITICAL PARTS SUPPLY NOTE - PLEASE READ CAREFULLY Parts will be in limited supply for several weeks. Therefore, parts will be prioritized for vehicles which Ford records show as sold as of November 16, 2000. Dealers are to report the results of inspections on all affected units that fail the inspection (for the first 30 days) by calling the Recall Hotline at 1-800-325-5621 with the following required information: -- VIN number -- Results of (4) ball stud inspections -- Results of (4) plastic ball socket inspections -- Dealer P&A; Code Based on the inspection results reported. dealers will be advised if the vehicle can be released or if it must be held for repair. Please note that FCS-700 tags will be issued and all replaced parts must be returned to the Warranty Parts Return Center where they will be inspected to assure that only suspect parts are being replaced. The cost of parts not properly inspected or not returned will be charged back to the dealer. A fair and equitable distribution of parts will be made based on the number of vehicles which fail the inspection and are properly reported to the Recall Hotline. Each Dealer who calls in will receive a shipment of parts for reported units before any dealer receives a second shipment. No seed stock distribution is planned at this time. No parts will be sent until inspected units are reported to the Recall Hotline. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 10045 Please note that vehicles sold after November 16, 2000 will not receive priority handling for parts. We urge you to carefully conduct inspections and manage your allocation of parts for this program. NOTE: All orders must be placed through the Recall Hotline (1-800 325-5621) for the first 30 days, until December 21, 2000. After that date, use the normal order process. ORDER INFORMATION DOR/COR DOR/COR number 50197 identifies parts ordered for this campaign through the Recall Hotline (1-800-325-5621). FCS-700 TAGS FCS-700 Tags will be issued for each claim involving a wiper module (less motor) replacement. These returned assemblies will be inspected and dealers will be "charged-back" for units that pass inspection criteria. Less than 6% of the wiper module assemblies will require replacement. DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to: ^ DOES II ^ Updated Price Book EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW The affected vehicles in this program may require the replacement of the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly (wiper module assembly less motor). A two-part inspection must be performed to determine if replacement is required. The inspection includes the following: ^ An inspection of the wiper link ball studs. ^ An inspection of the wiper link plastic ball sockets. If the vehicle fails the inspection process, a new windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly must be installed. This procedure gives details of the inspection process and refers you to the service procedures in the Workshop Manual if replacement is required. INSPECTION CAUTION Whenever the wiper arms are removed and reinstalled, proper torquing of the wiper arm nuts is critical. 1. Verify that the wipers are in the "PARK" position and the key is in the "OFF" position before proceeding with inspection. 2. Remove the windshield wiper arm nuts, then remove the wiper arms. 3. Remove the left side cowl top vent panel. 4. Disconnect the wiper motor electrical connector. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 10046 5. Remove the three (3) bolts, then remove the wiper module. See Figure 1. IMPORTANT: USING A PERMANENT MARKER, PLACE A MARK ON THE WIPER LINKS NEXT TO ALL BALL STUDS/SOCKETS THAT FAIL INSPECTION. DEFECTIVE WINDSHIELD WIPER MOUNTING ARM AND PIVOT SHAFT ASSEMBLIES MUST BE RETURNED TO THE WARRANTY PARTS RETURN CENTER. SEE THE ATTACHMENT II FOR MORE INFORMATION. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 10047 6. Inspect the four (4) ball studs (positions A-D). The backside of each ball stud should be riveted (mushroomed) over as shown in the illustration. Please note, the ball stud at position B is the most suspect. See Figure 2 for ball stud location and Figure 3 for detail of ball studs. ^ If ANY of the ball studs are not mushroomed over, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. ^ If all of the ball studs are mushroomed over, continue the inspection procedure. 7. Visually inspect the tabs on the four (4) plastic ball sockets located at the ends of the wiper links. Each tab should be undamaged and fully engaged in the corresponding hole located in the wiper arm link. See Figure 2 for location of ball sockets and Figure 4 for detail of tabs. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 10048 a. If the tab is missing, damaged, or detached from the rim on ANY of the sockets, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 5. b. If the tab is aligned but not fully engaged into the corresponding hole in the link on ANY one of the sockets but is not otherwise damaged or detached from the rim, press the tab with your thumb (no tools) to fully engage it in the hole. If force greater than thumb pressure is required to engage the tab into the hole, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 6. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 10049 c. If the tab is not aligned with the corresponding hole in the link on ANY one of the sockets, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 7. d. Beginning at the tab, carefully lift the lip of the rubber seal using a flat screwdriver or similar tool. Verify that there is a continuous rim of plastic material around the base of EACH socket. If there are any sections of material broken away or any visible damage (cracks) on ANY one of the sockets, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 10050 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 8. e. Inspect the dome section of the sockets for cracks. If grease is present on the dome of the socket, this may be evidence of a crack. If ANY one of the sockets is cracked, replace the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Refer to the service procedures in section 501-16 of the appropriate Workshop Manual. See Figure 9. If the wiper module passes all the inspections described in A-E, no replacement is required. 8. Install the wiper module. Tighten the bolts to 12 Nm (107 lb-in). WARNING: THE IGNITION KEY MUST BE IN THE "OFF" POSITION BEFORE CONNECTING THE WIPER MOTOR. IF NOT, SUDDEN MOVEMENT OF THE WIPER LINKS MAY OCCUR WHEN THE MOTOR IS CONNECTED. 9. Connect the wiper motor electrical connector. 10. Install the left side cowl vent panel. CAUTION The wiper motor must be in the "PARK" position before installing the wiper arms or damage to the vehicle will result. 11. Cycle and park the wiper motor. CAUTION Proper torquing of the wiper arm nuts is critical. 12. Install the windshield wiper arms. Tighten the nuts to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 10051 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor Linkage: > 00S49 > Nov > 00 > Recall - Wiper Module Inspection/Replacement > Page 10052 Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10053 Wiper Motor Linkage: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the cowl top vent panels. 2. Remove the wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the bolts. 3 Remove the wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft. 3. Remove the motor assembly. INSTALLATION 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10057 Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Component Testing Instructions Component testing procedures are provided to determine whether a component is good or bad. Testing information for each component includes a schematic with component terminal locations and step-by-step test procedures. Component terminals are identified by letters or numbers that may be marked on the component or callout if there is no mark on the component. The component connector MUST BE REMOVED before testing. To test a single circuit within the component, select that circuit under the column TO TEST If you wish to test the complete component, perform all tests. Connect the tester to the terminals shown in the second column and operate the component as shown in the third column. Ford Escape 2wd Workshop Manual (L4-122 2.0L DOHC VIN B SFI (2001)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10058